JP2023155835A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of executing a new display performance.SOLUTION: As a read-ahead performance that changes a display mode of a standby reservation display, a game machine can execute a first performance in which a moving display of the standby reservation display is executed while a decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, and a second performance in which at least one decorative symbol is varied at high speed while displaying a suggestion display. An operation promotion display that prompts a player to operate an operation unit is displayed in a state where the decorative symbol is varied at high speed after the end of the moving display of the standby reservation display in the first performance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 399

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pinball gaming machines (generally referred to as "pachinko machines") and reel-type gaming machines (generally referred to as "pachislot machines").

2. Description of the Related Art Gaming machines capable of executing display effects are conventionally known (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2001-137471

However, there is still room for improvement in the production.

In view of such circumstances, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can perform elaborate performances.

[Measure 1]
A determining means for acquiring lottery information regarding a win based on the establishment of a starting condition, and determining whether or not it is a win based on the lottery information;
a performance execution means for performing the performance;
a display device capable of displaying a predetermined image;
An operation means that can be operated by a player;
Decorative pattern changing means that displays a decorative pattern on the display device, executes variable display of the decorative pattern based on establishment of a start condition, and indicates the result of the determination at the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern;
holding means for storing the lottery information up to a predetermined number if the starting condition is satisfied but not the starting condition;
Prior determination means for determining whether or not it is a win based on the lottery information stored by the holding means before the start condition is satisfied;
a hold display means for displaying on the display device as a hold indication that the lottery information is stored by the hold means;
As modes of the variable display of the decorative pattern, there are a first display mode in which the decorative pattern is difficult or impossible to recognize, and a second display mode in which the decorative pattern is easy to recognize,
enabling the pending display displayed on the display device to be moved;
displaying an operation promotion display that prompts the user to operate the operation means;
The production includes a first production and a second production,
The first performance is
When starting to move the pending display displayed on the display device, the fluctuating display mode of the decorative pattern is the second display mode,
Even when the movement of the pending display displayed on the display device ends, the fluctuating display mode of the decorative pattern is the second display mode,
an effect in which the fluctuating display mode of the decorative pattern is the second display mode until a predetermined time has elapsed after the movement of the pending display displayed on the display device is completed;
The second performance is
At least one of the decorative patterns is set in the first display mode when a suggestion display is displayed by a suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the pending display displayed on the display device is changed. ,
When the pending display is shown in the display mode after the display of the suggestion display ends and changes, all the decorative patterns are in the first display mode,
When the predetermined period of time has elapsed after the movement of the pending display displayed on the display device is completed, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is set to the first display mode, and when the display mode is set to the first display mode, enabling the display of the operation promotion display;
It is possible to output a predetermined sound in accordance with the display of the operation promotion display,
The above-mentioned hit is characterized in that there are a plurality of types having different degrees of advantage.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can perform elaborate performances.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of the pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from behind. It is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from behind, with the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is a front view of the outer frame of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the front. It is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from behind. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front. (a) is a perspective view of the upper hinge member on the outer frame side of the outer frame, viewed from below with the left frame member omitted; (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a); be. (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed from the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the outer upper hinge member. FIG. 3 is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the main body side upper hinge member. It is an explanatory view showing the action of the locking member in an outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the front left. It is a perspective view of the door frame seen from behind. 20 is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 19. FIG. 20 is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 19. FIG. 20 is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 19. FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into each main member and seen from behind. (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into each main member and seen from behind. (a) is a front view of the production operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the production operation unit. (a) is a perspective view of the production operation unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the production operation unit seen from the back. It is an explanatory view of the performance operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 34(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 34(a). FIG. 34B is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 34(b). 34(a) is a sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG. 34(b), and FIG. 34(b) is an enlarged view of section A in FIG. 34(a). It is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into its main members and viewed from behind. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button as seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the decoration board unit of the performance operation unit as seen from the front. FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the production operation unit in FIG. 37; (a) is a diagram of the production operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and shows the part that is hidden by the first button decoration part of the operation button, button frame, etc. by cutting out a part of the operation button. (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a portion that is to be hidden by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in a cross-sectional view of the production operation unit. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit in a perspective view seen from the front, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. . (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a front view of the door frame left side unit seen from the back. FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from behind. FIG. 47(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line LL in FIG. 47(a). (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a front view of the door frame right side unit seen from the back. FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from behind. 51(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 51(a). 51(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 51(a), and FIG. 51(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 51(a). (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the back. It is. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from behind. 57 is a sectional view taken along line PP in FIG. 56. FIG. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 when viewed from the front. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 when viewed from behind. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged front view of the function display unit with the game board attached to the pachinko machine. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel having a different form from that shown in FIG. 63, viewed from the front together with the front component, the board holder, and the main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 viewed from behind. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69. FIG. It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals that are input and output to a connection terminal board for a game ball lending device, which relays electrical connections between the payout control board, the CR unit, and the frequency display board, which constitute the main board. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69. FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing a peripheral control MPU. FIG. 2 is a block diagram of the periphery of the VDP with built-in sound source in the liquid crystal and sound control section. It is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine. 76 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 75. FIG. FIG. 3 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing a power outage monitoring circuit. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing an inter-board communication interface circuit between a main control board and a peripheral control board. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit etc. of a payout control section. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit. 82 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 81. FIG. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout motor drive circuit. FIG. 3 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input/output circuit. It is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals to the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an arrangement of output terminals of an external terminal board. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit that draws a display area of a door frame side liquid crystal display device. It is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. 3 is a table showing an example of various commands sent from a main control board to a peripheral control board. 89 is a table showing a continuation of various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 89; It is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board that the main control board receives. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main control side power-on processing. 93 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 92. FIG. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of LOCKN signal history creation processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a connection failure determination process. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of connection recovery processing. 7 is a timing chart illustrating the timing of outputting a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the upper plate side liquid crystal transmitter IC. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process (step S114). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the first starting port passage process (step S5232). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the second starting port passing process (step S5234). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process processing (step S5238). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S5280). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S5305). (A) is a diagram showing a jackpot determination table, and (B) and (C) are diagrams showing symbol determination tables. It is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S5282). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation process (step S5283). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop processing (step S5284). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for normal symbols and normal electric accessory control processing (step S116). 12 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure for gate passage processing (step S5402). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for normal symbol normal processing (step S5403). It is a figure showing the pachinko machine of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are a front view, (C) is a top view, and (D) and (E) are right views. It is a time chart showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in this embodiment. It is a diagram schematically showing changes in the display mode of the game board side performance display device, the movement state of the frame movable body, and the light emission performance state over time in this embodiment. It is a diagram schematically showing changes in the display mode of the game board side performance display device, the movement state of the frame movable body, and the light emission performance state over time in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display mode of a display area in this embodiment. 5 is a time chart showing a display mode of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display mode of a display area in this embodiment. It is a figure showing the obstacle nail and the panel board in this embodiment. It is a figure showing an obstacle nail, a panel board, and a game ball in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a panel board, obstacle nails, etc. in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a panel board, obstacle nails, etc. in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a panel board, obstacle nails, etc. in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a panel board, obstacle nails, etc. in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a panel board, obstacle nails, etc. in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a panel board, obstacle nails, etc. in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a panel board, obstacle nails, etc. in this embodiment. It is a diagram showing a game board in this embodiment. It is a diagram showing a game board in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the casing in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the casing in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of display in a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 2 is an image diagram of the movement of a self-tank displayed in a display area in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is an image diagram of the movement of a self-tank displayed in a display area in the present embodiment. It is a diagram explaining a gaming state in this embodiment. It is a transition diagram of the game state in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a table of performance patterns in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a table of performance patterns in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a table of performance patterns in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a table of performance patterns in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an image displayed in a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an image displayed in a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an image displayed in a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a moving image displayed in a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an image displayed in a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing display priorities of display images in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an image displayed in a display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an image displayed in a display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an image displayed in a display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a table showing the production mode in this embodiment. It is a table showing the production mode in this embodiment. It is a table showing the production mode in this embodiment. It is a table showing the production mode in this embodiment. It is a table showing the production mode in this embodiment. It is a table showing the production mode in this embodiment. It is a table showing the production mode in this embodiment. It is a table showing the production mode in this embodiment. It is a table showing the production mode in this embodiment. It is a table showing the production mode in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a table showing the production mode in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing images and the like displayed in a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing images and the like displayed in a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing images and the like displayed in a display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a table showing the production mode in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing images and the like displayed in a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing images and the like displayed in a display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a table showing the production mode in this embodiment. It is a table showing the production mode in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a light guide plate etc. in this embodiment. It is a figure showing a light guide plate etc. in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a table showing the production mode in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing images and the like displayed in a display area in this embodiment. It is a table showing the production mode in this embodiment. It is a table showing the production mode in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a display area in this embodiment.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 10. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the Pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the Pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the Pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the back. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. Figure 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame, game board, body frame, and outer frame disassembled, and Figure 10 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine with the door frame, game board, body frame, and outer frame. FIG.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game parlor, a door frame 3 that can be opened and closed from the front of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that supports the main body frame 4 in an openable and closable manner and is attached to the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, and a main body frame 4 that is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. A game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is driven.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20, which are spaced apart vertically and extend left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. It includes a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect both ends of the frame 20 and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and back. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

The outer frame 2 also includes a curtain plate member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and a curtain plate member 50 that is attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left frame member 30. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached so as to be openable and closable by an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 includes a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular outer shape extending vertically when viewed from the front and having a through hole 111 penetrating back and forth, and a through hole of the door frame base unit 100. A handle unit 300 that is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below the handle unit 111 and can be operated by the player to drive a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. A tray unit 320 is attached to the lower front part of the tray unit 320, and a tray unit 320 is attached to the center of the tray unit 320, and the tray unit 320 is attached to the center of the tray unit 320, and the tray unit 320 is attached to the bottom of the tray unit 320, and it is attached to the center of the tray unit 320. A production operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participatory production, and a door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the through hole 111 above the plate unit 320. , a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through hole 111 above the dish unit 320, a door frame left side unit 530, and a door frame right side unit 550. A door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the through hole 111.

The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 whose part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and a main body frame base 600. It is attached to both the upper and lower ends of the left side in front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame. A main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are rotatably attached, a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and a main body frame base 600. A ball launcher 680 is attached to the front lower part of the game board 5 for driving game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a ball launcher 680 is attached to the right side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the outer frame 2 and the main body frame. 4, a locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and a locking unit 700 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 along the upper side and left side in front view and that pays out game balls to the player side. An L-shaped payout unit 800, a board unit 900 attached to the rear lower part of the main body frame base 600, and a game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable. A back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the.

The dispensing unit 800 of the main body frame 4 includes an inverted L-shaped dispensing unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a dispensing unit base 801 attached to the upper part of the dispensing unit base 801, which is opened upward and extends left and right. A ball tank 802 is box-shaped and stores game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown), and a ball tank 802 is attached to a payout unit base 801 on the lower side of the ball tank 802, and the game balls in the ball tank 802 are moved to the left when viewed from the front. A tank rail 803 that extends left and right to guide, a ball guiding unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the payout unit base 801 when viewed from the front and that guides game balls from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner; It is detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 on the lower side and pays out the game balls guided by the ball guiding unit 820 one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. A payout device 830 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and guides the game balls put out by the payout device 830 downward, and also guides game balls paid out by the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320 according to the storage state of the game balls. The upper full bulb path unit 850 is configured to discharge from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full bulb discharge port 850e, and the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full bulb path unit 850 is attached to the lower end of the dispensing unit base 801. A normal guide path 861 guides the game ball forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3, and a game ball discharged from the full discharge port 850e is guided forward and guides the game ball from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3. A lower full bulb path unit 860 having a full bulb guide path 862 guiding to the bulb socket 274 is provided.

The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a lower part for bass sound that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 when viewed from the front. A speaker unit 920 having a speaker 921, a power board box 930 installed on the right side in front view at the rear side of the board unit base 910 and housing a power board inside, and a power board box 930 installed on the rear side of the speaker unit 920. An interface control board box 940 that accommodates an interface control board inside, and a payout control board 951 that is installed across the power supply board box 930 and interface control board box 940 and that controls the payout of game balls is housed inside. and a payout control board box 950.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer periphery of a game area 5a into which game balls are hit, and the game balls fired from a ball firing device 680 are sent to the upper part of the game area 5a. A front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that guide the player, and a flat game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and partitions the rear end of the game area 5a. There is.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a player rotates the handle 302 with game balls stored in the upper tray 321, the ball launcher 680 fires the game balls with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls hit into the game area 5a are received in the winning hole, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 by the payout device 830 according to the accepted winning hole. Since the player's interest can be increased by this payout of game balls, the game ball in the upper tray 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Moreover, FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the back. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front. FIG. 16(a) is a perspective view of the upper hinge member on the outer frame side of the outer frame viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 16(b) is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 16(a) in an exploded manner. It is a diagram. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed in a game parlor or the like.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 has an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are vertically separated and extend left and right, and connects both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 to each other. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and back. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Further, the outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces facing outward in the left and right direction of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are on the same surface. It is being

The outer frame 2 also includes an outer frame upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front, and a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame upper hinge member 60. It includes an upper left end side upper part of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and a lower outer frame hinge member 70 attached to the left frame member 30. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be attached so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

The outer frame 2 also includes a curtain plate member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and a curtain plate member 50 that is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively, a flat left sliding member 81 attached to the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 at a position to the left of the left-right center; A flat right sliding member 82 is attached to a position near the right end of the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

Furthermore, the outer frame 2 includes the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30, and the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40, respectively. A connecting member 85 is provided. The outer frame 2 also has an upper hook member 90 and a lower hook member 91 that are attached to the inside (left side) of the right frame member 40 and to which an outer frame hook 703 of a locking unit 700 to be described later is locked. , is equipped.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is made of a solid material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) with a predetermined thickness. This upper frame member 10 is provided with an engagement notch 11 that penetrates vertically and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. Inside this engagement notch 11, upper and lateral fixing portions 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached. Further, the upper frame member 10 is provided with a mounting step portion 12 recessed from the general surface on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion when viewed from the front. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to this mounting step portion 12 .

[2-2. Bottom frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is made of a solid material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) with a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 has the same dimensions as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear widths of the upper frame member 10. It is longer than the front and back width of the The lower frame member 20 is provided with engagement notches 21, which penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction, at positions closer to the rear than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. In this engagement notch 21, a lower lateral fixing portion 88 of a lower left connecting member 85C and a lower right connecting member 85D of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, is attached.

The lower frame member 20 also includes front end notches 22 that are recessed rearward from the front surface at both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to be the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the portion between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 have a constant cross-sectional shape and extend vertically, and are formed of extruded shapes of metal such as aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in mutually symmetrical shapes in plan view. When assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward on the outer sides in the left-right direction from a position near the rear with respect to the center in the front-rear direction to near the rear end. It includes recessed portions 31 and 41, and protruding portions 32 and 42 that bulge out from the side surface opposite to the recessed portions 31 and 41 and are hollow inside. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are increased by the protrusions 32 and 42. Further, lower and horizontal fixing portions 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are inserted into the protrusions 32 and 42 and attached.

Furthermore, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of grooves formed on their surfaces that extend vertically. These grooves make it easier for the operator to hold the pachinko machine 1 by providing finger rests when installing or transporting the pachinko machine 1 to island facilities such as game parlors. The design of the exterior of the machine 1 can be improved.

[2-4. Curtain plate components]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with an open rear side. The curtain plate member 50 has a rear extension part 51 extending rearward in a flat plate shape near the left end in front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape with a size that allows a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extension part 51. A left discharge hole 52 which is notched and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 which penetrates vertically and is large enough for a game ball to pass through on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension part 51. A standing wall portion 54 extends upward in a flat plate shape from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rear extending portion 51, and a standing wall portion 54 bulges forward from near the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 with the front surface facing upward. It is provided with a return part 55 which is inclined so as to go rearward as it goes toward.

The curtain plate member 50 is arranged such that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the front upper surface of the rear extending portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. A horizontal portion 71, which will be described later, is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position that coincides with a discharge hole 74, which will be described later, of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side when assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side when assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

Further, the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 on the right side of the rear extension portion 51 is inclined so that the front end side is lower. The curtain plate member 50 also includes a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on the right side of the rear extension portion 51 on the top surface, and a right mounting portion 56 for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the top surface. A section 57 is provided. On the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed via a left sliding member 81 and a right sliding member 82.

As shown in the figure, this curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on its front surface. Further, although not shown in the drawings, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned into a grid pattern by a plurality of ribs, thereby increasing strength and rigidity. Moreover, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated therein.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper fixing part 61 that is horizontally extended and has a rectangular outer shape, and a flat plate-shaped upper fixing part 61 that extends forward from the front end of the upper fixing part 61. , a bearing groove 63 extending from the right end of the front extending part 62 toward the left and right center of the front extending part 62 and penetrating vertically, and the upper fixing part 61 in a plan view. A flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing part 64 extends downward from the left side, and a horizontal fixing part extends downward from the end side of the front extension part 62 from the left end to the front end to the area where the bearing groove 63 opens. A flat hanging part 65 that is continuous with the part 64 is provided (see FIG. 16(b) etc.).

In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the upper fixing part 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step part 12 of the upper frame member 10, and is fixed with screws (not shown). There is. Further, the front extending portion 62 extends further forward than the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the horizontal fixing portion 64 is inserted from above into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 and is fixed to the left frame member 30 with screws.

This outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 to rotate the main body frame 4 by inserting the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63. It can be supported so that it can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a band-shaped lock body 66a that extends back and forth with a predetermined width on the left and right sides, and an operating portion that protrudes rightward from the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a and then diagonally forward to the left, and a mounting hole penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66d. This lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 using attachment screws 67 .

The lock member 66 is attached through the attachment hole 66d at a position where the rear end of the lock body 66a is on the rear side of the bearing groove 63 in the front extending portion 62 of the upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side. Further, when the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in plan view, and the right side near the front end is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member. It extends forward so as to be able to come into contact with a portion of the hanging portion 65 of 60 that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

Further, the tip of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner circumferential surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. This locking member 66 is biased in a direction in which the front end rotates to the left around the attachment hole 66d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock body 66a to accommodate a body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the body frame side upper hinge member 620, which will be described later.

This lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the biasing force of the elastic part 66c by operating the operating part 66b. By operating the operating portion 66b, the lock body 66a is rotated in a direction in which its front end moves to the left, so that the lock body 66a can be retreated from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view. can be in a state where it is completely passed through. Thereby, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63 and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 71 that extends horizontally, and a portion that stands upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 71 on the rear side of the center in the front-rear direction. A rising flat plate-like rising part 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal part 71, and passing through the horizontal part 71 vertically, allowing only one game ball to pass through. A discharge hole 74 of the same size is provided. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed into a trapezoid with the left side as the base in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a cylindrical shape, and is formed into a truncated cone shape with the upper end narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. This outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to a left-side position near the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with the central portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction, and to extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right in an inverted U-shape. This discharge hole 74 is formed to have substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

In the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and the rear extension portion 51, and the horizontal portion 71 is fixed to the curtain reinforcing member 80 by screws (not shown) that pass through the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. In addition, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the protruding portion 32 using screws (not shown). This outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is constructed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into the lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. In cooperation with the hinge member 60, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

Furthermore, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 is aligned with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the game balls on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (ejected) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. To be more specific, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a game ball that falls between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 will fall between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 as the main body frame 4 is closed. Since the gap between the two gradually narrows, the liquid rolls toward the rear where the gap is wide, and the liquid can be discharged from the discharge hole 74. At this time, since the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position that is approximately the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game balls that have fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 74, it is possible to easily prevent them from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame side It is possible to make it difficult for game balls to stay in the lower hinge member 70 portion.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting members 85 of the outer frame 2 include an upper left connecting member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There are a lower left connecting member 85C that connects the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

The connecting member 85 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing part 86 extending horizontally, a flat plate-shaped upper and horizontal fixing part 87 extending upward from either the left or right side of the horizontal fixing part 86, and a horizontal fixing part 86. A flat plate-shaped lower lateral fixing part 88 extends downward from the same side as the part from which the upper lateral fixing part 87 in 86 extends. This connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper lateral fixing part 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing part 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower lateral fixing part 88 extends from both front and back sides of the upper lateral fixing part 87. It extends downward. That is, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 spaced apart from each other in the front and rear. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 while being in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. Further, the upper-lateral fixing parts 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the ends of the upper frame member 10 in the left-right direction. Further, the lower and horizontal fixing portions 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 on the front side of the protrusions 32 and 42, respectively. Further, the lower and horizontal fixing portions 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are screwed into the protrusions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed from the outer side surface. are fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively.

In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing part 87 protrudes further rearward than the rear end of the horizontal fixing part 86, and further than the horizontal fixing part 86 of the upper horizontal fixing part 87. A lower horizontal fixing part 88 extends below the horizontal fixing part 86 from the lower end of the rearwardly projecting part. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 that projects from the rear end of the upper horizontal securing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal securing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper and lateral fixing parts 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 on the front side of the protrusions 32 and 42, respectively. Furthermore, the lower horizontal fixing parts 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surfaces of the lower frame member 20 in the left and right direction, respectively. Ru.

[2-9. Locking mechanism of upper hinge member on outer frame side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the locking mechanism for the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 by the locking member 66 on the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. Refer to and explain. FIG. 17(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the upper hinge member on the main body frame side of the main body frame is removed from the upper hinge member on the outer frame side of the outer frame, and FIG. FIG. 3 is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram showing the action of the locking member on the outer frame.

When the locking member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extending portion 62 of the upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c is in contact with the inner circumferential surface of the hanging portion 65. Therefore, the lock body 66a partially closes the bent bearing groove 63, and the tip portion of the lock body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. A space is formed in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 into which the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted.

In this embodiment, the support mechanism of the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 is such that the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock main body 66a is The right side of the lock body 66a is close to the right side hanging part 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side of the front end of the lock body 66a and the right side hanging part 65, and they are in contact with each other). In the normal pivoting state (not shown), the centers of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest part of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end surface of the lock main body 66a are offset in an oblique direction and are opposed to each other. It is in a state.

In this normal pivoting state, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622, which pivotally supports the heavy main body frame 4, is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63. Almost no load is applied from 622 to the front end surface of the lock body 66a. In other words, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the locking member 66. Note that, since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, when the operating portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66, the lock member 66 rotates smoothly. There is. In addition, in the illustration, the center of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is the center of the attachment hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

Therefore, when the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is applied with an acting force F in a direction in which it comes out along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a dogleg shape and comes into contact with the arcuate front end surface of the lock body 66a, the acting force F is a component force F1 (normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a) acting on the abutting portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the circular arc-shaped front end surface, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the bearing groove 63. When divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface of one side, the direction of the component force F1 is directed toward the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (rotation center of the lock member 66). , the moment that rotates the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 in the direction away from the right hanging portion 65 does not work, and the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is connected to the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. The state of being sandwiched between the inner surface and the side surface is maintained.

Therefore, even in a normal pivoting state or a state in which the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is applied to the lock member 66, no load is always applied to the elastic part 66c of the lock member 66, and the elastic part 66c is integrally formed with synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent the elastic portion 66c from being plastically deformed due to creep, and to prevent the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from falling off from the bearing groove 63 over a long period of time. Note that even if the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction of moving to the right due to excessive force, the right side of the front end of the lock body 66a will come into contact with the hanging portion 65 and the lock body 66a will not move further. Since it does not rotate, the locking member 66 is prevented from protruding outside the front extending portion 62.

Note that even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not an arc shape, the lock member 66 may be placed at a position where no rotational moment is generated due to the action of the component force F1 described above, or when the front end portion of the lock member 66 is directed toward the outside of the front extension portion 62. By locating the center of rotation of the locking member 66 (the axis fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where a rotational moment is generated to rotate the locking member 66, no load is constantly applied to the elastic portion 66c of the locking member 66. Even when the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a only comes into contact with the hanging portion 65, so the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extending portion 62.

When supporting the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 in the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. Insert hinge pin 622. When the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 comes into contact with the right side of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock main body 66a resists the biasing force of the elastic part 66c. The locking member 66 rotates around the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock body 66a that had closed the bearing groove 63 retreats, opening the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be moved to the deepest part (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

Then, when the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 and the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock main body 66a is released by the urging force of the elastic part 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to its normal state. As a result, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is accommodated in the space in front of the front end of the lock main body 66a in the bearing groove 63, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is rotatable in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. It is held (locked) in the state.

When removing the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from inside the bearing groove 63, operate the operating part 66b of the lock member 66, rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left, and then remove the elastic part. The lock body 66a is retreated from the bearing groove 63 against the urging force of the lock body 66c. As a result, the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Security mechanism and ball bite prevention mechanism at the lower hinge member on the outer frame side]
A security mechanism at the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment and a ball chewing prevention mechanism for preventing game balls from being caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. The mechanism will be explained.

In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the lower outer frame hinge member 70 is attached to the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 when viewed from the front. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to be placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and on the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 is provided with a standing wall portion 54 rising upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire tries to enter the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, Since the tip of the unauthorized tool comes into contact with the standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the top surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized tool from being inserted further to the rear side. , it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from occurring through the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side.

In addition, since the upper end of the vertical wall portion 54 is provided with a barbed portion 55 extending forward, if an unauthorized tool that has come into contact with the vertical wall portion 54 bends upward, the barred portion 55 will cause the tip of the unauthorized tool to bend. Since it is possible to fold back further forward, it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and unauthorized acts can be carried out through the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side. can be reliably prevented.

By the way, when the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 is provided with the standing wall portion 54 extending upward, the game ball is placed on the outer frame side with the main body frame 4 open to the outer frame 2. When the game ball falls onto the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal part 71), the game ball on the horizontal part 71 is not ejected backward from the rear end of the horizontal part 71 due to the presence of the standing wall part 54, so the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 There is a risk of being caught between. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the horizontal part 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extension part 51 of the curtain plate member 50 include a discharge hole 74 through which a game ball can pass, and a left discharge hole 52. , and the right discharge hole 53, the game ball on the horizontal part 71 of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 etc., and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball is caught between the balls.

Therefore, if the game ball is caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the area around the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side may be damaged, or the main body frame 4 may not close normally and the outer frame 2 may It is possible to prevent a gap from being created between the main body frame 4 and the use of the gap to commit fraudulent acts.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. FIG. 19 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. 26 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B-B in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 19. It is a diagram. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main members and seen from the back.

As shown in FIGS. 29, 30, etc., the door frame 3 includes a door frame base unit 100, which has a rectangular frame-like external shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a door frame base unit 100, which is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 300 that is attached to the handle unit 300, the pan unit 320 that is attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, the production operation unit 400 that is attached to the center of the pan unit 320, and the door frame base unit that is attached to the upper side of the pan unit 320. The door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left side of the door frame base unit 100, the door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit 320, and the door frame left side unit 550 attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 that has a vertically extending rectangular (quadrangular) outer shape when viewed from the front and has a through hole 111 penetrating back and forth, although the details will be described later. , a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to both upper and lower ends of the left end side in front view of the reinforcing unit 130, and attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150, a glass unit 190 that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closes the through hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, The door frame 3 and main body frame 4, which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to protrude forward through the door frame base 110 and can be opened and closed, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 are locked. an opening/closing cylinder unit 210 for sending the game balls to the ball firing device 680, which is attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a ball sending device 680, which is attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110. The foul cover unit 270 receives the game balls that are ejected and does not reach the game area 5a and discharges them to the lower tray 322.

Although the details will be described later, the handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 allows the player to rotate the rotatable handle 302 to move the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 according to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It is possible to drive the ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a certain force.

The plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 below the through hole 111, and the front side bulges forward, although the details will be described later. A production operation unit 400 is attached to the front end in the center in the left-right direction. The tray unit 320 includes an upper tray 321 that stores game balls to be hit into the game area 5a, and a tray unit 320 that is disposed below the upper tray 321 and stores game balls supplied from the upper tray 321 and the foul cover unit 270. A lower tray 322 that can be stored, an upper tray ball removal button 327 for pulling out game balls stored in the upper tray 321 to the lower tray 322, and a ball lending machine within the range of cash or prepaid card balance inserted into the ball rental machine. A ball lending button 328 for lending game balls to a player, a return button 329 for returning cash or a prepaid card minus the amount of game balls lent from the ball lending machine, and cash inserted into the ball lending machine. A ball rental/return display section 330 that displays the remaining number of prepaid cards, etc., a performance selection left button 331 and a performance selection right button 332 that can be operated by the player when presenting a performance, and a display section 330 in the lower tray 322 A lower tray ball removal button 333 for discharging the game ball below the tray unit 320 is provided.

The production operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front part of the tray unit 320 at the center in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front, and can be pressed and operated by the player and presents a production image to the player. It is something that can be done. Although the details will be described later, this production operation unit 400 includes a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, and a door frame side production that is arranged within the operation button 410 so as to be visible from the player side and can display a production image. A display device 460 is provided.

Although the details will be described later, the door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the through hole 111 on the upper side of the dish unit 320, and It decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame left side unit 530 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) that can be decorated with light.

Although the details will be described later, the door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through hole 111 above the tray unit 320, and It decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a). This door frame right side unit 550 protrudes more forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both left and right sides, and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided at the front end. A right unit decorative lens member 561 is provided. In the door frame right side unit 550, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be decorated with light emission.

The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 and above the through hole 111 on the front side of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100. It is used to decorate the upper part of the frame 3. Although the details will be described later, the door frame top unit 570 includes a pair of upper speakers 573 spaced apart from each other on the left and right, a top middle decorative member 576 protruding forward at the center of the front surface, and both left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 are provided. In the door frame top unit 570, the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light emission.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31(a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame seen from the front, and FIG. 31(b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit seen from the back. Fig. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and Fig. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the back. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed (hinged) so that the left side in front view closes the front surface of the main body frame 4. The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 at the lower front corner, a tray unit 320 to which the production operation unit 400 is attached to the lower front of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 530 at the front left outside of the through hole 111. A door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right outer front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111.

As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the door frame base unit 100 has a plate-shaped door frame base 110 that has a rectangular outer shape extending vertically when viewed from the front and has a through hole 111 penetrating the front and back. , a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to both upper and lower ends of the left end side in front view of the reinforcing unit 130, protruding forward from the door frame base 110 and supporting the main body frame 4. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 which are rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, and the front side of the through hole 111 on the front side of the door frame base 110. A door frame left side decorative board 160, which is attached to the left side of the view and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a glass unit 190, which is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, are detachably attached. and a glass unit mounting member 170 for use.

The door frame base unit 100 also includes a cylindrical handle attachment member 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front view of the front side of the door frame base 110 for attaching the handle unit 300, and a cylindrical handle attachment member 180 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110. A glass unit 190 that closes the through hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, and an opening/closing cylinder unit that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward. 210, a ball feeding unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

Furthermore, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3, a ball feed solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a single button operation sensor 312, Ball rental button 328, return button 329, ball rental and return display section 330, performance selection left button 331, performance selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, pressure detection sensor 440, door frame side performance display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , upper speaker 573, etc., and a door main body relay board for relaying the connection between the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900 in the main body frame 4.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 110 has a square (rectangular) shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front. The door frame base 110 is provided with a through hole 111 that penetrates the door frame base 110 in the front and back, and has a substantially rectangular inner peripheral shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The upper side and both left and right sides forming the inner periphery of the through hole 111 are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is located above and below the lower end of the door frame base 110. It is located at about 1/3 of the height in the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is entirely formed into a frame shape with the through holes 111 penetrating in the front and rear. This door frame base 110 is integrally molded from synthetic resin.

The door frame base 110 has a handle mounting seat surface 112 formed at the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front and inclined so that the left end side protrudes slightly forward than the right end side, and the handle mounting seat surface 112 and the through hole 111. A cylinder mounting part 113 is recessed from the rear surface to the front near the right end in front view, and the cylinder mounting plate 213 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is attached to the cylinder mounting part 113 . The cylinder insertion hole 114 into which the cylinder lock 211 is inserted passes through the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 from front to back on the left side when viewed from the front, so that the entry port 251a and the ball extraction port 251b of the ball feeding unit 250 are inserted forward. A ball feeding opening 115 for facing the ball is provided.

Further, the door frame base 110 is located to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the door frame base 110 and penetrates back and forth at approximately the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, so that the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 faces forward. A passage hole 116 for the lower plate, which is inserted into the door frame base 110, and an upper hole that penetrates back and forth adjacent to the lower side of the through hole 111 near the left end of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front, so that the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 faces forward. A plate passage opening 117 , a glass unit mounting part 118 that is recessed from the rear surface toward the front along the inner periphery of the through-hole 111 and into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, and the upper left and right sides of the door frame base 110 . It is provided with a speaker insertion opening 119 that penetrates back and forth at the corner and into which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31, 33, and the like. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 extending left and right and attached along the upper side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a middle reinforcing sheet metal 131 extending left and right attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A left reinforcing sheet metal 133 that extends vertically and is attached along the left side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front; and a right reinforcing sheet metal 133 that extends vertically and is attached along the right side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front. It includes a metal plate 134 and a locking portion 135 attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing metal plate 134 and to which the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700 is locked.

In the reinforcing unit 130, both left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 with screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 with screws. Fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to a right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of an opening/closing cylinder unit 210, which will be described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed into a frame shape by an upper reinforcing metal sheet 131, a middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, a left reinforcing sheet metal 133, a right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by suitably bending a metal plate. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 has a notch 132a formed in the door frame base 110 at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage opening 117 and penetrating back and forth.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the reinforcing unit 130 has portions bent in the front-rear direction in each of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, This location increases strength and rigidity, and prevents unauthorized tools such as piano wire and flathead screwdrivers from entering from outside.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 includes a door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 that is attached to the door frame base 110 and has a pair of vertically spaced protruding pieces 141a, and a pair of protrusions of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. A cylindrical door frame upper hinge pin 142 that passes through the piece 141a and whose upper end is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, and a pair of protruding pieces 141a on the door frame upper hinge pin 142. A disc-shaped flange member 143 is installed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a and the hinge pin 142 on the door frame. is inserted through the lock spring 144 and urges the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward.

Although not shown, the hinge shaft bracket 141 on the door frame has a flat mounting piece that connects the rear ends of the pair of protruding pieces 141a, and has a shape in side view that is open to the front. It is formed into a letter shape. In the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141, a mounting piece connecting a pair of protruding pieces 141a is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with screws.

The door frame upper hinge pin 142 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 at a portion (upper end) that protrudes higher than the upper protruding piece 141a. Further, although not shown in the drawings, the door frame upper hinge pin 142 has a portion that protrudes below the lower protruding piece 141a and is bent in the horizontal direction. This bent portion abuts against the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 141a, thereby restricting upward movement of the door frame upper hinge pin 142.

The collar member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be inserted, and its upper end is in contact with the collar member 143, and its lower end is in contact with the lower protruding piece 141a. This lock spring 144 is interposed in a compressed state between the collar member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a, and urges the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward via the collar member 143. .

In the door frame upper hinge member 140, the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is urged upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes downward. By contacting the lower surface of the piece 141a, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a by a predetermined amount.

When an operator holds the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 and pulls that portion downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 144, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 is attached to the door frame side upper hinge member 140. The entire upper hinge pin 142 can be moved downward, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a. Therefore, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 does not allow the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 to be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 or pulled out from below. I can do it. Thereby, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, the upper left end of the door frame 3 in front view is , can be supported so as to be hinged and rotatable relative to the main body frame 4.

Further, in the door frame side upper hinge member 140, a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 supported by a pair of protruding pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 is a door frame side lower hinge member 150, which will be described later. It is supported coaxially with the lower hinge pin 152. Thereby, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 can hingely rotate the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 in a good condition.

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 31, 32, and the like. The door frame side lower hinge member 150 includes a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 that is attached to the door frame base 110 and has a flat plate-like extension piece 151a extending forward, and a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 that is attached to the door frame base 110 and has a flat plate-like extension piece 151a extending forward. A cylindrical door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) protrudes downward from near the front end of the extending piece 151a.

The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat mounting piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of a horizontally extending flat plate-like extension piece 151a, and has an overall shape in side view. is formed into a substantially L-shape. This door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a mounting piece (not shown) attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with screws.

The lower end of the door frame lower hinge pin 152 is shaped like a truncated cone that narrows downward. This door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into a door frame hinge hole 644 of a body frame side lower hinge member 640 in the body frame 4, which will be described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

This door frame side lower hinge member 150 allows the door frame 3 to hinge relative to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. can be supported.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative board 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 31, 32, and the like. The door frame left side decorative board 160 is attached to the left side of the through hole 111 in front view on the front surface of the door frame base 110. The door frame left side decorative board 160 is a door that extends vertically from a height below the speaker insertion opening 119 on the left side of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front to a height near the vertical center of the through opening 111. Frame left side upper decorative board 161 and door frame left side lower decoration which extends vertically from the height of the lower side of door frame left side upper decorative board 161 to approximately the same height as the lower end of upper plate passage hole 117. A substrate 162 is provided.

The door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162 of the door frame left side decorative board 160 are each equipped with a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a on the front surface that can emit light forward. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full color LEDs.

The door frame left side decorative board 160 is located behind the door frame left side unit 530, which will be described later, when the door frame 3 is assembled. By emitting light as appropriate, the left unit decorative lens member of the left side unit 530 of the door frame can be decorated with light.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting parts]
The glass unit attachment member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 31(b) and the like. The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and is used to detachably attach the glass unit 190. The glass unit mounting member 170 includes a disc-shaped base 171 that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a rod-shaped base 171 that protrudes from the base 171 in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protrusion 172.

The glass unit attachment members 170 are each rotatably attached to a portion of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 below the pair of speaker insertion holes 119 and outside the glass unit attachment portion 118.

The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotated so that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, so that the protrusion 172 is positioned further outward than the glass unit attachment portion 118 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the rear. In this position, the glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit attachment part 118 of the door frame base 110 or removed from the glass unit attachment part 118.

When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding part 172 protrudes downward from the base 171 with the glass unit 190 inserted into the glass unit mounting part 118 of the door frame base 110, the protruding part 172 attaches to the glass. It comes into contact with the rear side of the mounting piece 191a of the unit 190, restricting rearward movement of the upper part of the glass unit 190, and the glass unit 190 can be mounted on the door frame base 110.

Since the glass unit attachment member 170 has a protrusion 172 protruding from a disc-shaped base 171 that is rotatably attached to the door frame base 110, the center of gravity of the glass unit attachment member 170 is located within the protrusion 172. . From this, when the glass unit mounting member 170 is freely rotatable, the protrusion 172 is stably protruded downward from the base 171. In the glass unit mounting member 170, when the protrusion 172 is in the rotational position protruding downward from the base 171, the protrusion 172 restricts the rearward movement of the glass unit 190. Even if vibration or the like acts on the member 170, the entire body will not rotate so that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, and the restriction on rearward movement of the glass unit 190 will not be naturally released. do not have.

In addition, when removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, rotate the glass unit mounting member 170 so that the protruding part 172 protrudes upward from the base part 171, and the protruding part 172 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 further outward, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved rearward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1g. Handle mounting parts]
The handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The handle attachment member 180 is for attaching the handle unit 300 to the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle attachment member 180 includes a cylindrical tube portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction, and a cylindrical tube portion 181 extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 181 from the rear end of the tube portion 181. An extended annular flange portion 182 , and a plurality of ( In this example, the cylindrical portion 181 includes three projecting rims 183 and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 that connect the outer circumferential surface of the cylindrical portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 and are arranged in plurality in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181. .

The handle attachment member 180 is attached to the handle attachment surface 112 with screws, with the rear surface of the flange portion 182 in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment surface 112 on the door frame base 110.

The cylindrical portion 181 has an inner diameter slightly larger than an outer diameter of the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side within the cylindrical portion 181, and the remaining two are provided on the lower side within the cylindrical portion 181. These three protrusions 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 301c in the handle base 301. Therefore, in the handle attachment member 180, the base 301a of the handle base 301 can be inserted into the cylindrical part 181 only when the three protrusions 183 and the three grooves 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) with respect to the door frame base 110 can be regulated.

In addition, since the axis of the cylindrical part 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange part 182, the handle mounting member 180 can be attached to the slanted handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 so that the cylindrical part The handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in a similarly tilted state, with the axis line of the handle unit 300 being tilted so as to extend toward the right front.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The glass unit 190 closes the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that it can be seen from the front to the rear. The glass unit 190 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner circumference of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment part 118, and a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that closes the inside of the glass frame 191 and whose outer periphery is a glass frame. 191 and two transparent glass plates 192 attached to the glass plate 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end and the rear end of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are spaced apart from each other in the front and back so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 26, etc.).

The glass frame 191 includes a pair of mounting pieces 191a that extend outward in a flat plate form from a position below the upper left and right corners when viewed from the front, and a band that projects downward from the lower end and extends along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 191b. The mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191 can come into contact with the protrusion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

This glass unit 190 is assembled by inserting the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 from above into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from the rear side of the door frame base 110. , the front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit attachment part 118 of the door frame base 110, and the glass unit attachment member 170 is rotated so that the protruding part 172 of the glass unit attachment member 170 is attached to the attachment piece 191a of the glass frame 191. It is attached to the door frame base 110 by bringing it into contact with the rear surface of the door frame base 110.

When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit 190 can be removed by reversing the procedure described above. Thereby, the glass unit 190 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 includes a flat main body part 201 whose outer periphery is formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat rear protruding piece 202 that protrudes short rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body part 201, which are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions. A pair of locking pieces 203 that protrude forward from the main body portion 201 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110 are provided.

The main body part 201 of the security cover 200 is formed so that its lower end protrudes further downward than the lower end of the glass unit 190 when it is attached to the door frame base 110. Further, the main body portion 201 has an upper end formed in a shape along the lower end of the gaming area 5a on the gaming board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Specifically, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002, an out guide part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, which will be described later. It is formed so that it does not protrude into the gaming area 5a when assembled into the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 202 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201 . Therefore, the security cover 200 is formed into a shallow box shape opened to the rear by the main body portion 201 and the rear projecting piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear projecting piece 202 also projects rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 that is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. The rear projecting piece 202 that protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body part 201 is formed so as to align with a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

Note that the rear projecting piece 202 is not formed in a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball fired by the ball firing device 680) does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200, and is kept inside the game area 5a. It does not impede hitting the game ball into the ball.

The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. Thereby, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

When the security cover 200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front of the main body 201 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191), and the part that protrudes rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 is The removed rear protruding piece 202 is inserted into the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000, which will be described later. In addition, the security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear protruding piece 202 that protrudes rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component 1000. . As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state due to the rear protrusion 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the gaming area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from the lower front side of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the security recess 1008. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

[3-1j. Opening/closing cylinder unit]
The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to a cylinder attachment part 113 at a position between the through hole 111 and the handle attachment seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front, and cooperates with a locking unit 700 described later. It is used to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 includes a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 that has a keyhole 211a on the front and extends back and forth, and a locking unit that is attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and that rotates the key inserted into the keyhole 211a. 700, and a cylinder attachment plate 213 for attaching the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcement unit 130).

The cylinder lock 211 can be rotated by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the keyhole 211a.If the cylinder lock 211 is a corresponding key, it can be rotated either clockwise or counterclockwise when viewed from the front. It can also be rotated by a predetermined angle in the direction of.

The rotation transmission member 212 is formed into a cylindrical shape with an open rear end (more specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and is formed from the rear end toward the front at opposing positions across the central axis. It has a pair of notches 212a which are cut out. This rotation transmission member 212 is formed so that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and the protrusion of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of notches 212a. By doing so, the rotation of the rotation transmission member 212 (the key inserted into the keyhole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700, and the key cylinder 710 can be rotated.

The cylinder mounting metal plate 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and has a convex shape protruding forward in a plan view. To be more specific, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 includes a rectangular flat plate-like front plate part 213a extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of side plate parts 213b extending rearward from both left and right sides of the front plate part 213a in a flat plate-shape. and a pair of attachment plate parts 213c extending in a flat plate shape in a direction away from each other from the respective rear sides of the pair of side plate parts 213b. The cylinder lock 211 passes through the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 from the rear at a position approximately at the center in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. The pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is such that the left side mounting plate portion 213c in front view is attached to the right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and the right side mounting plate portion 213c in front view is attached to the right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130. It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. Thereby, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 of the reinforcing unit 130 are connected by the cylinder attachment sheet metal 213 .

When the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting plate 213 is inserted into the cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. 114 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110, and the front plate part 213a and a pair of side plate parts 213b of the cylinder mounting plate 213 are accommodated in the box-shaped cylinder mounting part 113 which is open to the rear. ing.

[3-4. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the production operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 34 to 41 and the like. FIG. 34(a) is a front view of the production operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 34(b) is a right side view of the production operation unit. Moreover, FIG. 35(a) is a perspective view of the production operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 35(b) is a perspective view of the production operation unit viewed from the back. FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram of the production operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 37 is a sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 34(a), and FIG. 38 is a sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 34(b). FIG. 39(a) is a sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 34(b), and FIG. 39(b) is an enlarged view of section A in FIG. 34(a). FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into its main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into its main members and seen from the back. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front part of the tray unit 320 at the center in the left and right direction when viewed from the front, and can be pressed and operated by the player and can also present an effect image to the player. It is.

The performance operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape and a transparent center side excluding the outer periphery, and includes an operation button 410 that can be pressed by the player, and a performance operation unit that surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410 and is a plate unit cover 326. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 that is attached to the mounting portion 326a, a decorative board unit 420 that is arranged behind the operation button 410 and can decorate the outer periphery of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415 with light, and a frame. A base unit 430 is attached to the rear side of the unit 415 and has an operation button 410 and a decorative board unit 420 attached to the front side. A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image is provided.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. FIG. 42(a) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button as seen from the front, and FIG. 42(b) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button as seen from the back. The operation button 410 has a circular outer shape with a diameter slightly smaller than the vertical height of the dish unit 320, and the center side excluding the outer periphery is transparent. The operation button 410 includes a transparent button lens 411 that has a circular outer circumference and a curved surface (partial shape of a spherical surface) so that the center side bulges forward, and a transparent button lens 411 that has a circular outer circumference and a curved surface (partial shape of a spherical surface) that bulges forward. It includes an attached annular button frame 412 and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are made of a material that does not easily transmit light.

The entire button lens 411 is formed to have a substantially constant thickness. Further, the button lens 411 is formed into a smooth curved surface with no unevenness on the front side. The button lens 411 is recessed in a W-shaped cross section from the back surface at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412 and extends a predetermined length toward the center (inside), and is arranged in rows in the circumferential direction. One button decoration part 411a is recessed from the back surface in a cross-sectional arc shape at a position on the outer circumferential side of the first button decoration part 411a, and extends on the axis toward the center, and is arranged in a row within a predetermined angle range in the circumferential direction. A plurality (six) of second button decoration parts 411b are provided.

As shown in the figure, the first button decoration part 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 toward the center when assembled to the operation button 410, and one group on both left and right sides is one group on both upper and lower sides. It extends further towards the center.

The plurality of second button decoration parts 411b of the button lens 411 each extend in an arc shape on the same circumference, and three are formed on each of the left and right sides. These second button decoration parts 411b are formed so as to face from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and protrude forward so that the front side thereof is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

The button lens 411 exhibits a lens effect in which light is refracted due to unevenness with a W-shaped cross section or an arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface at the first button decorative part 411a and the second button decorative part 411b. Therefore, the rear side cannot be clearly seen.

The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape and includes a plurality of (six) frame openings 412a that penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend in an arc shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412a are provided three each on the left and right sides, and correspond to the six second button decorative parts 411b of the button lens 411. This button frame 412 has a plating layer with metallic luster on its surface.

The button base 413 includes a substantially cylindrical main body 413a that extends short in the front-rear direction, an annular flange 413b that protrudes outward from the front end of the main body 413a, and a main body 413a that extends from the rear side of the flange 413b. A plurality of (four) guide boss parts 413c protrude rearward along the outer periphery of the main body part 413a and are arranged at approximately equal intervals in the circumferential direction. Detection pieces 413d protrude rearward in a band-like shape and are arranged in plurality (three) in the circumferential direction, and a detection piece 413d that penetrates the flange part 413b back and forth outside the main body part 413a and extends along the outer periphery for a predetermined length. A plurality of base openings 413e (six) are formed in the circumferential direction, and a base opening 413e extends forward from the front end of the main body 413a in a cylindrical shape, and the front end side is inward so as to follow the inner surface of the button lens 411. An inner extending portion 413f that narrows toward the center (center side) is provided.

The outer circumferential edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer circumferential surface of the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange portion 413b. The four guide boss portions 413c are arranged at portions corresponding to the four upper, lower, left, and right corners of the main body portion 413a in the circumferential direction. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, respectively. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at approximately equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a, two on the upper side and one on the lower side. These three detection pieces 413d are detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 when the operation button 410 is pressed.

The six base openings 413e are provided, three each on the left and right sides, and correspond to the second button decoration part 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. At the base opening 413e of the button base 413, a portion of the main body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f are recessed inward from the outer circumferential side. The inner diameter of the front end of the inner extending portion 413f, which narrows inward, substantially matches the inner diameter of the button frame 412.

This operation button 410 has a front surface that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (approximately a part of a spherical surface) and is transparent, and a door frame side effect display device 460 disposed on the rear side. The display screen can be viewed from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide bosses 413c slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and an operation button spring 438 inserted into the holding hole 431b of the unit base 431. Forced forward. The front side of the outer periphery of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the frame unit 415 due to the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, so that further forward movement is restricted. By pressing against this, the base unit 430 is moved rearward until the rear end contacts the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. The detection of the detection piece 413d by the pressure detection sensor 440 indicates that the operation button 410 has been operated.

In addition, the operation button 410 has a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference of the button frame 412 in the transparent button lens 411 so as to extend from the inner peripheral end to the center side when the production operation unit 400 is assembled. The portion 411a can make it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner circumferential surface of the button base 413 and the operation button internal decoration member 432 of the base unit 430.

Further, the operation button 410 has a front end opening of a cylindrical button base 413 closed by a button lens 411 and a button frame 412, and the button frame 412 attached to the outer periphery of the button lens 411 allows the operation button to be closed. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion that is visible from the rear is formed so as to narrow inward from the outer periphery. The presence of this button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner circumferential surface of the button base 413 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 of the base unit 430.

In addition, when the operation button 410 is assembled to the production operation unit 400, the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (main body portion 413a) passes through the inner circumferential side of the decorative board unit 420 and is lower than the front surface of the decorative board unit 420. It will protrude backwards. As a result, the light radiated forward from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 of the decorative substrate unit 420 is transmitted to the button. It is possible to prevent leakage from the outside of the base 413 to the inside, and also to prevent leakage from the outside of the base unit 430, the left side of the operation button decorative board 433, the right side of the operation button decorative board 434, the upper side of the operation button decorative board 435, and the lower side of the operation button. Light emitted forward from the LED mounted on the decorative board 436 can be prevented from leaking from the inside of the button base 413 to the outside. Therefore, the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b of the decorative board unit 420, the operating button left inner decorative board 433, the operating button right inner decorative board 434, the upper operating button inner decorative board 435, and the operating button of the base unit 430. It is possible to prevent the LEDs mounted on the lower inner decorative board 436 from decorating parts other than those targeted for the light-emitting decoration, and it is possible to perform the light-emitting decoration with good appearance.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the performance operation unit 400 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the performance operation unit attachment part 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery of the operation button 410 from the front side, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed to have an outer shape that matches the front end side of the production operation unit mounting portion 326a.

The frame unit 415 includes a frame-shaped frame main body 416 that is attached to the performance operation unit attachment part 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 and has a circular central opening 416a, and a frame body 416 that is attached to the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of frame side lenses 417 having light-transmitting properties that are attached to the frame body 416 from the rear side, and a frame top lens 418 having light-transmitting properties that is attached to the frame body 416 from the front side above the central opening 416a. There is.

The frame body 416 has a circular central opening 416a having a smaller diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrating back and forth, and a central opening 416a that penetrates back and forth on both left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a. A plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b extending in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a and arranged in a row in the circumferential direction, and a notch 416c cut out with a predetermined width in the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. , is equipped with. The center opening 416a is formed to have approximately the same size as the outer diameter of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410. This allows the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to come into contact with the outer peripheral rear side of the frame opening 412a.

The six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided three each on the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a, and are closed by frame side lenses 417 from the rear side. The notch 416c also penetrates in the front-back direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

Further, the frame main body 416 includes a substantially cylindrical inner cylinder portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the periphery of the central opening 416a. The inner cylinder portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and is cut out at a portion corresponding to the notch 416c. When the production operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner cylinder portion 416d is connected to the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b on the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 of the decorative substrate unit 420, respectively. and partitions between the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b (see FIG. 38).

Furthermore, the frame body 416 extends outward at the upper portions of the left and right sides of the outer periphery, and includes a pair of attachment portions 416e that are attached to the production operation unit attachment portions 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. The frame main body 416 (presentation operation unit 400) has a pair of mounting portions 416e and a cutout portion 416c on both sides thereof attached to the production operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320.

The frame body 416 has almost the entire surface made of metal, except for a portion with the same width as the notch 416c on the side opposite to the notch 416c (the side where the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a in between. A shiny plating layer is formed.

The frame side lenses 417 close off the outer peripheral openings 416b, which are formed three on each side of the frame main body 416, from the rear side. The frame side lens 417 has a smooth surface with no irregularities on the front side, and a plurality of irregularities along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear side (see FIGS. 39 and 46). The light is refracted by these plurality of irregularities, so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

The frame top lens 418 has a substantially rectangular outer shape so as to be fitted into the notch 416c of the frame body 416 from the front. The frame top lens 418 has a smooth front side. In addition, the frame top lens 418 has a plurality of concavities and convexities extending in a zigzag shape along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side, and are arranged in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 37 and 46). reference). The light is refracted by these plurality of irregularities, so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen.

In the frame unit 415, when the performance operation unit 400 is assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 are connected to the second LEDs 422b, 423b on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420. At the same time, the frame top lens 418 is located in front of the frame top lens decoration board 437 of the base unit 430, and each can be decorated with light by the second LEDs 422b, 423b, etc. mounted thereon. .

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative board unit 420 of the performance operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 39 to 43 and the like. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative board unit of the production operation unit as seen from the front. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can decorate the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 with light emission, and also This allows vibration to be applied to the operation unit 400.

The decorative board unit 420 includes a C-shaped board base 421 with an open upper side, and an operation button left outer decorative board 422 and an operation button right outer decorative board 423 attached to the left and right front surfaces of the board base 421, respectively. , a vibration motor 424 attached to the front lower part of the substrate base 421, and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

The board base 421 has an inner circumferential side slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical main body part 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and an outer circumferential side larger than the outer diameter of the flange part 413b of the button base 413. Moreover, it is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

The operation button left outer decorative board 422 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the board base 421. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted on the front side along the inner periphery of the board base 421, and a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted on the inner periphery of the board base 421 on the radially outer side of the plurality of first LEDs 422a. A plurality of second LEDs 422b are mounted along the side. The operation button right outer decorative board 423 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the board base 421. The operation button right outer decorative board 423 has a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted on the front side along the inner periphery of the board base 421, and a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted on the inner periphery of the board base 421 on the radially outer side of the plurality of first LEDs 423a. A plurality of second LEDs 423b are mounted along the side. Both the front and rear surfaces of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are white.

The vibration motor 424 has an eccentric weight 424a attached to a rotating shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a.

When the decorative board unit 420 is assembled to the production operation unit 400, the rear end side of the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421. In addition, in the decorative board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located behind the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410, The second LEDs 422b and 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. In addition, when assembled into the production operation unit 400, a frame is provided between the respective first LEDs 422a, 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 and the respective second LEDs 422b, 423b. An inner cylindrical portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 38).

Therefore, the decorative board unit 420 emits light and decorates only the second button decorative portion 411b of the operating button 410 using the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a on the operating button left outer decorative board 422 and the operating button right outer decorative board 423, respectively. At the same time, only the frame side lenses 417 of the frame unit 415 can be decorated with light by the light from the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b.

Further, the decorative board unit 420 can generate vibrations by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424, and can vibrate the entire production operation unit 400.

[3-4d. Effects of production operation unit]
The effects of the production operation unit 400 will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 44 to 46 and the like. FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the operation button is pressed in the sectional view of the production operation unit of FIG. 37. FIG. 45(a) is a diagram of the production operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, where a part of the operation button is cut out and hidden by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. It is an explanatory view showing a part, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a part which is going to be hidden by a first button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in a sectional view of a performance operation unit. FIG. 46(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit in a perspective view seen from the front, and FIG. 46(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is.

The performance operation unit 400 of the present embodiment can display a performance image to the player according to the game state that changes when a game ball is hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and also allows the player to operate the performance image. The player can be entertained by having the player participate in the presentation presented to the player by operating the button 410.

The overall height of the production operation unit 400 is approximately the same as the height of the lower portion of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. Further, the production operation unit 400 has a total width slightly larger than ⅓ of the total width of the door frame 3. The performance operation unit 400 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) when viewed from the front.

In the performance operation unit 400, the upper part of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. When the production operation unit 400 is attached to the pan unit 320, there is a gap between the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 serving as the bottom surface and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the tray unit cover 326 of the pan unit 320. is formed. That is, the production operation unit 400 is attached to the tray unit 320 only at the upper part, and is attached in a suspended state.

In addition, in the production operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the front inner circumference of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the production operation unit mounting portion 326a. It is installed as follows. As a result, in the production operation unit 400, the central axis CL of the transparent operation button 410, which bulges forward in a curved shape (partial shape of a substantially spherical surface), is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. It is sloped so that it moves upward as it goes forward. As a result, when a player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is placed above the tray unit 320 (performance operation unit 400). Since it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the player's head. Therefore, when a player looks down from the gaming area 5a to the production operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to its front view (projected view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). Therefore, the operation button 410, the door frame side effect display device 460 inside the operation button 410, etc. can be visually recognized in good condition.

In the performance operation unit 400, the four guide bosses 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, and are urged forward by the operation button spring 438. In the normal state of the production operation unit 400 (when the operation button 410 is not pressed), the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is pressed against the frame unit 415 by the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. It abuts a portion near the central opening 416a on the rear surface of the frame body 416.

In the normal state, the production operation unit 400 has a button frame 412 of the operation button 410 whose center side (center axis CL side) protrudes forward from the center opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. There is. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that protrudes forward in a curved shape (partial shape of a substantially spherical surface), the portion that protrudes forward from the inner periphery (inside) of the button frame 412 is , protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 37, etc.).

Incidentally, in this embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is approximately 15 cm, and (the front end of) the button lens 411 is located in the frame unit with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It protrudes approximately 4cm forward from the front of 415.

In a normal state, when a player presses the operation button 410 of the production operation unit 400, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the central axis CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. When the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, rearward movement is restricted and the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the player presses the button lens 411 which bulges forward in a curved shape (approximately a part of a spherical surface).

This operation button 410 has a much larger outer diameter than the operation buttons for performance provided in conventional pachinko machines, so the area near the periphery away from the center of the button lens 411 is pressed. There is a high possibility that it will be done. To explain in detail, the operation button for performance in a conventional pachinko machine is installed so that its central axis extends substantially parallel to a vertical line, whereas the operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400 of this embodiment is installed so that the central axis CL is inclined with respect to the vertical line, so when the player presses the operation button 410 from above like in a conventional pachinko machine, as shown by the white arrow in FIG. This means pressing a portion of the operation button 410 that is away from the central axis CL.

By the way, the operation buttons for performance in conventional pachinko machines are formed on a flat surface for the player to press, so if the operation buttons are made larger while keeping the part pressed on the flat surface, If you press a part of the operation button that is off the center of the button, the pressed surface will tilt so that the pressed part retreats first, making it impossible for the operation button to move back straight. There is a possibility that the pressing operation will not be possible.

On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400 of the present embodiment has a part (button lens 411) that is pressed and operated by the player in a curved shape (partial shape of a substantially spherical surface) that bulges forward. Therefore, when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed over the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight backward. I can do it. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retreated without tilting. You can fully enjoy the effects you operate.

In addition, the effect operation unit 400 has a vibration motor 424 attached to the front lower part of the board base 421 of the decorative board unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is plated so that the effect operation unit 400 is suspended. Since it is attached to the production operation unit attachment part 326a of the unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate vibration, the vibration is generated at the part farthest from the part to which it is attached. , the entire production operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is touching the production operation unit 400. Furthermore, since the vibration motor 424 is placed directly below a position where it is relatively easy for the player to press the button (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 44), the vibration motor 424 can It is possible to transmit strong vibrations, surprising the players and making them enjoy the performance.

Furthermore, the production operation unit 400 is attached to the pan unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the pan unit cover 326 Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the leg section 326i and the upper surface of the bottom plate section 326i, when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed downward or hit, the frame remains until the lower surface of the leg section 442a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate section 326i. The attachment portion 416e of the unit 415, the production operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc. can absorb the impact by bending downward. Furthermore, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the production operation unit 400 is restricted, and the production operation unit mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the plate unit cover 326 are mounted. It is possible to avoid applying excessive force to the portion 326a etc., and damage to the production operation unit 400 etc. can be prevented. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is pressed or tapped with strong force, such as when the player is presented with an effect in which the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 is pressed, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit Since the 400, etc. will not be damaged, it is possible to avoid interruptions in play due to damage, suppress a drop in player interest, and by making it difficult to damage, an increase in the burden on the game parlor side can be avoided. It can be suppressed.

Note that, as described above, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that is pressed by the player is formed into a curved surface shape (partial shape of an approximately spherical surface) that protrudes forward, so it is formed into a flat plate shape. The button lens 411 has higher strength and rigidity than the button lens 411, and even if it is hit strongly, the impact can be dispersed throughout the button lens 411, making it less likely to be damaged.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 46, the effect operation unit 400 has a button lens 411, a frame side lens 417, a frame top lens 418, and an operation button internal decoration member 432 made of transparent members. The decorations with unevenness such as the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, the first button inner decoration part 432f, and the second button inner decoration part 432g formed on the back side are on the front side (player side). ) can be visually recognized. In addition, in areas where these uneven decorations are formed, light is refracted in a complicated manner due to changes in board thickness, making it difficult to see the rear side through the areas where uneven decorations are formed. .

Since the production operation unit 400 includes a first button decoration part 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center side in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the uneven decoration of the first button decoration part 411a This makes it difficult to see the rear at the outer periphery of the inner part of the button lens 411. Behind the part where the first button decoration part 411a is formed (back in the central axis CL direction), there is an inner peripheral surface of the main body part 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a peripheral wall part of the operation button inner decoration member 432. 432a, and the first button decoration part 411a located in front of the gap allows the gap between the outer circumference of the inner operation button decoration member 432 to be closed from the front side (player side). It can be made difficult to see. As a result, even if the operation button 410 that can be pressed is provided with the interior decoration member 432 whose position is fixed, the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from deteriorating, and when the operation button 410 is viewed. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and the interior decoration member 432 of the operation button can be placed within the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, so that the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

To be more specific, the production operation unit 400 has a first button decoration part 411a, a second button decoration part 411b, and a button frame 412 of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, so that the outer periphery of the operation button interior decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 is A unit base 431, a decorative board unit 420, etc. located on the outer side and rear side (rear side) are formed so as not to be visible from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 45, the cross-hatched area surrounded by the dashed line is hidden from the player's view. In this way, since the operation button 410 is provided with the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, the button frame 412, etc., the outside and back side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 are made difficult to see and hidden. This makes it possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410 and, by extension, the entire performance operation unit 400.

In addition, in the production operation unit 400, the first button decoration part 411a of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. A second button interior decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button interior decoration member 432 disposed on the inner rear side of the operation button 410 extends in a modified octagonal shape centered on the central axis CL. As shown in FIG. 46, the uneven lines of the first button decoration part 411a and the uneven lines of the second button inner decoration part 432g intersect, resulting in a geometrical Decorations can be shown to players.

In addition, in the production operation unit 400, the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis CL extends). The second button interior decoration portion 432g allows the player to see a deep, three-dimensional geometric pattern, and enjoy the decorations including the interior of the operation button 410.

Furthermore, in the production operation unit 400, since the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g are separated from each other in the front and back direction, when the position of the player's eyes moves, the unevenness of the first button decoration part 411a changes. Since the degree of overlap between the line and the uneven line of the second button interior decoration part 432g changes, a moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained.

In this way, the production operation unit 400 provides a moving and three-dimensional decoration to the player using the first button decoration part 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button interior decoration part 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432. Since the pachinko machine 1 can be shown, it can strongly attract the attention of players, making it possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing.

In addition, in the production operation unit 400, inside the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412), behind the operation button inner decoration member 432, an operation button left inner decoration board 433, an operation button right inner decoration board 434, an operation button An upper inner decorative board 435 and a lower operating button inner decorative board 436 are arranged, and by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surfaces thereof, the inner operating button decorative member 432 in the operating button 410 emits light. It can be decorated. That is, the interior of the operation button 410 can be decorated with light by the operation button left interior decoration board 433, the operation button right interior decoration board 434, the operation button upper interior decoration board 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration board 436. As shown in FIG. 38, the LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of these operation button left interior decoration board 433, operation button right interior decoration board 434, operation button upper interior decoration board 435, and operation button lower interior decoration board 436 are as follows. When viewed from the direction in which the central axis CL extends, the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is arranged inside the cylindrical main body 413a, so that light from them does not leak to the outside of the main body 413a. , only the inside of the operation button 410 can be well decorated with light.

In addition, the production operation unit 400 has a decorative board 422 on the left side of the operation button in the decorative board unit 420 behind the second button decoration part 411b facing from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A first LED 422a and a first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are arranged, and by making these first LEDs 422a and 423a emit light, the six second button decoration parts 411b of the operation button 410 are decorated with light. I can do it. As shown in FIG. 38, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are connected to the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the frame unit. The light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body part 413a or the outside of the inner cylinder part 416d, making it easy to operate. Only the second button decoration part 411b of the button 410 can be well decorated with light.

Furthermore, the production operation unit 400 has a second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and an operation button right outer decorative board behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415. 423 second LEDs 423b are arranged, and by making these second LEDs 422b and 423b emit light, the frame side lens 417 can be decorated with light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are located between the cylindrical inner cylinder part 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame body 416. The light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylinder portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, and only the frame side lenses 417 of the frame unit 415 can be decorated with light. .

In addition, in the production operation unit 400, a frame top lens decorative board 437 in the base unit 430 is arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of frames are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decorative board 437. By causing the LED to emit light, the frame top lens 418 can be decorated with light. A flat light-shielding wall portion 431c protrudes forward from the lower side of the portion of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430 where the frame top lens decorative board 437 is attached to the rear of the lower end of the frame top lens 418. The light from the LED of the top lens decoration board 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be well decorated with light.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. FIG. 47(a) is a front view of the left side unit of the door frame, FIG. 47(b) is a perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 47(c) is a front view of the left side unit of the door frame from the rear. FIG. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from the back. FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view taken along line LL in FIG. 47(a). The door frame left side unit 530 is a door frame base unit so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162 (door frame left side decorative board 160) above the dish unit 320. 100 is attached to the front left part on the left side of the through hole 111. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front.

The door frame left side unit 530 includes a vertically extending strip-shaped left unit base 531 attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the through hole 111 when viewed from the front; A transparent band-shaped left unit diffusion lens member 532 is attached to the front surface, and a light-transmitting lens is placed in front of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 and has a polyhedral decoration on the front end. A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and a left unit upper part that is attached to the front upper part of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, protrudes forward in a cylindrical frame shape, and extends vertically. a decorative base 534; a left unit lower decorative base 535 that is attached to the front lower part of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member and protrudes forward in a frame shape shorter than the left unit upper decorative base 534; A transparent left unit decorative cover 536 is attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 so as to cover the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535, and the left unit A plurality of decorative members 537 are attached to the front side of the decorative cover 536.

The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed into a shallow box shape with an open rear side, and has a plurality of openings 531a penetrating the front side back and forth. As illustrated, the plurality of openings 531a include circular holes and square holes extending vertically. In the left unit base 531, the LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160 (the left side upper decorative board 161 of the door frame and the lower left side decorative board 162) are connected to each other through the plurality of openings 531a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. The openings 531a of the left unit base 531 are formed such that when assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a of the left side decorative board 160 of the door frame are located approximately at the center in the vertical direction. This left unit base 531 is formed of a non-transparent member.

Furthermore, the left unit base 531 has a left reflective standing wall portion 538 (see FIGS. 5 and 23) that stands upright from the glass plate 192 disposed so as to close the through hole 111 toward the front side. ing. In this left reflective standing wall portion 538, an inner surface that is flat and faces the through hole 111 is provided as a reflective surface that can reflect light. Note that this reflective surface can be provided not only by providing the inner surface of the left reflective vertical wall section 538 itself from a reflective material such as metal or resin, but also by attaching a reflective seal to the inner surface. It is possible. As will be described later, this left reflective standing wall portion 538 is formed by the left unit base 531 and serves as a part (left side portion) of the reflective standing wall portion 33 described above.

The left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed of a transparent member, and is vertically divided into an upper diffusion lens member 532A and a lower diffusion lens member 532B. The left unit diffuser lens member 532 has a circular lens portion 532a that is circular in front view and corresponds to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531, and a square lens portion 532a that is square in front view that corresponds to the square opening 531a. A lens portion 532b is provided. When the door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 are located immediately behind the center of the circular lens portion 532a and the square lens portion 532b. It is formed.

The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed into a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. This circular lens portion 532a allows the light from the LEDs 161a and 162a arranged at the rear to be irradiated forward in a point-like manner. The light emitted forward from the circular lens portion 532a allows the circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member to be decorated with light.

The rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 includes a central diffuse reflection portion 532c that is conically recessed toward the rear at the center of the front surface, and a front diffuser lens portion 532d that is formed on the outside of the central diffuse reflection portion 532c on the front surface. , an input lens section 532e that bulges rearward in a curved shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection section 532c), and an input lens section 532e that bulges rearward in the shape of a curved surface at the rear surface, and an input lens section 532e that extends forward as it moves away from the input lens section 532e as a whole on the outside of the input lens section 532e on the rear surface. The front reflecting portion 532f is tilted so as to move.

The front diffuser lens portion 532d of the square lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. More specifically, in the cross-sectional shape of the front diffusing lens portion 532d when cut along the radial direction, the groove portion is recessed backward in an arc shape, and the mountain portion between the grooves is recessed forward. It bulges out in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed into a smooth wave shape. Further, the front diffusing lens portion 532d is formed such that groove portions and mountain portions are alternately located in the circumferential direction, with the boundary being a radially extending line dividing the lens portion in the circumferential direction.

The front reflecting portion 532f of the square lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the input lens portion 532e. These grooves are recessed in a V-shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The front reflecting portion 532f has a serrated cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, with the peaks between the grooves being triangular and pointed rearward. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed such that the grooves and peaks move forward as the distance from the center increases. Further, the front reflecting portion 532f is formed such that groove portions and mountain portions are alternately located in the circumferential direction, with the boundary being a radially extending line dividing the front reflecting portion 532f in the circumferential direction. This radially extending line dividing in the circumferential direction coincides with the radially extending dividing line in the front diffuser lens portion 532d.

When the rectangular lens portion 532b is assembled to the door frame 3, the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a of the left side decorative board 160 of the door frame are located immediately behind the input lens portion 532e.

In the square lens section 532b, light emitted forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input into the square lens section 532b from the input lens section 532e. Since this input lens portion 532e bulges backward in a curved surface shape (convex lens shape), it refracts the light that spreads forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a so that it travels parallel to the front. Almost all of the light can be guided to the conical central diffuse reflection section 532c. The light guided to the central diffuse reflection part 532c is directed by the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflection part 532c in a direction perpendicular to the axis extending back and forth (parallel to the front surface of the left side decorative board 160 of the door frame). The light is reflected so as to be diffused in a direction (direction), and travels inside the square lens portion 532b from the center toward the outside along the front surface of the square lens portion 532b. Further, the light reflected by the central diffuse reflection section 532c travels from the center to the outside (in the direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection section 532c) over the entire thickness of the square lens section 532b in the front-rear direction.

When the light reflected from the center to the outside in the rectangular lens portion 532b substantially parallel to the front surface of the left side decorative board 160 of the door frame reaches the saw-shaped front reflecting portion 532f, it is reflected forward by the surface of the front reflecting portion 532f. Reflect to the side. At this time, since the front reflecting section 532f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it moves away from the central diffuse reflecting section 532c, the thickness of the square lens section 532b in the front-rear direction becomes thinner as it moves away from the center. (See Figure 50). As a result, the light that is reflected outward over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens section 532b in the front and back direction at the central diffuse reflection section 532c is sequentially reflected forward by the front reflection section 532f as it goes from the center side to the outside. It can be reflected.

The light reflected forward by the front reflecting section 532f passes through the front diffusing lens section 532d and is irradiated forward from the rectangular lens section 532b. At this time, since the front diffusing lens part 532d has a wave-shaped cross section, it can diffuse the light reflected forward by the front reflecting part 532f in various directions, and the square lens part 532b It is possible to irradiate light substantially uniformly forward (to the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) from the front surface of the lens member.

In the front diffusing lens part 532d and the front reflecting part 532f, the square lens part 532b has a plurality of concentric grooves divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves with the dividing line as a border. Since the grooves are shifted in the radial direction and the concentric arc-shaped grooves are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, the light emitted forward from the front surface of the square lens part 532b has a concentric striped pattern of shading. It is possible to prevent the light from turning into light, and it is possible to irradiate the front with light with a more uniform density. Thereby, the multifaceted decorative portion in front of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the left unit decorative lens member can be decorated with light emission substantially uniformly.

A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member includes a circular decorative portion formed in a portion located in front of the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusing lens member 532, and a circular decorative portion located in front of the square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusing lens member 532. A multifaceted decorative part formed on the part. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion having a concave front surface and a short extension in the front and back. The polyhedral decoration part has multiple rows of square pyramid-shaped parts arranged vertically on the front surface of a rectangular parallelepiped that extends vertically, and multiple rows of polyhedrons made of a plurality of triangles arranged vertically on both left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped. It is shaped like a. The circular decorative part and the multifaceted decorative part are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative part 561a and the multifaceted decorative part 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

The left unit decorative lens member can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. Further, in the left unit decorative lens member, the circular decorative part is caused by the light irradiated forward from the circular lens part 532a of the left unit diffusing lens member 532, and the multifaceted decorative part is directed forward from the square lens part 532b of the left unit diffusing lens member 532. The light irradiated onto each of them emits light and decorates them.

The left unit upper decorative base 534 has a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and is formed into a rectangular tube shape extending longitudinally. The left unit upper decorative base 534 has a portion constituting a lower surface on the outer periphery that is inclined so as to protrude downward from the front end side toward the rear end side, and the lower part of that portion penetrates back and forth. This left unit upper decorative base 534 is formed of a non-transparent member.

The left unit lower decoration base 535 has a U-shape that is open upward when viewed from the front. The left unit lower decoration base 535 is inclined from approximately the center in the vertical direction at the front end to the rear end so that the upper side moves rearward as it goes upward. This left unit lower decorative base 535 is formed of a non-transparent member.

The left unit decorative cover 536 extends vertically over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decorative cover 536 has a vertical middle part bent backward, and a dogleg-shaped part where the lower part is bent backward along the front end of the left unit upper decorative base 534, and a left A doglegged part whose upper part is bent backward along the front edge of the lower unit decorative base 535 connects the lower end of the upper doglegged part and the upper end of the lower doglegged part. It consists of a straight part.

Both upper and lower ends of the left unit decorative cover 536 are attached to the front surface of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decorative base 535, respectively. This left unit decorative cover 536 is formed of a transparent member, and allows the left unit decorative lens member disposed on the rear side to be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative members 537 extend vertically in short lengths and are attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 537 is made of a non-transparent member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55 and the like. 51(a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame right side unit. FIG. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the right side unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the right side unit of the door frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 54 is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 51(a). 55(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 51(a), and FIG. 55(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 51(a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320.

The door frame right side unit 550 includes a vertically extending box-shaped right unit base 551 attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 on the right side in front view of the through hole 111, and a front side of the right unit base 551. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is attached to the door frame right side decorative board 552, and the door frame right side decorative board 552 is attached to the left side of the center in front view of the right unit base 551 on the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552, and extends in the vertical direction and the front/rear direction. A transparent plate-shaped right unit left diffusion lens member 553, a sheet-shaped right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and decorated, and a right unit left decorative member. A right unit left cover 555 in the form of a transparent flat plate is attached to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of the right unit 554 .

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is located on the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552 and on the right side of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 in front view, on the right side of the center in front view on the front side of the right unit base 551, and on the right side of the right unit left diffuser lens. A transparent flat right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is attached to the member 553 and extends in the vertical and longitudinal directions, and a decorated right unit is attached to the right side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. a right unit right decorative member 557 in the form of a sheet, and a right unit right cover 558 in the form of a transparent plate attached to the right diffuser lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557. There is.

Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 550 is disposed between the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and has a shallow front and right side opening extending in the vertical and front and rear directions. A box-shaped opaque right unit left light shielding member 559 and a light opaque member attached to the left side of the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 to close the open right side of the right unit left light shielding member 559 The right unit right light shielding member 560 has a flat plate shape.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556, and the right side unit 550 has a translucent right side unit with a polyhedral decoration on the front end. It is attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the unit decorative lens member 561, the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561, the front end sides of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553, and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556. A frame-shaped right unit decoration base 562 penetrating from front to back, a transparent right unit cover 563 attached to the front side of the right unit decoration base 562 so as to close the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562, and a right unit cover. 563 and a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side. Although not shown, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to vertically penetrate the right unit base 551, and connects the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570. A connection cable for connecting to the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 has a rectangular shape that is elongated vertically when viewed from the front, has a short rectangular cylindrical shape in the front and back, and is formed into a box shape that is closed near the center in the front and back direction. has been done. This right unit base 551 is formed of a non-transparent member.

Further, the right unit base 551 has a right reflective standing wall portion 568 (see FIGS. 6 and 24) that stands upright from the glass plate 192 disposed so as to close the through hole 111 toward the front side. ing. In the right reflective standing wall portion 568, the inner surface, which is flat and faces the through hole 111, is provided as a reflective surface capable of reflecting light. Note that this reflective surface can be formed by providing the inner surface of the right reflecting wall section 568 itself from a reflective material such as metal or resin, similar to the inner surface of the left reflecting wall section 538, or by providing a reflective surface for the same inner surface. It is also possible to provide this by attaching a seal. As will be described later, this right reflective standing wall portion 568 is formed by the right unit base 551 and serves as a part (right side portion) of the reflective standing wall portion 33 described above.

The door frame right side decorative board 552 is formed in the shape of a vertically extending strip. The door frame right side decorative board 552 has a plurality of left LEDs 552a mounted on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, a right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, and a plurality of right LEDs 552b mounted on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface. A plurality of medium LEDs 552c are provided. The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 is used to decorate the right unit left decorative member 554 by emitting light through the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Further, the right LED 552b is used to decorate the right decorative member 557 of the right unit by emitting light through the right diffuser lens member 556 of the right unit. The middle LED 552c is used to decorate the right unit decorative lens member 561 with light.

The door frame right side decorative board 552 has both front and rear surfaces formed in white. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is vertically divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative board 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. Although not shown, the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is connected to the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. It is connected to the.

The right unit left diffuser lens member 553 includes a main body portion 553a in the shape of a flat plate extending in the vertical direction and the front-back direction, and a rear wall portion 553b projecting in a short flat shape from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right side in front view. A rectangular notch 553c is cut out from the right end side of the rear wall section 553b toward the left when viewed from the front, and a plurality of cutout sections 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a right unit left decorative member is formed on the left side of the main body section 553a when viewed from the front. 554, a housing recess 553d that is shallowly recessed so that the lens 554 can be accommodated, a plurality of input lens parts 553e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body part 553a, and are provided in a plurality in the vertical direction; A plurality of side reflection parts 553f are arranged in the vertical direction so that the input lens part 553e is located in the center in the vertical direction.

The main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 has a rectangular shape extending vertically, with the upper corner of the front end side cut out diagonally in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower edge extending upward as it goes forward. It is formed in an inclined shape so that it moves toward the In addition, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body portion 553a as a whole moves to the right in the front view as it goes from the rear end side to the front. It is slightly inclined. The front end of the main body part 553a, when assembled to the door frame 3, protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530.

When the rear wall portion 553b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, its right end extends to approximately the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is in contact with the right end of the rear wall portion 553b.

The plurality of notches 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and some of them correspond to the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 553c, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552c illuminate the right unit decorative lens member 561 well. It can be decorated.

The housing recess 553d has a flat bottom surface, and the shape of the outer periphery substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens sections 553e protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body section 553a in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals. Specifically, when the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction, it is formed approximately at the center in the vertical direction of each half. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the input lens portion 553e has a rectangular parallelepiped portion with a vertically extending rectangle projecting rearward, and is recessed forward in a spherical shape from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It has a part and. These input lens portions 553e are respectively located immediately in front of the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be widely diffused within the main body portion 553a.

A plurality (six) of side surface reflecting portions 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 553f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the input lens portion 553e. In each of these concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the surface farther from the input lens portion 553e is inclined to the surface of the main body portion 553a. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflection portion 553f has a sharp triangular cross-sectional shape when cut in the radial direction around the input lens portion 553e, with the peaks between the grooves facing toward the center. , the entire structure is saw-shaped. Further, the side reflection portion 553f is formed such that groove portions and peak portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, with radial lines dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as boundaries. ing.

This right unit left diffuser lens member 553 allows the light emitted forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 to enter the main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553e. It is incident. Since the rear end of this input lens portion 553e is curved forward, the curved surface refracts the light from the left LED 552a so that it spreads, and each input lens portion 553e It will spread radially forward from the center.

The main body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending perpendicularly from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that the entire body portion 553a moves to the right in the front view as it moves forward. Light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative board 552 and incident into the main body part 553a from the input lens part 553e hits the flat left surface inside the main body part 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not radiated to the outside from the left surface of the main body section 553a due to the incident angle with respect to the left surface of the main body section 553a, but is reflected on the inner surface of the left surface toward the side reflecting section 553f. becomes.

The light incident forward into the main body 553a from the input lens portion 553e is reflected to the left in the front view by hitting the saw-shaped side reflection portion 553f, and is directed outward from the left surface of the main body 553a. It will be irradiated. Note that light is also irradiated outward (to the right in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflecting portion 553f) of the main body portion 553a, but the right unit left light shielding member 559 disposed on the right side of the main body portion 553a is white. Since the left side of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 passes through the main body portion 553a and is irradiated to the left side. . Therefore, from the left side of the main body part 553a, there is light reflected leftward by the side reflection part 553f inside the main body part 553a, and light irradiated rightward from the side reflection part 553f and left by the left side of the right unit left light shielding member 559. Since the light reflected in the direction and passed through the main body 553a is irradiated to the left, it is possible to decorate the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body 553a with good brightness. can.

In addition, in the side reflection portion 553f, the plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary, thereby forming concentric arc-shaped grooves. are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, which prevents the light emitted outward (leftward) from the left surface of the main body portion 553a from having concentric striped shading. This makes it possible to irradiate light with more uniform shading to the left. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 accommodated in the accommodation recess 553d on the left surface of the main body portion 553a can be decorated with light emitting light almost uniformly.

In addition, since the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, the side reflection formed on the opposite side from the left side of the main body part 553a in front view (the side where the accommodation recess 553d is formed) A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves and radially extending lines of the portion 553f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the left decorative member 554 of the right unit, the pattern of the side reflection portion 553f of the left diffuser lens member 553 of the right unit is visible through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion of the left decorative member 554 of the right unit is visible. This portion can be decorated with the side reflection portion 553f.

The right unit left decorative member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and is decorated with decorations such as the manufacturer logo of the pachinko machine 1 and a logo that is in line with the concept of the performance presented to the player on the game board 5. It is designed to have a The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with respect to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, and has a similar configuration. To be more specific, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 includes a main body part 556a in the shape of a flat plate extending in the vertical direction and the front-back direction, and a rear wall projecting in the shape of a flat plate from the rear side of the main body part 556a to the left in front view. 556b, a rectangular notch 556c that is cut out from the left end of the rear wall 556b to the right in a front view, and is formed in plurality at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction; A housing recess 556d that is shallowly recessed to accommodate the unit right decorative member 557, a front view of the main body 556a, and a plurality of input lens parts 556e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body 556a and are provided in the vertical direction. A plurality of side reflection portions 556f are provided on the left side, which are arranged in the vertical direction so that each input lens portion 556e is centered in the vertical direction.

The main body portion 556a of the right diffuser lens member 556 of the right unit has a rectangular shape extending vertically, with the upper corner of the front end side cut out diagonally in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower edge extending upward as it goes forward. The main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 is formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the main body portion 553a. In addition, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body portion 556a as a whole moves to the left in the front view as it goes from the rear end side to the front. It is slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 556a, when assembled to the door frame 3, protrudes forward to a greater extent than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530.

When the rear wall portion 556b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, its left end extends to approximately the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is in contact with the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

The plurality of notches 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and some of them correspond to the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. These plurality of notches 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notches 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the notch 553c of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the notch 556c of the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 form a square opening penetrating back and forth. is formed, and the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be well decorated with light by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

The housing recess 556d has a flat bottom surface, and the shape of the outer periphery approximately matches the outer shape of the right decorative member 557 of the right unit. Thereby, the right unit right decorative member 557 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens sections 556e protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body section 556a in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals. Specifically, when the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction, it is formed approximately in the vertical center of each half. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the input lens portion 556e includes a rectangular parallelepiped portion with a vertically extending rectangle projecting rearward, and a spherically curved recess toward the front from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It has a part and. These input lens parts 556e are respectively located immediately in front of the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 in a state where they are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be widely diffused within the main body portion 556a.

A plurality (six) of side surface reflecting portions 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflecting portion 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the input lens portion 556e. In each of these concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface closer to the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 556a, and the surface farther from the input lens portion 556e is inclined to the surface of the main body portion 556a. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflection portion 556f has a sharp triangular cross-sectional shape when cut in the radial direction around the input lens portion 556e, with the peaks between the grooves facing toward the center. , the entire structure is saw-shaped. Further, the side surface reflecting portion 556f is formed such that groove portions and peak portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with radial lines dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as boundaries. ing.

This right unit right diffuser lens member 556 allows the light emitted forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 to enter the main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e. It is incident. Since the rear end of the input lens section 556e is curved forward, the curved surface refracts the light from the right LED 552b so that it spreads, and each input lens section 556e It will spread radially forward from the center.

The main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending perpendicularly from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that the entire body portion 556a moves to the left in the front view as it moves forward. Light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative board 552 and incident into the main body part 556a from the input lens part 556e hits the flat right surface inside the main body part 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not radiated to the outside from the left surface of the main body 556a due to the angle of incidence with respect to the right surface of the main body 556a, but is reflected on the inner surface of the right surface toward the side reflecting portion 556f. becomes.

The light incident forward into the main body 556a from the input lens part 556e is reflected to the right in the front view by hitting the saw-shaped side reflection part 556f, and is directed outward from the right side of the main body 556a. It will be irradiated. Note that light is also irradiated outward (to the left in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflecting portion 556f) of the main body portion 556a, but the right light shielding member 560 of the right unit disposed on the left side of the main body portion 556a is white. Since the right side of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is a member, the right side of the right unit right light shielding member 560 will be brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 will be irradiated to the right side through the main body portion 556a. . Therefore, from the right side of the main body part 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side reflection part 556f inside the main body part 556a, and the light irradiated leftward from the side reflection part 556f and the right side on the right side of the right light shielding member 560 of the right unit. Since the light reflected in the direction and passed through the main body portion 556a is irradiated to the right, the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body portion 556a can be decorated with light with good brightness. can.

In addition, in the side reflection portion 556f, the plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary, thereby forming the concentric arc-shaped grooves. are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, which prevents the light emitted outward (rightward) from the right surface of the main body portion 556a from having concentric striped shading. This makes it possible to irradiate light with more uniform shading to the right. Thereby, the right unit right decorative member 557 accommodated in the accommodation recess 556d on the right surface of the main body portion 556a can be decorated with light emitting light almost uniformly.

In addition, since the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, the side reflection formed on the opposite side from the right side in front view of the main body part 556a (the side where the accommodation recess 556d is formed) A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves and radially extending lines of the portion 556f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right decorative member 557 of the right unit, the pattern of the side reflection portion 556f of the right diffuser lens member 556 of the right unit can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion of the right decorative member 557 of the right unit becomes visible. This portion can be decorated with the side reflection portion 556f.

The right unit right decorative member 557 is formed into a thin sheet shape, and is decorated with decorations such as the manufacturer logo of the pachinko machine 1 and a logo that is in line with the concept of the performance presented to the player on the game board 5. It is designed to have a The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decorative member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed approximately symmetrically with respect to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. Further, the decorations applied to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 may be the same decoration or may be different decorations.

The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed to have substantially the same shape in side view as the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 in side view. The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed into a shallow box shape with the front and right sides open. The right unit left light shielding member 559 includes a main body portion 559a in the shape of a flat plate extending in the vertical direction and the front-back direction, a rear wall portion 559b projecting in a short flat shape from the rear side of the main body portion 559a to the right in front view, and a rear wall portion 559b. A rectangular notch 559c is cut out leftward from the right end side of the wall portion 559b when viewed from the front, and a plurality of cutout portions 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a cutout portion 559c extends rightward from the right side of the main body portion 559a and is cut out from the rear side. It includes a plurality of plate-shaped reinforcing parts 559d extending from the wall part 559b to the front end of the main body part 559a.

The main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 has a rectangular shape extending vertically, with the upper corner of the front end side being cut diagonally in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower edge extending upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to be movable, and the outer shape is formed to be approximately the same as the main body portions 553a and 556a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

When the rear wall portion 559b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, its left end extends to the right of the approximate center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The left surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 comes into contact with the right end of this rear wall portion 559b.

The plurality of notches 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and some of them correspond to the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. These plurality of notches 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notches 553c and 556c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 559c, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552c cause the right unit decorative lens member 561 to emit light well. It can be decorated.

The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided in three sets, each pair being a pair of reinforcing portions 559d spaced apart in the vertical direction and having substantially the same height as the left and right width, and spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. Each set of reinforcing portions 559d is formed at a position behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563, respectively. The strength and rigidity of the entire door frame right side unit 550 are increased by the plurality of reinforcing portions 559d.

The right unit right light shielding member 560 has a shape in a side view of a rectangular shape extending vertically, with the upper corner of the front end side cut out diagonally in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower edge moves upward as it moves forward. It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559. The right unit right light shielding member 560, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, closes the right opening opened to the right of the right unit left light shielding member 559 formed in a shallow box shape.

The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are each formed of a white member. The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, as shown in FIG. It is arranged so as to be close to the main bodies 553a and 556a of the left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. As a result, the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are spaced apart from each other in the left-right direction, forming a space extending in the vertical and front-back directions with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. . Through the space formed between the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560, light radiated forward from the LED 552c inside the door frame right side decorative board 552 is transmitted to the right unit decoration. The rear side of the lens member 561 is irradiated with light.

In addition, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are formed of non-transparent members, and are irradiated forward from the left LED 552a, middle LED 552c, and right LED 552b on the door frame right side decorative board 552, respectively. The right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 are prevented from interfering with each other, and the corresponding left LED 552a, right LED 552b, and Light-emitting decoration can be performed only by the middle LED 552c.

Furthermore, since the internal space is vertically divided into four parts by the three sets of reinforcing parts 559d, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are arranged at the rear side of each divided space. The LED 552c inside the door frame right side decorative board 552 can prevent light from interfering between the spaces, and the portion of the right unit decorative lens member 561 located in front of each space can be , each can be decorated with light emission independently. That is, the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550 can be divided into a plurality of (four) regions in the vertical direction, and each region can be decorated with light emission independently.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape that follows the front end shapes of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b extending vertically and having a plurality of polyhedrons formed therein. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion having a concave front surface and a short length extending back and forth. The multifaceted decorative portion 561b includes a plurality of square pyramid-shaped parts arranged vertically on the front surface of a rectangular parallelepiped that extends vertically, and a plurality of polyhedrons made of a plurality of triangles arranged in a plurality of vertical rows on both left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped. It is formed in a shape similar to the one shown below.

To be more specific, the right unit decorative lens member 561 has a plurality of circular decorative parts 561a and a multifaceted decorative part 561b in each space divided into four by three sets of reinforcing parts 559d in the right unit left light shielding member 559. In the top three parts located at the front, one multifaceted decorative part 561b is arranged on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decorative part 561a arranged in the center in the vertical direction, and in the lowermost part, the multifaceted decorative part 561b is arranged in the top three parts. It is formed so that only the portion 561b is disposed.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. This right unit decorative lens member 561 is decorated with light by an LED 552c inside the door frame right side decorative board 552 disposed at the rear.

The right unit decoration base 562 is formed into a cylindrical frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a shape that follows the shapes of the front and upper ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed to be able to cover both left and right outer sides near the front ends of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556, and both left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 protrudes slightly forward than the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. This right unit decoration base 562 is formed of a non-transparent member.

The right unit cover 563 is formed to be able to close the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562. The right unit cover 563 is made of a transparent member, and allows the right unit decorative lens member 561 disposed on the rear side to be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative members 564 extend vertically in short lengths, and are attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 564 is formed of a non-transparent member. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decorative lens member 561) into four parts in the vertical direction.

When the door frame right side unit 550 is assembled to the door frame 3, it protrudes forward in a plate shape to a greater extent than the door frame left side unit 530, and slightly protrudes further forward than the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. There is. The door frame right side unit 550 has a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on the protruding left and right sides, and a right unit decorative lens member 561 provided at the front end, respectively, independently. It can be used as a luminescent decoration.

Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and largely protrudes forward, when this pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment of a game parlor, the door frame right side unit 550 will be separated from the adjacent pachinko machine on the right side. It can act as a partition between the two. As a result, it is possible to give the illusion that a player playing on this pachinko machine 1 is playing in a private room, and to allow the player to play in a relaxed atmosphere without worrying about other players around him. I can do it.

In addition, since the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes significantly forward, in a game parlor where pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side, even if the door frame right side unit 550 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, the island equipment This pachinko machine 1 can be visually recognized even from the lateral direction along the horizontal direction, and the pachinko machine 1 can stand out in a game parlor where many pachinko machines are arranged in rows. Therefore, when the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are decorated with light, the book can be seen from a distance even if it is not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1. The existence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a problem such as a ball jam or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens on both left and right sides are removed. By decorating the member 561 etc. in a unique manner with light emitting decoration, it is possible to immediately notify and make the store staff at the game parlor aware of the occurrence of a malfunction, and it is possible to quickly respond to the malfunction. Therefore, it is possible to resolve the interruption of the game by the player at an early stage, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming irritated and losing interest in the game.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59 and the like. Figure 56 (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the back. FIG. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the back. FIG. 59 is a cross-sectional view taken along line PP in FIG. 56. The door frame top unit 570 is attached above the through hole 111 in the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

The door frame top unit 570 includes a central base 571 attached to the center in the left and right direction above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and attached to both left and right sides of the center base 571. A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 attached to the front surface of the pair of side bases 572, respectively, extend from side to side, and the center in the left and right direction protrudes forward. A pair of openings 574a, which are box-shaped and open at the rear, penetrate front and rear of the pair of upper speakers 573, respectively, and from a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a to near the center. It has a plurality of slits 574b (three each on the left and right) extending and penetrating in the front-rear direction and spaced apart vertically, and is attached to the front side of a central base 571 and a pair of side bases 572. It includes a unit main body 271, and a speaker cover 575 made of punched metal, which is arranged in front of the pair of upper speakers 573 and attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 so as to close the pair of openings 574a. ing.

The door frame top unit 570 also includes a top middle decorative member 576 that is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 at the center in the left-right direction and has translucency, and a top middle decorative member 576 that is attached to the rear side of the top middle decorative member 576. A door frame top middle decorative board 577 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame, and a door frame top middle decorative board 577 that is attached to the front of the unit main body 271 to close the plurality of slits 574b, respectively, and both left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576. A plurality of transparent flat plate-shaped light guiding members 578 (three each on the left and right ends) extend from the vicinity across the opening 574a to near both left and right ends of the unit body 271, and a top middle decorative member 576 on the front surface of the unit body 271. A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 are attached to the left and right sides and respectively cover the front surfaces of the plurality of (three) light guide members 578, and a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decoration A top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front side of the unit body 271 from the front side of each lens member 580 and extends from both left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 to near the center end of the opening 574a. A top middle right decorative member 582 is provided.

Furthermore, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the inside of both the left and right sides of the unit body 271, and LEDs are mounted on the parts facing the outer ends of the plurality (three) light guide members 578 in the left and right direction. The door frame top left decorative board 583 and the door frame top right decorative board 584 are penetrated by a plurality of (three) slits 574b formed on the left and right sides of the center in the left and right direction on the rear side of the unit main body 271. A plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a are mounted on the front surfaces of the pair of board bases 585 and are mounted behind the slit 574b of the unit body 271. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 are respectively attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 on the front side of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587. A pair of light shielding members 588 are provided.

Furthermore, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the center base 571 so as to cover the door frame top unit relay board 589 attached to the front surface of the central base 571 within the unit body 271, and the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. The attached relay board cover 590, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit body 271 to close the upper opening 574c of the unit body 271, and the unit cover 591 to close the lower opening 574d of the unit body 271. A lower cover 592 is attached to the main body 271.

The central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 has a rectangular shape extending from side to side when viewed from the front. The central base 571 is formed into a box shape that is open to the rear, and has a plurality of projections and depressions on the front surface. A pair of side bases 572 are attached to both left and right ends of the center base 571, respectively. A pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surface of each side base 572, respectively. When the pair of upper speakers 573 are assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surfaces of each of the upper speakers 573 are mounted obliquely so that the side closer to the center in the left-right direction of the door frame top unit 570 moves rearward. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone-shaped speakers capable of outputting sound in a wide frequency band.

The unit main body 271 has a shape when viewed from the front, such that the lower portions near both left and right ends of a rectangular shape extending left and right bulge downward. In other words, the unit main body 271 has a shape in a front view, in which a rectangle extending left and right is cut out with a trapezoid that narrows upward from the lower end side. The unit main body 271 has a shape in a plan view of a rectangle extending left and right, and a base that is approximately 1/2 of the total width (length in the left and right direction) centered on the center in the left and right direction on the front end side of the quadrangle. It is formed in a shape that is a combination of a trapezoid that protrudes forward, and a rectangle that protrudes short forward and has the front end side of the trapezoid as its long side. Therefore, in the unit main body 271, both sides of the forwardly protruding part at the center in the left-right direction on the front face are connected to the line connecting the left-right end of the unit main body 271 and the left-right end of the front end of the forward-protruding part. It is located further back (concave) than the

The unit main body 271 has openings 574a extending from both left and right ends of the front surface to positions outside of the forwardly protruding portions, which extend through the unit body 271 in the front and rear directions. In addition, the unit main body 271 has a plurality of slits extending horizontally at a predetermined height in the vertical direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction at an obliquely extending portion of the trapezoidally projecting portion on the front surface. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend left and right from near the front end of a portion extending diagonally forward on the front surface of the unit main body 271 to near the opening 574a. Further, the plurality of slits 574b are formed on both sides of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction, three each, spaced apart vertically.

The unit main body 271 also has an upper opening 574c cut out in a square shape from the rear end toward the front in the center of the upper surface in the left-right direction, and a lower opening 574d cut out in the left-right direction from the rear end toward the front on the lower surface. , is equipped with. The upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271 is closed by the upper cover 591. Further, the lower opening 574d is closed by a lower cover 592.

The unit body 271 also includes a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at both left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative portion 574e is formed at approximately the same position in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed such that its front surface is located forward of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. This unit main body 271 is formed of a non-transparent member.

The top middle decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion of the front surface of the unit main body 271 that protrudes forward at the center in the left-right direction. The top middle decorative member 576 has a shape in a front view of a modified pentagon that is bent so that the center of the lower side of the approximately square is located downward, and extends outward in the left and right direction from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the modified pentagon. It is formed into a shape that is a combination of a substantially right triangle connecting the tips of the sides and the bottom ends of the left and right sides of a side pentagon. The top middle decorative member 576 is inclined so that the pentagonal portion on the front side moves rearward as it goes downward. This top middle decorative member 576 is entirely formed into a three-dimensional shape and has translucency.

The door frame top middle decorative board 577 is attached to the back of the top middle decorative member 576 in a state where the front surface is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward, so that the front surface is along the front surface of the pentagonal part of the top middle decorative member 576. Mounted on the side. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame top middle decorative board 577, and by making these LEDs emit light, the top middle decorative member 576 can be decorated with light.

The light guide member 578 is made of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape that follows the shape of the front end of the forwardly protruding portion of the front surface of the unit main body 271 on both the left and right sides. The side near both ends of the unit main body 271 in the left and right direction is considered to be the end side, and the side near the center is the center side. 578a, and a circular arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape with a large radius so as to move forward from the center end side of the straight portion 578a toward the center. The light guide member 578 has a straight portion 578a whose depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than its height in the vertical direction, and a circular arc portion 578b whose depth in the front-rear direction is larger than its height in the vertical direction. Further, the light guiding member 578 is formed so that the height in the vertical direction is constant at the straight portion 578a, and the height in the vertical direction becomes smaller toward the center side at the arcuate portion 578b. When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight part 578a is located just in front of the opening 574a of the unit main body 271, and the circular arc part 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit main body 271 from the front. There is.

The light guiding member 578 includes a diffuse reflection part 578c made of saw-shaped unevenness formed on the rear surface of the straight part 578a, and a diffused input part 578d made of a plurality of unevenness formed on the rear side of the arcuate part 578b. It is equipped with

When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, both outer ends in the left and right direction face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 or the door frame top right decorative board 584. At the same time, the diffusion input section 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative board 587. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 or the door frame top right decorative board 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from both outer ends in the left and right direction, the light is transmitted to the straight part 578a. As the light travels toward the center, the light is sequentially reflected forward from the end portion by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and the light is irradiated forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is disposed in front of the light guide member 578, and a portion of these in front of the straight portion 578a is decorated with light.

In addition, light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 enters the light guide member 578 from a diffusion input part 578d formed on the rear surface of the circular arc part 578b. Then, the light is widely diffused into the arc portion 578b by the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is irradiated forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. Thereby, the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the circular arc portion 578b can be decorated with light.

In this way, the light guide member 578 is connected to the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative board 586, or the door frame top right decorative board 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587. By guiding the light from the LEDs 584a and 587a, the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or top right decorative lens member 580 disposed in front can be illuminated and decorated in a good (uniform) state.

The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit body 271. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens parts 579a that accommodate the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape that follows the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, concave and convex portions in the shape of a square pyramid protruding forward are arranged in rows on the left and right.

The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574e of the unit body 271. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. This top left decorative lens member 579 is decorated with light emission by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 via the three light guide members 578.

The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit main body 271. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens parts 580a that accommodate the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape that follows the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, concave and convex portions in the shape of a square pyramid protruding forward are arranged in rows on the left and right.

The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative portion 574f of the unit body 271. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire area on the right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. This top right decorative lens member 580 is decorated with light emission by the LEDs 584a and 587a of the door frame top right decorative board 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 via the three light guide members 578.

The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from in front of the top left decorative lens member 579 between the left opening 574 a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576 . The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to fill the space between the three decorative lens parts 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front side is closer to the top left side. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 579. This top middle left decorative member 581 is formed of a non-transparent member.

The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the top right decorative lens member 580 so as to fill in the space between the three decorative lens parts 580a when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front side is closer to the top right It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 580. This top middle right decorative member 582 is formed of a non-transparent member.

The door frame top left decorative board 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) of the unit body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing right. The door frame top left decorative board 583 has an LED 583a mounted at a position facing the left end surface of the three light guiding members 578 attached to the front left side of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 59). ). The three LEDs 583a can each independently emit light. The LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 illuminates the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 located in front of the left opening 574a of the unit body 271 through the straight portions 578a of the three light guiding members 578. Can be decorated with light.

The door frame top right decorative board 584 is attached to the inside of the right side (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing left. The door frame top right decorative board 584 has an LED 584a mounted at a position facing the right end surface of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 59). ). The three LEDs 584a can each independently emit light. The LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative board 584 illuminates the portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the right opening 574a of the unit body 271 through the straight portions 578a of the three light guiding members 578. Can be decorated with light.

The pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the portion in the unit body 271 where the plurality of slits 574b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrically with respect to each other. The board base 585 has a substantially square side wall in side view having sides extending vertically and longitudinally, a quadrangular rear wall in front view extending outward in the left and right direction at right angles from the rear side of the side wall, and a side wall extending from the front end of the upper side of the side wall. A roughly right triangular upper wall that connects the upper sides of the side wall and rear wall with the line that connects the upper half of the side wall as the hypotenuse, and a roughly right triangular upper wall that connects the lower sides of the side wall and rear wall on the opposite side of the upper wall. It has a right triangular lower wall, and is formed into a triangular prism-like box shape with an open space between the upper and lower hypotenuses. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit body 271 such that the open portion is closed by the unit body 271. A door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or a door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to this board base 585 so that the open portion is closed.

The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the board base 585, which is attached to the rear left side of the left-right center of the unit body 271, so as to close the box-shaped open part from the front. It will be done. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction, relative to the surface extending left and right. It will be in a tilted state. As a result, when the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, its front surface is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction are formed. The state is almost parallel.

A plurality of LEDs 586a are mounted on the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit body 271. As a result, when the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, a plurality of LEDs 586a are exposed forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit body 271. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 586a to decorate the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 near the top middle decorative member 576 through the arc portion 578b of the light guiding member 578. be able to.

The door frame top center right decorative board 587 is attached to the board base 585, which is attached to the rear right side of the left and right center of the unit main body 271, so as to close the box-shaped open part from the front. It will be done. The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction, relative to the surface extending left and right. It will be in a tilted state. As a result, when the door frame top center right decorative board 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, its front surface is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left and right direction are formed. The state is almost parallel.

A plurality of LEDs 587a are mounted on the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit body 271. As a result, when the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, a plurality of LEDs 587a are exposed forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit body 271. The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 587a to decorate the portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 near the top middle decorative member 576 through the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

The pair of light shielding members 588 are attached to the front rear side of the unit main body 271 at a position between the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the unit main body 271. The pair of light shielding members 588 are formed of non-light-transmitting members and are substantially symmetrical to each other. The light shielding member 588 extends between the upper and lower portions of the plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 which are arranged in a row corresponding to the three slits 574b in the unit main body 271. It's in charge. This light shielding member 588 allows light to be guided forward by the light guide member 578 only by the LEDs 586a and 587a located immediately after each light guide member 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decoration The decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 can be well decorated with light in a state where they are independent from each other.

The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay board 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decorative board 577, a door frame top left decorative board 583, a door frame top right decorative board 584, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and a door. It relays the connection between the frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door main body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered by a relay board cover 590.

This door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward at the center in the left and right direction, and the front faces on both left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 are curved so as to be gouged rearward. Therefore, the player can be given the illusion that only the top middle decorative member 576 is significantly protruding forward, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame top unit 570 also includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate both left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 disposed at the center. It is formed to extend from both sides to a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f formed at both left and right ends of the unit main body 271. Thereby, the entire front upper part of the door frame 3 can be decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punched metal at the rear of each of the left and right ends near where the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are arranged. The speaker cover 575 faces forward from between the three decorative lens parts 579a and 580a spaced apart above and below of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The player can listen to the sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 in good condition, and can enjoy high-quality stereo sound.

Furthermore, the door frame top unit 570 has a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decorative Light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 can be guided to the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the entire front surface of the top right decorative lens member 580 can be well decorated with light emission. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can decorate the entire upper front surface of the door frame 3 including the front side of the left and right upper speakers 573 with light emission.

[3-8. Effects of door frame]
The functions and effects of the door frame 3 will be explained. In the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the through-holes 111 that penetrate the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 at the front and back are made larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than in conventional pachinko machines. In accordance with the enlargement of the through hole 111, the vertical heights of the pan unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 are reduced, and the horizontal widths of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 are reduced. is made smaller. As a result, the front side of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen as widely as possible from the player (front) through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190). , it corresponds to the game board 5 with a wide game area 5a.

The door frame 3 includes a production operation unit 400 that has a large hemispherical operation button 410 at the center in the left-right direction of a plate unit 320 that bulges forward on the lower side of the through-hole 111. The front surface of the lower half (portion below the upper plate 321) on both the left and right sides (the front surface of the lower plate front decorative part 326c) is recessed so that it can be scooped out backwards (the front end of both the left and right ends of the plate unit 320, The performance operation unit 400 is formed into a concavely curved shape such that the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the performance operation unit 400 are located rearward from a straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the performance operation unit 400. As a result, the production operation unit 400 attached to the front surface of the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 320 appears to protrude significantly forward, so that the production operation unit 400 is highlighted and emphasized to the player. This makes it possible to draw strong attention to the performance operation unit 400.

In the door frame 3, the production operation unit 400, which is arranged on the front side of the tray unit 320 below the through-hole 111, is tilted so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 faces diagonally upward and forward. Therefore, when a player is seated in front of this pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 is in a state facing the player's head (face), and the player lowers his/her gaze and presses the production operation unit 400. When viewed, the operation button 410 can be seen in a state close to the front, making the large, round operation button 410 clearly visible, and increasing expectations for the production using the operation button 410. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 disposed within the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in good condition, and the effect image can be fully enjoyed.

Furthermore, since the door frame 3 is equipped with a large operation button 410 that has a diameter that is approximately the same as the overall height of the pan unit 320 and bulges out in a round shape toward the front, when operating the operation button 410, it is possible to operate the operation button 410 by moving the hand over a short distance. Any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, and "quick pressing" of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. In addition, the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward, is installed in an inclined position, so it can not only be pressed from above like a conventional pachinko machine operation button, but also operated from the left or right side. The user can easily operate the button 410 from the front or from the front, and the easy-to-operate operation button 410 can make the performance using the operation button 410 more enjoyable.

In addition, the door frame 3 has the performance operation unit 400 mounted in a suspended state by the plate unit 320, and is equipped with a vibration motor 424 that generates vibrations at the bottom of the performance operation unit 400, so that the game When the vibration motor 424 is rotated to generate vibrations depending on the state, strong vibrations can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the top of the operation button 410, surprising the player and causing the operation button to move. 410 can be enjoyed even more.

Furthermore, the door frame 3 is equipped with a large operation button 410 (performance operation unit 400) that spans the entire height of the tray unit 320 at the center of the front surface of the tray unit 320. Since the lower plate 322 underneath becomes less noticeable, players who are used to conventional pachinko machines can easily recognize that it is clearly different, and this appeal strongly attracts players' attention. The pachinko machine 1 can have high power.

Further, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 goes around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326d that is open on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the volume of the lower tray 322 can be increased relative to the size of the lower tray opening 326d, and a sufficient number of game balls can be stored in the lower tray 322. In addition, since the rear part of the lower tray 322 wraps around to the rear side of the performance operation unit 400, when the player puts his left hand into the lower tray 322 or hooks his left fingers on the lower tray opening 326d, Since it becomes difficult for the fingertips to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable, suppress a decrease in interest in the game, and to reduce the size of the lower plate opening 326d. The user can also tactually recognize that the volume of the lower plate 322 is larger than that of the lower plate 322 .

Furthermore, the door frame 3 includes a lower tray ball supply port 323c through which game balls from the upper tray 321 are discharged into the lower tray 322, and a lower tray ball supply port 323c through which the game balls from the upper tray 321 are discharged into the lower tray 322, and a lower tray for extracting the game balls from the lower tray 322 into a dollar box or the like below the tray unit 320. The plate ball extraction hole 322a is arranged linearly in the front and back, and is also arranged on the right outer side of the lower plate opening 326d (to the right of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the production operation unit 400) in front view. In other words, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a are connected to the production operation unit 400, the production operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outside of the lower plate opening 326d) of the plate unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower plate cover 340. Because they are arranged at the rear of the side, etc., the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a are not visible from the player side, and the appearance of the plate unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be made neat. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

In addition, in the door frame 3, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is arranged below the front (directly in front) of the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate 322, so the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is in an open state. Then, the game balls released from the upper tray 321 etc. to the lower tray 322 enter the lower tray 322 and are immediately discharged from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a to the dollar box or the like below. At this time, since the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a are not visible from the player side, the flow of game balls from the upper tray 321 etc. to the lower tray 322 and discharged to the dollar box is also limited. I can't see it. This prevents the player from giving the illusion that the game balls in the upper tray 321 and the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 when the upper tray 321 is full are being directly discharged to the dollar box. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the trouble of the game ball passing through the lower tray 322, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest by allowing the player to concentrate on the game (the operation of hitting the game ball, the effect image, etc.). can.

In addition, the door frame 3 has a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a disposed in a position to the front left of the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate 322, and a vertical position of the lower plate 322 on the right side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Since the raised wall part is curved diagonally so as to face the direction of the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, the game balls supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray 322 are directly transferred to the lower tray ball. It can be guided to the hole 322a, or indirectly guided to the lower ball hole 322a by being reflected on the right wall. As a result, while the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a remains open, the game balls supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 are transferred to the area on the left side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322. Since the balls flowing in the lower tray 322 can be discharged downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a without entering the lower tray first area A1, the game balls circulating in the lower tray 322 can be removed from the lower tray 322 without being visible to the player. The game balls can be ejected downward (to the dollar box), and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

Further, the door frame 3 includes a lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326, through which the lower plate 322 faces forward, between the production operation unit mounting portion 326a (production operation unit 400) and the lower speaker port 326e. Therefore, even if the player places his/her hand on the lower tray opening 326d or puts his/her hand into the lower tray 322, the front of the lower speaker port 326e will not be blocked by the player's hand. The sound from the lower speaker 921 in the board unit 900 can be outputted forward in a good manner, and the sound from the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. Furthermore, when the player puts his/her hand into or approaches the lower tray 322, the player can tactually feel the vibrations caused by the deep bass sound from the lower speaker 921 that is output forward from the lower speaker port 326e. It is possible to entertain the players and suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the door frame 3 is equipped with a door frame right side unit 550 that is plate-shaped and largely protrudes forward from the right side of the through-hole 111, when the present pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment of a game parlor, the door Since the frame right side unit 550 can act as a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, it is possible for players who play with this pachinko machine 1 to play in a private room. It is possible to create the illusion that the player is actually there, and it is possible to have players play games in a relaxed atmosphere without worrying about other players around them.

Furthermore, the door frame 3 can be decorated with light emitting light on the front end and both left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550, which is plate-shaped and largely protrudes forward. , the existence of the pachinko machine 1 can be announced even from a distance, such as from the side along the island equipment, even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of it, making it highly appealing to players. It can be set to 1.

In addition, the door frame 3 includes a top middle decorative member 576 protruding forward at the center in the left-right direction in the door frame top unit 570 above the through-hole 111, and the front face of the top middle decorative member 576 on both left and right sides. The top middle decorative member of the door frame top unit 570 has a concave shape that can be scooped out backwards (the top middle decorative member of the door frame top unit 570 576 is formed in a concavely curved shape so that the front surfaces on both the left and right sides are located rearward. As a result, only the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 appears to protrude forward, making it possible to highlight and emphasize the top middle decorative member 576 to the player. The center decorative member 576 can be strongly noticed.

By the way, the upper part of the door frame of a conventional pachinko machine is provided with a pair of upper speakers spaced apart from each other on the left and right, and the two upper speakers stand out. In contrast, in the door frame 3 of this embodiment, in the door frame top unit 570 attached above the through hole 111, a pair of upper parts whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal at both left and right ends are provided. In addition to being equipped with a speaker 573, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 are provided, which extend from both left and right sides of the central top middle decorative member 576 to both left and right ends in front of the speaker cover 575. The entire front surfaces of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light. As a result, the entire front upper part of the door frame 3 can be decorated, so that the pair of upper speakers 573 are not noticeable at the upper part of the door frame 3, and the decoration is clearly different from that of conventional pachinko machines. It is possible to make the player aware at a glance that the player is in the pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to the player, and the pair of upper speakers 573 allows the player to enjoy high-quality stereo sound. can.

In this way, in the door frame 3 of this embodiment, the production operation unit 400 attached to the tray unit 320 and the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 are arranged below and above the through-hole 111. , each protrudes forward at the center in the left and right direction, so that the imaginary line passing through the center in the left and right direction stands out, allowing the player to see a uniform decoration at the top and bottom, as well as giving the player a sophisticated decoration. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 stand out from other pachinko machines and have high appeal.

In addition, since the door frame 3 has the top middle decorative member 576 and the production operation unit 400 of the door frame top unit 570, which are arranged vertically in the center in the left-right direction, protruding forward, the top middle decorative member 576 When the performance operation unit 400 is decorated with light, it is possible to show the player a light emitting line extending vertically at the center of the front surface of the door frame 3 in the left and right direction, so that the player's line of sight is placed at the center in the left and right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 etc. of the production operation unit 400.

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 60 to 66 and the like. FIG. 60 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the game board exploded into its main components and viewed from the back. 63 is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and back unit, FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as seen from the front, and FIG. 65 is a front view of the game board of FIG. 63. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view seen from behind after being disassembled. FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged front view of the function display unit with the game board attached to the pachinko machine.

The game board 5 has a game area 5a into which a game ball is driven when the player operates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. In addition, the game board 5 includes a front component 1000 that partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 so that the rear end of the game area 5a is A plate-shaped game panel 1100 that partitions, a board holder 1200 attached to the rear lower part of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, which is operated by driving a game ball into the game area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 that controls the game contents to be played. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with game balls are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a (not shown).

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100, a game board side performance display device 1600 that is placed in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and is capable of displaying a predetermined performance image, and a front side of the game panel 1100. It further includes a front unit 2000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. A game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the game board side effect display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 has an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and also includes a transparent flat panel plate 1110, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. A frame-shaped panel holder 1120 is attached to the rear side and the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning holes 2001 that are always open to receive game balls that are hit into the gaming area 5a, and a plurality of general winning holes 2001 that are used for playing games at different positions in the gaming area 5a. A first starting port 2002 that is always open to receive a ball, a gate section 2003 that is installed at a predetermined position in the gaming area 5a and detects passage of a gaming ball, and a gaming ball that passes through the gate section 2003. Accordingly, the second starting port 2004 is driven so that game balls can be accepted according to the normal lottery result, and the second starting port 2004 is enabled to accept game balls according to the normal lottery result. The movable piece 2004a and the acceptance of game balls are possible in either of the first special lottery results or the second special lottery results drawn by receiving the game balls into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. It is equipped with a big winning opening 2005.

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a starting port unit 2100 that is installed directly above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the gaming area 5a and has a first starting port 2002 and a big winning port 2005, and a starting port unit A lower side unit 2200 that is installed along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the lower side unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has a plurality of general prize openings 2001, and a side unit that is installed above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 is installed approximately at the center of the gaming area 5a and has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. A locking mechanism 3020 for removably attaching the board side effect display device 1600 is provided.

Furthermore, the back unit 3000 has a back left center decoration unit 3050 attached at the front end of the back box 3010 upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front, and a back left center decoration unit 3050 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 at the top of the vertical center. A rear lower rear movable production unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back upper left movable production unit 3200 attached to the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the rear box 3010, and a rear upper left movable production unit 3200 attached to the left side in front view The back left movable production unit 3300 is attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 when viewed from the front, and the back upper center is attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view. It includes a movable performance unit 3400 and a back/front/back movable performance unit 3500 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and in front of the back/lower/rear movable performance unit 3100.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be explained with reference mainly to FIGS. 64, 65, and the like. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference of the inner shape defines the outer circumference of the game area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from a lower end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, passes the upper end of the center in the left-right direction as seen from the front, and extends to the diagonally upper right corner; The inner rail 1002 is arranged inside the front component 1000 along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front to the diagonally upper left side when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. An out guide portion 1003 is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and slopes downwardly toward the rear.

The front component 1000 also includes a lower right rail 1004 that is sloped linearly from the right end of the out guide section 1003 in front view to near the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher; The right rail 1005 extends from the right end of the front component 1000 along the right side of the front component 1000 to the bottom of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and has an upper part curved inward to the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. A stopper part 1006 is connected to the upper end of the outer rail 1001, and the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact with the stopper part 1006.

The front component 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front component 1000 and the outer rail 1001. The backflow prevention member can be rotated only between an open position in which the space between the backflow prevention member and the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the circumferential direction, and is biased by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position. 1007.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 is located on the outside of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 near the lower end extending substantially perpendicularly, on the lower side of the out guide section 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and on the outside of the right rail 1005. Each portion is provided with a security recess 1008 that is recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1008 has a rear protrusion 202 that protrudes toward the rear of the security cover 200 on the door frame 3. It will be inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state due to the rear protrusion 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the gaming area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from the lower front side of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the security recess 1008. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 that protrude rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. By inserting these positioning protrusions 1009 into inner rail fixing holes 1116 formed in the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, the inner rail 1002 can be positioned and fixed on the front surface of the panel board 1110.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of attachment bosses 1010 that protrude rearward from the rear surface. By inserting the plurality of attachment bosses 1010 into the attachment holes 1128 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, they can be positioned with respect to the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100).

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch 1011 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1011 coincides with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the lower full ball path passes through these notches 1011 and 1127. The front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank taxiway 862 of the unit 860 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62, FIGS. 64 and 65, etc. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and which holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. A frame-shaped panel holder 1120 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin board such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic board such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel board 1110 is thinner than the panel holder 1120 (gaming panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be held sufficiently even when obstacle nails are planted in the front or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel board 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin board.

The panel board 1110 has an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position within the game area 5a. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed in the panel board 1110, penetrating the front and back, and through which the front unit 2000 is attached.

The panel plate 1110 also has a plurality of fitting holes 1113 formed of round holes arranged near the outer periphery and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a long hole 1114 arranged near the outer periphery at the lower left side and penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the up-down direction. , is equipped with. These fitting holes 1113 and elongated holes 1114 are arranged outside the gaming area 5a and are used for positioning with the panel holder 1120. Further, the panel board 1110 is provided with step-shaped engaging step portions 1115 with a depressed front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. These engagement step portions 1115 are cut out to approximately half the thickness of the panel board 1110, and, like the fitting hole 1113 and the elongated hole 1114, are arranged outside the gaming area 5a. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1110 to the panel holder 1120.

Furthermore, the panel board 1110 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1116 at predetermined positions. By fitting and fixing the positioning protrusion 1009 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 into the inner rail fixing hole 1116, the inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is sized to include the panel board 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed thicker than the panel board 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of synthetic resin (eg, thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder 1120 has a holding step part 1121 which removably holds the panel board 1110 and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and a holding step part 1121 which has a size approximately equal to that of the game area 5a inside the holding step part 1121 in the front and rear direction. A through hole 1122 penetrating through the.

The depth of the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120 from the front is approximately the same as the thickness of the panel board 1110, and the front surface of the panel board 1110 held within the holding step 1121 is the same as the thickness of the panel board 1110. It is approximately the same surface as the front. Further, the holding step portion 1121 has a front inner circumferential surface formed in such a size that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer circumferential surface of the panel plate 1110. With this clearance, even if the panel board 1110 relatively expands and contracts due to temperature changes or changes over time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is arranged at a position corresponding to a fitting hole 1113 and a long hole 1114 formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding step 1121, and extends forward from the front surface of the holding step 1121. It extends and includes a plurality of protruding pins 1123 that can be fitted into and inserted into the fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114 of the panel board 1110. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1123 into the fitting holes 1113 and the elongated holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned relative to each other.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an engagement claw 1124 and an engagement piece 1125 that engage with the engagement step 1115 at a position corresponding to the engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. Specifically, the engagement claw 1124 is arranged at the upper part of the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110, and extends forward from the front surface of the holding step 1121. It protrudes toward the front and is adapted to be elastically engaged with the engagement step portion 1115. The engagement claw 1124 is sized so that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

The engagement piece 1125 of the panel holder 1120 is arranged below the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120 and corresponds to the lower engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. This engagement piece 1125 is attached to the upper side ( It extends a predetermined amount toward the center (center side). By engaging the engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 with these engaging claws 1124 and engaging pieces 1125, the panel plate 1110 is held detachably from the panel holder 1120.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an out port 1126 that penetrates back and forth at the lowest position within the gaming area 5a. In the panel holder 1120, the lower rear surface of the outlet 1126 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the outlet 1126.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1127 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1127 coincides with the notch 1011 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the lower full ball path unit 860 passes through these notches 1011 and 1127. The front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank taxiway 862 face forward.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a plurality of attachment holes 1128 penetrating back and forth at positions corresponding to the plurality of attachment bosses 1010 in the front component 1000. By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the front component 1000 into these multiple mounting holes 1128, the panel holder 1120 can be attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and the panel holder 1120 can be attached to the front component 1000. 1120 (gaming panel 1100) can be positioned.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a square insertion hole 1129 passing through in the front-rear direction above the notch 1127. The rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted through the insertion hole 1129.

When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000. As a result, the game balls flowing down to the lower end of the game area 5a are guided by the out guiding section 1003 to the out port 1126 on the rear side, and are discharged to the back side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126.

[5-2a. Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a game panel 1150 of an embodiment different from the game panel 1100 described above will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel having a different form from that shown in FIG. 63, viewed from the front together with the front component, the board holder, and the main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 viewed from behind. This game panel 1150 is formed of a wood board material such as plywood with a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm). This game panel 1150 is formed to have the same thickness as the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 described above.

The game panel 1150 has an outer shape that is approximately the same as the outer shape of the front component 1000. The game panel 1150 is provided with an out port 1151 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000 at the lower part of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. In the game panel 1150, the lower side of the rear surface of the outlet 1151 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the outlet 1151.

In addition, the game panel 1150 has a notch 1152 that extends horizontally in the front-rear direction on the left side of the lower end when viewed from the front and is opened downward and has the same shape as the notch 1011 of the front component 1000, and a notch 1152 on the upper side of the notch 1152 in the vertical direction. A rectangular insertion hole 1153 is provided, which extends through the hole 1153 and into which the rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted.

In addition, the game panel 1150 has a plurality of inner rails that pass through the front and rear so that the positioning protrusions 1009 can be fitted in positions corresponding to the plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 that protrude rearward from the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000. A fixing hole 1154 is provided. Furthermore, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of attachment holes 1155 penetrating back and forth at positions corresponding to the plurality of attachment bosses 1010 in the front component member 1000. By inserting the attachment bosses 1010 of the front component 1000 into these multiple attachment holes 1155, the game panel 1150 can be attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and the game panel 1150 can be attached to the front component 1000. 1150 can be positioned.

Furthermore, although not shown in the drawings, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of openings penetrating the front and rear for attaching the table unit 2000, similar to the openings 1112 of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100 described above. ing.

When the game panel 1150 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1151 is opened at the rear side of the out guide section 1003 of the front component 1000. Thereby, the game ball flowing down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear side outlet 1151 by the out guide part 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the outlet 1151.

[5-3. Board holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box with an open top and front, and the bottom surface is inclined toward the center in the left-right direction. This board holder 1200, when assembled on the game board 5, can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from below. As a result, it is possible to receive all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000. The liquid can be discharged downward from the discharge section 1201.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. Main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. This main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 that controls game content, payout of game balls, etc., and a main control board box 1320 that accommodates the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. .

The main control board box 1320 is equipped with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. Therefore, traces of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left behind. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, thereby increasing deterrence against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310.

The various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520, and 3042, including the main control board box 1320, are all provided as transparent members to enable visual confirmation from the outside. There is. In other words, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the payout control board 951 in the payout control board box 950 and the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 have surfaces that are inferior in fraud prevention performance. Since implementation areas are now provided, it is important to ensure such transparency in order to obtain various effects related to fraud countermeasures, which will be described later.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66 and the like. As shown, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the gaming area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 when the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 66). This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the gaming status (gaming situation), normal lottery results, special lottery results, etc.

As shown in FIG. 66, the function display unit 1400 includes a status indicator 1401 consisting of one LED that displays the gaming status, and four LEDs that display the normal lottery results drawn by passing the game ball through the gate section 2003. A normal symbol display 1402 consisting of a normal symbol display 1402, a normal holding display 1408 consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holdings related to the passing of game balls to the gate part 2003, and a drawing by receiving the game balls to the first starting port 2002. A first special symbol display 1403 consisting of eight LEDs that displays the first special lottery result, and a first special holding consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holdings related to the acceptance of game balls into the first starting slot 2002. A number display 1404, a second special symbol display 1405 consisting of eight LEDs that display the second special lottery result drawn by receiving game balls into the second starting port 2004, A second special reservation number display 1406 consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls, and a special reservation number display 1406 that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls, and when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "jackpot" etc. It mainly includes a round indicator 1407 consisting of three LEDs that displays the number of repetitions (round number) of the opening/closing pattern.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, etc. the provided LED.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be explained with reference to FIG. 62. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. ing. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control section for controlling light emitting effects, sound effects, movable effects, etc., and an effect display control section for controlling effect images. .

[5-7. Game board side performance display device]
Next, the game board side effect display device 1600 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. The game board side effect display device 1600 is arranged at the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. To be more specific, the game board side performance display device 1600 is removably attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 at approximately the center of the rear wall. This game board side performance display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 when the game board 5 is assembled. This game board side effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and moving images.

The game board side performance display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 that protrude outward from the left side surface when viewed from the front, and a right fixing piece 1602 that protrudes outward from the right side surface when viewed from the front. This game board side performance display device 1600 has two fixing grooves opened on the left inner circumferential surface in a front view inside a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. 3010c, insert the two left fixing pieces 1601 diagonally from the rear of the back box 3010, move the right fixing piece 1602 side forward, insert the right fixing piece 1602 into the opening of the locking mechanism 3020, and lock it. The mechanism 3020 is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding downward.

[5-8. Front unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, and has a front end protruding forward from the front surface of the panel board 1110 and a rear end passing through the opening 1112. and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel board 1110.

The table unit 2000 of this embodiment has a plurality of general winning holes 2001 that are always open and capable of receiving game balls shot into the gaming area 5a, and a plurality of general winning holes 2001 that are inside the gaming area 5a. a first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls at different positions; a gate section 2003 that is installed at a predetermined position within the game area 5a and detects passage of game balls; A second starting port 2004 allows game balls to be accepted according to the normal lottery results that are drawn by passing through the part 2003, and a lottery is performed by accepting game balls into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. A grand prize opening 2005 that can accept game balls according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

The plurality of general winning holes 2001 are arranged at the lower part of the gaming area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is located directly above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction within the gaming area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is disposed approximately directly below the blocking portion 1006 at the upper right in the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front. The second starting port 2004 is located directly below the gate portion 2003 to the right when viewed from the front. The big prize opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1126.

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a starting port unit 2100 that is installed directly above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the gaming area 5a and has a first starting port 2002 and a big winning port 2005, and a starting port unit A lower side unit 2200 that is installed along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the lower side unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has a plurality of general prize openings 2001, and a side unit that is installed above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. It includes an upper part 2300 and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 which is attached to the approximate center of the gaming area 5a and has a gate part 2003 and a second starting opening 2004.

The starting port unit 2100 is located in the gaming area 5a, near the lower end of the center in the left-right direction, directly above the out port 1126, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. This starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 that opens upward with a size that can accept only one game ball at a time, and a big winning port 2005 that allows multiple game balls to be received at a time ( For example, 4 to 6 pieces) are of an acceptable size and extend from side to side, and are formed to be openable and closable depending on the gaming state.

The lower side unit 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100 in the gaming area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The lower side unit 2200 has a plurality of general winning holes 2001 that can accept game balls at all times.

The upper side unit 2300 is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front in the upper left of the lower side unit 2200 in the front view, slightly below the center in the vertical direction, in the gaming area 5a. When the upper side unit 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110, the left end of the shelf is close to the inner rail 1002, and the game balls flowing down along the inner rail 1002 are directed to the right (playing area 5a). (center in the left-right direction).

The center accessory 2500 is arranged in the gaming area 5a above the starting port unit 2100 and the lower side unit 2200 and slightly above the center when viewed from the front, and is located on the front side of the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100. installed. The center accessory 2500 is formed into a frame shape, and allows the game board side effect display device 1600 placed behind the game panel 1100 and the effect unit provided in the back unit 3000 to be visually recognized from the front through the frame. be able to. The center accessory 2500 has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004.

The entire circumference of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, excluding the lower side, protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, so that a game ball struck into the game area 5a is placed within the frame. It is made so that it cannot be invaded.

The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2520 that is open on the outer peripheral surface on the left side when viewed from the front so that game balls in the game area 5a can enter, and a game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2520 and can be released into the frame. It includes an open warp exit 2522 and a stage 2530 that rolls the game ball released from the warp exit 2522 in the left-right direction and then releases it into the game area 5a. A starting port unit 2100 is arranged directly below the stage 2530, and when a game ball is released downward from the center of the stage 2530, the game ball is received into the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

[5-9. Back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. Further, a game board side effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

The back unit 3000 includes a back box 3010 that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and a lower side of the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010. A box-shaped performance drive board box 3042 is provided, which is rotatably mounted around an axis extending left and right along the direction and accommodates a performance drive board.

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a back left center decoration unit 3050 that is attached to the front end of the back box 3010 upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side in front view, and a back left center decoration unit 3050 that is attached to the front end of the back box 3010 at an upper position from the center in the vertical direction. A rear lower rear movable production unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back upper left movable production unit 3200 attached to the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the rear box 3010, and a rear upper left movable production unit 3200 attached to the left side in front view The back left movable production unit 3300 is attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 when viewed from the front, and the back upper center is attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view. It includes a movable performance unit 3400 and a back/front/back movable performance unit 3500 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and in front of the back/lower/rear movable performance unit 3100.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a penetrating through the rear wall, and a flat frame-shaped frame projecting rearward at a distance from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, and two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed from the inside of the frame toward the outside on the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b when viewed from the rear, into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the game board side performance display device 1600 is inserted. , a notch 3010d is cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the vertical center of the right side of the liquid crystal mounting part 3010b when viewed from the rear, and a notch 3010d is provided to which the locking mechanism 3020 is attached.

The opening 3010a is formed to have approximately the same size as the display screen of the game board side performance display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the game board side performance display device 1600 to be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, a lock mechanism 3020 is attached to the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface in a vertically slidable manner.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixing piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. This fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 has bosses, mounting holes, etc. formed at appropriate positions for mounting each movable performance unit and the like.

The back unit 3000 appropriately uses a back lower/rear movable presentation unit 3100, a back top/left movable presentation unit 3200, a back left movable presentation unit 3300, a back top/middle movable presentation unit 3400, a back/bottom/front movable presentation unit 3500, etc. , a light-emitting effect, a movable effect, a display effect, etc. can be performed, the player can be entertained by various effects, and the player's interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing.

[6. Game content]
Next, the content of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 60 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 arranged at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3, the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320 are released. , the ball passes between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5 and is hit into the upper part of the game area 5a, and the game with the game ball is started. A game ball hit into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving force of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and the more clockwise the handle 302 is rotated, the stronger the ball can be hit. , game balls can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in the front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and game balls are attached to the obstacle nails. By making contact, the falling speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are imparted to the game ball, so that the movement can be enjoyed. In addition to the obstacle nails, the game area 5a is provided with windmills (not shown) that are rotated by contact with game balls at appropriate positions.

When the game ball hit into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 when viewed from the front, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown). It flows down the area to the left of the center accessory 2500. When the game ball flowing down the left side area of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2530 from the warp exit 2522.

The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530, moves back and forth from side to side, and is released forward. When a game ball is released into the game area 5a from the center of the stage 2530, since it is located directly above the first starting port 2002, it is received into the first starting port 2002 with a high probability. When game balls are accepted into the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from other than the center, it flows down toward the starting port unit 2100. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the gaming area 5a may be received by the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the large prize opening 2005 in the open state, and the like.

By the way, if the game ball that has flown down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it will be moved toward the center in the left-right direction by the upper side unit 2300, and will be moved to the general prize opening 2001 and the first prize slot in the lower side unit 2200. There is a possibility that it will be accepted into the starting port 2002 or the like. Then, when game balls are received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

On the other hand, when the game ball hit into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (so-called hitting to the right), On the downstream side thereof, the water flows down a region where a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004 are provided.

Then, when the game ball hit to the right passes through the gate section 2003, a normal lottery is held in the main control board 1310, and if the normal lottery result is "normal win", the second starting port 2004 is opened for a predetermined time ( For example, the second starting port 2004 remains open for a period of 0.3 to 10 seconds, allowing game balls to be received into the second starting port 2004. Then, when the game balls are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, 4) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Ru.

In this embodiment, in the normal lottery performed when game balls pass through the gate section 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the time when the normal lottery result is indicated (for example, 0. 01 to 60 seconds, also called normal fluctuation time). This suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 becomes open after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

Furthermore, if the game ball passes through the gate section 2003 between the time the game ball passes through the gate section 2003 and the time when the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started, so the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of suggesting the result is suspended until the suggestion of the previous normal lottery result is finished. Further, the number of normal lottery results that can be held is set at the upper limit of four, and even if game balls pass through the gate section 2003, they are discarded without being held. This prevents an increase in the burden on the gaming parlor side due to the accumulation of reservations.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when game balls are received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the main control board 1310 displays an advantageous gaming state (for example, "jackpot", "jackpot", " A special lottery result is drawn to generate a "medium win," "small win," "probability fluctuation win," "time reduction win," etc.). Then, the special lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as special variable time). In addition, the special lottery results drawn when game balls are received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 include "Lose", "Small hit", "2R jackpot", "5R jackpot", " 15R jackpot," "probability variable (probability change) win," "time saving (time reduction) win," "probable variable time saving win," "probable variable time saving win," and so on.

When the special lottery results (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by receiving game balls into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are special lottery results that generate an advantageous gaming state. After the special variable time has elapsed, the grand prize opening 2005 becomes ready to accept game balls in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. When a game ball is accepted into the big winning hole 2005 while the big winning hole 2005 is in an open state, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 send a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13 balls) from the payout device 830. Game balls are paid out onto the upper tray 321. Therefore, by allowing the big winning hole 2005 to accept game balls when the big winning hole 2005 is enabled to accept game balls, many game balls can be paid out and the players can be entertained.

If the special lottery result is a "small win", after the big prize opening 2005 is open to accept game balls for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening and closing pattern is repeated multiple times (for example, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a "jackpot", a predetermined period of time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed after the grand prize opening 2005 is open to accept game balls, or When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are accepted, an opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) that brings the game balls into a closed state where they cannot be accepted is established. Repeat a number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, a ``2R jackpot'' is repeated for 2 rounds, a ``5R jackpot'' is repeated for 5 rounds, and a ``15R jackpot'' is repeated for 15 rounds to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

In addition, in "Jackpot", after the end of the jackpot game, the probability that a special lottery result such as "Jackpot" will be drawn will be changed ("probable winning"), and the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result will be changed. There is a ``win'' (``time saving hit'').

In this embodiment, the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2004 receive game balls from the start of the special lottery until the special lottery result is suggested. Once a game ball is received in the second starting slot 2004, it is not possible to start suggesting the special lottery result, so the start of suggesting the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the previously drawn special lottery result is completed. Ru. The maximum number of special lottery results to be held is 4 for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if game balls were accepted in 2004, they were discarded without retaining the special lottery results. This prevents an increase in the burden on the gaming parlor side due to the accumulation of reservations.

This suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side performance display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest special lottery results. The special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 by flashing a plurality of LEDs by repeatedly turning them on and off for a predetermined period of time, and then indicating the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, the game board side performance display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and suggests the special lottery result as a performance image. The performance image suggesting the special lottery result on the game board side performance display device 1600 is displayed in a variable manner by varying each symbol row with three symbol rows each consisting of a plurality of symbols being displayed side by side in the left and right direction. The symbol rows are sequentially stopped and displayed, and each symbol row is stopped and displayed so that the symbols of the three stop-displayed symbol rows are a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "lose", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a confirmed image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small winning game, a big winning game, etc.) occurs according to the special lottery result.

In addition, there is a time period (LED blinking time (fluctuation time)) indicating a special lottery result on the function display unit 1400, and a time period indicating a special lottery result on the game board side effect display device 1600 (when the symbol rows fluctuate). The time required for displaying the confirmed image is different from the time required for displaying the finalized image, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying a performance image for suggesting a special lottery result by the game board side performance display device 1600, the performance operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 displays a performance image for suggesting a special lottery result. The operation button 410, the door frame side effect display device 460, various decorations on the center accessory 2500, various decorations on the back unit 3000, back lower and rear movable effect unit 3100, back upper left movable effect unit 3200, back left movable effect It is possible to perform light emitting effects, movable effects, display effects, etc. by appropriately using the unit 3300, the back upper and middle movable effect unit 3400, the back lower front movable effect unit 3500, etc. It is possible to keep the players entertained, and to prevent the players from losing interest in the game.

In this way, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 of the production operation unit 400 attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320 protruding forward in the door frame 3 can be accessed from the outside. When you look at it, you can see that the first button decoration part 411a and the second button interior decoration part 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432 overlap, the first button decoration part 411a and the door frame side effect display device 460 overlap, Since it is possible to show players a decoration full of decorativeness with an unprecedented sense of perspective, it is possible to strongly attract the attention of players, and to differentiate it from other pachinko machines. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing.

In addition, an interior decoration member 432 of the operation button, a door frame side effect display device 460, etc. are arranged in the movement direction of the button lens 411 (operation button 410), and the unit base 431 allows the button lens 411 to be moved by the player's operation. Since it is supported so that it can be moved, when the player operates (presses) and moves the button lens 411, the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g move closer to each other or move away from each other. Therefore, due to the change in the distance between the first button decoration part 411a and the second button interior decoration part 432g, the perspective of the decoration is such that the first button decoration part 411a and the second button interior decoration part 432g overlap. This allows the player to change the decoration (intersection pattern) of the first button decoration part 411a and the second inner button decoration part 432g, thereby entertaining the player and reducing interest. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outward to the side opposite to the inner decoration member 432 of the operation button, a space is formed between them, which is seen from the player's perspective. In this case, the distance from the button lens 411 to the first button decoration part 411a and the distance from the operation button interior decoration member 432 to the second button interior decoration part 432g become more different, and the button lens 411 cannot be operated. Even when the player's eyes are not moving, the intersecting manner (overlapping degree) of the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g changes as the player's eye position moves, so it is possible to create a moving decoration. It can be shown to the players and can strongly attract the players' interest.

Furthermore, since the outer peripheral edge of the transparent button lens 411 is provided with a first button decoration part 411a having a radial decoration toward the center, the center side of the button lens 411 where the first button decoration part 411a is not provided. Through the radial decoration of the first button decoration part 411a, the player's line of sight can be directed to the center of the button lens 411. The player's attention can be strongly directed toward the operation button internal decorative member 432 and the door frame side performance display device 460 through the center of the transparent button lens 411.

In addition, since the operation button interior decoration member 432 is provided with a second button interior decoration portion 432g having a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, when viewed from the outside, the button lens 411 The decoration of the first button decoration part 411a and the decoration of the second button decoration part 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432 intersect with each other, so that the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g It is possible to reliably bring out the sense of perspective in the decorations created by the buttons, and to make the decorations created by the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g stand out, thereby making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players. can.

Moreover, since the decoration of the second button interior decoration part 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432 has a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, the second button interior decoration part 432g The decoration can direct the player's line of sight and attention to the door frame side effect display device 460 visible in the center of the operation button inner decoration member 432, and the decoration (effect image) of the door frame side effect display device 460 can be enjoyed. I can do it.

Furthermore, when each LED mounted on the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the upper operation button inner decoration board 435, and the lower operation button inner decoration board 436 is made to emit light, the light can be used for operation. Since the button inner decoration member 432 can be decorated with light emission, and the button lens 411 can also be decorated with light emission, in addition to the decoration of the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g, the light emission decoration can be used. can also entertain players. At this time, the second button interior decoration part 432g emits light from each LED of the operation button left interior decoration board 433, the operation button right interior decoration board 434, the operation button upper interior decoration board 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration board 436. Therefore, in the second button interior decoration part 432g, the operation button left interior decoration board 433, the operation button right interior decoration board 434, the operation button upper interior decoration board 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration board 436. The first button decoration part 411a is decorated with light by indirect light diffused by the second inner button decoration part 432g, and the first button decoration part 411a is decorated with light by direct light from each LED. While the second button inner decoration part 432g is strongly decorated with light, the first button decoration part 411a is weakly decorated with light. If you look at the first button decoration part 411a and the second button interior decoration part 432g from the outside with the LEDs of the decoration board 435 and the lower operation button inner decoration board 436 emitting light, the sense of perspective is further emphasized. The pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing by showing decorations to the players and strongly attracting the players' interest.

In addition, since the operation button interior decoration member 432 is arranged in the direction in which the button lens 411 moves, the button lens 411 is moved to a position outside the outer periphery of the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432. There is no need to secure space, and it is possible to expand the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 outward to make them as large as possible. It can make you stand out. Furthermore, as described above, there is no need to secure a space for movement outside the button lens 411, so by arranging the frame unit 415 outside the button lens 411, the entire pachinko machine 1 can be moved. The pachinko machine 1 can be made highly decorative, has a good appearance, and has a high appeal that strongly attracts the interest of players.

In addition, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outward, if a player hits the button lens 411 and applies an impact to a part of the surface, the button lens 411 has a flat shape. Since the applied impact force is more easily dispersed throughout the button lens 411 than in the case of the button lens 411, the button lens 411 can be made difficult to break (hard to be damaged). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the interruption of the game due to the button lens 411 being damaged during a game, which may cause some players to become irritated and lose their interest, and also to prevent the button lens 411 from being damaged. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game parlor where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the door frame 3 that allows the game area 5a of the game board 5 disposed in the main body frame 4 to be viewed from the front through the through hole 111, there is a space under the through hole 111. The unit base 431 of the performance operation unit 400, which is attached to the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 that bulges forward on the side, has a circular shape of approximately 15 cm with an outer diameter within the range of 10 cm to 30 cm. An operation button 410 that is movable (advances and retreats) when operated by the operator, an interior decoration member 432 of the operation button that is visible from the front through a transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, a door frame side performance display device 460, and an operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 is installed within the frame, so that the operation button 410 is as large as possible in a conventional pachinko machine where the game ball storage tray is conspicuous. Since the operation unit 400 is visible, the player can recognize at first glance that the pachinko machine is different from a conventional pachinko machine, making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing. The frame unit 415 is provided with a frame side lens 417 having translucency, and a second button decoration having translucency is provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) adjacent to the frame side lens 417. The second button decoration part 411b is provided on the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 which are attached to the unit base 431 on the rear side of the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration part 411b. In addition to providing first LEDs 422a and 423a for decorating the frame side lens 417 with light emission and second LEDs 422b and 423b for decorating the frame side lens 417 with light emission, a space between the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration part 411b is provided. Since it includes an inner cylinder part 416d of the frame main body 416 that partitions, and a main body part 413a and an inner extension part 413f of the button base 413 that partition the second button decorative part 411b and the center side of the button lens 411, The cylindrical portion 416d, the main body portion 413a, and the inner extension portion 413f allow the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a to illuminate the center side of the frame side lens 417 and button lens 411, and the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b to illuminate the center side of the frame side lens 417 and button lens 411. It is possible to prevent the two-button decoration part 411b from being illuminated, and the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration part 411b can be decorated with light emission independently. Therefore, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration part 411b can be clearly decorated with light emission, and a good-looking light emission effect can be performed. In addition, by appropriately combining lights off, lighting, blinking, brightness, color, etc. for the adjacent frame side lens 417 and second button decoration part 411b, various patterns of light emission can be produced. This makes it possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and it is also possible to entertain the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, the first LEDs 422a and 423a that emits light to decorate the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b that emits light to decorate the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are combined into one operation button left outer decoration. In preparation for the circuit board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423, since the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431, the second button decorative part 411b (operation button 410) Compared to the case where a substrate is provided, the first LEDs 422a and 423a can be moved as far away from the second button decoration part 411b as possible, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a can be sufficiently diffused while the second The button decoration part 411b can be irradiated with the light. Therefore, since the second button decoration part 411b can be uniformly decorated with light emitting light, the appearance of the second button decoration part 411b and the light emitting decoration of the frame side lens 417 can be improved, which strongly attracts the attention of players. In addition, it is possible to entertain the players, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the players.

Furthermore, since the operating button left outer decorative board 422 and the operating button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431, the operating button left outer decorative board 422 and the operating button right outer decorative board move as the operating button 410 moves back and forth. The wiring connected to 423 will not be bent or stretched, and breakage of the wiring due to fatigue can be eliminated. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 (second button decoration part 411b) is moved, the wiring will not be disconnected. To allow a player to enjoy the light-emitting decoration without any problem, and to suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

In addition, since the second button decoration part 411b is provided on the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the rear operation button internal decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be seen through the transparent button lens 411. When viewed, the second button decoration part 411b decorates the outer edges of the operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side performance display device 460, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. By causing the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b to emit light as appropriate, the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 from which the operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side performance display device 460 can be seen is decorated. As described above, since the second button decoration part 411b and the frame side lens 417 can be decorated with light emitting light in various patterns, the player's attention is strongly attracted to the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460. This allows the user to enjoy the light emitting effects, the operation of the operation button 410, and the effect images displayed by the door frame side effect display device 460, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

In addition, since the button lens 411 (operation button 410), which is provided with the second button decoration part 411b on the outer edge, can be operated by the player, the operation button 410 can be operated by the player during execution of a player participation type performance. By allowing the player to operate the button 410, the player can enjoy operating the operation button 410 (player participatory effect), and it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest in the game. When performing a player participation type production, the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are decorated with light to attract the player's attention to the operation button 410. Therefore, the player can be prompted to operate the operation button 410, and the player can be entertained by participating in the player participation type performance.

Furthermore, since only the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 is provided with the non-transparent main body part 413a and the inner extension part 413f, which allow the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 to be decorated with light by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 The area closer to the center than the button decoration part 411b is not illuminated by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and the center side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) becomes brighter, so that it is placed at the rear. It is possible to prevent the operation button internal decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 from becoming difficult to see from the front. Therefore, the second button decoration part 411b can be decorated with light in a good condition, and the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be visually recognized through the transparent button lens 411 in a good condition. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently entertain the players with decorations, light-emitting effects, etc., and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, since the inner cylinder portion 416d extends from the rear side of the frame unit 415 provided with the frame side lens 417, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration of the operation button 410 are displayed on the rear side of the frame unit 415. 411b can be completely partitioned off by the inner cylindrical portion 416d. On the other hand, the light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b is at the end (rear end) of the inner cylinder portion 416d closer to the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423. Since the rear end of the inner cylindrical portion 416d is located closer to the left outer decorative board 422 and the right outer operating button decorative board 423 than the diffusion range, the outer left decorative board 422 and the right outer operating button Even if a gap is formed between the front surface of the decorative board 423, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the frame side lens 417, and the light from the second LED 422b 423b illuminates the second button decorative portion 411b. There's nothing to do. Therefore, the light can be reliably blocked by the inner cylinder portion 416d, and the pachinko machine 1 that reliably achieves the above-mentioned effects can be realized.

In addition, since the main body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f of the button base 413 extend from the rear side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411), the second button decoration portion 411b on the rear side of the operation button 410 and the center side of the button lens 411 can be completely partitioned off by the main body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) of the main body portion 413a closer to the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423, the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operating button right outer decorative board 423 Since the LEDs 422a and 423a also extend rearward, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not pass through the rear end of the main body 413a, completely blocking light from entering the center of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410. Can be done. Therefore, the second button decoration part 411b can be illuminated and decorated in good condition by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and the rear operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be illuminated through the transparent button lens 411. It can be visually recognized in good condition, and it is possible to sufficiently entertain the players with decorations, light-emitting effects, etc., thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, when viewed from the front, the second button decoration part 411b is located in front of the outer part of the operation button interior decoration member 432 arranged behind the operation button 410 (button lens 411), so the button From the gap between the lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432, the outer side and rear side (rear side) of the operation button inner decoration member 432 can be made difficult to see by the second button decoration part 411b. Deterioration of the appearance of the button 410 can be prevented. At this time, when the second button decoration part 411b is decorated with light by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the outside and rear side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 are relatively bright with respect to the brightness of the second button decoration part 411b. Since it becomes dark, it is possible to make it difficult to see the members on the outside or rear side of the inner operation button decorative member 432. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the frame unit 415, the interior decoration member 432 of the operation button, the door frame side effect display device 460, etc. can be further improved, and a decrease in player's interest can be suppressed.

Moreover, since the outer circumference of the operation button 410 is circular, the second button decoration part 411b provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) and the frame adjacent to the second button decoration part 411b The side lens 417 has an arcuate shape. Therefore, by causing the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b to emit light as appropriate, a light emitting effect in which light circles around the outer edge of the operation button 410 or a light emission in which light spreads from the inside to the outside of the operation button 410 can be produced. Since it is possible to show the player a display, a light-emitting display in which light converges from the outside to the inside of the operation button 410, etc., it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored with the various light-emitting displays, and to make the player have fun. This can prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game balls stored in the tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320 in the door frame 3 are driven into the game area 5a, and the upper tray 321 used for the game is opened. At the same time, the production operation unit 400 is removably attached to the front side and lower part of the upper plate 321 to form the remaining space of the mounting space 326j of a predetermined size behind the production operation unit 400, and the remaining space of the mounting space 326j is A portion of the lower tray main body 325 corresponding to the first lower tray region A1 is arranged on the left side of the space, and a portion corresponding to the lower tray second region A2 of the lower tray main body 325 is arranged from that region into the remaining space of the attachment space 326j. Since the lower tray 322 that can store game balls is attached by extending the part, the lower tray 322 looks small when viewed from the front, and the lower tray 322 can be made less noticeable, making it relatively The production operation unit 400 can be made more conspicuous. Therefore, when this pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the production operation unit 400 is visible in the position where the upper tray and lower tray are seen vertically side by side in conventional pachinko machines. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to be highly appealing and can strongly attract the attention of players by making them aware that it is different from conventional pachinko machines.

Further, in the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322, the main body vertical wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer periphery extends upward from the upper end to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. Since the lower tray covers 340 and 340A are provided to restrict the movement of the game balls, it is possible to prevent the game balls in the lower tray 322 from coming into contact with the rear side of the performance operation unit 400, It is possible to prevent the supplied game balls and the game balls stored in the lower tray 322 from contacting or pressing the rear side of the performance operation unit 400. Therefore, the game ball will not come into contact with the rear side of the performance operation unit 400, and the rear side of the performance operation unit 400 will not be damaged by the game ball, so if the game is interrupted due to damage to the performance operation unit 400, the game It is possible to prevent the pachinko player from losing interest in the pachinko machine, and it is also possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game parlor in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, lower plate covers 340, 340A are provided in the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322 to prevent the game balls from moving toward the main body vertical wall portion 325b and the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. This makes it possible to prevent the game ball from entering (spilling) from the lower tray main body 325 into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost or uncomfortable due to the game ball intruding into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the player's interest in the game is reduced. It is possible to suppress the decrease in .

In addition, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A cover the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 in the lower plate 322, the game balls supplied into the lower plate 322 bounce within the lower plate 322. Even if it jumps up, it can be reliably prevented from intruding into the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved. In addition, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A cover the lower plate second area A2 of the lower plate main body 325, the player can 326d) into the lower plate second area A2, the lower plate covers 340, 340A can prevent the fingertips etc. from entering the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. It is possible to prevent injuries caused by touching the lower surface of the upper tray 321, the rear side of the performance operation unit 400, etc., and the player can play the game in a safe state.

Furthermore, since there is a gap between the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the performance operation unit 400, even if the lower plate covers 340, 340A are subjected to impact or pressure due to contact with game balls, the lower plate will not close. It is not transmitted from the covers 340, 340A to the production operation unit 400, and damage to the production operation unit 400 can be reliably prevented.

In addition, in the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is provided in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, so the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is open. In this state, the game balls released from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can directly enter the lower tray ball removal hole 322a and be discharged downward (to the dollar box), and the game balls can be removed from the main body of the lower tray body 325. It is possible to make it difficult to reach the front end side of the standing wall portion 325b. Even if the game ball jumps over the lower plate ball removal hole 322a, since the lower plate covers 340, 340A are provided as described above, the game ball will be prevented from coming into contact with the rear side of the performance operation unit 400. Therefore, it is possible to prevent damage to the production operation unit 400, reduce interruptions in the game, and suppress a decrease in player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower tray main body 325 near the front end of the lower tray 322 becomes higher toward the front, the game ball toward the front end side of the main body vertical wall portion 325b of the lower tray main body 325 is tilted. The ball will climb up the bottom surface, and the moving speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, since the speed of the game balls that come into contact with the lower plate covers 340, 340A can be slowed down, the lower plate covers 340, 340A reliably restrict the movement of the game balls to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. At the same time, it is possible to reduce the impact when the game ball comes into contact with the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the main body vertical wall portion 325b, and to prevent them from being damaged.

In addition, since at least the lower plate covers 340, 340A are separate members, if the lower plate covers 340, 340A are damaged, they can be easily repaired by simply replacing the lower plate covers 340, 340A, and this pachinko machine 1 can reduce the burden on the game parlors that have installed the system.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the center of the front surface in the left and right direction expands most forwardly below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game in which game balls are accepted into the general prize opening 2001 etc. is played. After installing the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 that has been taken out, the production operation unit 400 is removably attached to the most forwardly bulging part of the plate unit cover 326, and the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are attached to the plate unit cover 326. The storage tray (upper tray 321 and lower tray 322) is provided with a storage tray capable of storing game balls, and the storage tray (upper tray 321 and lower tray 322) has a lower tray first area A1 located outside the production operation unit 400 when viewed from the front, and a production operation when viewed from the front. Since the lower plate second area A2 is located in the rear space of the mounting space 326j that is the rear of the unit 400, the production operation unit 400 can be made to stand out when viewed from the front, and The storage trays (upper tray 321 and lower tray 322) can be made to look smaller and less noticeable. Therefore, since the conspicuous performance operation unit 400 is visible in the area where the upper tray and lower tray were visible in conventional pachinko machines, players can recognize at a glance that this is a gaming machine different from conventional pachinko machines. The pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing and can strongly attract the interest of players.

In addition, since the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the left and right direction, the area where the lower plate 322 opens on the surface of the plate unit cover 326 is small, but when viewed from the front, the effect is The first extension part 325B, the second extension part 325C, and the lower plate cover 340 of the lower plate main body 325 having the lower plate second area A2 located in the rear space of the mounting space 326j that is the rear of the operation unit 400, 340A, game balls can also be stored in an area of the lower tray 322 that cannot be seen from the front (lower tray second area A2). Therefore, contrary to the appearance from the front, it is possible to secure a sufficient amount of game balls stored, allowing the player to concentrate on playing the game without having to worry about the remaining amount of game balls in the lower tray 322. This makes it possible to enjoy the game and suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, the lower plate cover 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B, and the second extension part are attached to the lower plate main body 325 and the main body part 325A having the lower plate first area A1, and the lower plate cover 340, 340A having the lower plate second area A2. Since the lower plate 322 is constructed by attaching (combining) the parts 325C, a plurality of lower plate covers 340, 340A of different sizes, a first extension part 325B, a second extension part 325C, etc. are prepared in advance. By installing the lower tray cover 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B, and the second extension part 325C, the size of the lower tray cover 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B, and the second extension part 325C can be adjusted according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size of the installation space 326j in the tray unit cover 326. The volume of the dish 322 can be optimized. Further, as described above, by rearranging (replacing) the lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B, and the second extension part 325C, it is possible to correspond to the size of the space at the rear of the mounting space 326j. Since the width of this rear space depends on the amount of rearward protrusion of the production operation unit 400, it is possible to make the lower plate 322 compatible with various production operation units 400 having different amounts of rear protrusion. Therefore, the versatility of the pachinko machine 1 can be increased.

In addition, since the lower tray 322 includes a bottom wall portion 325a and a main body standing wall portion 325b rising from the outer peripheral end of the bottom wall portion 325a, the lower tray 322 becomes a container shape concave downward, and the game ball can be stored reliably. In addition, since the lower plate covers 340, 340A have a cover standing wall part 340a rising from the upper end of the main body standing wall part 325b of the lower plate main body 325, lower plate covers 340, 340A of various shapes are prepared in advance. Then, by combining (installing) lower plate covers 340, 340A with a shape according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1, the size (shape) of the rear space of the mounting space 326j, etc., it can be adapted to various forms. It is possible to achieve the same effects as described above.

Further, in the lower plate 322 composed of the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340, 340A, the lower plate covers 340, 340A are combined (attached) to the upper end of the main body vertical wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325. Therefore, since the part of the lower tray 322 on which the game balls are placed is the lower tray main body 325, the lower tray main body 325 and the lower tray covers 340, 340A are placed in the area where the load of many game balls is applied due to storage. Boundaries (joints, dividing lines PL) are never located. Therefore, the load of the stored game balls is only received by the lower tray main body 325, so even if many game balls are stored, there is no force that would cause the lower tray covers 340, 340A to be separated from the lower tray main body 325. There is no action, and the lower plate covers 340, 340A can be prevented from coming off from the lower plate main body 325.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper tray capable of storing game balls is provided below and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game in which game balls are received into the general prize opening 2001 etc. is played. 321 and a lower plate 322, and the half of the lower plate 322 including the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322 by the production operation unit 400 arranged in the center in the left and right direction. Since the above is made difficult to see from the front (players), the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made neat and presentable, and it is possible to strongly attract the attention of players. The pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing. In addition, since the production operation unit 400 makes it difficult to see the game balls heading from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, it is difficult for the player to notice the flow of game balls in the lower tray 322. It is possible to prevent the player from becoming distracted by the game, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the performance operation unit 400 controls the connection between the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a on the bottom of the lower plate 322, which guides the game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Since it is difficult to see the game balls guided by the guiding means such as the ball guide portion 322c and the buffer portion 322d, if the lower ball extraction hole 322a is left open, the ball will be removed from the lower ball supply port 323c. The game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 are guided by the guide means and are smoothly (immediately) discharged downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, allowing the player to play games without passing through the lower tray 322. It is possible to create an illusion that the balls are being ejected below the lower tray 322 (dollar box). Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the trouble of the game ball passing through the lower tray 322, and it is possible to allow the player to concentrate on the game and suppress a drop in interest.

Furthermore, since the production operation unit 400 makes more than half of the lower tray 322, including the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, difficult to see from the front, it is probable that the lower tray ball supply port 323c The lower plate ball removal hole 322a, etc. are located at the rear of the production operation unit 400. In other words, since more than half of the lower tray 322 is made to go around to the rear of the production operation unit 400, the actual size (capacity) of the lower tray 322 is smaller than the size of the lower tray 322 seen from the front. Since it is large, it is possible to secure a sufficient amount of game balls stored in the lower tray 322 compared to appearance.

In addition, when the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is open, the game ball released into the lower plate 322 from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is transferred to the lower plate ball supply port 323c on the bottom of the lower plate 322 and the lower plate ball. This is because the balls can be smoothly guided to the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a and discharged to the lower part of the lower tray 322 (dollar box) by the guiding means such as the ball guide portion 322c and the buffer portion 322d, which are located between the ball extraction hole 322a and the ball guide portion 322c, and the buffer portion 322d. , it is possible to prevent the game balls from circulating in the lower tray 322, and it is possible to reliably make the game balls circulating in the lower tray 322 difficult to see from the front (player). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the flow of game balls in the lower tray 322, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming distracted and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, if the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is left open, the game balls supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray 322 are immediately removed by the ball guide portion 322c etc. without the player noticing. Since the game ball can be discharged downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, the player is given the illusion that the game ball is being discharged below the lower tray 322 (to the dollar box) without passing through the lower tray 322. Can be done. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the trouble of the game ball passing through the lower tray 322, and it is possible to allow the player to concentrate on the game and suppress a drop in interest.

In addition, since the performance operation unit 400 makes it difficult to see from the front more than half of the storage area (storage area) of game balls in a plan view of the lower tray 322, the size of the lower tray 322 seen from the front is Since the actual lower tray 322 is more than twice the visible size, it is possible to secure a sufficient amount of game balls to be stored, similar to the lower tray of a conventional pachinko machine.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the door frame 3 bulges forward in the lower part of the game area 5a of the game board 5 when viewed from the front, where a game in which game balls are accepted into the general prize opening 2001 etc. is played. At the center in the left-right direction of the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320, a production operation unit mounting part 326a for attaching a large production operation unit 400 having the same height as the overall height of the dish unit cover 326 is provided. The plate front lower decoration part 326c on the left and right sides of the production operation unit mounting part 326a on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326, which is below the approximate center in the vertical direction, is recessed so that it can be scooped out backwards, so that the production operation unit can be attached to the plate unit cover 326. The effect operation unit 400 attached to the mounting part 326a can be made to appear to protrude significantly forward, and the effect operation unit 400 can be made to stand out. Therefore, the large performance operation unit 400 can be seen in an emphasized manner in the position where the upper tray and lower tray are seen side by side in a conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to make the player recognize that it is different from a pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing. The lower plate 322 is recessed rearward from the plate front lower decoration part 326c which is recessed rearward on both left and right outside of the production operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326, and a part of the production operation unit 400 is recessed. This allows the storage of game balls in the lower tray 322 (capacity of the lower tray 322) to be sufficient, so you can play games without worrying about the lower tray 322 being full of game balls. There is no need to play the game, the player can concentrate on the game, enjoy the game, and suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, since a part of the lower tray 322 wraps around to the rear of the production operation unit 400, when a player puts his/her hand into the lower tray 322 from the front, the fingertips may be attached to the rear wall of the lower tray 322 (the tray unit base). 323), the lower plate cover 340, etc., can be made difficult to touch. This makes it possible for the player to recognize through the sense of touch that a sufficient amount of game balls is stored, and when the game balls are stored in the lower tray 322, the amount of game balls stored in the lower tray 322 is Since it is possible to recognize that a large number of game balls are stored in the player, it is possible to give a feeling of satisfaction to the player, and it is possible to enjoy the game and suppress a decrease in interest. Furthermore, since the fingertips of the hand placed in the lower tray 322 are unlikely to touch the rear wall of the lower tray 322, the lower tray cover 340, etc., it provides the player with a feeling similar to that of the lower tray in a conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort to players who are accustomed to conventional pachinko machines, and it is possible to reassure the players and prevent them from losing interest in the game.

Furthermore, since the lower tray 322 is formed to become wider toward the back (backward), a sufficient amount of game balls can be stored even if the front side is small. In other words, since the front end side portion of the lower plate 322 is made small, the lower plate 322 is made less noticeable on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open (lower plate front decoration part 326c). This makes it possible to relatively make the production operation unit 400 more conspicuous. Therefore, it is possible to provide the performance operation unit 400 while ensuring a sufficient amount of game balls stored in the lower tray 322, and it is possible to increase the appeal to the players, entertain the players, and suppress a decline in interest. can be done.

In addition, since the sides and upper part of the lower tray 322 that goes around behind the production operation unit 400 are covered with the lower tray cover 340, when the player puts his/her hand into the lower tray 322, the fingertips etc. It is possible to prevent the player from being injured by touching the inner surface of the tray unit cover 326, the rear surface of the performance operation unit 400, etc., and the player can play the game in a safe state. Further, the lower tray cover 340 can prevent game balls from entering (spilling) from the lower tray 322 into the tray unit cover 326.

Furthermore, since the performance operation unit 400 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the dish unit cover 326, the performance operation unit 400 can be made more noticeable from the player's side, thereby strongly attracting the player's attention. In addition to making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing, it is possible to make the decorations by the performance operation unit 400 more visible, and to make the decorations and performances of the performance operation unit 400 more enjoyable, thereby preventing players from losing interest. It can be suppressed.

In addition, since the lower tray 322 is equipped with a lower tray ball supply port 323c that can communicate with the upper tray 321 and a lower tray ball extraction hole 322a that penetrates vertically so as to be openable and closable, Since it has the same function as the lower tray 322, when players who are accustomed to conventional pachinko machines play games with this pachinko machine 1, they will not be confused about the function of the lower tray 322, and will be able to play the same way as before. The player can enjoy the game by allowing the player to concentrate on the game. In addition, since the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a are respectively arranged at the rear of the production operation unit 400, when viewed from the front, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a are The pachinko machine 1 can be invisible from the player's side, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made neat and good-looking, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing and can strongly attract the interest of the players.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the plate unit 320 bulging forward is located below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 facing the game area 5a of the door frame 3. Attached to the base unit 430 of the performance operation unit 400 attached to the plate unit cover 326 is an inner operation button decorative member 432 that decorates the outside of the door frame side performance display device 460 that can present performances to the player. , an operation button 410 having a transparent button lens 411 with an outer diameter of about 15 cm and a center bulging in a direction away from the base unit 430 (outward) is attached so as to surround the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432; A cylindrical button base 413 is provided with a first button decoration part 411a, a second button decoration part 411b, and a button frame 412 on the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411, and protrudes from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 side. Since the first button decoration part 411a, the button base 413, etc. are provided, the outer edge, the inner side (rear side), etc. of the operation button inner decoration member 432 can be removed from the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432. The appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the interior decoration member 432 of the operation button provided therein, the door frame side effect display device 460, etc. can be further improved, and a decrease in player's interest can be suppressed.

In addition, the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 of the operation button 410 allow the operation button interior decoration member to be seen from the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432. 432 can be made difficult to see, even if the gap between the button lens 411 and the interior decoration member 432 of the operation button becomes relatively large, by increasing the outer diameter of the operation button 410. , can be well hidden by the first button decoration part 411a, etc., so that a large operation button 410 (button lens 411) with an outer diameter of about 15 cm can be realized without problems while preventing deterioration of appearance. . Therefore, since the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be made larger, this pachinko machine 1 can stand out, and it can strongly attract the attention of players, making it a highly appealing pachinko machine 1. can do.

Furthermore, since the button base 413 (main body portion 413a) is provided which protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 side, the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decorative member 432 can be viewed from an angle. At this time, the inner wall of the button base 413 can shield anything outside the operation button interior decoration member 432 and make it invisible, making it possible to further improve the appearance of the operation button 410.

In addition, since the transparent button lens 411 has a three-dimensional shape (hemispherical shape) that bulges in the direction away from the base unit 430 (outward), the surface near the outer periphery of the button lens 411 is A state in which it is inclined with respect to the plane formed by the opening on the front end side (a plane perpendicular to the direction in which the base unit 430 and the button lens 411 are lined up, that is, a plane perpendicular to the direction of movement of the operation button 410). Therefore, light is easily refracted when viewed from the player's side. Therefore, by combining the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 provided on the outer periphery, the area between the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 is The outer edge, the back side, etc. of the operation button interior decoration member 432 can be made difficult to see through the gap, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

In addition, since the button lens 411 is formed into a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward, the volume inside the operation button 410 becomes large, so that the interior decoration member 432 of the operation button disposed inside the operation button 410 and the door frame It becomes possible to make the side effect display device 460 larger and make it easier to move, and it becomes easier to provide the door frame side effect display device 460 that can entertain the player by using the inside of the operation button 410, which makes the game more enjoyable. A pachinko machine 1 that can entertain players can be realized.

Furthermore, since the button lens 411 is formed into a three-dimensional shape, the operation button 410 is given a design (decoration). This allows the player to easily select the pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to play.

Moreover, in the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, and the button frame 412 provided on the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411, since the button frame 412 is made opaque, the button frame 412 has a button It is possible to reliably hide the rear side of the operation button 410, the operation button inner decoration member 432, etc. from being seen through the gap between the lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432, and reduce deterioration of the appearance of the operation button 410 etc. You can make it look better.

The button lens 411 also has an opaque button frame 412 extending inward from the outer circumferential edge to the inside with a predetermined width, and cooperates with the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 411b to Since the gap between the main body part 413a of the button base 413 and the internal decoration member 432 of the button base 410 in the operation button 410 can be made difficult to see from the side, the gap between the main body part 413a and the internal decoration member 432 of the operation button can be made difficult to see. This makes it possible to increase the size, making it easier to secure a space in which the operation buttons 410 can move, and making it possible to move them favorably.

Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the button lens 411 is cylindrical, the outer periphery has no directionality compared to a case where the button lens 411 has a polygonal shape, making it easier to move the operating button 410 smoothly. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is enlarged, it can be pressed and operated without any problem, and it is possible to reliably let the player enjoy the player participatory performance using the operation button 410, thereby suppressing a drop in interest.

In addition, since the operation button 410 is enlarged, when a player participatory effect in which the player operates the operation button 410 is executed, it is possible to easily operate the operation button 410 without checking the position of the operation button 410. Since it is possible to make it easier to touch and press the operation button 410, it is possible to make it easier for the player to participate in a player participatory production using the operation button 410, thereby entertaining the player and reducing interest. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the door frame side effect display device 460 is provided within the operation button 410, the door frame side effect display device 460 within the operation button 410 attracts the player's attention by presenting an effect image according to the gaming state. The player can be strongly attracted to the player, and can enjoy the performance by the door frame side performance display device 460, as well as the effect images and light emitting effects from the door frame side performance display device 460 to encourage the player to press the operation button 410. It is possible to encourage the player to operate the game, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest by having the player actively participate and enjoy the player-participation type performance. Further, by executing the effect within the operation button 410, it is possible to make some players think that something good will happen, thereby increasing expectations for the game and suppressing a drop in interest. I can do it.

In addition, since the door frame side effect display device 460 can be visually recognized through the transparent button lens 411 of the large operation button 410 (the part inside the first button decoration part 411a), it is possible for the player to see this pachinko machine. It is possible to immediately recognize that the operation buttons 410 of 1 are clearly different from the operation buttons of conventional pachinko machines, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to be highly appealing to players. It is possible to increase the player's expectations for the performance using the operation button 410 and the door frame side performance display device 460 inside the operation button 410, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest.

Further, in the above embodiment, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 has the first button decoration part 411a formed on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412, but the invention is not limited to this. , a button lens 411 in which the first button decoration part 411a is not formed may be adopted.

Further, in the above embodiment, the opaque button frame 412 is attached to the outer periphery of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, but the button frame 412 is not limited to this. A decorative portion for hiding the rear side may be formed all around the lens 411 at a portion corresponding to the button frame 412.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, in the operation button 410, the button base 413 (main body 413a), but the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one protrudes toward the base unit 430 so as to surround only a portion of the entire outer periphery of the operation button interior decoration member 432. It may be something. The button base 413 may have a shape that follows the outer periphery of the button lens 411, or may have a shape that does not follow the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button base 413 may have decorations at least on the inner wall side.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the lower plate 322 is recessed backward only from the left outer part of the production operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326, but the present invention is not limited to this. The lower plate 322 may be recessed rearward from both left and right sides of the operation unit 400 and connected to each other at the rear of the production operation unit 400, or it may be recessed rearward only from the right outer part of the production operation unit 400, with a part It may be arranged to go around to the rear of the production operation unit 400.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the shape of the portion of the front surface of the tray unit cover 326 where the lower tray 322 is recessed rearward (the lower tray front decorative portion 326c) (the shape of the front end of the lower tray 322) is changed to a rearwardly curved surface. Although an example is shown in which the front surface is recessed in the shape of a polygonal column, the front surface may be recessed in the shape of a polygonal column or a polyhedron.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the production operation unit 400 was attached to the front of the dish unit cover 326, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be "equipped with an operation device such as an operation dial or a touch panel." , ``A device with a rotating body with a decoration on its surface,'' ``A device with a decorative body with a decoration, and a movable device that moves the decoration'', ``A character in line with the concept of a gaming machine, ``Items with decorations that three-dimensionally imitate items, logos, scenes (dioramas), etc.'', ``Those with stickers or printed decorations such as characters, items, logos, predetermined patterns, etc. that match the concept of the gaming machine.'' A member such as a unit or a panel may be attached. Further, the number of members attached to the attachment space 326j (the production operation unit attachment portion 326a) does not need to be one, and a plurality of (two or more) members may be attached. For example, separate members may be attached, such as a member attached to the upper half of the attachment space 326j and a member attached to the lower half of the attachment space 326j.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the plate unit cover 326 is shown as having a production operation unit attachment part 326a that is open to the front for attaching the production operation unit 400, but the production operation unit is not limited to this. A dish unit cover (for example, a panel-shaped cover part) that does not have an opening (presentation operation unit attachment part 326a) for attaching the operation unit 400 is used, and an attachment space 326j (or an attachment space) is provided at the rear of the dish unit cover. The remaining space of 326j) may be formed. Furthermore, it is desirable to decorate the front surface of such a dish unit cover with characters, items, logos, predetermined patterns, etc. that are in line with the concept of the gaming machine by stickers, printing, attaching decorative members, etc. .

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, an example in which an area slightly larger than half of the storage area (storage area) of game balls in a plan view of the lower tray 322 is covered by the performance operation unit 400 as a covering part so as to be difficult to see from the front. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and half or less of the game ball storage area in the lower tray 322 may be made difficult to see from the front, or the entire lower tray 322 may be made difficult to see from the front. It may be made difficult.

Further, in the above embodiment, the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are shown as having an arc shape partially provided in the circumferential direction. However, the second button decoration part 411b and the frame side lens 417 may have an annular shape extending over the entire circumference.

Further, in the above embodiment, the second button inner decoration part 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 in the production operation unit 400 is a decoration having a plurality of concentric polygons centered at the center, The present invention is not limited to this, and the second button interior decoration portion 432g may be a decoration having a plurality of concentric circles (including an oval shape) centered at the center.

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, the control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 69 to 74. FIG. 69 is a block diagram of the main control board, dispensing control board, and peripheral control board, FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals that are input and output to the connection terminal board for the rental device such as game balls that relays the electrical connection with the display board, and FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. FIG. 74 is a block diagram schematically showing the peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 74 is a block diagram of the periphery of the VDP with a built-in sound source in the liquid crystal display control section.

As shown in FIG. 69, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a first control unit MCG that performs control related to the game including the payout of prize balls, in addition to the generation process of the control power source (for example, +5V, etc.). , and a second control section SCG that performs effects related to the game progressed by the first control section MCG.

More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment adopts a structure in which various controls are shared by preparing a plurality of boards, and the main control board 1310 serves as the first control unit MCG. , a payout control board 951, and a power supply board 931, and a peripheral control board 1510 as the second control unit SCG. Hereinafter, in explaining the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the first control unit MCG will be explained in the order of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931, and then the The second control unit SCG (peripheral control board 1510) will be explained.

[7-1. Main control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game controls the power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on, and a predetermined period of time has passed since the power was turned on, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a is a microprocessor that has a built-in ROM that stores various control programs and various commands such as a main control program that is executed after the game is executed and controls gaming operations, and a RAM that temporarily stores data. A main control input circuit 1310b to which a detection signal from a detection switch is input, a main control output circuit 1310c to output various signals to an external board, etc., and a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to drive various solenoids. , and a power outage monitoring circuit 1310e that monitors signs of a predetermined voltage power outage or instantaneous power outage.

The main control MPU 1310a includes its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM"), its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), etc. A watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as "WDT with built-in main control 1310af") for monitoring its operation (system) and functions for preventing fraud are also built in.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. This nonvolatile RAM stores in advance a unique ID code that is given a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 1310a. This ID code once assigned is stored in non-volatile RAM and cannot be rewritten even using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can retrieve and refer to the ID code from the non-volatile RAM.

The main control MPU 1310a also includes a hardware random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in A hard random number circuit 1310an) is built-in. This main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an generates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range from 0 as the minimum value to 32767 as the maximum value is preset), The predetermined value is not fixed as the initial value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and the circuit is configured such that a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an first uses a clock signal ( Based on the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator (described later), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication at high speed, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. Once this is completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a without duplication. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a selects the value extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an as a jackpot. It is set as a random number for judgment.

The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information inputted with detection signals from various detection switches to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. In other words, in the main control input circuit 1310b, information based on detection signals from various detection switches inputted to its various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset described later, so that various signals based on the information are It is configured as a circuit that outputs from an output terminal.

The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type whose emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board, etc. are input to its various input terminals. A main control output circuit with a reset function 1310ca is provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information that has been reset, and a main control output circuit without a reset function 1310cb is not provided with a reset terminal and does not have a reset function. It consists of and. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. In other words, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function resets information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board, etc. by the main control system reset described later. The circuit is configured such that no signals based on the above are output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function is configured so that the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board, etc. is not reset by the main control system reset described later. The circuit is configured such that signals based on the data are output from its various output terminals.

A first starting port sensor 4002 that detects a game ball that has entered the first starting port 2002, a second starting port sensor 4004 that detects a game ball that has entered the second starting port 2004, and general A detection signal from the general winning hole sensor 4020 that detects a game ball that has entered the winning hole 2001 and a signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e are sent to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. has been entered. In addition, a gate sensor 4003 that detects game balls that have passed through the gate section 2003 shown in FIG. 60, a count sensor 4005 that detects game balls that have entered the grand prize opening 2005, and a back unit 3000 shown in A detection signal from the attached magnetic detection sensor 4024 that detects fraudulent activity using a magnet is sent to a predetermined input of the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 4161 attached to the game board 5 and the main control input circuit 1310b. It is input to the input terminal of the port.

The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of its predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca based on the detection signals from each of these switches. A control signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310ca to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and a drive signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the starting port solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay board 4161. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, the first special symbol display 1403 is transmitted via the panel relay board 4161 and the function display unit 1400. , outputs a drive signal to the second special symbol display 1405, the first special reservation number display 1404, the second special reservation number display 1406, the normal symbol display 1402, the status display 1401, and the round display 1407. do.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information related to the game (game information) from the output terminal of its predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with a reset function 1310ca, thereby controlling payout from the main control output circuit with a reset function 1310ca. By outputting various information related to games (gaming information) to the board 951 and outputting a signal (power outage clear signal) from the output terminal of its predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, A signal (power outage clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310ca to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e.

Note that in this embodiment, non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches are used for the first starting port sensor 4002, second starting port sensor 4004, gate sensor 4003, and count sensor 4005; The general winning a prize opening sensor 4020 uses a contact type ON/OFF mechanical switch. This is because the game balls frequently enter the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 and frequently pass through the gate portion 2003, so the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and Detection of game balls by the gate sensor 4003 also occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with long lifespans are used for the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. Further, when a jackpot game state advantageous to the player occurs, the big prize opening 2005 is opened and game balls frequently enter the ball, so that the count sensor 4005 frequently detects game balls. For this reason, a proximity switch with a long life is used for the count sensor 4005 as well. On the other hand, in the general winning hole 2001 where game balls do not enter frequently, detection by the general winning hole sensor 4020 does not occur frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter lifespan than a proximity switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 4020.

The main control MPU 1310a also controls the payout from the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function by transmitting various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of its predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function. Various commands are sent to the board 951 as serial data. When the payout control board 951 completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, it outputs a signal to that effect (payer ACK signal) to the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data at the main control input circuit 1310b, and inputs the input from the main control input circuit 1310b to its predetermined serial input port. The terminal receives various commands as serial data. When the main control MPU 1310a completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a signal to that effect (main payout ACK signal) from the output terminal of its predetermined output port as a main control output with a reset function. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to the payout control board 951.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data to the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function from the output terminal of its predetermined serial output port. , various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function to the peripheral control board 1510.

Here, the main serial transmission port that transmits various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a is mainly configured with a main control CPU core 1310aa, and in addition to a main control built-in RAM, a main serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of the main control various serial I/O ports, etc. connects a bus 1310ah. (See FIG. 79). The main serial transmission port 1310ae is for transmitting various commands as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510, and is mainly composed of a transmission shift register 1310aea, a transmission buffer register 1310aeb, a serial management section 1310aec, etc. (Fig. 79). When the main control CPU core 1310aa sets the command in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec, the serial management unit 1310aec transfers the command set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb from the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. It is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310aea and starts to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main cycle serial data. In this embodiment, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. Main control CPU core 1310aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to peripheral control board 1510 by setting a plurality of commands in transmission buffer register 1310aeb and then outputting a transmission start signal to serial management section 1310aec.

Note that the power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "capacitor") that serves as a backup power source to supply power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. BC0 (see FIG. 75). This capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM during power-off processing even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is generated by an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951, which will be described later, is operated within a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on. is output from the payout control board 951 and input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and with this as a trigger, it is completely erased from the main control built-in RAM by the main control MPU 1310a. (cleared).

[7-2. Payout control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, a payout control board 951 that controls the payout of game balls, etc. includes a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout, and an operation switch 954 that also serves various functions, as shown in FIG. and an error LED display 860b that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1. The operation switch 954, which also functions as a RAM clear switch, detects the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") based on the detection signal output when operated. .) outputs a RAM clear signal to completely erase the information stored in the memory.

[7-2-1. Payout control section]
As shown in FIG. 70, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payouts controls the power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on, and also controls the payout of game media that is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power is turned on. Detection from the payout control MPU 952a, which is a microprocessor that has a built-in ROM that stores various control programs including a payout control program that controls operations, a ROM that stores various commands, and a RAM that temporarily stores data, and various detection switches related to payout. A payout control input circuit 952b to which signals are input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external board, etc., and a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830. 952d, and a CR unit input/output circuit 952e for exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6. The payout control MPU 952a includes its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in RAM") and its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in ROM"). It also has a built-in watchdog timer to monitor its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

Under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control program transmits various information regarding games (gaming information) and various commands regarding payouts from the main control board 1310 through the payout control input circuit 952b in a serial format as a main payout serial data reception signal. to receive serial data. In addition, the payout control program generates a frame status 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the payout operation of the game ball, and operates the operation switch 954 as an error release unit. Create a 16-bit (2-byte) error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the first error cancellation command) based on the signal (detection signal), and send these error generation commands and error cancellation navigation commands to the payer as serial data. The signal is output as serial data to the receiving port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port 952b (command transmitting means). In addition, this payout control program executes the payout control program after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main processing is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is executed and the payout control is started. When an error occurs in the operation, the error is canceled based on a detection signal generated with the operation of the operation switch 954, and output of warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

In addition, this payout control program outputs a door frame opening command (first door opening command) when a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. When a detection signal (main body frame opening detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, a main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, this dispensing control program also executes a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when a detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) associated with the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. At the same time, when a detection signal (main body frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, a main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) is output.

The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various detection switches are input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. In other words, since the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals of the payout control input circuit 952b is not reset by the payout control system reset described later, the various signals based on the information are It is configured as a circuit that outputs from an output terminal.

The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type with an emitter terminal connected to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board, etc. are input to its various input terminals. A payout control output circuit with a reset function 952ca that has a reset function and is provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information that has been reset, and a payout control output circuit without a reset function 952cb that is not provided with a reset terminal and does not have a reset function. It consists of and. The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit into which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is input. In other words, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board, etc. by the payout control system reset described later. The circuit is configured such that no signals based on the above are output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is configured so that the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board, etc. is not reset by the payout control system reset described later. The circuit is configured such that signals based on the data are output from its various output terminals.

A ball outage detection sensor 827 that detects out of game balls in the supply path of the ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800, and a payout detection sensor 842 that detects game balls released from the payout ports 831b and 832b of the payout device 830. A detection signal from a blade rotation detection sensor 840 that detects the rotation of the payout blade 839 is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via a payout control input circuit 952b. Note that for the sake of explanation below, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 will be simply referred to as rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

Furthermore, the detection signals from the door frame release switch 618 that detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame release switch 619 that detects the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are sent to the dispensing control input circuit 952b. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control MPU 952a.

In addition, a detection signal from a full tank detection sensor 279 that detects whether the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 is full of stored game balls is first transmitted to the handle relay terminal board 315, the power supply board 931, and then to the payout board 931. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the control input circuit 952b.

The payout control MPU 952a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b in a serial data format at the input terminal of its serial input port, and receives operation signals (detected) from the operation switch 954. signal) is output to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When the payout control MPU 952a completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a signal to that effect (payer ACK signal) from the output terminal of its predetermined output port as a payout control output with a reset function. By outputting to the circuit 952ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the main control board 1310.

The payout control MPU 952a also controls payout control without a reset function by transmitting various commands for indicating the status of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data to the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function from the output terminal of its serial output port. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the output circuit 952cb to the main control board 1310. When the main control board 1310 completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, it outputs a signal to that effect (main payout ACK signal) to the payout control board 951. This signal (main payout ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b.

Further, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function from the output terminal of its predetermined output port. A drive signal is outputted from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor drive circuit 952d, and a drive signal is outputted from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, and the status of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the error LED indicator from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a drive signal for display on the error LED display 860b to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the error LED display 860b.

The error LED display 860b is a segment display and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, etc. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator 860b include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is reported that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is reported that there is a "connection abnormality" (specifically, the connection between the main control board 1310 and When the number "1" is displayed, it indicates that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it is notified that there are no game balls in the supply path of the dispensing device 830, and when the number "2" is displayed, it is notified that the ball is in play (specifically Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout rotating body and the game ball engage with each other near the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the payout device 830, making it difficult for the payout rotating body to rotate. When the number “3” is displayed, it indicates a “dispensing detection sensor error” (specifically, a malfunction has occurred in the dispensing detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 842). When the number "5" is displayed, it indicates a "retry error" (specifically, the number of retries for the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit). and when the number "6" is displayed, it indicates that the tank is "full" (specifically, the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 is filled based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279). When the number "7" is displayed, it indicates that "CR is not connected" (the electrical connection is made at any point from the payout control board 951 to the CR unit 6). When the number "9" is displayed, it indicates that the game ball is in stock (with prize ball stock (unpaid)) (specifically, game balls that have not yet been paid out). The number of pitches has reached a predetermined number).

Further, the payout control MPU 952a outputs the number of game balls actually paid out from the output terminal of its predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. The number of game balls actually put out is output from the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown).

Further, the payout control board 951 outputs various information regarding the game (gaming information) from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal board 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (constructed with a built-in infrared LED and a photo IC), and is connected to the game parlor (hall) via these plurality of photocouplers. ) The number of game balls, etc., and various information (game information, error details regarding the payout operation of game balls, or the fact that an error has occurred) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in the hall computer. The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and if an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1, the hall computer In addition to preventing the computer from malfunctioning or breaking down, the main control board 1310 that advances the game and the payout control board 951 that controls payouts etc. are connected from the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1. This prevents malfunctions or failures due to abnormal voltage being applied. The hall computer monitors the games of the players by grasping the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The game ball rental request signal from the ball rental button 328 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 329 are first sent to the frequency display board 365, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the game ball rental device connection terminal board. The signal is input to the CR unit 6 via 869. The CR unit 6 serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869, and this signal is transmitted to the CR unit. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the input/output circuit 952e. Further, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining balance of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls, and sends a signal for displaying the remaining balance on the ball rental/return display section 330. The signal is output to the ball rental device connection terminal board 869, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365, and this signal is input to the ball rental and return display section 330. Further, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball rental/return display section 330 receives the voltage supplied from the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. ing.

Note that the power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 is equipped with a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 75) as a backup power source for supplying power to the payout control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. There is. This capacitor BC1 allows the payout control MPU 952a to store various information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) during power cutoff processing even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is such that when the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period from power-on, the operation signal is sent to a predetermined input of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. It is input to the input terminal of the input port, and the payout control MPU 952a determines it as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and using this as a trigger, the payout control MPU 952a clears the information from the payout control built-in RAM. It is now completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function, and is also output from the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function to the main control board 1310.

[7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with the connection terminal board for rental equipment such as game balls, etc.]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control section 952 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365 will be explained based on FIG. 71. As shown in FIG. 71, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 not only relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951, but also connects the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. It also relays electrical connections between the boards of , the CR unit 6 and the connection terminal board 869 for rental equipment such as game balls are electrically connected, the terminal board 869 for rental equipment such as game balls etc. and the main door relay terminal board 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay terminal board 869 is electrically connected. The terminal plate 880 and the frequency display plate 365 are electrically connected). Between the board between the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869, between the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the payout control board 951, between the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay The terminal board 880 and the board, and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected by respective wirings (harnesses). Further, AC 24V, which will be described later, from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via a game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC +12V (DC+12V, hereinafter referred to as "+12V")) from the supplied AC 24V using a built-in voltage generation circuit (not shown) and outputs it together with the ground LG. , is supplied to the payout control board 951 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869, and is supplied to the frequency display board 365 through the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. .

On the component surface of the frequency display board 365, a pushbutton switch is mounted at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328, and a pushbutton switch is mounted at a position corresponding to the return button 329, and functions as a ball lending and return display section 330. A segment indicator is implemented. Further, a CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the component surface of the frequency display board 365. The display mode of the segment display and the light emission mode of the CR unit lamp 365d are configured to be visible to the player, so that the player and the clerk at the game parlor can confirm the display mode and the light emission mode. .

The ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via a game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and a main door relay terminal board 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is turned on (ON), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is sent to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal. The signal is input to the CR unit 6 via a plate 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the switch of the return button 329 is turned on (ON), and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is transmitted through the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. The signal is then input to the CR unit 6.

The ball rental/return display section 330 has three segment displays arranged in a row, and uses a so-called dynamic lighting method in which each one of these three-digit segment displays is sequentially driven. The lighting of the digit segment display is controlled. Through such lighting control, the ball rental/return display section 330 displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted into the CR unit 6 or displays an error of the CR unit 6. The ball rental and return display unit 330 receives digit signals DG0 to DG2 (total of 3 signals) for specifying a 1-digit segment display among the 3-digit segment display, and the specified 1-digit segment display. Segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (total of 7 signals) for specifying the content to be displayed by lighting are connected from the CR unit 6 to the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal. When input through the board 880, the one-digit segment display sequentially lights up according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and these three-digit segment display The contents indicated by the light emitted from the container can be visually recognized from the outside.

A CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display board 365 at a position adjacent to the ball rental/return display section 330. A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input to the CR unit lamp 365d via a terminal board 869 for connecting a rental device such as game balls and the like and a main door relay terminal board 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball rental available signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on a terminal board 869 for connecting a game ball rental device via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL from the AC 24V supplied from the power supply board 931 using a built-in voltage generation circuit, and when the ball rental button 328 and return button 329 are enabled and the ball rental is possible. controls the logic of the ball rental available signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and the manner in which the light is emitted can be visually confirmed from the outside. Further, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball rental/return display section 330 through a current limiting resistor mounted on a terminal board 869 for connecting a game ball rental device.

In the CR unit 6, when the ball rental button 328 is pressed, the ball rental operation signal TDS from the ball rental button 328 is transmitted from the frequency display board 365 to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. When input, the ball rental request signal BRDY is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. Then, the CR unit 6 sends a single payout operation start request signal to payout a predetermined number of rental balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, which corresponds to an amount of 100 yen) in one payout operation. BRQ is outputted to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869. The payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input sends EXS, which is a signal for notifying the start or end of one payout operation, to the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869. PRDY, which is a signal for outputting to the CR unit 6 and informing that the payout operation for paying out rented balls is possible or impossible, is sent to the connection terminal board for the rental device such as game balls. 869, and output to the CR unit 6. Note that, for example, if the hall clerk or the like has set the CR unit 6 in advance so that when the ball rental button 328 is pressed, game balls worth 200 yen are paid out, one payout operation is performed. This is done twice in a row, and once 25 balls worth 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls worth 100 yen are paid out, for a total of 50 balls worth 200 yen. Become.

In the CR unit 6, when the return button 329 is pressed, a return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is inputted from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball etc. rental device connection terminal board 869. Then, the prepaid card is ejected from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores a remaining amount after subtracting an amount corresponding to the number of game balls paid out as a result of pressing the ball lending button 328.

[7-3. Power supply board]
Next, the power supply board 931 of the first control unit MCG will be briefly explained. The power supply board 931 includes a power switch 934 that can electrically connect or disconnect 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island equipment, and a power supply control unit 935 that generates various power supplies. , a firing control section 953 that performs firing control by the firing solenoid 682 of the ball firing device 680 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250.

[7-3-1. Power control section]
The power supply control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectifier circuit 935a that rectifies 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island equipment when the power switch 934 is operated, and improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a. A power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c that smoothes the power whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 935b, and various types of direct current for supplying the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to various boards. A power generation circuit 935d that generates a power source is provided.

[7-3-2. Launch control section]
The firing control section 953, which performs firing control by the firing solenoid 682 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 255, mainly includes a firing control circuit 953a. The firing control circuit 953a receives an operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the strength (launching strength) of firing the game ball toward the gaming area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 302, and receives an operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307, A detection signal from a handle touch sensor 310 that detects whether or not a finger is touching the button, and a single button operation sensor 312 that detects whether or not the launch (launch) of a game ball is forcibly stopped according to the player's will. The detection signal from the handlebar relay terminal board 315 is inputted via the handle relay terminal board 315. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 are electrically connected, a CR connection signal is input to the firing control circuit 953a via the payout control board 951. .

The firing control circuit 953a controls the drive current for launching (launching) the game ball toward the gaming area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 and outputting the adjusted drive current to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 via the handle relay terminal plate 315, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320, Control is performed to send the game ball received by the ball sending member to the ball firing device 680 side.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
For such first control unit MCG, the peripheral control board 1510 of the second control unit SCG performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. A peripheral control unit 1511 that exchanges control commands and various information (various data) with an effect display drive board 4450 that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 shown in 19, a game board side effect display device 1600, and the door. A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the frame-side effect display device 460 and controls sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and calendar information specifying the year, month, day, and time. Rotate the knob to control the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") control unit 4165 that holds time information that specifies seconds, and the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573. A volume adjustment volume 4140a that can be adjusted by operation is provided.

[7-4-1. Peripheral control section]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs production control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on process that is executed when the power is turned on, and also controls the process that is executed after a predetermined period of time has passed since the power is turned on. A peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs such as sub-control programs that are executed and control performance operations, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control section 1512, which will be described later. Various information that continues beyond the peripheral control unit steady processing that is executed every time a blank signal is input (for example, schedule data that defines the screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600, light emission modes of various LEDs, etc.) peripheral control RAM 1511c that stores information for managing schedule data that defines A peripheral control SRAM 1511d that stores peripheral control SRAM 1511d (information for managing production flags, etc.) and a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control external WDT 1511e") that monitors whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally. ).

The peripheral control RAM 1511c can only retain the stored contents long enough for the power to be immediately restored after an instantaneous power outage, and can only be stored in a state where the power is cut off for a long time (in the event of a long power outage) ), the contents are lost, whereas the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter referred to as "SRAM electrolytic capacitor") provided on the power supply board 931 (not shown). This allows the stored contents to be retained for about 50 hours. By providing an SRAM electrolytic capacitor on the power supply board 931, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power is no longer supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, so the peripheral control SRAM 1511d stores the stored contents. It can no longer be held and loses its contents.

The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control, and when this timer times out, it is reset by hardware. In other words, if the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer times up) to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period of time, it can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, so that no reset is required.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has multiple built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and upon receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, it controls each decorative board of the game board 5 based on these various commands. Game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to multiple LEDs etc. provided on the lamp is sent from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). The game board side motor drive data is sent to the drive board 4170 and is used to output drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 5. Door side motor drive for transmitting a drive signal from the I/O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit or outputting a drive signal to an electrical drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 3 Data is sent from the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and peripheral door relay terminal board 882, Peripheral control output of door side light emission data from the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the multiple LEDs etc. provided on each decorative board in 3. It is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). In addition, a detection signal from a press detection switch for detecting the operation of the production selection left button 331, a detection signal from a press detection switch for detecting the operation of the production selection right button 332, and an operation of the press operation button 410 are also sent. The detection signal from the press detection switch for detection is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and this serialized production operation unit detection data is sent to the door-side serial transmission circuit. From there, it is input to the production operation unit detection serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photo sensors, etc.) for detecting the original position and movable position of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are sent to the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. The serialized movable object detection data is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and is input from the serial transmission circuit on the gaming board side to the serial I/O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via the peripheral control input circuit. There is. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input/output of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "WDT with built-in peripheral control"), and uses the built-in peripheral control WDT and the external peripheral control WDT 1511e together to prevent its own system from going out of control. We are diagnosing whether or not it is.

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, which is a microcomputer, will be explained. As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (direct memory access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and various peripheral control serial I. /O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control analog/digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A/D converter) 1511ak, and the like.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads and writes various data to and from the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via the internal bus 1511ah, while also reading and writing various data from the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, Various data are read and written to and from peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via internal bus 1511ah, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai.

Additionally, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data into the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h, while reading various data into the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Various data are read and written via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d, peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, and peripheral control various parallel I/O ports. DMA0 ~It has four channels called DMA3.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab storage device built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a, peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, and peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a. , peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, and other input/output devices to perform data transfer independently without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. While reading and writing to the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab via the internal bus 1511ah, peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and It reads from and writes to input/output devices such as the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac also includes storage devices such as a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d, which are externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and peripheral control various serial I/Os built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a. O port 1511ae, WDT 1511af with built-in peripheral control, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and input/output devices such as peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, without going through peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In order to transfer data independently, data is read and written to storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the external bus 1511h. For input/output devices such as serial I/O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, via peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511ai. Read and write.

The peripheral control bus controller 1511ad controls the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral bus 1511ai, and the external bus 1511h, and controls the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control Various devices including storage devices such as SRAM 1511d, peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converters 1511ak and other input/output devices. This is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between the two.

The various peripheral control serial I/O ports 1511ae include a serial I/O port for a lamp drive board, a serial I/O port for a motor drive board, a serial I/O port for a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, and a frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. A serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, a serial I/O port for the main control board, and a serial I/O port for obtaining information on the production operation unit.

The watchdog timer with built-in peripheral control (WDT with built-in peripheral control) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control, and when this timer times out, a hardware reset is performed. It has become. In other words, when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer, if it does not output a clear signal to clear the timer within a certain period of time (until the timer times up) to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa resets the watchdog timer. It will take a while. When the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within a certain period of time, the timer count can be restarted, so that no reset occurs.

The peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag not only output various latch signals such as the game board side motor drive latch signal and the door side motor drive light emitting latch signal, but also output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position, movable position, etc. of various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a serial transmission circuit on the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and the serial transmission circuit is serialized. It outputs a movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the serial transmission circuit on the game board side to the serial I/O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. This LED is a high-intensity white LED, and serves as a confirmation lamp to notify that the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state has been confirmed. In this embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LEDs and the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag are directly electrically connected, the path between the LEDs and the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag can be shortened. Therefore, noise countermeasures can be taken regarding the lighting control of LEDs, which has an important meaning in the game. Note that the lighting control of the LED is executed in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing described later, and other LEDs other than this LED are executed in the peripheral control unit steady processing described later. It has become.

The peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the resistance at the rotational position of the knob is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into a value in 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, the 1024-level value is divided into seven parts and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. At board volume 0, the sound is muted, and at board volume 6, the volume is set to maximum, and the volume is set so that it increases from board volume 0 to board volume 6. Music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source to be described later) so that the volume is set at the board volume 0 to 6. In this way, music and sound effects are made to flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotating operation of the knob.

In this embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds are used to notify the hall staff of malfunctions in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts against the pachinko machine 1, as well as content related to game production. (For example, to make the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 more impressive, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility that the game will shift to an advantageous game state.) The notification sound is also played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the system is such that the notification sound and notification sound are played completely independently of the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, and the sound can be adjusted from mute to maximum volume. The volume can be adjusted by controlling a liquid crystal display control section 1512 (VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source to be described later) using a program. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-mentioned board volume which is divided into seven levels, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume.
As a result, even if, for example, a hall clerk or the like turns the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume low, the music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 can be reproduced. Although the sound is low, the notification sound set at a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played when a problem occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when a player is committing a fraudulent act. Therefore, even if the volume of the performance sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the notification sound from making it difficult for the hall staff etc. to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the fraudulent activity of a player. In addition, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the rotation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound can be lowered so that it does not interfere with the music or sound effects. In addition to the music and sound effects, the volume of the playback may be increased to make the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 more powerful, and there is a possibility of shifting to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. You can also announce things that are expensive.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control section 1511, the liquid crystal display control section 1512, the RTC control section 4165, and the like. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data that generates screens to be drawn on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data that generates the light emission modes of various LEDs, and music. There are sound generation schedule data for generating sounds and sound effects, and electrical drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging screen data that defines the configuration of the screen, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. has been done. The schedule data for generating a light emission mode is configured by chronologically arranging light emission data that defines the light emission modes of various LEDs. The sound generation schedule data is composed of sound command data arranged in chronological order, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. This sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels of the built-in sound source of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which will be described later, and the output channel number of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. A track number is defined for instructing which track among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source is to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, and defines the operation of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Note that some of the various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are read directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed, while others are copied to the various control program copy area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, which will be described later, when the power is turned on, etc. There are some that are read out and executed. Also, some of the various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are read directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, while others are stored in various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c (described later) when the power is turned on. There are some items that are copied and read out.

In addition, the peripheral control ROM 1511b contains, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, a program for correcting the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600. Includes brightness correction program. This brightness correction program is for correcting the decrease in brightness of the game board side performance display device 1600 due to aging when the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is of an LED type. , acquires the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first powered on, the current date and time, brightness setting information, etc. from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165, which will be described later, and uses the acquired brightness setting information based on the correction information. Correct it. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. As described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in a range from 100% to 70% in 5% increments, and the current brightness. It includes the set brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, and, for example, the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first powered on, and the current date and time. Therefore, if six months have already passed since the power was first turned on to the game board side effect display device 1600, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness is When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75%, the brightness is set to 80% by adding 5%, which is the acquired correction information, to this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the backlight is turned on from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on. If December has already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, the game board side effect display device When turning on the backlight of 1600, the game board is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is 85%, which is 10%, which is the acquired correction information, added to this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a backup memory that specifically stores information to be backed up among various types of information updated by executing various control programs. A managed work area 1511ca, a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc that exclusively store copies of various information stored in the backup managed work area 1511ca, and peripheral control ROM 1511b. The various control program copy area 1511cd exclusively stores copies of the various control programs stored in the program, and the copies of various data, control data, schedule data, etc. stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. A various control data copy area 1511ce that is exclusively stored, and a backup unmanaged work area 1511cf that exclusively stores various information that is updated by executing various control programs but is not subject to backup. is provided.

Note that when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 (including when the power is restored due to a momentary power outage or power outage), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf and cleared to zero. Regarding the managed work area 1511ca, backup first area 1511cb, and backup second area 1511cc, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the power-on status command from the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 89) starts the RAM clear effect. and the game state (for example, it instructs the start of the performance when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on). Sometimes it is cleared to zero.

The backup management target work area 1511ca contains performance information (1fr ) is stored exclusively as a backup target, and the effect information (1ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later, is backed up. Bank 0 (1 ms) is stored exclusively as a target. Here, to briefly explain the names Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), "Bank" is the minimum management unit that represents the size of the storage area for storing various information. The following "0" means a normally used storage area for storing various information that is updated by executing various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the normally used storage area is the minimum management unit. "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area extending from the backup first area 1511cb to the backup second area 1511cc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as "Bank0". It means that it has a size. "(1fr)" means that when the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU 1511a Since a V blank signal is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, which indicates that it is ready to accept screen data from Since the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each time, "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" are respectively appended (direction information (1fr) and the performance described below). The same meaning is used for backup information (1fr). "(1ms)" means "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3" because the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, as described later. and "Bank4" (the same meaning is used for presentation information (1 ms) and presentation backup information (1 ms), which will be described later).

Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511cae. etc. are provided. The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa contains game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 5. is a storage area where is set, and the LED transmission data storage area 1511cab on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side contains lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting for a plurality of LEDs etc. provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3. This is a storage area where the door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting signals is set, and the received command storage area 1511cac receives various commands sent from the main control board 1310 and stores the received various commands. The RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad is a storage area in which various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a described later) is set, and the schedule data storage area 1511cae is is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to the received command are set based on the command received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy area 1511ce are read out and set, while various schedule data are directly read out from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. There are some that are set.

Bank0 (1ms) includes a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, a performance operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai, and A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak and the like are provided. The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf contains door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 3. The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag contains data for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 5. This is a storage area in which the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah is a storage area where the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set. This is a storage area where various information acquired such as the original position and movable position of various movable bodies is set.The performance operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai includes a performance selection left button 331, a performance selection right button 332, and an operation button 410. Various information obtained from the operation of the effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, operation button 410, etc. based on detection signals from various detection switches that detect operations (for example, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button operation history information created based on detection signals from various detection switches that detect the operation of the button 332 and the operation button 410. When the drive board 4450 receives the drawing data from the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the peripheral control board 1510 and determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data, it outputs the LOCKN signal to notify that fact based on the LOCKN signal, which will be described later. This is a storage area in which various information obtained about the frequency of malfunctions and the state of occurrence of malfunctions between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display drive board 4450 is set.

Note that the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of Bank0 (1fr), the LED transmission data storage area 1511cab of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side, and the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor of Bank0 (1ms). and the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag are each divided into two areas, a first area and a second area.

In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, when the peripheral control unit steady processing described later is executed, game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. , when the next peripheral control unit steady state processing is executed, game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, and the peripheral control unit steady state processing is performed. Every time the process is executed, game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. The peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and for example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, the previous peripheral When the control unit steady processing is executed, the processing is proceeded based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

The frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab stores the door side light emission data STL in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. - When DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the LED transmission data storage area 1511cab on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side. Each time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set alternately in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Ru. When the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed and, for example, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, Processing is now performed based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the LED transmission data storage area 1511cab on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side when the previous peripheral control unit steady process was executed. It has become.

When the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf executes the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing described later, the door When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. - DAT is set, and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side is set in the first area and second area of the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the motor on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side. Motor drive data STM-DAT is set alternately. The peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, and for example, in the current peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. When set, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT that was set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing was executed. Based on this, the process proceeds.

In the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. When the next peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. The peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, and for example, in the current peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Sometimes, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag when the previous peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process was executed. It looks like this.

Next, a description will be given of the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, which exclusively store copies of production information, which are various types of information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca. In the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs of two banks are managed as one page. The production information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is stored as production backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). , the production information (1ms) is copied at high speed to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and is stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area. is, as production backup information (1ms), sent by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. Copied quickly. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

Specifically, in the backup first area 1511cb, a total of two pairs are managed as one page, with Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area, is copied every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. It is copied at high speed to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by checking whether the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. This is done depending on whether the contents of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) match.

In addition, in the backup second area 1511cc, a total of two pairs are managed as one page, with Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area, is copied every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. It is copied to Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by checking whether the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. This is done depending on whether the contents of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511cb has a total of two pairs, Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. This is an area to be managed as a page, and the backup second area 1511cc has a total of two pairs: Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. This is an area for managing as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc.

In addition, in this embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is stored in the peripheral control unit every frame (1 frame) as effect backup information (1fr). Every time regular processing is executed, the content is copied at high speed to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and is stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area. The performance information (1ms) is stored as the performance backup information (1ms) in the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and each time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac performs high-speed copying, but the program for executing high-speed copying by these peripheral control DMA controllers 1511ac is shared. That is, in this embodiment, the performance information (1fr) and the performance information (1ms) are managed using a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a backup management target work area 1511da that exclusively stores backup target among various information updated by executing various control programs; A first backup area 1511db and a second backup area 1511dc are provided to exclusively store copies of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are the power-on state commands (see FIG. 89) sent from the main control board 1310 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 (including when power is restored due to instantaneous power failure or power outage). is for instructing the start of the RAM clear effect and the gaming state (for example, for instructing the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on). ), it is not cleared to zero. This point is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described above are cleared to zero. In addition, if the effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, or operation button 410 is operated within a predetermined time after powering on the pachinko machine 1, a screen for performing the setting mode will be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. It is now displayed. By operating the production selection left button 331, production selection right button 332, and operation button 410 according to the setting mode screen, each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, when a jackpot game state has occurred) (History, etc.) can be cleared, while the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. In this respect as well, the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are completely different.

The backup management target work area 1511da stores performance information (SRAM), which is various information that continues over days (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of jackpot gaming states and information for managing special performance flags). It consists of Bank 0 (SRAM) that exclusively stores information (information, etc.) as a backup target. Here, to briefly explain the name Bank0 (SRAM), as mentioned above, "Bank" is the minimum management unit that represents the size of the storage area for storing various information. The following "0" means a normally used storage area for storing various information that is updated by executing various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the normally used storage area is the minimum management unit. "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area extending from the backup first area 1511db to the backup second area 1511dc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as "Bank0". It means that it has a size. "(SRAM)" is "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3" because various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is backed up. , and "Bank4" (the same meaning is used for performance information (SRAM) and performance backup information (SRAM) to be described later).

Next, a description will be given of the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, which exclusively store copies of production information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. The first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc are managed with two banks as one pair, and each pair as one page. Performance information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, is stored as performance backup information (SRAM) every time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame. Then, it is copied at high speed to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

Specifically, in the backup first area 1511db, one pair is Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM), and one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame. The page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by checking whether the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

Further, in the backup second area 1511dc, one pair includes Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM), and one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame. The page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by checking whether the contents of Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) match.

As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 1511db is an area for managing Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair as one page, and the backup second area 1511db is an area for managing this pair as one page. 1511dc is an area where Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) form a pair, and this pair is managed as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. LCD display control section]
A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the drawings of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 and controls the sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is shown in FIG. As such, a sound source for controlling sounds such as music and sound effects is built-in (hereinafter referred to as "built-in sound source"), and the drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is A VDP (Video Display Processor) 1512a with a built-in sound source that performs control, various character data on the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, as well as various types of music, sound effects, etc. A liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b that stores sound data, an audio data transmission IC 1512c that transmits serialized music, sound effects, etc. as audio data toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the door frame side effect display device 460. The serialized drawing data is sent to the effect display drive board 4450 which is placed near the bottom of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed in the plate unit 320. A differential circuit 1512e that differentiates LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, into a positive signal and a negative signal. In addition to the signal output from the door frame side production transmitter IC 1512d, a signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, and when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, this signal is input. A forced switching circuit 1512f is connected to the circuit so as to transmit the signal, and when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d; It is equipped with This liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b contains, for example, decorative patterns used for displaying decorative patterns as image data used to display images displayed in the display areas of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Image data, background image data used to display a background image, tone adjustment image data used to display a volume adjustment image, standby image data used to display a standby image, etc. are stored as character data.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511. 1511cae is set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the first screen data of the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various types of peripheral control RAM 1511c. After extracting it from the control data copy area 1511ce and outputting it to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, when a V blank signal, which will be described later, is input, the first screen data is copied according to the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The next screen data following is extracted from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, updates the screen data arranged in chronological order in the screen generation schedule data every time the V blank signal is input. Then, the first screen data is output one by one to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source.

Additionally, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the sound command data at the beginning of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The sound command data at the beginning of the schedule data for sound generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is extracted and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the surroundings. After extracting various control data from the copy area 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and outputting it to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, the input of the V blank signal triggers the start of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The next sound command data following the sound command data is extracted from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, and receives the V blank signal. Each time, the sound command data is output one by one to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a starting from the first sound command data.

[7-4-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
In addition to the built-in sound source described above, the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source receives screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and based on this input screen data, as shown in FIG. Extract side character data and upper plate side character data to create sprite data and generate drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460 It also has a built-in VRAM (hereinafter referred to as "built-in VRAM") for this purpose. The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs the drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 among the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM, and also outputs the drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 to the door frame side effect display device 460. The drawing data is sent from channel CH2 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and an effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. By outputting (transmitting) to the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized.

The drawing data output from channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, whereas the drawing data output from channel CH2 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay. The terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display that is placed near the bottom of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and stored in the plate unit 320. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive board 4450. As described above, the drawing data output from channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, so the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side effect display device 1600 Although the length of the wiring required for the path from channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short because they are respectively attached to the game board 5, the drawing data output from channel CH2 is The peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5 because it is output from the control board 1510 to the door frame side performance display device 460 via the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. On the other hand, the effect display drive board 4450 is housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, so that it can be connected from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450. Since the length of the wiring required for the route is much longer than that for channel CH1, it becomes extremely susceptible to the influence of noise. Therefore, for channel CH2, where the length of the wiring for transmitting drawing data is extremely long compared to channel CH1, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d uses THine Electronics Co., Ltd.'s "V-by-One ( By adopting a differential communication method called "Registered Trademark", the system is not easily affected by noise.

Channel CH1 uses a serial differential interface called LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling), while channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data output from channel CH2 is composed of three video signals: a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals: a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. It is serialized by the door frame side production transmitter IC4610d, and is stored in the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the pan unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display driving board 4450. The various serialized signals are restored to parallel signals by the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs one screen worth of screen data (one frame worth) to be displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a Based on this input screen data, character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b to create sprite data for one screen (1 of the generated drawing data, the image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and the image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1. Image data for the effect display device 460 is transmitted from the channel CH2 to a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and a effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via. In other words, "screen data for one screen (one frame)" means that drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is stored in the built-in VRAM. This refers to the data to be generated above.

In addition, the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and also outputs image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. (Transmission) Then, a V blank signal is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, which indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps, so a V blank signal is output. The interval is approximately 33.3ms (=1000ms÷30fps). The peripheral control MPU 1511a is configured to execute peripheral control section V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, in response to input of this V blank signal. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Furthermore, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may vary somewhat depending on the production lot of the peripheral control board 1510 in which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the VDP with built-in sound source 1512a are mounted.

Note that the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source employs a frame buffer method. This "frame buffer method" means that drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM). This is a method in which drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in this frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460.

Furthermore, when the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a based on a command from the main control board 1310, the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source outputs the music stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b, as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as music and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, the sound data such as music and sound effects is incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and is used according to the output channel number. The output channel is set, and the music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is installed, and multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source have production sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sub-volume value that adjusts the sound data and its volume, the sound data and volume of the notification sound that is used to notify the hall staff, etc. of the occurrence of a malfunction in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1 can be adjusted. Includes subvolume values. Specifically, for the production sound, the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a described above is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotating operation of the knob of the volume 4140a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by shifting to the setting mode by operating the effect selection left button 331, the effect selection right button 332, or the operation button 410. In the setting mode, for example, the sub-volume value is decreased by operating the effect selection left button 331, the sub-volume value is increased by operating the effect selection right button 332, and the sub-volume value is determined by the operation button 410.

The sound specification data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is In fact, it is amplified to the master volume value that corresponds to the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and this amplified performance sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized performance sound is at the maximum volume, it is amplified to the master volume value and is output from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The volume is set to the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the production sound, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used among multiple tracks, and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used. The board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the set volume adjustment volume 4140a is synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized performance sound is adjusted to the volume actually flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. This amplified performance sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c, and for the notification sound, the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used, A maximum volume that is completely independent of the volume adjustment based on the rotating operation of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, which is set as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used, is synthesized, The volume of this synthesized notification sound is actually amplified to the master volume value that corresponds to the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and this amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. .

Here, we will briefly explain the control for playing a notification sound in order to notify the hall clerk of a malfunction in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1 when the production sound is being played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. To explain, first, the subvolume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and the sound data of the track in which this production sound is incorporated, the subvolume value set for muting, and the notification The sound data of the track in which the sound is embedded and the sub-volume value where the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized performance sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually set at the bottom. It is amplified to a master volume value that corresponds to the sound volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified performance sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In other words, only the maximum volume notification sound is actually heard from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, it does not flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the effect sound is progressing according to the above-described sound generation schedule data. In this embodiment, the notification sound is made to flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and after this predetermined period has elapsed, the sound that has been forcibly set to mute is generated. The volume of the production sound that is progressing according to the schedule data is set again as the sub-volume value by the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a (at this time, the production selection left button 331, If the production selection right button 332 or the operation button 410 is operated to shift to the setting mode and have been adjusted, the sub-volume value of the adjusted production sound is set), the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It flows from

In this way, when the production sound is being played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, when a notification sound is played to notify the hall clerk of a malfunction in the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1, Although the volume of the production sound is muted and the notification sound is played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the production sound that has been muted is progressing according to the sound generation schedule data, so the notification sound does not continue for a predetermined period of time. When the sound stops flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the production sound does not start playing again from the point where the notification sound started, but continues according to the sound generation schedule data until a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the notification sound started playing. The flow will start again from where it left off.

[7-4-2b. LCD and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 74, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b stores game board side character data for drawing on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and for drawing on the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. The upper plate side character data are stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the audio data transmission IC 1512c receives the serialized audio data from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, it outputs the audio data on the right side as serial data using a differential method in which it becomes a plus signal and a minus signal, and sends it to a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) and a relay around the frame. It is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and is also sent to the peripheral control output circuit (not shown) as serial data of a differential method that makes the left audio data a plus signal and a minus signal. , the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. As a result, music, sound effects, etc. matching various performances are reproduced in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

Note that the audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data between the boards from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data for the left and right sides, so that, for example, the plus signal of the left audio data, Even if the negative signal is affected by noise, when the noise component on the positive signal and the noise component on the negative signal are combined by the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 into one left audio data, Since noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-4-2d. Transmitter IC for door frame side production]
As shown in FIG. 74, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d receives drawing data output from channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. As described above, the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data consists of three video signals: a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals: a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. , a green video signal, and a blue video signal each consist of 8 bits, a total of 24 bits. In this embodiment, the red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are 6 bits each, 18 bits in total, so the upper 6 bits of each video signal are the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC1512d. Since the lower two bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for the human eye to distinguish, the lower two bits containing weak color information are invalidated even though they are output from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source.

Three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, which are drawing data output from channel CH2 of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. When , is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d sends three video signals: a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, a horizontal synchronization signal, and a vertical synchronization signal. The three synchronizing signals, the signal and the clock signal, are serialized into serial signals (serial data) using a differential method called THine Electronics Co., Ltd.'s "V-by-One (registered trademark)" and can be transmitted using only one differential pair cable. These various signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the pan unit 320 of the door frame 3.

As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, so the path from channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is Although the wiring length required for (the first path) is short, the drawing data output from channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is transferred from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the door. Since it is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the frame 3, the route from channel CH2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 (the Since the length of the wiring required for the second route is much longer than the length of the wiring required for the first route, it becomes extremely susceptible to the influence of noise.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported on the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed, the door frame 3 is pivoted on the closed side, which is the opposite side of the locking unit 700 provided along the open side of the main body frame 4. Various boards and door frames provided on the main body frame 4 side, for example, from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4 to the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 provided on the door frame 3. It is necessary to run various wirings for electrically connecting various substrates provided on the third side. However, on the closed side of the main body frame 4, in addition to the dispensing device 830, the game balls put out by the dispensing device 830 can be guided to the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320. A full tank branching unit 770 is arranged which can branch and guide the put out game balls to the lower tray 322 side when the tank is full. Moreover, on the lower side of the main body frame 4, a payout unit 800 is arranged, which is a unit made up of a power supply board 931 and the like to which power is supplied from the pachinko island equipment. In this way, the various wirings that electrically connect the various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and the various boards provided on the door frame 3 side are routed near the dispensing device 830, the full tank branch unit 770, the power supply board 931, etc. In addition to the noise caused by the drive of the payout motor 834 provided in the payout device 830, the noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game balls and the power line supplied from the pachinko island equipment where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. is in an environment where it is subject to noise, etc.

Therefore, for channel CH2, where the length of the wiring for transmitting drawing data is extremely long compared to channel CH1, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a By adopting a differential communication system called ``V-by-One (registered trademark)'', the system is not easily affected by noise. In this embodiment, a transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effects provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and a receiver ICSDIC0 for door frame side effects (described later) provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, As mentioned above, a differential 1-pair cable is used as the wiring for electrically connecting the transmitter and the receiver, but this differential 1-pair cable consists of two wires. are not just parallel lines, but twisted pair cables. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together, and is also called a twisted pair wire.

Here, a case will be briefly described in which a parallel wire is used as a differential one-pair cable that electrically connects a transmitter and a receiver. For channel CH2 of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, where the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is much longer than that of channel CH1 of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, THine Electronics has developed a transmitter IC1512d for the door frame side performance provided on the peripheral control board 1510. Even if a differential communication system called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by Co., Ltd. is used to make it less susceptible to noise, this kind of hardware configuration alone is not enough to prevent electrostatic discharge from the game balls. When the serial data on the parallel lines is affected by noise or noise that has entered the power line supplied from the pachinko island equipment where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, a performance display is stored in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. Since the noise is not canceled (removed) when received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the drive board 4450, the serial data is received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 in an affected state. , the drawing data output from channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as a disordered data different from the normal one, and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, it is displayed as a so-called sandstorm. There is a problem in that a certain image is displayed and it becomes impossible to recognize what the image is.

Therefore, in this embodiment, for channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely long compared to channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, the side of the door frame provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is The production transmitter IC1512d uses a differential communication method called ``V-by-One (registered trademark)'' by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. to create a mechanism that is less susceptible to the effects of noise, and in addition to this hardware configuration. Therefore, even if differential serial data is affected by noise that has entered the wiring, a twisted pair cable that can cancel (remove) that noise on the receiving side is electrically connected between the transmitter and receiver. Adopted as a differential 1-pair cable. As a result, even if the serial data in the twisted pair cable is affected by noise caused by electrostatic discharge from game balls, noise intruding into the power line supplied from the pachinko island equipment where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the door frame Since the noise is canceled (removed) when received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of No. 3, the channel of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source The drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, and output to the door frame side effect display device 460. By doing so, the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control section 1512 can be reliably displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460. By canceling (removing) noise, it is possible to prevent an image such as a sandstorm from being displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 in which it is impossible to recognize the image at all. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's desire to play. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's desire to play due to the influence of noise.

In addition, in this embodiment, a transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effects provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and a receiver ICSDIC0 for door frame side effects, which will be described later, provided in an effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. A frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are interposed between the connections between and, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not constructed integrally, but are assembled separately, and the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. After the work of attaching the door frame 3 to the door frame 4, electrically connect various wiring such as harnesses and twist cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side. This makes it possible to electrically connect various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and various boards provided on the door frame 3 side. With this configuration, maintenance of the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be performed by removing the door frame 3 from the main body frame 4 after opening the door frame 3 from the main body frame 4 and removing various wirings. If the defect that occurred in the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, replace the defective door frame 3 with another door frame 3' to the main frame 4, and replace the door frame 3 with another door frame 3'. By electrically connecting various wirings from various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side, various wirings from various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and various wirings provided on the door frame 3' side can be connected electrically. The substrate can be electrically connected to the substrate.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described above, the door frame side presentation transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 employs a differential type communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. In addition to this hardware configuration, even if serial data using the differential method is affected by noise that has entered the wiring, the receiving side can cancel (remove) that noise. ) was adopted as a differential 1-pair cable to electrically connect the transmitter and receiver. Specifically, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and between the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the effect display drive. The substrates 4450 and 4450 are electrically connected to each other by twisted pair cables, whereas the power wiring and wiring for transmitting various other signals are electrically connected to each other by harnesses. As a result, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 have, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting differential serial data transmitted by the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. A power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals are mixed together. For this reason, the above-mentioned video transmission wiring patterns are formed on the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, respectively, at a predetermined distance apart from the power supply wiring pattern and the various signal wiring patterns. The path from the transmitter to the receiver traverses multiple relay terminal boards, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, so the video transmission terminals formed on these multiple relay terminal boards are Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, a part of the signal that transmits serial data using the differential method sent by the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is reflected and becomes noise, or the output level of the signal decreases. occurs. Therefore, in this embodiment, the video transmission wiring patterns formed on these plurality of relay terminal boards are subjected to impedance matching.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the boards between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and between the peripheral door relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay The terminal board 882 and the production display drive board 4450 are electrically connected by twisted pair cables, whereas the power supply wiring and wiring for transmitting various other signals are electrically connected by harnesses. However, one wire of the twisted pair cable is red and the other wire is gray, and the wire that supplies power is red and several other wires of the harness are gray. . Note that the wiring for supplying power may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
The signal output from the door frame side production transmitter IC 1512d is sent to the forced switching circuit 1512f, a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is configured to be transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 that is housed. This forced switching circuit 1512f receives LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. is input into a differential circuit 1512e after being differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal. This differential circuit 1512e serializes the LOCKN signal output request data into a differential type serial signal (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data includes the period during which the startup screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the power is turned on of the pachinko machine 1, and the period during which the game board side performance display device 1600 displays a demonstration while waiting for a customer. During the period, a transmitter IC 1512d for the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and a receiver ICSDIC0 for the door frame side effect provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, which will be described later, are installed. , that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, is sent as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side effect display device 460. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the forced switching circuit 1512f connects the circuit so as to transmit these two signals. The circuit is configured such that the circuit is connected to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d when the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are not input to the conversion circuit 1512e. has been done. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the two signals, so that the two signals are , is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, while in the differential circuit 1512e. When the two differential signals of the positive signal and the negative signal are not input, the circuit is connected to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, so the door frame side effect transmitter A signal output from the IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a displays a startup screen on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, and performs a demonstration using the game board side performance display device 1600 while waiting for a customer. During the period, LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted toward the effect display drive board 4450 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the pan unit 320 of the door frame 3.

When the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3 receives a serial signal (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which will be described later, the effect display drive board 4450 displays various serialized signals. It mainly consists of a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that restores the signal to a parallel signal and outputs it to the door frame side effect display device 460.

The door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 receives the drawing data from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and if it determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data, it sends a LOCKN signal, which will be described later, to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , and is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. When a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the input LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source to generate an image to convey that fact and outputs it to the game board side performance display device 1600. This is displayed on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 to notify the user.

Furthermore, when the door frame side production receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the two received signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal, which will be described later, is sent to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. It is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control board 1510. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. As a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input to the tray unit of the door frame 3. On the other hand, if the LOCKN signal is not input, it can be determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, and a notification image (for example, ``A malfunction has occurred in the effect display device on the door frame side. Please call the store staff.") is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 by controlling the built-in sound source VDP 1512a, and a notification sound to that effect (for example, ``There is a problem with the door frame side effect display device.'' ”) is outputted to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, thereby producing a notification sound from the speaker provided in the door frame 3. As a result, notification can be made using the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly played from the speaker etc. provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all of the light-emitting decorative LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 may be turned on.

[7-4-3. RTC control section]
As shown in FIG. 72, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds calendar information that specifies the year, month, and day and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second is configured with an RTC 4165a as its center. This RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa (hereinafter referred to as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa") that holds calendar information and time information. The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is used in this embodiment) as a driving power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. In other words, the RTC 4165a is not supplied with any power from the peripheral control board 1510 (Pachinko machine 1), but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently from the peripheral control board 1510 (Pachinko machine 1). Thereby, even if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and maintain calendar information and time information by supplying power from the battery 4165b.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and uses the acquired calendar information and time information. Based on this, the effects can be played out on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Examples of such effects include, for example, if it is December 25th, a Christmas tree or reindeer screen will be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, or if it is New Year's Eve, a new year countdown will be displayed. For example, the screen to be executed may be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

In addition, in addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds LED brightness setting information if the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of an LED type. There is. If the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of an LED type, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the brightness of the backlight by PWM control. . The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600, in a range from 100% to 70% in 5% increments, and the currently set game. It includes the brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460.

Additionally, in addition to calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa also stores calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information as information on the year, month, day, hour, minute, and second when it was first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date and time information is also stored.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a controls ON/OFF or only ON of the backlight when cold cathode tube type backlights are installed in the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. It is supposed to be done.

Various information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date and time information, is set on the manufacturing line of the gaming machine manufacturer. On the manufacturing line, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600, input date and time information is inputted on the manufacturing line as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first powered on. The manufacturing date and time are set as month, day, hour, minute and second.

In this way, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores, in addition to calendar information and time information, brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type, input date and time information, etc. , it is possible to store and hold information that needs to be maintained independently of the model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the probability of occurrence of a jackpot game state with a low probability or a high probability).

Also, depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the brightness setting information etc. stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright with the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 set at the manufacturing date and time. , it may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the effect selection left button 331, the effect selection right button 332, or the operation button 410, it is possible to shift to a setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. In the setting mode, for example, the brightness is decreased by operating the effect selection left button 331, the brightness of the effect selection right button 332 is increased, and the brightness is determined by the operation button 410. If you operate the effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, or operation button 410 within a predetermined time after powering on the pachinko machine 1, a screen for performing the setting mode will be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, if you operate the effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, or operation button 410 during the period when the game board side effect display device 1600 is demonstrating while waiting for a customer, the setting mode will be changed. A screen for performing the game is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. By operating the effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, and operation button 410 according to this setting mode screen, calendar information and time information can be reset, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be changed. You can adjust the brightness to your desired level. The adjusted desired brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is overwritten (updated and stored) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

In addition, in the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the brightness correction program described above, so that when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of the LED type, the game board side effect is adjusted. A decrease in brightness due to aging of the display device 1600 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on, and calculates calendar information and time specifying the year, month, and day. The current date and time is determined by acquiring time information that specifies minutes and seconds, and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted in 5% increments from 100% to 70%. The brightness setting information including the brightness adjustment information for the game board and the currently set brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is acquired. This acquired brightness setting information is corrected based on correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

For example, if six months have already passed from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first powered on and the current date and time, In addition to acquiring the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is 80%, which is an additional 5% that is the correction information obtained for the brightness. If 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first powered on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. , when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the LED brightness included in the brightness setting information is 75%, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 85%, which is 10%, which is the acquired correction information, added to this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is the same.

Note that the current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring calendar information that specifies the year, month, and day and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, or by using the peripheral information described later. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 in the control unit power-on process The current date and time may be specified by acquiring the current time information set in the time information storage section and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510.

[7-4-4. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjustment volume 4140a can adjust the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 4140a has a resistance value that can be changed by rotating the knob, and the electrically connected peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak adjusts the resistance of the knob. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into a value in 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, as described above, the 1024-level value is divided into seven parts and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. At board volume 0, the sound is muted, and at board volume 6, the volume is set to maximum, and the volume is set so that it increases from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In this way, music and sound effects are made to flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotating operation of the knob. In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds to notify the hall staff of the occurrence of a malfunction in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity with respect to the pachinko machine 1, and game effects. (For example, to make the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 more impressive, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility that the game will shift to an advantageous gaming state.) (etc.) is also played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the system is such that the notification sound and announcement sound are played completely independently of the volume adjustment based on the rotating operation of the knob. The volume from mute to maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source) using a program.

The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-mentioned board volume which is divided into seven levels, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. As a result, even if, for example, a hall clerk or the like turns the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume low, the music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 can be reproduced. Although the sound is low, the notification sound set at a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played when a problem occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when a player is committing a fraudulent act. Therefore, even if the volume of the performance sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the notification sound from making it difficult for the hall staff etc. to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the fraudulent activity of a player.

In addition, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the rotation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound can be lowered so that it does not interfere with the music or sound effects. In addition to the music and sound effects, the volume of the playback may be increased to make the screens displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 more powerful, or to provide an advantageous effect for the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility of transitioning to a gaming state.

In this embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, the left production selection button 331 and the right production selection button By operating the button 332 or the operation button 410, the user can enter a setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. If you operate the effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, or operation button 410 within a predetermined time after powering on the pachinko machine 1, a screen for performing the setting mode will be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, if you operate the effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, or operation button 410 during the period when the game board side effect display device 1600 is demonstrating while waiting for a customer, the setting mode will be changed. A screen for performing the game is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. By operating the effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, and operation button 410 according to this setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a from an analog value to a digital value, and calculates the voltage for this converted value. By adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the production selection left button 331, production selection right button 332, or operation button 410, it is now possible to increase or decrease the value of the board volume. ing. This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for the track in which sound data of production sounds such as music and sound effects is incorporated, among the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. However, it is not reflected in the volume adjustment of the above-mentioned notification sound or notification sound.

As described above, in this embodiment, the volume of music and sound effects is adjusted by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the volume of the music and sound effects is adjusted by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a. There are two ways to adjust the volume of music and sound effects by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation 410, and increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume. Since the volume adjustment volume 4140a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, it is necessary to keep the main body frame 4 open from the outer frame 2. In this case, the person who can turn the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a is the clerk at the hall. However, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk may feel too low for the player, making it difficult to hear the music or sound effects, or may feel too loud for the player, making the music or sound effects too loud. Therefore, after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, within a predetermined period of time, the performance selection left button 331, the performance selection right button 332, and the operation button 410 may be operated, or the performance display device 1600 on the game board side displays a demonstration while waiting for a customer. If you operate the effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, or operation button 410 during the period when By operating the effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, and operation button 410 according to this setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. This allows the player to adjust the volume of the music and sound effects to the desired volume, so if the volume adjusted by the hall clerk feels low and it is difficult to hear the music or sound effects, click the left button on the production selection button. 331. You can increase the volume to the desired level by operating the production selection right button 332 or the operation button 410. If you feel that the volume adjusted by the hall staff is too loud and the music and sound effects are noisy, you can select the production selection. The volume can be lowered to a desired level by operating the left button 331, right effect selection button 332, and operation button 410.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, if the pachinko machine 1 continues to be in a state where no games are played for a predetermined period of time, enters a customer waiting state, and the demonstration by the game board side performance display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times). , the volume adjusted last time by the player who was sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 while playing the game is canceled and the volume is initialized. In this initialization of the volume, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a. As a result, if a player who played the game while sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time feels that the adjusted volume is too low and has difficulty hearing the music and sound effects, the player who played the game while sitting in the front of the pachinko machine 1 this time A player who plays a game can increase the volume to a desired level by operating the performance selection left button 331, performance selection right button 332, and operation button 410. If the player who was playing the game feels that the adjusted volume is too loud and the music and sound effects are noisy, the player who is sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game can press the performance selection left button 331 and the performance selection right button. The volume can be lowered to a desired level by operating the button 332 or the operation button 410.

[8. Power system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 75. First, the power supply board 931 will be explained, and then the power supplied to each control board and the like will be explained. Note that the ground (GND) of the various boards and the ground (GND) of the various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 931, and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board]
The power supply board 931 is electrically connected to a power cord, and the plug of this power cord is inserted into a power outlet of the pachinko island equipment. When the power switch 934 is operated, the power supplied from the pachinko island equipment is supplied to the power supply board 931, and the pachinko machine 1 can be powered on.

The power supply board 931 includes a power supply control section 935 and a firing control section 953, as shown in FIG. The power supply control unit 935 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from 24 volts (AC 24V) supplied from the pachinko island equipment, supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, and controls the firing control. The section 953 is a circuit that drives and controls the firing solenoid 682 of the ball firing device 680 and the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250.

The power supply control section 935 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power supply generation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island equipment is supplied via the power supply board 931 to the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869, and is also supplied to the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. This synchronous rectifier circuit 935a rectifies 24 volts of alternating current (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island equipment and supplies it to the power factor correction circuit 935b. This power factor improvement circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified power, creates +37V DC (hereinafter referred to as "+37V"), and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 935c. This smoothing circuit 935c removes the ripple of the supplied +37V, smoothes the +37V, and supplies the smoothed +37V to the firing control circuit 953a and the power generation circuit 935d of the firing control section 953, respectively.

The capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951. It supplies backup power to the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control).

The firing control circuit 953a of the firing control unit 953 uses +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as a driving power source to drive the game ball to the game area 5a shown in FIG. Control is performed to adjust the drive current for launching (shooting) the ball toward the ball and output it to the firing solenoid 682, while outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250. The sending member receives one game ball stored in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320, and controls the ball sending member to send the received game ball to the ball firing device 680 side.

The power generation circuit 935d generates DC +5V (DC+5V, hereinafter referred to as "+5V"), DC +12V (DC+12V, hereinafter referred to as "+12V"), and DC from +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c. +24V (DC+24V, hereinafter referred to as "+24V") is generated and supplied to the payout control board 951 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively. A power supply system to which +5V is applied and supplied is a +5V power supply line, a power supply system to which +12V is applied and supplied is a +12V power supply line, and a power supply system to which +24V is applied and supplied is a +24V power supply line.

+5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d is supplied to the payout control board 951, as will be described later. The +5V supplied to the payout control board 951 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control filter circuit 951a, and is also applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. ing. The +12V generated by the power generation circuit 935d is supplied to the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. This +5V generation circuit 1310g generates +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from +12V from the payout control board 951. The +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied to the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control filter circuit 1310h, and is also supplied to the power terminal of the RAM with built-in main control via the diode MD0. ing.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 on the power supply board 931 is grounded (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the RAM with built-in payout control on the payout control board 951, and It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control board 951. In other words, the +5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a, and also connects the power supply terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM in the forward direction through the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1. Current flows towards the positive terminal. In this way, the capacitor BC1 receives +5V by an electrical connection method in which +5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is transferred to the payout control board 951 and then returned from the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. is supplied and can be charged. As a result, when the +5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d is no longer supplied to the payout control board 951, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 951 as the payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode PD0 to the power terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate, the memory contents are retained by supplying payout VBB to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. It has become so.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 is grounded (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 1310. In other words, the +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM in the forward direction by the diode MD0 and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0. Current is flowing towards it. In this way, the capacitor BC0 is supplied with +5V and charged by the electrical connection method in which +5V created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied from the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. It is now possible to do so. As a result, the +12V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the +5V generation circuit 1310g is no longer able to generate +5V. When it runs out, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied as the main VBB to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, so a diode is connected to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Although the current is blocked by MD0 and does not flow, and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main VBB is supplied to the power terminal of the main control built-in RAM, so that the stored contents are retained. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies backup power to the main control built-in RAM is constituted by the diode MD0 and the capacitor BC0.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, the outline of the voltages supplied to each control board etc. will be explained, and then the voltages mainly supplied to the payout control board and the voltages supplied to the main control board will be explained.

Three types of voltages, +5V, +12V, and +24V created by the power supply generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931, are supplied to the payout control board 951 as shown in FIG. Two types of voltages, +24V, are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Furthermore, three types of voltages, +5V, +12V, and +24V, generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and are also supplied to the peripheral area via this frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. It is supplied to the control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, respectively.

Three types of voltages, +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510, are supplied to the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180, as shown in FIG. 76(a). 4180a, respectively. The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 outputs various signals such as lighting signals, flashing signals, and gradation lighting signals to various decorative boards of the game board 5, and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180 outputs various signals such as lighting signals, flashing signals, and gradation lighting signals to various decorative boards of the game board 5. A drive signal is output to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid of the panel 5.

The peripheral control board 1510 includes a +3.3V generation circuit 1510b that generates 3.3V DC (+3.3V DC, hereinafter referred to as "+3.3V") from +5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. ing. The +3.3V generated by the +3.3V generation circuit 1510b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600a of the game board side performance display device 1600. Further, +12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power supply 1600b of the game board side effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, the three types of voltages +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, as shown in FIG. 76(b). The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 includes a +9V generation circuit 194a that generates +9V DC (hereinafter referred to as "+9V") from +12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. In addition to the +9V generated by the +9V generation circuit 194a, a total of four types of voltages, +5V, +12V, and +24V, supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are supplied to various decorative boards of the door frame 3.

Further, +12V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is supplied to the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x generates +3.3V from +12V. The +3.3V generated by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x is supplied to various electronic components configuring the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V shown in FIG. 74, and also to the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y and the door frame side effect display device 460, respectively. The voltage generated by the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y is supplied to the door frame side effect display device 460.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the payout control board 951 includes a payout control filter circuit 951a and the like in addition to a payout control MPU 952a and the like. This payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with +5V from the power supply board 931, and removes noise from this +5V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 via the diode PD0, this +5V is also supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952. +12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951. The external communication circuit 784a of this external terminal board 784 is a circuit that outputs a signal conveying the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, etc. to a hall computer installed in a game parlor (hall). It is. The hall computer monitors the games of the players by ascertaining the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, etc. from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a. Note that +24 from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 without being used at all in the payout control board 951.

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to main control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 includes a main control MPU 1310a, a +5V generation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, and the like. The +5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and creates +5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from this +12V. In the main control board 1310, the power supply system to which +5V created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g is applied and supplied is a +5V power supply line. In this embodiment, the +5V power line created by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 and the +5V power line created by the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. Since the circuit is configured as shown in FIG. The +5V power supply line created by the creation circuit 1310g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards other than the main control board 1310.

The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g, and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 via the diode MD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the main control MPU 1310a. +12V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control input circuit 1310b, and +24V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d.

The power outage monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with +12V and +24V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and monitors signs of a power outage or instantaneous power outage of these +12V and +24V. When the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e detects a sign of a +12V or +24V power outage or instantaneous power outage, it outputs a power outage warning signal as a power outage warning to the main control MPU 1310a. The power outage notice signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a via the main control board 1310 and the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control board 951. Further, the power outage warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. Further, the power outage warning signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, as shown in FIG. 76(b). At the same time, the signals are inputted to the door frame decoration board and the like via this frame decoration drive amplifier board 194.

In this embodiment, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the voltages applied to two power lines, a +12V power line and a +24V power line, so that the voltage applied to one of the +12V power line or the +24V power line is Compared to the case of monitoring the applied voltage, it is possible to more accurately grasp signs of a power outage such as a power outage or momentary power outage.

[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit etc. of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. FIG. 77 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the main control board, FIG. 78 is a circuit diagram showing the power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 79 is a circuit showing the communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a diagram. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in FIG. 75 will be explained, followed by the power supply, main control system reset, main control crystal oscillator, main control input circuit, power failure monitoring circuit, main control MPU created on the main control board 1310. Various input/output signals to and communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be explained.

The main control board 1310 includes a main control MPU 1310a, a main control input circuit 1310b, a main control output circuit 1310c, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, a +5V generation circuit 1310g, and a main control board 1310, which are shown in FIGS. 69 and 75. In addition to the control filter circuit 1310h, as peripheral circuits, as shown in FIG. )).

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
The main control filter circuit 1310h, as shown in FIG. 77, mainly includes a main control three-terminal filter MIC0. This main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 has its No. 1 terminal applied with +5V created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g, its No. 2 terminal is grounded (GND), and the noise component is removed from its No. 3 terminal. +5V is being output. One end of the +5V applied to terminal 1 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC0, so that ripples (alternating current components superimposed on the voltage) are first removed. smoothed.

The +5V output from the No. 3 terminal is electrically connected to the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF)), one end of which is grounded (GND). By connecting it to , ripples are further removed and smoothed. This smoothed +5V is applied to the power terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal which is the power terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the like. Note that when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the electric charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is transferred to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. +5V is applied over a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of the voltage.

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC3 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the +5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. A VSS terminal, which is a ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

Further, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the capacitor MC4 is connected to the ground (GND) at one end. electrically connected to the other end. In addition to being electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, the VBB terminal of this RAM with built-in main control is connected via the resistor MR0 to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. electrically connected to the terminal. That is, the +5V from which the noise component has been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and is also applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0 via the diode MD0. The voltage is applied to the positive terminal of . As a result, as described above, the +12V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. If the circuit 1310g is unable to generate +5V, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB, so the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is Although the current is blocked by the diode MD0 and does not flow, and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main VBB is applied to the VBB terminal of the RAM with built-in main control, so that the stored contents are retained.

[9-2. Main control system reset]
+5V, whose noise components have been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h, is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, as shown in FIG. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC5 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of this capacitor MC5. It is now possible to do so. Specifically, when +5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (4.25V, for example), the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after a delay time has elapsed.

The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal, which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line and the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1, and one end is a capacitor that is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of MC6. Ripples are removed and smoothed by this capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is greater than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic is output to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output with reset function. While being input to the reset terminal of the circuit 1310ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is applied to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. Each is input to the reset terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold, the main control MPU 1310a and the reset function The main control output circuit 1310ca is reset. Note that the power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC7 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the power supply terminal has ripples removed and smoothed. Further, the ground terminal is connected to the ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
The +5V from which noise components have been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, as shown in FIG. This VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC8 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples. Further, this smoothed +5V is applied not only to the VDD terminal but also to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24 MHz clock signal from the F terminal, which is the output terminal, by applying +5V to each of these terminals A, B, C, and ST.

The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and receives a 24 MHz clock signal. The GND terminal, which is the grounding terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is connected to the ground (GND), and the D terminal, which outputs the frequency-divided wave of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is not electrically connected to the outside. It is in a state.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b includes a vibration sensor 2405, a general prize opening sensor 4020, a first starting opening sensor 4002, a second starting opening sensor 4004, a magnetic detection sensor 4024, a count sensor 4005, and a gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. In addition to the detection signal shown in FIG. 70, this circuit receives an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from an operation switch 954 provided in the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. Since the circuit configuration into which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, the circuit into which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described here.

[9-4-1. Circuit where the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 controls the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and the main control of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. It is operated to clear the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the MPU 1310a, or to cancel the error when an error is reported after the power is turned on. A function to clear RAM within a predetermined period from power-on, and error cancellation after power-on (after the period for functioning as RAM clear has elapsed, that is, after a predetermined period has elapsed from power-on). It has the ability to do this. Since the main control board 1310 does not have the function of canceling an error that the payout control board 951 has, if an operation signal is input from the operation switch 954 within a predetermined period from power-on, the main control board 1310 It is judged as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM, and processing to clear the main control built-in RAM is performed.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310, while when the operation switch 954 is operated, the logic signal from the payout control board 951 is input to the main control board 1310. An operation signal in which the input signal becomes HI is input from the payout control board 951 (detailed explanation of this point will be given later).

As shown in FIG. 77, the transmission line that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 within a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on is a pull-up line whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. The base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected not only to the resistor MR3 but also to the other end of a resistor MR4 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR5, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC10 (Non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 is equipped with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform after shaping it without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC10A).) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

The circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 954 on the payout control board 951 is configured as an open collector output type circuit in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and the circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is configured as an open collector output type circuit whose emitter terminal is grounded (GND). The line is pulled up to +12V by a pull-up resistor MR2. In the main control board 1310, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW and is input. When the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2, the logic becomes HI and is input.

A circuit composed of resistors MR3, MR4, and transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by an operation signal from operation switch 954.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, so that the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR5, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. be done. The main control MPU 1310a must not instruct to perform RAM clear to erase information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 inputted to the input terminal PA0 is HI. to decide.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation signal, which is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor MR2 and whose logic becomes HI, is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, turning on the transistor MTR0 and switching the switch 954 on. The circuit will also be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. be done. The main control MPU 1310a instructs to perform RAM clear to erase information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. I judge that.

Note that the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to +12V by a pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input via the payout control board 951. In other words, between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, the voltage is higher than the control reference voltage of +5V in order to suppress the influence of noise that enters the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. The voltage +12V is used to increase the reliability of the signal. Therefore, in this embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, and the second starting opening sensor 4004, which are directly input to the main control board 1310, are set to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor. While being pulled up, the detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, count sensor 4005, general winning hole sensor 4020, and gate sensor 4003, which are input via the panel relay board 4161 shown in FIG. 69, are sent to the main control board 1310. Since it is not directly input, it is pulled up to the +12V side by a pull-up resistor, similar to the operation signal from the operation switch 954.

[9-5. Power outage monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two types of voltages, +12V and +24V, from a power supply board 931 via a payout control board 951, and +12V and +24V are input to a power outage monitoring circuit 1310e. ing. The power outage monitoring circuit 1310e monitors +12V and +24V power outages or signs of instantaneous power outages, and when it detects signs of power outages or instantaneous power outages, it sends a power outage warning signal as a power outage warning to the main control MPU 1310a as well as to the payout control board. It outputs to the payout control MPU 952a of 951 and the peripheral control board 1510. Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will first be described, followed by the monitoring of +24V power failures or momentary power failures, the monitoring of +12V power failures or momentary power failures, and the output of a power failure notice signal.

[9-5-1. Configuration of power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 78, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, of the shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. +5V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (in this embodiment, 2.495V is set) which becomes a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC20 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled (superimposed on the voltage) by the capacitor MC20. AC components) are removed and smoothed. Note that the A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded (GND).

The comparator MIC21 is equipped with two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare the +24V monitoring voltage V1 and the reference voltage Vref, and the remaining one (MIC21B) is used to compare the +24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. , is used to compare the monitoring voltage V2 of +12V and the reference voltage Vref. A monitoring voltage V1 of +24V is applied to the No. 3 terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21A, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the No. 2 terminal, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21A. A monitoring voltage V2 of +12V is applied to the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21B, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the 6th terminal, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21B. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This D-type flip-flop MIC22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in this embodiment. The Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the +5V applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is , ripples are removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21, is connected to the ground (GND).

[9-5-2. +24V power outage or momentary power outage monitoring]
As described above, the +24V power outage or instantaneous power outage is monitored by the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 78, the No. 3 terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the +24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied, is connected to the other end of the resistor MR21, one end of which is electrically connected to the +24V power supply line, and the other end of the resistor MR21, which is electrically connected to the +24V power supply line. is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR22, which is grounded to the ground (GND); and the other end of the capacitor MC23, which is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR21 and MR22, and whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND); are electrically connected. The +24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the No. 3 terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is divided by +24V by the resistance ratio of resistors MR21 and MR22, and is smoothed by removing ripples by capacitor MC23. . The values of resistors MR21 and MR22 are such that when there is a power outage or momentary power outage of +24V, the voltage starts to drop from +24V and becomes the preset power failure detection voltage V1pf (in this embodiment, it is set to 21.40V). The monitoring voltage V1 of +24V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The No. 1 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23, which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. One end is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC24 which is grounded (GND), and is electrically connected to a PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the No. 1 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is increased to +5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal whose logic is HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of +24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the No. 1 terminal which is the output terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is ground (GND). A signal whose logic is LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. +12V power outage or momentary power outage monitoring]
As described above, the +12V power outage or instantaneous power outage is monitored by the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +12V monitoring voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 78, the No. 5 terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the +12V monitoring voltage V2 is applied, is connected to the other end of the resistor MR24, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and the other end of the resistor MR24, which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR25 and the other end of the resistor MR25 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the other end of the capacitor MC25 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR24 and MR25, and one end of the capacitor MC25 is grounded to the ground (GND). are electrically connected. The +12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is divided by +12V by the resistance ratio of resistors MR24 and MR25, and is smoothed by removing ripples by capacitor MC25. . The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are such that when there is a power outage or momentary power outage of +12V, the voltage starts to drop from +12V and becomes the preset power failure detection voltage V2pf (in this embodiment, it is set to 10.47V). The monitoring voltage V2 of +12V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The No. 7 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output, and is electrically connected to the No. 1 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21A mentioned above, so that one end is connected to the +5V power line and electricity. The other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the other end of the capacitor MC24 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) to preset the D-type flip-flop MIC22. It is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a terminal. As described above, the capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the No. 7 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is increased to +5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal whose logic is HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the +12V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the No. 7 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is ground (GND). A signal whose logic is LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Power outage warning signal output]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is a D input terminal, based on a change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is a clock input terminal, and stores this stored value. (logic) is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal, and a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal which is the output terminal. Furthermore, when the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a signal whose logic is LOW to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal, it releases the latch state and changes the logic of the signal that is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. On the other hand, when a signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, a latch state is set. In addition, when the D-type flip-flop MIC22 inputs a logic HI signal to the clear terminal CLR terminal to set the latch state, the logic LOW signal enters the preset terminal PR terminal. When a signal is input, the state in which a signal with logic HI is output from the output terminal 1Q terminal is maintained. (maintains the state of output from the 1Q terminal).

In this embodiment, the D type flip-flop MIC22 has a 1D terminal which is a D input terminal and a 1CK terminal which is a clock input terminal, which are each grounded (GND). The circuit is configured so that the edge of the input clock signal does not change, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, is not stored and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. ing. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 has the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, receives a signal from the No. 1 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, which monitors a +24V power outage or instantaneous power outage, and a +12V power outage, as described above. Alternatively, a signal from the No. 7 terminal which is the output terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors instantaneous power outages is input, and based on these signals, a signal is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal. Note that the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC22, one end of which is grounded (GND), and is applied to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. +5V is smoothed by removing ripples by capacitor MC22, the GND terminal which is the grounding terminal is grounded (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal which inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal is electrically connected to the outside. It is in an unconnected state.

In the present embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a power failure clear signal inputted from the main control MPU 1310a to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. This power failure clear signal is started to be output and stopped after a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the main control side power-on processing performed by the main control MPU 1310a, which will be described later. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal with its logic set to LOW via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is designed to release the latched state when a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal.At this time, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, is inverted and the output terminal is output. It is output from the 1Q terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power outage clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI and is input to the CLR terminal via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is configured to set a latch state when a power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the state in which the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The signal output from the 1Q terminal is input as a power outage warning signal to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. In addition, the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, and resets the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The non-functional main control output circuit 1310cb outputs it to the dispensing control board 951 as a dispensing power outage notice signal, and also outputs it to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage notice signal.

As shown in FIG. 78, the main control input circuit 1310b electrically connects the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the transistor MTR22, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR27. It is connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected not only to the resistor MR27 but also to the other end of a resistor MR28 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC23 (Non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is equipped with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform after shaping it without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC23A).) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

A circuit made up of resistors MR27, MR28, and transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned off. , the switch circuit will also be turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned on. The switch circuit will also be turned on.

When both the conditions that the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR29, and the power failure notice signal whose logic becomes HI is transmitted to the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. It is input to PA1.

On the other hand, when either one of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. This turns on the transistor MTR20. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes LOW is transmitted to the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. It is input to PA1.

In addition, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the dispensing control board 951 as a dispensing power outage notice signal is open as shown in FIG. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b mentioned above, and the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is connected via the resistor MR30. Electrically connected to the base terminal. The base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected not only to the resistor MR30 but also to the other end of a resistor MR31 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. It is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage via the resistor MR33. The base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is not only electrically connected to the resistor MR33 but also electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR34 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND), and the wiring It is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via a harness. Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 952 shown in FIG. In the circuit 952b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. connected.

The circuit composed of resistors MR30, MR31 and the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is a switch circuit in the former stage, and the circuit composed of resistors MR33, MR34 and the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is a switch circuit in the latter stage, and is a D-type flip-flop. It is turned on/off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the previous stage transistor MTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the previous stage transistor MTR21 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. MTR21 turns OFF, and the switch circuit in the previous stage also turns OFF, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage, is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR32. As a result, the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is pulled up to the +5V side, and the transistor MTR21 is turned on. The switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, which is the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the switch circuit in the latter stage is The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the subsequent switch circuit is also turned off.

When both the conditions that the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. The transistor MTR21 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage, thereby turning on the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via wiring (harness), and the payout power outage warning signal whose logic becomes LOW is issued. It is input to the control board 951.

On the other hand, when either one of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. By inputting the signal, the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is lowered to ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage, thereby turning off the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 on the payout control board 951 via wiring (harness). A payout power outage warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951.

In addition, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal is open as shown in FIG. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b mentioned above, and is connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. electrically connected to. The base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor MR35, and also to the other end of a resistor MR36 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness), the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. , one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Connected.

A circuit made up of resistors MR35, MR36, and transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned off. , the switch circuit will also be turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +5V side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned on. The switch circuit will also be turned on.

When both the conditions that the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor in the output control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 on the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and the logic is set to HI. The peripheral power outage warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

On the other hand, when either one of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. This turns on the transistor MTR23. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and the peripheral power outage warning signal whose logic becomes LOW is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. 1510.

In this way, the main control input circuit 1310b transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a power outage warning signal, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, which outputs the signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal, has one transistor each, and the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral While the logic is the same as that of the peripheral power outage notice signal input to the control board 1510, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is sent to the payout control board 951. The main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function that outputs as a power outage warning signal has two transistors, one in the front stage and the other in the rear stage, and the logic of the outgoing power outage warning signal is the same as the logic of the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the surroundings. The logic is the inverse of the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal input to the control board 1510, and is different from the logic of the power outage warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal.

Further, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is connected to the main control MPU 1310a via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage of the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function is connected to the payout control board via wiring (harness). In the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in 951, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit 1310cb has no reset function. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to a pull-up resistor whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 on the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the. This means that between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are connected to the main control board. 1310, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board are installed in the main control board 1310 and the payout control board. 951 and between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, the main control MPU 1310a, Power outage warning is performed by the logic of a power outage warning signal (ON/OFF signal) using +12V, which is a voltage higher than +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the delivery control MPU 952a and the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

[9-6. Various input/output signals to main control MPU]
Next, various input/output signals to the main control MPU 1310a will be explained with reference to FIG. 77. The RXA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 1310a, receives serial data from the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 as a payer serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 1310b. . On the other hand, the TXA terminal and TXB terminal, which are the serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 1310a, output the serial data sent from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 951 as the main payment serial data transmission signal and output the main control without a reset function. The main control output circuit 1310cb sends the main payment serial data transmission signal to the payout control board 951, and the serial data to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 69 from the TXB terminal. The main control output circuit without a reset function 1310cb sends the main control output circuit without a reset function as a serial serial data transmission signal to the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition to inputting the above-mentioned operation signal (RAM clear signal) to each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a payout signal indicating the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned main payment serial data reception signal is input. A payer ACK signal from the control board 951 is input via the main control input circuit 1310b, and detection signals from various switches such as the first starting port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69 are input via the main control input circuit 1310b. Each is input, etc.

On the other hand, each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a outputs, for example, a main payment ACK signal indicating completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function outputs the main payout ACK signal to the payout control board 951, and the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function outputs a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. The main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2107 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display 1403 shown in FIG. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function outputs drive signals to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function outputs drive signals to various displays, and various information related to games (gaming information). is outputted to the main control output circuit with a reset function 1310ca, and various information regarding the game (gaming information) is outputted from the main control output circuit with a reset function 1310ca to the payout control board 951.

[9-7. Communication interface circuit between the main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. The main control board 1310 is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 via the payout control board 951, and the +5V creation circuit 1310g creates +5V, which is the control reference voltage for the main control MPU 1310a, from this +12V. ing. The main circumferential serial data transmission signal sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is affected by noise that invades the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress this, the reliability is increased by transmitting using +12V, which is a higher voltage than +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a.

Specifically, the main control board 1310 causes the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly includes a resistor MR50, resistors MR51, MR52, and a transistor MTR50. has been done. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), and a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC) as a communication interface circuit. It is mainly composed of:

+12V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the negative terminal of the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of an electrolytic capacitor MC50 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 220 microfarads (μF)). In addition to being electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the anode terminal (terminal 1) of the photocoupler AIC10 on the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the. As a result, if power from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the main control board 1310 via the output control board 951 due to a power outage or instantaneous power outage, for example, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is +12V can be continuously applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510.

In this way, when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged with the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 470 μF) shown in FIG. Since the charge is applied as +5V, the main serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a at least serially manages the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in its transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 41aea by the unit 1310aec, and transmission can be completed as main cycle serial data from the transmission shift register 1310aea.

As described above, the main serial data transmission signal sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress the influence of intruding noise, the reliability is increased by transmitting using a voltage of +12V, which is higher than +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as +12V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the main serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa to its transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 41aea by the serial management unit 1310aec and transmits it. When the main cycle serial data is transmitted from the shift register 1310aea, it is possible to transmit a main cycle serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI with +12V from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50.

In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a is 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data for a maximum of 10 packets is stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. Further, in this embodiment, the transfer bit rate of main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19200 bps.

The cathode terminal (terminal 3) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 of the main control board 1310 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). A resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 1510 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

The TXB terminal that outputs the main frequency serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 via the transistor MTR50. The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected not only to the resistor MR51 but also to the other end of a resistor MR52 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded (GND).

The circuit composed of resistors MR51, MR52, and transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit, and when the logic of the main serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR50 is switched to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, no forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main frequency serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR50, the transistor MTR50 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. . As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

+5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is connected to the ground (GND), and the negative terminal is connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the grounded electrolytic capacitor AC10. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10 and also to the Vcc terminal (terminal 6) which is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (terminal 4) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal (terminal 5) of the photocoupler AIC10 is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to the +5V side by the AR 11 and electrically connected to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. By turning ON/OFF the photocoupler AIC10, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is sent to the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a main frequency serial data transmission signal. is input to the input terminal of

As a result, as described above, if +5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 due to a power outage or instantaneous power outage, for example, The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied as +5V to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. When a power outage or momentary power outage occurs, by applying +5V from the electrolytic capacitor AC10, the main frequency serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the main control MPU 1310a. The data set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the built-in main frequency serial transmission port 1310ae can be completely transmitted, and the main frequency serial data transmission signal, that is, the main frequency serial data in the middle of transmission, is interrupted. The peripheral control board 1510 is configured to reliably receive the data without missing or missing the data.

When the logic of the main frequency serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when MTR50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the main circuit whose logic becomes HI. The serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, while the logic of the main serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. When is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR50, turning on the transistor MTR50 and turning on the photocoupler AIC10. The voltage applied to the collector terminal is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the main serial data transmission signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. . In this way, the logic of the main serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC 10 is the same as the logic of the main serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. This is the logic.

In this way, in this embodiment, there is a +5V power line to which +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, is applied, and a +12V power line, to which +12V, which is the communication voltage, is applied via the diode MD50. Measures have been taken in the event that a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the control reference voltage and communication voltage drop. That is, for the main frequency serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a, the +5V power supply line and the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h whose first auxiliary power supply is the electrolytic capacitor MC2, are electrically connected in parallel, even if a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the +5V power supply line decreases, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 1310h, which is the first auxiliary power supply, By applying the control reference voltage from the positive terminal of MC2, it is possible to maintain the state in which the control reference voltage is applied. For the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, which functions as a communication interface circuit, +12V applied to the +12V power supply line is applied as a communication voltage to the anode terminal of the diode MD50, and the cathode terminal of this diode MD50 is and the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply, are electrically connected in parallel, so that when a power outage or instantaneous power failure occurs, the communication voltage is applied from the +12V power supply line through the diode MD50. Even if the voltage drops, the state in which the communication voltage is applied can be maintained by applying the communication voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power source. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the commands being sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 from being fragmented, and also to prevent the commands from being lost, so that the peripheral control board 1510 can reliably receive the commands being sent. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate commands from being missed immediately after a power outage occurs or at the time of a momentary power outage.

In addition, the plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a are all converted into main serial data by the resistor MR50, resistors MR51, MR52, and transistor MTR50. The capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h is set to 470 μF so that transmission can be completed to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, which functions as a communication interface circuit. The capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is set to 220 μF. As a result, even if a power outage or instantaneous power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, a reset allows the multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to be converted into main cycle serial data and all function as an interface circuit. Since the transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the non-functional main control output circuit 1310cb, the peripheral control board 1510 does not interrupt the plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and prevents them from being lost. You can receive it without any problem.

[10. Payout control board circuit]
Next, the circuit etc. of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 80 to 85. FIG. 80 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the payout control section, etc., FIG. 81 is a circuit diagram showing the payout control input circuit, FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 81, and FIG. 83 is a circuit diagram showing the payout motor drive. 84 is a circuit diagram showing the CR unit input/output circuit, and FIG. 85 is a circuit diagram showing various input/output signals to the main control board 1310 and various output signals to the external terminal board 784. It is an output diagram. First, the payout control filter circuit 951a will be described, followed by the circuit of the payout control section, various input/output signals with the main control board 1310, and various output signals to the external terminal board 784.

[10-1. Payout control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 80, the payout control filter circuit 951a mainly includes a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. This output control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. Terminal 1 of the output control three-terminal filter PIC0 is applied with +5V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75, and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0 whose one end is grounded (GND). The +5V from the power supply board 931 is first smoothed by removing ripples (alternating current components superimposed on the voltage) by the capacitor PC0. The second terminal of the three-terminal output control filter PIC0 is connected to the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the three-terminal output control filter PIC0 outputs +5V from which noise components have been removed.

The third terminal of the output control three-terminal filter PIC0 is connected to the capacitor PC1 and the other end of the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF)), one end of which is grounded (GND). By electrically connecting them, ripples are further removed and smoothed from the +5V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. This smoothed +5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, the VCC terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, etc., which will be described later. . In addition, when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 is connected to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a. +5V is applied over a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of the voltage.

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the +5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples by the capacitor PC3. ing. A VSS terminal, which is a ground terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

Further, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built in the payout control MPU952a, and the capacitor PC4 is connected to the ground (GND) at one end. electrically connected to the other end. In addition to being electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, the VBB terminal of the RAM with built-in output control is connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. electrically connected to the terminal. That is, the +5V from which noise components have been removed and smoothed by the dispensing control filter circuit 951a is applied to the VDD terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a, and is also applied to the VBB terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC1 via the diode PD0. The voltage is applied to the positive terminal of . As a result, as described above, when +5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. Since the current is supplied to the payout control board 951 as a current, the current is prevented from flowing to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a by the diode PD0 and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate. The stored contents are retained by applying the voltage VBB. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies backup power to the payout control built-in RAM is constituted by the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1.

[10-2. Payout control unit circuit]
The payout control unit 952 includes a payout control MPU 952a, a payout control input circuit 952b, a payout control output circuit 952c, a payout motor drive circuit 952d, and a CR unit input/output circuit 952e, as well as peripheral circuits such as a reset circuit, as shown in FIG. It mainly includes a payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal, and a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 (8 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment) that outputs a clock signal. Here, we will first explain the dispensing control system reset, and then explain the dispensing control crystal oscillator, dispensing control input circuit, dispensing motor drive circuit, CR unit input/output circuit, and various input/output signals to the dispensing control MPU.

[10-2-1. Payout control system reset]
+5V, whose noise components have been removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 951a, is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, as shown in FIG. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC5 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of this capacitor PC5. It is now possible to do so. Specifically, when the +5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V), the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after a delay time has elapsed.

The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal, which is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line and the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1, and one end is a capacitor that is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of PC6. This capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is higher than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic outputs the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control output with reset function. While being input to the reset terminal of the circuit 952ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is input to the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca. Each is input to the reset terminal. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold value, the payout control MPU 952a and the reset function are activated. The payout control output circuit 952ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC7 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the power supply terminal has ripples removed and smoothed. Further, the ground terminal is connected to the ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Payout control crystal oscillator]
The +5V from which noise components have been removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCC terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, as shown in FIG. This VCC terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC8 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the VCC terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples. Further, this smoothed +5V is applied not only to the VCC terminal but also to the OE terminal which is the output enable terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs an 8 MHz clock signal from its output terminal, ie, the OUT terminal, when +5V is applied to its OE terminal.

The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a. Note that the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the ground (GND).

[10-2-3. Payout control input circuit]
The dispensing control input circuit 952b receives the dispensing power outage warning signal from the door frame release switch 618 shown in FIG. 70, the main body frame release switch 619 shown in FIG. 70, and the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The circuit includes the handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 70, a circuit into which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input via the power supply board 931, a circuit into which the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input, etc. . First, we will explain the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame release switch is input, followed by the circuit to which the detection signal from the main body frame release switch is input, the circuit to which the power outage warning signal issued from the power failure monitoring circuit is input, The circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank sensor is input and the circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch is input will be explained. Note that the full tank detection sensor 279 and various detection switches shown in FIG. 70, such as the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the rotation detection sensor 840, have open collector output type output terminals. Since the circuit configuration into which the detection signal from the switch is input is almost the same, the circuit into which the detection signal from the full tank sensor is input will be described here.

[10-2-3a. Circuit where the detection signal from the door frame release switch is input]
The door frame release switch 618 uses a normally closed type (NC), and the switch is turned on (conducting) when the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, and the door frame 3 is connected to the main body frame 4. The switch is turned OFF (disconnected) in the closed state. The second terminal of the door frame release switch 618 is grounded (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame release switch 618 is connected to a pull-up resistor PR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via a resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected not only to the resistor PR21 but also to the other end of a resistor PR22 whose one end is grounded (GND). In addition, the No. 1 terminal of the door frame release switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and also to the other end of the capacitor PC20 whose one end is grounded (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC20 (Non-inverting buffer ICPIC20 is equipped with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform after shaping it without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC20A).) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR20, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 changes, and the signal is input as a door open signal to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

In addition, the No. 1 terminal of the door frame release switch 618 is pulled up to +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via a resistor PR21, and is also pulled to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR20. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24. The base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected not only to the resistor PR24 but also to the other end of a resistor PR25 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness), a pull (not shown) is connected at one end to the +12V power supply line on the external terminal board 784. Electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR21, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as an outer end frame door opening information output signal.

Furthermore, the No. 1 terminal of the door frame release switch 618 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21, and the No. 1 terminal is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. In addition to being pulled up to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 via a resistor PR26, ing. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected not only to the resistor PR26 but also to the other end of a resistor PR27 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 via wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end is connected to the +12V power supply in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR22, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door open signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR20 and the capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or when the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4, The circuit is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the door frame release switch 618 due to a flapping phenomenon in which the contacts forming the door frame release switch 618 repeatedly turn on and off for a short time.

A circuit consisting of resistors PR21, PR22 and transistor PTR20, a circuit consisting of resistors PR24, PR25 and transistor PTR21, and a circuit consisting of resistors PR26, PR27 and transistor PTR22 are door frame opening switches. This is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by the detection signal from 618.

When the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame release switch 618 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor PTR20 is turned on. It turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and the door frame open signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. Ru. In addition, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame release switch 618 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor The PTR 21 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes HI. is input to the external terminal board 784. In addition, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame release switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR 22 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame release switch 618 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR20. The transistor PTR20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the door frame open signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. In addition, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame release switch 618 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to +5V side, and the transistor PTR21 is turned ON. However, the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the external terminal board 784. In addition, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame release switch 618 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to the +5V side, and the transistor PTR22 is turned ON. However, the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and a main frame door open signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, the door frame release switch 618 is turned on, and the door frame release signal whose logic is HI is sent to the input terminal of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. The outer end frame door open information output signal input to PA0 and whose logic becomes HI is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the main control board 1310. When the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is turned OFF, and a door frame open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. The outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

[10-2-3b. Circuit where the detection signal from the main frame release switch is input]
The main body frame release switch 619 uses a normally closed type (NC), and the switch is turned on (conducting) when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, and the main body frame 4 is connected to the outer frame 2. The switch is turned OFF (disconnected) in the closed state. The second terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 is grounded (GND), while the first terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 is connected to a pull-up resistor PR28, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via a resistor PR29. The base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected not only to the resistor PR29 but also to the other end of a resistor PR30 whose one end is grounded (GND). In addition to being electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, the No. 1 terminal of the main body frame release switch 619 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC21 whose one end is grounded (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 described above, and is connected to the external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness). electrically connected. Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness), a pull (not shown) is connected at one end to the +12V power supply line on the external terminal board 784. Electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR23, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as an outer end frame door opening information output signal.

In addition, the No. 1 terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 is pulled up to +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR28 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via a resistor PR29, and also connected to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR28. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. The base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected not only to the resistor PR31 but also to the other end of a resistor PR32 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above, as shown in FIG. 69 via wiring (harness). It is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end is connected to the +12V power supply in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR24, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door open signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR28 and the capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, The circuit is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the main body frame opening switch 619 due to a flapping phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the main body frame opening switch 619 repeatedly turn on and off for a short time.

The circuit made up of resistors PR29 and PR30 and transistor PTR23 and the circuit made up of resistors PR31 and PR32 and transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned on and off by a detection signal from body frame opening switch 619.

When the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the body frame release switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor PTR23 is turned on. It turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes HI. is input to the external terminal board 784. In addition, when the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR 24 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. The transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side at the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is generated. It is input to an external terminal board 784. In addition, when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR28. Then, the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), and the main frame door open signal whose logic becomes LOW is transmitted to the main control board 1310. 1310.

In this manner, when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, when the main body frame open switch 619 is turned on, the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the external terminal board 784. The main frame door open signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310, while when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main frame door open switch 619 is turned OFF, and the logic is The outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In this embodiment, as described above, either one or both of the states in which the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4 and the state in which the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 are provided. Even in this case, the main frame door open signal is input to the main control board 1310, so the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. Although it is not possible to determine whether the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 based on the door frame 3 and/or The player can determine that the main body frame 4 is open, which does not normally occur during gaming, and the outer end frame door open information output signal is sent to the external terminal board 784. Therefore, this outer end frame door open information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784, and the hall computer determines the door frame door open information output signal based on the outer end frame door open information output signal. Although it is not possible to determine whether the door frame 3 and/or the main body frame 4 are opened from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the door frame 3 and/or the main body frame 4 may be opened. It can be determined that a situation that does not normally occur during gaming is occurring for the player who is playing the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, by adopting normally closed switches for the door frame release switch 618 and the main body frame release switch 619, the door frame release switch 618 may be short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned ON ( Even if the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 and the main frame release switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned ON (conductive), the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. In this way, by adopting normally closed switches for the door frame release switch 618 and the main body frame release switch 619, it is possible to output the main frame door release signal to the main control board 1310 even in the event of a short circuit, and the outer edge The frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

In addition, if the door frame release switch 618 and the main body frame release switch 619 are changed from normally closed switches to normally open (NO) switches (door frame release switch 618' and main body frame release switch 619'), , the door frame release switch 618' is turned on (conducting) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, and is turned off (disconnected) when the door frame 3 is open to the main body frame 4. . The main body frame opening switch 619' is turned ON (conducting) when the main body frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2, and turned OFF (disconnecting) when the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2. Then, even if the door frame release switch 618' is disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the door frame 3 will be released from the main body frame 4. Even if the frame release switch 619' is disconnected and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the main body frame 4 remains open from the outer frame 2. In this way, even if normally open switches are adopted as the door frame release switch 618' and the main body frame release switch 619', the main frame door release signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even in the event of a disconnection. The outer end frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

[10-2-3c. Circuit into which the power outage warning signal issued from the power outage monitoring circuit is input]
A transmission line that transmits a power outage warning signal issued from a power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR40, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and a resistor. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 via PR41. The base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected not only to the resistor PR41 but also to the other end of a resistor PR42 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (Non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 is equipped with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform after shaping it without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40A).) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR40, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and the signal is inputted to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as a payout power outage warning signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR41, PR42, and transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by a power outage warning signal issued from power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided in main control board 1310.

As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the two types of voltages +12V and +24V from the power supply board 931 for signs of a power outage or momentary power outage, and when a sign of a power outage or momentary power outage is detected, the reset function is disabled. A payout power outage warning signal is output to the payout control board 951 as a power outage warning via the main control output circuit 1310cb. The power outage monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the +12V and +24V voltages for signs of a power outage or instantaneous power outage, and as described above, meets the conditions that the +24V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V1pf and that the +12V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V2pf. When both conditions are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. While the payout power failure notice signal is input to the payout control board 951, either one of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is applied. When the conditions are met, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to +12V by the above-mentioned pull-up resistor PR40 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. is input to the payout control board 951.

When both the conditions that the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of a power failure or instantaneous power failure of the +12V and +24V voltages. Sometimes, a payout power outage warning signal with logic LOW is input to the payout control board 951, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning off the transistor PTR40. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to +5V by the resistor PR43. As a result, a payout power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when either one of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of +12V and/or +24V is When there is a sign of a power outage or instantaneous power outage, a power outage warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the power outage control board 951, so that the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40. When the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor PR40, the transistor PTR40 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, a payout power failure notice signal whose logic at the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

In this way, when there is a sign of a power outage or instantaneous power outage of +12V and/or +24V voltage, a payout power outage notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a, When there is no sign of a power outage or instantaneous power outage of the +12V and +24V voltages, a payout power outage notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. This is because, as described above, when there is a sign of a power outage or momentary power outage of +12V and/or +24V voltage, a power outage warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of a power outage or instantaneous power outage in the +12V and +24V voltages, a power outage warning signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The logic of the payout power outage notice signal input to the payout control MPU 952a and the logic of the power outage notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a due to the power outage notice are the same logic.

[10-2-3d. Circuit into which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input]
A detection signal from a full tank detection sensor 279 provided in the foul cover unit 270 is input to the dispensing control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931. The output terminal of this full tank detection sensor 279 has a circuit configuration as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line on the dispensing control board 951. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a, and is also electrically connected to the No. 1 terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. This three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is a T-type filter circuit, and is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics.

The 2nd terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full-tank detection sensor is connected to the ground (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full-tank detection sensor is connected to the 3-terminal filter for the full-tank detection sensor via the resistor PR44b. It is electrically connected to the No. 1 terminal of the terminal filter PIC50, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via a resistor PR45. Thereby, the detection signal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is inputted to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 after noise components are removed by the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR45, the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46, which has one end connected to the ground (GND), and has one end connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the electrically connected capacitor PC40. Capacitor PC40 plays a role as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR47, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (Non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 is equipped with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform after shaping it without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40B).) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR41, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input as a full signal to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

A circuit composed of resistors PR45, PR46, and transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by a detection signal from full tank detection sensor 279.

As described above, the full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full of stored game balls. In this embodiment, when the storage space is not full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is applied via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931. In the payout control board 951, a signal pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI is input to the payout control board 951, while when the storage space is full of stored game balls. , a signal in which the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is lowered to the ground (GND) side at the dispensing control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and the logic becomes LOW. is input to the payout control board 951.

When the storage space is not full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is applied to the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931. A signal pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and whose logic becomes HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41, which turns on the transistor PTR41 and turns on the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and a full signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when the storage space is full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is applied to the payout control board via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931. At 951, the signal pulled down to the ground (GND) side and its logic becomes LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41, which turns off the transistor PTR41 and turns off the switch circuit as well. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR47, and a full tank signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

Note that in this embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to a switch circuit including a resistor PR45, a resistor PR46, and a transistor PTR41 via a three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. However, the detection signals from various detection switches such as the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 and the dispensing detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. The circuit configuration is such that the signal is directly input to each switch circuit without any intervention. Since the full tank detection sensor 279 is provided in the foul cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, it is compared with the out of ball detection sensor 827, the dispensing detection sensor 842, etc. provided in the dispensing device 830 attached to the main body frame 4. , the path for transmitting the detection signal becomes extremely long and is extremely susceptible to noise.

The full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full with stored game balls, and the payout control MPU 952a detects whether the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full with stored game balls. When it is determined that the storage space is full of stored game balls based on the detection signal from 279, the drive control of the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped to stop the payout rotary body from paying out game balls. It is designed to be controlled. In other words, if noise enters the transmission path (transmission line) that transmits the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the payout control MPU 952a will control the payout motor 834 even though the accommodation space is not full of stored game balls. In some cases, the drive control is forcibly stopped to stop the payout rotary body from dispensing game balls, or the payout motor 834 is driven even though the storage space is full of stored game balls. When the above-mentioned prize ball passageway is filled with game balls upstream by controlling and rotating the payout rotary body to continue paying out game balls, the payout rotary body itself becomes unable to rotate and the payout motor 834 There may also be cases where an abnormal load is applied to the dispensing motor 834, resulting in overload and abnormal heat generation, resulting in failure, or a failure of the mechanism that transmits the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 834 to the rotational motion of the dispensing rotating body. be. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, the circuit configuration is first changed to remove the noise component from the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 in the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. Adopted.

[10-2-3e. [Circuit into which the operation signal from the operation switch is input]
The 1st and 2nd terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are grounded (GND), and the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are connected to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and electrically connected to the base terminal of the previous stage transistor PTR42 via a resistor PR49. The base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to a resistor PR49, and also to the other end of a resistor PR50 whose one end is grounded (GND). In addition, the No. 4 terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 954, is not only electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, but also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC41, one end of which is grounded (GND). ing. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR42 at the front stage is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR42 at the front stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. It is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage via the resistor PR52. The base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the latter stage is not only electrically connected to the resistor PR52 but also electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR53 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the latter stage is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the latter stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 is equipped with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform after shaping it without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40C)). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control MPU 952a. By turning ON/OFF the transistors PTR42 and PTR43 in the former stage and the latter stage, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the latter stage changes, and the signal is sent as the RWMCLR signal to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. is input.

In addition, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to +5V by a pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 via a resistor PR49. It is pulled up to +5V by a pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of a transistor PTR44 via a resistor PR55. The base terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to a resistor PR55, and also to the other end of a resistor PR56 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end is connected to +12V in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR2, which is electrically connected to the power supply line. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR44, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 changes, and the signal is input as a RAM clear signal to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR48 and the capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the operation switch 954 is pressed, the contacts forming the operation switch 954 repeatedly turn on and off for a short period of time, causing a flapping phenomenon. The circuit is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the operation switch 954 due to the operation switch 954.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR49, PR50 and transistor PTR42 is a front-stage switch circuit, and the circuit consisting of resistors PR52, PR53 and transistor PTR43 is a rear-stage switch circuit, including resistors PR55, PR56, and transistor PTR44. The circuit consisting of is a switch circuit, and is turned on/off by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

As described above, the operation switch 954 is configured to operate the RAM built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 (RAM with built-in payout control) and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from power-on. It is operated to clear the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), or to cancel the error when an error is reported after the power is turned on. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from the time of power on, and an error reset function after the power is turned on (after the period in which it functions as RAM clear has elapsed, that is, after a predetermined period has elapsed from the time of power on). It has the following functions. The operation signal from the operation switch 954 serves as a RAM clear signal in a function that clears the RAM within a predetermined period from power-on; ), it serves as an error release signal in the error release function.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the output terminals 3 and 4 of the operation switch 954 are pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the operation signal whose logic becomes HI is transferred to the previous stage transistor. The voltage is input to the base terminal of PTR42, turns on the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage, and turns on the switch circuit in the previous stage. By pulling the voltage down to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs RAM clear to erase information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period from power-on. If the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), the error is canceled. It is determined that this is not an instruction.

Further, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, which are the third and fourth terminals, are pulled up to +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the operation signal whose logic becomes HI is transmitted to the transistor PTR44. When the signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, the transistor PTR44 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and a RAM clear signal whose logic becomes LOW is sent to the main control board 1310. is input. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, when a RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input within a predetermined period from the time of power-on, this logic becomes LOW as shown in FIG. By inputting the RAM clear signal to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR5, and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, it does not instruct to perform RAM clear to erase information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, which are the third and fourth terminals, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the operation signal whose logic is LOW is transmitted to the previous stage transistor. The voltage applied to the base terminal of PTR42 turns off the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage, and the switch circuit in the previous stage also turns OFF. When the voltage is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR51, the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs RAM clear to erase information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period from power-on. If the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), the error is canceled. It is judged that it is an instruction.

In addition, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, which are the 3rd and 4th terminals, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48, so that the logic becomes LOW. The signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, turning off the transistor PTR44 and turning off the switch circuit as well. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the RAM whose logic becomes HI. A clear signal is input to main control board 1310. As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives a RAM clear signal whose logic is HI within a predetermined period from power-on, this logic becomes HI as shown in FIG. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, this is an instruction to perform RAM clear to erase information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[10-2-4. Dispensing motor drive circuit]
Next, a dispensing motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the dispensing motor 834 of the dispensing device 830 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, the payout motor drive circuit 952d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 952da and a drive ICPIC 60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to the +12V power line and the +5V power line, respectively, and +12 and +5V are applied thereto, respectively, and the ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is connected to the ground (GND). Grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is outputted from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and outputted from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It is now possible to do so. The power output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to the 3rd terminal and the 10th terminal, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC60, through the Zener diode PZD60, and is also electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the dispensing motor 834. Based on the voltage switching signal input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da, +12V or +5V is applied as the motor drive voltage to No. 3, which is the cathode terminal of the drive ICPIC 60, via the Zener diode PZD60. It is supplied to the terminal and terminal No. 10, respectively, and also to the dispensing motor 834.

The drive ICPIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors, and in this embodiment, the 6th and 7th terminals, which are the emitter terminals, of the drive ICPIC 60 are grounded (GND), and the base terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 is connected to the ground (GND). A payout motor drive signal is input to certain terminals 1, 5, 8, and 12 via resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The collector terminals of the drive ICPIC60, which are terminals 2, 4, 9, and 11, are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, which are terminals 1, 5, 8, and 12, respectively. When the payout motor drive signal is input to the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, which are terminals No. 1, No. 5, No. 8, and No. 12 through the resistors PR60 to PR63, an excitation signal is generated. A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) corresponding to the dispensing motor 834. This payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the drive ICPIC 60 via resistors PR60 to PR63. The signals are output to the base terminals 1, 5, 8, and 12, respectively. These driving pulses are generated by switching excitation currents flowing through each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) of the dispensing motor 834, and rotate the dispensing motor 834. Note that when the drive pulses (excitation signals) of each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) are cut off by this switching, a back electromotive force is generated. If this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC 60, the drive ICPIC 60 will be damaged. Therefore, as a protection, the Zener diode PZD0 described above is electrically connected in front of the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, which are terminals 3 and 10. We adopted a circuit configuration that

[10-2-5. CR unit input/output circuit]
Next, the CR unit input/output circuit 952e for inputting and outputting various signals to and from the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 71 will be described. The payout control board 951 receives the BRDY, which is a ball rental request signal, and the BRQ, which is a single payout operation start request signal, from the CR unit 6, as described above, via the gaming ball rental device connection terminal board 869. , is input, and a predetermined voltage VL (+12V) and ground LG created from AC 24V supplied from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. Via the terminal board 869, an EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has started or ended, and a PRDY signal that indicates that a payout operation for dispensing rental balls is possible or impossible. and outputs. As shown in FIG. 84, the input/output circuit for inputting/outputting these various signals is mainly composed of photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (incorporating an infrared LED and a phototransistor).

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via a resistor PR70. A cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC 70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. At times, the photocoupler PIC 70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via a resistor PR71, and also to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via a resistor PR72. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of PTR71. The collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is not only electrically connected to a resistor PR71, but also electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR73, one end of which is electrically connected to a +5V power supply line.

The base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected not only to the resistor PR71 but also to the other end of a resistor PR74 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR75, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. FIG. 80 It is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR70, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 changes, and the signal is input as the CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected not only to the resistor PR72 but also to the other end of the resistor PR76 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via wiring (harness), a pull-up resistor (not shown) whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line is connected to the power supply board 931. electrically connected to the other end of the By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR71, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply board 931 as a CR connection signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR71, PR74, and transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by turning ON/OFF the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off and pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, which turns on the transistor PTR70 and turns on the switch circuit. This will turn it ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR70 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. Ru.

The circuit composed of resistors PR72, PR76, and transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by turning ON/OFF the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off and pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR73, turning on the transistor PTR71, and the switch circuit is also turned off. This will turn it ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and a CR connection signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the power supply board 931. Ru.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR71 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of the power supply board 931 via wiring (harness), and a CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the power supply board 931. be done.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via a resistor PR77. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON, while the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned OFF. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR78, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 is equipped with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform after shaping it without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80B)). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control MPU 952a. By turning ON/OFF the photocoupler PIC71, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC 71 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the BRDY signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 turns OFF. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR78, and the BRDY signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. In this way, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 71 is the same as the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71, but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via a resistor PR79. BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON, while the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned OFF. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR80, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 is equipped with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform after shaping it without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80C)). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control MPU 952a. By turning ON/OFF the photocoupler PIC72, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC 72 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the BRQ signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 turns OFF. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. In this way, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 72 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6.

An EXS signal from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a that informs that one payout operation has started or ended is outputted to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and outputs the payout control output circuit without reset function. 952cb is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR82, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. The resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, EXS is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a is applied. When the logic of the EXS signal outputted from the output terminal of the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is connected to the inside of the CR unit 6 through a terminal board 869 for connecting a rental device such as a game ball by a pull-up resistor PR83. is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to its built-in control device. By turning ON/OFF the photocoupler PIC73, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 changes, and the signal is inputted to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as EXS.

When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, EXS is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 turns ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the EXS whose logic becomes LOW becomes the CR unit. 6 is input to the built-in control device. On the other hand, when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the voltage is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the logic becomes HI. EXS is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. In this way, the logic of the EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the same as the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. The logic is the same.

A PRDY signal that informs that the payout operation for paying out rental balls is possible or impossible from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a is sent to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR84. has been entered. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR85, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. The resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, PRDY is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is applied. When the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function is HI, the photocoupler PIC 74 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is connected to the inside of the CR unit 6 via the terminal board 869 for connecting a rental device such as a game ball by a pull-up resistor PR86. is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to its built-in control device. By turning ON/OFF the photocoupler PIC74, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input as PRDY to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, PRDY is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY whose logic is LOW is connected to the CR unit. 6 is input to the built-in control device. On the other hand, when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the voltage is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned off, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the logic becomes HI. PRDY is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. In this way, the logic of PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the same as the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. The logic is the same.

[10-2-6. Various input/output signals to the payout control MPU]
Next, various input/output signals input/output from input/output terminals of various input/output ports of the payout control MPU 952a will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 80, the RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 952a, receives serial data from the main control board 1310 as a main payment serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b. be done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU 952a, serial data to be sent to the main control board 1310 is sent as a payer serial data transmission signal to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. A payer serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function to the main control board 1310.

Each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a receives the above-mentioned RWMCLR signal, dispensing power outage warning signal, door open signal, full tank signal, and various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection). In addition to inputting signals such as signal 1, etc., for example, a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that conveys the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal is input via the payout control input circuit 952b. Detection signals from the ball outage detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, the rotation detection sensor 840, etc. shown in FIG. 70 are inputted via the payout control input circuit 952b.

On the other hand, each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a outputs the above-mentioned EXS signal and PRDY signal to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function, and outputs the EXS signal and PRDY signal from the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input/output circuit 952e, or the voltage switching signal described above is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the voltage switching signal is sent from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the voltage switching circuit 952da. Or output the payout motor drive signal to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and output the payout motor drive signal from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the payout motor 834 via the payout motor drive circuit 952d. In addition, for example, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function outputs a payout control output circuit 952ca with a payout control output circuit with a reset function to send the payout control output circuit 952ca to the payout control output circuit 952ca. The ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310, or the drive signal for the error LED indicator 860b shown in FIG. It outputs to the error LED indicator 860b, etc.

[10-3. Various input/output signals to the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input/output signals between the payout control board 951 and the main control board 1310, and various output signals from the payout control board 951 to the external terminal board 784 will be explained with reference to FIG.

[10-3-1. Various input/output signals with main control board]
The payout control board 951 exchanges various input/output signals with the main control board 1310. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85(a), the payout control board 951 transmits the above-mentioned payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, etc. is output to the main control board 1310. These output signals are pulled up to +12V by a pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, in addition to the above-mentioned main payment serial data reception signal, main payment ACK signal, and operation signal (RAM clear signal), the payout control board 951 outputs a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15 round jackpot information output signal, And games such as jackpot information output signals such as 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving information output signal, starting opening winning information output signal, etc. A game information signal, a payout power outage warning signal, etc. related to the game are input from the main control board 1310. These input signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 951 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85(b), in addition to the above-mentioned outer end frame door open information output signal, the number of game balls actually put out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 reaches 10 balls. The jackpot information of the main prize ball number information output signal, the 15th round jackpot information output signal and the 2nd round jackpot information output signal is outputted from the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Outputs gaming information signals such as an output signal, a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time saving information output signal, and a starting opening winning information output signal to the external terminal board 784. do. These output signals are pulled up to +12V by a pull-up resistor on the external terminal board 784. In other words, two signals are output to the external terminal board 784: the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the payout control board 951 side and the prize ball number information output signal, and the main prize ball number output signal from the main control board 1310 side. Information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving information output signal, and starting opening winning information Eight signals called output signals are output via (pass through) the payout control board 951.

The signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game parlor (hall), not shown, and the hall computer monitors the games played by the players. In addition, when outputting the 15-round jackpot information output signal or the 2-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hole computer outputs the number of jackpots in which there are 2 rounds (2-round jackpot information output signal). The number of jackpots in the pachinko machine 1 is the sum of the number of jackpots (number of occurrences of 15 round jackpots) and the number of jackpots with 15 rounds (the number of jackpots in 15 rounds). For this reason, the hall computer cannot determine the number of 2-round jackpots or the 15-round jackpot from the total number of jackpots, so the number of jackpots that actually occurred in Pachinko machine 1 is higher. , it is not possible to determine whether it is a 2-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot. Additionally, a data counter (not shown) is placed above the pachinko machine 1, and some players select whether or not to play by referring to the number of jackpot game states displayed on this data counter. Some do.

However, the number of jackpot game states displayed on the data counter may actually be biased toward the number of two-round jackpots, so even if the player starts playing, only two-round jackpots will occur. Sometimes it is difficult to hit the jackpot after 15 rounds. In this way, although the number of occurrences of the jackpot game state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, it may unnecessarily agitate the player's gambling spirit.

Therefore, in this embodiment, by separately outputting the 15-round jackpot information output signal and the 2-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as the jackpot information output signal, the hall computer can determine the number of occurrences of the 2-round jackpot, It is now possible to accurately grasp the number of 15-round jackpots. Therefore, the hall computer can determine whether the highest number of jackpots actually occurred in Pachinko machine 1 is a 2-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot, and the data counter shows the 15-round jackpot. Since the number of jackpot occurrences and the number of 2-round jackpot occurrences can be displayed separately, or only the number of 15-round jackpot occurrences can be displayed as the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to unnecessarily arouse the gambling spirit of players. do not have.

In this embodiment, the 2nd round jackpot information output signal is output to the hole computer during the period from when the 2nd round jackpot occurs until the end of the round, and the 15th round jackpot information output signal is also output when the 15th round jackpot occurs. The state is output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence to the end. In addition to the method of outputting the 2 round jackpot information output signal and the 15 round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as in this embodiment, for example, when a 2 round jackpot occurs, the 2 round jackpot information output signal is output for a predetermined period. The 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information are output to the hole computer, and when a 15-round jackpot occurs, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hole computer for a predetermined period. Another example is a method in which the output signal is output to the hall computer for the same predetermined period.

[11. Arrangement of output terminals on external terminal board]
Next, the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal board 784 that outputs various signals to the hall computer installed in the game parlor (hall) will be explained with reference to FIG. The external terminal board 784 is attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and its rear side is covered by an external terminal board cover 786. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing the arrangement of output terminals of the external terminal board.

As described above, the external terminal board 784 outputs the outer end frame door opening information output signal, the prize ball number information output signal, the main prize ball number information output signal, the 15th round jackpot information output signal, and the 2nd round jackpot information output signal. When a jackpot information output signal, a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time saving information output signal, and a starting opening winning information output signal are input from the payout control board 951, This is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

To briefly explain these various signals, the outer end frame door open information output signal indicates that the door frame 3 and/or main body frame 4 are open when a situation occurs that does not normally occur to the player during gaming. The prize ball number information output signal is a signal that conveys this fact every time the number of game balls actually put out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 70 reaches 10 balls. Yes, the main prize ball number information output signal is sent to game balls that have entered various winning holes such as the first starting hole 2002, second starting hole 2004, general winning hole 2001, and big winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. This is a signal that informs that every time the number of game balls that are scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls based on the 15th round jackpot information output signal, the 15th round jackpot information output signal indicates that a 15th round jackpot has occurred. The 2nd round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that a 2nd round jackpot is occurring, and the probability fluctuation information output signal is a signal that indicates that a probability fluctuation is occurring. The special symbol display information output signal terminates (stops) the variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display 1403 and second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The normal symbol display information output signal is a signal that indicates that the normal symbol display information output signal is a state in which the fluctuating display of the normal symbol has been completed (stopped) on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The time-saving information output signal is a signal that conveys that a time-saving state has occurred, and the starting opening winning information output signal is the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening shown in FIG. 60. 2004 is a signal that notifies each time a game ball enters the ball.

On the external terminal board 784, output terminals PT1 to PT10 are arranged horizontally in a row, as shown in FIG. The output terminal PT1 is colored white and outputs a prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the prize ball number information output signal is a signal that notifies each time the number of game balls actually put out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 reaches 10 balls, and in this embodiment, the output signal The signal is output from terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer controls the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 to output 10 prize balls each time the prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to know that game balls have been paid out as prize balls, and the total number of game balls put out by the Pachinko machine 1 can be determined by counting the number of game balls that have been put out.

The output terminal PT2 is colored green and outputs an outer end frame door opening information output signal. As described above, the outer end frame door open information output signal is a signal that informs the player that the door frame 3 and/or the main body frame 4 are open, which does not normally occur during gaming. In this embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT2 while the door frame 3 and/or the main body frame 4 are open. When the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer controls the door frame 3 and the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 while the outer end frame door opening information output signal is being input. /Or it can be recognized that the main body frame 4 is open.

The output terminal PT3 is colored gray and outputs a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal indicates that the variable display of the special symbol is finished (stopped) on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. This is a signal that conveys the status, and in this embodiment, the end (stop) of the variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display 1403 and second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 is sent from the output terminal PT3. It is designed to be output for 0.128 seconds at a time. When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, when the special symbol display information output signal is input, the hall computer displays the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp that the variable display of the special symbol has ended (stopped) on the display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, and also to count the number of times and display the first special on the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp the total number of times the special symbols have been variably displayed on the symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405.

The output terminal PT4 is colored yellow and outputs a starting slot winning information output signal. As described above, the starting hole winning information output signal is a signal that notifies each time a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 shown in FIG. , is output for 0.128 seconds every time a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 from the output terminal PT4. When the starting hole winning information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer outputs the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole of the pachinko machine 1 every time the starting hole winning information output signal is input. It is possible to know that a game ball has entered the starting port 2004, and also to count the number of times the starting port winning information output signal has been input to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp the total number of game balls that have entered the ball.

The output terminal PT5 is colored black and outputs a 15 round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 15 round jackpot information output signal is a signal that conveys that the 15 round jackpot is occurring, and in this embodiment, while the 15 round jackpot is occurring from the output terminal PT5, It is now output. When the 15 round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer detects that a 15 round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 while the 15 round jackpot information output signal is being input. In addition to being able to grasp the current state, it is also possible to grasp the total number of times that a 15-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of times the 15-round jackpot information output signal has been input.

The output terminal PT6 is colored pink and outputs a 2nd round jackpot information output signal. As mentioned above, the 2nd round jackpot information output signal is a signal that conveys that a 2nd round jackpot is occurring, and in this embodiment, while the 2nd round jackpot is occurring from the output terminal PT6, It is now output. When the 2-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer detects that a 2-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 while the 2-round jackpot information output signal is being input. In addition to being able to grasp the current state, it is also possible to grasp the total number of times that a two-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of times the two-round jackpot information output signal has been input.

The output terminal PT7 is colored blue and outputs a normal symbol display information output signal. As mentioned above, the normal symbol display information output signal is a signal that conveys that the fluctuating display of the normal symbols has been finished (stopped) on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT7 for 0.128 seconds when the fluctuating display of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 ends (stops). When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer outputs the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. At 1402, it is possible to know that the fluctuating display of the normal symbols has ended (stopped), and by counting the number of times, the total number of fluctuating displays of the regular symbols can be counted on the regular symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. You can keep track of the number of times.

The output terminal PT8 is colored red and outputs a time saving information output signal. As mentioned above, the time saving information output signal is a signal that conveys that the time saving state is occurring, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT8 while the time saving state is occurring. ing. When the time saving information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer recognizes that the time saving state has occurred in the pachinko machine 1. In addition, by counting the number of times the time saving information output signal is inputted, it is possible to grasp the total number of times the time saving state has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT9 is colored orange and outputs a probability fluctuation information output signal. As described above, the probability fluctuation information output signal is a signal that conveys that a probability fluctuation is occurring, and in this embodiment, the information output signal during probability fluctuation is output from the output terminal PT9 while a probability fluctuation is occurring. It has become so. When the probability fluctuation information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer determines that the probability fluctuation is occurring in the pachinko machine 1 when the probability fluctuation information output signal is input. Not only can it be grasped, but also the total number of times that a probability variation has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped by counting the number of times the probability variation information output signal has been input.

The output terminal PT10 is colored light blue and outputs a main prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the main prize ball number information output signal is the number of balls that enter the various winning holes such as the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the general winning hole 2001, and the big winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. This is a signal that conveys this every time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls reaches 10 balls, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds. It has become. When the main prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer determines that the pachinko machine 1 receives 10 balls as prize balls each time the main prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to know that game balls are scheduled to be paid out as prize balls, and the total number of game balls scheduled to be paid out by the pachinko machine 1 is determined by counting the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out. can do. In addition, for example, game balls that are scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on game balls that have entered various winning holes such as the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the general winning hole 2001, and the big winning hole 2005. When the number of balls reaches 20 or more and the main prize ball number information output signal is output multiple times, the main prize ball number information output signal is output once for 0.256 (= 0.128 seconds x 2 times) seconds. The signals are output at intervals of 0.128 seconds to avoid continuous signals.

Among the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal board 784, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the payout control board 951 side, whereas the output terminals PT3 to PT10 output the various signals output from the main control board 951 side. It is arranged so that various signals output on the 1310 side are output via (pass through) the payout control board 951. The output terminals PT1 to PT10 are colored, and by electrically connecting wires with connectors colored in the same color to the output terminals PT1 to PT10, it is possible to avoid accidentally connecting other wires with electricity. It is now possible to prevent a connection from occurring. Then, various signals output from the payout control board 951 side are transmitted to the hall computer so that various signals output from the payout control board 951 side and various signals output from the main control board 1310 side are not mixed. Output terminals PT1 and PT2 are arranged in a row on the left side of the external terminal board 784, and output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting various signals output from the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer are arranged on the left side of the external terminal board 784. By arranging them in a line from the center left side to the right side, in this respect as well, wiring for transmitting various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hall computer and various signals output on the main control board 1310 side can be connected. This makes it possible to prevent incorrect electrical connection of the wiring for transmitting signals to the hall computer.

In addition, in this embodiment, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side and the main prize ball number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 side are respectively connected to the hall from the external terminal board 784. It is configured to communicate to a computer. This is, for example, when the number of game balls stored in the prize ball tank 802 becomes low in a state where game balls from the pachinko island equipment side are not supplied to the prize ball tank 802 due to some trouble in the pachinko island equipment. In this case, if a 15th round jackpot happens to occur in the pachinko machine 1, the number of game balls stored in the prize ball tank 802 for paying out game balls as prize balls is insufficient, so the game balls cannot be paid out ( Furthermore, for example, if ball jamming or ball jamming occurs in the payout device 830, game balls cannot be paid out unless this problem is resolved.) Then, the prize ball number information output signal output from the payout control board 951 side indicates that the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 70 reaches 10 balls, as described above. Since it is a signal that conveys this fact every time, when it becomes impossible to pay out game balls, the payout control board 951 outputs a prize ball number information output signal and transmits it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. become unable. When the game balls are not paid out, the player calls the hall clerk or the like. A hall clerk or the like checks, for example, a hose-like replenishment nozzle for supplying game balls from the pachinko island equipment to the prize ball tank 802, and identifies the location of ball clogging (also, for example, if it occurs in the payout device 830). By identifying the location of the ball jam or the location of the ball jam and resolving the problem, the game ball can be returned to a state where it can be paid out.

However, even if the hall clerk is working, the game is still in progress using the main control board 1310, so after the 15-round jackpot is completed, the game ball is released due to the work of the hall clerk. When the payout state returns, the payout control board 951 will pay out the unpaid game balls one after another, and even though the 15th round jackpot has ended and the 15th round jackpot has not occurred, the payout control board 951 Each time the number of game balls actually put out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 reaches 10 balls, the board 951 outputs a prize ball number information output signal to notify that fact, and sends the prize ball number information output signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. This will be communicated to. In this case, even though the 15th round jackpot has not occurred, an extremely large number of game balls will be paid out. A problem arises in that the hall computer cannot accurately grasp the relationship between and.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the payout motor 834 is driven and controlled by the payout control board 951 and is independent of whether or not the payout motor 834 is actually paid out as a prize ball, that is, it is independent of the prize ball number information output signal outputted by the payout control board 951. The main control board 1310 generates signals based on the game balls that have entered various winning holes such as the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the general winning hole 2001, and the big winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. Every time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls, a main prize ball number information output signal is output as a signal to convey this fact, and the main prize ball number information output signal is sent to the payout control board 951 and then via the external terminal board 784. We adopted a system in which the information is transmitted to the hall computer. As a result, even if the above-mentioned troubles (problems such as ball jamming in the supply nozzle, ball jamming or ball jamming in the payout device 830, etc.) occur, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout in this gaming state The relationship between the number of game balls scheduled to be thrown out and the relationship can be accurately communicated to the hall computer. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls paid out in the gaming state.

[12. Production display drive board circuit]
Next, the circuit of the effect display drive board 4450 that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 will be described with reference to FIG. 87. As described above, the effect display drive board 4450 is disposed near the bottom of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed within the plate unit 320. It mainly consists of a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. FIG. 87 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460.

[12-1. LCD module circuit]
As shown in FIG. 87, the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V of the effect display drive board 4450 mainly includes a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

The liquid crystal module circuit 4450V receives a serial signal (serial data) from the door frame side display transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. are transmitted as a positive signal and a negative signal, they are input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the common mode choke coil SDL0 outputs a positive signal and a negative signal. It is now possible to separate noise from negative signals. The plus signal and the minus signal from which the noise has been separated are input to the RXIN+ terminal and RXIN- terminal of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal. This resistor SDR0 is a terminating resistor (terminator) and prevents the positive signal and the negative signal from being reflected at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively, thereby preventing disturbance of the serial signal.

The door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 receives three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. Three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, are restored (that is, restored to a parallel signal before being serialized). Note that the red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal are, as described above, although the red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal each output from channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source are 8 bits. , the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d each have 6 bits, a total of 18 bits, so they are the upper 6 bits of each video signal.

The liquid crystal module circuit 4450V receives signals from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510, as well as serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, as described above. Two signals in which a certain LOCKN signal output request data is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e of the peripheral control board 1510 are also input. As described above, the forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits these two signals when the two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e. On the other hand, when the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are not input to the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. The circuit is configured to connect the circuit as follows. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the two signals, so that the two signals are , is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V of the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the pan unit 320 of the door frame 3. When the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are not input to the activation circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. The signal output from the frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transferred from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. is sent to the LCD module circuit 4450V.

The forced switching circuit 1512f switches the signal output from the door frame side production transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the door frame side, when the two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e. A serial signal (serial data) using a differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. is transmitted from the side production transmitter IC 1512d as a plus signal and a minus signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board. 868, and is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and is input to the RXIN+ terminal and RXIN- terminal of the door frame side production receiver ICSDIC0, while the differential circuit 1512e When two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, these two signals are The signal is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and is input to the RXIN+ terminal and RXIN- terminal of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. The door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 determines that when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, it is a request to output a LOCKN signal, A LOCKN signal is output from a LOCKN terminal, which will be described later, to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

Note that, as described above, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, is used to create a startup screen on the game board side when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. During the period of displaying on the display device 1600 or during the period of waiting for a customer and performing a demonstration using the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display In order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the door frame side effect display device 460 is This is sent as an operation confirmation request. Although the LOCKN signal output request data in this embodiment is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e, it is a signal output from the door frame side production transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the above-mentioned Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. The data format is completely different from that of the company's differential serial signal (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)." Therefore, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the signal is not output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d, and an abnormality occurs. Assuming that it is data, a LOCKN signal will be output from the LOCKN terminal, which will be described later. In other words, in this embodiment, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal described later by using the function of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 that outputs the LOCKN signal when it is determined that the received data is abnormal data. In order to force the output, the LOCKN signal output request data, which has a different data format from the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, is sent from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. By outputting the information, it is possible to check whether the device called the door frame side presentation receiver ICSDIC0 is operating normally. This makes it possible to confirm whether a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

The VDD terminal, VDDO terminal, LVDSVDD terminal, PLLVDD terminal, and PDWN terminal of the door frame side presentation receiver ICSDIC0 are each supplied with +3.3V generated by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x shown in FIG. The GND terminal, GNDO terminal, LVDSGND request paper, PLLGND terminal, EDGE terminal, OE terminal, MODE0, and MODE1 terminal of the frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 are each grounded.

The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for the digital circuit, and a capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GND terminal, which serves as the ground for this digital circuit, and the +3.3V power supply supplied to the VDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the line.

The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output, and a capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between the terminals and the GNDO terminal, which serves as the ground for this TTL output, and the voltage is supplied to the VDDO terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the +3.3V power supply line.

The LVDSVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input, and a capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between the terminal and the LVDSGND terminal, which serves as the ground for this LVDS input. High frequency noise is removed from the +3.3V power supply line.

The PLLVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit, and a capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between the terminals and the PLLGND terminal, which serves as the ground for this PLL circuit, and the power is supplied to the PLLVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the +3.3V power supply line.

When +3.3V is supplied (applied) to the PDWN terminal, the logic becomes HI, which indicates normal operation, and when the supply of +3.3 is stopped, the logic becomes LOW, indicating power down. It is a terminal for transmitting information. The PDWN terminal is supplied with +3.3V via the resistor SDR1, and is electrically connected to the other end of the varistor SDZ0, one end of which is grounded. This varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltage of the +3.3V power supply line supplied via the resistor SDR1.

The EDGE terminal uses a rising edge to transmit various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on the clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal, which will be described later. This is a terminal for specifying either the case where the logic is transitioned from LOW to HI or the case where it is a falling edge (the logic is transitioned from HI to LOW), and in this embodiment, the above-mentioned The falling edge is specified by grounding the EDGE terminal. Incidentally, by connecting the EDGE terminal to +3.3V, a rising edge can be specified.

The OE terminal is used to instruct whether or not to permit output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, D0 terminal to D17 terminal, and CLKOUT terminal), which will be described later. As described above, by grounding the OE terminal, the output is always enabled. Incidentally, if the OE terminal is connected to +3.3V, no output will be possible.

The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting an operation mode, and when both are grounded, the operation mode can be selected. The operation modes include normal mode and shakehand mode. In normal mode, three video signals (18-bit video signal), a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, are generated based on the serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals, respectively. In the normal operating mode, the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 restores the parallel signal consisting of three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signal): horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal. be. In the shake hand mode, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. This is a mode in which a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirmation (recovery). This shake hand mode is designed to switch automatically.

For example, three video signals (18-bit video signals), a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, are generated based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. For some reason, the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 restores the parallel signal consisting of three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signal): horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal, and the error occurs. If it is difficult to draw data on the door frame side effect display device 460, the normal mode is automatically switched to the shake hand mode and a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2 which is a damping resistor, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and is input to the peripheral control board 1510 to control the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. The signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control board 1510. When a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the input LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sends a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d in order to notify the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of this fact. Output. When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d connects to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for restoring is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 to the performance display drive board 4450 for the door frame side effect. Send to receiver ICSDIC0. By receiving such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily restored. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Note that the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 are connected to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door. A direct electrical connection may be made via the relay terminal board 882.

As described above, the LOCKN terminal is connected between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. This is a terminal that outputs a request to send a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the two. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the damping resistor SDR2 of the effect display drive board 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the control board 1510.

The SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals output three synchronization signals: a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, which are restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals, respectively. It is a terminal. In this embodiment, the three restored synchronization signals, the horizontal synchronization signal, the vertical synchronization signal, and the clock signal, are not used, so the SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals are unconnected terminals.

The DE terminal is a terminal that outputs a DE signal that indicates whether a clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and data output from terminals D0 to D17, which are data output terminals, are valid or invalid, which will be described later. The DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via a resistor SDR3 which is a damping resistor.

The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal that outputs a clock signal DCLK generated by a PLL circuit built in the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via a resistor SDR4 which is a damping resistor.

The D0 to D17 terminals receive three video signals (18 This is a data output terminal that outputs a bit video signal. Blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals called D0 to D5 terminals in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line for the blue video signals B0 to B5 is a damping resistor. Each is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA0. Green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals called D6 terminals to D11 terminals in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line for the green video signals G0 to G5 is a damping resistor. Each is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA1. Red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals called D12 to D17 terminals in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line for these red video signals R0 to R5 is a damping resistor. Each is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA2.

The grounds of the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the effect display drive board 4450, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are electrically connected and are connected to the same ground. It has become.

[13. Various commands related to transmission and reception of the main control board]
Next, various commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. FIG. 88 is a table showing an example of various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board, FIG. 89 is a table showing an example of various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and FIG. is a table showing a continuation of various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 89, and FIG. 91 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board that the main control board receives. First, we will explain the prize ball command, which is a command related to payout that is sent from the main control board to the payout control board, and then we will explain the various commands that are sent from the main control board to the peripheral control boards, and the commands that the main control board receives. Various commands from the payout control board will be explained.

[13-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives detection signals from various winning switches such as the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. When input, based on these detection signals, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board. This prize ball command has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicate with the pachinko machine 1) drive the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (payout device 830) to dispense the upper tray 321 and lower tray 322, which are storage trays. If the machine that pays out game balls as rental balls is electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a "CR machine"), the main control board The prize ball commands sent from 1310 to the payout control board 951 include commands 10H to 1EH ("H" represents a hexadecimal number). Command 10H specifies one prize ball, and command 11H In command 1EH, 2 prize balls are specified, and in command 1EH, 15 prize balls are specified. The payout control board 951 controls the payout motor 834 to pay out game balls by the specified number of prize balls.

In addition, a pachinko machine 1 and a ball rental machine (a device that directly dispenses game balls as rental balls to storage trays such as an upper tray 321 and a lower tray 322) are installed adjacent to the game parlor (hall), and the pachinko machine 1 and the ball rental machine (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a "general machine"), as shown in FIG. Commands 20H to 2EH are prepared as the prize ball commands to be sent to , command 20H specifies 1 prize ball, command 21H specifies 2 prize balls, ..., command 2EH specifies the prize ball. Fifteen balls are specified. The payout control board 951 controls the payout motor 834 to pay out game balls by the specified number of prize balls.

Note that as a common command for the CR machine and the general machine, a command 30H is prepared as shown in FIG. 88(c), and this command 30H specifies self-check. If the sending side does not receive an ACK signal from the receiving side for a predetermined period of time after sending the command, it can send command 30H and check whether an ACK signal is received. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in this embodiment, the payout control board 951 checks the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[13-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be explained. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands have a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, a status indicating the type of command that has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), It consists of a mode that shows variations of effects and has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, the various commands are related to special figure 1 synchronized performance, special figure 2 synchronized performance related, jackpot related, power on, general pattern synchronized performance related, normal electric role performance related, notification display, and status. It is classified into Display, and Others.

[13-2-1. Special figure 1 synchronized production related]
Special figure 1 synchronized production related is based on the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, and as shown in FIG. 89, the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The first special symbol display 1403 is composed of commands named special symbol 1 synchronized performance start, special symbol 1 designation, special symbol 1 synchronized performance end, and state designation during fluctuation. These various commands are assigned a status of "A*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special pattern 1 synchronized performance start command instructs the start of the special pattern synchronized performance with the performance pattern specified in the mode, and the special pattern 1 designation command specifies a loss, a specific jackpot, and a non-specific jackpot. , the special figure 1 synchronized performance end command is for instructing the end of the special figure 1 synchronized performance, and the variation state designation command is for instructing the probability and time saving state. Note that the probability and time saving states include a low probability time saving state which is a low probability state and indicates a time saving state, a high probability time saving state which is a high probability state and indicates a time saving state, and a low probability time saving state which indicates a time saving state which is a high probability state. It consists of a low probability non-time saving state which indicates that it is a probability state and not a time saving state, and a high probability non time saving state which indicates that it is a high probability state and is not a time saving state (as a normal gaming state , a low probability non-time-saving state is set). Here, the high probability state is a state in which the probability of hitting the jackpot is set higher than the low probability state (normal gaming state), and the time saving state is, for example, a state in which the probability of hitting the jackpot is set higher than that in the normal gaming state. By shortening the time during which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner compared to the non-time saving state (normal gaming state) and displaying them in a static manner in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the normal lottery results, the normal lottery results by the regular lottery (described later) at a predetermined time can be changed. In addition to increasing the number of stop displays compared to the non-time saving state, and further increasing the period during which the movable piece 2004a of the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. 60 is opened and closed compared to the non-time saving state (normal gaming state), By increasing the acceptance rate (entering rate) of game balls into the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. Compared to the non-time-saving state, the decision as to whether or not to open/close the movable piece 2004a is made more often, and when the movable piece 2004a is to be opened/closed, the period of the opening/closing operation of the movable piece 2004a is lengthened. This is a state in which the acceptance rate (ball entry rate) of game balls into the starting port 2004 is increased.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 synchronization production start command is sent when the special symbol 1 variation starts, the special symbol 1 designation command is sent immediately after the special symbol 1 synchronization production starts, and the special symbol 1 synchronization production start command is sent when the special symbol 1 synchronization production starts. The production end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning/losing information is designated. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

[13-2-2. Special figure 2 synchronized production related]
Special figure 2 synchronized production related is based on the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69, and as shown in FIG. 89, the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. This command is composed of commands named "Start special pattern 2 synchronized performance," Specify special pattern 2, and End special pattern 2 synchronized performance regarding the second special symbol display 1405. These various commands are assigned a status of "B*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special pattern 2 synchronized production start command instructs to start the special pattern synchronized production with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the special pattern 2 designation command specifies a loss, a specific jackpot, and a non-specific jackpot. , Special figure 2 synchronized performance end is an instruction to end the special figure 2 synchronized performance.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the special pattern 2 synchronization production start command is sent when the special pattern 2 variation starts, the special symbol 2 designation command is sent immediately after the special pattern 2 synchronization production starts, and the special pattern 2 synchronization production start command is sent when the special pattern 2 synchronization production starts. The production end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variable time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in Figure 89, the categories related to jackpots include jackpot opening, jackpot opening 1 opening Nth display, jackpot 1 closing display, jackpot 1 count display, jackpot ending, jackpot symbol display, and small jack opening. It consists of commands named , small win release display, small win count display, and small win ending. These various commands are assigned a status of "C*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The jackpot opening command instructs the start of the jackpot opening, and the N-th opening jackpot opening command command starts during the opening of the jackpot 1 in rounds 1 to 16 (starting slot unit 2100 shown in FIG. 60). The big winning hole 1 closing display command is used to indicate when the big winning hole 2005 is opening or starting to open for the Nth round. The winning opening 2005 is closed between rounds or has started closing), and the grand winning opening 1 count display command indicates that the number of game balls with a count of 0 to 10 has been counted (as shown in FIG. 69). The jackpot ending command is for instructing the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command is for telling the jackpot number of game balls that have entered the jackpot opening 2005, which is detected by the count sensor 4005. This is an instruction to display symbol information.

In addition, the small win opening command is for instructing the start of the small win opening, and the small win opening display command is for instructing the opening of the small win. The small win count display command is used to instruct the small win medium/large prize opening winning presentation (when a game ball entering the large prize opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005 during the small winning). The small winning ending command instructs the start of the small winning ending.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the jackpot opening command is sent at the start of the jackpot opening, and the N-th time display command when the jackpot 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (when the jackpot 1 is opened (starting port unit 2100). The grand prize opening 1 closing display command is sent when the grand prize opening 1 is closed (starting closing of the grand prize opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100), The big winning hole 1 count display command is used when the big winning hole 1 is opened and when the count changes to the big winning hole 1 (when the big winning hole 2005 of the starting hole unit 2100 is opened, and when the game ball enters the big winning hole 2005) is detected by the count sensor 4005), the jackpot ending command is sent when the jackpot ending starts, and the jackpot symbol display command is sent when the jackpot opening is opened (when the jackpot opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 is opened). ) will be sent to.

In addition, the small win opening command is sent at the start of the small win opening, and the small win opening display command is sent when the small win is opened (when the large win opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 is opened at the time of the small winning), The small win count display command is sent when a small hit, medium or large prize opening is won (when the game ball that entered the large winning opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005 during the small winning), and the small winning ending command is sent. , sent when the small winning ending starts. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 89, the power-on category includes commands named "state at power-on" and "main control return destination at power-on". These various commands are assigned a status of "D*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The power-on state command is for instructing the start of the RAM clear effect and the gaming state. The power-on status command is used to control the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. Information that instructs when the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM, and when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, but also when the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs) ), information indicating which state (probability and time saving state) to return to among the low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state, low probability non time saving state, and high probability non time saving state mentioned above. , and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. For example, when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the model code of this pachinko machine is used to determine which work's copyright it corresponds to, and what kind of game specifications (for example, the probability fluctuation occurs). In addition to the game specifications in which the state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs, there are also game specifications in which probability fluctuations occur with the number of changes in the special symbol being limited (for example, 30 or 70 times). (so-called ST machine), etc.). In other words, the information on the model code of a pachinko machine includes the series code to identify the machine type among the max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, and the series code to identify the copyright of the work. Copyright code and game specifications (for example, in addition to the game specifications that when a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs, the probability change with a limited number of changes of special symbols) It mainly consists of a game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine, etc.) in which this occurs.

The main control return destination command at power-on indicates the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The main control return destination command at power-on mainly consists of information instructing the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69, and information instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. ing.

The transmission timing of the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command is when the main control board is powered on (in addition to when the power is turned on, when the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs) ). Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or recovered from a power outage or instantaneous power failure, the main control side power-on process described later is executed and the peripheral control board command in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process is executed. In the transmission process, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

[13-2-5. Futu synchronization related]
The normal pattern synchronization performance related is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69, and as shown in FIG. 89, the normal pattern display of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. Regarding the device 1402, it is composed of commands named ``Start of ``Fuji pattern synchronization performance'', ``Family pattern designation'', ``Full pattern synchronization performance end'', and ``Change state designation''. These various commands are assigned a status of "E*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The general pattern synchronization performance start command instructs to start the general pattern synchronized performance with the performance pattern specified in the mode, and the general pattern designation command specifies a loss, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot. The figure synchronization performance end command is for instructing the end of the general figure synchronization performance, and the fluctuation state designation command is for instructing the probability and time saving state. As mentioned above, the probability and time saving states include a low probability time saving state which is a low probability state and indicates a time saving state, and a high probability state which indicates a time saving state which is a high probability state. It consists of a time-saving state, a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates a low-probability state and not a time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates a high-probability state and not a time-saving state ( As the normal gaming state, a low probability non-time saving state is set).

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the common symbol synchronization performance start command is sent at the start of the normal symbol 1 variation, the common symbol designation command is sent immediately after the beginning of the common symbol synchronization performance, and the common symbol synchronization performance end command is sent. , is transmitted when the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed (when the normal symbol is confirmed), and the fluctuation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the normal symbol winning/losing information is designated. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
The normal electric effect related is related to the movable piece 2004a of the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. 60, which is opened and closed by the driving of the starting port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. As shown in , it is composed of commands named Opening per common map, Open display for general power, and Ending per common map. These various commands are assigned a status of "F*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The general power opening command is for instructing the start of normal power opening, and the general power opening display command is for starting the general power opening (when the movable piece 2004a is expanded in the left and right direction by the drive of the starting port solenoid 2107). , or when expanding), and the ending command for each general figure instructs to start the ending for each ordinary figure.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the normal power opening command is sent at the start of the normal power opening, and the normal power release display command is transmitted when the general power is released (the movable piece 2004a moves in the left and right direction by driving the starting port solenoid 2107). The general ending command is sent when the general ending starts. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the notification display classification includes commands named winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection/short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door open, and door close. These various commands are assigned a status of "6*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The winning abnormality display command is used when a game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 of the starting hole unit 2100 and the game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 of the starting hole unit 2100 even though there is no jackpot (even though it is not a jackpot). When the count sensor 4005 detects the winning abnormality notification), the connection abnormality display command is, for example, an electrical It instructs to start connection abnormality notification when there is a connection abnormality, and the disconnection/short circuit abnormality display command is, for example, sent to the main control board 1310, the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the count sensor. 4005, etc., to start displaying a disconnection/short circuit abnormality. This command instructs the start of magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when this occurs. Further, when an abnormality occurs in the vibration sensor 2405, a vibration detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted to instruct the start of vibration detection switch abnormality notification.

Further, the door open command is executed when the door frame 3 is moved relative to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal (open signal) from the door frame open switch 618 inputted via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. When the door is in an open state, the door open notification is instructed, and the door frame close command is used to close the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618. This command instructs the door open notification to end when the door is open. On the other hand, the main body frame release command is executed when the main body frame 4 is connected to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the main body frame release switch 619 inputted via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. When the main body frame is in the open state, the main body frame open notification is instructed, and the main body frame close command causes the main body frame 4 to close to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619. This is to instruct the end of the main body frame opening notification when the main body frame is in the closed state.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is sent when a prize is won in the big winning opening other than during a jackpot (when the conditional device is operating), and the connection abnormality display command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951. When there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the dispensing control board 951 when sending a command to The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. Further, the door open command is transmitted when the door is detected to be open (when the door frame 3 is in an open state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618), and the door The frame closing command is transmitted when door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is in a closed state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The main body frame opening command is sent when the main body frame opening is detected (when the main body frame 4 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619), and the main body frame is opened. The frame closing command is transmitted when body frame closure is detected (when the body frame 4 is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the status display classification consists of commands named frame status 1 command (corresponding to the error occurrence command), error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the error cancellation command), and frame status 2 command. There is. These various commands are assigned a status of "7*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command are each commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 951, and detailed explanations of these will be described later. . In addition, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command from the payout control board 951, as shown in FIG. In addition to setting the status, the received command is also set as the mode. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command from the payout control board 951, it adds "7*H" as additional information to these received commands. This formats the command into a command with a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The formatted frame status 1 command is sent when the power is restored, when the frame status changes, and when error cancellation navigation is performed.The error cancellation navigation command is sent when error cancellation navigation is performed, and the frame status 2 command is sent when the power is restored. , and when the frame status changes. Note that these formatted frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 90, the test-related category includes various commands named test. This test command is assigned "8*H" as the status and "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the peripheral control unit 1511, liquid crystal display control unit 1512, lamp drive board 4170, motor drive board 4180, and frame decoration shown in FIG. 72). This is used to inspect various boards such as the drive amplifier board 194).

The test command is sent at times other than RAM clear when the main control board is powered on and RAM clear. Specifically, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, when the power is restored from a power outage or an instantaneous power failure, and when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated, the power-on processing on the main control side, which will be described later, is performed. The test command is executed and transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-10. others]
Other classifications include, as shown in Figure 90, starting opening winning, variation reduction operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory pre-read effect, and It consists of a command named special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect. These various commands are assigned a status of "9*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The starting hole winning command instructs the start of the starting hole winning performance, and is the command to start the performance when a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 4002. , and the start of the performance when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004. The high probability end designation command instructs the state transition from the shortening working state to the variable shortening non-working state, and the special symbol 1 memory command is, 0 to 4 special symbols 1 are reserved (game balls enter the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. The special symbol 2 memory command is used to convey the number of balls that have not been played (the number of balls held), and the special symbol 2 memory command is to convey the number of balls that have not been played (the number of balls that have been reserved). The second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 conveys the number of balls (reserved number) that has not yet been used for the variable display of special symbols, and the normal symbol memory command is for normal symbols 1 pending 0 to 4. This is to convey the number of balls that have passed through the gate section 2003 shown in FIG. 60 and which have not yet been used to display fluctuating normal symbols on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 (pending number). Yes, the special symbol 1 memory pre-read production command pre-reads and makes the special symbol 1 pending before the special symbol 1 pending is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400. The special symbol 2 memory pre-reading performance command is used to instruct the start of a pre-reading performance that notifies a preview of the display result on the first special symbol display unit 1403 based on the function display unit 1400. This is to instruct the start of a pre-reading performance which pre-reads and notifies a preview of the display result by the second special symbol display 1405 based on the special symbol 2 reservation before the special symbol is used for variable display on the device 1405.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the starting hole winning command is transmitted at the time of starting hole winning (when a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 4002, or when a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 4002, When a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the starting port sensor 4004), it is transmitted mainly by voice from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 to notify that fact. The shortening operation end designation command is sent at the end of the stop period (after the deviation stop period has elapsed) after the specified number of fluctuation reductions have been completed. The special symbol 1 memory command is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is determined after the high probability number of times has been consumed (after the outage stop period has elapsed), and the special symbol 1 memory command is sent when the special symbol 1 operation pending ball number changes (game balls are stored in the first starting port 2002). When a game ball enters the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400 and there is a reserved number that is not yet used in the variable display of special symbols, a game ball enters the first starting port 2002. The special symbol 2 memory command is sent when the number of reserved symbols increases, or when the number of reserved symbols is decreased by using the first special symbol display unit 1403 to display special symbols from the retained number. 2 operation When the number of reserved balls changes (a state in which a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and there is a reserved number that is not yet used in the variable display of special symbols on the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400) In addition, when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the number of reservations increases, or from the number of reservations, the second special symbol display 1405 is used to display the fluctuation of special symbols and the number of reservations decreases. The normal symbol memory command is sent when the normal symbol 1 operation and the number of pending balls changes (when the game ball passes through the gate section 2003 and the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 displays a normal symbol in a fluctuating manner). When there is a reserved number that has not been used yet, when a game ball passes through the gate part 2003 and the reserved number increases, or from the reserved number, the normal symbol display 1402 is used to display fluctuations in the normal symbols. The special symbol 1 memory pre-reading production command is sent when the number of reserved balls increases (when a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 and the number of reserved balls increases). ), and the special symbol 2 storage pre-read performance command is transmitted when the number of reserved balls increases when the special symbol 2 is activated (when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the number of reserved balls increases). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

By the way, as mentioned above, the starting hole winning command is used when a starting hole is won (when a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 4002, or when a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 4002), When a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the sensor 4004, the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 mainly transmit a sound to notify that fact. How the peripheral control board 1510 shown in 72 uses the starting opening winning command may vary depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are designed to not only provide audio notifications but also to monitor whether there is any fraudulent activity. On the other hand, other pachinko machines have specifications in which the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the starting opening winning command, but does not notify the player by voice from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

[13-3. Various commands from the payout control board that the main control board receives]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 951 that the main control board 1310 receives will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 91, the classification of various commands from the payout control board 951 includes commands named frame status 1, error cancellation navigation, and frame status 2. The priority order is set in the order of frame state 2.

Frame status 1 commands (equivalent to error occurrence commands) include out of bulb, full tank, 50 or more in stock, connection error, and CR not connected, and if the bulb is out, bit 0 (B0, "B" represents a bit) is set to the value 1, when the tank is full, the value 1 is set to the bit 1 (B1), when there are 50 or more in stock, the value 1 is set to the bit 2 (B2), and when there is a connection error, the value 1 is set to the bit 1 (B1). Bit 3 (B3) is set to a value of 1, and if CR is not connected, bit 4 (B4) is set to a value of 1. In bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command, a value of 1 is set for B5, a value of 0 is set for B6, and a value of 0 is set for B7.

The error cancellation navigation command (equivalent to the error cancellation command) includes ball gumming, payout detection sensor error, and retry error. In ball gumming, bit 2 (B2) is set to value 1, and the payout detection sensor In the case of an error, the value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and in the case of a retry error, the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4). Here, the "dispensing detection sensor error" indicates whether a malfunction has occurred in the dispensing detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70. A "retry error" indicates that inconsistent payouts of game balls have been repeatedly performed due to retry operations. Bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the error cancellation navigation command have a value of 0 for B0, a value of 0 for B1, a value of 0 for B5, a value of 1 for B6, Then, the value 0 is set in B7.

The frame state 2 command includes a ball being removed, and a value of 1 is set in bit 0 (B0) when the ball is being removed. Bit 1 (B1) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame status 2 command have a value of 0 for B1, a value of 0 for B2, a value of 0 for B3, a value of 0 for B4, a value of 1 for B5, a value of 1 for B6, and The value 0 is set in B7.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame status 1 command is sent when the power is restored, when the frame status changes, and when error cancellation navigation is performed, the error cancellation navigation command is sent when error cancellation navigation is performed, and the frame status 2 command is sent when error cancellation navigation is performed. is sent when the power is restored and when the frame status changes. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process, which will be described later.

[14. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on processing, FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 92, and FIG. 94 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows. First, various random numbers used for game control will be explained, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on process, and the main control side timer interrupt process will be explained.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
Various random numbers used for game control include random numbers for jackpot determination, which are used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot gaming state, and random numbers for determining whether or not to generate a reach (out of reach) when a jackpot gaming state does not occur. Random numbers for reach determination to be used for determination and fluctuations for use in determining the fluctuation display pattern of special symbols that are variably displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 and second special symbol display 1405 shown in FIG. A random number for a display pattern, a random number for a jackpot symbol used to determine a jackpot symbol derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 when generating a jackpot gaming state, and this jackpot symbol. The random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol used to determine the initial value of the random number for the symbol, which is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 when generating the small win game state. Random numbers for small winning symbols used to determine small winning symbols, random numbers for determining initial values for small winning symbols, etc. are prepared for use in determining initial values of the random numbers for small winning symbols. In addition to these random numbers, a random number for normal symbol hit determination, which is used to determine whether to open/close the movable piece 2004a of the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. A random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination used to determine the initial value of the random number, and a normal random number for determining the variable display pattern of the normal symbol that is variably displayed on the normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. 69. Random numbers and the like for symbol fluctuation display patterns are prepared.

Among the various random numbers used for such game control, the jackpot determination random number is updated by hardware, while the other various random numbers are updated by software.

For example, the jackpot determination random number is directly updated by hardware by a main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, this main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an first uses a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a with a value of 1 within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value. (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When the extraction is completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. do. The main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a selects the value extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an as a jackpot. It is set as a random number for judgment.

On the other hand, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed, the value is incremented by 1, thereby counting up. This counter counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination, the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is updated. This method of updating a counter is called an "initial value update type counter." The random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process in which one value is drawn from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number. .

In this embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated at power-on, or when the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values is stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off). When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, such as when the checksum value (sum value) does not match, the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is set by the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. retrieves the ID code from its built-in nonvolatile RAM, and performs an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination based on the retrieved ID code. The system is such that the derived fixed value is set. In other words, the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is always overwritten with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set as the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is derived using the ID code, and is stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a. The first security measure is that the ID code cannot be rewritten even if an external device is used if the ID code is stored in the memory. A second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the above is taken to prevent the data from being analyzed.

Here, the advantage of extracting the ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a and using the extracted ID code as a random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination will be explained. For example, a person who attempts to illegally obtain game balls that are paid out as prize balls may somehow obtain the game board 5, disassemble it, and steal the ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is obtained illegally and it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination matches the normal symbol hit determination value, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the ID code is attached with a code, it is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a' provided in other game boards 5'. In other words, in other game boards 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination matches the normal symbol hit determination value is also completely different from that of the game board 5 obtained. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless for other game boards 5', that is, other pachinko machines 1', so it was disassembled and analyzed. Even if an instantaneous stop is generated at each predetermined interval obtained and a game ball is passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 60 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece of the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. It is not possible to generate a gaming state in which a game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004 by opening and closing 2004a.

[14-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer can, for example, indicate the address placed on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after exiting a subroutine. It indicates the address loaded on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is loaded.

Then, the above-mentioned main control program performs the main control side power-on processing under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93. When this main control side power-on process is started, the main control program sets RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, it is possible to update the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit).

Following step S10, the main control program performs initial value setting and startup setting of the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S12). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as " A timer setting value is set in the "WDT control register"), the main control built-in WDT 1310af is activated, and time measurement is started until the main control MPU 1310a is reset. When the main control built-in WDT 1310af starts, the main control built-in WDT 1310af starts measuring time, and by the time the measured time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, the watchdog timer clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a ( If a timer clear setting value is not set in the WDT clear register (hereinafter referred to as "WDT clear register"), the main control MPU 1310a will be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT1310af starts up and starts measuring time, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the measured time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, The time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and time measurement is started again. In this way, by repeatedly performing the process of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af until the time set by the timer setting value is reached and starting time measurement again, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a can operate normally. It is possible to monitor whether the

Following step S12, the main control program performs a power outage clearing process (step S14). In this power outage clearing process, first, output of a power outage clear signal to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e shown in FIG. 78 is started. This power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is composed of a comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, and a D-type flip-flop MIC22. The comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, compares the voltages between +24V and the reference voltage, or compares the voltages between +12V and the reference voltage, and outputs the comparison results. The result of this comparison is that when a power outage or instantaneous power outage does not occur, the logic becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

In the power outage clearing process, first, by starting to output a power outage clearing signal to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e, outputting the power outage clearing signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clearing terminal of this D-type flip-flop MIC22, is started. This power failure clear signal is input from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca with its logic set to LOW. be done. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the logic input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, can be canceled until the latched state is set. It can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

Subsequently, in the power outage clearing process, wait timer processing is performed to determine whether or not a power outage notice signal has been input. The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, in the event of a power outage or instantaneous power outage (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes lower than the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input as a power outage warning from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until the voltage rises to the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure notice voltage and becomes stable. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the wait time (wait timer). has been done. The determination as to whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is made based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, as the power outage warning signal.

If the power failure warning signal is not input even after waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on, the main control program sends the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Stop output. Here, the power failure clear signal is sent from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, with its logic set to HI, and sent to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. is input. Thereby, the main control MPU 1310a can set the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to the latched state. When the D-type flip-flop MIC22 latches a state in which the logic is LOW and is input to its preset terminal PR terminal, it outputs a power outage warning signal from its output terminal 1Q terminal.

Following step S14, the main control program makes it possible to execute a RAM clear process that initializes the main control built-in RAM (gaming storage unit) for a predetermined period of time from the time the power is turned on (when the game side power is turned on). operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs an error cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) to the main control MPU 1310a based on the operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951. Depends on whether or not. Based on the logic value of the operation signal, the main control program determines that when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI, it does not instruct to clear the RAM, and the operation switch 954 is operated. On the other hand, when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that it is an instruction to clear the RAM, and it is determined that the operation switch 954 is being operated.

In step S16, the main control program sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1 when the operation switch 954 is operated (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to the value 0 (step S20). That is, the main control program is capable of executing a RAM clearing process that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in RAM (gaming storage unit)) for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. state (gaming control side power-on operation control means). The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG determines whether to erase game information related to games such as probability fluctuations and unpaid prize balls stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 1310a. This flag is set to the value 1 when the game information is to be deleted, and to the value 0 when the game information is not to be deleted. Note that the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S18 and step S20 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs wait time waiting processing (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system that controls the drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72 is activated (boot I am waiting until In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting.

Following step S22, the main control program determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e as a power outage warning. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power outage warning signal. When it is determined in step S24 that a power outage warning signal is input, the main control program returns to the determination in step S24 again, and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and time measurement is started again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Thereafter, the main control program performs this main control side power-on process again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Note that a detailed explanation will be given later regarding the fact that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time waiting process in step S22.

If it is determined in step S24 that no power outage warning signal is input, the main control program determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when the gaming information is to be erased, and to the value 0 when the gaming information is not to be erased. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 in step S26, that is, when the gaming information is not to be erased, a checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum is calculated by considering the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculating the total thereof.

Following step S28, the main control program compares the calculated checksum value (sum value) with the checksum value (sum value) stored in main control side power-off processing (power-off time), which will be described later. It is determined whether they match (step S30). If they match, the main control program determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores and retains game backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value), and backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off processing described later. This is a flag indicating whether or not the main control side power off process has been completed normally, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power off process has been completed normally, and is set to a value of 0 when the main control side power off process has not been normally completed. In the inspection process of the main control board 1310 manufacturing line, the checksum calculation in step S28 and the determination in step S30 are performed when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection. A detailed explanation of , will be given later.

When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S32, that is, when the main control side power-off processing has ended normally, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM for when the power is restored ( Step S34). In this setting, power restoration information is read from the ROM (main control built-in ROM) built into the main control MPU 1310a, and this power restoration information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thereby, game information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to this game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that "power restoration" refers to the state in which the power is turned on after being cut off, as well as the state in which power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage, and the state in which the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage. This also includes a state in which the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset by irradiating the main control board 1310 with high frequency waves from a hidden high frequency output device (hidden high frequency output device), and then returns to normal operation.

Following step S34, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 0 (step S36). As a result, the game information, checksum value (sum value), etc. are changed as various processes are performed after this, so the main control side power-off process described later is normally completed and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared, as will be described later.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S26, that is, when erasing gaming information, or when the checksum values (sum values) do not match in step S30, , or when the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (value 0) in step S32, that is, when the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally, the main control program erases all of the main control built-in RAM. The area is cleared (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the gaming control side RAM clearing process triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 954 described above (payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program is executed by writing the value 0 into the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM and set it as an initial value. The main control MPU 1310a also performs processing when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 instructs to clear the RAM and erases gaming information, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power is cut off. If the process has not ended normally, a fixed numerical value range of a counter that retrieves a unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a and updates a random number for normal symbol hit determination based on the retrieved ID code. Perform initial value derivation processing to always derive the same fixed value from , and set this fixed value as the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination to be used for determining the initial value of the random number for determining normal symbol hit described above. do.

Following step S38, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is carried out by reading initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initial settings (step S44). Here, various serial input/output ports built into the main control MPU 1310a (for example, serial input/output ports (receiving channels and transmitting channels) for the payout control board 951, serial input/output ports (receiving channels and transmitting channels) for the peripheral control board 1510, ), the transmission serial port prescaler is configured to set the communication speed, parity is present, etc., and the transmission serial port control register is configured to initialize the transmitting circuit, enable transmission, etc.

Following step S44, the main control program performs test signal output port initialization settings (step S46). Here, in a gaming machine testing institute, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on.

Following step S46, the main control program performs activation settings for the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69 (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to games, a hardware random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310a is used to update, by hardware, a jackpot determination random number used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot gaming state. At the same time, the hardware random number setting register is set to activate the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an. When the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an is activated by these settings, a predetermined random number circuit is generated at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77). Other values within the numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and once all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predefined numerical range is extracted again, Based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication at high speed. Note that when the main control MPU 1310a acquires a random number (random value) from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an, and when this latch signal is input, the main control The random number (random value) extracted by the built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an is acquired from a hard random number latch register built in the built-in main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the obtained random number as a jackpot determination random number.

Following step S48, the main control program performs reservation settings for commands to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to notify that the power has been turned on (power restored) based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, FIG. A power-on state command classified as power-on and a power-on main control return destination command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM may read out game information from the game backup information and store various commands corresponding to this game information. be. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are subsequently transmitted. These commands are sent in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later. A detailed explanation will be given later regarding the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50.

Following step S50, the main control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control program executes an error cancellation navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (operation switch) when a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, when the main control side main processing has started. This will restrict the execution of the gaming control side RAM clearing process triggered by the receipt (normal operation control means). As described above, based on the concept of time sharing, the main control program uses the detection signal inputted with the operation of the operation switch 954 as the error release navigation command for a predetermined period of time from the power-on as described above. The RAM clearing process is triggered by the input (gaming control side power-on operation control means), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the execution of the RAM clearing process is restricted even if the error cancellation navigation command is input ( (game control side normal operation control means), is handled as a release switch for canceling error notification accompanying an error that has occurred. In other words, the operation switch 954 (error cancellation section), which was originally supposed to be used to cancel an error that occurred regarding the payout operation, is used instead as a game storage section for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. The main control built-in RAM (and the payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit) functions as an operation unit to execute the RAM clear process to start initialization, and after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the game ball It is possible to function as an operation unit for canceling an error that occurs regarding a payout operation.

Next, the main control program determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S54). As described above, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e as a power outage warning. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

If no power outage warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program performs a non-winning random number update process (step S56). In this non-winning/losing random number updating process, the above-mentioned random numbers for reach determination, random numbers for variable display patterns, random numbers for determining initial values for jackpot symbols, random numbers for determining initial values for small winning symbols, etc. are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number updating process, random numbers that are not related to winning/losing determination (jackpot determining) are updated by software. In addition, the above-mentioned random numbers for normal symbol hit determination, random numbers for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination, random numbers for normal symbol fluctuation display patterns, etc. are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

Following step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control program determines whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. If the power outage warning signal has not been input, the non-winning random number update process is performed in step S56. and repeat steps S54 to S56. Note that the processing from step S54 to step S56 is referred to as "main processing on the main control side."

On the other hand, when a power outage warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program sets interrupt prohibition (step S58). This setting prevents the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, from being performed, prevents writing to the main control built-in RAM, and protects game information from being rewritten.

Following step S58, the main control program starts outputting a power outage clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as that for starting output of the power outage clear signal in the power outage clearing process in step S14 is performed. Thereby, the main control program can release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S60, the main control program is as shown in FIG. , the drive signals output to the second special reservation number display 1406, the normal symbol display 1402, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the status display 1401, the round display 1407, etc. are stopped (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by considering the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area for the above-mentioned checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value.

Following step S64, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control program sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting makes it impossible to access the main control built-in RAM (game storage section), thereby preventing the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game storage section) from being updated.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the built-in main control WDT 1310af started in step S12, the time measurement by the built-in main control WDT 1310af is cleared, and time measurement starts again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Thereafter, the main control program performs this main control side power-on process again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Note that the processing from step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, and the main control side power-on process is performed when the power is restored thereafter.

In addition, in step S30, it is checked whether the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal or not, and then in step S32, it is checked whether the main control side power-off processing has been completed normally. is being inspected. In this way, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is examined whether the game backup information has been stored due to fraudulent activity.

Here, a description will be given of the fact that the determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24 is performed subsequent to the wait time waiting process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where there is no determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined following the wait time waiting process in step S22 and the subsequent processing is proceeded. We will explain the problems in .

As mentioned above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is used to charge the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. The electric charge is applied as +5V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs. In other words, even if the power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off due to a momentary power outage or power outage, the electric charge charged to the hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V, and the power from the pachinko island equipment is restored. The main control side power-off processing can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power is cut off. This is because a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs while a player is playing a game, that is, while the main control side main processing or the main control side timer interrupt processing (described later) occurs and the pachinko island equipment is interrupted. When the power is cut off, the main control side power cut-off processing can be completed reliably.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time waiting process of step S22 when the power is restored, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 as shown in FIG. Start counting the waiting time (boot timer: in this embodiment, 2.5 seconds is set) until the system that controls drawing of the device 460 starts up (boots), and immediately before the waiting time reaches that waiting time. If an instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs, the electric charge charged in the hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, but within a period of approximately 7ms, step S42 The interrupt initial setting is performed in step S52, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52, so that even if the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side It may become impossible to complete the main control side power-off process in the power-on process. Therefore, the main control side power-on process is started again when the power is restored without storing the calculated checksum value based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

Then, when the power is restored this time, the main control side power-on process is started, the wait time standby process in step S22 is completed without an instantaneous power outage or power outage, and then, in step S28, the main control built-in RAM When the value calculated based on the contents of the checksum is compared with the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs in step S30, it is found that the checksum values should match. Instead, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared in step S38. In other words, when the power is restored, the operation switch 954 is operated by a hall clerk, etc., and the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared) even without the hall clerk's intention to clear the RAM. ).

Therefore, in this embodiment, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is provided as step S24, and when a power outage warning signal is being input, Returning again to the determination in step S24, the determination in step S24 is repeated as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and time measurement is started again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Although a value is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S18 or step S20 before performing the wait time standby process in step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, the contents (gaming information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all even if RAM access permission is set in step S10.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is provided as step S24, and when a power outage warning signal has been input (that is, step When it is determined in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process in S22), the process returns to the determination in step S24, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, By repeatedly performing the determination in step S24, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted, so that the game cannot proceed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game information from being updated, and to prevent variations in the checksum calculation results. This allows the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to determine that the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation and memorized value in step S64 match when restarted. Therefore, there is no need to initialize the game information stored and held in the main control built-in RAM immediately before a momentary power outage or power outage occurs. Therefore, when the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the gaming information immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage from being initialized.

Immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is provided as step S24, and if the power outage warning signal has not been input (that is, in step S22) (When it is determined in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is in progress of the game, the pachinko machine 1 Even if the power supply to the main control MPU 1310a is cut off, the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 supplies power to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the main control side power-off processing consisting of the processing from step S58 to step S68 and an infinite loop, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 When the control MPU 1310a is restarted, the control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the checksum calculation result in the backup process (that is, the value stored in the checksum calculation in step S64). Therefore, there is no need to initialize the gaming information stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs. In other words, the main control board 1310 can be started after being restored to the gaming information that existed immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage occurred.

Furthermore, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, if it is determined in step S24 that a power outage notice signal has been input, the main control MPU 1310a forcibly resets the contents of the main control built-in RAM using the main control built-in WDT 1310af. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, the main control side power-off processing can be started again without updating the The main control side power-off processing can be reliably completed within the "instantaneous power outage or power outage securing period" of about 7 ms by the standard hardware. In other words, in this embodiment, when power is cut off from the pachinko island equipment due to an instantaneous power outage or power outage while performing the power-on processing on the main control side at the time of power restoration, the main control MPU 1310a The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in Fig. 77 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal, for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power-off processing cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms due to the hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2, the wait time standby processing in step S22 Immediately following step S24, it is determined whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. If a power outage warning signal has been input, the process returns to step S24, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, step S24 is performed. By repeating this determination, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the built-in main control WDT 1310af activated in step S12, and the time measurement by the built-in main control WDT 1310af is cleared and restarted. By not being able to start time measurement, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. By forcibly resetting the main control MPU 1310a by the main control built-in WDT 1310af using software, the steps after step S24 (specifically, interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then in step S52). It is possible to prevent the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM from being updated by preventing the control flow from proceeding to the control flow in which interrupt permission is set and the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, which will be described later. This system was adopted. In this way, when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the power is cut off from the pachinko island equipment, there is a part that is covered by software so that the contents (gaming information) of the main control built-in RAM will not be changed at all, and a part that is covered by the main control side power supply. The content of the main control built-in RAM (game information) is divided into two parts: a hardware part that ensures that the timeout process is completed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (gaming information) are not changed at all. This makes it possible to reliably prevent game information) from being changed.

Next, a description will be given of the reservation setting of a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50. In step S50, as described above, the fact that the power has been turned on (restored) is determined based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. In order to transmit the message, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. As described above, this power-on main control return destination command mainly consists of information instructing the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2107 and information instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. There is. Here, first, if the main control return destination command at power-on does not include information instructing the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2107 and information instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. A problem in the case where the command to be sent at power-on as the main control return destination command at power-on is not reserved in step S50 will be described.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of a jackpot game state screen (for example, a jackpot game performance screen) in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 shown in FIG. 60, the main control board 1310 drives the attacker solenoid 2108 and a momentary power outage or power outage occurs while the big prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. Based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in S34, the game state immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage occurs is restored, so that the attacker When the solenoid 2108 starts to be driven, the big prize opening 2005 changes from the closed state to the open state by the opening/closing member 2005a.

However, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored. When the power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is generating a jackpot gaming state as a gaming state, if an instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs and then the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will control the main control board 1310 when the power is restored. Based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from It is not possible to display which round of the jackpot game state it is in at all. That is, for example, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 and is detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. Even if the main control board 1310 sends a message to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the game ball that entered the big prize opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and time saving state. Even if the number can be displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, it is not possible to display which round (that is, what round) of the jackpot game state it is in at all.

In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving the attacker solenoid 2108 and opens the big prize opening 2005 by the opening/closing member 2005a, for example, when finishing the fourth round (fourth round) of the jackpot game state. The main control board 1310 sends a grand prize opening 1 close display command that instructs the transition from the closed state to the closed state (that is, to start closing the big prize opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 between rounds) from the peripheral control board 1310. When the main control board 1310 starts the 5th round (fifth round) of the jackpot game state by transmitting it to the board 1510, it starts driving the attacker solenoid 2108 and closes the jackpot 2005 by the opening/closing member 2005a. The main control board 1310 sends a command to display the opening of the grand prize opening for the fifth time to instruct the state to transition from the state to the open state (that is, to start opening the fifth round of the grand prize opening 2005) from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. do. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen indicating the start of the 5th round of the jackpot game state from the screen corresponding to the probability and time saving state described above and displays it in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. becomes.

In addition, for example, a screen informing the player that the gaming state is such that the game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004 and is advantageous to the player (for example, that the movable piece 2004a is expanded) is displayed. While the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of the screen that conveys to the player the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the starting port solenoid 2107 as shown in FIG. If a momentary power outage or power outage occurs while the movable piece 2004a of the second starting port 2004 is expanded in the left and right direction, and the power is restored thereafter, the main control board 1310 The starting port solenoid 2107 is restored to the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the RAM with built-in control in the work area of the RAM with built-in control. When the movable piece 2004a starts to be driven, the movable piece 2004a changes from a state in which it stands up substantially vertically to a state in which it is expanded in the left-right direction.

However, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored. When the power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which game balls can be received into the second starting port 2004, creating a gaming state advantageous to the player, a momentary power outage or power outage may occur. Then, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and time-saving state specified by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and returned, the game state becomes such that the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004, resulting in a game state that is advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display a screen at all on the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 to inform that the player is present. For this reason, players seated at the front of the pachinko machine may be surprised at the occurrence of a momentary power outage or power outage, and when the power is restored, game balls may be received into the second starting port 2004 just before the momentary power outage or power outage occurs. In some cases, the user may forget that the gaming state is such that the game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004 as the gaming state when the power is restored. Despite this, when the power is restored, a screen instructing a game (that is, a screen instructing a game in which a game ball enters the second starting port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. As a result, there was a problem in that the player did not know what kind of game to play.

As described above, in the two examples described above, there was a problem in that the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power failure or power outage could not be returned to immediately after the power was restored. In other words, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and the power is restored, a player seated in front of a pachinko machine will see the pachinko machine system in a frozen state, mistakenly thinking that it has malfunctioned. There was a problem.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 turns on the power (in addition to when the power is turned on, this also includes when the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power failure occurs), the main control board 1310 uses the power-on status command. In order to send the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command classified into power-on shown in FIG. is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are sent in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above-mentioned example, in the fourth round of the jackpot gaming state, When a momentary power outage or power outage occurs, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 starts driving the attacker solenoid 2108 and opens the big prize opening 2005 from the closed state by the opening/closing member 2005a. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen specifying that it is the fourth round of the jackpot game state (in other words, a screen indicating what round it is). ) cannot be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, but in a jackpot game state, when the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven and the jackpot opening 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member 2005a. A screen that conveys a message to the player (for example, a screen that conveys a message to the player, ``You have won the jackpot. The grand prize opening is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the grand prize opening.'') It is possible to display on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 to instruct a player seated at the front of the pachinko machine to play a game in which a game ball is placed into the big prize opening 2005 after the power is restored. For example, in the above-mentioned example, while the game state is such that game balls can be received into the second starting port 2004 and the game state is advantageous to the player, an instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs, and then the power is restored. When the main control board 1310 returns, a screen informing you that the starting port solenoid 2107 is started to expand the pair of movable pieces 2004a in the left and right direction (for example, the The peripheral control board 1510 displays a message on the game board side effect display device 1600 that tells the player, This can be displayed in the display area to instruct a player seated at the front of the pachinko machine to play a game in which a game ball is entered into the second starting port 2004 after the power is restored. This allows the main control board 1310 to give detailed instructions as to where the peripheral control board 1510 should return when power is restored after a momentary power outage or power outage occurs. Therefore, after the power is restored, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage. In other words, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and the power is restored, a player seated in front of a pachinko machine will see the pachinko machine system in a frozen state, mistakenly thinking that it has malfunctioned. This can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection process which is the inspection process of the main control board 1310 manufacturing line, the checksum in step S28 is checked when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be explained. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 is Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off processing, even if the checksum is calculated based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM in step S28, it is not executed in step S30. In the comparison and determination, the checksum values cannot possibly match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM must be cleared in step S38. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on is performed in step S50, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89 are created. By storing the transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, only two commands, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. will be stored in the state. As for these commands, in the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later, a power-on state command is first transmitted, followed by a power-on main control return destination command. Using this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 issues a power-on status command as the first command. It will be sent to the inspection device for the main control board inspection process.

By the way, as mentioned above, the power-on state command is executed as shown in FIG. Information that instructs when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. (including when the power is restored), the state is restored in any of the above-mentioned low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state, low probability non time saving state, and high probability non time saving state (probability and time saving state). It consists of information instructing whether to play the pachinko machine, and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a problem occurs when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

As mentioned above, the model code of the pachinko machine is determined when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310). What kind of game specifications (for example, when a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs), and what kind of game specifications (for example, a game specification in which the state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs), as well as a limited number of changes in special symbols (for example, It is possible to specify whether the game is a game specification (such as a so-called ST machine) in which a probability change occurs when the game is played 30 times or 70 times.

In the manufacturing line of a manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control boards 1310, the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works may coexist. Then, workers on the production line can determine which of the copyrights of multiple types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works Movie A, Movie B, Drama C, Movie D, Manga E, and Manga F) has ownership over the copyright. You may not know whether the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright for a work called movie D) among the copyrights of multiple types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work Manga F). There is also a misconception or misunderstanding that it is flowing down the production line. Therefore, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of a manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works coexist, the production line worker will It is not possible to confirm which work's copyright belongs to the manufactured main control board 1310, and even if the copyright of the same work belongs to which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) It is also impossible to confirm what type of game it is (type of game) and what kind of game specifications (game specifications or ST machines in which when a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs). As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of multiple types of works coexist, the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of multiple types of works coexist. 1310 will be sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. For this reason, workers on the game board assembly line sometimes attached a main control board 1310 to the game board 5 that does not correspond to the game board 5 with respect to the copyright of the work. As a result, there was a problem in that the production efficiency of the game board 5 decreased.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the main control board 1310 inputs the model code of the pachinko machine when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, this also includes when the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs). In order to send the power-on state command including information indicating the power-on state command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on shown in FIG. 89 and the power-on main control return destination command are sent. is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are sent in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

As a result, a worker on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 can turn on the power to the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device can operate the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on status command received from and sweet digital type, the series code to identify which type it is, the copyright code to identify the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when a probability change occurs, the next jackpot game state will be changed. In addition to game specifications in which the state continues until the occurrence of a special symbol, a game specification code for specifying a game specification in which a probability change occurs with a limited number of changes in the special symbol (ST machine, etc.); By visually checking detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on What type of machine is it (max type, middle type, or sweet digital type) and what kind of game specifications (if a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs) It is also possible to determine whether the game is a game specification or an ST machine. As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of a manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works coexist, the main control board inspection process of the production line By being able to visually check the inspection monitor and accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, the operator can classify the copyright of the work by main control board 1310 and perform subsequent work. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the operator of the game board assembly line can reliably attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 corresponding to the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board 1310 that does not correspond to the game board 5 corresponding to the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improving the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[14-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control side timer interrupt processing will be explained. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeated at every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS. 92 and 93.

When the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, in the main control board 1310, the main control program switches the register banks as shown in FIG. 94 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S100). The general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks, a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing described above, while the first register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is the main routine. In step S100, in order to use the second register bank in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine, the second register bank is changed from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing. Switch the register bank to the register bank. In this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is started, there is no need to save each register to the stack.

Following step S100, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction processing, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing described later, the normal In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1402 lights up according to the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern determined by the symbols and the ordinary electric accessory control process, the payout control board 951 also sends various commands sent by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). When determining whether or not a payer ACK signal indicating that the payer has been received normally is input, time management is performed such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4ms, so every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4ms. However, when the result of the subtraction becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes 0. Note that these various times and ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input processing, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, this main control program, for example, detects the detection signal from the general winning hole sensor 4020 shown in FIG. 69 that detects the game ball that has entered the general winning hole 2001 shown in FIG. The detection signal from the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69 which detects the game ball that entered the big prize opening 2005, and the detection signal shown in FIG. The detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 60, the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69 that detects a game ball passing through the gate section 2003 shown, a detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 that detects fraudulent activity using a magnet shown in FIG. 69 that the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 has successfully received the prize ball command sent by the vibration sensor 2405 that detects the fraudulent act of giving vibration to the gaming machine shown in FIG. The payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951 that conveys the information is read and stored in the input information storage area as input information. In addition, a detection signal from a first starting port sensor 4002 that detects a game ball that has entered the first starting port 2002, and a detection signal from a second starting port sensor 4004 that detects a game ball that has entered the second starting port 2004. When each signal is read, the corresponding starting opening winning command shown in FIG. 90 classified into others is stored as transmission information in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. In other words, when there is a detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002, the corresponding starting port winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and when there is a detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004. , and the corresponding starting opening winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, in this embodiment, the detection signal from the general winning a prize hole sensor 4020 which detects the game ball which entered the general winning a prize hole 2001, and the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 which detects the game ball which entered the big winning a prize hole 2005 , a detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002 that detects the game ball that entered the first starting port 2002, a detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004 that detects the game ball that entered the second starting port 2004. , and the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate section 2003 is read as the first time when this switch input process is started, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has passed, the detection signal is read. , respectively, are read again a second time. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. It is determined whether or not any of the comparison results have the same result. If the results are not the same, they are read again a third time, and the third and second reading results are compared. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results have the same result. If the results are not the same, they are read again a fourth time, and the fourth and third reading results are compared. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is the same, it will be treated as if the game ball did not enter.

In this way, in the switch input process, the main control program receives the detection signals from the general prize opening sensor 4020, count sensor 4005, first starting opening sensor 4002, second starting opening sensor 4004, and gate sensor 4003 for the first time. ~ By performing two readings in total, one for comparison for the third time and the second reading for comparison for the second to fourth times, false detections due to the effects of chattering, noise, etc. Since it is possible to avoid this, the reliability of the detection signals from the general prize opening sensor 4020, count sensor 4005, first starting opening sensor 4002, second starting opening sensor 4004, and gate sensor 4003 is increased. be able to.

Following step S104, the main control program performs win/loss random number update processing (step S106). In this win/loss random number update process, the above-mentioned random numbers for jackpot symbols and random numbers for small win symbols are updated. In addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, which is updated in the non-winning random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for small winning symbols is also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol are updated in the main control side main processing and this main control side timer interrupt processing to further enhance randomness. . On the other hand, since the random number for the jackpot symbol and the random number for the small prize symbol are random numbers related to the win/loss determination (jackpot determination), their respective counters count up only every time this win/loss random number update process is performed. In addition, the above-mentioned random numbers for normal symbol hit determination and initial value determination random numbers for normal symbol hit determination are also updated by this win/loss random number update process.

For example, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is, as mentioned above, an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value. The range from 1 to the maximum value is counted up by incrementing the value by 1 each time this main control side timer interrupt processing is performed. It counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination, the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is updated by this win/loss random number update process. The random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process in which one value is drawn from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number. .

In this embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol are used as the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. The winning/losing random number updating process and the winning/losing random number updating process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process which is this routine are updated, but each time the interrupt timer occurs, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven and the next If the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , and the random number for determining the initial value for small winning symbols may be updated only in the non-winning random number updating process of step S56.

Following step S106, the main control program performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, the input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and the prize ball command shown in FIG. 88 for paying out game balls based on this input information is created, and the prize balls are paid out as prize balls. When the planned number of game balls has reached 10 balls, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to notify that fact, and it is stored as output information in the output information storage area, or A self-check command shown in FIG. 88 for checking the connection state between the control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is created. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. 60, a prize ball command is created to pay out 15 balls as prize balls, and the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is created. Since the number of balls has reached 10 balls, the main prize ball number information output signal is set to be output to notify that fact, stored in the output information storage area as output information, and a prize ball command is sent to the payout control board 951. Or, if the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 951 has successfully received this prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, check the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. A self-check command is created and sent to the payout control board 951. In addition, if the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls exceeds 10, such as when creating a prize ball command that pays out 15 balls as prize balls, the exceeding number of balls will be added to the number of balls that will be played next time. In the prize ball control process, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is added based on this input information, and the added number of game balls is calculated. When the number of balls has reached that point, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to notify that fact, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Following step S108, the main control program performs frame command reception processing (step S110). In the payout control board 951, the payout control program includes various 1-byte (8-bit) commands classified into status displays shown in FIG. 91 (for example, frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command). Send. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, and outputs an error cancellation navigation command based on the detection signal of the operation switch 954. In the frame command reception process described above, when the main control program successfully receives these various commands as payer serial data, the main control program stores information to notify the payout control board 951 to that effect in the main control built-in RAM as output information. Store in area. In addition, the main control program formats the commands normally received as payer serial data into 2-byte (16-bit) commands (various commands categorized by status display in Figure 90 (frame status 1 command, error clearing). The navigation command and the frame state 2 command) are stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information. Note that the frame status 1 command here corresponds to the first error occurrence command, and the error cancellation navigation command corresponds to the first error cancellation command.

Following step S110, the main control program performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state regarding the prize ball is checked. For example, when input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 is being input when the game is not in a jackpot game state (when a game ball enters the jackpot hole 2005), etc. , a winning abnormality display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 90 as an abnormal state is created, and is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S112, the main control program performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69, and the random number extracted by the main control built in hard random number circuit 1310an when the latch signal is input. (Random number value) is obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a, and the obtained random number value is set as a random number for jackpot determination. Then, whether or not the random number for jackpot determination (that is, the random number obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the built-in main control MPU 1310a) matches the jackpot judgment value stored in advance in the built-in main control ROM. (determine whether or not to generate a jackpot gaming state (referred to as "special lottery")) and update the random number for jackpot symbols.The value of the counter is extracted and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not it matches the probability variation hit determination value (determination as to whether or not a probability variation is generated). Here, the "probability change" means that the probability of hitting the jackpot changes to a high probability (when the probability changes) that is set higher than when it is normal (low probability). In this embodiment, the above-mentioned jackpot judgment value range (jackpot judgment range) is set to a value of 32,668 to 32,767 for low probability, and is read from the normal judgment table, whereas for high probability, a value of 31,768 is set. ~ value 32767 is set and read from the probability change time determination table. In this way, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S114, the random number for jackpot determination (that is, the random value obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) and the When determining whether or not the jackpot judgment value pre-stored in the ROM matches the jackpot judgment value, a random number for jackpot judgment (that is, a random value obtained from a hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) is used. This is done depending on whether or not it is included in the jackpot determination range.

If these determination results are based on the first starting port sensor 4002, various commands related to the special map 1 synchronization effect shown in FIG. In some cases, various commands related to special figure 2 synchronized production shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the first special symbol is displayed according to the determined special symbol fluctuation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 is set so that the device 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 is lit, and is stored in the output information storage area mentioned above as output information. do. In addition, depending on the gaming state to be generated, for example, when a jackpot gaming state is entered, various commands classified into jackpot related as shown in FIG. A closing display command, a jackpot opening 1 count display command, a jackpot ending command, and a jackpot symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the opening/closing member of the jackpot opening 2005 shown in FIG. 60 is created. The output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 is set to open and close 2005a, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area as output information, and the number of times (round) that the big prize opening 2005 changes from the closed state to the open state is 2 When this is the case, the output of the lighting signal to the 2nd round indicator lamp 1407a is set to light up the 2nd round indicator lamp 1407a of the round indicator 1407 shown in FIG. 66, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area, When the number of rounds is 15, the output of a lighting signal to the 15th round indicator lamp 1407b is set so that the 15th round indicator lamp 1407b of the round indicator 1407 shown in FIG. The output of a lighting signal to the status display 1401 is set so that the status indicator 1401 lights up in a predetermined color to indicate the presence or absence of probability fluctuation, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Following step S114, the main control program performs normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and gate winning processing is performed based on this input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether a detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value of the counter for updating the above-mentioned normal symbol hit determination random number is extracted and used as gate information in the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. to be memorized.

This gate information storage area is provided with 0th section to 3rd section (4 sections), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th section, 1st section, 2nd section, and 3rd section. It looks like this. For example, if the gate information is stored in the 0th section to the 2nd section of the gate information storage, and the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage. do.

The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information in the first section of the gate information storage is placed in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information in the second section of the gate information storage is placed in the first section of the gate information storage, and the gate information in the second section of the gate information storage is placed in the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information in the third section of information storage is shifted to the second section of gate information storage, and the third section of gate information storage becomes a free area. For example, if gate information is stored in the first to second sections of the gate information storage, the gate information in the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of gate information storage, respectively, and the second section of gate information storage and the third section of gate information storage become empty areas. Here, if gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the above-mentioned gate information is stored so that the total number of stored gate information is reserved and the normal symbol storage display 1188 is lit. Based on this, the output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage display 1188 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area mentioned above.

Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and from this read gate information, the random number value for normal symbol hit determination is extracted and stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance. It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value (referred to as "normal lottery"). Based on the result of this determination (the result of a general lottery), it is determined whether the movable piece 2004a is to be opened or closed. When the opening/closing operation is performed based on this determination, the movable piece 2004a is expanded in the left and right direction, resulting in a gaming state in which the game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004, which is advantageous to the player. It's a state. The fluctuation display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern described above, and various commands classified as related to the normal symbol synchronization performance shown in FIG. 89 are created and sent as the transmission information. In addition to storing it in the transmission information storage area described above, the output of a lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set so that the normal symbol display 1402 is lit according to the determined normal symbol fluctuation display pattern, and the above-mentioned output information is set. Store in the output information storage area. For example, when the value of the extracted random number for normal symbol hit determination matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the ordinary electric role performance shown in FIG. is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and also sets the output of a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2107 to open and close the movable piece 2004a, and stores it as output information in the output information storage area mentioned above. On the other hand, if the value of the extracted random number for normal symbol hit determination does not match the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol The fluctuation display pattern is determined, and various commands classified as related to the normal symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. The output of a lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set so that the normal symbol display 1402 is lit, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information.

Following step S116, the main control program performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area mentioned above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. For example, when the main control program successfully receives various commands from the payout control board 951 from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on output information, the main control program sends a main payout ACK signal to the payout control board 951. When in the jackpot game state, a drive signal is output to the attacker solenoid 2108 that opens and closes the opening/closing member 2005a of the big winning opening 2005, and a drive signal is output to the starting opening solenoid 2107 that opens and closes the movable piece 2004a. In addition to outputting the main prize ball number information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal , various information (gaming information) signals related to the game, such as time saving information output information, starting opening winning information output signal, etc., are output to the payout control board 951.

Following step S118, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, this main control program reads transmission information from the above-mentioned transmission information storage area and transmits this transmission information to peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data. This transmission information includes various commands categorized as related to special figure 1 synchronized production, created in the main control side timer interrupt process that is this routine, and various commands categorized as related to special figure 2 synchronized production. Commands, various commands related to jackpots (for example, when a game ball entering the big winning hole 2005 (see FIG. 8) is detected, the big winning hole is activated based on the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 (see FIG. 69). 90 shows various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to general figure synchronization performance, and various commands classified as related to ordinary electric role performance (big winning opening 1 count display command corresponding to count command) Various commands categorized as notification displays (door open command, door frame close command, body frame open command, body frame close command, etc.) and various commands categorized as status displays (frame status 1 command, error clear navigation command, etc.) commands and frame status 2 commands), various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified as others. One packet of the main cycle serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main cycle serial data includes a status that indicates the type of command that has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode that indicates a variation of the effect that has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. and a sum value calculated by considering the mode as a numerical value and calculating the sum value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program transmits the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute various commands, to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order as main serial data. As described above, when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. It is possible to transfer the data to the register 41aea and complete transmission from the transmission shift register 1310aea as main cycle serial data. When the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs, in order to notify that the power has been restored in the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on in step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. In this case, the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. , as main cycle serial data, is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitutes a status command at power-on, and then status, which constitutes a main control return destination command at power-on, The mode and sum value are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order. In addition, in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, game information is read from the game backup information and is stored in accordance with this game information in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on processing. In some cases, various commands are stored. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are subsequently transmitted.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the frame status 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control unit ) (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) from the payout control board 951 through the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 151 An error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command) is transmitted to (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error cancellation navigation command received from the payout control board 951 in the form shown in FIG. 91 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the error cancellation navigation command in the form shown in FIG.

Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 151 A main body frame opening command (second main body frame opening command) is transmitted to the (presentation control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame opening command received from the payout control board 951 in the form shown in FIG. 91 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) from the payout control board 951 through the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 ( A main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the effect control unit (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame closing command received from the payout control board 951 in the form shown in FIG. 91 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG.

In addition, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door opening command (first door opening command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (presentation control (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame close command received from the payout control board 951 in the form shown in FIG. 91 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a door close command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 951 through the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (presentation control (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door close command received from the payout control board 951 in the form shown in FIG. 91 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a door close command in the form shown in FIG.

Following step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S122), and ends this routine. Clearing of the main control built-in WDT 1310af in step S22 is performed by setting a timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. This clears the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Then, by restarting time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af, the main control MPU 1310a does not have to be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af.

Note that, as described above, the main control board 1310 performs the backup function described above for storing game information based on the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is progressing. The process can be executed and completed, and when the power is restored, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information for which the backup process was executed as the destination for the main control board 1310 to resume playing the game. 89, which instructs the drive state of the starting port solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108, which are electrical drive sources, by the port output processing of step S118 in this routine, is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. It is now possible to output to. In other words, the main control board 1310 is the main control board 1310 in the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on in step S50 in the main-control-side power-on process in FIG. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the built-in control RAM, the power-on status commands and power-on main status commands classified as power-on in FIG. A control return destination command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 of this routine, the power-on state command is generated as main cycle serial data. The status, mode, and sum value are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order, and then the status, mode, and sum value are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of the main control return destination command when the power is turned on. Send to. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 determines the return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310 when the power is restored based on the main control return destination command from the main control board 1310 when the power is turned on. The effect can be displayed in the display area. As a result, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs while a player is playing a game, and then the power is restored, the gaming state immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage is restored after the power is restored. At the same time, it is possible to notify the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 by displaying an effect in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It is possible to prevent the player from seeing this state and being mistaken for a malfunction. Therefore, by quickly returning to the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage after the power is restored, it is possible to prevent players from misunderstanding that a malfunction has occurred.

In addition, in the main control board inspection process that is the inspection process of the main control board 1310 manufacturing line, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, as shown in FIG. The entire area of the main control built-in RAM is definitely cleared in step S38 in the main control side power-on processing. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on is performed in the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on in step S50 in the same process, the power-on state command classified as power-on shown in FIG. By creating a main control return destination command at power-on and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, two commands, the power-on status command and the main control return destination command at power-on, can be created. Only the following information is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 of this routine, the power-on status command is configured as main cycle serial data. The main control board is inspected in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which is sent to the inspection equipment in the main control board inspection process, and then the status, mode, and sum value, which constitutes the command to return to the main control when the power is turned on. Send to process inspection equipment. The inspection device in the main control board inspection step configures information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on status command received from the main control board 1310. , the series code to identify the model type among the Max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the copyright code to identify the copyright of the work, and the game specifications. (For example, in addition to a game specification in which when a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs, a game specification in which a probability change occurs with a limited number of changes in special symbols (ST Detailed machine type information is displayed on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process based on the game specification code for specifying the machine (such as machine).

[15-1. Various control processes of peripheral control unit]
[15-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 95. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control section 1511 shown in FIG. 72 performs the peripheral control section power-on processing as shown in FIG. 95. When this peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the production control program performs initial setting processing under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the production control program performs processes such as initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a itself, determining hot start/cold start, and setting a wait timer after reset. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs processing to initialize itself, but the time required to initialize the peripheral control MPU 1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a enters a state where interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the commands shown in FIGS. 89 and 90 from the main control board 1310. , it becomes possible to receive various commands such as commands related to control of game performance and commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1.

In the hot start/cold start determination process, regarding the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, the performance backup information (which is the content backed up in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) 1fr), and also compare the performance backup information (1ms) which is the content backed up in Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms), and compare the performance backup information (1ms), which is the content backed up in Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms), and compare the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) in the backup second area 1511cc. ), the performance backup information (1fr), which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (1ms), and the performance backup information (1ms), which is the content backed up in Bank 4 (1ms), were compared. When the contents match, the effect backup information (1fr), which is the contents stored in Bank1 (1fr), and Bank0 (1fr), which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, are stored. , the effect backup information (1ms), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1ms), is copied back to Bank0 (1ms) to perform a hot start, but if the compared contents do not match ( In other words, when there is a mismatch), a value 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), which are normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, to perform a cold start.

In addition, in the hot start/cold start determination process, regarding the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. (SRAM), and the performance backup information (SRAM) which is the content backed up in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) in the backup second area 1511dc. When the compared contents match, the performance backup information (SRAM), which is the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), is ) to perform a hot start, and if the compared contents do not match (in other words, they do not match), the value is copied back to Bank0 (SRAM), which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Forcibly write 0 to perform a cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 to zero-clear it. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511a. I'm trying not to get it on.

Following step S1000, the production control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information that specifies the year, month, and day and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. In the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Furthermore, in the current time information acquisition process, a brightness setting process for the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In this brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and adjusts the brightness of the game board so that the brightness of the LED included in the acquired brightness setting information is set. Processing is performed to adjust the brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 and turn it on. As described above, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in the range from 100% to 70% in 5% increments, and the current brightness. This includes the set brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600.

Specifically, in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is set. When lighting, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness is adjusted to the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 80% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. Adjust the brightness and turn on the light. In addition, in the brightness setting process of this liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. This is no longer done at all. This is because a correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated into the brightness setting process of this liquid crystal display device, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% every time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent this from happening.

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. Further, after performing this current time information acquisition processing, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

Following step S1002, the production control program sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to the value 0 (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute peripheral control section steady processing, which will be described later.When executing peripheral control section steady processing, the value is 1; When not executed, each is set to the value 0. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is used for peripheral control, which will be described later, to be executed when a V blank signal is input from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, which indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted. The value 1 is set in part V blank signal interrupt processing. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Furthermore, after setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to the value 0, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset. There is.

Following step S1006, the production control program determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1 (step S1008). When this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not the value 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 again and it is repeatedly determined whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1. By repeating such a determination, the peripheral control unit enters a standby state until the steady state processing is executed. Furthermore, after determining whether or not this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511a. I'm trying not to get it on.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control section steady processing is to be executed, the steady processing flag SP-FLG is first set to the value 1 (step S1009). The steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed, and is set to a value of 0 when the peripheral control section steady processing has been executed.

Following step S1009, the production control program performs a 1ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1ms interrupt timer activation process, a 1ms interrupt timer is activated to execute the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later, and the number of times this 1ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized by setting the value 1 to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting. This 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the production control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the production control program performs continuous DMA serial transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. 72. Here, continuous transmission is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 through the lamp drive board serial I/O port. When this lamp drive board serial I/O port continuous transmission is started, data as shown in FIG. 60 is stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Game board side light emitting data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 is created by the lamp data creation process described later. It is now set.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The first byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored at the top address is sent to the lamp drive board serial I/O port via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to the transmit buffer register. As a result, the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK to send 1 byte of the transmission shift register. Start transmitting the data one bit at a time.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the transmission buffer register of the lamp drive board serial I/O port is This is triggered by the fact that the written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data in the transmission buffer register becomes empty.), the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa uses the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is sent one byte at a time via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the lamp drive board serial I/O port, the lamp drive board serial I/O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and Transmission of 1 byte of data from the transmission shift register is started bit by bit in synchronization with the panel side light emission clock signal SL-CLK, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board.

In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs a DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. 72. Here, too, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is used to perform continuous transmission from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. When serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is started, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 1511cab, door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is created by the lamp data creation process described later. It is now set.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and sends the transmission data storage area for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. The first byte of the door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the first address of 1511cab is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial number via external bus 1511h, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to the I/O port's transmit buffer register. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK to transfer the data of the transmission buffer register written to the transmission shift register. Start transmitting 1 byte of data 1 bit at a time.

Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger every time a transmission interrupt request of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port occurs (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O This is triggered by the fact that 1 byte of data written in the transmit buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmit shift register, and the transmit buffer register no longer has 1 byte of data and becomes empty.), Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, the remaining door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab is sent one byte at a time to the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad. , and then transfers and writes to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for frame decoration driving amplifier board LED via the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfers the data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and starts transmitting 1 byte of data in the transmission shift register bit by bit in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Continuous transmission is performed using the serial I/O port.

Following step S1012, the production control program performs production operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this performance operation unit monitoring process, in the performance operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later, the operation of the operation button 410 etc. is performed based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the performance operation unit 400. Based on the performance operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. It will be decided as appropriate whether or not to reflect the changes.

Following step S1014, the production control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source from the channels CH1 and CH2 shown in FIG. It is output to the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460. As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460. In addition, in the display data output process, if the drawing exceeds the drawing capacity of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is sent to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect. Output to the display device 460 is canceled. This makes it possible to prevent a delay in processing time, but although so-called dropped frames may occur, various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. Production using multiple LEDs and LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3, and production using music, sound effects, etc. matching various productions from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573 through sound data output processing, which will be described later. The system is designed to prioritize the synchronization of and.

Following step S1016, the production control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output processing, the production control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the sound data creation processing described later to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data, In addition to music and sound effects, the sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds are output as serialized audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. When this audio data transmission IC 1512c receives serialized audio data from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, the audio data on the right side is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data using a differential method that has a plus signal and a minus signal. At the same time, the left side audio data is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data with plus and minus signals. As a result, music, sound effects, etc. matching various performances are played in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and notification sounds and announcement sounds are also played in stereo.

Following step S1018, the production control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the production control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, which screen data from the first screen data is transferred to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. Update the pointer to indicate what to output.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in chronological order constituting the schedule data for light emission mode generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the number of light emission data from the first light emission data is selected for the light emission of various LEDs. The pointer is updated to indicate the mode.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, the sound data such as music, sound effects, etc., and the sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds arranged in chronological order that constitute the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae are specified. The pointer is updated in order to instruct which number of sound command data from the first one of the sound command data is to be output to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the first drive data is The pointer is updated to indicate which drive data is to be output. The drive data for electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which constitutes the electrical drive source schedule data, is a peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt that is repeatedly executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. Updated in motor and solenoid drive processing. In the motor and solenoid drive process that is repeatedly executed every time this 1ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in chronological order is performed. Updates the pointer to the data, and updates the pointer each time it executes its own processing. In other words, the drive data pointed to by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process, so if for some reason the pointer points to the original point in the motor and solenoid drive process, Even if the drive data that is supposed to be used is used to instruct other drive data, the scheduler update process is forcibly updated to instruct the originally intended drive data.

Following step S1020, the production control program performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, the production control program uses information transmitted from the production display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and various information transmitted from the main control board 1310. Various commands received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing (command reception means), which will be described later, are analyzed (command analysis means). The production control program generates schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emitting mode generation, and sound based on information transmitted from the production display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. Generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. are extracted from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. do. In addition, the performance control program is configured such that the command received from the main control board 1310 in this peripheral control unit command interrupt processing is, for example, a starting opening winning command to instruct the start of the starting opening winning presentation, the number of pending normal symbols, etc. Normal symbol memory command to identify (0 to 4 pieces), symbol synchronization performance start command to instruct the start of symbol synchronization performance, symbol memory command output when the starting pending number changes, large winning opening 2005 The big winning hole 1 count display command (big winning hole count command) that is output every time a game ball is accepted, or the frame status 1 command (second error occurrence command, (command analysis means) and recognizes the current gaming state. In addition, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the power was turned on, this production control program executes a command received by this peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing such as a main body frame open command, a main body frame close command, a door open command, or a door frame close command. Analyze whether it is a command or not. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the received command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. , the production control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 1511cac. The various commands include, as shown in Fig. 89, various commands classified as related to special figure 1 synchronized performance, various commands classified as related to special figure 2 synchronized performance, various commands classified as related to jackpot, and various commands classified as power-on. various commands classified as related to general figure synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to ordinary electric role performance, various commands classified as notification display shown in FIG. 90, and the above-mentioned door frame opening command. , the door frame close command, the main body frame open command, the main body frame close command, the error release navigation command (equivalent to the second error release command), and the frame status 1 command (equivalent to the second error occurrence command), etc. There are various commands that are classified, various commands that are classified as test-related, and various commands that are classified as other.

Following step S1022, the production control program performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning process, if the command analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 as described above includes various commands categorized as the notification display shown in FIG. The peripheral control unit 1511 sends screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. set to the abnormality display mode for executing abnormality notification. It is extracted from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c and set to 1511cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. In addition, in warning processing, if multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification will be performed from the highest priority registered in advance, and will automatically transition to other abnormality notifications that remain after the abnormality has been resolved. It is supposed to be done. This makes it possible to monitor multiple abnormalities at the same time without losing the information that the first abnormality has occurred because another abnormality occurs after the first abnormality occurs and before that abnormality is resolved. Can be done.

Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the power was turned on, the production control program classifies the command analyzed in the received command analysis process (step S1022) described above into the status display shown in FIG. In the case of various commands such as the error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command), for example, by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in a manner different from the normal presentation mode accompanying the presentation operation, for example, the game board side A visual warning is given to the outside using the effect display device 1600 (the effect device), a door frame side effect display device 460 (the effect device), and a lamp (the effect device), and an auditory warning is given to the outside using the speaker ( error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player tries to input an error cancellation navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 even though the player is in the gaming state, Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to issue a warning to the outside, fraudulent acts against the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game are prevented.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the production control program performs RTC acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the production control program stores it in the calendar information storage unit acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The updated calendar information and time information stored in the time information storage section are updated. Through this RTC acquisition information update processing, hours, minutes, and seconds, which are time information stored in the time information storage section, are updated, and based on this updated time information, year, month, and year, which are calendar information stored in the calendar information storage section, are updated. The date is updated.

Following step S1026, the production control program performs a pre-read production control process (step S1027). The pre-read effect control process executes the process related to the pre-read effect based on the effect command analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, when a special symbol 1 memory pre-read effect command or a special symbol 2 memory pre-read effect command (hereinafter referred to as a "pre-read effect command") is received, the command for executing the pre-read effect is executed. Make settings. Details of the prefetch effect control process will be described later.

The pre-read performance command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. In this embodiment, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a prefetch effect command, a prefetch effect execution flag is set in the received command analysis process of step S1022. In the pre-read effect control process, if the pre-read effect execution flag is set, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-read effect based on the contents of the pre-read effect command. That is, in this embodiment, even if a prefetch effect command is received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether or not to actually execute the prefetch effect.

When performing a pre-read effect, the mode of displaying the start memory withholding displayed in the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600 is changed as the pre-read effect (normal pre-read effect). In addition, after the normal look-ahead effect is executed, if a predetermined condition is met, a continuous look-ahead effect is executed that changes the mode of the pending display every time the starting memory is exhausted, in which a variable display is executed in advance. do. In the prefetch effect control process, a process for executing a normal prefetch effect is performed, and it is also determined whether or not to execute a continuous prefetch effect. The predetermined condition may be, for example, when the number of unused starting memories is a certain number or more, or when there is a high expectation that the result of the variable display game based on the starting memory to be read ahead will be a jackpot. You can.

In addition, the contents of the pre-reading effect include not only changing the display mode of the pending display, but also display effects that change the display of characters and background images, display effects on the door frame side effect display device 460, light emission effects such as lamps, etc. It may be a performance using audio output from a speaker, a motion of a movable body, or the like.

Following step S1027, the production control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer is specified among the light emission data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for light emission mode generation. Game board side light emitting data SL- for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 60 based on the light emitting data. DAT is extracted and created from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511, and set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. At the same time, the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 stores the door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3. Alternatively, it is extracted and created from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the LED transmission data storage area 1511cab on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG.

Following step S1028, the production control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the production control program selects the screen data indicated by the pointer from among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the screen generation schedule data whose pointer has been updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020. is extracted from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, creates sprite data, and displays it on the game board side effect display device. 1600 and one screen worth of drawing data (one frame worth) to be displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated on the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the production control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the production control program selects the pointer that is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer points out of the sound command data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the sound generation schedule data. The sound command data is extracted from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b, and controls the built-in sound source to output the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to track numbers specified in the data, and output channels to be used are set according to output channel numbers.

In addition, in the sound data creation process, each time this sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. 73 is activated, and the volume adjustment volume is The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob 4140a is converted into a value in 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, the 1024-level value is divided into 7 parts and managed as board volumes 0 to 6. Board volume 0 is set to mute, board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and board volume 0 to board volume 6 are set to muffling. The volume is set so that the volume increases toward volume 6. The sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and the audio data is transmitted as serialized audio data in the audio data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the IC 1512c, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound are played without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, and the sound source built in the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is used to program the volume from mute to maximum volume. The VDP 1512a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-mentioned board volume which is divided into seven levels, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if a hall clerk or the like turns the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume low, the music flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, sound effects, and other performance sounds will be low. However, when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when a player is committing a fraudulent act, a notification sound set at a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the performance sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the notification sound from making it difficult for the hall staff etc. to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the fraudulent activity of a player. In addition, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the rotation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound can be lowered so that it does not interfere with the music or sound effects. In addition to the music and sound effects, the volume of the playback may be increased to make the screens displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 more powerful, or to provide an advantageous effect for the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility of transitioning to a gaming state.

Following step S1032, the production control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the production control program transfers the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. Included in Bank0 (1fr) are a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac stores the performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, as the performance backup information (1fr) in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data at high speed to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Specify to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and copy the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of Bank0 (1fr). The stored contents are sequentially copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) starting from the start address of Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa transfers the data to the peripheral control DMA controller. In the request factor of 1511ac, specify copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and copy the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (1fr) to Bank0 (1fr). ), all of the content stored at the end address of the backup area 1511cb is sequentially copied starting from the start address of Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb, one byte at a time (for example, one byte).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc in the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and copies the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank0 (1fr). ) from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), sequentially backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank3 (1fr) of the second area 1511cc. Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies that the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) be copied to Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc in the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Then, the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are successively stored in a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) at a time in Bank4 (of the backup second area 1511cc). 1fr) in order from the first address.

In addition, in the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is backed up every frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. 73, that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac transfers the performance information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), as the performance backup information (SRAM) to Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db. Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac quickly copies the data to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Specify to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, and copy the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). The stored contents are sequentially copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) from the start address of Bank 1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa transfers the data to the peripheral control DMA controller. In the request factor of 1511ac, specify copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, and copy the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank0 (SRAM). ), all of the content stored at the end address of 1511 db is sequentially copied starting from the start address of Bank 2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511 db, one byte at a time (for example, 1 byte).

Next, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and copies the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc. ) from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM), successively backup a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank3 (SRAM) of the second area 1511dc. Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies that the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) be copied to Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc in the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Then, the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the contents stored in the last address of Bank0 (SRAM) are successively stored in a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) at a time in Bank4 (of the second backup area 1511dc). Copy everything in order starting from the first address of SRAM).

Following step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

Following step S1036, the performance control program sets the value 0 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG as completion of the peripheral control unit steady processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and returns to the V blank signal detection flag VB. -FLG is initialized by setting the value 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1 in the peripheral control section V blank signal interrupt processing to be described later. That is, in step S1008, the system waits until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1, and when it is determined that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1 in step S1008, the steps from step S1009 to The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. In this way, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the processes in steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing from step S1009 to step S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing."

This peripheral control section steady processing starts with the production control program first setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG in step S1009, indicating that the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed, and then setting the steady processing flag SP-FLG to a value of 1 in step S1010. The interrupt timer activation process is performed, and the processes of steps S1012, S1014, . Setting this will complete the process. The peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal is input from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, which indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing to be described later. In this embodiment, as mentioned above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps, so V The interval at which the blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). In other words, the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[15-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be accepted, as shown in FIG. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed in response to this will be explained. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 (step S1045). As described above, this steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 95 is being executed; They are each set to the value 0 when the processing is completed.

If the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, if the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed, this routine is immediately terminated. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050); Exit this routine. As mentioned above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control section steady processing, and when the peripheral control section steady processing is executed, the value is 1; They are each set to a value of 0 when no stationary processing is executed.

In this embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, whether the peripheral control section steady processing has been executed, and the peripheral control section steady processing has been executed. Sometimes, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050, but this is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank signal is input while the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set in the signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit steady state processing currently being executed is assumed to be executed in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. Since the peripheral control unit steady state processing is forcibly canceled midway through and starts execution from the beginning, in order to prevent this, the steady state processing is canceled in step S1009 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady state processing) in FIG. By setting the value 1 to the processing flag SP-FLG, the fact that the steady processing of the peripheral control unit is being executed is notified to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing that is this routine, and the peripheral control unit power supply shown in FIG. By setting the steady processing flag SP-FLG to 0 in step S1038 in the input processing (peripheral control steady state processing), the completion of the peripheral control steady state processing is indicated by the peripheral control V blank in this routine. By transmitting the signal to the signal interrupt processing, it is determined whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in the judgment in step S1045 in the peripheral control section V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine, that is, the peripheral control section steady processing is executed. It is designed to determine whether or not the process has been completed. In other words, this is a measure to be taken when the routine processing of the peripheral control section cannot be completed between the input of the V blank signal and the input of the next V blank signal, so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, if the processing cannot be completed in approximately 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next It is in a standby state until the V blank signal is input. In other words, it takes about 66.6 ms to execute the current peripheral control section steady processing that has failed. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is normally executed repeatedly each time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but if there is a current peripheral control unit steady process that has failed as described above, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process will be executed 64 times. It is executed only 32 times. In other words, even if the steady processing of the peripheral control unit fails, the progress state of the effect caused by the steady processing of the peripheral control unit and the progress state of the effect caused by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, are not consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress of the performance can be reliably matched.

[15-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed each time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 95. . When this peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 determines whether the 1ms timer interrupt execution number STN is smaller than 33, as shown in FIG. is determined (step S1100). As described above, the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1ms interrupt timer being activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In this embodiment, as mentioned above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps, so V The interval at which the blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). In other words, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3ms, after starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before the process is executed. Specifically, when the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the steady processing of the peripheral control unit, first the first 1ms timer interrupt occurs, then the second, etc., and then the 32nd 1ms timer interrupt are sequentially generated. This will occur.

If the number of 1ms timer interrupt executions STN is not smaller than 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is immediately terminated. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to occur earlier than the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has priority over the peripheral control unit V blank signal. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to this 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is newly started due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, if the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN (incremented, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to this 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. The number of times this routine, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, has been executed increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the electrical drive source schedule data arranged in time series that constitutes the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. At the same time, the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in chronological order, and the pointer is updated every time this motor and solenoid drive process is executed.

Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is used to perform serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. When this frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port continuous transmission is started, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c is first read. To output a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the production operation unit 400 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series. The door side motor drive data STM-DAT is extracted and created from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the frame decoration drive data of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Set it in the motor transmission data storage area 1511caf on the amplifier board side. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies transmission of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores transmission data for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. The first byte of the door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the start address of the area 1511caf is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of the serial I/O port. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK to the transmission shift register. Start transmitting 1 byte of data bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O This is triggered by the fact that 1 byte of data written in the transmit buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmit shift register, and the transmit buffer register no longer has 1 byte of data and becomes empty.), Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, the remaining door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is transferred one byte at a time to the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller. 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511ai to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. Transfers the data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, starts transmitting 1 byte of data in the transmission shift register bit by bit in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and transfers the data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. Continuous transmission is performed using the motor serial I/O port.

Further, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Also here, continuous transmission is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 through the serial I/O port for the motor drive board. When this serial I/O port serial transmission for the motor drive board is started, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c is configured. A motor for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 60 based on drive data indicated by a pointer among drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting drive signals to the solenoid and solenoid is extracted and created from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511. 73 in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies transmission of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores it at the start address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. The first byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is sent to the transmission buffer of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to register. As a result, the serial I/O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the motor drive clock signal SM-CLK on the gaming board side. Start transmitting byte data one bit at a time.

Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, interrupts the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I/O port) whenever a transmission interrupt request of the motor drive board serial I/O port occurs. The 1-byte written data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte of data.), the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa uses the bus. If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is sent one byte at a time via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. , by transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I/O port, the motor drive board serial I/O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, Transmission of one byte of data from the transmission shift register is started bit by bit in synchronization with the motor drive clock signal SM-CLK on the game board side, and continuous transmission is performed through the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, original position history information) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input. , movable position history information, etc.) and set it in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The original positions, movable positions, etc. of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired from the history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in this movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah.

Following step S1106, performance operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this production operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, operation (operation history information of the button 410, etc.) is created and set in the production operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Whether or not the operation button 410 is operated can be acquired from the history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the performance operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai.

Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak of the control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c. As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 detects that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When it is determined, it is a signal that is output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. This is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. From the history information of the LOCKN signal set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak, the frequency of failures and the occurrence state of failures between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display drive board 4450 are acquired, and the door frame side effect display device 460 drawing status can be obtained.

Following step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine ends. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc for backup. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, for the peripheral control RAM 1511c, each time the 1ms interrupt timer occurs in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed. Each time, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah are included in Bank0 (1ms) which is the backup target. , and the effect information (1ms) stored in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai as effect backup information (1ms) around Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) of the backup first area 1511cb. The control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Specify to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank1 (1ms) of the backup first area 1511cb, and copy the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1ms) to the end address of Bank0 (1ms). The stored contents are sequentially copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) starting from the start address of Bank1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa transfers the data to the peripheral control DMA controller. In the request factor of 1511ac, specify copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank2 (1ms) of the backup first area 1511cb, and copy the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (1ms) to Bank0 (1ms). ), all of the contents stored at the end address of the backup area 1511cb are sequentially copied one byte at a time starting from the start address of Bank2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511cb.

Next, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank3 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc in the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and copies the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank0 (1ms). ) from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (1ms) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1ms), sequentially backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank3 (1ms) of the second area 1511cc. Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies that the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) be copied to Bank4 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc in the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Then, the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1ms) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1ms) are successively stored in a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) at a time in Bank4 (of the backup second area 1511cc). 1ms) in order from the first address.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effects of steps S1104 to S1108 described above as the progress of the effects are executed within a period of 1ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 95, various processes related to the effect from step S1012 to step S1032 described above as the progress of the effect are executed within a period of about 33.3 ms. are doing. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. , this routine ends as is, so even if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to occur earlier than the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt After forcibly canceling the start of the 1ms timer interrupt processing and restarting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the steady processing of the peripheral control unit due to the generation of the V blank signal, peripheral control is started again by the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. In other words, the consistency between the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress of the performance.

In addition, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a The interval at which the V blank signal is output may vary somewhat depending on the production lot of the mounted peripheral control board 1510. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the occurrence of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute section V blank interrupt processing, the start of peripheral control section 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes somewhat, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. This makes it possible to absorb a time lag caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[15-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 start being transmitted as serial data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. One byte (8 bits) of information is loaded into the reception buffer by the serial I/O port for the board, and when this loading is completed, an interrupt is generated using this as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main cycle serial data, one packet consists of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values and are summed as the 3rd byte. The calculated sum value is assigned.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 98 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received among the main frequency serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, when it is within the period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main frequency serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received, the peripheral One byte of information received from the reception buffer of the main control board serial I/O port built in the control MPU 1511a is taken in (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (incremented, step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the data is taken out from the reception buffer.When the status, which is the first byte of the main frequency serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the value is 1, which is the second byte of the main frequency serial data, which is the mode. When taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 2, and when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 3. Note that the reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 when the power is turned on.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, has been taken out from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this judgment, the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, are sequentially read from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

When the reception counter SRXC is not value 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, the mode which is still the second byte of the main cycle serial data, and the third byte of the main cycle serial data. If the sum values are not taken out from the reception buffer in order, a 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine ends. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, a period during which the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, or the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, can be received is set.

On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, and the third byte of the main cycle serial data. When the sum value of the byte is taken out from the reception buffer in order, the reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status, which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, which has already been taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, are regarded as numerical values, and their sum (sum value ) is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step S1214). The sum value that is the third byte of the main frequency serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main frequency serial data among the main frequency serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the pachinko island equipment, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, electrostatic discharge occurs and noise is generated, so the pachinko machine 1 is not affected by the noise. It is in a sanding environment. Therefore, in this embodiment, on the peripheral control unit 1511 side, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main cycle serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main cycle serial data are regarded as numerical values. and calculates the sum value (sum value), and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data from the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is determined whether or not. Thereby, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether the main circumference serial data between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 has changed to main circumference serial data different from the normal one due to the influence of noise. be able to.

In step S1214, if the sum value that is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match, the received main cycle serial data The status allocated as the first byte of the main serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main cycle serial data are stored in the received command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. (step S1216), and this routine ends. This received command storage area 1511cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the 1st byte of the main serial data and the mode allocated as the 2nd byte of the main serial data are the received command storage area. The data is stored in the peripheral control section reception ring buffer of 1511cac. This "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used as if the end and beginning of the buffer are connected, and it stores data sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and returns to the beginning when it reaches the end of the buffer. Remember. The peripheral control MPU 1511a stores the status allocated as the first byte of the received main cycle serial data and the status allocated as the second byte of the main cycle serial data when storing it in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216. The sum value assigned as the third byte is discarded.

On the other hand, if the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period has exceeded the period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main frequency serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received. Sometimes, or in step S1214, if the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, this routine is continued as is. finish.

[15-1-5. Peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal is executed when the power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. Interrupt processing will be explained. When this peripheral control section power outage notice signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control section 1511 shown in FIG. signal) is input (step S1302). If it is determined that no power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) has been input, this routine is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if the power outage warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer activated in step S1300 has elapsed for 2 microseconds. If 2 microseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302, and it is determined whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input, and if the power outage warning signal has not been input, this routine is directly terminated; If a signal is being input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. In other words, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power outage warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started.

If the power outage warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is the main routine, is started in step S1304, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlights of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 are turned off, the excitation of the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5 is turned off, and various LEDs are turned off, etc. in sequence. By suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1, stable operation is ensured for only a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU 1511a can operate even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being sent by the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 waits for at least a period of 17 milliseconds so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a can receive the commands being sent. It is set to wait. When the command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described above is started, and the received command storage area 1511cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. ) the received command is stored.

Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup process of this command, the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73 are transferred to Bank1 (1fr) and The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies data to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies data to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc at high speed.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The request factor of the control DMA controller 1511ac specifies copying of the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb. Then, the content stored in the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is stored in a predetermined byte (e.g. , 1 byte) in sequence from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa copies the request source of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify to copy the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and copy the content stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank0 (1fr). The content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in the received command storage area 1511cac to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank 0 (1fr) is contiguous by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). Then, all the received command storage areas included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb are copied in order from the first address.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa includes the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. The content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is stored to the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). The received command storage area is sequentially copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and then the peripheral control MPU core The peripheral control DMA controller 1511aa transfers the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Copy is specified, and the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is copied to a specified value. All bytes (for example, 1 byte) are sequentially copied starting from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc.

Following step S1310, it is determined whether a power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) has been input (step S1312). If it is determined that a power outage warning signal has been input, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset. .

On the other hand, if the power outage warning signal is not input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again and it is determined whether the power outage warning signal is being input. In other words, it continues to be determined indefinitely whether or not a power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) has been input. By continuing to make the determination infinitely in this way, when the power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sends a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e. cannot be output, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S1312, WDT clear processing is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. Note that when the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95 is restarted.

In this way, if the determination in step S1312 is that the input of the power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) continues in the infinite loop, the WDT clearing process is executed in step S1314, so that peripheral control is performed immediately before the power outage occurs. The MPU 1511a is not reset. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power outage notice signal is not continued in the infinite loop and is canceled, the WDT clearing process is not executed, and therefore the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e are The output of the clear signal is now interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing of this routine is mistakenly started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs for more than 2 microseconds and passes the determination in step S1302, the step If it is determined in S1312 that the input of the power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) is not continued in the infinite loop and is canceled, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset because the WDT clearing process in step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to deal with such noise by automatically returning to reset.

[15-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation process]
Next, the LOCKN signal history creation process executed as part of the drawing state information acquisition process in step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 97 will be described. In this LOCKN signal history creation process, a history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the performance display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created. As described above, this LOCKN signal is the drawing data that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 receives from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. If it is determined that the data is abnormal, this is a signal that is output to notify that fact.Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the effect display drive board 4450. This is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the side presentation receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal history creation process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72, as shown in FIG. LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is stored in 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). The history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the performance display drive board 4450 is stored in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak as LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. remembered.

Following step S1500, it is determined whether there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 (step S1502). This determination is made because when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. , requests transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is not abnormal data (normal data). This data is used to confirm (recover) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the pattern (SYNC pattern) is not requested to be transmitted.

When there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, a shift process of LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1504). In this LOCKN signal detection history information shift process, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, the most significant bits B7←B6, B6← B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2, B2←B1, B1←least significant bit B0, and so on, shifting one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7.

If the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1504, the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to the value 1 (step S1506), and this routine ends.

On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, a shift process of LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1508). In this shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information, the same processing as the shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information in step S1504 is performed, and when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal read out in step S1500 is Signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is changed to the least significant bit B7←B6, B6←B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2, B2←B1, B1←least significant bit B0. Shift one bit at a time toward the most significant bit B7.

If the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1508, the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to the value 0 (step S1510), and this routine ends.

In this way, each time this LOCKN signal history creation process is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, and then shifted to the least significant bit B0. Since the value 1 or the value 0 is set, it is possible to create a history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0.

[15-1-7. Connection failure determination process]
Next, a description will be given of a connection failure determination process executed as part of the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. In this connection failure determination process, based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87, the door frame side provided on the peripheral control board 1510 It is determined whether a problem has occurred in the connection between the performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the connection failure determination process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72, as shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1520). As described above, this LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the performance display drive board 4450. As described above, this LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. If it is determined that this is the case, it is a signal that is output to convey that fact, and specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. This signal is output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver.

Following step S1520, it is determined whether there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 (step S1522). This determination is made by determining whether the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation judgment value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. has a value of 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In the determination in step S1522, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value.

In step S1522, if the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value do not match, the peripheral control board 1510 is prepared. It is determined that there is no problem in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. and then exit this routine.

On the other hand, in step S1522, if the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 151 There is a problem in the connection between the door frame side presentation transmitter IC1512d prepared for the event and the door frame side presentation receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the presentation display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the communication check counter CC-CNT is incremented by the value 1 (step S1524). Each time this routine is executed, the communication check counter CC-CNT counts up the number of times it has been determined in step S1522 that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver. (counts the cumulative number of times). Note that the communication check counter CC-CNT is set to a value of 0 and reset when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, but it is not reset due to a momentary power outage or power outage, and when the power is restored. In some cases, the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is restored to the value of the instant or immediately before the power outage.

Following step S1524, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative count upper limit value CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative count upper limit value CC-LMT, the cumulative count of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative count. While it is determined that the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative count upper limit value CC-LMT, a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and receiver. It is determined that the cumulative number of times it has been determined that this state has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT.

When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative number of times. If the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to the value 0 (step S1528), and this routine is ended. On the other hand, in step S1526, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative count upper limit value CC-LMT, it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number of times has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S1530), and this routine is ended. The communication error flag CC-FLG indicates that the connection between the transmitter and receiver is interrupted when the cumulative number of times it has been determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. This is a flag that indicates whether a problem has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver, and the value is 1 when there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and receiver. When the cumulative number of times it is determined that the current state is in the current state has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value is set to 0. Note that the communication error flag CC-FLG is set to a value of 0 and reset when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, but it is not reset due to a momentary power outage or power outage, and is not reset when the power is restored. At times, the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is restored to the value of the moment or immediately before a power outage.

[15-1-8. Connection recovery processing]
Next, a connection recovery process executed as part of the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95 will be described. In this connection recovery process, which is executed following the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is output to confirm (recover) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. We will notify you to that effect.

When the connection recovery process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process in step S1020, it is determined whether or not screen generation schedule data is being activated among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. S1540). This determination is used to instruct which screen data, starting from the first screen data, is to be output to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation in the scheduler update process. Then, it is determined whether the pointer has been updated. In other words, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is being updated, the presentation is progressing according to the screen generation schedule data, so while it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is being activated, the screen generation schedule When the performance has been completed in accordance with the data and all pointer updates have been completed, it is determined that the screen generation schedule data has not been activated. Note that this determination includes the period during which the startup screen when the power is turned on of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 performs a demonstration while waiting for a customer. It is possible to judge whether or not it is the current period based on the schedule data for screen generation, and display the startup screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on on the game board side effect display device 1600. In the period when the player is waiting for a customer and a demonstration is being performed using the game board-side effect display device 1600, the process proceeds to step S1542, which will be described later. When the period is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 or the period when the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a state of waiting for a customer and performing a demonstration (when it is simply in a state of waiting for a customer), This routine ends immediately.

In step S1540, when the performance is progressing in accordance with the screen generation schedule data, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is being activated, this routine is immediately terminated, while in step S1540, the performance is progressing in accordance with the screen generation schedule data. When the effect has been completed and all pointer updates have been completed, that is, when the schedule data for screen generation has not been activated, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 (step S1542). As described above, each time the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 101 is executed, the communication check counter CC-CNT is set to Counts up the number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. (counts the cumulative number of times). In this determination, it is determined whether it has been determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once.

If the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 in step S1542, that is, if it has not been determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, then the While the routine ends, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 in step S1542, that is, the number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is even 1. If so, it is determined whether the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, this communication error flag CC-FLG indicates that the cumulative number of times it has been determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, and the transmitter This flag indicates whether or not there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.The value is 1 when there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and receiver. When the cumulative number of times it has been determined that a problem has occurred in the connection has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value is set to 0.

When the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. If the value has not been reached, SYNC pattern output processing is performed (step S1546), and this routine is ended. In this SYNC pattern output processing, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, thereby causing the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 to The transmitter IC1512d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. This predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d, and is output to the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, and is used for door frame side performance. This is to restore the connection between the transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

On the other hand, if the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1544, that is, if a problem has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver, the communication error display process is performed. (step S1548), and this routine ends. In this communication error display process, in order to reliably notify that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. Performs processing to draw on. For example, in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, a message “A malfunction has occurred in the door frame side performance display device. Please call the store clerk.” is displayed. In addition, in the communication error display process, the startup screen when the power is turned on of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the period when the game board side effect display device 1600 displays a demonstration while waiting for a customer. During this period, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. In order to confirm whether or not a problem has occurred, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits LOCKN signal output request data as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 outputs the LOCKN signal. As a response signal to the transmission of signal output request data, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and if this LOCKN signal is not input, it is assumed that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver. It is determined that a problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460, and a notification image (for example, "A problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device. Please call the store staff.") is displayed to that effect during the game. In addition to performing the process of displaying in the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600, a notification sound (for example, "There is a problem with the door frame side effect display device.") is repeatedly emitted from the speaker etc. installed in the door frame 3. Perform flowing processing. At this time, a process may be performed in which all of the light-emitting decorative LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 are turned on.

Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74 will be described using the timing chart shown in FIG. 103.

First, to briefly explain the decorative patterns that are variably displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 60, the peripheral control of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. A variable display of the decorative pattern is executed by part steady processing, etc., and the main control side of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 93 is performed by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball into the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 60 through the main processing or the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 94, or the second special lottery result shown in FIG. When the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball into the starting hole 2004 becomes a "jackpot", the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing operation of the big winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. 60 will be from 1 round to 15 rounds. There will be a total of 15 rounds, and in each round, if a game ball enters the grand prize opening 2005 within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) and the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls), The round is completed, and each time one game ball enters the grand prize opening 2005, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15 balls) are paid out.

The first special lottery result drawn by receiving a game ball into the first starting port 2002 or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving a game ball into the second starting port 2004 is determined by the main control board 1310. Based on the command, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, so that a left decorative pattern is displayed on the left side of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and a middle decorative pattern is displayed in the center. , and on the right side, the variable display of the right decorative pattern is started, and after a predetermined period of time, the variable display of the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern is stopped, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is displayed. At this time, the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The first special lottery result or the second special lottery result can also be confirmed in the symbol or the second special symbol. When the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner, the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern become translucent to the extent that the background image is visible, and the left decorative pattern is displayed. The reels rotate from the upper left side of the area to the lower left side of the area, the middle decorative symbols from the upper center of the display area to the lower center of the display area, and the right decorative symbols from the upper right side of the display area to the lower right side of the display area. When the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed in a fluctuating manner as if they were floating, and the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, they correspond to the stopped and displayed left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern. The left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern are opaque so that the background image at the position is difficult to see. In this way, the first special symbol or the second special symbol that starts to be displayed variably and then stops on the first special symbol display 1403 or second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66, The left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern, which are started to be displayed in a variable manner and then stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, are synchronized.

The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 selects a first special lottery result drawn by receiving a game ball into the first starting port 2002 or a second special lottery result drawn by receiving a game ball into the second starting port 2004. Upon receiving a command from the main control board 1310 that conveys the special lottery results, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled based on the received command to display the game board side shown in FIG. 60 as shown in FIG. 103. When the variable display of the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern starts in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (timing K0), the peripheral control unit steady state of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the process, the first screen of the screen data arranged in chronological order forming the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The pointer is updated to instruct which screen data to output to the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source.In other words, when the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process, the screen data is updated in accordance with the schedule data for screen generation. Since the production is in progress, the schedule data for screen generation is being activated, and while the schedule data for screen generation is being activated, that is, the variable display of the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern is started. Until the stop display is displayed, even if the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102 is executed in the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. , the determination in step S1540 in this connection recovery process causes the routine to be forcibly terminated.

As a result, from the start of the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol to the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 until they are stopped and displayed, the communication check counter CC-CNT is Even when the value is not 0, that is, between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 (in other words, between the transmitter and Even if the number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver is even once, the SYNC pattern output process in step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the transmitter and receiver The communication error display process in step S1548 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and, for example, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 displays "Door Frame". A malfunction has occurred in the side effect display device. Please call the store staff.'' The message is not displayed, which indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. In addition to invalidating the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect display device 460 displays an image based on the drawing data that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 receives from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. Display.

When the variable display of the left decorative symbol, middle decorative symbol, and right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 (timing K1), the peripheral control unit power is turned on as shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the time process, the effect is completed in accordance with the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Since all the updates have been completed, that is, in the scheduler update process, the schedule data for screen generation has not been activated, and while the schedule data for screen generation has not been activated, the peripheral control unit power is turned on as shown in FIG. In the determination in step S1540 in the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102, which is executed as part of the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the time process, the process advances to step S1542 in the same process, and the communication check counter CC- When the value of CNT is 0, that is, when it has been determined that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the routine is terminated and the communication check counter is When the value of CC-CNT is not 0, that is, when it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the process advances to step S1544 in the same process. When the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. If the value has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S1546, the above-described SYNC pattern output process is performed, and the routine ends. On the other hand, if the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1), In other words, if a problem definitely occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the process advances to step S1548, the above-described communication error display process is performed, and the routine ends. In other words, while the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern are being stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side performance receiver If there is a problem with the connection to ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and receiver, even once, and if there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and receiver. When the cumulative number of times determined to be present does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output process is performed without fail, so that between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, In other words, while processing is performed to restore the connection between the transmitter and receiver, the cumulative number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. (In other words, there is definitely a problem with the connection between the transmitter and receiver), by always performing the communication error display process, for example, " A malfunction has occurred in the door frame side effect display device. Please call the store staff.'' The process is to display and notify the user that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which conveys that the data is valid, is enabled.

In the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are started to be displayed in a variable manner, then stopped, and then the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are again displayed in a variable manner. During the interval period until the game board side effect display device 1600 starts displaying the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern, as described above, The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data, is enabled, and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d are activated. A state in which a problem has occurred at least once in the connection with the receiver ICSDIC0, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. If the cumulative number of times determined to be the same does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output process is always performed to reduce the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. In other words, while performing processing to restore the connection between the transmitter and receiver, the cumulative number of times it has been determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. (In other words, there is definitely a problem with the connection between the transmitter and receiver), by always performing communication error display processing, for example, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 Processing is performed to display and notify the message ``A malfunction has occurred in the door frame side performance display device. Please call the store staff.''

When the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern starts again (timing K2), as described above, the schedule data for screen generation is being activated, so the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed. , and until the right decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (timing K3), even if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control board 1510 The number of times it has been determined that a problem has occurred between the connection between the transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) is 1. Even if the connection recovery process is repeated, the SYNC pattern output process in step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the process to recover the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not performed. The communication error display process in step S1548 is not performed, and for example, the message "A malfunction has occurred in the door frame side effect display device. Please call the store clerk." is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data is disabled, and the door frame side effect display device 460 displays an image based on the drawing data that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 receives from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d.

In this way, the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are started and stopped in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, and then the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed again. During the interval period until the start of the fluctuating display of symbols, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 is activated, which indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. On the other hand, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter The LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, which indicates that the drawing data received from the IC1512d is abnormal data, is disabled. This is because the combination result of the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 is the information that is of most interest to the player, and is beneficial to the player. Since the player can judge whether or not a jackpot game state in which a jackpot is awarded will occur, the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are variably displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. Then, until the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the effect image drawn in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is distorted due to the influence of noise and may not be correct. Even if it becomes impossible to draw, instead of interrupting the performance midway through and performing a process to restore the state to a state where it can be drawn correctly, the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 displays left decorative symbols, middle decorative symbols, and By stopping and displaying the right decorative pattern, the information most interesting to the player is completed.

In this regard, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the period during which the startup screen of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the power is turned on, and the period when the pachinko machine 1 is displayed in the customer waiting state. This is greatly different from the case where the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted to the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510 during the demonstration using the game board side performance display device 1600. This LOCKN signal output request data includes the period during which the startup screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the power is turned on of the pachinko machine 1, and the period during which the game board side performance display device 1600 displays a demonstration while waiting for a customer. During the period of execution, the information is transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and is transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. This is sent as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510, as described above, the differential Two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the switching circuit 1512e are input to a forced switching circuit 1512f provided in the peripheral control board 1510. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the forced switching circuit 1512f connects the circuit so as to transmit the two signals. Two signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the pan unit 320 of the door frame 3. Then, when the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V provided in the effect display drive board 4450 determines that the two received signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal output request data is As described above, since the data format is different from the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is determined that the data is abnormal, and the LOCKN signal is sent to the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. Output to control MPU 1511a. As a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input, and sends the effect to the effect display drive board 4450. While it can be determined that no malfunction has occurred, if the LOCKN signal is not input, it is assumed that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and a malfunction has occurred in the production display drive board 4450. A notification image (for example, "A malfunction has occurred in the door frame side effect display device. Please call the store staff.") is displayed on the game board side effect display device by controlling the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source. 1600, and outputs a notification sound to that effect (for example, "There is a problem with the door frame side effect display device.") to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. A notification sound is emitted from a speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3. As a result, notification can be made using the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly played from the speaker etc. provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all of the light-emitting decorative LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 may be turned on.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data, the forced switching circuit 1512f can receive the LOCKN signal output request data at the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0. The circuit is connected so that the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, which has received the LOCKN signal output request data, outputs the LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 to the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a response signal. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is no problem in the door frame side effect display device 460. When no signal is input, it can be determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and that a problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460. Then, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that a malfunction has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can execute the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process of FIG. 102 as a notification process. It has become. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a discovers a malfunction in the door frame side effect display device 460, it can notify the hall clerk etc. of this by executing a notification process. Hall clerks and the like can very easily check whether or not a malfunction has occurred in the door frame side performance display device 460 before a player plays a game, and this check does not take much time. ing. Therefore, a malfunction in the door frame side effect display device 460 can be discovered without much effort.

Further, as described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. If it is determined that there is, it is a signal that is output to notify that fact. Specifically, it is a signal that is output to convey that fact. This is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and receiver, so it is used for door frame side production. When the receiver ICSDIC0 cannot properly receive the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, a communication problem occurs between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. In order to notify that the rendered drawing data is abnormal data, a LOCKN signal can be output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input sends a connection confirmation signal to the door indicating that a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is to be started being transmitted from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0. By outputting to the frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is possible to eliminate communication problems between image communications. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can early discover a malfunction in the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication failure during image communication, and can act on the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to resolve the defect. It looks like this. Therefore, by discovering and resolving the malfunction of the door frame side performance display device 460, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's desire to play.

Furthermore, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and outputs it to the door frame side effect display device 460, receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. If reception cannot be received normally, the production control microprocessor sends a LOCKN signal, which is a communication failure signal that indicates that a communication failure has occurred between the image communication between the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d. Since it is possible to output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of a certain peripheral control unit 1511, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input controls the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, causing a communication problem. The generated image is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It is now possible to display and notify users. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a detects a malfunction in the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication malfunction during image communication at an early stage, and notifies the player seated at the front of the pachinko machine 1 of the malfunction to that effect. Since the player can notify the pachinko hall clerk, etc., or directly notify the pachinko hall clerk, etc. who happened to pass in front of the pachinko machine 1, the pachinko hall clerk, etc. will be able to notify the pachinko machine 1 of the occurrence of the malfunction. You can begin work to resolve the problem at an early stage. Therefore, by early detection and resolution of the malfunction of the door frame side performance display device 460, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's desire to play.

Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 controls the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the effect display drive board 4450 during the period from timing K1 to timing K2 (interval period). If a problem occurs even once in the connection between the side production receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and receiver, and a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and receiver. When the cumulative number of times it is determined that the state is in a state where the cumulative number of times has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is used to enable the LOCKN signal and eliminate communication problems during image communication. A connection confirmation signal is sent to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 until the cumulative number of times reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. , it is possible to continue outputting repeatedly. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 causes the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to change the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. Since the connection confirmation signal can be repeatedly output only during the period when the game is started and stopped and the game is not progressing, communication problems can be resolved.

Then, during the period from timing K1 to timing K2 (interval period), the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect provided in the effect display drive board 4450. If a problem occurs even once in the connection between the performance receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and the problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and receiver. If the cumulative number of times determined to be in the state has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is activated to enable the LOCKN signal and eliminate communication problems during image communication. The door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d sends a connection confirmation signal to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d to inform the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 of the start of transmission, until the cumulative number of times reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. While the output continues to be repeated, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts changing the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 to play the game. When the process starts again, the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped, and when the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is stopped and the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d performs a predetermined process. It is possible to stop sending the data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 and output the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 to the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0. It looks like this. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 causes the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to change the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. By continuing to output the connection confirmation signal, which is a problem-resolving signal, only during the period when the game is not progressing by displaying a start and stop display, it is possible to move toward resolving the communication problem. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts changing the first special symbol or the second special symbol game and stops displaying it on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. While repeatedly outputting the connection confirmation signal only during the period when the game is not progressing, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 displays the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. Even if the first special symbol or the second special symbol game is started to fluctuate and the game progress is started again, the distortion of the performance (disturbance of the image) that progresses on the display screen of the door frame side performance display device 460, Each time the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts and ends the game again (every time the period from timing K1 to timing K2 (interval period) begins), it is possible to move the game toward resolution.

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 includes the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The main control board 1310 includes a first starting port 2002 and a second starting port 2002, which are starting areas provided in the gaming area 5a, through which game balls are fired by the ball firing device 680 toward a gaming area 5a defined on the game board 5. A main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor that controls the progress of the game based on the ball entering the starting port 2004, is installed. The payout control board 951 is equipped with a payout control MPU 952a that is a payout control microprocessor that controls the payout of game balls by the payout device 830 based on the prize ball command output from the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, is equipped with a main control built-in RAM, and the main control built-in RAM can store information regarding games even after the power is turned off.

The payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, is equipped with a payout control built-in RAM, and the payout control built-in RAM can store information regarding payout even after the power is shut off.

The pachinko machine 1 also includes an operation switch 954. If the operation switch 954 is operated within a period from when the power is turned on to when the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 92 is performed, information regarding the game stored in the main control internal RAM is erased. The RAM clear signal shown in FIG. 77 is output to the main control MPU 1310a which is the game control microprocessor, and when the payout control unit is operated within the period from when the power is turned on to when the power-on process is performed, the RAM with built-in payout control A RAM clear function that outputs the RWMCLR signal shown in FIG. 82 as a RAM clear signal for erasing information regarding payouts stored in the payout control microprocessor to the payout control MPU 952a, and a main control side shown in FIG. If the operation is performed after the period in which the determination process in step S16 in the power-on process is performed (or the period in which the payout control unit power-on process is performed after the power is turned on), an error that has occurred regarding the payout device 830 will be displayed. It also has an error cancellation function that outputs the RWMCLR signal in FIG. 82 as an error cancellation signal to the payout control MPU 952a, which is the payout control microprocessor, without outputting it to the main control MPU 1310a, which is the game control microprocessor. be.

In this way, when the operation switch 954 is operated within a period from when the power is turned on to when the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 92 is performed, the game stored in the main control internal RAM is When the RAM clear signal of FIG. 77 for erasing the information regarding is outputted to the main control MPU 1310a which is the gaming control microprocessor, and the payout control unit is operated within the period from power-on to the power-on processing of the payout control unit, A RAM clear function outputs the RWMCLR signal shown in FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, as a RAM clear signal for erasing information related to payouts stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and a RAM clear function that outputs the RWMCLR signal shown in FIG. If the operation is performed after the period during which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process is performed (or the period during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed after the power is turned on) has elapsed, the dispensing device 830 An error cancellation function that outputs the RWMCLR signal shown in FIG. 82 as an error cancellation signal to cancel the generated error to the payout control MPU 952a, which is the payout control microprocessor, without outputting it to the main control MPU 1310a, which is the game control microprocessor. Therefore, by operating one operation switch 954, the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with two different functions, a RAM clear function and an error release function. Therefore, it is possible to provide a RAM clear function and an error release function while contributing to cost reduction.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, control related to game progress and performance will be summarized below.

The main control board 1310 executes various processes for controlling the entire pachinko machine 1, and outputs various control signals (control commands) according to the processing results. Additionally, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display mode of the game board side performance display device 1600 (display images such as decorative patterns, background images, text, characters, etc.) based on the control signal (control command) output by the main control board 1310. ), and the display and operation modes of various members (such as the performance operation unit 400 and movable members) that contribute to the performance.

The main control board 1310 performs a special symbol process every time an interrupt process is performed. In this special symbol process processing, first and second starting opening winning processing is performed. In this first and second starting hole winning processing, it is determined whether a game ball has won a prize in the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004, and when it is determined that the game ball has won a prize, the corresponding special symbol side is Processing such as increasing the number of reservations by 1 is performed.

When the first and second starting opening winning processes are finished, if the processing flag is "0", a fluctuation start process is executed. In this fluctuation start process, on the condition that the number of pendings is 1 or more, the jackpot judgment in the pending state is completed and executed, and the result of this jackpot judgment (win, loss, its type, etc.) is memorized, and then , updates the processing flag to "1".

On the other hand, when the first and second starting opening winning processes are finished, if the processing flag is "1", a variation pattern setting process is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the special symbols (identification symbols) displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 are varied based on the above-mentioned stored jackpot determination result, current gaming state, etc. After determining and setting the pattern (such as the varying time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol until it is stopped and displayed) and the stop symbol (such as the jackpot symbol or loss symbol), the processing flag is updated to "2".

On the other hand, when the first and second starting slot winning processes are finished, if the process flag is "2", the fluctuating process is executed. In this process during fluctuation, a timer monitors the fluctuation time determined and set in the fluctuation pattern setting process, and based on the timeout, the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 is Stop the variable display. After this, when the result of the jackpot determination stored in the fluctuation start process is a jackpot, the processing selection flag is updated to "3", and when the result of the jackpot determination stored in the fluctuation start process is not a jackpot (loss). , update the processing selection flag to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the process will be restarted from the fluctuation start process.

On the other hand, when the first and second starting opening winning processes are completed, if the processing flag is "3", the jackpot game process is executed. In this jackpot game process, a condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, is activated to set the jackpot game aspect (for example, the number of rounds) determined based on the type of jackpot won, Based on this, the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 2005a is controlled. In addition, when the jackpot game ends, a process is performed to stop the operation of the conditional device, and if the type of jackpot won is a special type, it is controlled to be in an advantageous state such as a time saving state or a variable probability state. After updating the gaming status flag as shown, the processing flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the process will be restarted from the fluctuation start process.

Note that a plurality of types of variation patterns are stored as the variation patterns. The fluctuation pattern determines the time from the start to the end of the symbol fluctuation of the special symbol, and by transmitting the information to the peripheral control board 1510, the fluctuation pattern is transmitted to the game board side effect display device 1600. It is possible to determine the type of performance pattern that appears in the . In this embodiment, the plurality of types of variation patterns can be classified into a variation pattern for jackpot variation, a variation pattern for losing reach variation, and a variation pattern for loss variation. The jackpot fluctuation is a fluctuation that is performed when the result of jackpot determination is a jackpot, and in the game board side performance display device 1600, after the reach performance, the fluctuating display of decorative symbols finally causes the jackpot symbol to be confirmed and stopped. A production that unfolds as follows is executed. The missed reach variation is a variation that is performed when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss and it is determined that a reach is to be performed in the reach determination based on the reach random number. After that, an effect is executed in which the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols is finally discontinued and the symbols are displayed as fixed and stopped. The loss variation is a variation that is performed when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss and it is not determined that a reach is to be performed in the reach determination based on the reach random number. Without any delay, an effect is executed in which the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is finally discontinued and the pattern is displayed at a fixed stop. Further, the variation pattern is defined so that it can be specified whether the variation pattern is on the first special symbol side or the second special symbol side. In addition, it may be configured such that a small hit occurs as a result of the jackpot determination, and in this case, the fluctuation pattern for small hit fluctuation is selected as the fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation corresponding to the fluctuation pattern for small hit fluctuation is performed. It is preferable that the small winning symbol is finally displayed as determined and stopped.

The peripheral control board 1510 acquires game information such as the result of jackpot determination from the main control board 1310 and refers to this to execute variable display of decorative symbols based on the fluctuation pattern on the game board side performance display device 1600. It is possible to do so. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 changes the mode of effect display (background and pending image) on the game board side effect display device 1600 based on the acquired game information, and executes a display regarding the level of expectation. Control is executed to change the mode (display mode and operation mode) of the operation unit 400 and to operate movable members such as the back-down and rear movable production unit 3100.

Further, the peripheral control board 1510 can acquire operation information on the operation buttons 410 and information on the player's operations in the vicinity of the center accessory 2500, and can also execute control related to performances according to these information.

Next, game control of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained in detail. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (FIG. 94: Step S114).

Now, if the main control program moves to the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (FIG. 94: Step S114), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs the above-mentioned process as shown in FIG. On the condition that the detection signal by the first starting port sensor 4002 is in the ON state (ball has entered the first starting port 2002) (YES in step S5231), a first jackpot determination random number is obtained from the random number counter. A first starting opening passage process such as storing this in the first special symbol retention storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S5232). Further, on the condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 4004 is in the ON state (the ball has entered the second starting port 2004) (YES in step S5233), the second special random number of the second special symbol ( A second starting opening passage process is executed, such as acquiring a second jackpot determination random number) from the random number counter and storing it in the second special symbol retention storage area of the main control built-in RAM (step S5234).

Next, it is determined whether the jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is being controlled is set (step S5235), and if the jackpot execution flag is set, the jackpot gaming state is controlled. The jackpot control process (step S5240a) is executed.

In addition, in the jackpot control process according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
・When the result of the judgment process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests either "8R definite variable jackpot A" or "8R normal jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 8R repeats the opening/closing pattern (round game) 8 times to close after opening for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that 9 game balls have entered the grand prize opening 2005. Control to jackpot gaming state,
・When the result of the judgment process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "16R variable jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) control to a 16R jackpot game state in which the opening/closing pattern (round game) is repeated 16 times, or when the count sensor 4005 detects that 9 game balls have entered the big winning opening 2005.
- When the result of the judgment process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "8R guaranteed variable jackpot B", the big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) ) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that 9 game balls have entered the big winning opening 2005, the opening/closing pattern (round game) is repeated 8 times to create an 8R jackpot game state,
・When the result of the judgment process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "2R normal jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds) The game is controlled to a 2R jackpot game state in which an opening/closing pattern (round game) in which the game is closed after opening is repeated twice.

In this embodiment, it is arranged so that either a game ball that passes on the left side of the center accessory 2500 or a game ball that passes on the right side of the center accessory 2500 may enter the big winning hole 2005. A gaming area 5a is configured. In addition, only the game ball which passed the left side of the center accessory 2500 may be allowed to enter the big prize opening 2005. Alternatively, only the game balls that have passed on the right side of the center accessory 2500 may be allowed to enter the grand prize opening 2005.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, right-handed hitting is more advantageous for the player than left-handed hitting in situations where time-saving control is executed, and left-handed hitting is more advantageous than right-handed hitting in situations where time-saving control is not executed. It is advantageous for people. In the left-handed game state, even if a jackpot is won as a result of the lottery for the first special symbol in response to the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port 2002, it will be a long-open jackpot game state of up to 8 rounds (approximately Only 1000 game balls can be obtained).

On the other hand, in the right-handed state, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol according to the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port 2004, the probability of winning the jackpot is approximately 50% (allocation rate of the winning type). ), the expected value of the prize balls that can be obtained when winning the jackpot, such as the 16-round long open jackpot game state (approximately 2000 game balls can be obtained). As a result, when the player is controlled to shift to the right-handed batting state, he can expect to win a larger amount of prize balls than when he is in the left-handed batting state.

In the jackpot control process, in order to start the opening control of the big winning hole 2005, processes such as starting the operation of the conditional device, resetting the variation counter described later, etc. are performed.

In addition, in the jackpot control process, after controlling the opening of the jackpot 2005, as shown in FIG. 110, a high probability flag is set according to the type of jackpot that triggered the jackpot game. , execute each set process of the time saving flag.

The high probability flag is a flag indicating a high probability state, and is used in the jackpot determination process shown in FIG. 109, which will be described later. It is set when ending the jackpot game state based on Probable Variable Jackpot, 8R Probable Variable Jackpot B), and when the next jackpot occurs, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 114 or the second special symbol stop process (not shown) shown in FIG. will be reset.

The time saving flag is a flag indicating that time saving control is being executed (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state), and as shown in FIG. 110, time saving control (high probability time saving state) is performed after the jackpot game state ends. It is set when ending the jackpot game state based on the jackpot (8R probability variable jackpot A, 16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot B), and when the next jackpot occurs, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 114, which will be described later. Or it is reset by the second special symbol stop processing (not shown). Alternatively, when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are digested 100 times without winning the jackpot after the low probability time saving state occurs, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 114 described later Or it is reset by the second special symbol stop processing (not shown).

The variation counter is a counter that indicates the number of variations of the special symbol after the variation counter is reset, and is used in the first variation pattern setting process (second variation pattern setting process) shown in FIG. 112, which will be described later. It is updated (for example, counting up) when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) change, and at least a specific type of jackpot (16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot B). It is reset when starting a jackpot gaming state based on .

In addition, if the jackpot execution flag is not set (NO in step S5235), then as a process of step S5236, whether or not the small hit execution flag indicating that the control is in a small win gaming state is set. Determine whether As a result, if the small winning execution flag is set, a small winning control process (step S5240b) for controlling the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, in the small hit control process, a process is performed in which the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a specific opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds).

Here, in the small hit control process (step S5240b), unlike the case of the jackpot control process (step S5240a), after the opening control of the big winning opening 2005 is performed, the high probability flag, the time saving flag, the time saving flag, etc. Each set process, such as a number counter, is not performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110(A), there is no possibility of winning a small hit in the jackpot determination.

Further, if the small hit execution flag is not set (NO in step S5236), the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of second jackpot determination random numbers stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area is On the condition that it is "0" (step S5237), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S5238).

On the other hand, if the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of random numbers for second jackpot determination stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area is not "0" (step S5237), the second special symbol A second special symbol process process including a lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display is stopped is executed (step S5239). As a result, as long as the game is played so that the lottery for the second special symbol that is in a pending state is not lost (as long as the value of the second special pending number counter is not "0"), the first special symbol Regardless of the pending status of the lottery, only the lottery for the second jackpot determination random number will be held continuously without interruption (priority execution).

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player maintains hitting the game ball to the right side of the center accessory 2500 (right-handed hitting) in the time saving state (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state). By simply doing so, only the lottery (determination process) for the second jackpot determination random numbers can be performed continuously without interruption.

Note that the variable display of the second special symbol is not limited to being executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol, and for example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 ( The variable display of the special symbols may be started in the order in which the starting winnings occur after passing). In this case, a table is provided that stores data that can specify the order in which the starting winnings occur, and it is determined from the stored data whether to start the variable display using either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is a good idea to decide.

FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S5232).

Now, in the process of step S5231, if it is determined that the first starting port sensor 4002 is in the ON state and a game ball has entered the first starting port 2002, the main control is activated as shown in FIG. As the process of step S5241, the main control MPU 1310a of the board 1310 first inputs each random number on the first special symbol side (random number for jackpot determination, random number for reach determination, random number for jackpot symbol, random number for variable display pattern) from the random number counter. get.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the first special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the reservation number of the first special symbol reaches its maximum value (upper limit value). ) is "4" (step S5242). In the process of step S5242, if it is determined that the number of reservations for the first special symbol is not the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol (judgment process for the first special symbol) is set to a new pending state. In order to do so, the following steps S5243 to S5245 are performed.

First, as processing in step S5243, the first special reservation number counter is counted up (increased by 1). Next, as the process of step S5244, each random number acquired in step S5241 is stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. .

Next, the first special figure pre-reading process for executing the first special figure side pre-reading effect is executed, and the process is ended (step S5245). As will be described later, the look-ahead performance on the first special symbol side is a performance that suggests the determination result (or its expectation level) of the first special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the first special symbol. In this first special figure pre-reading process, information required on the peripheral control board 1510 side to determine whether or not to execute a pre-read effect and the content of the effect (information regarding wins and losses for pre-read judgment, information regarding symbol types for pre-read judgment information, information regarding the variation pattern number for pre-read determination, etc.) and stores it in the corresponding storage area as information to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result of the first special symbol itself, information regarding the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information suggesting the type of jackpot game. For example, information at a stage before being finally determined, such as SP reach group, normal reach group among the fluctuation patterns, potential hit group and small hit group among the symbol types, may be transmitted as a pre-read command.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5242, if it is determined that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the process without executing the process of steps S5243 to S5245, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S5234).

Now, in the process of step S5233, if it is determined that the second starting port sensor 4004 is in the ON state and a game ball has entered the second starting port 2004, the main control is activated as shown in FIG. As the process of step S5251, the main control MPU 1310a of the board 1310 first selects each random number on the second special symbol side (second jackpot determination random number, second reach determination random number, second jackpot symbol random number, second fluctuation display A pattern random number) is obtained from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and determines that the number of reservations of the second special symbol is the maximum value based on this counter value. 4'' (step S5252). In the process of step S5252, if it is determined that the number of pending second special symbols is not the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol (lottery for the second special symbol) is set to a new pending state. In order to do so, the following steps S5253 to S5255 are performed.

First, as processing in step S5253, the second special reservation number counter is counted up (increased by 1). Next, as the process of step S5254, each random number acquired in step S5251 is stored in a second special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. .

Next, a second special symbol pre-reading process for executing a pre-reading effect on the second special symbol side is executed, and the process is ended (step S5255). As will be described later, the pre-read performance on the second special symbol side is a performance that suggests the determination result (or its expectation level) of the second special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the second special symbol. In this second special symbol pre-reading process, the peripheral control board 1510 generates information (winning/losing information, symbol type, fluctuation pattern number, etc.) required for determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect and the content of the effect. It is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result of the second special symbol itself, information regarding the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information suggesting the type of jackpot game. For example, information at a stage before being finally determined, such as SP reach group, normal reach group among the fluctuation patterns, potential hit group and small hit group among the symbol types, may be transmitted as a pre-read command.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5252, if it is determined that the number of pending second special symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by ending the process without executing the process of steps S5253 to S5255, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

When the number of reserved first special symbols changes based on the game ball entering the first starting port 2002, a command ( First pending number designation commands 0 to 4) are set and sent to the peripheral control board 1510. Further, when the number of reserved second special symbols changes based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2004, the number of reserved second special symbols is instructed in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). A command (second reservation number designation command 0 to 4) is set and sent to the peripheral control board 1510.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process process (step S5238). In addition, the first special symbol process process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process are the same. This program module differs only in the random numbers and tables used for determination, so only the first special symbol process process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes will be selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag.

1. A random number for jackpot determination corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM is read out, and based on the read random number for jackpot determination, a lottery process is performed regarding the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, etc. The first special symbol normal processing (step S5280)

2. The first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281 )

3. It is executed in accordance with the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 based on the random number for the variable display pattern, and the special symbol on the performance display device (game board side performance display device) 1600. A first variation pattern setting process (step S5282) in which a lottery process is performed regarding the variation mode of the effect display to be performed.

4. First special symbol variation processing (step S5283) that waits until the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 is stopped.

5. The mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the determination process regarding the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped, is displayed on the first special symbol display 1403. First special symbol stop processing to stop the fluctuating display of the first special symbol (step S5284)

The initial value of the first special symbol process flag is set to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S5280) should be performed.

FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal process (step S5280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. Based on the counter value of the first special pending number counter, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display of the first special symbol in a pending state. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display of the first special symbol in the pending state, then as a process of step S5302, the first special symbol is stored in the first special symbol pending storage area of the main control built-in RAM. The earliest storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first random number for jackpot determination, the first random number for reach determination, the first random number for jackpot symbol, the random number for first variable display pattern) The random number stored in is read from the main control built-in RAM. Next, as the processing of steps S5303 and S5304, the first special reservation number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reservation storage area of the main control built-in RAM is displayed as a fluctuation. Random numbers related to the display mode at the time of stop (for example, first jackpot determination random number, first reach determination random number, first jackpot symbol random number, first fluctuation display pattern random number) are first-in first-out. Perform the shift operation in the manner shown below.

Specifically, the first special symbol retention storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol retention storage area a to first special symbol retention storage area d), and the first special symbol retention storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol retention storage area a to first special symbol retention storage area d), and the first special symbol retention storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol retention storage area a to first special symbol retention storage area d). Random numbers extracted according to occurrences are stored in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when a starting winning occurs when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1st (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting a variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are met, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and are stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Move various random numbers to the N-1st (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display of the first special symbol has occurred is stored in a specifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). Similarly, the second special symbol retention storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol retention storage area a to second special symbol retention storage area d), and is responsive to the occurrence of a starting prize to the second starting opening 2004. The random numbers extracted are stored in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when a starting winning occurs when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1st (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting a variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are met, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and are stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Move various random numbers to the N-1st (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display of the second special symbol has occurred is stored in a specifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first).

Thereafter, as the process of step S5305, a jackpot determination process is performed, which is a process for determining whether or not the jackpot has been won, based on the first jackpot determination random number that has been read out. Thereafter, at the time when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S5306) so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281), this process is ended.

FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S5305).

If the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability time saving state, high probability non time saving state) (step S5311), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes a jackpot at the high probability time shown in FIG. 110(A). A determination table is selected (step S5312), and if the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S5311), the jackpot determination table for low probability shown in FIG. 110(A) is selected (step S5313). The jackpot determination table is compared with the random number for jackpot determination read out in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process (step S5314).

As shown in FIG. 110(A), the jackpot determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and when the gaming state is low probability ( Low probability jackpot determination table used when the gaming state is high probability (high probability non-time saving state, high probability time saving state) It is equipped with a time jackpot determination table. Then, in the low probability jackpot judgment table that is referred to for comparison with the first jackpot judgment random numbers, 204 types of first jackpot judgment random numbers match the jackpot judgment value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 65332 The first jackpot judgment random numbers (65,536 types) are associated with each other so that the first jackpot judgment random number of the type matches the loss judgment value indicating the loss (jackpot probability at low probability; approximately "1/321"). On the other hand, in order to compare with the random number for jackpot determination (second random number for jackpot determination) of the second special symbol in the second special symbol process processing executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing. In the referenced low-probability jackpot judgment table, 204 types of second jackpot judgment random numbers match the jackpot judgment value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 65,332 types of second jackpot judgment random numbers are the above-mentioned losses. The second jackpot judgment random numbers are respectively associated with each other so as to match the failure judgment value indicating that the winning probability is low (jackpot probability at low probability; approximately "1/321").

In addition, in the high probability jackpot judgment table that is referred to for comparison with the first jackpot judgment random number, 2040 types of first jackpot judgment random numbers match the jackpot judgment value, and 63496 types of first jackpot judgment random numbers match the jackpot judgment value. The first jackpot judgment random numbers are associated with each other so that the random numbers match the loss judgment value (jackpot probability at high probability; approximately "1/32"). On the other hand, in the high probability jackpot judgment table that is referred to for comparison with the second jackpot judgment random number in the second special symbol process processing executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing. , 2040 kinds of second jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 63496 kinds of second jackpot determination random numbers match the loss determination value indicating the above-mentioned loss. The second random numbers for determining a jackpot are associated with each other (probability of jackpot at high probability; approximately "1/32"). In addition, the jackpot judgment value (the jackpot judgment value The number of jackpot judgment values may be the same (the jackpot probability is the same), or the number of jackpot judgment values may be different (the jackpot probability is different). In this case, the jackpot judgment value of at least one of the jackpot judgment table for low probability and the jackpot judgment table for high probability may be made different (both may be made different). .

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected jackpot judgment table with the random number for jackpot judgment read out in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process, and when it is judged that it is a jackpot (step S5315 ), sets a jackpot flag indicating that the fluctuation has won a jackpot (step S5316), and ends the jackpot determination process.

In addition, if it is determined in step S5315 that the jackpot has been won, the jackpot judgment random number read above matches the small hit judgment value indicating that the small hit has been won, based on the selected jackpot judgment table. It is determined whether or not (step S5317). However, as mentioned above, in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process (second special symbol process) of this example, the random number for jackpot determination that matches the small hit determination value is not read out (small hit probability; 0/65536), and in this step S5317, it is determined that the small hit has not been won (it is determined that it is a loss).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the game loses in step S5317, the reach determination table is compared with the random number for reach determination read out in step S5302 (step S5319).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM and is used when the gaming state is in the high probability non-time saving state, and the reach determination table when the gaming state is in the high probability non-time saving state. A reach determination table in a high probability time saving state used when the game state is low probability state (low probability non time saving state) is provided.

Here, in the reach determination table in the high probability time saving state, one type of reach determination random number matches the reach determination value indicating reach, and 71 types of reach determination random numbers match the reach determination value indicating not reach. Random numbers for reach determination are associated with each other so that they match. However, in the reach judgment table in the high probability time saving state, in order to maximize the speed of game progress when in the time saving state, all 72 types of reach judgment random numbers match the reach judgment value indicating that there is no reach. In this way, it may be possible to avoid a match with the reach determination value indicating reach.

In addition, in the reach determination table in the low probability state, five types of reach determination random numbers including the same reach determination random number as the reach determination random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability time saving state are used to determine reach. Random numbers for reach determination are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value indicating that there is no reach, and the 67 types of random numbers for reach determination match the reach determination value indicating that there is no reach. In this manner, in this embodiment, in the low probability state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is higher than in the high probability time saving state, and is obtained with a predetermined probability.

Furthermore, in the reach determination table in the high probability non-time saving state, there are five types of reach determination including the same reach determination random numbers as the reach determination table set in the high probability time saving state and the low probability state. The random numbers for reach determination are associated with each other so that the random number for reach determination matches the reach determination value indicating that reaching is possible, and the 67 types of random numbers for reach determination match the reach determination value indicating not reaching. In this manner, in this embodiment, in the high probability non-time saving state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is the same as in the low probability non-time saving state.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the random number for reach determination read in step S5302 (step S5319), and if it is determined that the reach is lost (YES in step S5320), A reach flag indicating that the fluctuation is a reach is set, and the process ends (step S5321).

FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 111, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S5305) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether the jackpot flag is set (step S5331).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a selects the symbol determination table shown in FIG. By comparing the selected symbol determination table with the selected symbol determination table, a jackpot symbol is determined as a mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped (a stop symbol of the first special symbol) (step S5332).

As shown in FIG. 110(B), the first special symbol side symbol determination table contains random numbers for the first jackpot symbol (here, a total of 200 (Random numbers for the first jackpot symbol) are stored in a manner that they are associated with each other. In addition, as shown in FIG. 110(C), the second special symbol side symbol determination table has a random number for the second jackpot symbol (16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot). Here, a total of 200 second jackpot symbol random numbers) are stored in a manner that they are associated with each other.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by identifying the determination result associated with the obtained jackpot symbol random number. In addition, in the symbol determination table of this example, the type of jackpot determined based on the random number for the first jackpot symbol and the type of jackpot determined based on the random number for the second jackpot symbol are set to be different. . More specifically, the allocation rate (allocation) for a variable jackpot that triggers a transition to a high probability state and a regular jackpot that does not trigger a transition to a high probability state is said to be the same, but for the first jackpot symbol. The expected value of the game balls that can be obtained by winning the jackpot determined based on the random number for the second jackpot symbol is greater than the expected value of the gaming balls that can be obtained by winning the jackpot determined based on the random number. ing.

The specific game/performance contents for each type of jackpot are briefly summarized as follows.

1. It is counted that after the jackpot symbol combination appears on the game board side performance display device 1600, after the big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when 9 game balls enter the big winning hole 2005. By repeating the opening/closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected by the sensor 4005 eight times, the game ball is controlled to the 8R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the big winning hole 2005, and this 8R jackpot game state After that, the system is controlled to a high probability time saving state until the next jackpot game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 8R jackpot game state, a battle performance (battle victory performance) in which a specific character wins is performed, and a high probability time saving state is performed. 8R probability variable jackpot A controlled by the performance mode that is indicated on the game board side performance display device 1600 as being in a relatively advantageous state.

2. It is counted that after the jackpot symbol combination appears on the game board side performance display device 1600, after the big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when 9 game balls enter the big winning hole 2005. By repeating the opening/closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected by the sensor 4005 eight times, the game ball is controlled to the 8R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the big winning hole 2005, and this 8R jackpot game state After that, until the variable display of the special symbol is consumed 100 times (or the jackpot is won within the period until it is consumed 100 times), the control is controlled to a low probability time saving state, and the execution period of the 8R jackpot game state is In the middle, a battle performance is performed in which a specific character is defeated (battle defeat performance), and in a low probability time saving state, the game board side performance display device 1600 is controlled to a performance mode in which a relatively disadvantageous state is shown. 8R normal jackpot

3. It is counted that after the jackpot symbol combination appears on the game board side performance display device 1600, after the big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when 9 game balls enter the big winning hole 2005. By repeating the opening/closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected by the sensor 4005 16 times, the game ball is controlled to a 16R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the big winning hole 2005, and this 16R jackpot game state After that, it is controlled to a high probability time saving state until the next jackpot gaming state occurs, and during the execution period of the 16R jackpot gaming state, the effect as to whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (or becomes 16 rounds) ( A performance in which the game board-side performance display device 1600 indicates that the player is in a relatively advantageous state after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since an additional challenge performance (success performance) is performed and the state is controlled to a high-probability time-saving state. 16R guaranteed variable jackpot controlled by mode

4. It is counted that after the jackpot symbol combination appears on the game board side performance display device 1600, after the big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when 9 game balls enter the big winning hole 2005. By repeating the opening/closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected by the sensor 4005 eight times, the game ball is controlled to the 8R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the big winning hole 2005, and this 8R jackpot game state After that, the control is performed in a high probability time saving state until the next jackpot gaming state occurs, and during the execution period of the 8R jackpot gaming state, the effect as to whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (or becomes 16 rounds) ( A performance in which the game board-side performance display device 1600 indicates that the player is in a relatively advantageous state after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since an additional challenge performance is performed in which a failure performance) is performed and the high-probability time-saving state is controlled. 8R certain variable jackpot B controlled by mode

5. After the jackpot symbol combination appears on the game board side effect display device 1600, after the big winning hole 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds), or when 9 game balls are won in the big winning hole 2005, as described above. By repeating the opening/closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected by the count sensor 4005 twice, it is controlled to a 2R jackpot game state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the big winning hole 2005, and after this 2R jackpot game state controls the time saving state with low probability until the variable display of the special symbol is consumed 100 times (or wins the jackpot within the period until it is consumed 100 times), and during the execution period of the 2R jackpot game state. 2R in which a battle performance in which a specific character is defeated (battle defeat performance) is performed, and in a low probability time shortening state, the performance mode is controlled to be such that the game board side performance display device 1600 indicates that the character is in a relatively disadvantageous state. Normal jackpot

In addition, in the left-handed state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the movable piece 2004a that opens the second starting port 2004 is not driven. Therefore, in the left-handed state, the game ball does not enter the second starting port 2004, and only the game ball enters the first starting port 2002, and there is a reserved ball with the second special symbol. Except in the case, only the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 is executed, and a jackpot (8R probability variable jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot) related to the first special symbol will occur. Similarly, no game ball enters the first starting port 2002 in the right-handed state. Therefore, in the right-handed state, only the winning of the game ball to the second starting hole 2004 will occur, and the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 1405 will not be displayed unless there is a reserved ball of the first special symbol. Only the variable display is executed, and jackpots related to the second special symbol (16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot) occur.

In addition, in the jackpot related to the first special symbol, the opening and closing pattern of opening the jackpot 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) is repeated 8 times at maximum, and only about 1000 game balls are paid out. In the jackpot related to the second special symbol, it is possible to pay out approximately 2000 game balls by repeating the opening/closing pattern of opening the jackpot 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) 16 times at maximum.

In addition, in the first special symbol stop pattern setting process, if it is determined to be 8R definite variable jackpot A, the 8R definite variable jackpot A symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and if it is determined to be 8R normal jackpot, the jackpot symbol is set to 8R normal jackpot symbol. decide. Also, although not shown, in the second special symbol stop pattern setting process, if the 16R probability variable jackpot is determined, the 16R probability variation jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and if the 8R probability variation jackpot B is determined, the 8R probability variation jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol. When the B symbol is determined and the 2R normal jackpot is determined, the 2R normal jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol.

Furthermore, if the jackpot flag is not set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the small win flag is set as a process in step S5333. As a result, if the small hit flag is set in the process corresponding to step S5333 in the second special symbol process (step S5239), the small hit symbol ( After determining the unique pattern stopping mode (step S5334), the process moves to step S5337.

In addition, if the small hit flag is not set in step S5333, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the losing symbol as the mode when the special symbol fluctuation is stopped (step S5336), and then moves to step S5337. .

After the process of determining the stop symbols is performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the lottery result (type of jackpot, small win, out of reach, or out of reach) as the process in step S5337. A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that the determination result notification command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. After that, as the process of step S5338, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282). Note that a command may be set that instructs the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the game board side performance display device 1600 to display decorative symbols in a variable manner and then to stop displaying them based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command. Specifically, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner, and the left decorative pattern, right decorative pattern, and middle decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in this order. Note that the left, middle, and right decorative symbols may be the same symbol and may be displayed in a synchronized manner in a variable manner and stopped at the same time. If the jackpot is won in a type other than the 2R normal jackpot, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the combination of three left, middle, and right decorative symbols. On the other hand, if the 2R normal jackpot is won, a specific symbol combination (a combination in which at least one of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is not the same as any other symbol) is determined. In addition, when a reach miss is identified, a miss symbol with a reach (a combination of the same symbols with left and right decorative symbols "0" to "9" but different middle decorative symbols; a miss reach symbol) If the winning pattern is determined and a miss is specified, a miss symbol without reach is determined (a combination in which at least the left and right decorative symbols among the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are different). The stop symbols thus determined are displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the variable time specified from the variable pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect).

In any case, when a win is obtained as a result of the progress of the game, the peripheral control MPU 1511a causes a winning performance display (special display mode) to appear before the jackpot game starts, and the jackpot game After the start of the game, an effect display during the jackpot game is displayed.

FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S5282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. (Step S5341), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of jackpot corresponding to the type of jackpot determined in Step S5332 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (Step S5342), and the small hit flag is set. If so (step S5343), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of a small hit is selected (step S5344), and if the reach flag is set (step S5345), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of a reach is selected. is selected (step S5346), and if none of the jackpot flag, small hit flag, and reach flag are set, that is, if it is a normal loss (a failure without executing the reach effect), the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is selected. A table (not shown) is selected (step S5347).

Then, by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the random number for variation display pattern read out in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process, a variation pattern to be executed is determined (step S5348), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variable pattern command is set to notify the peripheral control board 1510 of this, and variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 is started (step S5349). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets a variation time set in correspondence to the determined variation pattern in the variation timer (step S5350). Then, at the time when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S5355) so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol variation process (step S5283), this process is ended. As a result, the variable display control of the first special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 1403 for the variable time determined in this way, and in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the game board side effect display device 1600 Performance control will now be performed.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern table is a judgment result based on random numbers for jackpot judgment (first jackpot judgment random number, second jackpot judgment random number) and jackpot symbol random numbers (first jackpot symbol random number, second jackpot symbol random number). There are multiple types for each. In addition, in the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table, a plurality of pieces of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are included in the first one. The random numbers for the variable display pattern are stored in association with each other. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a reads out the selected variation pattern table from among the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the judgment results based on the jackpot judgment random number and the jackpot symbol random number in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing. The fluctuation time information associated with the read random number for the fluctuation display pattern is obtained from this table, and the fluctuation of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) Decide on a pattern. As a result, a determination process regarding the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. Note that the variation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

However, as mentioned above, in this example, there is no chance of winning a small hit, so the fluctuation pattern table at the time of a small win is not used. In this example, the small prize is not won, but the small prize may be won.

In addition, in the variation pattern table during reach in this example, the mode type of the reach effect to be executed is determined by comparing the judgment value indicating which reach effect to execute and the random number for the variation display pattern. has been done. For example, in the non-time saving state, 164 types of random numbers for variable display patterns out of 241 types of random numbers for variable display patterns are set as judgment values (0 to 163) indicating that any of the normal reach effects will be executed, and 59 The random number for the 18 types of variable display patterns is set as a judgment value (164 to 222) indicating that one of the super reach effects with a low expectation of a jackpot will be executed, and the random numbers for the 18 types of variable display patterns are set as a judgment value (164 to 222) indicating that one of the super reach effects with a low expectation of a jackpot will be executed. It is set as a determination value (223 to 240) indicating that one of the super reach effects is to be executed.

In addition, super reach performance (SP performance) is a game in which the expectation of a jackpot is higher than that of normal reach performance, and for players who desire the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state, when the super reach performance is executed, the player who is in a jackpot gaming state Expectations are increasing. In other words, this kind of super reach effect has the highest selection rate in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of jackpot, and even if a loss is displayed in the end, the player's expectation level for the jackpot game state will decrease. You will be able to increase your However, in reality, in order to sufficiently raise players' expectations for a jackpot gaming state, a highly anticipated preview performance that is a separate lottery from the fluctuating pattern appears during the period when the super reach performance is being executed. It is required to do (compound).

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss, which is provided corresponding to the first jackpot determination random number and the first jackpot symbol random number and is used when determining the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, the non-time saving state and the time saving state A common variation time of 12 seconds is set for both. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table at the time of loss, which is provided corresponding to the second jackpot determination random number and the second symbol random number and is used to determine the variation time of the second special symbol, the time saving state is 0.1 seconds to A variation time of 12 seconds can be set, and a variation time of 12 seconds is set as a non-time saving state. In this way, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is the same in the time-saving state and in the non-time-saving state, and when the first special symbol is fluctuating in the time-saving state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2004 is At the same time as prompting the player, time is secured for the player to enter the game ball into the second starting port 2004.

In addition, if 0.1 seconds is selected from the fluctuation time when the second special symbol loses, each game ball that is hit into the game area 5a at an interval of 0.6 seconds in a time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.) This prevents items from being discharged without being subjected to lottery processing.

That is, the game ball hit right is supplied to the area directly above the gate section 2003. Then, when a game ball is accepted from this area into the gate section 2003 while in the time saving state (high probability time saving state, low probability time saving state), a win as a normal symbol is obtained (for example, the winning probability is 100 %), the movable piece 2004a involved in opening and closing the second starting port 2004 is maintained in the open state for a long period of time (5.5 seconds in this example). This creates a situation where the balls can be received one after another into the second starting port 2004 (a time-saving state where almost all of the game balls hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be received into the second starting port 2004). Even if there is, every time those game balls are accepted, control is executed so that the lottery on the second special symbol side can be executed one after another with a high jackpot probability (probability in a high probability state) of around "1 in 32". It becomes possible.

In this example, when the player is operating the handle 302, the game balls are fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds, so in the time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.), the second Game balls are often accepted into the starting port 2004 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. In this regard, in this example, as described above, the fluctuation pattern table when the second special symbol misses based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 has extremely low fluctuation times in the time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.). It is said that it can be set to a short value of 0.1 seconds. In other words, in this case, when a loss is obtained, the symbol variation is ended in a time (0.1 seconds) that is less than the firing interval of game balls (0.6 seconds), so it is 0.6 seconds. Even in a situation where game balls fired at intervals are received one after another into the second starting port 2004, it is possible to prevent these game balls from being ejected without being subjected to lottery processing. .

FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation process (step S5283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. , the variable timer in which the variable time is set according to the variable pattern determined in the lottery process for the variable pattern (step S5282) is subtracted by 1. As a result, when it is determined that the variable time timer is 0, that is, the selected variable time has elapsed (step S5372), the process proceeds to step S5373. That is, in the process of this step S5373, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol stop process (step S5284).

In addition, even though the variable timer has been subtracted by 1 (step S5371), if the variable time timer has not reached 0, until the variable time timer reaches 0 (until the time when the symbol should be fixed and stopped), Each time the timer interrupt process is performed, the processes in steps S5371 and S5372 are performed.

FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop processing (step S5284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. Display control is performed to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display 1403, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. A stop display command is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 to instruct the derivation and display of the display result of the decorative pattern corresponding to the display result (step S5382).

Further, when the jackpot flag is set (YES in step S5386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating to start a jackpot game state (step S5387), and starts the jackpot game. The waiting time until the start of the state (the time for displaying the start of the jackpot gaming state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5388). Then, a jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is being executed is set, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and if the time saving flag is set, the time saving flag is set. At the time of resetting (step S5389), further resetting the variation counter, and updating the first special symbol process flag so that the process is transferred to the initial value of the first special symbol normal process (step S5394), this process end. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it will be determined in the process of step S5235 that the jackpot execution flag is set, and the jackpot game will be executed in the jackpot control process (step S5240a) described above. The state will now be executed.

Note that the jackpot start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually depending on the type of jackpot. In step S5387, the jackpot start command (8R probability variable jackpot A command, 8R normal jackpot command, 16R probability variation jackpot) according to the type of jackpot (8R probability variation jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot) Set the jackpot command, 8R certain variable jackpot B command, and 2R normal jackpot command). As a result, the performance of the jackpot game state (battle performance or additional challenge performance) according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the game board side performance display device 1600, each lamp/LED, each speaker, etc. .

On the other hand, in the process of step S5386, if it is determined that the jackpot flag is not set (NO in step S5386), first, it is determined whether or not the process is in a low probability time saving state (step S5390). Then, when in the low-probability time-saving state, it is determined whether the number of variations of the special symbol consumed after being controlled to the low-probability time-saving state has reached a predetermined upper limit (here, 100 times) ( Step S5391). In other words, when the number of variations of the special symbol consumed after being controlled to the low probability time saving state reaches a predetermined upper limit (100 times), it is assumed that the conditions for ending the low probability time saving state are satisfied, and the time saving state is The function is stopped and a transition is made to the normal gaming state (low probability non-time saving gaming state) (step S5392).

After the processing related to the time saving function is thus performed, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S5393). As a result, when it is determined that the small win flag is set (YES in step S5393), a small win start command indicating to start the small win game state is set (step S5394), and the small win flag is set. The waiting time until the start of the state (the time for displaying the start of the small winning game state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5395). Then, the small winning execution flag indicating that the small winning gaming state is being executed is set (step S5396), and the first special symbol process flag is set so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol normal processing which is the initial value. When updated to (step S5394), this process ends. In other words, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it will be determined in the process of step S5236 that the small hit execution flag is set, and the small win control process (step S5240b) will be executed. A small winning game state is now executed. Note that, unlike when a jackpot is won, the gaming state is not changed when such a small winning gaming state is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that neither the jackpot flag nor the small hit flag is set (NO in step S5393), it is considered a loss and the first special symbol process is performed without performing any processing related to the jackpot or small win. At the time when the flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S5394), this process ends. In other words, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it will be determined that the jackpot execution flag and the small hit execution flag are not set (steps S5235, S5236), and a new game will be started according to the pending status. Processing related to the progress of (lottery and symbol control) begins to be performed (steps S5237 to S5239).

FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing (step S116).

Now, in the process of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal by the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and that a game ball has passed through the gate section 2003, then as shown in FIG. As the process of step S5402, the main control MPU 1310a first executes gate section passing processing such as acquiring the normal random number of the normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol reservation storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. Normal symbol normal processing (step S5403) in which a normal random number stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read out, and a lottery process for the display mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped is performed based on the read normal random number. )
2. Normal symbol fluctuation time determination processing (step S5404) in which a lottery process for the fluctuation mode (fluctuation time) of the normal symbols displayed on the normal symbol display 1402 is performed based on the regular symbol fluctuation random number.
3. Normal symbol variation processing (step S5405) that waits until the variable display of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 1402 is stopped.
4. The variable display of the normal symbols is stopped so that the mode of display when the variable control of the normal symbols is stopped is displayed on the normal symbol display 1402, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable control of the normal symbols is stopped. Normal symbol stop processing (step S5406)
5. When the result of the lottery process regarding the mode at the time of stopping the variation control of the normal symbol is in a mode that suggests a "normal symbol hit", the movable piece 2004a becomes open and the game ball is accepted into the second starting port 2004. Normal electric accessories release processing (step S5407) that executes processing to enable control of

In addition, the initial value of the normal symbol process flag is set to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S5403) should be performed.

FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the gate passage process (step S5402).

Now, in the process of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal by the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and a game ball has passed through the gate section 2003, the main control board 1310 will be activated as shown in FIG. As the process of step S5411, the main control MPU 1310a first obtains the counter value of the normal hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether the number of reserved normal symbols is the maximum value "4" or not.

In the process of step S5411, if it is determined that the number of normal symbols on hold is not the maximum value, the following steps S5412 to S5414 are performed in order to put the normal symbol fluctuation display control into a new pending state. I will do it. That is, first, as processing in step S5412, the normal pending number counter is counted up (increased by 1). Next, as processing in step S5413, a normal random number and a normal pattern fluctuation random number are obtained from the random number counter. Then, as the process of step S5414, each random number thus obtained is stored in the normal symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal holding number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. .

However, in the process of step S5411, if it is determined that the number of pending normal symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of normal symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processes of steps S5412 to S5414, the variable display control of the normal symbols is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the procedure for normal symbol normal processing (step S5403).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 117, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs the normal hold Based on the counter value of the number counter, it is determined whether or not there is variable display control of the normal symbols in a pending state. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control for the normal symbols in the pending state, then as a process of step S5422, the normal symbols are stored in the normal symbol pending storage area of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. Among the random numbers (normal random numbers, normal pattern fluctuation random numbers) related to the display mode of normal symbols, the random number stored in the earliest storage area is read from the main control built-in RAM. Next, as processing in steps S5423 and S5424, the normal holding number counter is counted down, and when the variable display of the normal symbols stored in each storage area of the normal symbol holding storage area of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is stopped. Random numbers related to the display mode (normal random numbers, normal pattern fluctuation random numbers) are shifted in a first-in, first-out manner.

Specifically, the normal symbol retention storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores random numbers extracted in response to passage of the game ball to the gate section 2003 in order from the first (earliest) area. do. When a random number is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area, when a game ball passes through the gate section 2003, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1st (n=1 to 3) storage area. However, when the conditions for starting a variable display based on the random numbers stored in the first storage area are met, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and the data is displayed in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. The various stored random numbers are moved to the N-1st (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the normal symbols occurs is stored in a specifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first).

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, if the current gaming state is a time-saving state (high probability time-saving state, low probability time-saving state) (step S5425), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 generates a normal figure hit determination table (not shown) in the time-saving time. (step S5426), and if the current gaming state is a non-time-saving state (low probability non-time-saving state, high probability non-time-saving state) (step S5425), a normal figure hit determination table (not shown) for non-time saving is selected. is selected (step S5427), and the selected ordinary symbol hit determination table is compared with the ordinary random number read out in step S5422 of the ordinary symbol normal processing (step S5428).

The normal figure hit determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM of the main control MPU 1310a, and is used when the gaming state is short time (high probability time saving state, low probability time saving state). and a regular figure winning determination table in non-time saving mode, which is used when the gaming state is non-time saving mode (low probability non-time saving state, high probability non-time saving state). Then, in the short-time normal pattern winning judgment table that is referred to for comparison with normal random numbers, all 255 types of normal random numbers match the normal pattern winning judgment value indicating that the normal pattern has been won. Ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so that the normal map indicating a loss does not coincide with the loss judgment value. In this way, in the time saving mode, when a game ball passes through the gate section 2003, the winning is guaranteed on the normal ticket, and the movable piece 2004a becomes open and the game ball passes into the second starting port 2004. Acceptance is controlled. Rather than all of the 255 types, more normal random numbers than in the non-time-saving state may be made to match the normal pattern winning determination value indicating that the winning pattern has been won.

In addition, in the non-time-saving normal pattern winning judgment table that is referred to for comparison with normal random numbers, it is possible that all 255 types of normal random numbers match the normal pattern winning judgment value indicating that a winning pattern has been won. A random number is associated with each of the ordinary figures so as to match the ordinary figure deviation judgment value indicating that the ordinary figure is not correct. In this way, in the non-time-saving time, even if a game ball passes through the gate section 2003, there is no chance of winning a normal ticket, so the movable piece 2004a is in the open state and the game ball passes through the second starting port 2004. There is no control over the acceptance of game balls. However, as mentioned above, it may be possible to make it possible to win the normal symbol even in the non-time-saving state. In this case, the probability of winning is lower than in the time-saving state (for example, 50%), and the lottery result of the normal symbol is the winning probability. When the second starting port 2004 is opened, the movable piece 2004a of the second starting port 2004 is opened for a shorter time than the time saving state, for example, two seconds to allow the game ball to be received into the second starting port 2004, and then the movable piece 2004a is opened. It may be made to be in a closed state to make it impossible to receive game balls into the second starting port 2004.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected ordinary symbol hit determination table with the ordinary random number read out in step S5422 of the ordinary symbol normal processing, and when it is determined that the ordinary symbol has been hit (step S5429). , After setting the normal pattern winning flag indicating that the fluctuation is winning per normal pattern (step S5430), the normal pattern winning pattern as a state when fluctuation control of the normal pattern is stopped (normal pattern stopping pattern) is determined (step S5431). On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the comparison between the selected ordinary symbol hit determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S5422 of the ordinary symbol normal processing is that it is a loss, the fluctuation control of the ordinary symbol is performed. A normal symbol is determined as a mode at the time of stopping (stopping symbol of a normal symbol) (step S5432). After that, when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated (step S5433) so that the process is transferred to the normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S5404), this process ends.

While such control is performed by the main control MPU 1310a, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the above-mentioned various commands transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a to perform peripheral control unit steady processing (received command analysis processing (step S1022). )), it is possible to grasp the game situation each time and execute performances according to the game situation.

Specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not a starting prize has occurred, and when this situation exists, performs control regarding a hold display and a look-ahead effect according to the starting winning. After that, by updating the process flag based on the grasped gaming situation, the following fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting processing, production symbol fluctuation start processing, production symbol fluctuation processing, production symbol fluctuation stop processing, jackpot display processing, jackpot Either the in-game processing or the jackpot end performance processing is executed.

Waiting process for reception of a fluctuation pattern designation command: Until a fluctuation pattern command related to a fluctuation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, a performance (demonstration performance, etc.) is performed when the symbols are not in a fluctuating state and control regarding jackpots is not being performed. While performing control, upon receiving a variation pattern command regarding a variation pattern from the main control MPU 1310a, the process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the production symbol variation start process.

Production pattern variation start processing: Various production contents (production pattern, preview production, etc.) during the pattern variation period are determined based on a variation pattern command, etc., and variation of decorative symbols is started based on the determined production contents. Control as follows. After this, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during effect pattern variation.

Processing during production symbol fluctuation: Performs control to start various production contents determined in the production symbol variation start processing at respective timings during the symbol variation period, and when the variation time ends, changes the value of the process flag to the production symbol. Update to a value compatible with fluctuation stop processing.

Effect pattern fluctuation stop processing: Based on the reception of a command (design confirmation command) instructing to stop all patterns, control is performed to stop the fluctuation of decorative patterns and derive and display the display result (stop pattern). Then, if the decorative pattern is to be stopped at a jackpot pattern, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process, and if the decorative pattern is to be stopped at a loss pattern, the value of the process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the reception of the fluctuation pattern designation command. Update to the corresponding value.

Jackpot display processing: Controls the performance (such as the display performance for notifying the occurrence of a jackpot on the game board side performance display device 1600) during the period from when the decorative pattern stops at the jackpot pattern until the start of the jackpot game. Thereafter, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during the jackpot game.

Processing during the jackpot game: Controls various performances during the period when the jackpot game state occurs. When the jackpot game state ends, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect processing.

Jackpot end performance processing: In the game board side performance display device 1600, a performance during the period from the end of the jackpot game state to the change permissible state (display performance that notifies the player that the jackpot game state has ended, etc.) control. Then, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern designation command reception waiting process.

Here, the control of the look-ahead effect executed at the time of starting winning will be explained.

When a game ball wins a prize in the starting winning opening (first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004), the main control board 1310 performs first starting opening passage processing (FIG. 105) or The second starting port passing process (FIG. 106) is executed, and a random value is extracted (obtained) as starting memory (steps S5241, S5251). Then, in the first special symbol pre-reading process (S5245) or the second special symbol pre-reading process (S5255), based on the extracted random number value or the lottery result based on the random number value, a special symbol 1 memory pre-reading production command or special symbol 2. A memory pre-read effect command (see FIG. 90, hereinafter referred to as "special figure pre-read effect command") is sent to the peripheral control board 1510.

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the special figure pre-read effect command, it determines whether or not to execute the pre-read effect based on the received command. Commands from the main control board 1310 are stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer by peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing (FIG. 98). The received command is then analyzed by the received command analysis process (S1022) of the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process (FIG. 95).

Upon receiving the special figure pre-read effect command, the peripheral control board 1510 executes a pre-read effect control process in the received command analysis process. In the pre-read effect control process, a process for executing a normal pre-read effect that changes the display mode of the pending display is executed. Note that the prefetch effect control process may be performed by setting a flag indicating that a prefetch effect command has been received in the received command analysis process, and calling it in the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process (FIG. 95). good.

In the process for executing the normal pre-reading effect that changes the pending display, a lottery is drawn based on the special figure pre-reading effect command, and a display mode of the changed pending display is selected based on the lottery result. At this time, the display mode of the pending display may be changed only when shifting to the ready-to-win state in the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the special symbol pre-reading performance command. The display mode of the hold display may be changed, for example, by changing the color or shape of the hold display. Then, a normal prefetch effect setting process is executed to change the mode of pending storage display. In the normal look-ahead effect setting process, settings are made to change the display mode of the hold display, and at the same time the display mode of the hold display is changed, sound effects are output, lamps are lit, and accessories are moved. Make settings to do so.

With reference to FIGS. 1 to 8, an embodiment has been shown in which the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a door frame left side unit 530, a door frame right side unit 550, a door frame top unit 570, etc.; 2 shows an embodiment in which a movable body (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a frame movable body) used for presentation and decoration is provided on the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1.

118(A) to FIG. 118(E) show that a right ear frame movable body 7100 imitating the ear of an animal (specifically, a rabbit) is attached to the door frame top unit 570 constituting the door frame 3 as a frame movable body. An embodiment in which a left ear frame movable body 7200 is provided is shown. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are movable in the vertical direction, and the specific structure and operation mode will be described later.

118(A) and FIG. 118(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 118(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 118(D) and FIG. 118(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 118(A), FIG. 118(C), and FIG. 118(D) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570. 118(B) and FIG. 118(E) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protrude upward from the door frame top unit 570. FIG. 118(D) shows a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570.

In this embodiment, a door frame top unit 570 is provided at the top of the door frame 3. A glass unit 190 is provided in the center of the door frame 3, and through the glass unit 190, the game area 5a located at the rear, the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, and various movable bodies in the game board are displayed. is visible. A pan unit 320 and a handle unit 300 are provided at the bottom of the door frame 3. Furthermore, the performance operation unit 400 is equipped with an operation button 410, and is capable of receiving operation input from a player. In addition, in the figure, illustration of the upper tray 321, the lower tray 322, the ball lending button 328, the return button 329, etc. is omitted.

The door frame top unit 570 has a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape, and its top surface, right side surface, and left side surface are the same as the top surface, right side surface, and left side surface of the door frame base unit 100 constituting the outer frame 2 and the door frame 3, respectively. They are arranged so that they overlap when viewed from the front. The door frame top unit 570 is made of white, translucent synthetic resin and has a thickness of approximately several mm, and is capable of transmitting light. The door frame top unit 570 has a door frame top unit upper right ear opening 7000 corresponding to a right ear frame movable body 7100 movable in the vertical direction, and a door frame top unit upper right ear opening 7000 corresponding to a left ear frame movable body 7200 movable in the vertical direction. A frame top unit upper left ear opening 7010 is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 118(A) to 118(E), the door frame top unit 570 in this embodiment includes a right ear frame movable body 7100 on the left side and a left ear frame movable body 7200 on the right side when viewed from the front. There is. Their specific structures and operating modes are shown below. In addition, since the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have basically the same structure, in the following description, only the right ear frame movable body 7100 may be explained as a representative.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 has a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 facing forward and a right ear frame movable body second surface 7120 facing backward. ing. The first surface 7110 of the movable right ear frame consists of an inner decoration part 7112 on the first surface of the movable right ear frame made of a colored (specifically, pink) transparent synthetic resin, and a white translucent synthetic resin on the outside. It has a right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7114. The surfaces of the right ear frame movable body 7100 other than the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 (top surface, left side surface, right side surface, right ear frame movable body second surface 7120) are the outside of the right ear frame movable body first surface. It is made of the same white translucent synthetic resin as the decorative portion 7114. Note that the left ear frame movable body 7200 also has the same structure as the right ear frame movable body 7100.

Inside the right ear frame movable body 7100, a right ear frame movable body inner light emitting part 7116 is provided at a position overlapping the right ear frame movable body first surface inner decoration part 7112 in front view. Further, a right ear frame movable body outer light emitting portion 7118 is provided at a position overlapping the right ear frame movable body first surface outer decoration portion 7114 in front view. Specifically, the right ear frame movable body inner light emitting section 7116 is composed of a printed circuit board with a white protective film coated on both sides, and a light emitting diode capable of emitting light toward the player is mounted on its surface. has been done. The right ear frame movable body inner light emitting section 7116 and the right ear frame movable body outer light emitting section 7118 are capable of emitting light in a predetermined light emission manner forward under the control of the peripheral control board 1510. It is possible to decorate the right ear frame movable body first surface inner decoration portion 7112 with light emission by the movable body inner light emitting portion 7116, and the right ear frame movable body first surface outer decoration portion 7114 with the right ear frame movable body outer light emission portion 7118. It is. Note that the left ear frame movable body 7200 also has the same structure as the right ear frame movable body 7100.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are moved as shown in FIGS. 118(A), 118(C), and 118(D), respectively, by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. From the state (first state) stored in the standby position in the door frame top unit 570, vertically move upward from the top surface of the door frame top unit 570 as shown in FIGS. 118(B) and 118(E). It is possible to control it to a state where it protrudes (second state). The upper surfaces of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are formed flush with the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 when the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are in the standby position. has been done. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have shapes imitating animal ears, and are housed in the door frame top unit 570 and protrude vertically upward from the top surface of the door frame top unit 570. It is possible to decoratively express the state in which the animal's ears move by taking the state in which the animal's ears move.

In this embodiment, the door frame top unit 570 is made of white, translucent synthetic resin and has a thickness of approximately several mm. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 118(A), when the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body inner light emitting part 7116, the right ear frame movable body 7200 When the movable body outer light emitting section 7118, the left ear frame movable body inner light emitting section 7216, and the left ear frame movable body outer light emitting section 7218 are made to emit light in a predetermined manner, the front surface of the door frame top unit 570 is dimly emitted. It is possible for the player to visually recognize the game in the state where the game is displayed.

On the other hand, in a state where the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protrude from the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body inner light emitting part 7116, the right ear frame movable body outer light emitting part 7118, the left ear frame When the movable body inner light emitting part 7216 and the left ear frame movable body outer light emitting part 7218 are made to emit light in a predetermined manner, the right ear frame movable body first surface inner decoration part that the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 has. 7112, right ear frame movable body first surface outer decoration portion 7114, left ear frame movable body first surface inner decoration portion 7212 and left ear frame movable body first surface outer decoration portion of left ear frame movable body first surface 7210. 7214 can be directly viewed by the player in a predetermined light emitting effect state.

In this way, by moving the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as frame movable body), a part of the frame movable body is moved to the outer frame 2 or the door frame base unit 100. Because it is located above the top surface, the area it occupies for the player's field of view increases, and the volume of the casing appears to have increased, providing players with unprecedented surprise and fun. It becomes possible to give it to

Next, with reference to FIGS. 119(A) to 120(B), the game board side is adjusted according to the specific operation mode of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the operation mode of the frame movable body. The display mode of the frame movable body simulation image, which is an image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the operation button 410 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the operation unit) Player operation reception mode, right ear frame movable body inner light emitting part 7116, right ear frame movable body outer light emitting part 7118, left ear frame movable body inner light emitting part 7216, left ear frame movable body outer light emitting part 7218 (hereinafter referred to as frame An example of a performance combining light emitting modes etc. in a movable body light emitting section (sometimes referred to as a movable body light emitting section) is shown below.

119(A) to FIG. 120(B) respectively show the operation mode of the frame movable body and the display of a frame movable body simulated image that is an image simulating the frame movable body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. It is a time chart showing the state, the acceptance state of the operation unit, the display state of the operation instruction display displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600, and the light emission performance state of the frame movable body light emitting unit.

In addition, in the time charts shown in FIGS. 119(A) to 120(B), in order to explain the timing of the effect, t0, t1 to t34, t35, etc. are indicated according to the passage of time. The time between each timing is 1 second. Further, these points are not limited to this embodiment, and are the same even when similar notations are used in other embodiments to be described later.

FIG. 119(A) shows an example of a performance pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot and the player operates the operation unit during the period when operation reception on the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 119(B) shows an example of a production pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player operates the operation unit during the period when operation reception on the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 120(A) shows an example of a performance pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation reception on the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 120(B) shows an example of a performance pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation reception on the operation unit is valid. ing.

In each production pattern shown in FIGS. 119(A) to 120(B), the manner in which the frame movable body moves, the display manner of the frame movable body simulated image, the timing at which operation reception on the operation unit becomes effective, and the operation instruction display are The timing at which it starts and the timing at which the light-emitting section of the frame movable body changes from the light-emitting effect state to the light-out state are the same. On the other hand, the timing at which the operation instruction display ends and the timing at which the light emitting section of the frame movable body changes from the unlit state to the light emitting effect state or the specific light emitting effect state may differ depending on the effect pattern. Specific performance examples for each performance pattern will be shown below with reference to FIGS. 119(A) to 120(B).

In the performance patterns shown in FIGS. 119(A) to 120(B), the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570 in the initial state (before timing t0). state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the first state or standby state). In this state, when a reach effect state corresponding to the special lottery result occurs at a predetermined timing between timing t0 and timing t7 (for example, timing t4), the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 simultaneously rise. (timing t7).

At the same time, display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at the center of the game board side effect display device 1600. At the same time, display of a door frame top unit simulated image, which is an image simulating the door frame top unit 570, is also started. Specifically, the frame movable body simulation image is composed of an image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and an image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200. In the frame movable body simulation image, an image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and an image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 rise in accordance with the rise of the real right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200. dynamically displayed in a manner that The frame movable body simulation image is an image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a left ear frame movable body in accordance with the timing (timing t9) when the real right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200 finish rising. After the image imitating the body 7200 has finished rising, it continues to be displayed in a stopped state (after timing t9). The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are in a state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the second state or rising state) in which they have completed their rise at timing t9, which is two seconds after starting their rise at timing t7. Become.

On the other hand, at timing t9, the acceptance of the operation on the operation unit becomes valid, and display of an image instructing the operation on the operation unit on the game board side effect display device 1600 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as operation instruction display) starts. Ru. As the operation instruction display, for example, an image imitating the appearance of the operation button 410 may be displayed, or a character string instructing to operate the operation section (for example, a character string "Push!!") may be displayed. It's okay. Note that the operation validity period continues until an operation is accepted on the operation unit (timing t14 in the example shown below) or until a predetermined time elapses (until timing t18). Moreover, at timing t9, all the frame movable body light emitting parts change from the state in which they have performed the light emission effect to the light-out state.

FIG. 119(A) and FIG. 119(B) show the production mode when the operation on the operation unit is performed at timing t14 after the period in which the operation on the operation unit is valid has started (timing t9). It shows. In these effect patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t14, and the frame movable body light emitting section enters a predetermined light emitting effect state corresponding to the special lottery result.

FIG. 119(A) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot, and when the operation section is operated (timing t14), the light emitting section of the frame movable body changes from the off state to the normal state. A specific light emitting effect state that is different from the light emitting effect state is obtained. In this way, when the frame movable body light emitting section enters the specific light emitting performance state, it is shown to the player that the special lottery result is a jackpot.

On the other hand, FIG. 119(B) shows an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss, and when the operation section is operated (timing t14), the frame movable body light emitting section changes from the off state to the normal state. It will be in a light emitting state. In this way, when the frame movable body light emitting section enters the normal light emitting performance state, it is indicated to the player that the special lottery result is a loss.

In the specific light emission state, compared to the light emission mode in the normal light emission state, the light blinks faster, the light intensity is stronger, and the number of colors increases, making the player feel more stimulated. It is preferable to adopt a light emitting mode. In this way, when the performance state of the specific light emitting mode different from normal is visually recognized by the player, it is shown to the player that the special lottery result is a jackpot. Specifically, in the specific light emitting effect state, the inner part of the frame movable body and the outer part of the frame movable body may be configured to be in the light emitting effect state in different ways. For example, the inner part of the frame movable body may be configured to be visible in a more stimulating light emitting manner than the outer part of the frame movable body. Note that this definition of the specific light emitting effect state and the normal light emitting effect state may be configured to be applied to other embodiments.

FIGS. 120(A) and 120(B) show that after the period in which operations on the operating section are valid has started (timing t9), the player does not operate the operating section during the valid operation period; This shows a performance mode when the operation valid period ends at timing t18 after a predetermined time period has elapsed. In these effect patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t18, and the frame movable body light emitting section enters a predetermined light emitting effect state according to the special lottery result.

FIG. 120(A) shows a production pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot, in which the frame movable body light emitting section emits a specific light emission state different from the normal light emission production state at the timing when the valid operation period ends (timing t18). It becomes a performance state. In this way, when the frame movable body light emitting section enters the specific light emitting performance state, it is shown to the player that the special lottery result is a jackpot.

On the other hand, FIG. 120(B) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss, and at the timing when the valid operation period ends (timing t18), the light emitting part of the frame movable body returns to the normal light emitting effect state. . In this way, the light emitting section enters the normal light emitting performance state, thereby indicating to the player that the special lottery result is a loss.

In each production pattern shown in FIGS. 119(A) to 120(B), at a predetermined timing (timing t20) after the operation validity period ends, the decorative symbols that have been changing correspond to the special lottery results. It will stop and be displayed. For example, in the case of the performance patterns shown in FIG. 119(A) and FIG. 120(A), the special lottery result is in the form of a row of eyes (for example, "7", "7", "7") indicating that the result is a jackpot. In the case of the performance patterns shown in FIGS. 119(B) and 120(B) in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the reach loss mode (for example, "7", "6", "7") indicating that the special lottery result is a loss is displayed. ), the decorative pattern will be stopped and displayed.

At the timing (timing t22) when two seconds have elapsed since the decorative pattern stopped, the frame movable body moves to the raised position (second state) while maintaining the light emitting mode of either the specific light emitting effect state or the normal light emitting effect state. ) to the storage position (first state). At the same time, the frame movable body simulated image takes on a display mode in which it descends in accordance with the downward movement of the actual right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200. At the timing when the movement of the frame movable body to the storage position is completed (timing t24), the frame movable body simulated image changes to a display mode in which the descent has been completed in accordance with the lowering movement of the actual frame movable body, and The display ends.

When the special lottery result is a jackpot, the light emitting state of the frame movable body may be configured to change from the specific light emitting effect state to the normal light emitting effect state at a predetermined timing during the jackpot. If the special lottery result is a loss, the normal light emitting effect state is continued and the next decorative pattern variation is started.

121(A) to 121(C) show the movement state of the frame movable body, the display mode of the frame movable body simulated image, and the reception of the operation unit when the effect pattern shown in FIG. 119(A) is executed. It is a diagram schematically showing changes in the state, the operation instruction display state, and the light emitting effect state of the frame movable body over time. As described above, the performance pattern shown in FIG. 119(A) is a performance pattern when the player operates the operation unit when the special lottery result is a jackpot.

FIG. 121(A) shows the state at timing t5, in which the decorative pattern is fluctuating in the ready-to-reach state, and the frame movable body is in the storage position (first state) in the normal light-emitting state. The frame movable body simulated image is not displayed, the operation section is in an invalid operation period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed.

FIG. 121(B) shows the state at timing t8, where the decorative pattern is fluctuating in the reach state, and the frame movable body is in the light emitting state from the storage position (first state) to the raised position (second state). The frame movable body simulated image is displayed to simulate the state in which it is moving from the storage position (first state) to the raised position (second state), and the operation section is disabled. period, and the operation instruction display is hidden.

FIG. 121(C) shows the state at timing t11, where the decorative pattern is fluctuating in the reach state, the frame movable body is in the raised position (second state) in the unlit state, and the frame movable body simulated image is The display imitates the frame movable body located in the raised position (second state), and the operation valid period starts in the operation section, and an image imitating the operation section is displayed as an instruction display. ing.

FIG. 122(A) shows the state at timing t19, where the decorative pattern is fluctuating in the reach state, the frame movable body is in the raised position (second state) in the special light emission state, and the frame movable body is simulated. The image is a display imitating the raised position (second state), the operation section is in an operation invalid period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed.

FIG. 122(B) shows the state at timing t23, where the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a row (for example, "7", "7", "7") indicating that the special lottery result is a jackpot. The frame movable body is moving from the raised position (second state) to the stowed position (first state) in the special light emission state, and the frame movable body simulated image moves from the raised position (second state) to the stowed position ( The display simulates the state during movement to the first state), the operation section is in an invalid operation period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed.

FIG. 122(C) shows the state at timing t28, where the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a row (for example, "7", "7", "7") indicating that the special lottery result is a jackpot. , the frame movable body is located in the storage position (first state) in the special light emission state, the frame movable body simulated image is not displayed, the operation section is in the operation invalid period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed. .

In this way, by displaying the frame movable body simulated image at the timing when the frame movable body starts moving, it is possible to confirm that the frame movable body is moving and to change the light emission mode according to the operation of the operation section. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player misses a game. In addition, the frame movable body appears in an unprecedented position in response to a special lottery result (for example, in response to the occurrence of a reach effect), making it possible to give the player a great sense of surprise and fun. In addition, when the player operates the operation unit, the light emitting pattern of the frame movable body light emitting unit changes, making it possible to give the player the feeling that he or she has decided the special lottery result. becomes.

When the frame movable body operates, a performance pattern is selected so that the expectation that the special lottery result corresponding to the fluctuating decorative pattern will be a jackpot is higher than when the frame movable body does not operate. It is recommended to configure it as follows. For example, the expectation level when the frame movable body does not operate may be set to 3%, and the expectation level when the frame movable body operates may be set to 20%. In such a configuration, when a frame movable body simulated image imitating the frame movable body is displayed, a player who looks at the frame movable body and notices that the frame movable body is in a moving state , this creates a sense of expectation for winning the jackpot.

With such a configuration, it is possible to further increase the player's interest in the frame movable body, and the player's interest, which conventionally was within a predetermined range centered on the game board 5, is directed outward. It becomes possible to expand.

The volume of the variable effect sound may be changed from a normal state to a suppressed state in which the volume is lowered while the frame movable body is in operation.
The fluctuating performance sound is a sound in which a predetermined piece of music is played in accordance with the fluctuation of the decorative symbols, and is perceived by the player as background music. For example, a song consisting of the voice sung by a predetermined singer and the sounds of multiple musical instruments is played for several minutes, and during that time, the variation of the decorative pattern (for example, all the variation results of the decorative pattern are non-reach misses, and the variation time is 10% on average. ) is performed multiple times. By outputting such variable effect sound to the player, it is possible to increase interest in the game. Note that a plurality of such songs may be prepared in advance, and the configuration may be such that the playback of a different song starts at the timing when the playback of a certain song ends. Alternatively, in accordance with a change in the gaming state, the music that was being played up to that point may be faded out during playback, and another music that is different from the music that was being played up to that point may be played. In this embodiment, by suppressing the volume of such fluctuating effect sound in accordance with the timing when the frame movable body operates, a state where the effect becomes excessive is suppressed.

In addition, it may be configured to play a special sound for a short time to remind the player that the frame movable body is moving or has been moved, in synchronization with the timing when the frame movable body moves. , instead of emitting sounds that are recognized as a series of songs that play over a long period of time, such as variable sound effects, sound effects (for example, a chime sound such as "ping-dong") are played for one second, or for short periods of time ( It is recommended to play a song that finishes playing in 2 seconds, for example, or to play a sound that sounds like a drum being hit continuously (for example, a sound like "doko doko doko...") for several seconds. Further, it is preferable that the sounds constituting the special evocative sound do not include musical instrument sounds used as part of the variable performance sound. Further, the special evocative sound is output at a predetermined volume without being affected by the output state of the variable performance sound. For example, even in a normal state in which the volume of the variable effect sound is not suppressed or in a suppressed state in which the volume of the variable effect sound is suppressed, the special evocative sound is output at a predetermined volume. Further, the volume of the special evocative sound is preferably made larger than the volume of the variable effect sound in the suppressed state.

In this way, by suppressing the volume of the fluctuating performance sound and generating the special evocative sound in accordance with the movement of the frame movable body, it is possible to prevent the performance provided to the player from becoming excessive. Become. Furthermore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of situations where the player is injured or the frame movable body is damaged due to the player coming into contact with the frame movable body.

Instead of notifying the player that there is a high degree of expectation that a jackpot will occur, which is an advantageous state to the player, by operating the frame movable body, other games other than the expectation that a jackpot will occur. It may be configured to notify the player of the level of expectation regarding the occurrence of the content.

For example, although it is certain that there will be a jackpot, the details of the profit that will be given to the player during the jackpot may be notified. As for the content of profit, for example, the type of profit may be notified, or the amount of profit may be notified.

Alternatively, the system may be configured to notify the details of the profit to be given to the player after winning the jackpot. For example, it may be configured to notify the type of profit to be given to the player after a jackpot, or it may be configured to notify the amount of profit to be given to the player after a jackpot. .

In this way, it is not limited to the expectation that a situation advantageous to the player will occur (for example, a jackpot situation), but also the amount of profit that will be given to the player in a situation that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot situation). Expectations regarding the number of balls that will be rolled out, the number of times the big prize opening will be opened, etc.), and the conditions that may be advantageous to the player that may occur after the conditions that are advantageous to the player end (for example, the variable rate condition or electric chew support) The degree of expectation that a certain state (state) will occur, the type (for example, a fixed change state or electric chew support state) and the amount ( As an example, it may be configured to notify the number of fluctuations in which the variable probability state continues or the number of fluctuations in which electric chew support continues.

When the player is notified by the movement of the frame movable body that there is a high expectation that a jackpot, which is an advantageous state for the player, will occur by executing a predetermined presentation mode among a plurality of different presentation modes. good.
Note that the expectation level may be notified to the player not only by the movement of the frame movable body but also by other modes that the player can perceive. For example, the display mode in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, the mode of sound output from a predetermined speaker, the light emission mode based on the light output from a predetermined light source, the vibration mode of a predetermined vibration source, etc. It is preferable to configure the game so that the player is informed of the level of expectation in various ways that the player can perceive.

Furthermore, the degree of expectation may be configured to include that it is certain that a predetermined advantageous condition will occur (that a 100% advantageous condition will occur). For example, the degree of expectation that a predetermined advantageous state will occur when a predetermined production mode is executed is 10%, and the expectation that a predetermined advantageous state will occur when another production mode is executed is 10%. It may also be expressed as a percentage.

Further, it is preferable to configure such that the performance mode with a higher expectation that an advantageous state will occur has a lower rate of performance. For example, the ratio of the number of executions of a predetermined performance mode with a low expectation that an advantageous state will occur to the number of executions of a predetermined production mode with a high expectation that an advantageous state will occur is, for example, 90:10. It is recommended to set the execution rate of the production mode as follows. According to such a configuration, when a predetermined performance mode with a low probability of occurrence is executed, the player feels the joy of being able to experience the performance with a low probability of occurrence, and the feeling of anticipation for an advantageous state. It becomes possible to experience both and increase the interest in the game.

As a performance display performed in a display area of a performance display device, a pre-read performance display is known that is performed across multiple variable displays of decorative symbols in response to the occurrence of a specific suspension. The fluctuating display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the specific suspension that caused the pre-reading effect display is different from the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern in which the pre-reading effect display is not performed, and the decorative pattern stops in a manner that indicates the occurrence of a jackpot. The probability of being displayed is set high. Therefore, when the pre-read effect display is executed, the player has a feeling of expectation that a jackpot will occur.

On the other hand, in the display area of the performance display device, a fluctuating display of decorative symbols is performed, and a plurality of performance displays corresponding to the decorative symbol being fluctuated (for example, the fluctuating decorative symbol indicates a jackpot). (e.g., an effect display indicating the level of expectation that is stopped and displayed in a different manner) is also performed. Therefore, in addition to the look-ahead performance display that suggests the fluctuating display result of the decorative symbol several times in the future, the player also has to be aware of the fluctuating display mode of the currently fluctuating decorative symbol and the display content of the performance display corresponding to the currently fluctuating decorative symbol. The situation has become such that it is necessary to visually confirm the situation at the same time.

Although such a situation can increase the fun of the game, it may also cause the problem that the player cannot fully grasp the contents indicated by these effect displays. In particular, since players are in a situation where they are paying attention to the fluctuating display of decorative symbols that are currently fluctuating and the various performance displays that correspond to the fluctuating display, the pre-reading performance display is relatively inconspicuous, and the pre-reading performance display is There has been a problem in that the player may not be aware of the fact that the game is being executed or that the decorative symbols corresponding to the look-ahead effect display are about to start changing.

Therefore, when executing the pre-reading effect display, the following will help the player understand that the pre-reading effect display is being executed and that the timing to start the variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the pre-reading effect display is approaching. An embodiment is shown below.

Below, with reference to FIG. 123, various images displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 that are performed when the prefetch effect display is executed will be described.
Specifically, the game board-side performance display device 1600 displays the display of decorative symbols from the start of the fluctuation to the stop of the fluctuation, which is performed when the special lottery result held in response to a winning in the first starting opening 2002 is a loss. Examples of effects in the display area will be described with reference to FIGS. 123(A) to 123(F). In addition, an example of the production from the start of the fluctuation display of the decorative pattern to the stop of the fluctuation, which is performed when the special lottery result held in response to the winning in the first starting slot 2002 is a jackpot, is shown in FIGS. 123(A) to 123(A) 123(D), FIG. 123(G), and FIG. 123(H).
In addition, in this specification, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 may be simply referred to as a display area.

FIG. 123(A) shows a state in which three decorative patterns are stopped and displayed. It also shows a state in which the pending image corresponding to the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed is displayed. It also shows a state where there are three pending games corresponding to winnings of game balls into the first starting port 2002. Specifically, at approximately the vertical center of the display area, a decorative pattern with the number "3" attached thereto is placed at equal intervals from the left as the left decorative pattern, and a decorative pattern with the number "5" attached as the middle decorative pattern is placed at equal intervals from the left. , a decorative pattern with the number "2" added thereto as a right decorative pattern is shown in a stopped state. The decorative pattern has a vertically elongated rectangular shape and consists of a background area (the white part in the figure) consisting of an image that forms the outline of the decorative pattern, and a numeric area (the white part in the figure) consisting of an image showing any number from "1" to "9". (Black text in the figure) As shown in the figure, the number area is located in the center of the background area.

It is preferable that the decorative pattern is composed of images of different colors from the color of the background area and the color of the number area. For example, the color of the background area may be white and the color of the number area may be black. Note that the rectangular outline forming the outer shape of the background area may be black.

At the bottom of the display area, from the left, the relevant hold display area, the first hold display area, the second hold display area, the third hold display area, and the fourth hold display area are set. A state is shown in which the held image is displayed in the display area, and held images are displayed in each of the first to third held display areas. Note that the fourth hold display area is shown with a dotted line in the figure for explanation purposes, but the dotted line is not actually displayed in the display area as a display state, and in the following drawings, a hold image is displayed. In principle, such dotted lines are not used to indicate the expected locations.

In FIG. 123(A), the pending image displayed in the pending display area is a pending image corresponding to the decorative symbols "3", "5", and "2" that are stopped and displayed. Further, the pending image displayed in the first pending display area is a pending image corresponding to a variable display that will be performed next after the variable display corresponding to the pending image ends. Furthermore, the held image displayed in the second held display area is the held image corresponding to the next variable display that will be performed after the variable display corresponding to the held image displayed in the first held display area ends. be. Furthermore, the held image displayed in the third held display area is the held image corresponding to the next variable display that will be performed after the variable display corresponding to the held image displayed in the second held display area ends. be.

FIG. 123(B) shows the display state at the time when the decorative pattern corresponding to the pending image displayed in the first pending display area described with reference to FIG. 123(A) starts changing.
Specifically, the top edge of the decorative pattern that is displayed one step earlier under the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is the same as that of the decorative pattern that is displayed one step later than the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, respectively. The bottom edge is displayed. Also, the display of the pending display ends.
The pending image displayed in the pending display area and the pending images displayed in the first to fourth pending display areas are always displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern. The shape of the pending image and the pending image is a perfect circle, and the color is basically white. Further, the diameter of the circle in the retained image is larger than that of the retained image.

FIG. 123(C) shows a state in which the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are being displayed in a variable manner. Each decorative pattern is displayed in a downward scrolling manner within the display area.

Specifically, for a certain decorative pattern that is being displayed in a variable manner, the bottom side of the decorative pattern is first displayed on the top side of the display area, and then the decorative pattern moves downward to fill the display area. The entire decorative pattern will be displayed, and then, after the bottom edge of the decorative pattern reaches the bottom of the display area, only the upper part of the decorative pattern will be displayed. The upper end of the decorative pattern reaches the bottom edge of the display area, and the decorative pattern is no longer displayed. In this way, each decorative pattern changes its display state from a state where it is not displayed in the display area, to a state where it is displayed in the display area, and then to a state where it is not displayed in the display area.

The order in which the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern are displayed is set. Specifically, following a decorative pattern with a certain number (for example, "1"), a decorative pattern with the next number (for example, "2") appears in order from the top of the display area. will be displayed. The order of the numbers attached to the decorative designs is "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "8", "9". . After the decorative pattern numbered "9", a decorative pattern numbered "1" is displayed in the display area. For example, in FIG. 123(C), a left decorative pattern with the number "1" attached to the bottom and a left decorative pattern with the number "2" attached to the top are displayed as the left decorative patterns. is shown, but both left decorative patterns scroll downwards, and the left decorative pattern with the number "2" is followed by the left decorative pattern with the number "3". , will appear from the top of the display area.

With reference to FIG. 123(B), it was explained that the display of the pending image that had been displayed in the pending display area until then ends at the same time as the variation of the decorative pattern starts, but the display of the pending image ends. At the same time, the pending image displayed in the first pending display area is displayed so as to be enlarged and moved to the left, and is displayed as the pending image in the pending display area. At the same time, the pending image displayed in the second pending display area is displayed so as to move to the left, and is displayed as a pending image in the first pending display area. At the same time, the pending image displayed in the second pending display area is displayed so as to move to the left, and is displayed as a pending image in the first pending display area. Such enlargement of the held image and movement of the held image to the left are performed over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.67 seconds). FIG. 123(C) shows the state of such a held image after it has been moved.

FIG. 123(D) shows a state in which the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the middle decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, a decorative pattern with the number "2" added to the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed. Furthermore, a new pending image is displayed in the third pending display area in response to the winning of a game ball into the first starting port 2002.

Here, the temporary stop display will be explained. A temporary stop display is a display mode of a decorative pattern in which a decorative pattern with a predetermined number is displayed as if it had stopped at or near the display position where the decorative pattern will finally be displayed. It is. Specifically, for example, a decorative pattern with a predetermined number is gently moved up and down to the extent that the number attached to the decorative pattern can be clearly seen, based on the display position where the decorative pattern will finally stop and be displayed. A temporary stop display of the decorative pattern is performed by displaying it in a moving or swaying manner. Alternatively, a display may be performed that rotates within a predetermined angle range (for example, 5 to 10 degrees) with the vertical direction as an axis. In either case, the temporarily stopped decorative pattern continues to be displayed in the display area.
In this way, by performing a temporary stop display, the decorative pattern that is being displayed in a fluctuating manner appears to the player as if it is stationary, and the player can confirm the numbers attached to the decorative pattern. . In addition, when the decorative pattern is finally displayed in a stopped state, the vertical movement or shaking display is not performed in this way, and the decorative pattern is displayed in a completely stopped state.
Although the example is given at the end of the variable display, a temporary stop display may be performed for a predetermined period of time at the start of the variable display.
Further, during the fluctuating display, at least one of the left-center right decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped and displayed for a predetermined period of time, and then all the decorative symbols may be caused to fluctuate again at high speed. Such a display mode is used, for example, in a "pseudo-connection effect."
The mode of the temporary stop display may be different depending on the timing at which the temporary stop display of the decorative symbols is performed (such as the progress of the variable display) and the game state. For example, one or both of the vertical movement period and amplitude of the decorative pattern may be different. Moreover, the swaying direction may be not the vertical direction but the horizontal direction or the diagonal direction. Also, instead of displaying the image in a manner that rotates around the vertical direction, the display rotates within a predetermined angle range (for example, 5 to 10 degrees) around the horizontal direction or diagonally. You can.
Note that the fluctuating state in which the temporary stop display is performed may be referred to as "shaking fluctuation" in this specification.

When performing variable display such that the temporarily stopped displayed decorative pattern becomes the final stopped displayed decorative pattern, or when the temporarily stopped displayed decorative pattern is moved and displayed again in a downward scrolling manner, There is a case where a variable display is performed so that a decorative pattern with another number is finally stopped and displayed, but the details will be described later.

In addition, in Figure 123(D), arc-shaped lines are attached to the upper left and lower right of the left decorative pattern with the number "2", but this is because the left decorative pattern with the number "2" This line indicates that the symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. Further, in other drawings, such arcuate lines may be attached to decorative patterns, but this also indicates that the decorative pattern is in a temporarily stopped display state.

FIG. 123(E) shows a state in which the right decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed following the left decorative pattern, and the middle decorative pattern is being displayed in a fluctuating manner. Specifically, a decorative pattern with the number "2" added thereto as the left decorative pattern and a decorative pattern added with the number "4" as the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped and displayed.

FIG. 123(F) shows a state in which the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed. In accordance with the stop display of the middle decorative pattern, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern, which had been temporarily stopped and displayed, are also stopped and displayed. In addition, in accordance with the stop display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, in the figure, the decorative pattern with the number "2" added to the left decorative pattern is the decoration with the number "7" added to the middle decorative pattern. The decorative patterns with the number "4" attached to the right decorative pattern are each stopped and displayed, and the combination of the stopped and displayed decorative patterns indicates that the special lottery result was a loss. In the state where the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in a stopped state, as shown in the figure, the decorative patterns that were displayed above and below each decorative pattern during fluctuation or temporary stop are no longer displayed. The static display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is continued for a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second), and after that, the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the pending image displayed in the first pending display area is newly started. Ru. Note that the display of the pending image that has been displayed in the pending image ends at the same timing as the start of variation of a new decorative pattern.

FIG. 123(G) shows a state in which, following the left decorative pattern, the right decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and the middle decorative pattern is being displayed in a fluctuating manner from the display state shown with reference to FIG. 123(D). ing. Specifically, the decorative pattern with the number "2" attached to the left decorative pattern and the decorative pattern with the number "2" attached to the right decorative pattern are displayed in a temporary stop state, indicating that a reach state has occurred. Indicates the condition.

FIG. 123(H) shows a state in which the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed. In addition, in accordance with the stop display of the middle decorative pattern, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern, which had been temporarily stopped and displayed, are also stopped and displayed. In addition, in accordance with the stop display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, in the figure, the decorative pattern with the number "2" added to the left decorative pattern is the decoration with the number "2" added to the middle decorative pattern. The decorative patterns in which the number "2" is attached to the right decorative pattern are each stopped and displayed, and the combination of the stopped and displayed decorative patterns indicates that the special lottery result is a jackpot. In the state where the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in a stopped state, as shown in the figure, the decorative patterns that were displayed above and below each decorative pattern during fluctuation or temporary stop are no longer displayed. After the stop display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, one second), the display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is no longer performed. After that, the jackpot game state is started, and at the timing when the jackpot game state ends, the display of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol is restarted, and thereafter, the display of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol corresponds to the pending image displayed in the first pending display area. A new fluctuating display of decorative patterns begins.

In addition, although an example was shown in which the relevant pending image is displayed in the relevant retained image display area until the timing when a new decorative pattern fluctuation starts, the display of the relevant retained image ends at the same time as the fluctuation display of the decorative design stops. It's okay. Alternatively, the display of the pending image may be ended at a predetermined timing after the variable display of the decorative pattern stops and until the variable display of a new decorative pattern starts.

In this way, in the example of the variable display of decorative patterns explained with reference to FIG. After starting the variable display from the state, after the variable display is carried out for a predetermined period of time, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are temporarily stopped in this order, and then the middle decorative symbol enters the stopped display state. In addition, in accordance with the stop display of the middle decorative pattern, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are also in a stopped display state at the same time. Furthermore, by stopping the decorative symbols with the same numbers as the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol, it is shown to the player that the special lottery result is a jackpot. Furthermore, by stopping at least one of the left decorative symbols to right decorative symbols having a different number attached, it is shown to the player that the special lottery result is a loss.
Note that the period during which all of the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed is, for example, one second (see FIG. 124 etc. described later). This period may be referred to as a "determined suspension period" (or "determined display period").

Note that such a single fluctuating display (from the start of the fluctuating display to the end) may be referred to as a "game", and the number of fluctuating displays may be referred to as the "number of games". For example, it is used in a manner such as ``the number of time saving times is 100 games'' or ``the specific effect will not be executed again within 4 games after the end of the game in which the specific effect was executed''.

It should be noted that although it has been shown that the held image is displayed in the held display area and that the held images are displayed from the first holding display area to the fourth held display area, in order to clearly distinguish between these, the held image is displayed in the held display area. The currently held image and the held image may be referred to as standby held images. Further, the pending image displayed in the first pending display area is the first pending pending image, the pending image displayed in the second pending display area is the second pending pending image, and the pending image displayed in the third pending display area is the second pending pending image. The third standby hold image and the hold image displayed in the fourth hold display area may be referred to as a fourth standby hold image.
Further, the pending image (or the lottery information corresponding to this pending image) displayed in the first pending display area may be referred to as "Hold 1". Similarly, the held images (or the lottery information corresponding to the held images) displayed in the second held display area to the fourth held display area may be referred to as "Hold 2" to "Hold 4".

An embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 123 will be described below with reference to production examples shown in FIGS. 124 and 125. FIG. 124 is a time chart in this performance example, and FIG. 125 is a diagram showing the display state of the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 at a predetermined timing in this performance example. In addition, in FIG. 125, the variable display mode of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol, the display mode of the pending image in the corresponding pending display area, and the display mode of the pending image in the first pending display area to the fourth pending display area are as follows. Unless otherwise specified, the display mode is the same as that described with reference to FIG. 123. Note that these points are the same in other embodiments and production examples described later unless otherwise specified.

FIG. 124 is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. Immediately before the timing t0, the display state in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 is such that the decorative symbols have stopped fluctuating. FIG. 125(A) is a diagram showing this state, and shows a state in which decorative patterns numbered "6", "4", and "5" from the left are stopped and displayed. From this state, at timing t0, the variable display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is newly started. FIG. 125(B) is a diagram showing the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t1) after the start of the variable display, and shows a state in which the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner. There is.

In addition, in the time chart shown in FIG. 124(A), in order to explain the timing of the effect, t0, t1 to t34, t35, etc. are indicated according to the passage of time. The time between each timing is 1 second. Note that these points are the same in other embodiments and production examples described later unless otherwise specified.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 124, at timing t2, a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 and a new hold occurs. Further, with this starting winning as a trigger, a pre-read effect display is started at timing t2. In addition, in response to the look-ahead effect display, a specific pending image shaped like a pine branch with leaves is displayed instead of a normal pending image. The color of the specific pending image is green. FIG. 125(C) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t3) after the prefetch effect display is started at timing t2. Furthermore, a state is shown in which a specific pending image having a shape resembling a pine branch with leaves is displayed in the third pending display area, instead of a normal circular pending image.

In the look-ahead effect display, a look-ahead effect image is displayed that surrounds the display area in a frame shape in a manner that hides a part of the decorative pattern that is variably displayed as it scrolls downward. The look-ahead effect image is an image in which a plurality (specifically, six) of shapes resembling pine branches with leaves are arranged so as to pop out toward the inside of a horizontally long rectangular frame. The color of the prefetch effect image is slightly lighter green than the color of the specific pending image.

The display of the look-ahead effect image and the display of the specific pending image are performed based on the special lottery result obtained when a game ball enters the first starting port 2002, and only the normal pending image, which is circular and white in color, is displayed. The performance execution ratio is set so that the probability of hitting the jackpot is higher when the look-ahead effect image and the specific pending image are displayed than when they are displayed. For example, when a normal pending image is displayed, the probability of hitting the jackpot is 0.3%, and when a look-ahead effect image and a specific pending image are displayed, the probability of hitting the jackpot is 10.0%. It is configured so that

With this configuration, the player can display the prefetch effect image and the specific pending image, and when the decorative symbol corresponding to the specific pending image is to be changed, the normal pending image is displayed. The expectation is that the decorative pattern will be stopped and displayed in a static manner indicating that a jackpot will occur as a result of the change in the decorative pattern, compared to the case where the decorative pattern corresponding to the suspended image is changed. You will have a feeling.

From timing t2 to timing t4, while the look-ahead effect image is being displayed, a variable display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is performed, but during the variable display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is displayed. The look-ahead effect image is displayed closer than the right decorative pattern. For this reason, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner with a portion of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern being hidden by the pre-read effect image. Note that the pending image displayed in the pending display area, the normal pending image displayed in the first pending display area, the normal pending image displayed in the second pending display area, and the normal pending image displayed in the third pending display area. The specific pending image is displayed closer to the viewer than each decorative pattern or look-ahead effect image.

At timing t4, all of the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed. FIG. 125(D) shows a display state in which all of the left to right decorative patterns are stopped and displayed at timing t4. At the timing when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the display order of the pre-reading effect image and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is reversed, and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are closer to the front than the pre-reading effect image. It will be displayed on the side. Note that the pending image displayed in the pending display area, the normal pending image displayed in the first pending display area, the normal pending image displayed in the second pending display area, and the normal pending image displayed in the third pending display area. The specific pending image is displayed in front of the prefetch effect image.

Note that, at the timing when the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, the decorative patterns located above and below each decorative pattern are no longer displayed. For example, in FIG. 125(D), only the decorative pattern with the number "1" is displayed as the left decorative pattern, but until just before timing t4, the decorative pattern with the number "1" is displayed as the left decorative pattern. The lower part of the decorative pattern with the number ``2'' is above the decorative pattern, and the upper part of the decorative pattern with the number ``9'' is below the decorative pattern with the number ``1''. Displayed. With such a configuration, only the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed can be visually recognized by the player in a conspicuous state.

The stop display of the decorative pattern continues from timing t4 to timing t5. In addition, during this period, the display mode in which the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed closer to the front than the pre-read effect image continues.

At timing t5, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when a new variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the front-and-back relationship between the pre-reading effect image and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is switched again, and the pre-reading effect image is displayed closer to you than the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern. The display mode will be

In addition, at the timing when the decorative patterns stopped being displayed, the decorative patterns located above and below each decorative pattern were no longer displayed, but at the timing when the new fluctuating display of the decorative patterns started, each decorative pattern The display of the decorative patterns located above and below the pattern is also restarted. For example, in FIG. 125(D), only the decorative pattern with the number "1" is stopped and displayed as the left decorative pattern, but at timing t5, the upper side of the decorative pattern with the number "1" The lower part of the decorative pattern with the number "2" is displayed, and the upper part of the decorative pattern with the number "9" is displayed below the decorative pattern with the number "1". The downward movement display of each decorative pattern is instantly started.

Thereafter, similarly, in accordance with the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern and the stop of the variable display, the context of the pre-read effect image and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern will be swapped. For example, in the period from timing t4 to timing t5, the display mode in which the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed closer to the front side than the look-ahead effect image continues, but in the period from timing t9 to timing t10 and timing t14 Similarly, during the period from to timing t15, the display mode in which the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern are displayed closer to the front side than the prefetch effect image continues.

At timing t15, the variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the starting winning that triggered the display of the pre-read effect image and the specific pending image is started. In FIG. 125(E), at a predetermined timing after timing t15 (for example, timing t16), a look-ahead effect image is displayed in front of the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern, and a specific pending image is displayed in the pending display area. Indicates the displayed state.

At timing t25, the decorative symbols with the number "2" attached thereto as the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and a ready-to-win state occurs. At this time, the medium decorative pattern is maintained in a fluctuating display state in which it is scrolled downward and displayed. Further, at timing t25, the display of the pre-reading effect image that has been displayed up to that point is finished, and the state is such that the pre-reading effect image is not displayed. FIG. 125(F) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t26) after the ready-to-reach state occurs and the display of the look-ahead effect image ends at timing t25.

At timing t33, the medium decorative symbols that have been variably displayed in a display mode according to the special lottery result come to a non-variable state. Specifically, if the special lottery result is a loss, a decorative pattern with a number other than "2" is stopped and displayed as a medium decorative pattern. Further, if the special lottery result is a jackpot, a decorative pattern with the number "2" attached thereto is stopped and displayed as a medium decorative pattern.

FIG. 125(G) shows a state in which, at timing t33, a decorative pattern with the number "3" added thereto as a medium decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, at timing t34, the display of the pending image displayed in the pending display area ends. On the other hand, the stopped display state of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern continues until a new game ball enters the first starting hole 2002.

On the other hand, FIG. 125(H) shows a state in which, at timing t33, a decorative pattern with the number "2" attached thereto is stopped and displayed as a medium decorative pattern. Thereafter, at timing t34, the display of the pending image displayed in the pending display area and the display of the left to right decorative symbols are finished, and the state shifts to a jackpot game state.

This embodiment is configured such that the pre-reading effect image is displayed closer to the user than the decorative pattern while the decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable manner, and the decorative pattern is displayed closer to the user than the pre-reading effect image during the static display of the decorative pattern. ing.

By adopting such a configuration, the player can visually clearly understand the start and stop of each variable display, so the player can display the decorative pattern corresponding to the specific pending image without checking the movement of the specific pending image. This makes it possible to recognize when the display is one step closer to the fluctuation display.

In addition, the area occupied by the display area of the look-ahead effect image is larger than the area occupied by the display area of the specific pending image, and the area occupied by the look-ahead effect image is closer to the stop position of the decorative pattern than the specific hold image. Therefore, even if the player is focusing on visually recognizing the variation mode of the decorative pattern, it is possible to recognize that the player is one step closer to displaying the variation of the decorative pattern corresponding to the specific pending image. .

Furthermore, by displaying the decorative pattern and the pre-read effect image in an overlapping position, it is possible to increase the size of both the decorative pattern and the pre-read effect image, and it is possible to improve the utilization efficiency of the display area. Furthermore, the display can be optimized by configuring the image displayed on the front side to be switched between a decorative pattern and a look-ahead effect image depending on conditions.

Specifically, while the decorative symbols are changing, the look-ahead effect image is displayed on the front side, giving the player a big warning that the timing of the change display corresponding to the look-ahead effect image is approaching. It can create a sense of expectation. On the other hand, while the decorative symbols are stopped changing, the manner in which the decorative symbols are stopped is not obstructed by the look-ahead effect image, making it possible to clearly show the entirety of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed to the player. .

Note that it may be configured such that an effect mode in which only one of the prefetch effect image and the specific pending image is displayed can be executed. In this case, expectations will be higher when both the prefetch effect image and the specific pending image are displayed, compared to when only one of the prefetch effect image and the specific pending image is displayed. It is recommended to configure

Although an example has been shown in which a specific pending image shaped like a pine branch with leaves is displayed as the specific pending image, the specific pending image may be displayed in other manners.
For example, the normal pending image may be a white circular shape, and the specific pending image may be a red circular shape. Further, a plurality of specific pending images may be provided. For example, blue, green, red, and gold (yellow) pending images may be displayed as specific pending images, and the expectation level may increase in the order of blue, green, red, and gold (yellow).

By the way, in this embodiment, a plurality of obstacle nails 1201 are planted from the front in obstacle nail through holes 1110a provided in the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. Specifically, the obstacle nail 1201 is held in the panel board 1110 by engaging the obstacle nail helical portion 1201c provided at the tip of the obstacle nail 1201 so as to bite into the panel board 1110. Furthermore, the panel board 1110 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and it is possible to visually recognize the movable accessory and the light-emitting decorative part arranged behind the panel board 1110 through the panel board 1110. However, by engaging the obstacle nail spiral shaped portion 1201c with the panel board 1110, the panel board 1110 may be scratched or cracked, resulting in a cloudy area (hereinafter collectively referred to as the whitened area HKB). ), and these parts become visible to the player, resulting in a problem in that the aesthetic appearance deteriorates. The manufacturing method and structure of the game panel 1100 will be explained below with reference to FIGS. 126 and 127.

FIG. 126(a) is a side view showing the obstacle nail 1201 installed in the panel board 1110. FIG. 126(b) is a sectional view of the panel board 1110 and the obstruction nail through hole 1110a provided in the panel board 1110, viewed from the right. FIG. 126(c) is a cross-sectional view of the state in which the obstacle nail 1201 is installed in the obstacle nail through hole 1110a provided in the panel board 1110, viewed from the right. FIG. 126(d) is a cross-sectional view of a region A where a whitened portion HKB may occur around the obstacle nail 1201 implanted in the panel board 1110, viewed from the right. FIG. 126(e) is a sectional view, viewed from the right, of an example of a state in which a whitened portion HKB has actually occurred around the faulty nail 1201 planted in the panel board 1110. 127(a) shows the dimensions of each part constituting the obstacle nail 1201, and FIG. 127(b) shows the dimensions of the glass plate 192, the obstacle nail 1201, and the panel board 1110 when the obstacle nail 1201 is installed in the panel board 1110. It is a sectional view showing dimensions of each shown member. Note that some symbols are omitted in the figure.

The structure and shape of the obstacle nail 1201 will be explained with reference to FIG. 126(a). The obstacle nail 1201 is entirely made of brass and has a certain degree of elasticity. In addition, the entire surface is visually recognized as having a yellowish metallic luster in a white light irradiation environment. When viewed from the side, the faulty nail 1201 includes, from the left side, a faulty nail head 1201a, a faulty nail first body portion 1201b, a faulty nail spiral-shaped portion 1201c, a faulty nail second body portion 1201d, and a faulty nail tip portion 1201e. It has become. The length L1 of the obstacle nail 1201 is 27 mm. The shape of the obstacle nail head 1201a is a dome-like round head shape, and is a perfect circle shape when viewed from the front. The diameter L2 of the faulty nail head 1201a when viewed from the front is 4 mm, and the thickness L3 when viewed from the side is 1 mm. The shape of the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b is a cylindrical shape. The length L4 of the first body portion 1201b of the obstacle nail is 20 mm. The diameter L5 of the first body portion 1201b of the obstacle nail is 2 mm. The shape of the obstacle nail spiral portion is approximately cylindrical. The length L7 of the obstacle nail spiral-shaped portion 1201c is 4 mm. The diameter of the helical nail portion 1201c is slightly larger than the diameter L5 of the first body portion 1201b of the nail. The shape of the obstacle nail second body portion 1201d is cylindrical. The length L8 of the second body portion 1201d of the obstacle nail is 1 mm. Further, the diameter L6 of the second body portion 1201d of the obstacle nail is 2 mm, which is the same as the diameter L5 of the first body portion 1201b of the obstacle nail. The shape of the obstacle nail tip 1201e is a conical shape. The length L9 of the distal nail end portion 1201e is 1 mm.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 126(b) and 127(b), the structure of the panel board 1110 before the obstacle nail 1201 is installed will be described. The panel board 1110 is made of a colorless and transparent acrylic board material. The front and rear surfaces of the panel board 1110 are formed to be smooth, and members located at the rear can be clearly viewed through the panel board 1110. Note that the panel board 1110 may be made of a board material made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin such as polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin. The thickness L10 of the panel board 1110 is 10 mm. The panel board 1110 is provided with an obstacle nail through hole 1110a for installing the obstacle nail 1201. The obstruction nail through hole 1110a has a cylindrical shape, and its diameter L11 is 2 mm. The obstruction nail through hole 1110a is formed by cutting the panel board 1110. Therefore, the inner wall of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a becomes slightly cloudy and is visible to the player.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 126(c) and 127(b), a method for planting the obstacle nail 1201 into the obstacle nail through hole 1110a provided in the panel board 1110 will be described. The obstructing nail tip 1201e of the obstructing nail 1201 is pushed into the obstructing nail through-hole 1110a, and the entire obstructing nail spiral-shaped portion 1201c, obstructing nail second body portion 1201d, and obstructing nail tip 1201e are inside the obstructing nail through-hole 1110a. The obstacle to the panel board 1110 is removed by applying force toward the rear (to the right in the figure) until a part of the first body portion 1201b of the obstacle nail is located in the obstacle nail through hole 1110a. The installation of the nail 1201 is completed. Note that the obstacle nail 1201 is planted using a nail gun. The length L4 of the first body portion 1201b of the obstacle nail is 20 mm, but the length L12 of the portion located within the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is 3 mm, and the length L12 of the portion located within the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is not located within the obstacle nail penetration hole 1110a and is The length L13 of the portion located closer to this side than the front surface is 17 mm. FIG. 126(c) shows a state in which the installation of the obstacle nails 1201 on the panel board 1110 has been completed.

Note that the distance L14 between the tip of the obstructing nail tip 1201e and the rear surface of the panel board 1110 is 1 mm. With such a configuration, even if a manufacturer of a game machine or an employee of a game parlor inadvertently touches the rear surface of the panel board 1110, there is no chance of injury caused by the obstructing nail 1201. It is possible to prevent this.

Note that the shape of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is such that it passes through the panel board 1110 because the inner wall of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is shaved when the obstacle nail 1201 is planted in the panel board 1110. This is to remove the acrylic resin powder from the rear of the panel board 1110 to the outside.

As described above, the diameter L5 of the first body portion 1201b of the nail and the diameter L6 of the second body portion 1201d of the nail are 2 mm. Similarly, the diameter L11 of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is also 2 mm. On the other hand, the diameter of the obstacle nail spiral portion 1201c is slightly larger than 2 mm. Therefore, when pushing the obstacle nail 1201 into the obstacle nail through hole 1110a, the inner wall of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is slightly deformed by the obstacle nail spiral portion 1201c. When the pushing of the obstacle nail 1201 is completed, the obstacle nail spiral portion 1201c is engaged with the inner wall of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a, and the obstacle nail 1201 is firmly held against the panel board 1110. .

Note that the diameter L11 of the faulty nail through hole 1110a is slightly larger than the diameter L5 of the faulty nail first body portion 1201b and the diameter L6 of the faulty nail second body portion 1201d, and larger than the diameter of the faulty nail spiral-shaped portion 1201c. It may also be configured to be slightly smaller. In this case, in a state in which the helical nail portion 1201c is engaged with the inner wall of the nail through hole 1110a, the first body portion 1201b of the nail, the second body portion 1201d of the nail, and the inner wall of the nail through hole 1110a are connected to each other. There will be a slight gap between them. With such a configuration, when the game ball collides with the obstacle nail 1201 and the obstacle nail 1201 is elastically deformed, the obstacle nail 1201 is allowed to be elastically deformed by the amount of this gap. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the obstacle nail 1201 breaks when the game ball repeatedly collides with the obstacle nail 1201.

By the way, in the process of planting the obstacle nail 1201, the obstacle nail helical portion 1201c moves backward within the obstacle nail through hole 1110a, causing damage to the inside of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a provided in the panel board 1110. There is a problem that it is perceived as white.

Further, the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is formed by cutting the panel board 1110, and has a shape that passes through the panel board 1110. Since the through hole is formed by cutting, the inner surface of the through hole has a rough surface and is visually recognized as white. In particular, since the distal nail tip 1201e is planted while remaining within the panel board 1110, the rearmost portion of the dislocated nail through hole 1110a itself is visually recognized as whitened.

In addition, when the installation of the obstacle nail 1201 is completed, the engagement state with the obstacle nail helical portion 1201c is maintained by elastically deforming the obstacle nail through hole 1110a, but if the limit of elastic deformation is exceeded. In some cases, cracks may occur outward from the inner wall of the nail through hole 1110a that the nail spiral portion 1201c engages with.

In addition, during a game in a game machine installed in a game parlor, the game ball collides with the obstacle nail 1201 many times, and the kinetic energy of the game ball is transferred to the obstacle nail through hole 1110a of the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b. The cracks may be transmitted to the inner wall of the nail through hole 1110a through the portion located inside, and cracks may occur on the front side of the nail through hole 1110a. In addition, cracks may occur around the area (inside the panel board 1110) where the helical nail portion 1201c of the nail through-hole 1110a engages.

In addition, in gaming machines installed in gaming parlors, fraudulent actions such as forcibly bending the obstacle nails 1201 are carried out in order to make the winning rate of the predetermined winning openings more advantageous for players. After cleaning the front surface of the panel board 1110 with the door frame 3 in the open state, a store clerk moves the door frame 3 in the closing direction to put the door frame 3 in the closed state. 3 and the obstacle nail 1201 may occur. Even in such a case, a large force is applied to the faulty nail 1201, and the force is applied to the faulty nail through-hole 1110a through the portion of the faulty nail first body portion 1201b located inside the faulty nail through-hole 1110a. The cracks may be transmitted to the inner wall, and cracks may occur on the front side of the faulty nail through hole 1110a. In addition, cracks may occur around the area (inside the panel board 1110) where the helical nail portion 1201c of the nail through-hole 1110a engages.

In FIG. 126(d), A indicates a portion where a whitening portion HKB may occur as described above due to collision of game balls YGK, etc. Moreover, FIG. 126(e) and FIG. 127(b) show an example of a state in which the whitened portion HKB actually occurs. 126(e) and 127(b) show a state in which the force applied to the first body portion 1201b of the faulty nail is transmitted to the inner wall of the faulty nail through hole 1110a, and a whitened portion HKB is generated on the front surface of the panel board 1110. ing. It also shows a state in which a whitened portion HKB has occurred inside the panel board 1110 starting from a portion of the fault nail through hole 1110a where the fault nail spiral-shaped portion 1201c engages. As shown in FIG. 127(b), the diameter L15 of the game ball YGK is 11 mm, the thickness L16 of the glass plate 192 is 3 mm, and the distance L17 between the glass plate 192 and the obstacle nail 1201 is 2 mm.

Furthermore, the longer the operating period at the game parlor, the higher the possibility that the whitened portion HKB will occur on the panel board 1110. In addition, once the whitened area HKB occurs, the structure of the synthetic resin around the whitened area HKB becomes weak, and the whitened area HKB gradually expands from that area, and when viewed from the front, the obstructed nail 1201 A situation may also occur in which the whitened area HKB extends outward from the center.

Note that the shape of one whitened part HKB generated in this way is generally planar, and its area is approximately 1-2 square mm, but multiple whitened parts HKB are formed around one faulty nail 1201. may occur radially when viewed from the front. Furthermore, such whitened portions HKB may occur in each of the plurality of faulty nails 1201.

Furthermore, due to the occurrence of such a whitened portion HKB, there is a possibility that the strength of engagement with the helical nail portion 1201c in the nail through-hole 1110a may be weakened. In this case, when the game ball collides with the obstacle nail 1201, the bounce mode is weaker than what was expected at the time of shipment of the pachinko machine 1 (even if the game ball hits the nail, it does not rebound much and absorbs the momentum). There is a possibility that a situation may occur in which the winning rate in the winning opening changes.

In addition, when playing games on gaming machines installed at gaming parlors, a situation may occur where the obstructive nail 1201 breaks due to long periods of operation at the gaming parlor. In this case, the entire gaming board 5' may be broken. It will be replaced.

In this way, when the obstacle nails 1201 are planted on the panel board 1110 made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin, the predetermined movable accessories and the predetermined light-emitting decorative parts located behind the panel board 1110 become visible. While this improves the aesthetic appearance, the area around the obstruction nail through hole 1110a where the obstruction nail 1201 is installed looks white, which causes a problem in that the aesthetic appearance is degraded. Below, means for solving these problems will be shown.

FIG. 128 shows an embodiment in which a panel board back rough surface portion 1110b is provided on the rear surface of the panel board 1110. FIG. 128(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. Note that the illustration of the faulty nail head 1201a is omitted. Therefore, the circles showing the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 shown in the figure are actually the obstacle nail number of the obstacle nail 1201 that constitutes the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232. 1 shows the thickness of the body portion 1201b. Moreover, this can also be said to indicate the thickness of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a. These points are the same in each drawing explaining an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 128.

FIG. 128(b) is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 128(a). FIG. 128(b) schematically shows a cross section taken through the part where the life nail 1230 is implanted, which is located on the left side when viewed from the front. Note that this point also applies to each drawing illustrating an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 128.

FIG. 128(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure near the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment using an oblique projection projection method. The angle of inclination in this cabinet diagram is 45 degrees. In addition, in the figure, the detailed structure of the faulty nail 1201, such as the faulty nail head 1201a, the faulty nail spiral-shaped part 1201c, and the faulty nail tip 1201e, is omitted from illustration, and the faulty nail 1201 as a whole is shown as one cylinder. ing. In addition, in this cylinder, the part shown by the solid line has shown the fault nail head 1201a of the fault nail 1201, and the part located in the front side rather than the panel board 1110 of the fault nail 1st body part 1201b. In addition, in this column, the parts indicated by dotted lines are the part of the first body part 1201b of the obstacle nail located inside the panel board 1110, the spiral shaped part 1201c of the obstacle nail, the second body part 1201d of the obstacle nail, and the part of the obstacle nail first body part 1201b located inside the panel board 1110. The tip portion 1201e and the rear end portion of the obstruction nail through hole 1110a are shown. Note that these points are the same in each of the drawings illustrating a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 128.

Note that in FIG. 128(a), illustration of the whitened portion HKB is omitted. Also, in FIG. 128(c), although the whitened portion HKB is not shown, the whitened portion HKB occurs around the portion of the faulty nail 1201 indicated by the dotted line. Further, in FIGS. 128(a) to 128(c), illustration of the first starting port 2002 is omitted. Note that these points are the same in each of the drawings illustrating a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 128.

The rough panel back surface portion 1110b may be formed by cutting the rear surface of the panel board 1110 to a thickness of about 1 mm. The rough surface portion 1110b on the back side of the panel may be processed into a lens cut shape or a satin finish shape. The panel board back rough surface portion 1110b formed in this way is exposed to light emitted from the pachinko machine 1, light from lighting equipment installed inside the gaming parlor, or light emitted from the lighting equipment installed inside the gaming parlor. When light from other gaming machines is incident, these lights are diffusely reflected on the rough surface portion 1110b of the back of the panel board, resulting in a whitish appearance.

As shown in FIGS. 128(a) and 128(c), the portion of the panel board 1110 where the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is provided is visible from the front or diagonally above the left side of the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b. In this case, the player will see the panel board in a state where it overlaps with the back rough surface portion 1110b.

In this way, behind the obstacle nails 1201 that are planted as the life nails 1230, the jump nails 1231, and the left guide nails 1232 on the transparent board (panel board 1110), there is a bright color visible part (the rough surface on the back of the panel board). 1110b), it becomes possible to make the whitened portion HKB near the implantation site of the faulty nail 1201 less noticeable due to the bright color visible portion that is visually recognized as white.

Note that white color is visible when a given object reflects diffusely (approximately 100 to 80%) uniformly (approximately 100 to 80%) of the visible light of all wavelengths of natural light irradiated to the given object, regardless of the wavelength range. It refers to the color that is said to be In addition, bright color means that a predetermined object partially absorbs light in a specific wavelength range of natural light irradiated onto a predetermined object, and diffusely reflects the remaining light in the wavelength range, for example. , refers to colors that are considered visible, such as cream, light gray, and bright yellow. On the other hand, black color means that the surface of a given object uniformly absorbs most of the visible light of all wavelengths of natural light irradiated onto the given object, and a portion of the irradiated natural light (20 to several %) refers to the color that becomes visible when it is diffusely reflected. In addition, dark color means that most of the wavelength range of natural light irradiated onto a given object is uniformly absorbed, and only a part of the irradiated light (approximately 20 to several percent) is diffusely reflected. However, in a specific wavelength range, the absorption rate of light differs, so it refers to a color that is close to black, for example, a color that can be visually recognized as dark blue. These definitions may be adopted as the definitions of each color in this specification. In addition, in the embodiment described in this specification, the white part may be made light-colored, or the light-colored part may be made white. For example, instead of emitting white light from a predetermined light emitting member, it may be configured to emit bright colored light. Further, the black part may be made dark, or the dark part may be made black.

FIG. 128(d) is a diagram showing a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 128(a). In the example shown in FIG. 128(d), a panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is provided below the panel board 1110, white light emitted from the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is introduced to the panel board 1110, and the panel board 1110 is The structure is such that the introduced white light is diffusely reflected on the plate back rough surface portion 1110b. In this case, the panel back rough surface portion 1110b becomes visible to the player with white light. Note that the lower panel light emitting board 2400 may be configured to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. Further, a light emitting section similar to the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is provided on the side or above the panel board 1110 instead of or in addition to the panel board lower light emitting board 2400, instead of below the panel board 1110, The light emitting section provided in this manner may be configured to emit light in the same manner as the panel board lower light emitting board 2400.

With this configuration, the amount of light emitted from the lighting equipment installed inside the game parlor was weak, and the light from the gaming machines installed inside the game parlor was weak (for example, when games were being played). A gaming machine that is not installed may automatically go into power saving mode, reducing the amount of light emitted by the gaming machine, or even if the gaming machine is in use, the player may adjust the amount of light, causing the amount of light emitted by the gaming machine to be reduced. ), the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB will be visible as one, and the whitened portion HKB near the site where the faulty nail 1201 is installed will be visible. It is possible to make it less noticeable. In this state, the whitened portion HKB itself also diffusely reflects the introduced white light and is visually recognized as white, but the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel is larger than the whitened portion HKB. Since much light is diffusely reflected behind the whitened portion HKB, it is possible to prevent the whitened portion HKB from becoming conspicuous.

Note that, although a plurality of embodiments that are modified from the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 128 will be shown below, the technical content shown in one embodiment may be applied to the technical content shown in other embodiments.

Although an example has been shown in which white light is introduced from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 to the sides of the panel board 1110, a configuration may be adopted in which yellow light is introduced instead of white light. . In this case, the rough panel back surface portion 1110b becomes visible to the player as yellow due to the introduced light. Furthermore, the whitened portion HKB is also visually recognized as yellow due to the introduced light. By the way, as described above, the obstacle nail 1201 is made of brass and has a yellowish metallic luster. Therefore, the color of the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB is visually recognized as a similar color to the color of the obstruction nail 1201, and the presence of the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable. This is because the obstacle nail 1201 has been used for several decades in the pachinko machine 1, so the part of the obstacle nail 1201 located on the front side of the panel board 1110 (the obstacle nail head 1201a and the obstacle nail number This is because the player is less likely to feel uncomfortable about the color or shape of the portion (of the body portion 1201b that is not buried in the panel board 1110).

Hereinafter, an embodiment will be described in which the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 128 is modified and a panel board rear decorative member 2410 that can diffusely reflect light is provided close to the back surface of the panel board 1110. , will be explained with reference to FIG.

FIG. 129(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 129(b) is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 129(a). FIG. 129(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure near the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment using an oblique projection projection method. FIG. 129(d) is a cross-sectional view showing a mode in which a panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is provided below the panel board 1110.

In this embodiment, a panel plate rear decorative member 2410 made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin is arranged behind the panel plate 1110. The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 has a thickness of 2 mm, and has a panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a formed by lens cutting or satin finishing on the front side. The rough surface portion 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member diffusely reflects environmental light and is visually recognized as whitish in color. Note that the reason why the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a is provided on the front surface of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is that the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a is arranged closer to the whitening portion HKB than when it is provided on the rear surface. This is because the whitened portion HKB can be visually recognized more integrally with the whitened portion HKB.

The panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a is configured to be located behind the obstacle nails 1201 that are planted as the life nails 1230, jump nails 1231, and left guide nails 1232 that are planted on the panel board 1110. There is.

In this way, behind the obstacle nails 1201 that are implanted as the life nails 1230, the jump nails 1231, and the left guide nails 1232 on the transparent board part (panel board 1110), there is a diffuse reflection part (the rough surface of the rear decorative member of the panel board). 2410a, etc.) (panel board rear decorative member 2410, etc.), the whitened portion HKB near the site where the faulty nail 1201 is installed can be made less noticeable due to the diffused reflection portion that is visible in white. It becomes possible. Moreover, by providing the diffused reflection part on the front surface of the decorative member, the distance between the diffused reflection part and the whitened part HKB can be made closer, and it becomes possible to make the diffused reflection part and the whitened part HKB more visible as one. In this embodiment or other embodiments, metal plating is applied to the front surface of the diffused reflection portion (rough surface portion 2410a, etc. of the panel board rear decorative member) included in the decorative member (panel board rear decorative member 2410, etc.) to reduce unevenness. It may be configured to form a certain metallic luster.

As shown in FIG. 129(d), light of a predetermined color (for example, white or yellow) is irradiated onto the panel rear decorative member 2410 by the panel lower light emitting board 2400, and the light is irradiated on the rough surface portion 2410a of the panel rear decorative member. It may be configured to reflect light. Further, the light emitting mode and the like shown in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 128(d) may be adopted as the light emitting mode and the like of the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 in this embodiment. With this configuration, when the light emitted by the pachinko machine 1, the light from the lighting equipment installed inside the game parlor, or the light from other game machines installed inside the game parlor is weak, Even in this case, the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a can be visually recognized as whitish, and as a result, the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable.

Below, an embodiment will be described in which the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 129 is modified and a panel board rear substrate 2420 that can reflect light is provided close to the back surface of the panel board 1110. This will be explained with reference to FIG. 130.

FIG. 130(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 130(b) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure of the panel board rear board 2420 using an oblique projection method. FIG. 130(c) is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 130(a). FIG. 130(d) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure near the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment using an oblique projection projection method.

In this embodiment, the panel board rear board 2420 made of a white printed circuit board is configured to be directly visible through the panel board 1110. Even with such a configuration, the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable by the panel board rear substrate 2420 that is visually recognized in white. Note that it is preferable to adopt a light-colored light emitting diode mounted on the front surface of the panel board rear substrate 2420.

Note that in this embodiment, a light emitting diode that emits light laterally may be employed as the panel board rear substrate light emitting section 2425. In this case, it becomes possible to irradiate the entire front surface of the panel board rear board 2420 with light from the panel board rear board light emitting section 2425.

An embodiment that combines the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 129 and the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 130 will be described with reference to FIG. 131.

FIG. 131(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 131(b) is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 131(a). FIG. 131(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure near the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment using an oblique projection projection method.

In this embodiment, behind the obstacle nail 1201, a panel board rear decoration member 2410 made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin and having a lens cut treatment on the front surface is arranged, and further behind the panel board rear decoration member 2410 is arranged a light emitting section of the panel board rear board. A white panel board rear substrate 2420 having 2425 is arranged. With such a configuration, the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable, especially when the panel board rear substrate light emitting portion 2425 is turned off.

In this embodiment, the light emitted from the panel board rear board light emitting section 2425 is formed by a panel board rear decorative member rough surface part 2410a that can diffusely reflect the light, and a panel board rear board 2420 made of a white printed circuit board. As a result, light is uniformly irradiated onto the entire rough surface portion 2410a of the rear decorative member of the panel board, increasing the utilization efficiency of the light irradiated from the rear board light emitting portion 2425 of the panel board. is also possible.

Referring to FIGS. 129 to 131, an embodiment is shown in which one or both of the panel board rear decoration member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 are arranged at the rear of the panel board 1110 to make the whitened portion HKB less noticeable. As shown, one or both of the panel plate rear decoration member 2410 and the panel plate rear board 2420 may be configured to be able to be moved or rotated as an effect. Further, it is preferable that this movement effect is executed under control by the peripheral control board 1510. Furthermore, this moving performance may be configured to suggest the degree of expectation of a jackpot. Note that the drive mechanism for moving and rotating the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear board 2420 may be configured to be driven and controlled by the peripheral control board 1510.

By the way, when the panel board rear decoration member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 are configured to be movable in this way, the panel board rear decoration member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 located in the standby position can move There is a possibility that the whitened portion HKB, which was made less noticeable, becomes more noticeable when the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 move to the moved position. Therefore, in order to prevent the whitened portion HKB from becoming conspicuous, the following embodiment may be adopted.

FIG. 132 shows an embodiment in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is modified to be movable in the vertical direction in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 129. FIG. 132(a) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 129(a), showing a state in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is in the standby position. FIG. 132(b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 129(a), showing a state in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is in the moving position. When the panel board rear decoration member 2410 moves from the standby position to the first movement position, it moves a predetermined distance (10 mm) upward in a plane parallel to the panel board 1110, but even in this state, the obstacle nail 1201 It is located at a position overlapping with the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 when viewed from the front. FIG. 132(c) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 129(a), showing a state in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is in the moving position. When the panel plate rear decoration member 2410 moves from the standby position to the second movement position, it moves a predetermined distance (20 mm) upward in a plane parallel to the panel plate 1110, but in this state, the obstacle nail 1201 The panel plate rear decorative members 2410 are located at positions where they do not overlap when viewed from the front.

In this way, when the decorative member having the diffused reflection part (for example, the panel board rear decorative member 2410) moves from the standby position to the first movement position in the movement effect, the obstacle nail 1201 moves toward the rear of the panel board as seen from the front. By locating it so as to overlap with the decorative member 2410, it is possible to maintain a state in which the whitened portion HKB is less noticeable.

Note that when the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 moves to the first movement position, it is desirable that all the obstacle nails 1201 can maintain a state in which they overlap with the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 in a front view. Even if only the nails 1201 are positioned so as to overlap the panel board rear decorative member 2410 in front view, the whitened portion HKB can be maintained in a less conspicuous state.

When the panel board rear decorative member 2410 moves to the second moving position that is farther away than the first moving position, the impact on the player becomes larger due to the large amount of movement; The obstacle nail 1201 shown in 132(c) and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 no longer overlap when viewed from the front. Therefore, the frequency of execution of the effect of moving the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 from the standby position to the first moving position and then returning to the standby position without moving it to the second moving position, and the execution frequency of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 are determined. Regarding the frequency of execution of the performance in which 2410 is moved from the standby position to the second movement position and then returned to the standby position, it is preferable to configure the former performance to be performed with a high frequency. With such a configuration, it is possible to realize diversification of presentation modes in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is moved, and to reduce the frequency of occurrence of a situation in which the whitened portion HKB becomes conspicuous.

In addition, when moving the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, it is preferable to move the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate lower light emitting board 2400 together. Alternatively, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 may be moved together. Then, while the panel plate rear decoration member 2410 is in the first movement position or the second movement position, the panel plate lower light emitting board 2400 or the panel plate rear board 2420 may be brought into a light emitting state.

In addition, the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 or the panel board rear board 2420 is brought into different light emitting states depending on when the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is in the first moving position and when the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is in the second moving position. The decoration member 2410 may be configured to have a light emitting effect state in which it is visually recognized in different light emitting states. Further, in the game board side effect display device 1600, a special effect image may be displayed at the same time in response to this light emitting effect state. Furthermore, different effect images may be displayed when the panel plate rear decoration member 2410 is in the first movement position and when it is in the second movement position. Depending on the external shape of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 located at the first movement position or the second movement position and the special effect image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, one character, an integrated effect, etc. It may be configured to represent. For example, as a special effect image, it may be configured to display a rainy or snowy state on the panel rear decorative member 2410 representing a mountain range. Further, the plurality of performance modes may be configured to suggest different jackpot expectation levels.

With this configuration, the player's attention is directed to the panel board rear decoration member 2410 and the game board side effect display device 1600 located in the direction in which the panel board rear decoration member 2410 moves. Even if the decorative member 2410 moves to the second movement position and the obstacle nail 1201 does not overlap the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 in front view, it is possible to distract the player's consciousness from the whitening part HKB. becomes.

FIG. 133 shows an embodiment in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear board 2420 are modified to be movable in the vertical direction in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 131.

FIG. 133(a) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 131(a), showing a state in which the panel plate rear decoration member 2410 and the panel plate rear board 2420 are in the standby position.

FIG. 133(b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 131(a), showing a state in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is in the moving position. When the panel plate rear decoration member 2410 moves from the standby position to the movement position, it moves a predetermined distance (20 mm) upward in a plane parallel to the panel plate 1110, but in this state, the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel plate rear Although the decorative member 2410 is located at a position where they overlap when viewed from the front, the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board rear board 2420 are located at a position where they overlap when viewed from the front.

FIG. 133(c) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 131(a), showing a state in which the panel board rear substrate 2420 is in the moving position. When the panel board rear board 2420 moves from the standby position to the movement position, it moves a predetermined distance (20 mm) upward on a plane parallel to the panel board 1110, but in this state, the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board rear board Although the nails 2420 are located at positions where they do not overlap when viewed from the front, the obstacle nails 1201 and the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 are located at positions where they overlap when viewed from the front.

In this way, at a certain timing, only one of the panel board rear decoration member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 is moved from the standby position to the movement position, and the panel board rear decoration member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 are moved from the standby position to the movement position. 2420 may be configured so that they do not move to the movement position at the same time. For example, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 may be moved so as to alternately appear and retract in the vertical direction.

With this configuration, even when a movement effect is executed to move the panel board rear decorative member 2410 or the panel board rear board 2420 to the moving position, the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 or the panel board rear Since it is located so as to overlap with one of the substrates 2420 that has not moved in a front view, it is possible to maintain a state in which the whitened portion HKB is less noticeable. Although the embodiment has been shown in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 are moved from the standby position to the movement position, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is provided in place of the panel board rear board 2420, so that the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 are overlapped in the front and rear direction. The two panel plate rear decorative members 2410 may be moved in the same manner. Further, a panel plate rear substrate 2420 may be provided in place of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, and two panel plate rear substrates 2420 overlapping in the front-rear direction may be moved in the same manner. Alternatively, the positions of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 may be reversed in the front-rear direction, with the panel board rear board 2420 provided at the front and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 at the rear, and moved in the same manner. . Furthermore, a plurality of decorative units each consisting of the panel board rear decoration member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 may be arranged in a stacked manner and moved in the same manner.

FIG. 133(d) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 131(a), showing a state in which both the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 are in the moving position. When the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 move from the standby position to the movement position, they move a predetermined distance (20 mm) upward in a plane parallel to the panel board 1110, but in this state, no obstruction occurs. With respect to the nail 1201, both the panel board rear decoration member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 are located at positions where they do not overlap when viewed from the front. In this case, the whitened portion HKB around the tip of the faulty nail 1201 may become noticeable.

Therefore, when both the panel board rear decoration member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 are in the moving position, the panel board rear board 2420 is made to emit light in a predetermined luminescent color, thereby making the panel board rear decoration member 2410 It may be configured to be in a light emitting effect state. Further, in the game board side effect display device 1600, a special effect image may be displayed at the same time in response to this light emitting effect state. One character or the like may be represented by the outer shape of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 located at the moving position and a special effect image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. Note that the same aspect as the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 132 may be adopted.

With this configuration, the player's attention is focused on the panel board rear decoration member 2410, the panel board rear board 2420, and the game board side located in the direction in which the panel board rear decoration member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 have moved. In order to face the production display device 1600, the panel board rear decoration member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 move to the movement position, and the obstacle nail 1201 does not overlap the panel board rear decoration member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 in front view. Even if this occurs, it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB less noticeable.

A predetermined pattern or the like is applied to the front surface at the rear of the movably configured panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the movably configured panel plate rear board 2420 at a position overlapping with the obstacle nail 1201 in front view. , a decorative member that is visually recognized in bright color or metallic luster is provided, and this decorative member is visually recognized when both the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 are moved from the standby position to the movement position. The configuration may be such that this is possible. Note that even in the case where only one of the panel board rear decoration member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 is provided, the same decoration means may be adopted. With this configuration, it is possible to maintain a state in which the whitened portion HKB is less noticeable even when both the panel board rear decoration member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 are moved to the movement position.

FIG. 134 shows an embodiment in which the panel rear decorative member 2410 of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 129 is modified to be rotatable about the left-right direction. FIG. 134(a) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 129(a), showing a state in which the panel plate rear decoration member 2410 and the panel plate rear board 2420 are in the standby position. FIG. 134(b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 129(a), showing a state in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is in the moving position. When the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 rotates from the standby position to the moving position, it rotates approximately 30 degrees clockwise when viewed from the right side, but even in this state, the obstruction nail 1201 and the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 are They are located in overlapping positions when viewed from the front. FIG. 134(c) is a modification of the cross-sectional view shown in FIG. 134(b), and shows a state in which the game board side effect display device 1600 is located behind the panel board rear decorative member 2410.

In this way, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is configured to be rotatable about the panel plate rear decorative member rotation axis 2410c, and can be in a standby state parallel to the panel plate 1110 and a moving state not parallel to the panel plate 1110. It may be configured so that Further, it is preferable to configure the action of moving to a moving state to be executable as an effect indicating that the expectation of a jackpot is high. Specifically, it is preferable to provide a plurality of rotation angles at the movement position of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, and to configure the system so that the degree of jackpot expectation is indicated by the rotation angle. Note that when the panel board rear decoration member 2410 is not parallel to the panel board 1110, the display of the game board side effect display device 1600 located behind the panel board rear decoration member 2410 as shown in FIG. 134(c) It is preferable to configure such that the light from the area is directly incident on the front surface of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410. In this case, the light emitted from the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 is diffusely reflected on the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, so that the presence of the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable. Further, when the display mode of the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 is such that a predetermined image is displayed blinking at a predetermined cycle, it is possible to make the presence of the whitened portion HKB even less noticeable.

Note that light can be irradiated not only on the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 but also on the front surface of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 that has been rotated at a predetermined angle by another member capable of irradiating light. It may be configured to do so.

In this way, there is a high expectation of a jackpot in the game board side effect display device 1600 and other light-emitting decorative members, etc., with respect to the panel board rear decorative member 2410 that is originally tilted or has become tilted. It may be configured so that the light emitted in white color indicating the color is directly irradiated. In this case, since the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is illuminated in white, the whitened portion HKB becomes less noticeable than when illuminated in other colors. Note that yellow light may be used instead of white light.

By the way, gaming machines may be installed in gaming parlors for several years. On the other hand, the history of game boards formed by planting obstacle nails in transparent panel boards is shorter than the history of game boards formed by planting obstacle nails in wooden panel boards, and It is only in the past 10 years that game machines installed on panel boards have been installed in full scale at game arcades. Furthermore, the gameplay of the gaming machines themselves is constantly evolving. For this reason, the gauge configuration formed by driving the obstacle nails and the equipment installed on the game board change each time, and the number of obstacle nails planted on the transparent panel board and the number of obstacle nails planted are adjusted accordingly. The position, the distance between the obstacle nails, etc. also change. Therefore, in order to verify whether the pattern of the gauge configuration that can occur in various ways is one that is likely to cause whitening areas HKB or one that makes it difficult for whitening areas HKB to occur, it is necessary to The current situation is that it will take months.

Until now, as obstacle nails that receive the impact from the collision from the game ball immediately after launch, for example, a plurality of obstacle nails 1201 planted in the upper left of the game area 5a, and a plurality of obstacle nails 1201 planted on the right side of the game area 5a. There is a predetermined obstacle nail 1201 among the plurality of obstacle nails 1201. Further, after that, as an obstacle nail 1201 where game balls flowing down and rolling in the game area are concentrated according to the game state, for example, game balls that have rolled from the upper left of the game area 5a, which are concentrated during normal games, are placed in a predetermined position. A plurality of obstacle nails 1201 are planted on the left side of the game area 5a that collide with each other with a probability, and obstacle nails 1201 (jump nails) are installed corresponding to the rolling path from the upper left of the game area 5a to the first starting port 2002. 1231, life nail 1230, left guide nail 1232), and the obstacle nail 1201 provided close to the big prize opening 2005, which is concentrated during the jackpot game, are presumed to have deteriorated in the whitening part HKB.

In the embodiment described below, before a quality problem occurs in the operation of a certain gaming machine at a gaming parlor that could impede the progress of the game or the aesthetic appearance perceived by the player, such a gaming machine is installed. An embodiment will be described in which a store clerk at a game parlor can determine whether or not a quality problem is likely to occur.

In order to make the whitening part HKB less noticeable, a bright color visible part, a diffused reflection part, and a metallic luster part are provided behind the part where the fault nail 1201 is installed when the part where the fault nail 1201 is installed is viewed from the front. Although an example has been shown, in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, a configuration may be adopted in which the whitened portion HKB of a predetermined obstacle nail 1201 among the obstacle nails 1201 is intentionally planted in a conspicuous position.

Specifically, among the obstacle nails 1201 constituting the left guide nail 1232, the first obstacle nail 1201 and the second obstacle nail 1201 from the left are decorated with decorative members that are not bright in color when viewed from the front (preferably dark colored decorations). may be arranged so as to overlap with the member).

With this configuration, the whitened portions HKB of many of the faulty nails 1201 are made less noticeable, while the occurrence of the whitened portions HKB of some predetermined faulty nails 1201 is clearly visible. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily estimate the cumulative operating time of a gaming machine, and it becomes possible to use it as an indicator of whether or not a quality problem is likely to occur in the gaming machine.

As the dark-colored decorative member, in order to make the whitened portion HKB more conspicuous, it is desirable to employ, for example, a decorative member with a black-based decoration. Alternatively, it is preferable to use a liquid crystal display device, which is often used as an effect display device, as a basic device constituting a gaming machine. For example, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is visually recognized as a black flat surface in front when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off.

FIG. 135 shows an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. FIG. 135 is a front view of the game board 5. In this embodiment, a game board side effect display device 1600 is provided behind a colorless and transparent panel board 1110, and a life nail 1230, a jump nail 1231, a left guide nail 1232, and other obstacles are installed on the panel board 1110. A portion of the nails 1201 is provided at a position that overlaps the display area 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, the front surface of the display area 1600a is visually recognized as a black plane.

In this way, a position that overlaps the display area 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600, which is visually recognized as a dark decorative member or a black surface, in a front view, or in a predetermined direction around the center position of the pachinko machine as described above. If a predetermined obstacle nail 1201 is planted at a position that overlaps with a dark-colored decorative member or the display area 1600a of the game board side performance display device 1600 when the line of sight is tilted at a predetermined angle, the whitened portion HKB of the predetermined obstacle nail 1201 will be removed. This makes it easy to check the occurrence status.

With this configuration, it is possible to check the occurrence of the whitening portion HKB on the predetermined obstacle nail 1201 that is planted in a position that overlaps the dark-colored decorative member and the display area 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front. This makes it easy to confirm. It should be noted that, as described above, instead of looking from the front, there is a dark-colored decorative member or the side of the game board that overlaps with the predetermined obstacle nail 1201 when the line of sight is tilted at a predetermined angle in a predetermined direction about the center position of the pachinko machine. It may be configured such that the display area 1600a of the effect display device 1600 is located therein. Further, this configuration may be adopted for the obstacle nail 1201 in other embodiments to improve the visibility of the whitened portion HKB.

FIG. 136 shows an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 135. FIG. 136 is a front view of the game board 5. In this embodiment, a panel board back rough surface portion 1110b is provided on the back surface of the panel board 1110. The life nails 1230, the jump nails 1231, and some of the left guide nails 1232 planted in the panel board 1110 are provided at positions that overlap the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b, which is visually recognized in bright colors, when viewed from the front. On the other hand, some of the left guiding nails 1232 (the two upper left obstruction nails 1201) and other obstruction nails 1201 do not overlap with the panel board back rough surface part 1110b when viewed from the front, and the game board side effect display device 1600 It is provided so as to overlap the display area 1600a.

With this configuration, it is possible to always make the whitened portion HKB of some of the obstructing nails 1201 less noticeable, and for other obstructing nails 1201, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. By displaying a bright color or yellow effect image in the display area 1600a in the manner described above depending on the gaming state, the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable, and when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off. It becomes possible to make the whitened part HKB more noticeable.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 136, by applying the above-described embodiment in place of the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b, the whitening portion HKB of some of the faulty nails 1201 is configured to be made less noticeable. You may. For example, at least one of the panel rear decorative member 2410 and the panel rear substrate 2420 may be provided in place of or in addition to the panel back rough surface portion 1110b. Note that the shape of these members when viewed from the front is preferably configured to be the same shape as the shape of the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b when viewed from the front.

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with operating means have been considered, and below, a gaming machine that is equipped with a plurality of operating means and effectively utilizes the plurality of operating means in production will be described. As shown in FIG. 137, the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment includes a mission button 3700, an attack button 3710, a left lever 3720, a right lever 3730, and a defense button 3740 that can be operated by the player at the bottom of the door frame 3. .

The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is capable of displaying an effect of displaying the player's own tank during the variable display of decorative symbols in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 by displaying an image. In this production, your own tank moves along various routes, and while moving to its destination, it undergoes battles with enemy tanks, etc., and the result of the battle indicates the change in the decorative pattern. ing. Also, while your own tank is moving or during a battle between your own tank and an enemy tank, you can press the mission button 3700, attack button 3710, left lever 3720, right lever 3730, defense button 3740, etc. provided at the bottom of the door frame 3. By accepting a player's operation on the operating means, it is possible to change the content of the performance, such as the manner in which the variation results of decorative symbols are suggested.
In addition, in this specification, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 may be simply referred to as a display area.

The mission button 3700 is a button that functions in various ways in the presentation of displaying own tanks. The attack button 3710 is a button that can be used to mainly attack enemy units in a presentation that displays own tanks. The defense button 3740 is a button that can mainly be used to defend against attacks from enemy tanks in the presentation of displaying one's own tank. Each button can be pressed down a predetermined distance. The pachinko machine 1 is capable of detecting each button press by a player using a sensor (not shown), inputting the detected information to the peripheral control board 1510, and using it for performance. When each button is not pressed by the player, it is moved upward by a return mechanism (not shown) using a spring or the like.

The left lever 3720 is a rod-shaped operating means that can perform directional input. The base of the left lever 3720 is pivoted and can be tilted 360 degrees in any direction. The maximum tilt angle is 45 degrees. The left lever 3720 is configured to return to a vertical state (state not tilted in any direction) when the player releases the left lever 3720 by a return mechanism (not shown) using a spring or the like. The pachinko machine 1 is capable of detecting the direction in which the left lever 3720 is tilted and the tilt angle using a sensor (not shown), and inputting the detected information to the peripheral control board 1510 for use in performance. The player can perform operation input by gripping the left lever 3720 and tilting it in a predetermined direction at a predetermined angle.

A left lever vibration source 3722 capable of generating vibration is built in below the left lever 3720 in the vertical direction. The left lever vibration source 3722 may be configured by a stepping motor with an eccentric weight attached to a rotating shaft or a solenoid that reciprocates. The left lever vibration source 3722 can generate vibrations by being driven and controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. By transmitting the vibrations generated from the left lever vibration source 3722 to the palm of the player who is gripping the left lever 3720, it is possible to use the vibrations as an effect. For example, the left lever vibration source 3722 may be vibrated in a predetermined vibration mode in response to an operation of the left lever 3720 in response to an operation instruction. Further, the vibration mode may be configured to indicate the degree of expectation regarding an event advantageous to the player, such as a jackpot.

A plurality of left lever vibration sources 3722 may be provided within the left lever 3720. For example, the left lever vibration source 3722 may be provided in the upper half of the left lever 3720 and the lower half of the left lever 3720, respectively. Then, only one of them may be vibrated, or both vibration sources may be vibrated simultaneously.

A left lever light source 3724 capable of emitting light in a predetermined color is built in above the left lever 3720 in the vertical direction. The left lever 3720 is made of milky white synthetic resin, and the entire left lever 3720 can be decorated with light depending on the color of the light output from the left lever light source 3724. Specifically, the left lever light source 3724 is composed of a plurality of full-color LEDs and a drive circuit, and can emit light in a predetermined color by driving and controlling the drive circuit by the peripheral control board 1510. By the left lever light source 3724, mainly the upper half of the left lever 3720 can be decorated with light, and the color of the light and the mode of light such as blinking or lighting can be used as a presentation. For example, the light may be emitted in a predetermined light emission mode in response to an operation performed in response to an instruction to operate the left lever 3720. Further, the light emission mode may be configured to indicate the degree of expectation regarding an event advantageous to the player, such as a jackpot. Note that the left lever 3720 may be formed using another material as long as it can transmit light. For example, it may be formed from a colorless and transparent synthetic resin with a lens cut.

The right lever 3730 has the same structure and function as the left lever 3720. For example, the right lever 3730 can accept operation input. Also, like the left lever 3720, a right lever vibration source 3732 and a right lever light source 3734 are provided inside the right lever 3730, and can be used for the same effects as the left lever 3720.

The arrangement of each button is not limited to the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 137. FIG. 138 shows an embodiment in which an attack button 3710 is provided at the upper end of the left lever 3720, and a defense button 3740 is provided at the upper end of the right lever 3730. In this case, it is possible to press down the attack button 3710 at the upper end of the left lever 3720 with the thumb while holding the left lever 3720 and performing a tilting operation of the left lever 3720. Similarly, while holding the right lever 3730 and performing a tilting operation of the right lever 3730, it is possible to press down the defense button 3740 at the upper end of the right lever 3730 with the thumb.

Note that the attack button 3710 is formed of milky white or colorless transparent synthetic resin, and the left lever light source 3724 is set to a predetermined light emission mode in response to the operation of the attack button 3710, so that the attack button 3710 can be set to a predetermined light emission mode. Good too. Similarly, the defense button 3740 is formed of a milky white or colorless transparent synthetic resin, and the right lever light source 3734 is set to a predetermined light emission mode in response to the operation of the defense button 3740. You can also use it as

Instead of installing the attack button 3710 at the top end of the left lever 3720 and the defense button 3740 at the top end of the right lever 3730, the mission button 3700 is installed at the top end of the left lever 3720 in place of the attack button 3710. Good too. Alternatively, the defense button 3740 may be replaced with the upper end of the right lever 3730. Alternatively, two or three of these buttons may be installed at the upper end of one lever.
With this configuration, the tilting operation of the lever and the pressing operation of one or more buttons can be performed with one hand.

FIG. 139 shows an embodiment in which the effect of displaying own tanks is executed as a reach effect while the decorative symbols are changing. FIG. 139(a) shows a state in which decorative patterns are stopped and displayed. When a starting winning occurs in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols start changing.

FIG. 139(b) shows a state in which decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are displayed in a variable manner, appearing from above the display area and disappearing downward. Decorative symbols can be stopped and displayed without forming a reach state and displayed as a symbol representing a loss, forming a reach state and being stopped and displayed as a symbol representing a loss, or forming a reach state and causing a jackpot. It may be stopped and displayed with a symbol representing .

FIG. 139(c) shows a state in which the left and right "3" symbols are temporarily stopped and a ready-to-win state is formed. In this embodiment, as a reach effect, it is possible to perform a tank reach effect in which the own tank is displayed in the display area and moves forward.

FIG. 139(d) shows a state in which the display of an own tank has been started as a tank reach effect. Specifically, the self-tank is moving forward on the road. The decorative pattern is displayed at the upper left of the display area.

FIG. 139(e) shows a state in which an own tank and an enemy tank are engaged in battle. Moreover, FIG. 139(f) shows a state in which the own tank has arrived at the destination. These functions as a performance that suggests the result of the special lottery. For example, an effect display is executed to show whether or not the own tank can defeat the enemy tank shown in FIG. 139(e), or whether or not the own tank will be defeated by the enemy tank. is suggested. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 139(f), a performance display is performed to show whether or not the own tank can reach the destination without being defeated by enemy tanks, and the result of the special lottery is suggested based on the result of the performance display. .

FIG. 139(g) shows a mode in which the display of decorative symbols is stopped when the special lottery result is a loss. Further, FIG. 139(h) shows a state in which the display of decorative symbols is stopped in a variable manner when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. The display of images of own tanks, enemy tanks, roads, etc. ends immediately before the decorative patterns stop changing.

Referring to FIG. 139, an example was shown in which the player's own tank is displayed as a reach effect in the display area. It may be configured as follows. For example, by pre-reading the special lottery result related to a hold that occurs when a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, it is possible to start executing an effect that displays your own tank, and to do so multiple times. It may be configured to be executed across symbol variations and to suggest the variation result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the pre-read suspension. Alternatively, you can run an effect that displays your own tank from the start to the end of the jackpot, or execute an effect that displays your tank from the end of the jackpot until the decorative pattern changes a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). By executing this, it suggests what kind of gaming state the gaming state changed at the end of the jackpot (for example, whether the probability of being judged as a jackpot in a special lottery is a high probability state or a low probability state) It may be configured to do so. In this way, the targets suggested by the display of own tanks are not limited to special lottery results (e.g., the level of expectation that a jackpot will occur); good.

FIG. 140 shows a performance situation in which the user operates either the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 with the left hand and rotates the handle 302 with the right hand. During the display of your own tank, your own tank basically moves forward automatically. At this time, by operating the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730, it is possible to change the speed of the own tank or move it in the left-right direction. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 140, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 forward as viewed from the player, it is possible to increase the speed of the own tank. Further, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 backward (towards the player) when viewed from the player, it is possible to reduce the speed of the own tank. Furthermore, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 to the right as viewed from the player, it is possible to move the own tank to the right. Furthermore, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 to the left when viewed from the player, it is possible to move the own tank to the left.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which one lever is operated with one hand (left hand) to move the own tank, it may be configured to be able to perform an effect in which the left lever 3720 is operated with the left hand and the right lever 3730 is operated with the right hand. . Furthermore, since a reach effect, in which the expectation of a jackpot is higher than normal variations in decorative symbols, is occurring, the player does not necessarily need to operate the handle 302, but can use both hands to move the left lever 3720 or the right lever. Since it is possible to operate various buttons such as the lever 3730 and the mission button 3700, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the performance.

During the display of your own tank, your own tank basically moves forward automatically. At this time, by operating the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730, it is possible to change the speed of the tank or move it in the left and right direction. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 141, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 forward as viewed from the player, it is possible to increase the speed of the tank. Further, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 rearward (towards the player) when viewed from the player, it is possible to reduce the speed of the tank. Furthermore, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 to the right as viewed from the player, it is possible to move the tank to the right. Furthermore, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 to the left when viewed from the player, it is possible to move the tank to the left.

Further, when the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 are simultaneously tilted forward as viewed from the player, the speed can be increased significantly compared to when only one of the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 is operated. Similarly, if the left lever 3720 and right lever 3730 are tilted backwards at the same time as viewed from the player, the speed can be significantly reduced compared to when only one of the left lever 3720 and right lever 3730 is operated. . Additionally, if the left lever 3720 and right lever 3730 are tilted to the right at the same time as viewed from the player, it is possible to move the tank to the right more significantly than if only one of the left lever 3720 and right lever 3730 is operated. It is. Similarly, if the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 are tilted to the left at the same time as viewed from the player, the tank cannot be moved much to the left compared to when only one of the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 is operated. It is possible.

In this way, when the tank moves forward, the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 can be used to change the direction of the tank's movement, allowing it to avoid attacks from enemy troops or to avoid being set up in the field. This makes it possible to move forward while avoiding obstacles such as mines and rocks.

The basic usage of the mission button 3700, attack button 3710, and defense button 3740 in tank reach will be explained. By operating the mission button 3700, it becomes possible to fire bullets forward from the machine gun mounted on the own tank. Furthermore, by operating the attack button 3710, it becomes possible to fire a cannonball forward from the gun battery mounted on the own tank. Furthermore, by operating the defense button 3740, it becomes possible to provide a defense shield in front of the own tank to protect against attacks from enemy tanks. Note that the functions applied to each button may differ depending on the situation of the performance.

By the way, in this embodiment, a new condition is adopted as a condition for changing the gaming state. Below, with reference to FIGS. 142 and 143, new conditions will be described as conditions for changing the gaming state.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002, a variable display of special symbols is performed on the first special symbol display 1403, and a first special lottery result is displayed. Further, in the display area of the game board side performance display device, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a manner corresponding to the variable display results of the special symbols.
Similarly, when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004, a variable display of special symbols is performed on the second special symbol display 1405, and a second special lottery result is displayed. Further, in the display area of the game board side performance display device, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a manner corresponding to the variable display results of the special symbols.
In addition, if the normal lottery result that is drawn when a game ball passes through the gate section 2003 is a "win", the second starting port 2004 accepts the game ball from a state where it is impossible or difficult to accept the game ball. It is possible to change into a possible state.

In this embodiment, regarding the lottery mode of special symbols, there are two situations: a state where the probability that the lottery result of the special symbol will be a "jackpot" lottery result is low (probability: 1/300), and a lottery where the lottery result of the special symbol will be a "jackpot" lottery result. It is possible to take a state in which the probability of the result is high (probability: 1/30).
In addition, regarding the lottery mode of normal symbols, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is long (30 seconds on average), and the probability that the normal lottery result will be a "winning" lottery result is low (probability: 1/100). It is possible to have a state in which the fluctuation time is short (2.0 seconds on average) and the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol becomes a "winning" lottery result is high (probability: 1/1.2).
The following four gaming states are possible by combining these.
1: A normal state in which the probability that the lottery result of the special symbol will be a "jackpot" lottery result is low, the fluctuation time of the regular symbol is long, and the probability that the regular lottery result will be a "hit" lottery result is low.
2: A time-saving state in which the probability that the lottery result of the special symbol will be a "jackpot" lottery result is low, the fluctuation time of the regular symbol is short, and the probability that the regular lottery result will be a "hit" lottery result is high.
3: A non-time-saving variable state where the probability that the special symbol lottery result will be a “jackpot” lottery result is high, the fluctuation time of the regular symbol is long, and the probability that the regular lottery result will be a “hit” lottery result is low. .
4: A variable probability state in which there is a high probability that the lottery result of the special symbol will be a "jackpot" lottery result, the fluctuation time of the regular symbol is short, and the probability that the regular lottery result will be a "hit" lottery result is high.
In addition to these gaming states, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a "jackpot", the following states occur.
5: A jackpot state in which the jackpot opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. It should be noted that the special symbols are not displayed in a variable manner during the jackpot state.
FIG. 142 is a table showing these five gaming states.
In this way, in this embodiment, five game states are possible. Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the game, the game state changes from one of these game states to another game state. FIG. 143 is a diagram showing the transition conditions of the gaming state.

The time saving state transitions to the normal state on the condition that the number of times a losing special lottery result has occurred since the time saving state has started reaches a predetermined number of times. For example, when the jackpot state ends and the time saving state is entered, and the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 100 in the time saving state, the gaming state shifts to the normal state.
The non-time-saving variable probability state and the variable probability state continue until a jackpot gaming state occurs.

In this embodiment, three lottery results are provided as special lottery results: "Lose", "Lose with time saving", and "Jackpot".

If the special lottery result is a "lose", after the special lottery result is displayed for a predetermined time, the grand prize opening 2005 will not open and close in the predetermined opening/closing pattern, and the normal lottery result will be a "lose". ”, and the “time-saving state” in which it takes a short time to display the normal lottery results does not occur.

If the special lottery result is a "lose with time saving", after the special lottery result is displayed for a predetermined time, the grand prize opening 2005 is not opened and closed in the predetermined opening/closing pattern, and the regular lottery result is a "win". The game state shifts to a "time saving state" in which the probability that the result of the lottery is displayed is increased and the time until the normal lottery result is displayed is short. Even if the special lottery result is a "lose with time saving", if the game state is in the time saving state, non-time saving probability variable state, or probability variable state, the transition to the time saving state is not performed. Note that it is preferable that the "time-saving loss" occur with a predetermined probability. For example, among the special lottery results, it is preferable that the probability of occurrence of a "jackpot" is 1/300, the probability of occurrence of a "loss" is 298/300, and the probability of occurrence of a "loss with time saving" is 1/300.

When the special lottery result is a "jackpot", the special lottery result is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and the grand prize opening 2005 is opened and closed in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. After the jackpot state ends, the game mode shifts to any one of a normal state, a time-saving state, a non-time-saving probability variable state, and a probability variable state based on the predetermined jackpot details. Note that the rate of transition after the jackpot state may be set as appropriate, and the number of game states that can be shifted to after the jackpot may be less than four. For example, after the jackpot state, the percentage of shifting to the probability variable state may be 50%, the percentage of shifting to the time saving state may be 50%, and the percentage of shifting to the normal state and the non-time saving probability variable state may be 0%.

On the other hand, without adopting "loss with time saving", the number of times the special lottery result is consecutively a loser under normal conditions is counted, and the number of times the special lottery result is consecutively a loser is determined in advance. When the number of times (for example, 500) is reached, the special lottery result is displayed for a predetermined time, and then the game state shifts from a normal state to a time saving state without opening or closing a big prize opening 2005.
Furthermore, even if the number of times the special lottery result is a loss during the time-saving state, non-time-saving definite variable state, or definite variable state reaches a predetermined specific number (for example, 500 times), the transition to the time-saving state will not occur. do not have.

For the transition from the normal state to the time-saving state based on a loss with time-saving, and the transition from the normal state to the time-saving state based on the execution of a specific number of special drawings, either one or both may be adopted. Good too.

By adopting "loss with time saving" as the special lottery result, the game state can be shifted from the normal state to the time saving state without any balls being put out. Furthermore, compared to the normal state, it is possible to receive the special lottery result in a time-saving state in which the number of game balls is less likely to decrease.

In addition, as the special lottery is executed a certain number of times, the gaming state shifts from the normal state to the time-saving state, so if the normal state continues for a certain period of time, the time-saving state where the number of game balls is less likely to decrease is lower than in the normal state. It will be possible to receive the special lottery results.

The breakdown of the jackpot when the first special lottery result is a jackpot and the breakdown of the jackpot when the second special lottery result is a jackpot may be the same.
Alternatively, the breakdown of the jackpot when the first special lottery result is a jackpot may be different from the breakdown when the second special lottery result is a jackpot. For example, the breakdown when the first special lottery result becomes a jackpot is 50% for the normal jackpot, 50% for the time-saving jackpot, and the breakdown when the second special lottery result becomes a jackpot. , the jackpot that results in a time saving state may be 20%, and the jackpot that results in a variable probability state may be 80%.

In the low probability non-time saving state and the high probability non-time saving state, the player fires the game ball to the left side of the gaming area in order to cause the game ball to enter the first starting port 2002. This act of firing a game ball toward the left side of the game area is called "left-handed hitting." Note that the probability that a game ball flowing into the left side of the game area will win a prize in the first starting opening 2002 is approximately 1/10 to 1/15. In addition, the game balls that flow into the left side of the game area will not enter the second starting slot 2004.

On the other hand, during the jackpot game state, the player shoots the game ball toward the right side of the game area in order to win the game ball into the big prize opening 2005. Further, in the low probability time saving state and the high probability time saving state, the player shoots the game ball toward the right side of the gaming area in order to cause the game ball to enter the second starting port 2004. This act of firing a game ball toward the right side of the game area is called "right-handed hitting."
It should be noted that the probability that the game ball flowing into the right side of the game area will win in the second starting port 2004 differs depending on the game state. This means that the probability that the movable piece 2004a of the second starting port 2004 will be in the open state and the duration of the open state are in the non-time saving state (low probability non-time saving state, high probability non-time saving state) and in the time saving state (low probability time saving state, This is because it differs depending on the state (high probability time saving state). In the non-time saving state (low probability non-time saving state, high probability non-time saving state), the probability that the game ball flowing into the right side of the gaming area will enter the second starting opening 2004 is extremely low, for example about 1/200 to 1/300. It is. In the time saving state (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state), the probability that the game ball flowing into the right side of the gaming area will win the second starting opening 2004 is extremely high, for example, about 1/2 to 1/3.
Although the game balls that flow into the right side of the game area will not enter the first starting port 2002, the gaming area may be configured such that the first starting port 2002 may win.

In the low-probability time-saving state, the variable display time of the special symbol is shorter on average than in the low-probability non-time-saving state.
In the high-probability time-saving state, the fluctuating display time of the special symbol is shorter on average than in the low-probability non-time-saving state, and the probability that the special symbol stops in a manner that indicates the result of a jackpot is lower than in the low-probability non-time-saving state. It's more expensive than that.
Therefore, compared to playing left-handed (during a low-probability non-time-saving state), when playing right-handed (during a low-probability time-saving state or high-probability time-saving state), the next jackpot gaming state will be activated after the end of the jackpot gaming state. The average time until it occurs is short, and from the player's perspective, it feels like the next jackpot occurs immediately after the previous jackpot.

A state in which the first jackpot gaming state occurs in a low probability non-time saving state, and after this jackpot gaming state ends, a low probability time saving state or a high probability time saving state occurs, and a jackpot gaming state occurs again. That's what it means. Note that the number of consecutive attempts at this time is "2 times". After this jackpot game state, the low probability time saving state or high probability time saving state again occurs, and if the jackpot gaming state occurs again, the number of consecutive chances will be "3 times". If the low probability non-time saving state occurs after the end of the jackpot game state, or if the low probability time saving state occurs after the end of the jackpot game state, but the special lottery results are lost a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in a row. If the low-probability non-time-saving state is reached, the consecutive chance state ends. The player fires the game ball toward the right side of the gaming area while the continuous winning state continues, and at the timing when the continuous winning state ends, changes the area where the gaming ball is fired to the left side of the gaming area. .

Referring to FIGS. 142 and 143, it was shown that after the jackpot state ends, the game shifts to one of four predetermined gaming states (a combination of high probability or low probability, time saving or non-time saving). These gaming states may be referred to as follows in this specification.
Specifically, a jackpot that enters a low probability non-time saving state after the jackpot state ends is sometimes referred to as a low probability non-time saving jackpot. Further, a jackpot that enters a low probability time saving state after the end of the jackpot state is sometimes referred to as a low probability time saving jackpot. Further, a jackpot that becomes a high probability non-time saving state after the end of the jackpot state is sometimes referred to as a high probability non-time saving jackpot. In addition, a jackpot that enters a high probability time saving state after the end of the jackpot state is sometimes referred to as a high probability time saving jackpot (this jackpot is generally referred to as a "probable variable jackpot").
Note that the jackpot state may be referred to as a jackpot gaming state.

Furthermore, if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, a decorative pattern with a predetermined number attached is displayed in a stopped state in the form of a double-digit number to show the player that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. . At this time, if the type of jackpot is a high-probability non-time-saving jackpot or a high-probability time-saving jackpot, the decorative pattern with an odd number will be stopped and displayed in the form of a double-digit number, and the jackpot type will be a low-probability non-time-saving jackpot. Or, in the case of a low-probability time-saving jackpot, decorative symbols with even numbers may be stopped and displayed in the form of a square. For example, if the type of numbers attached to the decorative pattern is 1 to 7, and the combination of numbers on the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed is "222", "444", or "666", it will be a jackpot. The game state after the state becomes a low probability non-time saving state or a low probability time saving state. In addition, if the number combinations of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed are "111", "333", "555", or "777", the gaming state after the jackpot state will be a high probability non-time saving state or a high probability state. Time is shortened. In addition, decorative patterns with the numbers "2", "4", and "6" are "normal patterns", and decorative patterns with the numbers "1", "3", "5", and "7" are added. is sometimes referred to as a "variable pattern". In the case of such an embodiment, the player can know the gaming state after the jackpot if a jackpot occurs at the timing when the ready-to-win state is formed, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Note that the decorative symbols that constitute the ready-to-reach state in this way are sometimes referred to as "ready-to-reach symbols." In particular, whether the numbers attached to the decorative patterns that form the reach state are even or odd numbers, that is, whether the reach state is formed by a "normal pattern" or the reach state is formed by a "probable variation pattern". It is used to indicate whether For example, ``The reach symbol is ``1''. ” indicates that a ready-to-reach state is formed by the decorative pattern with the number 1 attached.
In addition, the reach state formed by the "normal symbol" may be referred to as the normal reach, and the reach state formed by the "probable variable pattern" may be referred to as the "probable variable reach."

In addition, the degree of expectation of a jackpot may be suggested by the type of symbols forming the reach state. For example, if the numbers attached to the decorative pattern are "1", "2", "4", or "5", the expectation level is less than 5%, if it is "6", it is 20%, and if it is "3", it is 50%. %, in the case of "7", it may be set to 90% (or 100%). In addition to simply determining whether the reach symbol is a regular symbol or a variable probability symbol (that is, whether it is an even number or an odd number), it also determines whether the number attached to the symbol is "1" to "7". It is also possible to increase the player's interest in whether there is such a thing.

Note that the number of rounds that occur in the jackpot state may be added to these names to further categorize and express the type of jackpot. For example, in the case of a 10-round jackpot in which a high-probability time-saving state occurs after the jackpot ends, it may be referred to as a 10R high-probability time-saving jackpot. Similarly, when the number of rounds is 3 or 6, it may be called a 3R high probability time saving jackpot or a 6R high probability time saving jackpot. In addition, when the probability state or time saving state after the end of the jackpot state does not matter, it may be referred to as a 3R jackpot or a 6R jackpot.

In addition, in this specification, the expectation level of a jackpot may be simply referred to as the expectation level.
In addition, although an embodiment is shown in which the expectation level of a jackpot is shown by executing a predetermined effect, etc., instead of the expectation level of a jackpot, the expectation level of a high probability time-saving jackpot or other predetermined It may be modified to indicate the degree of expectation regarding the occurrence of the event. Note that the expectation level can be determined by the formula: "Probability of appearing in a jackpot/(Probability of appearing in a jackpot + Probability of appearing in a loss)". Further, the player recognizes the degree of expectation when a predetermined effect is executed based on his/her own gaming experience and articles in specialized magazines.

Below, an embodiment of the ready-to-win effect executed using such an operation unit and the conditions for changing the game state will be described together with the display contents displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600.

Conventionally, by displaying an image of a character or the like on a display means, an effect suggesting a fluctuating display result of a decorative pattern has been performed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Nos. 2016-179063 and 2010-022544). For example, by displaying an image of a predetermined character before the fluctuation of the decorative pattern stops, the player is informed that the probability that the fluctuating display result of the decorative pattern will be a jackpot is a predetermined probability (for example, 10%). The suggested performance was being carried out.
However, some players may not necessarily like to see such suggestive effects. For example, if a certain suggestion effect is displayed multiple times, but the results of the most recent fluctuating displays in which the suggestion effect was displayed all result in a fluctuating display result indicating a loss, then They may feel a sense of disbelief, thinking, ``I'm going to fail again...'' or feel that the experience was a bad experience, and they may not want to see the suggestion. Such a tendency is noticeable in suggestion effects in which a player is requested to operate a predetermined operation unit, and a display indicating a predetermined level of expectation is performed based on the acceptance of the operation. In such a case, the player may lose interest in the game because he or she is made to see a suggestive performance that he or she does not want to see, even though he has taken the trouble to operate the operating means.

Furthermore, there are players who prefer that the results of the variable display be clearly informed, rather than being suggested with half-hearted expectations. For such players, being shown a suggestive performance with a low level of expectation (for example, 10%) may actually cause a decrease in interest.

However, the existence of such players has not been taken into account in the past, and there is room for improvement in the manner in which the suggestion effect is executed. In the embodiment shown below, an embodiment will be described in which the existence of such players is taken into account and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Below, with reference to Figure 144, etc., in a battle scene between your own tank and an enemy tank, a defensive shield will be displayed by firing a shield bullet from your own tank that can fire a newly developed shield bullet. "Reach" is explained.

FIG. 144 is a time chart showing the progress of "shield bullet reach" in this embodiment. In this time chart, when it is decided in the main control board 1310 to execute a performance pattern in which a variable display of special symbols is performed for 34 seconds in response to one start-up winning, the game is started under control by the peripheral control board 1510. The progress of a performance mode in which a variable display of decorative symbols is executed over 34 seconds in the display area of the board-side performance display device 1600 is shown. Note that after the end of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols, the stop display of the special symbols and the stop display of the decorative symbols are executed for one second. In addition, in the display area, in addition to the variable display of decorative patterns, an image of your own tank, an image of an enemy tank, a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, a simulated image imitating the defense button 3740, etc. are displayed. Details will be described later.
Further, FIGS. 145 and 146 show the display mode of the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 at a predetermined timing of the time chart described with reference to FIG. 144.

In addition, in the time chart shown in FIG. 144, in order to explain the timing of the performance, t0, t1 to t34, t35, etc. are indicated according to the passage of time. The time between each timing is 1 second. Note that these points are the same in other embodiments and production examples described later unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, each of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 149 to 196 is basically a modification of the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 144 to 148. Therefore, for configurations that are not specifically mentioned in the description of each embodiment shown in FIGS. 149 to 196 (for example, the display mode when the decorative pattern starts changing, the display mode when it stops, etc.), the configurations shown in FIGS. 144 to 148 The embodiments in the embodiments shown in are applicable.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 144, the variable display of decorative symbols starts at timing t0. From timing t0 to timing t5, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner as shown in FIG. 139(b). At timing t5, as shown in FIG. 139(c), a pattern in which the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are the same (in this embodiment, the pattern consisting of the number "3") is temporarily stopped and displayed, and a reach state occurs. Then, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are reduced and displayed at the upper left of the display area. At the same time, an image of the own tank moving forward on the road is displayed in the display area. Further, during the period from timing t5 to timing t27, operation reception of the defense button 3740 is enabled.

FIG. 145(a) shows a state in which an image of the own tank is displayed in the display area at timing t5. Each decorative symbol ("3", "↓", "3") in reach state will be displayed at the top left of the display area, the image of your own tank will be displayed at the bottom center of the display area, and your tank will move to the center of the display area in the horizontal direction. An image of the road is displayed at the top of the display area, an image of the horizon and the sky is displayed at the bottom right of the display area, a line image of the production character ``Colonel Dyna'' is displayed at the bottom right of the display area, and a window image surrounding the line image is displayed at the bottom left of the display area. It shows a state in which a dialogue image of "Might Sergeant", a character in the performance, and a window image surrounding the dialogue image are displayed. In addition, the player himself is set as a second lieutenant who operates his own tank, and moves around the battlefield in his own tank with "Colonel Dyna", who is higher in rank than a second lieutenant, and "Sergeant Mite", who is lower in rank than a second lieutenant. The performance will be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the immersion in the virtual reality reach performance.

As shown in the lines of "Colonel Dyna" in FIG. 145(a), by long-pressing the defense button 3740, a shield image is displayed in front of the own tank, which will be described in detail later.

At timing t9, the image of the white enemy tank starts to be displayed at the upper right of the display area, and is displayed moving to the left. FIG. 145(b) shows a state in which the image of the enemy tank is moving leftward toward the road at timing t10.

At timing t11, the image of the white enemy tank that has moved from right to left within the display area is positioned on the road. Note that at this timing, the image of the white enemy tank may be replaced with the image of the red enemy tank and displayed. At the same time, operation reception of the attack button 3710 is enabled, and a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed to the right of the lines of "Might Sergeant". The valid operation period of the attack button 3710 continues for 3 seconds from timing t11 to timing t14.
There are two types of enemy tank images displayed on the road: a white enemy tank image and a red enemy tank image. The display ratio of enemy tank images is set so that when a red enemy tank image is displayed, there is a higher possibility that the special lottery result will be a jackpot.
In addition, two types of simulated images imitating the attack button 3710 are prepared: a white simulated image and a red simulated image, and the red simulated image is displayed more than the white simulated image. The display ratio of enemy tank images is set so that there is a higher possibility that the special lottery result will be a jackpot when

The expectation level of a jackpot may be suggested by the combination of the color of the image of the enemy tank and the color of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710.
For example, if the image of the enemy tank and the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 are both white in color, the expectation level is 10%, and the color of the image of the enemy tank and the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is white and the other is white. The appearance rate may be set such that the expectation level is 20% when the image of the enemy tank and the simulated image of the attack button 3710 are red, and 30% when the image of the enemy tank and the simulated image of the attack button 3710 are both red.
Note that the color of either one of the image of the enemy tank and the simulated image of the attack button 3710 may be changed from white to red to suggest the level of expectation. Also, depending on the combination of the color of the image of the enemy tank and the color of the simulated image of the attack button 3710, the expectation level of the jackpot is 100%, that is, the pattern in which the occurrence of the jackpot is confirmed when that combination is displayed. You may also prepare one.

FIG. 145(c) shows a state in which a white simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and a white enemy tank image are displayed on the road in the display area at timing t12.

On the other hand, FIG. 145(e) shows a state in which a red simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and a red image of an enemy tank are displayed on the road in the display area from timing t11 to timing t12. .

If the attack button 3710 is operated during the operation validity period (timing t11 to timing t14) of the attack button 3710, an image of a shell flying out of the own tank's battery is displayed, and an image of the enemy tank is displayed. However, it changes to a destroyed image. An image of the shell exploding is also displayed. Furthermore, the display of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 ends.

FIG. 144(b) is a time chart showing the display mode when the attack button 3710 is operated during the operation validity period of the attack button 3710. Further, FIG. 144(c) is a time chart showing a display mode when the attack button 3710 is operated during the operation validity period of the attack button 3710.

The display of the image of the destruction of the enemy tank and the display of the image of the explosion of the shell continue for 3 seconds from the timing when the attack button 3710 is pressed. For example, when the attack button 3710 is operated at timing t13, the display of the destroyed image of the enemy tank and the display of the exploding image of the shell continue until timing t16.

There are two types of images of shells exploding: images of moderate explosions of shells and images of large explosions of shells, and the greater the degree of explosion, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. Display percentage is set. For example, if an image of a moderately exploding shell is displayed, the expectation level increases by +10 compared to the expectation level that was previously shown by the image of an enemy tank and the image imitating the attack button 3710. %, and when an image of a large explosion of a cannonball is displayed, the rate of occurrence of the effect may be set so that the expectation level increases by +20%.

FIG. 145(d) shows a state in which an image of a white enemy tank being destroyed and an image of a medium-sized shell exploding are displayed on the road in the display area from timing t13 to timing t16. On the other hand, FIG. 145(f) shows a state in which an image of a white enemy tank being destroyed and an image of a large shell exploding are displayed on the road in the display area from timing t13 to timing t16. Note that even when a red enemy tank is displayed as in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. Either an image of a large explosion or an image of a large shell exploding will be displayed on the road. In this way, the color of the moving tank image and the color of the destroyed tank image are the same color.

FIG. 144(c) is a time chart showing the content displayed in the display area when the attack button 3710 is not operated within the valid operation period. If the attack button 3710 is not operated within the valid operation period, at timing t14, which is the end timing of the valid operation period, an image of a shell being fired from your own tank is displayed, and an image of an enemy tank is displayed. changes into a destroyed image. Additionally, either an image of a moderately exploding shell or an image of a large exploding shell is displayed. Furthermore, the display of the destroyed image continues for three seconds from timing t14 to timing t17. These display modes are the same as when the attack button 3710 is operated.
In this way, regardless of whether the player operates the attack button 3710 or not, the player sees the same display effect except for the display timing and the position of the enemy tank in the left and right direction. Then, the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot can be recognized based on the performance mode of the visually recognized display performance.

After such a display effect is performed from timing t9 to timing t17 at the longest (when the attack button 3710 is not operated), from timing t17 to timing t25 at the longest (when the attack button 3710 is not operated), The same performance will be performed again. Further, in the performance performed again, the expectation level that the special lottery result will be a jackpot is similarly suggested.

In addition, the enemy tank moves and is destroyed from timing t9 to timing t17 at the longest (when the attack button 3710 is not operated), and from timing t17 to timing t25 at the longest (when the attack button 3710 is not operated). We have shown an example of executing this, but it is possible to execute a production pattern in which the enemy tank moves and is destroyed only at the former timing, or a production pattern in which the enemy tank moves and is destroyed only at the latter timing. It may also be possible to perform a performance pattern in which a performance is performed. Furthermore, a production pattern in which enemy tanks are not displayed may be executed at two timings. In this case, the "shield bullet reach" performance ends without the player operating the attack button 3710.

It is preferable to set the appearance ratio of performance patterns so that the expectation of a jackpot is higher for a performance pattern in which enemy tanks are displayed than in a performance pattern in which enemy tanks are not displayed. Also, it is recommended to set the appearance rate of performance patterns so that the expectation of a jackpot is higher for a performance pattern in which the enemy tank moves twice and is destroyed than in a performance pattern in which the enemy tank moves and is destroyed only once. . With this configuration, when this suggestion effect is executed, the enemy tank may be moved and destroyed 0 to 2 times, so the appearance mode (color/number of times) of the enemy tank and the enemy tank's Players' expectations for the destruction mode will increase. Note that a performance pattern in which the enemy tank is moved and destroyed three or more times may be configured to be executable.

FIG. 144(d) is a time chart showing the display contents when the defense button 3740 is not operated. As shown in FIG. 144(d), when the defense button 3740 is not operated, the effect display based on the operation of the defense button 3740 is not performed. FIGS. 145(c) to 145(f) show the display mode in the display area when the effect display based on the operation of the defense button 3740 is not performed.

Next, the display mode in the display area when the defense button 3740 is operated will be described.

A setting that prevents attacks from enemy tanks by long-pressing the defense button 3740 during the operation period of the defense button 3740 (timing t5 to timing t27) between the image of your own tank and the image of the enemy tank. A shield image is displayed. Note that the condition for determining that the long press has started may be that the defense button 3740 continues to be pressed for 0.5 seconds. Furthermore, as long as the defense button 3740 is kept pressed, the shield image continues to be displayed.
Note that although the shape of the shield image is a horizontally elongated ellipse in the figure, the shape of the shield image may be configured to dynamically change during display. Further, the shield image may be displayed intermittently. For example, if you continue to press and hold the defense button 3740, the shield image will gradually become smaller after it starts being displayed, and when the shield image is completely no longer displayed, the shield bullets will be automatically fired. A display effect may be repeatedly performed in which a target is fired, a shield bullet explodes, and a new shield image is displayed. Continuation of the display of the shield image includes such a display mode.

FIG. 144(e) is a time chart showing a display mode when the defense button 3740 is pressed for a long time while the operation of the defense button 3740 is valid. As shown in this time chart, the shield image is displayed from timing t7, when it is determined that the player is pressing the button for a long time, to timing t24, when the player releases the defense button 3740 and ends the long press. is displayed. By displaying the shield image based on the player's operation of the defense button 3740 in this way, it is possible to hide the color of the enemy tank image, the color of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, and the destruction mode of the enemy tank. It is.

For example, FIG. 146(a) shows the timing after the display shown in FIG. 145(a) is performed, and during the period when the enemy tank image is not displayed (for example, from timing t6 to timing t9), the player This shows the display state displayed when the long press of the defense button 3740 is operated. As shown in the figure, a shield image is displayed based on the detection of long press of the defense button 3740. In addition, the dialogue image of "Colonel Dyna" is also compatible with the display of the shield image.

FIG. 146(b) shows a state in which a shield image is displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, from timing t9 to timing t11) when an image of an enemy tank is displayed and the enemy tank is moving toward the road. That is, in the display state shown with reference to FIG. 145(b), if the shield image is displayed, the display state becomes the display state shown in FIG. 146(b).

146(c) and 146(e) show that when an image of an enemy tank is displayed on the road and a simulated image of the attack button 3710 is displayed (for example, from timing t11 to timing t14), the shield This shows a display mode in which an image is displayed. That is, in the display state shown with reference to FIG. 145(c), if the shield image is being displayed, the display state becomes as shown in FIG. 146(c). Similarly, in the display state shown with reference to FIG. 145(e), if a shield image is being displayed, the display state becomes as shown in FIG. 146(e).

At this time, the color of the enemy tank image and the color of the simulated image of the attack button 3710 suggest the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot, but since these images are hidden by the shield image, , it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the degree of expectation of a jackpot.

FIGS. 146(d) and 146(f) show that the shield image is displayed when an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed (for example, from timing t12 to timing t15 when an operation is being performed, and from timing t14 to timing t17 when not being operated). An example of the displayed state is shown. That is, in the display state shown with reference to FIG. 145(d), if the shield image is displayed, the display state becomes as shown in FIG. 146(d). Similarly, in the display state shown with reference to FIG. 145(f), if a shield image is being displayed, the display state becomes as shown in FIG. 146(f).

At this time, the way the shell explodes and the color of the image of the destroyed enemy tank suggest the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot, but since these images are hidden by the shield image, the expectation that it will be a jackpot is lowered. It is now possible to make the degree difficult to recognize.

To hide the image of an enemy tank, a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710, or the explosion mode of a shell, the display priority of the shield image can be set to the image of an enemy tank, a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710, or a shell. It is recommended to set the display priority higher than the display priority of the image. Furthermore, it is preferable to set the display priority of the window in which the lines of "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Mite" are displayed to be higher than the display priority of the shield image.

Note that the operation acceptance period of the defense button 3740 is from timing t5, which is the timing when the reach effect starts, to timing t27, which is after the second destruction image of the enemy tank is displayed. Further, even if the defense button 3740 is pressed for a long time, the display of the shield image ends at the same time as the operation validity period of the defense button 3740 ends.

According to this configuration, it is possible to make the performance display that suggests the level of expectation difficult to see according to the player's preference, so it is stress-free for players who do not want to know the level of expectation. It becomes possible to provide a gaming environment.
For example, by operating the defense button 3740 at the timing when an image of an enemy tank is displayed on the right side of the display area, as shown in FIG. You can make it difficult to see depending on your preferences and mood that day.

With reference to FIGS. 145(a) to 145(f) and FIGS. 146(a) to 146(f), the color of the image of the enemy tank and the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is set to white or red. In addition to these, the configuration is configured so that a production pattern that displays an image of an enemy tank or a mock image imitating the attack button 3710 is sometimes executed due to the gold color whose expectation level is 100%. Good too. In particular, it is preferable that an image of an enemy tank or a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 be displayed the first time in a pattern in which the image is displayed twice. In this case, the player can cancel the long press of the defense button 3740 to display the image of the enemy tank for the second time, so that the shield image will not be displayed and the "shield bullet" that has been confirmed to be a jackpot will be displayed. You can enjoy the "Reach" performance.

Note that there is a possibility that the player operates the defense button 3740 by mistake for the attack button 3710. In this case, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the simulated image of the attack button 3710, the image of a moving enemy tank, the destroyed image of an enemy tank, and the image of an exploding shell, which may actually reduce the interest. be. Therefore, in this embodiment, as described above, the shield image is displayed not only when the defense button 3740 is pressed, but also when the defense button 3740 is held down for a long time. With this configuration, even if the defense button 3740 is operated by mistake, the shield image will not be displayed immediately, which can cause stress to the player who wants to see the suggestive effect. can be prevented from occurring.

Although the embodiment has been shown in which the display of the shield image ends when the long press on the defense button 3740 ends, the shield image may continue to be displayed for a predetermined number of seconds (6 seconds) after the long press ends.

When the player presses and holds the defense button 3740, the shield image gradually becomes larger in concentric circles, and when the player releases the defense button 3740, the shield image gradually becomes smaller in a concentric circle. It may be configured as follows. For example, the shield image may be configured to gradually increase in size concentrically over 2 seconds, and the shield image may gradually decrease concentrically over 2 seconds. With this configuration, even if you accidentally operate the defense button 3740, you can quickly release your hand from the defense button 3740 to display a simulated image of the attack button 3710 or an image of an enemy tank. Since the visibility of the player is restored, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a player who wants to see the suggestive performance feels stressed. In addition, by changing the display mode of the shield image in this way, the image indicating the degree of expectation can be changed from a display mode in which it is not hidden at all, a mode in which it is partially hidden, or a mode in which it is completely hidden by the shield image to a mode in which it is completely hidden by the shield image. It may be configured so that the display mode can be changed.

Although we have shown an example in which the display mode of the shield image changes based on the player's operation, the display mode of the currently displayed shield image can be changed without the player's operation. may be configured. For example, the size of the shield image can be configured to automatically increase or decrease, the shape of the shield image can be configured to change periodically, or the transparency of the shield image can be configured to change. You may. Furthermore, these display modes may be combined. In addition, by changing the display mode of the shield image in this way, the image indicating the degree of expectation (a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 or an image of an enemy tank) can be completely hidden or partially hidden by the shield image. The display mode may be configured such that the display mode can be changed from either the completely hidden mode or the completely hidden mode to another display mode.

Instead of or in addition to long-pressing the defense button 3740, a shield image may be displayed for a predetermined number of seconds when it is detected that the defense button 3740 is repeatedly pressed by the player. FIG. 144(f) is a time chart showing the effect mode modified in this way. In this time chart, the shield image is displayed in the period from timing t10 to timing t16 and from timing t18 to timing t24 based on the detection of repeated hits of the defense button 3740 by the player. It shows. Note that the condition for determining that consecutive hits have been made may be that the button is pressed four or more times in one second. Note that after the shield image is displayed, there is no need to continue hitting repeatedly, and the shield image is displayed for a predetermined number of seconds (6 seconds).
Note that instead of pressing and repeatedly pressing the defense button 3740, a configuration may be made such that when the defense button 3740 is pressed, a predetermined lottery is performed and a shield image is displayed with a probability of 1/3.

Further, the configuration may be such that a shield image is displayed when the mission button 3700 and the defense button 3740 are pressed at the same time. Alternatively, when the operation unit described with reference to FIG. 138 is employed, the shield image may be displayed when the defense button 3740 is pressed while the right lever 3730 is tilted forward.

In this way, by configuring the shield image to be displayed when a specific condition regarding the defense button 3740 is satisfied based on the operation of the defense button 3740, it is possible for the player to accidentally operate the defense button 3740. Even if this occurs, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a shield image is immediately displayed, and the visibility of the suggestive effect is not hindered.

Operation of the defense button 3740 is performed when the result of the variable display in which the tank reach effect in which only the operation of the attack button 3710 is valid indicates failure a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 or 5 times) in a row. The configuration may be such that the reception is enabled and the "shield bullet reach" in which the shield image is displayed can be executed. In addition, on the condition that the result of the variable display when "Shield Bullet Reach" is executed indicates a jackpot, the reception of the operation for the defense button 3740 will be disabled, and only the operation of the attack button 3710 will be valid. If the configuration is such that the shield image display is not displayed even if the defense button 3740 is operated until the result of the variable display that has been executed shows a failure a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 or 5 times) consecutively. good. With such a configuration, it is possible to nullify the erroneous operation of the defense button 3740 and to reduce the feeling of dissatisfaction that the player feels when the special lottery results of losing are repeated.

The display time of the shield image displayed by pressing the defense button 3740 may be set to be longer than the display time of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710. For example, in this embodiment, the enemy tank's movement time before the operation validity period is set to 2 seconds, and the display time of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is set to 3 seconds, but the display time is set to 3 seconds based on the press of the defense button 3740. The display time of the shield image may be set to 6 seconds. With this configuration, once the display of the shield image is started, the simulated image that simulates the attack button 3710 remains hidden until the display of the simulated image that simulates the attack button 3710 is finished. It is possible to reduce the operational burden on the player.

After operating the attack button 3710 or at the end of the validity period of the attack button 3710, an image of an enemy tank being destroyed and an image of an exploding shell will be displayed, but these images will also be hidden by the shield image. The display time of the shield image may be determined. For example, in this embodiment, the display time of an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of an exploding shell is 3 seconds, but the display time of a shield image displayed by pressing the defense button 3740 is 6 seconds. It's good to do that. With this configuration, an image of an enemy tank being destroyed and an image of an exploding shell can be hidden by the shield image.

In this embodiment, the display time of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is set to 3 seconds at the maximum, and the display time of the image of a destroyed enemy tank and the image of an exploding shell is set to 3 seconds, but the display time of the shield image is set to 3 seconds. The time may be longer than the total time (for example, 10 seconds). With this configuration, by displaying the shield image while the enemy tank is moving, it is possible to shield both the simulated image of the attack button 3710, the image of the enemy tank being destroyed, and the image of the shell exploding. It can be hidden by images.

The configuration may be such that the player can stop displaying the shield image that has been displayed for a predetermined period of time. For example, the display of the shield image may be configured to end by pressing the mission button 3700 or the defense button 3740 while the shield image is being displayed. With this configuration, by visually recognizing a part of the performance that suggests a high level of expectation, a player who notices that a performance indicating a high level of expectation is actually being performed can be informed of the performance. can promptly provide a situation in which the Alternatively, the display of the shield image may be automatically stopped when a suggestive effect indicating an expectation level higher than a predetermined level is started. For example, if an image of a golden enemy tank whose expectation level is 100% or a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed, the display of the shield image may be automatically stopped.

On the other hand, if the display of the shield image is configured to be canceled when a simple condition such as pressing a button is met, the production mode may be easily visible if the player incorrectly presses the button. It becomes a state. Therefore, it is preferable to stop displaying the shield image when a specific condition is satisfied based on pressing the mission button 3700 or the defense button 3740. Specifically, the same conditions as those used when starting the display of the shield image as described above may be adopted as the conditions when stopping the display of the shield image.

The configuration may be such that, while the shield image is being displayed, an operating method for canceling the display of the shield image is displayed. For example, the dialogue window for "Colonel Dyna" displays the line "You weakling! Press the mission button to release the shield!" or "You weakling! Press the defense button 3740 to release the shield!" It would be good to display a line like “!”. With such a configuration, even if the player accidentally displays the shield image, the display of the shield image can be quickly ended.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 144(e), the shield image is configured to be displayed multiple times by allowing the defense button 3740 to be operated multiple times during the validity period. . Further, as long as the defense button 3740 is held down, the display time of the shield image is extended and the shield image is continuously displayed. As a result, the image of an enemy tank, the simulated image of the attack button 3710, the image of a destroyed enemy tank, and the image of an exploding shell can all be made difficult to see.

It may be configured to be able to execute a display effect in which the shield image cannot be displayed or the display of the currently displayed shield image ends. For example, the display of the shield image ends at the timing when an image suggesting high expectations (for example, a red or gold image) is displayed, and the shield image is stopped for a predetermined period during which the image suggesting high expectations is displayed, or when an image suggesting high expectations is displayed. It may be configured such that the shield image cannot be displayed by the player until the fluctuating display of decorative symbols indicating the degree of expectation is completed. Or, during the display of the shield image, a starting prize is generated in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and based on the pre-reading result of the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by accepting the game ball. At the timing when it is decided to perform a highly anticipated performance, the display of the shield image ends, and the "shield bullet reach" performance continues until the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern targeted for pre-reading ends. At the same time, the shield image may be configured so as not to be displayed by the player. Furthermore, as a display effect in this case, an image of an enemy tank that is larger than the shield image may be displayed.
In this way, the teacher can be improved by making the shield image invisible to the player based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. Further, by displaying a predetermined image larger than the shield image, it is possible to increase the expectation that an advantageous situation will occur for the player.

In the present embodiment, the operation acceptance period for the defense button 3740 is started after the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, but the operation acceptance period for the defense button 3740 is started at the same time as the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern. You may start it. In this case, it is preferable to display the mode shown in FIG. 145(a) at timing t0.

In addition, in this embodiment, the operation acceptance period of the defense button 3740 was set to end before the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern stops, but the defense button 3740 does not operate until the end timing of the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern (timing t35). The operation acceptance of 3740 may be continued. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the manner in which the decorative symbols indicating the special lottery results are stopped, depending on the player's intention, using the shield image.

By combining these embodiments, the shield image may be configured to be displayable from the start of variation of the decorative pattern (timing t0) to the end of variation display (timing t35).

An embodiment has been shown in which the shield image is displayed for a predetermined period of time (6 seconds, etc.) under conditions such as repeated hits of the defense button 3740 or a 1/3 lottery to be held when the defense button 3740 is operated. It may be configured so that the person can set it. For example, during the demo period when the decorative symbols are not being displayed in a variable manner and the jackpot game is not in progress, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730, the display time of the shield image can be changed from 5 seconds to 60 seconds. It may be configured such that it can be set between With such a configuration, the shield image can be displayed in a manner that suits the player's mood.

The period during which the shield image can be displayed may be configured to be settable by the player based on the number of changes in the decorative pattern. For example, if 20 times is set as the number of times the decorative symbol changes, the defense button 3740 is pressed in the tank reach effect that occurs during the period from when the player makes the setting until the number of times the decorative symbol changes 20 times. By operating it, you will be able to display a shield image. On the other hand, if the player does not make the settings, the shield image will not be displayed even if the defense button 3740 is operated during the tank reach effect.

Even if the conditions for displaying the shield image again are met while the shield image is being displayed, a new shield image will not be displayed. This can prevent excessive effects from being performed. On the other hand, if the conditions for displaying the shield image again are met while the shield image is being displayed, the display time of the currently displayed shield image will be postponed starting from the timing when the conditions for displaying the shield image are met. It may be configured so that With such a configuration, it is possible to continue hiding the suggestive effect with the shield image while suppressing excessive effects.

On the other hand, if the condition for displaying the shield image again is met while the shield image is being displayed, a new shield image may be immediately displayed. In this case, the display of the currently displayed shield image may be interrupted and a new shield image may be displayed, or a new shield image may be displayed in addition to the currently displayed shield image. With such a configuration, the time during which the shield image is not displayed can be shortened, and the time during which the shield image is displayed can be easily extended.

Furthermore, it may be configured to output sound effects corresponding to the types of images of enemy tanks, the types of simulated images simulating the attack button 3710, and the types of images of explosions of artillery shells. In this case, the level of expectation will be indicated to the player by the output sound.
On the other hand, for players who do not want to know their expectations, outputting such performance sounds is not desirable. Therefore, when displaying the shield image, output of the special sound may be started at the timing when the shield image is displayed. The output of the special sound is preferably continued until the display of the shield image is finished.
Further, when outputting the special sound, the volume of the effect sound may be suppressed. It is preferable to continue suppressing the volume of the effect sound until the display of the shield image ends. Further, the volume of the special sound may be made larger than the volume of the performance sound. Alternatively, both of these may be employed.
With such a configuration, the level of expectation indicated by the sound may be difficult to hear due to the volume reduction, or the sound may be difficult to hear due to the special sound, even if the level of expectation is suggested by the sound. can be made difficult to understand.
Note that when an enemy tank appears, a predetermined effect sound that does not indicate the level of expectation may be output. In this case, the player who does not want to know the level of expectation can display the shield image and start outputting the special sound by immediately operating the defense button 3740 at the timing when the player hears the predetermined performance sound. can.

The suggestion performance may be made possible to be performed even in a game state advantageous to the player, such as a time saving state in which the variation time of decorative symbols is short, or a probability variation state in which the probability that the result of a special lottery is a jackpot is increased. In this case, the shield image may not be displayed even if the defense button 3740 is operated. With this configuration, it is possible to accidentally operate the defense button 3740 in a game state where jackpots are more likely to occur than usual, and an image of an enemy tank, a mock image imitating the attack button 3710, or an image of an enemy tank may be displayed. It is possible to prevent a destroyed image from becoming difficult to see, and to prevent a situation in which a player misses a highly anticipated performance.

On the other hand, if it is possible to perform a suggestive effect in a game state advantageous to the player, such as a time saving state or a probability fluctuation state, a shield image may be displayed in response to the operation of the defense button 3740. . With such a configuration, the suggestion performance can be hidden even in a gaming state where jackpots are more likely to occur than usual.
Alternatively, in a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, the size of the shield image may be made smaller or the display time of the shield image may be shortened compared to the normal state, thereby reducing the suggestive effects hidden by the shield image. The visibility may be slightly increased.

Furthermore, it may be possible to perform a suggestion effect during the jackpot game state. In this case, the suggestion effect is to notify the expectation level that the jackpot will occur again after the jackpot game state ends by looking ahead, or to inform you of the expectation level that the jackpot will occur again after the jackpot game state ends, or to inform you of the time saving state or probability fluctuation state that is more advantageous than the normal state after the jackpot ends. It would be good to notify the level of expectation as to whether or not the transition will be made. For example, when a 10-round jackpot is being executed, such a suggestion effect may be performed from the third round to the fifth round. With this configuration, if you accidentally operate the defense button 3740 at a timing when you can know the game state that will occur after a jackpot, the image of the enemy tank, the simulated image of the attack button 3710, and the image of the enemy tank destroyed. It is possible to prevent the displayed image from becoming difficult to see.

On the other hand, if it is possible to perform the suggestion effect during a jackpot, a shield image may be displayed in response to the operation of the defense button 3740. With such a configuration, the suggestive performance can be hidden even during a jackpot. It is possible to make it difficult for a player who does not want to know the gaming state after winning the jackpot to recognize the level of expectation regarding the gaming state after winning the jackpot.

A similar effect to the "shield bullet reach" effect in which the self-tank moves on the road may be performed over multiple variations of decorative symbols as a look-ahead effect based on the pending look-ahead in the normal state.
In this case, it is preferable that the display effect of the own tank moving on the road be performed continuously from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern to the stop of the variation a plurality of times. In addition, while the decorative patterns are changing, the expectation level of the jackpot for the reservation subject to pre-reading is suggested by the above-mentioned simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, an image of an enemy tank, an image of an exploding shell, etc. It is preferable that shield images are displayed in response to the operation of the defense button 3740, and that these images are difficult to visually recognize. The shield image may be displayed over a plurality of variable displays of decorative symbols.
Note that the pending image that is the target of prefetching may be configured to be hidden by a shield image.
In this way, it is possible to create a sense of unity in the performance by performing a suggestive performance in which the own tank moves on the road across the variations of a plurality of decorative patterns.

If a jackpot state occurs due to the "Shield Bullet Reach" effect in which your tank moves on the road, if a jackpot occurs, the display effect in which your tank moves continues during and after the jackpot condition. You can. In addition, after the jackpot gaming state occurs, the expectation level that a jackpot will occur again after the jackpot gaming state ends is notified by looking ahead, and the time-saving state and the probability that the jackpot is more advantageous than the normal state after the jackpot ends. It is preferable to notify the level of expectation as to whether or not the state will shift by indicating that the own tank moves on the road. Furthermore, if the time saving state or the probability variable state is entered after the jackpot, the suggestive effect of the own tank moving on the road may be continued until the time saving state or the probability variable state ends. In this case as well, it is preferable to configure the shield image displayed in response to the operation of the defense button 3740 to make it difficult to see the simulated image of the attack button 3710, the image of an enemy tank, the image of an exploding shell, etc. .
Further, the display of the shield image may be configured to be displayed across a variable display state of decorative symbols, a stopped display state of decorative symbols, a jackpot game state, and a variable state of decorative symbols after the jackpot game state.
Even with such a configuration, it is possible to create a sense of unity in the performance.

Although an example has been shown in which a part of the image of the enemy tank is made invisible due to the shield image, the configuration may be such that the entire image of the enemy tank is made invisible due to the shield image.
FIG. 147(a) shows a modification of the production example shown with reference to FIG. 146(e). In the production example shown in FIG. 147(a), all of the image of the enemy tank and part of the simulated image of the attack button 3710 are hidden by the shield image.

Although we have shown an example in which a part of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 becomes invisible due to the shield image, it is configured such that the entire simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 becomes invisible due to the shield image. Good too.
FIG. 147(b) shows a modification of the production example shown with reference to FIG. 146(e). In the production example shown in FIG. 147(b), part of the image of the enemy tank and the entire simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 are hidden by the shield image.

We have shown an example where the image of a destroyed enemy tank and part of the explosion mode of a shell are not visible due to the shield image, but the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the explosion mode of the shell are all visible due to the shield image. It may be configured so that it is impossible.
FIG. 147(c) shows a modification of the production example shown with reference to FIG. 146(d). In the production example shown in FIG. 147(c), the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the manner in which the shell explodes are all hidden by the shield image.

The shield image is opaque, and the images of enemy tanks that have a lower display priority than the shield image, the simulated image of the attack button 3710, the image of the destroyed enemy tank, and the manner in which the shell explodes are rendered invisible by the shield image. However, the shield image may be made semi-transparent so that these images having a low display priority can be viewed through the shield image.

In this way, the entire simulated image simulating the first operation section and the corresponding display corresponding to the operation of the operation section can be displayed in a manner hidden by the image displayed based on the operation on the second operation section. These images can hide any implied expectations.
In addition, a simulated image simulating the first operation section or a part of the corresponding display corresponding to the operation of the operation section can be displayed in a hidden manner by the image displayed based on the operation on the second operation section. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the degree of expectation shown by the images while recognizing that an image indicating the degree of expectation is being displayed using these images.
In addition, only a part of these images suggests the degree of expectation, and the part suggesting the degree of expectation is configured so that it can be partially or completely hidden by the shield image. Good too.

Although an example has been shown in which the level of expectation is indicated by the color of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710, instead of or in addition to the color of the simulated image, the shape and size of the simulated image itself may be different. Further, the shape of the simulated image itself and the size of the image may be configured to suggest the degree of expectation. Here, it is preferable to configure such that the area protruding from the shield image becomes larger when the degree of expectation is high. Further, it is preferable to adopt a similar configuration for images of enemy tanks, images of destroyed enemy tanks, and explosion modes of artillery shells. With such a configuration, when the degree of expectation is high, it is possible to make it difficult for the image indicating the degree of expectation to be hidden by the shield image.

In the displayed state where the shield image is displayed, by performing a more difficult operation (for example, pressing the defense button 3740 for a longer time or hitting it repeatedly), a larger shield image is displayed. Good too. In addition, this large shield image allows the simulated image of the attack button 3710, the image of the enemy tank, the image of the destroyed enemy tank, and the explosion mode of the shell to be hidden more than the normal shield image. It's okay.
With this configuration, the player can be involved in determining the percentage of images that suggest the degree of expectation that are hidden, thereby further increasing the level of interest.

FIGS. 148(a) to 148(d) show modified examples of the production example shown with reference to FIG. 145(c). FIG. 148(a) shows an example of a performance in which a small-sized simulated image is displayed as a simulated image of the attack button 3710. FIG. 148(b) shows an example of a performance in which a small-sized simulated image and a shield image are displayed as a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710. FIG. 148(c) shows an example of rendering in which a large-sized simulated image is displayed as a simulated image of the attack button 3710. FIG. 148(d) shows an example of a performance in which a large-sized simulated image and a shield image are displayed as a simulated image of the attack button 3710.
The expectation of a jackpot is higher when a large-sized simulated image is displayed as a simulated image of the attack button 3710 than when a small-sized simulated image is displayed as a simulated image of the attack button 3710. It is configured to be high.
With this configuration, when a simulated image with a high level of expectation is displayed, the area of the simulated image that is not hidden by the shield image increases, allowing the player to see that the level of expectation is high. can be recognized.
Note that the image is not limited to the simulated image, and the image of an enemy tank or a destroyed enemy tank may be configured to similarly indicate the degree of expectation by varying the shape and size of the image.

Examples have been shown in which the level of expectation is suggested by a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, an image of an enemy tank, an image of a destroyed enemy tank, and an image of an exploding shell. It may also be applied to embodiments in images. Alternatively, an embodiment applied to a certain plurality of images may be applied to an embodiment applied to another plurality of images.

An example was shown in which the level of expectation is suggested by a simulated image of the attack button 3710, an image of an enemy tank, an image of a destroyed enemy tank, and an image of an exploding shell. It may be configured as suggested. In this case, it is preferable to configure at least a portion of the shield image to be hidden. With such a configuration, it is possible to grasp the progress of the performance while making it impossible or difficult to recognize the level of expectation.

As described above, according to the "shield bullet reach" in this embodiment, the predetermined image indicating the level of expectation related to the first operation section can be made difficult to see by the image displayed by the operation of the second operation section. Therefore, it is possible to provide players who do not want to know their expectation level with the option of hiding their expectation level, and it is possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game.

Conventionally, gaming machines provided with a plurality of operation sections have been known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-087638). Further, the valid period during which operations on the operating section can be accepted is limited to a part of the period during which the decorative pattern is changing. Therefore, even if some players have an increased desire to operate the operation section, they may feel irritated by not being able to operate the operation section. Furthermore, if an operation is performed during the valid period, a display effect corresponding to the operation is always performed, so the user may feel sluggish when operating the operation section. Therefore, in the embodiment shown below, in consideration of the existence of players who think in this way, an operating means that can be operated for a long period of time while the decorative symbols are changing is provided, and an operating means that corresponds to operations on the operating section is provided. Therefore, a display change is not always applied, but a special display change is added only when a specific condition is met.

An embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 144 and the like will be described below with reference to time charts shown in FIGS. 149 to 152, display examples shown in FIGS. 153 and 154, and the like. In the "Special Machine Gun Reach" effect in this embodiment, the functions and displays related to the attack button 3710 are displayed in the same way as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 144.
On the other hand, in the "Special Machine Gun Reach" performance, a performance pattern is executed in which operation reception for the mission button 3700 is valid instead of the defense button 3740. The operation reception of the mission button 3700 becomes valid at the timing (timing t5) when the decorative pattern becomes the reach state and the reach effect in which the own tank moves starts (timing t5). The operation reception ends at timing t27, which is the timing after the enemy tank is displayed twice.

The period during which operation reception for the mission button 3700 is valid (timing t5 to timing t27) is longer than the period during which operation reception for the attack button 3710 is valid (timing t11 to timing t14), and the operation reception for the mission button 3700 is valid. This period includes a period during which operation acceptance for the attack button 3710 is valid. Further, as described above, the attack button 3710 is always given a display change in response to an operation accepted during the valid operation period. On the other hand, even if the mission button 3700 is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not necessarily performed, but the display changes displayed in the display area at a predetermined probability (for example, 1/3 probability). will be granted. For example, each time the mission button 3700 is operated, a lottery is drawn with a probability of 1/3 of winning, and if a winning result is obtained, a bullet fired from a special machine gun will be displayed in the display area. An image of the explosion occurring when the object was hit is displayed for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is continuously displayed during the period when operation reception of the mission button 3700 is valid (timing t5 to timing t27), indicating that the operation of the mission button 3700 is within the valid period. It will be done.

The time chart in FIG. 149 shows an example of the effect when neither the attack button 3710 nor the mission button 3700 is operated.
In the time chart shown in FIG. 149, the variable display of decorative symbols starts at timing t0. From timing t0 to timing t5, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner as shown in FIG. 139(b). At timing t5, as shown in FIG. 139(c), a pattern in which the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are the same (in this embodiment, the pattern consisting of the number "3") is temporarily stopped and displayed, and a reach state occurs. Then, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are reduced and displayed at the upper left of the display area. At the same time, an image of the own tank moving forward on the road is displayed in the display area. Further, during the period from timing t5 to timing t27, operation acceptance of the mission button 3700 is valid.

FIG. 153(a) shows a state in which an image of the own tank is displayed in the display area at timing t5. Each decorative symbol ("3", "↓", "3") in reach state will be displayed at the top left of the display area, the image of your own tank will be displayed at the bottom center of the display area, and your tank will move to the center of the display area in the horizontal direction. An image of the road is displayed at the top of the display area, an image of the horizon and the sky is displayed at the bottom right of the display area, a line image of the production character ``Colonel Dyna'' is displayed at the bottom right of the display area, and a window image surrounding the line image is displayed at the bottom left of the display area. The dialogue image of the production character "Sergeant Might" and the window image surrounding the dialogue image are in a state where a mock image imitating the mission button 3700 is displayed in the upper left of the window image that displays the dialogue image of "Colonel Dyna". It shows.

As shown in the lines of "Colonel Dyna" in Figure 153(a), by operating the mission button 3700, a bullet is fired from the own tank's special machine gun and displayed moving, but details will be described later. do.

At timing t9, the image of the white enemy tank starts to be displayed at the upper right of the display area, and is displayed moving to the left. FIG. 145(b) shows a state in which the image of the enemy tank is moving to the left toward the road at timing t10.

At timing t11, the image of the white enemy tank that has moved from right to left within the display area is positioned on the road. At the same time, operation reception of the attack button 3710 is enabled, and a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed to the right of the lines of "Might Sergeant". The valid operation period of the attack button 3710 continues for 3 seconds from timing t11 to timing t14.

FIG. 153(b) shows a state in which a white simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and a white enemy tank image are displayed on the road in the display area at timing t11. Further, FIG. 153(c) shows a state in which a white simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and a white image of an enemy tank are displayed on the road in the display area at timing t12.

At timing t14, the image of the enemy tank enters a display state in which it has reached the left end of the road. Furthermore, the valid period of operation for attack button 3710 ends. FIG. 153(d) shows the display state at timing t14.

From timing t14 to timing t16, the image of the enemy tank continues to move to the left in the display area, and at timing t16, the image of the enemy tank moves out of the screen and is no longer displayed.

The operational validity period of the mission button 3700 and the display of the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 continue until timing t27. At timing t27, the operational validity period of the mission button 3700 and the display of the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 end.

Thereafter, from timing t32 to timing t34, the display mode becomes as shown in FIG. 139(f), and at timing t34, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. If the special lottery result is a loss, the display state is shown in FIG. 139(g) from timing t34 to timing t35, and if the special lottery result is a jackpot, the display state is shown in FIG. 139(h) from timing t34 to timing t35. The display state shown in is obtained.

With reference to the time chart of FIG. 149, an example of the effect when the player does not operate the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is shown.

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 150, an example of the effect when the player operates the attack button 3710 will be shown.

The time chart in FIG. 150 shows an example of the effect when the attack button 3710 is operated at timing t12. In this case, from timing t12 to timing t13, a display of the shell moving is performed. FIG. 153(e) shows a display example when the shell is moving. Further, the valid operation period of the attack button 3710 ends at timing t12, which is the timing when the attack button 3710 is operated.

At timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to an image of a destroyed enemy tank. Additionally, an image of the shell exploding is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding shell are displayed for 3 seconds (in this production example, 3 seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). FIG. 153(f) is a display example showing a state in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of an exploding shell are displayed.

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 151, an example of the effect when the player operates the mission button 3700 will be shown.

The time chart in FIG. 151 shows an example of the effect when the mission button 3700 is operated at timing t12. FIG. 151(a) is a time chart showing an example of an effect in which an operation on the mission button 3700 is performed, a bullet is fired from a special machine gun, and an image of the bullet exploding is displayed. Further, FIG. 151(b) is a time chart showing an example of an effect in which an operation is performed on the mission button 3700 and a bullet is fired from the special machine gun, but an image of the bullet exploding is not displayed.

In the case of the production example shown in FIG. 151(a), a display in which a bullet fired from a special machine gun moves is performed from timing t12 to timing t13. FIG. 154(a) shows an example of a display when a bullet is moving. Note that the valid operation period of the attack button 3710 ends at timing t14.

The production example shown in FIG. 151(a) is a production example in which a lottery result based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is won (selected with a probability of 1/3), and an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed. It is. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to an image of a destroyed enemy tank. Additionally, an image of the bullet exploding is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding bullet are displayed for 3 seconds (in this production example, 3 seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). FIG. 154(b) is a display example showing a state in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of an exploding bullet are displayed.

On the other hand, the production example shown in FIG. 151(b) is a production in which the lottery performed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 results in a loss (selected with a probability of 2/3), and the image of the destroyed enemy tank is not displayed. This is an example. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank does not change to the image of the destroyed enemy tank, and the image of the enemy tank continues to move to the left. Further, an image of the bullet exploding is not displayed. FIG. 154(c) is a display example in a state where the image of the enemy tank continues to move to the left without changing to the image of the destroyed enemy tank (for example, at timing t14).

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 152, an example of the effect when the player operates both the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 will be shown.

The time chart in FIG. 152 shows an example of the effect when the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 are operated simultaneously at timing t12. FIG. 152(a) is a time chart showing an example of an effect in which an image of an exploding bullet is displayed when the mission button 3700 is operated. Further, FIG. 152(b) is a time chart showing an example of a performance in which an image of an exploding bullet is not displayed even though the mission button 3700 is operated.

In the case of the example shown in FIG. 152(a), from timing t12 to timing t13, a display in which a cannonball fired from a cannon turret moves and a display in which a bullet fired from a special machine gun moves are performed. FIG. 154(d) shows an example of a display in which a cannonball and a bullet are moving. Further, at timing t12, the operational validity period of attack button 3710 ends.

The production example shown in FIG. 152(a) is a production example in which a lottery result based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is won (selected with a probability of 1/3), and an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed. It is. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to an image of a destroyed enemy tank. Also, an image of an exploding shell and an image of an exploding bullet are displayed. An image of a destroyed enemy tank, an image of an exploding shell, and an image of an exploding bullet are displayed for 3 seconds (in this production example, 3 seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). FIG. 154(e) is a display example showing a state in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank, an image of an exploding bullet, and an image of an exploding shell are displayed.

On the other hand, in the production example shown in FIG. 152(b), the lottery performed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 results in a loss (selected with a probability of 2/3), and an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed. This is an example of production. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to an image of a destroyed enemy tank. Additionally, an image of the shell exploding is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding shell are displayed for 3 seconds (in this production example, 3 seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). FIG. 154(f) is a display example showing a state in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of an exploding shell are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 154(e), the size of the image of the exploding bullet displayed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is larger than the size of the image of the exploding shell displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710. It's also big. Further, an image of an exploding shell displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710 is set to have a higher display priority than an image of a destroyed enemy tank. Further, an image of an exploding bullet displayed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is set to have a higher display priority than an image of an exploding shell displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710.
With such a configuration, it is possible to make a display change that is not necessarily given noticeable based on the operation of the mission button 3700. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to overlook the display change imparted in this manner.

When the player operates the attack button 3710, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed in response to the operation. Therefore, during the performance of moving the tank, the player operates the attack button 3710 to display the explosion image and changes the image of the enemy tank to a destroyed display mode, and then operates the mission button 3700. , an additional explosion image can be added to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. On the other hand, the player can change the image of an enemy tank to an image of a destroyed enemy tank by operating only the mission button 3700 without operating the attack button 3710.

Display modes (color, size, shape, etc.) of images of destroyed enemy tanks, simulated images of the mission button 3700, simulated images of the attack button 3710, images of exploding shells, and images of exploding bullets. It is preferable that at least one of them indicates the degree of expectation of a jackpot. Specifically, it is preferable to adopt a method similar to the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 144 (color, size, shape, etc. of each image). Note that these images do not have to indicate the degree of expectation of a jackpot.

According to this configuration, when the mission button 3700 is operated and a specific condition (a 1/3 lottery win) is met, the image of the enemy tank is changed to the image of a destroyed enemy tank. It can be changed. Additionally, an image of a bullet exploding can be added to an image of a destroyed enemy tank. Then, by providing such a display change, the player feels that the operation on the mission button 3700 has been rewarded, and feels great joy for having worked so hard to make the display change appear. It can improve your interest.

The explosion image displayed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is configured to have a higher display priority than the explosion image displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710. With this configuration, in addition to operating the mission button 3700, the visibility of the image that is displayed only when a specific condition (1/3 lottery win) is achieved is ensured, and the mission button 3700 is operated. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the visibility of the displayed image is obstructed by the operation of 3700 and the player feels dissatisfied.

A plurality of modes with different appearance ratios may be displayed as modes of display change performed in the display area in response to the operation of the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700. For example, there are three destroyed images of enemy tanks with different degrees of destruction, and the probability that the destroyed image with a high degree of destruction will be displayed is 10%, and the probability that the destroyed image with a medium degree of destruction will be displayed. The destroyed image may be selected and displayed so that the probability of displaying a destroyed image with a small degree of destruction is 30% and 60%. Furthermore, a destroyed image of an enemy tank with an extremely large degree of destruction may be provided, which is displayed with an extremely low probability (1%) only when the mission button 3700 is operated. According to this, even rarer display change grants are shown to the player when a display change grant is made to appear with difficulty. In place of or in addition to the destruction image, a similar display may be performed on the explosion image.

If the player does not operate the attack button 3710, a cannonball is automatically fired from the turret at the end of the valid operation period of the attack button 3710 (timing t14), and the shell is automatically fired without the player having to operate it. The configuration may be such that a destroyed image of an enemy tank is displayed. With this configuration, the player can concentrate on operating the mission button 3700.

In this embodiment, when an enemy tank is not displayed, the mission button 3700 is operated, a bullet is fired from the special machine gun of the own tank, and a display is performed in which the fired bullet hits the road and explodes. Is possible. For example, by operating the mission button 3700 at timing t5, a display is performed in which the bullets fired from timing t5 to timing t6 move. In addition, if the 1/3 lottery is won, an image of a fired bullet hitting the ground and exploding is displayed for 3 seconds from timing t6 to timing t9.
Note that the operation timing that can result in an image of a moving enemy tank being destroyed by a bullet fired based on the operation of the mission button 3700 may be from timing t9 to timing t16, which is the movement period of the enemy tank. It may be set from timing t11 to timing t14, which is the valid operation period of attack button 3710.

On the other hand, before the attack button 3710 is operated, the player operates the mission button 3700 to win the 1/3 lottery, and a display is displayed in which a bullet fired from the special machine gun of the own tank hits an enemy tank and explodes. In this case, even if the attack button 3710 is operated during the valid operation period of the attack button 3710, an image of a shell moving or an image of a shell exploding corresponding to the operation of the attack button 3710 may not be displayed. It may be configured so that it is not performed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to create an effect in which the player feels as if he has defeated an enemy tank with his own strength, and the player is able to experience the effect of displaying an image of exploding bullets, which is an effect that has been made with great effort. can increase their sense of satisfaction. Furthermore, since the image of the exploding shell is not displayed, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the image of the exploding bullet, which is an effect that has been made to appear through operation of the mission button 3700.
Note that if the mission button 3700 is operated in a situation where an image of an exploding shell corresponding to the operation of the attack button 3710 and an image of a destroyed enemy tank are displayed, an image corresponding to the operation of the mission button 3700 will be displayed. It is a good idea to add an image of the bullet exploding. In this case, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction as if he was able to destroy more enemy tanks.

Similar to the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 144 and the like, the degree of expectation may be suggested by the color of the enemy tank or the destruction mode of the enemy tank. In this case, it is preferable that at least a portion of the color of the enemy tank and the destruction mode of the enemy tank be visually recognized by the image of the exploding bullet displayed by operating the mission button 3700. With such a configuration, visibility of the indicated expectation level can be ensured.
In addition, if the suggestion performance has low expectations, the bullet will explode by operating the mission button 3700 during a predetermined period after the completion of the suggestion performance (for example, from timing t16 to timing t27). Since the displayed image can be displayed once or multiple times, it is possible to recover the interest in the game that has decreased due to the execution of a performance with a low level of expectation.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the mission button 3700 is operated, in addition to the mission button 3700, the right lever 3730 and the left lever 3720 can also be operated, and the direction of the special machine gun can be changed from side to side by the right lever 3730 and left lever 3720. It may be possible to do so. If the special machine gun is facing the enemy tank, the probability of winning the lottery when the mission button 3700 is operated is set to 1/2, which is a higher chance of winning than 1/3, or the special machine gun If the tank is not facing the enemy tank, the probability of winning the lottery when the mission button 3700 is operated may be set to 1/10, which is less likely to win than 1/3. Furthermore, if the operation mode of the right lever 3730 or the left lever 3720 is very appropriate, the probability of winning the lottery may be set to 100%. Conversely, if the operation mode of the right lever 3730 or the left lever 3720 is extremely inappropriate, the probability of winning the lottery may be set to 0%.
In this case, the player aims to display the enemy tank in a destroyed state by operating the mission button 3700 while operating the right lever 3730 and the left lever 3720, which makes the game more immersive. It becomes possible to obtain. Furthermore, when an image of destroying an enemy tank is displayed, the user feels a great sense of accomplishment.

Note that the game parlor may be configured so that when the mission button 3700 is operated, the probability of winning the lottery can be changed. Alternatively, the real-time clock function may be used to change the probability of winning the lottery on a weekly basis when the mission button 3700 is operated. With such a configuration, it is possible to set the appearance rate of performances according to the tendencies of players visiting the store. For example, the probability of winning the lottery may be changed cyclically from 0%, 30%, 100%, 50%, 0%, etc. every day.

The mission button 3700 may be configured to have a situation in which an operation instruction is displayed and a situation in which an operation instruction is not displayed during a period in which operation acceptance is valid. For example, a performance pattern that displays a simulated image that simulates the mission button 3700 and a performance pattern that does not display a simulated image that simulates the mission button 3700 may be configured to be executable.

Such selection of performance patterns may be configured so that the clerk at the game parlor can select which performance pattern to execute, or a real-time clock function may be used to select which performance pattern to execute. may be configured to change every month. For example, for one month after the introduction of the Pachinko machine 1, only the production pattern that does not display operation instructions can be executed, and after one month has passed since the introduction of the Pachinko machine 1, the production pattern that does not display the operation instructions can be executed. It is preferable that both of the performance patterns for displaying operation instructions are configured to be executable. Alternatively, when executing "Special Machine Gun Reach", it is preferable to select either a performance pattern in which the operation instruction is not displayed or a performance pattern in which the operation instruction is displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, a 50/50 probability).

With such a configuration, in the case of a performance pattern in which no operation instruction is displayed, the display content in the display area can be simplified. Furthermore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player who is not accustomed to the game becomes confused by being shown multiple operation instructions. On the other hand, a player who is accustomed to the game can operate the mission button 3700 even when no operation instruction display is displayed, fire a bullet from the special machine gun of his own tank, and explode when the fired bullet hits him. It becomes possible to display the mode in which the

An example has been shown in which a 1/3 lottery is performed in response to the operation of the mission button 3700, but in this case, the player who expects the display change to be given will press the mission button 3700 repeatedly. On the other hand, if the mission button 3700 is simply pressed repeatedly, there is a problem in that the player gets bored. Therefore, it may be configured such that the 1/3 lottery is performed by other operation modes, for example, by pressing and holding the mission button 3700. In this case, for example, it may be configured such that a lottery is drawn once every time the mission button 3700 is pressed for one second.

Furthermore, it is preferable to instruct the player which operation is required for the production pattern at the timing when operation acceptance of the mission button 3700 becomes possible. For example, in the case of a production pattern that requires repeated pressing of the mission button 3700, "Colonel Dyna"'s line is displayed as "Press the mission button 3700 repeatedly!", and in the case of a production pattern that requires a long press of the mission button 3700, In such a case, it is preferable to display the line ``Press and hold the mission button 3700!'' as a line for ``Colonel Dyna.''

With this configuration, the player does not have to operate the mission button 3700 aimlessly, but instead feels a sense of excitement as to which performance pattern will be executed and which operating instruction will be presented. In addition, the number of times you can win the lottery is smaller when you press and hold the button repeatedly (generally, you can press repeatedly several times per second), so in production patterns that require a long press, If the enemy tank is displayed in an exploding manner, the player will feel a greater sense of accomplishment. By providing a plurality of performance patterns with different levels of difficulty in displaying images in this way, it is possible to improve the game's interest.
Note that the appearance ratio of performance patterns that require repeated hits and performance patterns that require long presses may be configured so that it can be selected by the staff at the game parlor, or may be set using a real-time clock function. may be configured.

Furthermore, when the player executes an operation mode different from the operation instruction mode for the mission button 3700, an effect pattern may be implemented in which a bullet is displayed being fired from the special machine gun.

For example, if the mission button 3700 is pressed repeatedly according to the operation instructions in a production pattern that displays "Map the mission button 3700 repeatedly!", the display to fire the special machine gun will not be displayed, and the operation instructions will not be displayed. When a long press is performed, which is a different operation, a lottery will be drawn with a 1/2 probability of winning each time the mission button 3700 is pressed for 1 second, and if the lottery is won, a display will be displayed to fire a special machine gun. It is recommended to configure the system so that it is performed.

On the other hand, if the mission button 3700 is pressed and held according to the operation instructions in a production pattern that displays "Press and hold the mission button 3700," the display to fire the special machine gun will not be displayed, and the display will not match the operation instructions. If you perform multiple hits, which is a different operation, a lottery will be drawn with a 1/2 probability of winning each time the mission button 3700 is pressed, and if you win the lottery, a display will fire a special machine gun. It is recommended that the configuration be configured so that this is performed.

It may be configured such that images of exploding bullets in different formats (preferably different colors and shapes) are displayed when the button is pressed for a long time and when the button is pressed repeatedly.

Furthermore, a performance pattern is executed that does not instruct the operation mode of the mission button 3700, which displays the line ``I wonder what I should do with the mission button to fire the special machine gun...'' as a line for ``Colonel Dyna''. It may be possible to configure. Note that internally, as a performance pattern, either a performance pattern that requires a long press of the mission button 3700 or a performance pattern that requires repeated hits of the mission button 3700 may be executed. Furthermore, if the operation mode provided by the player is different from the required operation mode, "Colonel Dyna" will say, "I remember! To fire the special machine gun, press the mission button repeatedly!" or ``I remember! To shoot the special machine gun, press and hold the mission button!'' may be displayed to prompt the player to perform an appropriate operation. In this way, there are cases where the operation that the player performed after estimating the operation mode was an appropriate operation mode, or when the operation that the player performed after estimating the operation mode was inappropriate and the appropriate operation mode was If the player performs an appropriate operation mode after the instruction is displayed, an image of a bullet exploding in a special mode different from that when the instruction for the operation mode has been displayed in advance is configured to be displayed. It's okay. Additionally, different special sound effects may be output in response to each exploding image.

With such a configuration, it is possible to satisfy the rebellious spirit of players who feel as if they are constantly being commanded by the gaming machine. Alternatively, it is possible to give surprise and satisfaction to a player who accidentally or intentionally performs an operation different from the instruction. Furthermore, since the player plays the game while guessing the operation mode for the operating section, it is possible to increase the activeness of participating in the game. Furthermore, the second operation section may have a display mode in which the operation instructions are not necessarily clearly displayed, and in this case, the user's satisfaction with the operation performed by himself/herself will further improve.

We have shown an example in which a special machine gun is displayed when a special machine gun is fired when a specific condition is met by holding down or repeatedly pressing the mission button 3700 to draw a lottery, but the specific condition can also be achieved by other methods. It may be configured as follows. For example, in a performance pattern that requires a long press of the mission button 3700, a display may be made in which, when the mission button 3700 is held down for 10 seconds, a bullet is fired from a special machine gun. Alternatively, in a performance pattern that requires repeated pressing of the mission button 3700, a display may be made in which a bullet is fired from the special machine gun when the mission button 3700 can be pressed 16 times or more in one second. Good too.

The attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 have the same operation mode in terms of being pressed. Therefore, instead of pressing the mission button 3700, by rotating the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 once clockwise or counterclockwise, the lottery will be performed and a bullet will be fired from the special machine gun with a probability of 1/3. The configuration may be such that a display is performed. Alternatively, the display may be such that a bullet is fired from the special machine gun by rotating the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 clockwise or counterclockwise multiple times (for example, three rotations). .

The configuration may be such that operations on the mission button 3700 can always be accepted while the decorative symbols are changing. With this configuration, the mission button 3700 can be operated by a player who feels helpless and angry because the variable display result shows a highly expected reach but the variable display result is a failure. By doing so, such resentment can be alleviated. For example, while displaying a decorative pattern that has been stopped due to a loss, it is possible to relieve one's worries by attacking the decorative pattern.
Further, it is preferable to configure such that the applied display change does not end even if the next variable display after the unsuccessful variable display starts. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where the display of the image of a bullet exploding, which was displayed to relieve the player's worries, is forcibly interrupted and the player feels further dissatisfied. In addition, in this way, if it is determined that the display of the image of a bullet exploding straddles the variation of the decorative pattern, the "special machine gun reach" is executed again at timing t0, which is the start of the variation of the next decorative pattern. It may be configured as follows. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an unnatural state of presentation.

Note that whether or not a bullet is fired by operating the mission button 3700 may also be determined by lottery. For example, the configuration may be such that a bullet is fired with a probability of 1/2 and a bullet is not fired with a probability of 1/2.

According to the present embodiment, when the mission button 3700 is operated and specific conditions are met, the display content of the display area is changed, so the player does not have to worry about it. You will feel a sense of satisfaction that the display has come to fruition. Further, even if the displayed result from the operation on the attack button 3710 is undesirable for the player and the player feels dissatisfied with the displayed result, the display based on the operation on the mission button 3700 is performed. This alleviates the dissatisfaction felt by the player. In particular, since the mission button 3700 is allowed to be operated multiple times, a display corresponding to the operation will eventually be displayed, which is effective in alleviating the dissatisfaction felt by the player.

Conventionally, gaming machines provided with a plurality of operation sections have been known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-087638). In addition, at the timing when the operation on the operation panel becomes effective, a sound effect indicating that the operation can be accepted or that the operation can be accepted is output, or when the operation is accepted at the timing when the operation is performed. A gaming machine that outputs a sound effect that indicates a game is known. However, there was room for further improvement in terms of presentation. Below, when operation reception on the operation unit is enabled, no sound effect is output even if an operation is performed on the operation unit, and when specific conditions are met, an operation response reception display is displayed. , shows an embodiment in which a special sound is output.

Below, an embodiment related to a "silent machine gun reach" that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 149 and the like will be described with reference to FIG. 155 and the like. Note that, except for the output of sound effects such as voices, substantially the same display as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 149 and the like is performed in the display area. Note that various modifications of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 149 and the like can be applied to this embodiment. Note that the "silent machine gun" in this embodiment is an improvement on the "special machine gun" in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 149, etc., and is set so that the firing sound when firing a bullet is extremely low.

The time chart in FIG. 155 is a diagram showing a situation in which neither the attack button 3710 nor the mission button 3700 is operated. As shown in FIG. 155, in this embodiment, the attack button 3710 can be operated for a predetermined period (from timing t9 to timing t11) immediately before the timing when the attack button 3710 operation is enabled. A sound effect "preparing to fire a cannon", which is a premonitory sound, is output. Furthermore, at timing t11 when the acceptance of the operation of the attack button 3710 becomes valid, output of the voice "OK", which is a valid sound indicating that the acceptance of the operation is valid, is started. The voice "OK" is output from timing t11 to timing t12. The operational validity period of the attack button 3710 ends at timing t14. At timing t14, when the operation acceptance period for the attack button 3710 ends, a voice saying "Stop preparing the cannon", which is an end sound indicating that the operation acceptance period for the attack button 3710 has ended, is output from timing t14 to timing t16. be exposed.
On the other hand, regarding the mission button 3700, the valid operation period starts at timing t5 and ends at timing t27, but the sound effects are not output according to the start of the valid operation period or the end of the valid operation period. Not done.

FIG. 159(a) shows a state in which an image of the own tank is displayed in the display area at timing t5.
As shown in the lines of "Colonel Dyna" in Figure 159(a), by operating the mission button 3700, a bullet is fired from the silent machine gun of the own tank and displayed moving. This will be explained later.

159 and 160 show display examples in the display area, and the type of audio that is output (or is being output) when the display state is reached is indicated in the upper right part of the figure. ing. For example, the character string "\OK/" is written in the upper right corner of the display example shown in FIG. 159(c). This indicates that the sound is being outputted (or is being outputted).

At timing t9, an image of a white enemy tank is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area. Further, from timing t9 to timing t11, a voice saying "preparing to fire cannon" is output. FIG. 159(b) shows a state in which an image of a white enemy tank is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area at timing t9.

At timing t11, an image of an enemy tank is displayed on the road. At the same time, the operation validity period of attack button 3710 starts. Furthermore, a voice saying "OK" is output from timing t11 to timing t12. FIG. 159(c) shows a state in which an image of an enemy tank is displayed on the road at timing t11.

FIG. 159(c) shows the display state at timing t12.

At timing t14, the image of the enemy tank enters a display state in which it has reached the left end of the road. Furthermore, the valid operation period of the attack button 3710 ends. Further, from timing t14 to timing t16, a voice saying "Stop preparing cannons~" is output. FIG. 159(d) shows the display state at timing t14.

The time chart in FIG. 156 is a diagram showing an example of a performance in which the attack button 3710 is operated and the mission button 3700 is not operated during the valid operation period. As shown in FIG. 156, when the attack button 3710 is operated at a predetermined timing (timing t12 in this production example) during the valid operation period of the attack button 3710, the sound of a cannonball being fired from a cannon is heard. After a certain sound effect of "Zudoon" is output for a predetermined time (timing t12 to timing t13), a sound effect of "boom", which is the sound of a shell hitting a tank and exploding, is output for a predetermined time (timing t12 to timing t13). t13 to timing t15) is performed.

From timing t12 to timing t13, a display of the shell moving is performed. FIG. 159(f) shows a display example when the shell is moving. Further, at timing t12, the operational validity period of attack button 3710 ends.

At timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to an image of a destroyed enemy tank. Additionally, an image of the shell exploding is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding shell are displayed for 3 seconds (in this production example, 3 seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). Further, from timing t13 to timing t15, a sound effect called "boom", which is the sound of a shell exploding, is output. FIG. 159(g) is a display example showing a state in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of an exploding shell are displayed.

The time chart in FIG. 157 shows an example of the effect when the attack button 3710 is not operated but the mission button 3700 is operated. When the mission button 3700 is operated, as described above, there are cases where the enemy tank can be destroyed and cases where the enemy tank cannot be destroyed. FIG. 157(a) shows an example of the effect when the enemy tank can be destroyed, and FIG. 157(b) shows an example of the effect when the enemy tank cannot be destroyed. As described above, the probability that an enemy tank can be destroyed is 1/3, and the probability that an enemy tank cannot be destroyed is 2/3. If the enemy tank is destroyed, an image of the enemy tank's destruction is displayed and at the same time a sound effect called ``boom'', which is the sound of a bullet exploding when it hits the enemy tank, is output. On the other hand, if the enemy tank cannot be destroyed, no sound effect is output.
Note that in the production example shown in FIG. 157, since the attack button 3710 is not operated, the same sound effect as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 155 is output.

In the case of the production example shown in FIG. 157(a), a display in which a bullet fired from a silent machine gun moves is performed from timing t12 to timing t13. FIG. 160(a) shows an example of a display when a bullet is moving. Note that the valid operation period of the attack button 3710 ends at timing t14.

The production example shown in FIG. 157(a) is a production example in which a lottery result based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is won (selected with a probability of 1/3), and an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed. It is. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to an image of a destroyed enemy tank. Additionally, an image of the bullet exploding is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding bullet are displayed for 3 seconds (in this production example, 3 seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). Further, from timing t13 to timing t15, a sound effect called "boom", which is the sound of a bullet hitting an enemy tank and exploding, is output. FIG. 160(b) is a display example showing a state (for example, timing t14) in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of an exploding bullet are displayed.

On the other hand, the production example shown in FIG. 157(b) is a production in which the lottery performed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 results in a loss (selected with a probability of 2/3), and the image of the destroyed enemy tank is not displayed. This is an example. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank continues to move to the left without changing to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. Further, an image of the bullet exploding is not displayed. Furthermore, no sound is output in response to the firing of a bullet. FIG. 160(c) is a display example in a state where the image of the enemy tank continues to move to the left without changing to the image of the destroyed enemy tank (for example, at timing t14).

The time chart in FIG. 158 is a diagram showing a situation in which both the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 are operated. In this case, in response to the operation of the attack button 3710, a sound effect similar to the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 156 is output. Furthermore, in response to the operation of the mission button 3700, a sound effect similar to the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 157 is output.

The time chart in FIG. 158 shows an example of the effect when the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 are operated simultaneously at timing t12. FIG. 158(a) is a time chart showing an example of an effect in which an image of an exploding bullet is displayed when the mission button 3700 is operated. Further, FIG. 158(b) is a time chart showing an example of a performance in which an image of an exploding bullet is not displayed even though the mission button 3700 is operated.

In the case of the example shown in FIG. 158(a), from timing t12 to timing t13, a display in which a cannonball fired from a cannon turret moves and a display in which a bullet fired from a silent machine gun moves are performed. Additionally, a sound effect called ``Zudon'', which is the sound of a cannonball being fired from a cannon, is output. FIG. 160(d) shows an example of a display in which a cannonball and a bullet are moving. Further, at timing t12, the operational validity period of attack button 3710 ends.

The production example shown in FIG. 158(a) is a production example in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed as a result of a winning lottery (selected with a probability of 1/3) based on the operation of the mission button 3700. It is. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to an image of a destroyed enemy tank. Also, an image of an exploding shell and an image of an exploding bullet are displayed. An image of a destroyed enemy tank, an image of an exploding shell, and an image of an exploding bullet are displayed for 3 seconds (in this production example, 3 seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). Further, from timing t13 to timing t15, a sound effect called "boom", which is the sound of a bullet hitting an enemy tank and exploding, is output. At the same time, a sound effect called ``boom'', which is the sound of a shell exploding when it hits an enemy tank, is output. FIG. 160(e) is a display example showing a state (for example, timing t14) in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank, an image of an exploding bullet, and an image of an exploding shell are displayed.

On the other hand, in the production example shown in FIG. 158(b), the lottery performed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 results in a loss (selected with a probability of 2/3), and an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed. This is an example of production. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to an image of a destroyed enemy tank. Additionally, an image of the shell exploding is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding shell are displayed for 3 seconds (in this production example, 3 seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). Further, from timing t13 to timing t15, a sound "boom", which is the sound of a shell hitting an enemy tank and exploding, is output. FIG. 160(f) is a display example showing a state (for example, timing t14) in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of an exploding shell are displayed.

It is preferable that the volume of the sound effect "boom" output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is higher than the volume of the sound effect "boom" output based on the operation of the attack button 3710. In FIGS. 160(b) and 160(e), the loudness of the sound effect "boom" is indicated by increasing the font size of the characters "\boom/".
Further, during the period (timing t13 to timing t15) in which the sound effect "boom" that is output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is output, the volume of the fluctuating effect sound such as BGM may be suppressed. .
In addition, when the sound effect "thump" is output based on the operation of the mission button 3700, the sound effect "thump" that would normally be output when the attack button 3710 is operated is not output. Alternatively, if the output is already in progress, the output may be interrupted and the output of the sound effect "boom" based on the operation of the mission button 3700 may be started.
Further, it is preferable that the period for outputting the sound effect "thump" that is output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is longer than the sound effect "thump" that is output based on the operation of the attack button 3710. For example, the period for outputting the sound effect "thud" that is output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is three times the period for outputting the sound effect "thump" that is output based on the operation of the attack button 3710. It may be a certain 6 seconds. Further, the sound effect (the sound effect "boom") that is output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 may be output multiple times. For example, the sound effect "boom" may be output three times in six seconds. Further, the image of the bullet exploding may be displayed multiple times. For example, it may be configured to display an image of a bullet exploding three times in six seconds.
Furthermore, the sound effects output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 and the sound effects output based on the operation of the attack button 3710 may be different. For example, based on the operation of the mission button 3700, a sound effect called "bokaan" may be output.
In addition, the display and sound effects that are displayed and output based on the operation of the attack button 3710 are visible and heard by the player once for each player operation that satisfies the conditions. However, the display displayed and the sound effect output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 are made so that the player can see and hear them multiple times at least twice for each player operation that satisfies the conditions. You can.

In this way, for the attack button 3710, a sound effect indicating that the operation can be accepted, a sound effect indicating that the operation can be accepted, and a sound effect indicating that the operation has been accepted are output. .
On the other hand, regarding the mission button 3700, no sound effect indicating that the operation can be accepted or a sound effect indicating that the operation can be accepted is output. Furthermore, even if an operation is performed, a sound effect is output with a predetermined probability (1/3) after a predetermined time (1 second) after the operation is performed.
In this way, since sound effects are not necessarily output when operating the mission button 3700, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.
In addition, the sound effects output and the explosion images displayed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 are output or displayed multiple times, thereby making it more interesting.
Further, the explosion image displayed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is larger than the explosion image displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710. Furthermore, as described above, it is desirable that the sound effect output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 be easier to hear than the sound effect output based on the operation of the attack button 3710.
With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to easily recognize the sound effects and special displays related to the operation of the mission button 3700, which are relatively difficult to make appear.

In addition, in this embodiment, the operation acceptance period of the mission button 3700 is started after the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, but the operation acceptance period of the mission button 3700 is started at the same time as the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern. You may start it. In this case, it is preferable to display the mode shown in FIG. 159(a) at timing t0.

In addition, in this embodiment, the operation acceptance period of the mission button 3700 is set to end before the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols stops, but the mission button 3700 is not operated until the end timing of the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols (timing t35). The operation acceptance of 3700 may be continued.

By combining these embodiments, operation reception of the mission button 3700 may be continued from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern (timing t0) to the end of the variation display (timing t35). With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the opportunity for the player to make a sound effect or special display related to the operation of the mission button 3700, which is relatively difficult to make appear, appear.

If the display of an image of a bullet exploding or the output of the "boom" sound effect, which is the sound of a bullet exploding, are performed once based on the operation of the mission button 3700, after these displays and sound output are finished, It is preferable to configure it so that it can display images and output sound effects.
For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 157(a), the output of the sound effect "boom" ends at timing t15, and the display of the image of the bullet exploding ends at timing t16. In this case, the period from timing t16 to timing t17 is a period in which the image of the bullet exploding is not displayed or the sound effect of "boom" which is the sound of the bullet exploding is not output, and after timing t17, these images are not displayed. It is preferable to configure the system so that it can output sounds and sound effects.
Further, even if the operation of the mission button 3700 satisfies the output conditions for the sound effect of "boom" and the display conditions for the image of a bullet exploding between timings t15 and t16, these sounds and displays are executed. During the period, no sound will be output or displayed, and if an operation that satisfies the conditions is performed after timing t16 when these sounds and displays end, the sound effect will be output and images will be displayed again. You may start it.
With this configuration, each display of an image or the output of a sound effect can be more clearly recognized each time, so it is easier for the player to start displaying an image or outputting a sound effect, which has taken a lot of effort. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of situations that cannot be recognized.

In the production example shown with reference to FIG. 155 etc., the valid period during which the attack button 3710 can be operated occurs only once from timing t11 to timing t14, but it is configured so that it can occur multiple times. You may. For example, a similar display may be performed from timing t19 to timing t22. Further, the number of occurrences may be determined based on the special lottery results, and the degree of expectation may be suggested based on the number of occurrences and the performance content of each time. Note that it is preferable that the operation validity period of the attack button 3710 occurs multiple times during the operation validity period of the mission button 3700.
The number of times the operation validity period related to the attack button 3710 occurs, that is, the number of times the image of a shell exploding based on the operation of the attack button 3710 is displayed, can be determined based on the special lottery result in this way. On the other hand, based on the operation of the mission button 3700, the display of an image of a bullet exploding and the output of the sound effect of "boom", which is the sound of a bullet exploding, are not based on the special lottery result, and can be performed multiple times during the valid operation period. It is possible to execute it twice.
With this configuration, by performing the operation on the mission button 3700 multiple times, it is possible to successfully display an image of an exploding bullet, thereby increasing the player's sense of accomplishment.

Note that the own tank may be configured to be equipped with an additional machine gun. In this case, an intermediate presentation mode between the bullets fired from the gun turret and the bullets fired from the silent machine gun in this embodiment may be adopted. For example, although the further machine gun basically takes the same operation acceptance mode and performance mode as the silent machine gun in this embodiment, when the operation is performed, a reception sound indicating that the operation has been accepted (for example, a bullet flies) The configuration may be such that the sound (sound) is always output. Note that the defense button 3740 may be used as the operation unit in this case. Further, the size of the bullet explosion image is preferably set to be an intermediate size between the explosion image of a cannonball and the explosion image of a silent machine gun.

As shown in FIG. 159(a) etc., it is shown that the operation of the mission button 3700 is effective by a mock image imitating the mission button 3700 and the lines of "Colonel Dyna", but the operation of the mission button 3700 is effective. It is also possible to adopt a configuration that does not notify that this is the case.
For example, in the first half of the operation validity period of the mission button 3700, the operation instruction of the mission button 3700 is not given, and in the second half of the operation validity period of the mission button 3700, the operation instruction of the mission button 3700 may be configured. good. It is preferable that the enemy tank moves from the right side of the display area in the first half and second half of the valid operation period of the mission button 3700, and the operation of the attack button 3710 becomes valid. In this case, when an enemy tank is displayed for the first time, you can concentrate on operating the attack button 3710, and when an enemy tank is displayed for the second time, in addition to operating the attack button 3710, you can concentrate on operating the mission button 3700. It becomes possible to perform operations.
In this way, even when displaying based on acceptance of operation of the mission button 3700 is enabled, the configuration may be such that there are cases in which the operation instruction for the mission button 3700 is displayed and cases in which it is not displayed.
Note that the special sound and display contents based on the acceptance of operation of the mission button 3700 may be different depending on whether or not an operation instruction for the mission button 3700 is displayed. For example, when operation instructions for the mission button 3700 are not displayed, a louder special sound is output or a larger explosion image is displayed than when operation instructions for the mission button 3700 are displayed. You may also do this. With such a configuration, the player's sense of interest can be further enhanced.

It may be configured such that the case where the operation instruction display is performed and the case where it is not displayed can be switched by the above-mentioned real-time clock function or operation by the player or the store clerk.

As described above, according to the "silent machine gun reach" according to the present embodiment, a special sound is output when the second operation section is operated and further a specific condition is satisfied. With such a configuration, even if the second operation section is operated, the special sound may be output sometimes and sometimes not, so the special sound may not be output with good luck. The player will feel great joy.

Conventionally, gaming machines have been known in which operation instructions for an operation unit are displayed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-046210). In such gaming machines, players simply follow instructions, and there is room for improvement in terms of increasing interest. For example, if you do not follow the operating instructions, the same display as if you followed the operating instructions is displayed after a predetermined period of time, or if you do not give the operating instructions, no display is displayed. This was common, and the player's intention of not following the operating instructions was not respected. Therefore, in the embodiment shown below, an embodiment will be shown in which a special display is displayed when the operation unit is operated in an operation manner contrary to the instructed content.

Below, with reference to FIG. 161 and the like, a description will be given of "bomb character reach" in which the own tank and the bomb character engage in a battle while accelerating or decelerating the own tank.

FIG. 161 is a table showing selected performance patterns in "Bomb Character Reach". Furthermore, FIGS. 162 to 164 are time charts showing examples of effects when any of the effects patterns are executed. Further, FIGS. 165 to 170 show display examples at predetermined timings in these time charts.

In "Bomb Character Reach", the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner for 34 seconds, and the decorative symbols are statically displayed for one second. During the variable display of the decorative symbols, the decorative symbols become ready-to-reach at timing t5. In addition, the period from timing t6 to timing t15 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "first period"), the period from timing t16 to timing t25 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "second period"), In addition to own tank, an effect is performed in which bomb character A or bomb character B is displayed.

In "Bomb Character Reach", a bomb character appears on the road where your own tank is moving, and a performance is performed in which you are asked whether or not to operate the left lever 3720 so that your tank advances toward the bomb character. .

As the bomb characters, a bomb character A is displayed, which is a bomb character wearing sunglasses, and a bomb character B, whose sunglasses are upside down compared to the bomb character A, is displayed. If bomb character A is displayed, if your tank rams into it, part of your tank will be destroyed; if bomb character B is displayed, even if your tank rams into it, your tank will not be destroyed and you can move on. I can move on.

A bomb character is displayed in front of the own tank, and two characters ("Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Mite") indicate whether or not the own tank should ram into the bomb character. For example, as a line for "Colonel Dyna," a line instructing the player to move the left lever 3720 forward (on the gaming machine side, the same applies hereinafter) is displayed, such as "I'm sure it's a fake! Move forward!" Furthermore, as a line from "Sergeant Mite," a line instructing the player to move the left lever 3720 backwards (on the player's side, the same applies hereinafter) is displayed, such as "An enemy bomb has been found in front of you! Please slow down!" In addition, instead of indirect expressions such as ``forward'' or ``reverse'', more direct expressions such as ``please move the left lever forward'' or ``please move the left lever backward'' may be used. .

In addition, on the left side of the window where the lines from "Colonel Dyna" are displayed, there is a simulated image of the left lever 3720 in the shape of a vertically long rectangle, and an image that instructs how to operate the left lever 3720 ("lean forward", " The words "backward tilt") are displayed. Similarly, on the right side of the window in which the lines from "Sergeant Mite" are displayed, a simulated image simulating the left lever 3720 in a vertically long rectangular shape and an image instructing how to operate the left lever 3720 are displayed.

In "Bomb Character Reach", if "Colonel Dyna"'s dialogue is to give operational instructions, the instructions are basically 100% incorrect. Furthermore, the image that instructs the operation mode of the left lever 3720 is also an image that instructs the operation mode that is incorrect. On the other hand, if "Sergeant Might"'s dialogue is to give operational instructions, there is a 20% chance that the dialogue that gives the wrong operational instructions will be displayed, and a 80% chance that the dialogue that gives the correct operational instructions will be displayed. be. Further, as an image for instructing how to operate the left lever 3720, an image that matches the instruction content indicated by the dialogue is displayed.
For this reason, the player only needs to operate the lever in the opposite direction to the instructions for the lines of "Colonel Dyna" and the operation instructions for the left lever 3720, and for the lines of "Sergeant Mite" and the operation instructions for the left lever 3720, the player only has to operate the lever in the opposite direction to the instructions. Just operate the lever with some caution.
Note that once the player gets used to it, the player can determine the type of bomb character by the shape of the sunglasses, determine whether or not to ram his own tank into the bomb character, and then move the left lever 3720 appropriately. can be operated.

When the bomb character A is displayed, if the own tank collides with the own tank, a portion of the own tank will be destroyed. If the own tank does not ram into the bomb character A, only the bomb character A can be prevented from exploding before the own tank collides with the own tank, thereby preventing the own tank from being destroyed. When the bomb character A and the own tank collide, the gun turret of the own tank is destroyed in the first collision (the state of the own tank shown in FIG. 166(c)). Furthermore, in the second collision, the own tank's machine gun is also destroyed (the state of the own tank shown in FIG. 166(f)).
On the other hand, when bomb character B is displayed, even if bomb character B collides with the own tank, the own tank is not destroyed and can proceed. Bomb character B is actually a huge balloon disguised as a bomb, and even if your own tank hits it, your own tank will not be destroyed.
It should be noted that when the own tank moves forward, a huge bomb character appears and can be performed using the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700, but the details will be described later.

The production pattern shown in the table of FIG. 161 determines whether or not the bomb character is displayed and whether the bomb character is displayed at timing t6 to timing t11 and timing t16 to timing t21 in the time charts shown in FIGS. 162 and 163. In this case, it indicates whether the displayed bomb character is bomb character A or bomb character B. Also, at timing t26, the state in which the image of the own tank can be taken is shown.

Performance pattern 01, performance pattern 03, performance pattern 07, and performance pattern 09 are performance patterns in which the bomb character A does not appear. Therefore, at timing t26, the own tank is in a state where it is not destroyed.
Performance pattern 02, performance pattern 04, performance pattern 06, and performance pattern 08 are performance patterns in which the bomb character A appears once. Therefore, at timing t26, the own tank is either undestroyed or the gun turret of the own tank is destroyed.
Performance pattern 05 is a performance pattern in which bomb character A appears twice. Therefore, at timing t26, the own tank is in one of the following states: undestroyed, the gun turret of the tank destroyed, or the gun turret and machine gun of the tank destroyed.

Which of the effect patterns 01 to 09 is to be executed is determined by the peripheral control board 1510. For example, it may be determined based on the results of a special lottery.

Next, a mode of presentation using the explosive character A will be explained with reference to FIGS. 162, 165, and 166.
FIG. 162(a) is a time chart showing the state of the fluctuating display of decorative symbols executed together with the effects shown in the time charts of FIGS. 162(b) and 162(c).
FIG. 162(b) is a time chart showing the execution mode of the production pattern in which the bomb character A is displayed in the first period. The effect state when effect pattern 04, which is an effect pattern for displaying bomb character A during the first period (timing t6 to timing t15), is executed will be described below.
At timing t5, "bomb character reach" is started. FIG. 165(a) shows a display example from timing t5 to timing t6.
At timing t6, bomb character A is displayed at the top center of the display area. At this time, the lines ``Colonel Dyna'' displays are either ``I'm sure it's a fake! Move forward!'' or ``Hmm, mumble.'' On the other hand, "Sergeant Might"'s lines are displayed as follows: "Enemy bomb detected ahead! Please slow down!", "He's a fake. Move forward!", or "Hmm, mumble." Ru. Further, if the line indicates tilting the left lever 3720 forward, a simulated image of the lever with the words "tilt forward" is displayed along with the line. Further, if the line indicates tilting the left lever 3720 backward, a simulated image of the left lever 3720 with the words "tilt backwards" is displayed along with the line. Further, if the lines do not indicate the operation mode of the left lever 3720, the simulated image of the left lever 3720 is not displayed.

FIGS. 165(b) to 165(g) show display examples displayed in the display area from timing t6 to timing t11. As mentioned above, there are two types of lines for "Colonel Dyna" and three types for lines for "Sergeant Mite," and there are a total of six combinations that can be displayed by combining these lines. These six combinations are shown in FIGS. 165(b) to 165(g).

For example, Figure 165(b) shows the incorrect operation instructions from Colonel Dyna saying, ``I'm sure it's a fake! Move forward~!'' and the correct operation instructions from Sergeant Might, ``Enemies ahead! This is a display example showing a state in which the line "Bomb detected! Please slow down!" is displayed.
In this case, the player can avoid a collision with the bomb character A by performing an operation opposite to that instructed by the lines of "Colonel Dyna" (tilting the left lever 3720 backward). Furthermore, a collision with the bomb character A can be avoided by performing an operation (operation of tilting the left lever 3720 backward) according to the operation mode instructed by the lines of "Mite Sergeant". In addition, a collision with bomb character A can be avoided even if the player tilts the lever backward after confirming that the displayed bomb character is bomb character A, regardless of the instruction content of the dialogue.

In addition, Figure 165(e) shows the display of the line ``Colonel Dyna'' saying ``Hmmm, mumble.'' and the correct operation instruction ``Sergeant Might'' saying ``He's a fake. Forward!'' This is a display example showing a state in which the following is displayed.
In this case, the operation mode is not instructed by "Colonel Dyna's" lines. Moreover, by performing an operation (operation of tilting the left lever 3720 forward) according to the operation mode instructed by the lines of "Mite Sergeant", the bomb character A collides with the bomb character A. On the other hand, if the player confirms that the displayed bomb character is bomb character A without being bound by the instruction content of the dialogue, and tilts the left lever 3720 backward, bomb character A collision can be avoided.

In the operation period for tilting the left lever 3720 in a predetermined direction, it is determined that an operation input has been performed when the left lever 3720 is tilted in a predetermined direction for a predetermined time within a period from timing t6 to timing t11. For example, if the left lever 3720 is tilted forward for two seconds from timing t7 to timing t9, it is determined that the operation has been performed.

When the left lever 3720 is tilted forward when the bomb character A is displayed, an effect display in which the bomb character A and the own tank collide is performed from timing t11 to timing t15.
Specifically, from timing t11 to timing t12, an image of the collision between the own tank and the bomb character A is displayed. FIG. 166(a) is a display example from timing t11 to timing t12.
Next, from timing t12 to timing t15, an image of the gun emplacement of the own tank being destroyed is displayed. FIG. 166(c) is a display example from timing t12 to timing t15.

On the other hand, if the left lever 3720 is tilted backward when the bomb character A is displayed, an effect display in which the bomb character A explodes in front of the own tank is performed from timing t11 to timing t12. FIG. 166(b) is a display example from timing t11 to timing t12. Note that from timing t12 to timing t15, a display as shown in FIG. 165(a) may be performed.

FIG. 162(c) is a time chart showing the execution mode of the production pattern in which the bomb character A is displayed in the second period. FIG. 162(c) shows an example of a performance when, for example, performance pattern 02, which is a performance pattern in which the bomb character A is displayed during the second period, is executed.
In this performance example, a performance display similar to the performance example shown with reference to FIG. 162(b) is performed from timing t16 to timing t25.

In the case where either the bomb character A or the bomb character B is displayed in both the first period and the second period, as in the production pattern 05, production pattern 06, production pattern 08, and production pattern 09, as shown in FIG. The performance mode related to timing t11 to timing t15 in the time chart shown in (b) or the production mode related to timing t11 to timing t15 in the time chart shown in FIG. 163(b), which will be described later, and the time chart shown in FIG. 162(c) A presentation mode related to timing t16 to timing t25 in , or a presentation mode that is a combination of presentation modes related to timing t16 to timing t25 in the time chart shown in FIG. 163(c) is executed.

For example, when production pattern 05 is selected, the production mode from timing t11 to timing t15 in the time chart shown in FIG. 162(b) and from timing t16 to timing t25 in the time chart shown in FIG. 162(c) A presentation mode that is a combination of such presentation modes is executed.
In this case, there is a possibility that the own tank will ram into the bomb character A during both the first period and the second period.
For example, in the first period, when the own tank rams into bomb character A, the own tank's battery is destroyed, but in the second period, when the own tank's battery is destroyed by bomb character A, the own tank's battery is destroyed. By ramming into it, the tank's machine gun is destroyed.
FIG. 166(d) shows a display example from timing t21 to timing t22 when a self-tank whose battery has been destroyed rams into bomb character A in the second period. Further, from timing t22 to timing t25, the state is as shown in the display example shown in FIG. 166(f).
On the other hand, in the second period, if the own tank whose battery has been destroyed does not ram into the bomb character A, the display example shown in FIG. 166(e) is reached from timing t21 to timing t22.

Next, a mode of presentation using the explosive character B will be described with reference to FIGS. 163, 167, and 168.
FIG. 163(a) is a time chart showing the state of the variable display of decorative symbols executed together with the effects shown in the time charts of FIGS. 163(b) and 163(c).
FIG. 163(b) is a time chart showing the execution mode of the production pattern in which the bomb character B is displayed in the first period. Below, the performance state when the performance pattern 07, which is the performance pattern for displaying the bomb character B during the first period (timing t6 to timing t11), is executed will be explained.
At timing t5, "bomb character reach" is started. FIG. 167(a) shows a display example from timing t5 to timing t6.
At timing t6, bomb character B is displayed at the top center of the display area. At this time, one of the lines ``Colonel Dyna'' is displayed is ``It's an enemy bomb - slow down!'' or ``Hmm, mumble.'' On the other hand, "Sergeant Mite"'s lines are displayed as follows: "He's a fake. Forward!", "Enemy bomb detected ahead! Please slow down!", or "Hmm, mumble." Ru. Furthermore, if each line indicates tilting the left lever 3720 forward, a simulated image of the left lever 3720 with the words "tilting forward" attached together with the line is displayed. Further, if each line indicates tilting the left lever 3720 backward, a simulated image of the left lever 3720 with the words "tilt backwards" is displayed along with the line. Further, if the lines do not indicate the operation mode of the left lever 3720, the simulated image of the left lever 3720 is not displayed.

FIGS. 167(b) to 167(g) show display examples displayed in the display area from timing t6 to timing t11. As mentioned above, there are two types of lines for "Colonel Dyna" and three types for lines for "Sergeant Mite," and there are a total of six combinations that can be displayed by combining these lines. These six combinations are shown in FIGS. 167(b) to 167(g).

For example, Figure 167(b) shows the display of the incorrect operation instruction from Colonel Dyna saying, ``It's an enemy bomb! Slow down!'' and the correct operation instruction from Sergeant Might, saying ``That guy... This is a display example showing a state in which the line "It's a fake. Forward!" is displayed.
In this case, the player can ram the bomb character B by performing an operation (tilting the left lever 3720 forward) that is the opposite of the operation mode instructed by the lines of "Colonel Dyna". Furthermore, by performing an operation (operation of tilting the left lever 3720 forward) according to the operation mode instructed by the lines of "Sergeant Mite," it is possible to ram the bomb character B. In addition, the user can ram the bomb character B by confirming that the displayed bomb character is the bomb character B and tilting the left lever 3720 forward, without being limited by the instruction content of the dialogue.

In addition, Figure 167(e) shows the display of the line ``Hmmm, mumble'' from ``Colonel Dyna,'' and the correct operational instructions from ``Sergeant Might,'' ``An enemy bomb has been detected in front of you! Please slow down!'' This is a display example showing a state in which a line such as "" is displayed.
In this case, the operation mode is not instructed by "Colonel Dyna"'s lines. Further, by performing an operation (operation of tilting the left lever 3720 forward) according to the operation mode instructed by the lines of "Might Sergeant", the bomb character B cannot be rammed. On the other hand, if the player tilts the left lever 3720 forward after confirming that the displayed bomb character is bomb character B, regardless of the contents of the instructions in the dialogue, if the player tilts the left lever 3720 forward, bomb character B can be plunged into.

If the lever is tilted forward when the bomb character B is displayed, an effect display in which the own tank rams into the bomb character B is performed from timing t11 to timing t15.
From timing t11 to timing t12, an image of the own tank ramming into bomb character B is displayed. FIG. 168(a) is a display example from timing t11 to timing t12. Note that from timing t12 to timing t15, a display as shown in FIG. 165(a) may be performed.

On the other hand, if the left lever 3720 is tilted backward when the bomb character B is displayed, the bomb character B located in front of the own tank is displayed as is from timing t11 to timing t12. FIG. 168(b) is a display example from timing t11 to timing t12. Note that from timing t12 to timing t15, a display as shown in FIG. 165(a) may be performed.

FIG. 163(c) is a time chart showing the execution mode of the production pattern in which the bomb character B is displayed in the second period. FIG. 163(c) shows an example of the effect when the effect pattern 03, which is the effect pattern in which the bomb character B is displayed in the second period, is executed, for example.
In this performance example, a performance display similar to the performance example shown with reference to FIG. 163(b) is performed from timing t16 to timing t25.

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 164, the performance mode from timing t26 to timing t35 when performance pattern 01 to performance pattern 09 are executed will be described.
As described above, based on the selected effect pattern and the player's operation of the left lever 3720, the own tank can be in an unharmed state, a state in which the turret is destroyed, or a state in which the turret and machine gun are destroyed at timing t26. It is displayed in one of the following states.

As shown in FIG. 164(a), at timing t26, display of bomb character A or bomb character B is started. Further, from timing t26 to timing t28, operation of either attack button 3710 or mission button 3700 becomes valid.
The attack button 3710 becomes effective when the own tank is in an undamaged state. On the other hand, the mission button 3700 becomes effective when the gun turret of the own tank is destroyed. Note that when the artillery turret and machine gun are destroyed, neither the attack button 3710 operation nor the mission button 3700 operation is effective. Note that the performance mode when the operation of the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is not valid will be described later.

At timing t26, the operation of the attack button 3710 becomes valid and at the same time the bomb character A is displayed in the center of the display area. Furthermore, a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed at the upper right of the window displaying the lines of "Sergeant Might."
FIG. 169(a) shows the sequence from timing t26 until the attack button 3710 is operated (t28 in FIG. 164(a)) or until the operation validity period of the attack button 3710 ends (t29 in FIG. 164(a)). This is an example of the display for the period up to ).

If the special lottery result is a jackpot, the bomb character A will explode from the timing when the attack button 3710 is operated during the valid operation period of the attack button 3710 or from the timing when the operation valid period ends. It takes place for seconds. FIG. 169(b) shows a display mode in which the bomb character A explodes after the attack button 3710 is operated or after the valid operation period ends when the special lottery result is a jackpot. Thereafter, at timing t34, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot.
On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a loss, the bomb character A will attack your own tank from the timing when the attack button 3710 is operated during the valid operation period for the attack button 3710 or from the timing when the operation valid period ends. The display of the robot moving toward the target is displayed for 3 seconds. FIG. 169(c) shows a display mode in which the bomb character A moves toward the own tank after the attack button 3710 is operated or after the operation validity period ends when the special lottery result is a loss. Thereafter, at timing t34, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss.
Note that, based on the operation of the attack button 3710 or the end of the valid operation period, a display effect in which a cannonball is fired from the gun turret of the own tank is executed, as in the example effect shown with reference to FIG. 153.

At timing t26, the operation of the mission button 3700 becomes valid and the bomb character A is displayed at the center of the display area. Further, a mock image imitating the mission button 3700 is displayed at the upper left of the window displaying the lines of "Colonel Dyna".
FIG. 169(d) shows the sequence from timing t26 until the mission button 3700 is operated (t28 in FIG. 164(a)) or until the operation validity period of the mission button 3700 ends (t29 in FIG. 164(a)). This is an example of the display for the period up to ).

If the special lottery result is a jackpot, the display of bomb character A exploding will be 3 times from the timing when the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period for the mission button 3700 or from the timing when the operation valid period ends. It takes place for seconds. FIG. 169(e) shows a display mode in which the bomb character A explodes after the operation or after the operation validity period ends when the special lottery result is a jackpot. Thereafter, at timing t34, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot.
On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a loss, the bomb character A will be moved to your own tank from the timing when the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period for the mission button 3700 or from the timing when the operation valid period ends. The image of the robot moving toward the target is displayed for 3 seconds. FIG. 169(f) shows a display mode in which the bomb character A moves toward the own tank after the operation of the mission button 3700 or after the valid period of operation has expired when the special lottery result is a loss. Thereafter, at timing t34, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss.
Note that, based on the operation of the mission button 3700 or the end of the valid operation period, a display effect in which a bullet is fired from the machine gun of the own tank is executed, as in the example effect shown with reference to FIG. 154.

If production pattern 05 is executed and the own tank rams into bomb character A in both the first period and the second period, at timing t26, the own tank with its turret and machine gun destroyed is displayed. The Rukoto.
FIG. 164(b) is a time chart showing the effect state executed in this case.

In this case, if the special lottery result is a loss, the bomb character A starts to be displayed at timing t26 and is displayed at that position until timing t29. FIG. 170(a) shows a display example from timing t26 to timing t29.
From timing t29 to timing t32, a display of bomb character A moving toward own tank is performed for 3 seconds. FIG. 170(b) shows a display mode in which the bomb character A is moving toward the own tank. Thereafter, at timing t34, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss.
On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a jackpot, the display of the bomb character B starts at timing t26 and is displayed at that position until timing t29. FIG. 170(a) shows a display example from timing t26 to timing t29.
From timing t29 to timing t32, a display of bomb character B moving toward own tank is performed for 3 seconds. FIG. 170(b) shows a display mode in which bomb character B is moving toward own tank. Thereafter, at timing t34, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot.
Note that in either case, neither the attack button 3710 nor the mission button 3700 becomes valid for accepting operations.

In this way, by giving appropriate operation instructions without being confused by incorrect operation instructions for the left lever 3720, the player can achieve the results shown in FIGS. 169(a), (b), (d), and (e). It becomes possible to operate special operation parts (attack button 3710 and mission button 3700), and special images (images of bomb character A exploding, images of the sunglasses worn by bomb character A tilting, images of "Dyna It becomes possible to visually recognize lines such as "Colonel" and "Might Sergeant". On the other hand, if the player obediently follows the operation instructions, the player will not be able to operate the special operation section as shown in FIGS. 170(a) and (d), and the special image will not be visible. I can't.
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 169(a) and (d) or FIG. 169(b) and (e), the player can visually confirm a special effect display depending on the manner of destruction of his own tank. .

Note that if the player does not operate the left lever 3720, the configuration may be such that the operation instructions given by "Colonel Dyna" or "Sergeant Mite" are automatically executed. Further, at this time, the image that is displayed when the player issues the operation instruction may be automatically displayed. Furthermore, if "Colonel Dyna" or "Sergeant Mite" does not give any operation instructions and the player does not operate the left lever 3720, either the forward tilt operation or the backward tilt operation will be automatically selected by lottery. may be displayed. For example, it may be configured such that a forward tilting operation is selected with a probability of 1/2 and a backward tilting operation is selected with a probability of 1/2, and a display corresponding to the selected operation is performed.

In the embodiment described above, the player is required to perform an operation that does not follow the operation instruction during at least one of the first period and the second period. Further, by performing an operation that does not follow the operation instructions, it is possible to generate a performance state in which the operation on a specific operation section becomes valid immediately before the decorative pattern stops, and a special image is displayed.
In this way, the player is given operating instructions in a different manner than the intended operating instructions or in a contradictory manner, making it difficult for the player to understand what is the appropriate operation for the operation section. After estimating whether this is the case, the left lever 3720 is tilted. If the player is able to perform an appropriate operation contrary to the operating instructions, the player may be able to operate a special operation section or view a special image or effect display. becomes possible.
Additionally, in addition to performing an operation that violates the operation instructions, a special image may be displayed only when a specific condition (for example, successfully performing an operation that violates the operation instructions multiple times) is met. . With this configuration, the special display can be made visible only to players who are able to properly operate the operation unit, rather than being displayed by chance by operating the operation unit appropriately. .

It may be configured such that the player can operate the left lever 3720 in the left-right direction to cause the own tank moving forward to avoid a mine field set on the road.
For example, an image of a real minefield and an image of a fake minefield may be displayed on the right or left side of the road, and the player may operate the left lever 3720 in the left or right direction to avoid the minefield. It's good to do that. If your own tank enters a real minefield, it is best to configure it so that your own tank's gun emplacement and machine gun are destroyed. Furthermore, the lines of "Colonel Dyna" and the lines of "Sergeant Mite" are configured to give incorrect operation instructions regarding the operation mode of the left lever 3720. It is preferable to configure such an effect to be executable in the first period and the second period.

In this way, even if the left lever 3720 is operated appropriately to move the tank while avoiding the minefield to the left or right, and the operation contrary to the operation instructions is successfully performed, the explanation will be made with reference to FIGS. 161 to 170, etc. Similar to the embodiment described above, it is possible to allow the player to operate a special operation unit and to visually recognize a special image or effect display.

The effect table shown in FIG. 161 had a first period and a second period, but it is configured to have only the first period, and no bomb character appears in the first period. A table may be adopted in which any one of a performance pattern, a performance pattern in which bomb character A appears, and a performance pattern in which bomb character B appears is selected.
In this case, if the own tank rams into the bomb character A, the structure may be such that both the gun turret and machine gun of the own tank are destroyed.

The effect table shown in FIG. 161 has a first period and a second period, but a effect can be created using a effect table configured to provide three or more periods in which the bomb character can be displayed. May be executed.
In addition, we perform pre-reading of suspension, and based on the pre-reading results, we set multiple periods in which the bomb character can be displayed over multiple decorative pattern fluctuation displays (the bomb character can be displayed in one decorative pattern fluctuation). (You may set one period at a time, or you may set a period in which an arbitrary number of bomb characters can be displayed in one fluctuation of the decorative pattern), or stop the fluctuation display corresponding to the reservation targeted for pre-reading. It may be configured so that the effect display shown with reference to FIG. 164, FIG. 169, and FIG. 170 is executed at the last minute.

Further, although three levels of display modes for own tanks are provided, two levels or four or more levels may be provided. In addition, as a change in the display mode, we have shown an example where the destruction of the own tank progresses in stages, but when the own tank is repaired, the destruction stage of the own tank returns to a stage where it is relatively undestroyed. may be configured to be executable.

In the first period or the second period, an example was shown in which the bomb character does not appear, the bomb character A appears, and the bomb character B appears. In this case, either bomb character A or bomb character B may be configured to be always displayed. For example, the table shown in FIG. 161 may be modified to adopt a table consisting only of effect pattern 05, effect pattern 06, effect pattern 08, and effect pattern 09. With such a configuration, one of the bomb characters is displayed in each period of the effect pattern, so that the feeling of tension when operating the left lever 3720 can be increased.

Note that in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 165 to 170, the display example when the bomb character is displayed was mainly illustrated, but in the period when the bomb character is not displayed, the display example shown in FIG. 165 ( As shown in a), it is preferable to display the own tank character moving forward.

A special image may be displayed only when a specific condition is met. For example, a special display may be displayed only when an operation that does not follow the operation instructions is successfully performed multiple times. Further, even if the player performs an operation that does not follow the operation instructions, it is preferable to perform a predetermined lottery and display a special display with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/5). With this configuration, a special image will not be displayed by chance simply by operating the operation panel, and the difficulty level for displaying a special image can be increased, so that a special image will not be displayed by chance. It is possible to increase the surprise and joy that the player feels when the is displayed.

When a special image is displayed based on the operation of the left lever 3720, a suppressed state may be set in which the volume of the variable effect sound is reduced at least during the period in which the special image is displayed.
Further, when a special image is displayed based on the operation of the left lever 3720, a special sound (for example, a special explosion sound) is output at least during the period when the special image is displayed. It's okay.
Furthermore, the suppression of the variable performance sound and the output of the special sound may be performed simultaneously.
In this way, by suppressing the variable effect sound and outputting a special sound in response to the display of a special image, it is possible to prevent the display of a special image from being disturbed by the variable effect sound. Moreover, the display of a special image can be made more conspicuous by outputting a special sound.

It should be noted that the fluctuating performance sound is a sound in which a predetermined piece of music is played in accordance with the fluctuation of the decorative symbols, and is perceived by the player as background music. For example, a song consisting of the voice sung by a predetermined singer and the sounds of multiple musical instruments is played for several minutes, and during that time, the variation of the decorative pattern (for example, all the variation results of the decorative pattern are non-reach misses, and the variation time is 10% on average. ) is performed multiple times. By outputting such variable effect sound to the player, it is possible to increase interest in the game. Note that a plurality of such songs may be prepared in advance, and the configuration may be such that the playback of a different song starts at the timing when the playback of a certain song ends. Alternatively, in accordance with a change in the gaming state, the music that was being played up to that point may be faded out during playback, and another music that is different from the music that was being played up to that point may be played.
Note that a predetermined light emitting member provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5 may be caused to emit light in a light emitting manner that matches the melody of the variable performance sound. This makes it possible to enhance the production effect of the variable production sound.

The configuration is such that a game state in which a special image is displayed occurs when the left lever 3720 is operated properly without being fooled by the operation instructions, but the display period of the special image and the attack The display period of the simulated image imitating the button 3710 is configured so that it can overlap, and a special image (such as an image of a bomb exploding) and the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 are displayed at the same time. An example is shown below.

171(a) to 171(c) show other display examples that can be displayed at the timing when the diagram shown in FIG. 169(a) is displayed.
In each of Figures 171(a) to 171(c), the display priority of the image of the diagonally tilted semi-transparent sunglasses is set to the window displaying the lines of "Colonel Dyna" and the window displaying the lines of "Colonel Dyna". The display priority is higher than that of the image, the image of own tank, the image of bomb character A, and the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710. Furthermore, the images of translucent sunglasses are displayed in one case as shown in FIG. 171(a), in a case where two images are displayed as shown in FIG. 171(b), and in a case as shown in FIG. 171(c). There are cases where three are displayed as shown. Then, as shown in FIG. 169(a), when the translucent sunglasses image is displayed, the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the translucent sunglasses image is displayed than when the translucent sunglasses image is not displayed. It is determined whether or not to display the image. Furthermore, the display mode of the translucent sunglasses images is determined such that the greater the number of translucent sunglasses images, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

For example, the expectation level when the display state shown in FIG. 169(a) is reached is 10%, the expectation level when the display state is shown in FIG. 171(a) is 30%, and the display shown in FIG. 171(b) is set. It is preferable to display the translucent sunglasses image so that the expectation level is 50% when the display state is reached, and the expectation level is 80% when the display state shown in FIG. 171(c) is reached.

The display of the translucent sunglasses image starts at timing t26 and continues until the attack button 3710 is operated or until the valid operation period of the attack button 3710 ends. Note that if the bomb character A can be exploded (that is, if the special lottery result is a jackpot), the display of the translucent sunglasses image may be continued until the display of the explosion image is finished.

With such a configuration, the same effects as the above-described embodiment can be achieved. In addition, since the semi-transparent sunglasses image (special image) is displayed in front of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710, the special image that was able to be seen is replaced by the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710. can be prevented from being hidden by

FIG. 171(d) is a modification of the display example shown with reference to FIG. 171(c). As in this display example, the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 may be displayed in front of the translucent sunglasses image (special image).
Alternatively, the display mode shown in FIG. 171(c) and the display mode shown in FIG. 171(d) may be alternately displayed. For example, the display mode may be changed every 0.5 seconds from timing t26 to timing t29.
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make both the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and the semi-transparent sunglasses image stand out.
Note that the bomb character A before or after the explosion may also be displayed in the same display manner as the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710.

Note that the image of semi-transparent sunglasses does not have to indicate the level of expectation. In this case, a difference may be provided in the appearance rate of the displayed images.

In the production example shown with reference to FIGS. 164 and 169, the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 can be operated once from timing t26 to timing t29. A modified embodiment that can accept operations on the mission button 3700 multiple times will be described with reference to FIG. 172.

FIGS. 172(a) to 172(c) are display examples when the attack button 3710 is configured to be operable multiple times (for example, 5 times) from timing t26 to timing t29. Further, a plurality of simulated images (for example, five) imitating the attack button 3710 are displayed depending on the number of times the attack button 3710 can be operated. Moreover, each time the attack button 3710 is operated once, the display of the simulated image displayed furthest from among the simulated images imitating the attack button 3710 ends. When the attack button 3710 is operated, if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, an image of bomb character A being hit by a shell and exploding is displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/2). It is a good idea to do so. Further, when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot and the fifth operation is performed, an exploded image may be displayed with a 100% probability. Note that if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the bomb character A will not be hit by the shell and the image of the explosion will not be displayed.
FIG. 172(a) shows a display example at timing t26.
Further, FIG. 172(b) shows a state in which when the attack button 3710 is operated for the third time, a lottery with a predetermined probability is won and an exploded image is displayed.
On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the display shown in FIG. 172(c) will be displayed for 3 seconds from the timing when the attack button 3710 is operated five times or from the timing when the operation validity period ends. state.
Note that when the exploded image is displayed, if the number of times the attack button 3710 can be operated remains, the remaining number of operations will be accepted, and in response to this operation, the exploded image will be displayed. The aspect may also be configured to be displayed in an exploded manner.
When an explosion image is displayed, it is not necessarily necessary to operate the attack button 3710, so a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 may be displayed with a lower display priority than an exploded image. In FIG. 172(b), a display example is shown in which the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed with a lower display priority than the exploded image.

FIGS. 172(d) to 172(f) are display examples when the mission button 3700 is configured to be operable multiple times (for example, 5 times) from timing t26 to timing t29. Furthermore, a plurality of simulated images (for example, five) imitating the mission button 3700 are displayed depending on the number of times the mission button 3700 can be operated. Furthermore, each time the mission button 3700 is operated once, the display of the closest simulated image of the simulated images imitating the mission button 3700 ends. When the mission button 3700 is operated, if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, an image of bomb character A being hit by a shell and exploding is displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/3). It is a good idea to do so. Note that if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the exploded image will not be displayed.
FIG. 172(d) shows a display example at timing t26.
Further, FIG. 172(d) shows a state in which when the mission button 3700 is operated for the third time, a lottery with a predetermined probability is won and an exploded image is displayed.
On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the display shown in FIG. 172(f) is displayed for 3 seconds from the timing when the mission button 3700 is operated five times or from the timing when the valid operation period ends. state.
Note that when the exploded image is displayed, if the number of times the mission button 3700 can be operated remains, the remaining number of operations will be accepted, and the exploded image will be displayed according to this operation. The aspect may also be configured to be displayed in an exploded manner.
When an explosion image is displayed, an operation on the mission button 3700 is not necessarily required, so a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 may be displayed with a lower display priority than the explosion image. In FIG. 172(e), a display example is shown in which the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is displayed with a lower display priority than the exploded image.

In addition, in the production examples shown with reference to Figures 172(d) to 172(f), "Colonel Dyna"'s line is an incorrect operation, "Fire the special machine gun! Press the defense button!" It is an instruction. Therefore, the player needs to carefully observe the production situation and operate the mission button 3700. If the mission button 3700 can be operated, a special image of the bomb exploding can be viewed.

Next, an example of a performance that combines the example of performance shown with reference to FIGS. 172(a) to 172(c) and the example of performance shown with reference to FIGS. 172(d) to 172(f) is shown in FIG. This will be explained with reference to 173. In this embodiment, when the gun turret of the own tank is not destroyed and timing t26 comes, operation acceptance of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 becomes valid at the same time. At this time, the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 can each accept operations a predetermined number of times (for example, five times each). Further, a predetermined number of simulated images simulating the attack button 3710 and a predetermined number of simulated images simulating the mission button 3700 are displayed.

FIG. 173(a) shows a display example in which five simulated images representing the attack button 3710 and five simulated images representing the mission button 3700 are displayed. Note that, as described above, the operation validity period may start from timing t26.
In this state, when the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is operated, a lottery with a predetermined probability (1/2 for the attack button 3710, 1/2 for the attack button 3710, Regarding the mission button 3700, an image of the explosion is displayed depending on whether or not 1/3) is hit.

FIG. 173(b) shows a state in which an exploded image is displayed in response to the third operation of the attack button 3710. Further, FIG. 173(d) shows a state in which an exploded image is displayed in response to the third operation of the mission button 3700. The display examples shown in FIGS. 173(b) and 173(d) can be displayed when the special lottery result is a jackpot, respectively. Note that when the exploded image is displayed, if the number of times the attack button 3710 or mission button 3700 can be operated remains, the remaining number of operations will be accepted, and the exploded image will be displayed according to the operation. The display mode may be configured to be displayed in an even more explosive mode.
For example, if you win a predetermined lottery (1/3) based on the operation on the mission button 3700 in the display state shown in FIG. 173(b), the explosion mode in the display state shown in FIG. 173(d) The display mode may be changed to Alternatively, if a predetermined lottery (1/2) is won based on the operation on the attack button 3710 in the display state shown in FIG. 173(d), the display state is changed to the explosion state shown in FIG. 173(b). may be changed.
In addition, if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, even if you continue to miss the designated lottery by operating the mission button 3700 and attack button 3710, if you operate the mission button 3700 and attack button 3710 for the 10th time in total, you will receive 100% It is preferable to display an exploded image in a mode corresponding to the last button operated with a probability of .
When an explosion image is displayed, it is not necessary to operate the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700, so a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 or a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 has display priority over the exploded image. It is better to display the degree lower. In FIGS. 173(b) and 173(d), a display example is shown in which a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 are displayed with lower display priority than the exploded image. ing.
In addition, if the special lottery result is a loss, the attack button 3710 is operated five times and the mission button 3700 is operated five times during the valid operation period, or for 3 seconds from the timing when the valid operation period ends, as shown in Fig. 173. The display state shown in (c) is obtained.
In the production example shown with reference to FIG. 173(a), "Colonel Dyna"'s line is an incorrect operation instruction, "Fire the special machine gun! Press the defense button!" Therefore, the player needs to carefully observe the production situation and operate the mission button 3700.

In the production example explained with reference to FIG. 169(d), the lines of "Colonel Dyna" are to instruct the operation of the mission button 3700, but the line is "Shoot the special machine gun! Press the mission button! Instead of the line ``Shoot the special machine gun!Press the defense button!'', the wrong line may be displayed.
In addition, the production example explained with reference to FIG. 169(a), the production example explained with reference to FIG. 171(a), the production example explained with reference to FIG. 172(a), and the production example explained with reference to FIG. 173(a). In the production example referenced and explained, the line from "Sergeant Mite" is to instruct the operation of the attack button 3710, but the line "It's a large bomb!! Please attack with the attack button!" Alternatively, the configuration may be such that an incorrect line such as "It's a large bomb! Attack with the defense button!" is displayed.
With such a configuration, the player is required to carefully observe the production situation, so it is possible to further improve the interest in the game. Note that the player can recognize the operation unit to be operated by the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 and the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710.

In addition, the simulated images of the attack button 3710 and mission button 3700 showed the operation parts that should be operated, but these also had lines from "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Might" (because they gave incorrect instructions). In the same way as in the above case, a simulated image may be displayed that instructs an operation unit different from the operation unit that is supposed to be operated. In this case, when an appropriate operation is performed, a display may be made to fire a cannonball or a bullet to indicate to the player that an appropriate display has been performed.

Note that although a display example is shown in which simulated images of the left lever 3720, attack button 3710, and mission button 3700 are displayed, these may not be displayed. In this case, the player may need to operate the control section in a manner that is contrary to or different from the operation instructions based on the type of bomb character, the state of destruction of his own tank, etc., so the player must perform appropriate operations. Since the difficulty of performing the operations increases, it is possible to increase the interest felt when the operations are performed appropriately.

Referring to FIGS. 172 and 173, even in the period after timing t26, if the player performs an operation that does not follow the operation instructions, a special image (such as an explosion image or an image with sunglasses tilted) may be displayed. An example of a performance that generates a performance state is shown. Such an embodiment also provides the same effects as the embodiment described above with reference to FIGS. 161 to 171.

Note that it is preferable that the time for displaying the special image that violates the operation instruction and the time for displaying the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 be longer than the time for displaying the special image. With such a configuration, the player can enjoy special images.

Note that the special image displayed when an operation is performed in a manner contrary to the operation instruction or in a manner different from the operation instruction is preferably displayed as a larger image than the operation instruction. For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 171, an image (image of large translucent sunglasses shown in FIG. 171(c)) is larger than an image giving an operation instruction (an image of lines instructing an incorrect lever operation). images) can be displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the player's interest in displaying a more special image.

In this embodiment, an operation instruction display such as "forward tilt" or "backward tilt" is performed as an operation instruction for the left lever 3720, but if no operation instruction is given (FIG. 165(g), FIG. 167(g)) In the case of the display example shown in ), the content of the operation can also be estimated based on the display mode of the displayed bomb character. A special image may be displayed only when the player is able to properly operate the left lever 3720 in such a more difficult operation situation. For example, in the display example shown in FIG. 169(b), there are cases where an image of sunglasses tilted is displayed and cases where it is not displayed, and when no operation instruction is given for the attack button 3710, the operation for the attack button 3710 is When the sunglasses are tilted, an image (special image) in which the sunglasses are tilted may be displayed with a predetermined probability (1/10).

Note that when operating the left lever 3720 or the various buttons described above, the operation reception sound that directly corresponds to the operation of the left lever 3720 or the various buttons described above is intentionally not output. It may be configured such that a special sound corresponding to the operation is output only when such special conditions are met and a special image is displayed. With such a configuration, the player will feel that the special image is displayed even more special. Note that a similar configuration may be adopted for displaying special images in the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 171 to 173.

Note that as an operation contrary to the operation instruction, an example of a production in which the left lever 3720 is tilted in a different direction and an example of a production in which a button different from the instructed button is operated are given, but other embodiments may be used. For example, when the player is instructed to press and hold the attack button 3710, repeatedly pressing the attack button 3710 may be adopted as an operation contrary to the operation instruction. Alternatively, when the operation of the attack button 3710 is instructed, operating the defense button 3740 may be adopted as an operation contrary to the operation instruction.

In addition, we have shown an example of a performance in which a special display change is given when an operation that does not follow the operation instruction display is performed, but by giving such a special display change, the expectation of a jackpot is indicated. It may be configured as follows. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the expectation level of the jackpot is not indicated. Alternatively, among the above-mentioned special display changes, some display changes may indicate the expectation of a jackpot, while other display changes may not indicate the expectation of a jackpot. Good too.

In the present embodiment, the operation acceptance period of the left lever 3720 is started after the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, but the operation acceptance period of the left lever 3720 is started at the same time as the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern. You may start it. In this case, at timing t0, a display as shown in FIG. 165(b) may be performed to start "bomb character reach".

Further, based on the pending pre-reading, an effect similar to the "bomb character reach" shown with reference to FIGS. 165 to 173 may be performed over multiple variable displays of decorative symbols. In this case, it is preferable to display the bomb character A and the bomb character B once in the variable display of the decorative pattern that is executed before the variable display of the decorative pattern that is the target of pre-reading. Then, during the entire period when the decorative pattern is fluctuating and being displayed, an effect is performed that accepts the operation of the left lever 3720 in response to the displayed bomb character, and during the entire period when the decorative pattern is not changing, the operation of the left lever 3720 is accepted. It would be best to provide a corresponding display effect. For example, the production example performed from timing t6 to timing t11 in FIGS. 162 and 163 is executed while the decorative symbols are being fluctuated, and the production example performed from timing t11 to timing t15 is performed while the decorative symbols are not fluctuating. It's a good idea to do this. Then, during the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern that is the target of pre-reading to the end of the static display, it is preferable to perform the effect that is performed from timing t26 to timing t35 in FIG. 164.

It should be noted that it may be configured such that when the player's own tank's gun turret is destroyed and the player performs an operation that does not follow the operation instruction display, the destroyed turret becomes revived.
Further, it may be configured such that when the player's own tank's machine gun is destroyed and the player performs an operation that does not follow the operation instruction display, the destroyed machine gun is restored.
Further, it may be configured such that when the player performs an operation that does not follow the operation instruction display while the gun turret of the own tank is not destroyed, the player's own tank becomes more upgraded. For example, a display change may be provided in which the number of turrets increases one by one, the color of the turret changes, or the turret changes into an extra-large turret.
In this case, instead of setting the timing at which the bomb character can appear only twice as shown in FIG. 161, the number of times the bomb character can appear is increased, such as five times, to further improve the interest of the production. Can be done. In addition, special effects such as a destroyed machine gun being revived or an own tank being upgraded can be made visible to the player.

The display change may be configured to indicate the degree of expectation of a jackpot, or may be configured such that the display change is provided merely as a performance and does not indicate the degree of expectation.
For example, the level of expectation may be expressed by the number of turrets, the color of the turrets, and the size of the turrets. Alternatively, the number of turrets, the color of the turrets, and the size of the turrets may be used to suggest or notify the current game state or the game state that will occur.

The bomb character A or the bomb character B may be configured to be always displayed in the first period, the second period, and the variable display in the look-ahead effect. With such a configuration, operation instructions are always shown to the player, making it possible to create a sense of tension in the player, thereby increasing interest.

Although we have shown an example in which a special display change is given by operating the left lever 3720 without following the instructed operation details, an operation that is contrary to the instructed operation details or an operation that is different from the instructed operation details has been shown. It may be configured such that a special display change is given depending on the display.

Although we have shown an example in which both "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Mite" give operational instructions, it may also be configured so that only one character gives operational instructions in a series of "Bomb Character Reach". . In this case, it is preferable for the other character to display a line such as "Um, munyamunya."

In this way, in ``Bomb Character Reach,'' a special display change is applied when an operation that does not follow the operation instruction display is performed, making it possible to give the player a special sense of satisfaction. Become.

Conventionally, there have been cases in which a predetermined image is displayed to suggest the result of a special lottery based on an operation by a player (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2010-046210). Incidentally, the number of times such operations are accepted and the number of times displays are performed in response to the acceptance of operations are determined in advance. Further, the period during which the player can perform operations is limited to a predetermined period, and the display mode cannot be freely changed by the player's free operation. Further, the display time of the effects displayed in this manner is constant, and there is room for improvement in this respect as well. In the embodiment shown below, it is possible to accept multiple operations during the valid operation period, and the display time of the image displayed based on the operation is set to be long or short, and depending on the length of the displayed time, special An embodiment that makes it possible to suggest the lottery result will be described.

The "sudden tank effect" that can be executed as a look-ahead effect pattern will be described below with reference to FIG. 174 and the like. Note that whether or not to perform the "sudden tank effect" is determined based on pre-reading the pending contents on the peripheral control board 1510.
Figure 174 shows the types of performance patterns that can be selected, the conditions under which the performance patterns are selected, and the period during which the look-ahead performance is executed (specifically, how many times the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner) in the "sudden tank performance". This is a table showing whether the program is executed with

The look-ahead performance pattern 01 is a performance pattern that can be selected when the number of reservations is 1 to 4 when the previous fluctuating display of decorative symbols ends and the fluctuating display of decorative symbols starts anew. The look-ahead effect pattern 01 is an effect pattern in which a "sudden tank effect" is executed in the variable display related to the suspension at the start of the variable display. Note that the look-ahead effect pattern 01 is executed only in one variable display period, so strictly speaking it is not a look-ahead effect, but for convenience, it will be referred to as a look-ahead effect.

The look-ahead performance pattern 02 is a performance pattern that can be selected when the number of reservations is 1 to 3 when the previous fluctuating display of decorative symbols ends and the fluctuating display of decorative symbols starts anew. The look-ahead effect pattern 02 is an effect pattern in which a "sudden tank effect" is executed in the variable display related to the hold at the start of the variable display and the variable display related to the first hold.

The look-ahead performance pattern 03 is a performance pattern that can be selected when the number of reservations is 1 to 2 when the previous variable display of decorative symbols is finished and the variable display of decorative symbols is newly started. The look-ahead performance pattern 03 is a performance pattern in which a "sudden tank performance" is executed in the variable display related to the hold at the start of the variable display, the variable display related to the first hold, and the variable display related to the second hold.

The look-ahead performance pattern 04 is a performance pattern that can be selected when the number of reservations is 1 to 3 when the previous variable display of decorative symbols is finished and the variable display of decorative symbols is newly started. In the look-ahead effect pattern 04, the "sudden tank effect" is executed in the variable display related to the relevant hold at the start of the variable display, the variable display related to the first hold, the variable display related to the second hold, and the variable display related to the third hold. This is a performance pattern.

In addition, in performance patterns that perform multiple fluctuating displays such as look-ahead performance pattern 02 to look-ahead performance pattern 04, for the final fluctuating display when the "sudden tank performance" is executed, the result of the special lottery is the difference between a jackpot and a loss. Either one is fine, but for the special lottery results for the intermediate variable display other than the last variable display where the "sudden tank effect" is executed, if all of them are losers, the pre-read effect based on the pre-read effect pattern 02 to the pre-read effect pattern 04 will be applied. It is a good idea to do this.

FIG. 175 is a table showing three display effect patterns displayed in the "sudden tank effect". Further, FIG. 176 is a time chart showing the effect mode when the prefetch effect pattern 01 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 176(a), in the "sudden tank performance", the time during which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner is 14 seconds from timing t0 to timing t14. Further, the time during which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed is one second. Further, at timing t0, the operation reception of the attack button 3710 becomes valid, and at timing t14 when the variable display of the decorative pattern ends, the operation reception of the attack button 3710 becomes invalid. During a period (timing t0 to timing t14) during which operation acceptance of the attack button 3710 is valid, a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed in the display area. Below, with reference to FIG. 177, a description will be given of the performance mode displayed in the display area based on the player's operation on the attack button 3710.

FIG. 177 is a diagram showing a display mode in the display area at a predetermined timing in the time chart described with reference to FIG. 176.

FIG. 177(a) shows a state in which an image of the own tank is displayed in the display area at timing t0. The decorative symbols (3, ↓, 3) in the reach state are displayed in the upper left of the display area, the image of your own tank facing forward is displayed in the lower center of the display area, and the image of your own tank facing forward is displayed in the upper center of the display area. An image of the enemy tank facing its direction, an image of the road the tank is moving on in the center of the display area in the horizontal direction, an image of the horizon and sky at the top of the display area, and a character for the production at the bottom right of the display area. In the lower left of the display area, there is a window image surrounding the dialogue image of Colonel Dyna, and a window image surrounding the dialogue image of Sergeant Might, who is a production character, and a window image surrounding the dialogue image of Sergeant Might. A simulated image simulating an attack button 3710 is displayed on the right side of the enclosing window image.
In this manner, in the "sudden tank effect", at timing t0, the image of the own tank and the image of the enemy tank are suddenly displayed, and operation reception for the attack button 3710 becomes valid.

As shown in FIG. 176(a), if the attack button 3710 is not operated during the valid operation period, the display of the image of the enemy tank continues until timing t14. Further, at timing t14, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, after the player's operation of the attack button 3710 is detected, an effect display corresponding to the operation is immediately executed. FIG. 175 is a table showing performance patterns executed based on the operation on the attack button 3710.
Furthermore, FIGS. 176(b) to 176(d) are time charts showing a state in which a performance pattern corresponding to the operation is executed based on the reception of the operation on the attack button 3710 at timing t3.
In addition, FIGS. 176(e) to 176(g) are time frames showing a state in which the performance pattern corresponding to the operation is executed based on the reception of the operation on the attack button 3710 at two timings, timing t3 and timing t8. It is a chart.

FIG. 175 shows the effect patterns selected in response to the operation of the attack button 3710.
When smoke display effect pattern 01 is selected, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second. At the same time, a smoke image showing smoke rising from the enemy tank will be displayed for 1 second in the upper right corner of the image of the enemy tank being destroyed. After that, an image of the enemy tank being destroyed is displayed for one second.
When smoke display effect pattern 02 is selected, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed for two seconds. At the same time, a smoke image showing smoke rising from the enemy tank will be displayed for 2 seconds in the upper right corner of the image of the enemy tank being destroyed. After that, an image of the enemy tank being destroyed is displayed for one second.
When smoke display effect pattern 03 is selected, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed for 3 seconds. At the same time, a smoke image showing smoke rising from the enemy tank will be displayed for 3 seconds in the upper right corner of the image of the enemy tank being destroyed. After that, an image of the enemy tank being destroyed is displayed for one second.

The appearance ratio is determined in advance by the smoke display performance pattern 01 to smoke display performance pattern 03 so as to indicate the degree of expectation that the fluctuating display result will be a jackpot. The expectation level is 30% when smoke display performance pattern 01 is executed, the expectation level is 50% when smoke display performance pattern 02 is executed, and the expectation level is 100% when smoke display performance pattern 03 is executed. It is.

FIG. 176(b) is a time chart showing an example of a performance in which the smoke display performance pattern 01 is executed from timing t3 to timing t5 based on the operation on the attack button 3710.
FIG. 176(c) is a time chart showing an example of the effect in which the smoke display effect pattern 02 is executed from timing t3 to timing t6 based on the operation on the attack button 3710.
FIG. 176(d) is a time chart showing an example of a performance in which the smoke display performance pattern 03 is executed from timing t3 to timing t7 based on the operation on the attack button 3710.

FIG. 177(b) shows a display example in the display area when the attack button 3710 is operated at timing t3 in the production examples shown in FIGS. 176(b) to 176(d). In FIG. 177(b), an image of a shell being fired at an enemy tank and the shell exploding, and an image of the destroyed enemy tank are displayed in the display area.

The display shown in FIG. 177(b) ends in less than 1 second (for example, 0.1 second), and the display state shown in FIG. 177(c) is reached. In this display state, the enemy tank's gun battery is destroyed, and a smoke image showing smoke rising from the enemy tank is displayed at the upper right of the image of the destroyed enemy tank.

In the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 176(b), smoke display effect pattern 01 is selected, so one second after the display state shown in FIG. 177(c) is reached, the smoke image shown in FIG. 177(d) is displayed. is not displayed. Also, here, "Colonel Dinah's" lines are also displayed differently, indicating that expectations are low.

In the case of the production example shown in FIG. 176(c), because smoke display production pattern 02 is selected, a display state in which no smoke image is displayed will be reached 2 seconds after the display state shown in FIG. 177(c) is reached. (Illustration omitted). The line from "Colonel Dyna" that will be displayed two seconds later will be "Is the power of the new gun pretty good?" Here, ``Colonel Dinah'''s line indicates that expectations are moderate.

In the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 176(d), smoke display effect pattern 03 is selected, and the smoke image shown in FIG. 177(e) is displayed 3 seconds after the display state shown in FIG. 177(c) is reached. is not displayed. In addition, the lines of "Colonel Dinah" are also displayed differently, indicating that expectations are high.

In this way, it is suggested that the longer the smoke image is displayed (one second, two seconds, or three seconds), the higher the expectation of a jackpot.
Therefore, the player visually recognizes the display area, expecting that the smoke image will be displayed for a long time.
Furthermore, the lines of "Colonel Dyna" that are displayed when the display of the smoke image ends are displayed in correspondence with each smoke display performance pattern. Therefore, the lines ``Colonel Dinah'' also suggests the level of expectation of winning the jackpot. "Colonel Dyna's" lines correspond to the display time of the smoke image, so even if you don't know the exact display time of the smoke image, you can know the level of expectation and don't bother checking the display time of the smoke image. It is possible to make even players who have nothing to do and have a low level of concentration on the game feel interested in the game.

One second after the smoke image stops being displayed, a new image of an enemy tank is displayed. For example, in the case of the production example shown in FIG. 176(b), a new image of an enemy tank is displayed at timing t5. In the case of the production example shown in FIG. 176(c), at timing t6, a new image of an enemy tank is displayed. In the case of the production example shown in FIG. 176(d), a new image of an enemy tank is displayed at timing t7. FIG. 177(f) is a presentation example showing a state in which an image of a new enemy tank is displayed.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 176(b) to 176(d), the attack button 3710 is not operated after that and the variable display of the decorative symbols ends at timing t14.

FIG. 178(a) shows a display example that is displayed for one second from timing t14 to timing t15 when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot in the production examples shown in FIGS. 176(b) to 176(d). There is. In the figure, the decorative pattern is shown stopped at "333" indicating that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. In addition, the dialogue images of "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Mite" are also displayed in a manner that notifies you of a jackpot.
FIG. 178(b) shows a display example that is displayed for one second from timing t14 to timing t15 when the special lottery result is a loss in the production examples shown in FIGS. 176(b) to 176(d). There is. In the figure, the decorative pattern is shown stopped at "343" indicating that the result of the special lottery is a loss. Furthermore, the dialogue images of "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Mite" are also displayed in a manner that notifies them of their loss.

With reference to FIG. 176(b) to FIG. 176(d), an example of the effect is shown when an operation is accepted for the attack button 3710 at timing t3. It is possible to execute any of the smoke display performance patterns by accepting an operation from.

In this way, by accepting the operation from the player not only once but multiple times from timing t0 to timing t14, it is possible to execute the smoke display performance pattern multiple times.

FIGS. 176(e) to 176(g) show examples of effects when it is detected that the attack button 3710 has been operated at two timings, timing t3 and timing t8.
FIG. 176(e) shows an example of a performance in which smoke display performance pattern 01 is started at timing t3 and smoke display performance pattern 01 is started at timing t8.
FIG. 176(f) shows an example of a performance in which smoke display performance pattern 01 is started at timing t3 and smoke display performance pattern 02 is started at timing t8.
FIG. 176(g) shows an example of a performance in which smoke display performance pattern 01 is started at timing t3 and smoke display performance pattern 03 is started at timing t8.
Note that even if the smoke display effect pattern is executed multiple times, each time the effect pattern is executed, the same display as the effect example described with reference to FIGS. 176(b) to 176(d) is displayed. It will be done.

Note that if it is detected that the player has operated the attack button 3710 while a certain smoke display effect pattern is being executed, then after the smoke display effect pattern that is being executed ends, the screen shown in FIG. 177(f) After the display state shown in FIG. 177(b) continues for one second, one of the smoke display effect patterns may be automatically executed, resulting in the display state shown in FIG. 177(b) and thereafter. For example, if the player operates the attack button 3710 three times in a short period of time (for example, one second) while an image of an enemy tank that has not been destroyed is displayed, a smoke display pattern will be automatically executed three times. will be done.

An example was shown in which the "sudden tank effect" is executed in one variable display when the look-ahead effect pattern 01 is selected. The execution mode of "tank production" will be explained.
In the ``sudden tank effect'', the effect is executed over a maximum of four variable displays, but the variable time required for each variable display is 14 seconds, and the variable stop time is 1 second.

Below, with reference to FIGS. 179 and 180, an example of the effect when the prefetch effect pattern 02 is executed will be described. The look-ahead performance pattern 02 is a performance pattern in which a "sudden tank performance" is executed over two variable displays.
In this case, the target whose expectation level is suggested by the look-ahead effect is the special lottery result corresponding to the second variable display. Moreover, the special lottery results corresponding to the variable display other than the second time are losers. This point is the same for the pre-read effect pattern 03 and the pre-read effect pattern 04.
In addition, in the look-ahead effect pattern 02 to look-ahead effect pattern 04, if the display of the smoke image or the image of the destroyed enemy tank starts and ends during the variable display of the decorative pattern, refer to FIGS. 176 and 177. A display similar to the production example described above is performed.

Below, the display mode of the smoke image and the image of the destroyed enemy tank during the static display of the decorative pattern will be explained.
As shown in FIG. 179(a), if the attack button 3710 is not operated at all, the display state shown in FIG. 180(a) is reached from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 179(b), when the smoke display effect pattern 01 is started at timing t12 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the effect by the smoke display effect pattern 01 ends at timing t14, and at timing t14. The display state shown in FIG. 180(b) is reached from timing t15 to timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 179(c), when the smoke display effect pattern 02 is started at timing t13 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the smoke image and the destroyed enemy tank are displayed from timing t14 to timing t15. Since the image is displayed, the display state shown in FIG. 180(c) is reached from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 179(d), when the smoke display effect pattern 03 is started at timing t12 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the smoke image and the destroyed enemy tank are displayed from timing t14 to timing t15. Since the image is displayed, the display state shown in FIG. 180(c) is reached from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 179(e), when smoke display effect pattern 01 is started at timing t13 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed from timing t14 to timing t15. Therefore, the display state shown in FIG. 180(d) is obtained from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 179(f), when the smoke display effect pattern 03 is started at timing t11 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed from timing t14 to timing t15. Therefore, the display state shown in FIG. 180(e) is obtained from timing t14 to timing t15.

Incidentally, at timing t15, variable display of a new decorative pattern is started. At this time, the display of decorative symbols is also started in a display mode forming a reach state such as "3↓3".

With reference to FIG. 179, the display mode of the smoke image and the destroyed enemy tank image when the decorative pattern corresponding to the hold that occurred before the hold that was the target of the look-ahead effect is stopped has been explained. With reference to FIG. 181, the display mode of the smoke image and the destroyed enemy tank image when the decorative pattern corresponding to the hold that is the target of the look-ahead effect is stopped will be described.

FIGS. 181(b) to 181(f) all show performance examples in which the execution period of the selected smoke display performance pattern overlaps with the stop display period of the decorative pattern (timing t29 to timing t30). In the production examples shown in FIGS. 181(b) to 181(f), even during the execution period of the selected smoke display production pattern, the smoke display production pattern in progress is stopped at timing t29, and the decoration This shows an example of a performance in which symbols are displayed in a stopped state. From timing t29 to timing t30, the display state is as shown in FIG. 178(a) or FIG. 178(b) based on the special lottery result.

On the other hand, only when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, the currently executed smoke display effect pattern may be executed for a predetermined execution period. In this case, although the jackpot game state starts from timing t30, timings t30 to t35 are the opening state of the jackpot game, and the opening/closing operation of the jackpot opening 2005 is preferably started from timing t35. FIGS. 182(b) to 182(f) show examples of effects in which a smoke image or an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed while the variation of decorative symbols is stopped or during a jackpot game.

On the other hand, it may be configured such that the currently executed smoke display effect pattern is executed for a predetermined execution period only when the result of the special lottery is a loss. In this case, although the next variable display starts from timing t30, the tank effect is suddenly continued even in the next variable display, and the "sudden tank effect" is configured to end in the middle of the variable display. good.
Figures 182(b) to 182(f) show examples of effects in which a smoke image or an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed when the decorative pattern stops changing or when the next changing display starts. .

In this way, in the "sudden tank effect" according to the present embodiment, it is possible to accept an operation on the attack button 3710 (operation section) at the same time as the decorative pattern starts changing, and display effects based on the operation on the operation section can be performed. The number of times the display effect is performed is not predetermined, and the display effect can be performed an arbitrary number of times based on the player's intention, so that the player has a strong interest in operating the operation unit. I can do it. In addition to simply operating the operation panel, pay attention to the display time of the smoke image (specific display) that is displayed in response to the operation (it is suggested that the longer the display time, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. This can further improve interest. Furthermore, since the variation time of the decorative pattern is set to be short, it is possible to create a sense of tension regarding the operation on the operation unit and the display time of the smoke image displayed in response to the operation. In addition, as a look-ahead effect, by configuring this display effect to be executable over the fluctuations of multiple decorative patterns, the degree of expectation indicated by the display time of the smoke image is determined by the degree of expectation regarding the change of any decorative pattern. It is possible to increase the player's interest in whether or not there is such a thing.

Although three smoke display effect patterns are shown in FIG. 175, a "sudden tank effect" may be executed using a table in which only smoke display effect pattern 01 and smoke display effect pattern 02 are executed. Alternatively, a "sudden tank effect" can be executed using a table in which only smoke display effect pattern 01 and smoke display effect pattern 03 are executed, or a table in which only smoke display effect pattern 02 and smoke display effect pattern 03 are executed. Good too.

Furthermore, as a smoke display performance pattern 04, a performance pattern in which a destruction image and a smoke image are displayed for 4 seconds, and then only the destruction image is displayed for 1 second, and a performance pattern with a jackpot expectation of 100%, and a smoke display performance pattern 05, Either or both of the performance patterns in which the expected jackpot is 100% may be adopted in a performance mode in which the destruction image and the smoke image are displayed for 5 seconds, and then only the destruction image is displayed for 1 second. In this way, by adopting a performance pattern with a long performance execution period, the player can almost certainly notice that the level of expectation is 100%, and it is possible to increase interest.

With reference to FIGS. 174 to 182, an embodiment has been shown in which the longer the display time of the smoke image (specific display), the higher the expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a jackpot. A modified embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 183 to 190, in which the shorter the display time of the image (image of a destroyed enemy tank), the higher the expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a jackpot. . Note that descriptions of processes, displays, etc. that are the same as before transformation may be omitted.

FIG. 183 shows the effect patterns selected in response to the operation of the attack button 3710.
When white flag display effect pattern 01 is selected, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed for three seconds. After that, an image of the enemy tank being destroyed is displayed for one second. At the same time, a white flag image indicating that the enemy tank has surrendered is displayed for one second over the image of the enemy tank being destroyed.
When white flag display performance pattern 02 is selected, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed for two seconds. After that, an image of the enemy tank being destroyed is displayed for one second. At the same time, a white flag image indicating that the enemy tank has surrendered is displayed for one second over the image of the enemy tank being destroyed.
When the white flag display performance pattern 03 is selected, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second. After that, an image of the enemy tank being destroyed is displayed for one second. At the same time, a white flag image indicating that the enemy tank has surrendered is displayed for one second over the image of the enemy tank being destroyed.

The appearance ratio is determined in advance by the white flag display performance pattern 01 to white flag display performance pattern 03 so as to indicate the degree of expectation that the fluctuating display result will be a jackpot. The expectation level is 30% when white flag display performance pattern 01 is executed, the expectation level is 50% when white flag display performance pattern 02 is executed, and the expectation level is 100% when white flag display performance pattern 03 is executed. It is.

FIG. 184(b) is a time chart showing an example of a performance in which the white flag display performance pattern 01 is executed from timing t3 to timing t7 based on the operation on the attack button 3710.
FIG. 184(c) is a time chart showing an example of a performance in which the white flag display performance pattern 02 is executed from timing t3 to timing t6 based on the operation on the attack button 3710.
FIG. 184(d) is a time chart showing an example of a performance in which the white flag display performance pattern 03 is executed from timing t3 to timing t5 based on the operation on the attack button 3710.

FIG. 185(b) shows a display example in the display area when the attack button 3710 is operated at timing t3 in the production examples shown in FIGS. 184(b) to 184(d). In FIG. 185(b), an image of a shell being fired at an enemy tank and the shell exploding, and an image of the destroyed enemy tank are displayed in the display area.

The display shown in FIG. 185(b) ends in less than 1 second (for example, 0.1 seconds), and the display state shown in FIG. 185(c) is reached. In this display state, the gun battery of the enemy tank is destroyed, and an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed. Note that the white flag image is not yet displayed at this stage.

In the case of the production example shown in FIG. 184(b), since the white flag display production pattern 01 is selected, the white flag image shown in FIG. 185(d) is displayed 3 seconds after the display state shown in FIG. 185(c) is reached. The display state will be such that is displayed. Also, here, "Colonel Dinah's" lines are also displayed differently, indicating that expectations are low.

In the case of the production example shown in FIG. 184(c), by selecting the white flag display production pattern 02, the display state in which the white flag image is displayed 2 seconds after the display state shown in FIG. 185(c) is reached. (not shown). The line from "Colonel Dyna" that is displayed two seconds later is "Is the enemy's army's morale fair?" Here, ``Colonel Dinah'''s line indicates that expectations are moderate.

In the case of the production example shown in FIG. 184(d), since the white flag display production pattern 03 is selected, the white flag image shown in FIG. 185(e) is displayed one second after the display state shown in FIG. 185(c) is reached. The display state will be such that is displayed. In addition, the lines of "Colonel Dinah" are also displayed differently, indicating that expectations are high.

This suggests that the longer the white flag image is not displayed and only the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed (either 1 second, 2 seconds, or 3 seconds), the higher the expectation of a jackpot. be done.
Therefore, the player views the display area expecting that the white flag image will not be displayed and only the image of the destroyed enemy tank will be displayed for a long time.
Furthermore, the lines of "Colonel Dyna" that are displayed when the white flag image starts to be displayed are displayed in correspondence with each white flag display performance pattern. Therefore, the line ``Colonel Dinah'' also suggests the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot. "Colonel Dyna's" line corresponds to the time when the white flag image is not displayed and only the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed, so the white flag image is not displayed and only the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed. Even if you don't know exactly when the will be displayed, you can still know what to expect and don't bother checking the time when the white flag image is not displayed and only the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed. Even players who have a low level of concentration on games can be made to feel interested in the game.

One second after the white flag image is displayed, a new image of an enemy tank is displayed. For example, in the case of the production example shown in FIG. 184(b), a new image of an enemy tank is displayed at timing t7. In the case of the production example shown in FIG. 184(c), a new image of an enemy tank is displayed at timing t6. In the case of the production example shown in FIG. 184(d), at timing t5, a new image of an enemy tank is displayed. FIG. 185(f) is a presentation example showing a state in which an image of a new enemy tank is displayed.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 184(b) to 184(d), the attack button 3710 is not operated after that and the variable display of the decorative symbols ends at timing t14.

FIG. 186(a) shows a display state that is displayed for one second from timing t14 to timing t15 when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot in the production examples shown in FIGS. 184(b) to 184(d). There is. In the figure, the decorative pattern is shown stopped at "333" indicating that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. In addition, the dialogue images of "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Mite" are also displayed in a manner that notifies you of a jackpot.
FIG. 186(b) shows a display state that is displayed for one second from timing t14 to timing t15 when the result of the special lottery is a loss in the production examples shown in FIGS. 184(b) to 184(d). There is. In the figure, the decorative pattern is shown stopped at "343" indicating that the result of the special lottery is a loss. Furthermore, the dialogue images of "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Mite" are also displayed in a manner that notifies them of their loss.

With reference to FIG. 184(b) to FIG. 184(d), an example of a production is shown when an operation is accepted for the attack button 3710 at timing t3. It is possible to execute any of the white flag display effects patterns by accepting an operation from the user.

Further, by accepting an operation from the player not only once but multiple times from timing t0 to timing t14, it is possible to execute the white flag display performance pattern multiple times.

FIGS. 184(e) to 184(g) show examples of effects when it is detected that the attack button 3710 has been operated at two timings, timing t3 and timing t8.
FIG. 184(e) shows an example of a performance in which the white flag display performance pattern 01 is started at timing t3 and the white flag display performance pattern 01 is started at timing t8.
FIG. 184(f) shows an example of a performance in which white flag display performance pattern 01 is started at timing t3 and white flag display performance pattern 02 is started at timing t8.
FIG. 184(g) shows an example of a performance in which white flag display performance pattern 01 is started at timing t3 and white flag display performance pattern 03 is started at timing t8.
Note that even if the white flag display effect pattern is executed multiple times, each time the effect pattern is executed, the same display as the example effect described with reference to FIGS. 184(b) to 184(d) is displayed. It will be done.

Note that if it is detected that the player has operated the attack button 3710 while a certain white flag display performance pattern is being executed, then after the white flag display performance pattern that is being executed is completed, the process shown in FIG. After the display state shown in FIG. 185(b) continues for one second, one of the white flag display effect patterns may be automatically executed, resulting in the display state shown in FIG. 185(b) and thereafter. For example, if the player operates the attack button 3710 three times in a short period of time (for example, one second) while an image of an enemy tank that has not been destroyed is displayed, a three-time white flag display effect pattern will be automatically executed. will be done.

An example was shown in which the "sudden tank effect" is executed in one variable display when the look-ahead effect pattern 01 is selected. The execution mode of "tank production" will be explained.
In the ``sudden tank effect'', the effect is executed over a maximum of four variable displays, but the variable time required for one variable display is 14 seconds, and the variable stop time is 1 second.

Below, with reference to FIGS. 187 and 188, an example of the effect when the prefetch effect pattern 02 is executed will be described. The look-ahead effect pattern 02 is an effect pattern in which a "sudden tank effect" is executed over two variable displays.
In this case, the target whose expectation level is suggested by the look-ahead effect is the special lottery result corresponding to the second variable display. Moreover, special lottery results corresponding to variable displays other than the second time are losers. This point is the same for the pre-read effect pattern 03 and the pre-read effect pattern 04.
In addition, in the look-ahead effect pattern 02 to look-ahead effect pattern 04, if the display of the white flag image or the image of the destroyed enemy tank starts and ends during the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern, refer to FIGS. 184 and 185. A display similar to the production example described above is performed.

Below, the display mode of the white flag image and the image of the destroyed enemy tank during the static display of the decorative pattern will be explained.
As shown in FIG. 187(a), if the attack button 3710 is not operated at all, the display state shown in FIG. 188(a) is reached from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 187(b), when the white flag display performance pattern 03 is started at timing t12 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the performance by the white flag display performance pattern 03 ends at timing t14, and at timing t14. The display state shown in FIG. 188(b) is reached from timing t15 to timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 187(c), when the white flag display effect pattern 02 is started at timing t13 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed from timing t14 to timing t15. Therefore, from timing t14 to timing t15, the display state is as shown in FIG. 188(c).
As shown in FIG. 187(d), when the white flag display effect pattern 01 is started at timing t12 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed from timing t14 to timing t15. Therefore, from timing t14 to timing t15, the display state is as shown in FIG. 188(c).
As shown in FIG. 187(e), when the white flag display performance pattern 03 is started at timing t13 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the white flag image and the destroyed enemy tank are displayed from timing t14 to timing t15. Since the image is displayed, the display state shown in FIG. 188(d) is reached from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 187(f), when the white flag display effect pattern 01 is started at timing t11 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, from timing t14 to timing t15, a white flag image and a destroyed enemy tank are displayed. Since the image is displayed, the display state shown in FIG. 188(e) is reached from timing t14 to timing t15.

Incidentally, at timing t15, variable display of a new decorative pattern is started. At this time, the display of decorative symbols is also started in a display mode forming a reach state such as "3↓3".

With reference to FIG. 187, we have explained the display mode of the white flag image and the destroyed enemy tank image when the decorative pattern corresponding to the hold that occurred before the hold that was the target of the look-ahead effect stops. , with reference to FIG. 189, the display mode of the white flag image and the destroyed enemy tank image when the decorative pattern corresponding to the hold that is the target of the look-ahead effect is stopped will be described.

FIGS. 189(b) to 189(f) all show performance examples in which the execution period of the selected white flag display performance pattern overlaps with the stop display period of the decorative pattern (timing t29 to timing t30). In the production examples shown in FIGS. 189(b) to 189(f), even during the execution period of the selected white flag display production pattern, the white flag display production pattern being executed is stopped at timing t29, and the decoration This shows an example of a performance in which symbols are displayed in a stopped state. From timing t29 to timing t30, the display state is as shown in FIG. 186(a) or FIG. 186(b) based on the special lottery result.

On the other hand, only when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, the currently executed white flag display performance pattern may be configured to be executed for a predetermined execution period. In this case, although the jackpot game state starts from timing t30, timings t30 to t35 are the opening state of the jackpot game, and the opening/closing operation of the jackpot opening 2005 is preferably started from timing t35. FIGS. 190(b) to 190(f) show examples of effects in which a white flag image or an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed while the decorative symbols are stopped changing or during a jackpot game.

On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the currently executed white flag display performance pattern is configured to be executed for a predetermined execution period, and if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, the currently executed white flag display pattern is configured to be executed for a predetermined execution period. The production pattern may be configured to be interrupted without being executed for a predetermined execution period. This prevents the occurrence of situations where players feel dissatisfied with the outcome of the special lottery, even though the highly anticipated performance was executed if the display of the destroyed images of enemy tanks is interrupted. This is to do so.
In addition, if the result of the special lottery is a loss and there is one or more pending items, the next variable display will start from timing t30, but the "sudden tank effect" will continue even in the next variable display, It is preferable to configure the system so that the "sudden tank effect" ends during the fluctuating display. With this configuration, it is possible to end the "sudden tank effect" in a natural manner without making the player feel uncomfortable.
Figures 190(b) to 190(f) show examples of effects in which a smoke image or an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed when the decorative pattern stops changing or when the next changing display starts. .

The embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 183 to 190 can also achieve the same effects as the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 175 to 182. In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 183 to 190, it is suggested that the shorter the display time of the destroyed enemy tank, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. We will be watching the display effects while hoping that the display time of the tank will be short.

174 to 190, an embodiment regarding the "sudden tank effect" has been shown, but the embodiment may be modified as follows. Although an embodiment in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and a smoke image are displayed will be described as an example, a similar modification will be made in an embodiment in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and a white flag image are displayed. Good too.

As shown in FIGS. 175 and 183, the display time of the image of the destroyed enemy tank is 2 seconds, 3 seconds, or 4 seconds. A predetermined sound effect may be output while the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed. For example, it is preferable to prepare sound effects for 2 seconds, 3 seconds, and 4 seconds in advance, and start outputting the sound effects for the same number of seconds at the same time as the image of the destroyed enemy tank starts to be displayed. In this way, the display of the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the output of the sound effects may be configured to start at the same timing and end at the same timing.

On the other hand, it may be modified so that the display time of the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the output time of the sound effect are different. For example, prepare only a sound effect with an output time of 4 seconds, and output this sound effect regardless of whether the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for 2 seconds, 3 seconds, or 4 seconds. It is recommended to configure it as follows. With this configuration, the level of expectation will not be known unless one is watching the display of the image of the destroyed enemy tank, making it possible to create a sense of tension in the game. Note that only sound effects with an output time of 3 seconds may be used, or only sound effects with an output time of 2 seconds may be used.

Audio may be output by looping a predetermined sound effect. For example, a sound effect having a length of one second may be played multiple times (twice, three times, four times) in accordance with the display time of the image of the destroyed enemy tank. For example, a sound effect whose length is 1 second may be played four times in succession to output the sound effect for 4 seconds. In this case, as above, the sound effect is output a certain number of times (for a certain period of time), although the display time is different, so that the expectation level is not known unless you are paying close attention to the display form of the image of the destroyed enemy tank. This can add a sense of tension to the game.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 175, the expectation level when smoke display effect pattern 01 is executed is set to 30%, but it may be set to 0% instead of 30%. Similarly, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 183, the expectation level when the white flag display performance pattern 01 is executed is set to 30%, but it may be set to 0% instead of 30%.

This embodiment is configured so that a performance pattern that displays an image of an enemy tank being destroyed can be executed multiple times by referring to each performance pattern described in FIGS. 175 and 183 based on operations by the player. However, for highly anticipated performance patterns, a limit may be set on the number of times they are executed. For example, the number of times that the smoke display performance pattern 03 and the white flag display performance pattern 03 with a jackpot expectation level of 100% are executed during one "sudden tank performance" may be limited to one time. Further, the number of times that a performance pattern with an expectation level of 0% as described above is executed may be similarly limited to one time. With this configuration, the player carefully observes whether or not a production pattern with high expectations (or low expectations) will be executed, making it possible to create a sense of tension in the game.

As shown in FIGS. 177 and 185, in this embodiment, a decorative pattern (during a variable display and a stopped display), a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, an image of an undestroyed enemy tank, an image of a destroyed enemy Although the tank images are displayed relatively small in the display area, at least one of them may be displayed larger. For example, decorative patterns may be displayed in variable sizes as shown in FIGS. 139(b) and 139(c). In this case, these images may be displayed in an overlapping manner. In this case, the display priority is given to the image of an undestroyed enemy tank and the image of a destroyed enemy tank. ). Furthermore, it is preferable to further lower the display priority for images of own tanks, dialogue images, and background images such as roads.

With this configuration, the decorative pattern (during fluctuating display and static display), the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710, the image of an undestroyed enemy tank, or the image of a destroyed enemy tank overlap each other. Even if displayed, the visibility of images of undestroyed enemy tanks and destroyed enemy tanks is not obstructed by the decorative pattern or the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710. As a result, the timing at which the image of the destroyed enemy tank starts to be displayed and the display ends becomes clear, thereby preventing the player from having a misunderstanding about the display time of the image of the destroyed enemy tank, that is, the degree of expectation. can.

An embodiment has been shown in which the image of the enemy tank is always displayed in a destroyed state by operating the attack button 3710, but the difficulty level has been increased so that the image of the enemy tank is displayed in a destroyed state. It's okay. In this case, the display conditions for the operation of the operation unit in the embodiment described above may be adopted. For example, a lottery may be drawn when the attack button 3710 is operated, and if a winner is won with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/2), the image of the enemy tank may be destroyed and displayed. Good too. In this way, by configuring the image of the destroyed enemy tank to be displayed when specific conditions are met, it is possible to increase the difficulty of displaying the image of the destroyed enemy tank, and the attack button 3710 Even if the player is operating the tank, the player can feel a sense of tension in not knowing when the image of the destroyed tank will be displayed.

In the example described above, when the expectation level of the jackpot is 100%, that is, the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, an example of a production in which an image of a destroyed tank is displayed at a different time than usual in the "sudden tank production" (smoke (Example of performance when display performance pattern 03 or white flag display performance pattern 03 is selected) is shown, but it not only suggests a jackpot, but also suggests other gaming values that will be profitable for the player. You may do so. For example, as mentioned above, by winning a symbol that gives time savings, or by executing a predetermined number of losing fluctuations from the time the power is turned on or from the previous win, time savings are given from the normal gaming state. A ``sudden tank performance'' may be performed in the event of a loss change that triggers a switch to the gaming state. This case also has the common point that a time-saving gaming state is provided instead of a win as an advantageous benefit to the player, so that the various effects described in the above-mentioned embodiments can be similarly achieved.

In the above-described embodiment, the expectation level of a jackpot is indicated by the "sudden tank effect", but it may be configured such that the "sudden tank effect" indicates the type of profit to be given to the player. For example, as a profit to be given to the player, after a fluctuating decorative symbol becomes a jackpot, which of the time-saving state or the variable probability state will be given, or is it likely to be granted (for example, the expectation that the variable probability state will be given)? It may also be possible to indicate what percentage the degree is. Alternatively, in a gaming machine that can shift to a time-saving state or a variable probability state after a change in decorative symbols without going through a jackpot state, whether or not the time-saving state or variable probability state is granted after a change in decorative symbols is given. It may also indicate whether it is easy (for example, what percentage is the expectation that the probability variable state will occur).

In this way, the "Ikinari Tank Effect" can improve the interest of the gaming machine.

Conventionally, there has been an effect that requires a player to operate an operation unit (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-046210). In such effects, a predetermined effect display is displayed regardless of whether the player performs an operation on the operation section or not, so that the operation on the operation section becomes more tense. It was blurry. In particular, even if a complicated operation mode is required, in the end it is just a pretense, and a predetermined effect will be performed regardless of the operation mode performed by the player on the operation section. By executing such a performance, there is a risk that the player's interest in the performance display may be reduced. As described above, there is room for improvement in conventional gaming machines in terms of effectively utilizing operations on the operating section to improve gaming enjoyment. Therefore, in the embodiments described below, a gaming machine is provided in which it is possible to give the player a sense of tension regarding the manner in which the player operates the operation section, and thereby it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in playing the game. I will explain about it.

In the embodiment shown below, the player is required to operate the left lever 3720, and the operation depends on whether the player can tilt the left lever 3720 in a predetermined direction and angle and maintain that state. The system is configured so that there are cases in which the special effect display is not obstructed and cases in which it is obstructed (cases in which it is impossible to see it or cases in which it is difficult to see it). There is.

Below, with reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 191, the display examples shown in FIGS. 192 and 193, etc., the "full power breakthrough reach" in which the player is required to operate the left lever 3720 within a predetermined range will be explained. ” will be described. Note that FIG. 192 shows a display example when an appropriate operation is performed as shown in FIG. 191(a). Further, FIG. 193 shows a display example when an appropriate operation is not performed as shown in FIG. 191(b).

At timing t5, a reach effect state occurs. In ``Full Power Breakthrough Reach'', a speed display window showing the speed of your own tank is displayed above ``Colonel Dyna'''s dialogue window. The display in the speed display window changes depending on how the player operates the left lever 3720. Images of decorative patterns, roads, and self-tanks are displayed in the same way as in other embodiments. FIGS. 192(a) and 193(a) show display examples at timing t5 when the ready-to-reach effect state occurs.

At timing t5, the operation valid period of left lever 3720 occurs. As shown with reference to FIG. 140, by operating the left lever 3720, the lateral position and speed of the own tank can be changed. The operation validity period of the left lever 3720 continues until timing t34, which is the timing at which the fluctuation of the decorative pattern stops.

At timing t7, a state is created in which a cannonball comes flying from behind the own tank. This effect state continues for 4 seconds until timing t11. Also, during this period, a simulated image simulating the left lever 3720 is displayed on the left side of "Colonel Dinah"'s dialogue window. Furthermore, the words "forward tilt" indicating the operation mode of the left lever 3720 are added to the simulated image.
FIG. 192(b) and FIG. 193(b) show display examples at timing t7.

Hereinafter, an example of the effect when the left lever 3720 is appropriately operated will be described with reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 191(a), the display example shown in FIG. 192, etc. Further, an example of the effect when the left lever 3720 is not operated appropriately will be described below with reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 191(b), the display example shown in FIG. 193, and the like.

From timing t7 to timing t11, the player needs to tilt the left lever 3720 forward by a predetermined angle for a predetermined period of time. Specifically, it is necessary to maintain the left lever 3720 between 10 degrees and 45 degrees forward from the upright position of the left lever 3720 for 2 seconds. By performing such an operation, the display area displays that the own tank is accelerating and moving. FIG. 192(c) shows a display example when the own tank is sufficiently accelerated at timing t9.

The time chart shown in FIG. 191(a) shows a state in which the player was able to tilt the left lever 3720 at an appropriate angle from timing t8 to timing t10. At timing t11, the display of the operation instruction for the left lever 3720 ends. FIG. 192(d) shows a display example from timing t11 to timing t15 when the left lever 3720 is appropriately operated.

On the other hand, if the left lever 3720 is not operated properly, for example, if there is not enough time or angle to operate the left lever 3720, a shell fired from an enemy tank may hit your own tank. , a shell is shown exploding.

The time chart in FIG. 191(b) shows an example of a performance in which the left lever 3720 is operated for only one second from timing t8 to timing t9 during the valid operation period of the left lever 3720. In this case, your tank's speed is not sufficient. Therefore, at timing t11, which is the end timing of the operation instruction display, display of an image of smoke generated by exploding shells around the image of the own tank is started.

The display state shown in FIG. 193(c) shows a display example when the speed of the own tank is not sufficient at timing t9. Further, FIG. 193(d) shows a display example in which a smoke image is displayed from timing t11 to timing t15 because the speed of the own tank was not sufficient.

Note that in FIGS. 192(c) and 192(d), characters "30 km/h" are displayed as the speed of the own tank. Furthermore, in FIGS. 193(c) and 193(d), characters "20 km/h" are displayed as the speed of the own tank. In this way, if an appropriate operation is performed on the left lever 3720 while the operation instruction is being displayed, the speed display window will display 30 km/h or more, and the appropriate operation will be performed while the operation instruction is being displayed. If not, or if an appropriate operation is not performed while the operation instruction is being displayed, the speed display window displays less than 30 km/h. Specifically, the time from when the left lever 3720 reaches the appropriate angle is measured, and the speed display of the own tank is increased by 1 km/h every 0.1 seconds. According to such a configuration, by looking at the display in the speed display window, the player can determine whether or not the operation mode of the left lever 3720 is performed appropriately, and whether or not the left lever 3720 is operated appropriately. Recognizable.

From timing t15 to timing t24, a display effect in which the own tank moves forward is performed. Due to the explosion of the shell from the enemy unit, the display of the smoke image ends at timing t15 even if the smoke image is being displayed. FIGS. 192(e) and 193(e) show examples of display in which the own tank moves forward from timing t15 to timing t24. Note that the speed in the speed display window that has been changed according to the operation on the left lever 3720 changes from the timing (timing t15) when the display of the smoke image ends to the timing when the operation instruction for the left lever 3720 is displayed again ( It is preferable to set the speed to "10 km/h" at a predetermined timing up to timing t24).

Note that in this embodiment, the speed of the own tank can be changed in accordance with the operation of the left lever 3720 during the period from timing t5 to timing t34. Therefore, by operating the left lever 3720 during the period when no operation instruction is displayed, the player can practice changing the speed of his own tank. In this case, it is preferable that the speed display window display "10 km/h" at the timing when the speed instruction display is started.

At timing t24, images of a plurality of enemy tanks are displayed at the top of the display area. The images of the plurality of enemy tanks are displayed at the top of the display area, moving leftward until timing t32. At the same time, a simulated image simulating the left lever 3720 is displayed, and display of operation instructions for the left lever 3720 is started. The operation instruction display for the left lever 3720 is continued until timing t32.

From timing t24 to timing t32, the player needs to tilt the left lever 3720 forward at a predetermined angle for a predetermined period of time. Specifically, the left lever 3720 must be maintained between 30 degrees and 45 degrees forward from the upright position of the left lever 3720 for 4 seconds. By performing such an operation, the display area displays that the own tank is moving at a maximum speed of 50 km/h.

The time chart shown in FIG. 191(a) shows a state in which the player was able to tilt the left lever 3720 at an appropriate angle from timing t25 to timing t29. At timing t32, the display of the operation instruction for the left lever 3720 ends. FIG. 192(g) shows a display example from timing t32 to timing t34 when the left lever 3720 is appropriately operated.

Next, from timing t34 to timing t35, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. FIG. 192(h) is a display example showing a display state in which decorative patterns are stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, if the left lever 3720 is not operated properly, for example, if there is not enough time to operate the left lever 3720, if the left lever 3720 is tilted at an insufficient angle, or if the left lever 3720 is tilted in the wrong direction, it will cause damage to the enemy tank and own tank. The display shows that the own tank exploded due to a collision.

The time chart in FIG. 191(b) shows a state in which the left lever 3720 is appropriately tilted for only two seconds from timing t25 to timing t27 during the valid operation period of the left lever 3720. In this case, your tank's speed is not sufficient. Therefore, from timing t32, which is the timing at which the operation instruction display ends, display of an image of smoke generated by the collision with an enemy tank starts around the image of the own tank.

FIG. 193(g) shows a display example from timing t32 to timing t34 when the own tank's acceleration is insufficient. Further, FIG. 193(h) shows a display example in which a smoke image is displayed from timing t34 to timing t35 when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed.

Note that although the display examples shown in FIGS. 192 and 193 show display examples when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, the same display is also performed when the result of the special lottery is a loss. In this case, it is preferable to stop displaying the decorative pattern with the number "343" to indicate that the result of the special lottery is a loss.

As described above, according to the "full power breakthrough reach" in this embodiment, when the player is unable to operate the left lever 3720 in an appropriate operation mode, the visibility of the stop display mode of the large displayed decorative symbol is Disturbed by smoke images. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to confirm the stop display mode of the large displayed decorative symbols, and the player will be conscious of performing operations appropriately from next time onwards. On the other hand, when the player operates the left lever 3720 in an appropriate manner, the player can visually recognize the stopped display mode of the large displayed decorative pattern without obstructing the visibility. You will feel a sense of satisfaction from completing a stressful operation.

In the present embodiment, the operation instruction display for the left lever 3720 is performed twice: from timing t7 to timing t11 and from timing t24 to timing t32, and the effect display according to the operation mode in both periods is performed. It will be done.
At this time, regarding the operation mode of the left lever 3720, the time required for the operation is longer and the operation angle is within a narrower range at the later timing than at the first timing. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an operation mode that gives a more tense feeling.

FIG. 191(c) is an embodiment modified from the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 191(a) and 191(b). In this embodiment, when a smoke image is displayed due to a shell from an enemy tank, the display time of the smoke image is increased, and the smoke image is configured to be displayed until the timing when a group of enemy tanks is displayed. There is.
Specifically, the smoke image is displayed until timing t27. In such a configuration, the display period of the smoke image (timing t11 to timing t27) and a part of the display period (timing t24 to timing t31) during which the second operation instruction display is performed may overlap. Become.
At this time, it is preferable that part or all of the simulated image of the left lever 3720 be hidden by the smoke image. Similarly, the configuration may be such that part or all of the lines of "Colonel Dyna" instructing the operation of the left lever 3720 and the speed display window are hidden.
With this configuration, if an appropriate operation is not performed during the display period (timing t7 to timing t11) during which the first operation instruction display is performed, the display period during which the second operation instruction display is performed. Since it becomes difficult to recognize the operation mode during (timing t24 to timing t31), the feeling of tension in operating the left lever 3720 can be further increased.

Further, the length for displaying the smoke image when the left lever 3720 is not properly operated may be determined by lottery. For example, the display time may be determined by lottery from a minimum of 4 seconds to a maximum of 24 seconds. In this case, the smoke image will be displayed for 4 seconds from timing t11 to timing t15 at the shortest and 24 seconds from timing t11 to timing t35 at the longest. In particular, when the longest display period is selected, the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed in the center of the display area becomes difficult or invisible due to the smoke image, regardless of how the left lever 3720 is operated for the second time. .

Note that the technical concept related to the "sudden tank effect" shown with reference to FIGS. 174 to 190 may be applied to the display mode of the smoke image in the "full power breakthrough reach". For example, the display time of the smoke image in "full power breakthrough reach" may be configured to differ depending on whether a jackpot state or a time saving state occurs.

We have shown an example in which smoke images are displayed when the player is unable to perform an appropriate operation while the operation instructions are being displayed, but instead of always displaying these images, it is possible to perform an appropriate operation. If this is not possible, the configuration may be such that these images are displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 1/2).
Also, if the special lottery result is a loss, the smoke image is configured to be displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, 3/4 probability), and if the special lottery result is a jackpot, the smoke image is not displayed. It may be configured as follows.
Further, a plurality of colors and shapes of the smoke image may be provided, and the degree of expectation of the special lottery result may be indicated by the display mode of the displayed smoke image.

Another embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 191 and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 194 and 195. FIG. 194 is a time chart in this embodiment. Further, FIG. 195 shows a display example in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, instead of the effect in which a group of tanks is displayed, an effect in which a minefield is displayed on the road along which the own tank is traveling is performed from timing t24 to timing t29. FIG. 195(a) shows a display example at timing t29, which is the timing at which the minefield display starts. From timing t24 to timing t29, a display is performed in which the own tank approaches the minefield.

At timing t26, operation acceptance of the mission button 3700 becomes valid. The operational validity period of the mission button 3700 continues until the mission button 3700 is operated. If the mission button 3700 is not operated, the process continues until timing t29. Further, while the operation of the mission button 3700 is valid, a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is displayed at the upper left of the "Colonel Dyna" dialogue window. FIG. 195(b) shows a display example at timing t26 when the operational validity period of the mission button 3700 occurs.

As shown in FIG. 194(c), if the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period (timing t28), an effect display is displayed in which the own tank jumps and jumps over the advancing minefield. is performed for 3 seconds. FIG. 195(c) shows a display example at the timing (for example, timing t31) when the player operates the mission button 3700 during the valid operation period and the effect of the own tank jumping ends (for example, timing t31). This display continues until timing t34.

Next, from timing t34 to timing t35, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. FIG. 195(d) is a display example showing a display state in which decorative patterns are stopped and displayed.

FIG. 194(d) shows an example of the effect when the mission button 3700 is not operated during the valid operation period. In this case, from timing t29, which is the end of the valid operation period, to timing t35, a smoke image with a higher display priority than the own tank is displayed, and the own tank enters the minefield and is surrounded by smoke. A performance display is performed. FIG. 195(e) shows a display example from timing t29 to timing t34.

Next, from timing t34 to timing t35, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. FIG. 195(f) is a display example showing a display state in which decorative patterns are stopped and displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the center of the display area is hidden by the smoke image.

In this way, if the mission button 3700 is operated properly, the visibility of the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed is not obstructed, but if the mission button 3700 is not operated properly, smoke The visibility of the statically displayed decorative pattern is obstructed by the image. Therefore, the player feels more nervous when operating the mission button 3700.

Note that the modification shown with reference to FIG. 191(c) may also be applied to the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 195. In this case, the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700, the lines of "Colonel Dyna" instructing the operation of the mission button 3700, and the display mode in which the own tank is jumping are difficult to see due to the smoke image generated by the enemy tank's shell. or become invisible. This further increases the sense of tension in operating the left lever 3720.

In this way, according to the "full power breakthrough reach" in this embodiment, depending on whether or not the left lever 3720 can be operated within a predetermined operating range, the display mode of the decorative pattern indicating the result of the special lottery (or The visibility of the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700, the operation instruction display for the mission button 3700, and the effect display corresponding to the operation of the mission button 3700) may or may not be obstructed by the smoke image, so the game The player will feel nervous when operating the left lever 3720, and will be motivated to actively operate the left lever 3720, which will improve his enjoyment of the game.

An example has been shown in which a smoke image is displayed with a predetermined probability (1/2 probability) when the operation of the left lever 3720 is inappropriate. , the probability of displaying the smoke image may be different. For example, if the tilting direction of the left lever 3720 is appropriate but the operating time is shorter than a predetermined time, the smoke image may be more likely to be displayed as the operating time is shorter. Furthermore, the smoke image may be configured to be displayed with a probability of 90% or 100% if no operation is performed or if an operation is performed in the opposite direction to the direction instructed.

Note that the visibility of the operation instruction image, decorative pattern, etc. may be completely invisible due to the smoke image, or may be partially invisible but partially visible. Alternatively, a translucent image may be used as the smoke image, and the operation instruction image, decorative pattern, etc. may be vaguely visible through the semi-transparent smoke image. With such a configuration, visibility of the operation instruction image and the decorative pattern is ensured to a certain degree.

A display effect with an expectation level of 100% and a very low appearance probability (such as displaying a predetermined character image) is configured to be executable, and the timing at which this display effect is executed is set to the timing at which a smoke image can be displayed. Good too. Further, part or all of this display effect may be made invisible or difficult to see due to the smoke image. In this case, this display effect may be hidden by the smoke image, which is a very unfortunate gaming situation for the player. With such a configuration, it is possible to further maintain the feeling of tension in operating the operating means for the player.

Although the smoke image obstructs the visibility of the reach mode of the decorative pattern, it is possible to set the display time of the smoke image so that the display of the smoke image ends before the decorative pattern stops displaying. good. For example, the display of the smoke image may end at timing t34, and the smoke image may not be displayed during the period from timing t34 to timing t35. With this configuration, the visibility of the statically displayed decorative pattern is no longer obstructed by the smoke image, so when it comes to the result of a special lottery, even though the statically displayed decorative pattern indicates a jackpot, there is no chance that it will be a loss. In this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player misunderstands, or the player misunderstands that the stopped and displayed decorative pattern indicates a loss, but that it is a jackpot.

Alternatively, even when a smoke image is displayed, the configuration may be such that there are cases where the visibility of the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed is obstructed and cases where it is not obstructed. For example, a lottery with a probability of 1/2 may be executed so that a decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed may or may not be hidden by the smoke image. Alternatively, if the time during which the left lever 3720 was tilted is less than half of the required operation time, the decorative pattern displayed in a stopped state remains hidden by the smoke image, and the time during which the left lever 3720 was tilted is If this is more than half of the required operation time, the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed may not be hidden by the smoke image (for example, the display of the smoke image ends at timing t34). With this configuration, the player can operate the left lever 3720 with more tension.

The variable display of the decorative pattern may be configured to be invisible or difficult to see over a plurality of variable displays due to the smoke image.
For example, the display time of the smoke image may be set to 120 seconds instead of 4 seconds, and the smoke image may be displayed over the variable display of a plurality of decorative patterns. Alternatively, the display time of the smoke image may be modified from the lottery mode described above, and the display time of the smoke image may be determined by lottery from a minimum of 4 seconds to a maximum of 120 seconds.Also, an operation instruction display for the left lever 3720 may be performed. If the left lever 3720 is ignored both times (from timing t7 to timing t11 and from timing t24 to timing t32) and the left lever 3720 is not tilted, such a smoke image will be displayed with a high probability (99/100 probability). It is recommended to configure it as follows.
In this case, during the period when the decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable manner (timing t32 to timing t34) and during the period when the decorative pattern is being displayed in a static manner (timing t34 to timing t35), the decorative pattern etc. are hidden by the smoke image and cannot be easily seen. Furthermore, the visibility of the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern and the stop display of the decorative pattern starting after timing t35 may be obstructed by the smoke image multiple times.
In this case, for the purpose of ensuring consistency as a performance, it is preferable to configure the "full power breakthrough reach" to continue even after timing t35. In this case, the player is required to operate the left lever 3720 again.
Furthermore, when the display of the smoke image straddles the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern, the operation of the left lever 3720 is also disabled while the fluctuating decorative pattern is stopped or immediately after the fluctuating display starts (between timing t0 and timing t5). First, the valid operation period is configured for 7 to continue over a plurality of variable displays, so that an effect display (such as a change in the speed display in the speed display window) based on the reception of the operation of the left lever 3720 is performed at any time. may be configured.

Although the speed of the own tank is displayed in the display area in the figure, the direction in which the left lever 3720 is tilted or the angle at which the left lever 3720 is tilted may also be displayed. Alternatively, it may be configured to display the elapsed time since the left lever 3720 was tilted at the required angle in a situation where an instruction to operate the left lever 3720 is given. With this configuration, the player can recognize whether the left lever 3720 is being operated within an appropriate range and for how many seconds the left lever 3720 is being operated within an appropriate range.

Although we have shown an example in which a simulated image of the left lever 3720 is displayed and operation instructions are displayed using lines from "Colonel Dyna," instead of or in addition to this production pattern, the left lever 3720 may be displayed in the following manner. A performance pattern that requires a tilting operation of the left lever 3720 may be configured to be executable without clearly displaying an operation instruction using an image display. For example, it is possible to indicate that an enemy tank is approaching from the rear by displaying a state in which a cannonball is fired from the rear, and the player may voluntarily operate the tilting operation of the left lever 3720 without displaying an operation instruction. It may be configured so that By configuring the game so that more difficult game situations can occur in this way, it is possible to further increase the sense of tension when operating the left lever 3720.

The player may not be able to properly recognize whether the left lever 3720 is properly maintained within a predetermined operating range. Therefore, the operation mode of the left lever 3720 may be notified by the vibration mode of the left lever vibration source 3722 built into the left lever 3720. For example, when the operating range of the left lever 3720 moves within an appropriate operating range due to an operation by the player, the vibration source may be caused to vibrate for 0.5 seconds. Alternatively, when the operating range of the left lever 3720 moves within the appropriate operating range, the left lever vibration source 3722 starts vibrating, and during the period when the operating range of the left lever 3720 is within the appropriate operating range. The vibration of the left lever vibration source 3722 may be continued, and the vibration of the vibration source may be terminated when the operation range of the left lever 3720 is outside the appropriate range.

In addition, the operation mode of the left lever 3720 (whether the operation is being performed appropriately) was shown by the display content in the speed display window, but when the operation mode is displayed and when the operation mode is displayed. It may be configured so that there is. For example, the speed of the own tank within the speed display window may be hidden by the smoke image. In this case, since the operation mode is not displayed, the player operates the left lever 3720 with a greater sense of tension.

An example is shown in which the left lever 3720 is tilted forward, but in order to further increase the difficulty of operation, the range in which the lever should be operated is limited to only around 30 degrees to the front (for example, from 25 degrees to 35 degrees). If the tank is completely tilted forward at 45 degrees, smoke will come out from the tank's engine with a predetermined probability (1/2 probability), and the smoke image shown in Figure 193(d) or Figure 193(g) will appear. The image of the own tank and the operation instruction display may be hidden by the smoke image. In this case, the player is required to perform operations with a higher degree of difficulty, making it possible to further increase the sense of tension. Note that when such an embodiment is adopted, it becomes possible to practice tilting the left lever 3720 to an appropriate range at any time during the period in which the left lever 3720 can be operated.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 194 and 195, if the left lever 3720 cannot be operated properly, a smoke image is displayed, which obstructs the visibility of the operation instructions for the mission button 3700. It is configured so that Further, even if the mission button 3700 can be operated, the smoke image obstructs the visibility of the effect display (display mode in which the own tank jumps) corresponding to the operation of the mission button 3700. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the feeling of tension when operating the left lever 3720.

Furthermore, the display mode of the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700, the display mode of the lines of “Colonel Dyna” that instructs the operation mode of the mission button 3700, the type of the lines themselves, and the display mode of the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700, Depending on the type of display mode in which the tank jumps, an operation-compatible image indicating the degree of expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a jackpot may be displayed. According to such a configuration, depending on whether the left lever 3720 can be operated within an appropriate operating range, the visibility of the display indicating the level of expectation may or may not be obstructed by the smoke image. That will happen. Therefore, a player who wants to know the level of expectation will naturally operate the left lever 3720 with a sense of nervousness, which will increase his or her interest.
In addition, the technical concept that suggests the level of expectation in "shield bullet reach" shown with reference to FIGS. 144 to 148 is based on the image of the cannonball fired by the enemy unit and the left lever 3720 in "full power breakthrough reach". The present invention may be applied to a display mode of a simulated image, a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700, an image of an enemy tank group, an image of a minefield, etc. For example, the degree of expectation that a jackpot state or a time saving state will occur may be indicated by the display mode of these images in "full power breakthrough reach". Further, the technical idea related to the shield image in "shield bullet reach" may be applied to the smoke image in "full power breakthrough reach".

Although the operation of the mission button 3700 is requested after the instruction to operate the left lever 3720 is completed, the configuration may be such that the operation of the mission button 3700 is requested while the instruction to operate the left lever 3720 is being requested. With this configuration, the difficulty level of operating the left lever 3720 and the mission button 3700 can be increased, and the player's sense of tension can be further enhanced. Note that when both operation instruction displays are performed at the same time, it is preferable to display the operation instruction displays in a manner that they do not overlap. For example, a simulated image simulating the left lever 3720 and a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 in the display mode shown in FIG. 192(b) and the display mode shown in FIG. 192(b) may be displayed in a manner that they do not overlap. If there is not enough space available for display in the display area, move either the simulated image simulating the left lever 3720 or the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 to the front side, or move the other side to the rear side. It is preferable to display the simulated images in an overlapping manner so that a part of the simulated image displayed at the rear can be visually recognized.

However, if the difficulty level is increased too much, players who are not good at complex operations may avoid playing the game. Therefore, even if there is no operation by the player, an automatic reception mode is adopted in which the same effect display as when there is an appropriate operation by the player is adopted, and the left lever 3720 or mission button 3700 is not operated. Even if the player performs an appropriate operation, the same effect display as when the player performs an appropriate operation may be configured. In this case, the player only needs to concentrate on operating the operating section that was not set to the automatic reception mode.
Note that the configuration may be such that only the operation of the left lever 3720 can be set to the auto reception mode, only the operation of the mission button 3700 can be set to the auto reception mode, or the operation of both the left lever 3720 and the mission button 3700 can be set to the auto reception mode.
In particular, if only the operation of the mission button 3700 is set to the automatic acceptance mode, the player only has to concentrate on operating the left lever 3720 properly, which may confuse players who are not accustomed to "full power breakthrough reach". can be prevented from occurring. Furthermore, if both the left lever 3720 and the mission button 3700 are set to the auto acceptance mode, the player only has to concentrate on viewing the performance without operating the left lever 3720 or the mission button 3700. .

In addition to the left lever 3720, a right lever 3730 may also be configured to be operable. For example, when operating the right lever 3730, similarly to the left lever 3720, it is preferable to make it a condition for executing the production mode that the right lever 3730 be tilted within a predetermined tilting range for a predetermined period of time. For example, it is preferable to display an effect in which dust comes out from caterpillars to represent how the own tank is accelerating. In this case, the configuration may be such that an image (simulated image, etc.) instructing the operation of the right lever 3730 is not displayed.
In this way, the right lever 3730 may be configured to have a presentation mode that makes the presentation display based on the operation of the left lever 3720 look gorgeous. Therefore, no operation instruction is displayed, and the image displayed based on the operation of the right lever 3730 does not indicate the degree of expectation.
Note that the valid operation period of the right lever 3730 may be made to match the valid operation period of the left lever 3720.
With this configuration, it is possible to maintain a higher sense of tension for players who are tired of operating the left lever.

Furthermore, the left lever 3720, the right lever 3730, and the mission button 3700 are located in a position where it is difficult to operate them simultaneously with one hand, a position where they cannot be operated (a position where it is impossible to operate), and a position where they are easily touched. It is best to install it in a location where it is impossible to do so. In other words, since one operation unit is operated with one hand, the sense of tension in the game can be further increased.
Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, there are cases where the three operating sections, the left lever 3720, the right lever 3730, and the mission button 3700, can be operated at the same time. It can create a sense of tension.
In the operation section shown in FIG. 137, the attack button 3710 is provided between the mission button 3700 and the left lever 3720 and they are separated from each other, so it is extremely difficult or difficult to operate both operation sections with one hand. It's impossible. On the other hand, the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 are close to each other. Therefore, the positions where the right lever 3730 and the defense button 3740 are provided may be switched. In this case, since the defense button 3740 will be located between the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730, it will be extremely difficult or impossible to operate both operation parts with one hand.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the left lever 3720 is used for a predetermined effect, the right lever 3730 may be used instead of the left lever 3720. It may be configured such that both the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 can be operated, and when the operation on either lever satisfies the above-mentioned conditions, the above-mentioned display effect etc. can be executed.

As described above, according to the "full power breakthrough reach" in this embodiment, it is possible to increase the feeling of tension when operating the operating section.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, it has been known to perform an effect in which one operation section is pressed in a gaming machine. In this case, by providing a plurality of operating units and using the operating units for performance, it is possible to improve the game's interest (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-087638). Furthermore, if the operations on a plurality of operation sections are made valid at the same time, it is possible to further improve the game's interest. On the other hand, for players looking for a simple game, the requirement for such complicated operation modes may feel troublesome and stressful, and there is a fear that this may actually lead to a decline in interest. In the following, a gaming machine that satisfies players with different tastes and does not reduce interest in any case will be described.

In "AI Tank Reach" in this embodiment, the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 may be enabled at the same time at a predetermined timing during the display performance, but the attack button 3710 indicating the operation instruction for the attack button 3710 The player can set whether to display each of the simulated image and the simulated image of the mission button 3700 indicating operation instructions for the mission button 3700.
In advance, the player selects a first setting (first performance situation) that displays both a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700, and displays only a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710. A second setting (second performance situation) that displays only a simulated image that simulates the mission button 3700, a third setting (third performance situation) that displays only a simulated image that simulates the attack button 3710, and a simulated image that simulates the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700. It is possible for the player to select and set any one of the four settings (performance situation) of the fourth setting (fourth performance situation) in which both of the simulated images are not displayed. .
The player is configured to be able to make selections using the left lever 3720, attack button 3710, etc. during the demonstration when the decorative symbols are not changing. Further, when the power is turned on without any selection by the player, the first setting is selected by default.

When the operational validity period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 occurs while the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, a mock image imitating the attack button 3710 and a mock image imitating the mission button 3700 are displayed in a manner corresponding to the settings selected by the player. The image is displayed. For example, when the player selects the third setting, the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is not displayed, and only the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is displayed.

Regarding "AI Tank Reach", with reference to FIGS. 196 to 201, etc., the following will explain how the attack button 3710 and mission button 3700 are operated when the first to fourth settings are performed. An example of the display will be explained below.

FIG. 196(a) is a time chart showing an embodiment in which the first setting (first performance situation) is made and a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 are displayed.
FIG. 198 corresponds to the time chart shown in FIG. 196(a) and shows a display state in which the first setting is made and a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 are displayed. It is a diagram.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 196(a), "AI tank reach" occurs at timing t5. In "AI Tank Reach", a display effect is performed in which the own tank moves on a mountain road. FIG. 198(a) is a display example at timing t5.
At timing t8, an image of an enemy tank is displayed at the top of the display area. Additionally, lines from "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Mite" instructing the operation of the attack button 3710 and mission button 3700 are displayed. Furthermore, the valid operation period of the attack button 3710 and the valid operation period of the mission button 3700 are started. Furthermore, during the valid operation period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 (timing t8 to timing t11), a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 are displayed. FIG. 198(b) shows a display example at timing t8.
The valid operation period of the attack button 3710 and the valid operation period of the mission button 3700 each continue for 3 seconds until timing t11. On the other hand, if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period, the valid operation period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 ends. Furthermore, at the timing when the valid operation period ends, the display of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 also ends.
If the attack button 3710 is operated during the operation validity period, a shell is fired from the own tank's battery, the fired shell moves towards the enemy tank, the shell hits the enemy tank, and the shell is fired. There will be a display where the explosion will occur. FIG. 198(c) shows an example of a display in which a cannonball is moving toward an enemy tank. Further, FIG. 198(d) shows an example of a presentation in which an image of a shell hitting an enemy tank and exploding is displayed. The display of the movement of the shell and the subsequent display of the image of the shell exploding are performed for 3 seconds after the attack button 3710 is operated.
If the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period, a bullet is fired from the own tank's machine gun, the fired bullet moves toward the enemy tank, the bullet hits the enemy tank, and the bullet There will be a display where the explosion will occur. FIG. 198(e) shows an example of a display in which a bullet is moving toward an enemy tank. Further, FIG. 198(f) shows an example of a presentation in which an image of a bullet hitting an enemy tank and exploding is displayed. The movement of the bullet and the subsequent image of the bullet exploding are displayed for three seconds after the mission button 3700 is operated.
Note that if the attack button 3710 or mission button 3700 is not operated during the valid operation period, the shells and bullets will not be displayed moving or exploding, and the enemy tank will move backwards. As a result, a display that is no longer displayed in the display area is performed.
Note that, after timing t23 as well, the same display effect as such a display effect executed after timing t8 is performed.

FIG. 196(b) is a timing diagram showing an embodiment in which the second setting (second performance situation) is made and a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed, but a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is not displayed. It is a chart.
FIG. 199 corresponds to the time chart shown in FIG. 196(b), where the second setting is made and a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed, but a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is not displayed. It is a figure showing a state.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 196(b), "AI tank reach" occurs at timing t5. In "AI Tank Reach", a display effect is performed in which the own tank moves on a mountain road. FIG. 199(a) is a display example at timing t5.
At timing t8, an image of an enemy tank is displayed at the top of the display area. Additionally, a line from "Sergeant Mite" instructing the operation of the attack button 3710 is displayed. Furthermore, the valid operation period of the attack button 3710 and the valid operation period of the mission button 3700 are started. Furthermore, during the operation validity period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 (timing t8 to timing t11), a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed, and a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is not displayed. It won't happen. FIG. 199(b) shows a display example at timing t8.
The valid operation period of the attack button 3710 and the valid operation period of the mission button 3700 each continue for 3 seconds until timing t11. On the other hand, if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period, the valid operation period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 ends. Furthermore, at the timing when the valid operation period ends, the display of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 also ends.
If the attack button 3710 is operated during the valid operation period, a shell is fired from the own tank's battery, the fired shell moves toward the enemy tank, the shell hits the enemy tank, and the shell is fired. There will be a display where the explosion will occur. FIG. 199(c) shows an example of a display in which a shell is moving toward an enemy tank. Further, FIG. 199(d) shows an example of a presentation in which an image of a shell hitting an enemy tank and exploding is displayed. The display of the movement of the shell and the subsequent display of the image of the shell exploding are performed for 3 seconds after the attack button 3710 is operated.
If the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period, a bullet is fired from the own tank's machine gun, the fired bullet moves toward the enemy tank, the bullet hits the enemy tank, and the bullet There will be a display where the explosion will occur. FIG. 199(e) shows an example of a display in which a bullet is moving toward an enemy tank. Further, FIG. 199(f) shows an example of a presentation in which an image of a bullet hitting an enemy tank and exploding is displayed. The movement of the bullet and the subsequent image of the bullet exploding are displayed for three seconds after the mission button 3700 is operated.
Note that if the attack button 3710 or mission button 3700 is not operated during the valid operation period, the shells and bullets will not be displayed moving or exploding, and the enemy tank will move backwards. As a result, a display that is no longer displayed in the display area is performed.
Note that, after timing t23 as well, the same display effect as such a display effect executed after timing t8 is performed.

FIG. 197(a) is a timing diagram showing an embodiment in which a third setting (third performance situation) is made, and a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is not displayed, but a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is displayed. It is a chart.
FIG. 200 corresponds to the time chart shown in FIG. 197(a), in which the third setting is made, and the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is not displayed, but the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is displayed. It is a figure showing a state.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 197(a), "AI tank reach" occurs at timing t5. In "AI Tank Reach", a display effect is performed in which the own tank moves on a mountain road. FIG. 200(a) is a display example at timing t5.
At timing t8, an image of an enemy tank is displayed at the top of the display area. Additionally, a line from "Colonel Dyna" instructing the operation of the mission button 3700 is displayed. Furthermore, the valid operation period of the attack button 3710 and the valid operation period of the mission button 3700 are started. Furthermore, during the valid operation period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 (from timing t8 to timing t11), a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is not displayed, but a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is displayed. be exposed. FIG. 200(b) shows a display example at timing t8.
The valid operation period of the attack button 3710 and the valid operation period of the mission button 3700 each continue for 3 seconds until timing t11. On the other hand, if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period, the valid operation period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 ends. Furthermore, at the timing when the valid operation period ends, the display of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 also ends.
If the attack button 3710 is operated during the valid operation period, a shell is fired from the own tank's battery, the fired shell moves toward the enemy tank, the shell hits the enemy tank, and the shell is fired. There will be a display where the explosion will occur. FIG. 200(c) shows an example of a display in which a shell is moving toward an enemy tank. Further, FIG. 200(d) shows an example of a rendering in which an image of a cannonball hitting an enemy tank and exploding is displayed. The display of the movement of the shell and the subsequent display of the image of the shell exploding are performed for 3 seconds after the attack button 3710 is operated.
If the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period, a bullet is fired from the own tank's machine gun, the fired bullet moves toward the enemy tank, the bullet hits the enemy tank, and the bullet There will be a display where the explosion will occur. FIG. 200(e) shows an example of a display in which a bullet is moving toward an enemy tank. Further, FIG. 200(f) shows an example of a presentation in which an image of a bullet hitting an enemy tank and exploding is displayed. The movement of the bullet and the subsequent image of the bullet exploding are displayed for three seconds after the mission button 3700 is operated.
Note that if the attack button 3710 or mission button 3700 is not operated during the valid operation period, the shells and bullets will not be displayed moving or exploding, and the enemy tank will move backwards. As a result, a display that is no longer displayed in the display area is performed.
Note that, after timing t23 as well, the same display effect as such a display effect executed after timing t8 is performed.

FIG. 197(b) is a time chart showing an embodiment in which the fourth setting (fourth performance situation) is made and neither the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 nor the simulated image imitated the mission button 3700 is displayed.
FIG. 201 corresponds to the time chart shown in FIG. 197(b) and shows a display state in which the fourth setting is made and neither the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 nor the simulated image imitated the mission button 3700 is displayed. It is.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 197(b), "AI tank reach" occurs at timing t5. In "AI Tank Reach", a display effect is performed in which the own tank moves on a mountain road. FIG. 201(a) is a display example at timing t5.
At timing t8, an image of an enemy tank is displayed at the top of the display area. Furthermore, the valid operation period of the attack button 3710 and the valid operation period of the mission button 3700 are started. Further, during the valid operation period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 (timing t8 to timing t11), a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 are not displayed. FIG. 201(b) shows a display example at timing t8.
The valid operation period of the attack button 3710 and the valid operation period of the mission button 3700 each continue for 3 seconds until timing t11. On the other hand, if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period, the valid operation period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 ends. Furthermore, at the timing when the valid operation period ends, the display of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 also ends.
If the attack button 3710 is operated during the valid operation period, a shell is fired from the own tank's battery, the fired shell moves toward the enemy tank, the shell hits the enemy tank, and the shell is fired. There will be a display where the explosion will occur. FIG. 201(c) shows an example of a display in which a cannonball is moving toward an enemy tank. Further, FIG. 201(d) shows an example of a presentation in which an image of a shell hitting an enemy tank and exploding is displayed. The display of the movement of the shell and the subsequent display of the image of the shell exploding are performed for 3 seconds after the attack button 3710 is operated.
If the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period, a bullet is fired from the own tank's machine gun, the fired bullet moves toward the enemy tank, the bullet hits the enemy tank, and the bullet There will be a display where the explosion will occur. FIG. 201(e) shows an example of a display in which a bullet is moving toward an enemy tank. Further, FIG. 201(f) shows an example of a presentation in which an image of a bullet hitting an enemy tank and exploding is displayed. The movement of the bullet and the subsequent image of the bullet exploding are displayed for three seconds after the mission button 3700 is operated.
Note that if the attack button 3710 or mission button 3700 is not operated during the valid operation period, the shells and bullets will not be displayed moving or exploding, and the enemy tank will move backwards. As a result, a display that is no longer displayed in the display area is performed.
Note that, after timing t23 as well, the same display effect as such a display effect executed after timing t8 is performed.

The operation validity period of attack button 3710 and the operation validity period of mission button 3700 match. At this time, a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 are displayed in accordance with the settings selected by the player. In addition, in response to the display of these simulated images, the lines of ``Colonel Dyna'' and ``Sergeant Might'' also change to indicate operational instructions. If an operation on either the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is accepted, the operation validity period ends. Therefore, when the operation of one of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 is accepted, the effect display corresponding to the operation on the other operation section is not performed.

It is preferable to configure the system so that the degree of expectation of a jackpot is suggested by display modes such as an image of an enemy tank, a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710, and an image of an exploding shell. In this case, it is preferable to apply the various expectation level suggestion modes in "shield bullet reach" shown with reference to FIGS. 144 to 148 to the display effect in this embodiment.
Note that the display mode of the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 and the image of exploding bullets may be similar to the display mode of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and the image of exploding shells.

As described above, according to the "AI Tank Reach" in this embodiment, there is a performance situation in which a simulated image imitating the operation part is displayed based on the player's intention, and a display of a simulated image imitating the operation part is performed. Since a performance situation in which no game is performed is realized, a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

Although we have shown an example in which the player can select the first to fourth settings, an operation section (dip switch, button, etc.) that allows the player to select the settings is provided on the back of the door frame 3, so that the clerk at the game parlor can select the settings. The configuration may be such that the settings can be changed while the door of the door frame 3 is open. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide players with an optimal gaming environment by changing the settings as appropriate depending on the customer base of the gaming parlor, the location, the number of days that have passed since the introduction, etc. Note that the settings made by the gaming parlor may be configured to be effective only when the gaming machine is powered on, and then the settings can be changed by the player.

A first setting in which display of a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 or a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is not restricted by operating a predetermined operation unit (for example, defense button 3740) that can be operated by the player; The configuration is such that the display of a simulated image imitating the button 3710 or a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 can be alternately switched between any one of the second to fourth settings. Good too. For example, if the player has selected the second setting, operating the defense button 3740 once will switch to the first setting, and the player may operate the defense button 3740 once more. , it is preferable to configure the configuration so that the second setting is used again. Note that if the player has selected the first setting, the state in which the first setting is selected continues even if the defense button 3740 is operated. For example, the setting may be configured to be switched when the defense button 3740 is operated at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t14) while the decorative symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. On the other hand, the configuration may be such that the settings cannot be switched during the valid operation period (the period during which a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 or a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is displayed).
With such a configuration, it is possible to quickly switch to a setting in which both the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 simulated images are displayed.

Note that if the player can switch the settings with a simple operation, a situation may occur where the player feels dissatisfied, such as when the setting is changed just by pressing a button by mistake. Therefore, a configuration may be adopted in which switching of settings is not easily performed. For example, the setting may be configured to be switched when a specific condition regarding the operation, such as pressing and holding the defense button 3740 for 3 seconds, is met.

If the non-gaming state continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 minutes), if the settings are in the second to fourth settings, the settings will be automatically changed to the first setting, which is the default setting. You may also do so. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player who has started playing the game from feeling uncomfortable due to the changed settings.

An example was shown in which both the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 can be operated at the same time, and when either button is operated, the operation validity period of the other button ends. The configuration may be such that even if the button is operated, the valid period of operation of the other button does not end. For example, if the attack button 3710 is operated and then the mission button 3700 is operated, the effect display corresponding to the operation of the attack button 3710 (display of shell firing, movement, explosion) is started, and then the mission button 3700 is operated. It is preferable to configure the system so that an effect display (display of firing, moving, and exploding bullets) corresponding to the operation of the mission button 3700 is started.

It may be configured such that there are cases in which only the operation of the attack button 3710 is enabled and cases where only the operation of the mission button 3700 is enabled. In this case, it is preferable to determine whether or not to display a simulated image of the button whose operation is enabled based on the settings. Alternatively, the configuration is not limited to the settings, and may be configured to display a simulated image of the operating means whose operation is enabled. If only one operation section is enabled, it is assumed that the player will have little difficulty in operating the buttons, so it is advantageous to adopt such a method.

Rather than enabling the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 at the same time, for example, in a situation where one operating section is enabled, the other operating section may be enabled. In this case as well, it is preferable to determine whether or not to display a simulated image simulating the operation unit based on the settings.

After the mission button 3700 becomes operational, the attack button 3710 may be activated. Here, if the attack button 3710 is enabled while an image corresponding to the operation of the mission button 3700 (an image of moving bullets) is displayed, a mock image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed. It may be configured so that it is not displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid an overload of information, and the stress felt by the player is reduced.

Before or at the same time as the operation validity period occurs, a sound effect indicating that the operation validity period has started or that the operation validity period is in progress may be output. For example, a predetermined sound effect may be output at timings (from timing t7 to timing t8, from timing t22 to timing t23) before the operation valid period starts. Alternatively, a predetermined sound effect may be output when the valid operation period occurs (from timing t8 to timing t9, from timing t23 to timing t24).
On the other hand, if the setting is such that the simulated image of the operation unit is not displayed even if the operation validity period has expired, the configuration may be such that the sound effect indicating that the operation validity period has expired for that operation unit is not output. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent players from feeling confused. On the other hand, when an operation is performed, a predetermined sound corresponding to the reception of the operation may be output. In this case, it is possible to prevent the effect of the presentation from decreasing.

Depending on the selected settings, a performance situation in which one simulated image imitating a button is displayed and a performance situation in which two simulated images imitating a button are displayed may occur. At this time, when only one simulated image is displayed, the size of the simulated image may be displayed larger than when two simulated images are displayed.
With such a configuration, the display area can be used effectively. Furthermore, players who do not choose to display multiple simulated images may not notice that the simulated images have been displayed due to their advanced age, but displaying the simulated images in a larger size in this way can make the operation more effective. This allows the user to notice what has happened, and to more appropriately suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, the third operation section (defense button 3740) is used, and both the first operation section (attack button 3710) and the second operation section (mission button 3700) can accept operations, and the first operation section is simulated. In the first production situation in which both the image (display related to the operation of the first operation section) and the simulated image of the second operation section (display related to the operation of the second operation section) are displayed, the player can select the third operation section. A special display that makes it difficult to visually recognize both the displayed simulated image of the first operating section and the displayed simulated image of the second operating section may be made to appear based on the fact that is operated.
For players who operate the third operation section in a situation where they would normally operate the first or second operation section, this special display will notify the player that the operation was incorrect. It becomes possible to suggest. Furthermore, it is considered that the player who operates the third operation section in a situation where the simulated image of the first operation section and the simulated image of the second operation section are being displayed intentionally is doing such an act. Therefore, in order for a special display to be displayed to such an intentional player, the condition for the appearance of the display is not limited to simply that the third operation section has been operated, but also that the third operation section has been operated. It is desirable that the above-mentioned special display be performed when the third operation section is operated and the operation time of the third operation section satisfies a special condition of a predetermined number of seconds or more.

As described above, according to the "AI tank reach" in this embodiment, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the effects related to the display mode of the simulated image.

Conventionally, before the operation on the control panel becomes effective, a special precursor effect indicating that the operation will become effective is performed, and then the control panel is activated during the period when the operation on the control panel is valid. Displaying a simulated image of the operation panel showing that the player is playing the operation panel, prompting the player to operate the operation panel, and expecting the special lottery result to be a jackpot based on the operation of the operation panel. A gaming machine that suggests a degree has been known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-125549).

By performing a special precursor effect in this way, it is shown to the player that the operation on the operation section can be effective.
However, some players may be distracted by such a precursor effect, and may not be able to display a simulated image of the operation panel indicating that the operation on the operation panel is valid, or The user's attention to the operation itself may become distracted, and there is a risk that the user may not have enough time to display a simulated operation section image or operate the operation section.
For example, some experienced players prefer to concentrate on operating the operation unit rather than visually recognizing and enjoying the precursor performance. This is because although the player only visually recognizes the portent effects, the player concentrates on operating the operation panel based on his or her own will, with the expectation that the player will win the jackpot. . However, there is a risk that such concentration of consciousness may be disturbed by a precursor performance performed before the expiry of the validity period.
On the other hand, players with little gaming experience may not be able to understand the meaning of various effects, including precursory effects, and may not notice that a simulated image of the control panel has been displayed, indicating that the operation on the control panel has been activated. There is a possibility that a situation may occur in which the operator cannot operate the operation section during the event, and the opportunity to intervene in the performance is lost.

In this way, a precursory effect that is relatively unimportant to the player may prevent the player from concentrating on operating the operating unit, which is relatively important to the player, or may prevent the player from concentrating on operating the operating unit, which is relatively important to the player, or may prevent the player from concentrating on operating the operating unit, which is relatively important to the player. There is a possibility that the user may not be able to notice the displayed display of the operation unit simulated image.
In the embodiments described below, the visibility of the warning signs can be lowered according to the player's own will, and a simulated image of the operation section can be displayed to indicate that the operation of the operation section has become effective. , an example is shown in which the user can concentrate on operating the operating section.

Below, a modified embodiment of the "shield bullet reach" shown with reference to FIG. 144, etc. will be described with reference to FIGS. 202, 203, 204, etc.
FIG. 203 is a diagram showing a time chart in this embodiment. 202 and 204 are diagrams showing display examples in the display area.

In this embodiment, it is possible to set the display mode of the precursor effect during the demonstration. When a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 minutes) has elapsed without the decorative symbols shown with reference to FIG. 139(a), it is determined that no game is being played, and Control is performed to shift to the indicated display state. FIG. 202(a) shows a display example during the demonstration. Further, when the attack button 3710 is pressed from the display state shown in FIG. 139 or the display state shown in FIG. 202(a), the display state changes to the display state shown in FIG. 202(b). As shown in FIGS. 202(a) to 202(c), the decorative pattern in this case is displayed in a smaller size at the upper left of the display area in the stopped display state than during the variable display state.

FIG. 202(b) shows a display state in which the display mode of the omen effect can be set. In this state, by operating the left lever 3720 in the left-right direction, it is possible to select one of "normal display", "small display", and "no display". The frame corresponding to the selected setting is displayed thick. Furthermore, the dialogue displayed in the dialogue window of "Sergeant Mite" indicates to the player how to select settings. Note that when the gaming machine is powered on, the "normal display" is automatically selected.

FIG. 202(c) shows a display state changed from a state where "normal display" is selected to a state where "small display" is selected by tilting the left lever 3720 to the right. By operating the attack button 3710 again in this state, the display state shown in FIG. 202(a) is returned to. At the same time, the setting contents selected by the player (in this case, the setting contents of displaying a small warning effect) are stored in the peripheral control board 1510. In this way, the player can select any of the display settings that differ in the visibility of the precursor performance.
Note that even when the player selects "not display", similar display and storage processing of the selected settings are performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 203 and 204, the display mode when the precursor effect is executed will be described. FIG. 203(a) shows the fluctuating state of the decorative pattern and the operation reception state of the attack button 3710 (whether the operation reception is valid or invalid). FIGS. 203(b) and 203(c) show the display states of the support dialogue image, attack button simulated image, enemy tank image, etc. when "normal display" is selected. In addition, in this embodiment, the display of the cheering dialogue image functions as an omen effect. FIGS. 204(a) to 204(d) are display examples of the display area when "normal display" is selected.

As shown in FIG. 203, the cheering dialogue image is displayed for 6 seconds from timing t13 to timing t19. As the cheering line images, four cheering line images are displayed: "<Let's do it~", "<Ganbare~", "Let's go wrong~>", and "Ganbare~>". The two cheering dialogue images "<Don't miss it~" and "<Ganbare~" appear from the left edge of the display area, move horizontally to the right within the display area, and exit the display area at the right edge of the display area. and move. On the other hand, the two cheering dialogue images, "Don't miss it~>" and "Ganbare~>" appear from the right edge of the display area, move horizontally to the left within the display area, and move to the left edge of the display area. move outside. Further, from timing t13, the image of the enemy tank is displayed moving from the right end to the left end of the display area.

FIG. 204(a) shows a display example at timing t14, which is the timing when the display of the cheering line image has just started. FIG. 204(b) shows a display example at timing t16, which is the middle of the display of the cheering line image. FIG. 204(c) shows a display example at timing t18, which is the timing at which the display of the cheering line image has reached its final stage. As shown in the display example, the cheering line image moves horizontally to the right or left.

At the same time as the display of the support line image ends at timing t19, an operation unit simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed in the center of the display area. FIG. 204(d) shows a state in which a simulated operation unit image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed in the center of the display area (for example, a display state at timing t20). After the display of the support line image is finished, a mock image of the operation part imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed, the operation valid period starts, and the operation of the attack button 3710 and the operation are valid, as in the embodiment shown for "Shield Bullet Reach". A destruction image is displayed based on the end of the period, suggesting the expectation of a jackpot. FIG. 203(b) shows the display state when the attack button 3710 is operated at timing t21. Further, FIG. 203(c) shows the display state when the operation valid period ends at timing t22.

Next, a display example when "small display" is selected will be described. FIG. 203(d) is a time chart when "display small" is selected. FIGS. 204(e) to 204(g) are display examples when "small display" is selected.
Note that FIG. 204(e) shows the display state at timing t14. Further, FIG. 204(f) shows the display state at timing t16. Further, FIG. 204(g) shows the display state at timing t18.
As shown in FIGS. 204(e) to 204(g), when "Small display" is selected, the cheering dialogue image is displayed smaller than when "Normal display" is selected, making it easier to see. It is said to be a difficult situation.

Next, a display example when "Do not display" is selected will be described. FIG. 203(e) is a time chart when "do not display" is selected. When "Do not display" is selected, only the image of the enemy tank is displayed in the display area, and the support line image is not displayed during the period from timing t13 to timing t19.
In this way, when "Do not display" is selected, the cheering dialogue image is not displayed as in the case where "Normal display" or "Small display" is selected.

In this way, depending on the settings made by the player during the demo, the special omen display (cheer line image) can be displayed in three states: a state in which it is displayed in a small size, and a state in which it is not displayed. , it is possible to execute performance modes that match the player's preferences. For example, a player who does not want to visually recognize the special precursor display can make the special precursor display difficult or impossible to see, thereby displaying and operating an operation section mock image that imitates the first operation section (attack button 3710). You can concentrate on operating the parts.

By the way, in the above embodiment, the visual recognition mode of the omen effect can be changed only during the demonstration. Therefore, when trying to change the visual recognition mode of the omen effect, it is necessary to first set the pending number to 0 so that the decorative symbols are not displayed in a fluctuating manner. There was a risk that the game would feel troublesome, or that the tempo of the game would be impaired by setting the number of reservations to 0.

Therefore, an embodiment modified so that the visual recognition mode of the omen effect can be changed during the variable display of decorative patterns will be described with reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 205 and the like.

FIGS. 205(a) to 205(c) are time charts showing effects similar to the embodiment shown in FIGS. 203(a) to 203(c). That is, the variable display of the decorative pattern, the simulated image of the operation part of the attack button 3710, the destroyed image of the enemy tank, and the effective period of operation have the same effects.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 205(d), the defense button 3740 operation becomes valid. Then, when a specific condition regarding the operation of the defense button 3740 is met (details will be described later, but when a long press or repeated press operation is detected), the support line image is changed from the normal display to a smaller display state. Alternatively, it is possible to change the state to a state where it is not displayed.

FIG. 205(e) is a time chart when "small display" is selected in the settings during the demonstration. At timing t13, after the cheering line image is displayed, the player presses and holds the defense button 3740, and at timing t14, the cheering line image is displayed in a small size on the condition that the long press is detected. In this case, for example, the display state of the support line image is changed from the display state shown in FIG. 204(a) to the display state shown in FIG. 204(e) while the support line image is being displayed.

FIG. 205(f) is a time chart when "do not display" is selected in the settings during the demonstration. At timing t13, after the cheering line image is displayed, the player presses and holds the defense button 3740, and on condition that the long press is detected at timing t14, the cheering line image is not displayed. In this case, for example, the display state of the cheering line image is changed from the normal display state shown in FIG. 204(a) to a state in which the cheering line image is not displayed while the line image is being displayed.

The display state in which the cheering line image is displayed in a small size and the display state in which the cheering line image is hidden are configured to continue as long as the long press of the defense button 3740 is detected.
Alternatively, once a long press of the defense button 3740 is detected, even if the player releases the defense button 3740, the support line image will be displayed in a small size until timing t19, which is the timing at which the display of the support line image ends. It is also possible to continue a state in which the cheering dialogue image is displayed or a state in which the cheering dialogue image is not displayed.

In addition, by pressing and holding the defense button 3740 in advance during the period from timing t5, which is the timing when the operational validity period of the defense button 3740 starts, to timing t13, when the display of the support line image starts, the support line image can be displayed. From timing t13, which is the timing at which the image display starts, it is also possible to display the cheering line image in a smaller size or not displaying the cheering line image at all.

In this embodiment, the display mode of the special omen display (support line image) is set in advance during the demonstration, and the reach effect occurs during the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols, and the first operation section ( When there is a possibility that a special omen display (supporting line image) will be displayed indicating that the attack button 3710) can be operated, the second operation section (defense button 3740) can be operated at any timing. Thus, the player can select the display mode of the special omen display during the variable display of the decorative symbols. For example, if the player does not want to visually recognize the special precursor display, by reducing the visibility of the special precursor display and making it difficult or impossible to see, the player can create an operation section simulated image that imitates the first operation section. This allows you to concentrate on the display and operation of the control panel.

Note that instead of detecting the long press of the defense button 3740, the display mode of the support line image may be changed when repeatedly pressing the defense button 3740 is detected.

Instead of providing a support line image display mode setting function during the demonstration as shown in FIG. 202, the support line image is configured to be displayed in a small size based only on the detection of a long press of the defense button 3740. Good too. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the cheering dialogue image is not displayed.

In addition, in the "shield bullet reach" shown with reference to FIG. 144 etc., an embodiment was shown in which a shield image is displayed by operating the defense button 3740, but by displaying such a shield image, the support line image is An embodiment modified to be hidden will be shown below.

With reference to FIGS. 205(a) to 205(d), FIGS. 205(g) to 205(h), and FIG. An embodiment modified for display will be described. In this embodiment, based on the operation of the second operation unit (defense button 3740), instead of displaying the cheering line image in a smaller size or hiding it, an image that hides the cheering line image (the first shield image ) to hide the cheering line image, thereby reducing the visibility of the cheering line image and making it difficult or impossible to see.

FIG. 205(g) is a time chart showing the display state of the first shield image when the long press of the defense button 3740 is detected at a predetermined timing (timing t14 in this production example). The display period of the first shield image is predetermined to be 6 seconds. In this production example, it is displayed for 6 seconds from timing t14 to timing t20. Further, it is not necessary to continuously press and hold the defense button 3740, and after the long press is detected and the first shield image is displayed, the first shield image will not be displayed even if you release your hand from the defense button 3740. Continued.

FIG. 206(a) shows a display example at timing t14, which is the timing when the display of the cheering line image has just started. FIG. 206(b) shows a display example at timing t16, which is the middle of the display of the cheering line image. FIG. 206(c) shows a display example at timing t18, which is the timing when the display of the cheering line image has reached its final stage. FIG. 206(d) shows a display example from timing t19 when the operation on attack button 3710 becomes valid to timing t20.

Further, FIG. 206(e) shows a display example when the first shield image is displayed at timing t14. FIG. 206(f) shows a display example in which the first shield image is displayed at timing t16. FIG. 206(g) shows a display example in which the first shield image is displayed at timing t18. FIG. 206(h) shows a display example in which the first shield image is displayed from timing t19 to timing t20.

As shown in FIGS. 206(e) to 206(h), the size and display position of the first shield image do not change. Therefore, the foreshadowing effect can be hidden without making the first shield image itself stand out, and the player can wait patiently for the timing when the operation section simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed. Note that the color of the first shield image is preferably an inconspicuous color such as gray. Further, it is preferable that the display mode of the first shield image does not indicate the degree of expectation regarding the special lottery result. Note that, similar to the embodiment related to "shield bullet reach", it is preferable to configure so that the degree of expectation is shown by a simulated image of the operation part or a destroyed image of an enemy tank. At this time, it may be configured such that a plurality of different expectations are indicated by the color of the operation unit simulation image or the destroyed image of the enemy tank. Furthermore, the display priority of the destroyed image may be higher or lower than the display priority of the first shield image. If the display priority of the destroyed image is set higher than the display priority of the first shield image, part or all of the destroyed image will be displayed in front of the first shield image even if it overlaps with the first shield image. . When the display priority of the destroyed image is lower than the display priority of the first shield image, it is preferable that part or all of the destroyed image be displayed without being hidden by the first shield image.
These points regarding the first shield image may be adopted in the second shield image described later.

As shown in FIG. 206(h), between the first shield image and the operation unit simulation image simulating the attack button 3710, the operation unit simulation image has a higher display priority. Therefore, even if the first shield image is being displayed, the visibility of the operation unit simulation image is not hindered, and the visibility of the operation unit simulation image is improved.

In this way, by displaying an image (first shield image) that hides the special omen display (supporting line image) at the player's will, and configuring so that part or all of the special omen display is hidden, A player who does not want to visually recognize the special precursor display can lower the visibility of the special precursor display to make it difficult or impossible to see, thereby creating an operation section mock image that imitates the first operation section (attack button 3710). It is possible to concentrate on the display and the operation of the first operation section.
Further, since the operation unit simulated image imitating the first operation unit (attack button 3710) does not become difficult or invisible, it does not hinder the progress of the game using the first operation unit.

The embodiment in which the player presses and holds the defense button 3740 is shown with reference to FIG. It may be configured as follows. FIG. 205(h) shows an example effect in which repeated hits of the defense button 3740 are detected at timing t14, and the first shield image is displayed until timing t20. Note that in this case as well, the display examples shown in FIGS. 206(e) to 206(h) will be used similarly to the above-described embodiment.

The first shield images may have different sizes. For FIGS. 207(a) to 207(d), refer to FIGS. 205(a) to 205(d), FIG. 205(g), FIG. 205(h), and FIG. 206(e) to FIG. 206(h). This is a display example in an embodiment in which the size of the first shield image is modified in the embodiment shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the size of the first shield image is small. Additionally, the display position is slightly upward. 207(a) to 207(d) are display examples from timing t14, timing t16, timing t18, and timing t19 to timing t20, respectively. In the present embodiment, the cheering dialogue images "<Let's go~" and "Let's go wrong~>" are made difficult or impossible to see by the first shield image. On the other hand, the cheering dialogue images "<Ganbare~" and "Ganbare~>" are not rendered difficult or invisible by the first shield image.

In this way, part of the special omen display (supporting line image) has its visibility reduced by the first shield image and becomes difficult or impossible to see, and the visibility of other parts of the special omen display is reduced. It may be configured so that it does not become difficult or impossible to see.

The configuration may be such that a plurality of shield images can be displayed. 205(i), 207(e) to 207(h), 205(a) to 205(d), 205(g), 205(h), and 207(a) to 207(d) is a time chart and a display example showing an embodiment modified so that a plurality of shield images can be displayed. In this embodiment, after the first shield image is displayed when a long press on the defense button 3740 is detected, the second shield image is displayed when a long press on the defense button is detected again. It is configured as follows. The display time of the second shield image is 6 seconds, which is the same as the display time of the first shield image.
In the figure, the first shield image is marked with a diagonal line going downward to the right, and the second shield image is marked with a diagonal line going upward to the right.

FIG. 205(i) is a time chart showing a display state in which the long press of the defense button 3740 is detected at timing t15, and shows a state in which the second shield image is displayed for 6 seconds until timing t21. 207(e) to 207(h) are display examples from timing t14, timing t16, timing t18, and timing t19 to timing t20, respectively.

In FIG. 207(e), although the cheering dialogue images "<Make it~" and "Make it bad~>" are difficult to see due to the first shield image, "<Ganbare~" and "Ganbare~>" are difficult to see. The cheering dialogue image is shown in a state where it is easily visible without being hidden by the first shield image.
In FIG. 207(f), in addition to the first shield image, the display of the second shield image is started, and the cheering dialogue images "<Ganbare~" and "Ganbare~>" are no longer visible due to the second shield image. The state shown is as follows.
In FIG. 207(g), the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed, and the cheering dialogue images "<Ganbare~" and "Ganbare~>" are made difficult to see by the second shield image. It is shown.
In FIG. 207(h), a first shield image and a second shield image are displayed, and a simulated operation part image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed in front of the second shield image. ing. As shown in FIG. 207(h), between the second shield image and the operation unit simulation image simulating the attack button 3710, the operation unit simulation image has a higher display priority. Therefore, even if the second shield image is being displayed, the visibility of the operation unit simulated image is not hindered.

Note that the second shield image has a slightly longer width than the first shield image. Further, the second shield image does not move like the first shield image. Further, the color of the second shield image may be gray like the first shield image. Furthermore, the first shield image and the second shield image may have the same brightness of gray, or may have different brightness of gray.

After the first shield image is displayed by pressing and holding the defense button 3740, the second shield image may be displayed when the defense button 3740 is continued to be pressed for a predetermined period of time. With such a configuration, it is possible to display both the first shield image and the second shield image simply by continuing to press the defense button 3740.
On the other hand, after the player presses and holds the defense button 3740 and the first shield image is displayed, the player releases the defense button 3740 and no longer presses it, and then the defense button 3740 is pressed again for a predetermined period of time. If this continues, a second shield image may be displayed. With such a configuration, the difficulty level for displaying the second shield image increases, so there are two states: a state in which only the first shield image is displayed, and a state in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed. It becomes easy for the player to intentionally create any of the following.

In this way, multiple images (first shield image, second shield image) that hide the special omen display (supporting line image) are prepared, and these images are gradually changed based on the operation of the second operation section (defense button 3740). By displaying the special warning sign display, the special warning sign display is not suddenly hidden, so even if the player accidentally operates the second operation unit, a part of the special warning sign display can remain easily visible. . Furthermore, it is possible to realize a display mode that matches the player's preference.

Although the embodiment has been shown in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed by one operation section (defense button 3740), a plurality of shield images can be displayed corresponding to multiple operation sections (defense button 3740 and mission button 3700). An embodiment modified so that images (a first shield image and a second shield image) are displayed will be described below. 205(j), FIG. 205(k), FIG. 207(e) to FIG. 207(h), FIG. 205(a) to FIG. 205(d), FIG. 205(g), FIG. 207(a) to 207(d) are time charts and display examples showing an embodiment modified from the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 207(a) to 207(d).
In this embodiment, in addition to the defense button 3740, operation acceptance of the mission button 3700 is also enabled during the period from timing t5 to timing t27. Furthermore, when the pressing operation of the mission button 3700 is detected, the second shield image is displayed. The display time of the second shield image is 6 seconds, which is the same as the display time of the first shield image.

FIG. 205(j) is a time chart showing the operational validity period of the mission button 3700 and the display state when the pressing operation of the mission button 3700 is not detected.
FIG. 205(k) shows a state in which the pressing operation of the mission button 3700 is detected at timing t15, and the second shield image is displayed for 6 seconds until timing t21. 207(e) to 207(h) are display examples from timing t14, timing t16, timing t18, and timing t19 to timing t20, respectively.

In FIG. 207(e), although the cheering dialogue images "<Make it~" and "Make it bad~>" are difficult to see due to the first shield image, "<Ganbare~" and "Ganbare~>" are difficult to see. The cheering dialogue image is shown in a state where it is easily visible without being hidden by the first shield image.
In FIG. 207(f), in addition to the first shield image, the display of the second shield image is started, and the cheering dialogue images "<Ganbare~" and "Ganbare~>" are no longer visible due to the second shield image. The state shown is as follows.
In FIG. 207(g), the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed, and the cheering dialogue images "<Ganbare~" and "Ganbare~>" are made difficult to see by the second shield image. It is shown.
In FIG. 207(h), a first shield image and a second shield image are displayed, and a simulated operation part image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed in front of the second shield image. ing. As shown in FIG. 207(h), between the second shield image and the operation unit simulation image simulating the attack button 3710, the operation unit simulation image has a higher display priority. Therefore, even if the second shield image is being displayed, the visibility of the operation unit simulated image is not hindered.

In this way, in response to operations on multiple operation units, that is, the second operation button and the third operation button (defense button 3740 and mission button 3700), multiple images are created that hide different positions in the special omen display (support line image). (first shield image and second shield image) can be displayed, allowing the player to select how much the special omen display is to be hidden and which position of the special omen display is to be hidden according to the player's preference. can.
In addition, by displaying the operation part simulation image that imitates the first operation part (attack button 3710) in front of the second shield image, the operation part simulation image does not become difficult to see or invisible, so that the first operation part It does not hinder the progress of the game using the.

With reference to FIGS. 205 to 207 and the like, an embodiment has been described in which the special omen display (supporting dialogue image) can be hidden by the first shield image and the second shield image. An embodiment in which these images are transformed will be described below with reference to FIGS. 208 and 209. Note that the behavior of the gaming machine other than these image displays is the same as in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 205 to 207 and the like.

208(a) to 208(d) are display examples from timing t14, timing t16, timing t18, and timing t19 to timing t20, respectively.
In this embodiment, the first shield image has a horizontally elongated rectangular shape and has a hole in the center through which an image displayed at the rear can be viewed. Further, the second shield image has a horizontally long donut shape.
FIG. 208(a) is a display example showing a state in which the first shield image is displayed. As shown in the figure, the cheering line image becomes difficult or invisible due to the first shield image. Note that the display priority of the decorative pattern is higher than the display priority of the first shield image, and the decorative pattern is displayed on the front side of the first shield image.
208(b) and 208(c) are display examples showing a state in which a second shield image is displayed in addition to the first shield image.
FIG. 208(d) is a display example showing a state in which the operation valid period has occurred in a state where the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed. As shown in the figure, an operation unit simulated image simulating an attack button 3710 is displayed in the center of the display area.

The second shield image may be deformed to an elliptical shape instead of a donut-like shape so that the rear part of the hole at the center of the first shield image cannot be seen. 208(e) and 208(f) show display examples from timing t18 and timing t19 to timing t20, respectively. As shown in FIG. 208(f), an operation unit simulated image simulating an attack button 3710 is displayed at a position overlapping the second shield image.

209(a) to 209(d) are display examples from timing t14, timing t16, timing t18, and timing t19 to timing t20, respectively.
In this embodiment, the first shield image and the second shield image each have a vertically long rectangular shape. Furthermore, two first shield images and two second shield images are displayed.
FIG. 209(a) is a display example showing a state in which the first shield image is displayed. As shown in the figure, the cheering line image becomes difficult or invisible due to the first shield image. Note that the display priority of the decorative pattern is higher than the display priority of the first shield image, and the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the shield image.
209(b) and 209(c) are display examples showing a state in which a second shield image is displayed in addition to the shield image.
FIG. 209(d) is a display example showing a state in which the operation validity period has occurred in a state where the shield image and the second shield image are displayed. As shown in the figure, an operation unit simulated image simulating an attack button 3710 is displayed in an area between two second shield images.

Although a gap was provided between the two second shield images, it may be modified so that no gap is provided. 209(e) and 209(f) show display examples from timing t18 and timing t19 to timing t20, respectively. As shown in FIG. 209(f), an operation unit simulation image simulating an attack button 3710 is displayed at a position overlapping the two second shield images.

In this way, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 208 and 209, the first shield image is displayed at a position relatively far from the operation unit simulated image simulating the attack button 3710, and the first shield image is The configuration is such that the second shield image can be displayed at a nearby position.
The player can display only the first shield image, only the second shield image, or display both the first shield image and the second shield image according to his/her preference.

Although an embodiment has been described in which a cheering line image is displayed as an image to be displayed as a special omen display, instead of the cheering line image, an operating section mock image having a shape that resembles the first operating section (attack button 3710) is displayed. A modified embodiment will be shown below.

FIG. 210 is a time chart in this embodiment, and specifically, it is a time chart that is a modification of FIG. 205. In addition, as an omen effect, instead of displaying the cheering dialogue image, a simulated image shaped like the attack button 3710 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an "omen simulated image") is transformed to be displayed in a predetermined manner. However, the operation timing and the like are the same as in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 205 and the like.

FIGS. 211 to 213 are display examples of the foreshadow effects in this embodiment, and specifically, they are display examples that are modified from FIGS. 206 and 207.
Figures 211(a) to 211(d), Figures 212(a) to 212(d), and Figures 213(a) to 213(d) are shown in Figures 206(a) to 206(d), respectively. This is a display example corresponding to the display example at each timing (timings t14, t16, t18, t19 to t20) shown.
Similarly, FIGS. 211(e) to 211(h), FIGS. 212(e) to 212(h), and 213(e) to 213(h) are respectively shown in FIGS. 206(e) to 206(h). This is a display example corresponding to the display example at each timing (timings t14, t16, t18, t19 to t20) shown in h).

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 211, a precursor simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is first displayed in five rows and five columns (FIG. 211(a)). The precursor simulated image is opaque, and images located behind it (images of roads, etc.) are not visible. Note that some of the simulated precursor images are hidden in the dialogue window or in the image of your own tank. Next, as shown in FIG. 211(b), the precursor simulated images are displayed in three rows and three columns. Next, as shown in FIG. 211(c), only one precursor simulated image is displayed. At the same time as the operation validity period of the attack button 3710 starts, the word "attack" is added to the only one displaying simulated sign image as shown in FIG. 211(d), and the attack button 3710 is pressed. A simulated image of the operation section is displayed.

210(e) and 211(e) to 211(h) show that in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 211(a) to 211(d), the long press of the defense button 3740 at timing t14 is A time chart and display example when detected are shown. In this case, the precursor simulated image is displayed semitransparently from timing t14 to timing t19. At timing t19, at the timing when the operation validity period has started, the precursor simulated image becomes opaque, the word "attack" is added, and an operation unit simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed. be done.

Note that, as shown in the time chart of FIG. 210(f), the configuration may be such that the precursor simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is not displayed.

210(g) and FIG. 212 show that in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 211, instead of displaying the precursor simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 in a translucent manner, the precursor simulated image is displayed as the first shield image. 3 is a time chart and a display example showing an embodiment modified to hide the image.

212(a), 212(b), 212(c), and 212(d) show timing t14 when the defense button 3740 is not operated and the first shield image is not displayed. , timing t16, timing t18, and display examples from timing t19 to timing t20 are shown.

As shown in FIG. 210(g), when a long press of the defense button 3740 is detected at a predetermined timing (timing t14 in this production example), a button is displayed on the near side of the omen simulation image imitating the attack button 3710. 1 shield image is displayed, and a part of the precursor simulated image becomes difficult or impossible to see. FIG. 212(e) shows a display example when display of the first shield image is started at timing t14. FIGS. 212(f), 212(g), and 212(h) show display examples from timing t16, timing t18, and timing t19 to timing t20, respectively.

Instead of holding down the defense button 3740, the first shield image may be displayed when repeated hits of the defense button 3740 are detected.
FIG. 210(h) shows an example of the effect when repeated hits of the defense button 3740 are detected instead of long presses of the defense button 3740.

FIG. 213 is a display example showing an embodiment in which the precursory simulated image shown in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 210(g), FIG. 210(h), and FIG. 212 is transformed into another precursory simulated image.

As shown in FIGS. 213(a) to 213(c), nine precursory simulated images imitating the attack button 3710 gradually gather slightly to the left of the center of the display area, and finally as shown in FIG. 213(d). The display state is such that the attack button 3710 is activated. FIG. 213(a) is a display example at timing t14. At this time, each precursor simulated image is displayed at a separate position. FIG. 213(b) is a display example at timing t16, in which each precursor simulated image gradually approaches. FIG. 213(c) is a display example at timing t18. At this time, each omen simulated image is displayed overlappingly on the right side of the "Sergeant Mite" dialogue window. Note that each precursor simulated image is displayed with three protrusions like afterimages indicating the direction of movement. At timing t19, the operation of the attack button 3710 becomes valid, the display of each protrusion ends, and the character "attack" is added to the omen simulation image and displayed as the operation unit simulation image. FIG. 213(d) shows a display example from timing t19 to timing t20.

As shown in FIG. 210(g), when a long press of the defense button 3740 is detected at a predetermined timing (timing t14 in this production example), a button is displayed on the near side of the omen simulation image imitating the attack button 3710. 1 shield image is displayed, and a part of the precursor simulated image becomes difficult or impossible to see. FIG. 213(e) shows a display example when display of the first shield image is started at timing t14. 213(f), FIG. 213(g), and FIG. 213(h) show display examples from timing t16, timing t18, and timing t19 to timing t20, respectively.

In this way, even when a harbinger imitation image imitating the first operation section (attack button 3710) is displayed as a special harbinger display instead of a support line image, the visibility of the special harbinger display is reduced. By making it difficult or impossible to see, the same effects as in the embodiment described above can be obtained.

For the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 210(a) to 210(h) and FIGS. 211 to 213 (embodiment in which a precursor simulated image is displayed), see FIG. 205(i) and FIG. 207. An embodiment to which the embodiment described above (an embodiment capable of displaying the second shield image) is applied will be described with reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 210(i) and the display example shown in FIG. 214.
The present embodiment is configured such that a precursor simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 displayed as a precursor effect can be hidden by the first shield image and the second shield image.

214(a) to 214(d) show display examples in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 212(a) to 212(h), which are modified to display the second shield image. It shows.
FIG. 210(i) is a time chart when the long press of the defense button 3740 is detected at timing t15 and the second shield image is displayed. Note that the second shield image is displayed for a predetermined time (6 seconds).
214(a), FIG. 214(b), FIG. 214(c), and FIG. 214(d) are display examples in which the first shield image at timing t14 is displayed, and the first shield image and the first shield image at timing t16, respectively. A display example in which two shield images are displayed, a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at timing t18, and a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed from timing t19 to timing t20. Display examples of the respective states are shown below.

214(e) to 214(h) show display examples in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 213(a) to 213(h), which are modified to display the second shield image. It shows.
FIG. 210(i) is a time chart when the long press of the defense button 3740 is detected at timing t15 and the second shield image is displayed. Note that the second shield image is displayed for a predetermined time (6 seconds).
214(e), FIG. 214(f), FIG. 214(g), and FIG. 214(h) are display examples in which the first shield image at timing t14 is displayed, and the first shield image and the first shield image at timing t16, respectively. A display example in which two shield images are displayed, a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at timing t18, and a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed from timing t19 to timing t20. Display examples of the respective states are shown below.

In contrast to the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 210(a) to 210(h) and FIGS. 211 to 213 (embodiment in which a precursor simulated image is displayed), FIGS. 205(j) and 205(k) ), an embodiment to which the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 207 (an embodiment in which the second shield image can be displayed in response to the operation of the mission button 3700) is shown in FIGS. 210(j) and 210(k). This will be explained with reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 214 and the display example shown in FIG.
The present embodiment is configured such that a precursor simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 displayed as a precursor effect can be hidden by the first shield image and the second shield image.
Further, the second shield image is configured to be displayed when pressing the mission button 3700 is detected.

214(a) to 214(d) show display examples in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 212(a) to 212(h), which are modified to display the second shield image. It shows.
As shown in FIGS. 210(j) and 210(k), also in this embodiment, it is possible to display the second shield image in response to the operation of the mission button 3700.
214(a), FIG. 214(b), FIG. 214(c), and FIG. 214(d) are display examples in which the first shield image at timing t14 is displayed, and the first shield image and the first shield image at timing t16, respectively. A display example in which two shield images are displayed, a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at timing t18, and a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed from timing t19 to timing t20. Display examples of the respective states are shown below.

214(e) to 214(h) show display examples in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 213(a) to 213(h), which are modified to display the second shield image. Showing.
As shown in FIGS. 210(j) and 210(k), also in this embodiment, it is possible to display the second shield image in response to the operation of the mission button 3700.
214(e), FIG. 214(f), FIG. 214(g), and FIG. 214(h) are display examples in which the first shield image at timing t14 is displayed, and the first shield image and the first shield image at timing t16, respectively. A display example in which two shield images are displayed, a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at timing t18, and a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed from timing t19 to timing t20. Display examples of the respective states are shown below.

In addition, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 211, 213, etc., in which a portent simulation image is displayed as a portent effect, the first shield image and the second shield image in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 208, FIG. may be adopted.

The embodiments shown with reference to FIG. 210(i) to FIG. 210(k) and FIG. 214 can also provide the same effects as the embodiments described above.

With reference to FIGS. 205 and 210, an embodiment has been shown in which the first shield image and the second shield image can be displayed by operating the defense button 3740 and the mission button 3700. The operation validity period is from timing t5 when the ready-to-win effect state occurs to timing t27 which is the final stage of the ready-to-reach effect state.
During this period, the first shield image and the second shield image can be displayed at any timing triggered by the player's operation on the defense button 3740 or the mission button 3700. In addition, the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed for a predetermined period of time (6 seconds), but after the display of the first shield image and the second shield image is finished, the second shield image is displayed again when the player performs an operation. It is possible to display the first shield image and the second shield image.

For example, although a ready-to-reach state has occurred at timing t5, a player who does not want to visually recognize the precursor performance may press the defense button 3740 or By operating the mission button 3700, it is possible to display the first shield image and the second shield image, and to make the precursor effect difficult or impossible to see in advance.

Further, for example, from timing t16 to timing t22, the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed simultaneously with the operation part mock image imitating the attack button 3710 indicating that the operation acceptance of the attack button 3710 is valid. It can be displayed.
Further, it is possible to continue displaying the first shield image and the second shield image even after the acceptance of the operation of the attack button 3710 ends or after the operation validity period ends. When the operation of the attack button 3710 is accepted or when the operation validity period ends, the degree of expectation of the special lottery result is indicated depending on the state of the destroyed image of the enemy tank, but the display priority of the first shield image and the second shield image is given over the destroyed image. may be set high so that part or all of the destroyed image is hidden by the first shield image or the second shield image.
In this case, the player needs to pay attention to the display time of the first shield image or the second shield image and the timing to start displaying the first shield image or the second shield image. For example, if a player operates the defense button 3740 or mission button 3700 sloppily regardless of the progress of the production, a display state may occur where the visibility of the destroyed image is hindered as a penalty. The player will now seriously operate the defense button 3740 and the mission button 3700, and a decline in interest will be suppressed.

Prepare multiple types of operation unit simulated images depending on the level of expectation, and keep the display for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) instead of hiding it when an operation is accepted or when the operation validity period ends. Good too.
Since the display status of the operation unit simulated image is that important for the player who has made at least a part of the precursor display difficult or impossible to see due to the first shield image or the second shield image in order to concentrate on operating the operation unit, By leaving this performance situation after the operation, it is possible to give the player a lingering feeling of interest in the operation performance.

Note that the time for displaying the first shield image and the second shield image, and the time for displaying the cheering dialogue image that functions as a special omen display and the omen simulation image imitating the attack button 3710 were each set to 6 seconds. The time for displaying the first shield image and the second shield image may be longer. For example, the first shield image and the second shield image may be displayed for 10 seconds. Alternatively, once the display of the first shield image or the second shield image is started, until the operation validity period starts or until the display of the destruction image starts (i.e., the player presses the attack button 371 The display of the first shield image and the second shield image may be continued until the timing when the operation is performed or the timing when the operation validity period ends). With this configuration, the visibility of the special warning sign display can be reduced with a small number of operations, and the state can be maintained in a state where it is difficult to see or cannot be seen.

On the other hand, the time during which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed may be shorter (for example, 3 seconds) than the time during which the special omen display is displayed. In this case, players who do not want to see the special precursor display will be required to perform the operation multiple times, but for players who have mistakenly displayed the first shield image or second shield image, the special precursor display will be displayed. During at least a part of the period during which the special warning sign is displayed, the special omen display can be visually recognized without the visibility being obstructed by the first shield image or the second shield image, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

If the conditions for displaying the first shield image are met when the defense button 3740 is operated while the first shield image is being displayed, the first shield image will continue to be displayed again from the timing when the conditions are met. You may let them. For example, if the conditions for displaying the first shield image are met at the timing when the first shield image is displayed for 4 seconds, the first shield image is displayed for an additional 6 seconds, and the first shield image is displayed for a total of 10 seconds. The configuration may be such that an image is displayed.
Similarly, regarding the second shield image, if the conditions for displaying the second shield image are met when the mission button 3700 is operated, the display of the second shield image will continue from the timing when the conditions are met. You may let them. For example, if the conditions for displaying the second shield image are met at the timing when the second shield image is displayed for 4 seconds, the second shield image is displayed for an additional 6 seconds, and the second shield image is displayed for a total of 10 seconds. The configuration may be such that an image is displayed.

During the validity period of the defense button 3740, after a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed since the first shield image was displayed and the display of the first shield image has ended, the conditions for displaying the first shield image are met again. If the first shield image is displayed, the first shield image can be displayed again. The same applies to the second shield image.

According to such a configuration, a player who is unsure whether or not to view the special omen display and decides that he does not want to see it can extend the display time of the first shield image or the second shield image. . On the other hand, a player who wanted to see the special warning sign accidentally operated the second operation section (defense button 3740) or the third operation section (mission button 3700), and the visibility of the special sign display became poor. Although it is possible that the visibility of the special warning sign has decreased and become difficult or impossible to see, if the player does not operate the second operation unit any further, the visibility of the special warning sign has decreased and it has become difficult or impossible to see. will end promptly. In addition, since the first shield image and the second shield image can be displayed at any timing (for example, before the start of the special warning sign display or after the operation validity period ends), the first shield image and the second shield image It becomes possible to practice displaying.

215(a) to 215(d) show an example in which the display positions of the first shield image and the second shield image are changed in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 214(a) to 214(d). An example of display in the form is shown.
As shown in FIGS. 210(j) and 210(k), also in this embodiment, it is possible to display the second shield image in response to the operation of the mission button 3700.
215(a), FIG. 215(b), FIG. 215(c), and FIG. 215(d) are display examples in which the first shield image at timing t14 is displayed, and the first shield image and the first shield image at timing t16, respectively. A display example in which two shield images are displayed, a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at timing t18, and a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed from timing t19 to timing t20. Display examples of the respective states are shown below.

215(e) to 215(h) show an example in which the display positions of the first shield image and the second shield image are changed in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 214(e) to 214(h). An example of display in the form is shown.
As shown in FIGS. 210(j) and 210(k), also in this embodiment, it is possible to display the second shield image in response to the operation of the mission button 3700.
215(e), FIG. 215(f), FIG. 215(g), and FIG. 215(h) are display examples in which the first shield image at timing t14 is displayed, and the first shield image and the first shield image at timing t16, respectively. A display example in which two shield images are displayed, a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at timing t18, and a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed from timing t19 to timing t20. Display examples of the respective states are shown below.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 215(a) to 215(d) and the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 215(e) to 215(h), the display priority of the first shield image is set higher than the display priority of the second shield image, and the first shield image is displayed in front of the second shield image. Further, the first shield image is displayed at a position relatively close to the position where the operation unit simulated image is displayed, and the second shield image is displayed at a position relatively far away. Further, the size of the first shield image (specifically, the area occupied in the display area) is larger than the size of the second shield image.
Furthermore, as described above, although a special operation (long press or repeated press operation) on the defense button 3740 is required to display the first shield image, the mission button 3700 is required to display the second shield image. It is only necessary to perform a pressing operation. That is, the second shield image is displayed at the operation start timing of the mission button 3700 (operation start reception timing), while the first shield image is not displayed at the operation start timing of the defense button 3740 (operation start reception timing).

According to such a configuration, the first shield image is displayed when the player operates the second operation unit (defense button 3740) in a complicated manner with clear intention.
On the other hand, the second shield image is displayed when the player operates the third operation unit (mission button 3700) in a simple manner. Therefore, the second shield image is displayed not only when the player operates the third operation section intentionally, but also when the player operates the third operation section unintentionally or by mistake.
In this way, in this embodiment, instead of making the difficulty level of the operation mode required for displaying the first shield image relatively higher than the difficulty level required for displaying the second shield image, The first shield image can obstruct the visibility of the special warning sign display more than the image.

In this way, by displaying the first shield image, which is not displayed unless operated with a clear intention, the player can see the operation part mock image that imitates the first operation part (attack button 3710), It is possible to concentrate on operating the first operating section.
Further, even when the second shield image that can be displayed by a simple operation is displayed, the player can concentrate on the operation section simulated image and the operation of the operation section. On the other hand, when the second shield image is displayed compared to when the first shield image is displayed, the visibility of the special omen display is relatively higher, so that if the player makes a mistake, Even in the case where the second shield image is displayed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest felt by the player who wanted to see the special omen display.

Furthermore, the first shield image may be displayed after a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed after a special operation (long press operation or repeated tap operation) on the defense button 3740 is detected. Further, the display time of the first shield image may be made longer than the display time of the second shield image.
Even when such a configuration is adopted, similar effects can be obtained.

The first shield image that is displayed when the defense button 3740 is operated and the second shield image that is displayed when the mission button 3700 is operated may have different image sizes and display times. For example, in the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 207 and 214, the size of the second shield image is made larger than the first shield image, so that a large area in the special precursor display is made invisible.
Alternatively, the display times of the first shield image and the second shield image may be different. For example, the display time of the first shield image may be set to 6 seconds, and the display time of the second shield image may be set to 9 seconds. Conversely, the display time of the first shield image may be set to 9 seconds, and the display time of the second shield image may be set to 6 seconds.
By employing such a configuration, the special omen display can be displayed in a visual recognition mode that suits the player's preference.

Instead of simply making the first shield image and the second shield image appear at a predetermined position, they may be made to appear in a dynamic display. In order to make it appear as a dynamic display, for example, it may be displayed dynamically in a so-called cut-in manner from either the top, bottom, left or right of the display area, or dynamic display such as wipe-in, wipe-out, fade-in or fade-out may be used. You may choose to adopt it.
The first shield image and the second shield image that appear while moving in this manner may continue to move and be stopped at the center of the display area. Alternatively, the first shield image and the second shield image, which have appeared while moving at one end of the display area, may continue to move and be displayed at the other end of the display area so as to disappear outside the display area. Good too.
As a result, not only the special omen display is hidden by the first shield image and the second shield image, but also a dramatic display can be made when the first shield image and the second shield image appear or disappear, which reduces the interest. can be suppressed.

When the defense button 3740 is operated, a support line image and an omen simulation image of the attack button 3710 are displayed semitransparently, and when the mission button 3700 is operated, the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed and the support lines are displayed. The image or the precursor simulated image of the attack button 3710 may be configured to be difficult to view or invisible.
In this way, by making the special precursor display invisible or difficult to see in different ways depending on the type of operation section, it is possible to create a visual recognition mode that suits the player's preference.

Further, there may be a plurality of display modes of the precursor simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, and the degree of expectation of the special lottery result may be indicated depending on the type of the displayed precursor simulated image. For example, the degree of expectation may be indicated by the color or shape of the simulated precursor image. Also in this case, it is preferable to configure the special precursor display so that it can be made difficult or invisible by the first shield image and the second shield image.
With this configuration, the player is not confused by the level of expectation shown by the precursory simulated image, and the display of the operation unit simulated image that simulates the first operation unit (attack button 3710) or the first operation unit The player can concentrate on the operations.

Even if the special precursor display (display of a cheering dialogue image or a simulated precursor image) ends while the first shield image or the second shield image is being displayed, the first shield image or the second shield image will be displayed for a predetermined time. It's good to poke at it. This is because if the display of the first shield image and second shield image ends at the same time as the operation validity period starts, the background image (road, etc.) located in the background of the first shield image and second shield image will be displayed. This is because the player who wants to concentrate on displaying the operation unit simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 feels uncomfortable. It is preferable to continue displaying the hidden images (first shield image, second shield image) even if the operation validity period has expired in this manner.

Further, the display priority of the operation unit simulation image may be set higher than the display priority of the first shield image. For example, as shown in FIG. 206(h), it is preferable to display the operation unit simulated image in front of the first shield image. With such a configuration, the player can concentrate only on the displayed simulated image. If the first shield image were to disappear, the background image hidden by the first shield image would become visible, which would hinder the user's concentration on the operation unit simulated image.
Note that the same configuration can be adopted not only for the first shield image but also for the second shield image.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 207(h) and 214(h), a portion of the operation unit simulated image and a portion of the second shield image may be displayed so as to overlap. At this time, it is preferable to set the display priority of the operation unit simulated image higher than the display priority of the second shield image. Alternatively, as shown in FIGS. 212(h) and 213(h), the operation unit simulated image is placed near the first shield image and the second shield image and does not overlap with the first shield image and the second shield image. It may also be displayed at the location.
With such a configuration, the player can concentrate only on the displayed operation unit simulation image.

Although an embodiment has been described in which the display priority of the operation unit simulated image is higher than the display priority of the first shield image and the second shield image, the display priority of the operation unit simulated image is set higher than the display priority of the first shield image and the second shield image. 2 may be lower than the display priority of the shield image. In this case, it is preferable that a part of the operation unit simulated image be configured so that it can be visually recognized by the player without overlapping with the first shield image or the second shield image.

In addition to displaying the harbinger simulation image and the operation unit simulating image, the name and operation mode of the first operation unit (attack button 3710) are displayed during the special harbinger display (while the harbinger simulating image is being displayed) and during the valid operation period (operation may be configured to be displayed in the display area during display of the partial simulated image). In this case, a player who is unfamiliar with the game will have a deeper understanding of the name and operating method of the first operating section, and will be able to operate the first operating section reliably.
On the other hand, for experienced players, such a display may not be necessary. Therefore, by displaying the first shield image and the second shield image, the name and operation mode of the attack button 3710 may be configured to be difficult or impossible to see. On the other hand, the operation unit simulated image may be configured so that it does not become difficult or impossible to see due to the first shield image or the second shield image.
The operation mode and name of the attack button 3710 may be displayed only before or during the valid operation period, or may be displayed from before the valid operation period occurs until during the valid operation period. You can.
The embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 208 and 209 is an example of such an embodiment. In Figure 208(d), Figure 208(f), Figure 209(d), and Figure 209(f), the dialogue window of "Sergeant Might" has the text "Second Lieutenant! Aim at the enemy tank with the attack button!" Although the columns are displayed, the operation mode and name of the attack button 3710 are not visible because the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed.
With such a configuration, the player can concentrate only on the displayed operation unit simulated image.

Note that if the configuration is such that the first shield image can be easily displayed, the player may accidentally operate the defense button 3740 and the first shield image may be unintentionally displayed during execution of the omen effect. There is a risk that the visibility of the omen performance may be obstructed and the interest produced by the omen performance may be lost.
Therefore, the configuration is such that the first shield image is displayed when a specific condition is met in response to an operation on the defense button 3740. Examples of specific conditions include repeated presses of the defense button 3740 (a press operation is detected a predetermined number of times or more within a predetermined time period) and long presses (a press operation is continuously detected for a predetermined time period or more). However, other conditions that are satisfied when the defense button 3740 is operated may be adopted.

Although the embodiment has been shown in which the second shield image is displayed on the condition that the defense button 3740 is held down or the mission button 3700 is pressed, the second shield image may be displayed under other conditions. It may be configured as follows. For example, the second shield image may be displayed on condition that the mission button 3700 is pressed after the defense button 3740 is pressed. Alternatively, the second shield image may be displayed on condition that a long press or repeated presses of the mission button 3700 are detected.

Although the embodiment has been shown in which the second shield image is displayed regardless of whether or not the first shield image is displayed, the second shield image is displayed on the condition that the first shield image is being displayed. It may be configured so that

Note that the display priority of the first shield image and the second shield image is set lower than the display priority of the decorative pattern displayed at the upper left of the display area. Thereby, the decorative pattern is not hidden by the first shield image or the second shield image, so the visibility of the decorative pattern is ensured.

Although the operation valid period of the defense button 3740 is set to be from timing t5 to timing t27, the entire period during which the decorative symbols are being displayed in a variable manner or while the variation is stopped may be the valid operation period and the period during which the first shield image is displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to practice displaying the first shield image by operating the defense button 3740 at any timing.
Note that there is no need to adopt such a configuration for the operational validity period of the mission button 3700, which is the trigger for displaying the second shield image. ) may be set as the operation valid period, or the second shield image may be configured to be displayable. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the second shield image is not displayed at least while the variation of the decorative pattern is stopped. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed from decreasing.

Although the embodiment has been configured in which a special omen display is performed by displaying a plurality of images, the special omen display may be performed using only one image. For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 204 and the like, four cheering dialogue images are displayed, but only one of them may be displayed. Further, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 213 and the like, nine omen simulation images are displayed, but only one of them may be displayed.

A case may be provided in which the operation on the first operation section (attack button 3710) is not valid after the special omen display is displayed. In this case, after the special precursor display is displayed, the operation unit simulated image imitating the first operation unit is not displayed, and the operation validity period does not occur.
For players who have hidden the special precursor display with the first shield image or the second shield image, the operation section simulated image is not displayed even though they have taken the trouble to make the precursor simulated image difficult or invisible. Although the result may be disappointing, by purposefully displaying such an effect, it is possible to make the player want to operate the operation unit next time.

Conventionally, in a game performance in which a player is instructed to operate an operating means, a gaming machine is known in which even if the player does not perform an operation on the operating means, the same effect display as when the operating means is operated is performed. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007-136096).
However, since the same effect display is displayed even when no operation is performed as when the operation is performed, while the operational burden on the player is reduced, there is a risk that the player loses his desire to operate the operation means. . Particularly in game presentations that require complicated operational instructions to the operating means, if the same presentation display is displayed even when no operation is performed, it is possible to increase the player's desire to operate. There is a risk of significant loss.
Below, an embodiment of a gaming machine that solves such problems and suppresses a decline in interest by increasing the player's desire to operate the operating means will be described.

A modified embodiment of the "shield bullet reach" will be described below with reference to FIGS. 216 to 218.
FIG. 216 shows a time chart in this embodiment. Further, FIGS. 217 and 218 show display examples in the display area.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 216(a), a reach state occurs at timing t5. Next, at timing t15, an image of an enemy tank is displayed. Next, the operation validity period of the attack button 3710 occurs from timing t18 to timing t22. If repeated hits or long presses of the attack button 3710 are detected during the valid operation period, the valid operation period ends. Next, after a display is performed according to the operation status of the attack button 3710, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at timing t34.
FIGS. 216(b) to 216(d) show examples of effects that may occur depending on the operation status of the attack button 3710 during the valid operation period.

FIG. 216(b) shows an example of the effect when a repeated press operation on the attack button 3710 is detected at timing t21.
In this production example, at timing t15, a display is started in which an enemy tank appears from the right side of the display area and moves to the left. Next, at timing t18, the operational validity period of attack button 3710 starts. The operation validity period ends when a repeated tap operation or long press operation is detected. Further, when a long press operation or a repeated tap operation is detected, an effect display according to the operation mode is performed. If a long press operation or a repeated tap operation is not detected, the effective operation period ends at timing t22 when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the effective operation period.
FIG. 217(a) shows a display example at timing t19. As shown in the figure, an image of an enemy tank is displayed at the top of the display area. Furthermore, in the dialogue window of "Might Sergeant", a character string "Lieutenant! Hit the attack button repeatedly to attack the enemy tank!" is displayed to show the player how to operate the attack button 3710. Further, in the upper right corner of the dialogue window for “Sergeant Mite”, a simulated operation unit image (circular image) imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed. Additionally, the word "attack" is displayed in the operation unit simulated image.
Note that the same display (FIGS. 218(a), 218(d), ) is performed.

When a continuous firing operation is detected at timing t21, a display is displayed in which a shell is fired from the own tank at the enemy tank, and then a smoke image representing the smoke generated by the explosion of the shell is displayed. will be displayed instead of the image. FIG. 217(b) shows a display example at timing t22. In this display example, a smoke image is displayed in the center of the display area.
At timing t23 when two seconds have elapsed from the start of display of the smoke image, a bomb character image appears from behind the smoke image and is displayed moving to the left. The displayed bomb character images include a bomb character image A and a bomb character image B, and the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot is suggested depending on the type of bomb character image displayed.
FIG. 217(c) is a display example at timing t25. In this display example, a bomb character image A is displayed on the left side of the smoke image. FIG. 217(d) is a display example at timing t25. In this display example, a bomb character image B is displayed on the left side of the smoke image. The display of the bomb character image and the smoke image continues until timing t27 (6 seconds after the continuous hitting operation is detected).
In this way, when the player performs an appropriate operation on the operation unit, the expectation level of the special lottery result is shown to the player.

FIG. 216(c) shows an example of the effect when a long-press operation on the attack button 3710 is detected at timing t21.
In this production example, the display state is switched from the display example shown in FIG. 218(a) to the display example shown in FIGS. 218(b) and 218(c).
In this production example, when a long-press operation is detected at timing t21, a display of a shell being fired from your own tank is displayed instead of the image of an enemy tank, and then the smoke generated by the explosion of the shell is displayed. A smoke image is displayed. FIG. 218(b) is a display example at timing t22. In this display example, a smoke image is displayed in the center of the display area.
In this production example, the bomb character image is not displayed, and only the smoke image is displayed. FIG. 218(c) is a display example at timing t25. The display of the smoke image continues until timing t27 (6 seconds after the long press is detected).
In this way, if the operation performed by the player on the operation means is not an appropriate operation, a display corresponding to the operation will be displayed, but the expectations regarding the special result (such as the special lottery result being a jackpot, etc.) will be displayed. The expectation level) is not shown to the player.

FIG. 216(d) shows an effect when repeated tapping or long-pressing of the attack button 3710 is not detected during the valid operation period from timing t18 to timing t22 (for example, when the attack button 3710 is pressed only once or when it is not operated). An example is shown.
In this production example, the state of the display example shown in FIG. 218(d) is switched to the state of the display example shown in FIGS. 218(e) and 218(f).
In this production example, when the valid operation period ends at timing t22, the image of the enemy tank turns right at the upper center of the display area and begins to move upward in the display area. FIG. 218(e) shows a display example at timing t22. In this display example, an image of an enemy tank is displayed in the center of the display area.
FIG. 218(f) is a display example at timing t25. In this display example, the image of the enemy tank is moved upward and displayed smaller than in the case shown in FIG. 218(e).
In this way, if the player does not perform an appropriate operation on the operation means, a display corresponding to the operation is not displayed. Further, the level of expectation regarding the special result (the level of expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot, etc.) is not shown to the player.

As described above, the present embodiment is configured to indicate the degree of expectation regarding the special lottery result depending on the type of bomb character image. Specifically, when the bomb character image A is displayed, it is suggested that the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot is higher than when the bomb character image B is displayed. Note that the bomb character image may be configured so that different colors (red or green) suggest different expectations. Furthermore, the bomb character may not be displayed even if an appropriate operation (repeated hits) is performed.

In this embodiment, a player who performs an appropriate operation on the operation means (attack button 3710) can visually recognize a special game-related display (smoke image) as well as a specific effect (display of a bomb character image). I can do it. Furthermore, it is possible to know the level of expectation for the special lottery result depending on the type of specific performance. On the other hand, players who do not perform appropriate operations on the operation unit may be able to see the special game-related display but not the specific effect, or may be unable to see both the special game-related display and the specific effect. Can not do it. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's motivation and aggressiveness in operating the operation unit.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 216 etc., it is possible to execute a performance pattern that requires repeated hits and a performance pattern that requires a long press as an operation instruction for the attack button 3710, and either of the performance patterns is executed. It may be modified so that In this case, the dialogue window for "Sergeant Might" will include the lines "Lieutenant! Press the attack button repeatedly to attack the enemy tank!" and the line "Lieutenant! Press and hold the attack button to attack the enemy tank!" It is recommended that the configuration be configured so that the following line is displayed. In addition, if the player presses the button repeatedly even though the instruction to press repeatedly is given, or if the player presses the button repeatedly even though the instruction to press and hold the button repeatedly is given, the case shown in FIG. 218(c) It is preferable to control the bomb character image so that it cannot be visually recognized.
With this configuration, the player is required to carefully check the contents of the operation instruction display (character strings displayed in the dialogue window), which increases the sense of tension in the operation and increases the It is possible to improve the player's motivation and aggressiveness in operating the game.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 216 to 218, the same smoke image was displayed at the same position when the attack button 3710 was pressed repeatedly and when it was pressed for a long time (for example, in FIG. b) and Figure 218(b)). With this configuration, even if another player sees the display content in the display area, it is difficult to determine whether or not the content of the operation was appropriate. This will prevent you from getting noticed and feeling embarrassed.
Note that smoke images may be displayed in which part of the smoke image is different and part of the smoke image is the same depending on whether the operation is appropriate or not. Alternatively, an image showing the same or similar concept may be displayed as the smoke image.
In this way, instead of displaying completely the same image as a smoke image, similar images are displayed, or similar images that can be recognized as a similar motif (smoke in this embodiment) are displayed. Even in this case, it can be made difficult for other players to determine whether or not the content of the operation was appropriate.
Note that a similar configuration may be adopted for an embodiment that displays smoke images and explosion images, which will be described later. For example, images that the player recognizes as having a similar motif may be displayed. In addition, similar smoke images are displayed, similar messages regarding the operation of the operating means are displayed, and smoke images and explosion images similar to the smoke images are displayed depending on whether the operation content is appropriate or not. It would be good to display it. Further, these similar images may be displayed at a position overlapping the display position of the held image or near the center of the display area. The same effect can be obtained even when images that are slightly different are displayed in this manner.

A predetermined suggestion effect display indicating the degree of expectation of the special lottery result can be executed over a predetermined period (for example, timing t10 to timing t30) that straddles the operation valid period (timing t18 to timing t22), and while the suggestion effect display is being executed. If the attack button 3710 is not operated properly during the valid operation period, the currently running suggestion effect display may be terminated. For example, over a period from timing t10 to timing t30, it is possible to display a suggestive effect different from the effect of displaying a bomb character, and if the attack button 3710 is operated appropriately, this suggestive effect display is continued. , if the attack button 3710 is not operated appropriately, the suggestive effect display may be terminated.

In addition, during a predetermined period after the operation validity period (for example, from timing t22 to timing t34 when the fluctuating display of decorative symbols ends), a predetermined suggestion effect display indicating the expectation level of the special lottery result can be executed, and the operation If the attack button 3710 is not operated properly during the valid period (timing t18 to timing t22), execution of the suggestive effect display may be restricted during a predetermined period after the valid operation period. For example, during the period from timing t22 to timing t34, it is possible to display a suggestive effect that is different from the effect that displays a bomb character, and if the attack button 3710 is properly operated, this suggestive effect display is changed to a predetermined value. It may be configured such that the suggestion effect display is executed based on a probability and is not executed if the attack button 3710 is not operated appropriately.

In this way, if the operation is not performed properly, the suggestion effect display that is being executed is terminated or the suggestion effect display is not executed until the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is stopped, thereby reducing the tension caused by the operation. This increases the player's motivation and aggressiveness in operating the operating means.

If the attack button 3710 is not operated properly in a certain variable display, execution of the suggestion effect may be restricted in a predetermined number of variable displays after that variable display. For example, it is preferable to limit the execution of the suggestion effect until the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed 10 times.
With such a configuration, depending on the operation mode of the operating means, a game situation may occur in which the execution of a specific effect (suggestion effect) is restricted over multiple fluctuating displays of decorative symbols. The sense of tension is increased, and the player's motivation and aggressiveness in operating the operating means can be further improved.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 216 etc., the expectation level is not suggested for the fluctuating display result during execution if the attack button 3710 is not operated appropriately. Below, with reference to FIG. 219 and the like, a modified embodiment will be described in which execution of the pre-read effect is restricted when the attack button 3710 is not operated appropriately.

FIG. 219 shows a time chart in this embodiment. Further, FIGS. 220 to 222 show display examples in the display area.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 219(a), a reach state occurs at timing t5. Next, at timing t16, an image of the minefield is displayed. Next, the operation validity period of the attack button 3710 occurs from timing t18 to timing t22. Note that, at the timing of occurrence of the operation validity period, three pending operations have occurred. Next, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed from timing t34 to timing t35. Next, a new variable display of decorative symbols is performed from timing t35 to timing t44, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed from timing t44 to timing t45.
FIGS. 219(b) to 219(d) each show a plurality of production examples corresponding to the operation mode for the attack button 3710 during the valid operation period.

FIG. 219(b) shows an example of the effect when a repeated press operation on the attack button 3710 is detected at timing t21.
In this production example, at timing t16, a minefield consisting of a bomb character appears from the upper side of the display area and begins to move downward. Next, at timing t18, the operational validity period of attack button 3710 starts.
FIG. 220(a) shows a display example at timing t19. An image of an enemy tank is displayed at the top of the display area. In the dialogue window of "Sergeant Might", a character string "Lieutenant! Hit the attack button repeatedly to attack them!" is displayed, and the operation mode of the attack button 3710 is shown to the player. At the upper right of the dialogue window for "Sergeant Might," a simulated operation part image (circular image) imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed with the word "attack" attached. Furthermore, a pending image is displayed at the lower right of the display area. Specifically, from the left, the pending images corresponding to the pending, first pending, second pending, and third pending are displayed. Among these, the hold, the first hold, and the third hold are displayed as white hold images, which are normal hold images. On the other hand, the second hold is displayed as a red hold image indicating that there is a higher expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot than in the normal hold. Note that it is possible to display a total of five pending images, including one pending image and four, which is the upper limit of the number of pending images. Further, in each of the holdings from the holding to the fourth holding, it is possible to display in a display mode that shows that the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot is higher than that of the normal holding image. In addition, the pending image basically continues to be displayed regardless of whether the decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable manner or in a state where the variation is stopped.
Note that a display similar to this is also performed in the example of effect shown with reference to FIG. 219(c) and the example of effect shown with reference to FIG. 219(d).

When a continuous firing operation is detected at timing t21, a display is displayed in which a shell is fired from the own tank at the minefield, and then a smoke image representing the smoke generated by the explosion of the shell is displayed in the minefield. will be displayed instead of the image. FIG. 220(b) shows a display example at timing t22. In this display example, a smoke image is displayed in the center of the display area. FIG. 220(c) shows a display example after timing t23. Note that the display position of the smoke image differs depending on the timing of repeated hit detection. For example, if the repeated hits are detected early, the smoke image will be displayed relatively above the display area, and if the repeated hits are detected late, the smoke image will be displayed relatively below the display area. Ru. Further, the position of the displayed smoke image does not change and continues to be displayed at the same position.

At timing t34, the variable display of decorative symbols is finished. FIG. 220(d) shows a display example from timing t34 to timing t35. During this period, the hold will be in an erased state. Next, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started from timing t35. At this time, the hold that had been the first hold moves to the left and becomes larger, becoming the hold. Further, the hold that was the second hold moves to the left and becomes the first hold. Similarly, the hold that was the third hold moves to the left and becomes the second hold. In addition, in this production example, at the timing when the third hold moves to the left and becomes the second hold, the normal hold (white hold image) changes to the hold with higher expectations (green hold image). Change. FIG. 220(e) shows a display example at timing t36. FIG. 220(f) shows a display example during a period from timing t44 to timing t45 when this variable display ends.

In this way, by the player performing appropriate operations on the operating means, a state is maintained in which the player is shown the level of expectation regarding the special result (the level of expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot, etc.). Ru.

FIG. 219(c) shows an example of the effect when a long-press operation on the attack button 3710 is detected at timing t21.
In this production example as well, at timing t16, a display in which a mine field consisting of bomb characters appears from the upper side of the display area and moves downward is started. Next, at timing t18, the operational validity period of attack button 3710 starts.
FIG. 221(a) shows a display example at timing t19. The display content at this time is the same as the display content in the display example shown with reference to FIG. 220(a).

Even if a long-press operation is detected at timing t21, the display that a shell is fired from the own tank at the minefield is not performed. Then, the display of the minefield approaching the own tank continues. FIG. 221(b) shows a display example from timing t22 to timing t23 when the valid operation period has ended. Next, at timing t23, the minefield and the own tank come into contact and the minefield explodes, and a smoke image is displayed at the bottom of the display area in place of the minefield image. At the same time, the second hold image that had been shown in red changes to a white hold image. FIG. 221(c) shows a display example at timing t24.

At timing t34, the variable display of decorative symbols is finished. FIG. 221(d) shows a display example from timing t34 to timing t35. During this period, the hold will be in an erased state. Next, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started from timing t35. At the same time, the hold that had been the first hold moves to the left and becomes larger, becoming the hold. Further, the hold that was the second hold moves to the left and becomes the first hold. Similarly, the hold that was the third hold moves to the left and becomes the second hold. FIG. 221(e) shows a display example at timing t36. FIG. 221(f) shows a display example from timing t44 to timing t45 when this variable display ends. In this embodiment, the smoke image is displayed at a position overlapping the display area of the reserved image. In addition, while the smoke image is displayed, only the normal pending image can be displayed, and the previously displayed pending image (red pending image) indicating high expectations is replaced by the normal pending image (white pending image). image). Furthermore, while the smoke image is being displayed, an effect display that changes the normal pending image to another pending image (for example, a green pending image) indicating a high degree of expectation is not performed.
The display of the smoke image continues until the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the hold that existed at the start of the display of the smoke image is completed. Further, while the smoke image is being displayed, only the normal pending image is displayed.
In addition, in this production example, for the second hold, an example was shown in which the hold image indicating high expectations (red hold image) is replaced with a normal hold image (white hold image). If there is a hold indicating that the expectation level is high among other holds, it is replaced with a normal hold image in the same way as the second hold.

In this way, if a player does not perform an appropriate operation, a situation will occur in which the level of expectation regarding the special result (the level of expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot, etc.) is not shown to the player. The state is maintained for a predetermined period of time.

FIG. 219(d) shows an example of a performance when a continuous press operation or a long press operation on the attack button 3710 is not detected during the valid operation period (timing t18 to timing t22).
In this production example as well, at timing t16, a display in which a mine field consisting of bomb characters appears from the upper side of the display area and moves downward is started. Next, at timing t18, the operational validity period of attack button 3710 starts.
FIG. 222(a) shows a display example at timing t19. The display content at this time is the same as the display content in the display example shown with reference to FIG. 220(a).

In this production example, as in the other production examples, a minefield is displayed approaching the own tank. FIG. 222(b) shows a display example from timing t22 to timing t23 when the valid operation period has ended. Next, at timing t23, the minefield and the own tank come into contact and the minefield explodes, and an explosion image is displayed at the bottom of the display area in place of the minefield image. The display priority of the explosion image is set higher than that of the own tank image and the reserved image, and the own tank image becomes difficult to see, and the reserved image becomes invisible. FIG. 222(c) shows a display example at timing t24.

At timing t34, the variable display of decorative symbols is finished. FIG. 222(d) shows a display example from timing t34 to timing t35. The display priority of the explosive image is set higher than that of the decorative pattern, and the explosive image makes it difficult to visually recognize the stationary display mode of the decorative pattern. Furthermore, the retained images also continue to be invisible. Next, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started from timing t35. FIG. 222(e) shows a display example at timing t36. FIG. 222(f) shows a display example during a period from timing t44 to timing t45 when this variable display ends. In this embodiment, the explosion image is displayed at a position overlapping with the display area of the reserved image and the decorative pattern. The explosion image has a higher display priority than the reserved image and the decorative pattern, and the retained image and the decorative pattern are displayed hidden by the explosive image. Therefore, the reserved image becomes invisible and the decorative pattern also becomes difficult to see.
The display of the explosion image is continued until the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the hold that existed at the start of the display of the explosion image is completed. Further, as described above, while the explosion image is displayed, the reserved image becomes invisible and the decorative pattern becomes difficult to see.

In this way, if the player does not perform an appropriate operation, the player is not shown the number of pending tickets in addition to the level of expectation regarding the special result (the level of expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot, etc.) occurs and this state is maintained for a predetermined period of time.

In this way, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 219 etc., even after the fluctuating display in which the smoke image or explosion image is displayed ends and the next fluctuating display starts, the smoke image or the explosion image is not displayed. The system is configured to continue to change the visual recognition mode of the reserved images and decorative patterns according to the player's operation mode.

In this way, when a specific condition is met (when the operation on the operation means (attack button 3710) is appropriate), a special game-related display (smoke image) is displayed across multiple fluctuating displays. In addition to displaying a specific effect (changed pending image) that suggests the level of expectation regarding the special result (level of expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot, etc.) (when the operation on the operating means was inappropriate), special game-related displays are displayed across multiple fluctuating displays, and a specific effect indicating the level of expectation regarding the special result is displayed. By not doing so, it is possible to further increase the player's desire to operate the operating means. Furthermore, by giving penalties in stages according to the manner in which the operating means is operated, it is possible to increase the motivation to perform more appropriate operations.

During the valid operation period, if repeated hits are detected after a long press on the attack button 3710 is detected, the same effect as the example shown with reference to FIG. 219(b) will be performed from the timing when the repeated hits are detected. A performance is held. In order to perform such processing, the timing at which the display corresponding to the long press is executed is not when the long press is detected, but at the end of the valid operation period.
With such a configuration, even if the user makes a mistake in operating the operating means, if the operator quickly performs the correct operation, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the display indicating the level of expectation cannot be visually recognized, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

An example of a production in which changes in the display mode of a pending image is restricted or the pending image is made invisible until the variable display corresponding to the pending image that existed at the timing when the display of a smoke image or an explosion image started is finished. However, the change in the display mode of the held image is restricted until the variable display is performed the number of times corresponding to the maximum number of items that can be held (in this embodiment, the maximum number of items that can be held at the first starting port 2002 is 4). Alternatively, the held image may be made invisible.
In this way, by predetermining the number of variable displays that limit pending changes and the number of variable displays that make a pending image invisible, the display control of smoke images and explosion images on the peripheral control board 1510 is simplified. can do.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 219 etc., there are cases in which a production pattern that requires repeated hits as an operation instruction for the attack button 3710 is executed, and a production pattern that requires a long press is executed. It may be configured as follows. In this case, the line "Lieutenant! Hit the attack button repeatedly to attack those guys!" is displayed as the line for "Sergeant Might" in a production pattern that requires repeated hits. In a production pattern that requires a long press, it is preferable to configure the screen so that the line "Lieutenant! Press and hold the attack button to attack them!" is displayed.
If an appropriate operation is performed, the same display as the display examples shown in FIGS. 220(b) to 220(f) may be performed.
On the other hand, if the player presses the button repeatedly even though the instruction to press repeatedly is given, or if the player presses the button repeatedly even though the instruction is given to press and hold repeatedly, It is preferable to display the same display as the display example shown in 221(f).
Furthermore, if neither repeated hits nor long presses are performed, the same display as the display examples shown in FIGS. 222(b) to 222(f) may be performed.
With such a configuration, it is necessary to carefully check the contents of the operation instructions, increasing the sense of tension in the operation, and improving the player's motivation and aggressiveness in operating the operation means.

With reference to FIG. 221, an example of presentation in which a reserved image is displayed in front of a smoke image is shown, but an embodiment may be modified such that a smoke image is displayed in front of a retained image. FIG. 219(e) is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 223 shows a display example in this embodiment.

Also in this production example, at timing t23, the minefield and the own tank come into contact and the minefield explodes, and a smoke image is displayed at the bottom of the display area instead of the minefield image. The display priority is higher than that of reserved images and decorative designs. FIG. 223(a) is a display example at timing t24. As shown in the figure, the held image is hidden by the smoke image and is no longer visible.

At timing t34, the variable display of decorative symbols is finished. FIG. 223(b) shows a display example from timing t34 to timing t35. Next, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started from timing t35. FIG. 223(c) shows a display example at timing t36. FIG. 223(d) shows a display example during a period from timing t44 to timing t45 when this variable display ends. In this embodiment, the smoke image is displayed in a position overlapping the display area of the held image, so that the held image is not visible. Also, part of the decorative pattern that is changing becomes invisible. On the other hand, the visual recognition mode of the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed is not obstructed.

In each production example shown in FIG. 220, FIG. 221, FIG. 222, and FIG. 223, the variable display of smoke images and explosion images corresponding to all the reservations that existed at the start of display of the smoke images and explosion images ends. However, these displays may be ended at a predetermined timing before the fluctuating displays corresponding to all the holds are ended. For example, at the timing (timing t35) when the variable display in which the smoke image or explosion image was displayed ends and a new variable display starts (timing t35), the display of the smoke image or the explosion image ends, and the pending image becomes visible. You can also use it as Note that it is preferable that the held images displayed at this time be only normal held images, and that held images with high expectations (for example, red held images) are not displayed. Note that the period for displaying only normal held images is not limited to the remaining number of fluctuations, but may also be set as a condition that a predetermined period of time (for example, 120 seconds) has elapsed since the display of the smoke image or explosion image ended. .
In this way, while special game-related displays (display of smoke images and explosion images) are terminated in a short period of time, specific effects (pre-reading effects) are prohibited for a predetermined period of time, and only normal suspended images are displayed for a predetermined period of time. By making it so that the player is on hold, the player can only see the normal hold image, and cannot see the highly anticipated hold image, but can know the number of holds. . Furthermore, it is possible to prevent other players from feeling embarrassed if the smoke image or explosion image is displayed for a long period of time and the player finds out that he or she was unable to operate the operating means properly.

In addition, by operating when a special game-related display such as a smoke image or an explosion image is displayed, it is possible to end the special game-related display early before the display end period arrives. A new operating means may be provided in the gaming machine. Regarding this operation means, it may be possible to end the display quickly with a simple operation, but it is better to require a special operation such as multiple operations to end the display. This is preferable in terms of countermeasures against erroneous operations because the display ends early as a result of operations with a clear intention. Furthermore, even if the special game-related display such as a smoke image or an explosion image is terminated by operating this operating means, the execution of the look-ahead effect will be continued for a predetermined period in a game that is proceeded after the special operation of the operating means is performed. should be configured so that it is prohibited. Further, it is preferable to configure so that only normal pending images are displayed during this predetermined period.

When a long press is performed, the mode shown in FIGS. 219(d) and 222 is displayed (an explosion image is displayed, the pending image becomes invisible, and the decorative pattern becomes difficult to see), and the display is displayed in the manner shown in FIGS. 219(d) and 222. Even if the display shown in Figures 219(c) and 221 (the smoke image is displayed and the held image is normally held) is performed when an operation that does not result in a long press or when there is no operation is performed, good.
In this case, for a player who dares to perform an operation that differs from the operation instructions, an explosion image will be displayed, the pending image will become invisible, and the decorative pattern will also become difficult to see, resulting in a game situation where the player cannot perform the operation. You will be given a stiffer penalty than if you had not.
On the other hand, if an operation that does not correspond to repeated hits or long presses is performed, or if there is no operation, a smoke image is displayed and only the normal pending image is displayed, but the number of pending items can be recognized. becomes. This is because if a player is in a situation where he or she cannot perform an operation (for example, purchasing a drink from a clerk at a game store), it would be harsh to be given a large penalty for this.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 219, the display content is limited based on the operation mode during one valid operation period (timing t18 to timing t22), but with reference to FIG. The effect shown is executed multiple times, and if the player performs an operation that does not correspond to repeated hits or long presses during the operation validity period, or if the player does not perform an operation multiple times (two or more times and a predetermined number of times). If this occurs (predetermined number of times), restrictions may be placed on the display content.
In this case, in the production until the predetermined number of times, regardless of the operation content, the smoke image or explosion image is not displayed, but it is possible to display a specific pending image that shows that the expectation level is high, and after the predetermined number of times, In this effect, a smoke image may be displayed and only a normal pending image may be displayed as a pending image, or an explosion image may be displayed to make the pending image invisible.

Alternatively, if the player performs an operation that does not correspond to repeated hits or long presses, or if the player does not perform an operation multiple times (two or more times and a predetermined number of times), the next time the decoration will be displayed. A special effect may be executed in the variation of symbols so that only the normal pending image is displayed as the pending image, or the pending image may be made invisible.
Examples of special performances include the production examples shown with reference to FIGS. 221(a) to 221(f), the production examples shown with reference to FIGS. 222(a) to 222(f), and the production examples shown with reference to FIGS. 222(a) to 222(f). By modifying the production examples shown with reference to a) to FIG. 223(d), the player intervenes without generating an operation valid period in these production examples (and not displaying a simulated operation part image). It may also be configured such that a smoke image or an explosion image is automatically displayed by executing an effect that prevents the smoke image or explosion image from being displayed.
In addition, the special effect may be performed on the next variable display after the predetermined number of variable displays for which an appropriate operation was not performed, or it may be performed randomly from the variable display for which the appropriate operation was not performed for the predetermined number of times. It may be executed in a variable display after a predetermined number of rotations (for example, after 2 to 10 rotations). Alternatively, the process may start after a randomly selected period has elapsed (for example, after 10 seconds to 120 seconds have elapsed) from the timing at which the appropriate operation was not performed for the predetermined number of times.

With such a configuration, a penalty is given on the condition that an inappropriate operation is performed multiple times, so it is possible to prevent a situation in which a penalty is suddenly given to a player.
In addition, since a performance similar to a performance that could be operated is automatically executed in a state where the operation is disabled, it is possible to limit the display that suggests the level of expectation in a natural manner as a performance.
Note that if the player continues to ignore the operation instructions, the pending display indicating that the level of expectation is high will not be displayed, so the player can concentrate only on the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol that is currently fluctuating. In other words, it can be said that the player can change the performance mode to suit his/her preference.

In this embodiment, for the hold that existed at the timing when the operation was not performed properly, the execution of a specific effect (display of a highly anticipated hold image based on the read-ahead of the hold) is restricted, and the operation is Regarding the suspension that occurred after the timing when the performance was not performed properly, the execution of the specific performance is not restricted. For example, it may be possible to limit the execution of a specific effect by a predetermined number of fluctuations (number of pending items), but in this case, if you make an inappropriate operation on the gaming machine you were playing and leave the store, In this case, it becomes possible for a player playing a game with the game machine to perform a nuisance act in which the player starts playing the game with the performance execution restricted. Therefore, by not restricting the execution of a specific performance (pre-reading performance) for holds that occur after the timing when the operation was not performed properly, it is possible to prevent acts that are a nuisance to other players. You can do it like this.

Instead of continuously displaying the smoke image, a state in which the smoke image is displayed and a state in which it is not displayed may be repeated. For example, the state in which the smoke image is displayed and the state in which it is not displayed may be switched every 0.5 seconds.
With such a configuration, it is possible to make particular effects (pre-read effects such as a bomb character image, a pending image, etc.) that may be displayed together with a special game related display (smoke image) stand out.

Regarding the explosion image and the smoke image shown with reference to FIG. 223, a state in which the explosion image or smoke image is displayed and a state in which it is not displayed may be repeated. For example, the display may switch between displaying and not displaying the explosion image every 0.5 seconds. Note that if the explosion image or the smoke image shown with reference to FIG. 223 is hidden, the held image hidden in the explosion image or smoke image becomes visible, but the held image displayed at this time It is best to use only normal held images (white held images).
With such a configuration, it becomes impossible to recognize the degree of expectation regarding reservations, and it becomes difficult to recognize the number of reservations, making it possible to inflict an appropriate penalty on the player.

In this embodiment, as described above, the display position of the smoke image differs depending on the timing of continuous hit detection. For example, if the repeated hits are detected early, the smoke image will be displayed relatively above the display area, and if the repeated hits are detected late, the smoke image will be displayed relatively below the display area. Ru. That is, the slower the detection of repeated presses, the closer the smoke image is displayed to the display position of the smoke image displayed when a long press is detected. Further, the smoke image displayed by the repeated tap operation and the smoke image displayed by the long press operation are the same image. For this reason, if the player performs repeated hits immediately before the expiration of the valid operation period, it will be difficult to distinguish on the display from a case where the player mistakenly performs a long-press operation. As a result, even if other players see the situation where the smoke image is being displayed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the player has performed the operation properly or incorrectly. Even if a player makes a mistake in the operation mode, it is possible to prevent other players from noticing and feeling embarrassed.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 221, it has been shown that all of the relevant holds to the fourth hold are displayed as normal holds, but the first hold to the fourth hold are displayed only as normal hold images. However, regarding the hold, it may be possible to continue displaying the hold image in a manner that indicates that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than that of a normal hold. For example, when the hold is a hold indicating that the level of expectation is high, even if the display of the smoke image is started, it is preferable that the display mode of the hold is not changed. Furthermore, while displaying the smoke image, it may be possible to change the hold from a normal hold image to a hold image indicating a higher degree of expectation (for example, a red hold image).

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 222 and 223, the first to fourth holds may be hidden by the smoke image or the explosion image, and the hold may be configured not to be hidden. In addition, if the hold is a hold image that indicates high expectations, even if a smoke image or an explosion image starts to be displayed, the display mode of the hold will be changed to a normal hold image. It is a good idea to avoid this. Furthermore, while a smoke image or an explosion image is being displayed, it may be possible to change the hold from a normal hold image to a hold image indicating a higher degree of expectation (for example, a red hold image).

With this configuration, although the expectation level for the first to fourth holds is not shown to the player, the expectation level for the fluctuating result of the currently fluctuating decorative pattern can be shown to the player depending on the display mode of the hold. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the penalty given to the player from becoming excessive.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 220 to 223, instead of the smoke image and the explosion image, a dialogue window of "Colonel Dyna" may be displayed at the display position of the smoke image and the explosion image. In addition, regarding the held image at this time, as described above, it is recommended that only the normal held image be displayed, or that the visibility of the held image be restricted by a dialogue window that is displayed instead of the smoke image or explosion image. . Furthermore, a character string such as ``Check the operation details and operate carefully!'' may be displayed in the dialogue window. Alternatively, it may display the message ``Nice success in successive hits!'' when the consecutive hits were performed properly, or display the message ``You should have hit consecutively!'' when the consecutive hits were not performed properly. Alternatively, a character string such as "Don't confuse repeated presses with long presses!" may be displayed to indicate that there are multiple operation modes.
In this way, by displaying a message regarding the operation of the operating means, a player who is not familiar with the operating method of the operating means can learn how to operate the operating means after the expiration of the operation validity period, so that the next From then on, you will be able to use the operating means effectively.

Although we have shown an example in which a pending image indicating a high level of expectation is displayed instead of a normal pending image due to pre-reading, the expectation level for a given pending image can be changed not only by the pending image but also by the display mode of other effect displays. It may also be possible to suggest that the value is high.

Although the display mode of the pending image indicates the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot, the display mode of the pending image may indicate the degree of expectation that other events will occur. For example, it may be possible to indicate the degree of expectation of a probability-variable jackpot, or the degree of expectation of a loss with time savings.

With reference to FIGS. 137 to 223, an embodiment has been described in which the performance using the operation section is further improved in interest. Embodiments applicable to these embodiments will be described below.

Although an example is shown in which the operating section is provided at the bottom of the door frame, other operating sections may be employed. For example, a non-contact infrared sensor is installed on the game board, the glass plate is equally divided into multiple areas, for example, four areas in the upper right, lower right, lower left, and upper left, and a hand is applied to each of these areas. The operation may be accepted when the user approaches the user. With this configuration, the player will be able to move his/her hand significantly upwards, giving him/her the feeling of being more involved in the game. In this regard, sensors are installed on the movable parts of the movable bodies provided on the frame (parts imitating rabbit ears, etc.) to make it possible to detect movement by the player, and to accept operational input from the player. It may be held in a movable part. In this case, the feeling of participating in the game will be further enhanced.

In the various operation instructions in each of the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 137 to 223, certain operations that do not follow the operation instructions (for example, operating in a different operation mode than the instructed mode, operating a different operation part than the instructed operation section) It may be configured such that a special display is displayed by operating the section. For example, each embodiment may be modified so that an image that would normally be displayed when an operation is performed in accordance with the operation instructions is displayed when a predetermined operation is performed that does not follow the operation instructions. .

On the other hand, there are some players, such as tired players and elderly players, who may not like operation inputs that require large body movements. Therefore, one or more sensors are provided in a predetermined area in the game area, and the various operation parts described above are operated based on the sensor detecting the game ball launched into the game area by the player. It can be used as a substitute for tata. In this case, the player can use only his right hand to operate the operating unit, so even a tired or elderly player can operate the control unit while firing the game ball. It becomes possible to perform input. Note that it is also possible to accept both operations on the operation unit and input from a sensor provided in a predetermined area, and when an operation input is made to either one, a performance display corresponding to the operation input is displayed. good. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the player or the clerk at the game parlor can select whether to accept the operation input through the operation unit or a sensor provided in a predetermined area. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the operation input is performed only by the game balls being fired. As the predetermined area, a dedicated performance sensor that can detect the passage or approach of game balls may be provided on the board, or an existing winning opening (for example, general winning opening, first starting opening, gate An operation input may be accepted based on a game ball winning a prize (detected by a sensor) in a big prize opening, etc.). Note that the function as a sensor may be added to an existing predetermined member instead of a predetermined area. For example, if a sensor is installed at the backflow prevention member at the top of the rail or at the stop at the upper right corner of the game board, it is possible to detect when a game ball fired through a player's operation passes or when a game ball collides with the player. It may also be configured to accept operation input. In addition, in order to correspond to the direction input of the lever, the direction input may be performed in a pseudo manner using two or more sensors provided at different positions. Further, the operation time may be calculated in a pseudo manner according to the number of detected objects per unit time. In this way, the player may adjust the firing strength of the game ball so that a predetermined sensor or the like detects the game ball, thereby accepting the operation input. This makes it possible to further diversify the effects by reducing the number of operation units and by making it possible to display additional effects based on the reception of operations on the operation units.

With reference to FIGS. 144 to 148, an embodiment has been shown in which a predetermined image can be hidden by a shield image. However, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. It may also be configured such that simulated images simulating each part are displayed and these can be hidden by a shield image. Further, the configuration may be such that operation instruction displays are displayed for each of the plurality of operation units, and these can be hidden by a shield image. Further, the configuration may be such that operation corresponding displays are displayed in response to operations on a plurality of operation units, and these can be hidden by a shield image. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for a player who has little interest in operating the operation sections to visually recognize the displays related to the plurality of operation sections.
The embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 149 to 223 may also be configured to be capable of displaying a plurality of operation units and displaying a shield image.
Note that the display of the shield image may be configured to be performed by operating a predetermined operation unit (defense button 3740, etc.).

137 to 223, "shield bullet reach", "special machine gun reach", "silent machine gun reach", "bomb character reach", "sudden tank effect", "full power breakthrough reach", "AI tank reach" '', etc., but it is possible to adopt a predetermined technical idea for one effect as a technical idea for another effect. Further, it is possible to employ a plurality of technical ideas in a plurality of performances as technical ideas in one production.

For example, the display of the shield image related to "shield bullet reach" can be changed to "special machine gun reach", "silent machine gun reach", "bomb character reach", "sudden tank effect", "full power breakthrough reach", "AI tank reach" It may be applied to each performance. At this time, predetermined images displayed in each production (enemy tank image, bomb character image, simulated image imitating a predetermined button, image of an exploding shell, image of an exploding bullet, smoke image, white flag image, etc.) (images used for each production), it is a good idea to indicate the level of expectation using a method related to "shield bullet reach." Further, the degree of expectation shown in this manner may be configured to be hidden by a shield image.
In addition, the look-ahead mode related to the "Ikinari Tank Effect", the execution mode related to the look-ahead effect, and their technical philosophy are explained as "Shield Bullet Reach", "Special Machine Gun Reach", "Silent Machine Gun Reach", "Bomb Character Reach", "Full Power "Breakthrough Reach" and "AI Tank Reach" will be applied to "Shield Bullet Reach", "Special Machine Gun Reach", "Silent Machine Gun Reach", "Bomb Character Reach", and "Full Power Breakthrough" in multiple variable displays. "Reach" and "AI Tank Reach" may be executed.
For example, in contrast to the production mode using a shield image related to "shield bullet reach" and the smoke image related to "full power breakthrough reach", the production mode and technique using an image of a destroyed enemy tank in "sudden tank production" You may apply ideas.
Furthermore, the shield image and the smoke image may be configured to be displayed multiple times by the player, or the shield image and the smoke image may be displayed across the variable display. In this case, the image that suggests the level of expectation (in the case of "Ikinari Tank Production", the image of the destroyed enemy tank) corresponding to the variable display that is subject to pre-reading is hidden by the shield image or smoke image. It is recommended to configure it as follows.
Furthermore, for example, in "Special Machine Gun Reach" and "Silent Machine Gun Reach", images of shells fired from a turret, bullets fired from a machine gun, and exploding shells and bullets may be displayed across the variable display. .
For example, in "Bomb Character Reach", the collision scene between the bomb character and the own tank can occur not only during the fluctuation of the decorative pattern but also immediately before the fluctuation of the decorative pattern stops, and the display of the decorative pattern stopped. It may be configured such that there are cases in which the own tank explodes (a part of the own tank is destroyed) across the area, and cases in which the own tank straddles the stop display of the decorative pattern without exploding. In addition, immediately before the fluctuation of the fluctuation display that is the target of pre-reading stops, it is preferable to perform an effect of displaying a large bomb character as shown with reference to FIGS. 164, 169, 170, and the like.
Furthermore, in the "full power breakthrough reach", it may be configured such that the enemy unit may be attacked by shells multiple times during one fluctuating display of the decorative pattern. Further, the smoke image may be displayed over the variable display of decorative patterns. After performing the effect display based on the look-ahead multiple times in this way, it is preferable to display a group of enemy tanks appearing at the last timing of the variable display that was the target of the look-ahead.
Furthermore, in the case of "AI Tank Reach", a plurality of variable displays may be displayed based on pre-reading. In this case, it may be configured such that encounters with enemy tanks occur once to multiple times in each variable display. At least, an image of an encounter with an enemy tank occurring and a destroyed cannonball or bullet may be displayed so as to straddle the variable display of the decorative pattern immediately before the decorative pattern stops being displayed. Furthermore, when the left lever 3720, which normally does not give operation instructions, is operated, the tank is configured to fall onto a cliff on the left side of the road and a smoke image is displayed on the screen. Good too. In this case, the display of the smoke image may be performed over a plurality of times of variable display of the decorative pattern until the variable display of the decorative pattern that is the target of the pre-read effect display stops.
In addition, the mission button cannot be pressed for each of the following effects: "Shield Bullet Reach", "Special Machine Gun Reach", "Silent Machine Gun Reach", "Bomb Character Reach", "Sudden Tank Effect", "Full Breakthrough Reach", and "AI Tank Reach" 3700, the attack button 3710, the left lever 3720, the defense button 3740, etc. are shown to be operable, but in each production example, for some or all of the operation parts, the validity period is displayed by changing the decorative pattern. In the case where a pre-read effect is performed, it may be configured to be able to be executed across the variable display of a plurality of decorative symbols. Further, it is preferable that the number of valid operations is configured to be able to be performed multiple times during the variable display of one decorative pattern. Further, the display corresponding to the reception of the operation on the operation unit may also be configured to be displayed multiple times. Further, it is preferable that a display corresponding to such operation acceptance be displayed across the variable display of decorative symbols.
With such a configuration, some sort of reaction on the display occurs in response to the player's operation on the operation unit, making it possible to satisfy the player. Furthermore, by straddling the variable display and executing the effect display based on the operation without being interrupted by the stop display of the variable display, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the executed effect.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that are capable of executing a display effect that switches effect images depending on the gaming situation (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2003-340037).
However, if the display effect for switching the effect image is something that the player feels uncomfortable with, there is a risk that the player will lose interest in the game, and a more appropriate display method is required for the display effect for changing the effect image. It was the actual situation. Furthermore, it is also possible to improve the interest by implementing a more appropriate display method.
Therefore, in the embodiments shown below, a gaming machine will be described in which the player is less likely to feel uncomfortable with the display performance that changes the performance image, and is capable of suppressing a decrease in interest and improving the player's interest.

Below, an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 123 to 125, FIGS. 137 to 148, etc. will be described with reference to FIGS. 224 to 236, etc. FIGS. 224 to 228 show examples of images displayed in this embodiment (or modified example). FIG. 229 shows the display priorities of these images. 230 and 233 show time charts in this embodiment. 231, 232, and 234 to 236 show display examples in this embodiment.
In this embodiment, a special reach background image is displayed in place of the normal background image in the special reach effects such as "giant tank reach" and "enemy tank destruction reach".

224 to 226 show examples of images displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 in this embodiment. Specifically, background images (normal background image A, normal background image B, special reach background image A, special reach background image B, normal background image C displayed while hitting right), images of various decorative patterns, It shows images of tanks, enemy tanks, etc., a band-like look-ahead performance image, the relevant pending image, the first to fourth pending images, a character image for revival performance, a fourth symbol, a pending number display image, and an error notification image.
Note that data of various images and moving images in this embodiment and its modified examples are stored in advance in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b.
Note that for images other than the background image as well, as shown in FIGS. 225 and 226, horizontally long rectangles are shown in the drawings, and the horizontally long rectangles in this case indicate display areas. This makes it possible to clearly indicate the size and position of an image other than the background image when it is displayed in the display area. Note that images displayed in the display area may be explained in figures other than FIGS. 225 and 226, but the same applies in this case.

FIG. 224(a) shows the normal background image A. The normal background image A is an image showing a plurality of tanks gathered near a destroyed building.
FIG. 224(b) shows the normal background image B. The normal background image B is an image showing a state in which a tank is stopped in a hangar.
The normal background image A and the normal background image B are images displayed when the gaming state is the normal state.

FIG. 224(c) shows a special reach background image A that is displayed when a "giant tank reach" effect, which is a special reach effect, is executed. The special reach background image A is an image showing the sky, a desert, and an unpaved road.
FIG. 224(d) shows a special reach background image B that is displayed when a special reach effect, ``enemy tank destruction reach'' effect, is executed. The special reach background image B is an image showing the sky, grassland, and road.

FIG. 224(e) shows a normal background image C displayed in a variable probability state or a time saving state that is advantageous to the player, which may be shifted to after the end of the jackpot game state. The normal background image C is an image that shows the player to hit the ball to the right.

Note that the size (number of pixels) of the background image is the same as the size of the display area. Also, the background image is opaque. Therefore, some image is not displayed behind the background image and is not visually recognized by the player.

FIG. 225 shows an example of decorative patterns that can be displayed on the pachinko machine 1. Each decorative pattern consists of a left decorative pattern, a middle decorative pattern, and a right decorative pattern. These are switched and displayed as appropriate depending on the progress of the performance and the game situation.

FIG. 225(a) shows a normal decorative pattern. This figure shows an example of a normal decorative pattern that is displayed in a stopped state, but each normal decorative pattern may be displayed by scrolling in a predetermined direction (for example, downward) or temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined position. It is also possible.
The display mode of the normal decorative pattern is determined according to the special lottery result, and if the special lottery result is a jackpot, it will be stopped and displayed in a square pattern (for example, "222"), and if the special lottery result is not a jackpot, it will be displayed in a stopped state. It is stopped and displayed in a manner that is not a grid (for example, "352"). FIG. 225(a) shows, as an example, a state in which the normal decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at "352".
A normal decorative pattern consists of a vertically long rectangular background area and numbers and characters placed in front of the background area. There is a one-to-one correspondence between numbers and characters.

FIG. 225(b) shows a special reach decorative pattern that is displayed when a special reach effect, such as a ``giant tank reach'' effect or an ``enemy tank destruction reach'' effect, is executed.
The special reach decorative pattern is displayed in a smaller size than the normal decorative pattern near the center of the display area. This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize the performance suggesting the special lottery result that is executed during the execution of the "Giant Tank Reach" performance or the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" performance.
FIG. 225(c) is a modification of the special reach decorative pattern. In this way, a special reach decorative pattern in which the numbers are displayed in a more emphasized manner may be adopted.
Note that FIGS. 225(b) and 225(c) show a state in which the special ready-to-reach decorative pattern is temporarily stopped.
In addition, during the reach effect, only the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern may be displayed, and the middle decorative pattern may not be displayed.

FIG. 225(d) shows a decorative pattern displayed while hitting right. The right-hitting decorative symbol is a decorative symbol that is displayed in a game state where the player is required to hit right, such as a variable probability state or a time-saving state. FIG. 225(d) shows a state in which the decorative symbol during right-handed play is stopped and displayed at "352".

As shown with reference to FIG. 225, normal decorative patterns, special reach decorative patterns, and right-hitting medium decorative patterns can be distinguished by the size and design of the background area, the presence or absence of characters, the size of numbers, etc. It is. This makes it easier to understand the production status and game status by visually recognizing the decorative patterns.

Figure 226(a) shows an image of your own tank, an image of an enemy tank, a dialogue image of "Sergeant Mite", a dialogue image of "Colonel Dyna", and a mission button 3700 that are displayed when the "Giant Tank Reach" effect is executed. A simulated image is shown. The special lottery result is suggested depending on the display mode of these images.
Figure 226(b) shows the image of your own tank, the image of the enemy tank, the dialogue image of "Sergeant Mite", the dialogue image of "Colonel Dyna", and the attack button that are displayed when the "enemy tank destruction reach" effect is executed. 3710 is shown. The special lottery result is suggested depending on the display mode of these images.
Note that specific aspects of suggesting the special lottery result will be described later with reference to FIG. 233 and the like.

FIG. 226(d) shows a pending image. At the bottom of the display area, from the left, the relevant pending display area, a first pending display area, a second pending display area, a third pending display area, and a fourth pending display area are set. The shape of the pending image and the pending image is a perfect circle, and the color is basically white. Further, the diameter of the circle in the retained image is larger than that of the retained image.
In the figure, an example is shown in which the pending image is displayed in the pending display area, and the pending images are displayed in the first to fourth pending display areas.
When a game ball wins for the first starting port 2002, the pending image or the pending image is displayed in the pending display area, the first pending display area to the fourth pending display area. For example, when the pending image is displayed in the pending display area and the held images are displayed in the first pending display area and the second pending display area (i.e., there are two pending items), the first starting port 2002 is When a game ball wins, a pending image is displayed in the third pending display area.

Note that, as shown with reference to FIGS. 123 to 125, based on the pre-reading of the pending image, a specific pending image with a different display format (color and shape) from the normal pending image or pending image (white and circular) is displayed. Alternatively, a specific pending image may be displayed, and depending on the display mode, it may be shown that there is a high expectation that the special lottery result corresponding to the pending will be a jackpot.

For example, instead of the normal white pending image, a predetermined color (for example, red) pending image may be displayed to indicate that there is a high expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a jackpot. good.
More specifically, for example, the expectation of a jackpot may increase in the order of white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow colors. Alternatively, the display probability may be lowered in this order. That is, the lower the expectation level of a color, the higher the probability that it will appear, and the higher the expectation level, the lower the probability that it will appear. Note that the expectation level for rainbow colors may be set to 100%. Regarding the degree of expectation, it is generally preferable that the higher the degree of expectation, the lower the probability of appearance.

Strictly speaking, a single color called gold does not exist, but by combining pixels that emit yellow, ocher, and white in a predetermined display area in a predetermined manner as a display process, players can create a metallic luster. It is possible to realize a display mode in which the color is recognized as gold, which is a rich color.

Strictly speaking, there is no single rainbow color, but as a display process, within a predetermined display area (for example, a predetermined character image, etc.), blue, light blue, green, yellow, red, pink, blue, light blue, etc. , green, and so on in the order of stripes, it is possible to realize a display mode that the player recognizes as a rainbow color. Note that within this predetermined display area, each region emitting light in a stripe pattern may be moved in a fixed direction (for example, a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the stripes are formed).

Note that when displaying rainbow colors, it is desirable that areas in which six colors forming the rainbow colors are displayed are visible at the same time within a predetermined display area. Note that depending on the size of the predetermined display area, some of the six colors that make up the rainbow may not be displayed; in this case, more than half of the six colors may not be displayed. A rainbow of colors is displayed to the player by displaying colors (i.e., four or more colors) and moving the parts painted in each color in a certain direction so that each color is displayed sequentially. can be recognized as such.
As for the relationship between the expectation level and the display probability (ratio to the number of fluctuating display times), for example, the probability that the relevant pending image or pending image displayed at the time of starting winning is the white pending image or pending image, and the rainbow colored pending image or pending image is the highest probability. The configuration may be such that the probability that the image is the reserved image or the retained image is the lowest.
Further, it is preferable to configure such that the last displayed pending image at the end timing of the variation of the decorative pattern has the highest probability of being a white pending image and the lowest probability of being a rainbow colored pending image.

In addition, the green, red, or gold pending image or pending image may be displayed at the time of starting winning, or the holding image or pending image in white at the starting winning may be displayed until the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. The pending image may be changed to green, red, or gold at a predetermined timing.

Note that such a change at a predetermined timing from a presentation mode indicating a predetermined level of expectation to a mode of presentation indicating a higher level of expectation is sometimes referred to as "promotion."
On the other hand, changing the presentation mode indicating a predetermined level of expectation to a mode indicating a lower level of expectation at a predetermined timing is sometimes referred to as "demotion."

In addition, the probability of executing ``promotion'' or ``demotion'' should be set to a low probability (for example, the probability of ``promotion'' or ``demotion'' being executed when the denominator is the case where the expectation level is suggested by a predetermined color is set as the sum) (approximately 5 to 10%) is desirable. This makes it possible to increase or lower the displayed expectation level while maintaining a rough correspondence between the expectation level and the color. Furthermore, promotion is a positive event for players, but demotion is an unfavorable event for players, so in order to prevent a decline in interest, promotions are allowed to be carried out, but demotions are not allowed to be carried out. Good too.

Note that there are cases in which a player is promoted and cases in which they are not promoted by performing a predetermined performance, and a performance that does not result in promotion is sometimes referred to as a "gase." Furthermore, a situation in which a highly anticipated performance is executed but the variable display results in a failure is sometimes referred to as a "false."

We have shown examples in which the terms "promotion" and "demotion" are used to indicate changes in the expected level of jackpots, but when indicating the gaming benefits given to the player, it is important to note that the terms "promotion" and "demotion" are used to indicate changes in the expected level of jackpots. A change in the amount of profit or an increase in the amount of profit given to the player is sometimes referred to as "promotion." Conversely, when indicating the gaming benefits that will be given to the player, the term "promotion" refers to a change in the gaming profit to something disadvantageous to the player or a decrease in the amount of profit given to the player. ” is sometimes called. For example, when a ready-to-reach state formed by a "normal symbol" changes to a ready-to-reach state formed by a "probable variable symbol", it may be called "promotion". In addition, as a performance at the start of a jackpot game, the number of rounds (the number of balls put out per round is fixed) is announced as 4 rounds, and when the 4th round In a predetermined round before the game, an effect may be executed to notify that the jackpot game will continue up to the 8th round. In this case, the number of rounds is said to have been "promoted."

Although the pending image and pending image have been taken as an example, the degree of expectation can be suggested by the color of the image in the same manner as the pending image and pending image for images used for other effects.

In addition, we showed that the expectation of jackpot increases in the order of white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow colors in the reserved image, but in other presentation images, all of these colors Instead of adopting these colors, some of these colors may be used. Incidentally, even in this case, it is basically preferable that the order of expectation levels and the order of appearance probabilities remain unchanged. For example, when three colors, white, red, and gold, are adopted as the colors of a predetermined effect image, the expectation level is higher for a red effect image than for a white effect image, but the appearance probability is lower; It is preferable that the expectation level is higher for the golden effect image than for the effect image, but the appearance probability is lower.
In addition, when the three colors of blue, green, and red are adopted as the colors of other effect images, the expectation level is higher for the green effect image than the blue effect image, but the appearance probability is lower; It is preferable that the red effect image has a higher expectation level than the effect image, but the appearance probability is lower.
In this way, even if the expectation level is suggested using a predetermined color in a different performance, the relationship between the order of the colors, the expectation level, and the probability of appearance does not change, so the player can roughly estimate the level of expectation. can be recognized.

Although images (such as the pending image) have been taken as an example, the degree of expectation can also be suggested by the color of the light emitted from the light emitting member in the case of a decorative member equipped with a light emitting member, similarly to the pending image. For example, a plurality of light emitting members such as LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light may be mounted on a decorative member that is visible to the player, and each light emitting member may emit light in a predetermined color. Note that for the golden color, it is preferable to cause a plurality of light-emitting members to emit light in yellow, white, and ocher as appropriate. Similarly, for rainbow colors, a plurality of light emitting members may be appropriately caused to emit light in a stripe pattern in the order of blue, light blue, green, yellow, red, pink, blue, light blue, green, and so on. Further, the light emitting mode of the light emitting member may be changed cyclically so that each color appears to be moving.

Note that a performance where the expectation level of a jackpot is 100% and the appearance rate is low (for example, executed with a probability of 5% in a fluctuating display that results in a jackpot) is sometimes referred to as a premium performance (abbreviated simply as premium). (Sometimes called Premier). Since the expectation level of the premium performance is 100%, it will not be executed if the variable display result is a loss. As a premium performance, a special video display in which a special image (for example, a special character image, a special pending image to a special 4th pending image, a special icon image, or a special background image) is displayed. A special sound or special BGM is output, a special operation part imitation image is displayed at the timing when a button operation is valid, a special reach effect is performed, and a light emitting decoration means is displayed in a special manner. Effects such as light emission control such as lighting or blinking can be performed.
Note that the present invention is not limited to these, and the predetermined presentation modes described in this specification may be employed as the premium presentation. Note that these images and videos may be displayed in rainbow colors, or rainbow colors may be adopted as the light emitting mode of the light emitting decoration means. Further, among these effects, a plurality (two or more) effects may be performed in one variable display.
Furthermore, when representing various images etc. displayed in these premium effects, the characters "premium" (or "premier") may be added before the name of the image etc. to represent those images etc. For example, it is used in forms such as a premium image, a premium character (image), a premium hold (image), a premium icon, a premium background (image), and a premium reach (direction). Similarly, sound may also be referred to as premium sound. If these images are displayed, a reach effect is executed, or a sound is output, a jackpot will definitely occur.

In addition, when the premium effect is executed in 5% of the variable displays that result in a jackpot, and if the probability of a jackpot is 1/300, the probability that the premium effect is executed is 1/6000. On the other hand, compared to the premium performance, other performances have relatively low expectations and a high probability of execution. For example, the probability that the blue pending image, which has a relatively low expectation level, will be displayed is higher than the execution probability of the premium effect (for example, 1/15). Similarly, the probability that a normal reach with a relatively low expectation level will occur is higher than the probability of executing a premium performance (for example, 1/10).

When a premium effect is executed, a player who is accustomed to the game will immediately recognize that a jackpot will occur, and will be very excited not only because the jackpot has been confirmed but also because a premium effect with a low probability of execution has been executed. You will have to remember this. Additionally, players who are new to the game will be able to recognize that a special effect that they are not used to seeing is being executed, and experience the flow that ultimately results in a jackpot. Gradually, you will become aware of what is happening.

Although it has been described above that the execution of the premium performance indicates that a jackpot will occur, it may be indicated that a specific jackpot will occur due to the execution of the premium performance. For example, the premium effect may be executed only when a jackpot with the highest value occurs among a plurality of types of jackpots with different values. For example, if there are three types of jackpots: 3R jackpot, 6R jackpot, and 10R jackpot (the maximum amount of balls per 1R is the same for each jackpot), the 10R jackpot with the largest number of rounds will occur. The premium performance may be executed only in the case of the event. Alternatively, if there are two types of jackpots, a low probability time-saving jackpot and a high probability time-saving jackpot (the number of rounds and the maximum amount of balls per 1 round are the same for both jackpots), the premium will only be paid if the high probability time-saving jackpot occurs. The performance may be executed.

In addition, in the holding display area, the first holding display area to the fourth holding display area, the holding image and the holding image corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 are displayed. During hitting, etc., in response to the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is displayed in the corresponding holding display area, the first holding display area to the fourth holding display area. You may make it display the said pending image or pending image corresponding to in the same manner.

Alternatively, the pending image or pending image corresponding to the winning of a game ball to the second starting port 2004 is the same as but different from the pending image or pending image corresponding to the winning of a gaming ball to the first starting port 2002. It may be displayed in a display mode. For example, the pending image or pending image may be represented by having a hexagonal shape instead of a circle, or by displaying the characters "denchu" superimposed on each of the circular images.

In addition, the display format of the pending image or pending image corresponding to the winning of a game ball to the second starting port 2004 is the same as that of the pending image or pending image corresponding to the winning of a gaming ball to the first starting port 2002. It may be displayed at a different position (for example, at the lower left side of the display area).
Further, by combining these, the pending image or pending image corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 may be displayed at different positions and in different display modes.
By adopting such a configuration, the player can understand which starting port corresponds to the hold.

FIG. 226(e) shows a revival effect character and its lines that may be displayed when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in a state where the reach is lost. Details of the performance using the resurrection performance character will be described later.

FIG. 226(f) shows the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, for example, in the upper right corner of the display area as shown in FIGS. The decorative pattern is displayed smaller than the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 225(d). The fourth symbol is displayed in a variable manner according to the variable display of the special symbol, and is stopped and displayed in response to the stop display of the special symbol. Similarly to the decorative patterns, the fourth symbol is displayed in a pattern of a square if the special lottery result is a jackpot, and is displayed in a pattern other than a pattern if the special lottery result is a loss. FIG. 226(f) shows a state in which the number "352" is stopped and displayed as the fourth symbol.

Although we have shown an embodiment in which the fourth symbol consists of three numbers, there are only two types of symbols displayed as the fourth symbol: "○", which is a symbol that indicates a jackpot, and "x", which is a symbol that indicates a loss. The results of the special lottery may also be shown. In addition, during the variable display of the special symbol, it is preferable to display "○" and "x" alternately for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 seconds).
According to such a configuration, while the decorative symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, "○" and "x" are displayed alternately as the fourth symbol, and when the special lottery result is a jackpot, the decorative symbols are arranged in a row. The fourth symbol is a stationary display of "○", and if the special lottery result is a loss, the decorative symbol is stationary and displayed in a mode other than a square, and the fourth symbol is a stationary display of an "x".
In this case, the combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed can be displayed in different ways for each variable display, but there are only two kinds of symbols that are stopped and displayed as the fourth symbol: "o" and "x".

In this embodiment, since the variable display of the first special symbol display 1403 and the variable display of the second special symbol display 1405 are not performed at the same time, the fourth symbol is different from the first special symbol display 1403. It also shows the fluctuation status of the second special symbol display 1405, and the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol display 1403 and the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol display 1405. may be provided separately. For example, a fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol display 1403 is displayed above the reserved number display image, and a fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol display 1405 is displayed below the reserved number display image. It's okay.

FIG. 226(g) shows a pending number display image. The pending number display image consists of an image displaying the pending number corresponding to the first starting port 2002 on the upper side, and an image displaying the pending number corresponding to the second starting port 2004 on the lower side. In FIG. 224(h), a display example is shown in which the number of reservations corresponding to the first starting port 2002 is three and the number of reservations corresponding to the second starting port 2004 is zero. In this way, the number of reservations can be confirmed not only by the reservation number display image shown in FIG. 226(g) but also by the reservation image and the reservation image shown in FIG. 226(d).

FIG. 226(h) shows an error notification image that is displayed when some abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1 is detected. The figure shows an example of the message "An error has occurred. Please call a store clerk." The error notification image may show specific details of an abnormality that has occurred in the gaming machine or a fraudulent act committed by a player. In this case, the error notification image is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the fourth symbol or the pending number display image.

Note that a hitting instruction image for instructing how to operate the handle 302 may be displayed using the same display method as the error notification image. For example, a message such as "Please hit to the right" or "Please return to hitting to the left" may be displayed as a batting instruction image. The display priority of the how-to-play instruction image is preferably higher than the display priority of the fourth symbol and the pending number display image, and lower than the display priority of the error notification image.

By placing an object in a virtual space and creating a moving image by moving the virtual camera in a predetermined manner, and displaying that moving image as a normal background image, the normal background image can be viewed dynamically. You may also do so.
227(a) to 227(c) are display examples at predetermined timings of a normal background moving image A generated by following a virtual camera as a group of tanks enters an enemy position in a virtual space. It shows. By generating such a normal background moving image A and repeatedly playing it back, it becomes possible to repeatedly display a dynamic background image in a loop.
Specifically, Fig. 227(a) shows an example of the display when the tank group has departed, Fig. 227(b) shows an example of the display when the tank group is entering enemy territory, and Fig. 227(c) shows an example of the display when the tank group has departed. Furthermore, examples of the display when entering the enemy's base are shown.

With reference to FIGS. 227(a) to 227(c), an example of displaying a moving image of a group of tanks entering an enemy position has been shown, but other types of moving images may be displayed.
An example of a normal background moving image B created by moving the virtual camera from the initial position to the right and then to the left in the virtual space will be shown below. Note that in this normal background moving image B, each tank is stopped inside the hangar. Furthermore, at the end of the movement, the virtual camera has returned to the position from which it started moving. The direction of the virtual camera is adjusted to face the tank. FIG. 227(d) shows a display example when the virtual camera is at the initial position. FIG. 227(e) shows a display example when the virtual camera moves rightward to the front of the hangar. FIG. 227(f) shows a display example when the virtual camera has moved to the far right. The virtual camera then moves to the left and finally returns to its initial position. The player can visually recognize the moving images of tanks and hangars displayed in the order of FIG. 227(d), FIG. 227(e), FIG. 227(f), FIG. 227(e), and FIG. 227(d). Become.
Normally, when displaying the background moving image B in a loop, the display shown in FIG. 227(d), FIG. 227(e), FIG. 227(f), and FIG. From d), the normal background moving image B is displayed.

The length (playback time) of the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B is preferably set to about 30 seconds to 120 seconds. In this case, the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B can be displayed in a loop with a period of about 30 seconds to 120 seconds.
Note that a plurality of normal background moving images such as normal background moving image A and normal background moving image B are generated and displayed in a predetermined order, including normal background moving image A and normal background moving image B. You can.
Note that the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B can also be displayed across a plurality of variable displays similarly to the normal background image A and the normal background image B.

Note that, as in the embodiment described later, when the special reach effect, ``Giant Tank Reach'' effect or ``Enemy Tank Destruction Reach'' effect, is started while the normal background video image A is being displayed, The background image is changed to a background image or background video image dedicated to special reach effects.
After that, when the special reach effect ends, the normal background video image A that was displayed before the special reach effect is displayed instead of the special reach-specific background image and background video image. good. At this time, the normal background moving image A may be displayed from the beginning of the moving image (the display state shown in FIG. 227(a)), or the normal background image A may be played back even during a special reach effect. may be advanced, and the normal background image A that was being advanced may be displayed in accordance with the end of the special ready-to-reach effect.
Although the normal background moving image A is taken as an example, it is preferable that the normal background moving image B also be displayed in a similar manner.

Although we have shown an example in which dynamically displayed normal background video image A and normal background video B are displayed instead of statically displayed normal background image A and normal background image B, special reach background image A , the special reach background image B, the pending image, and the pending image may be displayed as still images or dynamically using moving images. In the case of dynamic display, the images may be displayed in a loop at a predetermined period. For example, the special reach background image may be displayed in a loop at a cycle of about 10 to 60 seconds. Further, the pending image or pending image may be displayed in a loop at a cycle of about 1 to 2 seconds.

FIGS. 228(a) to 228(c) show examples of background hidden images.
The background concealment image is an image that is displayed when switching between normal background image A or normal background image B and the special reach background image that is displayed when executing the "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" effect. . The background hidden images shown in FIGS. 228(a) to 228(c) are composed of black images. The background concealment image can reduce the visibility of images that have a lower display priority than the background concealment image.
A plurality of (specifically, three) background concealment images with different degrees of reduction in visibility are prepared. Each background concealment image in this embodiment is black, but has different transparency. Specifically, background concealed image A (FIG. 228(a)) with high transparency and a low degree of deterioration of visibility, and background concealment image B (FIG. 228(a)) with medium transparency and a medium degree of decrease in visibility. (b)) and a background concealed image C (FIG. 228(c)) which has low transparency and a high degree of deterioration of visibility, and these are switched in a predetermined order and displayed one after another. Although details will be described later, by sequentially displaying each background concealment image, the switching of background images can be visually recognized by the player in a natural manner. Note that although three background concealment images with different degrees of transparency are shown, two or four or more background concealment images may be used, or a moving image consisting of more images may be used. In this case, the background switching is more visually recognized by the player in a natural manner.
In addition, instead of preparing multiple background concealment images with different degrees of transparency, the visibility of the background image is changed by gradually changing the transparency of one black background concealment image using the function of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source. You can do it like this. With such a configuration, the visibility of the background image can be smoothly changed while reducing the capacity used to store the background hidden image.
FIGS. 228(d) to 228(f) show other examples of background concealment images. This is an example in which an image of a bomb character (specifically, bomb character A shown in the embodiment described above) is used as a background concealment image. Furthermore, although details will be described later, a white background concealment image may be used instead of black.

Display priorities are determined for each of the images shown with reference to FIGS. 224 to 228. FIG. 229 is a table showing display priorities, layer names in which images are arranged, and types of images that can be arranged in each layer. For example, a background image is placed in layer L90, an own tank image, an enemy tank image, an operation instruction image, etc. are placed in layers L75 to L80, decorative patterns are placed in layer L70, and display priorities set for each layer are placed. are superimposed and displayed based on
As shown in the table in Figure 229, background images (normal background image, special reach background image), various images displayed during special reach (image of own tank, image of enemy tank, "Mite Sergeant" dialogue image, " ``Colonel Dyna'' dialogue image, operation instruction image imitating the attack button 3710 and mission button 3700, etc.), decorative patterns (normal decorative pattern, special reach decorative pattern, etc.), pseudo consecutive number display image, band-like look-ahead effect image, 1st Holding image to fourth holding image, the holding image, a dialogue preview image, a background concealment image, which will be described later with reference to FIG. The display priority increases in the order of the line), the fourth symbol, the pending number display image, and the error notification image.
Specifically, the display priority of various images displayed during special reach, decorative patterns, the relevant pending image, etc. is higher than the display priority of the background image, The pending image and the like are displayed in front of the background image.
On the other hand, the display priority of the background concealment image is higher than the display priority of the background image, various images displayed during special reach, decorative designs, the relevant pending image, etc., and the background concealment image is placed in front of these images. When displayed, these images are hidden and visibility is reduced.

Although an example has been shown in which the pending image is placed in the layer L40 and the pending image is placed in the layer L45, the pending image may be placed in the layer L26 and the held image may be placed in the layer L27. In this case, the pending image and the pending image are not hidden by the background concealing image arranged in the layer L30.
Further, the reserved image may be placed on layer L21, and the reserved image may be placed on layer L22. In this case, the pending image and the pending image are not hidden by the background concealment image arranged in the layer L30 or the game result image arranged in the layer L25.

Further, decorative patterns may be arranged on layer L26. In this case, the decorative pattern is not hidden by the background concealment image arranged on the layer L30.

The various production modes in this embodiment and various modified examples are determined by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the results of the special lottery, the gaming state, etc. determined by the main control board 1310, and are determined by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the predetermined executed in time.
For example, when the result of the special lottery is a loss, the peripheral control board 1510 stops and displays a decorative symbol in a non-reach loss state (for example, "352") in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, or After reaching the reach state (for example, "2↓2"), a final stop display is performed in the reach-missing state (for example, "232"). On the other hand, when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, the decorative pattern is placed in a reach state ("2↓2"), and then the decorative pattern is finally stopped and displayed at a diagonal (for example, "222"). conduct.
Note that the peripheral control board 1510 also determines whether to execute special reach performances ("reach for giant tank", "reach for destroying enemy tanks") and other performances, which will be described later.

First, an example of the effect when the decorative pattern is not in the ready state and the background image is not switched will be described with reference to FIGS. 230(a) and 231. FIG. 230(a) shows a time chart in this production example, and FIG. 231 shows a display example at a predetermined timing in this production example.

Immediately before timing t0, the display state in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 is such that the decorative symbols have stopped fluctuating. FIG. 231(a) shows a state in which the variable display of decorative patterns is stopped. The number of reservations at this time is 3. As the decorative pattern, a decorative pattern is usually displayed. Further, a normal background image A is displayed as a background image behind the decorative pattern.
When timing t0 comes from this state, a new variable display of the decorative pattern is started. FIG. 231(b) shows the display state immediately after the variable display starts.
Thereafter, each decorative pattern on the left-center right side is displayed in a downward scrolling manner. FIG. 231(c) shows the display state at that time.
Thereafter, after a winning of the game ball for the first starting opening 2002 occurs and a pending image is displayed in the third pending display area, at timing t5, the left decorative image is temporarily stopped and displayed. FIG. 231(d) shows the display state at that time.

Next, at timing t10, the right decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed. FIG. 231(e) shows the display state at that time. Next, at timing t15, the medium decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed. Next, at timing t16, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed. At the same time, the display of the pending image ends. FIG. 231(f) shows the display state during the period from timing t16 to timing t17. In this state, it is indicated that the special lottery result is a loss. After timing t17, a variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the next suspension is performed.

Next, an example of the effect when the decorative pattern is in the reach state but the background image is not switched will be described with reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 230(b) and the display example shown in FIG. 232. Note that during the period from timing t0 to timing t10, a display similar to the example of effect shown with reference to FIG. 230(a) is performed.
In this performance example, at timing t10, the right decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed with the same number "2" as the left decorative symbol, and a ready-to-win state occurs. FIG. 232(a) shows the display state at that time. Thereafter, at timing t20, the medium decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, and at timing t21, the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed to show the player whether the special lottery result is a loss or a jackpot.
FIG. 232(b) shows a display example during the period from timing t21 to timing t22 when the special lottery result is a loss. In the figure, a state in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at "232" is shown.
FIG. 232(c) shows a display example during the period from timing t21 to timing t22 when the special lottery result is a jackpot. In the figure, a state in which each decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at the number "222" with matching eyes is shown.
After timing t22, if the special lottery result is a loss, a variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the next hold is executed, and if the special lottery result is a jackpot, the background image changes to the normal background image. The game is switched from A to a jackpot background image exclusively for jackpots, and a jackpot game state is executed.

Compared to the production example that does not result in a ready-to-win state shown with reference to FIG. 230(a), the variation display time of the decorative symbol is longer in the production example that results in a ready-to-win state shown with reference to FIG. 230(b). Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot for a long time.

In the production examples shown with reference to FIGS. 230(a) and 231 and the production examples shown with reference to FIGS. 230(b) and 232, only the normal background image A continues while the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The special reach background image A and the special reach background image B are not displayed. Further, the background hidden image is not displayed either.

In the time chart of FIG. 230(a), during the variation of the decorative pattern (timing t0 to timing t16), while the decorative pattern is stopped (timing t16 to timing t17), and during the subsequent variation of the decorative pattern (timing t17). , an example of performance in which the normal background image A is continuously displayed has been shown, but the normal background image A is displayed even when the number of pending images is 0 and the decorative pattern is not changing. FIG. 232(d) shows an example of a display after the number of pending items is 0 and "253" indicating that the result of the special lottery is a loss is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the latest decorative symbols. This display state is maintained unless a game ball wins into the first starting port 2002 (or second starting port 2004).
Note that, similarly to the normal background image, the display state of the normal background moving image is maintained in a state where the decorative pattern does not change. Specifically, even after the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the normal background moving image that has been displayed during the variable display of the decorative pattern continues to be played. Further, after the normal background moving image is played to the end, it is preferable that the moving image is played again from the beginning, so that the moving image is played in a loop.
In this way, the normal background image or the normal background moving image is an image or moving image that is displayed as a background image when decorative symbols are not being displayed in a variable manner and when the jackpot game state is not in progress.

If the state in which the number of pending items is 0 continues for a predetermined period of time (if the variable display is not performed for a predetermined period of time), the display of decorative symbols may not be performed.
Specifically, if the decorative pattern is not displayed in a variable manner and the number of pending items is 0, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. After further continuing the stop display of the decorative pattern until a period of time (seconds) has elapsed, the display of the decorative pattern may be stopped. FIG. 232(e) shows an example of a display in a state where the decorative pattern is not displayed in a stopped state.
Such a display state may be continued until a game ball wins in the first starting port 2002 (or second starting port 2004).

In addition, in this way, when the fixed stop period of the decorative pattern ends without any reservation, the period from the end of the fixed stop period until the new variable display of the decorative pattern starts is the demo period. Sometimes referred to as
Alternatively, if the fixed stop period of the decorative pattern ends and a predetermined period of time has elapsed without any reservations, the period from the timing when the predetermined time has elapsed until the new variable display of the decorative pattern starts is set as the demo period. Good too.
Alternatively, if a predetermined period of time (for example, 20 seconds) elapses in which no contact with the handle 302 is detected by the handle touch sensor 310 in a state where there is no hold and the fixed stop period of the decorative pattern has ended, the predetermined period of time has elapsed. The period from the timing to the start of a new variable display of decorative patterns may be defined as a demonstration period.

Note that a specific effect display that is executed only during the demonstration period may be started at the timing when the demonstration period starts or at the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the demonstration period.
For example, the display of decorative patterns may be interrupted at a timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the demonstration period. In this case, as the background image, it is preferable to continue displaying the background image being displayed (for example, normal background image A) as it is. Alternatively, the background image being displayed may also be hidden, and a video introducing the gaming machine or the gaming machine manufacturer may be played. Note that after the video has been played back (for example, for several minutes) for a predetermined period of time, the original decorative pattern and background image may be displayed again. Further, the display of the original decorative pattern and background image and the playback display of the moving image may be repeatedly displayed.

Furthermore, characters that appear during the reach performance may be displayed during the demonstration period. In this case, by setting the behavior of the character to be different from that during the ready-to-win performance, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the ready-to-win performance has occurred.
Further, during the demonstration period, characters such as "sit" may be displayed in the display area, assuming that no players are seated (no players are playing games). This can appeal to players who are looking for a gaming machine to play on, and can contribute to increasing the operation of the gaming parlor.
Further, the display area may shift to a demo image display state in which a demo image introducing the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. In the demonstration image display state, the demonstration image may be displayed in front of the stopped decorative pattern, or the demonstration image may be displayed in a state where no decorative pattern is displayed.
Note that these displays may be realized by reproducing still images or moving image data created in advance.

In this way, the normal background image A continues to be displayed even from the state where the decorative patterns are being displayed in a variable manner to the state where the decorative patterns are not being displayed in a variable manner (demonstration period).
In addition, from a state where the decorative pattern is not being displayed in a variable manner, to a state where the number of reservations corresponding to the first starting port 2002 (or second starting port 2004) is 0, to a state where the number of reservations corresponding to the first starting port 2002 (or second starting port 2004) is 0, ), the normal background image A continues to be displayed even when the game ball has won a prize and the variable display of decorative symbols has started.

Note that in a state where the decorative symbols are not displayed in a variable manner, the number of pending symbols is 0, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed for one second, the handle touch sensor 310 detects that the player touches the handle 302. The decorative pattern may not be displayed if the undetected state continues for a predetermined period of time.
In addition, when a touch of the handle 302 by the player is newly detected by the handle touch sensor 310, or when a winning of a game ball to the first starting port 2002 (or the second starting port 2004) occurs, the decorative pattern The display may be restarted. Furthermore, the demonstration period may be ended at the same time, and the display of various images displayed during the demonstration period may be ended. In addition, also in this case, it is preferable that the normal background image A is continuously displayed regardless of whether or not the decorative pattern is displayed.

Although the normal background image A is taken as an example, the normal background image B and the normal background image C are also used in the same way as the normal background image A, and can be displayed as background images while the decorative pattern is changing or not changing.

In addition, the normal background image must meet certain conditions (for example, if a variable display is performed a certain number of times, if a certain lottery is won, or if a special reach effect, which is a highly expected reach effect, is a loss result). In some cases, one of the normal background image A and the normal background image B may be switched to the other.
In addition, in the most recent fluctuating display of decorative symbols that starts after a predetermined condition is met (for example, the fluctuating display that was executed next to the fluctuating display in which a special reach effect that resulted in a loss was performed) , it is best to perform an effect that normally switches the background image.
Note that the normal background images that can be displayed in a gaming state (normal state) that is not a gaming state in which right-hand hitting is performed are described as normal background image A and normal background image B, but the number is not limited to two types, and three or more types may be used. . In that case, the normal background images may be switched based on a predetermined rule, such as displaying them in a predetermined order. Alternatively, the normal background images may be switched irregularly, such as being displayed in a random order.
Further, when a jackpot game state triggers a game state in which right-handed hitting is performed (variable probability state or time-saving state), a normal background image C is displayed as a background image during right-handed hitting. In this way, the displayed normal background image may be changed in response to a change in the gaming state. Note that there may be a plurality of background images other than the normal background image C as background images during right-handed hitting. In this case as well, the background image may be switched using the same method as the normal background image display method in the normal state.

In the production examples shown with reference to FIGS. 230(a), 230(b), 231, and 232, the background image is not switched during the variable display of decorative patterns, and the normal background image is displayed continuously. 230(c) and 233(a) show the "enemy tank destruction reach" performance in which the normal background image is switched to the special reach background image during the variable display of decorative symbols. This will be explained with reference to time charts and display examples shown in FIGS. 234 to 236. In addition, in the time chart shown in FIG. 230(c), an example of the effect from timing t0 to timing t10 in the effect of "enemy tank destruction reach" is shown, whereas in the time chart shown in FIG. 233 (a), the effect example is "enemy tank destruction reach". Examples of performances from timing t10 to timing t45 in the performance are shown.
In addition, in the period from timing t0 to timing t13, a variable display is performed in the same manner as the example of effect shown with reference to FIG. 230(b). FIG. 234(a) is a display example at a predetermined timing during a predetermined period (timing t10 to timing t13) before the background concealment image is displayed.

In this production example, background concealment image A, background concealment image B, and background concealment image C are displayed in a predetermined order from timing t13 to timing t19. Further, at timing t16 when the background concealment image C is displayed, the background image is switched from the normal background image A to the special reach background image B.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 233(a), the background concealment image A is displayed during a period (1 second) from timing t13 to timing t14. FIG. 234(b) shows a display example during this period.
Furthermore, the background concealed image B is displayed during a period (1 second) from timing t14 to timing t15. FIG. 234(c) shows a display example during this period.
Furthermore, the background concealment image C is displayed during a period (2 seconds) from timing t15 to timing t17. FIG. 234(d) shows a display example during this period.
Furthermore, the background concealment image B is displayed during a period (1 second) from timing t17 to timing t18. FIG. 234(e) shows a display example during this period.
Furthermore, the background concealed image A is displayed during a period (1 second) from timing t18 to timing t19. FIG. 234(f) shows a display example during this period.

At timing t16 when the background concealment image C is displayed, the background image is changed from the normal background image A to the special reach background image B, and the decorative pattern is changed to the normal background image shown with reference to FIG. 225(b). It is changed to a special reach decorative pattern that is smaller than the decorative pattern, but since the background concealment image C is displayed in front of the background image and the decorative pattern, it is possible to recognize that these images have been switched. This is after the timing t17 when the background hidden image B is displayed.
Note that the special reach decoration pattern is displayed during the period when the special reach background image is displayed (timing t16 to timing t39). Further, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are not scrolled downward and are displayed in a temporarily stopped state.

From timing t30 to timing t33, an operation valid period occurs during which operation acceptance for attack button 3710 is valid. FIG. 234(g) shows a display example during this period. Simultaneously with the start of the operation validity period, a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed, and a line instructing the operation of the attack button 3710 is displayed.
If an appropriate operation mode for the attack button 3710 is performed during the valid operation period, or if the valid operation period ends, a mode suggesting a special lottery result (whether the enemy tank is displayed or not) is displayed. ) will be displayed.

FIG. 235 shows a display example when the special lottery result is a jackpot. Specifically, if the special lottery result is a jackpot, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed. In addition, at timing t34 when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the operational validity period of the attack button 3710 ends, the special reach decorative pattern is displayed in a temporarily stopped state in a diagonal pattern ("222"). FIG. 235(a) shows this state.

On the other hand, FIG. 236 shows a display example when the special lottery result is a loss. If the special lottery result is a loss, an image of an enemy tank passing by without being destroyed is displayed. In addition, at timing t34 when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the operational validity period of the attack button 3710 ends, the special reach decorative pattern is displayed in a temporarily stopped state in a reach loss mode ("232"). FIG. 236(a) shows this state.

Next, the background concealed image is displayed during a period from timing t36 to timing t42.
Specifically, the background concealment image A is displayed during a period (1 second) from timing t36 to timing t37. 235(b) and 236(b) show display examples during this period.
Furthermore, the background concealed image B is displayed during a period (1 second) from timing t37 to timing t38. In FIGS. 235(c) and 236(c), ta shows display examples during this period.
Furthermore, the background concealment image C is displayed during a period (2 seconds) from timing t38 to timing t40. FIGS. 235(d) and 236(d) show display examples during this period.
Furthermore, the background concealed image B is displayed during a period (1 second) from timing t40 to timing t41. 235(e) and 236(e) show display examples during this period.
Further, the background concealment image A is displayed during a period (1 second) from timing t41 to timing t42. 235(f) and 236(f) show display examples during this period.

At timing t39 when the background concealment image C is displayed, the background image is changed from the special reach background image B to the normal background image A, and the decorative pattern is changed from the special reach decorative pattern B to the normal decorative pattern A. However, since the background concealed image C is displayed in front of the background image and decorative pattern, the switching of these images can be recognized at the timing t40 when the background concealed image B is displayed. Hereafter.

During the period from timing t34 to timing t44, the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern are maintained in a temporarily stopped state. During the period from timing t42 to timing t44, the background concealment image A is not displayed, and the visibility of the normal decorative pattern A during the temporary stop is not obstructed by the background concealment image. FIG. 235(g) and FIG. 236(g) show the display state at this time.

At timing t44, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and the special lottery result is shown to the player. 235(h) and 236(h) show the display state during the period from timing t44 to timing t45.

230(b) and 232, in which the background image is not switched, and the special case in which the background image is switched, as shown in FIG. 230(c), and 233 to 236. When it comes to Reach (“Reach to Destroy Enemy Tanks”), the latter has higher expectations that the special lottery result will be a jackpot. For example, the expectation level may be 3% in the former case, while the expectation level may be 10% in the latter case.

Further, a plurality of special reaches with different expectations of jackpots may be executed, and any one of the special reaches may be executed. In this case, it is preferable that the background image of the special reach, the image of the own tank, the image of the enemy tank, the operation section required to be operated, etc. be made different depending on the type of special reach. Thereby, by visually confirming the displayed special reach background image, images of own tanks and enemy tanks, and operation instruction images of the operation unit, the player can know whether the expectation level of a jackpot is high or low.
Note that a mode that suggests the degree of expectation in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 145 and other variations thereof may also be adopted.

An example of a production in which the background image is switched at timing t16 has been shown, but since the change to the special reach background image B or the small special reach decorative pattern becomes recognizable after timing t17, the special reach background image is changed at timing t15 or t17. A change to the ready-to-reach background image B or a small special ready-to-reach decorative pattern may be performed.
An example of a production in which the background image is switched at timing t39 has been shown, but since the change to the normal background image A or a small normal decorative pattern becomes recognizable after timing t40, the normal background image is switched at timing t38 or timing t40. A change to A or a normal decorative pattern may be made.

In this way, in this production example, the background image is switched from the normal background image A to the special reach background image B at timing t16. Similarly, at timing t39, the background image is switched from the special reach background image B to the normal background image A.
At timing t16 and timing t39, since the background concealed image C is displayed, the player does not recognize that the background image has been switched.

In the background image switching effect in this embodiment, background concealment image A and background concealment image B are displayed in order, the visibility of the background images decreases, and the background image before switching gradually becomes difficult to recognize. (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "first period") and a period during which the background concealed image C is displayed and the background images before and after switching are invisible (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "second period") Then, background concealed image B and background concealed image A are displayed in order, and the visibility of the background image increases, and there is a period (hereinafter referred to as the "third period") in which the background image after switching becomes gradually easier to see. ).
Note that during the period after the end of the third period until the decorative pattern stops changing (period from timing t42 to timing t44), the background image normally remains easily visible (hereinafter, this period may be referred to as the "fourth period").

According to such a configuration, the switching of the background images is perceived by the player in a natural manner, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.
In addition, at the start of the special reach, the normal background image is switched to the special reach background image while the background hidden image is displayed, so the player perceives the start of the special reach as natural, reducing interest. can be restrained from doing so.
Similarly, at the end of the special reach, the special reach background image is switched to the normal background image while the background hidden image is displayed, so the end of the special reach is perceived by the player in a natural way, and the player is less interested. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

In this kind of background image switching effect, the background image is switched during the period when the background is most difficult to see (second period). ). As a result, the background can be smoothly switched, and the player is less likely to feel discomfort in the performance.
In addition, by displaying a black background concealing image over the entire display area, the luminance of the display area decreases, and the visibility of decorative patterns decreases, resulting in less movement of the image within the display area. . Therefore, it is possible to make a player who has become less aware of the display contents of the display area due to operating a smartphone or the like recognize that an opportunity to pay close attention to the display area has arrived.
Further, at the end of the special reach, a black background concealment image is displayed and the special reach background image is switched to the normal background image, so that the display contents in the display area are simplified for a predetermined period of time. As a result, even if the player is shown that the result of the special lottery is a loss based on the display result of the special reach, the player's feelings, which were excited by the expectation of winning the jackpot, are calmed down, and subsequent changes are displayed. Since the player can continue playing the game without losing interest in the game, it is possible to prevent the operation of the game machine from decreasing.

A display example when the special lottery result is a jackpot was shown with reference to FIG. 235, but the background hidden image is displayed only when the special lottery result is a loss, and when the special lottery result is a jackpot, Alternatively, the display mode shown in FIG. 235(a) may be continued until timing t44 without displaying the background concealment image, and the symbol may be stopped and displayed as the special ready-to-reach decorative symbol. Further, although the background concealment image is displayed, at timing t39, the special reach background image B may not be switched to the normal background image A, but may be switched to the jackpot medium background image.
With such a configuration, it is possible to maintain the feeling of excitement caused by the occurrence of a jackpot until the jackpot game is started.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 235 and 236, the result of the special lottery was shown by the display mode of the enemy tank and the temporary stop display mode of the special reach decorative pattern, but the special reach indicating the special lottery result is As the decorative pattern, a large special reach decorative pattern shown with reference to FIG. 225(c) may be adopted.
For example, the timing at which the valid operation period ends (timing t33), or the timing at which the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped and displayed after a predetermined period of time (1 second) has elapsed after the valid operation period ended (timing t34). The decorative pattern may be changed from the small special reach decorative pattern shown with reference to FIG. 225(b) to the large special reach decorative pattern shown with reference to FIG. 225(c).
It is preferable that the display of the large special ready-to-reach decorative pattern continues until timing t39 during the second period, and after timing t39, the normal decorative pattern is displayed.
If the special lottery result is a jackpot and the background concealment image is not displayed, the display of the large special reach decoration pattern may be continued until timing t45.

The configuration may be such that the pending image or pending image is not hidden by the background concealment image. For example, if the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 234 to 236 is modified to display the suspended image or the suspended image in front of the background hidden image, Each display example shown in (h) will be displayed like each display example shown in FIGS. 237(a) to 237(h). Such a display can be realized by setting the display priority of the pending image and the pending image to be higher than the display priority of the background concealment image. Note that it may be configured such that the pending image or pending image is not hidden by the background concealment image not only at the end of the special reach but also at the start of the special reach.

According to such a configuration, since the visibility of the pending image and the pending image is not reduced, the player can check the pending number and operate the handle 302 to move the game ball to the first starting port 2002. You can decide whether or not to award the prize.
Specifically, the background concealed image is displayed at the start of a special reach where the variable display time is relatively long compared to the reach where only the background image is normally displayed, and when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the time of reach. Right after that. Further, from the state in which the decorative symbols at the time of reach are stopped and displayed, either the hold is reduced by one and the next variable display is started, or a jackpot game state occurs and the opening and closing of the jackpot opening 2005 is started.
Therefore, if you can check the number of reservations at the start of the special reach, you can decide whether to increase the number of reservations during the special reach when the expectation of a jackpot is high and there is not necessarily a high need to increase the number of reservations. It becomes possible.
Additionally, if it is possible to check the number of reservations at the end of the special reach, a player who has stopped firing the game ball during the special reach can accurately judge whether or not to fire the game ball. .

With reference to FIGS. 124 and 125, an embodiment has been shown in which a prefetch effect is displayed over a plurality of variable displays based on the prefetch result, but by applying the method in this embodiment, FIGS. In the embodiment shown with reference to 236 etc., it may be modified so that a pre-read effect display is performed.
For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 234 to 236, etc., if a prefetch effect display is configured, the display examples shown in FIGS. 236(a) to 236(h) are respectively The display will be as shown in the display examples shown in a) to FIG. 238(h).
In the embodiment shown in FIG. 238, as a look-ahead effect display in the special reach, a band-shaped look-ahead effect image with a character string "Enemy tank approaching!" is displayed at the upper right and upper left of the display area. In addition, by displaying the background concealment image A and the background concealment image B, the band-like pre-reading effect image becomes a first period in which it is difficult to see, and by displaying the background concealing image C, the band-like pre-reading effect image becomes invisible. This will be the second period. Thereafter, by displaying the background concealment image B and the background concealment image A, a third period occurs in which the band-shaped pre-reading effect image gradually becomes easier to see, and the band-shaped pre-reading effect image changes from a state of being difficult to see to a state of being easily visible. . Such a display mode can be realized by setting the display priority of the band-shaped prefetch effect image to be lower than the display priority of the background concealment image.

The display of the band-shaped look-ahead effect image ends at timing t45 when the stop display of the decorative pattern ends. Alternatively, the display of the band-shaped look-ahead effect image may be ended during the period from timing t36 to timing t42 (see FIG. 233), which is the period during which the background concealment image is displayed. In this case, the display of the band-shaped look-ahead effect image may be ended in any one of the first to third periods. Alternatively, the display of the band-shaped pre-read effect image may be ended in the fourth period, which is a period until the visibility of the background image returns to normal and the decorative pattern stops. Alternatively, the display of the band-shaped pre-read effect image may be ended at timing t44 when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. In this way, the band-like look-ahead effect image can also be displayed in a way that makes it difficult or impossible to see it using the background concealment image using the same display method as for other images such as reserved images.

By displaying the band-like look-ahead effect image during the first and third periods when the background concealment image is being displayed, it is possible to understand under what kind of expectation the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. Players can recognize it.
On the other hand, by ending the display of the band-like look-ahead effect image during the first to third periods (particularly the second period), it is possible to end the display of the band-like look-ahead effect image in a natural manner.
Furthermore, by ending the display of the band-like look-ahead effect image before the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the visibility of the stationary and displayed decorative pattern is not hindered.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 238, the pending image, the pending image, and the prefetch effect image are made difficult to view or invisible by the background concealment image.
On the other hand, the prefetch effect image in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 238 is also displayed on the near side of the background concealment image, similar to the pending image and the pending image in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 237. You may also do so. In this case, the pending image or the pending image and the look-ahead effect image are displayed in front of the background concealed image, so these images are easily visible.
On the other hand, the pending image and pending image are displayed in front of the background hidden image to make them easily visible, and the pre-read effect image is displayed behind the background hidden image to make it difficult or impossible to see. May be displayed.
Alternatively, the pending image and the pending image are displayed behind the background hidden image to make them difficult or impossible to see, and the pre-read effect image is displayed in front of the background hidden image for easy visibility. You may.
Note that the overlapping of these images may be performed by appropriately setting a display priority for each image and using a layer function.

If the pending image or both the pending image and the look-ahead effect image are not visible, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the scene has been switched.
If the pending image or both the pending image and the look-ahead effect image are visible, it may be difficult for the player to recognize that the scene has changed, but the player may recognize the level of expectation shown by these images. can.
If only one of the pending image or the pending image and the look-ahead effect image is visible, the player can recognize the rough expectation level, although the sense of scene switching is somewhat inferior.

In addition, if the pending image is displayed in a special manner different from normal (for example, the pending image is green or red), which indicates that the expectation of a jackpot is high, it indicates that the expectation of a jackpot is high. Recognizable.
For example, if the pending image is visible at the start of the special reach, it is possible to recognize under what expectations the special reach is being performed.
In addition, if the pending image is visible at the end of the special reach, it is possible to determine under what level of expectation the decorative pattern at the time of reaching stopped at a matching pattern indicating a jackpot, or an irregular pattern indicating a loss. You can check whether it has stopped by looking at it. For example, when a player's expectations are high and the result is a loss, or when the player's expectations are low and the result is a jackpot, the result is presented in a way that is contrary to the player's expectations. It can make you feel. In subsequent games, if a similar pending image is displayed, the user loses expectations that the special reach result will be a jackpot even if the expectation level is low. In addition, even when a high degree of expectation is shown, the player can enjoy the performance of the special reach with a sense of tension, considering that the result of the special reach may be a loss.
Further, by displaying the pending image or pending image, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player misunderstands that the gaming machine is broken.

A white background concealment image may be employed as the background concealment image. For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 234 to 236, etc., when modified to display a white background hidden image, the display examples shown in FIGS. 236(a) to 236(h), respectively, are as follows. The display will be as shown in the display examples shown in FIGS. 239(a) to 239(h).
Similar to the black background concealed image, white background concealed images A to white background concealed image C with different degrees of transparency are prepared.First, white background concealed images A and B are displayed, and the transparency is gradually lowered. , the visibility of images located behind the white background concealed image is gradually reduced (FIGS. 239(b) and 239(c)). Next, a white background concealment image C is displayed to make images located behind the white background concealment image invisible (FIG. 239(d)). Next, the white background hidden images B and A are displayed, and the transparency is gradually increased to gradually improve the visibility of the images located behind the white background hidden image (FIG. 239(e), Figure 239(f)). Thereafter, the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then stopped and displayed (FIGS. 239(g) and 239(h)).

A predetermined character or the like may be displayed as the background hidden image. For example, when the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 234 to 236 is modified to display a plurality of bomb characters, the display examples shown in FIGS. 236(a) to 236(h) are The display will be as shown in the display examples shown in FIGS. 240(a) to 240(h).
In the first period in this modified embodiment, the image of the bomb character and the triangular background area starts to be displayed as the background concealment image A from the upper left and lower right of the display area (see FIG. 240(b). )), then background concealed image B is displayed (FIG. 240(c)).
Furthermore, in the second period, an image of a bomb character and two trapezoidal background areas is displayed as a background concealment image C (FIG. 240(d)).
Furthermore, in the third period, background concealed image B is displayed (FIG. 240(e)), and then background concealed image A is displayed (FIG. 240(f)). Thereafter, the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then stopped and displayed (FIGS. 240(g) and 240(h)).
As described above, in this embodiment, the background concealment image is composed of the bomb character and the image of the background area (triangular or trapezoidal part).
Note that the background area is preferably a single color (white or black). Further, the bomb character itself may be a still image, or may be displayed dynamically, such as by moving the arms and legs of the bomb character. In addition, instead of or in addition to the bomb character, at least one of the following characters, such as a character other than the bomb character, a predetermined picture, the model name of the pachinko machine 1, the name of the special reach that is being executed or was being executed, etc., is used as the background. It may be displayed as part of the background concealment image on the near side of the area.
According to such a configuration, the player's consciousness can be switched to the next variable display of decorative symbols.

An example of switching the background image by displaying a black background concealment image at both the start and end timings of the special reach is shown with reference to FIGS. 234 to 236 and the like.
In addition, as a background concealment image, instead of a black background concealment image, an embodiment in which a white background concealment image is displayed is shown with reference to FIG. 239, and a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character etc. is displayed with reference to FIG. 240. However, instead of displaying the same background concealment image at the start and end of the special reach, different background concealment images may be displayed at the start and end of the special reach.
For example, as the background concealment image at the start of the special reach, one of a black background concealment image, a white background concealment image, a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character, etc. is displayed, and as the background concealment image at the end of the special reach, a black background concealment image is displayed. Any one of a background hidden image, a white background hidden image, a background hidden image consisting of a bomb character, etc. may be displayed.
Specifically, a white background concealment image is displayed as the background concealment image at the start of the special reach, and a black background concealment image or a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character, etc. is displayed as the background concealment image at the end of the special reach. You may also do so.

In the embodiment with reference to FIG. 233(a), there is a first period in which the background image becomes gradually less visible, a second period in which the background image is invisible, and a second period in which the background image gradually becomes more visible. An example is shown in which the length of the third period (specifically, 2 seconds) is the same. According to such an embodiment, it is possible to simplify the display process of a background hidden image and reduce the number of man-hours required for developing image effects.

On the other hand, the lengths of each period may be different instead of being the same. FIGS. 233(b) and 233(c) show modified examples (modified examples 01 to 12) in which the lengths of the first to third periods at the start of the special reach and the end of the special reach are different. It shows. For example, in modification 08, the length of the first period is the longest at 3 seconds, the length of the second period is the shortest at 1 second, and the length of the third period is 2 seconds, which is the middle length. There is.
Note that in each modification, the length of the fourth period may also be different from the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 233(a).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately switch and display background images within a limited time without unnecessarily lengthening the time required to display a background concealed image.

The basic effects at the start of the special reach in Modifications 01 to 12 are shown below.

According to modification 01, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is set as "third period > first period = second period" (that is, the special reach background image is completely (increasing the time it takes for the player to recognize it) allows you to enjoy which of the multiple reach effects is being displayed.

According to modification 02, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is set as "first period = second period > third period" (that is, the special reach background image is completely By shortening the time it takes to recognize the special reach effect, it is possible to recognize the special reach effect at an early stage.

According to modification 03, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is set as "second period>first period=third period" (that is, when the background hidden image C is displayed By extending the period during which the special reach background image and the normal background image are not displayed, you can ensure a longer time to enjoy which of the multiple reach effects will be executed. .

According to modification 04, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is set as "first period = third period > second period" (that is, when the background concealed image C is displayed By shortening the period during which the special reach background image and the normal background image are not displayed, it is possible to enjoy the special reach effect for a long time.

According to modification 05, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is set as "first period > second period = third period" (that is, the normal background image is completely removed). By increasing the time it takes to make it unrecognizable), it is possible to provide the joy of developing a special reach effect for a long time.

According to modification 06, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is set as "second period = third period > first period" (that is, the normal background image is completely removed). By shortening the time it takes to make it unrecognizable, the background concealed image C is displayed early, so it is possible to prepare for the special reach effect at an early stage.

According to modification 07, by setting the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach to be "first period>second period>third period", the normal background image is completely removed. It takes a longer time to make it unrecognizable, and the joy of having developed into a special reach performance can be provided for a long time, and the special reach performance to be executed can be recognized at an early stage.

According to modification 08, by setting the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach to be "first period>third period>second period", the normal background image is completely removed. It takes longer to make it unrecognizable, and the joy of developing a special reach effect can be provided for a long time.In addition, the background concealment image C is displayed, and the special reach background image and normal background image are displayed. By shortening the period in which it is not performed, it is possible to enjoy the special reach effect for a long time.

According to modification 09, by setting the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach to be "second period > first period > third period", among the multiple reach effects, It is possible to secure a long time to enjoy which ready-to-reach performance will be executed, and also to make the special ready-to-reach performance to be executed recognized at an early stage.

According to modification 10, by setting the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach to be "second period>third period>first period", the background concealed image C is Since the player can prepare for the special ready-to-reach performance at an early stage, it is possible to secure a long time to enjoy which of the plurality of ready-to-reach performances will be executed.

According to modification example 11, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is set to "third period > first period > second period", so that the special reach effect can be performed for a long time. It is possible to have fun, and also to enjoy which of the plurality of reach effects is being displayed.

According to modification 12, by setting the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach to be "third period>second period>first period", the background concealment image C is Since it is displayed on the screen, it is possible to prepare for the special reach effect at an early stage, and also to enjoy which of the plurality of reach effects is being displayed.

The basic effects at the end of the special reach in Modifications 01 to 12 are shown below.

According to modification 01, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach is set as "third period > first period = second period" (that is, the normal background image is completely removed). By increasing the amount of time it takes for people to recognize the change, they can take more time to change their feelings toward the next change.

According to modification 02, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach is set as "first period = second period > third period" (that is, the normal background image is completely removed). By shortening the time it takes to make the user recognize the change, it is possible to quickly end the anticipation for the change and create expectations for the next change (able to quickly change one's mind).

According to modification 03, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach is set as "second period>first period=third period" (that is, when the background concealed image C is displayed By extending the period during which the special reach background image and the normal background image are not displayed, it is possible to make it seem like the time that the background concealment image C is displayed is longer, and it is possible to make it seem like the time when the background concealment image C is displayed is longer than when the normal background image is not displayed. It can create a sense of hope.

According to modification 04, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach is set as "first period = third period > second period" (that is, when the background concealed image C is displayed By shortening the period during which the special reach background image and the normal background image are not displayed, the normal background image is recognized early, although its visibility is low, and expectations for the change are quickly raised. It is possible to end the session and create expectations for the next change (allowing a quick change of mindset).

According to modification example 05, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach is set as "first period > second period = third period" (that is, the special reach background image is completely (increasing the time it takes to make it unrecognizable) allows you to enjoy the aftertaste of the change.

According to modification 06, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach is set as "second period = third period > first period" (that is, the special reach background image is completely By shortening the time it takes for a change to become unrecognizable), it is possible to end expectations for the change early and create expectations for the next change (allowing a quick change of mindset). .

According to modification 07, by setting the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach to be "first period > second period > third period", the afterglow after the fluctuation is removed. In addition, it is possible to quickly end the feeling of anticipation for the change in question and to have expectations for the next change (allowing the user to quickly change his or her feelings).

According to modification 08, by setting the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach to be "first period > third period > second period", the afterglow after the fluctuation is removed. At the same time, although the visibility is low, the normal background image is recognized early, the anticipation for the change is ended early, and the expectation for the next change is raised (change of mind). can be done quickly).

According to modification 09, by setting the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach to be "second period>first period>third period", the background concealed image C is displayed. This can make the user feel that the normal background image will not be displayed for a long time, and can create a sense of expectation that the normal background image will not be displayed. It is possible to create expectations for changes in people's behavior (allow them to change their feelings quickly).

According to modification 10, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach is set to "second period>third period>first period", so that the special reach background image is completely The time it takes for the image to become unrecognizable becomes shorter, and just when I thought that my expectations for the change had ended earlier, the background concealed image C is displayed for a longer time, creating a new sense of expectation. be able to.

According to modification example 11, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach is set as "third period>first period>second period", so that the normal By having the background image recognized early, the anticipation for the change is ended early, and by lengthening the time it takes for the background image to be completely recognized, it is possible to change one's feelings toward the next change. You can take your time.

According to modification 12, by setting the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach as "third period > second period > first period", it is possible to deal with the fluctuation. By ending expectations early and lengthening the time it takes for the normal background image to be completely recognized, it is possible to take time to change one's feelings toward the next change.

In addition, the display mode of the background concealment image at the start of the special reach of the embodiment shown in FIG. 233(a), each modification shown in FIGS. 233(b) and 233(c), and the display mode of the background concealment image at the start of the special reach, The display mode of the background concealment image at the end of the special reach of the illustrated embodiment and each modification shown in FIGS. 233(b) and 233(c) may be combined as appropriate. For example, at the start of the special reach, each background concealment image may be displayed in the manner of modification 01, and at the end of the special reach, each background concealment image may be displayed in the manner of modification 02.
According to such a configuration, background images can be switched in a more appropriate manner.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 233(a), the number of seconds in each of the first to third periods was 2 seconds, and the total number of seconds was 6 seconds. Further, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 233(b) and 233(c), the number of seconds in each period from the first period to the third period is 1 second to 3 seconds, and the total number of seconds is 5 seconds. seconds to seven seconds, but these are just examples.
For example, each of the first to third periods may be set as appropriate in the range of about 1 second to 3 seconds, and the total number of seconds may be set as appropriate in the range of about 3 seconds to 9 seconds. Note that the number of seconds in each period may be made shorter or longer within a range where the effect is recognized.

As shown in Modification 04, Modification 05, Modification 08, and Modification 11 of FIG. 233, the second period may be shorter than the first period.
Furthermore, as shown in Modification 01, Modification 04, Modification 08, Modification 11, and Modification 12 in FIG. 233, the second period may be shorter than the third period.
Further, as shown in Modification 04, Modification 08, and Modification 11 of FIG. 233, the second period may be shorter than the first period and the third period.

In the first period and the third period, the transparency of the background concealment image changes and is dynamically visible, and although the visibility of the decorative pattern and the background image is reduced, it is not impossible to see. On the other hand, during the second period, the decorative patterns and background images were no longer visible and the display seemed to stop, and some players reported that the gaming machine was malfunctioning (or that they had high expectations that the result of the special lottery would be a jackpot). However, by making the second period relatively shorter than the first and third periods, it is possible to prevent this from occurring. I can do it.

Furthermore, when displaying a black background hidden image, the player's own face and light from the light emitting means provided in the gaming machine located behind the gaming machine are reflected in the display area of the gaming board side effect display device 1600. , there is a risk that the players will be able to see it and lose their sense of immersion in the game. Such a tendency is remarkable when a glossy (glare) type display device is adopted as the liquid crystal display device constituting the game board side performance display device 1600. However, by making the second period shorter than the first period and the third period, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

Note that the third period may be executed after the first period without providing the second period. In this case, the background image may be switched at the timing of switching from the first period to the third period. A similar effect can be achieved with such a configuration.
Note that in the embodiment and modification shown in FIG. 233, if the second period is not provided, the third period is executed after the first period ends without changing the start timing of the first period. You can do it like this. Alternatively, the end timing of the first period may be modified to match the start timing of the third period without changing the end timing of the third period.

As shown in Modification 03, Modification 06, Modification 09, Modification 10, and Modification 12 of FIG. 233, the second period may be longer than the first period.
Furthermore, as shown in Modification 02, Modification 03, Modification 07, Modification 09, and Modification 10 in FIG. 233, the second period may be longer than the third period.
Further, as shown in Modification 03, Modification 09, and Modification 10 of FIG. 233, the second period may be longer than the first period and the third period.

According to such a configuration, the background image and decorative patterns are hidden by the background concealing image and can be hidden for a long time, so that the display contents in the display area are simple, and the player's feelings can be easily understood from the background. You can switch to the production or game situation after switching the image.
For example, at the start of a special reach, the player's feelings can be focused on the content of the performance performed during the special reach. In this case, it may be possible to perform a plurality of special reach effects with different expectations as special reach effects, and configure such that any one of the special reach effects is executed (the "Giant Tank Reach" effect described later is an example of this). ). In this case, it is possible to make the player curious as to which special reach will develop, thereby increasing interest.
On the other hand, at the end of the special reach, the player's feelings can be switched to the next symbol change or jackpot game.

In addition, when a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character or the like is displayed as a background concealment image, the player can take time to carefully observe the displayed background concealment image in the second period, and the player's Your feelings will change more. Note that the background hidden image may be displayed dynamically, such as a character moving around within the screen. In this case, the player's feelings can be switched to the next symbol change or jackpot game.
On the other hand, in the case of a black or white background hidden image, only the transparency changes and the image itself does not move. Therefore, unnecessary information is not given to the player, the delimitation of the performance can be made clearer, and the player's feelings can be changed.

As shown in Modification 02, Modification 05, Modification 07, Modification 08, and Modification 09 of FIG. 233, the first period may be longer than the third period.

According to such a configuration, since the player can sufficiently perceive that the switching of the background image has started, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the player becomes unable to understand how the content of the performance has changed. If the first period is shorter than the third period, there is a risk that the player will not be able to understand how the content of the performance has changed.

As shown in Modification 01, Modification 06, Modification 10, Modification 11, and Modification 12 of FIG. 233, the third period may be longer than the first period.

According to such a configuration, the background image of the special reach is gradually displayed at the start of the special reach, so the player feels as if he or she is being teased, and the expectation for the special reach increases. . In this case, it may be possible to perform a plurality of special reach effects with different expectations as special reach effects, and configure such that any one of the special reach effects is executed (the "Giant Tank Reach" effect described later is an example of this). ). In this case, the player feels interested in which special reach effect will be executed, but by making the third period longer, the player can feel even stronger interest.
In addition, the visibility of the special reach background image can be quickly reduced when the special reach ends, and the player's mind can be switched to the next symbol change or jackpot game. This is particularly effective when the result of the special lottery is a loss.

The embodiments shown in FIGS. 233(a) to 233(c) may be modified so that the first period is not provided. In this case, it is preferable to hide the background hidden image during the period that was the first period, and to start the second period at the timing shown in the figure.
Even when the configuration is such that the first period is not provided, the same effects as those described above can be achieved.

The embodiments shown in FIGS. 233(a) to 233(c) may be modified so that the third period is not provided. In this case, it is preferable to hide the background hidden image during the third period and configure the second period to end at the timing shown in the figure.
Even when the configuration is such that the third period is not provided, the same effects as those described above can be achieved.

Further, the type of background concealment image displayed at the start of the special reach may be configured to suggest the degree of jackpot expectation. For example, the structure is configured so that the expectation of a jackpot is higher when a white background concealing image is displayed than when a black background concealing image is displayed and when a white background concealing image is displayed. You may.

It may be configured such that the degree of expectation of a jackpot is not indicated by the effect of the displayed background concealed image. For example, it is preferable to display the same background hidden image even when special reach with different jackpot expectations is executed.
According to such a configuration, the player waits for the end of the display of the background hidden image with anticipation as to what kind of special reach will occur. Furthermore, when the special reach ends, the player can face the next and subsequent fluctuating displays of decorative symbols and jackpot games with a sense of normalcy.

In addition, in the middle of the special ready-to-reach presentation, the content of the presentation may be switched to a special ready-to-reach presentation with higher expectations. Also in this case, the background hidden image may be displayed by adopting any of the above-mentioned aspects. Further, at this time, it may be configured such that any one of a plurality of special ready-to-reach background images having different jackpot expectations can be displayed as the special ready-to-reach effect after switching.

Although the embodiment has been described in which the background image is made invisible due to the background concealment image, it may be made difficult to see instead of being made invisible.
For example, even in the second period when the visibility of the background image is most reduced due to the background concealment image, the background image does not become invisible, but it is possible for the background image to pass through the background concealment image and be visible. It may be configured as follows. For example, when using a black background concealment image, the background image is visible in the second period in a display state intermediate between the display state shown in FIG. 234(c) and the display state shown in FIG. 234(d). It may be configured as follows.
Alternatively, instead of setting the size of the background concealment image to a size that can hide the entire background image, it is possible to hide a large part of the background image (at least 70% or more, preferably 90% or more). This background concealed image may be displayed in the second period.
Moreover, you may combine these aspects.
Even with such a configuration, switching of background images can be made difficult for the player to recognize.

Although the embodiment has been described in which a background concealment image consisting of a black background concealment image, a white background concealment image, a bomb character, etc. is displayed as the background concealment image, these background concealment images may be displayed simultaneously.
For example, the display area may be divided and a different background hidden image may be displayed for each divided area. For example, a black background concealed image may be displayed in the right half of the display area, and a white background concealed image may be displayed in the left half of the display area.
Further, a display priority may be given to the background concealed images so that the background concealed images are displayed in an overlapping manner.
For example, it is possible to display a background concealed image consisting of a bomb character, etc. and a black background concealed image, and the display priority of the background concealed image consisting of the bomb character etc. is set higher than the display priority of the black background concealed image. Good too. In this case, due to the background concealment image consisting of a bomb character, etc., the area where the background image is visible becomes narrower from the left and right, and the visibility of the background image decreases even within the area where the background image is visible. This will be visually recognized by the player. Note that instead of the black background concealment image, a white background concealment image may be displayed.
Note that for the display time (length of the first to third periods) of the plurality of background hidden images displayed in this way, any one of the embodiment shown in FIG. 233 or its modification may be adopted. . Alternatively, different display times (one of the embodiments shown in FIG. 233 or variations thereof) may be adopted for each background hidden image.
Even with such a configuration, switching of background images can be made difficult for the player to recognize.

At the timing (timing t34) when the special reach is temporarily stopped and displayed in a loss mode, the background image itself is darkened, and a background concealment image that is brighter than the background image (for example, a background concealment image consisting of a white background concealment image or a bomb character, etc.) is created. ) to switch the background image.
Thereby, the player can clearly visually recognize that the background hidden image has been displayed, the player can recognize that the performance content has been switched, and the player's feelings can be switched to the next symbol variation.

On the other hand, the background image itself may be darkened at the timing (timing t34) when the special reach is temporarily stopped and displayed in the state of losing, and the background image may be switched using a black background concealment image. In this case, since the visual difference between the background image and the background hidden image becomes smaller, it is possible to make it less noticeable that the background image has been switched.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 224 to 240, display effects are performed using the display area, but in addition to these display effects, a decorative member provided near the display area is used. These embodiments may be modified so that the effects may be performed simultaneously.
Below, with reference to FIG. 241 and the like, a tank accessory 3770 that enhances the special reach by emitting light or moving during the special reach will be described.

The tank accessory 3770 is a three-dimensional accessory that imitates the shape of a tank when viewed from the rear, and is provided on the game board 5. The tank accessory 3770 is provided at the front side and lower part of the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 when viewed from the front. FIG. 241 shows the positional relationship between the display area and the tank accessory 3770 when viewed from the front.

The tank accessory 3770 has a tank accessory light emitting part (not shown). The tank accessory light-emitting section is equipped with a full-color LED, and can be in a non-emitting state and a state in which it emits light in a predetermined color. As a specific light emitting mode, for example, the tank accessory light emitting section can be lit or blinked in white, green, red, or yellow.
The tank accessory 3770 also has a function of moving vertically between a lower standby position and an upper moving position by driving a tank accessory drive mechanism (not shown). Furthermore, it is possible to stop at any position between the standby position and the movement position.

FIG. 241(a) shows a state in which the tank accessory 3770 is located in a standby position without emitting light.
FIG. 241(b) shows a state in which the tank accessory 3770 emits light in a predetermined color (for example, red) and is located at the standby position.
FIG. 241(c) shows a state in which the tank accessory 3770 is located at a moving position without emitting light. When viewed from the front, the display area and the tank accessory 3770 are visually recognized by the player as overlapping.
FIG. 241(d) shows a state in which the tank accessory 3770 emits light in a predetermined color (for example, red) and is located at a moving position. When viewed from the front, the display area and the tank accessory 3770 are visually recognized by the player as overlapping.

In FIGS. 241(b) and 241(d), the pending image is displayed in the pending image display area, not in white, which is the normal pending image, but in red, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the normal pending image. An example is shown below. Furthermore, the tank accessory 3770 is positioned at the standby position or the moving position, and the tank accessory 3770 is shown emitting light in the same red color as the pending image.
Note that although red is given as an example of the color of the pending image, the color is not limited to red and may be green or gold.

The tank accessory 3770 may be configured so that it may move from the standby position to the movement position at the start of the special reach.

Note that the light emission and movement of the tank accessory 3770 are controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the special lottery result.

An embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 233(a) will be described below with reference to FIG. 242(a). Note that aspects other than the tank accessory 3770 and the relevant reserved image are basically the same presentation aspects as the embodiment shown with reference to FIG.

FIG. 242(a) is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the tank accessory 3770 does not move from its standby position, but it emits light in red, which is the same color as the pending image, indicating that the expectation of a jackpot is high. In addition, the timing of turning the pending image red may be the timing when the game ball enters the first starting port 2002 and the pending image is displayed, or the timing when the variable display starts (timing t0). , or a predetermined timing during the variable display (for example, a predetermined timing in the period from timing t1 to timing t33).

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 242(a), the red pending image is displayed as the pending image until timing t45 when the variable display ends and the decorative pattern is stopped for 1 second. Note that the pending image is difficult to view or cannot be viewed during the period from timing t13 to timing t19 and from timing t36 to timing t42 when the background hidden image is displayed.
On the other hand, the tank accessory 3770 remains at a standby position without moving during the period from timing t0 when the variable display starts to timing t45.
The tank accessory 3770 will now emit red light at the timing when the pending image is displayed in red (as mentioned above, the timing of starting winnings, the start timing of variable display, the predetermined timing during variable display, etc.). , the red light emission continues until timing t45.

An embodiment modified from the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 242(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 242(b).
FIG. 242(b) is a time chart showing modification example 01. In modification 01, the display mode of the pending image is changed from red to white at timing t36, which is the timing at which the display of the background concealed image A is started. At the same time, the light emission mode of the tank accessory 3770 is also changed from red to white.

An embodiment modified from the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 242(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 242(c).
FIG. 242(c) is a time chart showing modification example 02. In modification 02, the display mode of the pending image is changed from red to white at timing t38, which is the timing at which the display of the background concealed image C is started. At the same time, the light emission mode of the tank accessory 3770 is also changed from red to white.

An embodiment modified from the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 242(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 242(d).
FIG. 242(d) is a time chart showing modification example 03. In modification 03, the display mode of the pending image is changed from red to white at timing t40, which is the timing at which the display of the background concealed image C ends. At the same time, the light emission mode of the tank accessory 3770 is also changed from red to white.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 242(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 242(e).
FIG. 242(e) is a time chart showing modification example 04. In modification 04, the display mode of the pending image is changed from red to white at timing t42, which is the timing at which the display of background concealed image A ends. At the same time, the light emission mode of the tank accessory 3770 is also changed from red to white.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 242(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 242(f).
FIG. 242(f) is a time chart showing modification example 05. In modification 05, the display mode of the pending image is changed to non-display at timing t36, which is the timing at which the display of the background concealed image A is started. At the same time, the lighting mode of the tank accessory 3770 is also changed from a red lighting state to a non-lighting state.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 242(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 242(g).
FIG. 242(g) is a time chart showing modification example 06. In modification 06, the display mode of the pending image is changed to non-display at timing t38, which is the timing at which the display of the background concealed image C is started. At the same time, the lighting mode of the tank accessory 3770 is also changed from a red lighting state to a non-lighting state.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 242(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 242(h).
FIG. 242(h) is a time chart showing modification example 07. In modification 07, the display mode of the pending image is changed to non-display at timing t40, which is the timing at which the display of the background concealed image C ends. At the same time, the lighting mode of the tank accessory 3770 is also changed from a red lighting state to a non-lighting state.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 242(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 242(i).
FIG. 242(i) is a time chart showing modification example 08. In modification 08, the display mode of the pending image is changed to non-display at timing t40, which is the timing at which the display of the background concealed image A ends. At the same time, the lighting mode of the tank accessory 3770 is also changed from a red lighting state to a non-lighting state.

Next, another modification will be shown with reference to FIG. 243. Note that FIG. 243(a) is the same diagram as FIG. 242(a).

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 243(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 243(b).
FIG. 243(b) is a time chart showing modification example 09. In modification 09, the display mode of the pending image remains red until timing t45. On the other hand, the luminance of the tank accessory 3770 decreases in brightness from timing t36 to timing t38, turns off from timing t38 to timing t40, increases in brightness from timing t40 to timing t42, and returns to its original state from timing t42 to timing t45. It emits red light at a brightness of .

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 243(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 243(c).
FIG. 243(c) is a time chart showing modification example 10. In Modification 10, the display mode of the pending image is changed from red to white at timing t39. On the other hand, the luminance of the tank accessory 3770 decreases in brightness from timing t36 to timing t39, increases in brightness from timing t39 to timing t42, and emits red light from timing t42 to timing t45.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 243(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 243(d).
FIG. 243(d) is a time chart showing modification example 11. In Modification 11, the display mode of the pending image is changed from red to white at timing t39. On the other hand, the luminance of the tank accessory 3770 is such that the luminance decreases from timing t36 to timing t38, turns off from timing t38 to timing t40, and increases in luminance with white luminescent color from timing t40 to timing t42, and the luminance decreases from timing t36 to timing t38. White light is emitted from t42 to timing t45.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 243(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 243(e).
FIG. 243(e) is a time chart showing modification example 12. In modification 12, the display mode of the pending image is changed from red to white at timing t39. On the other hand, the luminance of the tank accessory 3770 is such that the luminance decreases from timing t36 to timing t39, the luminescent color changes from red to white at timing t39, and the luminance changes to white from timing t39 to timing t42. It rises and emits white light from timing t42 to timing t45.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 243(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 243(f).
FIG. 243(f) is a time chart showing modification example 13. In modification 13, the display mode of the pending image is changed to non-display at timing t39. On the other hand, the luminance of the tank accessory 3770 decreases in brightness from timing t36 to timing t38, and is turned off from timing t38 to timing t45.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 243(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 243(g).
FIG. 243(g) is a time chart showing modification example 14. In modification 14, the display mode of the pending image is changed to non-display at timing t39. On the other hand, the luminance of the tank accessory 3770 decreases in brightness from timing t36 to timing t39, and is turned off from timing t39 to timing t45.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 243(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 243(h).
FIG. 243(h) is a time chart showing modification example 15. In modification 15, the display mode of the pending image remains red until timing t45. On the other hand, the luminance of the tank accessory 3770 decreases in brightness from timing t36 to timing t38, and is turned off from timing t39 to timing t45.

In these embodiments, the level of expectation can be shown to the player by causing the light-emitting decorative member (tank accessory 3770) to emit light in the same color as the pending image.
In addition to displaying the background hidden image, when switching the background image, it is also possible to switch the display mode of the pending image or to terminate the display of the pending image.
At this time, the brightness of the light emitted from the light-emitting decorative member is gradually reduced as the visibility of the background image decreases, and the brightness of the light emitted from the light-emitting decorative member is gradually reduced as the visibility of the background image increases. By gradually increasing the brightness of the light, it is possible to make the light-emitting decorative member look natural.

Although an embodiment has been described in which the display of the pending image is performed until timing t45, the display of the pending image may be ended at timing t44, which is the timing at which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. Note that, at the same time as the display of the pending image ends, the luminescent color of the tank accessory 3770 may be changed from the luminescent color of the pending image to white, which is the normal luminescent color.

In modification 15 of FIG. 243, the tank accessory 3770 is turned off at timing t38 while displaying the red pending image, but instead of being turned off, it may be made to emit white light.
In Modifications 11 to 13 of FIG. 243, at timing t39, the red pending image is changed to the white pending image, or the pending image is hidden, but at this time, the red of the tank accessory 3770 is The light emitting state may be continued until a predetermined timing (for example, timing t44 when the stop display of the decorative pattern starts, or timing t45 when the stop display of the decorative pattern ends).

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the light emission mode of the tank accessory 3770 is set to white or turned off, the light emission mode of the tank accessory 3770 may be changed to white or turned off at the timing when the light emission mode of the tank accessory 3770 is set to white or turned off. It is also possible to change the display so that it finishes matching the light emitting mode of the hold display and starts emitting light simply as a decoration. In this case, the degree of expectation may not be indicated by the light emitting mode, or the light emitting mode may be adapted to the type of the normal background image being displayed.

During the variable display of decorative symbols, it may be possible to perform an effect of changing the pending image or pending image to a pending image or pending image indicating a higher degree of expectation.
For example, at timing t25 in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 242(a), the red pending image may be changed to the gold pending image. This allows the player to know that the level of expectation is higher.
Note that during the first to third periods in which the background hidden image is displayed, it is preferable not to change the pending image or the pending image to another display mode indicating a different expectation level.
According to such a configuration, the visibility of the pending image and the pending image is ensured at the timing when the expectation level changes, and it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the pending image and the change in the display mode of the pending image. .

An embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 242(a) will be described below with reference to FIG. 244(a). Note that the modes other than the movement mode of the tank accessory 3770 are basically the same effect modes as the embodiment shown with reference to FIG.
In this embodiment, the tank accessory 3770 moves from the standby position to the movement position when special reach is executed, and then moves from the movement position to the standby position.
As described above, FIGS. 241(a) and 241(b) show the tank accessory 3770 in the standby position. Moreover, FIG. 241(c) and FIG. 241(d) show a state in which the tank accessory 3770 is in a moving position.

The tank accessory 3770 in this embodiment is located at a standby position from timing t0 to timing t21. Thereafter, from timing t21 to timing t24, it moves upward from the standby position to the movement position. It is located at the movement position from timing t24 to timing t36. From timing t36 to timing t42, downward movement from the movement position to the standby position is performed. It is located at the standby position from timing t42 to timing t45. These movements of the tank accessory 3770 are preferably performed at a constant speed.

In addition, the tank accessory 3770 starts to emit red light at the timing when the pending image is displayed in red (as mentioned above, such as the start winning timing or the start timing of the variable display), and continues to emit red light until timing t45. continues to emit light.
In this way, in this embodiment, the downward movement of the tank accessory 3770 is started at the same time as the display of the background concealment image is started, and the downward movement of the tank accessory 3770 is started at the same time as the timing when the display of the background concealment image is finished. End the downward movement.

It should be noted that the configuration may be such that whether the tank accessory 3770 moves upward or not, the expectation of a jackpot is higher when it moves.

According to such a configuration, the operation of moving the movable decorative member (tank accessory 3770) from the movement position to the standby position can be made less noticeable. Therefore, when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, it is possible to prevent the joy of the player who is happy with the occurrence of the jackpot from decreasing. Furthermore, it is possible to make it difficult for a player who has lost a game to feel disappointed that he or she had high expectations but ended up losing.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 244(a), the tank accessory 3770 was moved downward during the period from timing t36 to timing t42, but the timing for moving the tank accessory 3770 downward will be explained below. A modified embodiment will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 244(b).

Modification 01 is an example in which the tank accessory 3770 is moved from the movement position to the standby position from timing t34 to timing t36.
In Modifications 02 to 14, the tank accessory 3770 similarly moves from the movement position to the standby position at each timing shown in FIG. 244(b).

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 244(a) and 244(b), the period before the visibility of the background image decreases and the period during which the background image gradually becomes difficult to recognize (first period) , a period in which the background image is not visible (second period), a period in which the background image gradually becomes more visible (third period), and a period after the visibility of the background image returns to normal (fourth period) begins. The movement of the tank accessory 3770 was started or ended at the same time as the end of the period, but these embodiments can be modified to start moving the tank accessory 3770 downward in the middle of a certain period, or The downward movement of the tank accessory 3770 may be terminated in the middle of the period.
For example, the downward movement may start at timing t37, which is in the middle of the first period, and end at timing t39, which is in the middle of the second period. Further, for example, the start of the downward movement and the end of the downward movement may be performed within the second period.

In this way, by moving the movable decorative member (tank accessory 3770) from the movement position to the standby position near the timing when the background concealment image is displayed and the visibility of the decorative pattern decreases, the movable decorative member The operation of returning to the standby position can be made less noticeable.

Each embodiment of the movement mode of the tank accessory 3770 shown with reference to FIG. 244(a) and FIG. 244(b), FIG. 242(a) to FIG. 242(i), and FIG. 243(a) to FIG. You may combine the display mode of the said pending image shown with reference to 243 (h), and each embodiment about the light emission mode of the tank accessory 3770.
For example, each embodiment described in FIG. 244 and each embodiment described in FIG. A pending image may also be displayed.
Alternatively, at the timing when the downward movement period of the tank accessory 3770 shown in FIG. 244 starts or the timing when the downward movement period ends, the light emission mode shown in FIGS. You may start.
Alternatively, the change in the light emitting mode shown in FIGS. 242 and 243 or the pending image may be started at a timing exactly in the middle of the period in which the tank accessory 3770 moves downward shown in FIG. 244.

With such a configuration, the light emitting mode of the tank accessory 3770 can be made more conspicuous or less conspicuous.
Even if a background hidden image is displayed in the display area and the visibility of the display area is reduced, the fact that the movable decorative member (tank accessory 3770) is emitting light will prevent you from hitting the jackpot or losing, regardless of your expectations. The player can know whether the result is as follows.
Alternatively, when a background concealing image is displayed in the display area and the visibility of the display area is reduced, the movement of the movable decorative member (tank accessory 3770) may be turned off to make the movement of the movable decorative member less noticeable. Can be done.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 233 to 236, the visibility of the background image and the decorative pattern are reduced at the same time. However, in the embodiment shown in FIG. , will be explained with reference to FIG. 246.

Note that FIG. 245(a) basically shows the same production mode as the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 233(a) etc., except that an explanation about the visual recognition mode of the decorative pattern is added. Therefore, explanations regarding these will be omitted.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 245(a), in the period from timing t13 to timing t19 and from timing t36 to timing t42, the visibility of the background image and the decorative pattern gradually decreases, and the background image and The decorative pattern becomes invisible, and the visibility of the background image and the decorative pattern gradually increases.

FIG. 245(b) shows an embodiment in which the embodiment shown in FIG. 245(a) is modified so that the visibility of the background image and the visibility of the decorative pattern may not match.

In modification 01, the visibility of the decorative pattern decreases from timing t14 to timing t15, the decorative pattern becomes invisible from timing t15 to timing t17, and the visibility of the decorative pattern increases from timing t17 to timing t18.
Further, the visibility of the decorative pattern decreases from timing t37 to timing t38, becomes invisible from timing t38 to timing t40, and increases from timing t40 to timing t41.

Similarly, in Modifications 02 to 08, the visibility of the decorative pattern decreases, the decorative pattern becomes invisible, and the visibility of the decorative pattern increases at each timing shown in FIG. 245(b).

FIG. 246 shows a display example corresponding to modification 03 of FIG. 245(b). Further, FIGS. 246(a) to 246(h) show display states corresponding to the display states shown with reference to FIGS. 236(a) to 236(h).
FIG. 246(b) shows a display example from timing t37 to timing t38 in modification 03 of FIG. 245(b). This figure shows a display example in which the visibility of the background image is reduced, but the visibility of the decorative pattern is not reduced. In addition, in order not to reduce the visibility of the decorative pattern, it is preferable to temporarily set the display priority of the decorative pattern higher than the display priority of the background concealment image.
FIG. 246(g) shows a display example from timing t42 to timing t43. This figure shows a display example in which the visibility of the background image is not reduced, but the visibility of the decorative pattern is reduced. Note that in order to reduce the visibility of the decorative pattern when the background concealment image is not displayed, it is preferable to display a black, semi-transparent image in front of the decorative pattern.
For FIGS. 246(a), 246(c) to 246(f), and 246(h), refer to FIGS. Since it is the same as the embodiment shown with reference, the description will be omitted.

In addition, the visual recognition mode of the decorative pattern at the start of the special reach of the embodiment shown in FIG. 245(a) and each modification shown in FIG. 245(b), and the embodiment shown in FIG. 245(a), FIG. The visual recognition mode of the decorative pattern at the end of the special reach in each modified example shown in (b) may be combined as appropriate. For example, at the start of the special reach, the decorative pattern may be displayed in the mode of modification 01, and at the end of the special reach, the decorative pattern may be displayed in the mode of modification 02.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately switch the background image according to the content of the presentation.

The embodiment in which a black background concealed image is displayed has been shown with reference to FIG. 246, but instead of the black background concealed image, a white background concealed image or a background concealed image consisting of a bomb character, etc. may be displayed. It's okay.

According to the embodiments of Modification 01, Modification 02, Modification 03, Modification 04, and Modification 06, when switching the background image, the time during which decorative patterns are visible can be extended, and the player can easily understand the game content. It can prevent things from becoming incomprehensible.
According to the embodiments of Modification 03, Modification 05, Modification 06, Modification 07, and Modification 08, when switching the background image, the time during which the decorative pattern is difficult to see can be extended. Thereby, at the start of the special reach, the player's attention can be directed to the display contents other than the decorative symbols, and the interest can be improved. Furthermore, when the special reach ends, a decorative pattern is displayed in a manner indicating a loss of reach or a jackpot, but in the case of a loss of reach, the player's feeling of regret can be alleviated. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot, it is possible to increase interest by teasing the player.

During a special reach, a special decorative pattern with a different design from that of normal decorative pattern fluctuations is displayed. Specifically, during normal mode, a large-sized normal decorative pattern with a character as shown in FIG. 225(a) is displayed, and during special reach, a small-sized decorative pattern with a character shown in FIG. 225(b) is displayed. A special reach decoration pattern that is not displayed is displayed. Although the designs of the decorative patterns are different, the numbers indicated by the decorative patterns are the same before and after the background concealment image is displayed.
At the end of the special reach, the special reach decoration pattern is displayed in a temporarily stopped state in the first period, the special reach decoration pattern is changed to a normal decoration pattern in the second period, and the normal decoration pattern is temporarily stopped in the third period. It will be displayed as
At the time of temporary stop display, the displayed decorative pattern is displayed in such a manner that it oscillates periodically without changing the displayed decorative pattern to another decorative pattern with a different number, but the oscillation occurs between the first period and the third period. The aspects may be the same or different. For example, the temporary stop display mode of the decorative pattern in the first period and the third period may be one of the following modes: vertically shaking, horizontally shaking, and rotating around the vertical direction. may be adopted.
Further, the swinging period of the decorative pattern in the first period and the swinging period of the decorative pattern in the third period may be the same. For example, the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the first period and the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the third period may be set to 1 second.
Alternatively, the swinging period of the decorative pattern in the first period may be longer than the swinging period of the decorative pattern in the third period. For example, the swinging period of the decorative pattern in the first period may be 2 seconds, and the swinging period of the decorative pattern in the third period may be 1 second.
Alternatively, the swinging period of the decorative pattern in the first period may be shorter than the swinging period of the decorative pattern in the third period. For example, the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the first period may be 1 second, and the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the third period may be 2 seconds.

In this way, by making the normal decorative pattern and the special ready-to-win decorative pattern different in the display mode at the time of temporary stop, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the difference between the normal decorative pattern and the special ready-to-reach decorative pattern.

The swinging period of the decorative pattern in the first period may be shorter than the length of the first period. Similarly, the swinging period of the decorative pattern in the third period may be shorter than the length of the third period. For example, when the first period and the third period are each 2 seconds, the swing period of the decorative pattern in the first period and the swing period of the decorative pattern in the third period may be set to 1 second.
Alternatively, the swinging period of the decorative pattern in the first period may be longer than the length of the first period. On the other hand, the swinging period of the decorative pattern in the third period may be shorter than the length of the third period. For example, when the first period and the third period are each 2 seconds, the swing period of the decorative pattern in the first period may be 3 seconds, and the swing period of the decorative pattern in the third period may be 1 second.
Alternatively, the swinging period of the decorative pattern in the first period may be shorter than the length of the first period. On the other hand, the swinging period of the decorative pattern in the third period may be longer than the length of the third period. For example, when the first period and the third period are each 2 seconds, the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the first period may be 1 second, and the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the third period may be 3 seconds.
Alternatively, the swinging period of the decorative pattern in the first period may be longer than the length of the first period. Similarly, the swinging period of the decorative pattern in the third period may be longer than the length of the third period. For example, when the first period and the third period are each 2 seconds, the swing period of the decorative pattern in the first period and the swing period of the decorative pattern in the third period may be set to 3 seconds.

In this way, by making the normal decorative pattern and the special ready-to-win decorative pattern different in the display mode at the time of temporary stop, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the difference between the normal decorative pattern and the special ready-to-reach decorative pattern.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 233(a), the length of the third period, which is a period during which the background image gradually becomes easier to recognize, is set to 2 seconds, and the length of the third period is set to 2 seconds after the visibility of the background image returns to its original state. Although the length of the fourth period is set to 2 seconds, the variation of the decorative pattern may be stopped at the end timing of the third period without providing the fourth period. For example, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 233(a), the decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed at timing t42 when the third period ends. Similarly, in modification 01 shown in FIG. 233(b), the decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed at timing t43 when the third period ends. In Modifications 02 to 12, the decorative patterns may be similarly stopped and displayed at the timing when the third period ends.
Note that the fourth period may be shorter than the third period. For example, if the third period is 2 seconds, the fourth period may be less than 2 seconds.

According to such a configuration, the decorative pattern can be displayed definitively immediately after the third period ends.

Referring to FIG. 233(a), in the embodiment, the display of the pending image is ended at timing t44 when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, but the dynamic display for erasing the pending image is started for a short period of time from timing t44. You can go in between.
At this time, instead of simply ending the display of the held image, at the same time as the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, a concealment image that hides at least a part of the held image is displayed in front of the held image, and then 0.3~ The display of the held image and the concealed image may be ended after 0.5 seconds have elapsed.
Alternatively, the held image itself may be dynamically erased and displayed in the same way. For example, the size of the held image may be gradually reduced, and after 0.3 to 0.5 seconds have elapsed, the size of the held image may be set to 0, and the display of the held image may be ended.

According to such a configuration, the player can accept the results of the special lottery without being bound by the level of expectation shown during the variable display.
Furthermore, the display of the pending image can be ended in a natural manner.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 233 to 236, the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed at timing t34 indicates whether the result of the special lottery is a loss or a jackpot. Refer to FIGS. 247 to 251 for an embodiment in which the form is changed so that after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in a display mode that indicates a loss, the decorative pattern may change to a display mode that indicates a jackpot. This will be explained below. In addition, after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating a jackpot, the decorative pattern does not change to the display mode indicating a loss.

In this embodiment, at timing t34 during the special reach, after the special reach decoration pattern on the left center right is temporarily stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a loss (for example, "232"), a revival effect is executed after the temporary stop is lost. In some cases, the normal decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a display mode that indicates a loss, and the normal decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a display mode that indicates a jackpot after the temporary stop loss and resurrection effect is executed. There are cases.

247 to 249 are time charts showing examples of effects in this embodiment. 250 and 251 are diagrams showing display examples in this embodiment.
Note that the performance modes other than the recovery performance after temporary stop loss are basically the same as the embodiment shown with reference to FIG.

Figures 247(b), 248(b), and 249(b) show the varying display times of decorative symbols when the revival effect after a temporary stop fails and the decorations when the recovery effect after a temporary stop fails. It shows the variable display time of the symbol.
Figures 247(c) to 247(g), Figures 248(c) to 248(f), and Figures 249(c) to 249(h) are display areas when the recovery performance fails after a temporary stop failure. An example of the effect in the display area and an example of the effect in the display area when the recovery effect after the temporary stop failure is successful are shown.
FIG. 250 shows a display example in the display area when the recovery effect after a temporary stop failure fails, and FIG. 251 shows a display example in the display area when the recovery effect after a temporary stop failure succeeds.

Among these performance examples, the recovery performance after temporary stop failure will be described with reference to the time chart (modification 06) shown in FIG. 248(d) and the display examples shown in FIGS. 250 and 251.

In modification 06, at timing t34, the decorative pattern at the time of reach is temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss. FIGS. 250(a) and 251(a) show a state in which the decorative pattern at the time of reach is temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss.
Next, from timing t36 to timing t37, a bomb character and a line image saying "There's still a chance!" are displayed in the upper right corner of the display area. FIG. 250(b) and FIG. 251(b) show the display state during the period from timing t36 to timing t37. Moreover, FIG. 250(c) and FIG. 251(c) show the display state during the period from timing t37 to timing t38.
Next, from timing t38 to timing t39, the bomb character and the dialogue image move from the upper right of the display area to the lower center of the display area.
From timing t39 to timing t40, along with the bomb character, there is a dialogue image saying "I can't help it..." indicating that the revival effect after a temporary stop failure has failed, or an image indicating that the recovery effect after a temporary stop failure has been successful. One of the dialogue images "Premonition of victory!" will be displayed. FIG. 250(d) shows an example of a display when the revival performance after a temporary stop fails, and FIG. 251(d) shows an example of a display when the revival performance after a temporary stop fails succeeds.

If the revival performance after a temporary stop fails, the bomb character and dialogue image are no longer displayed at timing t40, and the same display as when the resurrection performance after a temporary stop is not performed is displayed from timing t40 to timing t45. be exposed.
FIG. 250(e) shows a display example from timing t40 to timing t41, FIG. 250(f) shows a display example from timing t41 to timing t42, and FIG. 250(g) shows a display example from timing t42 to timing t44. , FIG. 250(h) shows display examples from timing t44 to timing t45.

If the revival effect after a temporary stop loss is successful, at timing t40, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a diagonal stop mode indicating a jackpot, and at timing t49, the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols stops, and the timing The decorative pattern is stopped and displayed from t49 to timing t50. Further, the display of the bomb character and the dialogue image continues from timing t40 to timing t50. That is, the fluctuating display time of the decorative symbols when the revival performance after a temporary stop failure is successful is longer than the fluctuating display time of the decorative symbols when the resurrection performance after a temporary stop failure fails.

251(e) shows a display example from timing t40 to timing t41, FIG. 251(f) shows a display example from timing t41 to timing t42, and FIG. 251(g) shows a display example from timing t42 to timing t49. , FIG. 251(h) shows display examples from timing t49 to timing t50. As is clear from the figure, if the revival effect after the temporary stop loss is successful (if the special lottery result is a jackpot), the display of the bomb character and the dialogue image continues until the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed.

Modification 06 has been described as a representative example, but in other modifications, the timing at which the resurrection effect starts after a temporary stop failure, the number of seconds the bomb character is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area, and the timing at which the bomb character moves is explained. Although the timing at which failure or success is displayed and the time at which the bomb character is displayed at the bottom center of the display area when the resurrection effect is successful are different, in other aspects, the display is similar to Modification 06. .
For example, in the embodiments and modifications 01 to 04 shown in FIGS. 247(c) to 247(g), the display of the bomb character starts at timing t34, but the bomb character moves and the special lottery The timing at which the display of the dialogue image indicating the result is started is timing t37 in modification example 01, timing t39 in modification example 02, timing t41 in modification example 03, and timing t43 in modification example 04.
Similarly, FIG. 248 shows a modification in which the display of the bomb character starts at timing t36, and FIG. 249 shows a modification in which the display of the bomb character starts at timing t38, timing t40, and timing t42. .

In addition, if the resurrection effect after a temporary stop loss is successful, at the timing when the dialogue image "Premonition of victory!" is displayed, the display mode of the decorative symbol displayed during the temporary stop will be changed from the display mode indicating a loss to the jackpot. It is preferable to change the display mode to the one shown below. Alternatively, the display mode may be changed to a display mode indicating a jackpot at a timing after a predetermined number of seconds (for example, one second) from the timing when the dialogue image "I have a feeling of victory!" is displayed.

In the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 247 to 251, after the temporary stop in a manner that indicates the loss of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, the background image a period in which the background image gradually becomes less visible (first period), a period in which the background image becomes invisible (second period), a period in which the background image gradually becomes more visible (third period), and a period in which the background image becomes less visible (the third period). You can start displaying the bomb character and dialogue images at the same time as the start of the period after returning to the original state (4th period), start displaying the dialogue images within these periods, or start displaying the dialogue images at the same time as the end of these periods. It was designed to notify whether it was a jackpot or not using an image (when the revival effect failed), but by modifying these embodiments, it is possible to start displaying a bomb character and dialogue image in the middle of a certain period. The display of the bomb character and the dialogue image may be started at the same time as the end of the period, or the dialogue image may be used to notify whether or not there is a jackpot in the middle of a certain period.
For example, the bomb character and the dialogue image may start to be displayed at timing t37, which is in the middle of the first period, and the dialogue image may be used to notify whether or not it is a jackpot at timing t38, which is the start timing of the second period. . Further, for example, within the second period, the start of displaying the bomb character, the movement of the bomb character, and the display of a dialogue image to notify whether or not it is a jackpot may be performed.

The display priority of the bomb character and the dialogue image is higher than the display priority of the background concealment image. On the other hand, the display priority of the bomb character and the dialogue image is lower than the display priority of the fourth symbol and the pending number display image.

If the result of the recovery effect after a temporary stop failure is a failure, the recovery effect after a temporary stop failure may be performed again. For example, if the execution mode shown in FIG. 247(c) fails, execute any of the modes shown in FIGS. 248(c) to 248(f) and 249(c) to 249(h). The revival effect may be executed again. Similarly, even if the mode shown in FIG. 248(c) fails, the recovery effect after temporary stop failure may be executed again in the modes shown in FIGS. 249(c) to 249(h).
In this way, after a failed result is displayed once in the temporary stop failure recovery performance, the temporary stop failure recovery performance is finally shown to be a success, and the player is shown that the special lottery result is a win. In some cases, the revival performance after temporary stop failure may be executed multiple times.

In this way, even if the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner that indicates a loss, the recovery effect after the temporary stop loss may be executed when the background image is switched afterwards, resulting in a jackpot, so the fluctuating display It is possible to make the player feel the expectation of winning the jackpot until the final stage of the game.
In particular, since the background concealed image is displayed, the display content in the display area is simple, so in this state, the revival effect after a temporary stop failure may be executed, or the result of the recovery effect after a temporary stop failure may be successful. By being informed that a jackpot will occur, the player can feel great surprise and joy.

During the period (first period) in which the visibility of the special reach background image gradually decreases, if a revival effect is performed after a temporary stop failure, the decorative pattern will be temporarily stopped in a manner that indicates a failure, which will be disappointing. It is possible to stimulate the expectation of winning the jackpot without sustaining that feeling.
In the period when the special reach background image is not visible (second period), if the resurrection effect after a temporary stop loss is performed, the resurrection effect after a temporary stop loss is performed because the visibility of the resurrection effect after a temporary stop loss is high. The player can easily notice that the game has been stopped, and the player can be prevented from overlooking that a revival performance is being executed after a temporary stop failure.
During the period in which the normal background image gradually becomes more visible (3rd period) or during the period in which the normal background image is easier to see (4th period), if a revival effect is performed after a temporary stop failure, the normal background image will not be visible. In this way, the player can be made to think that the result of the special lottery is a loss, but the player may win the jackpot, thereby making the player excited.
These effects can be made more effective by increasing the lengths of the first to fourth periods as shown with reference to FIG. 233(b).
Note that by increasing the lengths of the first period to the fourth period, a revival performance may be performed after a plurality of temporary stop failures in a certain period.

Although the embodiment related to the recovery effect after temporary stop failure has been shown with reference to FIGS. 247 to 251, it may be combined with the other embodiments described above.

With reference to FIGS. 224 to 251, embodiments and variations thereof regarding the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" performance have been shown, but other embodiments described in this specification (for example, "Giant Tank Reach" described later) are shown. The embodiment of the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" performance or its variations may be applied to the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" performance.

An embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 224 to 236 will be described below. In the special reach performance "Giant Tank Reach" in this embodiment, instead of the special reach background image B, a special reach background image A is displayed. Furthermore, operation of the mission button 3700 becomes effective instead of the attack button 3710. Further, the pending image is not displayed during the period when the special reach background image is displayed.
FIG. 252(a) is a time chart showing an example of the performance from timing t10 to timing t45 in this embodiment. Note that other than the display mode of the suspended image and the suspended image and the production mode during special reach (background image, enemy tank mode, etc.), basically the same as the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 233(a) etc. Since the presentation modes are the same, explanations regarding these will be omitted.

FIG. 253 shows an example of the display at the start of the "Giant Tank Reach" effect. The display examples shown in FIGS. 253(a) to 253(g) respectively correspond to the display examples shown in FIGS. 234(a) to 234(g), and the display timing etc. of FIG. This is the same as the production example shown with reference to a) to FIG. 234(g).
FIG. 254 shows a display example at the final stage of "Giant Tank Reach" (at the time of jackpot). The display examples shown in FIGS. 254(a) to 254(g) respectively correspond to the display examples shown in FIGS. 235(a) to 235(g), and the display timing etc. This is the same as the production example shown with reference to a) to FIG. 235(g).
FIG. 255 shows an example of the display at the end of "Giant Tank Reach" (when you lose). The display examples shown in FIGS. 255(a) to 255(g) respectively correspond to the display examples shown in FIGS. 236(a) to 236(g), and the display timing etc. This is the same as the production example shown with reference to a) to FIG. 236(g).

As shown in FIGS. 252 to 255, in the "giant tank reach" in this embodiment, the displayed image of the enemy tank is different from that in the "enemy tank destruction reach". Moreover, a special reach background image A is displayed as a background image. Furthermore, operation of the mission button 3700 instead of the attack button 3710 becomes effective. Additionally, the pending image or pending image will not be displayed during "Giant Tank Reach."

The "giant tank reach" in this embodiment has a higher expectation of a jackpot when the reach effect is executed than the "enemy tank destruction reach" shown with reference to FIGS. 233 to 236 and the like. For example, the expectation level for "reach to destroy enemy tanks" is 10%, and the expectation level for "reach for giant tanks" is 50%.

As shown with reference to Figures 254 and 255, the relevant pending image or pending image was not displayed during "Giant Tank Reach", but the pending image is displayed and the pending image is not displayed. You may also do so.
With this configuration, the player can recognize the level of expectation shown by the pending image even during the "Giant Tank Reach". Also, while the highly anticipated "Giant Tank Reach" is being executed, the player basically does not consider increasing the number of pending changes or the expectation level of the variable display that will occur after the current variable display ( For example, even if a green pending image is displayed in the third pending display area, what the player is concerned about is the result of "Giant Tank Reach"). Therefore, by not displaying the pending image, the display contents of the display area can be made simple, and the player can concentrate on "Giant Tank Reach".

With reference to FIGS. 233 and 252, we have shown an example in which "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" occur at the same timing, but when "Giant Tank Reach" occurs, " Compared to the case where "enemy tank destruction reach" occurs, the time for which the normal background image is displayed may be made longer. For example, the time for which the normal background image is displayed is increased by 5 seconds, a reach state occurs at timing t15, and at timing t21, the normal background image A is switched to the special reach background image A, and a "giant tank reach" occurs. It may be started.

In the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 233 and 252, the length of reach performance is the same for "giant tank reach" and "enemy tank destruction reach"; It is also possible to have different lengths. For example, "Giant Tank Reach" may take longer than "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", or "Giant Tank Reach" may take a shorter time than "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach". may end.

If the relevant pending image (for example, the red pending image or the gold pending image) is displayed that indicates that the expected level is higher than the predetermined level, the "Giant Tank Reach" will always occur. good. On the other hand, if the pending image (for example, a white pending image or a green pending image) indicating that the expected level is lower than the predetermined level is displayed, a "huge tank reach" will occur, or an "enemy It is preferable to set the production mode to be one in which "tank destruction reach" occurs, or neither reach occurs.

In "Reach to Destroy Enemy Tanks," we have shown that it is possible to use any of the following: a black background concealment image, a white background concealment image, a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character, etc.; however, in "Giant Tank Reach", , a black background concealed image, a white background concealed image, a background concealed image consisting of a bomb character, etc. may be employed.
For example, a background concealing image consisting of a bomb character or the like may be employed in "Giant Tank Reach" and a black background concealing image may be employed in "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" so that the background concealing images are different. Alternatively, the same background concealment image (for example, both black background concealment images) may be used in the "giant tank reach" and "enemy tank destruction reach".

FIGS. 252(b) and 252(c) show a first period in which the background image becomes gradually less visible, a second period in which the background image becomes invisible, and a second period in which the background image gradually becomes less visible. The embodiment shown in FIG. 252(a) has been modified so that the length of the third period (specifically, 2 seconds), which is the period in which it becomes easier, is not the same but different. A plurality of embodiments (Modifications 01 to 12) are shown. Note that these embodiments may also produce the same effects as the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 233(b) and 233(c).

In this way, in the first reach effect ("Giant Tank Reach"), the pending image is not displayed while the special reach background image is being displayed. On the other hand, in the second reach performance ("enemy tank destruction reach"), a suspended image is displayed while the special reach background image is being displayed. In this way, by providing cases where the pending image is not displayed and cases where it is displayed depending on the type of reach, the display contents can be diversified.
For example, by not displaying the pending image, the player's attention can be focused on the performance using the tank. On the other hand, by displaying the pending image, the player can decide whether to operate the handle 302 or not. Furthermore, when the pending image is displayed, the player can know how much he or she expects to win the jackpot.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 252(a), the modified embodiment shown in FIG. 252(b), and FIG. 252(c) may be adopted as the visual recognition mode of the background image in "Giant Tank Reach". . Note that the contents shown in the time chart are the same as those shown with reference to FIG. 233, with some exceptions.
In addition, the embodiment shown in FIG. 233(a) and the modified embodiments shown in FIG. 233(b) and FIG. 233(c) are adopted as the visual recognition mode of the background image in "enemy tank destruction reach". Good too.
In addition, "Giant Tank Reach" using any of the embodiments or modifications shown in FIG. 252 and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" using any of the embodiments or modifications shown in FIG. 233 are executed. It may be configured so that it is wet.
For example, modification 01 shown in FIG. 252(b) may be adopted for "reach of giant tank", and modification 02 shown in FIG. 233(b) may be employed for "reach of destruction of enemy tank".

The embodiment and modified example shown with reference to FIG. 252 can also have the same effects as the embodiment and modified example shown with reference to FIG. 233.

As shown in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 252(b) and Modification 02 shown in FIG. The third period (3 seconds) in which "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" is displayed using a black background hiding image that is different from "Giant Tank Reach" is made longer than the third period (1 second) in which You may.
According to this configuration, the first reach effect ("Giant Tank Reach") is better than the second reach effect ("Enemy Tank Destruction Reach") at the end of the reach effect, which has not been displayed until then. Pending images that were not available will be displayed slowly.

As in modification example 01 shown in FIG. 252(b) and modification example 01 shown in FIG. The third period (3 seconds) in which "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" is displayed using a black background hiding image that is different from "Giant Tank Reach" is the same length as the third period (3 seconds) in which "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" is displayed. It can also be used as a salad.
According to such a configuration, display processing can be simplified.

As shown in Modification 02 shown in FIG. 252(b) and Modification 01 shown in FIG. The third period (1 second) in which "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" is displayed using a black background hiding image that is different from "Giant Tank Reach" is made shorter than the third period (3 seconds) in which "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" is displayed. You may.
According to this configuration, the first reach effect ("Giant Tank Reach") is better than the second reach effect ("Enemy Tank Destruction Reach") at the end of the reach effect, which has not been displayed until then. Pending images that were previously unavailable become visible rapidly in a short period of time.

When switching the background image at the end of the first reach effect ("Giant tank reach"), the background image changes more gradually than when switching the background image at the end of the second reach effect ("Enemy tank destruction reach"). By lengthening the third period, which is a period in which the number of pending images is easily recognized, the player's attention is drawn to the pending image that has been displayed for the first time in a while, and the player's awareness of the pending number can be increased. This allows the player to determine whether or not to shoot the game ball.
In particular, with the first reach effect, players tend to become less aware of the number of reservations due to the longer time elapsed since the fluctuating display started and the higher the expectation of a jackpot. By adopting this display method, it is possible to regain awareness of the number of reservations, and it is possible to increase awareness of the firing of game balls, which was paused during the reach performance.

As shown in Modification 02 shown in FIG. 252(b) and Modification 01 shown in FIG. During the fourth period (3 seconds) after the third period (3 seconds) when "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" is displayed, a black background hidden image different from "Giant Tank Reach" is displayed. It may be longer than the fourth period (1 second) after the period ends.
According to this configuration, the first reach effect ("Giant Tank Reach") is better than the second reach effect ("Enemy Tank Destruction Reach") when the reach effect ends, and the player who has been invisible or Since the suspended image, which was difficult to see, is clearly displayed for a relatively long period of time, the player can remember to shoot the game ball. In addition, there is a risk that some players may be shocked if the result of the special lottery is a loss, but it is necessary to ensure that the players have time to change their mind to the next time's changing display of decorative symbols. Can be done.

As in modification example 01 shown in FIG. 252(b) and modification example 01 shown in FIG. During the fourth period (1 second) after the end of the third period in which the enemy tank is destroyed, a display using a black background hiding image different from that in the "Giant Tank Reach" is displayed in "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach". The length may be the same as the fourth period (1 second) after the period ends.
According to such a configuration, display processing can be simplified.

As shown in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 252(b) and Modification 02 shown in FIG. During the fourth period (1 second) after the third period (1 second), in which "enemy tank destruction reach" is displayed, a black background hidden image different from "giant tank reach" is displayed. It may be shorter than the fourth period (3 seconds) after the period ends.
According to this configuration, the first reach effect ("Giant Tank Reach") is better than the second reach effect ("Enemy Tank Destruction Reach") because the decorative pattern temporarily stops at the end of the reach effect. The time taken can be shortened.

In addition, as a method for making the length of the fourth period different or the same for "huge tank reach" and "enemy tank destruction reach", the embodiments shown in FIGS. 252 and 233 are available. Alternatively, in a modified example, the timing at which the decorative pattern stops changing can be changed from timing t44 to timing t43 or timing t45.

In the "enemy tank destruction reach" shown with reference to FIG. 233 etc., the display priority of the decorative pattern may be higher than the display priority of the background concealment image. For example, during the period from timing t10 to timing t44, the display priority of the decorative pattern may be set higher than the display priority of the background concealment image.
With this configuration, a period in which the background image becomes gradually less visible (first period), a period in which the background image is invisible (second period), and a period in which the background image gradually becomes more visible ( During the third period), the decorative pattern is always visible.
Note that the ready-to-reach decorative pattern and the normal decorative pattern may be switched at an appropriate timing, such as at the start of the next variable display.
In this way, in the first reach effect ("Giant tank reach"), the decorative pattern is made invisible in the second period, and in the second reach effect ("Enemy tank destruction reach"), the decorative pattern is made visible in the second period. It may be possible.

In the first reach performance ("Giant Tank Reach"), which has relatively high expectations, even if the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in a losing state, the decorative pattern will become invisible in the second period, so It is possible to alleviate the shock that a player feels due to a losing result.
On the other hand, in the second reach performance ("enemy tank destruction reach"), which has relatively low expectations, the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in a losing state, and the decorative pattern is visible during the second period. However, the player does not feel that much of a shock; in fact, because the decorative pattern continues to be visible, the player can smoothly switch his mind to the next change in the decorative pattern, and the player is able to smoothly change his mind to the next change in the decorative pattern. Does not inhibit the tempo of fluctuations.

A third period in which a background concealed image consisting of, for example, a bomb character is displayed for "Giant Tank Reach", a black background concealed image different from "Giant Tank Reach" for "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" An embodiment has been shown in which the normal decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the same position and the same size during the third period in which the display using ``enemy tank destruction reach'' is performed. Other modes may be adopted as the stop display mode.
For example, within the third period, the size of the normal decorative pattern displayed at the same position may be changed to a smaller value. Alternatively, within the third period, the sizes of the normal decorative patterns displayed while changing the position may be the same. Alternatively, within the third period, the position of the normal decorative pattern may be changed and the size of the normal decorative pattern may be changed to a small value.
It should be noted that, strictly speaking, the same position may mean the average position of the normal decorative pattern that is displayed while swinging at a predetermined period.

After the reach effect for both "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" ends (the special reach background image for each reach ends), the same normal decorative pattern will be displayed as a decorative pattern from the third period. . Further, the temporary stop position of the normal decorative pattern is also the same. In addition, the third period in "Giant Tank Reach" is displayed using a hidden background image consisting of bomb characters, etc., and the third period in "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" is displayed in black color, which is different from "Giant Tank Reach". The display employs a background hidden image.
With such a configuration, after the first reach and second reach, which have different contents and expectations of the effect display, the player will normally see the decorative patterns in the same effect, so the player's intention will not be affected. can be directed to future changes.

Referring to FIG. 238, an example was shown in which a band-like look-ahead effect image is displayed when an "enemy tank destruction reach" is executed, but the band-like look-ahead effect image is displayed in the same way when a "giant tank reach" is executed. An image may also be displayed.
Further, the display mode of the band-like look-ahead effect image when the background concealment image is displayed in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 238 can be adopted as the display mode of the band-like look-ahead effect image in "Giant Tank Reach". . For example, the display priority may be set higher than that of the background concealment image so that the display of the band-shaped look-ahead effect image is not affected from the first period to the third period, or the display priority may be set lower than that of the background concealment image. In the first period, the visibility of the band-shaped look-ahead effect image may be reduced, in the second period it may be rendered invisible, and in the third period the visibility may be improved. Alternatively, the display of the band-like look-ahead effect image is stopped while the background concealment image is displayed (the visibility of the band-like look-ahead effect image decreases in the first period, becomes invisible in the second period, and may be rendered invisible even during periods of time).

As a display mode of the band-shaped pre-reading effect image, a mode in which the display priority is set higher than that of the background concealing image so that the display of the band-shaped pre-reading effect image is not affected from the first period to the third period, and the background concealing image A mode in which the display priority is lowered than that in the first period, so that the visibility of the band-shaped look-ahead effect image decreases, it becomes invisible in the second period, and the visibility improves in the third period. , the display of the band-like look-ahead effect image is stopped while the background concealment image is being displayed (the visibility of the band-like look-ahead effect image decreases in the first period, it becomes invisible in the second period, and the display of the band-like look-ahead effect image decreases during the third and fourth periods). However, any one of these display modes is adopted as the display mode of the band-like pre-reading effect image in "Giant Tank Reach". Any one of these display modes may be adopted as the display mode of the band-shaped pre-read effect image in "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach".

By adopting the same display mode as the display mode of the look-ahead effect image even for different types of reaches in this way, the effect processing can be shared, and the display processing and development man-hours can be simplified.
On the other hand, by employing different display modes for the look-ahead effect image depending on the type of reach, the effect mode can be diversified.

Referring to FIGS. 241 to 244, embodiments and variations thereof in which the tank accessory 3770 is made to emit light in a predetermined luminous color and are moved between the standby position and the movement position in "enemy tank destruction reach" will be described. However, in "Giant Tank Reach", the embodiments and variations thereof in "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" are adopted, and the tank accessory 3770 is made to emit light in a predetermined luminescent color, and the standby position and movement position are changed. It is also possible to move between them.
That is, any of the light emitting modes shown in FIGS. 242 and 243 may be adopted as the light emitting mode of the tank accessory 3770 in "Giant Tank Reach". Similarly, any of the operation modes shown in FIG. 244 may be adopted as the operation mode of the tank accessory 3770.

Even with these different types of reach, by adopting the same lighting mode and movement mode for the movable decorative member (tank accessory 3770), the production processing can be standardized, and display processing and development Man-hours can be simplified.
On the other hand, by employing different modes of light emission and movement of the movable decorative member (tank accessory 3770) depending on the type of reach, the presentation mode can be diversified.

Although the tank accessory 3770 is shown as an example of a movable decorative member, one or more other movable decorative members having similar functions may be provided on the game board 5. For example, a total of three movable decorative members may be provided, with their standby positions located above, to the right, and to the left of the display area, and whose moving position is located near the center of the display area. When a plurality of movable decorative members are provided, they may emit light or move at the same timing as the tank accessory 3770, or may emit light or move at a different timing from the tank accessory 3770. That is, any of the light emitting modes and operation modes shown in FIGS. 242 to 244 can be adopted for other movable decorative members as well.
In addition, the lighting mode and movement mode of other movable decorative members may be different between "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach". '', any of the light emission modes and operation modes shown in FIGS. 242 to 244 can be adopted.

Although the tank accessory 3770 is shown as an example of a decorative member that can emit light, a decorative member that can emit light may also be provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5. The decorative means provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the door frame left side unit 530, the door frame right side unit 550, etc.) and the decorative member provided on the game board 5 may be made to emit light at the same timing as the tank accessory 3770. However, the light may be emitted at a different timing from that of the tank accessory 3770. That is, any of the light-emitting modes shown in FIGS. 242 to 244 can be adopted for the light-emitting decorative means provided on the door frame 3 and the light-emitting decorative member provided on the game board 5.
Furthermore, the lighting modes of the decorative means provided on the door frame 3 and the decorative members provided on the game board 5 may be different between "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach". For "enemy tank destruction reach", any of the light emission modes shown in FIGS. 242 to 244 can be adopted.

With reference to FIGS. 242 and 243, an embodiment and a modification example of the display mode of the pending image has been shown in "enemy tank destruction reach", but also in "huge tank reach", "enemy tank destruction reach" has been shown. The pending image may be displayed by adopting any of the display modes of the pending image in the embodiment or its modification.

For example, the modification 01 shown in FIG. 242(b) may be adopted for the "reach of giant tank", and the embodiment shown in FIG. 242(a) may be adopted for the "reach of destruction of enemy tanks".
In "Giant Tank Reach", where expectations are relatively high, as soon as it is confirmed that the result of the special lottery is a loss, the pending image will be returned to its normal state as soon as the result of the special lottery is determined to be a loss. It is possible to alleviate the shock of a player who ends up losing the game even though the game was intended for the game.
On the other hand, in the case of "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", which has a relatively low level of expectation, even if it is confirmed that the result of the special lottery is a loss, the pending image will be displayed in red, so that the level of expectation will be reduced. It is possible to give an impression to the player as to whether the variable display was performed under , and it can be used as a reference when the same effect situation occurs in the next and subsequent variable displays.

Alternatively, the embodiment shown in FIG. 242(a) may be adopted for the "giant tank reach", and the modification 01 shown in FIG. 242(b) may be adopted for the "enemy tank destruction reach".
In this way, in "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", which has relatively high expectations, even if it is confirmed that the result of the special lottery is a loss, by displaying the pending image in red, To make players clearly aware of the fact that the result of a special lottery turned out to be a loss even though they had high expectations, and to stimulate the players' feelings toward the next and subsequent variable displays.
On the other hand, in the case of "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", which has a relatively low level of expectation, as soon as it is confirmed that the result of the special lottery has been a loss, the pending image will be returned to its normal state, and it will be possible to It is possible to smoothly switch the player's feelings from the reach performance in which the expectation level is low and the jackpot is unlikely to result, to the next variable display.

Regarding the display mode of the pending image, which embodiment or modification is adopted between the embodiment for "Giant Tank Reach" and the embodiment for "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" should be decided based on the priority of such effects. It is advisable to use them in combination as appropriate.

In this embodiment, the jackpot expectation level of "Giant Tank Reach" may be lower than the jackpot expectation level of "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" shown with reference to FIGS. 233 to 236 and the like.

Not limited to the above-mentioned example, a modified example applied to the embodiment related to "enemy tank destruction reach" shown with reference to FIG. 233 etc. can be applied to "giant tank reach" shown with reference to FIG. 252 etc. It is also possible to apply this embodiment to a new embodiment.

In this way, in the third period of the first reach performance ("giant tank reach"), a display (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special display A") in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases is performed.
Furthermore, in the third period of the second reach performance ("enemy tank destruction reach"), a display (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special display B") in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases is performed.

As shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, when a jackpot occurs in the normal state, the subsequent gaming state is a time-saving state, a non-time-saving probability variable state, and a time-saving state that are more advantageous to the player than the normal state. It may become a variable probability state (variable time saving state). The advantageous states described below refer to the time-saving state and variable time-saving state among the states.
As shown with reference to FIGS. 142 and 143, when a "loss with time saving" occurs as a special lottery result, or when a losing special lottery result occurs a predetermined number of times in a row, the time saving state is activated. It is also possible to have a configuration in which it is generated.
In an advantageous situation, the player rotates the handle 302 significantly and performs an action of hitting the game ball toward the right side of the game area (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "right-handed hitting"). A game ball is placed in a provided starting hole (for example, second starting hole 2004).
Further, when a jackpot occurs during an advantageous state and the advantageous state continues thereafter, the number of balls put out due to the jackpot or small hit during that period is added up and stored in the peripheral control board 1510.
Furthermore, in an advantageous state, a normal background image C, which indicates that the player is in an advantageous state, is displayed instead of the normal background images A and B.
This advantageous state ends when certain conditions are met. Specifically, after the advantageous state has started, the decorative pattern does not become a jackpot and a loss result is displayed a predetermined number of times in a row (the special lottery result is a loss result a predetermined number of times in a row) Termination subject to the following conditions: For example, in the variable time saving state, if the loss occurs 100 times in a row, the variable time saving state ends. Note that the time saving state may also end when a loss occurs a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in a row. Furthermore, in a so-called fall type game in which a lottery is held to determine whether or not to end the variable time saving state at the start of the variation of each game, a predetermined condition may be satisfied if the lottery to end the variable time saving state is won.
The advantageous state ends when a predetermined condition is met, but the timing at which the advantageous state ends (specifically, when the advantageous state ends after a predetermined number of losses (for example, 100)) During the 100th variation (for falling type, during the variation where the player won the falling lottery), the normal background image C is switched to the normal background image A or the normal background image B, and during a jackpot or an advantageous situation, the player The total number of game balls paid out is displayed.

FIG. 256 shows an image displayed at the end of right-handed hitting. FIG. 256(a) shows a background concealed image A at the end of right-handed batting, FIG. 256(b) shows a background concealed image B at the end of right-handed batting, and FIG. 256(c) shows a background concealed image C at the end of right-handed batting. . These images are based on the sunglasses worn by bomb characters.
FIG. 256(d) shows a game result image showing the end of "Dynamite Time", which is a right-handed game, the number of consecutive games (13 times), and the number of game balls paid out to the player (14,125 balls). ing.

The performance mode at the end of right-handed hitting will be explained with reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 257 and the display example shown in FIG. 259.
In FIG. 257(a), from timing t0 to timing t7, the 99th variable display of decorative symbols is performed in the variable time saving state, which is an advantageous state. Note that the decorative pattern displayed during the variable time saving state is a right-handed medium decorative pattern.
After that, from timing t8 to timing t24, the 100th variable display of decorative symbols is performed in the variable time saving state. Note that this time chart shows an example of performance in which the result of the 100th variable display of decorative symbols is a loss.
FIG. 259(a) shows a display example in a period from timing t14 to timing t16. A display state in which a right-handed medium decorative pattern is temporarily stopped on the near side of the normal background image C is shown.

From timing t16 to timing t17, the background concealment image A at the end of right-handed hitting is displayed. FIG. 259(b) shows a state in which the background concealment image A is displayed at the end of right-handed hitting.
From timing t17 to timing t18, the background concealment image B at the end of right-handed hitting is displayed. FIG. 259(c) shows a state in which the background concealment image B is displayed at the end of right-handed hitting.
From timing t18 to timing t20, the background concealment image C at the end of right-handed hitting is displayed. FIG. 259(d) shows a state in which the background concealment image C is displayed at the end of right-handed hitting.

From timing t18 to timing t20, game result images showing game results during right-handed play, such as "Dynamite time finished,""Defeated 13 bodies," and "Obtained 14125," are displayed. Note that the display of "Dynamite Time End" indicates that the variable time saving state ends. Furthermore, the display "13 enemies defeated" indicates that the number of consecutive attempts was 13. In addition, the display of "14125 earned" indicates to the player that the number of game balls that were won and paid out in the big winning hole 2005 while hitting right was 14125 balls.
Further, at timing t19 during the second period in which the background concealment image C at the end of right-hand hitting is displayed and the background image is not visible, the background image is switched from the normal background image C to the normal background image A. Note that the switching may be performed at timing t18 or timing t20.

From timing t20 to timing t21, the background concealment image B at the end of right-handed hitting is displayed. FIG. 259(e) shows a state in which the background concealment image B is displayed at the end of right-handed hitting. At this time, the background image has been changed to the normal background image A. In addition, the decorative designs have been changed to normal decorative designs.
From timing t21 to timing t22, the background concealment image A at the end of right-handed hitting is displayed. FIG. 259(f) shows a state in which the background concealment image A is displayed at the end of right-handed hitting.
From timing t22 to timing t24, the normal decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed. FIG. 259(g) shows a state in which the background concealment image A is no longer displayed at the end of right-handed hitting.
Thereafter, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed from timing t24 to timing t25. FIG. 259(h) shows a state in which the normal decorative pattern is stopped and displayed.

At timing t25, a new variable display of decorative patterns is started, but at this time, the background image has been changed to the normal background image A, and the decorative pattern has been changed to the normal decorative pattern. Furthermore, since the gaming state has been changed from the probability variable time saving state to the normal state, the probability of determining a jackpot has also been changed from 1/30 to 1/300 (see FIGS. 142 and 143).

In this way, when the background concealed image is displayed at the end of right-handed hitting, there is a period in which the background image becomes gradually less visible (first period), a period in which the background image is invisible (second period), and a period in which the background image gradually becomes less visible. There are a period in which the visibility of the background image becomes easier (third period) and a period after the visibility of the background image returns to its original state (fourth period).

In addition, if the result of the 100th variable display in the variable probability state is a jackpot, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot without displaying the background concealment image at the end of the right hit.
At this time, a "giant tank reach" performance or "enemy tank destruction reach" performance may be performed.

257(b), FIG. 257(c), and FIG. 257(d) respectively change the timing of displaying the background concealment image at the end of right-hand hitting in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 257(a). The embodiments shown in FIG.
For example, in the time chart shown in FIG. 257(c), at timing t24, the end of the display of the background concealment image A at the end of right-hand hitting and the stop of the variable display of the decorative symbols are performed at the same time.

258(b) and 258(c) are examples in which the display times and display timings of the background concealed image A at the end of right-handed hitting, the background concealed image B at the end of right-handed hitting, and the background concealed image C at the end of right-handed batting are modified ( Modifications 01 to 12) are shown.

By performing such a display, the player can know the number of consecutive wins (the number of consecutive jackpots) and the number of game balls acquired at the end of the right-handed hitting state.
Additionally, when normal background images A to C are not displayed, it is possible to take a photo of the display area where the number of consecutive games and the number of game balls acquired using a mobile terminal such as a smartphone or digital camera. can.
Further, behind the scenes where such a display is performed, the background image and decorative pattern can be smoothly switched from those in the variable time saving state or the time saving state to those in the normal state.

The period during which the background image is invisible at the end of a right-handed hit (second period) is shorter than the period during which the background image is invisible during "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" (second period). Good too.
For example, the length of the second period in Modification 04 shown in FIG. 258 is shorter than the length of the second period in Modification 03 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

Even if the period during which the background image is invisible at the end of the right-handed hit (second period) and the period during which the background image is invisible during "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" (second period) are the same length. good.
For example, the length of the second period in modification 01 shown in FIG. 258 is the same as the length of the second period in modification 01 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

Even if the period during which the background image is invisible at the end of the right-handed hit (second period) is longer than the period during which the background image is invisible during "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" (second period). good. In addition, the period during which the background image is not visible at the end of right-handed hitting (second period) is made to last for at least half of the fluctuation time in the relevant fluctuation (that is, the final fluctuation at which the advantageous state ends). Good too. Half or more of this variation time may be longer than the shortest time of all variation patterns.
For example, the length of the second period in Modification 03 shown in FIG. 258 is longer than the length of the second period in Modification 04 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

The period during which the background image at the end of the right-handed shot becomes gradually easier to see (3rd period) is the period during which the background image during "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" becomes gradually easier to see (3rd period) It may be shorter than .
For example, the length of the third period in modification 02 shown in FIG. 258 is shorter than the length of the third period in modification 01 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

A period in which the background image at the end of a right-handed shot becomes gradually easier to see (3rd period), and a period in which the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" becomes gradually easier to see (3rd period) and may be the same length.
For example, the length of the third period in modification 01 shown in FIG. 258 is the same as the length of the third period in modification 01 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

The period during which the background image at the end of the right-handed shot becomes gradually easier to see (3rd period) is the period during which the background image during "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" becomes gradually easier to see (3rd period) It may be longer than .
For example, the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 258 is longer than the length of the third period in Modification 02 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

The period after the visibility of the background image at the end of the right-handed hit returns to the original (4th period) is the period after the visibility of the background image returns to the original during "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" It may be shorter than the period (fourth period).
For example, the length of the fourth period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 258 is shorter than the length of the fourth period in Modification 02 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

The period after the visibility of the background image at the end of the right-handed hit returns to the original (4th period), and the period after the visibility of the background image returns to the original during "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" The period (fourth period) may be the same length.
For example, the length of the fourth period in modification 01 shown in FIG. 258 is the same as the length of the fourth period in modification 01 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

The period after the visibility of the background image at the end of the right-handed hit returns to the original (4th period) is the period after the visibility of the background image returns to the original during "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" It may be shorter than the period (fourth period).
For example, the length of the fourth period in modification 02 shown in FIG. 258 is shorter than the length of the fourth period in modification 01 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

We have shown an example in which the background image displayed at the end of a right-handed hit and the background image displayed after a "giant tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach" are both normal background images A. , the background image displayed at the end of a right-handed hit may be different from the background image displayed after a "giant tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach" ends in a loss.
For example, the normal background image B may be displayed at the end of the right-handed hit, and the normal background image A may be displayed after the "giant tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach" ends in failure. Alternatively, the normal background image A may be displayed at the end of the right hit, and the normal background image B may be displayed after the "giant tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach" ends in failure.

Although we have shown an example in which the normal background image A is displayed instead of the normal background image C at the end of right-handed hitting, it is also possible to display either the normal background image A or the normal background image B instead of the normal background image C. It may be displayed randomly.
Also, regarding the background image while hitting right, in addition to the normal background image C, there is a background image in another form other than the normal background image C (for example, a background image with a different form of a bomb character or a different form of dialogue). It may be displayed randomly as a background image while hitting right-handed.

In addition, in place of the normal background image C, the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B may be displayed when the right-handed hit ends. At this time, it is preferable to display the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B from the beginning of the moving image (the display state shown in FIG. 227(a) or FIG. 227(d)).
Note that while the player is hitting the right hand, a background video image exclusively for hitting the right player may be displayed.

With reference to FIG. 256, an example of the background concealment image at the end of right-handed hitting is shown, but a background concealing image in another display mode may be employed as the background concealing image at the end of right-handed hitting. For example, one of the background concealment images consisting of a black background concealment image, a white background concealment image, a bomb character, etc. may be used as the background concealment image exclusively for the end of right-handed hitting.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 259, an example was shown in which the game result image is displayed in the second period (from timing t18 to timing t20), but the game result image is displayed in the first period and the third period. may be displayed. In this case, by moving the game result image from the left and right of the display area in accordance with the movement of the background hidden image at the end of right-handed play, the game result image can be made to appear in the display area, or the game result image can be deleted from the display area. It is a good idea to do something like this.

In the variable display of decorative symbols at the end of the right-handed hit, whether a reach mode occurs or a reach mode does not occur, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, a background hidden image is displayed. . On the other hand, in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", a background concealment image is displayed as the reach mode occurs.

With reference to FIG. 242, etc., maintain the display mode of the pending image before and after displaying the background concealed image when executing "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" (for example, display the red pending image as it is) It is also possible to change the display mode (for example, change the red pending image to a normal pending image (white pending image)). A similar display may also be made for "Reach").
On the other hand, when the right-handed hitting state ends and the normal state returns by performing the variable display of the decorative pattern a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), a background concealment image is displayed at the end of right-handed hitting, but at this time, Regarding the reserved image displayed after the end of the background concealed image at the end of right-hand hitting, it is preferable that a normal reserved image (white reserved image) be displayed.
In addition, the pending image that will be displayed after the right-hand hit is displayed as a normal pending image (white pending image), and the pending image is displayed in a manner that indicates that expectations are higher than the normal pending image. It is a good idea to avoid displaying images (red pending images or gold pending images).

At the end of the right-hand hitting state, a background concealment image is displayed at the end of the right-hand hitting state, and during a period (third period) in which normal background image A and normal background image B gradually become easier to see, the held image is replaced with another held image. It is best not to change it.
Similarly, during the execution of "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", a background concealing image is displayed, and during the period (third period) in which the normal background image gradually becomes more visible, the reserved image is displayed in other ways. It is preferable not to change it to the reserved image.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player overlooks that the displayed expectation level has changed due to a change in the aspect of the pending image.

Referring to FIG. 238, etc., the display mode of the band-shaped pre-reading effect image can be maintained before and after displaying the background concealment image when executing "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", or the display mode of the band-shaped pre-reading effect image can be maintained. (Incidentally, a similar display may also be made for "Giant Tank Reach").
On the other hand, when the right-handed hitting state ends and the normal state is reached by performing variable display of the decorative pattern a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), a background concealment image is displayed at the end of right-handed hitting, but at this time, It is preferable that the band-like look-ahead effect image not be displayed after the background concealment image at the end of right-hand hitting. Alternatively, in the variable display where the right-handed hit state ends, the band-shaped look-ahead effect image may not be displayed.
Whether or not to execute the band-shaped look-ahead effect image is determined by the look-ahead process at the time of starting winnings, but for starting winnings that occur after the start of the variable display a predetermined number of times before the end of the advantageous state, the band-like look-ahead effect image It is a good idea to prevent the display from starting. For example, it is preferable not to start displaying the band-shaped look-ahead effect image for a hold that occurs during the 96th to 100th variable display.

If the result of the special lottery is a jackpot when the decorative pattern changes at the end (100th time) of the right-handed state, the period in which the background concealment image consisting of sunglasses etc. is displayed (1st period to 1st period) A jackpot notification image may be displayed to notify that a jackpot will occur during the third period) or during the period after the background concealed image is displayed (fourth period).

An embodiment in which the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 257 is modified to display a jackpot notification image that announces that a jackpot will occur will be described with reference to FIG. 260.
FIG. 260(a) shows an embodiment in which a jackpot notification image is displayed during a period from timing t14, which is the timing when the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped, to timing t16, which is the start timing of the first period. ing.

Modifications (modifications 01 to 14) in which the period for displaying the jackpot notification image is modified in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 260(a) will be described below with reference to FIG. 260(b). do.

In modification 01, a jackpot notification image is displayed during a period from timing t14, which is the timing at which the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped, to timing t18, which is the end timing of the first period.
In modification 02, a jackpot notification image is displayed during a period from timing t14 to timing t20, which is the end timing of the second period.
In modification 03, a jackpot notification image is displayed during a period from timing t14 to timing t22, which is the end timing of the third period.
In modification 04, a jackpot notification image is displayed during a period from timing t14 to timing t24, which is the end timing of the fourth period.

In modification 05, the jackpot notification image is displayed during a period from timing t16, which is the start timing of the first period, to timing t18, which is the end timing of the first period.
In modification 06, a jackpot notification image is displayed during a period from timing t16 to timing t20, which is the end timing of the second period.
In modification 07, a jackpot notification image is displayed during a period from timing t16 to timing t22, which is the end timing of the third period.
In modification 08, a jackpot notification image is displayed during a period from timing t16 to timing t24, which is the end timing of the fourth period.

In modification 09, the jackpot notification image is displayed during a period from timing t18, which is the start timing of the second period, to timing t20, which is the end timing of the second period.
In modification 10, a jackpot notification image is displayed during a period from timing t18 to timing t22, which is the end timing of the third period.
In modification 11, a jackpot notification image is displayed during a period from timing t18 to timing t24, which is the end timing of the fourth period.

In modification 12, the jackpot notification image is displayed during a period from timing t20, which is the start timing of the third period, to timing t22, which is the end timing of the third period.
In modification 13, a jackpot notification image is displayed during a period from timing t20 to timing t24, which is the end timing of the fourth period.

In modification 14, the jackpot notification image is displayed during a period from timing t22, which is the start timing of the fourth period, to timing t24, which is the end timing of the fourth period.

The timing to start displaying the jackpot notification image is timing t14, which is the timing when the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped, timing t16, which is the start timing of the first period, and timing t18, which is the start timing of the second period. , timing t20, which is the start timing of the third period, and timing t22, which is the start timing of the fourth period, are shown, but predetermined timing within these periods may be used as the timing to start displaying the jackpot notification image.
For example, timing t15, timing t17, timing t19, timing t21, and timing t23 may be set as the timing to start displaying the jackpot notification image.

In addition, the timing at which the display of the jackpot notification image ends is timing t16, which is the start timing of the first period, timing t18, which is the end timing of the first period, timing t20, which is the end timing of the second period, and timing t20, which is the end timing of the second period. Although timing t22, which is the end timing, and timing t24, which is the end timing of the fourth period, are shown, a predetermined timing within these periods may be used as the timing to end the display of the jackpot notification image.
For example, timing t15, timing t17, timing t19, timing t21, and timing t23 may be set as timings at which the display of the jackpot notification image ends.

In this way, the timing to start displaying the jackpot notification image can be set to any timing from timing t14 to timing t23, and the timing to end displaying the jackpot notification image can be set to any timing from timing t15 to timing t24. can.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 260, the normal background image C is switched to the normal background image A at timing t19, but if the display of the jackpot notification image has started before timing t19, The normal background image C may continue to be displayed after the timing t19, and the normal background image C may be changed to the jackpot background image at the timing t25.

The display priority of the jackpot announcement image is preferably set higher than the display priority of the background concealment image and the game result image. Further, the jackpot notification image may be displayed at a position overlapping with the game result image. The jackpot announcement image may be a moving image, and the jackpot announcement may be made by displaying the moving image.

During the period from the start of the variable display until the display of the background concealment image at the end of the right-hand hit is executed, the period from the start of the variable display until the display of the background concealment image at the end of the right-hand hit is the period from the start of the variable display to the special reach in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach". It is preferable to make the period shorter than the period until the display of the background hidden image is executed.
For example, in the production example shown in FIG. 257(a), the display of the background concealment image at the end of right-handed hitting is started at timing t16, eight seconds after timing t8 when the variable display was started.
On the other hand, in the "Giant tank reach" shown with reference to FIG. 252(a) and the "Enemy tank destruction reach" shown with reference to FIG. 233(a), the timing when 36 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variable display. At t36, display of the special reach background concealment image is started.
Also, at the end of the right hit (if the result of the 100th variation display is a loss), "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" will not be executed, and the special reach background concealment image will not be displayed. It is recommended to configure it as follows.

With such a configuration, a suitable performance mode can be realized.

In this manner, in the third period at the end of the advantageous state, a display (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special display C") in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases is performed.

When executing the first reach effect ("Giant Tank Reach"), by displaying a hidden background image of a bomb character, etc., even if the first reach effect is a failure, a special effect in which the character appears can be created. This can alleviate the player's feelings of regret.
Also, when comparing the special display A in the first reach effect and the special display C at the end of the right hit, the background concealment image used for special display A and the background concealment image used for special display C are different. There is. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from confusing the gaming state.

When executing the second reach effect ("enemy tank destruction reach"), a black background hidden image is displayed to calm the player's regret even if the second reach effect results in a loss. be able to.
Also, when comparing the special display B in the second reach effect and the special display C at the end of the right hit, the background concealment image used for special display B and the background concealment image used for special display C are different. There is. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from confusing the gaming states.

Next, with reference to FIG. 261 and the like, an embodiment of a pseudo-continuous effect in which the decorative patterns are visually recognized as if they have stopped, and then are displayed while changing again will be described.
Specifically, as shown in the time charts of FIGS. 261 and 262, the left and right decorative patterns are temporarily stopped at decorative patterns with different numbers, and then a special decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed on the middle pattern. When the stop effect is performed, each temporarily stopped decorative pattern is scrolled downward again and displayed in a variable manner. Further, when the downward scrolling movement is started again after each decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, an image "x2" is displayed in the display area. Hereinafter, such a performance will be referred to as a pseudo-continuous performance.

When the image "x2" is displayed, the left and right decorative patterns temporarily stop at the decorative patterns with different numbers, and a special pattern is displayed on the middle pattern, causing the temporarily stopped decorative pattern to move downwards again. It may change by scrolling in the direction. In this case, instead of the image "x2", the image "x3" is displayed. Hereinafter, these "x2" and "x3" images will be referred to as pseudo consecutive number display images. FIGS. 261(b) and 262(b) are time charts showing an example of a performance in which an image "x3" is displayed after an image "x2" is displayed.

Below, a production example will be specifically shown with reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 261(b) and the display example shown in FIG. 263. At timing t0, variable display of decorative patterns is started.
At timing t4, the left decorative pattern temporarily stops. At timing t6, the right decorative pattern temporarily stops. FIG. 263(a) shows the display state at this time. At timing t8, the medium decorative pattern temporarily stops. In the medium decorative pattern, a special decorative pattern with the kanji ``Zoku'' attached is displayed. FIG. 263(b) shows the display state at this time. At timing t10, the left to right decorative patterns are again scrolled downward and displayed in a variable manner. In addition, "x2" in the pseudo consecutive number display image is displayed at the upper left of the display area. FIG. 263(c) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t14, the left decorative pattern temporarily stops. At timing t16, the right decorative pattern temporarily stops. FIG. 263(d) shows the display state at this time. Note that, as shown in this figure, the display priority of the pseudo consecutive number display image is higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern. At timing t18, the medium decorative pattern temporarily stops. In the medium decorative pattern, a special decorative pattern with the kanji ``Zoku'' attached is displayed. FIG. 263(e) shows the display state at this time. At timing t20, the left to right decorative patterns are again scrolled downward and displayed in a variable manner. In addition, "x3" in the pseudo consecutive number display image is displayed at the upper left of the display area. FIG. 263(f) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t25, the left decorative pattern temporarily stops. At timing t30, the right decorative symbol temporarily stops at the same number as the left decorative symbol (number "2"), and a reach state occurs. FIG. 263(g) shows the display state at this time. From timing t37 to timing t39, "x3" in the pseudo consecutive number display image gradually becomes translucent and difficult to see. FIG. 263(h) shows the display state at this time. At timing t40, the medium decorative pattern temporarily stops. The display mode of the decorative pattern at the time of temporary stop indicates whether the result of the special lottery is a jackpot or a loss. At timing t41, the left to right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and this state is maintained until timing t42. After timing t42, the next and subsequent variable displays are executed, or the jackpot game state is executed.

Although the presentation mode of the pseudo-continuous presentation has been described using FIG. 261(b) as a representative, similar displays are performed in other time charts as well.

In the example of the effect shown in the time chart of Figure 261(a), after "x2" is finally displayed as the pseudo continuous number display image, it does not develop into "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach". Then, at timing t31, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a reach loss or a jackpot. The pseudo continuous number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t27 to timing t29.
Note that the pseudo-repeat number display image has a higher display priority than the normal background image, so that a part of the normal background image is difficult or impossible to see due to the pseudo-repeat number display image. The fact that the pseudo continuous number display image of the time chart gradually disappears is equivalent to the fact that the normal background image gradually becomes visible.

In the example of the effect shown in the time chart of Figure 262(a), "x2" is finally displayed as the pseudo-repeat number display image, and then the effect develops into the "Giant Tank Reach" effect and the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" effect. do. After the ready-to-reach effect occurs at timing t20, the ready-to-reach effect is executed in the manner shown in FIG. 252(a) or FIG. 233(a).

In the example of the effect shown in the time chart of Figure 262(b), "x3" is finally displayed as the pseudo continuous number display image, and then the effect develops into the "Giant Tank Reach" effect and the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" effect. do. After the ready-to-reach occurrence occurs at timing t30, the ready-to-reach effect is executed in the manner shown in FIG. 252(a) and FIG. 233(a).

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 262(a) and 262(b), the pseudo consecutive number display image is visually recognized by the background concealment image displayed at the start of the "Giant Tank Reach" production or the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" production. It becomes difficult or impossible to see, and the display ends in this state. For example, the display may be ended at a predetermined timing in the period from timing t13 to timing t19 shown in FIG. 252(a) or FIG. 233(a).

As described above, the display priority of the pseudo consecutive number display image is higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern, and is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. In FIG. 263, it is shown that a pseudo consecutive number display image is displayed on the near side of the decorative pattern.
Furthermore, the display priority of the pseudo-number of consecutive runs display image is lower than the display priority of the background hidden image, and the pseudo-number of consecutive runs display image is displayed behind the background hidden image.

As shown in FIG. 261(a), from timing t27 to timing t29, the pseudo consecutive number display image ("x2") is gradually erased.
Similarly, as shown in FIG. 261(b), from timing t37 to timing t39, the pseudo consecutive number display image ("x3") is gradually erased.
During these periods, the pseudo-repeat count display image gradually changes from an opaque state to a translucent state over a period of 2 seconds, and the display ends when it finally becomes transparent, making it difficult to visually recognize the background image and decorative patterns. It is good to improve your sexuality. FIG. 263(h) shows a state in which the pseudo consecutive number display image is displayed in a semi-transparent state.
Note that instead of gradually making the entire pseudo-run count display image transparent, the pseudo-run count display image is made transparent from the surroundings, and finally the central part is made transparent to display the pseudo-run count display image. may be terminated.
Other display modes may be adopted as long as the pseudo consecutive count display image is displayed in a manner in which the visibility gradually decreases.

The display priority of the pseudo consecutive number display image is higher than that of the decorative pattern and is displayed in front of the decorative pattern, but when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the display priority of the pseudo consecutive number display image is given. The priority level may be temporarily lowered than the priority level of the decorative pattern, so that at least a part of the pseudo consecutive number display image is hidden by the temporarily stopped display of the decorative pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 262(a) and 262(b), when a background concealing image is displayed because the background image can be switched to a special reach background image, a predetermined period during which the background concealing image is displayed It is preferable to end the display of the pseudo consecutive number display image at the timing of . For example, the display may be terminated while background concealed image A and background concealed image B are being displayed, or the display may be terminated while background concealed image C is displayed.

When the pseudo-continuation performance is executed and the pseudo-continuation number display image ("x2", "x3") is displayed, it is preferable that the stop display mode of the decorative symbol does not become a non-reach loss.
In other words, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern stop at the decorative pattern with the same number, and become a ready-to-win mode, and thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 261(a) and 261(b). As shown in FIG. 262(a) and FIG. 262(b), either the medium decoration pattern stops without developing into a special reach and indicates the result of the special lottery, or as shown in FIG. 262(a) and FIG. It is preferable that the symbols stop to indicate the result of the special lottery.
Alternatively, when "x3" is displayed as the pseudo consecutive number display image, the stop display mode of the decorative pattern may be set so that it does not become a non-reach loss. In addition, if "x2" is displayed as the pseudo consecutive number display image, but "x3" is not displayed, the stop display mode of the decorative pattern may be set to non-reach loss. .

The expectation of a jackpot is higher in the case where the pseudo-continuation performance is not performed and the case where the pseudo-continuation performance is performed and a pseudo-continuation count display image of "x2" is displayed.
In addition, there are two cases in which a pseudo continuous effect is performed and a pseudo continuous count display image of "×2" is displayed, but a pseudo continuous count display image of "×3" is not displayed, and a pseudo continuous effect is performed. The expectation of a jackpot is higher in the latter case than in the case where the pseudo consecutive number display image "x2" is displayed and then the pseudo consecutive number display image "x3" is displayed.

The manner in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the pseudo-continuous presentation is not limited to the display example shown in FIG. 263, and other temporary stopping manners may be used.
For example, only one of the left and right decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped, and special symbols such as "NEXT", "Run", "Pseudo-Run", and "Next" may be stopped in the middle decorative design.
Alternatively, such a special pattern may be stopped not only on the middle decorative pattern but also on one of the left and right decorative patterns.
Further, each decorative pattern on the left center right may be temporarily stopped in a special combination (numbers "1, 3, 5", numbers "6, 7, 7", etc.).
In this way, in the pseudo-continuous performance, some or all of the left decorative symbol, middle decorative symbol, and right decorative symbol are visually recognized as if they were stopped and displayed, and then these symbols are moved and displayed again to play the game. It is a good idea to make it visible to the public.
In addition, although the decorative pattern itself does not temporarily stop, the variation of the decorative pattern can be achieved by displaying a production image in which a predetermined character's recollection story progresses step by step in front of the decorative pattern to hide part or all of the decorative pattern. It may also be visible to the player like a display break. In this case, effect images showing different stories will be displayed between the first effect image and the second effect image.

In the production example shown in FIGS. 261(a) and 261(b), by displaying the pseudo consecutive number display image on the front side of the decorative pattern, it becomes easier for the player to understand the expectation level. In addition, the display of the pseudo consecutive number display image ends at a timing (timing t29 or timing t39) before the timing (timing t30 or timing t40) when a part of the decorative pattern (medium decorative pattern) is temporarily stopped and displayed. This ensures the visibility of the decorative patterns and makes it easier for players to recognize the special lottery results.
In the production examples shown in FIGS. 262(a) and 262(b), by ending the display of the pseudo-sequence number display image during the period in which the background concealment image is displayed, the pseudo-sequence number display image is displayed during the special reach. Since the number display image is not displayed, it is possible for the player to concentrate on the battle results between tanks during execution of the special reach.

In the production example shown in FIG. 261(a), the pseudo continuous number display image is gradually erased from timing t27 to timing t29, but may be erased at other timings. FIG. 264(b) shows an embodiment in which the mode of deletion of the pseudo consecutive number display image is modified in the production example shown in FIG. 261(a).
As shown in Modifications 01 to 11 shown in FIG. 264(b), the timing to start erasing the pseudo-run count display image, the period required to erase the pseudo-run count display image, and the end of erasing the pseudo-run count display image The period from when the pseudo consecutive number display image is erased until the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed may be determined. Note that FIG. 264(a) is the same diagram as FIG. 261(a). Note that in Modification 01 and the like, for convenience of drawing drawings, parts that should be written as "gradually erased" are written as "gradually".

In order to simplify the comparison with other inventions, the period from the start of display of the pseudo consecutive number display image until the start of erasure (timing t10 to timing t27 in FIG. 264(a)) is shown for convenience. It may also be referred to as a "second period." Similarly, the period required for erasing the pseudo consecutive number display image (timing t27 to timing t29 in FIG. 264(a)) may be referred to as a "third period" for convenience. Similarly, the period from when the pseudo consecutive number display image is completely erased until the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed may be referred to as a "fourth period" (timing t29 to timing t30 in FIG. 264(a)) for convenience. Note that a first period (timing t10 to timing t12 in FIG. 264(a)) may be provided in which the pseudo continuous number display image is displayed in a semi-transparent state and gradually becomes opaque.

Modification 01 shows that the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t26 to timing t27.
Modification 02 shows that the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t26 to timing t28.
Modification 03 shows that the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t26 to timing t29.
Modification 04 shows that the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t27 to timing t28.
Note that an example of effect in which the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t27 to timing t29 has already been shown in FIG. 261(a).
Modification 05 shows that the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t27 to timing t30.
Modification 06 shows that the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t28 to timing t29.
Modification 07 shows that the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t28 to timing t30.
Modification 08 shows that the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t28 to timing t31.
Modification 09 shows that the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t29 to timing t30.
Modification 10 shows that the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t29 to timing t31.
Modification 11 shows that the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t30 to timing t31.
In these examples, any one of 1 second to 3 seconds is set as the time for erasing the pseudo consecutive number display image. Further, the time from when the pseudo consecutive number display image is completely erased until the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed is set to any one of 0 seconds to 4 seconds.

Referring to FIG. 264(b), an embodiment and a modified example of erasing the pseudo continuous number display image "x2" are shown, but the pseudo continuous number display in the production example shown with reference to K30(b) The method described in FIG. 264(b) can also be applied when erasing the image "x3".

Decorative patterns displayed during execution of the “Giant Tank Reach” effect or “Enemy Tank Destruction Reach” effect, and decorative patterns displayed during execution of the reach effect shown in Figures 261(a) and 261(b). are different in design and size. Specifically, the decorative patterns displayed during the execution of the "Giant Tank Reach" performance or the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" performance consist only of numbers and square frames, and are small in size, but are shown in Figure 261(a), The decorative pattern displayed during execution of the ready-to-reach effect shown in FIG. 261(b) consists of numbers, a rectangular frame, and a bomb character, and is large in size.

The period required for erasing the pseudo continuous number display image may be shorter than the period (third period) in which the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" becomes gradually easier to see.
For example, the length of the period required to erase the pseudo consecutive number display image in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 264 is shorter than the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

The period required to erase the pseudo continuous number display image and the period (third period) during which the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" become gradually easier to see may be set to be the same length.
For example, the length of the third period in modification 02 shown in FIG. 264 is the same as the length of the third period in modification 03 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

The period required for erasing the pseudo continuous number display image may be longer than the period (third period) in which the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" gradually becomes easier to see.
For example, the length of the period required to erase the pseudo consecutive number display image in Modification 03 shown in FIG. 264 is longer than the length of the third period in Modification 02 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

The period from the end of the display of the pseudo consecutive number display image to the stop of the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is the period after the visibility of the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" returns to normal (4th period) may be shorter.
For example, the length of the period from the end of the display of the pseudo consecutive number display image to the stop of the variable display of the decorative pattern in Modification 05 shown in FIG. 264 is the length of the fourth period in Modification 02 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233. It is shorter than Sa.

The period from the end of the display of the pseudo consecutive number display image until the stop of the fluctuating display of decorative patterns, and the period after the visibility of the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" returns to normal (4th period) may have the same length.
For example, the length of the period from the end of the display of the pseudo consecutive number display image to the stop of the variable display of the decorative pattern in Modification 05 shown in FIG. 264, and the length of the fourth period in Modification 01 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233. are the same.

The period from the end of the display of the pseudo consecutive number display image to the stop of the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is the period after the visibility of the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" returns to normal (4th period) may be longer.
For example, the length of the period from the end of the display of the pseudo consecutive number display image to the stop of the variable display of the decorative pattern in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 264 is the length of the fourth period in Modification 01 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233. It's longer than it is.
In "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", the size of the decorative pattern is small, but in the reach effect shown with reference to Figures 261(a) and 261(b), the size of the decorative pattern is small. The image is large and is displayed overlapping the pseudo-repeat count display image. Therefore, by lengthening the period from when the pseudo consecutive number display image is erased to when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, it becomes easier for the player to visually recognize the manner in which the decorative symbols are stopped.

In the reach effects shown with reference to FIGS. 261(a) and 261(b), the "giant tank reach" effect, and the "enemy tank destruction reach" effect, the background image A is normally displayed at the start of the variation. However, after the display of the background concealment image and the pseudo consecutive number display image is finished, the normal background image A may be displayed again. Alternatively, the normal background image B may be switched to and displayed instead of the normal background image A at the timing when the background concealment image C is displayed or at the timing when the display of the pseudo continuous number display image ends. The background image may always be switched, or the original normal background image may be displayed with a predetermined probability, and another normal background image may be displayed with a predetermined probability.
In addition, only when the display of the pseudo continuous number display image shown with reference to FIG. 261 (a) and FIG. It may also be possible to switch to another normal background image.

In this way, the normal background image that was displayed while the pseudo consecutive number display image is displayed or before the special reach effect can be switched to another normal background image after the display of the pseudo continuous number display image ends or after the special reach effect. By adopting a configuration in which this is possible, it is possible to change the feelings of players who feel disappointed when the special lottery results in a loss.

Instead of the normal background image A and the normal background image B, the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B may be displayed.
The normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B may be displayed from the beginning at the timing when the display of the pseudo continuous number display image is finished. Alternatively, the pseudo continuous number display image is displayed in a situation where normal background moving image A or normal background moving image B is displayed, and the degree of visibility of normal background moving image A or normal background moving image B decreases, causing the pseudo continuous number to be displayed. When the degree of visibility of normal background moving image A and normal background moving image B is increased during the period of erasing the displayed image, the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image The normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B are continuously displayed without displaying the image B from the beginning, so that the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B are displayed even after the period for erasing the pseudo continuous number display image The normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B may be continuously displayed without displaying the normal background moving image B from the beginning.

The production examples shown in Figures 262(a) and 262(b) will shift to "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach"; Regarding the display mode of the pending image or the pending image in "Destructive Reach", the display mode in the embodiment described above with reference to FIGS. 233 to 244 etc. may be adopted.
As shown in FIGS. 230(b), 261(a), and 261(b), after the left and right decorative patterns are temporarily stopped with the same decorative pattern and the reach state is reached, the decorative patterns and background images are For example, the middle decorative pattern scrolls at a low speed or changes frame by frame without switching, and after a predetermined period of time, the middle decorative pattern is the same as the left and right decorative patterns (in the case of a jackpot) or different. The variation mode that stops at a decorative pattern (in case of loss) is called normal reach.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 230(c), FIG. 262(a), and FIG. 262(b), after the left and right decorative patterns temporarily stop with the same decorative pattern and enter the reach state, the decorative pattern becomes a special decorative pattern. (often with a smaller decorative pattern than before the temporary stop), the background image is switched to a special background image, and a display such as characters fighting each other to determine the winner or loser is performed. An effect in which the result of the special lottery is substantially indicated by the displayed result is called SP Reach (abbreviation for Special Reach or Super Reach). In addition, in accordance with the result of this effect display, the middle decorative pattern will be stopped and displayed in a manner that indicates a jackpot (a pattern with the same number as the left and right decorative symbols) or a manner that indicates a loss (a pattern with a different number from the left and right decorative symbols). be done.

Note that in this specification, SP reach is referred to as "special reach" or "special reach effect", and "giant tank reach", "enemy tank destruction reach", etc. fall under SP reach. Note that in SP Reach, effects such as characters fighting each other are displayed, so it is sometimes referred to as a battle reach (effect).

Note that SP reach has higher expectations than normal reach and SP reach. Therefore, after the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped with the same decorative symbol and enters the ready-to-reach state, the player will pay attention to whether or not it will shift to the SP ready-to-win state and watch the fluctuating display.
Note that a plurality of types of SP reach (for example, "giant tank reach" and "enemy tank destruction reach") may be made possible, and the degree of expectation may be varied depending on the type of SP reach. At this time, SP reach with relatively high expectation level (or expectation level is higher than a predetermined probability) is classified as strong SP (reach), and SP reach with relatively low expectation level (or expectation level is lower than a predetermined probability). Reach is sometimes referred to as weak SP (reach).

Note that whether or not the result of the special lottery is a jackpot may be expressed as a win or loss or a win or loss result. For example, when we say that the result of a battle between characters indicates a winning or losing result, it means that the result of a battle between characters indicates whether or not the result of a special lottery is a jackpot.

On the other hand, while the pseudo consecutive number display image is being erased, it is preferable not to change the display mode of the pending image or the pending image to a display mode indicating another expectation level.
For example, if the pending image is a green pending image at timing t27 in FIG. It is better to display an image.

When a pseudo-continuous effect is executed in a state where the band-like pre-read effect image is displayed based on the pending read-ahead, after timing t20 in the effect example shown in FIG. ), special reaches such as "Giant Tank Reach" shown with reference to Figure 252, etc. and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" shown with reference to Figure 233, etc. will always occur after timing t30 in the production example shown in ). You can do it like this.

In this manner, while the pseudo consecutive number display image is being erased, a display (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special display D") in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases is performed.

At the start of the variable display of decorative patterns, the normal background image may be switched to another normal background image. An embodiment of a normal background image switching effect that displays a special background concealment image and switches a normal background image to another normal background image will be described below.

First, the background concealment image displayed in the normal background image switching effect in this embodiment will be explained.
FIG. 265(a) shows a huge bomb character viewed diagonally from the front left. Also, the parts other than the bomb character are blue and translucent. Hereinafter, an image composed of these images will be referred to as a background hidden image A.
FIG. 265(b) shows the bomb character viewed diagonally to the left and slightly from the front. Also, the parts other than the bomb character are blue and translucent. Hereinafter, an image composed of these images will be referred to as a background hidden image B.
FIG. 265(c) shows the bomb character viewed from the front. Also, the parts other than the bomb character are blue and opaque. Hereinafter, an image composed of these images will be referred to as a background hidden image C.
FIG. 265(d) shows the bomb character viewed diagonally to the right and slightly from the front. Also, the parts other than the bomb character are blue and translucent. Hereinafter, an image composed of these images will be referred to as a background hidden image D.
FIG. 265(e) shows the bomb character viewed diagonally from the front right. Also, the parts other than the bomb character are blue and translucent. Hereinafter, an image composed of these images will be referred to as a background hidden image E.
In the image of the giant bomb character, the outline is black and opaque, and the other parts (within the area enclosed by the outline) are white and opaque.
In this embodiment, the normal background image is switched while the background concealed image consisting of such a huge bomb character is displayed.

In a background concealed image consisting of a huge bomb character, etc., the blue semi-transparent parts of the background concealed images A and E have higher transparency than the blue semi-transparent parts of the background concealed images B and D, and the transparency of the blue semi-transparent parts of the background concealed images A and E is higher than that of the background concealed images B and D. High visibility. Note that since the blue portion of the background concealment image C is opaque, the image located at the rear is not visible. Note that the bomb character may be displayed in a large size so that only the bomb character can view the background concealed image C.

An example of a normal background image switching effect for switching the currently displayed normal background image to another normal background image will be described below with reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 266(a) and the display example shown in FIG. 267.
First, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started from timing t0. FIG. 267(a) shows a display example of the period from timing t0 to timing t1. Note that the normal background image A is already displayed at timing t0. For example, the normal background image A is displayed over a plurality of variable displays.
Next, the background concealed image A is displayed during a period from timing t1 to timing t2. FIG. 267(b) shows a display example of the period from timing t1 to timing t2.
Next, the background concealed image B is displayed during a period from timing t2 to timing t3. FIG. 267(c) shows a display example of the period from timing t2 to timing t3.
Next, the background concealment image C is displayed during a period from timing t3 to timing t5. Furthermore, at timing t4, the background image is switched from normal background image A to normal background image B. FIG. 267(d) shows a display example of the period from timing t3 to timing t5.
Next, the background concealment image D is displayed during a period from timing t5 to timing t6. FIG. 267(e) shows a display example of the period from timing t5 to timing t6.
Next, the background concealment image E is displayed during a period from timing t6 to timing t7. FIG. 267(f) shows a display example of the period from timing t6 to timing t7. In this way, the normal background image switching effect is executed from timing t1 to timing t7.
After timing t7, the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner without displaying the background concealment image. FIG. 267(g) shows a display example after timing t7.
Thus, in this embodiment, the normal background image A is displayed from timing t0 to timing t4, and the normal background image B is displayed from timing t4 to timing t32. Note that in the next and subsequent variable displays, the normal background image B will be displayed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the normal background image gradually becomes less visible (first period), the normal background image becomes invisible (second period), and the normal background image gradually becomes less visible. There is a period (third period) in which the visibility of the background image becomes easier, and a period (fourth period) in which the visibility of the background image returns to normal and the decorative pattern stops. Note that the normal background image in the first period is different from the normal background images in the third and fourth periods. Thereby, the normal background image can be switched without any discomfort.
In addition, the background concealment image is displayed immediately after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols, and the normal background image is displayed to change the mood of the player.

The background concealment image in this embodiment is the background concealment image used when starting "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", and the background used when ending "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach". The occlusion image is different from the background occlusion image used when exiting advantageous conditions. This can prevent the player from thinking that a reach effect advantageous to the player has occurred.
In this way, after switching the normal background image, depending on the result of the special lottery, you can execute the above-mentioned pseudo-sequence effects, such as "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach". It is good to be able to do so.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 266, the display of the background concealment image is started immediately after the start of the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern, and the normal background image is changed, but in the middle of the fluctuating display of the decorative design, The normal background image may be changed at the end of the game.
Note that the normal background image may be changed only once during one variation of the decorative pattern.
Further, it is preferable to change the normal background image in a state where none of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped. For example, in the production example shown in FIG. 266(a), the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at timing t20, which is a timing after timing t7 when the display of the background concealment image ends.

The left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern may be changed at high speed before the display of the background concealment image ends (before timing t7 in FIG. 266(a)). Specifically, it is better to change the downward scrolling speed of the decorative pattern to the fastest state before the display of the background concealment image ends (note that the scrolling speed immediately after the decorative pattern starts changing, The scrolling speed immediately before the temporary stop is slower than this scrolling speed).
Alternatively, even after the display of the background concealment image ends, at least one of the decorative patterns that were stopped and displayed in the previous variable display may be made visible. For example, it is preferable that a predetermined decorative pattern whose fluctuating display started at timing t0 in FIG. 266(a) remains visible or remains visible even after timing t7 by not moving or moving slowly.

The background may be hidden as shown in Modifications 01 to 12 of FIG. 266. In these modified examples, the length of the first period to the fourth period is from 1 second to 3 seconds, and the modification example compares the time of each of the first period, second period, and third period. This is an example.
For example, as in Modification 01, the lengths of the first period and the second period are the same, but the third period is longer than the first period and the second period. This has the effect of creating excitement in seeing which normal background image will be displayed as the new normal background image. In modification 02, although the lengths of the first period and the second period are the same, the third period is shorter than the first period and the second period. This has the effect of displaying a new normal background image early and allowing time to be spent on so-called preview performances such as comment previews (for example, preview performances using dialogue preview images to be described later). In modification 03, although the lengths of the first period and the third period are the same, the second period is longer than the first period and the third period. By doing so, the display of the background hidden image itself can be enjoyed by the player. It goes without saying that the other modifications also have their own effects.
In addition, in the first normal background image switching effect, the normal background image is switched in the manner of modification 01, and in the second normal background image switching effect, the normal background image is switched in the manner of modification 02. Various modifications may be applied to each of the background image switching effects.

The period during which the background image is invisible in the normal background image switching effect (second period) is shorter than the period during which the background image is invisible in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" (second period). Good too.
For example, the length of the second period in Modification 04 shown in FIG. 266 is shorter than the length of the second period in Modification 03 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

The period in which the background image is invisible in the normal background image switching effect (second period) is the same length as the period in which the background image is invisible in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" (second period) You can also use it as
For example, the length of the second period in modification 01 shown in FIG. 266 is the same as the length of the second period in modification 01 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

The period in which the background image is invisible in the normal background image switching effect (second period) is longer than the period in which the background image is invisible in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" (second period). Good too.
For example, the length of the second period in Modification 03 shown in FIG. 266 is longer than the length of the second period in Modification 04 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

The period (3rd period) in which the background image in the normal background image switching effect becomes gradually easier to see is the period (3rd period) in which the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" becomes gradually easier to see. ) may be shorter.
For example, the length of the third period in modification 02 shown in FIG. 266 is shorter than the length of the third period in modification 01 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

A period in which the background image in the normal background image switching effect becomes gradually easier to see (3rd period) and a period in which the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" gradually becomes easier to see (3rd period) ) may be the same length.
For example, the length of the third period in modification 01 shown in FIG. 266 is the same as the length of the third period in modification 01 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

The period (3rd period) in which the background image in the normal background image switching effect becomes gradually easier to see is the period (3rd period) in which the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" becomes gradually easier to see. ) may be longer.
For example, the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 266 is longer than the length of the third period in Modification 02 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

The period after the normal background image switching effect ends and the visibility of the background image returns to the original (4th period) is based on the visibility of the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" It may be shorter than the period after returning (fourth period).

Based on the period after the normal background image switching effect ends and the visibility of the background image returns to the original (4th period), and the visibility of the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" The period after returning (fourth period) may be the same length.

The period after the normal background image switching effect ends and the visibility of the background image returns to the original (4th period) is based on the visibility of the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" It may be longer than the period after returning (fourth period).
For example, the length of the fourth period in modification 01 shown in FIG. 266 is longer than the length of the fourth period in modification 01 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

As described above, at the end of the special reach, the highly anticipated pending image displayed in the pending image display area may be displayed as it is, or may be returned to the white pending image and displayed.

On the other hand, regarding the held image in this embodiment, the held image is moved while the background hidden images A to E are being displayed (at least one of the first period, second period, and third period; the same applies hereinafter). It's okay. Further, while displaying the background hidden images A to E, it may be possible to change the pending image or the mode of the pending image to a pending image with a higher expectation level. When changing the pending image or the mode of the pending image to a pending image with a higher expectation level while displaying the background hidden images A to E, the mode of the pending image or pending image after the change can be recognized. , if the change starts in the first period, it will start in one of the first to fourth periods, and if it starts in the second period, it will start in one of the second to fourth periods, and then in the third period. If the change starts in the 3rd period to the 4th period, if the change starts in the 4th period, the mode of the held image or the held image after the change is recognized in the 4th period. It is better to make it . For example, if the change starts in the first period and the form of the held image or held image after the change is made recognizable in the first period, the held image or the form of the held image after the change can be recognized early. Therefore, if the effect is that a sense of expectation can be provided early, or if the mode of the pending image or pending image that starts changing in the first period and changes in the fourth period can be recognized, which mode should be used? It can provide a sense of expectation that things will change. If the change starts in the 4th period, it is possible to provide a sense of expectation that there may be a change even in the 1st to 3rd periods, which have not changed, and each pattern has its own effect. Needless to say. Alternatively, while the background hidden images A to E are being displayed, it may be prohibited to change the pending image or the pending image.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 266 etc., an example of effect is shown in which the visibility of the pending image or the pending image is reduced due to the background concealment image, but similar to the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 237, It may be configured so that the visibility of the pending image or the pending image is not reduced. For example, the display priority of the pending image or the pending image may be set higher than the display priority of the background hidden image.

At the start of the variable display of decorative symbols, the pending images that have been displayed in the first to fourth pending display areas are displayed to move from the first to third pending display areas. FIG. 268(a) shows that the movement of the pending image started and ended during the period from timing t0 when the variable display started to timing t1. Note that the movement of the reserved image may start and end within this period. This point also applies to Modifications 01 to 07 shown in FIG. 268(b).
FIG. 267(a) shows a state in which the movement of the held image from the first held display area to the held display area is completed before the display of the background hidden image A starts.

FIG. 268(b) shows a modified example of the period during which the pending image is moved.
Modification 01 indicates that movement of the reserved image starts and ends during the period from timing t1 to timing t2.
Modification 02 indicates that movement of the reserved image starts and ends during the period from timing t2 to timing t3.
Modification 03 indicates that movement of the reserved image starts and ends during the period from timing t3 to timing t4.
Modification 04 indicates that movement of the reserved image starts and ends during the period from timing t4 to timing t5.
Modification 05 indicates that movement of the reserved image starts and ends during the period from timing t5 to timing t6.
Modification 06 indicates that movement of the reserved image starts and ends during the period from timing t6 to timing t7.
Modification 07 indicates that movement of the reserved image starts and ends during the period from timing t7 to timing t8.

Modifications 01 to 07 indicate that the movement of the held image starts and ends over one second within the period from timing t1 to timing t8, but within the period from timing t1 to timing t8. The movement of the held image may be started at a predetermined timing, and the movement of the held image may be ended at a predetermined timing. Further, the time required to move the held image is not limited to 1 second, and may be shorter than 1 second or longer than 1 second.
For example, the movement of the held image may start at timing t1, and the movement of the held image may end at timing t7. Alternatively, the movement of the held image may start at timing t6 and end at timing t8.

In this way, in this embodiment, it is possible to move the pending image while the normal background image switching effect is being executed. On the other hand, during execution of the "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" effect, the held image is not moved, and the position of the held image does not change before and after the reach effect.

In this embodiment, the embodiment of displaying the band-shaped look-ahead effect image shown with reference to FIG. 238 may be adopted.
For example, after the normal background image switching effect is executed, the display of the band-shaped prefetch effect image may be started based on the prefetch result. Alternatively, the normal background image may be changed by executing the normal background image switching effect while the band-shaped pre-reading effect image is being displayed.
On the other hand, if the band-shaped look-ahead effect image has already been displayed, the normal background image switching effect may not be executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player, whose expectation level for a jackpot has increased due to the display of the strip-shaped look-ahead performance image, from visually perceiving an excessive performance.
In addition, in the holding display area, the first holding display area to the fourth holding display area, a holding image (for example, a green or red holding image) that has a higher expectation level than a white holding image, which is a normal holding image, is displayed. Similarly, the normal background image switching effect may be prevented from being performed even when the background image is displayed, and the same effect can be obtained in this case as well.

The time from the start of the fluctuating display of decorative patterns to the start of changing the normal background image (for example, the time from the start of the display of the background concealment image) is It is best to make it shorter than the time it takes for special reach (such as "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach") to start.
In addition, the time from the start of the fluctuating display of decorative patterns to the end of changing the normal background image (for example, the time from the start of the fluctuating display of decorative designs to the end of the display of the background concealment image) is It is best to make it shorter than the time it takes for special reach (such as "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach") to start.
In addition, after a predetermined period of time has passed after the normal background image has been switched and the background concealed image has finished displaying, the background concealed image at the start of the special reach ("Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach") will be displayed. It is preferable to configure the system so that it is possible to start it.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from confusing the switching of the normal background image and the switching of the background image at the time of special reach.

In the normal background image switching effect, an embodiment has been shown in which a background hidden image consisting of a giant bomb character etc. is displayed. It may be executed. For example, instead of a giant bomb character, a giant tank may be displayed and the normal background image may be switched.
Further, the degree of expectation regarding the special lottery result may not be indicated by executing the normal background image switching effect. In other words, the normal background image switching effect may be executed regardless of the special lottery result being displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, the normal background image switching effect may be executed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/3 probability) in the next variable display in which the special reach result is a loss. In addition, in the variable display after a non-reach loss shown in FIG. 230(a) and the variable display after a reach loss (no background switching) shown in FIG. 230(b), the normal background image switching effect is executed with a predetermined probability. Good too. In this case, a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 1/30) is lower than the probability of executing the normal background image switching effect (for example, a probability of 1/3) in the next variable display that results in a loss of the special reach. A normal background image switching effect may be executed.
On the other hand, by executing the normal background image switching effect, the jackpot expectation level for the changing decorative pattern may be shown. For example, when another normal background image is displayed instead of normal background image A or normal background image B, expectations are higher than when normal background image A or normal background image B is displayed. It is better to do so. In this case, it is preferable that the degree of expectation indicated by the switching of the normal background image is lower than the degree of expectation indicated by the occurrence of the special reach.

A plurality of performance patterns for normal background image switching performance may be provided. For example, a plurality of types and colors of characters to be displayed may be provided. Further, different expectations of a jackpot may be indicated for each presentation pattern. Further, for each performance pattern, any one of the modified examples shown in FIG. 266 may be adopted as appropriate, and the first to third periods may be made different.
For example, the length of the third period in the normal background image switching effect may vary depending on the type and color of the displayed character. Further, at this time, different expectations may be shown depending on the type and color of the displayed character.

In the examples of the "giant tank reach" effect and the "enemy tank destruction reach" effect shown with reference to FIGS. 252 and 233, the normal background image A is displayed at the start of the variation, and the normal background image A is displayed even after the background concealment image ends. Although the background image A was displayed again, the normal background image B may be switched to and displayed instead of the normal background image A at the timing when the background concealed image C is being displayed. The background image may always be switched, or the original normal background image may be displayed with a predetermined probability, and another normal background image may be displayed with a predetermined probability.
On the other hand, in the example of the background image switching effect shown with reference to FIGS. 266 and 267, the normal background image A is displayed at the start of the change, and the normal background image A is A normal background image (normal background image B in this embodiment) different from the normal background image is displayed. Note that the normal background image A may be displayed subsequently after the background concealed image ends. In this case, the background image switching performance can be made unexpected.

Instead of the normal background image A and the normal background image B, the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B may be displayed.
At the timing when the display of the background concealed image C ends, the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B may be displayed from the beginning. Alternatively, a background hiding image is displayed in a situation where normal background moving image A or normal background moving image B is displayed, the degree of visibility of normal background moving image A or normal background moving image B decreases, and the background hiding image is deleted. When increasing the visibility of normal background moving image A and normal background moving image B during a period of The normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B are continuously displayed without being deleted, and the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B are displayed from the beginning even after the period for erasing the background hidden image ends. The normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B may be continuously displayed without being displayed.

In this way, in the effect of switching the normal background image, a display (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special display E") in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases is performed in the third period.

Below, the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 256 and the like will be compared with the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 265 and the like. In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 256 and the like, a background concealment image at the end of right-handed hitting is displayed to switch the background image. On the other hand, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 265 and the like, the background image is switched when the decorative pattern starts changing.

The period (third period) during which the background image gradually becomes more visible at the end of right-handed hitting may be made longer than the period (third period) during which the background image gradually becomes easier to see in the normal background image switching effect. .
For example, the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 258 is longer than the length of the third period in Modification 02 shown in FIG. 266.

Even if the period (third period) in which the background image becomes gradually easier to see at the end of right-handed hitting is the same length as the period (third period) in which the background image becomes gradually easier to see in the normal background image switching effect. good.
For example, the length of the third period in modification example 01 shown in FIG. 258 is the same as the length of the third period in modification example 01 shown in FIG. 266.

The period (third period) during which the background image gradually becomes more visible at the end of right-handed hitting may be shorter than the period (third period) during which the background image gradually becomes easier to see in the normal background image switching effect. .
For example, the length of the third period in modification 02 shown in FIG. 258 is shorter than the length of the third period in modification 01 shown in FIG. 266.

The period (4th period) after the visibility of the background image returns to the original at the end of right-handed hitting is the period (4th period) after the normal background image switching effect ends and the visibility of the background image returns to the original. period) may be longer.

The period after the visibility of the background image returns to the original at the end of right-handed hitting (4th period), and the period after the normal background image switching effect ends and the visibility of the background image returns to the original (4th period) period) may have the same length.

The period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image returns to the original at the end of right-handed hitting is the period (fourth period) after the normal background image switching effect ends and the visibility of the background image returns to the original. period) may be shorter.
For example, the length of the fourth period in modification example 01 shown in FIG. 258 is shorter than the length of the fourth period in modification example 01 shown in FIG. 266.

In the example of the performance at the end of right-handed hitting shown with reference to FIG. 257, normal background image C was displayed while right-handed hitting, and normal background image A was displayed after the display of the background concealment image was finished. However, the normal back normal background image C may be displayed. For example, the normal background image A may be displayed with a predetermined probability, and the normal background image C may be displayed with a predetermined probability.
On the other hand, in the example of the normal background image switching effect shown with reference to FIGS. 266 and 267, the normal background image A is displayed at the start of the change, and the normal background image A normal background image different from A (normal background image B in this embodiment) is displayed. Note that the normal background image A may be displayed even after the background concealment image ends. In this case, the background image switching performance can be made unexpected.

Instead of the normal background image A and the normal background image B, the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B may be displayed.
Furthermore, instead of the normal background image C, a normal background moving image C that is displayed in an animated manner similar to the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B may be displayed.
The normal background moving image A to normal background moving image C may be displayed from the beginning at the timing when the right-handed hit ends or when the display of the background concealment image C in the normal background image switching effect ends. Alternatively, a background concealing image is displayed in a situation where normal background moving images A to normal background moving images C are displayed, the degree of visibility of normal background moving images A to normal background moving images C decreases, and the background hiding image is deleted. When the degree of visibility of normal background moving images A to normal background moving images C is increased during a period of The normal background moving image A to normal background moving image C are displayed continuously without being deleted, and the normal background moving image A to normal background moving image C are displayed from the beginning even after the period for erasing the background hidden image ends. The normal background moving image A to the normal background moving image C may be continuously displayed without being displayed.

When the right-handed hitting state ends and the normal state returns, the background hiding image at the end of right-handed hitting is displayed, but at this time, the reserved image that is displayed after the end of the right-handed hitting end background hiding image is changed to the normal state. It is preferable that a pending image (a white pending image) be displayed.
In addition, at the end of the right-handed hitting state, a background concealment image is displayed at the end of the right-handed hitting state, and during a period (third period) in which normal background image A and normal background image B gradually become easier to see, the held image is hidden from other held images. It is best not to change it to an image.

On the other hand, regarding the held image in the normal background image switching effect, the held image may be moved while the background hidden images A to E are being displayed (first period to third period). Further, while displaying the background hidden images A to E, it may be possible to change the pending image or the mode of the pending image to a pending image with a higher expectation level. Alternatively, while the background hidden images A to E are being displayed, it may be prohibited to change the pending image or the pending image.

In this way, in the third period at the end of the advantageous state, a display ("special display C") in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases is performed. Further, in the third period in the effect of switching the normal background image, a display ("special display E") in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases is performed.

While the decorative symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, an effect indicating the degree of expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a jackpot may be performed. An embodiment in which a dialogue preview effect that displays a dialogue preview image can be executed will be described below.

First, the dialogue preview image displayed in the dialogue preview performance in this embodiment will be explained.
FIG. 269 shows dialogue preview images A to E displayed in the dialogue preview performance of this embodiment.
The display priority of dialogue preview images A to dialogue preview images E is higher than decorative patterns and reserved images, and dialogue preview images A to dialogue preview images E are displayed in front of these images.
The line preview image consists of a bomb character (white image) located in the center, a line consisting of the four kanji characters ``BOMBON DANSHI'' (white image), and other areas (green background image). Note that the background image referred to here is merely a background image for convenience in comparison with the image of the bomb character and the dialogue image.
The green background areas of dialogue preview image A and dialogue preview image E have high transparency, the green background areas of dialogue preview image B and dialogue preview image D have low transparency, and the green area of dialogue preview image C has the highest transparency. The background image is not visible.
Line preview image A has the kanji ``baku'' on it, line preview image B has the kanji ``bomb'' on it, and line preview image C to line preview image E have the kanji ``bomb boy'' on it. .

FIG. 270 shows a time chart showing an example of a dialogue preview performance. Further, FIG. 271 shows a display example in which a dialogue preview image is displayed at a predetermined timing.

As shown in the time chart of FIG. 270(a), variable display of decorative symbols starts at timing t0. FIG. 271(a) shows a state in which decorative patterns are being displayed in a variable manner. At this time, the normal background image A is displayed as the background image.
Next, the line preview image A is displayed during a period from timing t10 to timing t11. FIG. 271(b) shows the display state at this time.
Next, a line preview image B is displayed during a period from timing t11 to timing t12. FIG. 271(c) shows the display state at this time.
Next, a line preview image C is displayed during a period from timing t12 to timing t14. FIG. 271(d) shows the display state at this time.
Next, the line preview image D is displayed during a period from timing t14 to timing t15. FIG. 271(e) shows the display state at this time.
Next, a dialogue preview image E is displayed during a period from timing t15 to timing t16. FIG. 271(f) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t16, the series of display of dialogue preview images ends. FIG. 271(g) shows the display state at a predetermined timing in the period from timing t16 to timing t20 (period until the left decorative pattern temporarily stops).
A left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at timing t20, a right decorative pattern is temporarily stopped at timing t25, and a middle decorative pattern is temporarily displayed at timing t30.
At timing t31, all decorative symbols are stopped and displayed to indicate whether or not the result of the special lottery is a jackpot.

In this way, even in the dialogue preview production, due to the display of the dialogue preview image, there is a period (first period) in which the background image becomes gradually less visible, a period in which the background image is invisible (second period), and a period in which the background image gradually becomes less visible. There is a period (third period) in which the background image becomes more visible and a period (fourth period) in which the visibility of the background image returns to normal and the decorative pattern stops. In other words, the dialogue preview image also functions like a background concealment image.

In this way, when a dialogue preview performance in which a series of dialogue preview images is displayed during the variable display of decorative symbols is executed, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when the dialogue preview performance is not executed. Whether or not to execute the dialogue preview performance is determined based on the special lottery results.
In addition, in some situations during the dialogue preview performance, the normal background image becomes invisible, but the normal background image will not be changed to another normal background image before or after the dialogue preview performance is executed. , the same normal background image is displayed.

It may be configured such that a plurality of dialogue preview performances with different display modes can be executed, and any one of the dialogue preview performances may be executed. For example, it is preferable to use dialogue preview images that differ in the content of the dialogue, the type of character, the color of the background area, etc. Furthermore, depending on the type of dialogue preview performance, the same level of expectation may be suggested, or different levels of expectation may be suggested.
For example, when the color of the background area is red, the level of expectation may be higher than when the background area is green.

Although an example of displaying dialogue and a character has been given, these are only examples, and it may be configured to be executable as a preview performance without displaying either the dialogue or the character. Alternatively, instead of the lines or characters, other images may be displayed as a preview effect.

Although it has been shown that the dialogue preview performance is performed by displaying the dialogue preview images A to dialogue preview images E, the dialogue preview performance may be performed by displaying a moving image. For example, characters or dialogue may be moved, or transparency may be changed smoothly.

Comparing the normal background image switching effect in the embodiment shown in FIG. good.
For example, compared to Modification 02 of the normal background image switching performance, Modification 01 of the dialogue preview performance has a longer performance execution time.
Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the expectation level of the jackpot indicated by the speech preview performance. On the other hand, the expectation level of a jackpot is basically not indicated by the execution of the normal background image switching effect. Therefore, even if the time for performing the performance is relatively shortened, the influence caused by the player overlooking the level of expectation can be reduced.

The period (second period) during which the background image is invisible in the dialogue preview performance may be shorter than the period (second period) during which the background image is invisible in the normal background image switching performance.
For example, the length of the second period in Modification 04 shown in FIG. 270 is shorter than the length of the second period in Modification 03 shown in FIG. 266.

The period (second period) in which the background image is not visible in the dialogue preview performance and the period (second period) in which the background image is not visible in the normal background image switching performance may be the same length.
For example, the length of the second period in modification 01 shown in FIG. 270 is the same as the length of the second period in modification 01 shown in FIG. 266.

The period (second period) in which the background image is not visible in the dialogue preview performance may be longer than the period (second period) in which the background image is not visible in the normal background image switching performance.
For example, the length of the second period in Modification 03 shown in FIG. 270 is longer than the length of the second period in Modification 04 shown in FIG. 266.

The period (third period) in which the background image becomes gradually easier to see in the speech preview performance may be shorter than the period (third period) in which the background image gradually becomes easier to see in the normal background image switching performance.
For example, the length of the third period in modification 02 shown in FIG. 270 is shorter than the length of the third period in modification 01 shown in FIG. 266.

The period (third period) in which the background image becomes gradually easier to see in the dialogue preview performance and the period (third period) in which the background image gradually becomes easier to see in the normal background image switching performance may be the same length. .
For example, the length of the third period in modification 01 shown in FIG. 270 is the same as the length of the third period in modification 01 shown in FIG. 266.

The period (third period) in which the background image gradually becomes easier to see in the dialogue preview performance may be made longer than the period (third period) in which the background image gradually becomes easier to see in the normal background image switching performance.
For example, the length of the third period in modification 01 shown in FIG. 270 is longer than the length of the third period in modification 02 shown in FIG. 266.

The period (fourth period) after the dialogue preview performance ends and the visibility of the background image returns to its original state (4th period) is the period after the normal background image switching performance ends and the visibility of the background image returns to its original state (4th period). It may be shorter than the fourth period).
For example, the length of the fourth period in modification example 01 shown in FIG. 270 is shorter than the length of the fourth period in modification example 01 shown in FIG. 266.

The period after the dialogue preview performance ends and the visibility of the background image returns to its original state (4th period), and the period after the normal background image switching performance ends and the visibility of the background image returns to its original state (4th period). (4th period) may have the same length.

The period (fourth period) after the dialogue preview performance ends and the visibility of the background image returns to its original state (4th period) is the period after the normal background image switching performance ends and the visibility of the background image returns to its original state (4th period). (4th period) may be made longer.

Both the dialogue preview effect shown in FIG. 270 and the normal background image switching effect shown in FIG. 266 may be configured to be executable during one change in the decorative pattern.
For example, a normal background image switching effect may be executed during a period from timing t1 to timing t7, and a dialogue preview effect may be executed during a period from timing t10 to timing t16. Further, modifications of both embodiments may be appropriately combined and executed.
Note that it is preferable that the dialogue preview performance is not executed before the normal background image switching performance, and conversely, the dialogue preview performance is executed after the normal background image switching performance. Further, it may be configured such that the normal background image switching effect may be executed regardless of the presence or absence of the dialogue preview effect.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 270 and the like, an example of a performance in which the visibility of the suspended image or the suspended image is reduced during a dialogue preview performance is shown, but this is similar to the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 237. The configuration may also be such that the visibility of the pending image or the pending image is not reduced. For example, the display priority of the pending image or the pending image may be set higher than the display priority of the dialogue preview image.

In both the dialogue preview effect shown with reference to FIG. 270, etc. and the normal background image switching effect shown with reference to FIG. You can also do this.
Alternatively, in both the dialogue preview effect shown with reference to FIG. 270 etc. and the normal background image switching effect shown with reference to FIG. It may also be possible to maintain the easily visible state as before the performance without becoming invisible.

Alternatively, in the dialogue preview performance shown with reference to FIG. 270 etc., the suspended image or pending image is made difficult or invisible during performance execution, and the normal background image switching shown with reference to FIG. 266 is performed. In the performance, even during the execution of the performance, the suspended image or pending image may not become difficult or impossible to view, but may remain easily visible as before the performance.
On the other hand, in the dialogue preview performance shown with reference to FIG. 270, etc., even during execution of the performance, the suspended image or pending image does not become difficult or invisible and remains easily visible as before execution of the performance. may be maintained, and in the normal background image switching effect shown with reference to FIG. 266, the suspended image or pending image may be difficult to view or invisible during execution of the effect.

Even if the band-like look-ahead effect image shown with reference to FIG. 238 is being displayed, the dialogue preview effect may be configured to be executable.
On the other hand, when the band-like look-ahead effect image is being displayed, the normal background image switching effect may be configured not to be executed.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player's expectation level is confused due to execution of a normal background image switching effect that does not necessarily indicate the expectation level.

It is preferable to increase the expectation level when only the dialogue preview performance is performed, compared to when only the dialogue preview performance is performed and when only the normal background image switching performance is performed.
Alternatively, the expectation level may be the same when both the dialogue preview performance and the normal background image switching performance are performed and when only the dialogue preview performance is performed.

Since the background image is usually not changed before and after the execution of the dialogue preview performance, the player is unlikely to feel strange even if the first period or third period of the dialogue preview performance is shortened or the second period is lengthened.
Further, since the background image is not normally changed, the player is unlikely to feel strange even if the time until the variation of the decorative pattern ends is short.

The dialogue preview performance may be performed as a pre-read performance based on pending pre-reading. For example, in the display example shown in FIG. 271(a), the number of reservations is 2 and a reservation image is displayed in the second reservation display area. A dialogue preview image may be displayed in each of three variable displays in total until the pending image is read in advance and the pending image displayed in the second pending display area becomes the pending image. In this way, the dialogue preview effect may be displayed over a plurality of variable displays. Further, it is preferable that a predetermined level of expectation is indicated by the display mode of the dialogue preview image.

On the other hand, the normal background image switching effect is not executed based on the prefetch effect. Furthermore, as described above, the process may be executed in the next variable display that results in a loss.
In addition, at the timing when the variable display that resulted in a loss is stopped and displayed, if there is a hold, a normal background image switching effect will be executed with a predetermined probability, and if there is no hold, a starting prize will occur. Even if the next variable display starts, the normal background image switching effect may not be performed.
Or, a specific reach effect (reach effect in which a special reach background image is displayed instead of the normal background image, such as the aforementioned "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach") is executed, and there is no chance of losing. On the condition that the result is the same, it is determined internally with a predetermined probability (including 100% execution of the normal background image switching effect) that the normal background image switching effect will be executed in the next variable display. The normal background image switching effect may be executed based on the determined content when the variable display is executed next time. In addition, as a specific implementation mode, it can be realized by turning on or off a normal background image switching effect execution flag provided in a predetermined storage area of the peripheral control board 1510. According to such a configuration, even if the number of pending items is 0, by turning on the normal background image switching effect execution flag, when a starting prize occurs and the next variable display is performed. In addition, a normal background image switching effect can be performed. Note that the normal background image switching effect execution flag is preferably kept in an on state until the next variable display is started.
In addition, even if it is decided to perform the normal background image switching effect, the normal background image switching effect will not be executed in the next variable display, provided that no starting prize occurs for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). You may change the determination content (turn off the normal background image switching effect execution flag) as follows. Note that, at the same time as a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the display area may shift to a demonstration image display state in which the pachinko machine 1 is introduced. The normal background image switching effect execution flag is kept on even after the transition to the demo image display state, and the normal background image switching effect is executed when a starting prize occurs in the demo image display state and a variable display is performed. , the normal background image switching effect execution flag may be turned off.

In this way, while the dialogue preview image is being erased, a display (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special display F") in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases is performed.

Although a plurality of embodiments and modifications of these embodiments have been described with reference to FIGS. 224 to 271, all of the described embodiments and modifications can be executed in one pachinko machine 1. You can also use it as Alternatively, some of the described embodiments and modifications may be executable in one pachinko machine 1.

Further, before the start of the game, the player or the clerk at the game parlor can determine which aspect is to be executed among the plurality of aspects in the embodiments and modified examples shown with reference to FIGS. 224 to 271. It may be possible to select in advance. For example, the player himself may be able to set the lengths of the first to fourth periods in each of the effects shown with reference to FIGS. 224 to 271 on a customization screen or the like.
With such a configuration, the player can set the game performance to be executed in a manner that suits his/her preference. Furthermore, the clerk at the game parlor can set the game performance to be executed in accordance with the customer demographic of the game parlor. As a result, the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

In each of the effects in the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 224 to 271, there is a first period in which the visibility of the background image is reduced by starting to display an image that hides the background image, and a first period in which the visibility of the background image is reduced. There is a second period in which the visibility of the background image is the lowest, and a third period in which the visibility of the background image is high. Furthermore, after the end of each performance, there is a fourth period, which is a period from when the display of the image that hides the background image ends to when the visibility of the background image returns to normal and the decorative pattern stops.

We have shown an example in which all of the background images become invisible in the second period due to the display of the background concealment image, but rather than making them completely invisible, compared to the case where the background concealment image is not displayed, It may be made difficult to see.
In this case, it is preferable that the background concealment image has the lowest transparency in the second period.
Alternatively, instead of making the background hidden image the same size as the display area, make it smaller than the display area so that even if the background hidden image is displayed, part of the background image can be seen. Good too. In this case, it is desirable that the ratio of the background concealment image to the display area is 50% or more, or 2/3 or more.
Note that the dialogue preview image can also be transformed in the same way.
On the other hand, the pseudo consecutive number display image and the revival effect image (resurrection effect character and his lines) are originally smaller in size than the display area. It is desirable that the proportion of these images occupying the display area is less than 50%.

The background image switching effect at the start of the special reach, the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, the background image switching effect at the end of the right hit, the pseudo continuous effect, the normal background image switching effect, and the line preview effect that is part of the preview effect. Although it has been shown that there are 1st to 4th periods, the length of at least one of the periods (1st period to 4th period) in each production is longer than the length of each state described below. You can do it, or you can shorten it.

The special reach decorative pattern swings vertically at a predetermined period during the special reach, but each effect (background image switching effect at the start of the special reach, background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, background image at the end of the right hit) Each period (1st period to 4th period) in switching effects, pseudo-continuous effects, normal background image switching effects, dialogue preview effects) may be made longer or shorter than this cycle. You can. Alternatively, even if it is made longer, it is better to make it less than two cycles.
For example, by making the length of the first period in the background image switching effect at the start of the special reach longer than the predetermined period of the special reach decoration pattern that is displayed at a predetermined period during the special reach, the special reach decoration during the special reach The predetermined period of the symbol is relatively long (if it is shortened, it will look rushed and you will not be able to concentrate on the reach effect), so by providing the first period of the background image switching effect at the start of the special reach effect for a longer period of time, the special It has the effect of being able to provide the pleasure that has developed into reach for a long time.
In addition, for example, the length of the third period in the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach can be made shorter than the predetermined period of the special reach decorative pattern that is displayed at a predetermined period during the special reach, so that the fluctuation can be compensated for. This has the effect of ending the feeling of anticipation early and creating expectations for the next change (allowing a quick change of mindset).
It goes without saying that the other modifications also have their own effects.

The pending image or pending image may be made into a moving image and repeatedly displayed at a predetermined period. At this time, each performance (background image switching performance at the start of special reach, background image switching performance at the end of special reach, background image switching performance at the end of right hit, pseudo continuous performance, normal background image switching performance, dialogue preview performance) Each of the periods (first period to fourth period) may be made longer or shorter than this cycle. Alternatively, even if it is made longer, it is better to make it less than two cycles.
For example, the length of the third period in the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach of a special reach that does not display the held image or held image during the special reach is the predetermined cycle of the held image or held image displayed as a moving image. By making it longer than , the pending image or pending image will be displayed for one cycle or more in the third period, making it possible to impress the player with the presence of the pending image and reminding the player to operate the handle 302. It has the effect of reminding you.
For example, the length of the second period in a normal background image switching effect or dialogue preview effect can be made shorter than the predetermined cycle of the pending image or pending image displayed as a moving image. This has the effect of ensuring a certain degree of visibility of the presentation display.
It goes without saying that the other modifications also have their own effects.

Referring to FIGS. 142 and 143, it has been shown that there are four gaming states (normal state, time saving state, non-time saving variable probability state, and probability variable state) in addition to the jackpot state. In these four game states, special symbols can be displayed in a variable manner. Further, it is possible to variably display decorative patterns at the same time as special patterns.
In the normal state, variable display is performed in multiple production patterns with different variable display times (the time from when the decorative pattern starts variable display until it stops displaying), but compared to the shortest variable display time among them, , each period in each performance (background image switching performance at the start of special reach, background image switching performance at the end of special reach, background image switching performance at the end of right hit, pseudo continuous performance, normal background image switching performance, dialogue preview performance) Each of the periods (first period to fourth period) may be longer or shorter than this length.
In the time saving state, variable display is performed in multiple production patterns with different variable display times (the time from when the decorative pattern starts variable display until it stops displaying), but compared to the shortest variable display time among them, , each period in each performance (background image switching performance at the start of special reach, background image switching performance at the end of special reach, background image switching performance at the end of right hit, pseudo continuous performance, normal background image switching performance, dialogue preview performance) Each of the periods (first period to fourth period) may be longer or shorter than this length.
In the non-time-saving variable state, variable display is performed in multiple production patterns with different variable display times (time from when the decorative pattern starts variable display until it stops displaying), but the variable display time is compared with the shortest among them. Then, each performance (background image switching performance at the start of special reach, background image switching performance at the end of special reach, background image switching performance at the end of right hit, pseudo continuous performance, normal background image switching performance, dialogue preview performance) Each of the periods (first period to fourth period) may be longer or shorter than this length.
In the variable state, variable display is performed in multiple production patterns with different variable display times (the time from when the decorative pattern starts variable display until it stops displaying), but compared to the shortest variable display time among them. , each period in each performance (background image switching performance at the start of special reach, background image switching performance at the end of special reach, background image switching performance at the end of right hit, pseudo continuous performance, normal background image switching performance, dialogue preview performance) Each of the periods (first period to fourth period) may be longer or shorter than this length.

The shortest variation display time may be set to be different depending on the number of reservations at the start of variation of the decorative pattern. For example, the larger the number of reservations, the shorter the shortest variable display time, and the smaller the number of reservations, the longer the shortest variable display time.
At this time, each effect (background image switching effect at the start of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of special reach) is compared with the shortest variable display time among the variable display times of the effect patterns that can occur corresponding to each pending number. For each period (1st period to 4th period) in the production, background image switching production at the end of right-handed hit, pseudo-continuous production, normal background image switching production, dialogue preview production), the duration is longer than this length. You can make it longer or shorter.

The performance pattern of the decorative symbols and the variable display time of the decorative symbols are also determined according to the game state and the number of reservations, but each performance (special Each period (1st period to 1st period to 4 periods) may be longer or shorter than this time.
For example, the fourth period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach or the background image switching effect at the end of a right hit (the fourth period is the period immediately after the display of a different type of decorative pattern from the previous one starts) By making the length shorter than the shortest fluctuating display time of the performance patterns, there is an effect that the player will not be misled into thinking that a new fluctuating display has started and stopped.
For example, by making the length of the fourth period of the normal background image switching effect or dialogue preview effect longer than the shortest variable display time of the effect patterns, the duration of the fourth period of the normal background image switching effect or dialogue preview effect can be set to be longer than the shortest variable display time among the effect patterns. This has the effect of allowing enough time for development (for example, development into special reaches, pseudo-coupled effects, etc.).
It goes without saying that the other modifications also have their own effects.

With reference to FIGS. 261 to 264, an embodiment of a pseudo-sequential effect has been shown, but a display that allows the player to recognize that a pseudo-sequential effect has occurred (such as "Continue" as shown in FIG. 263(b), etc.) (display of special symbols), each effect (background image switching effect at the start of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of right hit, pseudo continuous effect, normal) Each of the periods (first period to fourth period) in the background image switching performance and dialogue preview performance may be made longer or shorter than this time.
For example, the length of the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach and the background image switching effect at the end of the right hit can be made shorter than the display that makes the player aware that a pseudo-continuous effect has occurred. In order to quickly transition to the second period, it is possible to clearly differentiate the performance from the pseudo-continuous performance, and the pseudo-continuous performance occurs (all of the left decorative symbols to right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, so the player can This has the effect of making it difficult for the player to make a mistake.
For example, the length of the fourth period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach and the background image switching effect at the end of the right hit may be made longer than the display that makes the player aware that the pseudo-continuous effect has occurred. The combination of decorative symbols that have been temporarily stopped will be displayed as they are (in the case of a pseudo-continuous effect, a re-variation display will always be performed after a temporary stop, but the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach or the background at the end of a right hit) will be displayed as is. During the fourth period of the image switching effect, the decorative pattern that was temporarily stopped and displayed will remain stopped and displayed as it is, unless the revival effect is executed and the result is a success. This has the effect of making the user give up on the fluctuating display.
It goes without saying that the other modifications also have their own effects.

Compared to the shortest firing interval of game balls fired into the game area, each effect (background image switching effect at the start of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of right-hand hit, pseudo continuous) Each of the periods (first period to fourth period) in the presentation, normal background image switching presentation, and dialogue preview presentation may be made longer or shorter than the shortest firing interval. For example, when it is possible to fire 100 game balls in 60 seconds, the shortest firing interval of game balls is 0.6 seconds.
For example, by making the length of the first period of the background image switching performance at the end of the special reach shorter than the shortest firing interval of game balls, the following effects can be obtained.
There are players with extensive gaming experience who stop firing the game ball when a special reach with a high expectation of winning a jackpot (for example, "giant tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach") starts. When the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach starts, such a player with extensive gaming experience operates the handle 302 to control the game ball, assuming that the result of the special lottery is a loss. will resume firing. In this case, by making the length of the first period of the background image switching performance at the end of the special reach shorter than the shortest firing interval of game balls, firing of game balls is resumed and the second game ball is fired. At times, the special reach background image displayed during the special reach is completely unrecognizable, so the player becomes convinced that the result of the special lottery was a loss because he or she guessed that he or she had lost. From the second game ball onwards, the user can concentrate on the whereabouts of the game ball (whether it starts winning or not). In other words, while the background changes smoothly, the number of game balls that make it difficult to concentrate can be minimized.
For example, by making the length of the first period of the background image switching performance at the end of the special reach longer than the shortest firing interval of game balls, the following effects can be obtained.
As described above, when the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach starts, a player with a lot of gaming experience operates the handle 302 assuming that the result of the special lottery is a loss. Resume firing game balls. At this time, the special reach background image that is displayed during the special reach is displayed in the display area and can be recognized by the player, so both the destination of the launched game ball and the special reach background image are visible. It will become. In particular, no matter how experienced a player is, it is difficult for even the most experienced player to view the special reach background image, which has been viewed for a long time in the hope of winning the jackpot, when the result is predicted to be a loss. It will become. Due to these circumstances, it is expected that even experienced players will be distracted by the content displayed in the display area and may become unsteady, making it difficult to shoot the game ball accurately. Ru. Therefore, the probability that the game balls fired during the first period will start winning is lower than when the player shoots the game balls accurately. In this way, by making the length of the first period of the background image switching performance at the end of the special reach longer than the shortest firing interval of the game ball, it is possible to create a state where the player is in a state where the probability of starting winning is reduced for a long time. This can contribute to the sales of the game arcade.
It goes without saying that the other modifications also have their own effects.

After the fluctuating display of decorative symbols ends without any hold-up and a predetermined waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the display area shifts to a demo image display state in which an image introducing the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. It may also be possible to transition to At this time, each effect (background image switching effect at the start of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of right hit, pseudo continuous effect, normal background image switching effect) than the predetermined waiting time. , dialogue preview performance), each period (first period to fourth period) may be made longer or shorter than this time.
For example, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching performance at the end of the special reach shorter than the predetermined waiting time for transitioning to the demo image display state, the following effects can be obtained.
Even if a player does not necessarily have a lot of experience in gaming, there are players who stop launching the game ball during the special reach. However, for players who do not necessarily have a lot of gaming experience, when a special reach is executed and the result is a loss even though it was strongly expected to result in a jackpot, the player may think to himself, ``Are you serious? In many cases, the player receives such a big shock that he or she cannot recover for a while, and is unable to resume firing the game ball. be able to switch). In this way, if you change the screen (transition to the demo performance state) when you are in a situation where you cannot recover for a while, it will be difficult for players who do not have a lot of gaming experience to realize the final performance (the fact that you lost). (This tendency is noticeable in pachinko machines that use revival effects.) Therefore, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach shorter than the predetermined waiting time for transitioning to the demo image display state, it is possible for players who do not necessarily have a lot of gaming experience to You can take care of your heart.
For example, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach longer than the predetermined waiting time, the following effects can be obtained.
Players who do not necessarily have a lot of gaming experience may be shocked and unable to recover for a while if the special lottery results are a loss. many. By quickly switching to the demo image display state in such a shocked situation and causing a change in the screen, you can make the user feel, "Hmm, maybe a revival effect has occurred!" ( This tendency is noticeable in pachinko machines that employ revival effects.However, experienced players remain calm under such situations). In this way, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach longer than the predetermined waiting time for transitioning to the demo image display state, it is possible to make it easier for players who do not necessarily have a lot of gaming experience. This can provide a sense of elation and motivate the user to resume shooting the game ball.
It goes without saying that the other modifications also have their own effects.

In addition, by driving the payout motor 834, for example, if game balls successively win in a winning opening such as a starting opening or a big winning opening that pays out when winning, the payout corresponding to the first winning is made. After that, the payout corresponding to the second winning is made, but after making the payout corresponding to the first winning, it takes a predetermined time (for example, , 1 second), but compared to this predetermined time, each effect (background image switching effect at the start of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of right hit, Each period (1st period to 4th period) in the pseudo continuous effect, normal background image switching effect, dialogue preview effect) may be made longer or shorter than this time. .
For example, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching performance at the end of the special reach shorter than the predetermined time until a new payout is made, the following effects can be obtained.
In the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, there is a possibility that a revival effect will be executed, so if you pay out game balls multiple times in the third period, the events that will occur due to the payout. (The collision sound generated when the game ball collides with the upper tray 321, the management of the number of game balls present in the upper tray 321, etc.), and a revival effect is executed saying "Revival!" However, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach may be set longer than the predetermined time until a new payout is made. By keeping it short, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring where concentration is interrupted. The reason why we decided to make a payout at least once is because players will be distrusted if they do not pay out immediately when they win a prize in a predetermined winning hole (general winning hole 2001, first starting hole 2002, etc.) in the third period. This is because I think.
For example, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach longer than the predetermined time until a new payout is made, the following effects can be obtained.
The experienced players mentioned above assume that the result of the special lottery will be a loss when the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach starts, so naturally they will not be able to launch the game ball in the third period. Is going. Therefore, a situation may occur in which a plurality of game balls enter a predetermined winning opening (such as the general winning opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2002) in the third period that comes after the first period. Experienced players understand that if a game ball enters a designated winning slot (starting slot, general winning slot, etc.), the game ball will be paid out immediately; If not, there is a risk of creating a sense of distrust (this tendency is caused by suppressing the output of variable effect sounds in the background image switching effect, making the display area simpler, etc.) (This is noticeable when it is possible to pay a certain amount of attention to the payout), but the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach can be changed to the predetermined time until a new payout is made. By making it longer than this, you can prevent this feeling of distrust.
It goes without saying that the other modifications also have their own effects.

When the result of the normal lottery is a winning result, the movable piece 2004a is driven and moved to open the second starting port 2004, and the game ball rolling in the game area 5a can enter. After a predetermined time has elapsed, the movable piece 2004a is returned to its original position, thereby closing the second starting port 2004, making it impossible for game balls rolling in the game area 5a to enter. A plurality of different times are set as the time from when the second starting port 2004 is opened by moving the movable piece 2004a until it is closed (opening time), and a game ball is placed in the second starting port 2004 at any one of the opening times. The second starting port 2004 may be configured to be able to enter a game ball multiple times in response to a winning of one normal lottery (a movable (This is realized by driving and moving the piece 2004a multiple times). At this time, the second starting port 2004 is compared with the shortest time (if there is only one pattern of opening time of the second starting port 2004, the opening time in that pattern). , each period in each performance (background image switching performance at the start of special reach, background image switching performance at the end of special reach, background image switching performance at the end of right hit, pseudo continuous performance, normal background image switching performance, dialogue preview performance) Each of the periods (first period to fourth period) may be made longer or shorter than this time.
For example, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching performance at the end of the special reach shorter than the shortest opening time of the second starting port 2004, the following effects can be obtained.
In the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, the normal background image is displayed instead of the special reach background image that was displayed during the special reach, so players who do not necessarily have a lot of gaming experience may When the background image becomes visible over a period of time, it often causes a big shock in the mind, such as ``Are you serious?'' and it is difficult to recover for a while. In such a situation, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach shorter than the shortest opening time of the second starting port 2004, for example, the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach can be changed. If the start of the third period and the timing when the second starting port 2004 becomes a state in which a ball can enter are the same, the special reach ends before the second starting port 2004 becomes in a state in which a ball cannot enter. The third period of the background image switching effect can be ended. If the second starting hole 2004 is in a state where balls can be entered, a special symbol lottery will be held when a game ball can be entered into the second starting hole 2004, so players who do not necessarily have a lot of gaming experience The player operates the handle 302 in an attempt to enter the game ball into the second starting port 2004, and his interest increases again, and when the second starting port 2004 is no longer open, the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is activated. Since the third period has ended, you can forget that the special reach occurred and that the result was a loss, and you can switch your mind to the change of the new decorative pattern.
For example, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching performance at the end of the special reach longer than the shortest opening time of the second starting port 2004, the following effects can be obtained.
In the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, the normal background image is displayed instead of the special reach background image that was displayed during the special reach, so players who do not necessarily have a lot of gaming experience may When the background image becomes visible over a period of time, it often causes a big shock in the mind, such as ``Are you serious?'' and it is difficult to recover for a while. In such a situation, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach longer than the shortest opening time of the second starting port 2004, for example, the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach can be changed. If the start of the third period and the timing when the second starting port 2004 becomes ready for ball entry are the same, the start of the third period will start before the end of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach. The secondary starting port 2004 can be made in a state where the ball cannot enter. If the second starting hole 2004 is in a state where balls can be entered, a special symbol lottery will be held when a game ball can be entered into the second starting hole 2004, so players who do not necessarily have a lot of gaming experience Even if the player operates the handle 302 in an attempt to place a game ball into the second starting port 2004, and his interest improves again, and he is unable to place the game ball into the second starting port 2004, the special reach ends. Since the third period of the background image switching effect continues, the player can expect the revival effect to be executed, and the shock experienced by the player can be alleviated as a whole.
It goes without saying that the other modifications also have their own effects.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 233 and 252, the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 and mission button 3700 is 3 seconds (there is only one type of operation valid period), but other operations As a performance pattern, a performance pattern in which the effective period of operation of the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is longer than 3 seconds or a short performance pattern may be configured to be executable.
For example, a performance pattern A may be adopted in which the operation validity period of the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is, for example, 2 seconds, and a performance pattern B in which the operation validity period of the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is, for example, 4 seconds. In this way, a plurality of operation validity periods may be provided.
At this time, each performance (background image switching performance at the start of special reach, background image switching performance at the end of special reach, background image switching performance at the end of right hit, pseudo continuous performance, normal background image switching performance, dialogue preview performance) Each of the periods (first period to fourth period) may be made longer than the effective operation period of effect pattern A and effect pattern B. In addition, each period of each performance (background image switching performance at the start of the special reach, background image switching performance at the end of the special reach, background image switching performance at the end of right hit, pseudo continuous performance, normal background image switching performance, dialogue preview performance) Each of the periods (first period to fourth period) may be longer than the valid operation period of effect pattern A and shorter than the valid operation period of effect pattern B. In addition, each period of each performance (background image switching performance at the start of the special reach, background image switching performance at the end of the special reach, background image switching performance at the end of right hit, pseudo continuous performance, normal background image switching performance, dialogue preview performance) Each of the periods (first period to fourth period) may be shorter than the valid operation period of effect pattern A and effect pattern B.
During the third period of the background image switching performance at the end of the special reach, a performance (performance pattern A or performance pattern B) in which the operation unit can be operated may be executed, and in that case, the effects described below are performed. can be expected. In addition, if a performance that allows the operation unit to be operated is executed during the third period of the background image switching performance at the end of the special reach, the effective operation period will not extend to the fourth period or after the variable display stops (i.e. The valid operation period may end within three periods, or the fourth period may be deleted. In this case, the following effects can be expected.

For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach should be longer than the shortest of the plurality of valid operation times when there are multiple valid operation times. This has the effect of making the player expect that an operation instruction image (display of "PUSH!" etc.) as a revival effect will be displayed during the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach. be.
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach should be longer than the longest of the plurality of valid operation times when there are multiple valid operation times. This has the effect of making the player expect that an operation instruction image (display of "PUSH!" etc.) as a revival effect will be displayed during the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach. be.
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach should be shorter than the shortest of the plurality of valid operation times when there are multiple valid operation times. Then, during the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, it can be recognized that the operation instruction image (display of "PUSH!" etc.) as a resurrection effect will not be displayed, so the next change This has the effect of allowing you to quickly change your expectations regarding the display.
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is longer than one of the multiple valid operation times, but the other By making it shorter than the valid period of operation in step 1, it is possible for the game to display an operation instruction image (such as "PUSH!") as a revival effect during the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach. This has the effect of making people have expectations.
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach should be longer than the valid operation time, since there is one valid operation time (there is only one valid operation time). This has the effect of making the player expect that an operation instruction image (display of "PUSH!" etc.) as a revival effect will be displayed during the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach. be.
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach should be shorter than the valid operation time, as there is one valid operation time (there is only one valid operation time). Then, during the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, it can be recognized that the operation instruction image (display of "PUSH!" etc.) as a resurrection effect will not be displayed, so the next change This has the effect of allowing you to quickly change your expectations regarding the display.
It goes without saying that the other modifications also have their own effects.

By displaying special display A to special display F, expectations for a jackpot may vary. In addition, in the relationship between any one special display from special display A to special display F and any one special display from special display A to special display F, it is possible to increase the expectation level of one or both. The expectations for both may be the same, or the expectations for one may be lower.
Similarly, in the relationship between three or more special indications, you can increase the level of expectation for one special indication, set the same level of expectation for multiple special indications, or lower the level of expectation for a certain special indication. good.

For example, the expectation level may be higher when special display A is displayed and when special display E is displayed than when special display B or special display D is displayed. Furthermore, in the case where special display A is displayed and the case where special display E is displayed, the expectation level may be set higher when special display A is displayed, and when special display B is displayed. You can set your expectations high.
Further, the expectation level when the special display C is displayed may be lower than the special display A or the special display E, and higher than the special display B or the special display D. Alternatively, it may be lower than special display A, special display B, special display D, and special display E.

The light emitting decoration means provided in the door frame 3 (for example, the door frame left side unit 530, the door frame right side unit 550, etc.) may be made to emit light when the special display is executed.
For example, the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 may be caused to emit light in light emission patterns A to F corresponding to the special displays A to F. In the relationship between any one special display from special display A to special display F and any one special display from special display A to special display F, the light emission pattern may be different or the same. Good too.
For example, for displays with high expectations such as special display A, and displays indicating that the gaming state will be changed such as special display C, unique lighting patterns are adopted, and special display B and special display C are used. , special display E may use the same light emission pattern.
In this way, by making the light emitting pattern different for each special display, even if the player looks away without looking at the display area, the door frame left side unit 530, the door frame right side unit 550, etc. By coming into view, it is possible to recognize which special display has been executed.
As a method of making the light emitting pattern different for each special display, methods such as lighting or blinking, different light emitting colors, and different light emitting times may be adopted.

A light emitting pattern corresponding to the color of the image used for the special display may be adopted. For example, when a black background concealment image is displayed, the brightness of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 may be reduced or turned off. When a white background concealment image is displayed, the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 may be caused to emit white light. When other background concealment images are displayed, the left side unit 530 of the door frame and the right side unit 550 of the door frame may be emitted in the color of the displayed character, or the background area of the displayed background concealment image may be emitted. It may also emit light in the color.

The light emission pattern corresponding to each special display may end earlier than the special display, may end at the same time as the special display, or may end later than the special display.
Note that after the light emission pattern corresponding to each special display is completed, the light may be turned off, or the light may be emitted in a light emission mode that matches the BGM.

Although the embodiment of the "Giant Tank Reach" has been shown with reference to FIG. . Further, the degree of expectation of "giant tank reach" may be set differently depending on the display mode of the enemy tank and the display unit operated. Note that even in this case, it is preferable that the expectation level of "reach of huge tank" is higher than the expectation level of "reach of destruction of enemy tank". Furthermore, it is preferable to switch and display the background images in the same manner even in such different modes of "giant tank reach". For example, in a plurality of "Giant Tank Reach", a background concealed image consisting of a bomb character or the like may be displayed, and the background images may be switched and displayed in the same manner.

Although the embodiment of "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" has been shown with reference to FIG. Good too. Furthermore, the degree of expectation of "reach for destroying enemy tanks" may be set differently depending on the display mode of enemy tanks and the display unit operated. In addition, even in this case, it is preferable that the expectation level is lower than that of "Giant Tank Reach". Further, it is preferable to switch and display the background images in the same manner even in such different manners of "enemy tank destruction reach". For example, in a plurality of "giant tank reach", a black background hidden image may be displayed and the background images may be switched and displayed in the same manner.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 233, a simulated image imitating the operation part is displayed during the valid operation period to suggest the special lottery result, but the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is During execution, the operation was not valid, nor was a simulated image of the operation panel displayed.
Similarly, for each of the other performances (background image switching performance at the start of special reach, background image switching performance at the end of right hit, pseudo-continuous performance, normal background image switching performance, dialogue preview performance), the same applies from the 1st period to the 3rd period. In this case, it is preferable that the operation validity period is not set, and that a simulated image simulating the operation unit is not displayed (that is, a simulated image simulating the operation unit is not always displayed).
In this way, it is recommended that the first to third periods of all reach effects not be valid operation periods, and that a simulated image that imitates the operation section should not be displayed (i.e., the operation section should not be simulated). simulated images are not always displayed).
Note that the period from the first period to the third period is not the valid operation period, and is a period in which a simulated image imitating the operation section is not displayed (that is, a simulated image imitating the operation section is always not displayed). The period is merely an example, and may include the fourth period, or may be any one of the first to fourth periods, or any plurality of periods among these periods.
With this configuration, the display contents of the display area are simplified, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player is unable to operate the operation unit because he or she does not realize that the operation reception on the operation unit is enabled. It can be prevented.

During the variable display of decorative symbols, the variable effect sound is output, but in the special display A to special display F, the output of the variable effect sound may be suppressed.
An embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 252 and the like will be described below with reference to FIG. 272(a). Similarly, a modification of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 270 will be described with reference to FIG. 272(b).
In the production example shown in FIG. 272(a), the variable production sound is suppressed during the period from timing t13 when the background concealment image is displayed to timing t19. Furthermore, the variable effect sound is suppressed during the period from timing t36 to timing t42.
In the production example shown in FIG. 272(b), the variable production sound is not suppressed even during the period from timing t10 when the background concealment image is displayed to timing t16, and the output in the normal state is maintained.
In this way, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 272(a), the first period is a period in which the background image becomes gradually difficult to recognize, the second period is a period in which the background image is invisible, During the third period in which the background image gradually becomes more visible, the output state of the variable effect sound was set to a suppressed state.
On the other hand, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 272(b), the output state of the variable effect sound of the variable effect sound is not set to the suppressed state and is maintained in the normal state even in the first period to the third period. Was.
When switching the background image in this way, the output state of the variable effect sound may be set to a suppressed state, and when the background image is not switched, the output state of the variable effect sound may be maintained in the normal state.

An example was shown in which the first to third periods are in the suppressed state, but during the first to third periods, the fourth period is the period from which the visibility of the background image returns to normal and the decorative pattern stops. During at least one period of the above, the variable effect sound may be suppressed. Note that after the fourth period, the suppressed state may be maintained even during the period in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and the state may be set to the normal state at the timing when the next variable display is started.

Note that the suppressed state may be a state in which the volume of the fluctuating effect sound is made smaller than in the normal state and is output. Alternatively, the state may be such that the variable effect sound is not output. In this case, although the variable effect sound is internally reproduced, the output volume may be internally set to 0 (muted) so that the variable effect sound is not output from the speaker. Alternatively, the reproduction of the variable effect sound itself may be terminated or interrupted so that the variable effect sound is not output from the speaker.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 272(a), the normal state is reached from timing t19 to timing t36, but during this period, even if a special variable effect sound corresponding to the type of special reach is output. good. In this case, it is preferable to start outputting the special variable effect sound at timing t16 during the suppression state or at timing t19 at the end of the suppression state. Further, it is preferable to end the output of the special fluctuation effect sound at timing t36 at the start of the suppressed state or at timing t39 during the suppressed state.

Not limited to the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 252, etc., the "enemy tank destruction reach" effect shown with reference to FIG. 233, etc., the background image switching effect at the end of right hit shown with reference to FIG. 257, etc., The same aspect may be adopted in the pseudo continuous effect shown with reference to FIG. 261 etc. and the normal background image switching effect shown with reference to FIG. 266 etc. to suppress the variable effect sound.

The "hold change chance performance", which is a special performance in an embodiment modified from the embodiment shown in FIGS. 123 to 272, will be described below with reference to FIGS. 273 to 281, etc. FIGS. 273 to 275 show examples of images displayed in this embodiment (or modified example), etc. FIG. 280 shows a time chart in this embodiment. FIG. 281 shows a display example in the display area.

273 to 275 show examples of images displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 in this embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 273 shows a background image, FIG. 274 shows a decorative pattern, and FIG. 275 shows a background concealment image.
Note that data of various images and moving images in this embodiment and its modified examples are stored in advance in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b.

FIG. 273(a) shows the normal background image A. The normal background image A is an image showing a scene inside a recording studio, a stand microphone, and a female singer character.
FIG. 273(b) shows the normal background image B. The normal background image B is an image showing the interior of the female singer character's room and the installed furniture.
The normal background image A and the normal background image B are images displayed when the gaming state is the normal state.

FIG. 273(c) shows a special ready-to-reach background image A that is displayed when a special ready-to-reach effect, "year-end song contest ready-to-reach effect" is executed. The special reach background image A is an image showing the stage, audience seats, and reach name.
FIG. 273(d) shows a special reach background image B that is displayed when "The countdown reach effect" which is a special reach effect is executed. The special reach background image B is an image representing the stage, the audience seats, the reach name, and the degree of expectation that the fluctuation result will be a jackpot.
The expectation level when the "year-end song contest reach performance" is executed is set higher than the expectation level when "the countdown reach performance" is executed. For example, the expectation level when the "year-end song contest reach performance" is executed may be 50%, and the expectation level when "the countdown reach performance" is executed may be 15%.
Furthermore, the "year-end song contest reach performance" and "the countdown reach performance" are similar to the "giant tank reach performance" and "enemy tank destruction reach performance" shown with reference to Figures 224 to 272. , various embodiments of the "giant tank reach effect" and "enemy tank destruction reach effect" (effects when switching background images, pseudo-sequence effects, dialogue preview effects, effects for operating various operation parts, etc.) It may be adopted in "Battle Reach Production" and "The Countdown Reach Production."

FIG. 273(e) shows a normal background image C displayed in a high probability time saving state and a low probability time saving state advantageous to the player. The normal background image C is an image that shows the player the number of successive jackpots (number of consecutive wins), the number of game balls paid out during the consecutive winning state, and whether to hit right. The number part of the image "LIVE x 15" indicates the number of consecutive jackpots (number of consecutive wins), and the number of consecutive wins in this example is 15 times. In addition, the number of people in the image "Number of spectators: over 12,000" indicates the number of game balls that were paid out during the consecutive matches, and in this example, more than 12,000 game balls were paid out. It shows. In addition, the normal background image C is specifically displayed during a fluctuating display or static display of decorative symbols in a high probability time saving state or a low probability time saving state, or during a jackpot that occurs in a high probability time saving state or a low probability time saving state. be done.

FIG. 274 shows an example of decorative patterns that can be displayed on the pachinko machine 1. Each decorative pattern consists of a left decorative pattern, a middle decorative pattern, and a right decorative pattern. These decorative patterns are switched and displayed as appropriate depending on the progress of the performance and the game situation.

FIG. 274(a) shows a normal decorative pattern. This figure shows an example of a normal decorative pattern that is displayed in a stopped state. Each normal decorative pattern can be displayed by scrolling in a predetermined direction (for example, downward) or temporarily stopped at a predetermined position. It is also possible to display.
The display mode of the normal decorative pattern is determined according to the special lottery result, and if the special lottery result is a jackpot, it will be stopped and displayed in a square pattern (for example, "222"), and if the special lottery result is not a jackpot, it will be displayed in a stopped state. It is stopped and displayed in a manner that is not a grid (for example, "352"). FIG. 274(a) shows, as an example, a state in which the normal decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at "538".
A normal decorative pattern consists of a vertically long rectangular background area, and numbers and characters (or letters) placed in front of the background area. There is a one-to-one correspondence between numbers and characters (or letters).

FIG. 274(b) shows a special reach decoration pattern that is displayed when a special reach performance such as "year-end song contest reach performance" or "the countdown reach performance" is executed.
The special reach decorative pattern is displayed smaller than the normal decorative pattern at a predetermined position of the display area (near the center in the figure). This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize the performance suggesting the special lottery result that is executed during the execution of the "Year-end Song Contest Reach Performance" or "The Countdown Reach Performance."
FIG. 274(c) is a modification of the special reach decorative pattern. In this way, a special reach decorative pattern in which the numbers are displayed in a more emphasized manner may be adopted. Displayed during special reach effects (especially towards the end).
Note that FIGS. 274(b) and 274(c) show a state in which the special ready-to-reach decorative pattern is temporarily stopped.
In addition, during execution of a special ready-to-reach effect (particularly in the middle), only the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern may be displayed in a temporary stop mode, and the middle decorative pattern may not be displayed.

FIG. 274(d) shows a decorative pattern displayed while hitting right. The right-hitting decorative symbol is a decorative symbol that is displayed in a gaming state where the player is required to hit right, such as a low probability time saving state or a high probability time saving state. FIG. 274(d) shows a state in which the decorative symbol during right-handed play is stopped and displayed at "538".

Special reach decorative patterns and right-hitting decorative patterns do not have characters or letters attached to them like normal decorative patterns, but only have numbers. Therefore, the visual recognition mode of the pattern can be made simple.

The decorative pattern is displayed for a predetermined period (e.g., 1 second) after the variable display starts, and for a predetermined period (e.g., 1 second) before the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed when a ready-to-reach state occurs, or when the variable display ends. Since the previous predetermined period (for example, one second) is scrolled slowly, the player can clearly see the decorative patterns. Note that such a fluctuating state may be referred to as low-speed fluctuation.
On the other hand, outside of these periods, the decorative symbols are displayed semi-transparently and the scrolling speed is high, and although the player can recognize that the decorative symbols are being displayed in a fluctuating manner, the numbers, characters, etc. It becomes impossible or difficult to recognize. Note that such a fluctuating state may be referred to as high-speed fluctuation.
In addition, when starting the fluctuating display of decorative symbols, the fluctuating display may be suddenly started with high-speed fluctuations without displaying them with low-speed fluctuations.
FIG. 274(e) is a diagram schematically showing a decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation by an arrow pointing downward; in the embodiment described later, a decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation is schematically shown by an arrow. ing.

When the symbols are to be scrolled slowly, for example, the symbols may be scrolled and displayed by two symbols per second. Note that the speed is not limited to 2 symbols per second, but any speed within the range of 1 symbol to 3 symbols can be selected. By making the symbols scroll slowly in this manner, it becomes easy to identify the type of symbol.
Furthermore, a plurality of (two or more) variation modes having different variation speeds may be provided as the mode of low-speed variation. For example, a low-speed variation in which the symbols scroll by 1 symbol per second, a low-speed variation in which the symbols scroll by 2 symbols per second, and a low-speed variation in which the symbols scroll by 3 symbols per second may be provided. Furthermore, when displaying fluctuations, low-speed fluctuations may be performed in any one of these modes.
Incidentally, a variable display in which the symbols scroll by one symbol per second may be referred to as a very low-speed variation, and a variable display in which the symbols scroll by three symbols per second may simply be referred to as a low-speed variation.

Further, when scrolling the symbols at high speed, it is preferable that, for example, 10 symbols are scrolled and displayed per second. Note that the speed is not limited to 10 symbols per second, but any speed within the range of 8 symbols to 12 symbols can be selected. By scrolling the symbols at high speed in this manner, it becomes difficult or impossible to identify the type of symbol.
Furthermore, a plurality of (two or more) variation modes having different variation speeds may be provided as the mode of high-speed variation. For example, a high-speed fluctuation in which the symbols scroll by 8 symbols per second, a high-speed fluctuation in which the symbols scroll by 10 symbols per second, and a high-speed fluctuation in which the symbols scroll by 12 symbols per second may be provided. Furthermore, when displaying fluctuations, high-speed fluctuations may be performed in any one of these modes.
Incidentally, a variable display in which symbols scroll by 12 symbols per second may be referred to as ultra-high-speed variation, and a variable display in which symbols scroll by 10 symbols per second may simply be referred to as high-speed variation.

As shown with reference to FIG. 274, normal decorative patterns, special reach decorative patterns, and right-hitting medium decorative patterns can be distinguished by the size and design of the background area, the presence or absence of characters or letters, the size of numbers, etc. is possible. Note that the numbers constituting the decorative pattern are not limited to Arabic numerals, but may also be written in Chinese numerals or Roman numerals.
With such a configuration, the player can recognize the performance situation and the game state based on the types of decorative symbols, numbers, etc.

FIGS. 275(a) to 275(c) show examples of background hidden images. The background concealment image in this embodiment has the same function as that shown with reference to FIGS. 228, 229, and the like.
The background concealment image in this embodiment is used when switching between the normal background image A and the normal background image B and the special reach background image displayed when executing "Year-end song contest reach effect" or "The countdown reach effect". Is displayed. The background concealment images shown in FIGS. 275(a) to 275(c) consist of white images resembling doncho, and are displayed moving from the top of the display area to the bottom, and then displayed. It is displayed moving from the bottom of the area, and the background image and decorative designs are changed during this period.
FIGS. 275(d) to 275(f) show other examples of background hidden images. This background concealment image is the one in which the bomb character in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 228 etc. is removed, and is displayed so as to move in the left and right direction similarly to the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 228 etc. Ru.

An overview of the "year-end song contest reach performance" will be described below with reference to FIG. 276. Furthermore, an overview of "The Countdown Reach Effect" will be explained with reference to FIG. 277.

First, the left and right normal decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed as the same symbol, and a ready-to-win state is established. 276(a) and 277(a) show the display state at this time.
Next, the background hidden images are displayed in the order of background hidden image A, background hidden image B, background hidden image C, background hidden image B, and background hidden image A. Note that the background concealed image is displayed in the same manner as in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 224 to 272 and the like.

Next, in the case of "Year-end song contest reach performance", a special reach background image A is displayed, and in the case of "The countdown reach performance", a special reach background image B is displayed. The titles of these reach effects are also displayed. FIG. 276(b) and FIG. 277(b) show the display state at this time. The display of the displayed title ends after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed.
The color of the text indicating the title of the reach effect is displayed in one of white, red, and gold, and red text has a higher expectation of winning the jackpot than white text. The gold letters are set so that the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher.

Next, an image of a female singer character and a microphone is displayed. Furthermore, in the case of "Year-end singing contest reach performance", an image of the evil princess character is displayed, and in the case of "The countdown reach performance", the image of the small fry princess character is displayed. FIGS. 276(c) and 277(c) show the display state at this time.

Next, a performance display is performed in which a female singer character and an evil princess character or a small fry princess character compete for the microphone over a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds), and the result of the special lottery is indicated based on the result of the performance display. Specifically, if the female singer character is able to continue holding the microphone, the special reach decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the form of a double mark, indicating that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. FIG. 276(d) and FIG. 277(d) show the display state at this time. Thereafter, the display of the background concealment image is performed again, and the normal decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the form of double-digits and the normal background image are displayed. FIG. 276(e) and FIG. 277(e) show the display state at this time.
On the other hand, if the microphone is taken away by the evil princess character or the small fry princess character, the special reach decoration pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the form of a reach loss, indicating that the result of the special lottery is a loss. FIGS. 276(f) and 277(f) show the display state at this time. Thereafter, the display of the background concealment image is performed again, and the normal decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the manner of losing the reach and the normal background image are displayed. FIG. 276(g) and FIG. 277(g) show the display state at this time.
After the normal decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second), the normal decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, and then the state shifts to the jackpot game state or the next variable display starts. .
Note that during the special reach performance, it is preferable to output a predetermined song from the speaker. Furthermore, different songs may be output for the "year-end song contest reach performance" and "the countdown reach performance."

The evil princess character or the small fry princess character may appear twice during one special reach performance. In this case, for example, if the female singer character is able to hold the microphone twice in a row during the special reach effect, the decorative pattern will be displayed in a jackpot manner, and the female singer character will be able to hold the microphone even once. If you are unable to continue, or if you were able to continue holding the microphone the first time, but were unable to continue holding the microphone the second time, the decorative pattern will be stopped and displayed as a loss. good.
In this case, after the display shown in FIGS. 276(d) and 277(d) is performed, the evil princess character or the small fry princess character is displayed as shown in FIGS. 276(c) and 277(c). It is preferable to make the female singer character appear again and display whether or not the female singer character can continue to hold the microphone.
In this way, the special reach effect is divided into two parts, the first half and the second half, and a predetermined display (in this case, holding the microphone) is performed for each time, so that the player can know that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. It may be done as shown in .
Note that the evil princess character or the small fry princess character may appear not only twice in the first half and the second half, but three or more times.

Note that after the display states shown in FIGS. 276(d), 276(f), 277(d), and 277(f), the special reach background image and character (female singer character) are displayed without displaying the background concealment image. , the evil princess character, and the small fish princess character) may be stopped and the special reach decoration pattern that has been temporarily stopped may be stopped and displayed. In addition, at this time, the small special ready-to-reach decorative pattern may be changed to a large special ready-to-reach decorative pattern shown in FIG. 274(c) and displayed in a stopped state.

Predetermined characters may be displayed during execution of the special reach effect, and the expected degree of jackpot may be indicated by the color of the characters. For example, the line ``Don't let go of the microphone!'' may be displayed as a line for a female singer character. FIG. 278(a) shows a state in which the evil princess character appears during the "year-end singing contest reach performance" and the words "I will not let go of the microphone!" are displayed as the lines of the female singer character. In addition, the dialogue image is displayed while the evil princess character and the small fry princess character appear and are competing for the microphone, and after the dialogue image has finished displaying, the female singer character is asked if she can continue holding the microphone. A display will be made as to whether or not the request has been made.
The color of the serifs is displayed in one of white, red, and gold, and the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher with red characters than with white characters, and with gold characters than with red characters. It is best to set it so that the expectation level of jackpot is high.

Similarly, a cut-in image may be displayed during execution of the special reach effect to indicate the degree of expectation. FIG. 278(b) shows an example in which a window image, a line image saying "I'll sing until the end!!", and an image of a female singer character are displayed as cut-in images. Note that the cut-in image is displayed while the evil princess characters and small fry princess characters appear and are competing for the microphone, and after the cut-in image has finished displaying, the female singer character can continue to hold the microphone. A display will be made to see if it is possible.
The color of the image displayed as a cut-in image (at least one of the entire window image, a part of the window image (for example, the frame), a dialogue image, and an image of a female singer character) is green, red, or gold. Displayed in one of these colors, if you set it so that the expectation of a jackpot is higher for a red image than for a green image, and that the expectation for a jackpot is higher for a gold image than a red image. good.

Furthermore, during the special reach effect, a predetermined effect may be generated according to the operation of a button (for example, the operation button 401 or the attack button 3710) to indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a jackpot. .
For example, a cheering message image indicating cheering from the audience may be displayed in response to a button operation, and the level of expectation may be indicated depending on the amount of cheering shown by the cheering message image.
FIG. 279(a) shows the display state when the evil princess character is displayed. In this state, button operation acceptance is valid for a predetermined period of time, an image imitating the shape of the button is displayed, and button operation is instructed. FIG. 279(b) shows the display state at this time. Note that a gauge indicating the operation validity period is displayed below the image instructing the button operation.
A support message image supporting the female singer character is displayed at the timing when the player presses the button or at the timing when the valid period of the button operation ends. The expectation level of a jackpot is indicated by the number of displayed support message images. The higher the number of support message images, the higher the expectation level should be set.
FIG. 279(c) shows a state in which two support message images are displayed. Moreover, FIG. 279(d) shows a state in which four support message images are displayed. In this case, the latter display state in which four cheering message images are displayed has a higher expectation of a jackpot.
Furthermore, when a performance that instructs a button operation is performed, the expectation level may be set higher than when a performance that instructs a button operation is not performed (that is, when a support message image is not displayed).
Note that the display of the support message image ends after a predetermined time, and then a display indicating whether or not the female singer character can continue to hold the microphone (one of the displays shown in FIG. 276(d) and FIG. 276(f)) is displayed. ) is carried out.
Note that although the operation button 401 and attack button 3710 have been cited as examples of button operations, button operations for the mission button 3700 and defense button 3740 may be required.

With this configuration, the player was made to feel an expectation that an image instructing him to operate the button would be displayed during the special reach effect, and the image instructing him to operate the button was displayed. In this case, the player expects more support message images to be displayed.

Note that instead of a button operation, a display may be performed based on an operation on a lever (the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 137, etc.). In that case, a predetermined number of penlight images (for example, 4 to 8) will be displayed instead of the cheering message image, and the more the number of penlight images displayed, the higher the expectation level will be. Good too.
FIG. 279(e) shows a display state in which an image instructing lever operation is displayed. Further, FIG. 279(f) shows a display state in which six penlight images are displayed after the lever operation (or after the effective period of the lever operation ends).

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 276 and 277, all of the pending images and the pending images in the first pending display area to fourth pending display area are displayed during the special reach effect. During a reach effect, only the pending image may be displayed. Alternatively, all the pending images including the pending image may not be displayed during a special ready-to-reach effect.
In addition, an embodiment was shown in which a background concealment image is displayed at the end of a special reach effect and the special reach background image is switched to a normal background image, but after this switching timing, the normal background image, the normal decorative pattern, and the corresponding pending The image and the held images in the first to fourth held display areas gradually become visible. Note that, although the held images are displayed in the first held display area to the fourth held display area, the held images may not be displayed.

The "hold change chance performance" will be described below with reference to FIGS. 280 and 281. FIG. 280 shows a time chart illustrating an embodiment of the "hold change chance performance". Further, FIG. 281 shows an example of display in the display area when the "hold change chance effect" is executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 280(a), an explanation will be given of the performance mode when the "hold change chance performance" is not performed. Note that the decorative patterns displayed in the figures shown in FIGS. 281 to 284 are normal decorative patterns.
The fluctuating display starts at timing t0, and after one second has elapsed, the decorative pattern enters a display state in which it fluctuates at high speed. FIG. 281(a) shows a display state in which decorative patterns are changing at high speed, and a normal background image A is displayed as a background image. The number of pending images is two, and the normal pending image is displayed in the pending display area, and the normal pending images are displayed in the first pending display area and the second pending display area. The details of the hold display area, the first hold display area, and the second hold display area are as described above with reference to FIG. 123.
In this production example, the visual recognition mode of the pending image does not change until the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at timing t31.
The decorative pattern is stopped and displayed from timing t31 to timing t32. The display of the pending image ends at timing t31. After timing t32, the next and subsequent variable displays and jackpot games are started. Note that the display of the new pending image is started at the timing (timing t32) when the next variable display is started.

Next, a description will be given of the performance mode when the "hold change chance performance" is executed for performance examples 01 to 04 shown in FIG. 280(b). In the "hold change chance effect", a held concealment image that indicates as an effect whether or not the held image being displayed will change to another held image is displayed in front of the held image. The reserved hidden images include a first reserved concealed image in which the kanji character ``uta'' is placed within an octagonal area, a second retained hidden image in which the kanji character ``hime'' is placed in an octagonal area, and an octagonal area in which the kanji character ``hime'' is placed. The third reserved hidden image has the kanji ``den'' placed in the area, the fourth reserved hidden image has the kanji ``setsu'' placed in the octagonal area, and the circumference has a radial shape. It consists of a substantially circular retained concealment effect image (note that it is written as "circular" in the figure for simplicity).

Production example 01 shows an example of production in which a first pending concealment image is displayed on the near side of a normal pending image (white pending image) from timing t2 to timing t3. FIG. 281(b) is a display example from timing t2 to timing t3.

In production example 02, from timing t2 to timing t3, a first pending concealment image is displayed in front of the normal pending image, and from timing t3 to timing t4, a second pending concealment image is displayed in front of the normal pending image. An example of a performance in which is displayed is shown.
FIG. 281(b) is a display example from timing t2 to timing t3. Further, FIG. 281(c) is a display example from timing t3 to timing t4.

In production example 03, from timing t2 to timing t3, a first pending concealment image is displayed in front of the normal pending image, and from timing t3 to timing t4, a second pending concealment image is displayed in front of the normal pending image. is displayed, and shows an example of an effect in which a third pending concealment image is displayed on the near side of the normal pending image from timing t4 to timing t5.
FIG. 281(b) is a display example from timing t2 to timing t3. Further, FIG. 281(c) is a display example from timing t3 to timing t4. Further, FIG. 281(d) is a display example from timing t4 to timing t5.

In production example 04, from timing t2 to timing t3, a first pending concealment image is displayed in front of the normal pending image, and from timing t3 to timing t4, a second pending concealment image is displayed in front of the normal pending image. is displayed, and from timing t4 to timing t5, a third pending concealment image is displayed on the near side of the normal pending image, and from timing t5 to timing t6, a fourth pending concealment image is displayed on the near side of the normal pending image. This shows an example of a performance in which a hold concealment effect image is displayed in front of the normal hold image from timing t6 to timing t7. In this production example, the changed pending image is displayed after timing t7.
FIG. 281(b) is a display example from timing t2 to timing t3. Further, FIG. 281(c) is a display example from timing t3 to timing t4. Further, FIG. 281(d) is a display example from timing t4 to timing t5. Further, FIG. 281(e) is a display example from timing t5 to timing t6. Further, FIG. 281(f) is a display example from timing t6 to timing t7. Further, FIG. 281(g) is a display example after timing t7.
Although it is determined that the fourth pending concealment image is displayed at timing t5, the pending image changes to another pending image, but in this embodiment, the pending concealment effect image is displayed. By delaying the timing of displaying the changed pending image, it is possible to maintain the player's sense of anticipation for a long time.

In production examples 01 to 03, the display of the held hidden image is finished at timing t2 to timing t4, respectively, and the held image that was being displayed before the held hidden image is displayed is displayed. FIG. 281(h) shows the display mode at this time.
Note that when ending the display of the held hidden image, the display of the held hidden image may be ended instantly or may be ended gradually. If the pending image is gradually ended, the pending image becomes visible gradually.
On the other hand, in production example 04, after displaying the fourth pending concealment image and the pending concealment effect image, the display of the pending concealment effect image ends at timing t7, and the normal The pending image is displayed in a color (blue in this case) indicating that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than that of the pending image. FIG. 281(g) shows the display mode at this time.
In this way, the display effect is performed in stages: displaying the words "uta", "hime", "den", and "setsu" (or displaying the word "setsu"), displaying the pending concealment effect image, and displaying the said pending image. progresses, and eventually the display mode of the pending image suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot, which can increase the player's expectations compared to a case where the display mode of the pending image suddenly changes. .

Furthermore, although we have shown an example in which a blue pending image is displayed when the display of the pending concealment effect image ends, it is not limited to the blue pending image, but green, red, and gold colors that indicate higher expectations of a jackpot are also shown. The configuration may be such that such pending images may be displayed. With this configuration, when the fourth pending hidden image is displayed, the player waits with anticipation to see which pending image will be displayed.
In addition, in each production example, during the period in which the held hidden image continues to be displayed, the held hidden image is not visible, but a portion thereof may be made visible. In this case, it is possible to recognize which color of the pending image is displayed as the pending image.

The "hold change chance effect" may be executed when the held image other than the normal held image is displayed. Below, with reference to FIG. 280(c), an example of a performance in a case where the "retention change chance performance" is executed when the relevant blue reservation image is displayed will be shown.
Production example 05 shows an example of production in which only the first pending hidden image is displayed when the blue pending image is displayed. In this production example, the blue pending image is displayed even after the timing t2 when the display of the first pending hidden image ends. Note that even if only the second pending concealed image and the third pending concealed image are displayed, the blue pending image is displayed after the display of these pending concealed images is finished.

Production example 06 shows an example of production in which the pending concealment effect image is also displayed when the blue pending image is displayed. In this production example, at timing t7 when the display of the pending concealment effect image ends, display of the pending image in green, red, gold, etc., which has a higher degree of expectation than the blue pending image, is started.

In the production examples shown with reference to FIGS. 280(a) and 280(b), decorative patterns are sequentially temporarily stopped and displayed after timing t10, and all decorative patterns are stopped and displayed at timing t21. The timing of the stop display will be further delayed, and until then, other performances described in this specification such as a pseudo-continuation performance, "Year-end song contest reach performance", "The countdown reach performance", etc. will be executed. You may also do so.

In this way, in the "holding change chance effect", held hidden images are displayed step by step in a predetermined order, and when the last stage of held hidden images is displayed (the fourth held hidden image is displayed). case), the pending image is changed and displayed to indicate that the expectation level is higher. On the other hand, if the display of the held hidden image does not reach the final stage (if only the first to third held hidden images are displayed), no change occurs in the held hidden image, and the held hidden image does not change. The pending image that was being displayed before the display of the hidden image was started is displayed as is.
According to such a configuration, the player becomes very interested in whether or not the display of the reserved concealed image progresses to the final "theory", making it possible to provide the player with a new sense of entertainment. Become.

With reference to FIG. 280(b), an example was shown in which a maximum of four pending concealment images (first to fourth pending concealment images) are displayed, but the number of pending concealment images may be greater than this. It can be good or it can be less. For example, in the production example shown with reference to FIG. 280(f), the seventh pending concealment image may be displayed, but the details will be described later.

We have shown an example in which the held concealment image changes instantly at a predetermined timing (timing t3, timing t4, timing t5, timing t6, etc.), but when switching, the held concealment image before switching changes to the held concealment image after switching. The image may be displayed in such a way that it changes gradually. For example, in an octagonal area, the kanji ``uta'' is moved to the left while the kanji ``hime'' appears from the right, so that the pending hidden images can be dynamically switched. It's okay. FIG. 282(a) shows the display mode of the pending hidden image during switching. Note that it is desirable that such switching display be executed in a period of about 0.1 to 0.3 seconds.

With reference to Production Example 01 to Production Example 03, an example was shown in which the reserved concealed image was only displayed halfway. Instead of making it visible, the held hidden image may be gradually erased over a predetermined period (for example, one second). For example, the configuration may be such that the transparency is gradually increased so that the pending image becomes visible.
FIG. 282(b) shows a state in which the first reserved hidden image is displayed semitransparently. In this state, it is possible to recognize the kanji added to the reserved concealed image and the shape and color of the retained image.

Although we have shown an example in which a held hidden image is suddenly displayed at a position overlapping the held image, the held concealed image is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the held image, and is moved toward the held image. It may be overlapped with
In FIGS. 282(c) to 282(e), after displaying a large first held concealment image in the upper left of the display area, while gradually decreasing the size of the first held concealment image, A display example is shown in which the first reserved concealed image is displayed in such a manner that it is moved and finally overlaps with the front side of the reserved image.

A held hidden image may be displayed within the held image. FIGS. 283(a) to 283(d) show display examples in which the first to fourth reserved concealed images are displayed in a superimposed manner on the near side within the retained image. Note that the held concealment effect image may also be displayed in an overlapping manner on the near side within the held image. Note that the first to fourth reserved hidden images may be composed only of characters.

In addition, the first to fourth pending concealment images and the pending concealment effect image displayed in the "holding change chance production" are images that are displayed temporarily, and they continue to be displayed on the near side of the holding image. There isn't. That is, the display of the first to fourth pending concealment images and the pending concealment effect image is finished at a predetermined timing during the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol, and at least immediately before the decorative symbol stops fluctuating, the display is performed in a predetermined manner. An effect is performed so that the pending image (white, blue, etc.) can be visually recognized. For example, in production examples 01 to 04, the display of the first to fourth pending concealment images and the pending concealment effect image ends by timing t7 at the latest.

Other display modes may be adopted as the display mode of the first to fourth pending concealment images. FIG. 283(e) is an example of a square (tilted at 45 degrees). FIG. 283(f) is an example in which the size of the kanji characters displayed within the octagonal area is increased. FIG. 283(g) is an example in which the color within the octagonal area is green. Furthermore, the color of the characters is not limited to the color within the area, and the color of the characters may be green. Further, a combination of these retained hidden images may be employed.
Further, these display modes may indicate the degree of expectation that the characters will be executed to the end or the degree of expectation of a jackpot in the "suspended change chance effect".
Specifically, compared to the case where the held hidden image in the form shown in FIGS. 281(b) to 281(e) is displayed, the case where the held hidden image in the form shown in FIG. 283 is displayed is better. However, the expectation level that the characters will be executed to the end or the expectation level of the jackpot may be increased.
In addition, it is arranged so that a pending hidden image with an expectation of 100% for characters to be executed to the end or a jackpot to be displayed in any one of the first to fourth pending hidden images. You can.
With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding whether or not the reserved concealed image will be displayed to the end and the degree of expectation of a jackpot when the reserved concealed image is displayed to the end.

With reference to FIGS. 281(f) and 281(g), an example was shown in which the pending concealment effect image is changed and displayed at the timing (timing t7) at which the display of the pending concealment effect image ends. At the timing when displaying the image ends, an effect image that suggests or foretells the occurrence of a predetermined event may be displayed in front of the pending image.
FIGS. 284(a) and 284(b) are performance images including the words "chance" and "super hot". A display example is shown in which an effect image indicating the degree of expectation that the variable display result will be a jackpot is displayed. Note that the latter performance image has higher expectations.
FIG. 284(c) shows a display example in which an effect image including the text "Waiting" indicating that some effect will be executed before the variable display ends is displayed. Note that when the effect is executed, the display of this effect image ends and the suspended image becomes visible.
FIG. 284(d) shows a display example in which a performance image including the words "Live Reach" that foretells the occurrence of "Year-end Song Contest Reach Performance" or "The Countdown Reach Performance" is displayed. . Note that a performance image including the words "Year-end Song Contest" and "The Countdown" may be displayed more clearly to indicate the type of reach performance that will occur. Note that at the timing when the ready-to-reach effect is started, the display of this effect image ends, and the pending image becomes visible.
Note that the effect image including the characters "Diva Legend" shown in FIG. 284(e) is also a effect image showing that decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot.

Regarding the effect images shown in FIGS. 284(c) and 284(d), the display ends in the middle of the variation of the decorative pattern, and the suspended image becomes visible, but in FIG. 284(a), Regarding the effect images shown in FIGS. 284(b) and 284(e), the display may end during the movement of the decorative pattern, and the pending image may become visible, or the decorative pattern may stop. The display may be continued until the effect image is displayed, and the pending image may not become visible after the effect image is displayed. In addition, in this case, the effect image will perform substantially the same function as the relevant pending image.
Although we have shown an example of using text to suggest or foretell the occurrence of a predetermined event, display formats other than text (color, shape, icon, etc., or combinations thereof) may suggest or foretell the occurrence of a predetermined event. You can do it like this.

Although an example has been shown in which the "pending change chance effect" is started immediately after the decorative symbol fluctuating display changes at high speed, the "pending change chance effect" may be started at other timings.
For example, at the start of a pseudo-series performance (for the pseudo-series performance, see the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 262, 263, etc.), during the pseudo-series performance, a special reach performance "Year-end Uta Gassen Reach Performance" ”, at the start of “The Countdown Reach Effect” (timing when the special reach background image becomes visible), and when the title of the special reach effect is displayed (timing shown in FIGS. 276(b) and 277(b)) , the "hold change chance performance" may be started during the special reach performance (timing shown in FIGS. 276(c) and 277(c)).
In addition, regarding the end timing of the "suspended change chance performance" in these cases, it ends during the pseudo-continuation performance or the special reach performance.

Note that the "pending change chance performance" may be executed more than once, and the timing of execution may be any one of these timings. For example, it may be executed two or more times during high-speed fluctuation before the decorative symbol becomes ready-to-reach. Alternatively, the first "suspended change chance performance" may be executed during the pseudo-continuous performance, and the second "suspended change chance performance" may be executed during the special ready-to-reach performance.

Next, other performance examples will be explained.
In production examples 07 to 09 in FIG. 280(d), although the first to third pending concealment images are the same, multiple types of fourth pending concealment images are provided, and any one of the fourth pending concealment images is A modification example in which a hidden image is displayed is shown. In this modification, depending on the type of the fourth reserved concealed image, there are cases in which the retained image changes with a predetermined probability (for example, 50%) and cases in which the retained image always changes.

First, with reference to production example 07 and production example 08, a production mode when a fourth pending concealment image of a type in which the pending image changes with a predetermined probability (for example, 50%) is displayed will be described.
In production example 07 and production example 08, "Hold", "Tame", "Up", and "Tsu" are displayed in order from timing t2 to timing t6, but in production example 07, the suspended image is displayed as being promoted at timing t7. will not be carried out. On the other hand, in production example 08, at timing t7, a display is performed in which the relevant protection image is promoted. In this way, when "Tsu" is displayed as the fourth reserved hidden image, a display is performed in which the reserved image is promoted with a predetermined probability (for example, 50%).

Next, with reference to production example 09, a production mode when a fourth pending concealment image of a type in which the pending image always changes is displayed will be described.
In production example 09, "Hold", "Hold", "Up", and "Rise" are displayed in order from timing t2 to timing t6. Thereafter, at timing t8, a display is performed to promote the pending image. In this way, when "promote" is displayed as the fourth reserved concealed image, the reserved image is displayed with a 100% probability of being promoted.

Although the example in which four characters, ``uta,''``hime,''``den,'' and ``setsu'' are displayed, three or five or more characters may be displayed.
In addition, although kanji (``uta'', ``hime'', ``den'', ``setsu'', ``ho'', ``tome'', ``jo'', and ``shō'') are shown as examples of characters included in the reserved hidden image, Examples of characters included in hiragana (e.g. "u", "ta", "hi", "me"), katakana (e.g. "u", "ta", "hi", "me"), and alphabetical English (e.g. "D", "me"), I,” “V,” and “A”) may be adopted.
In addition, an example in which the characters included in the retained hidden image are the same up to the middle and then become different from the middle (``hold'', ``tome'', ``upper'', ``trace'', and ``hold'', ``tome'', ``upper'', ``raise'') ”), but for example, “C”, “H”, “A”, “N”, “C”, “E” and “C”, “H”, “A”, “N”, “G”, “E”, etc. Some of the English spellings of the characters included in the hidden image may be the same, and some may be different ("C" and "G"). In addition, if the displayed character string is "CHANGE", the suspended image will be promoted with a predetermined probability (for example, 50%), and the displayed character string will be promoted as "CHANGE". In this case, the retained image may be promoted with a probability of 100%, similar to the "retention increase".

After the pending concealment effect image is displayed, instead of changing the pending image immediately, the pending image may be displayed to be promoted after waiting for a predetermined period of time. Note that while on standby, it is preferable to display an effect image "on standby" as shown in FIG. 284(c).
Production example 10 is a production example in which a production image "on standby" is displayed from timing t7 to timing t22, and the pending image is promoted at timing t22. In production example 10, the suspended image is promoted while the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed.
Production example 11 is a production example in which a production image "on standby" is displayed from timing t7 to timing t27, and the pending image is promoted at timing t27. In production example 11, the pending image is promoted in a state where the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped and displayed.

Although an example has been shown in which an effect image indicating "waiting" is displayed while waiting for the pending image to be promoted, other effect images may be displayed. For example, an effect image such as "waiting for pending change" or "pending change" may be displayed.
Alternatively, an effect image may be displayed that includes all of the characters displayed as the first to fourth pending concealment images, such as "on hold" or "on hold".

The promotion of the pending image may be performed at other timings.
For example, at the start of a pseudo-series performance (for the pseudo-series performance, see the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 262, 263, etc.), during the pseudo-series performance, a special reach performance "Year-end Uta Gassen Reach Performance" ”, at the start of “The Countdown Reach Effect” (timing when the special reach background image becomes visible), and when the title of the special reach effect is displayed (timing shown in FIGS. 276(b) and 277(b)) , the pending image may be promoted during a special reach effect (timings shown in FIGS. 276(c) and 277(c)).

On the condition that the "reserved change chance performance" progresses to a predetermined stage (display of the fourth reserved hidden image), a performance image that suggests that the relevant retained image will be promoted or a special performance will be performed will be displayed. Although an example has been shown in which the process has progressed to a predetermined stage, an effect mode may be implemented in which a pending hidden image is further displayed.
In production example 12 shown in FIG. 280(f), held hidden images to which the characters "hold", "tame", "hen", and "ka" are attached are displayed as the first to fourth held hidden images. It shows the pattern. Furthermore, production example 13 shows a pattern in which "hold", "hold", "change", "change", "geki", "a", and "tsu" are displayed as the first to seventh pending concealment images.
Between the case where the "pending change chance performance" of production example 12 is executed and the case where the "suspension change chance production" of production example 13 is executed, the latter is more likely to be promoted to the corresponding pending image with a higher expectation level. You can do it like this.
In addition, when the "hold change chance effect" of effect example 12 is executed, it is promoted to any of the blue to red pending images, but not to the gold one, and the "retention change chance effect" of effect example 13 is promoted. When the "pending change chance effect" is executed, the pending image may not be promoted to the blue pending image, but may be promoted to any of the green to gold pending images.
Production example 14 shows a pattern in which "hold", "hold", "change", "change", "wait", "ki", and "medium" are displayed as the first to seventh pending concealment images. In this case, a "waiting" effect image is displayed after the pending concealment effect image is displayed, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the pending image is promoted. It is preferable to configure the presentation example 14 to be promoted to the pending image, which has a higher degree of expectation than the presentation example 12, in the same manner as when the presentation example 13 is executed.

Although an example has been shown in which the "pending change chance effect" is executed for the relevant pending image, the "pending change chance effect" may be executed for any of the pending images displayed in the first to fourth pending display areas. may be executed. In this case, based on the pre-reading of the reservation, it is determined whether or not the "retention change chance effect" can be executed. Further, the pending concealed image is displayed in a manner that it overlaps with the pending image corresponding to the pending image that is the target of pre-reading. In addition, the "suspended change chance effect" may be performed within one fluctuating display of decorative symbols, or may be performed across multiple fluctuating displays of decorative symbols. good. In addition, if the decorative pattern is displayed multiple times, the held image will move to the left, but if the held concealment image is also moved to the left together with the held image, the held image will move to the left. good.
For example, the "holding change chance effect" may be performed during a period in which a holding image corresponding to a certain holding is displayed in the second holding display area. Alternatively, the execution of the "pending change chance effect" is started during the period displayed in the second pending display area, and the execution of the "pending change chance effect" is finished during the period displayed in the first pending display area. Good too. Alternatively, even if the execution of the "pending change chance effect" starts during the period displayed in the second hold display area, and the execution of the "pending change chance effect" ends during the period displayed in the relevant hold display area, good.

When the alphabets “Z”, “O”, “N”, and “E” are displayed as the first to fourth pending concealment images, the pre-reading effect image (green color) shown with reference to FIGS. ) may be displayed.
In addition, when the alphabets "Z", "O", "N", "E", "G", "O", "L" and "D" are displayed as the first to eighth pending concealment images, The prefetch effect image (gold color) shown with reference to FIG. 125 and the like may be displayed.
Note that there may be cases where the eighth pending concealment image is not displayed and only one of the fifth pending concealment image to the seventh pending concealment image is displayed. In that case, the prefetch effect image (green) is displayed. be done.
Note that the expectation level when the golden pre-read effect image is displayed is preferably higher than the expectation level when the green pre-read effect image is displayed.
According to such an embodiment, when "Z", "O", "N", and "E" are displayed as the first to fourth pending concealment images, the player will not be able to see the green pre-read effect image. be able to recognize that Furthermore, "G", "O", "L", and "D" are displayed as the 5th to 8th pending concealment images, and the production mode is visually checked while expecting whether or not the golden look-ahead production image will be displayed. I will do it.

Note that the prefetch effect images in the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 123 to 125 are displayed over a plurality of fluctuating displays of decorative symbols, but are displayed only in one fluctuating display corresponding to the suspension. It is also possible to do so.

In addition, "hold", "tome", "hen", "ka", "geki", "ho", "tome", "hen", "ka", "geki", "a", or "ho", "tome", "hen", "ka" ”, “Wait”, “Hold”, “Hold”, “hen”, “Ka”, “Hold”, and “Ki” may be displayed as the hold hidden images. In this case, “Hold” and “Hold” It is preferable to promote the pending image in the same manner as when "change" and "change" are displayed. It is preferable to adopt a similar presentation mode for "Z", "O", "N", "E", "G", "O", "L", and "D".

Displays in the order of ``theory'', ``legendary'', ``princess'', and ``song'', and when the last ``song'' is displayed, special reach effects such as ``Year-end song contest reach effect'' and ``The countdown reach effect'' are displayed. ” may be executed. In this example, the last character displayed suggests that a reach effect with a song motif will be executed, so the player will want more strongly for the character ``Uta'' to be displayed. Become.

In the example of production shown with reference to FIG. It may be seconds.
Furthermore, the display times may be different between the reserved hidden images. In production example 01 shown in FIG. 285(b), the display time of the first to fourth pending concealment images is the same, but in production example 02 to production example 09, the first to fourth pending concealment images are Some of the pending hidden images have different display times.
Regarding the display time, in consideration of the effect achieved, in the relationship between any two held hidden images among the first held hidden image to the fourth held hidden image, the display time is the same, and the display time of one side is the same. A relationship can be established in which one display time is longer and one display time is shorter.

For example, as in production example 01, by making the display times of the first to fourth pending concealment images the same, it is possible to reduce the number of man-hours involved in creating the production.
Furthermore, as in production example 02, by lengthening the display time of the first pending concealment image, it becomes easier for the player to notice that the "pending change chance production" has occurred, and the player can monitor the progress of the subsequent production. It becomes difficult to overlook.
In addition, as in production example 03 and production example 04, by increasing the display time of the second pending concealment image and the third pending concealment image, it is possible to display the fourth pending concealment image in a state approaching the display stage of the fourth pending concealment image. It is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation as to whether or not the image will be displayed for a long period of time.
In addition, as in production example 05, by increasing the display time of the fourth pending concealment image, the "pending change chance production" reaches the final stage, and the satisfaction that it is confirmed that the pending image is promoted. It is possible to make the player feel the feeling for a long time.
It goes without saying that effect examples 06 to 09 and other variations also have their own effects.

With reference to FIGS. 280 to 285 and the like, an embodiment has been described in which the reserved concealed image is displayed in stages and when the reserved concealed image is displayed up to the last stage, the retained image is promoted. Referring to FIGS. 286 to 288, other embodiments of the "hold change chance production" will be described below.

FIG. 286(a) shows a state in which the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped and displayed as decorative patterns with the same number, resulting in a ready-to-reach state, and the middle decorative pattern is changing at high speed. A normal background image A representing the scenery inside the recording studio is displayed as the background image. In addition, there are four reservations corresponding to the first starting port 2002.

Next, the variation speed of the medium decorative pattern becomes slow, and the medium decorative pattern becomes easily visible. FIG. 286(b) shows the display state at this time.
Next, an image imitating a lightning bolt is displayed moving toward the medium decorative pattern, and the medium decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. FIG. 286(c) shows the display state at this time.
Next, the display of the image imitating a lightning bolt ends, and a window image with the words "Diva Legend Pending Change Chance!" is displayed in the center of the display area. FIG. 286(d) shows the display state at this time.

Next, circular images are gradually displayed in two divided areas set on the left and right sides of the display area. FIGS. 286(e), 286(f), and 287(a) show a state in which circular images indicating divided areas are gradually displayed.
Next, a pseudo pending image for effect having the same size as the pending image is displayed at the position of the pending image displayed in the first pending display area. The pseudo-retention image for presentation moves toward the partitioned area on the left side while gradually increasing in size.
Similarly, a pseudo pending image for effect having the same size as the pending image is displayed at the position of the pending image displayed in the third pending display area. The pseudo-retention image for presentation moves toward the partitioned area on the right side while gradually increasing in size.
The color of the pseudo-holding image for presentation is the same color as the holding image displayed at the movement source, and is white in this example of presentation. FIG. 287(b) shows a state in which two pseudo-holding images for effect are being moved.
Note that the arrows in the figure are drawn to indicate the movement mode of the pseudo-holding image for effect, and are not actually displayed. Such notation may also be used in other drawings (FIGS. 288 to 292, etc.).
Next, the movement of the performance pseudo-holding image that started moving from the first holding display area to the left partitioned area is completed. At the same time, the movement of the performance pseudo-holding image that started moving from the third holding display area to the right partitioned area is completed. FIG. 287(c) shows the display state at this time.

Next, the kanji character "uta" is added to the pseudo-retention image for presentation in the left and right partitioned areas and displayed. FIG. 287(d) shows the display state at this time. In the left and right partitioned areas, in the same manner as in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. executed. Note that the characters of the pseudo-retention image for effect in the left partitioned area are large, and the characters of the pseudo-retention image for effect in the left partitioned area are small. In this embodiment, the larger the characters, the higher the probability that the last character will be displayed, and the player expects the larger characters to be displayed. Note that the probability that the last character will be displayed may be indicated by the color of the kanji instead of the size of the kanji.

In the partitioned area on the left, "theory" is finally displayed. On the other hand, in the partitioned area on the right side, only the songs up to the first stage are displayed, and the pseudo-retention image for performance is displayed semitransparently. FIGS. 287(e) and 287(f) show the display state at this time.

Next, for the left partitioned area, after "theory" is displayed, a green presentation pseudo-retention image is displayed. Also, a message saying "Change?!" is displayed. FIG. 287(g) shows the display state at this time. Note that the words "Change?!" may be displayed in a manner overlapping the pseudo-holding image for presentation.

Next, the green performance pseudo-holding image displayed in the left divided area starts moving toward the holding image display area. At the same time, the display of the semi-transparent presentation pseudo-retention image displayed in the partitioned area on the right side ends. FIG. 288(a) shows the display state at this time.

If the pseudo-holding image for presentation is displayed up to the last "theory" and displayed in the predetermined color, the decoration pattern will collide with the temporarily stopped decorative pattern and be bounced back, causing the decorative pattern to miss the reach. There is an effect that is displayed in a manner that shows , and an effect that moves the medium decorative pattern by colliding with the medium decorative pattern and changes the color of the holding image to the color of the pseudo holding image for presentation, and the reach effect is performed. Any of the effects to be executed is executed.
FIGS. 288(b) to 288(d) show display modes in the former case. Specifically, a display is performed in which the presentation pseudo-retention image collides with the medium decorative pattern, but is repelled, moves toward the left side of the display area, and finally moves out of the screen. Thereafter, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped and displayed in the form of "3", "7", and "3", and then stopped and displayed.
FIGS. 288(e) to 288(g) show display modes in the latter case. Specifically, the presentation pseudo-retention image collides with the middle decoration pattern, flips off the middle decoration pattern, and is displayed as the said reservation image in the said reservation display area. Further, after the medium decorative pattern is in a state of high-speed fluctuation, a special reach effect ("The Countdown Reach Effect" is illustrated in the figure) is performed.

In this way, if the pseudo-holding image for presentation is displayed to the end and the decorative pattern can be flicked away, the mode changes to indicate that the held image has high expectations, and a special reach effect is executed. This will result in a jackpot with a predetermined probability.
On the other hand, if the presentation pseudo-retention image is displayed to the end and the decorative pattern cannot be flicked off, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss.

With reference to FIGS. 286 to 288, an example was shown in which the display of the pseudo-holding image for effect is started from the position where the normal holding image (white holding image) is displayed, but the holding image different from the normal holding image An embodiment in which the display of the pseudo pending image for effect is started from the position where the pending image (blue, green, etc.) is displayed will be described with reference to FIG. 289.

Normal pending images are displayed in the first pending display area, second pending display area, and fourth pending display area, but a blue pending image is displayed in the third pending display area. FIG. 289(a) shows the display state at this time.

Next, the display and movement of the presentation pseudo-retention image is started. A blue pending image is displayed in the third pending display area, and the presentation pseudo pending image is also a blue pending image. FIG. 289(b) shows a display state in which the presentation pseudo-retention image is being moved. Further, FIG. 289(c) shows the display state when the movement of the presentation pseudo-retention image is completed.

Next, character display of the pseudo-retention image for presentation is started. In the partitioned area on the left side, "song" is displayed in small letters on a white pseudo-retention image for performance, and in the partitioned area on the right side, "song" is displayed in large letters on a blue pseudo-retention image for effect. FIG. 289(d) shows the display state at this time.

In this embodiment, when the presentation pseudo-retention image is blue or green, the probability that it will be displayed up to the last character is higher than when it is white. Furthermore, when the last character is displayed, the color of the presentation pseudo-retention image may change to a presentation pseudo-retention image of a color with a higher degree of expectation.
For example, when the color of the pseudo-holding image for presentation is blue, the holding image may be changed to blue or a green holding image, which is a color with higher expectations than blue. In addition, when the color of the presentation pseudo-holding image is red, the holding image may be changed to red or a gold-colored holding image, which is a color with higher expectations than red.
With this configuration, it is possible to arouse the player's great interest in which pending image will be moved to become the performance pseudo pending image.

With reference to FIGS. 286 to 288, an embodiment was shown in which the characters of the pseudo-retention images for presentation are displayed in parallel, but the characters of the pseudo-retention images for presentation are made to be displayed one by one in order. The embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 290 and 291.

Also in this embodiment, the pseudo-holding images for effect are displayed in the first holding display area and the third holding display area, and are moved to the left and right divided areas. FIGS. 290(a) to 290(c) show the display state from the display of the divided area to the completion of movement of the presentation pseudo-retention image.

Next, a large "song" is displayed in the partitioned area on the left, and a small "song" is displayed in the partitioned area on the right. The size of the characters indicates the degree of expectation that the last character will be displayed. In this embodiment, the display is performed sequentially starting from the left partitioned area. A radial image is displayed as a mark in the divided area where the display is being performed. FIGS. 290(d) to 290(f) show the display state at this time. As shown in the figure, the pseudo-holding image for performance on the left side is displayed up to "theory," but the pseudo-holding image for performance on the right side is in a standby state with "song" still displayed.

The pseudo-holding image on the left displays the ``theory'' and then changes to green. Additionally, a message "Change?!" is displayed. FIG. 290(g) shows the display state at this time.

Next, the display mode of the pseudo-hold images for performance on the right side changes in order from "song". FIGS. 291(a) to 291(c) show the display state when "song" to "sensei" are displayed. At this time, the pseudo-holding image for presentation on the left side remains in a standby state while changing to green.

The pseudo-holding image for production on the right displays "theory" and then changes to blue. Additionally, a message "Change?!" is displayed. FIG. 291(d) shows the display state at this time.

Next, the text "Change?!" and the radial image displayed on the right side are erased. FIG. 291(e) shows the display state at this time.
In this way, by sequentially changing the display mode of the performance pseudo-retention image in a plurality of partitioned areas (the left partitioned area and the right partitioned area), the visibility of the changed pattern is improved.

Next, the left presentation pseudo-holding image moves toward the holding image, but is bounced by the temporarily stopped medium decorative pattern and moves toward the lower left. FIG. 291(f) shows the display state at this time.

Next, the right-side performance pseudo-holding image moves toward the holding image, tilting the temporarily stopped medium decorative pattern, and moving it so as to overlap the display position of the holding image. FIG. 291(g) shows the display state at this time.

Finally, the pseudo-holding image for effect on the right side is deleted at the timing when it overlaps with the holding image. At the same time, the held image changes from the normal held image to blue, which is the color of the presentation pseudo held image on the right side. At the same time, the high-speed fluctuation of the medium decorative pattern is resumed. FIG. 291(h) shows the display state at this time. After that, special reach performances such as ``Year-end Song Contest Reach Performance'' and ``The Countdown Reach Performance'' will be performed.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 286 to 291, the sizes of the partitioned areas are the same, but partitioned areas of different sizes may be displayed. For example, divided areas of three sizes, large, medium, and small, may be displayed.
In FIGS. 292(a) to 292(d), a large partitioned area is displayed as the left partitioned area, a medium-sized partitioned area is displayed as the right partitioned area, and the held image moves toward the left and right partitioned areas, A display example in which a pseudo-retention image for presentation is displayed is shown. Note that the size of the pseudo-retention image for presentation is displayed in the same size as the size of the displayed partitioned area.
Further, it is preferable that the larger the divided area is, the higher the probability that the last character will be displayed.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 286 to 291, an example was shown in which two partitioned areas are displayed, but the number of partitioned areas to be displayed is determined by lottery from 1 to 4. You can. FIG. 292(e) is a display example when one divided area is displayed. FIG. 292(f) is a display example when three divided areas are displayed. FIG. 292(g) is a display example when four divided areas are displayed.
In addition, in the embodiment described above, an example was given in which the pending images in the first pending display area and the third pending display area are displayed in a moving manner, but this is only an example, and the first pending display area to There is a possibility that the production pseudo-holding image will be displayed in any area of the fourth holding display area.
Note that it is preferable that the number of divided areas greater than the number of reservations is not displayed. For example, when the number of reserved items is three, it is preferable to perform a lottery so that the number of displayed divided areas is between one and three. Further, when the number of pending items is 0, it is preferable not to perform the "holding change chance effect". With this configuration, the player is conscious of keeping a large number of reservations, so it is possible to increase the operation of the gaming machine.

When multiple divided areas (2 to 4) are displayed, the effect pattern is that all the divided areas are displayed up to the last character, and in some divided areas, the characters are only displayed half way, and other divided areas are Either a production pattern that displays up to the last character in an area (multiple successes and only one failure, only one success and multiple failures, etc.), or a production pattern that does not display until the last character in all divided areas. It is preferable that the effect pattern is made executable and the effect pattern to be executed is determined based on the result of the special lottery.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 286 to 291, an example was shown in which the "pending change chance performance" automatically progresses, but when the player's operation is triggered, the "pending change chance performance" is started. A part of the process may proceed.
For example, although a display in which a pseudo-holding image for presentation moves toward a divided area is automatically performed, text display is performed by the player by repeatedly pressing or holding a button (for example, the operation button 401 or the attack button 3710, etc.). The effect display may not progress unless the button is pressed. For example, while a pseudo-holding image for effect is displayed (FIG. 293(a)), the display of characters is started on the condition that the player continues to press or hold the button repeatedly (FIG. 293(b)). ) Later, the display may be performed up to a predetermined character. Note that if the player stops hitting repeatedly or holding down the button midway through, the display will stop or end at, for example, "Princess" or "Den." When the player resumes repeated hits or long presses, the display of new characters is also resumed. Note that it is preferable to display an image "push" at the lower left of the display area to suggest to the player how to operate the button. Alternatively, instead of "press", "repeat press" or "long press" may be displayed to indicate the operation mode.
In FIG. 293(c), the first partition area from the left and the fourth partition area from the left are displayed until the last "theory", and the second partition area from the left and the third partition area from the left are displayed until the last. This example shows a display example where the "theory" is not displayed.

Furthermore, even if the character display is started by the player pressing a button in a state in which a pseudo-retention image for presentation is displayed moving to a partitioned area (the state shown in FIG. 293(a)), good. Note that it is preferable that the characters be displayed automatically after that, up to a predetermined mode (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 293(c)).

In addition, in the display examples shown in FIGS. 293(a) to 293(c), a circular operation part simulation image imitating the operation button 401 and the attack button 3710 is displayed, but the operation of other buttons is If requested, a simulated operation unit image imitating the shape of the button may be displayed.
FIG. 293(d) shows an example in which a simulated image of the operation part of the mission button 3700 is displayed when operation of the mission button 3700 is requested. Note that the operation unit simulated image may be displayed at a position other than the lower left of the display area, and the figure shows an example in which it is displayed at the upper center of the display area.
In addition to the operation unit simulated image, a gauge indicating the operation validity period of the operation unit may be displayed. FIG. 293(d) shows an example in which a gauge image indicating the operation validity period is displayed below the operation unit simulated image. In addition, the black part in the figure gradually becomes shorter as the operation validity period passes, and the border moves to the right. The figure shows a state where 1/3 of the operation validity period has passed. There is.

In addition, if such a button operation is not performed, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a pseudo-holding image for presentation will be displayed in a predetermined manner (the same manner as when the button operation was performed). A display effect may be performed to change the pending image.
Alternatively, if such a button is not operated, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed without progressing the character display, the display of the pseudo-holding image for effect is terminated, and the display is displayed in a manner according to the special lottery result. It is preferable to stop displaying the medium decorative pattern.

Each character is displayed periodically as follows: "Uta → Hime → Legend → Theory → Song → Hime → Legend → Theory →...", and one of the characters is displayed according to the player's button operation. Good too. FIG. 293(e) shows a state in which each character is displayed periodically. In this case as well, if "Uta", "Princess", or "Ten" are displayed, it is considered a failure, and if "Theory" is displayed, it is considered a success, and the color of the pseudo-retention image for presentation may be changed. Note that it is preferable to display the characters at a speed that allows each character to be recognized (for example, the time for displaying one character may be approximately 0.1 seconds to 0.4 seconds).
Note that if a plurality of divided areas are displayed, the display of the plurality of divided areas may be determined at the same time by one operation of a button by the player.
Alternatively, the display of each divided area may be determined one by one in response to one operation of a button by the player. For example, as shown in FIG. 293(f), an operation unit simulated image may be displayed for each performance pseudo-retention image. Further, in this case, it is preferable that the presentation pseudo-holding images are stopped one by one from the left in response to one button operation.
In addition, although we have shown an example in which the operation part simulated image is displayed overlapping each of the performance-use pseudo-holding images, the display position of the operation-part simulation image is set slightly downward, and the performance-use pseudo-retention image and the operation part simulation It may be arranged to display the image so that it does not overlap with the image.

The operation instruction image for instructing the operation of the operation unit may overlap part or all of the pseudo-retention image for presentation. FIG. 293(g) shows a display state in which the operation instruction image and the presentation pseudo-retention image partially overlap. Further, FIG. 293(h) shows a display state in which the operation instruction image and the presentation pseudo-retention image all overlap.
Further, FIG. 294(a) shows a display state in which the operation unit simulated image and the performance pseudo-retention image all overlap. In the example shown in this figure, the pseudo-retention images for presentation are arranged in an arc shape. Specifically, in a clockwise direction from a predetermined position on the left side of the operation unit simulated image, pseudo-holding images for performance corresponding to the holding images displayed in the first holding display area to the fourth holding display area are displayed. .
Note that the operation mode in the embodiment described above can be adopted as the operation mode for stopping the presentation pseudo-holding image.

Depending on the display mode of the operation unit simulated image and the operation instruction image, either or both of the expectation of a jackpot and the expectation of displaying a "theory" may be indicated. For example, if a simulated operation part image or an operation instruction image is displayed in white, red, gold, etc., expectations will be higher when it is displayed in red than white, and gold than red. good.
In addition, the timing for displaying the operation part simulation image and the operation instruction image is the timing when at least all of the characters that can be finally displayed, such as "uta → princess → legend → theory", are displayed in the pseudo-holding image for production. It is desirable to do so later.

The performance pattern is shown in which each character is displayed periodically as follows: ``Uta → Hime → Legend → Theory → Uta → Hime → Legend → Theory →...'', and then one of the characters is stopped and displayed. In this performance pattern, the characters for "uta", "hime", "den", and "setsu" are usually white, but any one of the characters "uta", "hime", "den", and "setsu" By setting one or all of the colors to colors other than white, the degree of expectation that the "theory" will eventually be displayed may be suggested. For example, by making the letters ``uta'' blue, it may be suggested that there is a higher expectation that ``setsu'' will be displayed, compared to a case where the letters ``uta'' are white. In addition, when "theory" is displayed, the pending image changes to a mode that indicates that the expected level of the pending image is higher (for example, the normal pending image changes to the blue pending image). Therefore, if the text is a color other than white, the expectation of a jackpot is substantially higher than if it is white.
Note that although white and blue are used as examples of character colors, other colors than blue may be used as colors other than white. For example, it may be displayed in any one of three colors: blue, green, and red. At this time, the probability that the "theory" will be displayed may be increased in the order of blue, green, and red. In this case as well, the expectation of a jackpot is substantially higher in the order of blue, green, and red. By making the expectations different depending on the multiple display modes in this way, each character is displayed cyclically as follows: ``Uta → Hime → Legend → Theory → Uta → Hime → Legend → Theory →...'' It is also possible to arouse players' interest in the performance mode itself.
Note that the degree of expectation that the "theory" will be displayed may be suggested not only by color but also by other display modes. For example, star-shaped marks may be added to the characters, and the more marks there are, the higher the expectation that the "theory" will be displayed.
Note that before starting to display the characters (for example, during the period from timing t1 to timing t2), the pending concealment effect image is displayed in a predetermined color (white, blue, green, red), and the "theory" is determined depending on the display mode. After indicating the degree of expectation to be displayed (increasing in the order of white, blue, green, and red), the display of characters may be started.

A production pattern (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "first production pattern") in which each character is displayed periodically as "Uta → Hime → Legend → Theory → Uta → Hime → Legend → Theory →..." is shown. However, this production pattern has been modified to create a production pattern in which the characters "?→?→?→?→..." and "?" are scrolled and displayed periodically within the pseudo-hold image for production (hereinafter referred to as "?→?→?→?→..."). , (sometimes referred to as a "second effect pattern") may be provided.
FIG. 294(b) shows a display example when the second effect pattern is adopted in displaying the pseudo-holding image for effect in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 292(g).
Moreover, FIG. 294(c) shows a display example when the second effect pattern is adopted in displaying the pseudo-retention image for effect in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 293(g).
Moreover, FIG. 294(d) shows a display example when the second effect pattern is adopted in displaying the pseudo-retention image for effect in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 293(a).

In addition, in the second effect pattern, the timing for displaying characters to stop may be the same as in the first effect pattern, and depending on the elapse of a predetermined time or button operation, "song", "princess", " If any of the characters ``den'' and ``setsu'' are displayed in a stopped state, and ``setsu'' is displayed, a display is performed in which the pending image is promoted with a predetermined probability.
In addition to the four characters ``uta'', ``hime'', ``den'', and ``setsu'', other characters may be displayed as the characters that are stopped and displayed. For example, characters such as "red" and "gold" may be displayed in a stopped state, and a red or gold presentation pseudo-holding image may be displayed. Alternatively, the character "promote" may be displayed to indicate that the hold is to be promoted. In this case, it is preferable to display a pseudo-holding image for presentation in a predetermined color and to promote the holding to the holding of the color of the pseudo-holding image for presentation.
Alternatively, the word "win" may be displayed in a stopped state to indicate that a jackpot has occurred. In this case, it is preferable to display a pseudo-holding image for effect in a special mode (for example, a mode including the character "TO"), and to perform a display in which the held image is promoted to the held image in the special mode.

In the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 280 and 285, an example is shown in which the "hold change chance performance" is performed only once during one fluctuating display of the decorative pattern, but it may be performed multiple times. It may be set as such. In that case, it is preferable that after a certain "pending change chance performance" ends, execution of the next "pending change chance performance" is started.
For example, the first effect pattern may be executed two or more times during one variable display of decorative symbols. Similarly, the second effect pattern may be executed two or more times.
Alternatively, after executing the first effect pattern, the second effect pattern may be executed, or after executing the second effect pattern, the first effect pattern may be executed.
Further, the first effect pattern, the second effect pattern, and the first effect pattern may be executed in this order, or the second effect pattern, the first effect pattern, and the second effect pattern may be executed in this order.
With such a configuration, there is a possibility that the display for promoting the pending image will be displayed more than once during one change, and if the promotion fails in the first "holding change chance effect", Also, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that the second "retention change chance performance" will occur. In addition, if the player succeeds in promotion in the first "pending change chance performance", the second "pending change chance performance" can occur and make the player feel hopeful that he/she will be further promoted. can.

The valid period of button operation may be set to be the same length in the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern.
Alternatively, the length of the valid operation period in the first performance pattern and the length of the valid operation period in the second performance pattern may be set to different lengths. For example, the length of the valid operation period in the first performance pattern may be longer than the length of the valid operation period in the second performance pattern. Alternatively, the length of the valid operation period in the second performance pattern may be longer than the length of the valid operation period in the first performance pattern.

In this way, by displaying a pseudo-holding image for presentation and changing the display mode of the holding image, it is possible to increase the game by showing that the fluctuating result of the fluctuating decorative pattern is highly expected to indicate a jackpot. It can make people feel interested. In addition, since the performance pseudo-retention image is stopped and displayed by operating the operation unit, it is possible to increase the player's desire to operate the game.

Refer to FIGS. 273 to 275, FIGS. 295 to 297, etc. regarding the special effect "look-ahead effect when the reach is lost" in an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment shown below with reference to FIGS. 123 to 272, etc. I will explain. Note that FIG. 295 shows a time chart in this embodiment. Further, FIGS. 296(a) to 297(g) show display contents in the display area.

The outline of the performance mode shown in the time chart shown in FIG. 295(a) will be explained. In this production mode, it is indicated by the display mode of the character etc. that a special reach production ("The Countdown Reach Production") will result in a loss, and the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern are temporarily displayed in a mode indicating a loss. When the display is stopped, an effect display is performed based on the result of pending pre-reading.
Specifically, as the performance display, a microphone icon image is displayed at the position where the medium decorative pattern is displayed, and then a small microphone icon image is displayed at the lower left of the display area. After that, when the decorative pattern corresponding to the hold that is the target of pre-reading is being displayed in a variable manner, the microphone icon image is displayed again at the position where the medium decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable manner, and a special reach effect is performed. (In response to microphone icons being stocked, it is suggested that ``Year-end Song Contest Reach Performance'' and ``The Countdown Reach Performance'', which are performances related to microphones, will occur). In this production example, a "year-end song contest reach production" is executed.

Below, specific aspects of the production example will be explained in detail.
Before timing t4 in FIG. 295(a), the microphone is stolen by the little fish princess character in "The Countdown Reach Performance", and it is suggested to the player that the special lottery result is a loss. Note that the number of pending requests at this time is four. FIG. 296(a) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t4, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss. FIG. 296(b) shows the display state at this time.
A background concealed image is displayed from timing t6 to timing t12, and the background image is switched from special reach background image B to normal background image A. FIG. 296(c) shows a display state in which the background concealment image A is displayed during the period from timing t6 to timing t7. Further, FIG. 296(d) shows a display state in which the background concealment image C is displayed during the period from timing t8 to timing t10. FIG. 296(e) shows a display state in which the background concealment image A is displayed during the period from timing t11 to timing t12. Note that the details of the display mode of the background hidden image are as shown with reference to FIGS. 224 to 236 and the like.

At timing t12, the display of the background concealed image A ends. FIG. 296(f) shows the display state from timing t12 to timing t13. Note that from timing t12 to timing t17, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped and displayed.

At timing t13, a microphone icon image is displayed on the front side of the medium decorative pattern. Thereafter, the microphone icon image is displayed in a large size, and the words "Acquired!" are displayed until timing t15. FIG. 296(g) shows the display state from timing t13 to timing t14. FIG. 296(h) shows the display state from timing t14 to timing t15.

At timing t15, the microphone icon image is displayed moving to the lower left of the display area while becoming smaller. FIG. 297(a) shows the display state after the movement. At timing t17, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed. FIG. 297(b) shows the display state at this time.

In the period from timing t18 to timing t28, the next variable display is performed, and from timing t28 to timing t29, a stop display is performed. The result of this variable display is a loss.

At timing t29, the next variable display starts. FIG. 297(c) shows a state in which a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has passed since the fluctuation display, and the decorative pattern is fluctuating at a high speed.
At timing t34, the microphone icon image displayed at the lower left of the display area is enlarged and moved to near the center of the display area. Additionally, the words "Mic activated!" are also displayed. Note that the microphone icon image and the words "Mike activated!" are displayed on the front side of the middle decorative pattern. FIG. 297(d) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t36, the display of the microphone icon image and the words "Activate microphone!" ends.
At timing t37, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped and displayed as the same pattern, and a ready-to-win state is established. FIG. 297(e) shows the display state at this time.
From timing t38 to timing t45, the background concealment image is displayed, the background image is changed from the normal background image A to the special reach background image A, and a special reach effect (in this case, "year-end song contest reach effect") is performed. is started.
FIG. 297(f) shows a display state in which the background concealment image C is displayed from timing t41 to timing t43.
FIG. 297(g) shows a display state during execution of the "year-end song contest reach effect" at a predetermined timing after timing t45.
In FIG. 295(a), regarding the performance mode after timing t51, the same performance display as that described above for the "year-end song contest reach performance" is performed, and the decorative pattern stops in a manner that indicates the result of jackpot or loss. Is displayed.

Note that, as shown in this embodiment, the microphone icon image displayed at a predetermined position (for example, near the center) of the display area is displayed at a predetermined position of the display area (in the embodiment, it is displayed in a small size on the left side). is sometimes referred to as acquisition in this specification.
Further, a state in which the microphone icon image is displayed at a predetermined location in the display area may be expressed as standby.
Also, in this specification, the act of displaying a microphone icon image that has been displayed small as shown in this embodiment in a larger size and executing the effect suggested by the microphone icon image is sometimes referred to as activation in this specification. be.
Although the microphone icon image is taken as an example, the embodiments described later show embodiments in which images other than the microphone icon image are acquired, stood by, and activated. Therefore, these may be collectively referred to as suggestion images.

Note that the acquisition and activation of various suggestive images, such as a microphone icon image, are effects performed based on pre-reading. Therefore, if there is no reservation at the timing when the special reach is missed (timing t13 in FIG. 295(a)), display for acquiring various suggestive images such as a microphone icon image is not performed.
Further, although the timing of activation is determined within the gaming machine, it is unknown to the player. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while looking forward to seeing which of the pending images that existed at the time when the suggestion image was acquired will activate the suggestion image.

In this way, at the timing when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating that the special reach effect has been executed but the reach is missed, a look-ahead effect display related to the next fluctuating display is performed, so that the special reach effect can be performed. It is possible to alleviate the feeling of disappointment caused by the heightened expectations caused by the execution, to direct the player's attention to the next and subsequent variable displays, and to suppress a decline in the operation of the gaming machine.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 295(a), the microphone icon image is displayed while the decorative pattern is changing at high speed to notify that a special reach effect will occur. , the microphone icon image may be displayed at other timings.

For example, in the first half of the "Year-end Song Contest Reach Production," where a female singer character and an evil princess character are competing for the microphone, the microphone icon image is enlarged, and then the microphone icon image collides with the evil princess character. A performance may be performed in which the evil princess character runs away to the left of the display area, thereby confirming that the "year-end song contest reach performance" will progress to the second half.
Or, in the first half of the "Year-end Song Contest Reach Direction", after the microphone is shown being taken away by the evil princess character, the microphone icon image is enlarged, the microphone is handed over to the female singer character, and the "Year-end Song Contest Reach Direction" is displayed. You may perform a performance that confirms that the "battle reach performance" will progress until the latter half.

Similarly, in the second half of the "Year-end Song Contest Reach Production", where the female singer character and the evil princess character are competing for the microphone, the microphone icon image is enlarged, and then the microphone icon image collides with the evil princess character. , the evil princess character runs away to the left of the display area, and in the "year-end song contest reach effect," an effect may be performed that suggests that the occurrence of a jackpot has been confirmed.
Similarly, in the second half of the "Year-end Song Contest Reach Production", after the microphone is shown being taken away by the evil princess character, the microphone icon image is enlarged, the microphone is handed over to the female singer character, and "Year-end Song Contest Reach Direction" is shown. In the song contest reach performance, a performance may be performed that suggests that the occurrence of a jackpot has been confirmed.

Note that it is unclear to the player when the displayed microphone icon image will be activated. Therefore, if the "year-end song contest reach effect" occurs while the microphone icon image is displayed, but the microphone icon image does not activate and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner that indicates a loss. In this case, the player continues playing the game in the hope that the microphone icon image will be activated in the next and subsequent variable displays.

In addition, in order to clearly indicate which hold the performance will be performed in response to, the microphone icon image may be displayed in an overlapping manner in front of the hold image and may be moved in the left-right direction. In this case, there is a possibility that the microphone icon image will be activated for the held image that overlaps with the microphone icon image. FIG. 298(a) shows that the microphone icon image may be activated in any of the first to third holds. Further, FIG. 298(b) shows a display example after the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed twice. In this example, the microphone icon image is moving in such a manner that it overlaps the hold and the first hold.
Note that instead of displaying the microphone icon image superimposed on the pending image, a message such as "activated within 0 fluctuation" may be displayed together with the microphone icon image displayed at a predetermined position.
By displaying this kind of display, players can understand that the possibility of triggering is pending, and even if the number of pending prizes increases due to a starting win after acquiring the microphone icon image, there is a possibility that the microphone icon image will be triggered. It is possible to distinguish between reservations that have and those that do not.

Although the embodiment has been described in which the number of microphone icon images that can be acquired is one, it may be possible to acquire a plurality of microphone icon images.
In this case, a plurality of microphone icon images may be activated during one fluctuating display, or microphone icon images may be activated separately in different fluctuating displays.
FIG. 298(c) shows a display state in which two microphone icon images are acquired (display state from timing t15 to timing t17).
Further, as shown in FIG. 298(d), the number of acquired microphone icon images may be displayed by adding the characters "x2". Note that "x3", "x4", etc. may be displayed depending on the number of microphone icon images acquired.

For example, when a "year-end song contest reach performance" is started, the first microphone icon image may be activated during the first half of the reach performance, and the second microphone icon image may be activated during the second half of the reach performance.
Alternatively, in each of the variable display corresponding to the first hold and the variable display corresponding to the third hold when the microphone icon image is acquired, the microphone icon image is activated and the "year-end song contest reach effect" starts. It is also possible to do so.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 295(a), the microphone icon image can be acquired only during the period (timing t13 to timing t15) when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in a state where the reach is lost (timing t13 to timing t15). A microphone icon image may be added during the period.
For example, in a state where one microphone icon image is acquired, one or more microphone icon images may be additionally acquired. For example, in the time chart shown in FIG. 295(a), an effect may be performed in which a microphone icon image is additionally acquired during a period from timing t26 to timing t28. In this case, it is preferable that at least at timing t26, it is suggested that the result of the variable display of decorative symbols is a loss. For example, at timing t25, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped and displayed at decorative patterns with different numbers, and the medium decorative pattern changes from a state where it changes at high speed to a state where it is scrolled at a slow speed. You can. According to such a performance mode, it is possible to effectively utilize a period when a losing result is about to be shown and the player feels disappointed.
Note that as the display mode when the microphone icon image is added, the display mode shown with reference to FIG. 298(c) and FIG. 298(d) can be adopted.

A plurality of types of microphone icon images may be displayed.
FIG. 298(e) shows an example in which a microphone icon image of a different color (red) from the normal (white) microphone icon image can be obtained.
Compared to a normal microphone icon image, a microphone icon image with a different color is set so that the expectation that the effect executed when the microphone icon is activated (for example, a special reach effect) will be a jackpot is higher. You may. For example, when a normal microphone icon image is activated and becomes a "year-end song contest reach effect," and when a different color microphone icon image is activated and becomes a "year-end song contest reach effect," the latter It may be set so that the expectation level of the jackpot is higher when the number of players is higher.
Alternatively, the setting may be made such that when the microphone icon image is activated, there is a high probability that a performance with high expectations of a jackpot will be performed. For example, if a normal microphone icon image is activated, there is a 70% chance that "The Countdown Reach Effect" will occur, and a 30% chance that "Year-end Song Contest Reach Effect" will occur, and a different colored microphone icon image will be activated. In this case, it may be set so that "The Countdown Reach Performance" occurs with a probability of 30%, and "Year-end Song Contest Reach Performance" occurs with a probability of 70%.
Although red is given as an example of a color different from the usual color of the microphone icon image, it is only necessary to distinguish it by color. For example, it is possible to display microphone icon images of blue, green, and red in addition to white. good. Alternatively, the expectation level of a jackpot may be increased in the order of white, blue, green, and red, or the probability that a performance advantageous to the player will be executed may be increased.

Note that although a plurality of types of microphone icon images are provided by using different colors, the microphone icon images may have different types in aspects other than color. For example, a plurality of sizes of microphone icon images may be provided, and the larger the size of the microphone icon image, the higher the expectation of a jackpot, or the higher the probability that a performance advantageous to the player will be executed.
In this way, depending on the display mode (color, size, etc.) of the microphone icon image, the expectation level of a jackpot may be increased, or the probability that a more advantageous performance will be performed by the player may be increased.
Note that the microphone icon image is not limited to the color or size, but may be visually recognized differently in other display modes.

Although an example of a microphone icon image that is always activated is shown, a microphone icon image that may not be activated may be provided. For example, a microphone icon image that is activated with a 30% probability and not activated with a 70% probability may be adopted. FIG. 298(f) shows a display example of such a microphone icon image that may not be activated. As shown in the figure, a "?" mark is attached to the microphone icon image to indicate that there may be cases where the microphone icon is not activated.
With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the acquisition rate and the number of microphone icon images and to suppress the probability that the microphone icon will be activated.

An example that suggests that a microphone or song-related performance will be performed by displaying a microphone icon image (a special song-related performance as shown with reference to FIGS. 295(a) and 296 to 297) Although the example of a performance in which a reach effect can occur or a special reach effect can be won in a confrontation has been shown, the embodiment may be modified so that other suggestive images can be obtained in place of the microphone icon image. In the following, the display mode of the suggestion image mainly shows an embodiment in which the function etc. are modified, but the display mode of the portion that is not modified will be explained with reference to FIG. 295(a), FIG. 296, and FIG. 297. A similar display will be displayed.

FIG. 299(a) shows a state in which a promotion suggestion image indicating that the production mode is promoted is displayed.
In production example 01 of FIG. 295(b), the promotion suggestion image is displayed during the period from timing t13 to timing t15, and the promotion suggestion image can be obtained. FIG. 299(a) shows the display state from timing t15 to timing t17.
At timing t42, the special reach background image B is displayed and the execution of "The Countdown Reach Effect" is started, but during the period from timing t46 to timing t48, a promotion suggestion image is displayed and the execution is stopped. Instead of "The Countdown Reach Performance," the much anticipated "Year-end Song Contest Reach Performance" will be performed.
When the promotion suggestion image is activated in this way, a display is performed that changes the predetermined presentation mode to a presentation mode with higher expectations.
Below, examples of productions in which production modes other than the special reach production are promoted will be shown.

For example, by activating the promotion suggestion image, the display mode of the look-ahead effect image shown with reference to FIGS. 124, 125, etc. may be promoted to a display mode with a higher expectation of a jackpot. Note that the timing for promoting the prefetch effect image may be before the variable display that is the target of the prefetch effect is started, or may be during the execution of the variable display that is the target of the prefetch effect.
Further, the promotion suggestion image may be acquired at a predetermined timing after the display of the pre-read effect image is started, or the pre-read effect image may be displayed at a predetermined timing after the promotion suggestion image is acquired. It may be started.

Referring to FIG. 278(a), an example was shown in which a dialogue is displayed during a special reach performance to indicate the level of expectation, but a promotion suggestion image is activated while the dialogue is displayed, and a color indicating a higher level of expectation is displayed. The dialogue may be displayed.

In addition, with reference to FIG. 278(b), an example was shown in which a cut-in image was displayed during a special reach effect to indicate the level of expectation. The cut-in image may be displayed in a color indicating the level of expectation.

FIG. 299(b) shows a state in which a hold change suggestion image indicating that the hold is to be promoted is displayed.
In production example 02 of FIG. 295(b), the pending change suggestion image is displayed during the period from timing t13 to timing t15, and the pending change suggestion image can be obtained. FIG. 299(b) shows the display state from timing t15 to timing t17.
A hold change suggestion image is activated from timing t26 to timing t27, and at timing t27, the normal hold image displayed in the first hold display area changes to a more anticipated blue or green hold image. From timing t29, a variable display of blue or green corresponding to the pending image is performed.
In this way, at the end of the previous variable display (in this example, the previous variable display) corresponding to the pending target for pre-reading, the pending change suggestion image is activated and displayed in the first pending display area. This figure shows an example of a performance in which the currently held image changes from a normal held image to a more anticipated blue or green held image.

In production example 03 of FIG. 295(b), the pending change suggestion image is activated from timing t30 to timing t32, and at timing t32, the normal pending image displayed in the pending display area has a higher expectation level. Changes to a high blue or green pending image.
In this way, immediately after the decorative pattern starts to change, the pending change suggestion image is activated, and the pending image displayed in the pending display area changes from the normal pending image to the more expected blue or green color. By changing to the pending image, expectations for the result of the variable display can be increased immediately after the start of the variable display.

299(c) and 299(d) show a state in which a button operation suggestion image indicating that the button operation is valid is displayed. Note that the button operation suggestion image shown in FIG. 299(d) has a shape that imitates the shape of a button.
In production example 04 of FIG. 295(b), the button operation suggestion image is displayed during the period from timing t13 to timing t15, and the button operation suggestion image can be acquired. 299(c) and 299(d) show display states from timing t15 to timing t17. During the period from timing t30 to timing t32, a button operation suggestion image is activated, and during the period from timing t32 to timing t35, an effect that requires a button operation is executed, and acceptance of the button operation becomes valid. Note that for effects that require button operations, a configuration similar to that of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 145 and the like can be adopted, and configured so that a predetermined level of expectation is indicated.
Note that the mission button 3700, attack button 3710, and defense button 3740 in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 137 can be used as buttons whose operations are valid. Alternatively, the operation of the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 may be enabled instead of the button.

Regarding button operations, in addition to single-press operations, operations such as long presses (holding down for about 2 to 3 seconds) and repeated presses (requiring multiple presses during the operation period) are required. However, which operation is requested may be displayed along with the button operation suggestion image.
FIG. 299(e) shows a state in which a button operation suggestion image is displayed that suggests that a long press operation of the mission button 3700, which is square in plan view, is required.
In addition, regarding the operation of the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730, the operation of pulling the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730, pulling it long, or pushing it long may be required.

When the operation validity period occurs, an operation instruction image instructing a button operation is displayed, but a plurality of display modes with different expectations may be provided for the operation instruction image. For example, it is preferable to provide a white operation instruction image and a red operation instruction image so that the expectation level is higher when the red operation instruction image is displayed. Note that, regarding the aspect of the operation instruction image, it is preferable to adopt the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 145 and the like.
In addition, a white button operation suggestion image and a red button operation suggestion image are provided, and when the white button operation suggestion image is activated, the white operation instruction image is displayed and the red button operation suggestion image is activated. In this case, a red operation instruction image may be displayed.

A button operation suggestion image may be activated during the valid button operation period to display a display that changes the mode of the displayed operation instruction image to one with a higher degree of expectation. For example, if a red button operation suggestion image is activated at the timing when a white operation instruction image is being displayed, the operation instruction image may change to red. Also, it is preferable that this increases the level of expectation. Note that the operation instruction image may be gradually displayed before the operation validity period starts, but at this timing, a red button operation suggestion image is activated, and the operation instruction image turns red at the start of the operation validity period. It may be made to appear to be changing.

If a button operation suggestion image is activated during the button operation validity period to display a display that changes the appearance of the displayed operation instruction image to one with a higher expectation level, the performance result with a low expectation level will not be displayed. You can do it like this. For example, a presentation image of white, red, or gold is displayed as a presentation display corresponding to a button operation, and expectations are higher for a red presentation image than for a white presentation image; In the case where the expectation level is higher, the white effect image for which the expectation level is lower is not displayed, and a red or gold effect image may be displayed.
A button operation suggestion image may be activated at the timing when a button operation is performed. In this case as well, it is preferable to prevent presentation images with low expectations from being displayed.

FIG. 299(f) shows a state in which a pseudo-association suggestion image suggesting that a pseudo-association occurs is displayed.
In production example 05 of FIG. 295(b), the pseudo-coupling suggestion image is displayed during the period from timing t13 to timing t15, and the pseudo-coupling suggestion image can be obtained. FIG. 299(f) shows the display state from timing t15 to timing t17.
A pseudo-coupling effect in which a pseudo-coupling suggestion image is activated from timing t30 to timing t32, and after the decorative pattern temporarily stops in a predetermined manner during the period from timing t32 to timing t35, the temporarily-stopped decorative pattern is displayed again in high-speed fluctuations. will be held.
It should be noted that, regarding the pseudo-coupling performance, a configuration similar to that of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 261 etc. may be adopted, and the configuration may be configured such that a predetermined degree of expectation is indicated.

With reference to FIGS. 298(a) and 298(b), an example was shown in which a microphone icon image is displayed on the front side of the first to third holds when acquiring a microphone icon image. Suggestion images (promotion suggestion image, pending change suggestion image, button operation suggestion image) may also be modified so as to display in a similar manner.
FIG. 300(a) is a display example from timing t13 to timing t15, in which a window with the word "promote" is displayed across the first to third holds, and the first to third holds are displayed. This is a display example showing that some sort of promotion effect will be performed in any of the above.
FIG. 300(b) is a display example from timing t13 to timing t15, in which a window with the words "hold change" is displayed across the first hold to third hold, and This is a display example showing that a pending change is made in any of the pending situations.
Note that in response to the end of the hold, the positions and horizontal lengths of these windows are displayed while moving to the left and becoming shorter.

Although the embodiment in which only one type of image can be acquired is shown with reference to FIG. 299, it may be modified so that a plurality of suggestive images can be acquired simultaneously.
FIG. 300(c) is a display example from timing t13 to timing t15, and shows an example in which a microphone icon image, a promotion suggestion image, a pending change suggestion image, and a button operation suggestion image are acquired. In this case, an effect corresponding to each acquired suggestion image is executed in any of the first to fourth holds.

FIG. 300(d) is a display example from timing t13 to timing t15, and shows an example in which a microphone icon image, a promotion suggestion image, a pending change suggestion image, and a button operation suggestion image are acquired. In this example, as in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 298(f), a "?" is attached to the acquired suggestion image. Further, the performance corresponding to the acquired suggestion image is not necessarily executed. That is, in any of the first to fourth holds, the performance corresponding to each acquired image is executed with a predetermined probability (for example, 30%).

With reference to FIGS. 298(c) and 298(d), an embodiment is shown in which a plurality of microphone icon images can be acquired, but a plurality of other suggestion images may also be acquired.
300(e) and 300(f) are display examples from timing t13 to timing t15, and show a state in which two pending change suggestion images and two button operation suggestion images are acquired.
Furthermore, if a plurality of promotion suggestion images can be obtained, an effect is performed in which a plurality of promotion suggestion images are activated. The same applies to the pending change suggestion image and the button operation suggestion image. Note that the activation timing may be set to be activated multiple times within one variable display, or may be activated separately within different variable displays.

With reference to FIG. 298(e), an example of a production in which a microphone icon image of a different color (red) from a normal (white) microphone icon image can be obtained was shown. For each suggestion image of the images, suggestion images of different colors may also be displayed. Furthermore, the color of the suggestion image may indicate the degree of expectation of a jackpot or the probability that a display with a high degree of expectation will be displayed in a performance executed in response to the suggestion image.
Further, the expectation level of a jackpot may be varied depending on the type of suggestion image (microphone icon image, promotion suggestion image, pending change suggestion image, button operation suggestion image). For example, the expectation level may be higher when a microphone icon image can be acquired than when a pending change suggestion image can be acquired. In other words, out of the four suggestive images, the expectation level is higher when a certain suggestive image is obtained than when the other suggestive image is obtained. Good too.

The embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 298 to 300 may be combined.

An embodiment in which a plurality of microphone icon images can be acquired has been described with reference to FIGS. 298(c) and 298(d), but a more detailed embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 301.
First, a large microphone icon image and the words "Obtained x?" are displayed. Note that the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are in a temporarily stopped state. FIG. 301(a) shows the display state at this time.
Next, a horizontally long window is displayed in the display area, a normal microphone icon image is displayed on the left side of this window, and a number (for example, "1" to "3") that changes rapidly is displayed on the right side of the window. Is displayed. FIG. 301(b) shows the display state at this time. Note that the time for the variable display is preferably about 1 to 2 seconds.
Next, the rapidly fluctuating numbers displayed on the right side of the window stop and "2" is displayed. FIG. 301(c) shows the display state at this time. Note that "1" or "3" may be displayed.
Next, on the left side of the display area, the number of microphone icon images corresponding to the displayed number (one to three) is displayed. FIG. 301(d) shows the display state at this time.
After that, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. FIG. 301(e) shows the display state at this time.
In this way, by displaying how many microphone icon images can be obtained, it is possible to increase the player's expectations.

Although an embodiment in which a plurality of microphone icon images can be obtained has been described with reference to FIG. 301, another embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 302.
In this embodiment, the same display as in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 301 is performed up to the middle. 302(a) to 302(c) show the same display states as FIGS. 301(a) to 301(c), respectively.
Next, a red microphone icon image is displayed on the left side of the horizontally elongated window, and numbers (for example, "1" to "3") that are fluctuated at high speed are displayed on the right side of the window. FIG. 302(d) shows the display state at this time. Additionally, the acquired normal microphone icon image is displayed on the left side of the display area. Note that the time for the variable display is preferably about 1 to 2 seconds.
Next, the rapidly fluctuating numbers displayed on the right side of the window stop and "1" is displayed. FIG. 302(e) shows the display state at this time. Note that "1" or "3" may be displayed.
Next, on the left side of the display area, a number of red microphone icon images (one to three) corresponding to the displayed number are displayed. FIG. 302(f) shows the display state at this time.
After that, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. FIG. 302(g) shows the display state at this time.
In this way, by displaying how many of each microphone icon image can be obtained, it is possible to increase the player's expectations.

As shown with reference to FIG. 302, if a plurality of suggestive images can be acquired, it is preferable to display them in the order in which they were acquired, from bottom to top.
Further, when the acquired suggestion image is activated, the suggestion images displayed above the activated suggestion image may be moved downward and displayed.

Although an embodiment in which a plurality of microphone icon images can be obtained has been described with reference to FIG. 301, another embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 303.
First, the words "Obtained ×?" are displayed. Note that the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are in a temporarily stopped state. FIG. 303(a) shows the display state at this time.
Next, a horizontally long window is displayed in the display area, and a microphone icon image (for example, a normal microphone icon image and a red microphone icon image) that is displayed in a rapidly changing manner is displayed on the left side of this window, and the right side of the window is displayed in a horizontally long window. Numbers (for example, "1" to "3") that fluctuate at high speed are displayed. FIG. 303(b) shows the display state at this time. Note that it is preferable that the time for the variable display of the microphone icon image be approximately 1 to 2 seconds, and the time for the variable display of the numbers to be approximately 1 to 2 seconds longer.
Next, a normal microphone icon image is displayed. FIG. 303(c) shows the display state at this time. Note that a red microphone icon image may also be displayed.
Next, the rapidly fluctuating numbers displayed on the right side of the window stop and "2" is displayed. FIG. 303(d) shows the display state at this time. Note that "1" or "3" may be displayed.
Next, on the left side of the display area, the number of microphone icon images corresponding to the displayed number (one to three) is displayed. FIG. 303(e) shows a display state in which two white microphone icon images are displayed on the left side of the display area. Note that either white or red is displayed as the microphone icon image.
After that, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. FIG. 303(f) shows the display state at this time.
In this way, by displaying which and how many microphone icon images can be obtained, it is possible to increase the player's expectations.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 301 to 303, an example was shown in which at least one microphone icon image could be acquired, but "0" was added to the variable display number and "0" was displayed. In some cases, the microphone icon image may not be acquired.

Although two microphone icon images, a white microphone icon image and a red microphone icon image, have been given as examples, there may be three or more microphone icon images.For example, there may be three or more microphone icon images. A tall golden microphone icon image may be used.

We have shown an example where one or more suggested images can be acquired when the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped and displayed in a state where the reach is lost, but it is also possible to acquire additional suggested images at other times. You can also do this.

A suggestion image of the same type or a different type may be obtained at the same time as a predetermined suggestion image is activated.
For example, a pending change suggestion image may be acquired when the microphone icon image is activated. In this case, it is preferable that the message "Pending change acquisition" be displayed together with the message "Microphone activated!".
By making it possible to acquire suggestive images at the same time that the number of suggestive images is displayed, it is possible to reduce the feeling of regret that the number of times a given effect is executed has decreased. can.

Alternatively, during a period in which a predetermined suggestion image is acquired and is on standby, a new suggestion image of the same type or a different type may be newly added and acquired. Note that in this case as well, it is preferable to perform a display similar to the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 296(g) and 296(h).

Alternatively, a new suggestion image may be acquired during the performance that is being performed based on the activation of the suggestion image. For example, when a special ready-to-reach effect is executed based on the activation of the microphone icon image, the microphone icon image and other suggestive images may be acquired again while the special ready-to-reach effect is being executed. In addition, by activating the microphone icon image during a special reach effect, a display that allows the female singer character to continue holding the microphone after winning the battle for the microphone with the diva or the small fry princess, and a display that allows the female singer character to continue holding the microphone after winning the battle for the microphone with the diva or the small fry princess, or losing the battle for the microphone. Even in the case where the female singer character has reached the female singer character, a display may be made to show that the microphone is delivered to the female singer character, so that the female singer character can finally continue to hold the microphone during the first half or the second half of the special reach effect.
In this case, the player can have a sense of expectation that a suggestive image will be added until the final stage of the variable display.

Referring to FIG. 296(h) to FIG. 297(c), in the embodiment, when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped and displayed in a reach-missing manner, the suggestion image moves to the left side of the display area. Although an example is shown in which the suggestion image is displayed, the timing at which the suggestion image is moved may be set to another timing.
For example, the suggestion image may be moved while the decorative pattern is being displayed in a stopped state or at the timing when the next variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

When a special reach effect in which a microphone icon image is activated is executed, more microphone icon images may be acquired before the special effect is started. Note that there are cases where the pseudo-continuous performance is performed 0 times, once, or twice, and the presentation form will be explained in different cases depending on the number of pseudo-continuous performances.

First, if the pseudo-continuous effect is not performed, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol will be in the reach state during the period from the start of the variable display until the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are in the reach state. The microphone icon image may be additionally acquired during one or more of the periods from 1 to 2 until the start of the special reach effect.

In addition, when a pseudo-continuous effect is performed once, the period from when the variable display starts until the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the pseudo-continuous effect, and then after the variable display of the decorative pattern is resumed. , the period from when the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are in the reach state, the period from when the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are in the reach state until the start of a special reach effect, or Additional microphone icon images may be acquired during a plurality of periods.

For example, during the period from when the fluctuating display starts until the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner that indicates a pseudo-coupled effect, after that, after the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is resumed, the decorative pattern is displayed again in a manner that indicates a pseudo-coupling effect. The left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are in the reach state during the period until it is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then after the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols is resumed until the left and right decorative symbols are in the reach state. The microphone icon image may be additionally acquired during one or more of the periods from when the special reach effect is started.

In this way, as the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect increases, more microphone icon images can be obtained, and thus the player expects the pseudo-continuous effect to be executed.

In addition, when the microphone icon image is activated and a special reach effect is started, the color indicating the title of the reach effect (details are shown in FIG. 276(b) and FIG. 277(b)) ) may be displayed in the same color as the activated microphone icon image. For example, if the color of the activated microphone icon image is red, the title of the reach effect will be displayed in red, and if the color of the activated microphone icon image is gold, the title of the reach effect will be displayed in gold. You may.

Below, more specific implementation aspects of special reach effects and the like will be explained. First, let me explain the premise. The probability that the special lottery result will be a jackpot is 1/300, and the probability that the special lottery result will be a loss is 299/300. In the case of a jackpot, the probability of reaching the reach state is 1/1. On the other hand, in the case of a loss, the probability of being in a reach state is 30/299. The loss chance is 299/300 x 30/299, which is 1/10.

FIG. 304(a) shows distribution of reach effects.
In the case of a jackpot, the occurrence ratio of "year-end song contest reach performance,""the countdown reach performance," and "other reach (performance)" is 70:20:10.
On the other hand, in the case of a loss, the occurrence ratio of "year-end song contest reach performance,""the countdown reach performance," and "other reach performance" is 2:4:94.
In this case, the expectation level for "Year-end Uta Gassen Reach Performance" is approximately 54%, the expectation level for "The Countdown Reach Performance" is approximately 14%, and the expectation level for "Other Reach (Directions)" is approximately 0.4%. becomes.
Incidentally, the occurrence rate in the figure indicates the proportion of the decorative pattern to the total variation display. "Year-end song contest reach performance" occurs in approximately 0.4% of the fluctuating display, "The countdown reach performance" occurs in approximately 0.5% of the fluctuating display, and approximately 9.4% of the fluctuating display , other reach occurs (after setting the decorative pattern to reach state, the decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed in a jackpot or loss mode, or after setting it to reach state, execute another reach effect to achieve jackpot) (The decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed in the event of a loss.) In the remaining approximately 89.7% of the variable displays, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a non-reach-missing manner.

FIG. 304(b) shows a table for selecting how many microphone icon images will be acquired when the "year-end song contest reach effect" is executed. In both cases of jackpot and loss, the denominator is 100, and the number of microphone icon images acquired is set at a predetermined ratio.
As shown in the table, the ratio of the number of acquired images is set so that the greater the number of microphone icon acquired images, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.
Incidentally, the occurrence rate in the figure indicates the proportion of the decorative pattern to the total variation display. As mentioned above, the "Year-end song contest reach effect" occurs in approximately 0.4% of the total variation display of decorative symbols, but the "Year-end song contest reach effect" when the number of microphone icon images acquired is approximately 0.4%. 0.230%, "Year-end Uta Gassen Reach Effect" with 1 microphone icon image acquisition is approximately 0.078%, and "Year-end Uta Gassen Reach Effect" with 2 microphone icon images acquisition is approximately 0.078%. 0.051%, "Year-end Uta Gassen Reach Production" with 3 microphone icon images acquired is approximately 0.039%, and "Year-end Uta Gassen Reach Production" with 4 microphone icon images acquired is approximately 0.039%. It occurs with a probability of 0.035% (the sum of these values is approximately 0.4%, which is the probability of occurrence of the "year-end song contest reach performance").

FIG. 304(c) shows a selection table of performance patterns when the number of acquisitions is "0". The denominator is 100 in both the case of a jackpot and the case of a loss, and the selection probabilities of performance patterns are set at predetermined ratios.
Similarly, FIG. 304(d) shows the selection table of performance patterns when the number of acquisitions is "1", FIG. 304(e) shows the selection table of performance patterns when the number of acquisitions is "2", and FIG. 304(f) 304(g) shows a presentation pattern selection table for the case where the number of acquisitions is "3", and FIG. 304(g) shows a selection table of presentation patterns for the case where the number of acquisitions is "4".

FIG. 305 is a table showing the acquisition ratio of microphone icon images (the acquisition ratio of golden microphones and normal microphones) in each production pattern.
FIG. 305(a) is a selection table when the number of acquired microphone icon images is "1".
FIG. 305(b) is a selection table when the number of acquired microphone icon images is "2".
FIG. 305(c) is a selection table when the number of acquired microphone icon images is "3".
FIG. 305(d) is a selection table when the number of acquired microphone icon images is "4".

In this embodiment, in the "Year-end singing contest reach performance", there will be four fights for the microphone with the evil princess (sometimes referred to as "battles" in the embodiment. The same applies to the fight for the microphone with the small fry princess. If you win the game (sometimes referred to as a "battle"), you will be shown the result of your jackpot. On the other hand, if you lose in the first to third battles, the result of your loss will be shown. Note that, as will be described later, after a display is made to make it appear that the player has lost the battle, the microphone icon image may be activated to display that the player has won the battle.

FIG. 306 is a table showing the results of the first to fourth battles in each performance pattern. "〇" means that the battle will be displayed as a victory, "×" means that the battle will be defeated. is activated, and a display indicating that the player was able to win the battle is performed.
FIG. 306(a) shows a performance mode when the number of acquired microphone icon images is "0".
FIG. 306(b) shows a performance mode when the number of acquired microphone icon images is "1".
FIG. 306(c) shows a performance mode when the number of acquired microphone icon images is "2".
FIG. 306(d) shows the performance mode when the number of acquired microphone icon images is "3".
FIG. 306(e) shows a performance mode when the number of acquired microphone icon images is "4".

As shown in FIG. 306(a), when the number of acquired items is "0", the microphone icon image is not activated.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 306(b), when the acquired number is "1", the microphone icon image (either the golden microphone icon image or the normal microphone icon image) is activated once at maximum.
Performance patterns "PTN06" to "PTN11" are performance patterns in which the microphone icon image is activated in any of the first to third battles, but results in a loss in subsequent battles.
The performance pattern "PTN12" is a performance pattern in which the player wins four battles without activating the microphone icon image.
The production pattern "PTN13" is a production pattern in which the battle occurs for the fourth time without the microphone icon image being activated, and although the player loses in the fourth battle, the microphone icon image is activated and the fourth battle is won.
Performance patterns "PTN14" to "PTN16" are performance patterns in which the microphone icon image is activated in any of the first to third battles, and the subsequent battles are won.

As shown in FIG. 306(c), when the number of microphone icon images acquired is "2", the microphone icon image (gold microphone icon image and normal microphone icon image, or both) is activated up to two times. do.
The acquisition ratio of microphone icon images is as shown in FIG. 305(b).
If two golden microphone icon images or two normal microphone icon images can be acquired, the microphone icon images are activated at the timing shown in each effect pattern in FIG. 306(c).

When one golden microphone icon image and one normal microphone icon image are obtained, the order in which they are activated is determined with a predetermined probability.
In the case of production pattern "PTN17", in the second battle, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 50%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 50%. In addition, in the third battle, the microphone icon image of the one that was not activated will be activated.
In the case of the production pattern "PTN18", in the first battle, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 80%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. In addition, in the third battle, the microphone icon image of the one that was not activated will be activated.
In the case of the performance pattern "PTN19", in the first battle, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 20%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 80%. In addition, in the second battle, the microphone icon image that was not activated will be activated.
In the case of the performance pattern "PTN20", in the first battle, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 50%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 50%. In addition, in the second battle, the microphone icon image that was not activated will be activated.

In the case of the production pattern "PTN21", the microphone icon image is not activated.
In the case of the production pattern "PTN22", in the fourth battle, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 50%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 50%.
In the case of the production pattern "PTN23", in the third battle, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 50%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 50%.
In the case of the production pattern "PTN24", in the second battle, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 50%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 50%.
In the case of the production pattern "PTN25", in the first battle, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 50%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 50%.
In the case of the performance pattern "PTN26", in the third battle, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 50%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 50%. In addition, in the fourth battle, the microphone icon image of the one that was not activated will be activated.
In the case of the production pattern "PTN27", in the second battle, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 80%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. In addition, in the fourth battle, the microphone icon image of the one that was not activated will be activated.
In the case of the production pattern "PTN28", in the first battle, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 80%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. In addition, in the fourth battle, the microphone icon image of the one that was not activated will be activated.
In the case of the production pattern "PTN29", in the second battle, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 20%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 80%. In addition, in the third battle, the microphone icon image of the one that was not activated will be activated.
In the case of the performance pattern "PTN30", in the first battle, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 80%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. In addition, in the third battle, the microphone icon image of the one that was not activated will be activated.
In the case of the performance pattern "PTN31", in the first battle, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 20%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 80%. In addition, in the second battle, the microphone icon image that was not activated will be activated.

As shown in Figure 306(d), if the number of microphone icon images acquired is "3", the microphone icon image (gold microphone icon image and normal microphone icon image, or both) is activated up to three times. do.
The acquisition ratio of microphone icon images is as shown in FIG. 305(c).
If three golden microphone icon images can be acquired or three normal microphone icon images can be acquired, the microphone icon images are activated at the timing shown in each effect pattern in FIG. 306(d).

If you can obtain two golden microphone icon images and one normal microphone icon image, if you can obtain one golden microphone icon image and two normal microphone icon images, it will be activated in the following manner. The order is determined.
In the case of the production pattern "PTN32", in the first battle, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 80%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. In addition, in the second battle, if there is a waiting golden microphone icon image, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 80%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. . In the third battle, the remaining microphone icon images will be activated.
In the case of the performance pattern "PTN33", the microphone icon image is not activated.
In the case of the production pattern "PTN34", in the fourth battle, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 50%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 50%.
In the case of the performance pattern "PTN35", in the third battle, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 50%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 50%.
In the case of the performance pattern "PTN36", in the second battle, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 50%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 50%.
In the case of the performance pattern "PTN37", in the first battle, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 50%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 50%.
In the case of the production pattern "PTN38", in the third battle, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 50%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 50%. In addition, in the fourth battle, if there is a waiting golden microphone icon image, the golden microphone icon image will be activated, and if there is no waiting golden microphone icon image, the normal microphone icon will be activated. The image is activated.
In the case of the performance pattern "PTN39", in the second battle, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 80%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. In addition, in the fourth battle, if there is a waiting golden microphone icon image, the golden microphone icon image will be activated, and if there is no waiting golden microphone icon image, the normal microphone icon will be activated. The image is activated.
In the case of the production pattern "PTN40", in the first battle, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 80%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. In addition, in the fourth battle, if there is a waiting golden microphone icon image, the golden microphone icon image will be activated, and if there is no waiting golden microphone icon image, the normal microphone icon will be activated. The image is activated.
In the case of the production pattern "PTN41", in the second battle, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 20%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 80%. In addition, in the third battle, if there is a waiting golden microphone icon image, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 80%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. .
In the case of the production pattern "PTN42", in the first battle, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 20%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 80%. In addition, in the third battle, if there is a waiting golden microphone icon image, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 80%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. .
In the case of the production pattern "PTN43", in the first battle, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 20%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 80%. In addition, in the second battle, if there is a waiting golden microphone icon image, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 80%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. .
In the case of the performance pattern "PTN44", in the first battle, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 20%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 80%. In addition, in the second battle, if there is a normal microphone icon image waiting, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 20%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 80%. . In the third battle, the remaining microphone icon images will be activated.
In the case of the performance pattern "PTN45", in the first battle, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 20%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 80%. In addition, in the second battle, if there is a normal microphone icon image waiting, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 80%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. . In the fourth battle, the remaining microphone icon images will be activated.
In the case of the performance pattern "PTN46", in the first battle, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 80%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. In addition, in the third battle, if there is a normal microphone icon image waiting, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 50%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 50%. . In the fourth battle, the remaining microphone icon images will be activated.
In the case of the production pattern "PTN47", in the second battle, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 80%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. In addition, in the third battle, if there is a normal microphone icon image waiting, the probability that the golden microphone icon image will be activated is 80%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. . In the fourth battle, the remaining microphone icon images will be activated.

As shown in FIG. 306(e), when the number of microphone icon images acquired is "4", the microphone icon image (golden microphone icon image and normal microphone icon image, or both) is activated up to 4 times. do.
The acquisition ratio of microphone icon images is as shown in FIG. 305(d).
If four golden microphone icon images or four normal microphone icon images can be acquired, the microphone icon images are activated at the timing shown in each effect pattern in FIG. 306(e).

If you can get 3 golden microphone icon images and 1 regular microphone icon image, if you can get 2 golden microphone icon images and 2 regular microphone icon images, you can get 1 golden microphone icon image. If three normal microphone icon images can be acquired, the order of activation is determined in the following manner.
In the case of the production pattern "PTN48", after losing all four battles, the microphone icon image is activated and the player is revived. In other words, the four acquired microphone icon images will be activated in all four battles. The activation order is that after all the normal microphone icon images (1 to 3) are activated, the golden microphone icon images (3 to 1) are activated.

In addition, in battles after the golden microphone icon image is activated, the activation probability of the golden microphone icon image is set so that it is easier to win the battle compared to battles after the normal microphone icon image is activated. .
Note that it is preferable that the microphone icon image enlarged by the activation be held by the female singer character until she loses the battle. This allows the player to recognize what color the most recently activated microphone icon image is.

In addition, if you lose the battle with the evil princess or the small fry princess without a microphone icon image on standby, the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern will end in a manner that indicates the result of your loss. After displaying as if she had lost the battle, the female singer character took out the microphone hidden in her costume, reversed the battle, and displayed as if she had won, so that the next battle would be held. You can. In addition, if it is the fourth battle, if such a display is performed, the decorative pattern will be stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode.
According to such an aspect, even if the player loses the battle with the evil princess or the small fry princess without a microphone icon image on standby, it is possible to make the player expect a jackpot result. .

In this way, if you win 4 battles, you will win a jackpot.The more microphone icon images you acquire (or wait for) at the start of the special reach effect, the higher the expectation that a jackpot will occur. , the player can enjoy the effect display while hoping to obtain as many microphone icon images as possible.

The timing of activating the suggested images on standby may be in the order in which the suggested images are acquired. Alternatively, the activation may be performed in the order of the highest degree of expectation indicated by the suggestion images, or in the order of the lowest degree of expectation indicated by the suggestion images.

Although a production pattern in which a normal microphone icon image and a golden microphone icon image are displayed as microphone icon images has been shown, microphone icon images in other forms may be displayed.
For example, it may be possible to obtain one to four suggestive images with the words "special move" written on them, so that when the suggestive images are activated, the player is sure to win the battle against the evil princess or the small fry princess. Note that it is best to limit the number of times you can win a battle to one. If four suggestive images can be acquired, the player will definitely win the four battles, so a jackpot will definitely occur.

Note that a suggestion image including characters such as "Jackpot", "V", and "Nationwide Tour" may be acquired. Then, when the suggestion images of "Jackpot" and "V" are displayed, the player may always win the jackpot without losing the battle. In addition, when the "nationwide tour" suggestion image is displayed, a jackpot may occur without losing the battle, and after the jackpot, the state may be shifted to a high probability time saving state.

The timing at which the acquired suggestion images are activated may be different.
For example, when one microphone icon image is acquired, the microphone icon image is activated in the first battle and cannot be activated in the second to fourth battles, or the microphone icon image is activated in the second battle and three times. There may be battles where the microphone icon image cannot be activated in the fourth to fourth battles, and battles where the microphone icon image is activated in the fourth battle.
In this case, if the microphone icon image is displayed until the fourth battle, the player expects that the microphone icon image will be activated in the last battle, resulting in a jackpot.

In addition, when one promotion suggestion image is acquired, the promotion suggestion image is activated when the reach title is displayed and promotes the reach title (white becomes red or gold), and the case where the reach title is displayed. However, instead of being activated, the promotion suggestion image may be activated when the cut-in image is displayed to promote the cut-in image (green becomes red or gold).
In this case, the effect may be such that the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the effect is activated later.

It is also possible to perform an effect in which the suggestive image appears to be activated, but is not activated. For example, the display may move slightly from the left side of the display area to the center, but then return to the left side again.
With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the player's expectations as to when the suggestion image will be activated.
Note that if the expectation level of the jackpot is higher when the jackpot is activated later, the player will expect the activation to be as late as possible.

The player may be able to recognize the timing at which the suggestion image is activated.
For example, it may be indicated that it is activated at the start timing of the variation of decorative symbols, the start timing of a special reach effect, the end timing of a battle, the end timing of the final battle (fourth battle), etc.
Specifically, the timing may be indicated by displaying text such as "Activate at the start of fluctuation" or "Activate at the start of reach effect!" on the right side of the suggestion image.

Alternatively, it may be indicated to the player that the trigger will be activated before or after a certain timing.
For example, it may be indicated that it is activated before the start timing of decorative symbol fluctuations, the start timing of a special reach effect, the end timing of a battle, or the end timing of the final battle (fourth battle).
Alternatively, it may be indicated that it is activated after the start timing of decorative symbol fluctuation, the start timing of a special reach effect, the end timing of a battle, or the end timing of the final battle (fourth battle).
Specifically, the timing is indicated by displaying text on the right side of the suggestion image such as ``Activate before the start of the fluctuation'', ``Activate after the start of the fluctuation'', ``Activate before the start of the reach effect!'', ``Activate after the start of the reach effect!'' Good.

With reference to FIGS. 300 and 302, an example has been shown in which a plurality of suggestion images of the same type or different types can be acquired, but these may be activated at different timings or at the same timing. Further, the activation may be performed for each suggestion image in an order based on a predetermined priority. Alternatively, each suggestion image may be activated in the order in which it is acquired.
For example, between the pending change suggestion image and the button operation suggestion image, the pending change suggestion image may always be activated before the button operation suggestion image. Alternatively, the button operation suggestion image may always be activated before the pending change suggestion image.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 300(d), only the character "?" may be displayed, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, it may be possible to identify which suggestion image it is. For example, a timer is displayed next to the character "?" and counted down (for example, from "20" to "0" over 20 seconds), and when "0" is displayed, one of the suggested images is displayed. may be displayed.
Alternatively, the words "Pending change? Button?" may be displayed. In this case, a pending change suggestion image or a button operation suggestion image is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.
In this way, by not knowing which suggestion image will be displayed until a predetermined timing arrives, it is possible to increase the player's expectations.

A timer may be displayed next to the character "?" to count down, and a normal microphone icon image may be displayed at the timing when "0" is displayed.
Also, after the normal microphone icon image is displayed, the timer is displayed again, and the normal microphone icon image changes to a gold microphone icon image at the timing when "0" is displayed. good. Note that the probability that a normal microphone icon image changes to a golden microphone icon image may be set to 100%, or may be set to a lower predetermined probability (for example, 50%).

The decorative pattern may be displayed in a reach-loss mode, and after returning to the normal background image, the decorative pattern may be displayed in a jackpot mode. According to such a display mode, after the player is once discouraged, a display indicating that a jackpot will occur is performed, so that the player can feel great excitement.
In this way, when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, the suggestion image is not acquired, and it is preferable to configure the system so that the suggestion image can be acquired only when the result of the special lottery is a loss.

In addition, after performing a predetermined inciting effect display while the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the state of losing the reach, either the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the state of winning the jackpot without acquiring the suggestion image, or the suggestion image is displayed. However, the decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed in a losing mode. In this case, the player will recognize that either a jackpot or acquisition of a suggestion image will occur at the timing when the predetermined promotion effect is displayed.

In this way, by performing a performance display based on pre-reading at the timing when the highly anticipated result of a fluctuating display is displayed in a manner indicating a loss, players' disappointed feelings can be quickly switched to the next fluctuating display. can be done.

Refer to FIGS. 273 to 275, FIGS. 307 to 315, etc. regarding the "history display step-up effect" which is a special effect in the embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment shown below with reference to FIGS. 123 to 272, etc. and explain. Note that FIGS. 307 to 312 are tables showing performance patterns of the "history display step-up performance" in this embodiment. Further, FIG. 313 is a time chart showing the performance mode of the "history display step-up performance". Further, FIG. 314 is a diagram showing display contents in the display area.

The effect patterns "PTN-1-001" to "PTN-1-004" shown in FIG. 307 indicate effect patterns in which only the step-up image of the first stage is displayed.
As shown in the figure, step-up images A to D are displayed in the effect patterns "PTN-1-001" to "PTN-1-004," respectively.

The effect patterns “PTN-2-001” to “PTN-2-016” shown in FIG. 307 are effect patterns in which the step-up image of the first step is displayed, and then the step-up image of the second step is displayed. It shows.
For example, the performance pattern "PTN-2-002" is a performance pattern in which step-up image A is displayed and then step-up image B is displayed.

In the production patterns "PTN-3-001" to "PTN-3-064" shown in FIG. 308, after the step-up image of the first step is displayed, the step-up image of the second step is displayed, and This shows a performance pattern in which a step-up image of the eyes is displayed, and then a step-up image of the third stage is displayed.
For example, the production pattern "PTN-3-007" is a production in which step-up image A is displayed, then step-up image B is displayed, and after step-up image B is displayed, step-up image C is displayed. It's a pattern.

In the effect patterns “PTN-4-001” to “PTN-4-256” shown in FIGS. 309 to 312, after the first step-up image is displayed, the second step-up image is displayed. After the step-up image of the second step is displayed, the step-up image of the third step is displayed, and after the step-up image of the third step is displayed, the step-up image of the fourth step is displayed. This shows the performance pattern.
For example, in the production pattern "PTN-4-028", after step-up image A is displayed, step-up image B is displayed, after step-up image B is displayed, step-up image C is displayed, and step-up image B is displayed. This is an effect pattern in which a step-up image D is displayed after a close-up image C is displayed.

According to the effect patterns shown with reference to FIGS. 307 to 312, step-up images are displayed from the first stage up to the fourth stage. Further, at each stage, one of the step-up images A to D is displayed.
It should be noted that whether or not to execute the "history display step-up effect" and which effect pattern to execute is determined by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the results of the special lottery and the like. Further, the “history display step-up effect” is executed based on the control by the peripheral control board 1510.

Note that the performance patterns "PTN-1-001" to "PTN-1-004" may be collectively referred to as the performance pattern "PTN-1."
Similarly, the performance patterns "PTN-2-001" to "PTN-2-016" may be collectively referred to as the performance pattern "PTN-2."
Similarly, the performance patterns "PTN-3-001" to "PTN-3-064" may be collectively referred to as the performance pattern "PTN-3."
Similarly, the performance patterns "PTN-4-001" to "PTN-4-256" may be collectively referred to as the performance pattern "PTN-4."

FIG. 313 is a time chart showing the performance mode of the "history display step-up performance". FIG. 313(a) shows, for comparison, the performance mode when the "history display step-up performance" is not performed.
FIGS. 313(b) to 313(g) show effects when the "history display step-up effect" is performed.
First, an example of the effect when the effect pattern "PTN-4-028" is executed will be explained with reference to FIG. 313(b), FIG. 314, and FIG. 315.

First, the fluctuating display of decorative symbols starts at timing t0, and after one second, at timing t1, the left to right decorative symbols are in a state of high-speed fluctuation. FIG. 314(a) shows the display state at this time.

Next, at timing t1, the "history display step-up effect" is started, and a step-up effect display window is displayed. In the period up to this timing t2, the step-up image is not displayed yet, and only the step-up effect display window is displayed. FIG. 314(b) shows a display state in which the "history display step-up effect" is being executed. A step-up image is displayed within the rectangular step-up effect display window shown in the center (the specific display mode within the window is omitted in the figure). In this embodiment, the size of the step-up effect display window and the step-up image are the same.
Note that the figures shown in FIGS. 314(d) to 315(f) show the display mode of the step-up effect display window. The display mode in the step-up effect display window will be described below with reference to FIGS. 314(d) to 315(f).

FIG. 314(d) shows the state before the step-up image is displayed. At the bottom of the step-up effect display window, a history display area is provided in which it is possible to know in what order the step-up images were displayed.
The history display area consists of four horizontal display areas, and an image obtained by reducing the first step-up image is displayed in a reduced size in the leftmost display area. Similarly, the step-up images of the second to fourth stages are displayed in a reduced size order from the left.

Next, a step-up image of the first stage is displayed from timing t2 to timing t4.
FIG. 314(e) shows a state in which step-up image A is displayed as the first step-up image. Further, FIG. 314(f) shows a state in which the displayed step-up image A is reduced and displayed in the leftmost display area.

Note that, as shown in FIGS. 314(d) to 314(f), "?" is displayed in the history display area before the step-up image is displayed. Further, after the step-up image is displayed, an image obtained by reducing the step-up image is displayed in the history display area.
The display priority of the step-up effect display window is higher than the display priority of the decorative symbols, and the step-up effect display window is displayed in front of the decorative symbols.
Further, the display priority of the step-up image is higher than the display priority of the step-up effect display window, and the step-up image is displayed on the near side of the step-up effect display window.
Also, the display priority of the image displayed in the history display area (reduced step-up image) is higher than the display priority of the step-up image, and the image displayed in the history display area is placed in front of the step-up image. is displayed.
Note that the size of the step-up image may be one size smaller than the step-up effect display window.

Next, a second step-up image is displayed from timing t4 to timing t6. FIG. 315(a) shows a state in which step-up image B is displayed in the step-up effect display window as the second step-up image. Further, FIG. 315(b) shows a state in which the displayed step-up image B is reduced and displayed in the second display area from the left.

Next, a third step-up image is displayed from timing t6 to timing t8. FIG. 315(c) shows a state in which a step-up image C is displayed in the step-up effect display window as a step-up image of the third stage. Further, FIG. 315(d) shows a state in which the displayed step-up image C is reduced and displayed in the third display area from the left.

Next, a fourth step-up image is displayed from timing t8 to timing t10. FIG. 315(e) shows a state in which the step-up image D is displayed in the step-up effect display window as the fourth step-up image. Further, FIG. 315(f) shows a state in which the displayed step-up image D is reduced and displayed in the fourth display area from the left.

At timing t10, the display of the step-up image ends. FIG. 314(c) shows the display state after the history display step-up effect is completed.

As shown in FIGS. 314(d) to 315(f), a star-shaped mark is attached to the upper right of the letter A in the step-up image A. Moreover, the character "BO" is attached to the upper right of the character B in the step-up image B. Furthermore, the character "Misao" is attached to the upper right of the character C in the step-up image C. Note that no mark or character is attached to the upper right of the letter D in the step-up image D.
Note that when each step-up image is reduced and displayed in the history display area, these marks and characters are also reduced and displayed, but it is recommended to display them without these marks and characters. You can.

As shown in FIGS. 314(d) to 315(f), the background portions of step-up images A to D are different from each other. Step-up image A has a background portion including two horizontal lines. Step-up image B has a background portion including two diagonal lines downward to the left. The step-up image C has a background portion including two diagonal lines downward to the right. Step-up image D has a background portion including four diagonal lines. According to such a configuration, the type of step-up image can be easily recognized.
Note that when displaying a step-up image in a reduced size in the history display area, the lines in these background parts are also reduced in size, but it is possible to omit the display of the lines or display the lines simply. Good too. For example, only one of the characters "A" to "D" may be displayed in the history display area.
Note that instead of lines, the background portion of each step-up image may be composed of colors, patterns, or the like. In this case as well, when displaying in the history display area, the colors and patterns may be displayed as they are in a reduced size, or the colors and patterns may be omitted or displayed in a simplified manner. Good too.

The same steps as the production pattern "PTN-3-022"("B""B""B") and the production pattern "PTN-4-001"("A""A""A""A") If the step-up images are displayed continuously, there is a risk that the player may not be able to recognize that a new step-up image has been displayed. However, in this embodiment, the step-up effect display window Since there is a period in which a large step-up image is not displayed (display states shown in FIGS. 314(f), 315(b), 315(d), and 315(f)), a new step-up image is displayed. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a player cannot recognize that an image has been displayed.
Note that the length of the period in which the large step-up image is not displayed in the step-up effect display window should be shorter than the period in which the large step-up image is displayed, for example, about 0.2 to 0.4 seconds. good.

Since the size of the history display area is smaller than the step-up effect display window, if the step-up image is simply reduced and displayed in the history display area, the player will not be able to see what was displayed as the step-up image. However, when displaying a reduced step-up image in the history display area, you may omit or simplify part of the step-up image to display the original image. By displaying something similar to a step-up image, it becomes easier for the player to recognize which step-up image has been displayed.

In this embodiment, when the performance pattern "PTN-3" or the performance pattern "PTN-4" is executed, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern always temporarily stop at the decorative pattern with the same number and reach. state.
When the performance pattern "PTN-1" or the performance pattern "PTN-2" is executed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss without being in a ready-to-win state.
Alternatively, the performance pattern "PTN-1" or the performance pattern "PTN-2" may be executed, although the probability is lower than the case where the performance pattern "PTN-3" or the performance pattern "PTN-4" is executed. It may be arranged so that even if the player is defeated, the player may be in a reach state.
For example, the probability that the performance pattern "PTN-1", the performance pattern "PTN-2", the performance pattern "PTN-3", and the performance pattern "PTN-4" will reach the reach state in this order (i.e., the probability of finally hitting the jackpot) It is better to make it higher.
With such a configuration, the player will be greatly interested in how many steps the step-up image will be displayed.

In this embodiment, each performance pattern shown with reference to FIGS. 307 to 312 is configured to suggest or notify that some event related to the game will occur.

When a plurality of step-up images A (in the range of 2 to 4) are displayed, the higher the number of displayed step-up images A, the higher the expectation level.
Specifically, expectations are higher when three step-up images A are displayed than when two step-up images A are displayed, and when three step-up images A are displayed. Also, expectations are higher when four step-up images A are displayed.
For example, the expectation level may be set to 10% when two step-up images A are displayed, 20% when three step-up images A are displayed, and 60% when four step-up images A are displayed.
FIG. 313(c) shows an example of the effect when the effect pattern "PTN-2-001" is executed and two step-up images A are displayed.

In addition, if a plurality of step-up images B (in the range of 2 to 4) are displayed, the pending image change effect will change the held image at a predetermined timing after the "history display step-up effect" ends. is executed. Note that the larger the number of displayed step-up images B, the more expected the pending image changes.
Specifically, when two step-up images B are displayed, the pending image changes to green at a predetermined timing. FIG. 313(d) shows an example of the effect when the effect pattern "PTN-3-006" is executed and two step-up images B are displayed.
Further, when three step-up images B are displayed, the pending image changes to red at a predetermined timing. FIG. 313(e) shows an example of the effect when the effect pattern "PTN-3-022" is executed and two step-up images B are displayed. Further, when four step-up images B are displayed (effect pattern "PTN-4-086"), the pending image changes to a golden color at a predetermined timing.
Note that the expectation level of the pending images is highest in the order of white, green, red, and gold.

When two step-up images B are displayed, the pending image may be changed to green, red, or gold. Furthermore, when three step-up images B are displayed, the pending image may be changed to either red or gold. By doing this, even if the number of displayed step-up images B is small, the player can have a sense of expectation that the pending image change effect, which has a high degree of expectation, will be executed.

Further, when a plurality of step-up images C (in the range of 2 to 4) are displayed, a button operation effect is executed at a predetermined timing after the "history display step-up effect" ends. Note that the larger the number of displayed step-up images C, the more highly anticipated the operation performance will be executed.
Specifically, when two step-up images C are displayed, the button operation is enabled at a predetermined timing, the light source provided inside the button emits white light, and the button emits white light. An operation effect is performed that makes it appear as if the person is actually there. FIG. 313(f) shows an example of the effect when the effect pattern "PTN-3-041" is executed and two step-up images C are displayed.
In addition, when three step-up images C are displayed, the button operation becomes effective at a predetermined timing, and the light source provided inside the button emits red light, so that the button emits red light. A visually recognized operation effect is executed.
Further, when four step-up images C are displayed (when the effect pattern "PTN-4-171" is executed), an operation effect is executed in which the lever operation becomes effective at a predetermined timing.
Note that the level of expectation is higher in the case where the operation effect is performed than in the case where the operation effect is not performed and the case where the operation effect is performed. In addition, the expectations for operation performance are highest in order of button operation (white light emitting), button operation (red light emitting), and lever operation.

When two step-up images C are displayed, any one of button operation (white light emission), button operation (red light emission), and lever operation may be performed. Furthermore, when three step-up images C are displayed, either a button operation (red light emission) or a lever operation may be performed. By doing so, even when the number of displayed step-up images C is small, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that a highly anticipated operation performance will be executed.
In addition, in the button operations in the operation performance, operation reception for the mission button 3700, attack button 3710, etc. is valid. Furthermore, in lever operations, acceptance of operations on the left lever 3720, right lever 3730, etc. is enabled. Note that various aspects in other embodiments can be adopted as various aspects related to operation reception.

Regarding the step-up image D, regardless of the number of images displayed, it does not have a function of executing an effect that suggests or informs of some event.

In addition, when the performance pattern "PTN-2" is executed, an embodiment has been shown in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss without reaching the reach state. "A" (production pattern "PTN-2-001"), "B" "B" (production pattern "PTN-2-006"), "C" "C" (production pattern "PTN-2-011"). If it is displayed, it is preferable that it is at least in a reach state and, depending on the case, a jackpot result. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game from always ending in a loss even though the performance has been executed, and it is possible to leave the player with a feeling of expectation of winning the jackpot.

Although we have shown an example in which the level of expectation is indicated by a predetermined presentation mode based on the number of step-up images, the predetermined presentation mode is executed based on the step-up images being displayed in a predetermined order. You can also do this.
Specifically, step-up images are displayed in a special order (such as "A", "B", "C", "D", (displayed in the order of "D", "C", "B", and "A"), after the "history display step-up effect" ends, a special reach effect "Year-end song contest reach effect" will be displayed at a predetermined timing. ” or “The Countdown Reach Production” is executed.

As described above, when the performance pattern "PTN-3" or the performance pattern "PTN-4" is executed, the decorative symbols are always in the ready-to-reach state.
Here, by checking the step-up images displayed in the history display area, if the step-up images are displayed as "A", "B", "C", or "D", you can know that a special reach will occur. Players can recognize it. Similarly, the degree of expectation that a jackpot will occur can be recognized by the number of step-up images A. Similarly, depending on the number of step-up images B, it is possible to recognize what kind of pending change effect will occur. Similarly, depending on the number of step-up images C, it is possible to recognize what kind of operation effect will occur.

On the other hand, even when the "history display step-up effect" is executed, the history of the displayed step-up image is, for example, "D", "B", "D", "C" (effect pattern "PTN-4-223"). As in, if the above-mentioned conditions are not satisfied, there is no indication of the degree of expectation or that the pending change performance or operation performance will be executed.

Furthermore, when the step-up image is displayed as "B", "B", "C", "C" (production pattern "PTN-4-091"), the player will be informed that the decorative symbol will be in the reach state. At the same time, it is shown to the player that both the pending change performance and the operation performance will occur. FIG. 313(g) shows an example of the effect when the effect pattern "PTN-4-091" is executed and two step-up images B and two step-up images C are displayed.

According to such an embodiment, in addition to being able to see how many levels of history display step-up effects have been displayed, by referring to the history of displayed step-up images, expectations and The player can recognize whether or not a performance will occur.
The player visually recognizes the performance by paying attention to both how many stages the history display step-up performance continues and the reason why the history display step-up performance continues, which creates a new sense of interest. It happens.

After the "history display step-up effect" ends, the pending change effect or operation effect may be executed immediately (for example, one second later).
Further, a special ready-to-reach effect may be started immediately after the "history display step-up effect" ends (for example, one second later).

The occurrence of the pending change performance, operation performance, and special reach performance may be indicated in the display area until these performances are executed. For example, the display method in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 295 etc. may be adopted.
For example, the hold change effect may be displayed in characters such as ``Hold (green)'', ``Hold (red)'', and ``Hold (gold)''. Alternatively, a circular green (or red or gold) image may be displayed as an icon to indicate what color the hold will change to.
Further, the operation effects may be displayed in characters such as "button (white)", "button (red)", and "lever". Alternatively, a white (or red) image imitating the shape of a button or an image imitating the shape of a lever may be displayed as an icon to indicate what kind of operation performance will be performed.
Further, for special reach performances, the name of the reach performance may be displayed in characters such as "Year-end Song Contest" and "The Countdown."
Furthermore, regarding the degree of expectation, the degree of expectation may be displayed using a numerical value or the like.

The expectation level may be 100%. For example, when the production pattern "PTN-4-086"("B","B","B","B") is executed, some type of jackpot may always occur.
In addition, when the production pattern "PTN-4-001"("A","A","A","A") is executed, a high probability time saving jackpot (after the jackpot gaming state ends, a high probability time saving state will occur) A jackpot) may always occur.
In this way, some type of jackpot or high-probability time-saving jackpot may occur based on the combination of step-up images displayed up to the fourth stage.

Note that a performance pattern in which some kind of jackpot or a high probability time-saving jackpot occurs may be provided as part of the performance patterns that are displayed only up to the second stage or up to the third stage.
For example, when performance pattern "PTN-3-020"("B","A", and "D") is executed, some type of jackpot may always occur.
In addition, when the performance pattern "PTN-2-014"("D" and "B") is executed, a high probability time-saving jackpot (a jackpot that becomes a high-probability time-saving state after the end of the jackpot gaming state) will definitely occur. You can do it like this.

Although four types of step-up images, step-up images A to D, are shown, other types of step-up images may be displayed.
In addition, we have shown an example in which when the history of the displayed step-up images is a specific combination, the expectation level is shown and a predetermined effect (the pending change effect or operation effect) is executed. It may also be indicated that a predetermined level of expectation or a predetermined effect will be performed in response to the step-up image being displayed once.
For example, a step-up image "Hold" may be displayed at any of the first to fourth stages to indicate that the hold change effect will be executed.
Furthermore, a step-up image called "manipulation" may be displayed at any of the first to fourth stages to indicate that the manipulation performance will be performed.
Furthermore, a step-up image such as "V" or "win" may be displayed at any of the first to fourth stages to indicate that some kind of jackpot will occur.
In addition, a step-up image of "sure" may be displayed at any of the first to fourth stages to indicate that a high probability time-saving jackpot will occur.

Referring to FIG. 314, an example of the "history display step-up effect" is shown, but the display is made as if the "history display step-up effect" is starting, but the "history display step-up effect" is not started. It may be arranged so that there are cases in which it is not performed. For example, first, only a translucent step-up effect display window is displayed, and then the step-up effect display window is displayed in an opaque state, resulting in the display state shown in FIG. 314(d). '' will start, and there will be cases where only the translucent step-up effect display window will be displayed, and then the semi-transparent step-up effect display window will stop displaying and the ``history display step-up effect'' will not start. It may be set as such. It is preferable to perform such a display from timing t1 to timing t2.
With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player have a sense of anticipation as to whether or not the "history display step-up effect" will start.

In the "history display step-up effect", an embodiment was shown in which the step-up image is displayed in the range of 1 to 4 times, but the step-up image is displayed in the range of 1 to 3 times or in the predetermined range of 1 to 5 or more times. The step-up image may be displayed within a predetermined number of times.

In the "history display step-up performance", if the player does not notice that the step-up images are displayed in a predetermined combination, there is a risk that the player's interest will decrease. Therefore, an effect display may be performed to notify that a predetermined combination has been displayed.
316(a) to 316(d) show display examples in the step-up effect display window from the 1st stage to the 4th stage when the effect pattern "PTN-4-091" is executed. . In FIG. 316(b), the two step-up images B, which are displayed in a reduced size, are displayed in a frame. Similarly, in FIG. 316(d), the two step-up images C, which are displayed in a reduced size, are displayed in a frame.
By performing such a display, it is possible for the player to easily notice that a predetermined combination has been established.

Furthermore, as in the case where the effect pattern "PTN-4-103" is executed, a plurality of step-up images "B", "C", "B", and "C" may be displayed, but they may not be displayed consecutively. Therefore, in such a case, instead of surrounding the reduced and displayed step-up image with a frame, the reduced and displayed step-up image may be moved in a predetermined manner. For example, step-up image B is displayed to vibrate in the vertical direction when two images are displayed, and step-up image C is displayed to vibrate in the left-right direction when two images are displayed. Good too. FIG. 316(e) shows an example in which such a display is performed when the effect pattern "PTN-4-103" is executed up to the fourth stage. Note that the arrows in the figure schematically represent the manner in which they vibrate and move (the direction of movement), and do not indicate that the arrow images are actually displayed.

Note that the frame may be displayed in different ways depending on the number of step-up images. For example, when three step-up images B are displayed, such as when the production pattern "PTN-4-087"("B","B","B","C") is executed, the frame The thickness may be increased. FIG. 316(f) shows an example in which such a display is performed when the effect pattern "PTN-4-087" is executed up to the fourth stage. Note that when four step-up images B are displayed, it is preferable to further increase the thickness of the frame. With this embodiment, the thickness of the frame gradually increases as the number of displayed step-up images B increases, so that the player can be informed that a predetermined combination has occurred. This will make it more appealing.
In addition, although the example is given in which the frame is displayed in a different manner, the step-up image that is displayed in a reduced size may be vibrated in a different manner. For example, as the number of displayed step-up images increases, the amplitude of the vibrating and displayed step-up images may be increased or the period may be decreased. Note that when these amplitudes and periods are made different, it is desirable to make them different enough that the player can recognize the difference.

With this embodiment, the player can recognize that the step-up images are displayed in a predetermined combination. Furthermore, when a combination with a high degree of expectation occurs, it can be made easier to notice.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 313 to 314, etc., while the "history display step-up effect" is being executed, the player is only looking at the effect displayed in the display area, and is actively I was not able to be involved in the production.
Below, a modified embodiment will be shown in which the player can participate in the "history display step-up performance" by operating a button. Note that operation of an attack button 3710 is required as a button.

The ``history display step-up effect'' is conditioned for the player to perform an operation on the button to proceed to the next stage, and if the player does not perform an operation on the button, the ``history display step-up effect'' is performed. may be prevented from proceeding to the next step.
For example, first, a step-up effect display window and an image instructing a button operation may be displayed, and the "history display step-up effect" may be started on condition that the operation is performed. FIG. 317(a) shows a state in which a step-up effect display window and an image instructing button operations are displayed. Specifically, a state is shown in which an image with the character "push" indicating the operation mode attached to the center of a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed. Note that "?" is displayed in each history display area.
On the other hand, if the button is not operated for a predetermined period of time, the display of the step-up effect display window and the image instructing the button operation is terminated without displaying the step-up image, and the display shown in FIG. 314 ( The display mode shifts to c).
Note that the configurations of the buttons operated by the player (types of buttons, display modes, etc.) may be appropriately employed in other embodiments.

In the example shown with reference to FIG. 313(b) etc., the step-up image of each stage was displayed for 2 seconds, but by adding a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) during which button operations are valid, The display time of the step-up image may be 4 seconds in total. For example, if a button operation is performed when one second has elapsed from the operation validity period, the step-up image may be displayed for the remaining three seconds.

In addition, the step-up image for the first stage is automatically displayed, but if a button is operated at that timing, the step-up image for the second stage and subsequent stages will be displayed automatically. You may also do so. FIG. 317(b) shows a state in which after step-up image B is displayed as the first step-up image, an image instructing button operation is displayed.
On the other hand, if the button is not operated for a predetermined period of time, the step-up effect display window and the display of the image instructing the button operation are terminated without displaying the step-up image for the second stage or later. Then, the display mode shifts to the display mode shown in FIG. 314(c).
According to such an embodiment, the player can select whether or not to display the next step-up image after recognizing the first step-up image displayed, and the performance can be tailored to the player's preference. The player can decide for himself whether or not to proceed with the performance.

In addition, the display of step-up images up to the second stage is performed automatically, but at the point when the step-up image of the second stage is displayed, an image instructing the button operation is displayed, and at this time, Step-up images from the third stage onwards may be displayed on the condition that the operation is performed. FIG. 317(c) shows a display mode in which an image instructing button operation at this time is displayed.
Similarly, the display of step-up images up to the third stage is automatically performed, but at the time the step-up image of the third stage is displayed, an image instructing button operation is displayed, and at this time, A fourth step-up image may be displayed on the condition that an operation is performed. FIG. 317(d) shows a display mode in which an image instructing button operation at this time is displayed.
Note that if the button is not operated for a predetermined period of time, the display of the step-up effect display window and the image instructing the button operation is terminated without displaying the step-up image, and the screen shown in FIG. 314 ( The display mode shifts to c).
According to such an embodiment, as the step progresses, a plurality of step-up images are displayed, and when the expectation that a predetermined combination will be established increases, the step-up image of the next step is displayed. The display can be performed by the player's own operation, which increases interest.

The button operation may be required at all of the above-mentioned timings. Alternatively, the button operation may be requested at a plurality of timings among the above-mentioned timings, and the button operation may not be requested at some timings.
According to such an embodiment, the number of button operations increases, so that players who are highly motivated to play can be satisfied.

If the operation is not performed despite being requested, a step-up image may be displayed in the same way as if the operation had been performed. By allowing the step-up image to be displayed even when no operation is performed in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from operating the button by chance due to lack of motivation or due to a smartphone operation. Even if the player is unable to perform the performance, the player can visually recognize the performance.
On the other hand, if no operation is performed, the step-up image at that stage is not displayed, the history display area remains displayed as "?", and the next step-up image is displayed (or the button Displays that instruct operations may also be displayed. Instead of displaying "?" as it is, the words "No operation!" may be displayed in the history display area. By not displaying the step-up image when no operation is performed in this way, it is possible to encourage the player's desire to participate in button operations.

In addition to simply pressing the button once, the player may be required to operate the button in another manner.
For example, the next step-up image may be evaluated on the condition that a button is pressed repeatedly (for example, a button is pressed 10 times or more in 2 seconds). Alternatively, the step-up image of the next stage may be evaluated on the condition that the button is kept pressed for a predetermined period of time (for example, one second) or more.
In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 317(a) to 317(d), the character "push" indicating the operation mode was attached to the center of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710, but " Instead of "press", the characters "repeat hit" and "long press" may be displayed to indicate the operation mode to the player. FIGS. 317(e) and 317(f) show display states in which "repeat hit" and "long press" are displayed, respectively.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 317(a) etc., it has been shown that operation of the attack button 3710 is required, but operation is required not only for the attack button 3710 but also for other operation means. You can do it like this. As other operating means, a mission button 3700, a defense button 3740, a left lever 3720, a right lever 3730, etc. can be employed.

As an example of the operation means that requires operation, an embodiment is shown in which only one type of operation means (attack button 3710) is required, but any one of a plurality of operation means may be selected with a predetermined probability. The user may be requested to operate the operating means.
For example, in one "history display step-up performance", operation of the attack button 3710 is required at each stage, and in another "history display step-up performance", operation of the mission button 3700 is required at each stage. You may also do so.
Alternatively, the operation of the attack button 3710 may be requested at a certain stage in a certain "history display step-up effect", and the operation of the mission button 3700 may be requested at another stage.
In this way, the game can be prevented from becoming boring by requiring the player to operate different buttons rather than requiring the player to operate a fixed button each time.

In the above example, if the player does not operate the button, the subsequent step-up image is not displayed, but if the player does not operate the button for a predetermined period of time The step-up image may be displayed according to a predetermined effect pattern when the valid time period of each button operation has elapsed.
According to such an embodiment, a player who wants to operate a button only needs to do so, and a player who does not want to operate a button does not need to do so, so it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

If a lottery is used to determine whether or not to display a step-up image when a button is operated, the step-up image must not be displayed if no operation is performed by the player. Good too.

Note that the player may be allowed to select which of these performance modes to select. For example, it is possible to customize whether or not a button operation is required in the "history display step-up effect" during the demonstration display, and if so, in which manner the button operation is required. good.
As for the customization content, only one aspect selected by the player from among these aspects may be executed in the "history display step-up effect", or multiple aspects selected by the player from among these aspects may be executed. Each of the "history display step-up effects" may be executed with a predetermined probability.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which a "history display step-up effect" is started in response to a button operation or a step-up image of the next stage is displayed, instead of a button operation, a predetermined prize-winning effect provided in the gaming area is displayed. On the condition that the game ball wins or passes through the openings (general winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2002, gate section 2003, second starting opening 2004, etc.), the "history display step-up effect" is started, and the next stage is displayed. It may be modified so that a step-up image of .

In the embodiment described above, an example was shown in which a step-up image is displayed on the condition that a predetermined time elapses (2 seconds), a button is operated, and a game ball enters or passes a predetermined winning hole. A "history display step-up effect" that combines conditions may be executed. For example, these conditions are applied to each of the display of the step-up image of the first stage, the display of the step-up image of the second stage, the display of the step-up image of the third stage, and the display of the step-up image of the fourth stage. The "history display step-up effect" may be executed by applying one of the predetermined conditions.

For example, the display of the step-up image of the first stage is switched to the display of the step-up image of the second stage under the condition of button operation, and the step-up of the second stage is performed under the condition of the game ball winning or passing through a predetermined winning opening. Even if the display of the image is switched to the display of the step-up image of the third stage, and the display of the step-up image of the third stage is switched to the display of the step-up image of the fourth stage on the condition that a predetermined time has elapsed. good.

Alternatively, the display of the step-up image of the first stage is switched to the display of the step-up image of the second stage on the condition that the game ball enters or passes through the predetermined winning opening, and the display of the step-up image of the second stage is switched on the condition that the game ball enters or passes through the predetermined winning opening, and The display of the step-up image is switched to the display of the step-up image of the third stage, and the display of the step-up image of the third stage is switched to the display of the step-up image of the fourth stage on condition that a predetermined time has elapsed. It's okay.

Although we have given two examples, you are not limited to these examples; any of the above-mentioned conditions may be adopted as the condition for displaying the step-up image at each stage, and the conditions adopted at each stage may be combined as appropriate. A "history display step-up effect" may be executed. Note that, as described above, the player may be able to customize the conditions at each stage.

According to such an embodiment, there may be cases in which no button operation is required, cases in which button operation is required, and cases in which the game ball is required to be constantly launched. . By providing cases in which button operations are not required and cases in which button operations are required, it is possible to adjust the pace of the game. Furthermore, by requiring the game ball to be in a state where it is being fired, the operating rate of the game machine can be increased, and the sales of the game parlor can be improved.

Although the embodiment has been described in which a step-up image of the next stage is displayed after a predetermined time (2 seconds) has elapsed, the predetermined time may be different depending on the display stage of the step-up image.
For example, the step-up image of the first step is displayed for 1 second, then the step-up image of the second step is displayed, the step-up image of the second step is displayed for 2 seconds, and then the step-up image of the third step is displayed. Even if the step-up image of the 3rd step is displayed for 3 seconds, the step-up image of the 4th step is displayed, the step-up image of the 4th step is displayed for 4 seconds, and the "history display step-up effect" is finished. good.
Further, after displaying the step-up image of the first stage for 2 seconds, the step-up image of the second stage is displayed, and after displaying the step-up image of the second stage for 2 seconds, the step-up image of the third stage is displayed, Even if the step-up image of the 3rd step is displayed for 3 seconds, the step-up image of the 4th step is displayed, the step-up image of the 4th step is displayed for 3 seconds, and the "history display step-up effect" is finished. good.
In this way, as the second half of the "history display step-up effect" progresses, the display time of each step-up image is lengthened to lengthen the time until the next step-up image is displayed. It is possible to secure enough time to expect whether or not a predetermined combination will be displayed.

In addition, after displaying the first stage step-up image for 4 seconds, the second stage step-up image is displayed, and after displaying the second stage step-up image for 3 seconds, the third stage step-up image is displayed, Even if the step-up image of the 3rd step is displayed for 2 seconds, the step-up image of the 4th step is displayed, the step-up image of the 4th step is displayed for 1 second, and the "history display step-up effect" is finished. good.
In addition, after displaying the first stage step-up image for 3 seconds, displaying the second stage step-up image, and after displaying the second stage step-up image for 3 seconds, displaying the third stage step-up image, Even if the step-up image of the 3rd step is displayed for 2 seconds, the step-up image of the 4th step is displayed, the step-up image of the 4th step is displayed for 2 seconds, and the "history display step-up effect" is finished. good.
In this way, as the "history display step-up effect" progresses, the display time of each step-up image is shortened, and the time until the next step-up image is displayed is shortened. The game is displayed as if it has suddenly been decided, which can make the player feel very interested.

In FIG. 314(d), an example is shown in which one star-shaped mark is attached to step-up image A, but step-up image A with multiple star-shaped marks may be displayed. You can do it like this. Further, a predetermined event may be suggested or notified based on the number of displayed star-shaped marks.
FIG. 318(a) shows a state in which the step-up image A with one star-shaped mark is displayed as the first step-up image.
FIG. 318(b) shows a state in which the step-up image A with two star-shaped marks is displayed as the first step-up image.
FIG. 318(c) shows a state in which the step-up image A with three star-shaped marks is displayed as the first step-up image.
FIG. 318(d) shows a state in which the step-up image A with four star-shaped marks is displayed as the first step-up image.

The greater the number of star-shaped marks attached, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. By adopting such a mode, if the combination of step-up images is displayed in a manner that does not give hope for a jackpot, or if the step-up images are displayed only up to a stage such as the 1st or 2nd stage where there is no hope for a jackpot. Even so, it is possible to maintain expectations for a jackpot depending on the number of star-shaped marks.

Note that the star-shaped mark may be displayed after a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after the display of the step-up image has started. With this display mode, even if the level of expectation indicated by the display of the step-up image is low, the expectation of winning the jackpot can be maintained depending on the number of star-shaped marks displayed. can.

Note that the predetermined lottery process that determines the number of star-shaped marks to be displayed is independent of the predetermined lottery process that determines the performance pattern to be executed ("PTN-1-001" to "PTN-4-0256"). It may also be done by
For example, in the case of a jackpot, we will draw a lottery with a probability of 10% for 1 star, 20% for 2 stars, 30% for 3 stars, and 40% for 4 stars. It is preferable to conduct a lottery in which one star is displayed with a probability of 40%, two stars with a probability of 30%, three stars with a probability of 20%, and four stars with a probability of 10%.
By adopting such an aspect, it is possible to prevent the number of presentation patterns from becoming enormous.

Although step-up image A is shown as an example, a similar aspect may be adopted for step-up image B and step-up image C.
For example, the step-up image B may be displayed with any number of kanji characters "BO" added thereto from one to four. FIG. 318(e) shows a state in which the step-up image B to which four kanji characters "ho" are added is displayed as the first step-up image.
Further, the step-up image C may be displayed with any number of kanji characters "Misao" added thereto from one to four. FIG. 318(f) shows a state in which the step-up image C to which four kanji characters "misao" are added is displayed as the first step-up image.
In these, it is preferable that the higher the number of "ho" and "misao", the higher the expectation level.

The degree of expectation for the performance to be performed may be indicated by the total number of displayed marks and kanji characters.
For example, when the production pattern PTN-2-001 is executed and “A” and “A” are displayed, the total number of star-shaped marks displayed will be between 2 and 8, but The higher the number, the higher the expectation level may be.
In addition, when there are 2 step-up images A displayed and 8 star-shaped marks are displayed, the expectation level is as follows: 3 step-up images A and 3 star-shaped marks are displayed. It is best to set it lower than the expected level in the case.

Similarly, when "B", "B", "C", and "C" are displayed, the total number of "ho" and "misao" displayed will be between 2 and 8. In this case, the same mode as in the case of "A" and "A" may be adopted. For example, it is preferable to set the expectation level to be higher as the total number of displayed words ``hold'' and ``misao'' increases.

Although an example has been shown in which each of the step-up images A to D includes the letters "A" to "D" of the alphabet, images in other formats may be used as long as the images can be distinguished. For example, instead of these four alphabets, four character images of female singer characters in different costumes and poses may be displayed.
Although the embodiment has been shown in which the level of expectation is indicated by the total number of displayed star marks and characters, instead of these, the level of expectation may be indicated by adding characters such as "GOOD" and "EXCELLENT!" A similar effect can be obtained.

Further, in each step-up image, predetermined straight lines are combined to form the background portion, but aspects other than straight lines may be adopted. For example, any one of a daytime landscape image representing a daytime landscape, an evening landscape image representing an evening landscape, and a nighttime landscape image representing a nighttime landscape may be displayed. Further, the expectation level may be higher when an evening scenery image is displayed than when a daytime scenery image is displayed. Furthermore, the expectation level may be higher when a night scenery image is displayed than when an evening scenery image is displayed.
Note that these display modes may be combined.

An embodiment in which the displayed step-up image is reduced and displayed in the history display area has been described with reference to FIGS. 307 to 314, and other embodiments that are modified from this embodiment will be described below.

In this embodiment, an image obtained by reducing the step-up image is displayed in advance in the history display area. The player is then notified of the level of expectation based on whether or not the step-up image displayed at each stage matches the step-up image that is displayed in a reduced size in the history display area. There is.

This embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 319 and 320. It should be noted that each of the figures shown in FIGS. 319 and 320 is a diagram showing the display mode within the step-up effect display window. Further, the performance mode will be explained by taking as an example the case where the performance pattern "PTN-4-030" ("A", "B", "D", and "B") is executed.

First, when the step-up effect display window starts to be displayed, an image obtained by reducing the step-up image in advance is displayed in the history display area. The first history display area displays a reduced image of step-up image A, the second history display area displays a reduced image of step-up image C, and the third history display area displays step-up image D. A reduced image is displayed, and an image obtained by reducing the step-up image B is displayed in the fourth history display area. Furthermore, each history display area is displayed with a gray background. FIG. 319(a) shows the display state at this time.
Next, step-up image A is displayed as the first step-up image. FIG. 319(b) shows the display state at this time.
Next, the background of the first history display area is displayed in white, and the words "EXCELLENT!" are displayed near the center of the step-up effect display window. FIG. 319(c) shows the display state at this time.

Next, after the characters "EXCELLENT!" have been displayed (FIG. 319(d)), step-up image B is displayed as the second step-up image. FIG. 319(e) shows the display state at this time.
Next, an image in the shape of an "X" is displayed in the entire second history display area, and the words "Not good enough..." are displayed near the center of the step-up effect display window. FIG. 319(f) shows the display state at this time.

Next, after the display of the characters "Not so good..." is finished (FIG. 320(a)), step-up image D is displayed as the third step-up image. FIG. 320(b) shows the display state at this time.
Next, the background of the third history display area is displayed in white, and the words "EXCELLENT!" are displayed near the center of the step-up effect display window. FIG. 320(c) shows the display state at this time.

Next, after the characters "EXCELLENT!" have been displayed (FIG. 320(d)), step-up image B is displayed as the fourth step-up image. FIG. 320(e) shows the display state at this time.
Next, the background of the fourth history display area is displayed in white, and the words "EXCELLENT!" are displayed near the center of the step-up effect display window. FIG. 320(f) shows the display state at this time.

In this way, when the same step-up image as the step-up image that was previously displayed in the history display area is displayed (first stage, third stage, fourth stage), the background becomes white. .
On the other hand, if a step-up image that is different from the step-up image that was previously displayed in the history display area is displayed (second stage), the background remains gray and the history display area does not display the step-up image that was previously displayed. An image shaped like an "x" will be displayed in front of the step-up image that was previously displayed.
The expectation level is set to be higher as the number of times (three times in this example) that the same step-up image as the step-up image previously displayed in the history display area is displayed. The player can recognize the level of expectation based on the number of areas displayed with a white background in the history display area.

Note that when the various conditions shown with reference to FIGS. 307 to 314 are satisfied in the matched step-up images, effects corresponding to the respective conditions may be executed. For example, if two "C" characters are included in the matched step-up images, an operation effect may be performed. Similarly, for "A" and "B", the degree of expectation may be shown in a manner corresponding to the number of matches, or the pending change effect may be executed.

In addition, although we have shown an example in which the background color is different depending on whether the step-up images match or not, when the step-up images match, the step-up image is displayed in a reduced size in the history display area. The color of the frame may be changed from black to red, and if they do not match, it may remain black.

In the production examples shown with reference to FIGS. 319 and 320, the step-up images in the second stage did not match, but if they matched in all stages from 1 to 4, a special display You may do so. For example, the history display area may be displayed surrounded by a frame, or the words "PERFECT!" may be displayed near the center of the step-up effect display window. FIG. 321(a) shows a display mode when such a display is performed.
Alternatively, the number of matches may be indicated. FIG. 321(b) shows a display mode when the characters "3 matches!" are displayed.
Further, whether or not there is a match may be displayed as "○" or "x" in correspondence with each history display area. FIG. 321(c) shows a display mode when such a display is performed.
Note that these displays are examples of performances performed within the step-up performance display window, but they may also be displayed outside the step-up performance display window, or in a manner that spans both within the step-up performance display window and outside the step-up performance display window. A message such as "PERFECT!" or "3 matches!" may be displayed.

As shown with reference to FIG. 319(c), FIG. 319(f), FIG. 320(c), and FIG.・”), the history display area continues to be displayed, but during the period when these characters are displayed, the history display area may be deleted or displayed. may be displayed even smaller.
With such a configuration, the player can more clearly recognize whether or not there is a match.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 319 and 320, no operation is required from the player, but a mode is adopted in which a step-up image is displayed in response to the player's button operation. You may. Note that the above-mentioned modes can be adopted as appropriate for the implementation and display modes of various effects related to button operations by the player.
Note that it is preferable to display the next operation instruction at the timing when the display indicating whether or not they match is erased. For example, the operation instruction display may be performed in the display states shown in FIGS. 319(a), 319(d), 320(a), and 320(d).
Furthermore, a "?" may be displayed as a history display at a stage where no operation has been performed. FIG. 321(d) shows a display example when no operation is performed in the third stage display.

With reference to FIGS. 319 and 320, an embodiment has been shown in which "Not good enough..." is displayed when there is no match, and "EXCELLENT!" is displayed when there is a match, but other display modes are also possible. may be adopted.
For example, if there is no match, one of "Not good enough...", "EXCELLENT!", or "WONDERFUL" will be displayed, and if there is a match, one of "EXCELLENT!" or "WONDERFUL" will be displayed. It may also be displayed.
Specifically, if there is no match, "Not so good..." will be displayed with a 95% probability, "EXCELLENT!" will be displayed with a 3% probability, "WONDERFUL" will be displayed with a 2% probability, and a match will be displayed. In this case, "EXCELLENT!" may be displayed with a probability of 70% and "WONDERFUL" may be displayed with a probability of 30%.
In addition, in the case of a loss, there is a 80% probability that they will not match, and a 20% probability that they will match, and in the case of a win, there will be a 10% probability that they will not match, and there will be a 90% probability that they will match. You may also do so.

Although an embodiment has been described in which characters are displayed to indicate whether or not the step-up images match ("EXCELLENT!", "Not good enough..."), the time required to display the characters depending on whether or not there is a match is shown. may be different.
For example, by making the display time of the characters ("EXCELLENT!") longer when there is a match, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction.
On the other hand, by lengthening the display time of the characters (``not good enough...'') when the characters do not match, it is possible to stimulate the player and motivate him to press the button next time.

Alternatively, the time for displaying characters may be different depending on whether a predetermined button operation is performed or not. For example, by making the display time longer when a button is operated so that the characters displayed by the player's own actions are visible for a long time, it is possible to reward the player for performing the operation. can.

Characters are displayed to indicate whether or not there is a match ("EXCELLENT!", "Not good enough...") both when a predetermined button operation is performed and when a predetermined button operation is not performed. As mentioned above, when a predetermined button operation is performed, the time for character display is changed to the display time for a new operation instruction image that instructs the button operation to be performed after character display ends ( The period may be longer than the valid period of button operation).
On the other hand, if the predetermined button operation is not performed, the time for displaying the text is changed to the display time for a new operation instruction image that instructs the button operation to be performed after the text display ends (valid period of button operation). It is better to make it shorter than .

When a predetermined button operation is performed, the time for displaying the characters may be shorter than the display time for a new operation instruction image that instructs the button operation to be performed after the end of the character display.
On the other hand, if a predetermined button operation is not performed, the time for displaying the characters may be made longer than the display time for a new operation instruction image that instructs the button operation to be performed after the end of the character display.

As mentioned above, the display in the history display area may be deleted when displaying the characters indicating whether or not there was a match ("EXCELLENT!" or "Not so good..."). The time from when the display is restarted until the display in the history display area is erased again may be shortened on the condition that a predetermined condition is met.

For example, when the display of the history display area is resumed, whether or not to shorten the length may be determined by lottery. Alternatively, the length may be shortened when a button is operated. Alternatively, the time period may be shortened when a predetermined number of game balls enter a predetermined prize opening within a predetermined time.

In the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 314 to 320, etc., the "history display step-up effect" is executed immediately after the decorative pattern fluctuates and changes at high speed. The "history display step-up effect" may be executed at other timings.
For example, the "history display step-up effect" may be executed while the "year-end song contest reach effect" or "the countdown reach effect" is being executed.

In addition, instead of completing the execution of the "history display step-up effect" during one fluctuating display of the decorative pattern, the "history display step-up effect" is executed across multiple fluctuating displays of the decorative pattern. You can.
For example, a "history display step-up effect" may be executed as a prefetch effect. Specifically, when there are four pending items, a step-up image is displayed one step at a time in each of the four variable displays, and a step-up image of the fourth step is displayed in the variable display corresponding to the fourth pending. It may be displayed to indicate the expectation level corresponding to the fourth hold.

In addition, if there are less than 4 holds, the step-up image will be displayed one step at a time until the decorative pattern corresponding to the hold that is the target of pre-reading is displayed, and the image will be stepped up one step at a time. In the variable display of decorative patterns, it is preferable to display step-up images in multiple stages.
For example, when there are three holds, the first step-up image is displayed in the first variable display corresponding to the first hold, and in the second variable display corresponding to the second hold. , the step-up image of the second stage is displayed, and in the third fluctuation display corresponding to the third hold, the step-up images of the third and fourth stages are displayed, and the step-up image of the third stage is displayed. It may also be possible to indicate the level of expectation corresponding to the above.

Another embodiment in which display is performed in the history display area will be described.
First, the premise of this embodiment will be explained.
When a game ball enters the first starting port 2002, a special lottery is held and decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The probability that the result of the special lottery will be a jackpot is 1/300.
When the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, a jackpot game is executed in which the jackpot 2005 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times. Moreover, after the end of this jackpot game, the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 in a time-saving state where it is easy to enter the ball. Up to this point, the game progresses in the same manner as in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 142 and 143.
In this embodiment, the jackpot based on winning for the first starting opening 2002 and the jackpot based on winning for the second starting opening 2004 are only the 10R low probability time saving jackpot.
The number of time reductions awarded after a jackpot based on winning for the first starting opening 2002 is one time. On the other hand, the number of time reductions awarded after the jackpot based on the winning of the second starting opening 2004 is 10 times.

In addition, if a game ball enters the second starting port 2004, a small hit will occur with a high probability (1/7) as a special lottery result, and if a small hit occurs, a decorative pattern corresponding to the small win will be drawn. A stop display is performed, and the second grand prize opening (not shown) is opened. Note that the second grand prize opening is provided on the right side of the gaming area. A specific area is provided within the second grand prize opening, and when the game ball that enters the second grand prize opening passes through the specific area, a jackpot game in which the grand prize opening 2005 opens and closes a predetermined number of times starts. ing. In addition, since the game ball that entered the second grand prize opening or the position of the gaming ball that entered the second grand prize opening always (or with a high probability) passes through a specific area, the player cannot play the game. Except for exceptional circumstances such as not firing a ball, it is virtually certain that the next jackpot game will start when a small win occurs. Note that the probability that the result of the special lottery for the second starting hole 2004 will be a jackpot is the same probability (1/300) as the special lottery held when the ball enters the first starting hole 2002, but as mentioned above, Since winnings occur with a high probability (1/7), most jackpot games for the second starting port 2004 occur via small wins. Note that when a game ball enters the first starting port 2002, the probability of a small hit occurring is 0%.

The number of time reductions given after a jackpot game that occurs based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 2002 is one, but after a jackpot game that occurs based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 2004. The number of time savings granted is 10 times. Further, the maximum number of holds for the first starting port 2002 and the maximum number of holdings for the second starting port 2004 are both four.
Therefore, after a jackpot game that occurs based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 2002, the player can receive a special lottery for the second starting hole 2004 up to five times, and the player can If a small win (occurs with a probability of 1/7) occurs during a total of 5 special drawings, including the upper limit of the number of pieces reserved in the second starting slot 2004, the next jackpot state will virtually never occur. Determine.
On the other hand, after the jackpot game that occurs based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 2002, the player can receive up to 14 lottery draws, and the player can receive the number of pending balls in the second starting port 2004. If a small win (occurs with a probability of 1/7) occurs during a total of 14 special drawings including the upper limit, it is virtually certain that the next jackpot will occur.

According to such game specifications, the player first hits the ball to the left and causes the game ball to enter the first starting hole 2002, aiming to generate a jackpot result as a result of the special lottery. .
Next, when the jackpot game is started, the player performs a right-handed hit, and continues to do so even after the jackpot ends, and the movable piece 2004a is driven and five pieces are placed in the second starting port 2004, which is in the open state. game balls are entered to obtain the results of a maximum of five special drawings. Note that the time period for which the movable piece 2004a is in the open state is set to a time (for example, 1 minute) sufficient for the number of reservations corresponding to the second starting port 2004 to reach the maximum number.

Corresponding to the ball entering the second starting port 2004, a small hit occurs with a probability of 1/7. The player expects the occurrence of a small win (as described above, the occurrence of a substantial jackpot) during the five fluctuating displays.
If a small hit does not occur during the five fluctuation displays, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 2004 (the remaining time of the movable piece 2004a set to open for one minute). Even if the ball is controlled to the normal state, it will be closed), so it is not possible to make more than 5 fluctuating displays, so the player hits left-handed again and aims to generate a jackpot. That will happen.

On the other hand, if a small hit occurs during the five variable displays, the second grand prize opening becomes open, and on the condition that the game ball passes through a specific area within the second grand prize opening, the big winning opening A jackpot condition occurs in which 2005 opens and closes.
When this jackpot state ends, 10 time-saving times are given, so the movable piece 2004a is driven and the game ball enters the second starting port 2004, which is in the open state, and a maximum of 14 special drawings are held. The result will be obtained. In this case as well, if the player continues to hit the game ball with the right hand without interrupting the firing of the game ball, he will receive a maximum of 14 special lottery results, and the 14 fluctuation display will be displayed. If a small win occurs with a probability of 1/7, the second big prize opening will open and close again, and a jackpot state will occur on the condition that the player passes through a specific area. In this way, if a small hit occurs during the 14 fluctuating displays, it will essentially transition to the jackpot gaming state, so this gaming state will repeat in a loop, and from the player's perspective, it will become a continuous winning state. will occur. Note that even if a small hit occurs during the time saving, the 10 time saving will not be newly given unless the specific area is passed.

In this way, the player is in three states with different degrees of advantage: a left-handed batting state, a first right-handed batting state (a state in which one time-saving count is given), and a second right-handed batting state (a state in which one time-saving count is given). Players play the game while being aware of which of the three states they are playing in (a state in which the number of times is given 10).

In this embodiment as well, it is common that the above-mentioned "year-end song contest reach effect" and "the countdown reach effect" are performed in the state of left-handed hitting. The story is about a female singer character who aims to perform live around the world.

In this embodiment, there are three states: a left-handed batting state, a first right-handed batting state (a state in which one time saving number is given), and a second right-handed batting state (a state in which a working time saving number is given 10 times). To help players recognize how far they have broken through the status, for example, "Aim for local live", "Aim for national live", and "Aim for world live" are displayed in order from the left at the top of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. displayed (not shown). Although this display is always displayed, it may be hidden in special conditions (for example, during a jackpot opening, jackpot ending, or during a special error).

If you are left-handed, all of "Aim for local live," "Aim for national live," and "Aim for world live" are normally displayed, and the first right-handed state (a state where one time saving number is given) If so, a special display will be displayed to show that only "Aim for local live" has been completed, and if it is in the second right-handed state (state where 10 time saving times have been given), "Aim for local live" A special display will be displayed to show that "Aim for local live" and "Aim for nationwide live" of "Aim for national live" and "Aim for world live" have been completed, and the second right-handed state (10 time saving times will be given) will be displayed. When the user wins a small hit and passes through a specific area (or when the player wins a jackpot), a special display is displayed to show that all live events have been completed. In addition, in the second right-handed state (the state in which the time saving number is given 10 times), there is a special feature where you can see that all the live performances have been completed when you win a small hit and pass a specific area. The reason why this display was made may be that although the player won a small hit in the first right-hand hitting condition, he did not win a small hit in the second right-hand hitting condition (so-called single-shot through). Therefore, the final objective, ``Aim for the World Live'', is completed when you avoid a single pass. This is because displaying a message to complete all the games when there is a possibility of a one-shot pass that makes the player feel uncomfortable may make the player feel uncomfortable.

In addition, special displays that let you know that "Aim for local live" etc. have been completed include, for example, displaying the "Aim for local live" display slightly darkened, or displaying an effect around the display of "Aim for local live". Alternatively, a message such as "CLEAR!" may be displayed overlaying "Aim for local live performance."

In addition, in the first right-handed hitting state and the second right-handed hitting state in this embodiment, in the left-handed hitting state, a symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating that a jackpot will occur. Only then, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating that a jackpot or small win has occurred.

Specifically, for example, if there are 8 types of decorative symbols "1 to 8" in the left-handed batting state, and you hit the jackpot with "333" in the left-handed batting state, the first right-handed batting state, It has a feature that when a jackpot or small hit occurs in the second right-handed state, the decorative symbol "333" is always stopped and displayed. In addition, as the decorative symbols displayed in the first right-handed hitting state and the second right-handed hitting state, there are eight types of decorative symbols "1 to 8", which are the same as the decorative symbols in the left-handed hitting state. However, the designs differ depending on the left-handed hitting condition, the first right-handed hitting condition, and the second right-handed hitting condition. For example, if the decorative pattern in the left-handed state is a basic design (for example, a number pattern with a character), in the first right-handed state, the design has a halo pointing to the number pattern with a character, and in the second right-handed state, In the hit state, a halo points to the number pattern with characters, and the numbers are drawn in gold. In this way, the more advantageous the state, the more luxurious the design becomes, thereby increasing the player's sense of exhilaration.

By doing this, the advantageous state ends when a predetermined number of fluctuating displays are completed.In most gaming machines, it is mainstream to entertain whether or not a ready-to-reach state will occur, but this embodiment The game machine loses when the left decorative symbol does not stop at a specific symbol (for example, if you hit the jackpot with "333" while playing left, the specific symbol will be "3"). Therefore, it is possible to increase interest when the left decorative pattern stops, and even if the left decorative pattern does not stop at a specific pattern, when the right decorative pattern stops, for example, the left decorative pattern By changing the decorative pattern again from the temporarily stopped state, it is possible to have more timing to increase interest, such as by stopping the left decorative pattern at a specific pattern.

In addition, there is a technique in the past that increases the expectation of winning when the left decorative pattern stops, for example, when the reach of "7" is high, but basically, "7" Because it is rare for a reach to occur, as a result, it was not possible to increase interest in the stoppage of the left decorative pattern.However, in this embodiment, since the hit occurs only with a specific pattern, It is possible to stop a specific symbol on the left decorative pattern with a higher probability of winning the small hit, and it is possible to create a reach state with specific symbols on the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol with a higher probability of winning the small hit. .

Note that the above-mentioned special display indicating that the game has been completed may be made to display a decorative symbol that has been hit in the jackpot while hitting left-handed. By doing this, for example, if you hit the jackpot with "333" while playing left-handed, "333" will be displayed superimposed on the display position of "Aim for local live", and from the first right-handed shooting state. When the state shifts to the second right-handed state (in other words, you won a small hit in the first right-handed state and "333" is displayed) and is controlled to the second right-handed state, the message "Aim for local live performance" is displayed. In addition to ``333'' being displayed over the display position of ``Aim for a national live'', ``333'' is also displayed overlapping the display position of ``Aim for a national live'', and it was a small hit in the second right-handed state that was transferred for the first time. If you win and pass through a specific area (in other words, you won a small hit in the second right-handed state and "333" is displayed), "333" will be superimposed on the display position of "Aim for local live" and "Aim for national live". In addition to being displayed, ``333'' will also be displayed over the display position of ``Aim for the World Live'', creating an impactful display.

Furthermore, "Aim for local live", "Aim for national live", and "Aim for world live" which are displayed in order from the left at the top of the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 are not intended to make you expect to win, but are merely a display of the status. Therefore, it is preferable to display it in a size that is less than 1/2 of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, for example. This is because it is easier for the player to recognize the main performance performed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 if it is based on the winning/losing lottery results.

In this case, "Aim for local live," "Aim for national live," and "Aim for world live," which are displayed in order from the left at the top of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, are previews based on the results of the special lottery. Since the display is smaller than the production and reach production, a special display indicating completion may be slightly dimmed, an effect may be displayed around the display of "Aim for local live", and a message such as "CLEAR!" may be displayed. However, when three decorative symbols (for example, "333") are displayed as a special display, it is difficult for the player to recognize which symbols are displayed. For example, one decorative pattern may be displayed instead of three decorative patterns. By displaying one decorative pattern, when all live performances are completed, "3", "3", and "3" are displayed at the top of the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. , it is possible to give the player the illusion that he or she has won even though he or she has not won.

In addition, specific live shows (for example, "Aim for local live" and "Aim for national live") will be displayed with 3 decorative patterns, and live performances other than the specific live (for example, "Aim for world live") will be shown as complete. Completion may be indicated by one decorative pattern. In this case, the biggest difficulty in the specifications of this embodiment is to win the jackpot or small hit in the first right-handed state. Only the display indicating that you won a jackpot or small win when playing right-handed is displayed with three decorative patterns, and the remaining "Aim for local live" and "Aim for world live" are displayed with one decorative pattern. You can also display only the complete display of "Aim for a national live" (display indicating that you won a jackpot or small hit in the first right-handed state) with one decorative pattern, and the remaining "Aim for a local live" and ``Aim for the World Live'' may be displayed using three decorative patterns.

In addition, when displaying "CLEAR", it is displayed in different ways, such as red text for "Aim for local live", gold text for "Aim for national live", and rainbow colored text for "Aim for world live". You can do it like this. As mentioned above, the biggest difficulty in the specifications of this embodiment is to win the jackpot or small hit in the first right-handed state. It may be displayed when (when a jackpot or small jackpot is won in the first right-hand hitting state).
Strictly speaking, there is no single rainbow color, but a predetermined area (in this example, the text part) can be colored blue, light blue, green, yellow, red, pink, blue, light blue, etc. In this specification, a display mode that is visually recognized by the player as a rainbow by causing the pixels constituting the display means to emit light in a striped pattern is expressed as rainbow colors in this specification.

In addition, when displaying a decorative pattern at the upper part of the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, since the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 itself is small, it is necessary to display the decorative pattern at the approximate center of the game board side performance display device 1600. Decorative patterns corresponding to the variable display displayed on the screen may be displayed in a reduced size, or data of small-sized decorative patterns may be prepared in advance and the data may be displayed. Regarding "CLEAR", "CLEAR" to be displayed as a reach effect may be displayed in a reduced size, or small-sized "CLEAR" data may be prepared in advance and the data may be displayed.

It should be noted that although we have explained that "Aim for local live", "Aim for national live", and "Aim for world live" are all displayed at the top of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, in the state where left-handed players are playing, "Aim for local live" is displayed. In the first right-handed playing state, only "Aim for a national live performance" is displayed, and in the second right-handed playing state, only "Aim for a world live performance" is displayed to indicate which state the player is in.

In addition, we explained that "Aim for local live", "Aim for national live", and "Aim for world live" are always displayed except in special situations (for example, during jackpot opening, jackpot ending, and during special errors). It may also be erased after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

Specifically, when displaying all of ``Aim for local live'', ``Aim for nationwide live'', and ``Aim for world live'', it will shift to the first right-handed state (a state in which the time saving number is given once). When the "Aim for Local Live" is completed, the "Aim for the Nationwide Live" and "Aim for the World Live" are displayed as incomplete. The time may be close to the average variation time of the first inning, or it may be shorter than the shortest variation time that can be selected in the first right-handed batting condition, or it may be shorter than the shortest variation time that can be selected in the first right-handed batting condition. Although it is a long time, it is shorter than the longest variation time that can be selected in the first right-handed state, or it is longer than the longest variation time that can be selected in the first right-handed state). (This includes things that are displayed but cannot be recognized.)

Similarly, when displaying all of "Aim for local live", "Aim for national live", and "Aim for world live", when the transition to the second right-handed state (state in which 10 time saving times are given) ``Aim for local live'' and ``Aim for national live'' are displayed as completed, and ``Aim for world live'' is displayed as incomplete. After a predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, one time of about 10 seconds) from the start of the display, The time is close to the average fluctuation time, the time is shorter than the shortest fluctuation time that can be selected in the first right-handed hitting state, or the time is longer than the shortest fluctuation time that can be selected in the first right-handed hitting state. However, the time may be shorter than the longest variation time that can be selected in the first right-handed state, or it may be longer than the longest variation time that can be selected in the first right-handed state) and hidden (displayed). (including things that are recognized but cannot be recognized).

Similarly, when displaying all of ``Aim for local live'', ``Aim for nationwide live'', and ``Aim for world live'', it will shift to the second right-handed state (state where 10 time saving times are given). In this state, when you win a small hit and pass through a specific area (or when you win a jackpot), a complete display of "Aim for local live", "Aim for national live", and "Aim for world live" is displayed and the display starts. A predetermined period of time has elapsed since (for example, the time is close to the average fluctuation time of one time of about 10 seconds, or the time is shorter than the shortest fluctuation time that can be selected in the first right-handed state, or the first Although the time is longer than the shortest variation time that can be selected in the right-handed hitting state, the time is shorter than the longest variation time that can be selected in the first right-handed hitting state, or the time that can be selected in the first right-handed hitting state is (e.g., for a period longer than the longest fluctuation time available) (this also includes cases where it is displayed but cannot be recognized).

Time to hide the display where only "Aim for local live" has been completed (1st time), time to hide the display where only "Aim for local live" and "Aim for nationwide live" have been completed (2nd time) It is best to set an appropriate time (3rd time) to hide the complete display of "Aim for local live", "Aim for national live", and "Aim for world live", depending on each purpose, but Hours 1 to 3 may all be the same time, hours 1 and 2 may be the same but hour 3 is longer or shorter than hours 1 and 2, hours 1 to 3 may all be different times. However, all combinations of the first to third hours have their own purposes and effects, such as making the second hour longer than the first hour, and the third hour longer than the second hour, so it may be necessary to It is desirable to set the settings accordingly.

Here, the effects of typical combination patterns will be described. As a typical example, if the pattern is such that the times from the first hour to the third hour are all the same, the display will be hidden for the same amount of time regardless of which state it is controlled in, so there will be no reach effects or notices. This has the effect that it is possible to pay close attention to the performance based on the results of the lottery of winners and losers.

In addition, if the pattern is that the second time is longer than the first time, and furthermore, the third time is longer than the second time, the situation will shift to a state (situation) where the degree of advantage is high. Since the longer the display time becomes, it is possible to give a sense of satisfaction to the players, and also to appeal to players who are not playing the game, which can be expected to have the effect of improving operation.

In addition, the biggest difficulty in the specifications of this embodiment is to win the jackpot or small hit in the first right-hand hit state as described above, so the second time is the longest time, and then the third time, The first hour (the first and third hours may be reversed or may be the same). By displaying for a long time that the player has overcome the biggest hurdle, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction, and it is also expected to improve performance by appealing to players who are not playing the game.

In addition, some players feel more joy in avoiding a single shot through in the second right-handed hit state than in overcoming the biggest hurdle in the specifications of this embodiment, so the third period is set as the longest period. , then the second time, and the first time (the first and second hours may be reversed or may be the same). In addition, if the third period is the longest period, the players who are not playing will look at you passionately, wondering, "How much will that machine play?" The display may be shortened. The complete display will be displayed when you move to the second right-handed state (the state where 10 time saving times have been given) and win a small hit in that state and pass through a specific area (or when you win a jackpot) Therefore, for example, when the number of game balls passing through the specific area is one, the time is shortened, and when two or more balls have passed, the time is preferably not shortened. By doing so, it is possible to meet the expectations of both players who feel pressured and those who do not. Further, in the case of a jackpot, the time may be configured not to pass through a specific area, and when the time passes through the specific area, the time may be shortened.

Also, when transitioning to the second right-handed state (the state in which the number of time reductions is given 10 times), "Aim for local live" and "Aim for national live" are displayed as completed, but "Aim for world live" is not completed. However, when the player moves to the first right-handed state (the state in which the time saving number is given once) and wins a small hit in that state and passes through a specific area (or when he or she wins a jackpot) It may also be possible to display the In this case, in order to meet the expectations of both parties mentioned above, the second time period may or may not be shortened depending on the number of game balls that have passed through the specific area.

Up to this point, in this embodiment, we have explained how far we have broken through the story in which we aim to perform a world live performance. It may also be possible to display which reach effect the player hit in the second right-handed hit state). In this case, for example, instead of displaying ``Aim for a local live show'', you can display ``The reach effect that was displayed when you won (instead of a dynamic video of all the reach effects, a display that lets you know that you won with the reach effect)''. )”.

It should be noted that the hold corresponding to the second starting opening 2004 may be pre-read and a small hit or a jackpot may be suggested or notified by a pre-read effect.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 321 and the like will be described below with reference to FIGS. 322 to 324 and the like.
In the "hourglass hold change effect" which is a special effect in the embodiment described below, a predetermined pattern (predetermined color ) An hourglass image resembling an hourglass is displayed at a position that overlaps with the pending image displayed in At the same time, the suspended image of a predetermined color is gradually hidden by sand, and at the same time, the suspended image of a specific color different from the predetermined color is gradually displayed by the fallen sand image.
If all the sand does not fall and the performance ends midway, the display that changes the relevant suspended image is not performed, and the relevant suspended image of the predetermined color before the hourglass suspended change performance is executed continues to be displayed. be done.
On the other hand, if all the sand falls and the held image is hidden by the fallen sand, the held image changes to the held image of a specific color. For example, when the held image is blue, the green held image is gradually displayed as green sand falls, and finally only the green held image is displayed. state. In this way, when the "hourglass hold change effect" is executed to the end, the hold image with a higher expectation level is displayed.

Hereinafter, detailed effects of the "hourglass hold change effect" will be explained with reference to FIGS. 322 to 324 and the like. FIG. 322 shows a time chart for the "hourglass hold change effect". Further, FIGS. 323 and 324 show display modes in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600.
Note that, although a predetermined background image can be displayed in the display area as shown in other embodiments, illustration is omitted in this embodiment.

The "hourglass hold change effect" is executed immediately after the fluctuating display starts, with each decorative symbol being temporarily stopped and displayed. It should be noted that as the decorative pattern in the temporarily stopped display state, the stopped display result of the previous variable display may be displayed as is, or other combinations of decorative patterns may be temporarily stopped and displayed.
FIG. 323(a) shows a state where the decorative symbols are being displayed in a stopped state and immediately before the variable display is started. In this example, the color of the pending image displayed in the first pending display area is displayed in blue due to the pre-read effect.
Performance pattern 01 shown in FIG. 322(a) is a performance pattern in which the "hourglass hold change effect" is not executed, but is shown for comparison with other performance patterns in which the "hourglass hold change effect" is executed. be. The variable display starts at timing t0, and enters a temporary stop state during a period from timing t0 to timing t1. FIG. 323(b) shows a state in which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. Next, from timing t1, a state of high-speed fluctuation occurs, and at timing t30, the left to right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, and at timing t31, all the symbols are stopped and displayed. After being displayed in a stopped state until timing t32, the next variable display is started in the case of a loss, and a jackpot game is started in the case of a jackpot, depending on the result of the special lottery indicated by the stop mode of the decorative pattern. .

The suspended image is erased at the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, but during the period when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, it is gradually made translucent, reduced in size, or overlaid with a predetermined effect display. The visibility of the suspended image is gradually lowered or lowered (hidden) all at once, and at a predetermined timing until the end of the decorative pattern stop display period or at the end of the decorative pattern stop display period. It is a good idea to end the display of pending images.
For example, when the stop display period of the decorative pattern is 1 second, the display of the suspended image may be ended when 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the decorative pattern was stopped and displayed. Note that when a special ready-to-win effect is executed, the display of the pending image may be ended at the timing when the special ready-to-reach effect is started.

Effect pattern 02 shown in FIG. 322(b) is an effect pattern in which only a part of the hourglass image is displayed, but not all of it, and falling sand is not displayed. In this case, from timing t0 to timing t3, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in a temporarily stopped state as the pattern at the start of the variable display. Further, from timing t2 to timing t3, the hourglass image is gradually displayed from the bottom in such a manner that it overlaps with the pending image in the pending display area, but the display ends without being completely displayed. FIG. 323(c) shows a state in which the lower half of the hourglass image is displayed at a predetermined timing between timing t2 and timing t3. In production pattern 02, at timing t3, the display of the hourglass image that has been displayed halfway ends, and the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate at high speed. FIG. 324(a) shows the display state at the timing when the display of the hourglass image ends. Moreover, FIG. 324(b) shows a display state in which the decorative pattern is then in a state of high-speed fluctuation. Note that from timing t2 to timing t3, the time chart states that the visual recognition mode of the pending image is the appearance of an hourglass, but as shown in FIG. 323(c), when the hourglass is displayed, The held images are visible.

In effect patterns 03 to 05 shown in FIGS. 322(c) to 322(e), all hourglass images are displayed at timing t3. FIG. 323(d) shows the display state at this timing. Immediately after this, a sand image of a predetermined color (green in this example) is displayed above the hourglass image. FIG. 323(e) shows the display state at this timing. After that, a display is performed in which the sand image falls downward.

Performance pattern 03 shown in FIG. 322(c) is a performance pattern in which the "hourglass hold change performance" is executed halfway. In this case, from timing t0 to timing t5, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in a temporarily stopped state as the pattern at the start of the variable display. Furthermore, a display of sand falling from top to bottom is performed from timing t3 to timing t5. FIG. 323(f) shows the display state at timing t5. In production pattern 03, the display of the hourglass image ends at this timing, and the decorative pattern, which was in a temporarily stopped state, changes at high speed. FIG. 324(a) shows the display state at the timing when the display of the hourglass image ends. Moreover, FIG. 324(b) shows a display state in which the decorative pattern is then in a state of high-speed fluctuation.

Performance pattern 04 shown in FIG. 322(d) is a performance pattern in which the "hourglass hold change performance" is executed halfway. In the case of effect pattern 04, sand falls for an additional 2 seconds compared to effect pattern 03, but not all the sand falls. FIG. 323(g) shows the display state at timing t7. In production pattern 04, the display of the hourglass image ends at this timing, and the decorative pattern, which had been in a temporarily stopped state, changes at high speed. FIG. 324(a) shows the display state at the timing when the display of the hourglass image ends. Moreover, FIG. 324(b) shows a display state in which the decorative pattern is then in a state of high-speed fluctuation.

Performance pattern 05 shown in FIG. 322(e) is a performance pattern in which the "hourglass hold change performance" is executed to the end. Compared to production pattern 04, the time for the sand to fall is longer by 2 seconds, and all the sand falls. At timing t9, the entire display area occupied by the blue pending image is hidden by sand. FIG. 323(h) shows the display state at timing t9.
Immediately after that, the display of the hourglass image ends. FIG. 324(c) shows a state in which the display of the hourglass image has been completed. As shown in the figure, the color of the pending image is changed to the color of the sand in the falling hourglass image (green in this case). Immediately after that, the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate at high speed. FIG. 324(d) shows a display state in which the decorative pattern changes at high speed.
In this embodiment, the probability that all the sand will fall and the pending image will be promoted is set to 30%, and the probability that all the sand will not fall and the pending image will not be promoted is set to 70%. may be set as appropriate; for example, the probability of promotion may be set to about 30% to 70%.
In addition, in this production pattern, all the sand images fall over a total of 6 seconds, but the time required for all the sand images to fall may be set appropriately, for example, about 3 seconds to 10 seconds. You can also use it as

In effect pattern 02, the "hourglass hold change effect" ends without the display area occupied by the hold image being hidden by the sand image. In addition, in effect pattern 03 and effect pattern 04, since the "hourglass hold change effect" ends with only a part of the display area occupied by the held image being hidden by the sand image, the held image cannot be changed. The pending image is not displayed, but is displayed in its original form. FIG. 324(a) shows the display state at the timing when the display of the hourglass image is finished in production patterns 02 to 04. As shown in the figure, the color of the pending image is displayed in the same color as the color of the pending image before the "hourglass pending change effect" is executed.

In addition, when a performance pattern that fails (a performance pattern in which the relevant pending image does not change) is selected, 2/3 of the sand has fallen compared to performance pattern 03, which is a performance pattern that ends when 1/3 of the sand has fallen. It is preferable that performance pattern 04, which is a performance pattern that ends in stages, is more likely to be selected. By adopting such an aspect, it is possible to maintain the player's sense of anticipation until the latter half of the performance.
Conversely, the performance pattern 04, which is a performance pattern that ends when 2/3 of the sand has fallen, is made more difficult to select than the performance pattern 03, which is a performance pattern that ends when 1/3 of the sand has fallen. Good too. By adopting such an aspect, it is possible to create high expectations in the player when the performance progresses to the latter half. Further, although some players may feel aversion to a prolonged performance, it is possible to create a performance that is less likely to cause such players to feel disgusted.
Furthermore, although a plurality of failure timings (in this example, three timings, timing t3, timing t5, and timing t7) are provided, the failure timing may be set to only one of these timings. For example, effect pattern 02 and effect pattern 03 may be made unexecutable, and it may be determined whether or not the display mode of the pending image changes depending on whether or not the sand stops falling at timing t7. By adopting such an aspect, since it is only necessary to pay attention to a certain timing during the performance, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which excessive concentration on the performance is required.

As shown in effect pattern 05, the color of the sand image in the hourglass image indicates the color that the held image changes when the sand falls to the end of the "hourglass held change effect".
The performance mode shown in production patterns 01 to 05 was whether the blue pending image changes to the green pending image, but the color of the pending image before the change or the color of the sand image changes. (In other words, the color of the retained image after the change) may be any other color.
For example, white, blue, green, red, and gold can be displayed as the colors of the pending image at the start of the performance.
In addition, the colors of the sand image can be displayed in blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow colors, but the expectations are higher than the color of the suspended image when the "hourglass pending change effect" is executed. Only colored sand images are displayed.
For example, if the pending image is red, a sand image of either gold or rainbow color is displayed, but a blue or green sand image is not displayed. This is because players do not like performances that lower their expectations.

The retained image has a motif of a colorless transparent or milky crystal ball, and the setting is such that the color of the crystal ball appears to change depending on the sand falling inside the hourglass.
As the new held image overlaps with the front side of the original held image, a part of the original held image becomes unrecognizable, but in this case, the new held image is larger than the original held image. By increasing the display priority, the lower part of the original held image is displayed in the display process, but it is hidden by the new held image with a higher display priority, making it unrecognizable. You can.
Alternatively, as the performance progresses, the shape of the original held image and the shape of the new held image are changed respectively (for example, the lower side forming part of the external shape of the original held image and the new held image are changed). (with the upper side constituting a part of the external shape of the reserved image being adjacent to each other), the display processing may be such that both images are displayed without being in an overlapping state.
Although the display example in FIG. 323 shows an example in which a two-dimensional image is displayed, the display in the "hourglass hold change effect" may be realized by image processing using a three-dimensional model. For example, the held image may be composed of a spherical, colorless, transparent or milky-white 3D object imitating a crystal ball, and a display may be performed in which a minute 3D object of a specific color is dropped from the top of an hourglass toward the surroundings of the crystal ball. Alternatively, image processing may be adopted in which a spherical 3D object is visually recognized as being gradually hidden by minute objects of a specific color from the bottom and changing to a specific color.
In addition, instead of changing the decorative pattern at high speed at the same time as the display of the hourglass image ends, the decorative pattern is scrolled slowly for a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) from the timing at which the display of the hourglass image ends, and then the decorative pattern is changed to a high-speed fluctuation state. good.

In effect patterns 02 to 04, the display of the hourglass image ends with the sand of the hourglass image not falling, or even if it does fall, some of it remains. At this time, the hourglass may be blown away by the wind to display the hourglass moving off-screen, or the sand may be broken and the sand may be scattered, making it impossible for the sand to overlap with the held image. Then, the destroyed hourglass and scattered sand may be hidden by performing a display process to make them translucent.
With this aspect, it is possible to return the held image to the original color of the held image in a natural manner.

In this way, in the "hourglass pending change effect", an hourglass image is displayed at a position that overlaps with the pending image, and as time passes, an image of sand with a specific color different from the color of the original pending image is displayed. By dropping the image, the original held image is gradually eroded by the new held image, and the original held image is gradually hidden. Depending on whether or not all of the retained images are eroded and hidden, an indication is made as to whether or not the color of the retained image changes.
For this reason, the player has a sense of anticipation as to which of the pending images of different display modes (colors) that are simultaneously displayed in the area where the pending images are displayed will be displayed in the end. We will be watching the progress of "Hourglass Pending Change Production".

By adopting such a presentation mode, when changing the display mode of the pending image, the color of the original pending image that was displayed in the area where the pending image is displayed will be changed from the color of the original pending image displayed in the area where the pending image is displayed. Since the color of the new pending image appears to change gradually in the area where the pending image is displayed, the player can see only the area where the pending image is displayed to see which color it may change to. This makes it easier to recognize the held image, and it is possible to expect that the color of the held image will change.
In addition, both the pre-change color of the pending image (the color before the hourglass pending change effect is performed) and the color that may change due to the hourglass pending change effect are simultaneously displayed in the area where the held image is displayed. Since it is recognizable, it is easy for the player to understand how the level of expectation changes from one level to another.
In addition, since the "hourglass hold change effect" is executed using the display area in which the hold image is displayed, the display area used for the "hourglass hold change effect" can be made smaller, and other It is possible to secure a display area for performing the effects.
Furthermore, since the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped when the "hourglass hold change performance" is executed, the player's consciousness can be focused on the "hourglass hold change performance".

In addition, in this pending change performance, while the performance is being performed, the pending image before the change with a low expectation level gradually becomes unrecognizable, and is gradually switched to a new pending image with a color that has a high expectation level. Therefore, compared to the case where the pending image before the change is changed to the pending image after the change at the final timing of the pending change effect, the player's expectations for the pending image to change are lower. can be gradually increased from the early stage of production.
Furthermore, compared to the held image with a high expectation level, the held image with a low expectation level has a higher probability of being displayed, so in a sense, the player will be able to visually recognize the held image with a low expectation level. The held image, which the player is tired of but has low expectations for, disappears during the performance, which refreshes the mind of such players and allows them to continue playing the game until the held image for which they have high expectations is displayed. It is possible to direct people's feelings.
Additionally, a false effect pattern (for example, a effect pattern in which the pending image does not change and the suggested degree of expectation does not change, such as the effect patterns shown in effect patterns 02 to 04 in FIG. 322) may be provided. By making only a portion of the pending image, which is highly anticipated, visible to the player, it is possible to increase the player's sense of elation.

In addition, since execution of the effect is started immediately after the start of the variable display, it is possible to make the user forget the previous variable display result and rapidly increase expectations for the current variable display.

In the display examples shown with reference to FIGS. 323(a) to 323(h) and FIGS. 324(a) to 324(d), the original pending image is eroded by the sand image and the new pending image is created. In the area where the image is displayed, the circular outline of the pending image is left as is. The color of the original retained image may be used as the outline color. Alternatively, a common color (for example, black) may be originally adopted regardless of the color of the held image. Note that, as the common color, it is preferable to adopt a color different from the color adopted as the color of the relevant pending image or the color adopted as the color of the falling sand.

It is also possible not to display such an outline. In this case, the outline of the original retained image is also eroded by the sand image, and only the upper part (uneroded area) of the original retained image is visible, and the lower part (eroded area) is visible. The retained images are not visible. In addition, the new retained image is displayed not in a circle but in a polygon (square or hexagon). Figure 324(e) shows the state in which 2/3 of the sand has fallen at timing t7, and Figure 324(f) shows the state in which 2/3 of the sand has fallen at timing t7. This shows a state in which all the sand has fallen at timing t9. Note that after erasing the hourglass image, the shape of the hold may remain hexagonal or may be circular as shown in FIG. 324(c). .

The size of the pending image and the size of the lower part of the hourglass image may be made to match.
324(g) and 324(h) show display examples in the case of the "hourglass pending change effect" in which the size and shape of the pending image match the size and shape of the lower part of the hourglass image. .
FIG. 324(g) shows a state where an hourglass image and a sand image are displayed at timing t3 and before the sand falls. Further, FIG. 324(h) shows a state in which half of the sand has fallen at timing t6 when 3 seconds have elapsed since the sand fell. Note that at the timing when all the sand has fallen, the original pending image is completely switched to the new pending image.
According to this display mode, the falling sand itself only affects the area where the new pending image is displayed, making it clear to the player that the pending image itself has changed. This can further increase expectations for the color of the pending image to change.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the "hourglass holding change effect" is executed while the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, it is also possible to perform the "hourglass holding change effect" when the decorative symbols are being changed at high speed or at low speed (the player can clearly see the moving decorative symbols). The "hourglass hold change effect" may be executed while scrolling at a speed that is possible.
In addition, it is preferable not to change the fluctuating display state of the decorative symbols while the "hourglass holding change effect" is being executed. For example, if execution of the "hourglass hold change effect" is started while the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the temporary stop state of the decorative pattern may be maintained until the execution of the "hourglass hold change effect" is completed. Similarly, in the case of high-speed fluctuation or low-speed scrolling, when the execution of the "hourglass pending change effect" is started, the high-speed fluctuation or low-speed scrolling state may be maintained until the execution of the "hourglass pending change effect" is completed.
By adopting such an aspect, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the "hourglass hold change effect".

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 322 and 323, it is preferable to keep the amount of sand falling per unit time within the hourglass constant (that is, the falling sand is displayed in a way similar to a real hourglass). ).
Below, with reference to FIG. 325, another embodiment regarding the amount of sand falling per unit time within the hourglass will be described. Note that FIGS. 325(a) to 325(c) respectively show display modes of the hourglass image and the pending image (the color is white) at predetermined timings (timings t3 to t9). Also, the color of the sand is green. Furthermore, the dotted line shown at the bottom of the hourglass indicates the upper side of the sand at predetermined timings (timings t4 to t8).
FIG. 325(a) shows an example in which the suspended image has a circular shape and the height of the sand increases evenly per unit time. In other words, in this case, the falling sand will be displayed in a different way than a real hourglass. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 325(a), in six divisions (six stages) with the same height, a display is performed in which the sand fills by 1/6 every second, for example. . When displaying a display that fills 1/6 of the area in 1 second, the amount of falling sand may be changed to gradually fill 1/6 of the area by the time 1 second passes. It is also possible to perform a display in which sand falls but does not fill the area, and 1/6 of the area is filled with sand at once after 1 second has passed. It may feel a little strange because the falling sand is displayed in a different way than a real hourglass, but the height of the sand increases evenly (for example, 1/6 of the height is filled in 6 times) (e.g., the area does not increase evenly), it becomes easier for the player to understand the time until the sand completely falls, and it becomes easier for the player to control the tempo. If it is filled in six times, at the timing of 5/6 (timing of t8 in FIG. 325(a)), the feeling of exhilaration can be instantly increased for the pending change performance. As is clear from FIG. 325(a), when the retained image (white) is gradually eroded by the hourglass sand (green sand in this case), the eroded area gradually increases. The area becomes larger, and from the middle of the erosion, the area being eroded is displayed as becoming gradually smaller.

On the other hand, Figure 325(b) shows an example in which the holding shape is circular and the amount of sand falling per unit time is uniform (that is, the sand falling is similar to a real hourglass). is displayed). In the example shown in FIG. 325(b), the time for the height of the sand to rise is short at the beginning and end of the performance, and the time for the height of the sand to rise becomes longer as it gets closer to the middle stage of the performance (i.e., slowly (and the height of the sand becomes higher), so that the player can fully enjoy the effect of whether or not the color of the pending image changes. The time for the sand to rise near the middle stage of the hourglass is longer than the time for the sand to rise at the beginning and end of the hourglass. ” or “ma”, it is possible to improve the interest in the hold change performance.

FIG. 325(c) is an example in which the pending image has a square shape. In this case, if the amount of sand falling per unit time is equalized, the sand will fill evenly from below as the performance progresses. Note that the shape of the retained image is not limited to a square, but may be a vertically long or horizontally long rectangle.

FIGS. 325(d) and 325(e) show other examples of the hourglass image and the pending image (white). Note that the sand image is not shown in the figure.
FIG. 325(d) shows an example of the retained image and the hourglass image when the retained image has a square shape tilted at 45 degrees. In this case, as in the example shown in Figure 325(b), if the amount of sand falling per unit time is made equal, the time during which the height of sand increases at the beginning and end of the performance is short, and the time during which the height of the sand increases is shortened. The closer to the stage, the longer it takes for the sand to rise.
FIG. 325(e) shows an example of the pending image and the hourglass image when the triangular pending image is adopted. In this case, if the amount of sand falling per unit time is made equal, the height of the sand will slowly increase at the beginning of the performance, making it difficult for the player to recognize what color sand is falling. Can be done. Additionally, as the second half of the performance progresses, the time for the sand to rise becomes shorter, making the performance more dynamic as the player sees it as if the sand has suddenly increased in height towards the end of the performance. be able to.
In addition, in these examples, the height of the sand may be increased evenly per unit time.

Note that in FIGS. 325(a) to 325(c) (including FIGS. 325(d) and 325(e)), an example has been described in which the process starts at timing t3 and ends at timing t9. Needless to say, the time it takes to finish is not limited to this time.
For example, in a low probability non-time-saving state, a plurality of production stages (a first production stage in which a first background image and a first character are displayed, a second background image different from the first background image and a different first character A second production stage where the second character is displayed, etc.In addition, a certain production stage continues over multiple variable displays (for example, 10 to 30 times), and a special reach production may result in a loss. It may be possible to perform the "hourglass hold change performance" in any of the performance stages (changed to another performance stage based on a predetermined opportunity).
Further, the "hourglass hold change performance" may be made possible to be executed in all or a plurality of performance stages excluding some of these performance stages. In this case, the appearance (display mode) of the pending image may be the same or different for each production stage. If different, for example, the shape of the pending image may be made into a shape corresponding to the motif of the production stage. Note that even if the production stages are different, the degree of expectation suggested by the color of the pending image and the relationship between the order of the color and the degree of expectation may be the same.
In all production stages, the production of falling sand may start from timing t3 and end at timing t9, or in the first production stage, the production of sand falling starts from timing t3 and ends at timing t9. However, it may be different for each production stage, such as in the second production stage, the sand falling production starts at timing t3 and ends at timing t7 (depending on the production stage or for each production stage). , only the start timing may be the same, only the end timing may be the same, or both the start timing and the end timing may be different).

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 322, any one of effect patterns 02 to 04 is executed, but only effect pattern 04 may be executed. In this case, it is determined that the color of the pending image will be promoted to a color with high expectations at the timing when the display of the hourglass image starts, so the player has high expectations for which color of the sand image will be displayed. You will have a feeling. Furthermore, after the sand image is displayed, the user can watch with satisfaction how the color of the sand image changes in the pending image.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 322, the "hourglass hold change effect" is executed immediately after the start of the fluctuating display, but the "hourglass hold change effect" may also be executed at other timings. good.
For example, after the fluctuating display has started, a pseudo-continuous display (a so-called general pseudo-continuous fluctuating display in which the decorative symbols are quickly varied again after a predetermined symbol or a predetermined symbol combination is displayed) is started. The ``hourglass hold change effect'' may be executed before the game, during a pseudo continuous effect, during formation of a ready-to-reach state, during a special ready-to-reach effect, or the like. Alternatively, the execution of the main effect may be started during one of these periods, and the execution of the main effect may be ended during the other one period.
Alternatively, the special reach effect may be shown in a manner that suggests a loss, and the "hourglass holding change effect" may be executed in a state where the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in a manner indicating a loss. In this case, the manner in which the decorative symbols are stopped (results of the special lottery) may be indicated depending on whether or not the holding change performance is successful. In other words, if the sand falls to the end and the pending image changes, the decorative pattern changes to a state indicating a jackpot and then stops displaying, and if the sand does not fall to the end and the pending image does not change. In this case, it is preferable that the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a temporarily stopped state in a manner that indicates a loss.

The effect mode in which the sand image continues to fall has been shown with reference to effect pattern 03 to effect pattern 05 in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 322. The effect pattern transformed into will be explained with reference to FIG. 326.
In effect pattern 01 shown in FIG. 326, falling sand is interrupted during a period from timing t5 to timing t7, and a display of falling sand is performed again during a period from timing t7 to timing t9. Note that the display state at timing t9 is a state in which 2/3 of the sand has fallen, as shown in FIG. 323(g).
After that, the display of the hourglass image ends and the original pending image is displayed. FIG. 324(a) shows the display mode at this time.
On the other hand, in effect pattern 02 shown in FIG. 326, the falling of sand is interrupted during the period from timing t5 to timing t7, and the display of falling sand is performed again during the period from timing t7 to timing t11. Note that the display state at timing t11 is a state in which all the sand has fallen, as shown in FIG. 323(h). After that, the display of the hourglass image ends, and the suspended image is displayed in the color of the falling sand. FIG. 324(c) shows the display mode at this time.
In this way, by making it possible for the falling sand to be interrupted (temporarily stopping the sand erosion of the hourglass), the player can check whether the sand has fallen to the end and the pending image changes. Since the players have to wait and visually check the sand, they feel a sense of being teased, and their anticipation for the sand to fall again increases, making it possible to increase their interest.

A plurality of interruption times may be provided, and the interruption times may be different. Effect pattern 02 shown in FIG. 326(b) shows an effect pattern in which the sand stops falling for two seconds from timing t5 to timing t7, and then the sand falls to the end. In addition, the effect pattern 03 shown in FIG. 326(c) is a effect pattern in which the falling sand is interrupted for 4 seconds from timing t5 to timing t9, and then the sand does not fall until the end (the falling sand ends at timing t11). It shows. In addition, the effect pattern 04 shown in FIG. 326(d) is an effect in which the falling of sand is interrupted for 4 seconds from timing t5 to timing t9, and then the sand falls to the end (all the sand falls at timing t13). showing a pattern. By providing a plurality of interruption times in this way, it is possible to make the player wonder when the falling sand will resume.
Note that the length of the interruption time is not limited to 4 seconds, and may be 1 second or 3 seconds.

The number of interruptions is not limited to one, but may be two or more times. Effect pattern 05 shown in FIG. 326(e) is an effect in which the sand falls to the end after the sand is interrupted twice, for 2 seconds from timing t5 to timing t7 and for 2 seconds from timing t9 to timing t11. showing a pattern. In addition, in production pattern 05, the first interruption time and the second interruption time are the same 2 seconds, but each interruption time may be different. For example, the first interruption time may be 1 second, and the second interruption time may be 3 seconds. By providing a plurality of times of interruption in this manner, it is possible to further irritate the player by interrupting the falling of the sand again after the falling of the sand has been restarted.

Either or both of the length of the interruption time and the number of interruptions may indicate the degree of expectation that the sand will fall to the end (that is, the degree of expectation that the suspension will be promoted). For example, the longer the interruption time or the greater the number of interruptions, the higher the expectation that the sand will fall to the end. In this case, the player watches the performance with the expectation that the interruption time and number of interruptions will become longer.
On the other hand, the longer the interruption time or the greater the number of interruptions, the lower the expectation that the sand will fall to the end. In this case, the player watches the performance in hopes that the falling sand will resume as soon as possible or that the falling sand will not be interrupted.

The falling of the sand may be interrupted by the player's operation. For example, by operating a button once, the sand falling may be interrupted, and by operating the button again, the sand falling may be resumed. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to interrupt the performance according to the player's will, so it becomes possible to take a picture of the performance with a smartphone or operate the ball rental button 328 with plenty of time. In addition, it becomes possible to enjoy the performance with plenty of time after completing these tasks.
In addition, in this case, you may display a model image imitating the button to encourage button operation, or you may not display the image imitating the button by using it as a hidden button effect (the button operation itself (is enabled). In addition, when displaying a sample image imitating a button, it may be displayed at any of the following timings: before the hourglass hold change effect starts, before the sand is displayed and the sand starts falling, or while the sand is falling. .

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 323, the display that promotes the pending image is performed at the timing when all the sand has fallen, but when all the sand has fallen (for example, the display shown in FIG. 322(e) At timing t9 in pattern 05, timing t11 in effect pattern 02 shown in FIG. 326(b), etc., immediately after the hourglass image is erased, an hourglass image of sand with a more expected color is displayed. , the pending image may be further promoted. For example, after all the green sand falls and the blue pending image changes to the green pending image, the "hourglass pending change effect" is executed again, and the red sand image falls within the hourglass image. may be executed.
In addition, when changing from blue to green, the sand image may be dropped in the manner shown in FIG. 325(a). On the other hand, when changing from green to red, the sand image may be dropped in the manner shown in FIG. 325(b). Furthermore, between the mode shown in FIG. 325(a) and the mode shown in FIG. 325(b), the time required for all the sand to fall is preferably longer in the latter. According to this aspect, it is possible to extend the performance of the latter aspect in which the sense of anticipation is more visually recognized.

We have shown an example in which you can run the "Hourglass Holding Change Effect" again immediately after the "Hourglass Holding Change Effect" ends, but we recommend that you run the "Hourglass Holding Change Effect" two or more times in a row. You can.
In addition, at the end of the "Hourglass Holding Change Effect", instead of ending the display of the hourglass image, the hourglass is reversed 180 degrees and a sand image with a more anticipated color is displayed, and the second "Hourglass Holding Change Effect" is performed. ” may be started.
Further, the "hourglass holding change effect" may be executed two or more times without consecutive execution. For example, in situations such as after the start of the variable display and before the start of the pseudo continuous effect, during the pseudo continuous effect, during the formation of a reach state, during a special reach effect, etc., the "Hourglass hold change effect" may be displayed twice or more in total ” may be executed. Furthermore, between the execution of the "hourglass hold change effect" and the "hourglass hold change effect", another effect indicating the level of expectation may be executed. Or, during one of these periods (after the start of the variable display and before the start of the pseudo-continuous effect, during the pseudo-continuous effect, during the formation of a reach state, during a special reach effect, etc.), the main effect may be The execution may be started and the execution of the main effect may be ended in another period.
Alternatively, the ``hourglass hold change effect'' may be executed in a state where the special reach effect ends in a manner that suggests a loss, and the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in a manner indicating a loss. In this case, as described above, it is preferable that the decorative pattern changes to indicate a jackpot when all the sand falls.
In this way, by making it possible for the "hourglass hold change effect" to be executed multiple times, even if the effect ends in failure without all the sand falling, the second and subsequent effects can be started. It can create a sense of expectation.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 322 and 323, if the effect ends without the sand falling to the end (for example, effect pattern 02 to effect pattern 04 in FIG. 322), the original The corresponding pending image of the color (in the case of the examples of production patterns 02 to 04 in Fig. 322, the corresponding pending image of blue color) was displayed to prevent expectations from lowering, but the sand did not reach the end until the end. If the performance ends without falling, a display may be made in which the expectation level is lowered (demoted) with a predetermined probability (for example, 50%). For example, at timing t3 of production pattern 02, timing t5 of production pattern 03, and timing t7 of production pattern 04, the blue pending image may change to the normal white pending image with a predetermined probability.
In addition, in order to clearly convey to the player that the sand has not fallen to the end, for example, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed between timing t3 of effect pattern 02, timing t5 of effect pattern 03, and timing t7 of effect pattern 04 (for example, After one second), the blue pending image may change to the normal white pending image with a predetermined probability. Note that during this one second, it is preferable to display the hourglass as it is without ending the display. Note that the timing at which the display of the hourglass ends may be the timing at which the display for demoting the held image is performed, or it may be one second after the timing at which the display for demoting the held image is performed.
Note that the pending image may be changed to any pending image that suggests that the level of expectation is lower than the pending image before the start of the performance. For example, if the pending image before the start of the performance is a green pending image, it may be changed to a blue or normal white pending image.
Alternatively, regardless of the pending image before the performance starts, it may be changed to a normal pending image that indicates the lowest level of expectation. For example, if the pending image before the performance starts is a green pending image or a red pending image, it may be changed to a normal white pending image. That is, in this case, the green and red pending images are displayed in the area where the pending images are displayed, and the white pending images are displayed in the area where the pending images are subsequently displayed.
Note that the predetermined probability is not limited to 50%, but may be 10% or 100%. If it is about 10%, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel anxious. Furthermore, when it is set to 100%, a great sense of tension is given to the player, thereby increasing the joy given to the player when all the sand falls and the pending image is promoted.
According to such a presentation, it is possible to give the player a sense of tension. Furthermore, the number of times the "hourglass hold change effect" is executed can be increased.

In addition, if the "Hourglass Holding Change Effect" ends before the "Hourglass Holding Change Effect" has progressed to the predetermined stage, the expectation level will not be lowered and the "Hourglass Holding Change Effect" will continue to the predetermined stage. Only when the process has progressed to this point, a display indicating that the expectation level is lower may be displayed. The predetermined stage is, for example, the stage t7 (4/6 stage) in the case of FIG. 325(a), but the expectation level may be displayed decreasing only when the stage has progressed to a certain extent. The predetermined stages may be set arbitrarily, as this increases the sense of tension, but it is more preferable that the display that lowers the level of expectations is not displayed if half of the stages are not met.
According to such an effect, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling unreasonable or uncomfortable due to a sudden display that lowers the expectation level of the pending image.

A sand image of a color with a lower expectation than the color of the held image may be displayed, and when all the sand images fall, the held image changes to the held image of a color with a lower expectation. For example, if an "hourglass pending change effect" in which blue sand falls while the green pending image is displayed, and all the sand has fallen, it will be demoted to the blue pending image. Good too. In this way, it is possible to improve the appearance rate of the highly anticipated pending image.

It has been shown that as a result of the execution of the "Hourglass pending change effect", the relevant pending image may be demoted, but under such circumstances, it is not possible to execute another pending change effect or to execute the hourglass pending change effect again. Then, the effect of promoting the pending image may be performed again. Furthermore, after being promoted again, the "hourglass hold change effect" may be executed. In this case, if the pending image is promoted by another pending change effect, or if the held image is promoted by another "hourglass pending change effect," the result of the decorative pattern fluctuation display will indicate a jackpot. The game may be stopped and displayed, and a jackpot game state may occur.
For example, in the pending image displayed in blue, even though the "hourglass pending change effect" shows that green sand, which is more expected than blue, falls, all the sand does not fall. After the normal white held image is displayed and demoted (the area where the held image is displayed changes from blue and green to white), other By executing the holding change effect and the hourglass hold change effect again, the corresponding hold image becomes blue again, and in that state, the "hourglass hold change effect" occurs again, and the green sand, which has a higher expectation level than the blue one, appears. If the falling display is performed again (blue and green displays are performed once again in the area where the relevant suspended image is displayed), the blue suspended image will always change to the green suspended image, and the jackpot game will be played. The condition may be made sure to occur. Further, although the jackpot game state is set to always occur when the game is played again, it may be set when the game is played three or more times. In the case of three times, the display corresponding to the demotion (white display after blue/green) will be performed twice (multiple times) for one change. In addition, although we have explained that the jackpot gaming state always occurs, it is also possible to make sure that the jackpot gaming state does not always occur, but in order to avoid giving the impression of being demoted as a bad impression, we need to set the expectation level for the jackpot gaming state to occur. It is preferable to set it to about 50%. Also, when the pending image becomes blue again after being demoted, and the "hourglass pending change effect" occurs again in that state, the "hourglass pending change effect" is generated in a different color from the color that failed once. Good too. Specifically, for example, the color of the sand in the second "hourglass holding change effect" may be red, gold, etc. if the expectation level is green or higher.

In this way, even if the player is demoted, depending on the progress of the performance, an advantageous result may occur for the player, so that the player can maintain motivation for playing the game. In addition, if other players view only the second half of such a series of performances, for example, only the performance that has been promoted to a green pending image, a jackpot gaming state will occur in a situation where the green pending image is displayed. Since the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner that indicates that it is going to happen, expectations are actually quite high for the pending image (in this case, the green pending image), which is recognized as having relatively low expectations. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the operating rate of gaming machines.

Although the embodiment has been shown in which the display mode of the pending image changes by the "hourglass pending change effect", the first pending display area to the fourth pending display area (see FIGS. 123 to 125 etc. for the pending display area) The displayed pending image may also be modified so that the "hourglass pending change effect" is executed. In this case, it is preferable that the "hourglass hold change effect" be executed based on the prefetch process.

When executing the "hourglass hold change effect" for the hold images displayed in the 1st hold display area to the 4th hold display area, the execution of the effect will be completed during the execution of one variable display. It's good to do that. According to such a configuration, there is no need to move the pending image while the "hourglass pending change effect" is being executed, so it is possible to prevent the player from being confused about the content of the effect and to simplify the display process. .
The "hourglass pending change effect" may be executed at the timing when the pending image moves to an adjacent pending display area at the start of the variable display. For example, an "hourglass pending change effect" may be executed immediately after the blue pending image is moved from the third pending display area to the second pending display area at the start of the variable display.

Although an example has been shown in which the "hourglass hold change effect" is executed within one fluctuating display, it may be performed across two or more fluctuating displays. For example, start execution of the effect when a certain pending image is displayed in the third pending display area, and end execution of the effect when the held image is displayed in the first pending display area. Good too. Alternatively, the execution of the effect may be started at the timing when a certain pending image is displayed in the fourth pending display area, and the execution of the effect may be ended at the timing when the held image is displayed in the corresponding pending display area. good.

Based on the pre-reading process, it may be notified in advance that the "hourglass hold change effect" will be executed before the variable display starts. For example, when a starting prize occurs during the execution of a preceding variable display, a prefetch process is performed and an "hourglass pending change effect" is executed for the pending image when the variable display corresponding to the starting winning starts. If it is determined to do so, an hourglass icon image in the shape of an hourglass may be displayed at a predetermined location in the display area to notify that the "hourglass hold change effect" will be executed. Note that the icon image may be displayed at a predetermined location on the left side of the display area, similar to the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 295 to 297 and the like. Further, when acquiring the hourglass icon image, the same display as the microphone icon image may be performed.
The hourglass icon image acquired in this way may be moved while being enlarged to the position of the pending image (or a predetermined pending image) at the start of the variable display, so that it functions as an hourglass image. Further, in this case, a sand image of a predetermined color (for example, green or red) may be displayed in advance within the hourglass icon image. In this case, since the player waits for the variable display to start while anticipating which color it will change from the time of winning the first prize, it is possible to provide a sense of anticipation for a jackpot over a long period of time. In addition, in the case where it is suggested that the "hourglass pending change effect" is executed for the pending image before the variable display corresponding to the pending image is executed, as shown in FIGS. 322(a) to 322(a) 322(d), the so-called fake information may not be executed and the information may always change.

Although an example has been shown in which the "hourglass hold change effect" is executed in the hold image and the hold images displayed in the first hold display area to the fourth hold display area, the "hourglass hold change effect" in the hold image is executed. The "hourglass pending change effect" may be modified to be executable in the pending image displayed in the first to fourth pending display areas at the same time as the execution.
For example, in the pending image, the effect is executed in the form of the effect pattern 03 shown in FIG. The performance may be performed in this manner. In this case, although the color of the pending image does not change, the color of the pending image displayed in the second pending display area changes.
According to this configuration, even if the color does not change in one performance, the color may change in the other performance, which reduces the regret felt by the player who was visually observing one performance. It can be reduced. Note that when the "hourglass pending change effect" for the pending image and the pending image is executed at the same time, a pattern may be provided in which all changes, some changes, and all do not change. When all of the changes occur, the player feels a sense of immense pleasure, when some of the changes occur, a sense of relief can be provided, and by providing a case where all of the changes do not change, a sense of tension can be provided to the player.
Although an example was shown in which the "hourglass holding change effect" is executed for the holding image and one holding image, not only one holding image but multiple holding images shown in the first holding display area to the fourth holding display area are executed. The "hourglass pending change effect" may be executed on the held images (maximum 4). In this case, a maximum of five "hourglass hold change effects" will be executed in parallel. However, when the hold is displayed in the 4th hold display area, it is when the 3rd hold is stored, and when it is stored in the 4th hold (when you win the starting slot), the remaining time is fluctuating. may be long or short, so a maximum of 4 "Holding images" (from the relevant pending image to the pending image displayed in the 3rd pending display area) excluding the pending image displayed in the 4th pending display area will be displayed. "Pending change performance" may be executed in parallel.

The "hourglass pending change effect" of the pending image and the "hourglass pending change effect" of the pending image may be executed in a predetermined order.
For example, after the "hourglass pending change effect" is executed for the relevant pending image, the "hourglass pending change effect" is simultaneously executed for the pending images displayed in the first to fourth pending display areas. It is also possible to do so.
Alternatively, the pending image, the pending image displayed in the first pending display area, the pending image displayed in the second pending display area, the pending image displayed in the third pending display area, the held image displayed in the fourth pending display area The "hourglass pending change effect" may be executed in the order of the pending images.
Alternatively, the pending image, the pending image displayed in the fourth pending display area, the pending image displayed in the third pending display area, the pending image displayed in the second pending display area, the held image displayed in the first pending display area The "hourglass pending change effect" may be executed in the order of the pending images.

Alternatively, after the "Hourglass pending change effect" is simultaneously executed for the pending images displayed in the first to fourth pending display areas, the "Hourglass pending change effect" of the pending image is executed. It is also possible to do so.
Alternatively, the pending image displayed in the first pending display area, the pending image displayed in the second pending display area, the pending image displayed in the third pending display area, the held image shown in the fourth pending display area, The "hourglass pending change effect" may be executed in the order of the pending images.
Alternatively, the held image displayed in the fourth held display area, the held image displayed in the third held display area, the held image displayed in the second held display area, the held image shown in the first held display area, The "hourglass pending change effect" may be executed in the order of the pending images.

In addition, although the case where the number of reservations is the maximum number was illustrated, when the number of reservations is not the maximum number, it is good to perform an effect in each reservation image corresponding to the existing reservation. For example, if the number of pending items is 2, the "Hourglass pending change effect" is displayed in a predetermined order in the pending image, the pending image displayed in the first pending display area, and the pending image displayed in the second pending display area. It's a good idea to do this.

In addition, in these examples, it is possible to start the subsequent "hourglass hold change effect" while the previously started "hourglass hold change effect" is being executed, so that multiple "hourglass hold change effects" are executed at the same time. You may also do so.
Alternatively, the subsequent "hourglass hold change effect" may be started immediately after the execution of the previously started "hourglass hold change effect" ends or after a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed.

In this way, when the "hourglass pending change performance" is executed simultaneously, there is a possibility that any of the pending images will be promoted, so that the player's feeling of regret can be alleviated. Furthermore, when the "hourglass hold change performance" is executed in order, it is possible to prevent the performance result from being overlooked.

``Explosive hold change effect'', which is another hold change effect that is different from the ``hourglass hold change effect'', will be explained with reference to FIGS. 327, 328, and the like. It should be noted that the "explosion hold change effect" is also a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 321 and the like, similar to the "hourglass hold change effect".

FIG. 327 shows a time chart regarding the "explosion hold change effect". Further, FIG. 328 shows a display example when the "explosion hold change effect" is executed.

FIG. 328(a) shows a state in which decorative symbols are being displayed in a stopped state and immediately before variable display is started. In this example, the color of the pending image displayed in the first pending display area is blue.
Performance pattern 01 shown in FIG. 327(a) is a performance pattern in which the "explosion hold change effect" is not executed, but is shown for comparison with a performance pattern in which the "explosion hold change effect" is executed. The variable display starts at timing t0, and enters a temporary stop state during a period from timing t0 to timing t1. FIG. 328(b) shows a state in which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. Next, from timing t1, a state of high-speed fluctuation occurs, and at timing t30, the left to right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, and at timing t31, all the symbols are stopped and displayed. After being displayed in a stopped state until timing t32, the next variable display is started in the case of a loss, and a jackpot game is started in the case of a jackpot, depending on the result of the special lottery indicated by the stop mode of the decorative pattern. .

Performance pattern 02 shown in FIG. 327(b) is a performance pattern in which a bomb character image is displayed on the lower left side of the display area and moves toward the right side where the suspended image is displayed, but returns halfway. In this case, from timing t0 to timing t3, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in a temporarily stopped state as the pattern at the start of the variable display. Further, from timing t2 to timing t3, a bomb character image is displayed on the lower left side of the display area, moves toward the right side where the pending image is displayed, but returns halfway. FIG. 328(c) shows a state in which the bomb character image is displayed at the bottom of the display area at a predetermined timing between timing t2 and timing t3. In production pattern 02, at timing t3, the bomb character image moves from the lower left side of the display area to the outside of the screen and becomes invisible, and the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate at high speed. FIG. 328(f) shows the display state at the timing when the display of the bomb character image is finished.

In the effect pattern 03 shown in FIG. 327(c) and the effect pattern 04 shown in FIG. 327(d), a bomb character image is displayed on the lower left side of the display area and moves toward the right side where the pending image is displayed. This is a performance pattern in which an explosion is displayed overlapping the pending image. In this case, from timing t0 to timing t4, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in a temporarily stopped state as the pattern at the start of the variable display. Further, from timing t2 to timing t3, a bomb character image is displayed on the lower left side of the display area and moved toward the right side where the pending image is displayed. FIG. 328(c) shows a state in which the bomb character image is displayed at the bottom of the display area at a predetermined timing between timing t2 and timing t3. FIG. 328(d) shows a state in which the bomb character image is displayed superimposed on the front side of the pending image at timing t3. In the performance pattern 03 and the performance pattern 04, a bomb character image is displayed superimposed on the front side of the pending image at timing t3, and immediately after it explodes, an explosion image is displayed, and this state continues until timing t4. FIG. 328(e) shows a state in which an explosion image is displayed. The display of the explosion image ends at timing t4.
As shown in FIGS. 328(d) and 328(e), the pending image becomes invisible during the period from timing t3 to timing t4.
Note that the color of the explosion image is composed of a color such as gray or black that is not displayed as the color of the pending image before or after the change.

In the case of effect pattern 03 shown in FIG. 327(c), after the display of the explosion image ends, the held image becomes visible in blue, which is the color before the execution of the "explosion hold change effect". FIG. 328(f) shows the display state at this time.

In the case of effect pattern 04 shown in FIG. 327(d), after the display of the explosion image ends, the green pending image becomes visible, which is different from the color before the execution of the "explosion pending change effect". FIG. 328(g) shows the display state at this time.

The held image is not limited to green, but may be changed to a more anticipated held image (red, gold, rainbow color). In addition, in the "Hourglass hold change effect", an embodiment was shown in which the hold image may change to the relevant hold image with a low expectation level, but in the "Explosion hold change effect", the hold image changes to the hold image with a low expectation level. There's nothing to do.

In the "explosion hold change effect", the time required from the appearance of the bomb character to the display of the hold image after the explosion is set to 2 seconds (timing t2 to timing t4), but it is not limited to 2 seconds, and can range from 1 second to 3 seconds. It can be set to a time of about seconds.

In this way, in the "explosion hold change effect", while the predetermined hold image changes to the hold image with a higher expectation level, it does not change to the hold image with a lower expectation level. By making it possible to implement both the "hourglass hold change effect" and the "explosion hold change effect," it is possible to increase the variations of effects that change the hold image.
In addition, the "explosion hold change effect" changes the hold image in a shorter time (2 seconds) compared to the "hourglass hold change effect" in which the hold image changes when the sand falls over a period of 6 seconds. If the suspended image is suddenly displayed as being demoted, the player may feel unreasonable and lose interest, so the system is designed to prevent the suspended image from being demoted.
On the other hand, in the "Hourglass holding change effect", the effect time is longer than the "Explosion holding change effect", and if all the sand falls during the effect, the held image will be promoted, so the player cannot see the held image. It is possible to make the player feel the suspenseful feeling of wondering whether or not he will be promoted for a long period of time, which can improve the player's interest. Note that in some modified examples, the player may be demoted, but in this case, it is possible to make the player feel even more excited.

Note that various embodiments and modifications of the "hourglass hold change effect" can be applied to the "explosion hold change effect" as appropriate. For example, when applying the "explosion hold change effect" to the hold images displayed in the first hold display area to the fourth hold display area, it is possible to change the hold image to a hold image with higher expectations. becomes.

The rate at which the "hourglass hold change effect" is executed is preferably higher than the rate at which the "explosion hold change effect" is executed. For example, the "hourglass hold change effect" and the "explosion hold change effect" may be executed at a ratio of 4:1. According to such a configuration, since the "hourglass hold variation effect" which has a relatively long effect execution time is executed at a higher rate, it is possible to make the player feel more interested.

On the other hand, the "hourglass hold change effect" and the "explosion hold change effect" may be executed at the same rate. For example, the "hourglass hold change effect" and the "explosion hold change effect" may be executed at a ratio of 1:1.
Alternatively, the rate at which the "hourglass hold change effect" is executed may be lower than the rate at which the "explosion hold change effect" is executed. For example, the "hourglass hold change effect" and the "explosion hold change effect" may be executed at a ratio of 1:4.

It is preferable that the probability that the held image is promoted in the "hourglass holding change effect" is higher than the probability that the held image is promoted in the "explosion hold change effect". This can improve the interest of long-time players.

On the other hand, the pending image may be promoted at the same rate when the "hourglass pending change effect" is executed and when the "explosion pending change effect" is executed.
Alternatively, the probability that the held image will be promoted in the "hourglass holding change effect" may be lower than the probability that the held image will be promoted in the "explosion hold change effect".

In the "Hourglass Holding Change Effect", it takes at least 6 seconds from when the sand starts falling until all the sand falls and the holding image changes (for example, from timing t3 in the effect pattern 05 in FIG. 322(e)). (period of timing t9). On the other hand, in the "explosion hold change effect", the time required from the start of displaying the bomb character until the hold image changes is 2 seconds. Thereby, the interest of the "hourglass hold change effect" can be further improved.

The time from when the sand starts falling in the "hourglass hold change effect" until all the sand falls and the relevant hold image changes, and the time from the start of display of the bomb character in the "explosion hold change effect" to the hold image concerned. The time required for the change to change may be the same (for example, 4 seconds).
Alternatively, the time (e.g., 3 seconds) from when the sand starts falling in the "hourglass hold change effect" until all the sand falls and the relevant hold image changes can be used as the bomb character's time in the "explosion hold change effect". It may be shorter than the time (for example, 6 seconds) from the start of display until the pending image changes. In this way, for example, when the "hourglass hold change effect" is performed on the held image, the held display after the change is a display that gradually erodes the area of the held image, whereas the ``explosion hold change effect'' Since the "change effect" is displayed that encroaches on the area of the pending image at once, it is possible to have variations in the display mode when the pending image is changed, thereby increasing the interest.

When performing the "Hourglass Holding Change Performance" or the "Explosive Holding Change Performance", a specific sound that matches the performance (the specific sound here is a sound that is output in accordance with the progress of the Holding Change Performance), (not a sound indicating that the hold status has changed) may also be output. At this time, the sound to be output may be the same sound or may be different sounds. Further, the specific sound may be output in only one performance, and the specific sound may not be output in the other performance.
If you output the same sound as the specific sound for the "hourglass hold change effect" and the "explosion hold change effect", it will have the effect that you will not miss both effects, and it will be possible to output different sounds. If you do this, you will be able to recognize which pending change effect is being performed just by the sound without looking at the display area, but if you only perform one effect, there is a risk of missing the effect. This has the effect of allowing the user to gaze at the liquid crystal.
Note that the timing for outputting the specific sound may be at the start of the performance, or at a predetermined timing during the performance. In addition, a special sound different from the specific sound (the special sound here is not a sound that is output in accordance with the progress of the hold change effect, but a sound that indicates that the hold has changed) is used as an "hourglass hold change effect". and "explosion hold change effect" may be output. However, for the "explosion hold change effect", the hold display after the change is suddenly displayed (Figure 328 (e), Figure 328 (f)), so there is a sound indicating that the hold has changed, or which hold it has changed to. It is better to always output the sound indicating "Hourglass hold change effect", but when the hold change occurs, the player has already been informed which hold display will change to during the process of the hourglass hold change effect. Since it is recognized, the special sound does not need to be output.

In one fluctuating display, it may be possible to execute both the "hourglass hold change effect" and the "explosion hold change effect." For example, the "explosion hold change effect" may be executed after the "hourglass hold change effect" is executed, or the "hourglass hold change effect" may be executed after the "explosion hold change effect" is executed.
According to such a configuration, if the result of the first pending change performance is unfavorable for the player (such as no change in pending or demoted), a pending change performance that is different from the first held change performance is performed. is executed, the effect can be visually recognized with the player's feeling changed compared to the case where the initially held change effect is executed again.
Furthermore, if the same pending change performance is executed again, the player will be reminded of the most recent performance that had an unfavorable result for the player, and will be reminded of the unfavorable result. Although there is a possibility that the user may feel unpleasant feelings, the above configuration can prevent the user from feeling unpleasant feelings.

The "hourglass pending change effect" and other effects that can suggest the degree of expectation may be executed simultaneously.
For example, while the "hourglass hold change effect" is being executed, execution of another effect may be started. Alternatively, the execution of the "hourglass hold change effect" and other effects may be started at the same time. Alternatively, execution of the "hourglass hold change effect" may be started while other effects are being executed.
Furthermore, the execution of the "hourglass hold change effect" may be terminated while other effects are being executed. Alternatively, the execution of the "hourglass hold change effect" and other effects may be ended at the same time. Alternatively, the execution of other effects may be terminated while the "hourglass hold change effect" is being executed.

Other effects include the pseudo linked effect shown with reference to FIG. 261, the special reach effect shown with reference to FIGS. 276, 277, etc., and the reach effect shown with reference to FIGS. 276, 277, etc. A title image showing the title of , a preview image (line image or cut-in image) display effect shown with reference to FIG. 278, etc., a step-up effect shown with reference to FIG. 313, etc. can be adopted.
Note that the hourglass image in the "hourglass hold change effect" and a predetermined image displayed in other effects may be displayed in an overlapping manner. At this time, it is preferable to display the hourglass image in front of the predetermined image.
Alternatively, a predetermined image to be displayed in another performance may be displayed at a position that does not overlap with the hourglass image in the "hourglass hold change performance".

According to such a configuration, even when a sand image of a color with low expectation level is displayed in the "hourglass holding change effect", the expectation for a jackpot can be maintained by other effects.

Note that from the viewpoint of drawing the attention of the player to the "hourglass hold change effect," it is preferable not to execute any one or all of the other effects at the same time as the "hourglass hold change effect." In this case, the hourglass image and the image used to execute another predetermined effect are not displayed at the same time. According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the "hourglass hold change effect".
Furthermore, other predetermined performances with an expectation level of 100% may not be executed simultaneously with the "hourglass hold change performance." In this case, it is possible to draw the player's attention to another predetermined performance that is more preferable to the player.

A predetermined image displayed in another performance may be displayed in a plurality of modes with different colors, and the degree of expectation may be suggested by the color of the image.
As the colors used at this time, white, red, and gold, which are some of the colors used as the colors of the pending image of the "hourglass pending change effect", may be adopted. Further, it is preferable that the expectation level increases in this order of color (white, red, gold). Specifically, if the other effect is a step-up effect shown with reference to FIG. The colors are white, red, and gold.
In this way, the colors used to suggest the level of expectation in the ``hourglass hold change production'' are also used to suggest the level of expectation in other productions, so that they can be used in other productions. An issue where the color and the color of the falling sand in the "Hourglass pending change effect" were the same in some cases. Thereby, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of security regarding the change of the pending image to the pending image of another color in the "hourglass pending change effect".

On the other hand, colors that are not used in the "hourglass hold change effect" may be used as colors of images in other effects. For example, brown, orange, and purple may be used as the colors of the image. Alternatively, the expectation level may increase in this order (brown, orange, purple). In addition, in some of the other performances, expectations are suggested by the colors used in the "Hourglass Holding Change Performance", and in the remaining performances, in the "Hourglass Holding Change Performance" It is preferable to suggest the level of expectation using colors that are not used.
In this way, by indicating the level of expectation using colors that are not used in the "hourglass hold change effect," it is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation that this is a special color effect.
In addition, in a predetermined production among the other productions, a plurality of display modes with different expectations are provided depending on the colors used in the "hourglass suspension variation production" and the colors not used in the "hourglass suspension variation production". You can do it like this. Specifically, for example, when the predetermined performance is a step-up performance, and the expectation level of the step-up performance is different depending on the color of the frame, the color of the frame is white, purple, red, and gold, and the colors are set in this order. Assume that expectations are high. In this case, the color that is not used in the "Hourglass hold change effect" will be purple, and if a purple frame is displayed, it may make you think that the expectation level is higher or lower than red, or that it is a premium effect. It can give you a sense of elation.

After the "hourglass hold change effect" is completed and the hold image is completely replaced with the hold image of another color and the effect is completed, execution of other effects may be started. Conversely, the "hourglass hold change effect" may be started after the execution of other effects is completed.
By adopting such an aspect, the player's attention can be focused on each performance.

In the "hourglass holding change effect", it was shown that the time from the start of the falling sand to the end is 6 seconds (effect pattern 05 shown in FIG. 322(e)), but in other effects, It is preferable that the time during which the image suggesting the level of expectation is displayed is shorter than this time.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to more effectively perform the "hourglass pending change effect" that determines whether or not the suggested degree of expectation changes.

In addition, for all other performances, from the time the sand of the "Hourglass Holding Change Performance" starts until it ends (from the time when the erosion of the area where the relevant holding image is displayed starts until the erosion ends) The time during which the image suggesting the level of expectation is displayed may be shorter than the time until
Alternatively, for some of the other effects, from the time the sand of the "hourglass pending change effect" starts until it ends (from the time the erosion of the area where the relevant pending image is displayed starts to the erosion) (until the end of the hourglass). An image that suggests the level of expectation is displayed, rather than the time from the start of sand falling until it ends (from the start of erosion to the end of the erosion in the area where the relevant suspended image is displayed). The time taken may be increased.
Alternatively, for all other effects, from the time the sand falls in the "Hourglass pending change effect" starts to the end (from the time the erosion of the area where the pending image is displayed starts until the erosion ends) The time during which the image suggesting the level of expectation is displayed may be made longer than the time until

The output of a specific BGM (the specific BGM here is a sound different from the specific sound described above) may be started from the start timing of the "hourglass hold change effect" or the start timing of the falling sand. If the pending image is successfully changed, it is preferable to continue outputting the specific BGM even after the "hourglass pending change effect" ends. On the other hand, if the change of the pending image fails, it is preferable to end the output of the specific BGM at the timing of the failure (timing when the display of the sand image ends).
In this way, the fact that the suspended image has been promoted can be recognized for a predetermined period of time by the specific BGM even after the suspended image has been promoted, so that the user can feel more satisfied with the promotion. Further, it is possible to notify other players that the player has been promoted.
Note that the timing to start outputting the specific BGM may be a predetermined timing before the start of the "hourglass hold change effect". In this case, the output of the specific BGM also functions as a notice that the "hourglass hold change effect" will start. Furthermore, even if the output timing of a specific BGM is determined to be the start timing of the "hourglass pending change effect," for example, if a special condition is met, the output timing of the specific BGM will be the start timing of the "hourglass pending change effect." The output timing may be the same, but the timing at which the output is made audible may be delayed. If the audio is made audible later than the normal timing, the level of anticipation will be increased to increase interest. The special conditions mentioned here include determining whether or not to delay based on the winning result, determining by customization settings operated by the player, and performing an "hourglass pending change effect" as the pending image. This applies when the previous variation satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, a non-reach variation pattern or a variation pattern in which a specific SP reach is performed).

The timing at which the output of the specific BGM ends may be a predetermined timing before the end of the fluctuating display of decorative symbols, or the timing at which the fluctuating display of decorative symbols ends.
For example, if a reach state (a state in which the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and the same symbol is displayed, and the middle decorative symbol is scrolling or changing at high speed) occurs, even if the output of a specific BGM is terminated. good. Further, at this time, BGM corresponding to the ready-to-reach state may be output.
In addition, if a reach state does not occur and a decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a non-reach state, output of specific BGM is continued until the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, and the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed is It is recommended to end the output of a specific BGM with .

Alternatively, if a special reach effect occurs, the BGM corresponding to the special reach effect is output and the output of the specific BGM is terminated, and if the special reach effect does not occur, The specific BGM may be continued to be output until the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed.

Note that music such as a song by a specific singer or a melody of a specific song can be used as the BGM. Furthermore, instead of BGM, audio consisting of specific lines may be used.

In the "hourglass holding change effect", a light-emitting decorative member including a plurality of light-emitting members (for example, full-color LEDs) may be made to emit light in the same or similar color to the color of the holding image or the sand image. The light-emitting decorative members include the door frame left side unit 530 shown with reference to FIGS. 47 to 55, the door frame right side unit 550, and the movable right ear frame shown with reference to FIGS. The body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, the panel plate rear substrate 2420 shown with reference to FIGS. 130, 131, etc. can be employed. In addition, in the "hourglass holding change effect", some of these light-emitting decorative members may be made to emit light, or all of them may be made to emit light.
Specifically, at the same time as the start of the "hourglass hold change effect" or at the same time as the start of the sand image display, one or more light emitting decorative members are displayed in their entirety before the "hourglass hold change effect" is started. It is preferable that the lower part of the light-emitting decorative member is emitted in the same color as the sand image that has been held, and as the sand image falls, the lower part of the light-emitting decorative member is changed to the same color as the fallen sand image.
For example, in the case of effect pattern 05 shown in FIG. 322(e), at timing t2 or timing t3, the entire light emitting decoration member is brought into a state of emitting light in blue, which is the same color as the color of the pending image. Next, as the sand falls, the light-emitting decorative member gradually changes from a state in which it emits blue light from below to a state in which it emits green light. At timing t6, exactly half of the sand has fallen, and at this time, the light emitting state of the light emitting decorative member is blue in the upper half and green in the lower half. When the sand falls to the end at timing t9, the entire light emitting decorative member emits green light. Further, it is preferable that the entire light is emitted in green even after the timing t9. Moreover, in order to make it clearer that the color has changed from timing t9 to timing t10, a blinking display may be performed that repeats the changed color and extinguishing.
When the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 emit light in this manner, it is possible to indicate that the "hourglass hold change effect" is being executed in the entire gaming machine and that the color of the hold image concerned is You can show off your changes over a long period of time to those around you.

Note that if the sand stops falling midway, the luminescent color of the luminescent decorative member may be returned to its original color. For example, in the case of production pattern 04 in FIG. 322(d), the display of the sand image ends at timing t7, and only the blue pending image is displayed, but at the same timing, the entire luminescent decorative member is also displayed. It is best to return it to the state where it emits blue light.

The panel rear substrate 2420 provided on the game board 5 can also be made to emit light in a similar manner. Note that the shape of the panel board rear substrate 2420 may be the same circular shape as the retained image. Although the panel plate rear substrate 2420 is provided near the first starting port 2002, it may be provided at other locations. For example, it may be provided near the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 or near a movable decorative member provided on the game board 5.

The timing to end the emission of green light, which is the same or similar color as after the change of the relevant pending image changed by the "hourglass pending change effect", may be a predetermined timing before the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern. , it may be the timing at which the variable display of the decorative pattern ends.
For example, if a reach state occurs (a state in which the left and right decorative patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed as the same pattern, and the middle decorative pattern is scrolling or changing at high speed), the green light emission may be terminated. . Further, at this time, light emission may be started in a color corresponding to the ready-to-reach state.
In addition, if the reaching state does not occur and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the non-reaching state, the green light will continue to be emitted until the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, and at the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. It is better to stop emitting light in green.

Alternatively, if a special reach effect occurs, the light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the special reach effect and the green light emission is terminated, and if a special reach effect does not occur, the decoration is The green light may continue to emit light until the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Simultaneously with the start of the "hourglass hold change effect" or at the same time as the start of the display of the sand image, the entire light-emitting decorative member may be made to emit light in the same color as the sand image (in other words, the "hourglass hold change effect" may be made to emit light in the same color as the sand image). '', the entire or part of the light-emitting decorative member is made to emit light in the same color as the new sand color even before the area where the suspended image is displayed starts being eroded with the new sand color). Further, in that case, all sand images of that color may be made to fall without fail. According to this aspect, the player can be made aware in advance that the display mode of the pending image will change. Although the explanation has been given with an example in which the held image is displayed in blue and the held image changes to green due to the "hourglass held change effect," other patterns (for example, the held image is displayed in green and the held image is changed to green due to the "hourglass held change effect"). The same technical idea can also be used to change the pending image to red due to a change effect. Note that in the case of a pattern that the player is made to recognize in advance, the above-mentioned blinking display may not be performed (because the player is notified in advance).

The falling speed of the sand may be changed in response to a predetermined button operation by the player. For example, the sand falling speed may be made faster or slower in response to a predetermined button operation during execution of the "hourglass holding change effect". As the predetermined button operation, any one of pressing the button once, repeatedly pressing the button, pressing the button for a long time, etc. can be adopted as appropriate.
It is preferable that the operation validity period of the button operation is from the start to the end of the "hourglass hold change effect". Alternatively, it may be performed from the time the sand image is displayed until the end of the "hourglass pending change effect".

Note that various buttons described in this specification can be employed as the button. Further, it is possible to respond to operations on other operation parts such as levers instead of buttons.
Further, in this specification, such an embodiment can be adopted as appropriate when receiving an operation input from a player such as a button (operation unit) or button operation (operation of the operation unit).
Furthermore, during the operation validity period of the operation unit, a simulated image that imitates the operation unit may be displayed in the display area, but may be referred to as a simulated image instead of the name simulated image. In this case as well, the meaning is the same, that is, an image that imitates the operation section.

For example, when the player presses a button once, the falling speed of the sand may be increased so that all the sand falls within three seconds at the shortest. Alternatively, the player may press a button to slow down the falling speed of the sand, such that all the sand falls in nine seconds at the longest.
Furthermore, when the player repeatedly presses the button, the sand may fall at a faster speed so that all the sand falls in three seconds at the shortest. Alternatively, if the player presses the button for a long time, the sand may fall at a slower speed, so that all the sand falls in nine seconds at the longest.
Note that if the player starts or ends the button operation during the "hourglass holding change effect", the sand falling speed becomes longer than 3 seconds or shorter than 9 seconds.

The valid operation period may be started at the same time as the "hourglass hold change effect" or at the same time as the display of the sand image is started, and a simulated image imitating the shape of the button may be displayed during the valid operation period. At the same time, it also displays the operation mode (single press, multiple presses, long press, etc.) and the effects obtained by the operation ("Sand will fall faster", "Sand will fall slower", etc.). Good too. Furthermore, in order to make the player aware of this in advance, the simulated image may be displayed before the operation validity period expires, or in order to provide a sense of surprise, the simulated image may be displayed after the sand image begins to fall. A sample image may be displayed (when it is falling and erosion is occurring).

In this way, by changing the falling speed of the sand and changing the timing at which display results are obtained depending on the operation mode, it is possible to make the performance progress quickly or slowly. For example, if green sand, which has a relatively low level of expectation, is displayed, the performance may proceed quickly, and if golden sand, which has a relatively high level of expectation, is displayed, the effect may proceed slowly. This allows the performance mode to be tailored to the player's preferences.

At the timing when all the sand has fallen in the "hourglass hold change effect" (at this time, the display state shown in Figure 323 (h) is displayed), the button operation is enabled for a predetermined period without erasing the hourglass image ( For example, the valid operation period is set to 2 seconds), or the valid operation period continues as is, and a simulated image resembling the control panel is displayed at the timing when all the sand has fallen or at a timing after the timing when all the sand has fallen. However, the hourglass image may be deleted at the timing when an operation is performed or when the operation validity period ends without any operation being performed, or a new hourglass image may be displayed at the same time as the hourglass image is deleted. . In the former case, the "hourglass pending change performance" ends as is. In the latter case, a new display of falling sand is performed based on the newly displayed hourglass image and sand image. Note that it is preferable that the newly displayed sand image be a sand image of a color with a higher expectation level.
For example, after the timing when the blue pending image is changed to the green pending image, a new hourglass image and a red sand image are displayed according to the operation on the operation panel, and a display of falling red sand is displayed. It is a good idea to ensure that this is done.
By adopting such an aspect, even immediately after all the sand has fallen, it is possible to create a sense of expectation that the pending image will change further.

In addition, when erasing the hourglass image at the timing when an operation is performed or when the operation validity period ends without being performed, multiple display modes for erasing the hourglass image are provided, and the expectation level is adjusted depending on the display mode. may also be suggested.
For example, a display in which the hourglass image is erased as is, a display in which the hourglass image is broken and displayed scattered around the relevant pending image, and then erased, a display in which the hourglass image is broken and displayed scattered throughout the display area, and then erased. You may adopt a display mode such as display. Alternatively, the expectations may increase in this order. Furthermore, a performance unrelated to the "hourglass hold change performance" may also be selected. For example, at 1/3, the hourglass image deletion pattern is selected, and at 2/3, a performance unrelated to the "hourglass pending change effect" (for example, a comment preview that does not affect the pending change effect) is selected. You may also do so.

On the other hand, during the execution of the "hourglass hold change effect", the operation validity period of the button operation may not be set, and a simulated image imitating the shape of the button may not be displayed. According to this aspect, the player can concentrate on watching the performance.

Note that the display of a simulated image imitating the shape of the button is started immediately before all the sand images fall (for example, at timing t8 in FIG. 325(a)), and the operation is enabled after all the sand images have finished falling. You may start a period. Even in this case, the player can concentrate on watching the performance. In addition, an effect display that is displayed immediately before all the sand images fall (for example, at timing t8 in FIG. 325(a), etc.) and before a simulated image imitating the shape of the button is displayed, After all the sand images have finished falling, a simulated image imitating the shape of the button may be displayed.

As a movable member for production having a decorative function, the frame movable body (right ear frame movable body 7100, left ear frame movable body 7200, etc.) shown with reference to FIGS. 118 to 122, etc., FIGS. 133, 134, etc. The movable elements for effect (panel board rear decorative member 2410, panel plate rear board 2420, etc.) shown with reference to are shown. It may be operated in a predetermined manner. For example, during execution of the "Hourglass Holding Change Effect" (at the start of the "Hourglass Holding Change Effect", when the holding image is being eroded by falling sand images, the hourglass image will be displayed after all of the sand images have fallen). The performance decoration member may be moved from the standby position to the movement position at any timing until the display is erased.
Note that an appropriate shape can be adopted as the shape of the decorative member for presentation.
In addition, the operation mode of the decorative member for performance is not limited to a simple movement mode such as moving from a standby position to a moving position, but also an operation mode in which it continues to move back and forth within a predetermined section, an operation mode in which it vibrates, and an operation mode in which it moves along a predetermined axis. It is possible to adopt an operation mode such as rotational movement or rotational movement around .

The degree of expectation may be suggested by the type and operation mode of the decorative member for presentation. For example, a different level of expectation may be set for each decorative member for performance, and the level of expectation may be indicated when the decorative member for performance operates.
Alternatively, the performance decoration member may be allowed to take different operation modes, and when the performance decoration member operates, different expectations may be suggested depending on the operation mode.

While the "Hourglass pending change effect" is being executed (at the start of the "Hourglass pending change effect", if the corresponding pending image is being eroded by falling sand images, the hourglass image display will not be displayed until all of the sand images have finished falling). Only one of the above-mentioned performance decorative members may be operated at any timing until the display is erased. Alternatively, while the "Hourglass pending change effect" is being executed (at the start of the "Hourglass pending change effect", if the corresponding pending image is being eroded by falling sand images, the hourglass image will be displayed after all of the sand images have fallen). A plurality of the above-mentioned presentation decorative members may be operated at any timing until the display is erased. Furthermore, a plurality of performance decorative members may be operated simultaneously or in a predetermined order. In addition, when operating multiple performance decoration members in a predetermined order, for example, when the sand image is eroding the suspended image due to falling sand, the first performance decoration member is operated, and after the erosion has finished, the first performance decoration member is operated. The next decorative member for performance may be operated at the same time, or a plurality of decorative members for performance may be operated when the held image is being eroded by the falling sand image, or a plurality of decorative members for performance may be operated when the sand image is being eroded by the falling sand image. A plurality of performance decorative members may be operated after the completion of the process.
Furthermore, the operation of the performance decoration member may be started before the execution of the "hourglass hold change effect", and the operation may be performed even during the execution of the "hourglass hold change effect". This suggests to the player that the "hourglass hold change performance" is to be started.

If the decorative member for the performance is operated while the "Hourglass holding change effect" is being executed (at least while the sand image is falling and eroding the area of the held image), the "Hourglass holding change effect" is activated. The operation of the performance decoration member may be ended after the execution of " is completed." Conversely, when the "hourglass holding change effect" is being executed (at least while the sand image is falling and eroding the area of the holding image), the decorative member for the effect is in the operating state (normal position). It is preferable to do so. As a result, even if the pending image does not change due to the "hourglass pending change effect", it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest because the effect decoration member is in operation.

In this embodiment, the pending image is displayed in a predetermined area near the center in the horizontal direction at the bottom of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the "hourglass pending change effect" is also performed in an area including this area. A decorative member for presentation may be provided that can be moved to the front side of the predetermined area in which the reserved image is displayed.
However, while the "Hourglass Holding Change Effect" is being executed, it is better to prevent the decorative member for the effect from moving to the front side of the predetermined area where the held image is displayed, but the falling sand image will erode the held image. Although the decorative member for effect is not operated when the erosion is finished and the effect such as the hourglass breaking is performed, the decorative member for effect may be operated.

On the other hand, while the "hourglass pending change effect" is being executed (the sand image is falling and is eroding the area of the pending image), the effect is created in front of the area where the hourglass image and the pending image are displayed. The decorative member may be moved. For example, by moving the performance decorative member in the left and right direction in front of the area where the hourglass image or the pending image is displayed, the hourglass image or the pending image may be hidden or not hidden. good.
Alternatively, the performance decorative member may be moved to the front side of the area where the hourglass image or the suspended image is displayed and stopped temporarily (for example, for about 1 second) or for the entire duration of the performance. Note that in this case, instead of making the hourglass image and the held image completely invisible, a part of the hourglass image and the held image may be made invisible and a part of the held image may be made visible. Furthermore, when viewed from the front, the entirety of the hourglass image or the pending image is not visible, but if the viewpoint is changed to look from the left or right, part of the hourglass image or the pending image or It is best to configure it so that everything is visible.
By adopting such an aspect, it becomes difficult to immediately recognize how much sand has fallen, and by seeing the hourglass image or the relevant pending image, it stimulates the imagination of the parts that are not visible (imagination is difficult). (inflates), which increases interest.

Note that none of the performance decorative members may be operated during the execution of the "hourglass hold change performance". Note that all of the performance decoration members may be positioned at the standby position, or the performance decoration members that are located at the movement position before the start of the performance may not be moved to the standby position.
By adopting such an aspect, it is possible to make the player concentrate on the "hourglass hold change effect".

The rate at which the "hourglass pending change effect" is executed may be, for example, once in ten of all the variable displays.
Alternatively, the rate at which the "hourglass hold change effect" is executed may be set to be a different rate depending on the gaming situation. For example, the rate at which the "hourglass hold change effect" is executed may be set to a different rate depending on the number of holds.

Below, when the number of reservations in the second starting port 2004 is 0 and a variable display corresponding to the winning of game balls in the first starting port 2002 is performed, " An embodiment in which the rate at which the hourglass hold change effect is executed is set to a different rate will be described.
If the number of items held at the first starting port 2002 is 1 to 4, it will be executed once every five times, and if the number of items held at the first starting port 2002 is 0, it will be executed once every eight times. It is recommended to do so (setting balance 1).
Note that the probability of occurrence of a ready-to-reach state is set to occur once in ten times. If the reach state does not occur, the jackpot will not occur and the reach effect will not occur. For example, if the probability of reaching a reach state is extremely low (for example, 1/200), the expectation of hitting the jackpot even if a reach state occurs is extremely low, and if the probability of a reach state occurring is extremely low (for example, 1/200), a reach state will not occur at all. Therefore, the probability of occurrence of a ready-to-reach state is set to 1/10 in this embodiment because a setting balance is required so that a jackpot can be expected when a ready-to-reach state occurs, and at the same time, a ready-to-reach state occurs appropriately.
In the case of setting balance 1 like this, the "hourglass hold change effect" will be performed at a higher rate than the probability of reaching the reach state regardless of the number of holds, so the reach state will not occur and the non-reach loss will occur. ``Hourglass hold change effect'' can be used as a performance to improve interest in situations where ``reach'' is continuous, and wait for the reach condition to occur while suppressing the decline in interest during the period until the reach condition occurs. be able to. In addition, when the number of pending items is 1 to 4, the "hourglass pending change effect" will be performed once in eight times, and if the number of pending items is 0, the "hourglass pending change effect" will be performed once in every five times. The same effect can be obtained.

Alternatively, if the number of items held at the first starting port 2002 is 1 to 4, it will be executed once every five times, and if the number of items held at the first starting port 2002 is 0, it will be executed once every 20 times. It may also be executed in proportion (setting balance 2).
Note that in this case as well, the probability that a reach state will occur is 1/10.
In the case of setting balance 2, if there is a number of holds, as in setting balance 1, the "hourglass hold change" is used as a performance that improves the interest in a situation where no reach state occurs and there are consecutive non-reach losses. It is possible to wait for the occurrence of the ready-to-reach state while suppressing a decline in interest during the period until the ready-to-reach state occurs. On the other hand, if there is no hold, when the current variable display ends, the variable display will be interrupted unless there is a new starting prize. In such a situation, if the "hourglass holding change effect" is used as a performance to improve the interest in a situation where no reach state occurs and there are consecutive non-reach losses, there is a risk that it will adversely affect the player's feelings. Therefore, in such a situation where the fluctuation display is interrupted (a situation where there is no hold), the "Hourglass hold change effect" is used as a performance to improve the interest in a situation where the reach state does not occur and there are continuous non-reach losses. Instead of making it work, it is better to set the probability (lower probability than the probability of occurrence of the reach state) to make people think that it is hot if the "hourglass hold change effect" is displayed.

Alternatively, if the number of items held at the first starting port 2002 is 1 to 4, it will be executed once every 20 times, and if the number of items held at the first starting port 2002 is 0, it will be executed once every 5 times. It may also be executed in proportion (setting balance 3).
Note that in this case as well, the probability that a reach state will occur is 1/10.
In the case of setting balance 3, if the number of holds is 0, "Hourglass holding change effect" is used as a effect that improves the interest in a situation where there are continuous non-reach losses without generating a reach state. If you activate the "Hourglass Hold Change Effect" and the number of holds is 1 to 4, the "Hourglass Hold Change Effect" is unlikely to appear. "Change effect" does not appear often, but when a player tries to quit playing, the "Hourglass hold change effect" becomes more likely to appear, so it is possible to stop a player who is about to quit playing.

In these examples, the execution ratio is different depending on whether the number of pending items at the first starting port 2002 is 1 to 4 or 0; however, the execution rate is not limited to this. If the same effect is obtained when the number is 2 or more and 1 or less, 3 or more and 2 or less, or 4 and 3 or less, the execution rate The above-described embodiment may be modified so that the values are different.

Note that the execution is not limited to the number of reservations in the first starting port 2002, but may be executed at a predetermined rate.
Note that in this case as well, the probability that a reach state will occur is 1/10.
In this way, if the "hourglass hold change effect" is made to appear at a rate of 1 out of 5 times, which is higher than the probability of reaching the reach state regardless of the number of holds, the same as setting balance 1 will be applied. If the effect is expected and the "Hourglass Holding Change Effect" is made to appear at a rate of 1 in 20 times, which is lower than the probability of occurrence of the reach state regardless of the status of the number of holds, then the ``Hourglass Holding Change Effect'' It can provide a feeling of exhilaration because it becomes hot just by being displayed.

A performance suggesting that the "hourglass hold change performance" is to be performed may be performed. For example, an hourglass image is displayed at the top center in the horizontal direction of the display area (this hourglass image is the suggested image), and after the hourglass image is displayed at the top center in the horizontal direction, it is slowly scrolled down and the corresponding hold is displayed. The display may be stopped and displayed at a position overlapping with the image, and the execution of the "hourglass hold change effect" may be started. In addition, the time required for scrolling (the time from when the hourglass image (suggestion image) starts moving until it stops at a position overlapping with the relevant held image) is the execution time of the "hourglass held change effect" (Fig. 322 (e) In production pattern 05, the duration may be the same as 7 seconds), it may be longer (for example, 20 seconds), or it may be shorter (for example, 2 seconds). Also, the time from when the hourglass image (suggestive image) starts moving until it first reaches the position where the area where the suspended image is displayed is a part of the time required for scrolling (this time is A B It is preferable to make it longer than This is because the player can know in advance that the "hourglass hold change performance" will be performed. Even if time B is longer than time A, if a performance display that allows the player to know in advance that the "hourglass hold change effect" will be performed, the time of A There is no problem even if the time of B is made longer than the above.
Note that, in addition to scrolling the hourglass image, it may be suggested that the "hourglass pending change effect" is executed by displaying a dialogue image (such as "Pending change?").
By adopting such an aspect, it is possible to mentally prepare in advance for the execution of the "hourglass hold change effect". Note that this suggested effect may be made executable not only for the relevant hold but also for the first hold to the fourth hold.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 322 and 323, the color of the held image and the sand color of the hourglass image are different colors, but below, the sand image of the same color as the held image ( An embodiment of the "hourglass hold change effect" modified so that a color (for example, both green) is displayed will be described with reference to FIGS. 329 to 331.

Effect pattern 01 to effect pattern 05 in FIG. 329 are effect patterns corresponding to effect pattern 01 to effect pattern 05 in FIG. 322, respectively, but in effect pattern 01 to effect pattern 05 in FIG. The color and the sand color in the hourglass image are the same color.
Further, the display examples shown in FIGS. 330(a) to 330(h) are also display examples corresponding to the display examples shown in FIGS. 323(a) to 323(h), respectively.
As shown in each figure, the display formats differ in terms of whether the color of the retained image and the sand image are different or the same, but other aspects (display timing and display format of various images, etc.) are both different. Since there is basically no difference between the embodiments, a detailed description will be omitted.

The presentation mode after all the sand has fallen will be described below with reference to presentation pattern 05 in FIG. 329, FIG. 330, and FIG. 331.
As shown in effect pattern 05 in FIG. 329, the falling of the green sand is completed at timing t9. FIG. 330(h) shows an example of the display at this time.
Next, a martial artist character holding a hammer appears from the left side of the display area and appears to hit the hourglass image. Next, by being hit by the hammer, the hourglass image rotates 180 degrees, and the suspended image and the sand image are positioned above the hourglass. These displays are performed from timing t9 to timing t10. Note that the martial artist character remains displayed on the left side of the display area thereafter. FIGS. 331(a) and 331(b) show the display state at this time.
Next, from timing t10 to timing t16, the sand falls downward. In this case as well, a display of sand falling from the upper side of the hourglass to the lower side is performed for a total of 6 seconds. Specifically, at timing t12, 1/3 of the sand has fallen (FIG. 331(c)), at timing t14, 2/3 of the sand has fallen (FIG. 331(d)), and at timing t16, All the sand has fallen (FIG. 331(e)).
Here, the suspended image that becomes newly visible due to the falling sand is not the green suspended image that was displayed at the start of the performance, but is a more anticipated, red-colored suspended image, for example.

Next, the martial artist character moves to the right, approaches the hourglass, and is shown destroying the hourglass. Thereafter, the display of the destroyed hourglass image ends, and the red pending image moves downward. Further, the martial artist character moves to the left and moves out of the screen from the edge of the display area. These displays are performed from timing t16 to timing t17. FIG. 331(f) and FIG. 331(g) show the display state at this time.
At timing t17, the movement of the pending image is completed. FIG. 331(h) shows the display state at this time.

Thus, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 329 to 331, the reserved image of a predetermined color (for example, green) is hidden by the sand image of a predetermined color that is the same color as the predetermined color of the reserved image. If the held image is hidden, a display is performed in which the held image of a color with a higher degree of expectation (for example, red) gradually appears from among the sand images of a predetermined color.
Note that the color before and after the change of the pending image can be appropriately selected from among the above-mentioned colors. For example, a pattern in which a blue pending image changes to a red pending image, a pattern in which a red pending image changes to a rainbow colored pending image, etc. may be executed.

Note that the reason why the sand gradually becomes visible as it falls is explained in the relevant retained images (Figures 331(c) to 331(f)), but this is a different image from the relevant retained images, and it is not possible to Images suggesting expectations may be gradually made visible. Examples of images different from the pending image are as shown below. Note that when an image different from the held image is to be displayed, it is displayed in place of the red held image displayed above the hourglass in FIGS. 331(c) to 331(f).
For example, when a character image "Hold Change!" is displayed in place of the hold image, it suggests that the hold image will always be promoted at a predetermined timing until the end of the variable display.
For example, if a character image that says "Holding change?" is displayed instead of the relevant suspended image, this suggests that the relevant suspended image may be promoted at a predetermined timing until the end of the variable display. .
For example, if a character image "Pseudo-link!" is displayed instead of the suspended image, it suggests that the pseudo-link effect will always be performed at a predetermined timing until the end of the variable display.
For example, when a character image "Pseudo-link?" is displayed instead of the suspended image, it suggests that a pseudo-link effect may be performed at a predetermined timing until the end of the variable display.
For example, if a character image such as "Very hot!" is displayed in place of the pending image, it suggests that expectations for the fluctuation to be a hit are extremely high.
For example, if a text image saying "Chance!" is displayed instead of the pending image, it suggests that there is a high expectation that the fluctuation will be a hit.
For example, when a character image "XX Reach!" is displayed instead of the relevant pending image, it is suggested that XXX Reach will be performed in the relevant change.
For example, if a character image saying "Congratulations!" is displayed instead of the pending image, it suggests that a jackpot will occur in the fluctuation.
Note that it is not necessary to limit the image to the one above; for example, if the display can convey the suggested content to the player, such as changing "Pseudo-Ren!" to "Ren!", the display may be changed as appropriate. It's fine.
In addition, when displaying the above-mentioned image in place of the held image, the image to be displayed in place of the held image is displayed at the position where the held image in red in FIG. 331(f) is displayed, and When the sand image on the lower side of the hourglass in 331(f) and the hourglass are erased, the suspended image may be displayed in the display mode of the suspended image before the effect is performed.
It goes without saying that the "hourglass performance" may include both the "hourglass hold change performance" and the "hourglass performance other than the hourglass hold change performance".

In addition, we set multiple speeds at which the sand falls (the time it takes for all the sand to fall), and the slower the sand falls (the longer the time it takes for all the sand to fall), the higher the expectation level is. A pending image may be displayed. Alternatively, a more highly anticipated display effect may be performed.

Certain embodiments and variations shown with reference to FIGS. 322-328 may be applied to the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 329-331.

It may be configured to be able to implement both the "hourglass hold change effect" shown with reference to FIGS. 322 to 328 and the "hourglass hold change effect" shown with reference to FIGS. 329 to 331. In this case, in the states shown in FIGS. 323 and 330, in a situation where the relevant held image of a predetermined color is displayed, a sand image of a color different from that held image is displayed falling, or a sand image of the same color is displayed. A display will be made in which the object falls. In the case of sand images of different colors, the player can enjoy the performance while anticipating which color the held image will change to.In the case of sand images of the same color, the player can wait until all the sand falls first. The player can be entertained in two stages: first, the player will be entertained as to whether or not the sand image will appear, and then, the player will be entertained in two stages: first, in which color of the reserved image will appear from among the sand images.

Even if the “hourglass hold change effect” shown with reference to FIGS. 329 to 331 may be executed after the “hourglass hold change effect” shown with reference to FIGS. 322 to 328 is executed, good.
Alternatively, after executing the "hourglass hold change effect" shown with reference to FIGS. 329 to 331, the "hourglass hold change effect" shown with reference to FIGS. 322 to 328 may be executed. It's okay.

According to such an "hourglass hold change performance", it is possible to provide a new entertainment to the player.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 321 and the like will be described below with reference to FIGS. 332 to 334 and the like. In this embodiment, a "double roulette effect" is configured to be executable as a special effect. The "double roulette performance" consists of two performances: the "expectation level roulette performance" and the "retention change roulette performance".

Below, detailed effects of the "double roulette effect" will be explained with reference to FIGS. 332 to 334 and the like. FIG. 332 shows a time chart in the "double roulette performance". Further, FIGS. 333 and 334 show display examples in the "double roulette effect".
Note that FIG. 332(a) shows the first half of one fluctuating display, and FIG. 332(b) shows the second half of one fluctuating display. Specifically, FIG. 332(a) shows the presentation mode from timing t0 when the variable display starts to timing t40 when the special reach effect starts, and FIG. 332(b) shows the effect when the special reach effect starts. The presentation mode is shown from timing t40 when the display starts to timing t80 when the stop display of the decorative pattern ends.
Note that, although a predetermined background image can be displayed in the display area as shown in other embodiments, illustration is omitted in this embodiment.

At timing t0, variable display of decorative patterns is started. Simultaneously with the start of the variable display, a fan-shaped expectation roulette image is displayed at the lower left of the display area, and a fan-shaped pending change roulette image is displayed at the lower right of the display area. The kanji ``period'' is displayed in the expectation roulette image. Furthermore, the kanji character "hold" is displayed in the hold change roulette image. In addition, in the variable display in which the expectation roulette image and the pending change roulette image are displayed, the pending display area to the fourth pending display area are slightly different from those in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 123 to 125, etc. changed to the left. Further, a normal (white) pending image is displayed as the pending image.
FIG. 333(a) shows a display state in which left decorative symbols to right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed before the variable display starts. Further, FIG. 333(b) shows a display state in which the expectation roulette image is displayed at the lower left of the display area and the pending change roulette image is displayed at the lower right of the display area immediately after the variable display starts. ing. Note that the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped and displayed.
At timing t1, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern start changing at high speed. FIG. 333(c) shows the display state when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern change at high speed.

At timing t5, a convex rotation suggestion image is displayed outside the expectation roulette image. The rotation suggestion image is displayed until the rotation of the expectation roulette image ends. FIG. 333(d) shows a display state in which the rotation suggestion image is displayed.
Next, at timing t6, the expectation roulette image starts rotating clockwise. FIG. 333(e) shows a display state in which the expectation roulette image is rotating clockwise. Note that the arrow in the figure indicates the rotation direction, and does not indicate that the arrow is actually displayed as an image (the same applies to FIG. 334(c) described later).

The expectation level roulette image rotates at high speed for two seconds from timing t6 to timing t8, and then is stopped and displayed at timing t8, where the number "30" is displayed as the expectation level image. FIG. 333(f) shows a display state in which the expectation level roulette image is stopped and displayed, and the number "30" is displayed as the expectation level image.
There are five types of expectation images that are stopped and displayed: "10,""30,""50,""70," and "99." After the expectation roulette image stops, one of the expectation images is displayed. is displayed. The number displayed as an expectation image indicates the expected degree of winning for the fluctuation that is being displayed. For example, if the number is "30", the expected degree is approximately 30%. This suggests that
In this way, the expectation level roulette image rotates and one of the multiple expectation level images is displayed in a stopped state, making it possible for the player to recognize the level of expectation level. It is possible.

Next, a special reach effect occurs at timing t40. In the special reach effect in this embodiment, a martial artist character and a bomb character are displayed in the display area, a dynamic display of a battle between the martial artist character and the bomb character is performed, and if the martial artist character wins, a decorative pattern is displayed. is stopped and displayed in a manner to indicate a jackpot, and if the bomb character wins, it is stopped and displayed in a manner to indicate a loss.
Note that at the start of the special reach effect, a reach title image such as "Martial Artist VS Bomb" may be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, for two seconds from timing t40 to timing t42). Further, it is preferable that the "holding change roulette effect" is started at a predetermined timing after the display of the reach title image is finished. Alternatively, as shown with reference to FIGS. 224 to 272, a special image may be displayed (eg, a display that hides the background) at the start of a special reach effect. Further, the "expectation level roulette performance" can be performed before these images are displayed, and the "pending change roulette performance" can be performed after these images are displayed. In this way, by switching the types of performances that can be executed at the start of the special reach performance, the execution timing of both performances will be different, and the player's consciousness will be focused on the performance that is being executed. be able to.
FIG. 334(a) shows a display state when a special reach effect occurs. In addition, during the special ready-to-reach effect, a decorative pattern with a predetermined number (in this case, the number "5") is displayed in a temporarily stopped ready-to-reach state, as shown in the figure.

Next, at timing t50, a convex rotation suggestion image is displayed outside the pending change roulette image. The rotation suggestion image is displayed until the rotation of the pending change roulette image ends. FIG. 334(b) shows a display state in which the rotation suggestion image is displayed.
Next, at timing t51, the pending change roulette image starts rotating counterclockwise. FIG. 334(c) shows a display state in which the pending change roulette image is rotating counterclockwise.

The pending change roulette image rotates at high speed for 2 seconds from timing t51 to timing t53, and then is stopped and displayed at timing t52, where the text "red" is displayed. FIG. 334(d) shows a display state in which the pending change roulette image is stopped and displayed and the word "red" is displayed.
While the pending change roulette image is rotating, five types of characters, ``blue'', ``green'', ``red'', ``gold'', and ``rainbow'', are cyclically displayed in this order. In addition, after the rotation of the pending change roulette image starts and the character ``hold'' moves from the bottom of the display area to the outside of the screen, the character ``hold'' is not displayed, and the characters ``blue'', ``green'', and ``hold'' are displayed. The characters "Red", "Gold", and "Rainbow" are displayed in a rotating manner.
After the pending change roulette image rotates, one of the five types of characters as the expectation image, ``blue,''``green,''``red,''``gold,'' and ``rainbow,'' stops and is displayed. Ru. The displayed characters indicate the change mode of the held image, and when "blue" is displayed, the held image changes to a blue held image, and when "red" is displayed, the held image changes to a blue held image. , the pending image changes to a red pending image.
At timing t54 one second after the pending change roulette image stops, the pending image changes to a red pending image. FIG. 334(e) shows the display state at this time.
In this way, by rotating the pending change roulette image and displaying predetermined characters in a stopped state, the player can recognize which color the pending image will change to.

FIG. 334(f) shows a state in which the martial artist character has won against the bomb character at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t70, etc.) during a special reach effect. When this display is performed, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot. Incidentally, when a display is made in which the martial artist character loses to the bomb character, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss.
Thereafter, the special ready-to-reach effect ends at timing t76, and at timing t78, the left decorative symbol to right decorative symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed. FIG. 334(g) shows the display state at this time.
Next, at timing t77, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed. The display of the pending image, the expectation roulette image, and the pending change roulette image ends at this timing. FIG. 334(h) shows the display state at this time.

In this way, the "expectation level roulette performance" is a performance that can be executed before execution of the special reach performance is started. On the other hand, the "suspended change roulette performance" is a performance that can be executed while a special reach performance is being executed. In addition, special reach performances include "Giant tank reach" (Figures 224 to 236, etc.), "Enemy tank destruction reach" (Figures 252 to 255, etc.), "Year-end song contest reach performance" (Figure 277, etc.), "The Countdown Reach Effect" (see FIG. 277, etc.) or the like can be adopted.
As described above, in this embodiment, before the start of the special ready-to-win performance, a performance using the expectation roulette image is performed, and during the special ready-to-win performance, a performance using the pending change roulette image is performed. In this way, the effects using the roulette images are executed at different timings and are not executed simultaneously, allowing the player to concentrate on the effects.

An example has been shown in which the expectation roulette image and the pending change roulette image are displayed from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display (until the decorative pattern stops displaying timing), but the expectation roulette image is displayed at other timings. The display of the pending change roulette image may be started or ended.
For example, the timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuating display (for example, the timing when all the decorative patterns are fluctuating at a high speed, the timing when some decorative patterns are fluctuating at a high speed and a decorative pattern different from some You may start displaying the expectation roulette image and the pending change roulette image at a time when there is no high-speed fluctuation (for example, at a timing such as low-speed fluctuation or shaking fluctuation), or after suggesting that a pseudo-relationship will occur. When a pseudo-variation effect is being performed (for example, when a display indicating the number of pseudo-variations such as x2 or x3 is being performed, or when pseudo-variations are being performed on the LCD screen) The display of the expectation level roulette image and the pending change roulette image may be started when an effect or the like suggesting a change is being displayed.
In addition, even if it is decided to perform the double roulette effect, the expectation level roulette effect is performed before the special reach effect is performed, and the pending change roulette effect is performed when the special reach effect is performed. Since the expectation level roulette performance and the pending change roulette performance are not performed at the same time, when the performance related to the expectation level roulette performance is being performed, the performance related to the pending change roulette performance is hidden, and the performance related to the pending change roulette performance is hidden. When the performance related to the change roulette performance is being performed, the performance related to the expectation level roulette performance may be hidden. This is because the user can concentrate on the displayed roulette performance.

In this way, even if the performance related to the pending change roulette performance is hidden when the performance related to the expectation roulette performance is being performed, the start timing of the expectation roulette performance will be different from that of the variable display. Not only at the start, but also at the timing when all decorative patterns are fluctuating at high speed, or when some decorative patterns are fluctuating at high speed and other decorative patterns are not fluctuating at high speed (for example, at low speed fluctuations). When a pseudo-fluctuation effect is being performed after suggesting that a pseudo-sequence will be performed (for example, the display indicating the number of times pseudo-sequences such as x2 and x3 have been performed) It may also be configured to start when a pseudo link is being performed, or when an effect or the like suggesting that a pseudo link is being performed is displayed on the liquid crystal screen.

Also, regarding the timing at which the pending change roulette effect is started, it is a performance that can be executed at a predetermined timing while a special reach effect is being executed; It may be immediately after the winning/losing effect, or the branching timing of the winning/losing effect (the effect that ultimately suggests whether the result of the fluctuating display is a jackpot or a loss due to characters fighting, etc.) in a special reach effect (the result of the winning/losing effect is The timing may be immediately before the timing shown), or it may be when a display prompting the operation of the operating means that can be displayed when a special ready-to-win effect is being performed.
In addition, whether or not to execute the double roulette effect is determined based on the result of the win/loss judgment performed at the start of the fluctuation, but it is determined whether or not to execute the "double roulette effect" based on the pre-reading process. You may. In this case, if it is decided to perform a "double roulette effect" by making a preliminary determination of winning or losing at the time of the starting winning, the pending image corresponding to the starting winning will be displayed normally until the "holding changing roulette effect" starts. The suspended image (the suspended image at the time of performance execution) may continue to be displayed.
Further, instead of or in addition to whether or not to perform a double roulette performance, it may be determined whether or not to perform a single roulette performance. This single roulette performance is a performance that performs only one of the "expectation level roulette performance" or the "suspended change roulette performance." For example, if it is decided to perform a single roulette performance, the "expectation level roulette performance" is performed. If it is decided to perform, the "expectation level roulette performance" is performed, but the "holding change roulette performance" is not performed while the special reach performance is being executed. Conversely, if it is decided to perform only the "suspension change roulette performance", the "expectation level roulette performance" will not be performed. Here, the "suspended change roulette performance" is a performance that is performed while a special reach performance is being executed, so if it has not been decided to execute a special reach performance as a variable performance, the "expectation level roulette performance" If it is decided that a special reach effect will be performed as a variable effect, either the double roulette effect, only the "expectation level roulette effect", or only the "suspended change roulette effect" It would be good to be able to select as well.
In addition, if it is decided to perform a double roulette effect or a single roulette effect and the "expectation level roulette effect" is performed, if the number displayed as the expectation level image is displayed, it will be displayed until the fluctuation is finished or "on hold" will be displayed. It has been explained that the effects related to the "changing roulette effect" may be hidden when the effects start, but for example, the numbers displayed as the expectation level image may be hidden after a predetermined period of time (e.g., about 3 seconds) has elapsed. It may be hidden, or it may be possible to indicate that a predetermined operation means has been operated (unlike the expectation level roulette effect, a preview effect that prompts you to operate the operation means is displayed, and the operation of the operation means for the preview effect is accepted). It may also be hidden based on what has been done. Further, the "holding change roulette effect" may be hidden at the timing when the holding image changes to the red holding image or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the timing. This is because it is possible to clearly determine which pending color the pending image is.
In addition, the variable display in which it was decided to perform a double roulette effect or a single roulette effect was the result of a loss, and it was determined or had been decided to perform a double roulette effect or a single roulette effect in the next variable display. In this case, the expectation roulette image and pending change roulette image are returned to their initial state (the state in which “period” and “hold” are displayed), and the “double roulette effect” is executed again in the next variable display. You can. In addition, even during the period (fixed stop period) when the result of a loss is fixed and the next fluctuation display starts (fixed stop period), the initial state of the expectation roulette image and the pending change roulette image ("period" and "hold" are displayed) It is even better to display an image of the

The colors of the expectation roulette image, the pending change roulette image, and the rotation suggestion image may be expressed by colors that are not used as the pending image or the color of the pending image (for example, gray or brown). This prevents the player from misunderstanding that the expectation level is indicated by the colors of the expectation level roulette image and the pending change roulette image, and can arouse interest in the display mode after rotation.

Although an example has been shown in which the degree of expectation is suggested by the numbers and characters displayed in the degree of expectation roulette image and the pending change roulette image, in addition to these displays, the degree of expectation may be suggested using color.
For example, the numbers "10", "30", "50", "70", and "99" are displayed as the rotation results of the expectation level roulette image. The color of the degree roulette image may be set to a color corresponding to the number. For example, if the stopped number is "10", it is blue, "30" is green, "50" is red, "70" is gold, and "99" is blue. It is a good idea to display an expectation roulette image in rainbow colors. Note that the color of the numbers themselves may be a corresponding color, or the color of the numbers may be a common color such as black, regardless of the number, and the background color other than the numbers may be a corresponding color, or both It is also possible to use a corresponding color.
Similarly, the characters "blue", "green", "red", "gold", and "rainbow" are displayed as the rotation result of the pending change roulette image, but at the timing when these characters are stopped and displayed, The color of the pending change roulette image may be changed to a color corresponding to the characters. For example, if the stopped displayed character is "blue", it will be blue, "green" will be green, "red" will be red, "gold" will be gold, and "rainbow" will be displayed. It is good to display a pending change roulette image in rainbow colors. Note that the text color itself may be a corresponding color, or the text color may be a common color, such as black, regardless of the text, and the background color other than the text may be a corresponding color, or both It is also possible to use a corresponding color.

In addition, instead of changing the color of the expectation roulette image to the color corresponding to the number when the rotation of the expectation roulette image stops, the color of the expectation roulette image is displayed in the color corresponding to the number from the time the rotation starts. It may be modified to do so. When the expectation roulette image is rotated, numbers will be displayed in the order of "10", "30", "50", "70", "99", "10", "30", etc. When transformed in this way, the expectation roulette image is visually recognized by the player in the order of blue, green, red, gold, rainbow color, blue, green, and so on.

Note that when the expectation level roulette image is stopped and displayed, a display may be made to emphasize to the player which number (or color) has stopped. For example, the displayed numbers may be repeatedly reduced and enlarged during the period when they are stopped, or the numbers may be displayed gradually larger than the rotating numbers over a period of 1 second from the time the display stops. good.
Alternatively, if the expectation roulette image is displayed in a color that corresponds to the number, by increasing or decreasing the brightness of that color, the player can see it brighter or darker. You can do it like this.

We have shown an example where the expectation roulette image and pending change roulette image rotate at high speed for 2 seconds and then stop displaying. However, the time required for high speed rotation is 1 second, and during the remaining 1 second, the rotation speed is changed to high speed rotation. After making the spinning numbers and letters visible by slowing down or gradually slowing it down, the expectation level is displayed as a result corresponding to the expectation roulette image or pending change roulette image. The image may be displayed in a stopped state.
Note that while the expectation roulette image and the pending change roulette image are rotating at high speed, numbers and letters may be made invisible, or may be made difficult to see even at high speed.
In addition, when the expectation roulette image or pending change roulette image is rotated at low speed, there are two visible states where two (or more) adjacent numbers or letters are displayed at the same time, and a state where only one letter or number is visible and visible. Possible states occur alternately, and finally only one state is displayed and the display is stopped. Alternatively, three (multiple) adjacent numbers or letters may be displayed so as to be visible at the same time.

The numbers displayed on the expectation roulette image may be displayed in the order of "10", "30", "50", "70", "99", or "99", "70". , "50", "30", and "10", or may be displayed in a random order.
The characters displayed on the pending change roulette image may also be displayed in the order of "blue", "green", "red", "gold", and "rainbow", or "rainbow", "gold", etc. ", "red,""green," and "blue" may be displayed in this order, or may be displayed in a random order.

In the performance examples shown with reference to FIGS. 332 to 334, the "expectation level roulette performance" is performed only once, but it may be performed multiple times (two or more times). An embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 332(a) will be shown below with reference to FIG. 335, and all the displayed pending images are normal (white) pending images. Therefore, the display mode of the pending image is omitted in the time chart.
When performing the "expectation level roulette performance" multiple times, it is preferable to display a number indicating that the level of expectation is higher than the number displayed last time. Performance pattern 01 shown in FIG. 335(a) is a performance pattern in which the second "expectation level roulette performance" is executed from timing t14 to timing t16, and "50" is displayed.
Alternatively, in addition to the number indicating that the level of expectation is higher than the number displayed last time, the same number as before the execution of the effect may be displayed.

When performing the "expectation level roulette performance" multiple times, numbers with a relatively lower expectation level compared to the number displayed immediately before may be displayed during the next performance. In the performance pattern 02 shown in FIG. 335(b), the first "expectation level roulette performance" is executed from timing t6 to timing t8 and "50" is displayed, and the second "expectation level roulette performance" is executed from timing t14 to timing t16. This is a performance pattern in which "roulette performance" is executed and "30" is displayed.

In addition, the "Expectation level roulette effect" can be performed more than 3 times, and after a number with a relatively low expectation level is displayed for the second time compared to the first number displayed, Numbers with high expectations may be displayed.
In the performance pattern 03 shown in FIG. 335(c), the first "expectation level roulette performance" is executed from timing t6 to timing t8 and "50" is displayed, and the second "expectation level roulette performance" is executed from timing t14 to timing t16. This is a performance pattern in which a ``roulette effect'' is executed and ``30'' is displayed, and a third ``expectation level roulette effect'' is executed from timing t22 to timing t24 and ``70'' is displayed.
In this way, compared to the numbers displayed the first time, such as "50" → "30" → "70", numbers with relatively low expectations are displayed the second time, and then the numbers displayed the first and second times are A number with a relatively higher expectation level than the other numbers may be displayed for the third time.

In addition, a number ("30") with lower expectations than the number "50" displayed the first time may be displayed the third time, such as "50" → "10" → "30". Alternatively, a number ("50") having the same expectation level as the initially displayed number may be displayed, such as "50" → "10" → "50".

Even if "99" is displayed, which is the number with the highest level of expectation, the number with the highest level of expectation may change depending on the next production, or the number with the highest level of expectation may change to a number with the highest level of expectation, and then the number with the highest level of expectation may be displayed again. The number "99" with the highest degree may be displayed. For example, numbers may be displayed such as "99" → "10" → "99".

In addition, after the display of numbers with high expectations changes to numbers with low expectations, the display may return to the display of numbers with high expectations after displaying numbers with relatively low expectations multiple times. You can. For example, "99" → "10" → "30" → "99", "99" → "50" → "30" → "99", or "99" → "10" → "50" → "99" , ``99'' → ``50'' → ``99'' → ``30'' → ``99'' may be displayed.
By adopting such an aspect, the player's emotions can be varied and the player's interest can be increased.

In addition, if the number with the highest expectation level "99" is displayed, "99" will be displayed again in the next production, or even if the number with the lowest expectation level is displayed, the next production will be different. In subsequent performances, "99" may be finally displayed. In other words, if "99", the number with the highest expectation, appears even once, even if the number with the lowest expectation is displayed, "99" will eventually be displayed. good. For example, "99" → "99" or "99" → "99" → "99" or "99" → "50" → "99", "99" → "50" → "99" → "70" → A number such as "99" may be displayed.
By adopting this mode, the player is nervous that the number with the lowest level of expectation will be displayed, but in the end, the number with the highest level of expectation is displayed. It is possible to maintain the player's confidence in the performance.

As shown with reference to FIGS. 332 to 335, the number that stops and is displayed at a predetermined timing is any one of multiple numbers (during the rotation of the roulette, multiple types of numbers are displayed). (may be displayed). Therefore, even if numbers with high expectations are displayed, the execution of the effect may change the state to display numbers with low expectations instead of numbers with high expectations. can create a sense of tension.

When performing the "expectation level roulette performance" multiple times, after the end of the performance and a predetermined number of seconds predetermined as the interval time (i.e., the time when the rotation results are displayed), the next "expectation level roulette performance" will be performed. ” (for example, in the case of effect pattern 01 shown in FIG. 335(a), for 5 seconds from timing t8 to timing t13).
It is desirable that the interval time be a length (for example, one second or longer) that allows the player to reliably view the displayed numbers. This allows time to increase expectations for the occurrence of a jackpot.
In addition, when performing the "expectation level roulette performance" multiple times, it is preferable that the time (for example, 5 seconds) from the end of the performance to the start of the next performance be the same. For example, in the case of production pattern 03 shown in FIG. 335(c), execution of the next production is started after waiting for 5 seconds from timing t8 to timing t13 and for 5 seconds from timing t16 to timing t21.
Alternatively, the interval times may not be the same, but may be gradually shortened or lengthened, or each interval time may be determined at random. For example, in production pattern 04 shown in FIG. 335(d), the interval time is gradually shortened to 5 seconds, 4 seconds, and 3 seconds.

In this way, after the "expectation level roulette effect" is performed multiple times, the special reach effect is started, and the player can see how the result of the special reach effect will be depending on the result of the "expectation level roulette effect". It is possible to realize a gaming experience in which the player has high expectations or does not have high expectations as to what the outcome will be.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 332 to 334, an example was shown in which the "holding change roulette performance" is performed only once. In this way, by making the "suspended change roulette effect" occur only once, the player's awareness of the battle between characters (for example, a martial artist character and a bomb character) that is executed during a special reach effect is reduced. can be concentrated.

On the other hand, the "holding change roulette performance" may be executed multiple times. Below, a performance pattern obtained by modifying the performance pattern shown in FIG. 332(b) will be described with reference to FIG. 336.
Performance pattern 01 shown in FIG. 336(a) shows an example of performance in which the "holding change roulette performance" is performed twice. Furthermore, performance pattern 02 shown in FIG. 336(b) shows an example of performance in which the "holding change roulette performance" is performed three times.
In the case of production pattern 01, the held image changes from a normal (white) held image to a blue held image, and then changes from the blue held image to the red held image.
In addition, in the case of production pattern 01, the held image changes from the normal (white) held image to the blue held image, then changes from the blue held image to the red held image, and then the red held image. The pending image changes to a gold colored pending image.
In this way, by making it possible to execute the ``pending change roulette effect'' multiple times, even if a relatively low expected result is displayed, the ``pending change roulette effect'' will not be executed again. This can give the player a sense of expectation that a more highly anticipated result will be displayed.

When "Rainbow", which is the character with the highest degree of expectation, is displayed as a result of the execution of the "pending variation roulette effect", it is preferable to prevent the "pending variation roulette effect" from being executed from then on. For example, if a "rainbow" is displayed as a result of the first execution of the "pending variation roulette effect", the second and subsequent "pending variation roulette effects" will not be performed.
By adopting such a mode, the player's consciousness can be focused on the content of the special reach effect itself (a battle between characters).

As a result of executing the "Pending change roulette effect", if "Rainbow", which is the character with the highest expectation level, is displayed and the pending image changes to a rainbow color, after the pending image changes to a rainbow color, A special benefit display may be displayed. For example, special benefits may be displayed by changing the image displayed in a special reach effect (for example, changing the hammer held by a martial artist to a rainbow hammer), or displaying a special Display in addition to the image displayed in the reach effect (for example, by displaying the rainbow hammer in a manner that overlaps with the front side of the pending change roulette image, the martial artist character's attack with the hammer is powerful (easier to hit) Displays that are not displayed under special reach effects (e.g., displays that are completely unrelated to special reach effects, such as displaying bromide photos of celebrities, etc.) (display that may be displayed) The character with the highest level of expectation, "Rainbow", is displayed, so the expectations of the players are at their peak. This is a completely unrelated display (for example, displaying a celebrity's bromide photo, etc., which may be displayed other than special reach effects), thereby breaking through the limits of expectations that are at their peak. It is possible to provide the player with an excited state.
In addition, the special benefit display will not be displayed every time "Rainbow", which is the character with the highest expectation, is displayed, but will be displayed every time "Rainbow", the character with the highest expectation, is displayed. It may be displayed at a rate of (for example, once every 20 times). Further, the special privilege display may be displayed even when a character other than "Rainbow", which is the character with the highest expectation level, is displayed. However, in that case, it is preferable that the lower the expectation level of a character, the lower the rate at which special benefit displays are displayed. In other words, in the case of characters with low expectations, special benefit displays are less likely to be displayed. By doing this, a premium feeling is created in the special benefit display, and if a character other than "Rainbow", which is the most anticipated character, is displayed and the lottery result is a loss, the special benefit display will be displayed. If you do this, you can somewhat reduce the feeling of disappointment of losing. Furthermore, if a character other than "Rainbow", which is the character with the highest expectation level, is displayed and a special benefit display is displayed, the win may be confirmed. By doing so, the special benefit display can indicate the result of the special lottery.
Please note that displays that are not displayed under special reach effects (displays that are completely unrelated to special reach effects, such as displaying bromide photos of celebrities, etc.) may be displayed in situations other than special reach effects. If a certain display) is displayed after the most anticipated character "Rainbow" is displayed and the pending image changes to a rainbow color, the display that will not be displayed due to this special reach effect is: It may be displayed so as to overlap the position where the pending change roulette image was displayed, or it may be displayed so as to overlap with all the areas where the pending change roulette image was displayed.
In addition, displays that are not displayed in special reach effects (displays that are completely unrelated to special reach effects, such as displaying bromide photos of celebrities, etc.) may be displayed in situations other than special reach effects. A certain display) may be displayed even if the pending change roulette effect is not performed, or may be displayed after the display of the special reach effect is finished.
In addition, displays that are not displayed in special reach effects (displays that are completely unrelated to special reach effects, such as displaying bromide photos of celebrities, etc.) may be displayed in situations other than special reach effects. When a certain display) is being performed, a mock image of a production button, etc. is displayed, an instruction is displayed to prompt a predetermined operation, and even if the operation is performed according to the instruction display or no operation is performed, e.g. , the display of bromide photos may be switched (changed), or the player may be able to select the type of bromide photo (for example, male idol, female idol, etc.).

Referring to FIG. 332, an embodiment is shown in which the "expectation level roulette performance" and the "suspension change roulette performance" are executed once each in the "double roulette performance". Further, with reference to FIG. 335, an embodiment is shown in which the "expectation level roulette performance" is executed multiple times in the "double roulette performance". Further, with reference to FIG. 336, an embodiment is shown in which the "holding change roulette effect" is executed multiple times in the "double roulette effect". In addition, it was shown that in the "double roulette performance", the "expectation level roulette performance" and the "suspended change roulette performance" may not be executed.
These embodiments may be combined. For example, in the "double roulette performance", the number of executions of the "expectation level roulette performance" is 0 times, 1 time, multiple times (more than 2 times), and the number of executions of the "suspended change roulette performance" is 0 times, 1 time. Even if the "expectation level roulette effect" and the "suspension change roulette effect" are executed a predetermined number of times (or not executed at all) in an appropriate combination. good.
For example, it may be possible to execute a performance pattern in which the "expectation level roulette performance" is executed twice and the "pending change roulette performance" is not executed, or the "expectation level roulette performance" is executed once and the "pending change roulette performance" is not executed. '' may be executed three times, but the most effective combination of the number of executions of the "expectation level roulette effect" and the "suspension change roulette effect" is the combination of multiple executions of the "expectation level roulette effect". Although this pattern can be executed twice (twice or more), the "suspended variation roulette effect" can only be executed once. Since the "expectation level roulette performance" is a performance that is performed before the special reach performance occurs, the expectations of the players are not that high, and the level of expectation is low in the "expectation level roulette performance". If a numerical image is displayed and the numbers do not change after that, the expectation for the fluctuating display that has been performed with the "expectation level roulette effect" will continue until the end of the fluctuating display (the symbol is fixed). Therefore, it is desirable to be able to perform the "expectation level roulette performance" multiple times (two or more times). On the other hand, regarding the "holding change roulette performance", since it is a performance that is performed after a special reach performance occurs, players' expectations are quite high. Under such circumstances, if you perform the "suspended change roulette effect" multiple times, you will not be able to concentrate on the special reach effect, and you will not be able to concentrate on the special reach effect. This is because there is a risk that the player may miss the effects (such as multiple cut-ins or character cut-ins that hint at expectations).

Among the "double roulette effects," the "expectation level roulette effect" is executed only before the decorative symbol reaches the reach state, and the "suspended change roulette effect" is executed after the decorative symbol becomes the reach state. It may be configured to be executed only in the state of .
In addition, among the "double roulette effects", the "expectation level roulette effect" is executed only before the decorative symbol becomes a reach state, and the "suspended change roulette effect" is special when the decorative symbol becomes a reach state. It may be configured to be executed only after a reach effect has occurred. In this case, each display may be performed when each roulette effect is executed. For example, if the "expectation level roulette performance" starts to be executed but the "suspended change roulette performance" does not start to be executed, only the display regarding the "expectation level roulette performance" is performed.

The size of the expectation roulette image in the "expectation roulette effect" of the "double roulette effect" is the size of the expectation roulette image in the state before the decorative pattern reaches the reach state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 333(e)). It is made smaller than the size of the decorative pattern in a state where a special ready-to-reach effect occurs (for example, the state shown in FIG. 334(a)). In this way, it is preferable that the size of the expectation roulette image in the "expectation roulette performance" be made larger or smaller than the size of the decorative pattern depending on the timing at which the expectation roulette image is displayed. On the other hand, the size of the roulette image in the "holding change roulette performance" of the "double roulette performance" is always larger than the size of the decorative pattern. This is because the timing of the occurrence of the "holding change roulette effect" is when a special reach effect is being performed, so the player knows that it is a reach state, and its role (meaning) as a decorative symbol is This is because there are not many.
In the display examples shown with reference to FIGS. 333 and 334, the size of the decorative pattern is changed, but instead of or in addition to changing the size of the decorative pattern, the roulette image in the "double roulette effect" You may change the size of.

In addition, although the display position of the expectation roulette image in the "expectation roulette effect" has been explained at the lower left of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it is not limited to the lower left of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. At the approximate center of the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, at the bottom of the approximate center of the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, or at an appropriate timing to start executing the "expectation level roulette performance". The display position may be changed, or expectations may be suggested depending on the display position. For example, expectations for winning are higher when the expectation level roulette image is displayed at approximately the center of the display area of the liquid crystal display device than when it is displayed at the lower left of the display area of the liquid crystal display device.
Note that if the entire expectation roulette image is displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, the number displayed at a predetermined position (for example, the position directly above) when the rotation is stopped is It is recommended to use this as a stop result that indicates the degree of failure.

Furthermore, the "holding change roulette effect" is executed during a special reach effect, but in the special reach effect, the decorative symbols are displayed small, making the player pay attention to the "hold change roulette effect". can be done.

In addition, when executing the "holding change roulette performance", the decorative symbols that are displayed in a small size may be displayed in a smaller size or may be deleted. Further, the display of the small decorative symbols may be restarted at the timing when the execution of the "suspended change roulette performance" is completed.
In addition, when executing the "suspended change roulette effect" before or after the special reach effect starts or ends, or when executing it in a variable display where the special reach effect is not executed, as in the case of the expectation level roulette image, At the start of the performance, it is preferable to reduce the size of the decorative pattern or increase the size of the pending change roulette image. Further, at the end of the performance, it is preferable to return the size of the decorative pattern to the original size or return the size of the pending change roulette image to the original size.

The "double roulette effect" may be performed over multiple variable displays. At this time, the "expectation level roulette effect" may be executed before the variable display starts based on the pre-reading process. For example, in response to the pending image displayed in the second pending display area, an "expectation level roulette effect" is executed to display a predetermined number, and until the variable display corresponding to this pending image ends, The number may be displayed. In this case, since the player does not know which hold the player is showing his/her expectation level for, the player can maintain his or her sense of expectation until the number display ends.
On the other hand, regarding the "suspended change roulette performance", it is preferable to decide whether or not to execute the performance at the start of the fluctuating display, and to allow the performance to be performed at a predetermined timing while the decorative symbols are fluctuating (in other words, " The "Pending Variable Roulette Effect" is not executed before the variable display that performs the "Pending Variable Roulette Effect" is started). As a result, even if the normal (white) pending image is displayed as the pending image at the start of the special reach effect, the ``holding change roulette effect'' will be executed, suggesting that expectations are higher. It is possible to create a sense of expectation in the player that the game will be successful.

While the "expectation level roulette effect" is being executed, a predetermined display effect suggesting the level of expectation may be executed. Similarly, a predetermined display effect indicating the degree of expectation may be executed while the "suspended change roulette effect" is being executed.
As a predetermined display effect, for example, a predetermined comment may be displayed together with the display of a character image, and the content of the comment and the color of the comment may indicate the level of expectation. Alternatively, a timer image that counts down a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) is displayed, a predetermined image is displayed when the timer reaches 0 seconds, and a predetermined expectation level is set depending on the type of displayed image. May be suggested. In addition to this, a predetermined level of expectation may be suggested based on the color and shape of the timer image, the time of the timer that is first displayed (that is, the elapsed time until it reaches 0 seconds), and the like.
Note that the predetermined display effect that is executed during the execution of the "expectation level roulette effect" and the predetermined display effect that is executed during the execution of the "retention change roulette effect" may be the same display effect, or may be different. It may be a display effect.
Note that a predetermined display effect may be started while the "expectation level roulette effect" or "suspended change roulette effect" is being executed, or the "expectation level roulette effect" or A "suspended change roulette performance" may be started.
Further, a predetermined display effect may be terminated while the "expectation level roulette effect" or "suspended change roulette effect" is being executed, or the "expectation level roulette effect" or " The "pending change roulette effect" may end.
According to this aspect, it is possible to provide a plurality of pleasures to the player.

Although the "expectation level roulette performance" and the "suspended change roulette performance" have been described, both the expectation level and the pending change may be suggested by a performance using one roulette image. For example, when only one roulette image is displayed and the roulette rotates and stops, the display results are "10", "30", "50", "70", "99", "blue", "green". ”, “red”, “gold”, and “rainbow”, any one of ten types of numbers and letters may be displayed.
Note that it may be possible to perform effects using similar roulette images not only for the expectation level and pending changes but also for other display effects.
For example, characters such as "change", "pseudo-link", and "rise" may be displayed. In addition, if it is a "change", it suggests that a pending change will be carried out, if it is a "pseudo link", it is suggested that a pseudo link will be carried out, and if it is an "increase", for example, the displayed comment The color varies depending on the level of expectation, and if the word "increase" is displayed when a color with a low level of expectation is displayed, it suggests that the color will change to a color with a high level of expectation.

Alternatively, a "changing roulette effect", a "pseudo-linked roulette effect", an "ascending roulette effect", and an "evolving reach roulette" are provided, and changing modes, pseudo-linking modes, rising modes, and special reach effects are selected from multiple options. You can do it like this. Note that it is good to have different levels of expectations suggested depending on the options.
The "changing roulette effect" and the "increasing roulette effect" are as mentioned above, but if it is a "pseudo continuous roulette effect", it may be possible to suggest even the number of pseudo continuous sequences to be performed, or "development reach If it is a roulette effect, it may even suggest a reach effect to be specifically executed. In addition, in each roulette performance, the image when the roulette is rotating is the same, and when the roulette is stopped and displayed, a predetermined display (for example, Pseudo-Run! or Rising!) is displayed. Alternatively, the displayed type may be determined from the image when the roulette is rotating.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the "expectation level roulette effect" and the "holding change roulette effect" are executed at two locations in the display area, it is possible to execute the "expectation level roulette effect" at two locations in the display area. Good too. Furthermore, the "holding change roulette effect" may be executed at two locations in the display area. In this way, the same roulette effect may be performed at two locations.
In addition, in this case, the execution of the roulette effect may be started at the same time, and the display result as the roulette effect is performed at the same time, so that a highly expected display may be applied, or the execution of one of the roulette effects may be started. After that, before stopping and displaying the one roulette effect, the other roulette effect may be started, and the display result as the roulette effect may be displayed at the same time, so that a highly anticipated display is applied. After starting execution of one roulette effect, the other roulette effect is started to be executed before being stopped and displayed in that one roulette effect, and after being stopped and displayed in one roulette effect, it is stopped and displayed in the other roulette effect. Alternatively, after starting execution of one roulette effect, stopping and displaying the result of that one roulette effect, and hiding the result of the stop display, the execution of the other roulette effect may be started. Good too.
Even in this case, the predetermined roulette effect that starts when the special reach effect is being executed will only be executed once, and the As for the roulette performance, it is desirable to be able to perform it multiple times.
To explain more specifically, for example, in a "double roulette effect", if it is decided to perform both "expectation level roulette effects", before a special reach effect is performed, one expectation level roulette effect will be executed. can be executed multiple times (for example, displaying "10" → "30" → "50" as an expectation image, displaying "99" → "10" → "99", displaying "99") → "99" → "99"), and when a special reach effect is being performed, the other party's expectation level roulette effect is performed once. In this case, before the other party's expectation roulette performance is performed (for example, the timing of a special reach performance, the timing of the other party's expectation roulette performance, or the display result of one expectation roulette performance) It is preferable to hide the display result of one expectation level roulette performance after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the performance. This is because displaying a plurality of expectation level images may confuse the player.
In addition, at that time, the results displayed in one expectation roulette performance are hidden when the display results of the other expectation roulette performance are performed, so the player cannot use the expectation roulette performance. Since it is possible that the displayed result has been forgotten, there is no need to always display a result that is higher than the result displayed in one expectation level roulette performance, and it is not necessary to always display a result that is higher than the result displayed in the other expectation level roulette performance ( "10") may be used as the expectation level image. Further, a result that is higher than the result displayed in one expectation level roulette performance may be displayed in the other expectation level roulette performance.

In addition, in the case of "double roulette effect", if it is decided to execute both "holding change roulette effects", the hold display will also be displayed when a special reach effect is displayed. , so-called decline does not occur. Under such circumstances, if multiple hold changes are performed before a special reach effect is performed, a mode that suggests that multiple hold changes will be performed (for example, "Hold change! x 2") It may be displayed or may not indicate that multiple pending changes will be made. In addition, if the result display as a pending change roulette effect is "Pending change! (display result that does not indicate a specific color)", the pending display after the change will be displayed immediately after "Pending change!" is displayed. Alternatively, instead of immediately displaying the pending display after the change, the display may display the pending display after the change after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.
The type of roulette effect to be used is determined based on the judgment result of winning or losing, but regarding the "pseudo consecutive roulette effect", the pseudo consecutive roulette effect itself does not occur after the special reach effect is executed. Therefore, after the special reach effect is executed, it is not decided to execute the "pseudo consecutive roulette effect".
Further, the roulette effect may be performed not only in two display areas but also in three or more display areas. Alternatively, it may be placed in only one place.
Furthermore, as described above, roulette performances other than the "expectation level roulette performance" and the "suspended change roulette performance"("change roulette performance", "pseudo-connected roulette performance", and "rising roulette performance") may be possible. Further, each roulette effect may be appropriately combined to be executable.

Note that "x", "?", etc. may be displayed as the display result of each roulette effect. For example, a roulette that is displayed as "term" starts running and displays "?" as the display result, or a roulette that displays "main" starts running and displays "×" as the display result. For example, the pending change is not performed.

According to such a "double roulette performance", it is possible to provide players with a new sense of entertainment.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 321 and the like will be described below with reference to FIGS. 337 to 344 and the like.
In the "silhouette preview effect," which is a special effect in the embodiment described below, multiple characters are displayed in silhouette in the effect window displayed in the display area, and then one of the characters is displayed. The level of expectations is shown. Please note that this "Silhouette Preview Performance" is a special reach performance (all SP reach performances excluding normal reach, or some SP reach performances other than normal reach (such as the aforementioned battle reach performance)) This is a performance that can be executed after the

First, each character displayed in the "silhouette preview effect" will be explained with reference to FIGS. 337 and 339. There are four types of characters displayed in this performance: a martial artist character, a warrior character, a samurai character, and a wizard character.

FIG. 337(a) shows a martial artist character image painted in multiple colors.
FIG. 337(b) shows a state in which the martial artist character is displayed in silhouette in a single color in the production window.
FIG. 337(c) shows a state in which a martial artist character is displayed as a silhouette in a single color in the production window, and a halo image that is placed behind the martial artist character and is visible like a halo is displayed. ing.
FIG. 337(d) shows a state in which a martial artist character painted in a plurality of colors is displayed in the production window.
FIG. 337(e) shows a state in which a character image indicating the level of expectation is displayed together with a martial artist character painted in a plurality of colors in the production window. In this example, an image of the words ``Geki Atsu'' is displayed on the tip of the hammer. Note that other character images may be displayed, but details will be described later.
FIG. 337(f) shows a state in which a dialogue image is displayed together with a martial artist character painted in a plurality of colors in the production window.
FIG. 337(g) shows a state in which a martial artist character painted in a plurality of colors shakes his body to make a warrior's tremor in the performance window, and a dialogue image is displayed.

FIG. 338(a) shows a warrior character image painted in multiple colors.
FIG. 338(b) shows a state in which the warrior character is displayed in silhouette in a single color in the production window.
FIG. 338(c) shows a state in which the warrior character is displayed as a silhouette in a single color in the production window, and a halo image that is placed behind the warrior character and is visible like a halo is displayed. .
FIG. 338(d) shows a state in which warrior characters painted in a plurality of colors are displayed in the production window.
FIG. 338(e) shows a state in which a character image indicating the level of expectation is displayed together with a warrior character painted in a plurality of colors in the production window. In this example, an image of the text "Gekiatsu" is displayed near the hand of the sword. Note that other character images may be displayed, but details will be described later.
FIG. 338(f) shows a state in which a dialogue image is displayed together with a warrior character painted in a plurality of colors in the production window.
FIG. 338(g) shows a state in which a warrior character colored in a plurality of colors wears a tiara or armor, raises a sword, and displays a dialogue image in the production window.

FIG. 339(a) shows a samurai character image painted in multiple colors.
FIG. 339(b) shows a samurai character silhouette displayed in a single color in the production window.
Figure 339(c) shows a state in which the samurai character is displayed as a silhouette in a single color in the production window, and a halo image that is placed behind the samurai character and is visible like a halo is displayed. .
FIG. 339(d) shows a state in which a samurai character painted in a plurality of colors is displayed in the production window.
FIG. 339(e) shows a state in which a character image indicating the degree of expectation is displayed together with a samurai character painted in a plurality of colors in the production window. In this example, an image of the words "Geki Atsu" is displayed on the headband worn on the forehead. Note that other character images may be displayed, but details will be described later.
FIG. 339(f) shows a state in which a dialogue image is displayed together with a samurai character painted in a plurality of colors in the production window.
FIG. 339(g) shows a state in which a samurai character painted in a plurality of colors holds his sword crosswise in the production window, and a dialogue image is displayed.

FIG. 340(a) shows a wizard character image painted in a plurality of colors.
FIG. 340(b) shows a state in which the wizard character is displayed in silhouette in a single color in the production window.
FIG. 340(c) shows a state in which the wizard character is displayed as a silhouette in a single color in the production window, and a halo image that is placed behind the wizard character and is visible like a halo is displayed. .
FIG. 340(d) shows a state in which a wizard character painted in a plurality of colors is displayed in the production window.
FIG. 340(e) shows a state in which a character image indicating the level of expectation is displayed together with a wizard character painted in a plurality of colors in the production window. In this example, the text image ``Gekiatsu'' is displayed at the tip of the cane. Note that other character images may be displayed, but details will be described later.
FIG. 340(f) shows a state in which a dialogue image is displayed together with a wizard character painted in a plurality of colors in the production window.
FIG. 340(g) shows a state in which a wizard character painted in a plurality of colors raises his left hand and holds up a staff in the production window, and a dialogue image is displayed.

Each character image is shown in Figure 337(a), Figure 338(a), Figure 339(a), and Figure 340(a). It's different. Additionally, these parts are painted in different colors. As a result, detailed aspects of facial expressions, hairstyles, and costumes can be visually recognized within the outline of the character. In this embodiment, such a display mode may be referred to as a non-silhouette display or a non-silhouette display. Furthermore, in this display, each character has a different hair color and clothing color. For example, a warrior character may have brown hair and blue clothing, or a wizard character may have pink hair and clothing. By adopting such a non-silhouette display mode, the player can easily recognize which character is displayed.

On the other hand, in this presentation, only the outlines of these characters can be recognized, and the inside of the outlines may be displayed in a manner filled with only one predetermined color (for example, black or gray). 337(b), FIG. 337(c), FIG. 338(b), FIG. 338(c), FIG. 339(b), FIG. 339(c), FIG. 340(b), and FIG. This shows a state where the inside of the outline of the character is displayed in a manner filled with a predetermined color. In this embodiment, such a display mode is sometimes referred to as a silhouette display. According to this display mode, the characters are displayed like shadow figures or silhouettes, and only the outlines are visible, so the character images that indicate the level of expectation for each character described above are "super hot". Although it is not possible to visually confirm whether or not the characters are displayed, it is possible to easily recognize which of the characters is displayed.
Note that instead of filling the inside of each character's outline with only one color, it may be filled with a predetermined pattern (for example, a gradation, a checkered pattern, etc.), and such a display mode is also included in the silhouette display. You can also use it as

337(c), FIG. 338(c), FIG. 339(c), and FIG. 340(c) show a state in which a halo image is displayed behind a character displayed in a silhouette shape. Note that displaying the halo image suggests that the level of expectation is higher than when the halo image is not displayed, but details will be described later.

337(e), FIG. 338(e), FIG. 339(e), and FIG. 340(e) show a state in which a text image (``Gekiatsu'') is displayed on a character's weapon or body part. There is. The types of character images displayed include "chance", "super hot", and "hit", and it is suggested that expectations are highest in this order, but details will be described later.

In FIG. 337(f), FIG. 338(f), FIG. 339(f), and FIG. 340(f), a dialogue image is displayed on the left side of a character displayed in a non-silhouette shape. Note that each character is not displayed moving as described later, but is displayed statically.

In Figures 337(g), 338(g), 339(g), and 340(g), dialogue images are displayed to the left of the characters displayed in silhouette, and each character moves, etc. A state in which a dynamic display is performed and the display mode has changed is shown. be). Note that changing the display mode suggests that the level of expectation is higher than when the display mode does not change, but details will be described later.

Next, the performance pattern of the "silhouette preview performance" will be explained with reference to the performance pattern table of FIG. 341. In this embodiment, performance patterns 01 to 13 are provided. Further, in each performance pattern, there may be a plurality of execution modes for a predetermined performance. For example, "presence or absence of a halo when displaying a silhouette", "display mode of character etc. when character is confirmed", "text display when character is displayed", and "character movement" can have multiple display modes. One of these display modes is selected and the effect is executed.
In the "silhouette preview effect," a silhouette character is first displayed four times, and then one of the characters is displayed.
As shown in the "First Silhouette Display" column of FIG. 341, a silhouette-shaped martial artist character is displayed for the first time.
Next, as shown in the "Second Silhouette Display" column of FIG. 341, a silhouetted warrior character is displayed for the second time.
Next, as shown in the "Third Silhouette Display" column of FIG. 341, a silhouette-shaped samurai character is displayed for the third time. The display mode up to the third silhouette display is common to each production pattern.
Next, as shown in the "Fourth Silhouette Display" column of FIG. 341, one of the four characters is displayed in silhouette for the fourth time. Specifically, one of a martial artist character, a warrior character, a samurai character, and a wizard character is displayed.

As shown in the "Presence or absence of halo during silhouette display" column in Figure 341, when a halo image is not displayed behind the character as the display mode of the character when the silhouette is displayed from the first to the fourth time. There are cases where a halo image is displayed behind the character, and either display mode is selected.
These display modes will be explained using a martial artist character as an example. FIG. 337(b) shows an example in which a martial artist character is displayed without a halo image. FIG. 337(c) shows an example in which a martial artist character is displayed in a manner in which a halo image is displayed.

After that, if there are three characters displayed, that is, if the wizard character is not selected in the "fourth silhouette display", the three characters of the martial artist character, the warrior character, and the samurai character will switch at high speed. After that, one of the three displayed characters is finally stopped and displayed. The characters that are stopped and displayed are as shown in the "Character that is finally stopped and displayed" column in FIG. In the case of pattern 07, a warrior character is displayed in a stopped state, and in the case of production patterns 09 to 11, a samurai character is displayed in a stopped state.
On the other hand, if there are four characters displayed, that is, if a magician character is selected in the "fourth silhouette display", the four characters of martial artist character, warrior character, samurai character, and magician character will switch at high speed. After that, one of the four displayed characters is finally stopped and displayed. The characters that are stopped and displayed are as shown in the "Finally stopped and displayed characters" column in FIG. is stopped and displayed, in the case of production pattern 12, the samurai character is stopped and displayed, and in the case of production pattern 13, the wizard character is stopped and displayed.

As shown in the "Display mode of character when character is confirmed" column in Figure 341, there are two types of display modes for characters during static display: "silhouette display" and "non-silhouette display", and either mode is selected. be done.
These display modes will be explained using a martial artist character as an example. FIG. 337(b) shows an example in which a martial artist character is displayed in a "silhouette display" display mode. FIG. 337(d) shows an example in which a martial artist character is displayed in a "non-silhouette" display mode.
When a character is displayed as a silhouette, the character gradually starts to be colored from this state, and becomes a state where the character is not in a silhouette shape but is painted in a plurality of colors.

When a halo is not displayed and when a halo is displayed, expectations are higher in the latter case.
Further, the level of expectation is suggested depending on the type of displayed character. Specifically, expectations increase in the order of martial artist characters, warrior characters, samurai characters, and wizard characters.
Also, when determining a character, there are cases where the character is displayed in silhouette and cases where the character is displayed in non-silhouette (that is, cases where the character is suddenly displayed in multiple colors without being displayed in silhouette), but the latter is better. Expectations are high.
Furthermore, when determining a character, the expectation level for a jackpot may be set higher when the character is displayed in silhouette than when it is displayed in non-silhouette form.
Furthermore, when determining a character, the expectation level may be set to 100% for either the case where the character is displayed in a non-silhouette or the case where the character is displayed in silhouette, and the expectation level for the other case may be set to be less than 100%. By setting either one to 100%, there is a sense of security when a production with 100% expectation level is displayed, and a sense of expectation is maintained even if a production with 100% expectation level is not displayed. This is for the purpose of

In a mode in which a character is displayed in multiple colors (that is, in a case in which a character is displayed in a non-silhouette manner), a character image may be displayed together with the character to suggest the level of expectation. As shown in the "Character display when character is displayed" column in FIG. 341, a mode in which no text is displayed, a mode in which the text "Chance" is displayed, a mode in which a text image "Gekiatsu" is displayed, One of the modes in which the character "TO" is displayed is selected. Taking the martial artist character as an example, FIG. 337(e) shows an example in which the character "gekiatsu" is displayed on the hammer of the martial artist character.
The level of expectation increases in the following order: no characters are displayed, characters ``chance'' are displayed, characters ``gekiatsu'' are displayed, and characters ``to'' are displayed. The expectation level in the case of the mode in which the character "TO" is displayed is 100%. Furthermore, the appearance rate decreases in the order of the mode in which no text is displayed, the mode in which the text ``Chance'' is displayed, the mode in which the text ``Gekiatsu'' is displayed, and the mode in which the text ``Tsu'' is displayed.

After the character is confirmed, a predetermined dialogue image is displayed next to the character, but as shown in the "Character's dialogue" column in Figure 341, there is a one-to-one correspondence between the character type and the displayed dialogue. . For example, in the case of a martial artist character, the line ``Go, fight, and come back! Same as always!'' is displayed.
Further, at the same time as the dialogue is displayed, a display (dynamic display) in which the character performs a predetermined action such as swinging a weapon may be performed as shown in the "Character Action" column of FIG. 341.
Taking the martial artist character as an example, FIG. 337(f) shows a display mode in which the martial artist character does not perform a predetermined action. FIG. 337(g) shows an example in which a martial artist character is dynamically displayed in a manner in which his whole body is trembling.
Expectations are higher in the case where the character does not move (not dynamically displayed) and the case where the character moves (dynamically displayed).
Note that the character may always be dynamically displayed.

Next, a more specific embodiment of the "silhouette preview performance" will be described with reference to the performance pattern table shown in FIG. 341, the time chart shown in FIG. 342, the display examples shown in FIGS. 343 to 345, and the like.
Note that in the time chart shown in FIG. 342, vertical lines indicating each timing are written in 0.5 second increments. Further, timing may be expressed in 0.5 second increments, such as timing t44.5 and timing t50.5. Furthermore, similar notations may be used not only in this figure but also in other figures described in this specification.
Note that expressions such as timing t10.2, timing t10.4, timing t10.33, timing t10.67, etc. may be used as expressions to specify arbitrary timings, not limited to 0.5 second increments. These expressions indicate timings 10.2 seconds, 10.4 seconds, 10.33 seconds, and 10.67 seconds after timing t0, respectively.
Although we have shown an example of writing vertical lines in the diagram in 1-second or 0.5-second increments, in order to explain the technical content described in the specification, it is necessary to write vertical lines at specific timings. For example, in a time chart in which vertical lines are written in 1-second increments, numbers below the decimal point are used to indicate predetermined timings shorter than 1 second (for example, timing t10.2, timing t10.33, etc. described above). ) can be specified.

First, production example 01 shown in FIG. 342(a) will be explained. In production example 01, in production pattern 04 shown in FIG. 341, "None" is selected as "presence or absence of halo when displaying silhouette", and "silhouette display" is selected as "display mode of character, etc. when character is confirmed". This is an example of a performance when "None" is selected as "Character display when character is displayed" and "None" is selected as "Character action".

First, the predetermined timing (timing At t44.5), a production window is displayed near the center of the display area. FIG. 343(a) shows a display example at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t44) before the production window is displayed. In this example, as a special reach effect, a fight between a martial artist character and a bomb character is displayed, and as a result of the battle, if the fighter character wins, it is a jackpot, and if the bomb character wins, it is a loss. Note that instead of the martial artist character, a production in which a warrior character, a samurai character, or a wizard character fights a bomb character may be displayed.
Note that the presentation window may be configured to use the entire display area for presentation. In that case, the player cannot recognize the special reach effect or decorative pattern.
FIG. 343(b) shows a display example during display of the production window (for example, at a predetermined timing from timing t44.5 to timing t45). Note that no characters are displayed in the production window during the period from timing t44.5 to timing t45, but character images and the like are displayed during the period from timing t45 to timing t50.5.
Next, details of the display contents in the presentation window will be explained with reference to FIG. 343(d) and subsequent figures.
First, during a period from timing t45 to timing t45.5, a silhouette image of a martial artist character is displayed in the production window. FIG. 343(d) shows the display state at this time.
Next, during a period from timing t45.5 to timing t46, a silhouette image of the warrior character is displayed in the production window. FIG. 343(e) shows the display state at this time.
Next, during a period from timing t46 to timing t46.5, a silhouette image of the samurai character is displayed in the production window. FIG. 343(f) shows the display state at this time.
Next, during a period from timing t46.5 to timing t47, a silhouetted image of the wizard character is displayed in the production window. FIG. 343(g) shows the display state at this time.
Next, during a period from timing t47 to timing t48, images of each silhouette-shaped character are sequentially switched and displayed at high speed (for example, every 0.1 seconds) within the production window. FIG. 344(a) shows a state in which all four silhouette characters are superimposed (a state visually perceived by the player).

Next, during a period from timing t48 to timing t48.5, the silhouette-shaped martial artist character is stopped and displayed. FIG. 344(b) shows the display state at this time. By displaying the characters in a silhouette shape in this manner, it is possible to remind the player which character is displayed in a colored manner.
In other words, in a situation where the images of each silhouette character are displayed and switched at high speed (for example, every 0.1 seconds), it is impossible to recall which colored character will be displayed, but one of the Since it is possible to recall which colored character will be displayed at the stage where the character silhouette display is selectively performed (timing t48), it is possible to recall which colored character will be displayed. A display (display at timing t48) that can be performed may be hereinafter referred to as a recall display.
Note that since one of the plurality of silhouette characters displayed in the period from timing t45 to timing t48 is displayed in a colored state, the colored character is displayed in a colored state from timing t45 to timing t48. Although it can be said that it can be recalled by the plurality of silhouette-like characters displayed in the period up to t48, since the player cannot definitively determine which colored character is selected, the timing from timing t45 to The plurality of silhouette-shaped characters displayed in the period up to t48 are not displayed as a recall display.
Next, during a period from timing t48.5 to timing t49, the martial artist character gradually changes from a silhouette-like state to a state painted in a plurality of colors. FIG. 344(c) shows the display state in the middle of change. Further, FIG. 344(d) shows a display state in which the change has been completed. Note that when the silhouette character displayed in the recall display gradually changes to a state in which the silhouette character is painted in multiple colors, for example, if the silhouette character is a martial artist, the color changes. As he gradually changes, he becomes a wizard, etc., and will not be changed to other characters.
Next, during a period from timing t49 to timing t50, the martial artist character is displayed in a stationary state. FIG. 344(d) shows the display state at this time.
Next, from timing t50 to timing t50.5, a dialogue image saying "Go, fight, and come back! Same as always!" is displayed on the left side of the martial artist character. FIG. 344(e) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t50.5, the display of the martial artist character and lines ends, and at timing t51, the display of the production window ends. FIG. 343(c) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t52) after the display of the production window ends. In addition, at the timing when the display of the production window ends, a special reach performance (such as the battle reach performance mentioned above, all SP reach performances except normal reach, or some SP reach performances excluding normal reach) The winning/losing announcement performance (the performance suggesting whether it is a win or a loss) has not yet been performed.

Next, production example 02 shown in FIG. 342(b) will be explained. In production example 02, in production pattern 13 shown in FIG. 341, "Yes" is selected as "presence or absence of halo during silhouette display", and "non-silhouette display" is selected as "display mode of character, etc. when character is confirmed". is selected, "Very hot" is selected as "Text display when character is displayed", and "Raise cane" is selected as "Character action".

First, the predetermined timing (timing At t44.5), a production window is displayed near the center, which is a part of the display area. FIG. 343(a) shows a display example at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t44) before the production window is displayed.
Note that the presentation window may be configured to use the entire display area for presentation. In that case, the player cannot recognize the special reach effect or decorative pattern.
Further, FIG. 343(b) shows a display example during display of the production window (for example, at a predetermined timing from timing t44.5 to timing t51). Note that no character is displayed in the production window during the period from timing t44.5 to timing t45. Note that the display contents up to this point are the same as in the case of production example 01.
Next, details of the display contents in the presentation window will be explained with reference to FIGS. 345(a) to 345(g).
First, during a period from timing t45 to timing t45.5, a silhouette image of a martial artist character is displayed in the production window. FIG. 345(a) shows the display state at this time.
Next, during a period from timing t45.5 to timing t46, a silhouette image of the warrior character is displayed in the production window. FIG. 345(b) shows the display state at this time.
Next, during a period from timing t46 to timing t46.5, a silhouette image of the samurai character is displayed in the production window. FIG. 345(c) shows the display state at this time.
Next, during a period from timing t46.5 to timing t47, a silhouetted image of the wizard character is displayed in the production window. FIG. 345(d) shows the display state at this time.
As shown in the figure, a halo is displayed behind each character.
Next, during a period from timing t47 to timing t48.5, images of each silhouette-shaped character are sequentially switched and displayed at high speed (for example, every 0.1 seconds) within the production window. FIG. 345(e) shows a state in which all four silhouette characters are superimposed (a state visually perceived by the player).

Next, during a period from timing t48.5 to timing t49.5, a non-silhouette wizard character painted in multiple colors is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, an image of the text ``Gekiatsu'' is displayed on the tip of the cane that the character is holding. FIG. 345(f) shows the display state at this time.
Next, during a period from timing t49.5 to timing t50, a dialogue image saying "Thank you for waiting!" is displayed on the left side of the wizard character. Additionally, a specific dynamic display is performed in which the wizard character moves his left arm and changes into a pose in which he holds up his staff. FIG. 345(g) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t50, the display of the wizard character and the dialogue ends, and at timing t50.5, the display of the production window ends. FIG. 343(c) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t52) after the display of the production window ends.

Here, the differences between production example 01 and production example 02 will be explained.
First, the first difference is that the presentation example 01 and presentation example 02 differ in the display mode of the characters after the characters are switched and displayed at high speed. In the case of production example 01, the image is first displayed in a silhouette shape, and then gradually colored. On the other hand, in the case of production example 02, the character is suddenly displayed in color without being displayed in silhouette. In other words, in production example 01, a recall display (stop display in silhouette display) that allows you to recall which character has been selected among the characters that will be displayed with color later is performed, whereas production example In 02, no recall display (stop display in silhouette display) is performed.
In this way, in each production pattern, there is a production mode in which the character is first displayed in a silhouette shape (with evocation display), and a production mode in which the character is suddenly displayed in a non-silhouette shape and suddenly colored (without evocation display). Both may be executed. Furthermore, the degree of expectation for winning may vary depending on the performance mode (depending on the presence or absence of a recall display). For example, there is a production mode in which the character is first displayed in a silhouette shape (with evocation display), and a production mode in which the character is displayed in a non-silhouette shape and suddenly colored (without evocation display). You can set your expectations high. Further, in this case, the appearance rate of the latter may be lower than that of the former.
Or, for example, if the character is first displayed in a silhouette shape (with evocative display), and the character is displayed in a non-silhouette shape and suddenly colored (without evocative display), the latter may be more The former may also have higher expectations. Further, regarding the appearance rate in this case, the former may be lower than the latter.

Next, as a second difference, between production example 01 and production example 02, in addition to the display mode of the character after the character is switched and displayed at high speed (presence of evocation display), the display mode of the character after the character is switched and displayed at high speed. The length of time (period) during which the display is switched at high speed also differs depending on whether the display is displayed in a silhouette shape or in a non-silhouette shape. Specifically, in production example 01, the duration is 1 second (period from timing t47 to timing t48), and in production example 02, it is 1.5 seconds (period from timing t47 to timing t48.5).
For this reason, the time (period) for quickly switching and displaying characters is shorter than in Production Example 01, in which the display mode of a character that is stopped and displayed is displayed in a silhouette shape (reminiscence display). If the expectation level for winning is higher in production example 02, in which the display mode of the character is displayed in a non-silhouette manner, where the character is stopped and displayed for a longer period of time than in production example 01, then the time ( The time (period) for changing and displaying characters at high speed is shorter than that of production example 01, in which the display mode of characters that are stopped and displayed is displayed in a silhouette shape (reminiscence display). , when the expectation level for winning is lower in production example 02, in which the character is displayed in a non-silhouette manner, in which the time (period) in which the characters are switched and displayed at high speed is longer than in production example 01. It is possible to make the user think that the high-speed switching should be completed early. Further, when the character that is stopped and displayed is displayed in a silhouette shape (reminiscence display), the expectation level for winning may be set to 100%. By doing this, a sense of security is provided to the player if the high-speed switching ends early, and a sense of anticipation is maintained even if the high-speed switching does not end early.

In this way, according to the "Silhouette Preview Performance", there are a number of things that can be done, such as whether there is a halo display when the silhouette is displayed, whether the wizard character will be displayed in the fourth silhouette display, and which character will finally be displayed. whether or not the displayed character is in a silhouette shape (whether the high-speed switching display takes a long time), and whether the character displayed in a silhouette shape gradually changes color and is displayed in a non-silhouette shape. Display (effectual display that changes from a state where it is difficult to tell which character is displayed to a state where it is clear), whether or not a character image is attached to a character displayed in color, and whether a character image is attached. In the case of a game, the player pays close attention to the progress of the performance, focusing on which character images are attached and whether or not the characters move (whether dynamic display is performed or not), and the expectations suggested. Depending on the degree of display, expectations regarding the results of the variable display of decorative patterns will be heightened.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which a "silhouette preview performance" is executed during a special reach performance, the battle between characters ends at a predetermined timing after the "silhouette preview performance" ends (the display of the production window ends). Then, an indication that one of the characters wins is made. Furthermore, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in one of two modes, one indicating a jackpot and the other indicating a loss, depending on the battle result.
In this embodiment, at timing t53, the battle result of the character is shown and a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the battle result, and at timing t54, the decorative pattern is changed to be a decorative pattern exclusive for special reach effect or a normal one. At the same time, the background image is changed from the special ready-to-reach background image to the normal background image, and at timing t55, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed.
Note that after timing t56, if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, a jackpot game is started. Further, if the result of the special lottery is a loss and there is a hold-up, a new variable display is started. If the result of the special lottery is a loss and there are no pending tickets, the lottery will be in a standby state.

Audio may be output together with the display of the dialogue image. The entire dialogue may be output as audio, or only a portion of the dialogue may be output as audio.
Alternatively, only audio output may be performed without displaying the dialogue image.

Note that the switching timing when character images are switched and displayed at high speed is not limited to every 0.1 seconds, but may be, for example, every 0.33 seconds to every 0.2 seconds.

Depending on various effects (presence or absence of a halo, type of character that is finally displayed in a stopped state, display mode of the character etc. when the character is confirmed, mode of text display when the character is displayed, presence or absence of character movements, etc.) , we mentioned the points that suggest the level of expectation, but the lower the level of expectation, the higher the appearance rate, and the higher the level of expectation, the lower the appearance rate.
For example, the four characters that are finally stopped and displayed are a martial artist character, a warrior character, a samurai character, and a wizard character, but the expectations are suggested in the order of martial artist character, warrior character, samurai character, and wizard character. It is preferable that the appearance rate decrease as the value increases.

"Silhouette preview performance" is a winning/losing branch performance in special reach performances (such as the battle reach performance mentioned above, all SP reach performances other than normal reach, or some SP reach performances other than normal reach) (In the case of example 01 in FIG. 342, at timing t51), the example ends before the (performance suggesting a hit or miss) is performed, but after this timing t51 The presentation window may also continue to be displayed. For example, the presentation window may continue to be displayed even when the timing for the winning/losing notification effect has arrived, or the presentation window may continue to be displayed even when the winning/losing notification presentation is being performed. Alternatively, the display of the effect window may be continued even when the fluctuating state of the decorative pattern is stopped (determined stop period). In addition, if you want to continue displaying the presentation window when the timing for the winning/losing notification effect has arrived or while the winning/losing notification presentation is being performed, the presentation window should be It is preferable to display it in a different manner, such as by reducing the size of the display.
For example, if the stop display result of the decorative symbols is a jackpot, the presentation window may continue to be displayed during the jackpot game.
Further, if the stop display result of the decorative pattern is a loss, the effect window display may be continued if there is no hold.
For example, a state in which the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed as a combination of "5", "6", and "5" (the display state shown in FIG. The presentation window may continue to be displayed until it is stopped and displayed in combination (the display state shown in FIG. 346(b)).
Note that it is preferable to lower the display priority of the production window (including characters and letters; the same applies hereinafter) than the decorative patterns in normal times. Further, after the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed for one second, the display priority of the production window may be set higher than that of the normal decorative pattern (display state shown in FIG. 346(c)).
In addition, if a starting winning does not occur for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) after the decorative pattern stops displaying, the display of the decorative pattern is interrupted and the game machine demo video (model name and story that is the motif of the machine) is displayed. or a video explaining the character). Further, even in this situation, the effect window may be continuously displayed (display state shown in FIG. 346(d)). Note that it is preferable to set the display priority of the demo video lower than the display priority of the production window so that the production window is displayed in front of the demo video. Alternatively, the display priority of the demo video may be set higher than the display priority of the production window, so that the production window is displayed behind the demo video.
Note that the character may be displayed statically within the production window. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 338(g), 339(g), and 340(g), it is preferable to continue displaying the character in a static manner after making a predetermined movement.
Alternatively, the character may continue to be displayed dynamically. For example, in the case of the martial artist character shown in FIG. 337(g), the character may be displayed continuing to move its whole body. Further, in the case of a warrior character, a samurai character, or a magician character, a display may be performed in which the character continues to swing the weapon he/she is holding.
The presentation window and characters will be displayed at the start of a new variable display (when there is a hold or when a start winning occurs without a hold) or after a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 minutes) from the stop display of decorative symbols. It is best to end it after the period has passed.
In this way, by continuing to display the characters even after the special reach effect ends, it is possible to soothe the player's mind.
Note that it is more effective to dynamically display each character with comical movements. Further, as a dynamic display pattern, a dynamic display pattern that is not displayed during a special reach effect may be displayed.

For example, at timing t50 in performance example 01, a dialogue image that prompts the user to operate the operating means may be displayed. For example, a character may prompt the player to operate the handle 302 by displaying the message, "I missed the ball...I'm sorry, but I'm hitting left-handed!"
By performing such a display, it is possible to prevent a player who has stopped shooting game balls during a special reach performance from stopping the game, and it is possible to increase the operating rate of the gaming machine.
Furthermore, if there is a hold and there is a hold that results in a jackpot, the line ``I missed...I'm sorry, but I'm hitting left-handed now!'' will be displayed based on pre-reading processing. , may suggest that a jackpot will occur.
If you do this, first you'll see the words ``I missed...I'm sorry,'' and then you'll see the words ``I'm hitting left-handed!'' and then the words ``Now I'm hitting left-handed!'' By displaying the text sometimes, even if the special reach effect results in a loss, it contributes to suppressing a drop in interest.

In production example 01, a martial artist character is displayed in a silhouette shape during a period from timing t48 to timing t48.5. On the other hand, in production example 01, the martial artist character may be dynamically displayed during the period from timing t50 to timing t50.5.
Although an example has been shown in which the time period in which the character is displayed in silhouette and the time period in which the character is dynamically displayed are the same length, they may be different times.
For example, the length of time the character is displayed in silhouette may be longer than the length of time the character is dynamically displayed. For example, the length of time the character is displayed in silhouette may be 2 seconds, and the length of time the character is dynamically displayed may be 0.5 seconds. It is possible to secure time for the player to sufficiently recognize which character is displayed.
Alternatively, the length of time during which the character is displayed in silhouette may be shorter than the length of time during which the character is displayed dynamically. For example, the length of time the character is displayed in silhouette may be 0.5 seconds, and the length of time the character is dynamically displayed may be 2 seconds. In this case, even if the player is not paying close attention to the flow of the performance, in the end, they will have enough time to check the type of character, the presence or absence and type of character display, and whether or not the character is moving. It is possible to provide the player with certain information regarding the level of expectation. In addition, it is possible to secure time for the player to enjoy the behavior of the character.

Note that the performance decorative members described in the embodiment of the "hourglass hold change performance" may be employed in the "silhouette preview performance".
For example, the character moves during the period from timing t50 to timing t50.5 of production example 01 shown in FIG. 342(a) and from timing t49.5 to timing t50 of production example 02 shown in FIG. 342(b). There are cases where the characters are displayed dynamically and cases where they are not displayed dynamically, but when the characters are displayed dynamically, the decoration members for performance may sometimes operate.
Further, it is preferable to set the expectation level to be higher when the performance decoration member operates than when the performance decoration member does not operate.

Note that when the character is dynamically displayed, the decorative member for presentation may always be operated. This makes it possible to enhance the dynamic display of the character.
Conversely, when the character is dynamically displayed, the performance decoration member may not be operated. In this case, the player's attention can be focused on the dynamic display of the character.
Further, when the performance decorative member operates, it may be arranged so that a jackpot is always achieved. Also, it may be possible to make it so that if a decorative member for performance does not work, it will always result in a loss.

A period in which characters are displayed in silhouette (a period in which it is certain which colored character will be displayed (for example, in production example 01, a period from timing t48 to timing t48.5)) In this case, button operations (eg, operation of the operation button 401 or attack button 3710) may be enabled. Further, a simulated image of the operation unit indicating that the button operation is valid or an image indicating the operation mode (an image such as "PUSH") may be displayed. The displayed character may change to a more highly anticipated character in response to a button operation by the player.
For example, when a martial artist character is displayed in silhouette, a mock image simulating the operation button 401 and an image "PUSH" indicating the operation mode are displayed in the display area, and when the player presses the operation button 401. In some cases, a warrior character (or a samurai character or a wizard character) may be displayed in silhouette instead of the martial artist character.
In this case, it is preferable that the time period during which the character is displayed in silhouette is longer than 0.5 seconds (for example, 3 seconds).
According to this aspect, a character with a low expectation level changes to a character with a high expectation level, so that even if a character with a low expectation level is displayed, it is possible to maintain the feeling of expectation for a jackpot.
Note that a plurality of display modes of a simulated image simulating the operation unit or an image showing the operation mode may be provided, and the degree of expectation may be indicated by different display modes. For example, a simulated image simulating the operation unit or an image showing the operation mode may be displayed in one of white, red, and gold, and the expectation level may be increased in this order.

Note that the performance decorative members described in the embodiment of the "hourglass hold change performance" may be employed in the "silhouette preview performance".
For example, in the period from timing t48 to timing t48.5 of production example 01 shown in FIG. 342(a), the character is displayed in a silhouette shape, but the decoration member for production may operate during this period. It's okay.
Further, it is preferable to set the expectation level to be higher when the performance decoration member operates than when the performance decoration member does not operate.

Note that the presentation decorative member may always be operated during the period in which the character is displayed in a silhouette shape. This makes it possible to enhance the display of the silhouette character.
Conversely, when the character is displayed in a silhouette shape, the decorative member for presentation may not be operated. In this case, the player's attention can be focused on the display of the silhouette character.
Further, when the performance decorative member operates, it may be arranged so that a jackpot is always achieved. Also, it may be possible to make it so that if a decorative member for performance does not work, it will always result in a loss.

We have shown an example in which a silhouette is displayed a total of four times, and a predetermined character is displayed after the display is switched at high speed, but at the predetermined time of the four silhouette displays, a colored character is suddenly displayed. You can do it like this. Furthermore, the various effects described above (such as the effects shown in the "Character display when character is displayed" column and the "Character movement" column in FIG. 341) are executed in response to the character. good.
For example, after a silhouetted martial artist character is displayed the first time, a colored non-silhouetted warrior character is displayed the second time, and a performance that suggests the level of expectation corresponding to the warrior character is performed. Good too.
Alternatively, a silhouetted martial artist character is displayed the first time, a silhouetted warrior character is displayed the second time, a silhouetted samurai character is displayed the third time, and a non-silhouette colored wizard character is displayed the fourth time. may be displayed, and an expectation level suggesting effect corresponding to the wizard character may be performed.

Note that it is preferable to make the color of the production window (the color of the part displayed as the background of the character) the same regardless of the type of character.
Some players, who are used to the game, can tell in advance the type of character that will be displayed based on the color of the production window, and may be disappointed if they find out that a character they have low expectations for will be displayed. However, it is possible to prevent such situations from occurring.
Alternatively, the color of the presentation window may be different depending on the type of character.
In this case, some players who are unfamiliar with the game may be able to predict the type of character in advance based on the color of the presentation window, and if the displayed character matches the expected character, they may be able to predict the type of character in advance. It can make you feel happy.

According to such a "silhouette preview effect", it is possible to provide players with a new sense of entertainment.

As decorative members, a panel board rear board 2420 (FIG. 130, etc.), a panel board rear decorative member 2410 (FIG. 131, etc.), a tank accessory 3770 (FIG. 241, etc.), etc. are provided on the game board 5, and these decorative members Although an example has been shown in which it may be used for presentation, etc., modifications that can be applied to decorative members will be described below.

These decorative members can be moved between a standby position and a moving position. Therefore, these decorative members are sometimes referred to as movable decorative members.
Note that the movement mode is not limited to linear movement between the standby position and the movement position, and various movement and operation modes can be adopted. For example, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 shown with reference to FIG. 134 may rotate between a standby position and a movement position. Further, the direction of the rotation axis is not limited to the left-right direction, but may be the up-down direction or the front-back direction. Alternatively, any direction can be used as the rotation axis. Note that the movement of the movable decorative member is not limited to rotation, and may be configured to be rotatable.

Furthermore, with reference to FIG. 241 and the like, an embodiment in which the tank accessory 3770 is movable in the vertical direction has been shown, but the direction in which the movable decoration member moves is not limited to the vertical direction, but can also be moved in the left-right direction or the front-back direction. good. Alternatively, it may be movable along a straight line with an arbitrary inclination. For example, the decorative member may move diagonally from the upper left to the lower right of the display area, or the movable decorative member may move diagonally from the upper right to the lower left of the display area.

Furthermore, referring to FIG. 241 and the like, when the tank accessory 3770 moves from the standby position to the movement position, the tank accessory 3770 approaches the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and overlaps with the display area. In this example, when the movable decorative member moves along a straight line with an arbitrary inclination, or when the decorative member rotates or rotates, the movable decorative member moves from the standby position to the moving position. The movable decorative member may change from a state in which it does not overlap with the display area to a state in which it is visually recognized as overlapping with the display area.

Note that an operation mode in which the decorative member is vibrated at the standby position or the moving position may be adopted.
Note that such an operation mode can be realized by using a known drive source or drive mechanism (pulse motor, link mechanism, etc.) (the same applies when realizing other operation modes etc. described in this specification). be.).

Further, among these decorative members, the panel board rear substrate 2420 and the tank accessory 3770 are equipped with a predetermined light source (a plurality of full-color LEDs), and can directly emit light in a predetermined color. Therefore, these decorative members are sometimes referred to as light-emitting decorative members.
Note that the panel board rear decorative member 2410 has a function of diffusely reflecting light of a predetermined color irradiated from the panel board rear board 2420 provided at the rear of the panel board rear decorative member 2410. The light emitted from the board 2420 will eventually pass through the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and be emitted toward the player. As a result, the player can visually recognize that the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is illuminated and decorated in a predetermined color.
Note that the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 may be integrated to function as a decorative member, a movable decorative member, a light emitting decorative member, or the like.

As already mentioned, the light-emitting decorative member may emit light in a specific color (white, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow color, etc.) that indicates the expectation of a jackpot. Alternatively, the light emission mode can be made in a predetermined color as a mere presentation without indicating the degree of expectation. For example, it may be possible to emit light in a predetermined color during a demonstration in which no game is being played.

In this way, the decorative member in this embodiment can have one or both of the movable (or moving) function and the light emitting function. In addition, decorative members can perform one of these functions (for example, move from a standby position to a movement position, emit light in a specific color or a predetermined color, etc.) or a combination of multiple functions (for example, move from a standby position to a movement position, emit light in a specific color or a predetermined color, etc.). After moving to a position, it emits light in a specific color or a predetermined color, etc.) to suggest a predetermined game content (for example, the degree of expectation that the fluctuating result of the decorative pattern during the fluctuating display will result in a jackpot, etc.); It can be used for various performances such as performances to enliven a specific game period (for example, during a jackpot game state). Therefore, these decorative members are sometimes referred to as performance decorative members.

A plurality of decorative members (two or more) may be provided. In this case, a plurality of decorative members having similar functions may be provided, or a plurality of decorative members each having a different function may be provided. Note that the function here refers to the movement mode, light emission mode, etc. of the decorative member.
Furthermore, one or more decorative members having a first function may be provided, and one or more decorative members having a second function different from the first function may be provided. Similarly, a decorative member having a third function different from the first function and the second function, a decorative member having a fourth function different from the first function to the third function... (the same applies hereinafter) ) may be provided one or more times.

For example, a first tank accessory 3770 that is movable in the vertical direction may be provided below the display area, and a second tank accessory 3770 that is movable in the vertical direction may be provided above the display area. Further, a first panel board rear decorative member 2410 and a first panel board rear board 2420 that are movable in the left-right direction are provided on the right side of the display area, and a second panel board that is movable in the left-right direction is provided on the left side of the display area. A rear decorative member 2410 and a second panel plate rear substrate 2420 may be provided. As shown in FIG. 241, when these decorative members are in the standby position, they do not overlap with the display area when viewed from the front, and when they are moved from the standby position to the movement position, they do not overlap with the display area. They may be overlapped when viewed from the front.

The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 are decorative members representing a mountain range. Further, the tank accessory 3770 is a decorative member imitating a tank. Note that the shape of the decorative member is not limited to these examples. For example, it may be an image imitating a predetermined image (such as a character) displayed in the display area. Further, the decorative member and a predetermined image displayed in the display area may be integrated to represent one motif. Moreover, one motif may be represented by a plurality of decorative members.
Note that the decorative member does not necessarily need to represent or imitate some object in this way, and a decorative member that does not represent or imitate any object may be employed. This is because it is possible to produce an effect only by the manner in which the decorative member moves and the manner in which it emits light.

As in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 134, the decorative member is provided so as to be located between the panel board 1110 and the game board side performance display device 1600 in the front-back direction.
Note that the decorative member may be provided between the glass plate 192 and the panel plate 1110. In this case, a partition or the like may be provided to prevent the rolling game ball from colliding with the decorative member, or the strength of the decorative member may be increased so that even if the game ball collides with the decorative member, the decorative member will not be damaged. may be made less likely to occur.

Alternatively, the decorative member may be provided behind the game board side performance display device 1600 or the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. Note that by reducing the size of the game board side effect display device 1600, it is possible to arrange the decorative member at a position that does not overlap with the game board side effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front. Alternatively, by moving the decorative member from the standby position to the movement position, it may be changed from a state where it is hidden behind the game board side performance display device 1600 and cannot be seen when viewed from the front to a state where it is visible when seen from the front. In this case, it will be visually recognized by the player as if the decorative member appeared from the back side of the game board side effect display device 1600.

Although an example is shown in which the decorative member is provided on the game board 5, the door frame left side unit 530, the door frame right side unit 550, and the door frame top unit 570 shown with reference to FIG. This is a light-emitting decorative member. Note that the left side unit 530 of the door frame, the right side unit 550 of the door frame, and the top unit 570 of the door frame can be moved and rotated within a movement range that does not pose a danger to players or the store staff, and function as movable decorative members. You can do it like this.
Further, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 shown with reference to FIG. 118 etc. are provided in the door frame 3. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can emit light and move, and function as a light emitting decorative member and a movable decorative member.
In addition, the functions of various decorative members provided on the game board 5 may be appropriately applied to these decorative members provided on the door frame 3 in an embodiment.

Note that instead of the name "decorative member", the names "decoration body", "decoration means", etc. may be used, but there is no substantial difference from the name "decoration member". Further, even when it comes to decorative bodies, decorative means, etc., the various embodiments described above can be applied in the same manner as the decorative members.

Note that when a game ball enters a winning hole (general winning hole 2001, first starting hole 2002, second starting hole 2004, big winning hole 2005, etc.), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. At this time, the game balls paid out may be referred to as prize balls. Further, the number of game balls paid out may be referred to as the number of prize balls.
The number of prize balls is set as appropriate in the range of 1 to 15 depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the gameplay, etc., but for example, the number of prize balls in the general prize opening 2001 is 4, and the number of prize balls in the first starting opening 2002 is set as appropriate. The number of prize balls may be four, the number of prize balls in the second starting opening 2004 may be one, and the number of prize balls in the big prize opening 2005 may be ten.

In addition, the larger the number of prize balls in the general prize opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, and the second starting opening 2004, the more difficult it is for the game balls owned by the player to decrease, so the more balls can be paid out at the time of a jackpot. The number of game balls is reduced, and the game can be designed to have a less gambling effect.
On the other hand, the smaller the number of prize balls in the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, and the second starting opening 2004, the easier it is for the game balls owned by the player to decrease, so it is relatively possible to pay out at the time of a jackpot. The number of game balls increases, and specifications with high gambling quality can be achieved.

Furthermore, by increasing the number of prize balls in the jackpot, it is possible to increase the total number of game balls that are paid out during a jackpot.
On the other hand, by reducing the number of prize balls in the jackpot, the total number of game balls paid out during a jackpot can be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, FIG. 135, etc., if the second starting hole 2004 is arranged on the right side of the gaming area and the game ball can enter the second starting hole 2004 when the ball is hit to the right, By arranging the obstacle nail 1201 and the second starting port 2004 at positions where the number of prize balls equal to or slightly smaller than the number of fired game balls is paid out to the player, the game ball can be fired while hitting the right hand. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player's interest decreases due to the decrease in the player's interest.
The number of prize balls in the second starting port 2004 may be set to one, and almost all of the fired game balls may enter the second starting port 2004. Alternatively, the number of prize balls in the second starting port 2004 may be set to two, and approximately half of the fired game balls may enter the second starting port 2004.
In this way, the number of prize balls for each winning hole (general winning hole 2001, first starting hole 2002, second starting hole 2004, big winning hole 2005, etc.) is based on the winning probability, jackpot probability, and other various factors for the winning hole. It will be decided comprehensively.

Below, an embodiment including a new effect, ``Character Present Hold Surprise Effect'' will be described. Note that this embodiment is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 346 and the like.
347 to 349 show various images displayed in the display area in this embodiment. 350 and 351 show time charts in this embodiment. 352 to 358 show display modes in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 of this embodiment.
In this embodiment, the pending image is referred to as the current pending image, and the pending images displayed from the first pending display area to the fourth pending display area are referred to as pending pending images (first pending pending image to fourth pending image). (standby hold image). Note that the functions and effects of the variable display of decorative patterns, the pending images, the pending images, etc. are as described above with reference to FIGS. 123 to 125 and the like. In addition, it was shown with reference to FIGS. 142 and 143 that the probability that the result of the special lottery will be a jackpot in the low probability non-time saving state is 1/300, but the probability that it will be a reach state is 30/300 (i.e. 1/300). /10). With such a probability, when the player is in a reach state, there is a probability of 29/30 that he will miss the reach, and a probability of 1/30 that he will hit the jackpot. According to such an embodiment, the player has a feeling of expectation of winning the jackpot when a reach state occurs.

FIG. 347 shows various images displayed in the display area.
FIG. 347(a) shows the normal background image A. The normal background image A is an image showing a road in the center of a grassland and trees growing along the road. Furthermore, the words "Kaido Stage" indicating the content of the background image are attached to the upper left area of the image.
FIG. 347(b) shows the normal background image B. The normal background image B is an image showing a post town where two houses are built on the right side of the road. Additionally, the words "Shukuba Stage" indicating the content of the background image are attached to the upper left area of the image.
FIG. 347(c) shows the background image A at the time of reach. The ready-to-reach background image A is an image in which a plurality of meandering lines are provided from the upper right to the lower left.
FIG. 347(d) shows the background image B at the time of reach. The reaching background image B is an image showing the inside of the limestone cave. The image includes a plurality of images of downward-facing stalactites and upward-facing stalactites.
FIG. 347(e) shows a monster character image. The monster character image occupies more than half of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The monster character has eyes, a mouth, hands, and the like. 347(f) and 347(g) each show a miasma image A and a miasma image B representing miasma exhaled from the monster character's mouth in addition to the monster character image. As is clear from the figure, miasma image B is larger than miasma image A.
FIG. 347(h) shows the types of decorative patterns displayed in the display area in this embodiment. There are seven types of decorative patterns, each numbered from ``1'' to ``7.''

FIG. 348(a) shows a normal background image C. The normal background image C is an image representing a map of Japan. Further, the normal background image C is an image displayed while the player is hitting the right hand.
FIG. 348(b) shows an image that has a higher display priority than the normal background image C and a lower display priority than the decorative pattern among the images displayed while hitting the right hand. Specifically, as shown in the figure, a frame having an opaque background portion is displayed at the upper left position of the display area. Also displayed in this frame are the words "Victory x 15", "Over 12,000 cars!!", and "Next destination: Owari". Note that in "Win x 15", the numerical part indicates the number of consecutive matches, and in this case, the number of consecutive matches is 15. Further, in "Over 12,000 ryo!!", the numerical part indicates the number of game balls paid out to the player during the consecutive games. These numbers are displayed as numbers corresponding to the number of consecutive games and the number of game balls paid out to the player during the consecutive games.
Additionally, the words "Musha Shugyo RUSH" are displayed at the top of the display area.
In addition, a martial artist character and the lines of the martial artist character (``Training warriors all over the country!'') are displayed in the lower left of the display area.
FIG. 348(c) shows an image having a higher display priority than a decorative pattern among the images displayed while hitting right. Specifically, as shown in the figure, a rightward arrow image containing the words "Right hit!" is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area. The player can recognize that he/she is in a gaming state (time-saving state) in which the player plays right-handed by visually recognizing the words "Right-handed" and the direction of the arrow.

349(a), FIG. 349(b), and FIG. 349(c) show a lightning image A, a lightning image B, and a lightning image C.
The lightning image A shows a lightning strike occurring from the upper right to the lower left of the display area.
Lightning image B shows a lightning strike occurring from the upper right to the lower left of the display area, and a lightning strike occurring from the upper left to the lower right of the display area.
Lightning image C shows a lightning strike occurring from the upper right to the lower left of the display area, a lightning strike occurring from the upper left to the lower right of the display area, and a lightning strike occurring from the top to the bottom of the display area. It represents.
A lightning image may be displayed when a reach state is formed, but details will be described later.

349(d), FIG. 349(e), and FIG. 349(f) show tornado image A, tornado image B, and tornado image C.
Each tornado image contains three tornadoes. The positions where these three tornadoes are displayed correspond to the positions where the left-center right decorative pattern is displayed. Further, the tornado images increase in size in the order of tornado image A, tornado image B, and tornado image C.
A tornado image may be displayed when a reach state is formed, but details will be described later.

Performance patterns 1 to 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 350 and 351. It should be noted that the variable display time of the decorative symbols in each performance pattern is 10 seconds, and the fixed stop period of the decorative symbols is 0.5 seconds.
In addition, a total of 7 types of decorative patterns with numbers 1 to 7 can be displayed, and during variable display, they are displayed cyclically in order from the decorative pattern with the number 1. Ru.
Furthermore, although FIG. 352 and the like show an example in which the number of pending decorative symbols immediately before the start of variation is 3, the pending number may be any one from 1 to 4. In addition, the martial artist character standby pending image, which is a pending image based on the result of the pre-reading process, is displayed in the first pending display area, but the martial artist character standby pending image is displayed only at the start of winning or when a new This is the start of the variable display. Therefore, a martial artist character standby pending image may be displayed in the second pending display area to the fourth pending display area. In this case, display processing is performed in which the martial artist character standby pending image moves leftward to the adjacent pending display area at the same timing as the new variable display starts.
Depending on the type of production pattern, the timing at which the left decorative pattern, right decorative pattern, and middle decorative pattern change from a state in which they are displayed fluctuating at high speed to a state in which they are displayed fluctuating at low speed, or a temporary stop from a state in which they are fluctuating and displaying at low speed. The timing of display, whether or not to generate a reach state, whether or not to switch the background image, whether or not to hide the current pending image and standby pending image, the timing to hide, etc. are different. .

Effect pattern 1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 350(a) and FIG. 352.
At timing t0, the variable display is started, and all the decorative symbols are displayed in a high speed variable manner until timing t6. FIG. 352(a) shows the display mode in the display area before the start of variable display. As shown in the figure, a normal background image A is displayed as the background image. Further, as described above, the number of pending items at this time is three. A martial artist character standby pending image is displayed in the first pending display area. In addition, a white circular normal standby image is displayed in the second hold display area and the third hold display area. Whether or not the martial artist character standby image is to be displayed is determined based on the result of the prefetch process.

FIG. 352(b) shows a display mode at a predetermined timing during a period from timing t0 when variable display is started to timing t6 when the left decorative pattern is displayed at low speed. During this period, all decorative patterns are displayed in a rapidly changing manner. Furthermore, a currently reserved image of a martial artist character is displayed as a currently reserved image. At the same time as the variable display starts, the image that was displayed as the martial artist character standby image moves to the left within the display area and gradually increases in size, and then stops at approximately the center in the left and right direction and starts fighting. Displayed as a house character current pending image.

During the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the left decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner at a low speed. FIG. 352(c) shows a state in which the left decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner at a low speed.

At timing t7, the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed. Further, in the period from timing t7 to timing t8, the right decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner at a low speed. FIG. 352(d) shows a state in which the left decorative pattern with the number 2 is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the right decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner at a low speed.

At timing t8, the right decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed. Further, during the period from timing t8 to timing t9, the medium decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner at a low speed. FIG. 352(e) shows a state in which the right decorative pattern with the number 2 is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the middle decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner at a low speed. Note that here, the number attached to the left decorative pattern and the number attached to the right decorative pattern are the same number (number "2"), and a reach state has occurred.

At timing t9, the medium decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed. FIG. 352(f) shows a state in which the medium decorative pattern with the number 3 is temporarily stopped and displayed.
In this case, the combination of numbers attached to the temporarily stopped decorative symbols is "232", indicating that the result of the variable display is a reach loss.

At timing t10, all decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and the stopped display continues until timing t10.5. In this case, the combination of numbers attached to the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed is "232", indicating that the result of the variable display is a reach loss.
Furthermore, at timing t10, the display of the currently pending image of the martial artist character ends. Alternatively, at timing t10, the display of the martial artist character current pending image starts to end, and by timing t10.5, the display of the martial artist character currently pending image is finished, for example. The display may increase the transparency of the character, or a predetermined display image (for example, an image of smoke) may be displayed so as to overlap the current pending image of the martial artist character. Note that a similar mode can be adopted when hiding the currently pending image of the martial artist character in production patterns 2 to 5. FIG. 352(g) shows a display state when all decorative patterns are stopped and displayed.
After timing t10.5, a new variable display is started.

In the example of production described above, an example was shown in which the variable display result stops in the form of a reach loss, but if the numbers attached to the left and right decorative symbols are different numbers, the reach state may not be formed. Also, after the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and a ready-to-reach state is formed, at timing t9, a medium decorative symbol with the same number as the left and right decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped. . Thereafter, at timing t10, all the numbers attached to the decorative symbols on the left-center right side are stopped and displayed as the same number, indicating that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. In this case, a jackpot game state (strictly speaking, a jackpot opening performance that suggests the start of a jackpot game) occurs from timing t10.5.

In addition, in this embodiment, when decorative patterns are displayed in a high-speed variable manner, the decorative patterns are scrolled and displayed by 10 patterns per second.
Further, when the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner at a low speed, the decorative symbols are scrolled and displayed by three symbols per second.
Further, when the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner at a very low speed (details will be described later in presentation pattern 2), the decorative symbols are scrolled by one symbol per second and displayed.

Note that when decorative patterns are displayed in a high-speed variable manner, it becomes difficult or impossible to identify the type of decorative pattern (the type of number attached to the decorative pattern).
On the other hand, when the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner at a low or extremely low speed, it becomes possible to easily identify the type of the decorative pattern (the type of number attached to the decorative pattern).
Note that the type of decorative pattern (the type of number attached to the decorative pattern) is better in the case where the decorative pattern is displayed in a slow and variable manner and the case in which the decorative pattern is displayed in a very slow and variable manner. Can be easily identified.

Next, effect pattern 2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 350(b) and FIG. 353.
It should be noted that since the performance mode from timing t0 to timing t6 is the same as the performance pattern 1, only the illustration will be explained for the sake of simplicity. Similar to FIG. 352(a), FIG. 353(a) shows a display mode before variable display starts. Further, FIG. 353(b) shows a state in which variable display has started and all decorative symbols are being displayed in variable fashion at high speed, similarly to FIG. 352(b).

During the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the left and right decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner at a low speed. FIG. 353(c) shows the fluctuating display mode of decorative symbols during this period. As shown in the figure, the left and right decorative patterns have the same number (specifically, the left decorative pattern has a "7", the right decorative pattern has a "7", and the "1" The left decorative pattern with "1" attached thereto and the right decorative pattern with "1" attached thereto are displayed in a fluctuating manner in a manner that they scroll synchronously at the same speed.

At timing t7, the left and right decorative patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed. Since the left and right decorative symbols are displayed in synchronized variation, they will always be displayed in a ready-to-reach state at the time of a temporary stop. Further, at timing t7, the medium decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner at a very low speed (scrolling by one pattern per second). Furthermore, instead of the normal background image A, the ready-to-reach background image A may be displayed. FIG. 353(d) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t9, the medium decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed. FIG. 353(e) shows a state in which the medium decorative pattern with the number 3 is temporarily stopped and displayed.
In this case, the combination of numbers attached to the temporarily stopped decorative symbols is "232", indicating that the result of the variable display is a reach loss.

At timing t10, all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and the stopped display continues until timing t10.5. In this case, the combination of numbers attached to the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed is "232", indicating that the result of the variable display is a reach loss. Furthermore, at timing t10, the display of the currently pending image of the martial artist character ends. Further, in the period from timing t10 to timing t10.5, the normal background image A is displayed as the background image. FIG. 353(f) shows a display state when all decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.
After timing t10.5, a new variable display is started.

In production pattern 2, a ready-to-reach state always occurs. In the display example shown in FIG. 353, the final result is a reach loss, but if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, at timing t9, a medium decorative symbol with the same number as the left and right decorative symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed. Thereafter, during a period from timing t10 to timing t10.5, decorative symbols with the same numbers are stopped and displayed as decorative symbols at the center-right of the left.

Next, effect pattern 3 will be explained with reference to FIG. 350(c) and FIG. 354. It should be noted that since the performance mode other than the period from timing t7 to timing t9 is the same as the performance pattern 2, only the explanation of the figure will be given for the sake of simplicity. Similar to FIG. 353(a), FIG. 354(a) shows a display mode before variable display starts. Further, FIG. 354(b) shows a state in which the variable display has started and all the decorative symbols are being displayed in a variable manner at high speed, similarly to FIG. 353(b). Moreover, FIG. 354(c) shows a state in which the same decorative patterns are scrolled synchronously as left and right decorative patterns similarly to FIG. 353(c).

In production pattern 3, the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed at timing t7, but the middle decorative symbols are also displayed in high-speed fluctuations during the period from timing t7 to timing t8. FIG. 354(d) shows the display state at this time.

Next, during a period from timing t8 to timing t9, the medium decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner at a low speed. FIG. 354(e) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t9, the medium decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed. FIG. 354(f) shows a state in which the medium decorative pattern with the number 3 is temporarily stopped and displayed.

At timing t10, all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and the stopped display continues until timing t10.5. In this case, the combination of numbers attached to the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed is "232", indicating that the result of the variable display is a reach loss. Furthermore, at timing t10, the display of the currently pending image of the martial artist character ends. Further, in the period from timing t10 to timing t10.5, the normal background image A is displayed as the background image. FIG. 354(f) shows a display state when all decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.
After timing t10.5, a new variable display is started.

In production pattern 3, a ready-to-reach state always occurs. In the display example shown in FIG. 354, the final result is a reach loss, but if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, at timing t9, a medium decorative symbol with the same number as the left and right decorative symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed. Thereafter, during a period from timing t10 to timing t10.5, decorative symbols with the same numbers are stopped and displayed as decorative symbols at the center-right of the left.

In the period from timing t7 to timing t10 in production pattern 2 or production pattern 3, an embodiment has been shown in which the reach background image A is displayed instead of the normal background image A. However, in the period from timing t7 to timing t10, the background The normal background image A may be displayed as is without changing the image. In addition, in this case, the expectation level when the reach background image A, which is not displayed when the decorative pattern is not changing, is displayed instead of the normal background image A, is calculated based on the expectation level when the background image A is displayed in place of the normal background image A. It is recommended that the expected level be higher than the expected level when displayed as is. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the background image changes when the reach state occurs, and when the background image changes, it is possible to give the player great excitement and reach You can liven up the situation.

Effect pattern 4 (“Character current hold surprise effect”) will be explained with reference to FIG. 350(d), FIG. 351, and FIGS. 355 to 357. It should be noted that since the performance mode from timing t0 to timing t1 is the same as the performance pattern 1, only the illustration will be explained for the sake of simplicity.
Further, FIG. 351(a) is a time chart showing the fluctuation state of the decorative pattern on the left center right during the period from timing t8 to timing t10 when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. Moreover, FIG. 351(b) is a time chart showing the fluctuation state of the decorative symbol on the left center right during the period from timing t8 to timing t10 when the result of the special lottery is a loss.
Similar to FIG. 352(a), FIG. 355(a) shows the display mode before the variable display starts. Further, FIG. 355(b) shows a state in which the variable display has started and all the decorative symbols are being displayed in a variable manner at high speed, similarly to FIG. 352(b).

In production pattern 4, a monster character image is displayed at timing t1. Further, an "!" mark (exclamation mark) indicating that the martial artist character has noticed that the monster character has appeared is displayed at the upper left of the martial artist character's current pending image.
FIG. 355(c) shows the display state at this time.

From timing t1 to timing t2, the currently held image of the martial artist character runs away to the left within the display area, moves from the left end of the display area to outside the display area, and the display ends.
FIG. 355(d) shows a state in which the currently held image of the martial artist character is on the run. Further, FIG. 355(e) shows a state in which the display of the currently reserved image of the martial artist character has been completed.

At timing t4, the miasma image A is displayed in front of the monster character image. Furthermore, at timing t6, the miasma image B is displayed in front of the monster character image.
FIG. 355(f) shows a state in which the miasma image A is displayed at timing t4. Further, FIG. 355(g) shows a state in which the miasma image B is displayed at timing t6.
Note that the miasma image may be displayed more dynamically. For example, a video may be displayed in front of the monster character image in which a small amount of miasma is exhaled from the monster character's mouth and the miasma gradually increases in size over two seconds.

During the period from timing t7 to timing t8, the decorative pattern on the left center right is displayed in a variable manner at a low speed. Each pattern is scrolled and displayed in synchronization at the same speed, but at this time, the left and right decorative patterns are displayed with the same numbers, and the middle decorative pattern is displayed with the same numbers attached to the left and right decorative patterns. is displayed with the previous number in the order of fluctuation display.
FIG. 355(h) shows a decorative pattern being displayed in a variable manner at a low speed. The combination of "171" and "212" is shown in the figure as a combination of the left-center right decorative patterns that are displayed synchronously.

At timing t8, the decorative symbols that have been scrolling synchronously are temporarily stopped and displayed. FIGS. 356(a) and 357(a) show a state in which the decorative patterns on the left center right are temporarily stopped and displayed in combination with "212". Note that the large displayed miasma image gives the player the perception that the left-center right decorative pattern has been stopped, so the display mode in which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped can be more interesting.

At timing t8.1, the master character image is displayed at the lower right of the display area. Note that the master character is set to be the master of the martial artist character. Further, at timing t8.1, the display priority of the decorative pattern and the monster character image is changed. Until timing t8.1, the display priority of the decorative pattern is higher than that of the monster character image, and after timing t8.1, the display priority of the monster character image is set higher than that of the decorative pattern. Note that the display of the miasma image ends at the same time as the display priority is switched. Note that the display priority of the master character is set higher than that of decorative patterns and monster character images.
356(b) and 357(b) show a display state in which the master character image is displayed at timing t8.1 and the display priorities of the monster character image and the decorative pattern are switched.

Next, at timing t8.5, the master character attacks (kicks) the monster character. As a result of the master character's attack, the monster character rotates counterclockwise, tilts, and appears slightly smaller. This display continues until timing t9. FIG. 356(c) and FIG. 357(c) show the display state at this time.

Although FIGS. 356(a) to 356(c) and FIGS. 357(a) to 357(c) show the same display mode, FIGS. 351(a) and 356(d) to FIG. The display mode when the special lottery result is a jackpot will be explained with reference to (f), and the display mode when the special lottery result is a jackpot will be explained with reference to FIGS. 351(b) and 357(d) to FIG. The display mode in this case will be explained.

The display mode when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot will be explained with reference to FIGS. 351(a) and 356(d) to 356(f).
At timing t9, the master character returns to the lower right position of the display area, and the monster character is displayed even smaller than when it was attacked by the master character. Note that the monster character eventually moves off the screen from the left side of the display area, disappears, and becomes invisible.
FIG. 356(d) shows the display state at timing t9.1.

As shown in FIG. 351(a), from timing t9.4 to timing t9.6, the middle decorative symbol moves by one symbol. As a medium decorative pattern, the decorative pattern with the number "1" was temporarily stopped, but in this case, by moving one pattern, the decorative pattern with the number "2" is temporarily stopped. will be displayed. As the middle decorative pattern shifts by one pattern and temporarily stops, all the numbers attached to the left-center right decorative pattern become "2", indicating to the player that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot ( period from timing t9.6 to timing t10).
FIG. 356(e) shows a display state in which the middle decorative pattern is moving.

During the period from timing t10 to timing t10.5, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. During this period, all the numbers attached to the decorative patterns on the left-center right that are stopped and displayed are "2", indicating to the player that the result of the special lottery was a jackpot.
FIG. 356(f) shows a state in which decorative patterns are stopped and displayed.

The display mode when the special lottery result is a loss will be explained with reference to FIG. 351(b) and FIG. 357(d) to FIG. 357(f). Note that, as shown in FIG. 351(b), the decorative pattern at the center right of the left continues to be in a temporarily stopped state during the period from timing t8 to timing t10.
At timing t9, the monster character returns to its original position and size and is displayed. Further, the master character is thrown away by the monster character and rotates towards the lower right position of the display area. The master character eventually moves from the bottom right of the display area to the outside of the screen and disappears, making it no longer visible.
FIG. 357(d) shows the display state at timing t9.1.

At timing t9.5, the display priority of the decorative pattern becomes higher than the display priority of the monster character image. As a result, the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the monster character image, and the player can clearly see that the numbers attached to the decorative pattern on the left-center right are displayed in the combination of "212". This indicates to the player that the result of the special lottery is a loss.
FIG. 357(e) shows a display state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the monster character image.

During the period from timing t10 to timing t10.5, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. During this period, the numbers attached to the decorative symbols on the left-center right that are stopped and displayed are the combination of "212", indicating to the player that the result of the special lottery was a loss.
FIG. 357(f) shows a state where the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed.

In production pattern 4, until the decorative pattern temporarily stops, the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the monster character image, and at the timing when the decorative pattern temporarily stops (timing t8), the monster character is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. Displaying an image. In this case, the impact of displaying the monster character image can be further enhanced. On the other hand, the visibility of the decorative pattern is hindered. Therefore, for example, without changing the display priority, the transparency of the decorative pattern can be changed from opaque to semi-transparent, and the monster character displayed on the back side can be seen through the decorative pattern displayed on the foreground. The image may be made visible. Alternatively, by displaying only the numbers attached to the decorative pattern in an opaque manner without changing the display priority, and making the other area, the rectangular part that makes up the decorative pattern, completely transparent, The visibility of the monster character image may be increased.

Next, effect pattern 5 will be explained with reference to FIG. 350(e) and FIG. 358. Note that since the performance mode from timing t0 to timing t5 is the same as that of performance pattern 3, only the illustration will be explained for the sake of simplicity. Similar to FIG. 354(a), FIG. 358(a) shows the display mode before the variable display starts. Further, FIG. 358(b) shows a state in which variable display has started and all decorative symbols are being displayed in a variable manner at high speed, similarly to FIG. 354(b).

During the period from timing t5 to timing t6, the left and right decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner at a low speed. FIG. 358(c) shows the fluctuating display mode of decorative patterns during this period. As shown in the figure, the left and right decorative patterns have the same number (specifically, the left decorative pattern has a "7", the right decorative pattern has a "7", and the "1" The left decorative pattern with "1" attached thereto and the right decorative pattern with "1" attached thereto are displayed in a fluctuating manner in a manner that they scroll synchronously at the same speed.

At timing t6, the left and right decorative patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed. Since the left and right decorative symbols are displayed in synchronized variation, they will always be displayed in a ready-to-reach state at the time of a temporary stop. The medium decorative pattern is displayed in a rapidly changing manner. Moreover, in place of the normal background image A, the ready-to-reach background image B is displayed. Further, the current pending image and the standby pending image are in a non-display state. FIG. 358(d) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t7, the medium decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner at a very low speed (scrolling by one symbol per second). FIG. 358(e) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t9, the medium decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed. FIG. 358(f) shows a state in which the medium decorative pattern with the number 3 is temporarily stopped and displayed.

At timing t10, all decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and the stopped display continues until timing t10.5. In this case, the combination of numbers attached to the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed is "232", indicating that the result of the variable display is a reach loss. Furthermore, at timing t10, the display of the standby pending image is restarted. Further, in the period from timing t10 to timing t10.5, the normal background image A is displayed as the background image. FIG. 358(g) shows a display state when all decorative patterns are stopped and displayed.
After timing t10.5, a new variable display is started.

In production pattern 5, a ready-to-win state always occurs. In the display example shown in FIG. 358, the final result is a reach loss, but if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, at timing t9, a medium decorative symbol with the same number as the left and right decorative symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed. During the period from timing t10 to timing t10.5, decorative symbols with the same numbers are stopped and displayed as decorative symbols in the middle right of the left.

In effect pattern 5, at the same time as the ready-to-reach state is formed, the ready-to-reach background image B is displayed, and the current pending image and the standby pending image are hidden. In addition, the medium decorative pattern is maintained in a state where it is displayed in a high-speed fluctuation manner, and does not immediately change to a state in which it is displayed in a low-speed fluctuation state. Therefore, the visibility of the ready-to-reach background image B that has just been displayed can be sufficiently ensured.

According to the "Character Present Suspended Surprise Effect" executed in Production Pattern 4, when a monster character appears, the Character Present Suspended Image is surprised, moves outside the display area, and is no longer displayed in the display area. It is possible to provide players with new entertainment that is not available in other countries. On the other hand, the pending images in the first to fourth pending display areas do not stop being displayed, so it is not difficult to check the number of pending images.
In addition, the currently held image not only functions to simply indicate the level of expectation during variable display, but also displays the currently held image displayed in character mode as if it were running away from other characters (monster characters). This allows the currently held image to be used as part of an effect display using characters.
Furthermore, since the monster character is displayed in a large size in front of the normal background image A, there is no need to switch the background image, and therefore the display process can be simplified.

In production pattern 4, the normal background image is not changed to the background image for reach time (a part of the normal background image is recognized), but the size of the monster character image is changed by the game board side production display device. By having a size that occupies most of the 1600 display area (at least 1/2 or more of the size), there is no need to change the background image, reducing the cost and storage space required to create a dedicated background image. This makes it possible to reduce the cost of manufacturing gaming machines.

In addition, the selection rate of each of performance patterns 1 to 5, which are selected by drawing a lottery to determine whether or not it is a jackpot, is that performance pattern 1 is likely to be selected at the highest rate, followed by performance pattern 2. easy to be Effect pattern 3 is less likely to be selected than effect patterns 1 and 2, but more likely to be selected than effect patterns 4 and 5. The effect pattern 4 may be more easily selected than the effect pattern 5, may be less likely to be selected than the effect pattern 5, or may be the same. It is said that the higher the selection rate, the lower the expectation level for a jackpot. Note that the selection rate is synonymous with the appearance rate (probability of being displayed).

In addition, in production pattern 4, the monster character image is displayed in the area where the currently reserved image of the martial artist character is displayed, which increases the impact of the monster character being displayed, making it possible to make the character more reachable. can enliven.

Although the embodiment regarding the demonstration period has been described with reference to FIG. Displayed in .

Comparing production pattern 3 and production pattern 4, in production pattern 3, characters are not displayed, so depending on whether or not the background image is changed, it is clearly communicated to the player whether expectations are high or not. be able to.
On the other hand, in the case of production pattern 4, the characters (monster character and master character) are displayed in a form that occupies most of the display area, so there is no need to change the background image, and there is no need to change the background image (monster character and master character). A production in which a character and a master character fight) can be performed without changing the normal background image. Furthermore, since the normal background image is displayed as is, there is no need to create a dedicated reach background image, and the cost associated with image development and the storage capacity required for image storage can be reduced.

It is preferable to increase the expectation level in the case where the effect pattern 3 is executed and the normal background image is displayed and the ready state is reached, and the case where the effect pattern 4 is executed.
Further, it is preferable to increase the expectation level in the case where the effect pattern 4 is executed and the case where the effect pattern 3 is executed and the ready-to-reach state is reached with the background image displayed at the time of the ready-to-win.

In addition, in production pattern 3, during the time when the background image is displayed and the decorative symbol is in the ready-to-reach state (3 seconds from timing t7 to timing t10), in production pattern 4, the decorative symbol is in the ready-to-reach state. It is longer than the forming time (2 seconds from timing t8 to timing t10). Further, as described above, it is preferable to increase the expectation level in the case where the effect pattern 4 is executed and the case where the effect pattern 3 is executed and the ready-to-reach state is reached with the background image displayed at the time of the ready-to-reach.
In this way, by lengthening the execution time of performances with high expectations for a jackpot, it is possible to provide the player with a feeling of expectation for a jackpot for a long time.

Further, when comparing the decorative symbols in performance pattern 3 and the decorative symbols in performance pattern 4, the left and right decorative symbols indicate a reach state in both performance patterns. Production pattern 3 is based on the fluctuation of the decorative pattern (from high-speed fluctuation) to determine at which number the inner decorative pattern (decorative pattern that does not indicate a reach state) stops while the left and right decorative symbols indicate a reach state. On the other hand, in production pattern 4, a monster character is displayed a short time after the start of the variation (timing t1), and the monster character is defeated. It is a performance that suggests the outcome of winning or losing depending on whether or not it is true. In production pattern 4, the left and right decorative patterns indicate the reach state, and the decorative pattern inside also shows a decorative pattern with a different number from the left and right decorative patterns, and all the decorative patterns swing and fluctuate (temporary stop display). It is carried out. In this way, by oscillating all the decorative symbols and displaying combinations of decorative symbols that are not jackpots, the player can focus on the fight against the monster character rather than the decorative symbols. If the decorative pattern of production pattern 4 is displayed like the decorative pattern of production pattern 3 (in a production that shows which number the medium decorative pattern stops at), should I pay attention to the decorative pattern? Players are confused as to whether they should pay attention to the battle between players, and the problem arises that they end the highly anticipated reach performance without increasing their interest.
In addition, in production pattern 4, if you lose the battle with the monster character (if the winning result suggests that you are a loser), if you display a combination of losing symbols after losing the battle with the monster character, Although it is necessary to appeal to the player multiple times that the game has failed, and there is a risk of hurting the player's feelings, such a risk can be avoided by configuring the game as in performance pattern 4. In addition, displaying a losing symbol combination after losing a battle with a monster character will take up a lot of time, but by reducing the time it takes, the machine becomes more efficient in terms of fluctuations, which in turn increases sales. It also leads to improvement.

Production pattern 4 is a production pattern that can be executed only in a variable display in which a character current pending image is displayed. In other words, effect pattern 4 is never executed in a variable display in which the current pending character image is not displayed.
When it is determined based on the pre-reading process that the character standby pending image is to be displayed, production pattern 4 is used as a production pattern executed at the start of a variable display in which the character standby pending image is displayed as a character current pending image variable display. may be selected.
Alternatively, when the effect pattern 4 is selected as the effect pattern to be executed at the start of the variable display, the white circular currently pending image may be changed to the character currently pending image.

Furthermore, depending on the display mode of the character standby pending image and the character currently pending image, the degree of expectation that the fluctuation result of the variable display corresponding to the character standby pending image and the character currently pending image will be a jackpot may be suggested. For example, three types of colors, white, red, and gold, may be provided as the colors of the torso worn by the martial artist character, and the expectation level may be increased in the order of white, red, and gold.
Furthermore, as described above, the circular current pending image and standby pending image can also be colored white, blue, green, red, gold, or rainbow-colored. Alternatively, the expectation level of the variable display corresponding to the currently held image or the standby held image may be increased in the order of white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow color.
Note that although the martial artist character is taken as an example of the character displayed as the character standby image or the character current image, other characters may be used. For example, characters such as the warrior characters, samurai characters, and wizard characters shown with reference to FIGS. 338 to 340 may be displayed as character standby images or character current reservation images. Furthermore, the level of expectation may vary depending on the type of character. For example, the level of expectation may increase in the order of martial artist character, warrior character, samurai character, and wizard character.
Note that the degree of expectation is indicated by the same color (white, red, gold) for the circular current pending image or standby pending image and the character standby pending image or character currently pending image, but in this case, It is preferable that the character standby pending image and the character current pending image have higher expectations. For example, between a red character currently pending image and a red circular currently pending image, it is preferable that the former has a higher expectation level.
In production pattern 4, the display of the current pending image ends immediately after the start of the fluctuation, but if the display mode of the current pending image (for example, three colors of white, red, and gold) indicates the degree of expectation. In this case, the player needs to keep a close eye on which level of expectation the player has, and it is possible to create a sense of tension in the game immediately after the start of the variable display.

Note that the circular current pending image or standby pending image may be changed to a character standby pending image or a character currently pending image at a predetermined timing. For example, at the start of a new variable display, a circular standby image may be changed to a character standby image.
Similarly, a circular current pending image may be changed to a character current pending image. In this case, it is necessary to change the circular current pending image to the character current pending image before one second has elapsed since the start of the variable display (that is, before the monster character image is displayed).
In addition, when changing a circular standby pending image or a circular current pending image to a character standby pending image or a character currently pending image, it is preferable to change the same color or a color with a higher expectation level. For example, a white circular standby image may be changed to a white character standby image. Alternatively, the red circular current pending image may be changed to a gold character current pending image.

In addition, in the case of production pattern 4, some kind of character currently pending image must be displayed as the current pending image at the timing when the monster character image is displayed, but production patterns 1 to 3, and production pattern 5 In this case, a currently reserved image other than the character currently reserved image (for example, a circular reserved image) may be displayed as the currently reserved image.

In the embodiments shown with reference to FIG. 354 and FIG. 358 (effect pattern 3, effect pattern 5), the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the reach state at timing t7.0 and timing t6.0. A modified embodiment in which the symbol forming a ready-to-reach state during a temporary stop is changed from a normal symbol to a variable probability symbol will be described with reference to FIGS. 349 and 359 to 361.

FIG. 359(a) is a time chart (from timing t5.0 to timing t8.0) in an embodiment in which the symbol forming the ready-to-reach state is changed from the normal symbol to the variable probability symbol in production pattern 3. . Further, FIG. 360 shows an example of displaying a predetermined timing in this time chart.
In this embodiment, during the period from timing t7.0 to timing t7.2, the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in a ready-to-reach state, and the middle decorative symbol is displayed variably at high speed. FIG. 360(a) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t7.2, a lightning image is displayed in the display area. The type of lightning image displayed is one of lightning image A to lightning image C. The decorative pattern is hidden at the same time as the lightning image is displayed. This display state continues until timing t7.8.
FIG. 360(b) shows a display state in which lightning image A is displayed. FIG. 360(c) shows a display state in which lightning image B is displayed. FIG. 360(d) shows a display state in which the lightning image C is displayed.

At timing t7.8, the display of any one of the lightning images A to C is finished, the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the reach state by the normal symbol or the variable probability symbol, and the medium decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner at high speed. The state will be as follows.
FIG. 360(e) shows a display state in which the normal symbol is displayed again as a symbol forming a ready-to-reach state. FIG. 360(f) shows a display state in which variable probability symbols are displayed instead of normal symbols as symbols forming a ready-to-reach state.

At timing t7.2, any one of lightning image A to lightning image C is displayed, but depending on the type of lightning image displayed, it is suggested that the symbol forming the reach state will change from a normal symbol to a variable symbol. do. Specifically, the degree of expectation that the normal symbol will change to the variable probability symbol is set to be high in the order of lightning image A, lightning image B, and lightning image C.
For example, when lightning image A is displayed, the expectation that the normal symbol will change to a variable probability symbol is 10%, when lightning image B is displayed, the expectation that the regular symbol will change to variable probability symbol is 20%, and the lightning image The degree of expectation that the normal symbol will change to the variable probability symbol when C is displayed may be set to 50%. Alternatively, the expectation level for a jackpot may increase in the order of lightning image A, lightning image B, and lightning image C.

FIG. 359(b) is a time chart (from timing t5.0 to timing t8.0) in an embodiment in which the symbol forming the ready-to-reach state is changed from the normal symbol to the variable probability symbol in production pattern 5. . Further, FIG. 361 shows an example of displaying a predetermined timing in this time chart.
In this embodiment, during the period from timing t6.0 to timing t6.2, the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in a ready-to-reach state, and the middle decorative symbol is displayed variably at high speed. FIG. 361(a) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t6.2, a tornado image is displayed in the display area. The type of tornado image to be displayed is one of tornado images A to C. At the same time as the tornado image is displayed, the decorative pattern is hidden. This display state continues until timing t6.8.
FIG. 361(b) shows a display state in which tornado image A is displayed. FIG. 361(c) shows a display state in which tornado image B is displayed. FIG. 361(d) shows a display state in which tornado image C is displayed.

At timing t6.8, the display of any one of the tornado images A to C is completed, and the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the reach state by the normal symbol or the variable probability symbol, and the medium decorative symbol is displayed in a high-speed variable manner. The state will be as follows.
FIG. 361(e) shows a display state in which the normal symbol is displayed again as a symbol forming a ready-to-reach state. FIG. 361(f) shows a display state in which variable probability symbols are displayed instead of normal symbols as symbols forming a ready-to-reach state.

At timing t6.2, any one of tornado images A to C is displayed, but depending on the type of tornado image displayed, it suggests the degree of expectation that the symbol forming the reach state will change from a normal symbol to a variable probability symbol. do. Specifically, the degree of expectation that the normal symbol will change to the variable probability symbol is set high in the order of tornado image A, tornado image B, and tornado image C.
For example, when tornado image A is displayed, the expectation that the normal symbol will change to a variable probability symbol is 10%, and when tornado image B is displayed, the expectation that the regular symbol will change to a variable probability symbol is 20%, and the tornado image The degree of expectation that the normal symbol will change to the variable probability symbol when C is displayed may be set to 50%. Alternatively, the expectation level for a jackpot may increase in the order of tornado image A, tornado image B, and tornado image C.

According to the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 359 to 361, even if the normal symbol is in the ready-to-reach state, an effect in which a lightning image or a tornado image is displayed is executed, and the state changes to the ready-to-reach state with the variable probability symbol. In particular, it can create a sense of expectation among players.
In addition, in the example shown below, the example may be explained by regarding the modification shown with reference to FIG. 359(a) and FIG. 360 as part of the effect pattern 3. That is, when performance pattern 3 is executed, if no lightning image is displayed, any one of lightning images A to C may be displayed.
Similarly, the embodiment may be described by regarding the modified examples shown with reference to FIGS. 359(b) and 361 as part of production pattern 5. That is, when effect pattern 5 is executed, if no tornado image is displayed, any one of the tornado images may be displayed.

In addition, when a ready-to-win state is formed by a variable probability pattern, it is preferable that the effect of displaying a lightning image or a tornado image is not executed. Alternatively, an effect may be executed to display a lightning image or a tornado image so that the decorative pattern can be changed to a special decorative pattern (for example, "7") that has a high expectation of a jackpot among the variable probability patterns.

An embodiment in which the effect pattern 3 is modified is shown with reference to FIG. 359(a) and FIG. 360. In this embodiment, the decorative pattern is not displayed during the period when the lightning image is displayed (0.6 seconds from timing t7.2 to timing t7.8).
On the other hand, in production pattern 4, the decorative pattern may similarly be hidden during the period when the master character attacks the monster character (0.5 seconds from timing t8.5 to timing t9.0).
In this way, when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the reach state or out-of-reach state, the decorative symbols are hidden for a predetermined period so that the player cannot recognize the decorative symbols, thereby preventing the player from reaching the reach state or out-of-reach state. Whether or not the decorative symbols forming the state will be promoted from normal symbols to variable patterns, and whether the numbers attached to the decorative symbols forming the reach state will be promoted to numbers with high expectations for a jackpot. At first, the player will be intrigued by the outcome of the battle between the characters (whether the medium decorative pattern will move and the result will indicate that a jackpot will occur), but once a predetermined amount of time has passed, Afterwards, the display of the decorative symbols is restarted and a predetermined result (whether or not you will be promoted or not, and whether or not it will be indicated that you will hit the jackpot) will be displayed, so the result will be advantageous to the player by the amount of teasing. It is possible to increase the joy that the player feels when the game becomes .

It should be noted that during the period in which the lightning image is displayed (0.6 seconds from timing t7.2 to timing t7.8) in the embodiment that is a modified version of production pattern 3, the master character in production pattern 4 attacks the monster character. Although the embodiment has been shown in which the decorative pattern is hidden during the period (0.5 seconds from timing t8.5 to timing t9.0), the display of a lightning strike image or the display of the master character attacking the monster character is not possible. The length of the period during which this is performed (that is, the length of the period during which the decorative pattern is hidden) can be set as appropriate.
For example, the period during which the master character attacks the monster character may be set to be longer than the period during which the lightning image is displayed. For example, the period during which the lightning image is displayed may be 0.5 seconds, and the period during which the master character is attacking the monster character may be 2 seconds. Since the expectation level for winning is higher in production pattern 4 than in production pattern 3, the length of the period in which decorative symbols are hidden in production pattern 4 (the period in which the monster character is attacked) is set to be different from production pattern 3. This may change by making the period longer than the period during which the decorative pattern is hidden (the period during which the lightning image is displayed) (a production pattern with high expectations will have a longer interval). It can provide a long-lasting sense of elation.
Further, the length of the period in which the lightning image is displayed and the period in which the master character attacks the monster character may be set to be the same length (for example, both are 1 second). By doing this, even in production pattern 3, which has lower expectations for a jackpot than production pattern 4, it is possible to create expectations for changes in the symbols (whether it is production pattern 3 or production pattern 4). (because the time between changes is the same).
Further, the period during which the lightning image is displayed may be set to be longer than the period during which the master character is attacking the monster character. For example, the period during which the lightning image is displayed may be 2 seconds, and the period during which the master character is attacking the monster character may be 0.5 seconds. Performance pattern 4, which has a higher level of expectation for a jackpot than performance pattern 3, can give a sense of surprise by shortening the time until the decorative pattern is redisplayed, and quickly increases expectations when the pattern changes. can be granted.

In addition, when the display of the lightning image in production pattern 3 ends and the left and right decorative patterns are displayed again, an example is shown in which the same decorative pattern as before the decorative pattern was hidden or a decorative pattern with different numbers is displayed. However, it is preferable that the proportion of displaying the same decorative pattern is set higher than that of displaying decorative patterns with different numbers.
Also, when displaying the same decorative pattern again, even if it is not completely the same before and after displaying it, for example, a decorative pattern that was composed of numbers and characters will only be numbers when displayed again. Or, when a decorative pattern that was composed of numbers and dynamic characters is redisplayed, it is composed of numbers and static characters, the size of the decorative pattern is different, or the font of the decorative pattern is different. Even if the numbers are the same but the appearance is different, it can be treated as the same (similar) decorative pattern.
In addition, in production pattern 4, all decorative patterns are given higher display priority than the master character and monster character, and when the master character and monster character are fighting (timing t8.1 to t9.0), The display mode may also be such that all the decorative patterns are visible. In that case, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, all the decorative symbols that are made visible are symbol combinations that correspond to the loss, so they will be displayed as confirmed, but if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot In this case, as shown in FIG. 356(e), the middle decorative pattern may be changed again to display a decorative pattern with the same number as the left and right decorative patterns, or all the decorative patterns may be changed again. However, if you want to change all the decorative symbols again, you must make sure to change the number of zeros (jackpot) of a different decorative symbol (for example, in Fig. It is preferable to display a symbol combination corresponding to For example, instead of the number "2", the number "3" or "7" may be displayed. By doing this, it is possible to provide a sense of expectation regarding the probability change.

During the period (from timing t7 to timing t10) in which the left and right decorative symbols of production pattern 3 are temporarily stopped, the display mode of the standby pending image may be changed based on the pre-reading process. For example, a white circular pending image displayed in the first pending display area may be changed to a red circular pending image.
On the other hand, in performance pattern 4, the expectation level for a jackpot is higher than in performance pattern 3, so the display mode of the standby pending image is You may choose not to change it. In addition, from timing t8 to timing t9, although the decorative symbols are displayed with a symbol combination corresponding to a loss, at timing t9, a winning/losing branch performance (a performance in which the master character wins or loses) starts. , the decorative pattern from timing t8 to timing t9 is synonymous with indicating a reach mode.
In this way, in production pattern 3, by making it possible for the display mode of the standby hold image to change, it is possible to change not only the result of the fluctuating display in the reach state, but also the change in the standby hold image. It can also increase expectations for hitting the jackpot.
On the other hand, in production pattern 4, by not changing the display mode of the standby pending image, it is possible to make the player concentrate on the result of the battle between the characters being displayed.

The display mode of the currently pending image may be changed during the period (from timing t0 to timing t7) until the left and right decorative symbols of production pattern 3 temporarily stop. For example, a white circular current pending image may be changed to a red circular current pending image. Alternatively, the white, circular current pending image may be changed to a current pending image of a martial artist character wearing a white waistcoat. Alternatively, the current pending image of a martial artist character wearing a white bodice may be changed to the current pending image of a martial artist character wearing a red bodice.
In the period (from timing t0 to timing t1) until the monster character image of production pattern 4 is displayed, the display mode of the currently pending image may be changed. For example, a white circular current pending image may be changed to a current pending image of a martial artist character wearing a white waistcoat. Alternatively, the current pending image of a martial artist character wearing a white bodice may be changed to the current pending image of a martial artist character wearing a red bodice. Additionally, a currently pending image of a martial artist character wearing a white bodice is displayed at timing t1, and changes from white to a currently pending image of a martial artist character wearing a red bodice by timing t2. You can do it like this. In such a case, the display mode of the currently held image will change while the martial artist character is moving (dynamic display); When changing the display mode of the pending image, a predetermined display image may be displayed for the current pending image. Note that this predetermined display image may also be moved in the same way as the character.
In addition, during the period until the left and right decorative symbols of production pattern 3 temporarily stop (from timing t0 to timing t7) and the period until the left center right decorative symbol of production pattern 4 temporarily stops (from timing t0 to timing t8). , the display mode of the standby pending image may be changed.
By changing the display mode of the current pending image and the standby pending image at a predetermined timing in this way, it is possible to increase expectations for the occurrence of a ready-to-reach state and for a change result in advance.

It is preferable that the rate at which the variable pattern that executes the effect pattern 3 is selected is higher than the rate at which the variable pattern that executes the effect pattern 4 is selected.
The long period of time in which the medium decorative symbols are displayed in high-speed, fluctuating fashion can give the player a sense of discomfort, and can make the player feel a sense of exhilaration, ``Isn't this a special performance?'' can.
Conversely, the rate at which the variable pattern that executes the effect pattern 3 is selected may be lower than the rate at which the variable pattern that executes the effect pattern 4 is selected.

When the rate at which the variable pattern that executes production pattern 3 is selected is higher than the rate at which the variable pattern that executes production pattern 4 is selected, the period until the left and right decorative symbols of production pattern 3 temporarily stop ( From timing t0 to timing t7), the rate at which the display mode of the currently held image is changed (the ratio here is based on all variable displays selected to execute effect pattern 3 as the denominator) is determined by the effect. During the period (from timing t0 to timing t1) until the monster character image of pattern 4 is displayed, the rate at which the display mode of the currently pending image is changed (the rate here refers to the rate at which execution of production pattern 4 is selected) (the denominator is all of the displayed fluctuations). By doing so, it is possible to make the player expect that effect pattern 4 will be executed when the display mode of the currently reserved image changes during the period from timing t0 to timing t1.
In addition, if the rate at which the variable pattern that executes production pattern 3 is selected is higher than the rate at which the variable pattern that executes production pattern 4 is selected, the decorative patterns on the left and right sides of production pattern 3 will be During the period (from timing t0 to timing t7), the rate at which the display mode of the currently held image is changed (the rate here is the denominator of all variable displays for which performance pattern 3 is selected to be executed) is , the rate at which the display mode of the currently pending image is changed during the period (from timing t0 to timing t1) until the monster character image of production pattern 4 is displayed (note that the ratio here refers to the rate at which production pattern 4 is executed. (with all of the selected variable displays as the denominator). By doing so, it is possible to make the player expect that the effect pattern 4 will be executed when the display mode of the current pending image does not change during the period from timing t0 to timing t1.

Either the period in which the left and right decorative symbols of production pattern 3 are temporarily stopped (from timing t7 to timing t10) or the period in which the left-center right decorative symbol of production pattern 4 is temporarily stopped (from timing t8 to timing t10) Since the timing is before and after the branching timing of the display indicating a win or loss, it is necessary for the player to concentrate on the win or loss. Assuming that there is a period in which the left and right decorative symbols of production pattern 3 are temporarily stopped (from timing t7 to timing t10) and a period in which the left center right decorative symbol of production pattern 4 is temporarily stopped (from timing t8 to timing t10). If the position of the standby image is set to a different position in the game, the player may be given the misunderstanding that the standby image may change or a predetermined effect may occur near the standby image, resulting in a loss of winnings. The problem arises that it becomes difficult to concentrate, but during the period when the left and right decorative symbols of production pattern 3 are temporarily stopped (from timing t7 to timing t10), and the left and center right decorative symbols of production pattern 4 are temporarily stopped. By making the standby image displayed at the same position during the period (from timing t8 to timing t10), this problem can be solved and the player can concentrate on winning or losing. can.

In the modified example of effect pattern 3 shown with reference to FIG. 359(a) and FIG. Depending on which of the three symbols it is, the degree of expectation that the normal symbol constituting the ready-to-win state will be promoted to the variable probability symbol (and the degree of expectation of the jackpot in production pattern 3) was indicated.
On the other hand, in production pattern 4, as shown in FIGS. 356(c) and 357(c), the master character performs a kick with only one foot, but there are cases where the master character performs a drop kick on the monster character with both feet. It may be set as such. Furthermore, in this case, the degree of expectation of winning against the monster character (that is, the degree of expectation of a jackpot) may be set higher than in the case of kicking with only one foot.
In this way, by making it possible to perform performances with different levels of expectation while the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the expectation of winning the jackpot can be increased. In addition, in the modified example of production pattern 3, the expectation level (and production pattern Since the expected level of the jackpot (in 3) changes, the player wishes to display a lightning image and wishes to display a lightning image with a high expectation level, whereas in production pattern 4, the user only wishes for a drop kick to be displayed with both feet. Since production pattern 4 has higher expectations for winning than production pattern 3, when multiple expectation level increasing productions can be displayed in production pattern 4, if an expectation level increasing production with a low expectation level is displayed, the expectation level will increase. In order to prevent interest from decreasing even though performance pattern 4 with a high level of performance is displayed, only one expectation level increasing performance is provided in performance pattern 4.

In addition, when the lightning image C is displayed, the normal symbol may always be changed to the variable probability symbol. Alternatively, when the lightning image C is displayed, although the normal symbol may or may not change from a variable probability symbol, the result of the variable display may always be a jackpot. Alternatively, when the lightning image C is displayed, it may always change from a normal symbol to a variable probability symbol, and the result of the variable display may always be a jackpot result.
Furthermore, when the master character performs a drop kick with both feet on the monster character, the master character may always win against the monster character (that is, the result of the variable display will always be a jackpot).

In both production pattern 3 and production pattern 4, a period in which the decorative pattern on the left center right is displayed in a high-speed fluctuating manner (a period in which it is not possible to determine whether it is production pattern 3 or production pattern 4 (period from timing t0 to timing t1) )), it may be possible to perform the same expectation level suggesting performance that suggests the expectation level of a jackpot. For example, as an effect suggesting the level of expectation, behind the decorative pattern, a samurai character image may appear from the right side of the display area and disappear to the left side for one second. Further, it is preferable that the expectation level of a jackpot when the samurai character image is displayed is higher than the expectation level of the jackpot when the samurai character image is not displayed.
In this way, by making it possible to execute the same expectation level suggestion performance that suggests the expectation level of a jackpot whether it is performance pattern 3 or performance pattern 4, it is possible to execute the same expectation level suggestion performance that suggests the expectation level of a jackpot when the expectation level suggestion performance is displayed. It is possible to make a player feel a sense of expectation that a performance pattern with a high degree of expectation will appear.

In addition, the rate at which the expectation level suggesting effect is executed in the effect pattern 3 (the ratio here is based on all the variable displays in which it is selected to execute the effect pattern 3) is the same as in the effect pattern 4. It may be higher than the rate at which the expectation level suggesting effect is executed (the rate referred to here is the denominator of all variable displays in which execution of the effect pattern 4 is selected). By doing this, when the expectation level suggestion effect is executed, effect pattern 3 will appear more often than effect pattern 4, but since effect pattern 3 has a higher appearance rate than effect pattern 4, By frequently executing the expectation level suggesting effect, it is possible to prevent the user from becoming bored at an early stage.
Alternatively, the rate at which the expectation level suggesting effect is executed in the effect pattern 3 (the ratio here is based on all the variable displays for which execution of the effect pattern 3 is selected as the denominator) is It may be lower than the rate at which the expectation level suggesting effect is executed (the rate referred to here is the denominator of all variable displays in which execution of the effect pattern 4 is selected). By doing this, it is possible to create expectations for the appearance of the performance pattern 4 when the expectation level suggesting performance is executed, so that interest can be increased just by executing the expectation level suggesting performance.

Although it has been shown that it is possible to execute performance patterns 1 to 5 with reference to FIG. Any one of pattern 5 may be made executable. Incidentally, since the variable display time of effect pattern 1 to effect pattern 5 is 10 seconds, the variable display time when the effect patterns can be executed continuously in this way is 20 seconds. Furthermore, if the performance patterns can be executed continuously in this way, there are 25 combinations.
In addition, when executing the production pattern consecutively, all decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed at the end of the first production pattern (period from timing t9 to timing t10) in the form of reach loss, but in the second production pattern. As soon as the game starts, all the decorative symbols will be displayed in a rapidly changing state, so even if a losing result is shown when the first performance pattern is executed, the second performance pattern will start and the result will be a jackpot. It is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that the game will happen.

Note that when performance pattern 4 is executed, the current pending image is not displayed, so after performance pattern 4 is executed, other performance patterns may not be executed. Alternatively, the display of the currently held image may be resumed at timing t10, and after effect pattern 4 is executed, another effect pattern may be executed.
Further, after the effect pattern 3 is executed, the effect pattern 4 may be executed continuously. Alternatively, after executing the effect pattern 4, the effect pattern 3 may be executed subsequently. Furthermore, in this case, the expectation level may be higher for the former or higher for the latter.

Regarding the level of expectation, the level of expectation is higher when a certain effect pattern is executed and then a second effect pattern is executed than when a certain effect pattern is executed once and ends. You can lower it or lower it.
For example, the expectation level when performance pattern 4 is executed after performance pattern 3 may be higher or lower than the expectation level when performance pattern 3 is executed.
Alternatively, the expectation level when the performance pattern 3 is executed after the performance pattern 4 is executed may be higher or lower than the expectation level when the performance pattern 4 is executed.

During the period (timing t7 to timing t10) in which the left and right decorative symbols of production pattern 3 are temporarily stopped, operation reception on the operation unit (eg, operation button 401, attack button 3710, etc.) may be enabled. For example, it is preferable to enable reception of operations on the operating unit during a period from timing t7.5 to timing t9.0, and to display an operating unit simulated image that simulates the enabled operating unit in the display area. Further, when an operation is performed on the operation unit, it is preferable to display a display indicating whether or not the result of the variable display is a jackpot (for example, display of characters such as "jackpot" or "loss"). Alternatively, instead of directly indicating the result of the variable display, a display indicating the level of expectation such as ``High level of expectation!'' or ``Low level of expectation!'' may be performed. Note that after these displays are performed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t10, and the fluctuating display results are shown to the player.
On the other hand, during the period (timing t8 to timing t10) in which the decorative pattern on the left center right of production pattern 4 is temporarily stopped, it is preferable not to enable operation reception on the operation unit (naturally, the operation unit simulated image (No display etc.)
According to such an embodiment, in the case of performance pattern 3, which has a relatively low level of expectation compared to performance pattern 4, the player can quickly find out whether or not it is a jackpot based on his or her own will, so It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player feels disgusted by being shown a highly anticipated performance for a long time.
On the other hand, in the case of performance pattern 4, which has a relatively high level of expectation compared to performance pattern 3, it is not possible to know whether it is a jackpot or not until the decorative symbols stop regardless of the player's intention. It is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation for the occurrence of a jackpot for a long period of time until the end of the variable display.

In the embodiment of the "hourglass holding change effect", it was shown that the effect decoration member may be driven in a predetermined manner (for example, moving or emitting light), but in this embodiment as well, the effect decoration member can be driven in a similar manner. The member may be driven. Note that the performance decorative member may be arranged between the panel board 1110 and the game board side performance display device 1600 in the front-rear direction as shown in FIG. 134. In addition, when viewed from the front, when the performance decoration member is in the standby position, it does not overlap with the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, and when the performance decoration member is in the moving position, the game board side performance It is preferable to overlap the display area of the display device 1600.
These decorative members may be driven even during the period (timing t7 to timing t10) in which the left and right decorative symbols of presentation pattern 3, which have relatively low expectations compared to presentation pattern 4, are temporarily stopped (timing t7 to timing t10). For example, by moving the performance decorative member from the standby position to the movement position during the period from timing t7 to timing t10, it is possible to enhance the fluctuating display. Note that the decorative member for presentation may be made to emit light. In this case, the performance decorative member may be brought into a light-emitting state at the standby position and then moved to the movement position while remaining in the light-emitting state. Alternatively, the light-off state may be moved to the movement position while the light-off state is maintained, and the light-off state may be changed to the light-emission state at the timing when the movement to the movement position is completed.
On the other hand, in the case of production pattern 4, which has a relatively high expectation compared to production pattern 3, during the period when the decorative pattern on the left center right of production pattern 4 is temporarily stopped (timing t8 to timing t10), By preventing the decorative member from moving from the standby position to the movement position, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the effect display (battle between characters) from being obstructed. Furthermore, although the performance decorative member may be moved from the standby position to the movement position before timing t8, it is desirable to move it to the standby position before timing t8. It should be noted that during a period (timing t8 to timing t10) in which the decorative pattern on the left-center right side of the presentation pattern 4 is temporarily stopped, the presentation decorative member may be made to emit light at the standby position.
Note that it is preferable to increase the level of expectation when the performance decoration member moves compared to when the performance decoration member does not move. Similarly, it is preferable to increase the level of expectation when the performance decoration member emits light compared to when the performance decoration member does not emit light.

During the period when the left and right decorative patterns of production pattern 3 are temporarily stopped (timing t7 to timing t10), in a situation where the normal background image is displayed as the background image, the first specific production sound is displayed as the background image as shown in FIG. 360. In a situation where the ready-to-reach background image A is displayed, a second specific effect sound different from the first specific effect sound may be output as BGM or SE. On the other hand, in the period when the decorative pattern on the left center right of production pattern 4 is temporarily stopped (timing t8 to timing t10), in a situation where the normal background image is displayed as the background image, the above-mentioned first specific production sound is Of course, no other performance sounds are output at all. Performance pattern 4 has higher expectations for winning than performance pattern 3, so it is possible to increase the tension by making it silent (However, if the game ball enters the starting slot in this silent situation, , the starting winning sound that is output when winning in the starting slot is output).

Next, the difference between the effect pattern 4 explained with reference to FIG. 350(d) and FIGS. 354 to 356 and the effect pattern 5 explained with reference to FIG. 350(e) and FIG. Differences from the above patterns) and modified examples of these performance patterns will be explained.

Comparing production pattern 4 and production pattern 5, in production pattern 5, characters are not displayed, so the background image is replaced with a special reach background (special background) that cannot be displayed when the decorative pattern is not changing. ), it is possible to clearly convey to the player that expectations are high.
On the other hand, in the case of production pattern 4, the characters (monster character and master character) are displayed in a form that occupies most of the display area, so there is no need to change the background image, and there is no need to change the background image (monster character and master character). A production in which a character and a master character fight) can be performed without changing the normal background image. Furthermore, since the normal background image is displayed as is, there is no need to create a dedicated reach background image, and the cost associated with image development and the storage capacity required for image storage can be reduced.

Note that the expectation level of the jackpot may be increased in the order of performance pattern 4, performance pattern 3 (when background image A is displayed at the time of reach), and performance pattern 5. Further, the time during which the left and right decorative symbols form a reach state and temporarily stop is 2 seconds in presentation pattern 4, 3 seconds in presentation pattern 3, and 4 seconds in presentation pattern 5.
According to such a configuration, the higher the expectation level of the performance pattern, the longer the time period in which the ready-to-win state is formed, so that it is possible to effectively provide the player with a sense of expectation due to the ready-to-win state.

Further, when comparing the decorative symbols in performance pattern 5 and the decorative symbols in performance pattern 4, the left and right decorative symbols indicate a reach state in both performance patterns. Production pattern 5 is based on the fluctuation of the decorative pattern (from high-speed fluctuation) to determine at which number the inner decorative pattern (decorative pattern that does not indicate the reach state) will stop while the left and right decorative symbols indicate the reach state. On the other hand, in production pattern 4, as mentioned above, the monster character is displayed a short time after the start of the variation (timing t1), and the monster character is recognized by the player. It is a performance that suggests the outcome of winning or losing depending on whether you defeat the opponent or not. In the production pattern 4, the left and right decorative patterns indicate a ready-to-reach state, and the inner decorative pattern also shows a decorative pattern with a different number from the left and right decorative patterns, and all the decorative patterns are fluctuating. In this way, by oscillating all the decorative symbols and displaying combinations of symbols that are not winning, the player can focus on the fight against the monster character rather than the decorative symbols. If the decorative pattern of production pattern 4 is made like the decorative pattern of production pattern 5 (if the medium decoration pattern is made to show which number it stops at), should we pay attention to the decorative pattern? Players are confused as to whether they should pay close attention to the battle between the players, and the problem arises that they end the highly anticipated reach performance without increasing their interest. In addition, in production pattern 4, if you lose the battle with the monster character (if the winning result suggests that you are a loser), if you display a losing symbol combination after losing the battle with the monster character, Although it is necessary to appeal to the player multiple times that the game has failed, and there is a risk of hurting the player's feelings, such a risk can be avoided by configuring the game as in performance pattern 4. In addition, displaying a losing symbol combination after losing a battle with a monster character will take up a lot of time, but by reducing the time it takes, the machine becomes more efficient in terms of fluctuations, which in turn increases sales. It also leads to improvement.

An embodiment in which the effect pattern 5 is modified is shown with reference to FIG. 359(b) and FIG. 361. In this embodiment, the decorative pattern is hidden during the period in which the tornado image is displayed (0.6 seconds from timing t6.2 to timing t6.8). In production pattern 4, the decorative pattern may similarly be hidden during the period when the master character attacks the monster character (0.5 seconds from timing t8.5 to timing t9.0).
In this way, when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the reach state or the reach loss state, the reach state is created by hiding the decorative symbols for a predetermined period of time and making the decorative symbols unrecognizable to the player. Whether or not the decorative symbols that are in use will be promoted from normal symbols to variable symbols, whether or not the numbers attached to the decorative symbols that form the reach state will be promoted to numbers with high expectations for jackpot, and the character For a while, players will be intrigued as to what will be the result of the battle between the two players (whether or not the medium decorative pattern will move to indicate that a jackpot will occur), but after a predetermined period of time, the decorative The symbol display is restarted and the predetermined result (whether or not it will be promoted or not, and whether it will be shown that it will be a jackpot or not) is displayed, so the result is advantageous to the player by the amount of teasing. In some cases, it is possible to increase the pleasure felt by the player.

It should be noted that during the period in which the tornado image is displayed in the embodiment that is a modified version of production pattern 5 (0.6 seconds from timing t6.2 to timing t6.8), the master character in production pattern 4 attacks the monster character. Although an embodiment has been shown in which the decorative pattern is hidden during the period (0.5 seconds from timing t8.5 to timing t9.0), the display of a tornado image or the display of the master character attacking the monster character is not possible. The length of the period during which this is performed (that is, the length of the period during which the decorative pattern is hidden) can be set as appropriate.
For example, the period during which the master character attacks the monster character may be set to be longer than the period during which the tornado image is displayed. For example, the period during which the tornado image is displayed may be 0.5 seconds, and the period during which the master character is attacking the monster character may be 2 seconds. Since the expectation level for winning is higher in production pattern 5 than in production pattern 4, the length of the period in which the decorative pattern is hidden (the period in which the tornado image is displayed) in production pattern 5 is changed in production pattern 4. This may change by making the period longer than the period during which the decorative pattern is hidden (the period during which the monster character is attacking) (a production pattern with high expectations will have a longer interval). It can provide a long-lasting sense of elation.
Further, the length of the period in which the tornado image is displayed and the period in which the master character attacks the monster character may be set to be the same length (for example, both are 1 second). By doing this, even in production pattern 4, which has lower expectations for winning than production pattern 5, it is possible to create expectations for changes in the symbols (whether production pattern 4 or production pattern 5). (because the time between changes is the same).
Further, the period during which the tornado image is displayed may be set to be longer than the period during which the master character is attacking the monster character. For example, the period during which the tornado image is displayed may be 2 seconds, and the period during which the master character is attacking the monster character may be 0.5 seconds.

In addition, when the display of the tornado image in production pattern 5 ends and the left and right decorative patterns are displayed again, an example is shown in which the same decorative pattern as before the decorative pattern was hidden or a decorative pattern with different numbers is displayed. However, it is preferable that the proportion of displaying the same decorative pattern is set higher than that of displaying decorative patterns with different numbers. Also, when displaying the same decorative pattern again, even if it is not completely the same before and after displaying it, for example, a decorative pattern that was composed of numbers and characters will only be numbers when displayed again. Or, when a decorative pattern that was composed of numbers and dynamic characters is redisplayed, it is composed of numbers and static characters, the size of the decorative pattern is different, or the font of the decorative pattern is different. Even if the numbers are the same but the appearance is different, there is no problem in treating them as the same (similar) decorative pattern.
In addition, in production pattern 4, all decorative patterns are given higher display priority than the master character and monster character, and when the master character and monster character are fighting (timing t8.1 to t9.0), The display mode may also be such that all the decorative patterns are visible. In that case, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, all the decorative symbols that are made visible are symbol combinations that correspond to the loss, so they will be displayed as confirmed, but if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot In this case, as shown in FIG. 356(e), the middle decorative pattern may be changed again to display a decorative pattern with the same number as the left and right decorative patterns, or all the decorative patterns may be changed again. However, if you want to change all the decorative symbols again, you must make sure to change the number of zeros (jackpot) of a different decorative symbol (for example, in Fig. It is preferable to display a symbol combination corresponding to For example, instead of the doublet of "2", the doublet of "3" or "7" may be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to provide a sense of expectation regarding the probability change.

It is preferable that the rate at which presentation pattern 5 is selected is higher than the rate at which presentation pattern 4 is selected. For example, it is preferable that the ratio of the ratio of presentation pattern 5 being selected to the ratio of presentation pattern 4 being selected is 9:1. In this case, compared to the timing (timing t5) at which high-speed fluctuation switches to low-speed fluctuation in performance pattern 5, the timing at which high-speed fluctuation switches to low-speed fluctuation (timing t7) when performance pattern 4 is executed is the start of the fluctuation display. This is a slow timing compared to . In other words, when performance pattern 4 is executed, the time during which the decorative symbols are rapidly fluctuating will seem to be long, giving the player a sense of discomfort, and raising concerns that an advantageous situation such as a jackpot may occur. It is possible to provide a feeling to the player. Further, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation display from becoming monotonous.

The rate at which presentation pattern 5 is selected may be lower than the rate at which presentation pattern 4 is selected. For example, it is preferable that the ratio of the ratio of presentation pattern 5 being selected to the ratio of presentation pattern 4 being selected is 1:9. In this case, the timing (timing t5) at which the high-speed fluctuation switches to the low-speed fluctuation in the effect pattern 4 is different from the timing (timing t7) at which the high-speed fluctuation switches to the low-speed change when the effect pattern 5 is executed, and the start of the fluctuation display. This is an early timing compared to In other words, when performance pattern 5 is executed, the time during which the decorative symbols are rapidly fluctuating seems short, giving the player a sense of discomfort and giving him a sense of elation that an advantageous situation such as a jackpot may occur. can be provided to players. Further, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation display from becoming monotonous.

In the modified example of effect pattern 5 shown with reference to FIG. 359(b) and FIG. Depending on whether the size is medium or large), the degree of expectation that a normal symbol constituting a reach state will be promoted to a variable probability symbol (and the degree of expectation of a jackpot in production pattern 5) was indicated.
On the other hand, in production pattern 4, as shown in FIGS. 356(c) and 357(c), the master character performs a kick with only one foot, but there are cases where the master character performs a drop kick on the monster character with both feet. It may be set as such. Furthermore, in this case, the degree of expectation of winning against the monster character (that is, the degree of expectation of a jackpot) may be set higher than in the case of kicking with only one foot.
In this way, by making it possible to perform performances with different levels of expectation while the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the expectation of winning the jackpot can be increased. In addition, in the modified example of production pattern 5, the expectation level (and production pattern Since the expected level of the jackpot (in 5) changes, the user wishes to display a tornado image and wishes to display a tornado image with a high level of expectation, whereas in production pattern 4, the user only wishes for a drop kick to be displayed with both feet. Performance pattern 4 has a higher expectation level for winning than performance pattern 5, so if multiple expectation level increasing performances can be displayed in production pattern 4, if an expectation level increasing performance with a low expectation level is displayed, the expectation level will increase. In order to prevent interest from decreasing even though performance pattern 4 with a high level of performance is displayed, only one expectation level increasing performance is provided in performance pattern 4.

In addition, when the tornado image C is displayed, the normal symbol may always be changed to the variable probability symbol. Alternatively, when the tornado image C is displayed, although the normal symbol may or may not change from a variable probability symbol, the result of the variable display may always be a jackpot result. Alternatively, when the tornado image C is displayed, it may always change from a normal symbol to a variable probability symbol, and the result of the variable display may always be a jackpot result.
Furthermore, when the master character performs a drop kick with both feet on the monster character, the master character may always win against the monster character (that is, the result of the variable display will always be a jackpot).

In both the performance pattern 4 and the performance pattern 5, the same expectation level suggesting performance suggesting the expectation level of a jackpot may be made executable during a period in which the decorative pattern on the left-center right side is displayed in a high-speed variable manner. For example, as an effect suggesting the level of expectation, behind the decorative pattern, a samurai character image may appear from the right side of the display area and disappear to the left side for one second. Further, it is preferable that the expectation level of a jackpot when the samurai character image is displayed is higher than the expectation level of the jackpot when the samurai character image is not displayed.
By allowing the expectation level suggesting performance to be executed, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation as to which mode the left-center right decorative symbol will temporarily stop.

The rate at which the expectation level suggesting effect is executed in the effect pattern 4 (the ratio here uses all the variable displays for which execution of the effect pattern 4 is selected as the denominator) is based on the expectation level in the effect pattern 5. The rate at which the suggestive effect is executed may be higher than the rate at which the suggestive effect is executed (the rate referred to here is the denominator of all variable displays in which the effect pattern 5 is selected to be executed).
Alternatively, the rate at which the expectation level suggesting effect is executed in the effect pattern 4 (the ratio here is based on all the variable displays in which it is selected to execute the effect pattern 4) is the same as in the effect pattern 5. It may be lower than the rate at which the expectation level suggesting performance is executed (the rate referred to here is the denominator of all variable displays in which performance pattern 5 is selected to be executed).

Although it has been shown that it is possible to execute performance patterns 1 to 5 with reference to FIG. Any one of pattern 5 may be made executable. Incidentally, since the variable display time of effect pattern 1 to effect pattern 5 is 10 seconds, the variable display time when the effect patterns can be executed continuously in this way is 20 seconds. Furthermore, if the performance patterns can be executed continuously in this way, there are 25 combinations.
In addition, when executing the production pattern consecutively, all decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed at the end of the first production pattern (period from timing t9 to timing t10) in the form of reach loss, but in the second production pattern. As soon as the game starts, all the decorative symbols will be displayed in a rapidly changing state, so even if a losing result is shown when the first performance pattern is executed, the second performance pattern will start and the result will be a jackpot. It is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that the game will happen.

Note that when performance pattern 4 is executed, the current pending image is not displayed, so after performance pattern 4 is executed, other performance patterns may not be executed. Alternatively, the display of the currently held image may be resumed at timing t10, and after effect pattern 4 is executed, another effect pattern may be executed.
Further, after the effect pattern 4 is executed, the effect pattern 5 may be executed continuously. Alternatively, after performance pattern 5 has been executed, performance pattern 4 may be executed subsequently. Furthermore, in this case, the expectation level may be higher for the former or higher for the latter.

Regarding the level of expectation, the level of expectation is higher when a certain effect pattern is executed and then a second effect pattern is executed than when a certain effect pattern is executed once and ends. You can lower it or lower it.
For example, the expectation level when performance pattern 5 is executed after performance pattern 4 may be higher or lower than the expectation level when performance pattern 4 is executed.
Alternatively, the expectation level when the effect pattern 4 is executed after the effect pattern 5 is executed may be higher or lower than the expectation level when the effect pattern 5 is executed.

During the period when the left and right decorative symbols of the performance pattern 5 are temporarily stopped (timing t6 to timing t10), operation reception on the operation unit (eg, operation button 401, attack button 3710, etc.) may be enabled. For example, it is preferable to enable reception of operations on the operating unit during a period from timing t6.5 to timing t9.0, and to display an operating unit simulated image that simulates the enabled operating unit in the display area. Further, when an operation is performed on the operation unit, it is preferable to display a display indicating whether or not the result of the variable display is a jackpot (for example, display of characters such as "jackpot" or "loss"). Alternatively, instead of directly indicating the result of the variable display, a display indicating the level of expectation such as ``High level of expectation!'' or ``Low level of expectation!'' may be performed. Note that after these displays are performed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t10, and the fluctuating display results are shown to the player.
On the other hand, during the period (timing t8 to timing t10) in which the decorative pattern on the left center right of production pattern 4 is temporarily stopped, it is preferable not to enable operation reception on the operation unit (naturally, the operation unit simulated image display etc.).
According to such an embodiment, in the case of performance pattern 5, which has a relatively low level of expectation compared to performance pattern 4, the player can quickly find out whether or not it is a jackpot based on his or her own will, so that the expectation level is low. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player feels disgusted by being shown a highly anticipated performance for a long time.
On the other hand, in the case of performance pattern 4, which has a relatively high level of expectation compared to performance pattern 5, it is not possible to know whether it is a jackpot or not until the decorative symbols stop regardless of the player's intention. It is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation for the occurrence of a jackpot for a long period of time until the variable display ends.

In the embodiment of the "hourglass holding change effect", it was shown that the effect decoration member may be driven in a predetermined manner (for example, moving or emitting light), but in this embodiment as well, the effect decoration member can be driven in a similar manner. The member may be driven. Note that the performance decorative member may be arranged between the panel board 1110 and the game board side performance display device 1600 in the front-rear direction as shown in FIG. 134. In addition, when viewed from the front, when the performance decoration member is in the standby position, it does not overlap with the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, and when the performance decoration member is in the moving position, the game board side performance It is preferable to overlap the display area of the display device 1600.
These decorative members may be driven even during the period (timing t6 to timing t10) in which the left and right decorative symbols of the performance pattern 5, which have relatively low expectations compared to the performance pattern 4, are temporarily stopped (timing t6 to timing t10). For example, by moving the performance decorative member from the standby position to the movement position during the period from timing t6 to timing t10, the fluctuating display can be made more exciting. Note that the decorative member for presentation may be made to emit light. In this case, the performance decorative member may be brought into a light-emitting state at the standby position and then moved to the movement position while maintaining the light-emitting state. Alternatively, the light-off state may be moved to the movement position while the light-off state is maintained, and the light-off state may be changed to the light-emission state at the timing when the movement to the movement position is completed.
On the other hand, in the case of production pattern 4, which has a relatively high expectation level compared to production pattern 5, during the period when the decorative pattern on the left center right of production pattern 4 is temporarily stopped (timing t8 to timing t10), By preventing the decorative member from moving from the standby position to the movement position, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the effect display (battle between characters) from being obstructed. Furthermore, although the performance decoration member may be moved from the standby position to the movement position before timing t8, it is desirable to move it to the standby position before timing t8. Note that during the period when the decorative pattern on the left-center right side of the presentation pattern 4 is temporarily stopped (timing t8 to timing t10), the presentation decorative member may be made to emit light at the standby position.
Note that it is preferable to increase the level of expectation when the performance decoration member moves compared to when the performance decoration member does not move. Similarly, it is preferable to increase the level of expectation when the performance decoration member emits light compared to when the performance decoration member does not emit light.

In this way, according to the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 347 to 361, new entertainment can be provided to the player.

Embodiments that are modified from the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 123 to 361 and the like will be described below with reference to FIGS. 362 to 367 and the like. In this embodiment, a "barbell training performance" in which a character trains using a barbell is performed in the display area, and then a special reach performance is executed, and the expectation of a jackpot is indicated depending on the content of the performance. . In addition, during training, a barbell may fall from above, but details will be explained later.

FIG. 362 shows a time chart in this embodiment. 364 to 367 show the display contents in the display area or the display contents in the effect window displayed in the display area.

In the "barbell training performance", one of the performance patterns 1-1 to 3-8 is selected and executed. Furthermore, the level of expectation of a jackpot is suggested based on the contents of the performance executed.
First, the display mode common to presentation patterns 1-1 to 3-8 will be explained.
In the effect patterns 1-1 and 1-2 shown in FIG. 362(a), from timing t0 to timing t14, and in the effect patterns 2-1 to 2-4 shown in FIG. 362(b), from timing t0 to timing t16. In production patterns 3-1 to 3-8 shown in FIG. 363, decorative symbols are displayed in a fast and variable manner from timing t0 to timing t18. Among these, from timing t0 to timing t4, in addition to the decorative pattern as shown in FIG. 364(a), the normal background image (here, the normal background image B shown in FIG. 347(b)), the currently reserved image, A standby pending image etc. is displayed. After timing t4, a production window is displayed in the center of the display area, a "barbell training production" is started, and a character training using a barbell is displayed in the production window. FIG. 364(b) shows a state in which a production window is displayed near the center of the display area.
Note that FIGS. 365(a) to 365(h), FIG. 366(a), FIG. 366(b), and FIG. 366(e) are diagrams showing display modes in the production window.
Although an example has been shown in which the effect window occupies most of the display area, it may occupy the entire display area, or may be displayed using a small effect window that does not occupy the majority of the display area. Further, the size of the performance window may be varied (increased or decreased) while the "barbell training performance" is being executed.

"Barbell training production" consists of "training production" which is a period during which training is displayed using a barbell, "training completion production" which displays the state that training has been completed, and "reach It consists of "Character confirmed performance".
In the "barbell training performance", the "training performance" is first performed. The time required to execute the "during training performance" is 4 seconds, 6 seconds, or 8 seconds. The time required for execution varies depending on the selected performance pattern. Following the "training performance", the "training end performance" is executed. The time required to execute the "training completion performance" is 4 seconds. Following the "training completion performance", the "reach character confirmation performance" is executed. The time required to execute the "reach character confirmation effect" is 2 seconds.
After the "reach character confirmation effect" ends, a "window enlargement display effect" in which the effect window is enlarged is executed. Moreover, with the start of the "window enlargement display effect", special ready-to-reach decorative symbols are displayed as left and right decorative symbols in a ready-to-reach state (details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 366(c) and 366(f)).
After the "window enlargement display effect" ends, a special reach effect (``character reach effect'') in which the character indicated by the "reach character confirmation effect" appears is executed.

The display contents in the effect window during the period from timing t4 to timing t6 are common to effect patterns 1-1 to 3-8.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 365(a), in the production window, the words "Training Chance" are displayed in the upper left, the master character and the master character's lines are displayed in the lower left, and the master character's dialogue is displayed on the right side of the master character. The lines of the martial artist character and the martial artist character are displayed. Additionally, a martial artist character is shown holding a guts barbell with the word "guts" written on it.

When performance pattern 1-1 and performance pattern 1-2 are selected, the time required to execute the "during training performance" is 4 seconds. Furthermore, a one-ton barbell may fall at timing t6.
When the performance pattern 2-4 is selected from the performance pattern 2-1, the time required to execute the "during training performance" is 6 seconds. Furthermore, a one-ton barbell may fall at timing t6. Further, at timing t8, a 1-ton barbell or a 5-ton barbell may fall.
When the performance pattern 3-8 is selected from the performance pattern 3-1, the time required to execute the "during training performance" is 8 seconds. Furthermore, a one-ton barbell may fall at timing t6. Further, at timing t8, a 1-ton barbell or a 5-ton barbell may fall. Further, at timing t10, a 1 ton barbell, a 5 ton barbell, or a 10 ton barbell may fall.

FIG. 365(b) shows the display state when the 1 ton barbell falls. As shown in the figure, a one ton barbell is larger than a gut barbell. It also has the word 1 ton attached to it.
FIG. 365(c) shows the display state when the 5-ton barbell falls. As shown in the figure, the 5 ton barbell is larger than the 1 ton barbell. It also has the word 5 tons attached to it.
FIG. 365(d) shows the display state when the 10 ton barbell is dropped. As shown in the figure, the 10 ton barbell is larger than the 5 ton barbell. It also has the word 10 tons attached to it.
The barbells will fall in the following order: 1 ton barbell, 5 ton barbell, and 10 ton barbell. In other words, a 5-ton barbell or a 10-ton barbell will not fall if the martial artist character only has a guts barbell.
As shown in the figure, the lines of the martial artist character and the master character change as the barbell falls.

When the "training performance" ends, the "training end performance" starts. Note that, as shown in FIGS. 362 and 363, the timing at which the "training end effect" starts varies depending on the effect pattern being executed. Specifically, when either performance pattern 1-1 or performance pattern 1-2 is being executed, the "training end performance" is started from timing t8. Further, if any of the performance patterns 2-1 to 2-4 is being executed, the "training end performance" is started from timing t10. Further, if any of the performance patterns 3-1 to 3-8 is being executed, the "training end performance" is started from timing t12.
At the timing when the "training completion effect" starts, the combinations of barbells held by the martial artist character are: guts barbell only, guts barbell and 1 ton barbell, guts barbell, 1 ton barbell and 5 ton barbell, guts barbell and 1 ton barbell. There are four types: ton barbell, 5 ton barbell, and 10 ton barbell.
FIGS. 365(e) to 365(h) show display modes during the "training completion effect". Specifically, FIG. 365(e) shows a state in which the martial artist character has only the guts barbell. FIG. 365(f) shows the martial artist character holding a guts barbell and a 1-ton barbell. FIG. 365(g) shows a state in which the martial artist character holds a guts barbell, a 1 ton barbell, and a 5 ton barbell. FIG. 365(h) shows a state in which the martial artist character holds a guts barbell, a 1 ton barbell, a 5 ton barbell, and a 10 ton barbell.

The longer the time for performing the "in-training performance", the higher the expectations. For example, when the length of time to execute the "during training performance" is 4 seconds, when it is 6 seconds, and when it is 8 seconds, the expectation level increases in that order.
Furthermore, the higher the number of barbells that fall, the higher the level of expectation. For example, the level of expectation increases in the following order: if the barbell remains a barbell of guts, if the barbell falls to a 1 ton barbell, if the barbell falls to a 5 ton barbell, and if the barbell falls to a 10 ton barbell.
Note that the higher the degree of expectation, the lower the probability of performance execution (selection probability).
By adopting such an aspect, the player visually checks the progress of the performance in anticipation that the "training performance" will continue for a long time and that many barbells will fall.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 362 and 363, only one barbell falls at certain timings (for example, timing t6, timing t8, timing t10) during the "training performance". However, at these timings, a plurality of barbells may fall at the same time. For example, even if two barbells (a 1-ton barbell and a 5-ton barbell, or a 5-ton barbell and a 10-ton barbell) or three barbells (a 1-ton barbell to a 10-ton barbell) fall at the same time, good.
Specifically, for example, at timing t10 of production pattern 3-2, instead of only the 1 ton barbell falling, a 1 ton barbell, a 5 ton barbell, and a 10 ton barbell are made to fall at the same time. Good too.
In this way, by allowing a plurality of barbells to fall at the same time, the level of anticipation increases all at once, making it possible for the player to feel great excitement.

Note that a barbell falling effect may be performed during the "training completion effect." The execution time of the "training end effect" is 4 seconds, but one barbell may fall at each timing of the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd seconds from the start of the "training end effect". You may also do so.
For example, when performance pattern 3-5 is executed, a 1-ton barbell falls at timing t6, but the next barbell, a 5-ton barbell, does not fall until timing t12. In this situation, the 5-ton barbell may fall at timing t14, and the 10-ton barbell may fall at timing t15, during the "training completion performance." FIG. 366(a) shows a state in which a 5-ton barbell is falling.
In this way, by allowing the barbell to fall even during the "training completion performance", it is possible to keep the player's sense of expectation that the level of expectation will increase.

Note that even at the timing when the barbells can fall in the "training end effect," a plurality of barbells (two or three) may fall at the same time, as in the case of the "during training effect." In this case as well, the level of expectation of winning the jackpot increases at once, and the excitement felt by the player can be increased.

When the "training completion performance" ends, the "reach character confirmation performance" starts. Note that, as shown in FIGS. 362 and 363, the timing at which the "reach character confirmation effect" is started differs depending on the effect pattern being executed. Specifically, when performance pattern 1-1 and performance pattern 1-2 are being executed, the "reach character confirmation performance" is started from timing t12, and performance pattern 2-1 to performance pattern 2-4 is executed. If it is being executed, the "reach character confirmation effect" is started from timing t14, and if the production pattern 3-1 to 3-8 is being executed, the "reach character confirmation effect" is started from timing t16. is started.
The "reach character confirmation performance" is a performance that informs whether the SP reach performance to be performed thereafter is character reach performance 1 by a martial artist character or character reach performance 2 by a master character.
FIG. 366(b) shows that character reach performance 1 is performed by the martial artist character. Note that the lines of both characters indicate that character reach effect 1 will be performed by the martial artist character, but a special effect that uses the entire display area (for example, a close-up of the martial artist character's face in the entire display area) is indicated. Display) may indicate that the character reach effect 1 is performed by the martial artist character.
FIG. 366(c) shows that character reach performance 2 is performed by the master character. Note that the lines of both characters indicate that character reach performance 2 will be performed by the master character, but a special performance using the entire display area (for example, displaying a close-up of the master character's face in the entire display area) ) may indicate that the character reach effect 2 will be performed by the master character. In addition, when character reach performance 1 by a martial artist character is performed, the lines of both characters are used, and when character reach performance 2 is performed by a master character, a close-up of the master character's face is displayed in the entire display area. Depending on the development, the size and display mode of the notification effect by the "reach character confirmation effect" may be changed.
Furthermore, since it is the martial artist character who trains in the "Barbell training performance", basically the proportion of character reach performance 1 developed by the martial artist character is higher (for example, the character reach performance by the martial character is higher). It is better if the rate of development into reach effect 1 is 90%, and the rate of development into character reach effect 2 by the master character is 10%).
Note that the higher the expectation level, the lower the execution probability (selection probability) of the ready-to-reach effect.
In this way, by occasionally selecting a master character as a character that appears in a "Character Reach Effect" (but not a martial artist character), I believe that a "Character Reach Effect" in which a martial artist character appears will occur. It is possible to make a player feel a sense of surprise, and to improve his/her interest.

The rate at which the character reach performance 1 is developed by the martial artist character and the rate at which the character reach performance 2 is developed by the master character may be made the same. By setting the same ratio, character reach performance 1 by the martial artist character and character reach performance 2 by the master character appear evenly, and interest is maintained for a long time by displaying various performances.
Furthermore, the rate at which character reach performance 2 is developed by the master character may be made higher than the rate at which character reach performance 1 is developed by the martial artist character. It is possible to create a scenario that is easy for players to understand, in which the expectation level of character reach performance 1 by the martial artist character increases as the martial artist character becomes stronger through training.

When the "training end effect" ends (that is, the "barbell training effect" ends), the "window enlargement display effect" starts.
In the "window enlargement display effect", the size of the effect window becomes the same size as the display area over 2 seconds, and the effect window continues to expand and the frame of the effect window moves outside the display area and is no longer displayed. state. While the "window enlargement display effect" is being executed, the characters appearing in the "character reach effect" and the name of the "character reach effect" to be executed are displayed in the effect window. In addition, at the same time as the "window enlargement display effect" starts, a special reach decoration symbol (see Figure 225(b)) will be displayed in the reach state, instead of the decoration symbol in the center left center right that had been displayed in a high-speed fluctuating manner. is displayed.
FIGS. 366(c) and 366(f) show the display state at the timing when one second has elapsed since the "window enlargement display effect" was started.
In FIG. 366(c), the characters Martial Artist Character and Martial Artist Character Reach are displayed. It also shows a state in which the size of the production window is in the process of increasing. In addition, the left and right special reach decorative patterns are each temporarily stopped and displayed at "2". Note that among the special reach decoration patterns, the medium decoration patterns are not yet displayed at this timing.
In FIG. 366(f), the characters Master Character and Master Character Reach are displayed. It also shows a state in which the size of the production window is in the process of increasing. In addition, the left and right special reach decorative patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed at "2" at the upper left and upper right positions of the display area, respectively. Note that among the special reach decoration patterns, the medium decoration patterns are not yet displayed at this timing. In addition, the timing to show the left and right special reach decoration symbols in the reach state is not only at the same time as the start of the "window enlargement display effect" but also after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the "window enlargement display effect" when the character in the SP reach effect It may be performed at the start of the ready-to-reach performances 1 and 2, or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the character ready-to-reach performances 1 and 2, which are SP ready-to-reach performances.

In addition, to change the display content in the production window from the display content shown in FIG. 366(b) or FIG. 366(e) to the display content shown in FIG. 366(c) or FIG. 366(f), It is advisable to change the position and size of the characters (martial artist characters and master characters) appearing in the "Character Reach Production" and the barbells held by the characters, and to end the display of other images in the production window. By adopting such an aspect, the performance can be smoothly developed from the "barbell training performance" to the "character reach performance", and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable about the performance.
Furthermore, the name of the "Character Reach Effect" to be executed may be displayed at the same time as the "Window Enlarged Display Effect" starts, or it may be displayed while the "Window Enlarged Display Effect" is being executed. Good too.

Note that, as shown in FIGS. 362 and 363, the timing at which the "window enlargement display effect" is started differs depending on the effect pattern being executed. Specifically, when the effect pattern 1-1 and the effect pattern 1-2 are being executed, the "window enlarged display effect" is started at timing t14, and the effect patterns 2-1 to 2-4 are executed. If it is being executed, the "window enlarged display effect" is started at timing t16, and if the effect patterns 3-1 to 3-8 are being executed, the "window enlarged display effect" is started at timing t18. is started.

The display of the effect window ends at the timing when the "window enlargement display effect" ends, but at this time, the background image is switched from the normal background image to the ready-to-reach background image. Furthermore, at the timing when the "window enlargement display effect" ends, a special reach effect, ``character reach effect'' (``martial artist character reach effect'' or ``master character reach effect''), starts.
FIG. 366(d) shows the display state at the timing when the "martial artist character reach effect" is started. Here, the ready-to-reach background image B is displayed as the background image.
Further, FIG. 366(g) shows the display state at the timing when the "master character reach effect" is started. Here, the ready-to-reach background image A is displayed as the background image.
When two seconds have elapsed from the start of the character reach effect, the display of the name ``character reach effect'' ends and the enemy character fighting the martial artist character or the master character is displayed.

Note that, at the same time as the "window enlargement display effect" ends, the display of the current pending image and the standby pending image is stopped. As shown in FIG. 366(c) and FIG. 366(f), the current pending image and the standby pending image are displayed during the "window enlargement display effect", and as shown in FIG. 366(d) and FIG. 366(g), After the timing when the "window enlargement display effect" ends, the display of the current pending image and the standby pending image is stopped. Note that the timing to hide the current pending image and the standby pending image is not at the exact timing when the "Window enlarged display effect" ends, but may be slightly before the "Window enlarged display effect" ends, or when the "Window enlarged display effect" ends. It may be a little after the "display effect" is completed. If it is a little later, the current pending image and the standby pending image will be made recognizable at the start of the "character reach performance", but will soon become unrecognizable.
In addition, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the display of the standby pending image is restarted at the timing when the "character reach performance" is finished and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. The currently held image will not be displayed again.
On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, even if the "character reach effect" ends and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the standby pending image will not be displayed or the current pending image will not be displayed again. Alternatively, it may be done as explained in the case where the result of the special lottery is a loss. Further, even if the result of the special lottery is a loss, it may be changed depending on the type of reach effect. For example, if the player loses due to the character reach performance by a martial artist, the current pending image is not displayed, and if the character loses due to the character reach performance by the master, the current pending image is displayed. Note that even if the result of the special lottery is a win, it may be changed depending on the type of reach effect, as in the case of a loss.

In the "character reach performance", a display is performed in which the character determined by the "barbell training performance" fights with another character. Specifically, there is a reach effect where a martial artist character and a samurai character fight (Figure 367(a)), a reach effect where a martial artist character and a warrior character fight (Figure 367(b)), and a master character and a fake samurai wearing sunglasses. Four types of "character reach effects" are executed: a reach effect in which characters fight (FIG. 367(c)), and a reach effect in which a master character and a fake warrior character wearing sunglasses fight (FIG. 367(d)). Note that Figures 367(a) to 367(d) show one scene of the reach effect, and during the reach effect, two characters move and fight with the weapons they are holding. Display is performed.
In addition, when the martial artist character or the master character wins in the "character reach effect", after the end of the reach effect, the special reach decoration pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot. Further, if the martial artist character or the master character loses in the "character reach performance", after the end of the reach performance, the special reach decoration pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss.

In addition, the level of expectation for a jackpot differs depending on the type of "Character Reach Production", including a Reach Production in which a martial artist character and a samurai character fight, a Reach Production in which a martial artist character and a warrior character fight, and a Master Character and a fake samurai wearing sunglasses. Expectations are highest in the following order: the reach performance in which the characters fight, and the reach performance in which the master character and a fake warrior character wearing sunglasses fight.
For example, the expectation level for a reach performance in which a martial artist character and a samurai character fight is 20%, the expectation level for a reach performance in which a martial artist character and a warrior character fight is 30%, and the expectation level for a reach performance in which a master character and a fake samurai character wearing sunglasses fight. The expectation level may be set to 40%, and the expectation level for a reach effect in which a master character and a fake warrior character wearing sunglasses fight may be set to 50%.

Note that the time required for the "character reach performance" may be set to a predetermined number of seconds, such as 60 seconds or 90 seconds, independently of the execution time of the "barbell training performance". Alternatively, the time required for the "character reach performance" may be determined in accordance with the type of character to fight. For example, the execution time of the "martial artist character reach performance" may be set to 60 seconds, and the execution time of the "master character reach performance" may be set to 90 seconds.

Note that the timing at which the ready-to-reach effect is started varies depending on the effect pattern that is being executed. If production pattern 1-1 and production pattern 1-2 have been executed, the reach production will start from timing t16, and if production pattern 2-1 to production pattern 2-4 has been executed, the timing The ready-to-win effect is started from t18, and if the effect patterns 3-1 to 3-8 have been executed, the ready-to-win effect is started from timing t20.

In each performance pattern shown in FIG. 362, the display mode up to timing t25 is shown, but the ready-to-win performance continues even after timing t25, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at a predetermined timing. In addition, in an embodiment in which the ready-to-win effect described below is not executed, the decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed before timing t25.

In this way, two characters appear in the "barbell training performance", and their expectations are shown based on the length of time the "training performance" takes and the height of the barbell they have fallen to. Therefore, the player can recognize in advance the level of expectation for the "character reach performance" that will occur thereafter.
Furthermore, in addition to simply indicating the level of expectation, the characters that appeared in the "barbell training performance" also appear in the "character reach performance" as they are, so it is possible to give a sense of unity to the performance.
Furthermore, among the characters that appeared in the "Barbell Training Performance", the probability that the "Character Reach Performance" will be executed for the character who was training (the martial artist character) is set to be high. Although there is a low probability, the "character reach performance" may be executed for the character (master character) that was performing the same. By adopting such an aspect, it is possible to make the player feel the unexpected feeling of a character who has not undergone training appearing in the ready-to-reach presentation (that's the fun!).
Further, when a character that has not been trained appears in the ready-to-win performance, the level of expectation is higher, so that the player can feel a sense of expectation for a jackpot in addition to a sense of surprise.

In the "training production", the master character only changed the content of his lines as various barbells fell; You can also make it so that it comes.
For example, the barbell could be made to fall only if the master character jumps and collides with the top of the production window one second before the timing at which the barbell is likely to fall (timing t6, timing t8, timing t10). Good too. In this case, the meaning of the performance may be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner by displaying the message ``Watch your head!'' as the master character's line.
Note that when the master character jumps, the barbell may always fall, or the barbell may fall with a predetermined probability (eg, 30%, 40%, etc.).
Also, if the master character jumps, the barbell will fall with a relatively high probability (for example, 60% or 50%, etc.), and if the master character does not jump, the barbell will fall with a relatively low probability (for example, 10%). %, 5%, etc.).
Note that similar embodiments may be adopted not only during the "training performance" but also during the "training end performance".
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to realistically represent a character training, and it is also possible to further enhance the unexpected feeling of a master character who has not been training appearing in a ready-to-reach presentation.

Although the embodiment has been described in which the master character instructs the martial artist character in training, an embodiment in which the master character trains with a barbell instead of the martial artist character may be implemented. In this case, the martial artist character is displayed on the left side of the production window, and the master character who lifts the guts barbell is displayed on the right side of the martial artist character.Similar to the embodiment described above, various barbells are displayed against the master character. It may also be made to fall.
Further, in this case, it is preferable that the probability that the "martial artist character reach effect" is executed is 10%, and the probability that the "master character reach effect" is executed is 90%.
According to such an aspect, it is known that the probability that the "master character reach performance", which has a relatively higher expectation level than the "martial artist character reach performance", will be executed is high before the execution of the "character reach performance" starts. This makes it possible to recognize a strong sense of expectation for a jackpot at an early stage of the fluctuating display, and maintains a high sense of expectation that a jackpot will occur for a long period of time until the fluctuating display of decorative symbols ends. It becomes possible to do so.

FIG. 368 is a table showing the relationship between the performance contents and expectations of the "barbell training performance" and the "character reach performance" to be executed thereafter. Performance contents are set for each performance number in the table, and any performance number is selected with a predetermined probability, and the performance corresponding to the selected performance number is executed.
For example, if performance number 1 is selected, performance pattern 1-1 is executed, the length of the training performance is 4 seconds, only the guts barbell is displayed as the barbell, and the type of character reach performance is ""Martial Artist Character VS Samurai Character" is executed, and the expectation level at this time is 15%.
Note that this table assumes an embodiment in which a barbell additionally falls during the "training completion effect."

Any one of a plurality of predetermined colors may be applied to the 1 ton barbell to 10 ton barbell. Furthermore, the level of expectation may be indicated by the color assigned.
For example, three types of one-ton barbells, a white one-ton barbell, a red one-ton barbell, and a golden one-ton barbell, may be provided in advance, and any one of the barbells may be made to fall during the performance. Further, at this time, it is preferable that the expectation level increases in the order of white 1 ton barbell, red 1 ton barbell, and gold 1 ton barbell.
Similarly, three types of 5-ton barbells, a white 5-ton barbell, a red 5-ton barbell, and a golden 5-ton barbell, may be provided in advance, and any one of the barbells may fall during the performance. Further, at this time, it is preferable that the expectation level increases in the order of white 5 ton barbell, red 5 ton barbell, and gold 5 ton barbell.
Similarly, three types of 10 ton barbells, a white 10 ton barbell, a red 10 ton barbell, and a gold 10 ton barbell, may be provided in advance, and any one of the barbells may be made to fall during the performance. Further, at this time, it is preferable that the expectation level increases in the order of white 10 ton barbell, red 10 ton barbell, and gold 10 ton barbell.
Note that the color of the guts barbell should not be multiple colors, but only one color (for example, white or brown).
According to such an embodiment, the player does not simply wait for the barbell to fall, but instead expects the barbell with higher expectations to fall, thereby increasing the player's interest. can.

In addition, although we have shown an embodiment in which it is confirmed that the barbell will fall by displaying the master character jumping and colliding with the top side of the production window, we have performed a production that confirms which color of the barbell will fall. It may be possible. For example, the color of the falling barbell may be indicated by the type of dialogue displayed when the master character jumps.
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to create great expectations regarding what color barbell will fall.

An embodiment was shown in which barbells of one color, white, red, or gold, fall as 1-ton barbells to 10-ton barbells, and the level of expectation is indicated by the color of the falling barbells, but when a red barbell falls. In this case, it is recommended that the next barbell that falls is a red or gold barbell, and that the white barbell does not fall. Similarly, if a golden barbell falls, the next barbell that falls should be a golden barbell, and white or golden barbells should not fall.
For example, after a red 1-ton barbell falls, a red or gold 5-ton barbell will fall, but a white 5-ton barbell will not fall. Similarly, after a red 5-ton barbell falls, a red or gold 10-ton barbell will fall, but a white 10-ton barbell will not fall.
When multiple types of images (in this embodiment, multiple types of images indicated by different colors) with a fixed order of relative expectation levels are displayed consecutively, an image with a relatively high expectation level is displayed. If an image with a relatively low level of expectation is displayed after , the player may feel that his/her level of expectation has lowered and his/her interest may decrease. However, according to the present embodiment, this It is possible to prevent such situations from occurring.

As shown with reference to FIG. 362, FIG. 363, FIG. 364(b), etc., the "barbell training performance" is performed while the decorative pattern on the left center right is changing at high speed. Therefore, the player can concentrate on the "barbell training performance" without worrying about the temporary stop mode of the decorative symbols. If a reach state occurs during the "barbell training performance", it will be difficult for the player to concentrate on the "barbell training performance" (especially the types of numbers attached to the decorative patterns that form the reach state). However, according to the present embodiment, such a situation can be prevented from occurring.

The decorative pattern may be placed in the reach state while the "barbell training performance" is being performed. For example, the decorative pattern may be placed in the ready-to-reach state during execution of any one of the "training performance", "training end performance", and "reach character confirmation performance" of the "barbell training performance".

The embodiment has been shown in which when the "barbell training performance" is executed, the decorative pattern always becomes the reach state and the reach performance is executed. However, if the reach effect is not executed and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss (so-called normal reach is off), or if the "barbell training effect" is executed and the decorative pattern is in the reach state. A case may also be provided in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss (of course, the ready-to-win effect is not executed).
In this case, at the timing of executing the "window enlargement display effect," it is preferable to perform an effect display in which the window is shrunk and erased over two seconds.
Further, it is preferable to end the variable display of the decorative symbols at the timing when these two seconds or several seconds in addition to these two seconds (for example, from one second to five seconds) have elapsed.
Further, it may be notified during the "barbell training performance" that the decorative pattern is in the ready-to-reach state but the ready-to-reach effect is not executed, or that the decorative pattern is not in the ready-to-reach state.
For example, when a master character's dialogue is "I'm going home today!" or when a martial artist character drops all the barbells he's holding, a "barbell training effect" is running ("training effect", " You may also go during either the "Training End Effect" or the "Reachable Character Confirmation Effect").

As shown with reference to FIGS. 364 to 367, the current pending image and the standby pending image are displayed while the "barbell training performance" is being executed, but the current pending image and the standby pending image are displayed while the "character reach performance" is being performed. and standby images are not displayed.
During the execution of the "barbell training effect", the holding change effect shown with reference to FIGS. 123 to 125 and the like may be executed for the current held image and the standby held image. For example, although the current pending image and the waiting pending image are white and circular in this embodiment, they may be changed to a display mode that indicates a higher degree of expectation. Specifically, the color may be changed from white to any color from blue to iridescent.

If the pending change effect only changes the color, it will end instantly at a predetermined timing, but by executing it over a predetermined period of time, you can change the display mode (specifically, what color). ) can make the player feel a sense of expectation that the game will change. For example, as in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 322 to 329, the pending change effect may be executed over several seconds.
In addition, the timing to start executing the held change effect and the timing to end the execution of the held change effect are, for example, starting the execution of the held change effect before the execution of the "barbell training effect", and starting the execution of the held change effect before starting the execution of the "barbell training effect". The hold change effect may end during the execution of the ``Production'' (the form of the hold display after the change is shown), or the execution of the hold change effect may be started during the execution of the ``barbell training performance'', and The hold change effect may end while the ``barbell training effect'' is being executed (the form of the hold display after the change is shown), or the hold change effect may be started while the ``barbell training effect'' is being executed. , the hold change effect may end (the form of the hold display after the change is shown) after the "barbell training effect" ends (in this case, the hold change effect may be shown during the execution of the "character reach effect"). (It is recommended that the currently held image and the standby held image be displayed.)
According to such an embodiment, while the "barbell training performance" or the "character reach performance" is being performed, expectations can be raised by another performance different from the "barbell training performance" or the "character reach performance". Therefore, the level of expectation increases, and the player's expectation of winning the jackpot can be increased.

With reference to FIG. 278(b), an embodiment was shown in which a cut-in image is displayed during a special reach effect to indicate the expectation of a jackpot, but a cut-in image is displayed in a similar manner during a character reach effect in this embodiment. An image may be displayed.
The display mode of cut-in images will be described with reference to FIGS. 369(a) to 369(c).
During the martial artist character reach performance, the martial artist character and the samurai character are shown approaching and fighting. FIG. 369(a) shows the display state at this time.
Next, a cut-in image is displayed. The cut-in image consists of a horizontally long rectangular frame, a character (in this embodiment, a "wizard character") displayed within the frame, and the character's lines. The cut-in image is displayed for several seconds (for example, for 3 seconds). FIG. 369(b) shows the display state at this time. The cut-in image shows the expectation of a jackpot depending on the color of the background within the frame. For example, three colors, green, red, and gold, may be displayed as the background color within the frame, and the expectation level may be increased in this order. In addition to the color of the background within the frame, a plurality of types (for example, three or more types) of characters that appear may be provided, and expectations may be set for them in a predetermined order. In addition, the illustration shows light being emitted from the tip of the wand held by the wizard character, but the part that represents this light can be displayed in three colors: green, red, and gold. , the expectations may increase in this order.
After the display of the cut-in image ends, the battle between the characters is settled and one of the characters wins. If the martial artist character wins, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot. Conversely, if the samurai character wins, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner that indicates a loss. FIG. 369(c) shows a display state in which the martial artist character wins the battle and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot.
Although the martial artist character reach performance has been taken as an example, a similar cut-in image may be displayed in the master character reach performance.
Note that the cut-in image is not displayed during the "barbell training performance". Furthermore, the cut-in image is displayed immediately before the battle between the characters is concluded. For example, it is preferable that the battle between the characters is concluded after the battle has been fought for 5 to 10 seconds after the display of the cut-in image ends. Thereby, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation of winning the jackpot immediately before the result of the battle between the characters is announced. Further, by displaying the cut-in image, the player can recognize that the result of the battle between the characters will be displayed soon.

The same suggestive performance that suggests the level of expectation may be executed in the “training performance” and the “character reach performance”.
For example, a wizard character riding a cane appears from the right side of the display area and flies horizontally to the left, and depending on the type of dialogue displayed on the left side of the wizard character, the expectation of a jackpot is predicted. The degree may be suggested (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "character flight suggestion effect"). In addition, it is preferable to provide three types of lines: "hot,""superhot," and "super hot," so that the level of expectation increases in this order.
FIG. 369(d) shows the display state in the production window when the "character flight suggestion production" is executed during the "training production". As shown in the figure, the wizard character's lines are "hot."
FIG. 369(e) shows the display state in the display area when the "character flight suggestion performance" is executed during the "character reach performance". As shown in the figure, the wizard character's lines are "super hot."
Note that the size of the wizard character and dialogue window displayed by executing the "Character Flight Suggestion Production" is the same during the "Training Production" and the "Character Reach Production"; While the display in the window shows the display content in a part of the display area, FIG. 369(e) shows the display content in the entire display area. Therefore, compared to FIG. 369(e), the sizes of the illustrated wizard character and dialogue window are larger in FIG. 369(d).
Note that the "character flight suggestion performance" may be executed twice, once during the "training performance" and during the "character reach performance." Alternatively, if one of the "training performance" and "character reach performance" is executed, the other is not executed, and the "character flight suggestion performance" is performed once during one fluctuation display. It may also be configured so that only the following is executed.

Predetermined BGM may be played while the "barbell training performance" is being performed. Also, predetermined BGM may be similarly played during the execution of the "character reach effect". The same BGM may be played from the execution of the "barbell training performance" to the execution of the "character reach performance." By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to make the player recognize the "barbell training performance" and the "character reach performance" as a series of performances, thereby increasing the sense of unity of the performances.
On the other hand, different BGM may be played during execution of the "barbell training performance" and during execution of the "character reach performance." For example, the first BGM may be played while the "character reach effect" is being executed, and the second BGM different from the first BGM may be played while the "barbell training effect" is being executed. By adopting such an embodiment, the player can clearly recognize which effect is being performed.
In addition, character reach performances include "martial artist character reach performance" and "master character reach performance", but there are two types of character reach performance: "barbell training performance", "martial artist character reach performance", and "master character reach performance". The same BGM may be played during the execution of ``.
Alternatively, the first BGM is played while the "martial artist character reach performance" is being performed, and the second BGM is played while the "barbell training performance" and "master character reach performance" are being performed. You may also do so.
Alternatively, the first BGM is played while the "master character reach performance" is being performed, and the second BGM is played while the "barbell training performance" and "martial artist character reach performance" are being performed. You may also do so.

In addition, when the "Barbell training performance" is executed and the "Character reach performance" is performed, the second BGM that was output when the "Barbell training performance" was being executed is changed to the first BGM. BGM is output (the output of the first BGM is stopped before the symbol variation ends), but even if the "barbell training performance" is executed, if the "character reach performance" is not performed, , the second BGM that was output when the "barbell training performance" was being executed will continue to be output (not played from the start of the second BGM) even after the "barbell training performance" ends. It's okay. In addition, the output of the second BGM that is continuously output may be stopped before the symbol fluctuation ends, or it may be continued even after the symbol fluctuation ends (the second BGM starts). (not playback) may be output. If it continues to be output, it will be output over the next symbol change, so it is possible to provide a sense of expectation that the "barbell training performance" may be executed even in the next symbol change. can.

In the "barbell training performance", operation reception on the operation section (for example, operation button 401, attack button 3710, etc.) may be enabled, and the barbell may fall based on the player's operation on the operation section. For example, when an operation is performed on the operation unit, a display may be made in which the master character jumps and collides with the upper side of the production window, causing the barbell to fall.
For example, at the timing when the guts barbell is being displayed during the "barbell training performance," it is preferable to enable operation reception on the operating section and display a simulated operating section image shaped like the operating section in the display area. Additionally, if an operation is performed on the operation section, the master character will jump and collide with the top of the production window, and the 1-ton barbell will fall; if no operation is performed on the operation section, , the master character should not jump or fall by a 1 ton barbell.
Similarly, at the timing when the 1-ton barbell is displayed during the "barbell training performance," it is preferable to enable operation reception on the operation section and display a simulated operation section image shaped like the operation section in the display area. Additionally, if an operation is performed on the operation section, the master character will jump and collide with the top of the production window, and the 5-ton barbell will fall; if no operation is performed on the operation section, , the master character should not jump and the 5-ton barbell should not fall.
Note that while the 5-ton barbell is being displayed, it is also preferable to display the falling barbell based on the reception of the operation on the operation unit in a similar manner.
Note that the operational validity period of the operation unit may be limited to a part of the period during the "barbell training performance" or may be the entire period during the "barbell training performance." Alternatively, it may be limited to the entire period during the "performance during training".
For example, when a 1 ton barbell can be changed to a 5 ton barbell, the barbell may change to 5 ton only if the player operates it, or even if the player does not operate it, the 5 ton barbell may change. It may also be changed to a tonbar bell.
By adopting such an embodiment, the barbell can be dropped at a timing of the player's preference, and the player's sense of exhilaration can be enhanced.

With reference to FIGS. 369(a) to 369(c), an embodiment in which a cut-in image is displayed during a "character reach effect" has been shown. 401, attack button 3710, etc.), a simulated operation unit image shaped like the operation unit is displayed in the display area, and one of the cut-in images is displayed based on the player's operation on the operation unit. may be displayed.
By adopting such an embodiment, the cut-in image can be displayed at the player's preferred timing, and the player's sense of excitement can be enhanced.

An embodiment in which a barbell falls based on an operation on the operation part during a "barbell training performance" and an embodiment in which a cut-in image is displayed based on an operation on the operation part during a "character reach performance" are shown. However, it is also possible to enable operation reception for the same operation unit in the two performances, and to display the same operation unit simulated image in the display area as the operation unit simulated image.
For example, if the barbell is made to fall based on the operation on the operation button 401 during the "barbell training effect", a cut-in image is displayed based on the operation on the operation button 401 during the "character reach effect". It is a good idea to do so. Further, during the valid operation period during both effects, a simulated image simulating the operation button 401 may be displayed in the display area.
Alternatively, if the barbell is made to fall based on the operation on the attack button 3710 during the "barbell training effect", a cut-in image is displayed based on the operation on the attack button 3710 during the "character reach effect". It is a good idea to do so. Further, during the valid operation period during both effects, a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 may be displayed in the display area.
By adopting such an embodiment, it becomes easier for the player to understand the operation unit to be operated.

In addition, although an embodiment has been shown in which the same operation part simulation image is displayed during "Barbell training performance" and "Character reach performance", the position where the operation part simulation image is displayed is also different between "Barbell training performance" and "Character reach performance". It is best to set it to the same position as during "Character reach performance". Further, it is preferable that the size of the operation unit simulated image is also the same size.
For example, it is preferable to display the operation unit simulated image in the center of the display area during either the "barbell training performance" or the "character reach performance".
By adopting such an embodiment, it becomes easier for the player to understand the operation unit to be operated.

Note that the operation validity period of the operation unit may be the same length or different lengths during the "barbell training performance" and during the "character reach performance."
For example, the valid operation period during the "barbell training performance" may be made longer than the valid operation period during the "character reach performance."
Alternatively, the valid operation period during the "barbell training performance" and the valid operation period during the "character reach performance" may be the same length.
Alternatively, the valid operation period during the "barbell training performance" may be shorter than the valid operation period during the "character reach performance".

Although the shape of the operation part simulation image is the same, the color of the operation part simulation image may be displayed in a plurality of colors. Moreover, the expectation level of a jackpot may be made to differ depending on the color of the operation unit simulated image.
For example, as the operation part simulation image displayed during the "barbell training performance", either a white operation part simulation image or a red operation part simulation image can be displayed, and the "character reach performance" It is preferable that any one of a white operating section simulated image, a red operating section simulated image, and a gold operating section simulated image be displayed as the operating section simulated image.
Alternatively, any one of a white operation unit simulation image, a red operation unit simulation image, and a gold operation unit simulation image may be displayed as the operation unit simulation image displayed during the “barbell training performance”. At the same time, it is preferable that either a white operating unit simulating image or a red operating unit simulating image be displayed as the operating unit simulating image displayed during the “character reach effect”.
In addition, even if the number of types of operation part simulated images displayed during the "barbell training performance" and the number of types of operation part simulated images displayed during the "character reach performance" are different in this way, good.

Although an embodiment has been described in which the operation reception of the operation unit is valid only once during the execution of the "barbell training performance" or the execution of the "character reach performance," it may be possible to accept the operation multiple times. When the "barbell training performance" is being performed, it is preferable to make the barbell fall multiple times in response to multiple operations.
Further, when the "character reach effect" is being executed, the cut-in image may be displayed multiple times in response to multiple operations.
Note that it is preferable to display a simulated operation unit image each time operation acceptance is enabled. In other words, if operation acceptance is enabled multiple times, the operation unit simulated image will also be displayed multiple times.
In addition, even if the number of times the operation reception on the operation section is valid is the same number of times (one time or multiple times) during execution of "Barbell training performance" and during execution of "Character reach performance". Alternatively, the number of times may be different (one time or multiple times).
For example, while the operation of the control unit is valid only once during the execution of the “Barbell training performance”, the operation reception of the control unit is valid only once or multiple times during the execution of the “Character reach performance”. It may be made valid once.
Alternatively, while the operation of the operation unit is enabled once or more than once during the execution of the “Barbell training performance”, the operation reception of the operation unit of the operation unit is activated once during the execution of the “Character reach performance”. It may also be possible to enable only the
Alternatively, while the operation of the operation unit is enabled two or more times during the execution of the “Barbell training performance”, the operation reception of the operation unit is activated two or more times during the execution of the “Character reach performance”. It may be made valid once. Furthermore, in this case, the number of times that the "barbell training performance" and the "character reach performance" are activated may be the same or may be different.
For example, the number of times the operation reception of the operation unit is enabled during the execution of the “barbell training performance” may be less than the number of times the operation reception of the operation unit is enabled during the execution of the “character reach performance”, It may be more.

The execution time of the "barbell training performance" (10 seconds, 12 seconds, 14 seconds) and the execution time of the "character reach performance" (60 seconds, 90 seconds) are longer.
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to provide a player who prefers a ready-to-win performance after the formation of a ready-to-win state with a longer time to enjoy the ready-to-win performance.

Conversely, the execution time of the "barbell training performance" may be longer than the execution time of the "character reach performance". For example, instead of 10 seconds, 12 seconds, and 14 seconds, the execution time of "Barbell training performance" is changed to 40 seconds, 48 seconds, and 56 seconds, and the execution time of "Character reach performance" is changed to 60 seconds, 90 seconds, It may be 20 seconds or 30 seconds.
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to perform the "character reach performance" while increasing the expectation that the "barbell training performance" will result in a jackpot. In addition, even if the barbell training performance suggests that expectations are low and the player moves to the character reach performance, the short execution time of the character reach performance will affect the player's feelings next time. Thereafter, the display can be quickly switched to a variable display.

We have shown that there are two types of "character reach performance": "martial artist character reach performance" and "master character reach performance", and we have shown various modifications that can be applied to "character reach performance". The modification may be similarly applied to each of the "reach performance" and the "master character reach performance."
Alternatively, a certain modification example may be applied to one of the "martial artist character reach performance" and "master character reach performance" and the modification example may not be applied to the other.
Alternatively, different modifications may be applied to each of the "martial artist character reach performance" and the "master character reach performance".
Note that the number of modified examples to be applied may be one, or two or more modified examples may be applied.

An embodiment has been shown in which after the execution of the "barbell training performance", the ratio of the "master character reach performance" being performed is lower than the ratio of the "martial artist character reach performance" being performed. For example, after the execution of the "barbell training performance," the "martial artist character reach performance" is performed at a rate of 90%, and the "master character reach performance" is performed at a rate of 10%. Furthermore, as shown with reference to FIG. 368, even if the expectation level when the "master character reach performance" is executed is higher than the expectation level when the "martial artist character reach performance" is executed, good.
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to give a sense of surprise to the player who thought that the martial artist character who trained using a barbell would appear in the reach effect as is, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. .

Conversely, after the execution of the "barbell training performance", the ratio of the "master character reach performance" may be made higher than the ratio of the "martial artist character reach performance". For example, the rate at which "martial artist character reach performance" is performed may be 10%, and the rate at which "master character reach performance" is performed may be set at 90%.
At this time, the expectation level when the "master character reach effect" is executed may be lower than the expectation level when the "martial artist character reach effect" is executed.
According to such an embodiment, the martial artist character who has been training with a barbell finally appears in the reach effect, and the expectation level at that time is high, creating great excitement for the player. It can be made to memorize and increase interest.
On the other hand, the expectation level when the "master character reach effect" is executed may be higher than the expectation level when the "martial artist character reach effect" is executed.
According to such an embodiment, when a martial artist character who trained using a barbell appeared in a reach effect, it was possible to see a rare effect in which the player's interest decreased due to low expectations. This can be supplemented by a sense of satisfaction, and a decline in interest can be prevented.

The display state is switched from the "training completion effect" state to the "character reach effect" state without executing the "reach character confirmation effect" and the "window enlargement display effect." The embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 240 may also be applied. For example, at the end of the "training completion effect," a predetermined background concealment image is displayed to make the entire display area black or white, or a predetermined character is displayed, and when the "character reach effect" starts, these images are displayed. The display may be gradually ended. In this case, the display state will transition from the display states shown in FIGS. 365(e) to 365(h) to the display states shown in FIGS. 366(d) and 366(g).
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation in the player as to which character (the martial artist character or the master character) will start the reach effect when the "character reach effect" starts. .

Depending on the length of time for displaying a predetermined background concealment image to make the entire display area black or white, or for displaying a predetermined character, which character (the martial artist character or the master character) will be displayed? may be suggested.
For example, if you prepare two types of background concealment image display times: short (for example, 4 seconds) and long (for example, 6 seconds), and if the display time is short, "martial artist character reach effect" will be executed. If it is a long time, it is preferable that a "master character reach effect" is executed.
Conversely, if it is a short time, a "master character reach effect" may be executed, and if it is a long time, a "martial artist character reach effect" may be executed.
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to make the player interested in how long the display of the background concealment image will last and which reach effect will start after the display of the background concealment image ends. .

Note that the type of reach effect to be executed is not determined according to the display time of the background concealment image, but is selected with a predetermined probability of the type of reach effect corresponding to the display time of the background concealment image. You may also do so. For example, if the display time of the background hidden image is 5 seconds, the probability that "martial artist character reach effect" will be selected is 50%, and the probability that "master character reach effect" will be selected is 50%. You can.
Alternatively, if the display time of the background hidden image is short (for example, 4 seconds), there is a 90% probability that "martial artist character reach effect" will be selected, and a probability that "master character reach effect" will be selected. In addition, if the display time of the background hidden image is long (for example, 6 seconds), the probability that "Martial artist character reach effect" will be selected is 10%, and the probability that "Master character reach effect" is selected is 10%. The probability that "reach effect" will be selected may be 90%.
Even in the case of such an embodiment, it is possible to make the player more interested in which reach effect will be started.

Note that although we have shown an embodiment in which multiple types of display times for background concealed images are prepared and the type of "character reach effect" to be executed is selected according to the display time, The type of enemy character appearing in the "character reach performance" may be selected.
For example, we prepare four types of background concealment image display times (for example, 4 seconds, 6 seconds, 8 seconds, and 10 seconds), and in the case of 4 seconds, a "martial artist character reach effect" in which a samurai character appears as an enemy character is displayed. If it is executed for 6 seconds, a "martial artist character reach effect" in which a warrior character appears as an enemy character is executed, and if it is for 8 seconds, a "master character reach effect" in which a fake samurai character appears as an enemy character is executed. , in the case of 10 seconds, a "master character reach effect" in which a fake warrior character appears as an enemy character may be executed. In this case, the longer the display time of the background hidden image, the more expected character reach effect will be executed.
Furthermore, after executing the "reach character confirmation effect", two types of background concealment image display times (for example, 2 seconds and 4 seconds) were prepared, and it was shown that the "martial artist character reach effect" was executed. It is preferable that a samurai character be displayed for 2 seconds and a warrior character for 4 seconds. Similarly, in a state where it is indicated that the "master character reach performance" is to be executed, a fake samurai character may be displayed for 2 seconds, and a fake warrior character may be displayed for 4 seconds.
According to such an embodiment, the player can predict what kind of reach effect will be executed and what kind of enemy character will be displayed by using the time to switch the background image, It is possible to increase expectations for winning the jackpot.

Although the embodiment has been shown in which the effect is displayed within the window, the same effect may be displayed in the entire display area without displaying the window. In this case, regarding the display priority of images such as characters, it is preferable to set the display priority higher than the background image and lower the display priority than the fourth symbol, the pending number display image, and the error notification image.
Note that the display priority of the effect display may be higher or lower than the display priority of the decorative pattern.
When the display priority of the effect display is set higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern, the visibility of the effect display can be ensured even when the decorative pattern is changing at high speed, changing at low speed, or temporarily stopping.
If the display priority of the effect display is lower than the display priority of the decorative pattern, there is a risk that the visibility of the effect display will be obstructed by the decorative pattern. By increasing the transparency of the decorative symbols during high-speed fluctuation, the player can recognize both that the decorative symbols are being displayed in a variable manner and that an effect display is being performed.

In this way, according to the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 362 to 369, new entertainment can be provided to the player.

An embodiment including a "bomb expectation level effect" which is a new effect will be described below. Note that this embodiment is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 369 and the like.

First, an overview of the "bomb expectation level production" will be explained. In the "bomb expectation performance", in the time saving state (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state), a winning ball occurs in the second starting hole 2004 (the number of prize balls in this embodiment is one) and When the number of items held in the second starting port 2004 reaches a predetermined maximum number (specifically, four items), a bomb image and a countdown image are displayed. Some images of the bomb resemble a fuse, with the end of the fuse lit. In addition, whether or not to start executing the "bomb expectation effect" when the condition that the number of pending items is the maximum is satisfied depends on when a prize is entered into the second starting port 2004 on the peripheral control board 1510. If the number is a predetermined maximum number (specifically, four), it is determined in advance at the time of winning.
When it is decided to start the execution of the "bomb expectation level production" when a predetermined maximum number (specifically 4) of prizes have been won, the predetermined maximum number (specifically 4) When a prize is won, the number "8" is displayed as a countdown image along with a bomb image. After the bomb image is displayed, each time a prize is won in the second starting port 2004, the number on the countdown image decreases by one with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 1/2), and the length of the fuse decreases. becomes shorter. Finally, when the number on the countdown image reaches 0, a bomb is displayed to explode, and a fluctuating decorative pattern appears at the position where the bomb was displayed, indicating the expectation of a jackpot. An expectation level suggestion image is displayed. As the expectation level suggestion images, "hot", "extremely hot", and "true?" are displayed. Furthermore, the level of expectation increases in the order of "heat", "extreme heat", and "hit?".
In addition, "every time a winning occurs in the second starting opening 2004" may refer to a winning that is over-winning in the starting opening described later, or may also be applied to a winning that is not an over-winning. The length of the fuse may be made shorter as the number in the countdown image decreases one by one with a probability (for example, a probability of 1/2). Alternatively, the predetermined probability may be set to 1/1, and the number on the countdown image will decrease by one and the length of the fuse will become shorter whenever the second starting port 2004 receives an over-win. Regardless of whether a prize is won or not, when a prize is won in the second starting port 2004, the number on the countdown image decreases one by one and the length of the fuse becomes shorter. Note that the number on the countdown image will not be subtracted unless the length of the fuse is shortened.

Over-winning means that a game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 when the number of reserved balls in the second starting opening 2004 is the upper limit of four, and in this specification, it is referred to as over-winning. be.
In addition, similarly, when the number of reservations in the first starting hole 2002 is the upper limit of four balls, it may be said that the winning of a game ball in the first starting hole 2002 is an over-winning.
Furthermore, on the condition that a predetermined number of game balls enter the grand prize opening 2005, when closing the open grand prize opening 2005, more game balls than the predetermined number enter the grand prize opening 2005. There are cases. This is because there is a time lag between when the winning of a predetermined number of game balls is detected and when the closure of the grand prize opening 2005 is completed, and game balls may enter the grand prize opening 2005 during this period. It is. This kind of gaming situation may also be called an over-win.

In addition, if no winning is detected at the second starting port 2004 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 6 seconds) while the bomb image and countdown image are being displayed, the display of the bomb image and countdown image is interrupted, and the bomb image and countdown image are displayed. The images are hidden (or only one of the images may be hidden so that the player is aware that the bomb expectation effect itself is being performed).
Further, if 6 seconds have passed since the bomb image and the countdown image were not displayed, the execution of the "bomb expectation level production" is ended.
On the other hand, when the bomb image and the countdown image are not displayed or only one of the images is hidden, when a winning in the second start opening 2004 is detected, the display of the bomb image and the countdown image is restarted. In addition, when the display is restarted, the same process as when a winning is detected in the second starting port 2004 with the bomb image and countdown image being displayed is performed (with a probability of 1/2). A determination is made as to whether or not the number decreased by one), and a bomb image and a countdown image are displayed according to the determination result.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 370 and 371, images displayed in the "bomb expectation level production" will be described.
FIGS. 370(a) to 370(h) show eight bomb images, ie, the first bomb image to the eighth bomb image, and countdown images corresponding to each bomb image. Each bomb image consists of a part representing a spherical bomb, a part representing a fuse, and a part representing a burning part at the end of the fuse. The length of the fuse is the longest in the eighth bomb image, becomes shorter in the seventh bomb image, then the sixth bomb image, and is the shortest in the first bomb image.
Further, as a countdown image, a predetermined number is located above a part representing a spherical bomb. The size of the numbers in the countdown image corresponds to the length of the fuse in each bomb image. That is, the length of the fuse can be recognized by the numbers displayed as a countdown image.
Further, as shown in the figure, the bomb image and the countdown image are displayed at positions that do not overlap. This ensures the visibility of both images.
In the "bomb expectation level production" described later, by displaying the 8th bomb image, the 7th bomb image, the 6th bomb image, ..., the 2nd bomb image, and the 1st bomb image in this order, the fuse It expresses how the length of is getting shorter.

FIG. 371(a) shows an explosion image. The explosion image is an image that is displayed when a starting prize occurs while the first bomb image is being displayed.
FIGS. 371(b) to 371(d) show expectation level suggestion images. The expectation level suggestion image is an image that is displayed after the display of the explosion image ends.
As shown in each figure, there are three types of expectation level suggestion images: "hot", "extremely hot", and "hit?", each of which suggests a different level of expectation. Specifically, the expectation level for "heat" is 20%, the expectation level for "extremely hot" is 40%, and the expectation level for "true?" is 100%.
Note that this expectation level is just an example, and the expectation level for "heat" may be 10%, the expectation level for "extremely hot" may be 20%, and the expectation level for "hit?" may be 100%.
In addition, although the expectation level of "Was it?" was set to 100%, it may be set to 90% or 95%.
Note that the types of expectation level suggestion images are not limited to three types, and may be any number of types of two or more (for example, four to ten types).

The "bomb expectation level effect" will be explained below with reference to the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 372 to 374.
FIG. 372 is a flowchart showing the bomb expectation level performance execution process. Note that the bomb expectation level performance execution process is executed periodically from the main routine in the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control section steady processing described with reference to FIG. 95 etc.) when it is decided to execute the bomb expectation level performance. This is a subroutine that is called. Further, FIG. 373 is a flowchart showing bomb image display processing. Further, FIG. 374 is a flowchart showing bomb image display cancellation processing.
The bomb image display process and the bomb image display stop process are subroutines called from the bomb expectation level performance execution process.

In step S140 in the bomb expectation level production execution process, it is determined whether or not an expectation level suggestion image is being displayed. If the expectation level suggestion image is not displayed, the process moves to step S142, and if the expectation level suggestion image is displayed, the process moves to step S168.

In step S142, it is determined whether an explosion image is being displayed. If the explosion image is not displayed, the process moves to step S146, and if the explosion image is displayed, the process moves to step S164.

In step S146, it is determined whether the number of reservations at the second starting port 2004 is four. If the number of reservations at the second starting port 2004 is 4, the process moves to step S148, and if the number of reservations at the second starting port 2004 is not 4 (that is, 0 to 3), the process goes to step S162. Transition.

In step S148, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the second starting port 2004. If a game ball has entered the second starting port 2004, the process moves to step S150, and if no game ball has entered the second starting port 2004, the process moves to step S162.

In step S150, it is determined whether the display of the bomb image is being interrupted. If the display of the bomb image is being interrupted, the process moves to step S152. If the display of the bomb image is not being interrupted, the process moves to step S154.

In step S152, the display of the bomb image and countdown image is restarted. The displayed bomb image and countdown image may be the same bomb image and countdown image that were displayed before the display was interrupted, or may be an image that is one step ahead (for example, the countdown number is 5 and is hidden, When restarted, it may be 4, etc.). After that, the process moves to step S154.

In step S154, it is determined whether the bomb expectation level performance execution flag is 1 or not. If the bomb expectation level production execution flag is 1, the process moves to step S156. If the bomb expectation level performance execution flag is not 1, the process moves to step S158.

The bomb image display process in step S156 will be explained with reference to FIG. 373.
In step S180, it is determined whether or not the bomb image development lottery has been won. The bomb image development lottery is, for example, a lottery with a probability of 1/2 of winning and a probability of 1/2 of losing. If the bomb image development lottery is won, the process moves to step S182, and if the bomb image development lottery is unsuccessful, the process returns to the bomb expectation level performance execution process.

In step S182, it is determined whether the first bomb image is being displayed. If the first bomb image is displayed, the process moves to step S184; if the first bomb image is not displayed (the second to eighth bomb images are displayed), the process moves to step S186. Transition.

In step S184, the first bomb image is hidden and the explosion image is displayed. Further, the number "0" is displayed as the next countdown image. Thereafter, the process returns to the bomb expectation level performance execution process.

In step S186, the next bomb image and countdown image are displayed as the bomb image and countdown image. For example, if the number "8" is displayed as the eighth bomb image and countdown image, the number "7" is displayed as the seventh bomb image and countdown image. Thereafter, the process returns to the bomb expectation level performance execution process.

Although the bomb image display process has been described with reference to FIG. 373, the explanation will return to the bomb expectation level performance execution process with reference to FIG. 372.

In step S158, the bomb expectation level performance execution flag is set to 1.

In step S160, display of the bomb image and countdown image is started. The first bomb image displayed is the eighth bomb image. The number "8" is also displayed as a countdown image.

The bomb image display canceling process in step S162 will be described with reference to FIG. 374.
In step S200, it is determined whether or not a prize is entered into the second starting port 2004 continuously for a predetermined period of time (6 seconds) while the bomb image is being displayed. If there is no winning in the second starting opening 2004, the process moves to step S202. If there is a prize in the second starting opening 2004, the process moves to step S204.

In step S202, the display of the bomb image and countdown image that is currently being displayed is interrupted. After that, the process moves to step S204.

In step S204, it is determined whether or not a prize is entered into the second starting port 2004 for a predetermined period of time (6 seconds) continuously from the start of interruption of display of the bomb image. If there is no winning in the second starting opening 2004, the process moves to step S206. If there is a prize in the second starting port 2004, the process returns to the bomb expectation performance execution process.

In step S206, the bomb expectation level performance execution flag is set to 0. Thereafter, the process returns to the bomb expectation level performance execution process. Note that there is no process to be executed in the returned bomb expectation performance execution process, so the process returns to the main routine. In addition, in the main routine, when the bomb expectation level performance execution flag changes from 1 to 0, the execution of the bomb expectation level performance is terminated, and the bomb is continued until it is decided to execute the bomb expectation level performance again. Expectation level performance execution processing is not executed.
In addition, it is possible to terminate the bomb expectation level performance in the middle (for example, by counting down) by determining whether or not the winning to the second starting port 2004 has continued for a predetermined period of time (for example, 6 seconds) from the start of interruption of display of the bomb image. Although the display does not advance to 0 and ends at 5, etc.), the display may not end in the middle of the bomb expectation level presentation.

Although the bomb image display canceling process has been described with reference to FIG. 374, the explanation will return to the bomb expectation level effect execution process with reference to FIG. 372.

In step S164, it is determined whether two seconds have passed since the start of displaying the explosion image. If two seconds have passed since the start of displaying the explosion image, the process moves to step S166. If two seconds have not elapsed since the start of displaying the explosion image, the process returns to the main routine.

In step S166, the explosion image and the countdown image are hidden, and the expectation level suggestion image is displayed. Note that the expectation level suggestion image to be displayed is determined based on the results of a special lottery. Thereafter, the process returns to the main routine. In addition, based on the results of the special lottery, even for winnings that are not over-winning, the number on the countdown image will decrease by one with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/2 probability) and the length of the fuse will increase. If you set it to become shorter, when the explosion image is displayed, it will either be in a state where the fluctuation is occurring but there is no hold, or a state where the fluctuation is occurring and there is also a hold, so it is necessary to do so. In some cases, an image suggesting the level of expectation for the change is displayed, and even if the change being performed ends, the image suggesting the level of expectation remains displayed, and an image suggesting the level of expectation for one of the pending changes is displayed. In some cases. In other words, it may be based on the result of a lottery held at the start of the fluctuation, or it may be based on the result of a so-called pre-read lottery.

In step S168, it is determined whether three seconds have elapsed since the start of displaying the expectation level suggestion image. If three seconds have passed since the start of displaying the expectation level suggestion image, the process moves to step S170. If 3 seconds have not elapsed since the start of displaying the explosion image, the process returns to the main routine.

In step S170, the expectation level suggestion image is hidden.
Subsequently, in step S172, a bomb expectation level performance execution flag is set to 0. Thereafter, the process returns to the main routine.
In addition, in the main routine, when the bomb expectation level performance execution flag changes from 1 to 0, the execution of the bomb expectation level performance is terminated, and the bomb is continued until it is decided to execute the bomb expectation level performance again. Expectation level performance execution processing is not executed.
In other words, 2 seconds after the explosion image is displayed, the expectation level suggestion image is displayed, and 3 seconds after the expectation level suggestion image is displayed, the expectation level suggestion image is hidden (the expectation level suggestion image is (The time the expectation-suggesting image is displayed is longer than the time it takes to display it.) However, it may happen that the change is not made two seconds after the explosion image is displayed. Therefore, the expectation level suggestion image may be displayed together with the display of the explosion image. Specifically, if a single hit is performed while the bomb expectation level performance is being executed even though no fluctuation is being performed, the bomb expectation level performance will progress every time a game ball enters the second starting hole 2004. This is because it can be done.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 375 and 376, a specific display mode in the "bomb expectation level production" will be described.
The "bomb expectation performance" is executed in the time saving state (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state). In the time saving state, the probability that a game ball will win in the second starting port 2004 is higher than in the non-time saving state (low probability non-time saving state, high probability non-time saving state). Furthermore, since the second starting opening 2004 is provided on the right side of the gaming area, the player will play right-handed.
Note that FIG. 375 shows a time chart of an example of performance in this embodiment. Further, FIG. 376 shows the display state at a predetermined timing in the example effect.

First, production example 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 375(a) and 376. Performance example 1 shows an example of performance in the case where it is assumed that the bomb image development lottery is won in all of the multiple start winnings for the second starting opening 2004 and it is determined that the next bomb image will be displayed. As mentioned above, the probability of winning the bomb image development lottery is 1/2 and the probability of failing is 1/2, so there is a 1/2 probability that the next bomb image will be displayed, and a 1/2 probability that the next bomb image will be displayed. The original bomb image continues to be displayed, but now all the next bomb images are displayed.
In addition, in production example 1, the timings at which the starting winnings occur are timing t9, timing t10, timing t13, timing t14, timing t15, timing t16, timing t18, timing t19, and timing t22.

FIG. 376(a) shows the display state in the display area immediately before timing t0 (immediately before the start of variable display). At this time, the number of reservations at the second starting port 2004 is four, and "4" is displayed as the reservation number display image. In addition, the game is in a time saving state (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state), and is a gaming state in which the player is required to play right-handed. In the display area, there is a normal background image C, the number of consecutive matches (number part of "Win x 15"), and the number of game balls paid out to the player during consecutive matches (number part of "Over 12,000 cars!!") , "Next destination: Owari", the words "Musha training RUSH", the words of the martial artist character and the martial artist character ("Musha training all over the country!"), and the words "Right hit!" The arrow image and the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed are displayed. Note that these characters and images continue to be displayed even while the decorative patterns are being displayed in a fluctuating manner.
At timing t0, variable display of decorative patterns is started. At the same time, the number of pending images decreases by one to three, and the standby pending image displayed in the first pending display area increases in size while moving to the left, and is displayed as the current pending image in the current pending display area. Further, the standby pending images displayed in the second pending display area to the fourth pending display area are moved to the left and displayed in the first pending display area to the third pending display area, respectively. As a result, the standby pending image is not displayed in the fourth pending display area. Further, "3" is displayed as the pending number display image.
FIG. 376(b) shows the display state at this time (predetermined timing between timing t0 and timing t9).
Note that, from timing t0 to at least timing t33, the decorative patterns are displayed in a high-speed variable manner. The manner in which the decorative symbols are varied and displayed after timing t33 will be described later.

At timing t9, a game ball enters the second starting port 2004. In response to this winning, a standby pending image is displayed in the fourth pending display area. Further, an eighth bomb image and a countdown image (number "8") are displayed on the left side of the display area. Note that the display priority of the bomb images (first to eighth bomb images) and countdown images is higher than the display priority of the decorative patterns. Further, "4" is displayed as the pending number display image.
FIG. 376(c) shows the display state at this time.

Next, at timing t10, a game ball enters the second starting port 2004. Note that this winning occurred when the number of reservations in the second starting port 2004 was four (as described above, this is an over winning). In response to this winning, the 8th bomb image changes to the 7th bomb image. At the same time, the countdown image changes from the number "8" to the number "7". As the eighth bomb image changes to the seventh bomb image, the length of the fuse becomes shorter.
FIG. 376(d) shows the display state at this time.

Similarly, a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 at timing t13, timing t14, timing t15, timing t16, timing t18, and timing t19. The bomb image changes in order from the seventh bomb image to the first bomb image in accordance with each winning prize. At the same time, the countdown image changes from the number "7" to the number "1" in order. Additionally, the length of the fuse gradually becomes shorter as the bomb image changes.
FIG. 376(e) shows a display state in which the first bomb image and the countdown image of the number "1" are displayed (the display period is from timing t19 to timing t22).

Next, at timing t22, a game ball enters the second starting port 2004. In response to this winning, the first bomb image changes to an explosion image. At the same time, the countdown image changes from the number "1" to the number "0". Note that the display priority of the explosion image is higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern. The explosion image is displayed for 2 seconds.
FIG. 376(f) shows a display state in which the first bomb image and the countdown image of the number "0" are displayed (the display period is from timing t22 to timing t24).

Next, at timing t24, the display of the explosion image and countdown image ends. Further, an expectation level suggestion image is displayed at the position where the explosion image was displayed. Here, an image suggesting the level of expectation for "extreme heat" is displayed. The expectation level suggestion image is displayed for 3 seconds.
FIG. 376(g) shows a display state in which the expectation level suggestion image is displayed (the display period is from timing t24 to timing t27).

Next, at timing t27, the display of the expectation level suggestion image ends. Furthermore, this ends the execution of the "bomb expectation level effect".
FIG. 376(h) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t30) after the display of the expectation level suggestion image ends.

Next, production example 2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 375(b) and FIG. 376. In production example 2, it is determined that the next bomb image will be displayed in some of the multiple start wins for the second start opening 2004, and it is determined that the next bomb image will not be displayed in the other start wins. An example of the performance is shown assuming that the As mentioned above, the probability of winning the bomb image development lottery is 1/2 and the probability of failing is 1/2, so there is a 1/2 probability that the next bomb image will be displayed, and a 1/2 probability that the next bomb image will be displayed. Although the original bomb image continues to be displayed, there are cases where the next bomb image is displayed and cases where the original bomb image continues to be displayed.
In addition, the timings at which the starting winnings occur in production example 2 are timing t9, timing t10, timing t12, timing t13, timing t14, timing t15, timing t16, timing t17, timing t18, timing t19, timing t21, and timing t22. There is.

Among these, for the starting winnings at timing t9, timing t10, timing t13, timing t14, timing t15, timing t16, timing t18, timing t19, and timing t22, the next bomb image is displayed in response to the occurrence of the starting winning. It is assumed that this will be done.
On the other hand, regarding the starting winnings at timing t12, timing t17, and timing t21, although the starting winnings have occurred, the original bomb image continues to be displayed. For example, at timing t12, although a starting prize occurs, it is determined that the original bomb image continues to be displayed, so the display content of the display area does not change.
Note that the display content in the display area (specifically, the display mode of bomb images, countdown images, explosion images, etc.) is the same as the display mode in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 375(a). .

Next, production example 3 will be explained with reference to FIG. 375(c). In production example 3, a starting prize for the second starting port 2004 occurs and the execution of the "bomb expectation level performance" is started, but the player interrupts the firing of the game ball and the "bomb expectation level performance" is in progress. An example of presentation is shown assuming that the starting prize does not occur after the bomb image changes only once. Note that, as described above with reference to FIG. 374, if a starting prize does not occur for a predetermined period of time during the execution of the "bomb expectation effect", the display of the bomb image and the countdown image is interrupted. Further, after the display of the bomb image and the countdown image is interrupted, if a starting prize does not occur for a predetermined period of time, the execution of the "bomb expectation level performance" is terminated.
In addition, in the production example 3, the timings at which the starting winnings occur are timing t9 and timing t10. Furthermore, it is assumed that the bomb image development lottery executed in response to the starting prize winning at timing t10 has been won.

As shown in FIG. 375(c), at timing t9, a starting prize is generated, and the display of the number "8" in the eighth bomb image and the countdown image is started. FIG. 376(c) shows the display state at this time.
Next, at timing t10, a starting prize occurs, and by winning the bomb image development lottery, the number "7" is displayed as the seventh bomb image and the countdown image.
Thereafter, no starting prize is generated, and at timing t16 (six seconds after timing t10), the display of the number "7" as the seventh bomb image and countdown image is interrupted. FIG. 376(h) shows the display state at this time.
Next, at timing t22 (six seconds after timing t16), the execution of the "bomb expectation effect" ends. That is, even if a starting prize occurs after timing t22, the display of the number "7" in the seventh bomb image and the countdown image will not be restarted.

Next, production example 4 will be explained with reference to FIG. 375(d). Production example 4 is a partial modification of production example 3, and in addition to the timing shown in production example 3, the production example is based on the assumption that a starting prize for the second starting port 2004 occurs at timing t18. Showing.
In the case of this production example, at timing t16, the display of the number "7" in the seventh bomb image and the countdown image is interrupted, but in response to the occurrence of a starting prize at timing t18, the display of the seventh bomb image and the number "7" is interrupted. The display of the number "7" is resumed as a countdown image.
Furthermore, at timing t24 (six seconds after timing t18), the display of the number "7" in the seventh bomb image and the countdown image is interrupted again.

Production examples 1 to 4 in the "bomb expectation level production" have been shown, but after timing t33, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner that indicates a loss without reaching the reach state, or after reaching the reach state. The decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner that indicates a loss or a jackpot.
Note that after reaching the ready-to-reach state, a special ready-to-reach presentation (for example, the above-mentioned martial artist character ready-to-reach presentation or master character ready-to-reach presentation) may be performed. In this case, after it is suggested whether or not it is a jackpot based on the performance content during the reach performance (such as the result of a battle between characters), the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss or a manner indicating a jackpot.

A variation pattern with a long variation time (for example, 1 minute or 2 minutes) is selected despite the time reduction state (low probability time reduction state, high probability time reduction state), and the "bomb expectation performance" is executed, and the second When starting prizes occur continuously for the starting opening 2004, the "bomb expectation level effect" is executed only within one fluctuating display, as in effect examples 1 to 4. However, in time-saving states (low-probability time-saving states, high-probability time-saving states), fluctuation patterns with relatively short fluctuation times (for example, 1 second or 2 seconds) are selected at a high rate (for example, 1/2 or more). When such a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time (for example, 1 second or 2 seconds) is selected, a "bomb expectation effect" is executed, or when a time-saving state (low probability time-saving state, high probability Even though a variation pattern with a long variation time (for example, 1 minute or 2 minutes) is selected and the "bomb expectation effect" is executed, the launch of the game ball may be stopped. If you hit left-handed, a starting prize will not be generated for the second starting port 2004, so before the explosion image is displayed in the "bomb expectation level production" (1st bomb image to 8th bomb image and those It is also assumed that the fluctuations may be interrupted when the numbers are displayed as the corresponding countdown image.
In this case, even if the fluctuation is interrupted (the pattern is confirmed, there is no hold, and the next fluctuation does not start), the "bomb expectation level effect" itself will continue to be displayed (1st bomb image to 8th bomb image) and the corresponding countdown images are displayed even if the fluctuation is interrupted (the pattern is confirmed, there is no hold, and the next fluctuation does not start), so that the "bomb expectation level effect" is executed over multiple fluctuation displays. That will happen. In this case, regarding the display result of the newly started fluctuation display (specifically, regarding the change that triggered the display of the explosion image in the "bomb expectation level production", or the "bomb expectation level production") The expectation level (with respect to the change before the change that triggered the display of the explosion image) is suggested by the expectation level suggestion image.
Note that even if the "bomb expectation effect" is executed across the variable display, the bomb image and countdown image continue to be displayed. As a result, it is possible to keep the user aware that the "bomb expectation level effect" is being performed, and the interest is maintained.

According to aspects such as production example 1 and production example 2, the bomb image is switched to the next bomb image with a predetermined probability in response to the occurrence of a starting prize, and as the fuse gradually becomes shorter, a countdown occurs. Since an image countdown is shown to the player, the player who wants to know the level of expectation will actively play a game that will generate a starting prize. Furthermore, by displaying numbers as a countdown image, the progress of the performance can be clearly communicated to the player. Also, when switching bomb images, the countdown image is always switched, and when the countdown image decreases toward 0 and reaches 0, the expectation level suggestion image is displayed, so even if you are a normal player, For example, if you watch the ``bomb expectation level effect'' two or three times, you can quickly understand what kind of effect it is. Furthermore, the player who understands the content of the performance will feel a sense of excitement as the numbers on the countdown image decrease toward zero.
Alternatively, there are a certain number of players who do not interrupt the shooting of game balls because they feel troublesome about interrupting the shooting of the game balls. Further, depending on the game parlor, there are cases where it is prohibited to interrupt the firing of game balls. In such a case, over-winning may inevitably occur, and the player may feel as if he or she has lost money without gaining any profit from the initial winning, and there is a risk that the player's interest may decrease. According to the embodiment, the fuse gradually becomes shorter due to the occurrence of over-winning, and the expectation level is finally indicated, so that the interest can be improved.
On the other hand, players who do not want to know the expectation level, or who do not want to shoot the game ball because they consider the risk of reducing the number of game balls rather than knowing the expectation level, may decide to fire the game ball. Even if you do, you can interrupt or stop the display of the bomb image or countdown image by immediately stopping the firing of the game balls (in this case, the display of the bomb image or countdown image can be interrupted or stopped). ).
Furthermore, if such a player changes his or her mind midway through the game, the display of the bomb image or countdown image can be restarted by restarting the firing of the game ball. For example, in production example 4, if the player continues to shoot the game ball after timing t18, it is possible to display an expectation level suggestion image.

In this way, according to the present embodiment, even if the number of balls on hold reaches the upper limit, the player continues to fire the game balls, so the operating rate of the game machine can be increased, contributing to the sales of the game parlor. . Furthermore, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be increased because the player continues to shoot the gaming balls until at least a plurality of starting winnings occur. On the other hand, a player who does not like having his/her expectation level suggested can avoid having his or her expectation level suggested by the "bomb expectation level performance" by interrupting the firing of the game ball.

Although the embodiment has been shown in which the bomb image continues to be displayed when the variable display ends while the bomb image is being displayed, the bomb image is The execution of the "bomb expectation level performance" may be completed by ending the display.
Alternatively, during the variable display, the execution of the "bomb expectation level effect" may be ended at the timing when the decorative pattern forms the ready-to-reach state or at the timing when the ready-to-reach effect is started.

An embodiment has been shown in which the "bomb expectation performance" is started based on the number of items held in the second starting port 2004 during the time saving state (low probability time saving state or high probability time saving state). Note that during the time saving state, the frequency of the movable piece 2004a being in the open state increases, so it is possible to increase the number of reservations in a short time. For this reason, the number of balls held in the second starting port 2004 is likely to reach the maximum, which may be an opportunity for the player to interrupt the firing of game balls. It becomes possible to provide motivation to continue firing.
On the other hand, it may also be possible to perform a "bomb expectation level effect" based on the number of items held in the first starting port 2002 during left-handed firing (during a low probability non-time saving state or a high probability non-time saving state). Note that the first starting port 2002 is not provided with a member that changes the winning rate like the movable piece 2004a in the second starting port 2004. In addition, when performing the "bomb expectation degree production" based on the number of pending bombs in the first starting port 2002, it is preferable to display the normal background image A or the normal background image B as the background image.

In addition, when a bomb image is displayed (when any of the bomb images from the 8th bomb image to the 1st bomb image is displayed), the expectation level for winning does not change regardless of the type of bomb image. is desirable.
By adopting such an embodiment, a player who is firing a game ball because he or she wants to know the expectation level indicated by the expectation level suggestion image can, in the middle of executing the "bomb expectation level performance", Even if you feel anxious that an image suggesting a low expectation level may be displayed, and feel like ``I don't want to see an image suggesting an expectation level after all,'' you can immediately stop shooting the game ball. Since the expectation level suggestion image is no longer displayed, it is possible to provide a performance that can respond to the player's psychological changes, and it is possible to maintain the sense of expectation until the expectation level suggestion image is displayed.

Note that the bomb image may be provided with a plurality of colors so that different expectations are suggested depending on the color of the bomb image.
For example, a white bomb image, a red bomb image, and a gold bomb image may be displayed as the bomb images. Further, it is preferable that the expectation level at this time increases in the order of white bomb image, red bomb image, and gold bomb image.
The color of the entire bomb image may be changed, or only the color of a part of the bomb image may be changed.
When changing the color of a part of the bomb image, the portion to be changed may be any one or two of a portion representing a spherical bomb, a portion representing a fuse, and a burning portion at the end of the fuse. In addition, in the case of two, it is preferable to make them the same color instead of making them different colors.
Note that when displaying the next bomb image, it is preferable to leave the part whose color has changed to the same color or to change it to a color with a higher expectation level. On the other hand, it is best not to change the color to a color for which expectations are low.
For example, if you win the bomb image development lottery and decide to display the 6th bomb image while the 7th bomb image with the red burning part is displayed, the 6th bomb image with the red burning part Although either the bomb image or the sixth bomb image with a golden burning part is displayed, it is preferable that the sixth bomb image with a white burning part is not displayed.
In this way, the timing of changing to the mode with high expectation level may be the timing of displaying the next bomb image, or the timing of changing to the mode with high expectation level may be the timing of displaying the next bomb image, or the timing of changing to the mode with high expectation level may be the timing of displaying the next bomb image, or the timing of changing to the mode with high expectation level may be the timing of displaying the next bomb image. It may be changed. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the firing interval is generally about 0.6 seconds, and the progress of the "bomb expectation performance" of the present invention (the progress of the countdown) is determined by the time when the second starting port 2004 is reached. Since winning is the trigger, it is preferable to set the time shorter than the firing interval time. The reason for changing the mode to a high expectation level is that it can make the player recognize that it is the game ball that was fired, which increases the sense of elation. In addition, if the predetermined time is set to a time longer than the firing interval time, for example, 1.0 seconds, even though it has been decided to change to red, the second It may also be determined that the prize enters the starting slot 2004 and changes to gold. In such a case, the red color may be displayed and then the gold color may be displayed, or the red stage may be skipped (without being displayed) and the gold color may be displayed.

Note that instead of the bomb image, the color of the countdown image may be changed in the same way as the bomb image. Alternatively, when changing the color of the entire bomb image or a part of the bomb image, the color of the countdown image may be changed to the same color or a different color, or only the countdown image may be changed.

The color of the explosion image may also be changed to the same color as the first bomb image (in whole or in part) or the countdown image. For example, if the first golden bomb image is being displayed, a golden explosion image may be displayed.

Although an embodiment has been described in which the level of expectation is indicated by the color of the bomb image or the countdown image, the level of expectation may be indicated by providing a plurality of display modes of the bomb image or the countdown image, and is not limited to the color. For example, three types of bomb images, a small bomb image, a medium bomb image, and a large bomb image, may be displayed, and the larger the size of the bomb image, the higher the expectation level. Note that a similar aspect can be adopted for the countdown image as well.

In addition, when a prize is entered into the second starting port 2004 and the predetermined maximum number (specifically, 4) is reached, the 8th bomb image and the countdown 8 shall be displayed, and the 8th bomb image may be displayed, one of a white bomb image, a red bomb image, and a golden bomb image may be displayed. In this case, the red bomb image and the golden bomb image, which have relatively high expectations, are suddenly displayed at the start of the "bomb expectation performance", so the number of pending items in the second starting port 2004 is 3. It is possible to make the player feel a sense of exhilaration that a highly anticipated bomb image will be displayed at a timing when the game ball is likely to enter the second starting port 2004.
Although the bomb image is taken as an example, the color of a part of the bomb image or the countdown image may change as described above.

An embodiment is shown in which an expectation level suggestion image is displayed on the condition that the starting prize occurs multiple times (for example, at least 8 times) during the "bomb expectation level performance" and the bomb image development lottery is won a predetermined number of times. . In other words, the level of expectation is not suggested to the player until the starting winnings occur a plurality of times. Thereby, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be increased. Note that the number of times is not limited to 8, and may be any number of times from 3 to 10, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine and the probability that a starting prize will occur.

When a game ball enters the second starting slot 2004 (in both cases of over-winning and non-over-winning), a bomb image development lottery is held, and the probability of winning the bomb image development lottery is set to 1/2. Although the embodiment has been shown, the probability of winning the bomb image development lottery may be set to another probability, for example, 1/3 or 2/3.
Alternatively, the next bomb image and countdown image are always displayed when a game ball enters the second starting slot 2004 without conducting a bomb image development lottery (in both cases of over-winning and when not over-winning). Alternatively, an explosion image may be displayed. This modification can be realized by not performing the process of step S180 in the flowchart of FIG. 373, or by setting the probability of winning the bomb image development lottery to 1/1.

An example in which the expectation level suggestion image in the "bomb expectation level production" indicates the level of expectation regarding the display result of the decorative pattern that is being displayed in a variable manner, and one of the waiting times displayed in the first to fourth pending display areas. We have shown an example in which the expectation level for the hold is shown, but if the expectation level for any of the hold holds displayed in the first hold display area to the fourth hold display area is shown, the expectation level for any hold is ``Expected to be a bomb''. It is also possible to indicate whether or not the "on-hold display area" is being executed by adding an arrow or the like to the standby image. Alternatively, the display with the arrow etc. It may be a display effect that corresponds to any one of the attached standby and hold areas. In this case, both sides may have a chance, and only one side may have a chance.

In step S150 and step S152 of FIG. 372, an embodiment has been shown in which the display of the bomb image and the countdown image is restarted, but at this time, instead of displaying the original bomb image and countdown image, An image and a countdown image may also be displayed. Note that if the number "1" is displayed as the first bomb image and the countdown image, it is preferable to display the number "0" as the explosion image and the countdown image.
According to such an embodiment, when the display is restarted, the explosion image and the countdown image are displayed in a state that is one step ahead of the time when the display was interrupted, so that the player who has resumed firing the game ball can It can make the player feel like he has earned the ball once.

As a special reach performance, a first reach performance during time saving, a second reach performance during time saving, and a third reach performance during time saving may be executable during the time saving state (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state). In addition, in the 1st reach performance during time saving to the 3rd reach performance during time saving, each martial artist character fights a different opponent character, and if the martial artist character wins, the decorative pattern will stop in a manner indicating a jackpot after the reach performance ends. is displayed, and then the jackpot game starts. On the other hand, if the martial artist character loses, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss after the end of the ready-to-win effect, and then the next decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner.
In addition, the 1st reach effect during time saving, the 2nd reach effect during time saving, and the 3rd reach effect during time saving are each performed after a predetermined number of seconds from the start of the variable display, based on the effect pattern determined at the start of the variable display. execution begins.
Note that the level of expectation increases in the order of the first reach performance during time savings, the second reach performance during time savings, and the third reach performance during time savings.

Since the period during which the "bomb expectation performance" is executed changes depending on the firing state of the game ball, a game situation may occur in which the reach performance is started while the "bomb expectation performance" is being executed.
In this case, it is preferable to interrupt the display of the bomb image and the countdown image at the timing when all reach effects have started. By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to make the player concentrate on the reach effect.
Alternatively, for some reach effects, the bomb image and countdown image continue to be displayed while the reach effect is being executed, and for other reach effects, the display of the bomb image and countdown image is interrupted at the timing when the reach effect starts. You may also do so. With such an embodiment, depending on the type of reach effect, the bomb image and the countdown image may or may not be displayed during execution of the reach effect.
For example, during the execution of the third reach effect during time saving, which has the highest expectations, the display of the bomb image and countdown image is interrupted, and the display of the bomb image and countdown image is interrupted during the execution of the first reach effect during time saving, which has the highest expectations, and the second reach effect during time saving, which has the lowest expectations. During execution, the bomb image and countdown image may continue to be displayed.
In this way, by increasing the number of reach effects in which the display of bomb images and countdown images is not interrupted (hidden) than the number of reach effects in which the display of bomb images and countdown images is interrupted (hidden), It can be reminded that a reach effect in which the display of the bomb image and the countdown image is interrupted (hidden) is a reach effect with a particularly high degree of expectation.
Also, even if the number of reach effects in which the display of bomb images and countdown images is not interrupted (hidden) is smaller than the number of reach effects in which the display of bomb images and countdown images is interrupted (hidden), good. In this case, it is possible to provide a sense of anticipation even in the second short-time reach performance, where expectations are relatively low (the display of bomb images and countdown images is interrupted in the third short-time reach performance, where expectations are high). This is because the player is under the illusion that expectations are high when the display of the bomb image and countdown image is interrupted (hidden).
Further, the number of ready-to-reach effects in which the display of the bomb image and the countdown image is interrupted (hidden) may be the same as the number of ready-to-reach effects in which the display of the bomb image and the countdown image is not interrupted (hidden). It should be noted that the reach performance referred to here is a reach performance other than the so-called normal reach performance that is performed while the background image is displayed during time saving.
In such a case, the bomb image and countdown image will be displayed from the start of variation until the start of the reach effect (until a predetermined time has passed from the start of variation), and will be hidden while the reach effect is being executed. It is desirable that the bomb image and countdown image be hidden for a longer time than the image and countdown image are displayed.

If the martial artist character loses in the 1st reach performance during time saving to the 3rd reach performance during time saving (if a display suggesting a loss is displayed in a display suggesting a win or loss), the result of the win or loss will be indicated. It is preferable to restart the display of the bomb image and the countdown image at a timing after the display of the bomb image and the countdown image is performed and before the timing at which the decorative pattern is displayed as a fixed stop. By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to alleviate the feelings of a player who feels disappointed when it turns out that the result of the special lottery is a loss, by displaying the bomb image and the countdown image.

If a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 during the execution of the 1st reach effect during time saving to the 3rd reach effect during time saving (including both cases of over winning or not over winning), either bomb image Even if it is a countdown image, it is preferable not to restart the display. According to such an embodiment, the player can be made to concentrate on the reach effect. Note that it is preferable not to restart the display of any of the bomb images (first bomb image to eighth bomb image) and their corresponding countdown images; image) and the corresponding countdown images may be restarted.

If the martial artist character wins from the 1st reach effect during time saving to the 3rd reach effect during time saver (if a display indicating a jackpot is displayed in the display indicating the result of winning or losing), the decorative pattern will be fixed and stopped. However, the bomb image and countdown image are hidden until the jackpot game state ends, and the display of the bomb image and countdown image is resumed at the timing when the jackpot game state ends and the next variable display starts. Ru. By adopting such an embodiment, the player can concentrate on the jackpot gaming state.
It should be noted that the "bomb expectation level performance" may be ended at the timing when the variable display of the decorative pattern is ended. In this case, the display of the bomb image and countdown image will not be restarted after the jackpot game state ends.
In addition, if the martial artist character wins in the 1st reach performance during time saving to the 3rd reach performance during time saving (when a display suggesting a win is displayed in a display suggesting a win or loss), the decorative pattern will be confirmed. The display of the bomb image and the countdown image may be restarted before the display is stopped. In this case, a sense of anticipation can be provided after the jackpot game state ends.

Although the embodiment has been shown in which the display of the bomb image and the countdown image is resumed at the timing when the jackpot game state ends and the next variable display starts, it may be possible to restart the display of the bomb image and the countdown image at a predetermined timing during the jackpot game state, or at a predetermined timing during the time saving In the 1st reach performance to the 3rd reach performance during time saving, after the timing when the martial artist character wins (a display indicating a jackpot is displayed in the display indicating the result of winning or losing), until the decorative symbols are confirmed and stopped. The display of the bomb image and the countdown image may be restarted at the timing of . According to such an embodiment, regarding the variable display performed after a jackpot, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation that another jackpot will occur (that a consecutive win will occur). .
Although the embodiment has been shown in which the display of the bomb image and the countdown image is restarted at the timing when the jackpot game state ends and the next variable display starts, the next variable display starts when the jackpot game state ends. The bomb image and the countdown image may be displayed at an earlier timing. In such a case, a sense of anticipation can be provided even before the change occurs.

An embodiment has been shown in which the display of the bomb image and the countdown image is restarted at the timing when the jackpot game state ends and the next variable display starts. The bomb image and countdown image displayed when restarting are the same bomb image and countdown image as before restarting. According to such an embodiment, the fluctuating display performed after a jackpot can make the player feel a sense of expectation that another jackpot will occur.
On the other hand, when restarting the display of the bomb image and countdown image, a different bomb image and countdown image may be displayed than before the display was interrupted (hidden).
For example, regardless of the types of bomb images and countdown images that were being displayed, the eighth bomb image and countdown image (the number "8") may be displayed so that the countdown starts from the beginning. According to such an embodiment, the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.
Alternatively, a bomb image and a countdown image may be displayed that are one step higher than before the display was interrupted. According to such an embodiment, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that he has shot the game balls in vain.

Although the embodiment has been described in which the display of the bomb image and the countdown image is interrupted and hidden if no prize is entered into the second starting port 2004 for 6 consecutive seconds while the bomb image is being displayed, the bomb image and the countdown image are not displayed. Instead of setting the time during which the image and countdown image are hidden for six seconds, the time may be determined by a predetermined lottery. For example, 6 seconds may be selected with a 1/2 probability and 10 seconds may be selected with a 1/2 probability at the start of the "bomb expectation level performance."
Further, when a prize is won in the second starting slot 2004, an additional 10 seconds may be added by a predetermined lottery with a probability of, for example, 3/4. If 10 seconds are added like this, it will be hidden if there is no winning in the second starting port 2004 for 16 seconds (6 seconds + 10 seconds), so until it is hidden. There will be multiple times.
Specifically, a case will be explained in which 6 seconds is determined at the start of the "bomb expectation performance" and no prize is entered into the second starting opening 2004 until all fluctuations including suspension are completed. In this case, if 6 seconds have passed by the time all fluctuations including suspension are completed, there will be no fluctuation and the bomb image and countdown image will be hidden. If you enter the second starting gate 2004 at this time, the bomb image and countdown image will be redisplayed (the redisplayed image may be the same image as before it was hidden, or it may be a different image). ) However, the time it takes to hide again is sometimes 6 seconds and sometimes 16 seconds. In this way, there are multiple patterns of time from the start of fluctuation until the bomb image and countdown image are hidden, and players who thought they would be hidden in 6 seconds will find that they are hidden in 6 seconds. Witnessing what was not done will increase your sense of elation. Further, by setting the number of seconds to be added to be substantially infinite, a pattern may be provided in which the bomb image and the countdown image are never hidden from the start of the fluctuation until the end of the fluctuation. This is because it is possible to clearly recognize that a "bomb expectation level production" is being performed.

An embodiment has been shown in which when a prize is entered into the second starting port 2004, the next bomb image with a shortened fuse and the next countdown image are displayed at the same position instead of the currently displayed bomb image and countdown image. , the next bomb image and countdown image may be displayed at a different position from the original bomb image and countdown image.
For example, when a winning occurs in the second starting port 2004, the next bomb image and the next countdown image may be displayed while being swung in the left-right direction.
FIG. 377(a) shows the display state before a winning occurs in the second starting port 2004. Further, FIG. 377(b) shows the display state after a winning occurs in the second starting port 2004. In the figure, the number "7" in the seventh bomb image and the countdown image is shown moved to the right. FIG. 377(c) also shows the display state after a winning occurs in the second starting port 2004. In the figure, the number "7" in the seventh bomb image and the countdown image is shown moved to the left.
Note that such a shaking display may continue for a predetermined period of time (for example, one second) after the next bomb image and new countdown image start to be displayed.
In this way, by making the bomb image visible as if it were shaking, it is possible for the player to more clearly recognize that a winning has occurred in the second start opening 2004. Furthermore, it is possible to make the player feel nervous as if the bomb might explode at any moment.

Note that the bomb image and the countdown image may be dynamically displayed in a manner other than the shaking display. For example, each time a new bomb image and countdown image are displayed, the bomb image and countdown image may gradually move linearly toward a predetermined position.
For example, the bomb image and the countdown image may move toward the currently reserved display area, and eventually be displayed immediately to the left of the currently reserved image. FIG. 377(d) shows a state in which a bomb image is displayed on the left side of the currently reserved image.
Note that the final display position of the bomb image and the countdown image may not be set immediately to the left of the currently pending image, but may be a position where part or all of the currently pending image and bomb image overlap. At this time, the bomb image may be displayed in front of the currently held image, or may be displayed behind the currently held image.
FIG. 377(e) shows a display state in which the first bomb image is displayed in front of the currently reserved image.

At the start of the "bomb expectation level effect", the number "8" of the eighth bomb image and the countdown image was displayed at the same time, but the timing of displaying the bomb image and the timing of displaying the countdown image may be different. .
For example, at the start of the "bomb expectation level production", only the 8th bomb image is displayed, and at the timing of displaying the 7th bomb image, a countdown image (in this case, the countdown starts from the number "7") is displayed. You may start.
Alternatively, only the bomb image may be displayed from the start of the "bomb expectation effect" until halfway through, and the display of the countdown image may be started from a predetermined stage. For example, the display of a countdown image (in this case, the countdown starts from the number "4") may be started at the timing when the fourth bomb image is displayed.
According to such an embodiment, the bomb image, which is difficult for other players to distinguish, is displayed earlier than the countdown image in which the stages are clearly indicated by numbers, so that the "bomb expectation level effect" is displayed. It is difficult for other players to know that the game is being executed, and the player can enjoy the game by himself/herself. In addition, players who do not want to fire the game ball unnecessarily can avoid the need to display the countdown image by immediately stopping the game ball fire even if a bomb image is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to interrupt or cancel the "bomb expectation level production" before the volume of the production as a whole is felt.

When executing the "bomb expectation level production", the bomb image and the countdown image have shown an embodiment in which they can change to the next bomb image and countdown image at the same time at the timing of entering the second starting port 2004, but the bomb image and the countdown image The timing at which the image changes to the next bomb image and the countdown image may be different. For example, the next bomb image is displayed at the timing when a prize is entered into the second starting port 2004, but the next countdown image is not displayed at the timing when a prize is entered into the second starting port 2004, and after a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds later), the next countdown image may be displayed. In this way, predetermined conditions are met so that both the situation where the next image is displayed at the same time and the situation where the next countdown image is displayed with a delay are met (for example, winning a delayed lottery, (for example, in the case of an even number of images among the images to the eighth bomb image), the display may be delayed. In such a case, the proportion of situations that are performed at the same time as the situations of being late may be the same, or the situations of being late may be made more likely or less likely to occur.

An embodiment has been shown in which the image is sequentially switched from the eighth bomb image to the first bomb image, but of these, the part representing the fuse and the part representing the burning part at the end of the fuse are displayed more dynamically. You may also do so. Specifically, when switching from one bomb image to the next bomb image, the length of the fuse may be dynamically displayed so that it gradually becomes shorter. At this time, it is preferable to dynamically display the combustion part so that it moves as the length of the fuse becomes shorter.
Further, the countdown image may be switched to the next countdown image at the timing when the dynamic display ends and the switching from one bomb image to the next bomb image is completed.

The embodiment has been shown in which the next bomb image and countdown image are displayed on the condition that a prize is entered into the second starting gate 2004, but the next bomb image and countdown image are displayed under other conditions. It may also be possible to
For example, a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the bomb image and countdown image were displayed in response to the start of the "bomb expectation performance" or the occurrence of a prize in the second starting port 2004 during the execution of the "bomb expectation performance". Based on this, the next bomb image and countdown image may be displayed.
Specifically, the next bomb image and countdown image may be displayed at the timing when two seconds and four seconds have elapsed after the bomb image and countdown image were displayed. Note that if no game ball enters the second starting port 2004 for six consecutive seconds, the display of the bomb image and countdown image will be interrupted, so players who wish to view the "bomb expectation level effect" without interruption may , it is necessary to make the game ball enter the second starting port 2004 during the remaining two seconds.
Similarly, the next bomb image and countdown image may be displayed when one second and two seconds have elapsed after the bomb image and countdown image were displayed. In this case, it is necessary to make the game ball enter the second starting port 2004 during the remaining 4 seconds.
Note that if a prize is won in the second starting port 2004 before the predetermined time has elapsed, it is preferable to time the predetermined time again from the beginning.
According to such an embodiment, part of the display of the bomb image and the countdown image is performed automatically, and the performance can be enjoyed with a relatively small number of shots of game balls, so that the above-mentioned This has the effect of reducing the reluctance of players who do not like the active firing of game balls to participate in the performance.

An embodiment in which, at the same time as the display of the explosion image and the countdown image ends, an expectation level suggesting image of "heat", "extreme heat", or "hit?" is displayed at the position where the explosion image was displayed. However, the following display mode may also be adopted.
For example, instead of the position where the explosion image was displayed, the position where the countdown image was displayed may be used as the position where the expectation level suggestion image is displayed. In this case, the expectation level suggestion image will be displayed at the position where the number "0" of the countdown image was displayed.
Alternatively, the expectation level suggestion image may be displayed at a position different from the position where the explosion image or countdown image is displayed. In this case, the position where the expectation level suggestion image is displayed is preferably a predetermined position.
According to such an embodiment, since the display of the explosion image and the countdown image is finished at the time when the expectation level suggestion image is displayed, the player's consciousness can be focused on the expectation level suggestion image. . Further, since the player can recognize in advance the position where the expectation level suggestion image is displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the expectation level suggestion image.

As the expectation level suggestion image, a display saying "Change!" indicating a change in the current pending image or the waiting pending image may be displayed. In this case, it is suggested that the color of the current pending image or the standby pending image changes to a color with a higher expectation level (the relationship between the color of the pending image and the expectation level is as described above). For example, the color of the currently held image and the standby held image may be changed from white to one of blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow colors.
Similarly, a message such as "Changes twice!" may be displayed. In this case, the color change of the current pending image and the standby pending image is performed twice. Note that the same held image changes twice, and different held images do not change once.
Note that it is preferable to change the current pending image or the standby pending image while displaying the expectation level suggestion image or at the timing when the display of the expectation level suggestion image ends.
Also, based on the pre-reading process, it is possible to count the number of holds in which the result of the special lottery is a jackpot among the four standby holds, and to notify the number by an expectation level suggestion image.
For example, the expectation level suggestion image may be displayed such as "win x 1", "win x 2", "win x 2", "win x 4", etc. In this case, it is suggested to the player that the four waiting times include one to four special lottery results that are jackpots.
Also, an example was shown in which an image suggesting expectations (such as "Heat!" or "Change!") is displayed after the explosion image is displayed, but instead of the image suggesting expectations, it is displayed only during a short time frame. A display that does not make you expect a big hit (as shown in Figure 376(b), unlike the basic information (such as the number of consecutive chances and the number of wins) that is displayed during time saving, for example, and the time spent in the jackpot state (eg, "40 minutes and 30 seconds have passed now!") or a message such as "Today is Sports Day!") may be displayed.

The display of the countdown image was ending at the timing of ending the display of the explosion image, but even if the display of the countdown image was ended at the timing of ending the display of the bomb image and only the explosion image was displayed. good. According to such an embodiment, the display mode of the "bomb expectation level effect" becomes simple, and the player concentrates on the fact that the bomb has exploded and the expectation level suggesting image that is displayed after the display of the explosion image is finished. be able to.
Alternatively, the display of the countdown image may be finished before the bomb image is displayed. For example, the display of the countdown image may be ended at the timing of displaying the sixth bomb image, seventh bomb image, or eighth bomb image. According to such an embodiment, since a clear countdown using numbers is not performed, it is possible to make the player feel the nervous feeling of wondering when the bomb will explode.
On the other hand, the display of the bomb image may end before the countdown image. For example, the display of the bomb image may be ended at the timing when the numbers "3", "2", and "1" of the countdown image are displayed. According to such an embodiment, a clear numerical countdown is performed, so that it is possible to clearly indicate to the player when the explosion image will be displayed.

Although the embodiment has been shown in which the bomb image and the countdown image to be displayed have a one-to-one correspondence (for example, see FIG. 370), after the start of the bomb expectation level production, the prize entry to the second starting port 2004 is When a bomb occurs, a case may be provided in which the eighth bomb image continues to be displayed and the next countdown image is displayed as to the countdown image. In this case, the eighth bomb image continues to be displayed even when a prize is won in the second starting port 2004 from the next time onwards, and only the number of the countdown image is displayed so as to decrease. Further, such a performance is performed only when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. In addition, the words ``Loss'' and ``It's the opposite of ``Loss!'' are displayed as expectations suggesting images. Furthermore, it is preferable that such an effect is executed with a low probability (for example, 1/100) when the "bomb expectation level effect" is executed. According to such an embodiment, although a player seeing the performance for the first time may feel strange, it is possible to make a player who has seen the performance multiple times realize that a jackpot will occur. become.
Note that such an effect may be performed while other bomb images are being displayed, not limited to the eighth bomb image.
In addition, it can be used as a one-shot announcement mode that is executed only when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, and when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, this strange effect (a production in which only the countdown progresses) is executed. good. Furthermore, the player can choose which mode to suggest or announce the result of the special lottery, either this one-shot announcement mode or the normal announcement mode (the announcement mode in which the bomb image and countdown image as mentioned above are displayed until the end). It may be possible to do so.

In addition, when a prize is won in the second starting opening 2004, and it is determined in advance that it is a win based on pre-reading, and a "bomb expectation level effect" is executed, the 8th "8" in the bomb image and countdown image is displayed, and if you enter the second starting gate 2004, it will advance up to a predetermined number (for example, up to "5" in the fifth bomb image and countdown image), If the winning amount exceeds the winning number, an unnatural effect may be performed in which no matter how many prizes are entered into the second start opening 2004, no progress is made. By doing this, the player will initially feel an odd feeling that the "bomb expectation level performance" will not progress halfway, but later will realize that the win is certain when the "bomb expectation level performance" stops progressing midway through. This makes it possible to increase interest in the case where the player enters the second starting slot 2004 and does not advance. Regarding this predetermined number, for example, if it is assumed that the first bomb image and the countdown image progress to "1", the expectation level suggestion image will be displayed soon, so which expectation level suggestion image will be displayed? Therefore, it is preferable that the predetermined number be set to "4", which is the first half of "bomb expectation level effect", or less than "4". By doing this, you can play the game while expecting that the first half of the "bomb expectation level effect" will be a strange effect, and the second half will be a high expectation level suggesting image. It is possible to create a performance in which a drop in interest is suppressed throughout the entire ``bomb expectation level performance''. Note that the player may also be able to select whether or not to execute such a performance.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the displayed bomb image and countdown image have a one-to-one correspondence (for example, see FIG. 370), either one may be hidden for a predetermined period.
For example, the countdown image may be hidden until the middle of the "bomb expectation effect" and then displayed from the middle. Specifically, during the execution of the "bomb expectation level effect", the countdown image is not displayed during the period when the 8th bomb image to the 5th bomb image is displayed, and the countdown image is not displayed during the period when the 4th bomb image to the 1st bomb image is displayed. A countdown image is displayed.
Alternatively, the countdown image may be displayed until the middle of the "bomb expectation effect" and then hidden from the middle.
Further, the bomb image may be hidden until the middle of the "bomb expectation level effect" and then displayed from the middle.
Alternatively, the bomb image may be displayed until the middle of the "bomb expectation effect" and then hidden from the middle.
Note that such display switching may be performed at any of the seven timings at which the bomb image and countdown image are changed to the next bomb image and countdown image.
According to such an embodiment, if only one of them is being displayed, the player may want to display both and fire the game ball, increasing the operation of the gaming machine. be able to. Further, since one of the images becomes hidden from the middle, the player can concentrate on the countdown effect. Furthermore, if only the bomb image is displayed, the progress of the countdown becomes unclear, which creates a motivation to display the countdown image. Further, when only the countdown image is displayed, the user is motivated to reduce the number displayed as the countdown image. In either case, the game balls are fired, and the operation of the game machine can be improved.

Note that the sound corresponding to the bomb image or countdown image may be output at the timing when the bomb image or countdown image is displayed.
For example, the same explosion sound may be output at each timing in response to the display of the eighth to first bomb images. Furthermore, the same sound (such as a sound such as "Pikon") may be output at each timing in correspondence with the numbers in the countdown image.
Alternatively, different explosion sounds may be output in response to the display of the eighth bomb image to the first bomb image. Furthermore, different numbers may be outputted in audio (such as "Hachi", "Nana", etc.) corresponding to the numbers in the countdown image.
Also, in the first half of the "bomb expectation level production" (for example, up to the timing of displaying the fifth bomb image and the fourth bomb image), the same explosion sound and audio are output, and in the second half, different explosion sounds and audio are output. You may also do so.
According to such an embodiment, the progress of the "bomb expectation effect" can be made clear and the player's sense of excitement can be enhanced.

As mentioned above, if the timing at which the bomb image progresses (the next bomb image is displayed) and the timing at which the countdown image progresses (the next countdown image is displayed) are different, the bomb image may The sound or audio, etc. that corresponds to the progress of the countdown image (the next bomb image is displayed) is output, but the sound or audio, etc. that corresponds to the progress of the countdown image (the next countdown image is displayed) is output. It is preferable not to do so. When the timing at which the bomb image progresses (the next bomb image is displayed) and the timing at which the countdown image progresses (the next countdown image is displayed) are different, and when you continue to hit right. Since it is relatively easy to win a prize into the second starting hole 2004, many game balls will win into the second starting hole 2004. In such a case, if the firing interval is about 0.6 seconds and the timing is different, some sound will be output twice in 0.6 seconds, or once every 0.3 seconds on average. This is because there is a risk of giving the player a feeling of disgust. Note that the sound or audio that corresponds to the progress of the bomb image (the next bomb image is displayed) is not output, but the sound that corresponds to the progress of the countdown image (the next countdown image is displayed) is not output. Alternatively, a reverse pattern may be used in which audio and the like are output.

In the "bomb expectation level production", decorative members may be made to move or emit light.
For example, the decorative member may not be operated at the timing when the bomb image or countdown image is first displayed, but the movable decorative member may be operated at the timing when the next bomb image or countdown image is displayed.
Furthermore, the movement of the movable decorative member may gradually increase. For example, the movable decorative member may not be operated at the timing when a bomb image or countdown image is first displayed, and the movable decorative member may be operated at the timing when the second or later bomb image or countdown image is displayed. . By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to increase the player's sense of excitement.
Note that a movable decorative member having a light emitting means may be employed, and the light emitting means may be made to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode in accordance with the operation timing of the movable decorative member or after the movable decorative member is operated. By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to further enhance the player's sense of exhilaration.

At the timing when the bomb image and the countdown image are displayed, the operation reception on the operation section may be enabled and an operation section simulated image that prompts the operation on the operation section may be displayed. FIG. 377(f) shows an example in which an operation unit simulated image is displayed above the number "7" in the countdown image.
Furthermore, when a predetermined condition is satisfied when the operation section is operated, the display mode of the bomb image or countdown image may be changed with a predetermined probability (for example, from a white bomb to a red bomb). .
Additionally, if the player does not operate the operation unit simulated image even if it is displayed (if one fluctuation is confirmed and stopped before the operation), the operation unit simulated image will be hidden at the timing of the confirmed stop. The operation unit simulated image may be displayed over a plurality of fluctuation displays by continuing to display it even when the next fluctuation start timing arrives.
Furthermore, multiple operations on the operating section may be accepted while the operating section simulated image is being displayed. Further, the display mode of the bomb image or countdown image may be changed multiple times in response to multiple operation receptions. In such a case, even if the operation unit is operated, the display of the operation unit simulated image continues.
Further, the operation unit simulated image may be displayed less conspicuously than the bomb image or the countdown image, so that it is difficult for the player to notice that the operation reception of the operation unit is enabled. FIG. 377(g) shows a state in which the operation unit simulated image is displayed at the lower left of the display area. In this way, by displaying the operation unit simulated image smaller than the bomb image or countdown image and in a position closer to the edge of the display area, it is possible to make it difficult to understand that the operation unit simulated image is being displayed. .

In this way, according to the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 370 to 377, new entertainment can be provided to the player.

An embodiment including a "scroll stock effect" which is a new effect will be described below. Note that this embodiment is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 377 and the like.

First, an overview of the "scroll stock performance" will be explained. In the "scroll stock effect", at the timing when a hold occurs, a pre-read process is performed for the hold, and based on the pre-read result, it is determined whether or not to execute the "scroll stock effect".
If it is decided to execute the "scroll stock effect", a martial artist character will be displayed behind the current pending image, and a demon character will be displayed behind each displayed standby pending image. be done. Note that although the characters are displayed so as to overlap with the current pending image and each standby pending image, they may be displayed so as not to overlap.
When the variable display ends and a new variable display starts, the martial artist character continues to be displayed in the same position, but as the pending image moves, it corresponds to the first standby pending image that was closest to the martial artist character. A "scroll acquisition performance" is executed in which the demon character that was displayed moves and fights with the martial artist character.
In the battle in the "scroll acquisition performance", the martial artist character may win or lose against the demon character, but if the martial artist character wins, the scroll can be obtained. The acquired scroll is displayed at a predetermined position in the display area (for example, at the upper left position of the display area). If the martial artist character loses, the scroll cannot be acquired.
In this way, each time the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the "scroll acquisition effect" is executed, and a battle between the martial artist character and the demon character is displayed. Note that the final battle between the martial artist character and the demon character takes place in the variable display corresponding to the suspended memory that triggered the start of the execution of the "scroll stock performance." Furthermore, even if a new hold occurs during the execution of the "scroll stock performance," no new demon character will be displayed in response to the hold.
After the battle with the last demon character ends, a "scroll release effect" in which the scrolls acquired up to that point are opened is sequentially performed while the decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable manner. Predetermined characters and the like are written inside the opened scroll, and these indicate the level of expectation, and the display content of the preview performance is changed to display content with a higher level of expectation for a jackpot. In addition, in the variable display in which the battle with the final demon character takes place, it may develop into a reach effect.
The timing at which the "scroll release effect" is executed is a predetermined timing within the period from immediately after the battle with the last demon character ends until the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. For example, a "scroll release effect" may be executed at a predetermined timing before the decorative symbol becomes a ready-to-reach state, during a ready-to-reach state, or during a ready-to-reach effect.

FIG. 378 is a production pattern table showing the number of waiting and holding scrolls, the type and number of scrolls that can be obtained at the timing when it is decided to execute the "scroll stock production". In the "scroll stock performance", a performance pattern is selected based on pre-reading processing.
Specifically, if the number of items on standby at the timing when it is decided to execute the "scroll stock effect" is one, one of the effect patterns PTN01 to PTN03 is selected. Ru.
Further, if the number of items on standby at the timing when it is decided to execute the "scroll stock effect" is two, one of the effect patterns PTN04 to PTN09 is selected.
Further, if the number of items on standby at the timing when it is decided to execute the "scroll stock effect" is three, one of the effect patterns PTN10 to PTN19 is selected.
Further, if the number of items on standby at the timing when it is decided to execute the "scroll stock effect" is four, one of the effect patterns PTN20 to PTN34 is selected.

Note that the performance pattern is selected such that the larger the number of scrolls that are on standby at the timing when it is decided to perform the "scroll stock performance", the greater the number of scrolls that can be obtained in the end. Furthermore, the production pattern is selected such that the greater the total number of scrolls acquired, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

As shown in the figure, the maximum number of scrolls that can be obtained in the "scroll stock performance" is the same as the number of scrolls that are on standby at the timing when it is decided to execute the "scroll stock performance". For example, if one of the performance patterns PTN30 to PTN34 is selected at the timing when the fourth standby hold occurs and the "scroll stock performance" is started, the martial artist character becomes the demon character. A win display will be displayed four times, and four scrolls will be obtained.
On the other hand, regardless of the number of scrolls on standby at the start of the "scroll stock performance", there may be cases where no scrolls can be acquired. For example, when performance pattern PTN01, performance pattern PTN04, performance pattern PTN10, and performance pattern PTN20 are selected, the martial artist character cannot defeat the demon character even once and cannot acquire any scroll.

Furthermore, the types of scrolls that can be obtained include scrolls without a timer and scrolls with a timer.
FIG. 379 is a table showing the correspondence between the number of scrolls acquired and the order in which the scrolls were acquired. Note that which scroll acquisition pattern is used to acquire a scroll is also determined based on the pre-read results. For example, the scroll acquisition pattern PTN04 is a pattern in which a scroll with a timer is acquired as the first scroll, and a scroll without a timer is acquired as the second scroll. In addition, the scroll acquisition pattern PTN25 acquires a scroll without a timer as the first scroll, acquires a scroll with a timer as the second scroll, acquires a scroll without a timer as the third scroll, and acquires a scroll with a timer as the fourth scroll. This is a pattern to obtain a scroll.

In this way, in the "Scroll Acquisition Performance", it is important to know how many pieces are on standby at the start of the "Scroll Stock Performance", in other words, how many times the "Scroll Acquisition Performance" will be performed, and ultimately the number of scrolls without a timer and those with a timer. The player's interest is in how many scrolls they can acquire.

At a predetermined timing in the variable display after the last "scroll acquisition performance" ends, a "scroll release performance" corresponding to each acquired scroll is executed. In the ``scroll release effect'', the scroll is opened and displayed in an enlarged manner near the center of the display area, giving a predetermined change to the content of the effect being executed. Specifically, a display is performed that increases the level of expectation suggested by the performance.
Furthermore, there are two types of scrolls that can be obtained: scrolls without a timer and scrolls with a timer.
In a scroll with a timer, the timer counts down from the time it is acquired, the scroll is opened at the timing when the timer reaches zero, and changes are made to the predetermined performance contents being executed when the scroll is opened. In other words, the player can recognize when the "scroll release effect" will be performed. Furthermore, the countdown may be started not at the timing when the scroll is acquired, but after it has been moved and displayed in the upper left, as will be described later.
On the other hand, with a scroll without a timer, the player is not shown when the scroll will be opened, but the scroll is opened at a predetermined timing, and changes are made to the predetermined performance content that is being executed when the scroll is opened. give. In other words, the player cannot recognize when the "scroll release effect" will be performed.
Furthermore, the expectation of a jackpot is higher when a scroll with a timer is acquired than when a scroll without a timer is acquired. Furthermore, for scrolls with a timer, the number on the timer counts down from a predetermined number of seconds, and the longer the number of seconds at the start of the countdown, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. Furthermore, a scroll without a timer at the time of acquisition may be changed to a scroll with a timer to start the countdown when the scroll finishes moving and displaying in the upper left, as will be described later. In other words, in this case, the scroll without a timer functions as a harbinger of the scroll with a timer.

A specific example of the "scroll stock effect" will be described below with reference to FIGS. 378 to 385 and the like. FIG. 378 shows the effect pattern table in this embodiment as described above. FIG. 379 shows a scroll acquisition pattern table in this embodiment. FIGS. 380 and 381 show time charts of this production example. Further, FIGS. 382 to 387 show the display states of the display area at predetermined timings in this example of presentation.
In this performance example, when there are three waiting holds, a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 and the number of waiting holds becomes four, and based on the pre-reading process based on this winning, the performance pattern PTN32 is selected and the "scroll stock performance" begins. Thereafter, a "scroll acquisition performance" is performed every time the variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to each standby is performed. Further, the scroll acquisition pattern PTN25 is selected, and in the "scroll acquisition performance", two scrolls without a timer and two scrolls with a timer are acquired. In the variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the fourth standby that is subject to the pre-reading process, after the "scroll acquisition performance" is executed, the "scroll release performance" is performed four times.
That is, in this performance example, the "scroll stock performance" is executed over five variable displays. It should be noted that among the five variable displays, the results of the first to fourth variable displays are losses, and the fifth variable display is either a jackpot or a loss.

FIGS. 380(a) to 380(d) show time charts corresponding to the first to fourth fluctuation displays. Further, FIGS. 381(a) and 381(b) show time charts corresponding to the fifth variable display.
Moreover, timing t20 (timing at which the stop display in the first fluctuating display ends) in FIG. 380(a) is the same timing as timing t0 (timing at which the second fluctuating display starts) in FIG. 380(b). Similarly, timing t20 and H30(c) in FIG. 380(b), timing t0 in FIG. 380(c), timing t0 in FIG. 380(d), timing t20 and H32(a) in FIG. The timing t0 of , the timing t30 of FIG. 381(a) and the timing t30 of H32(b) are the same timing.

In addition, here, the execution time of each variation display from the first to the fourth time is 19 seconds, and the fixed stop period of the decorative pattern is 1 second, but it is only necessary to secure the time to execute the "scroll acquisition effect", and each variation The display execution time can be appropriately set, for example, in a range of about 5 seconds to 40 seconds.
Similarly, although the execution time of the fifth variable display is set to 59 seconds, it is only necessary to secure the time to execute the reach performance and the "scroll release performance", and it can be set as appropriate, for example, in the range of about 30 seconds to 180 seconds. In other words, it is preferable that the average fluctuation time of the holds determined to perform the "scroll stock effect" be longer than the average fluctuation time of each of the first to fourth fluctuations. In addition, even when performing a "scroll stock effect", the number of scrolls acquired may be 0, so the target fluctuation may be the so-called normal fluctuation time (about 10 seconds without reach) or shortened. It may be a variable time (for example, a variable time of about 3 seconds, which is most likely to be selected when playing 4). Note that it is better to make the fifth variation display longer as the number of scrolls acquired increases, but for example, two scrolls can be obtained with a variation time of 120 seconds, and a scroll can be obtained with a variation time of 90 seconds. A pattern such as three scrolls may be provided in which the fluctuation time is long but the number of scrolls acquired is small.

The first variable display will be described with reference to FIG. 380(a). The number of items on standby at the start of the variable display is three. Further, a normal background image A (see FIG. 347(a)) is displayed as a background image. FIG. 382(a) shows the display state of the display area during the period from timing t0 to timing t10.
At timing t10, a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 and a "scroll stock effect" is started based on the pre-reading process. Here, a martial artist character is displayed on the upper left side of the current pending image, and a demon character is displayed on the upper right side of each standby pending image. FIG. 382(b) shows the display state of the display area during the period from timing t10 to timing t17.
At timing t17, the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, at timing t18, the right decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, and at timing t19, all the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a manner that indicates a loss, and the stopped display is continued until timing t20. . FIG. 382(c) shows the display state of the display area during the period from timing t19 to timing t20.
Note that, as shown in FIG. 382(d) and the like, the display priority of the martial artist character and the demon character is higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern that is being displayed in a variable manner. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 382(c), the display priority of the martial artist character and the demon character is lower than the display priority of the decorative pattern during stop display.

Next, the second variable display will be explained with reference to FIG. 380(b).
The second variable display starts at timing t0. From timing t0 to timing t1, each pending image moves one position to the left. At the same time, the demon character also moves together with each pending image. At timing t1, the movement of each pending image and the demon character ends, and from timing t1 to timing t3, a battle between the martial artist character and the moving demon character starts above the current pending image. Also, the word "Battle" is displayed behind both characters. FIG. 382(d) shows the display state of the display area during the period from timing t1 to timing t3.

At timing t3, the battle between the martial artist character and the demon character ends, and from timing t3 to timing t4, either a display that the martial artist character has won or a display that the demon character has won is performed.
If the martial artist character wins, the demon character assumes a fallen position and then becomes invisible, and the martial artist character acquires the scroll and is in a state where it is holding the scroll in its left hand. 382(e) and 382(f) show the display state at this time. Next, a display is performed in which the scroll acquired by the martial artist character becomes slightly larger and moves to the upper left of the display area, and the "scroll acquisition effect" ends. FIG. 382(g) and FIG. 382(h) show the display state at this time. Furthermore, the scroll displayed in the upper left may be smaller than the scroll that the martial artist character acquires and holds in his left hand.
On the other hand, if the martial artist character loses, the martial artist character assumes a fallen posture, the demon character becomes hidden, and the "scroll acquisition performance" ends. If the martial artist character loses, the scroll cannot be acquired and the scroll will not be displayed. FIG. 383(a) shows the display state when the martial artist character is in a fallen position. Further, FIG. 383(b) shows the display state when the "scroll acquisition effect" is completed.
After that, at timing t17, the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, at timing t18, the right decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, and at timing t19, all the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a manner that indicates a loss, and the stop display is continued until timing t20. Continued.

As shown in FIG. 380(c), FIG. 380(d), and FIG. 381(a), from timing t3 to timing t4 of the third to fifth variable display, the "Scroll" where the martial artist character and the demon character fight. "Acquisition Performance" will be held. Also, in the third and fourth variable displays, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the same manner as the second variable display. In this production example, the martial artist character wins the battle with the demon character in all four "scroll acquisition productions" and obtains four scrolls. FIG. 383(c) shows a display example at timing t5 in FIG. 381(a).
The acquired scrolls are displayed in the display area from the top left to the right in the order in which they were acquired. In this production example, the first and third scrolls from the left are scrolls without a timer, and the second and fourth scrolls from the left are scrolls with a timer. A scroll with a timer starts counting down from the timing when it is acquired, but at timing t5 in Figure 381(a), the value of the second timer from the left is "14:00", and the value of the fourth timer from the left is "14:00". "38:00", and the "scroll release effect" is executed at timing t19, which is 14 seconds after timing t5, and at timing t43, which is 38 seconds after timing t5. Furthermore, the countdown may be started not at the timing when the scroll is acquired, but at the timing at which it starts moving and displaying in the upper left, or after it finishes moving and displaying in the upper left.

If four scrolls have been acquired at the start of the fifth variable display, the "scroll release effect" is executed four times, and an example of the effect is shown below.
The first "scroll release performance" is executed at timing t10 during the execution of the "step-up notice performance" in the period from timing t8 to timing t12 when the decorative symbols are changing at high speed.
The second "scroll release performance" is executed at timing t19 during the execution of the "line preview performance" during the period from timing t17 to timing t21 when the decorative symbols are changing at high speed.
The third "scroll release performance" is executed at timing t33 during the execution of the "reach title preview performance" during the period from timing t31 to timing t35 during the reach performance.
The fourth "scroll release performance" is executed at timing t43 during the execution of the "line preview performance" during the period from timing t41 to timing t45 during the ready-to-reach performance.
Below, the performance mode of each "scroll release performance" will be explained. Note that the "scroll release effect" by a scroll with a timer and the "scroll release effect" by a scroll without a timer will not be performed at the same time (when the countdown by a scroll with a timer reaches 0, the "scroll release effect" by a scroll without a timer will not be performed at the same time). ” is never performed).

Here, the "step-up notice effect" will be explained with reference to FIG. 384.
The "step-up preview performance" is a performance in which a plurality of images are displayed in a predetermined order, and the level of expectation is suggested depending on which images have been displayed. Specifically, a rectangular frame is displayed near the center of the display area, and a martial artist character, a warrior character, a samurai character, and a wizard character are displayed in order within the frame.
The production patterns include a production pattern in which only the first-stage fighter character is displayed, a production pattern in which the second-stage warrior character is displayed, a production pattern in which the third-stage samurai character is displayed, and 4. There is a production pattern that displays up to the stage wizard character.
FIG. 384(a) shows a display state in which a martial artist character is displayed. FIG. 384(b) shows a display state in which a warrior character is displayed. FIG. 384(c) shows a display state in which a samurai character is displayed. FIG. 384(d) shows a display state in which a wizard character is displayed.
For example, if a production pattern is executed in which the wizard character of the fourth stage is displayed, the display area will be displayed in the order of FIG. 384(a), FIG. 384(b), FIG. The display state will change.
Note that the display time of each character can be set as appropriate to ensure the visibility of the character, but in the production example shown below, it is set to 2 seconds.

In the "step-up preview performance", the level of expectation is also indicated by the background color within the frame. Specifically, it is assumed that one of three colors, white, red, and gold, is selected as the background color. Furthermore, the level of expectation increases in the order of white, red, and gold. FIGS. 384(a) to 384(d) show display states when white is selected as the background color.
The background color may not change as it is at the start of execution of the "step-up preview performance" or may change to a color with a higher level of expectation during the execution of the "step-up preview performance". For example, a white background image may be displayed continuously from the first stage to the fourth stage, and the color may not change. Alternatively, the color of the background image may change to a color with higher expectations when changing from one stage to the next, or the color of the background image may change to a color with higher expectations while the background image of a certain stage is being displayed. . When the background image changes in this way, the color of the background image after the change is adopted as the color of the background image at the next stage. Note that the color of the background image may change from white to red at a certain timing, and then from red to gold at another timing.
In such a "step-up preview performance," the player's expectation level is suggested depending on which stage of the character has been displayed and what color the background image is in the end.

Although the embodiment has been shown in which the color of the background image is changed, the color of the frame may be changed instead of the color of the background image. Furthermore, although the embodiment has been described in which different characters are displayed sequentially from the first stage to the fourth stage, the characters may not change and different poses of the same character may be displayed sequentially. Furthermore, not only the characters but also different images may be displayed up to the fourth stage.
In addition, although we have shown a performance pattern in which the "step-up preview performance" is executed up to a maximum of 4 stages, it is not limited to 4 stages, it may be multiple stages (2 stages or more), and the maximum number of stages the character can be Whether or not to display it can be set as appropriate. Similarly, the colors of the background image and the frame are not limited to three colors, but may be multiple colors (two or more colors), and the maximum number of colors that can be displayed can be set as appropriate.

As shown in the time chart shown in FIG. 381(a), in the fifth variable display, the "step-up preview performance" is performed during the period from timing t6 to timing t14.
FIG. 384(e) shows the display state at timing t5 before the execution of the "step-up notice performance" is started. Further, FIG. 384(f) shows the display state at timing t10 when the display of the samurai character, which is the third stage character, is started during the execution of the "step-up preview effect".
At timing t11, a "scroll release effect" is performed. In the "scroll release effect", the scroll without a timer that was on the far left moves to the center of the display area and then opens so that a predetermined character (for example, "Rise!") becomes visible, and the background color becomes white. (The background color may be changed after a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after displaying a predetermined character.) At the same time, the remaining scrolls move to the left (they do not have to move). FIG. 384(g) shows the display state at timing t11.
At timing t12, the wizard character, which is the fourth stage character, is displayed. At this time, the background color remains red. Note that, as shown in the figure, the display of the opened scroll ends at timing t12. FIG. 384(h) shows the display state at timing t12.
At timing t14, the "step-up preview performance" ends, and the display of the horizontally long rectangular frame and the character ends.

Here, the "line preview effect" will be explained with reference to FIG. 385.
The "line preview performance" is a performance in which one of a plurality of lines is displayed for a predetermined period of time (4 seconds in this case), and the level of expectation is suggested depending on the type of displayed line. Specifically, in the dialogue display frame displayed in the display area, one of the following will be displayed: "No, no, no...", "I don't understand...", or "Wait in anticipation!" That line will be displayed. The expectations for these lines increase in the order of ``No, no, no...'', ``I don't really understand...'', and ``Wait with anticipation!''.
FIG. 385(a) shows a display state in which a line with a low expectation level, ``No, no, no...'' is displayed. FIG. 385(b) shows a display state in which the line "I don't really understand..." with medium expectations is displayed. FIG. 385(c) shows a display state in which the highly anticipated line "Wait with anticipation!" is displayed. Note that a character (in this case, the master character) speaking the lines may be displayed as shown in these figures.

As shown in the time chart shown in FIG. 381(a), in the fifth variable display, the "line preview effect" is performed during the period from timing t17 to timing t21.
FIG. 385(d) shows the display state at timing t16 before the execution of the "line preview performance" is started. Further, FIG. 385(e) shows the display state at timing t18 when the "speech preview performance" is started and "No, no, no..." is displayed as the dialogue. Here, the number of seconds indicated by the scroll with a timer on the far left is "1:00", indicating that a "scroll release effect" will be performed in one second.
At timing t19, a "scroll release effect" is performed. In the "scroll release effect", the scroll with a timer on the far left moves to the center of the display area and then opens, making the predetermined characters (for example, "Serif change!") visible, and the dialogue changes to " ``No, no, no...'' to ``Wait with hope!'' ). At the same time, the remaining scrolls move to the left (they do not have to move). FIG. 385(f) shows the display state at timing t19.
At timing t21, the "line preview performance" ends, and the display of the line display frame, lines, master character, and opened scroll ends.
When the "scroll release performance" is performed in this way, we have shown an example in which other preview performances and reach performances that are different from the "scroll release performance" are changed to displays with high expectations, but only the "scroll release performance" (without affecting the display of other preview effects or reach effects).
In addition, in the "step-up preview performance" and "dialogue preview performance", we have shown an example in which the display is changed to a highly anticipated display when a predetermined character is displayed by the "scroll release performance", but the "scroll release performance" The time from when a predetermined character is displayed to when the display changes to a highly anticipated display may be the same for the "step-up preview performance" and "dialogue preview performance" shown in the example, or may be different. Good too. For example, in the ``Step-up Preview Effect'', the display changes to a highly anticipated display one second after the predetermined characters are displayed, but in the ``Speech Preview Effect'', the display changes to a highly anticipated display 2 seconds after the predetermined characters are displayed. For example, the display may be changed to a higher value.

At timing t25, the left decorative symbol (number "2") temporarily stops, and at timing t26, the right decorative symbol (number "2") having the same number as the left decorative symbol temporarily stops, resulting in a ready-to-reach state. Next, a reach effect is started at timing t30. Specifically, at timing t30, the background image is switched to a background image exclusively for reach effect (here, background image A at reach time shown in FIG. 347(c)), and the decorative pattern becomes a decorative pattern for reach time, and is displayed. A temporary stop is displayed at the top left and top right of the area.

Here, the "reach title preview effect" will be explained with reference to FIG. 386.
There are multiple types of reach effects, and the characters and background images that appear are different. Furthermore, at the start of the ready-to-reach effect, a display indicating the name of the ready-to-reach effect is performed.
For example, FIG. 386(a) is a display example at the start of "Martial Artist Character Reach", and shows a display example in which the martial artist character, background image A at the time of reach, and the words "Martial Artist Character Reach!" are displayed. There is.
FIG. 386(b) is a display example at the start of "Warrior Character Reach", and shows a display example in which a warrior character, a background image B at the time of reach, and the words "Warrior Character Reach!" are displayed.
The background color within the frame displaying the reach name is white, red, or gold. FIG. 386(c) shows a display example in which the background color within the reach title display frame displaying the reach name of "Martial Artist Character Reach" is displayed in red. Further, FIG. 386(d) shows a display example in which the background color in the reach title display frame of "Warrior Character Reach" is displayed in red.
The level of expectation for a jackpot differs depending on the type of reach performance, and the level of expectation for a jackpot is higher for the ``warrior character reach'' than for the ``warrior character reach.''
Furthermore, the color of the background within the reach title display frame also indicates the degree of expectation of a jackpot, and the degree of expectation increases in the order of white, red, and gold. In this way, the color of the background within the reach title display frame indicates the degree of expectation in the "reach title preview performance."

As shown in the time chart shown in FIG. 381(a), in the fifth variable display, the "reach title preview effect" is performed during the period from timing t31 to timing t35.
FIG. 385(e) shows the display state at timing t32, one second after the start of execution of the "reach title preview effect". Here, the color within the reach title display frame is white.
At timing t33, a "scroll release effect" is performed. In the "scroll release effect", the scroll without a timer that was on the far left moves to the center of the display area and then opens, and the predetermined characters ("Rise!") become visible, and within the reach title display frame. The color changes from white to red (the color within the reach title display frame may be changed after a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after displaying the predetermined characters). At the same time, the remaining scrolls move to the left (they do not have to move). FIG. 386(f) shows the display state at timing t33.
At timing t35, the "reach title preview performance" ends, and the display of the reach title display frame, the reach name, and the scroll ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 387, the "line preview performance during reach performance" will be explained.
"Reach dialogue preview performance" is a performance in which one of several different lines is displayed, and the level of expectation is indicated depending on the type of displayed line. Note that the lines displayed are those of the battle opponent. Specifically, one of the following lines is displayed in the line display frame displayed in the display area: ``I won't lose!'', ``You're strong!'', and ``It's impossible!''. The expectations for these lines increase in the order of ``I won't lose!'', ``You're strong!'', and ``I'll never be able to do it!''.
FIG. 387(a) shows a display state in which a line with low expectations, "I won't lose!", is displayed. FIG. 387(b) shows a display state in which a line with a medium level of expectation, "So strong!", is displayed. FIG. 387(c) shows a display state in which the highly anticipated line "Absolutely impossible~!" is displayed. Note that, as shown in these figures, the facial expressions and the way the character is holding a weapon may be displayed in a manner that matches the dialogue.

As shown in the time chart shown in FIG. 381(a), in the fifth variable display, the "ready-to-reach speech preview performance" is performed during the period from timing t41 to timing t45.
FIG. 387(d) shows the display state at timing t40 before the execution of the “ready-to-reach dialogue preview performance” is started. Further, FIG. 387(e) shows the display state at timing t42 when the "lich-to-reach performance dialogue preview performance" is started and the dialogue "I won't lose!" is displayed. Here, the number of seconds indicated by the scroll with a timer on the far left is "1:00", indicating that a "scroll release effect" will be performed in one second.
At timing t43, a "scroll release effect" is performed. In the "scroll release effect", the scroll with a timer moves to the center of the display area and then opens, and the predetermined characters ("chance!") become visible, and the lines change from "I won't lose!" to "It's so strong!'' (The lines may be changed after a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after displaying the predetermined characters). At this point, the number of scrolls displayed at the top left of the display area becomes 0. FIG. 387(f) shows the display state at timing t43.
At timing t45, the "line preview performance during reach performance" ends, and the display of the dialogue display frame, dialogue, and scroll ends. Also, the "scroll stock performance" will end at this timing.

During the period from timing t45 to timing t57, a battle is displayed between the martial artist character and the samurai character, and if the martial artist character wins, at timing t57, the decorative pattern during reach is displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot (for example, "2","2","2"), and at timing t59, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot.
On the other hand, if the samurai character wins, at timing t57, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in a manner indicating a loss (for example, "2", "3", "2"), and at timing t59, the decorative symbols are changed in a manner indicating a loss. Stop display.

Next, with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 381(c) and 381(d), an example of the effect when the "scroll stock effect" is not executed will be shown.
The time charts shown in FIGS. 381(c) and 381(d) show that the various effects performed in the fifth variable display shown with reference to FIGS. 381(a) and 381(b) are This shows an example of a performance performed without any "performance."
In this production example, no scrolls are acquired or released. Therefore, the preview mode (the type of dialogue, the background color within the frame, etc.) does not change at timing t4, timing t19, timing t33, and timing t43.

According to such an embodiment, it is not known when a scroll without a timer will be released, and the release timing of a scroll with a timer can be clearly indicated.
In addition, although we have shown embodiments in which scrolls are released in all of the "step-up preview performance", "dialogue preview performance", "reach title preview performance", and "dialogue preview performance during reach performance", the number of scrolls acquired does not change. is between 0 and 4. Therefore, for example, if the number of scrolls acquired is small (eg, one), the player can enjoy imagining in which preview performance the "scroll release performance" will be executed.
In addition, the "step-up preview performance" and the "line preview performance" are executed before reaching the reach state, and the "reach title preview performance" and the "line preview performance during reach performance" are executed during the reach performance. Therefore, depending on the length of time indicated by the timer-equipped scroll, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of imagining whether or not a ready-to-reach performance will occur and which preview performance the timer-equipped scroll corresponds to.
In addition, although we have taken four performances as examples: "Step-up preview performance", "Speech preview performance", "Reach title preview performance", and "Speech preview performance during reach performance", the preview performance is performed in one change. Alternatively, the number of preview effects may be greater than the maximum number of scrolls (four) that can be acquired. By doing so, it is possible to enjoy seeing which preview performance corresponds to which scroll release performance will be executed.

In scroll acquisition pattern PTN04, scroll acquisition pattern PTN08, etc. shown in the scroll acquisition pattern table (Figure 379), after acquiring a scroll with a timer (while the countdown display for the scroll with timer is being displayed), a scroll without timer is acquired. It is now possible to do so.
According to such an embodiment, the player can be entertained even during the period until the timer of the scroll with a timer reaches 0.
Also, even if you acquire a scroll with a timer and acquire a scroll without a timer before the countdown of the scroll starts (until the scroll with a timer starts or finishes moving to the top left of the display area). good.

In the scroll acquisition pattern PTN05, scroll acquisition pattern PTN11, etc. shown in the scroll acquisition pattern table (FIG. 379), it is possible to acquire a scroll with a timer after acquiring a scroll without a timer.
According to such an embodiment, when the player is watching with anticipation to see what will be displayed from the scroll without a timer, he or she may be able to acquire a new scroll with a timer, which can further increase the player's sense of excitement. .

In the scroll acquisition pattern PTN03, scroll acquisition pattern PTN08, etc. shown in the scroll acquisition pattern table (FIG. 379), it is possible to acquire a timer-less scroll after acquiring a timer-less scroll.
According to such an embodiment, when the player is watching with anticipation to see what will be displayed from the timer-less scroll, he or she may be able to acquire a new timer-less scroll, which can further increase the player's sense of exhilaration. .
In the embodiment described later, it is possible to obtain a plurality of types of timer-less scrolls with different expectations depending on the display mode. In such an embodiment, it may be possible to obtain a scroll without a timer and then obtain the same scroll without a timer, or it may be possible to obtain a scroll without a timer and then obtain a different scroll without a timer. You can also use it as For example, after acquiring a blue scroll without a timer, which has a relatively low expectation level, it may be possible to acquire a red scroll without a timer, which has a relatively high expectation level.
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to obtain a timer-less scroll with a high expectation level from a situation in which a timer-less scroll with a low expectation level was obtained, so that the player's interest in the "scroll stock performance" decreases. can be prevented.

A martial artist character may be provided with a plurality of display modes. For example, two types of martial artist characters may be provided: a martial artist character without a halo and a martial artist character with a halo. Between the case without a halo and the case with a halo, the probability of winning a battle, that is, the probability of acquiring a scroll, is higher in the case with a halo (that is, the expectation of a jackpot is higher). FIG. 388(a) shows a display state in which a halo is displayed behind the martial artist character. The display mode of the martial artist character is not limited to the presence or absence of a halo, the expression of the martial artist character is different, or the martial artist character is equipped with one of multiple weapons (club, hammer, nunchaku, etc.). It is possible to realize different display modes by having these modes or by combining these modes.
According to such an embodiment, the probability of acquiring a scroll differs depending on the display mode of the martial artist character, so it is possible to increase expectations for being able to acquire a scroll.

A plurality of display modes may be provided for the demon character. For example, two types of demon characters may be provided: a demon character with one horn and a demon character with two horns. Between a demon character with one horn and a demon character with two horns, the demon character with two horns is weaker, and the martial character has a higher probability of winning the battle, that is, a higher probability of acquiring a scroll (i.e. , high expectation of jackpot). FIG. 388(b) shows a display state in which, from the left, a demon character with one horn, a demon character with two horns, a demon character with two horns, and a demon character with one horn are displayed. . Note that the present invention is not limited to this example, and either one of a demon character with one horn and a demon character with two horns can be appropriately placed in each of the first to fourth waiting reservations. Most preferable for the player is a case where all the demon characters have two horns. On the other hand, the most undesirable situation for the player is when all the demon characters have one horn. Note that there may be three or more types of demon characters.
In addition, multiple types of display objects such as not only demon characters but also other characters and treasure chests are displayed, and scrolls are obtained based on the results of battles between the martial artist character and these characters, and whether or not the martial artist character is able to open the treasure chest. It may be possible to do so. Also, it is good to vary the probability of acquiring scrolls depending on these types.
According to such an embodiment, the probability of acquiring a scroll varies depending on the type of displayed character or object, so it is possible to increase expectations for being able to acquire a scroll.

In addition, during the "scroll stock effect" (at the end of the fluctuation, at the start of the fluctuation, after the battle with the demon character and the result display (after the martial character has won or lost the battle is displayed), etc. ), a martial artist character without a halo may change to a martial artist character with a halo, or a martial artist character with a halo may change into a martial character without a halo.
Similarly, during the "scroll stock production", a demon character with one horn changes to a demon character with two horns, and a demon character with two horns changes to a demon character with one horn. It may be possible to do so in some cases.
For example, in a "scroll stock effect" that starts with four pending items, the display mode of the martial artist character or the type of demon character may be changed at the timing when the "scroll acquisition effect" is executed twice. .
According to such an embodiment, the probability of acquiring a scroll increases or decreases during the "scroll stock performance", so it is possible to increase the interest of the player who expects to acquire a scroll.
Note that only the effects that increase the probability of acquiring a scroll may be made executable, and the effects that decrease the probability of obtaining a scroll may not be executed.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the degree of expectation of obtaining a scroll differs depending on the display mode of the martial artist character, the display mode of the martial artist character may be three or more types. Also, it is preferable that the probability of obtaining a scroll differs depending on its type.
Note that one of a plurality of types of characters (for example, a martial artist character, a samurai character, a warrior character, and a magician character) may be displayed, and the probability of acquiring a scroll may vary depending on the displayed character. Furthermore, it is also possible to display a plurality of display modes for characters other than the martial artist character, and the probability of acquiring a scroll may vary depending on the type of character and the display mode.
Although two types of demon characters are shown, three or more types may be displayed. Also, it is preferable that the probability of obtaining a scroll differs depending on its type.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which a demon character with one horn and a demon character with two horns appear, the proportion of scrolls that can be obtained when winning a battle may vary depending on the type of demon character. . For example, if you win against a demon character with one horn, you have a 1/3 chance of getting a scroll without a timer, a 2/3 chance of getting a scroll with a timer, and you win against a demon character with two horns. In this case, a scroll without a timer may be obtained with a probability of 2/3, and a scroll with a timer may be obtained with a probability of 1/3.
Alternatively, if the player wins against a demon character with one horn, a scroll with a timer is obtained, and if the player wins against a demon character with two horns, a scroll without a timer may be obtained.

We have shown an embodiment in which the acquisition ratio of scrolls with a timer and scrolls without a timer when winning a battle differs depending on the type of demon character, but the ratio of scrolls with a timer and scrolls without a timer when winning a battle is different depending on the display mode of a martial artist character. The acquisition ratio of scrolls without a timer and scrolls without a timer may be set to be different. For example, the probability of acquiring a scroll with a timer may be higher when a martial artist character with a halo wins a battle than when a martial artist character without a halo wins a battle.

We have shown that there are scrolls with a timer and scrolls without a timer as scrolls that can be acquired, but it is possible to set multiple types of display formats (timer time) when the scroll with a timer starts displaying, and the longer this time, the greater the jackpot. Expectations are high. Further, the time to be displayed at the start of the countdown is set so that the countdown ends at the timing when a predetermined preview effect is being executed. The time displayed at the start of the countdown is determined based on the time required for varying display of the decorative pattern multiple times. In other words, at the start of the variable display corresponding to the starting prize that is subject to pre-reading processing, it is set so that the longer the time displayed on the scroll with a timer (the remaining time of the countdown), the higher the expectation of a jackpot. There is.

Similarly, a plurality of types (two or more types) of display modes for scrolls without a timer may be used. Further, it is preferable that the level of expectation of a jackpot differs depending on the type of jackpot.
Specifically, three types of scrolls without a timer, blue, green, and red, may be displayed. In this case, it is preferable to increase the expectation of a jackpot in the order of the blue scroll without a timer, the green scroll without a timer, and the red scroll without a timer. FIG. 388(c) shows a display state in which four scrolls without a timer have been acquired. The acquisition states of the scrolls include, from the left, a blue scroll without a timer, a blue scroll without a timer, a green scroll without a timer, and a red scroll without a timer.
Note that the thickness of the scroll may be different depending on the color of the timer-less scroll. For example, the length or thickness of the scrolls may be increased in the order of blue scroll without timer, green scroll without timer, and red scroll without timer.
According to such an embodiment, the degree of expectation of a jackpot can be indicated in advance even by the display mode of the scroll without a timer, and the expectation for the occurrence of a jackpot can be increased.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which a scroll without a timer may have a plurality of display modes, the display content displayed when the scroll is opened may be different depending on the type of scroll without a timer.
For example, a blue scroll without a timer will display either "Rise!" or "Change!"; a green scroll without a timer will display either "Heat!" or "Heat!" You can do it like this.
According to this embodiment, different displays are performed depending on the type of scroll without a timer being displayed, so the player can recognize in advance what kind of display will be performed depending on the type of scroll without a timer.
In this way, by making the characters displayed on the blue scroll without a timer completely different from the characters displayed on the green scroll without a timer, you can determine which characters are displayed for each color of the scroll without a timer. It becomes clear whether the game will be played or not, and the player can hope that if it is a blue scroll without a timer, a display with the highest expectation of winning will be displayed, which can be displayed with a blue scroll without a timer. In the case of a scroll without a timer, the player can hope that a display with the highest expectation for winning that can be displayed with a green scroll without a timer will be displayed, so that the player can have expectations no matter what color the scroll is.
Also, for example, for a blue scroll without a timer, either "Rise!" or "Change!" will be displayed, and for a green scroll without a timer, either "Rise!" or "Heat!" will be displayed. It is also possible to do so. In this case, the part displayed by the scroll release effect for scrolls without a timer will appear in common among multiple types of scrolls without a timer, and the expectation of winning will be lower than that of the green scroll without a timer. Even a scroll without a timer can be expected. Moreover, everything displayed by the scroll release effect may be the same for multiple types of scrolls without a timer.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which when the "scroll release effect" is executed, the display mode of the preview effect being executed changes and the level of expectation always increases, but a case may also be provided in which the level of expectation does not change.
For example, when a "scroll release effect" is executed using a scroll with a timer, the display mode of the preview effect being executed will always change, but when a "scroll release effect" is executed using a scroll without a timer, the scroll release effect will always change. Even if the scroll is opened, there may be cases where there are no characters written inside the scroll, or there is an "x" written on it, and the display format of the preview performance that is being executed does not change. Good too.
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to increase the sense of tension when the scroll is opened. Further, since a display that increases the expectation level of the preview effect being executed is no longer displayed, the appearance rate of the "scroll stock effect" can be increased.

With reference to FIGS. 389(a) to 389(c), an embodiment in which the "scroll release effect" is applied to the hold change effect will be described.
At timing t18 in FIG. 381, if the hold change effect is performed instead of the "line preview effect", the display state at timing t18 becomes the display state shown in FIG. 389(a). Note that at this timing, the color of the currently held image is white.
Next, at timing t19, the scroll with a timer is opened and a message "Pending change!" is displayed. At this time, the color of the currently held image changes from white to a color with higher expectations. FIG. 389(b) shows a display state in which the color of the current pending image changes from white to green as a result of the pending change effect. Further, FIG. 389(c) shows a display state in which the color of the current pending image changes from white to red as a result of the pending change effect.
The relationship between the expectation level and the color of the currently held image has been described above, and for example, the expectation level increases in the order of white, blue, green, red, and gold.
In this manner, interest can be improved even when the current pending image is the object whose display mode changes due to the scroll release effect. Note that the color of the current pending image may be changed after a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after the message "Pending change!" is displayed.

With reference to FIGS. 389(d) to 389(f), an embodiment will be described in which the "scroll release effect" is applied to the "character display effect" that indicates the level of expectation.
At timing t18 in FIG. 381, if the "character display effect" is performed instead of the "dialogue preview effect", the display state at timing t18 becomes the display state shown in FIG. 389(d).
Next, at timing t19, a display is made to open the scroll with a timer. Inside the open scroll are the words ``It might be hot?'' indicating a relatively low level of expectation, or the words ``Hot!'' indicating a medium level of expectation. The words ``Very hot!!'' are written on it, indicating that expectations are high. FIG. 389(e) shows a display state in which the words "Is it hot?" are displayed. Further, FIG. 389(f) shows a display state in which the words "Very hot!!" are displayed.
Although the types of characters displayed in the "character display effect" are three types with relatively different expectations, any number of types may be used as long as there is a plurality of types (two or more types).
In this way, characters indicating the level of expectation may be displayed using the "scroll release effect".

Referring to FIG. 390, an embodiment will be described in which the "scroll release effect" is applied to the "cut-in preview effect" that displays a cut-in image.
A display example when the "cut-in preview effect" is performed at timing t50 in FIG. 381 is shown below. The display state at timing t49, which is the timing immediately before the cut-in preview effect is executed, is as shown in FIG. 390(a).
Next, at timing t50, execution of the "cut-in preview effect" is started, and a horizontally long rectangular frame and a wizard character are displayed as a cut-in image. Note that the execution time of the "cut-in preview performance" is 4 seconds until timing t54. FIG. 390(b) shows the display state at timing t50.
At timing t52, a display for opening a scroll with a timer is performed. The words "Chance!" are written inside the opened scroll, and the background color within the frame of the cut-in image changes from white to red. FIG. 390(c) shows the display state at this time.
There are three types of background colors within the frame of the cut-in image: white, red, and gold, with expectations increasing in the order of white, red, and gold.
In this way, the background color of the cut-in image may be changed by the "scroll release effect" to increase the expectation level.

When displaying the title of the reach effect, a predetermined number of stars (one to five) may be displayed in the display area, and the degree of expectation of the reach effect may be indicated by the number of stars. Further, when the expectation level of the ready-to-win performance has increased due to the "scroll release performance", the number of displayed stars may be increased to indicate that the expectation level of the reach-to-reach performance has increased.

Referring to FIGS. 380 to 387, during the execution of the "scroll stock effect", after all the "scroll acquisition effects" in which the martial artist character and the demon character battle are completed, the "scroll release effect" is performed at a predetermined timing. Although the embodiment has been shown in which the ``scroll acquisition effect'' is executed, the ``scroll release effect'' may be executed at a timing before all the ``scroll acquisition effects'' are executed.
For example, a ``scroll release effect'' may be executed during the ``scroll acquisition effect'' to display that the martial artist character wins the battle against the demon character. In this case, it is preferable that the scrolls that can be obtained have higher expectations than the scrolls that are released. For example, a scroll with a timer may be acquired as a result of a scroll without a timer being released. Alternatively, as a result of releasing a blue scroll without a timer, a green or red scroll without a timer may be obtained.

Note that even though the "scroll stock performance" has been executed, if no scrolls can be obtained, the game's interest will be greatly reduced. Therefore, at least one scroll may be acquired.

When a scroll with a timer is acquired, the countdown may be started from the time the scroll is displayed (timing shown in FIG. 382(f)). Alternatively, the countdown may be started from the timing when the scroll starts moving or when the scroll is in the middle of movement (timing shown in FIG. 382(g)). Alternatively, the countdown may be started from the timing when the scroll finishes moving (the timing shown in FIG. 382(h)).

In the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 380, 381(a), 381(b), etc., the scrolls are released in the order in which they are acquired, but in other embodiments It may also be released.
For example, in a situation where you have acquired both a scroll without a timer and a scroll with a timer, first perform the "scroll release effect" that corresponds to the scroll without a timer, and then execute the "scroll release effect" that corresponds to the scroll with a timer. may also be executed. According to such an embodiment, the timing of releasing the scroll can be made clear in a relatively later period in the entire variable display.
In addition, if you do this, the "scroll release effect" by the scroll with a timer will not start until the specified display of the "scroll release effect" by the scroll without a timer ends (the countdown display will become 0). Therefore, the time the countdown is displayed is longer than the time the scroll without a timer is displayed.
In addition, by doing this, the "scroll release effect" using a scroll with a timer can be thought of as a chance-up effect performed in the latter half of the variable display of the target that is supposed to perform the "scroll stock effect" (for example, reach effect). (recall that it is performed in response to the title display or the cut-in display during the reach effect), the "scroll release effect" using a scroll without a timer is a chance-up effect (for example, "step up effect") performed in the first half of the variable display. "Preview production"), he recalls. When the "step-up preview performance" that occurs in the first half of the variable display is performed, the player who has recalled it in this way not only sees the display with the highest level of expectation, but also has a higher level of expectation than the display with the highest level of expectation. It is possible to increase interest by being able to wish for the display to be one step lower, and when the "step-up notice performance" is being performed, a "scroll release performance" using a scroll without a timer is performed. This also has the effect that a player who remembers this is more likely to find the timing at which he expects the display with the highest level of expectation to occur.

Conversely, in a situation where you have acquired both a scroll without a timer and a scroll with a timer, execute the "scroll release effect" corresponding to the scroll with a timer first, and then execute the "scroll release effect" corresponding to the scroll without a timer. ” may be executed. According to such an embodiment, the timing of release of the scroll can be made ambiguous in a relatively later period of the entire variable display.
In addition, in this case, the "scroll release effect" using the scroll without a timer will start running until the specified display of the "scroll release effect" using the scroll with a timer ends (while the countdown display is being performed). The time the countdown is displayed is shorter than the time the scroll without a timer is displayed, so the same effect can be obtained, although the recall timing mentioned in the previous section is reversed. can get.

The embodiments of "step-up preview performance", "dialogue preview performance", "reach title preview performance", "line during reach performance preview performance", and "cut-in preview performance" have been shown, but these preview performances can be performed separately. Instead of executing the preview effects in one period, the execution periods of two or more preview performances may overlap in at least a part of the period.
For example, execution of the second preview effect may be started while the first preview effect is being executed. Furthermore, execution of the first preview performance may be started while the second preview performance is being executed. Furthermore, execution of the first preview performance and the second preview performance may be started at the same time.
Further, the execution of the second preview performance may end while the first preview performance is being executed. Further, the execution of the first preview performance may end while the second preview performance is being executed. Furthermore, execution of the first preview performance and the second preview performance may end at the same time.
Moreover, you may combine these.
For example, the execution of the "line preview performance" may be started while the "step-up preview performance" is being executed.

Specifically, for example, the character shown in FIG. 385(a) is displayed when displaying the third stage of the "step-up preview effect" shown in FIG. 384(c). By doing this, even if there are multiple acquired scrolls, it is possible to perform the "scroll release performance" using the acquired scrolls in a relatively short period of time. In this case, for example, when a "scroll release effect" (display such as Rise!) performed in response to a scroll with a timer is displayed, a "scroll release effect" performed in response to a scroll without a timer is displayed. It is also possible to display "improvement" (displays such as "rise!"). In that case, even if the "scroll release effect" display corresponding to a scroll with a timer and the "scroll release effect" display corresponding to a scroll without a timer are partially overlapped, You may also display them so that they do not overlap. Also, the "scroll release effect" that was displayed first may be hidden first, the "scroll release effect" that was displayed later may be hidden first, or both may be hidden at the same time.
Also, when a "scroll release effect" (display such as Rise!) performed in response to a scroll with a timer is displayed, a "scroll release effect" performed in response to a scroll without a timer (e.g. Rise!) is displayed. ), the line of sight will go to the display that corresponds to the "scroll release effect" that was displayed later, so the time will be longer than the time that the display that corresponds to the "scroll release effect" that was displayed later will be displayed. By making the display corresponding to the previously displayed "scroll release effect" longer, it is possible to prevent the display corresponding to a plurality of "scroll release effects" from being overlooked (forgotten).

Also, when a "scroll release effect" (display such as Rise!) performed in response to a scroll with a timer is displayed, a "scroll release effect" performed in response to a scroll without a timer (e.g. Rise!) is displayed. We have shown an example of displaying "scroll release effect" (display such as Rise!) that was performed in response to a scroll with a timer, but if When the "scroll release effect" (display such as Rise!) that corresponds to a scroll without a timer is displayed, a scroll with a timer (display such as Rise!) is displayed. When a "scroll release effect" (display such as Rise!) performed in response to a scroll without a timer is displayed (display such as Rise!) performed in response to a scroll without a timer. The same applies to the case where a "scroll release effect" (display such as Rise!) performed in response to a scroll without a timer is displayed.
Furthermore, although we have shown an example in which the time for which the display corresponding to the "scroll release effect" that is displayed first is displayed is longer than the time that the display that corresponds to the "scroll release effect" that is displayed later is performed, The time during which the display corresponding to the previously displayed "scroll release effect" is displayed may be made shorter than the time during which the display corresponding to the later displayed "scroll release effect" is performed. This is because the player may have recognized the display corresponding to the previously displayed "scroll release effect" since it has already been displayed quite a bit.
Further, the display corresponding to the "scroll release performance" may be displayed for the same time regardless of the "scroll release performance" performed first and the "scroll release performance" performed later. By making it the same time, the time until it is hidden is fixed, so that it does not mislead the player (does not give unnecessary concerns such as "Is it a chance because the display time is long?") be able to.

If a plurality of preview effects are to be executed simultaneously, the display area may be divided into a plurality of areas, and the preview effects may be executed in each of the divided areas. For example, the display area may be divided into left and right sections, and the left side of the display area may display a "step-up preview effect", and the right side of the display area may display a "line preview effect".

In addition, depending on the ``scroll release effect'', the display format of ``step-up preview effect'', ``dialogue preview effect'', ``reach title preview effect'', ``line during reach effect effect'', ``cut-in preview effect'', etc. will change. Although the embodiment has been shown, as mentioned above, for example, the "Step Up Preview Performance" and the "Speech Preview Performance" are executed at approximately the same time, and the "Step Up Preview Performance" has increased expectations due to the "Scroll Release Performance". In some cases, both the ``Preview Performance'' and the ``Speech Preview Performance'' whose expectations have been raised by the ``Scroll Release Performance'' are displayed. In that case, the display periods in the display mode after the display mode has changed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "post-change display mode") overlap in at least part of the periods.
In that case, displaying of the second changed display mode may be started while displaying the first changed display mode. Furthermore, displaying of the first changed display mode may be started while displaying the second changed display mode. Further, the display of the first changed display mode and the second changed display mode may be started at the same time.
Further, the display of the second changed display mode may end while the first changed display mode is being displayed. Furthermore, the display of the first changed display mode may end while the second changed display mode is being displayed. Further, the display of the first changed display mode and the second changed display mode may end at the same time.
Moreover, you may combine these.
For example, there is a period in which a scroll is released during a "step-up preview performance" and the background color is displayed in the changed background color, and a period in which a scroll is released during a "dialogue preview performance" and the dialogue is displayed. The period displayed by the changed lines may overlap at least in part.
In this way, by displaying a plurality of post-change display modes at the same time, it is possible to further heighten the sense of exhilaration when a jackpot occurs.

During the period from acquiring a scroll with a timer until the "scroll release effect" performed on the scroll with a timer is performed (or until the display mode changed by the "scroll release effect" is displayed), Player participatory performances that display operation instructions on operation units that can be operated by the player (for example, the operation button 401, the attack button 3710, etc.) (the aforementioned "step-up preview performance", "line preview performance", ""Reach title preview performance", "Leach dialogue preview performance", and "Cut-in preview performance") can be executed, and by operating the relevant operation instruction display, player participation type performance, and operation section. The displayed result performance (including the result performance that is displayed without operating the operating means) may be displayed. In this case, it is possible to maintain interest even before the countdown display by the scroll with a timer reaches "0".
Also, the same may be done for scrolls without a timer, but since the player does not know when the "scroll release effect" will be performed for scrolls without a timer, the player must obtain the scroll without a timer and then use the scroll without a timer. It is preferable that the above-described player participation type performance (start of displaying operation instructions) is not performed until the "scroll release performance" is executed.
On the other hand, if both a scroll with a timer and a scroll without a timer have been obtained, the above-mentioned player participation performance (start of displaying operation instructions) will not be performed until the first scroll release performance is performed. However, after that, a player participation type performance (the operation instructions display starts) may be performed, or a player participation type performance (operation instructions display starts) before the "scroll release performance" that is executed first. Alternatively, after a predetermined number of "scroll release effects" smaller than the number of acquired scrolls have been executed, a player participatory effect (start of operation instruction display) may be performed. Alternatively, the player participatory performance (the start of the operation instruction display) may be performed after the "scroll release performance" corresponding to all acquired scrolls has been executed. Further, in the variation that is the subject of the "scroll stock performance", the player participation type performance may be performed multiple times. In that case, it may be possible to perform multiple player participation performances (the start of displaying operation instructions) before the first "scroll release performance", or the "scroll release performance" may be performed multiple times. It may be possible to perform multiple player participation performances (the start of displaying operation instructions) before the next "scroll release performance" is executed, or after the scroll release performance is executed and the next "scroll release performance" is executed. One player participation performance (the start of the operation instruction display) is performed before the "Scroll release performance" is executed, and the remaining player participation performance (the start of the operation instruction display) is performed before the next "Scroll release performance". Alternatively, it may be performed after the "Scroll release performance" corresponding to all acquired scrolls has been executed, or multiple player participation performances (operation instruction display) may be performed. start).

The above-mentioned light-emitting decorative member may be made to emit light in response to the execution of the "scroll release effect".
Examples of the light-emitting decorative members include a door frame left side unit 530, a door frame right side unit 550, a door frame top unit 570, a right ear frame movable body 7100, a left ear frame movable body 7200, and a game board provided on the door frame 3. One or more of the panel plate rear substrate 2420, tank accessory 3770, etc. provided in 5 can be adopted.
When performing a "scroll release effect" for a scroll without a timer, it is preferable to cause the light-emitting decorative member to emit light in a specific light-emitting mode.
The timing to start emitting light in a specific light emission mode must be before the start of the "scroll release effect", at the same time as the start of the "scroll release effect", or after the start of the "scroll release effect". Can be done. In addition, the timing to end the light emission in a specific light emission mode must be before the start of the "scroll release effect", at the same time as the start of the "scroll release effect", or after the start of the "scroll release effect". Can be done.
The light-emitting decorative member having a specific light-emitting mode may be one or more of the above-mentioned light-emitting decorative members. Further, as a specific light emitting mode, after the light emitting decorative member provided on the door frame 3 and the light emitting decorative member provided on the game board 5 are made to emit light in a predetermined manner, the light emitting decorative member provided on the door frame 3 is made to emit light in a predetermined manner. A light emitting mode in which light is emitted may be adopted.
With a scroll without a timer, it is not known when the scroll will be released, so there is a risk that the player may miss the display mode after the change, but according to this embodiment, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the display mode after the change. can.
Note that when performing a "scroll release effect" for a scroll with a timer, the light-emitting decorative member may not emit light in a specific light-emitting mode. In this case, it is preferable that the light emitting mode of the light emitting decoration member be adapted to the BGM being output. This is because the player can recognize the timing of releasing the scroll by counting down the timer. According to such an embodiment, it is possible to prevent the effects from becoming excessive.

The above-mentioned movable decorative member may be moved in response to the execution of the "scroll release effect".
Examples of movable decorative members include a door frame left side unit 530, a door frame right side unit 550, a door frame top unit 570, a right ear frame movable body 7100, a left ear frame movable body 7200, and a game board provided on the door frame 3. One or more of the panel plate rear substrate 2420, tank accessory 3770, etc. provided in 5 can be adopted.
A specific movable decorative member (one or more may be used) may be operated at the timing when the "scroll release effect" is executed for the scroll without a timer and the scroll with a timer.
In addition, certain movable decorative members are activated at the timing when performing the "scroll release effect" for scrolls without a timer, but certain movable decorative members are not activated when performing the "scroll release effect" for scrolls with a timer. You may also do so.
In addition, certain movable decorative members will not operate at the timing of executing the "scroll release effect" for scrolls without a timer, but certain movable decorative members will not operate when performing the "scroll release effect" for scrolls with a timer. You may also do so.
Further, a specific movable decorative member (one or more) may not be operated at the timing when the "scroll release effect" is executed for the scroll without a timer and the scroll with a timer.
The movable decorative member may be moved, for example, from a standby position to a moving position. Further, when the movable decorative member moves to the movement position, it is preferable that the predetermined preview display in the post-change display mode overlaps with the movable decorative member when viewed from the front. For example, part or all of the predetermined advance notice display in the changed display mode may overlap with the movable decorative member. In this case, the visibility of the preview display that has changed to the changed display mode will be reduced, but it can make the player feel nervous and wonder what has been displayed.
On the other hand, when the movable decorative member moves to the movement position, the predetermined preview display in the post-change display mode may not overlap with the movable decorative member when viewed from the front.
In addition, when a plurality of movable decorative members move to the movement position, some of the movable decorative members overlap in front view with the predetermined preview display in the post-change display mode, and the predetermined preview display in the post-change display mode overlaps in front view. The advance notice display and other movable decorative members may not overlap when viewed from the front.

In addition, depending on the ``scroll release effect'', the display format of ``step-up preview effect'', ``dialogue preview effect'', ``reach title preview effect'', ``line during reach effect effect'', and ``cut-in preview effect'' will change. Although the form is shown, the type of display form after the display form has changed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "post-change display form") may be different between a scroll without a timer and a scroll with a timer.
For example, the number of post-change display modes displayed when a scroll with a timer is released may be greater than the number of post-change display modes displayed when a scroll without a timer is released. According to such an embodiment, it is possible to make the user wait anxiously to see which display mode will be changed during the period until the countdown reaches zero.
Note that the number of changed display modes displayed when a scroll without a timer is released may be the same as the number of changed display modes displayed when a scroll with a timer is released. Alternatively, the number of changed display modes displayed when a scroll with a timer is released may be smaller than the number of changed display modes displayed when a scroll without a timer is released.

A predetermined sound effect may be output in response to the execution of the "scroll release effect."
Furthermore, different sound effects may be output depending on when a scroll without a timer is released and when a scroll with a timer is released.
Further, a sound effect may be output when a scroll without a timer is released, and a sound effect may not be output when a scroll with a timer is released.
In addition, when a scroll without a timer is released, one of the multiple sound effects corresponding to the multiple post-change display modes is output, and when a scroll with a timer is released, a sound effect is output. may not be output, or the same sound effect may be output regardless of the display mode after the change.
With a scroll without a timer, it is not known when the scroll will be released, so there is a risk that the player may miss the display mode after the change, but according to this embodiment, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the display mode after the change. can.
Note that for a scroll with a timer, a countdown sound may be output in accordance with a countdown display from a predetermined number of seconds before the scroll is released. For example, voice output may be performed such as "5", "4", "3", "2", and "1" during the period from 5 seconds before the scroll is released to 1 second before the scroll is released.

In this way, according to the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 378 to 390, new entertainment can be provided to the player.

The light guide plate 1140 functioning as a decorative member will be described below with reference to FIGS. 391 and 392.
FIG. 391(a) shows a front view, and FIG. 391(b) shows a plan view (cross-sectional view). FIG. 392 shows a front view of the light guide plate 1140 and the display area 1600a of the game board side performance display device 1600.
The panel plate 1110 is provided with a panel plate opening 1118. Further, a light guide plate 1140 is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the rear so as to partially block the panel plate opening 1118. Note that the size of the light guide plate 1140 is one size larger than the display area 1600a.
The light guide plate 1140 is a flat member made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 formed by fine irregularities is provided on the rear surface. The thickness of the light guide plate 1140 is 2 mm. The shape of the portion where the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 is provided is a decorative shape such as a predetermined character, design, pattern, or letter (in the example described later, the shapes of a monster character and a plurality of lightning bolts are expressed). ing.
A light guide plate illumination member 1146 is attached to the right end of the light guide plate 1140 along the vertical direction. The light guide plate lighting member 1146 consists of a thin plate-shaped light guide plate substrate 1147 and a plurality of light guide plate light emitting members 1148 mounted on the light guide plate substrate 1147 along the longitudinal direction of the light guide plate substrate 1147. ing. The light guide plate light emitting member 1148 is composed of full color LEDs. Light emission control of the light guide plate illumination member 1146 is performed by the peripheral control board 1510.

The light emitted from the light guide plate illumination member 1146 reaches the left end of the light guide plate 1140 while being reflected within the light guide plate 1140. Therefore, the light emitted from the light guide plate illumination member 1146 reaches the entire area inside the light guide plate 1140.
The light that has entered the light guide plate 1140 is diffusely reflected by the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142. A part of the diffusely reflected light changes its optical path toward the player, so that the portion where the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 is provided is visible to the player in a light-emitting manner.
On the other hand, when the light guide plate illumination member 1146 is not emitting light, the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 is visually recognized in a substantially transparent state, making it difficult for the player to notice that the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 exists. Further, the portion of the light guide plate 1140 where the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 is not provided is in a smooth state, and the light guide plate 1140 is present regardless of whether or not the light guide plate illumination member 1146 is emitting light. It is difficult for players to notice this.
Therefore, when the light guide plate illumination member 1146 is emitting light, the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 is visually recognized as emitting light in a predetermined manner. In addition, the player can visually confirm the display contents of the display area 1600a located behind the light guide plate 1140 in a state where the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 is overlaid with the light emitting state.
Further, when the light guide plate illumination member 1146 is not emitting light, the player can visually confirm the display contents of the entire display area 1600a located behind the light guide plate 1140.

Next, with reference to FIG. 392, a specific visual recognition mode of the display area 1600a and the light guide plate 1140 will be described. 392(a) to 392(c) are front views.
FIG. 392(a) shows how the light guide plate 1140 (broken line) overlaps the display area 1600a (solid line). Additionally, a light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 provided on the light guide plate 1140 is shown. A light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 in the shape of a monster character is provided near the center of the light guide plate 1140. Further, light guide plate rough surface portions 1142 in the shape of lightning bolts are provided radially around the monster character.
FIG. 392(b) shows a state in which the decorative pattern is changing and the light guide plate illumination member 1146 is not emitting light. In this state, since no light is introduced onto the light guide plate 1140, the monster character and the lightning bolt are not visible, and the entire display content of the display area 1600a is visible.
On the other hand, FIG. 392(c) shows a state in which the decorative pattern is changing and the light guide plate illumination member 1146 is emitting light. In this state, light emitted from the light guide plate illumination member 1146 is introduced into the light guide plate 1140, and the light is scattered at the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142, making the monster character and the lightning bolt visible.

In this way, by introducing the light emitted by the light guide plate illumination member 1146 into the light guide plate 1140, the light is diffusely reflected on the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 provided on the light guide plate 1140, and the light is diffused in the predetermined area formed by the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142. Images of patterns (monster characters, lightning bolts, etc.) can be displayed. Further, while the player is viewing the display area 1600a, a predetermined image (here, an image of a monster character or an image of lightning) is suddenly displayed on the light guide plate 1140 located on the front side of the display area 1600a. This can give the player a big surprise.

A plurality of colors of light emitted by the light guide plate illumination member 1146 may be provided. For example, when irradiating light of colors such as blue, green, and red, it is possible to make light guide plate rough surface portions 1142 of the same shape emit light in different colors. In the above example, the degree of expectation is expressed by various images (reserved images, preview images, etc.) and the emitted light color of the light-emitting decorative member.Similarly, the degree of expectation of a jackpot, etc., can be expressed by the color of the light introduced into the light guide plate 1140. can be shown.
For example, it is preferable to provide three colors of light, blue, green, and red, as the colors of light introduced into the light guide plate 1140, so that the expectation level increases in the order of blue, green, and red. In this case, the monster character and the lightning bolt will be displayed in one of blue, green, and red.

The "weather preview effect" will be described below with reference to FIG. 393.
The "weather preview performance" is a performance that displays an image expressing a weather phenomenon (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "weather phenomenon image") in the display area 1600a, and indicates the degree of expectation of a jackpot depending on the type of the displayed weather phenomenon image. be.
There are three types of weather phenomenon images: rain images, lightning images, and tornado images, and any one of these images is displayed in the "weather preview effect". The expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of rain images, lightning images, and tornado images. For example, it is preferable that the expectation level when a rain image is displayed is 3%, the expectation level when a thunder image is displayed is 7%, and the expectation level when a tornado image is displayed is 10%.
The "weather preview effect" is executed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds), and one of the weather phenomenon images continues to be displayed while the effect is being executed.

FIG. 393(a) shows an example of a display state when the "weather preview effect" is not being executed. Here, the normal background image A is displayed as the background image, the decorative pattern is in a state of high-speed fluctuation, and the current pending image and two standby pending images are displayed.
A display example when execution of the "weather preview performance" is started in this state is shown below.
FIG. 393(b) shows a state in which the "weather preview effect" is executed and a rain image is displayed. Further, FIG. 393(c) shows a state in which the "weather preview effect" is executed and a lightning image is displayed. FIG. 393(d) shows a state in which the "weather preview effect" is executed and a tornado image is displayed.
As shown in each figure, the display priority of the weather phenomenon image is higher than the display priority of the background image, and the display priority of the weather phenomenon image is higher than that of the background image. The display priority is set lower than the display priority of

The "weather preview effect" may indicate the degree of expectation that the fluctuation result of the fluctuating decorative pattern will be a jackpot, or the fluctuation result corresponding to any of the standby images will be a jackpot based on the pre-reading process. The level of expectation may also be indicated.
Note that the weather phenomenon image may be displayed dynamically. For example, a weather phenomenon image may be displayed such that rain or lightning falls from top to bottom, or a tornado moves from side to side.
In the production example shown with reference to FIG. 393, the timing to execute the "weather notice production" was when the decorative patterns were fluctuating at high speed. The "weather preview performance" may be executed while the weather forecast is temporarily stopped. For example, in a "pseudo-continuous performance", a "weather notice performance" may be executed in a state where the left center right decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, or in a reach state where the left and right decorative patterns are the same pattern and temporarily stopped. .

A variation pattern table for determining variation patterns will be described with reference to FIG. 394. Here, there are losses and jackpots as a result of the special lottery, and in the case of a loss, the fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the loss time fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 394(a). Further, in the case of a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the jackpot fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 394(b).
The execution of the special lottery and the determination of the variation pattern are performed by the main control board 1310, and the result of the special lottery and the determined variation pattern are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as a command. Peripheral control board 1510 executes effects such as display using game board side effect display device 1600, output of sound, movement of decorative members, light emission, etc. based on the received special lottery result and fluctuation pattern.

In this embodiment, the jackpot probability is 1/300. Also, to simplify the explanation, it is assumed that small wins and time-saving losses do not occur. In addition, the illustrated variation pattern table is a variation that is referenced when a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 in a normal state (low probability non-time saving state) and when the number of reservations in the first starting port 2002 is 0. Let it be a pattern table.
In the loss time variation pattern table, from variation pattern 01 to variation pattern 07, the variation time becomes longer but the distribution probability becomes lower. On the other hand, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern table, from fluctuation pattern 08 to fluctuation pattern 14, the fluctuation time becomes longer but the distribution probability becomes higher. Note that the probability that variation pattern 07 and variation pattern 08 are selected is 0% here.

From FIGS. 394(a) and 394(b), it can be said that the longer the variation time of the decorative pattern, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. For example, the expectation level of a variable display with a variation time of 10 seconds (variation pattern 01, variation pattern 08) is 0%, but the expectation level of a variation display with a variation time of 120 seconds (variation pattern 05, variation pattern 12) is 0%. Approximately 1.6%, the expectation level of a fluctuation display with a fluctuation display of 180 seconds (fluctuation pattern 06, fluctuation pattern 13) is approximately 9.1%, a fluctuation display with a fluctuation display of 240 seconds (fluctuation pattern 07, fluctuation pattern 14) The expectation level is 100%.

By employing such a variation pattern table, it becomes possible to perform a pseudo-continuous effect or a special reach effect when the variable display is long.
Furthermore, the longer the variable display time of the decorative symbols, the higher the expectation of a jackpot, and it is possible to entertain the player with an elaborate performance for a long period of time while giving the player a sense of expectation for a jackpot.
In addition, in the variation pattern tables of the same number of seconds (for example, variation pattern 06 and variation pattern 13), the same effect display is executed until the predetermined timing of the variation display, and after the predetermined timing, the result of the special lottery is a loss. A display indicating whether it is a jackpot or a jackpot (for example, a win/loss display performed at the end of a special reach effect) is performed. By adopting such an embodiment, the player can estimate the level of expectation of a jackpot during the stage of the effect display, and watch the result of the effect display while anticipating what kind of display will be performed in the end. I will keep an eye on it.

Note that the number of fluctuation patterns, fluctuation time, and distribution probability shown in FIG. The number of seconds may also be used. By adopting such an aspect, it becomes possible to perform various effects while the decorative patterns are being displayed in a variable manner.

The table that is referred to when the state when a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 is a normal state (low probability non-time saving state) and the number of pending balls in the first starting port 2002 is 0 is shown. The type of starting port where the ball won (first starting port 2002, second starting port 2004), gaming state (low probability non-time saving state, high probability non-time saving state, low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state), number of reservations (from 0 to 4), different variation pattern tables may be used.
For example, although the variation times remain the same as the five types illustrated, the distribution probabilities may be different. Alternatively, a variation pattern table may be used in which the type of variation time (number of seconds) is increased or decreased.

Particularly in the case of a low probability time saving state and a high probability time saving state, many game balls enter the second starting slot 2004 in a short period of time. Therefore, in the variation pattern table of the second starting port 2004, it is preferable to set the distribution probability so that the variation time is relatively short compared to the variation pattern table used in the low probability time saving state and the high probability time saving state. By employing such a variation pattern table, it is possible to increase the number of times the decorative pattern is displayed in variation per unit time, which makes it difficult for over-winning in the second starting opening 2004 to occur, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. can.

Further, a fluctuation pattern table may be set depending on the number of items on hold. In this case, it is preferable to set the distribution probability so that the larger the number of items on hold, the shorter the fluctuation time is. Conversely, it is preferable to set the distribution probability so that the smaller the number of items on hold, the longer the fluctuation time becomes. By employing such a variation pattern table, the variation display of the decorative symbols is less likely to be interrupted, so it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

395 to 405 etc., which is a special effect in an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment shown in FIGS. FIG. 395 shows an example of an image displayed in this embodiment (or modified example), etc. 396 and 397 show the effect pattern table in this embodiment. 398 and 399 show time charts in this embodiment. 400, 401, 403, 404, and 405 show display examples in the display area 1600a of this embodiment.

An outline of the "reserved change color prediction performance" will be explained below. In the "holding change color foreshadowing effect", the color in which the holding image will change is suggested by the color of the decorative pattern that is temporarily displayed.
In the "pending change color prediction effect", the "first pending change color prediction effect" and the "second pending change color prediction effect" are executed, but only the "first pending change color prediction effect" is executed. In some cases, the "second pending change color predictive effect" is executed after the "first pending change color predictive effect" is executed.

FIG. 395(a) shows an example of a decorative pattern displayed in the display area 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600 in this embodiment.
There are three types of colors for the numbers in the decorative pattern: blue, green, and red. The numbers attached to the decorative patterns include "1" to "9". As shown in the figure, among these numbers, "2,""4,""6," and "8" are colored blue, "1,""5," and "9" are colored green, and "3" and "7" are colored red. ing. In the figure, blue is represented by diagonal lines going down to the left, green is represented by diagonal lines going down to the right, and red is represented by grid-like lines. Note that this point may also be applied to other drawings, and the color of the image may be indicated depending on the type of line even for images other than decorative patterns. The parts of the decorative pattern other than the numbers (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "background area") may be colored white, gray, black, or the like. Or use a color similar to the color of the decorative pattern (dark blue or light blue if the decorative pattern is blue, yellow-green if the decorative pattern is green, orange or peach if the decorative pattern is red). May be adopted.
Note that the decorative designs with blue numbers are normal designs, and the decorative designs with green numbers and red numbers are variable designs.
Further, the degree of expectation of a jackpot may be suggested by the type of symbols forming the reach state. For example, if the numbers attached to the decorative pattern are "1", "2", "4", "5", "8", or "9", the expectation level is less than 5%, if it is "6", it is 20%, and "3" may be set to 50%, and "7" may be set to 90% (or may be set to 100%). In addition to simply determining whether the reach symbol is a regular symbol or a variable probability symbol (that is, whether it is an even number or an odd number), it also determines whether the number attached to the symbol is "1" to "9". It is also possible to increase the player's interest in whether there is such a thing.
Note that, as shown in FIG. 395(b), the color of the background area of the decorative pattern is not limited to numbers, and the color of the background area of the decorative pattern may be set to a color (blue, green, red) corresponding to the type of number. In this case, the number part of the decorative pattern may be colored white, gray, black, etc. Or use a color similar to the background area color (dark blue or light blue if the background area color is blue, yellow-green if the background area color is green, orange or pink if the background area color is red). May be adopted.

FIG. 395(c) is a background image for predictive effect displayed as a background image in the "second pending change color predictive effect" of the "pending change color predictive effect". The background image for the omen effect imitates a slot machine installed in a casino facility. Note that the characters "PAYS", "BET", and "SPIN" are also part of the background, but they do not indicate that operation acceptance from the player is valid, but function merely as decoration.

The colors of the held images (current held images and standby held images) are white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow colors. The color of the pending image is determined based on prefetch processing. White is a color that is normally used as a color for retained images. Expectations increase in the order of white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow colors. The expectation level when a golden pending image is displayed is less than 100% (for example, 80%). The expectation level when a rainbow-colored pending image is displayed is 100%. The appearance probability decreases in the order of white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow colors.

When a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 and a hold occurs during the variable display of decorative symbols, the random number obtained at the time of winning is pre-determined in the pre-reading process, and based on the result of the pre-determination, the ``pending change color'' is It is determined whether or not to execute the "premonition effect". When it is decided to execute the "Pending Change Color Foreshadowing Performance", the three decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right will be displayed immediately (under no circumstances will the fluctuating display be executed (for example, if all the decorative symbols are fluctuating at high speed) Temporary stop will be displayed immediately (even if you are in a situation where you are in a situation where you are in a situation where you are in a situation where you are performing a reach effect). Although the details will be described later, the conditions for determining that the "pending change color foreshadowing performance" is executed are that the result of the fluctuating display being executed is a loss, and the remaining fluctuating time of the fluctuating display being executed is This is an effect that can be determined when a predetermined time or more remains.
Furthermore, all the temporarily stopped decorative patterns are the same color. For example, combinations such as "2", "4", "8" and "2", "2", "8" with blue decorative patterns, "9", "1", "1", "1", and "5" with green decorative patterns. These decorative patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed in combinations such as "9", "3", "3", "7" with red decorative patterns, and "7", "3", and "3". It goes without saying that combinations other than these may be employed as long as the condition that the colors of the decorative patterns on the left and center right sides are the same color is satisfied.

In addition, in the combinations of decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped in the "first pending change color foreshadowing performance" and the "second pending change color foreshadowing performance" described later, combinations that indicate a reach loss (decorative symbols with the same left and right decorative symbols) , combinations that indicate a jackpot (decorative patterns with the same decorative pattern on the left, center, and right) are not accepted. For example, decorative patterns are not displayed temporarily in a combination of "2", "4", "2" or "2", "2", "2". This can prevent the player from misunderstanding that a reach loss has occurred or that a jackpot has occurred after the temporary stop display ends.

In addition, when a game ball wins not only in the first starting port 2002 but also in the second starting port 2004, the "retention change color predictive performance" may be executed.

A prefetch process is performed based on the starting prize, and it is determined whether or not to execute the "retention change color predictive performance" based on the preliminary determination result of the prefetch process.
Further, when there are a plurality of holds (2 to 4), the display mode of the hold image of any one of the existing holds changes according to the "hold change color prediction effect".
Furthermore, the result of the variable display during execution is always a "loss". That is, if the result of the variable display being executed is a jackpot, the "pending change color prediction effect" is not executed.
Furthermore, the greater the number of pending items, the higher the probability that the "holding change color predictive performance" will be executed. In other words, the higher the number of held items, the higher the probability that the held item will include a hold that will result in a jackpot.As a result, the higher the number of held items, the higher the probability that the ``reserved change color foreshadowing effect'' will be executed. .
According to such an embodiment, a player who wants to start the "holding change color predictive effect" tries to increase the number of holdings, so it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, the display mode of the standby hold image corresponding to the starting winning that triggered the execution of the prefetch process may be changed by the “hold change color foreshadowing effect”. In this case, the display mode of the most recently displayed standby pending image will change.
In this case as well, since the player who wants to start the "reservation change color predictive performance" tries to increase the number of reservations, the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

The effect pattern table shown in FIG. 396 shows the relationship among the color of the temporarily stopped decorative symbol, the color of the displayed aura image, and the change mode of the standby pending image in the "first pending change color prediction effect".
This performance pattern table shows the relationship between the color of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern (the color of the displayed aura image) and the change mode of the standby pending image. For example, when performance pattern PTN-1-02 is executed, a blue decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, a blue aura image is displayed, and then the standby image changes from white to blue. Furthermore, when performance pattern PTN-1-07 is executed, the green decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, and after the green aura image is displayed, the standby pending image changes from white to red. Furthermore, when performance pattern PTN-1-09 is executed, the red decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, and after the red aura image is displayed, the standby pending image changes from white to red.
On the other hand, when performance pattern PTN-1-01, performance pattern PTN-1-05, and performance pattern PTN-1-08 are executed, the color of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern (the color of the displayed aura image) However, the color of any pending image does not change.

In this way, the standby pending image may change to a pending image of a color with higher expectations than the color of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern. On the other hand, the standby image does not change to a color with a lower expectation level than the color of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern.
For example, if the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is blue, the white standby pending image may change to a blue, green, or red pending image. On the other hand, if the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is green, the white standby pending image may change to a green or red pending image, but will not change to a blue pending image. Furthermore, if the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is red, the white standby image may change to a red standby image, but it will not change to a blue or green standby image.
Therefore, even if the color of the temporarily stopped decorative symbol is blue, the player can expect that the color will change to red. Further, if the color of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is red, it will not change to blue or green, so the user will have a sense of expectation only that it will change to red.

Below, examples of effects when effect pattern PTN-1-01 and effect pattern PTN-1-02 are selected are shown in the time charts shown in FIGS. 398(a) and 398(b), and in FIGS. 400 and 401. , will be explained with reference to the display example shown in FIG. 402. Here, an example is shown in which the combinations of decorative symbols "2", "4", and "8" are temporarily stopped. Note that FIG. 398(a), FIG. 400, and FIG. 401 show examples of effects in which the color of the standby image does not change. On the other hand, FIG. 398(b), FIG. 400, and FIG. 402 show examples of effects in which the color of the standby image changes. The contents of both production examples are the same up to the middle. Therefore, the explanation up to the middle is an explanation of both production examples. In addition, in a state where the variable display of decorative symbols is being executed and there are two waiting holds, it is decided that a game ball will newly enter the first starting port 2002 and the "holding change color foreshadowing effect" will be executed. Let's explain the case.

At timing t0, variable display of decorative patterns is started. The color of the current pending image and the color of the two standby pending images are white, which has the highest display ratio as a pending display. FIG. 400(a) shows a display state in which the decorative pattern is changing at high speed.
At timing t4.5, a game ball enters the first starting port 2002, a white third standby image is displayed, and a prefetch process is performed. At timing t5, the "pending change color prediction effect" is started based on the result of the prefetch process. Here, the performance pattern PTN-1-01 is selected, and the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed in combinations of "2", "4", and "8". Note that the color of these decorative patterns is blue. FIG. 400(b) shows the display state when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. Note that the "pending change color prediction performance" may be started at the timing when the prefetching process is performed.
Subsequently, at timing t6.0, one second has elapsed since the decorative symbols were temporarily stopped and displayed in combinations of "2", "4", and "8", and the currently reserved image is no longer displayed. FIG. 400(c) shows a display state in which the currently reserved image is not displayed.
Once the "pending change color prediction effect" starts, it is certain that the fluctuating display that is being executed will result in a loss, so it is better to hide the current pending image in order to avoid creating unnecessary expectations. Although preferred, the current pending image may remain displayed.
In this case, it is preferable to display the current pending image by moving it to the upper right of the display area 1600a in the same way as the standby pending image, and display the current pending image until the variable display ends.

From timing t6.5 to timing t7.5, each standby pending image moves at a constant speed from the lower right of display area 1600a toward the lower center of display area 1600a. FIG. 400(d) shows a state in which the standby pending image has completed moving to the lower center of the display area 1600a.
Since the "holding change color prediction performance" is a performance that may change the standby pending image, it is easier for the player to recognize it if it is moved near the center of the display area 1600a. Further, although the explanation has been given of moving the standby images at a constant speed, they may be moved at different speeds, the timing of movement may be shifted, or a combination thereof may be used. When shifting the timing of movement, it is preferable to move the standby and hold images earlier in the lottery so that the plurality of standby and hold images are not displayed overlapping each other.
Note that the arrows in the figure indicate the movement mode of the standby pending image, and are not actually displayed in the display area 1600a. Note that in other figures, arrows may be drawn in the figures for the purpose of indicating the trajectory of the currently held image or the standby held image.
At timing t7.5, a blue aura image is displayed near the center of the display area 1600a. FIG. 400(e) shows a display state in which a blue aura image is displayed.

From timing t7.5 to timing t10, the aura image moves downward and then gradually becomes smaller so that it overlaps with any one of the standby images. FIG. 400(f) shows a display state in which the blue aura image moves downward and is displayed overlapping the standby image. Further, FIG. 400(g) shows a display state in which a reduced blue aura image is displayed overlapping one standby hold image (here, the first standby hold image). In addition, as described above, the display mode of the standby hold image corresponding to the starting winning that triggered the execution of the prefetch process may be changed by the "hold change color prediction effect". In this case, the display mode of the most recently displayed standby hold image (the third standby hold image shown in FIG. 400) will change.

Hereinafter, a production example (production pattern PTN-1-01) in which the color of the standby pending image does not change will be described with reference to FIG. 398(a).
At timing t10, the display of the aura image ends and the aura image enters a non-display state. The color of the first standby image that overlapped with the aura image remains white without changing. FIG. 401(a) shows the display state after the display of the aura image is finished.
The standby pending image moves at a constant speed toward the upper right of the display area 1600a from timing t11 to timing t12. FIG. 401(b) shows the display state of the standby pending image while it is being moved. Further, FIG. 401(c) shows a state in which the movement of the standby pending image has been completed.
At timing t13, each decorative pattern on the left center right is in a state of high-speed fluctuation. Note that the color of the decorative pattern returns to the original color of the decorative pattern at the same time as the high-speed fluctuation resumes. FIG. 401(d) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of each decorative pattern on the left-center right side has ended and the high-speed fluctuation state has resumed. In addition, when each decorative pattern on the left center right is set to a state where it changes at high speed, the decorative pattern that is fluctuating is made semi-transparent (the type of decorative pattern can be recognized when it is semi-transparent), and then it is caused to change at high speed. Good. This is because smoother movements do not give the player a sense of discomfort.
At timing t28.5, the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, at timing t29, the right decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, and at timing t29.5, the middle decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed. Next, at timing t30, the decorative pattern on the left center right is stopped and displayed. FIG. 401(e) shows a display state in which the variable display has ended and the decorative symbols on the left-center right are stopped and displayed. Note that the decorative pattern at the center right of the left may be stopped and displayed at timing t30 without temporarily stopping and displaying the decorative pattern at the center right of the left.
At timing t31, a new fluctuating display is started, and the decorative pattern on the left center right enters a high-speed fluctuating state. In addition, at the same time as the display of each of the pending images that had been displayed at the upper right of the display area 1600a as the first to third standby pending images ends at timing t31, the pending images are displayed in the display area as the current pending image to the second pending pending image. 1600a, and the "first pending change color prediction effect" ends. FIG. 401(f) shows a state in which the decorative pattern on the left center right is in a high-speed fluctuation state.

Below, an example of effect (effect pattern PTN-1-02) in which the color of the standby image changes will be described with reference to FIG. 398(b).
At timing t10, the display of the aura image ends and the aura image enters a non-display state. The color of the first standby image that overlapped with the aura image changes from white to blue, which is the color of the aura image. FIG. 402(a) shows the display state after the display of the aura image is finished.
The standby pending image moves at a constant speed toward the upper right of the display area 1600a from timing t11 to timing t12. FIG. 402(b) shows the display state of the standby pending image while it is being moved. Further, FIG. 402(c) shows a state in which the movement of the standby pending image has been completed.
At timing t13, each decorative pattern on the left center right is in a state of high-speed fluctuation. Note that the color of the decorative pattern returns to the original color of the decorative pattern at the same time as the high-speed fluctuation resumes. FIG. 402(d) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of each decorative pattern on the left-center right side has ended and the high-speed fluctuation state has resumed. In addition, when each decorative pattern on the left center right is set to a state where it changes at high speed, the decorative pattern that is fluctuating is made semi-transparent (the type of decorative pattern can be recognized when it is semi-transparent), and then it is caused to change at high speed. Good. This is because smoother movements do not give the player a sense of discomfort.
At timing t28.5, the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, at timing t29, the right decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, and at timing t29.5, the middle decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed. Next, at timing t30, the decorative pattern on the left center right is stopped and displayed. FIG. 402(e) shows a display state in which the fluctuating display has ended and the decorative symbols at the center left and right are stopped and displayed. Note that the decorative pattern at the center right of the left may be stopped and displayed at timing t30 without temporarily stopping and displaying the decorative pattern at the center right of the left.
At timing t31, a new fluctuating display is started, and the decorative pattern on the left center right enters a high-speed fluctuating state. In addition, at the same time as the display of each of the pending images that had been displayed at the upper right of the display area 1600a as the first to third standby pending images ends at timing t31, the pending images are displayed in the display area as the current pending image to the second pending pending image. 1600a, and the "first pending change color prediction effect" ends. FIG. 402(f) shows a state in which the decorative pattern at the center right of the left is in a high-speed fluctuation state.

In this way, in the "first hold change color prediction effect", an aura image of the same color as the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is displayed. Further, the color of one of the standby images may change to the color of the aura image or a color with a higher degree of expectation than the color of the aura image. For example, when a blue aura image is displayed as shown in production patterns PTN-1-02 to PTN-1-04, the color of the standby image changes to blue, green, or red. I can do it.

Although an example of the effect when there are three standby images has been shown, the "first hold change color prediction effect" can also be executed when there are one, two, or four standby images. Note that regardless of the number of standby and hold images, only one standby and hold image changes.

It may also be possible to indicate in advance to the player which standby images the display mode of which is likely to change. For example, from the same timing as the aura image display start (timing t7.5), an arrow or marker may be added around a certain standby pending image whose display mode may change, or a certain standby pending image whose display mode may change. The display may be periodically enlarged or reduced. According to such an embodiment, it becomes easier for the player to recognize which standby images may change. Note that such a display mode may continue until the "pending change color prediction effect" is completed. Alternatively, the process may be ended at the timing when the standby pending image changes due to any effect.

Furthermore, when the display mode of a standby image changes, an arrow or marker is added to indicate the change, or the image whose display mode has changed is enlarged or reduced periodically. good. For example, such a display may be started at timing t10. Note that after repeating enlargement/reduction a predetermined number of times, the standby pending image may be displayed in the final enlarged state, or the standby pending image may be gradually enlarged without being enlarged/reduced until it is displayed in the final enlarged state. It may be made to have a predetermined size.
Such a display that emphasizes the standby pending image may be performed until the timing (timing t13) when the execution of the "first pending change color predictive effect" ends (timing t13), or the standby pending image may be displayed at the upper right position of the display area 1600a. The process may continue until the timing (timing t31) when the display area 1600a returns to the lower right position of the display area 1600a.
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to make the user recognize that the standby image has changed. Furthermore, when a plurality of standby images are displayed, it is possible to recognize which standby image has changed.

As shown with reference to FIGS. 401(e), 401(f), 402(e), and 402(f), the standby pending image displayed above the display area 1600a is replaced by the next variable display It will be deleted as soon as it starts. At the same time, the current pending image and the standby pending image are displayed in the pending image display area provided below the display area 1600a.
Note that dynamic display may be performed in which the reserved image displayed on the upper side is moved to the lower side.

By executing the "first hold change color foreshadowing performance" in this way, the player is made aware of which color the standby hold image is likely to change to, depending on the color of the temporarily stopped displayed decorative pattern. be able to. Furthermore, when there are a plurality of standby images, it is possible to make the player have a sense of anticipation as to which standby image will change.

Furthermore, when the "first pending change color prediction effect" is executed, the display position of the pending pending image in the display area 1600a changes from the usual lower right position to the final upper right position. be done. Thereby, the standby pending image can be dynamically viewed. Furthermore, since the standby pending image is moved while the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the player can more clearly recognize that the decorative pattern has been moved. Further, since the standby pending image is located at a position different from normal, other players can recognize that a highly anticipated performance has been performed.

Next, the "second pending change color prediction performance" will be explained. The "second pending change color foreshadowing performance" is a performance that may be performed after the execution of the "first pending change color foreshadowing performance", and in the "second pending change color foreshadowing performance", the "first pending change color foreshadowing performance" The standby hold image that has changed with the hold change color foreshadowing effect may change further.
The performance pattern table shown in FIG. 397 shows the color of the standby pending image after change by the "first pending change color prediction performance" and the type of decorative pattern to be temporarily stopped in the "second pending change color predictive performance". It shows the relationship between the color, the combination of decorative patterns to be temporarily stopped, whether or not the decorative pattern continues to be temporarily stopped, the type and color of the decorative pattern in the case where the temporary stop is continued, and the display mode of the standby pending image.

In the "second pending change color foreshadowing performance", the decorative pattern on the left-center right side is temporarily stopped and displayed, similar to the "first pending change color foreshadowing performance". Thereafter, the temporarily stopped decorative patterns sequentially change to a high-speed fluctuation state. When all three decorative symbols are in a high-speed fluctuation state, the standby pending image is not changed. On the other hand, if two decorative patterns are in a high-speed fluctuation state, but one decorative pattern maintains a temporarily stopped state for a predetermined period of time, the color of the standby pending image changes to the color of the decorative pattern that maintained its temporarily stopped state. A message will be displayed.
It should be noted that during the "second pending change color prediction effect", the correspondence between the numbers and colors of the decorative pattern changes. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 397, the decorative pattern temporarily takes on one of green, red, gold, and rainbow colors.
Furthermore, in the "second pending change color foreshadowing effect", the background image changes to the background image for foreshadowing effect shown with reference to FIG. 395(c).

Below, production pattern PTN-1-02 and production pattern PTN-2-06 (production patterns in which the color of the standby pending image does not change from blue in the "second pending change color prediction production") are selected and executed. An example of the performance when the performance pattern PTN-1-02 and the performance pattern PTN-2-08 (the performance pattern in which the standby hold image changes from blue to red in the "second hold change color prediction effect") are selected. Please refer to the time charts shown in FIGS. 399(a) and 399(b) and the display examples shown in FIGS. 403, 404, and 405 for the effects after timing t13 among the examples of effects when executed. and explain. Note that the presentation contents before timing t13 are as shown with reference to FIG. 398(a), FIG. 398(b), and FIGS. 400 to 402, and will therefore be omitted.
Note that FIG. 399(a) is a time chart when performance pattern PTN-2-06 is executed. Further, FIG. 399(b) is a time chart when performance pattern PTN-2-08 is executed.

FIG. 403(a) shows the display state from timing t12 to timing t13. Here, a state in which the first standby and hold status has changed to blue and is displayed at the upper right of the display area 1600a is shown.
From timing t13 to timing t13.5, a "development effect" that displays the characters "kara-no-" is executed. FIG. 403(b) shows the display state at this time.
In other words, if the "development effect" is executed after the "first pending change color foreshadowing effect" ends, the "second pending change color foreshadowing effect" will start, but the "first pending change color foreshadowing effect" will start. If the ``development effect'' is not executed after the ``color prediction performance'' ends, the ``second pending change color prediction performance'' will not be started thereafter.

Note that even if the "development effect" is executed, the "second pending change color prediction effect" may not be executed in some cases. In this case, at timing t13.5, the display of the characters "KA-RA-NO-" ends, resulting in a display state as shown in FIG. 398.

At timing t13.5, the "second pending change color prediction effect" is started. At the timing when the "second pending change color foreshadowing effect" is started, the background image changes from the normal background image A shown with reference to FIG. 347(a) to the foreshadowing effect shown with reference to FIG. 395(c). background image. As described above, the background image for the omen performance is an image that imitates a slot machine installed in a casino facility. By displaying the background image for predictive effect, it is suggested to the player that the standby pending image may change further.
In addition, a red "3" as a left decorative pattern, a green "2" as a middle decorative pattern, and a red "7" as a right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped and displayed as initial symbols.
Further, as a text display indicating the content of the performance, the text "Pending Promotion Chance!" is displayed at the bottom of the display area 1600a.
FIG. 403(c) shows the display state from timing t13.5 to timing t14.5.

At timing t14.5, instead of the text "Pending promotion chance!", the text "Pending color will be promoted to the color of the symbols on the reels that do not move until the end!" is displayed.
FIG. 403(d) shows the display state from timing t14.5 to timing t15.5.
At timing t15.5, the text "READY GO!" is displayed instead of the text "The pending color will be promoted to the color of the symbols on the reels that do not move until the end!".
FIG. 403(e) shows the display state from timing t15.5 to timing t16.
By performing such a display, it is possible for the player to fully understand the content of the performance.

At timing t16, the display of the words "READY GO!" ends, and a horizontally long remaining time gauge image is displayed. The remaining time gauge image is displayed for three seconds from timing t16 to timing t19.
The remaining time gauge image is entirely black at the beginning of the display, but as time passes from the start of the display, it gradually switches to white from the left side until the entire time becomes white and the display stops. finish.
FIG. 403(f) shows the state immediately after the remaining time gauge image is displayed.
Further, FIG. 403(g) shows the display state 2 seconds after the remaining time gauge image is displayed (timing t18).

An example of a performance in which the color of the standby image does not change (performance pattern PTN-2-06) will be described below with reference to FIG. 399(a).
At timing t19, the display of the remaining time gauge image ends. At the same time, the decorative pattern on the left center right becomes in a high-speed fluctuation state. FIG. 404(a) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t20.5, the display of the background image for predictive effect ends, and the normal background image A is displayed as the background image. FIG. 404(b) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t28.5, the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, at timing t29, the right decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, and at timing t29.5, the middle decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed. Next, at timing t30, the decorative pattern on the left center right is stopped and displayed. FIG. 404(c) shows a display state in which the variable display has ended and the decorative symbols on the left-center right are stopped and displayed. Note that the decorative pattern at the center right of the left may be stopped and displayed at timing t30 without temporarily stopping and displaying the decorative pattern at the center right of the left.
At timing t31, a new fluctuating display is started, and the decorative pattern on the left center right enters a high-speed fluctuating state. In addition, at the same time as the display of each of the pending images displayed in the upper right of the display area 1600a as the first to third standby pending images ends at timing t24, the pending images are displayed in the display area as the current pending image to the second pending pending image. 1600a, and the "second pending change color prediction effect" ends. FIG. 404(d) shows a state in which the decorative pattern on the left center right is in a high-speed fluctuation state.

An example of effect (effect pattern PTN-2-08) in which the color of the standby image changes will be described below with reference to FIG. 399(b).
At timing t19, the display of the remaining time gauge image ends. At the same time, the middle decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are in a high-speed fluctuation state. The left decorative pattern continues to be temporarily stopped. FIG. 405(a) shows the display state at this time. At this timing, it is confirmed that the standby pending image changes to red, which is the color of the left decorative pattern.
A display is performed that emphasizes the left decorative pattern that has been temporarily stopped from timing t19 to timing t19.5. Here, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 395(a) and the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 395(b) are alternately displayed multiple times. FIG. 405(b) shows a display state in which the decorative pattern "3" shown in FIG. 395(b) is displayed.
From timing t19.5 to timing t20, the left decorative pattern shrinks and moves to a position overlapping the standby pending image, and at the timing when the movement is completed, the color of the standby pending image changes to the color of the decorative pattern. Since the color of the left decorative pattern is red, the color of the first standby image changes to red. FIG. 405(c) shows the display state of the left decorative pattern while it is moving. Note that the above-described highlighted display may be continued even during movement.
The left decorative pattern is erased from that position at a timing that overlaps with the first standby image (timing t20), and instantly starts to fluctuate at high speed on the left side of the display area 1600a. FIG. 405(d) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t20.5, the display of the background image for predictive effect ends, and the normal background image A is displayed as the background image. FIG. 405(e) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t28.5, the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, at timing t29, the right decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, and at timing t29.5, the middle decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed. Next, at timing t30, the decorative pattern on the left center right is stopped and displayed. FIG. 405(f) shows a display state in which the fluctuating display has ended and the decorative symbols at the center left and right are stopped and displayed. Note that the decorative pattern at the center right of the left may be stopped and displayed at timing t30 without temporarily stopping and displaying the decorative pattern at the center right of the left.
At timing t31, a new fluctuating display is started, and the decorative pattern on the left center right enters a high-speed fluctuating state. In addition, at the same time as the display of each of the pending images displayed in the upper right of the display area 1600a as the first to third standby pending images ends at timing t24, the pending images are displayed in the display area as the current pending image to the second pending pending image. 1600a, and the "second pending change color prediction effect" ends. FIG. 405(g) shows a state in which the decorative pattern on the left center right is in a high-speed fluctuation state.

In this way, in the "second hold change color foreshadowing effect", the player is made to recognize in advance which color the standby hold image is likely to change to, depending on the color of the temporarily stopped displayed decorative pattern. I can do it.
Further, since the suggestion performance of displaying the background image for predictive performance is executed at the same time as the start of the "second pending change color predictive performance", the player can be made aware that the standby pending image may change.
In addition, in the "first pending change color prediction effect", even if the pending image is likely to change to a color with a low expectation level (for example, a blue pending image) or has actually changed, the "second pending change color predictive effect" is displayed. If the "effect" is executed, there is a possibility that the pending image will change to a more highly anticipated one, so the player can feel at ease.

As described above, in the "pending change color prediction effect" in this embodiment, there are cases where only the "first pending change color prediction effect" is executed and the pending image changes (FIG. 398(b)) and cases where it does not change (FIG. 398(b)). There is FIG. 398(a)). Furthermore, after the execution of the "first pending change color predictive effect", the "second pending change color predictive effect" is executed and the pending image changes (Fig. 399(b)) and the case where it does not change (Fig. 399()). There is a)).

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the end timing of the "first pending change color prediction effect" and the "second pending change color prediction effect" (the timing of returning the standby pending image to the lower right corner of the display area 1600a) is timing t31. , the timing immediately before the high-speed fluctuation ends (timing t28), the timing when the left decorative pattern starts to temporarily stop (timing t28.5), the timing when the left center right decorative pattern becomes temporarily stopped (timing t29). .5) and the timing (timing t30) at which the decorative pattern on the left center right is stopped and displayed as the end timing of the "first pending change color foreshadowing performance" and the "second pending change color foreshadowing performance". Good too. In this case, at these timings, the standby image that was displayed at the upper right of display area 1600a will be displayed at the lower right of display area 1600a.
In this way, by returning the position of the standby hold image to its original position before the next variable display starts, the player can fully understand the number of holdouts and the display mode of the standby hold image. In this state, the next variable display can be started. Further, even when various effects are executed immediately after the start of the next variable display, the display contents in the display area 1600a do not become complicated, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming confused.

Other timing may be adopted as the timing for returning the position of the standby pending image to its original position at the lower right of the display area 1600a. For example, the timing at which the display of the background image for predictive performance is started (timing t13.5), the predetermined timing within the period during which the display explaining the content of the performance is performed (timing t13.5 to timing t16), At a predetermined timing within the period during which the remaining time gauge image is displayed (timing t16 to timing t19), the position of the standby pending image may be returned to its original position. In this case, the display mode of the standby pending image changes while it is displayed at the lower right of the display area 1600a.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the standby image moved to the upper right of the display area 1600a does not overlap with the decorative pattern temporarily stopped or stopped, the standby image is moved to a position where it overlaps with the decorative pattern temporarily stopped or stopped. It may also be displayed in .
In this case, the display priority of the standby and held image may be higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern during the temporary stop or stop display, or the display priority of the standby and hold image may be higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern during the temporary stop or the stop display. The display priority of the decorative pattern inside may be set high.
Alternatively, the display priority of the standby pending image is set higher than the display priority of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern so that the standby pending image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. The display priority of the decorative pattern being stopped and displayed may be set higher than the display priority of the image, so that the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the standby pending image.

The "suspended change color predictive effect" does not straddle the variable display, but starts in the middle of a certain variable display, and ends at the same time as the stop display ends (timing t31 in FIGS. 398 and 399). By the way, the time for performing the variable display is predetermined by a random number obtained in the main control board 1310 at the time of occurrence of a starting prize. Therefore, the "suspended change color predictive effect" is executed only when the remaining time of the variable display is sufficiently secured.
Specifically, at the timing when the starting winning occurs, if the remaining time of the variable display being executed is less than 15 seconds, the "pending change color predictive effect" is not executed.
If the remaining time of the variable display being executed is between 15 seconds or more and less than 20 seconds at the timing when a starting winning occurs, the "first pending change color prediction effect" will be executed, but the "second pending change color indication effect" will be executed. "Color omen effect" is not executed.
At the timing when a starting winning occurs, if the remaining time of the variable display being executed is 20 seconds or more and less than 35 seconds, only the "first pending change color prediction effect" is executed, and the "first There is a case where the ``second pending change color prediction effect'' is executed after the execution of the ``second pending change color prediction effect''.
If the remaining time of the variable display being executed is 35 seconds or more at the timing when the starting winning occurs, the "pending change color prediction effect" is not executed. Note that, as shown with reference to FIG. 394, the longer the variable display time, the higher the probability that the result of the special lottery will be a jackpot. Moreover, in that case, the probability that a special reach effect with high expectations will be executed over a long period of time increases. Therefore, if the remaining time of the variable display is long and you start the "pending change color foreshadowing performance", it will be confirmed that you will lose even though the expectation level was high. This may cause great disappointment to the player, but in this embodiment, if the remaining time of the variable display is long (more than 35 seconds), the "pending change color foreshadowing performance" is not started. , it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player feels discouraged.

Note that when it is decided to execute the "suspended change color foreshadowing effect", various displays related to the variable display that is being executed are basically stopped. This is because the variable display during execution will result in a loss. Note that the effects and images that will be canceled include pseudo-continuous effects, reach effects, and currently pending images. On the other hand, images that are not canceled include the fourth symbol and the pending number display image.

An overview of the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped in the "second suspended change color prediction performance" is shown in the "Type and color of the decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped" column of the performance pattern table in FIG. Although it is shown in the "Combination" column, the combination of numbers should be determined randomly so that the numbers are evenly distributed.
In addition, as in the case of the "first hold change color prediction performance", combinations that indicate a loss of reach such as "3", "1", and "3", and jackpots such as "3", "3", and "3" are shown. It is recommended that the combination shown is not displayed.

In production patterns PTN-2-01 to PTN-2-12, as the number of red decorative symbols increases, the probability that the standby image changes to red (that is, the expectation level of a jackpot) increases.
In production pattern PTN-2-16, the combination of decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped is two golden decorative symbols and one rainbow colored decorative symbol, but the two golden decorative symbols are always in a state of high-speed fluctuation, The rainbow-colored decorative pattern is always in a temporarily stopped state, and the standby image changes to a rainbow color. Note that the expectation level of the rainbow-colored standby image is 100%, so it is certain that a jackpot will occur at the timing when the rainbow-colored decorative pattern is displayed.

Although the embodiment has been described in which two or three of the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed at the end of the display period (timing t16 to timing t19) of the remaining time gauge image are simultaneously in a high-speed fluctuation state, the decorative symbols may be set to a high-speed fluctuation state in sequence.
For example, at the timing (timing t17) when 1 second has elapsed from the start of display of the remaining time gauge image, one of the decorative patterns changes from a temporary stop state to a high-speed fluctuation state, and 2 seconds have elapsed from the start of display of the remaining time gauge image. At the timing (timing t18), one of the decorative symbols changes from the temporarily stopped state to the high-speed fluctuation state, and at the timing when the display of the remaining time gauge image ends (timing t19), the remaining one decorative symbol maintains the temporarily stopped state. , it may be set to a high-speed fluctuation state.
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of seeing whether or not a decorative pattern of a highly anticipated color remains in a temporarily stopped state.

In addition, instead of changing the decorative pattern to a high-speed fluctuation state evenly (1 second, 2 seconds, and 3 seconds after the remaining time gauge image starts displaying) as the remaining time decreases, the decorative pattern is changed at other timings. It may be in a high-speed fluctuation state. For example, the decorative pattern may be changed from a temporarily stopped state to a high-speed fluctuation state 0.5 seconds, 2 seconds, and 3 seconds after the start of display of the remaining time gauge image. Alternatively, the decorative pattern may be changed from the temporarily stopped state to the high-speed fluctuation state 0.5 seconds, 1 second, and 3 seconds after the start of displaying the remaining time gauge image.
According to such an embodiment, candidates for decorative patterns (that is, colors in which the standby image can change) are quickly narrowed down, so that it is possible to further enhance interest.

FIG. 406 is a diagram showing a movement mode of the standby pending image in the "first pending change color predictive effect". The arrows in the figure indicate the moving route of the standby image (the arrows are not actually displayed but are shown for explanation).
FIG. 406(a) shows the path (movement start position, intermediate position, and movement end position) of the standby pending image in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 400 to 402 and the like. FIG. 406(b), FIG. 406(c), FIG. 406(d), and FIG. 406(e) each show an example in which the route of the standby pending image is modified.
Although an embodiment has been shown in which the standby and held image is temporarily stopped at an intermediate position, the image is moved at a constant speed from the movement start position via the intermediate position to the movement end position without temporarily stopping at the intermediate position. Good too.
Further, the standby and hold image may be repeatedly enlarged and reduced while the standby and hold image is being moved. Alternatively, you can gradually increase the size of the standby image until it reaches its maximum size at the intermediate position, gradually decrease the size after passing the intermediate position, and then display it at its original size at the end position. You may also do so.
Note that when the standby images are moved along the routes shown in FIGS. 406(a) to 406(e), the order of the standby images does not change in any case. Therefore, when the color of the standby image changes, the player can easily understand after how many changes the highly anticipated change display will be performed.

In the embodiments shown with reference to FIG. 398, FIG. 399, and FIGS. 403 to 405, the display in which the decorative pattern overlaps with the reserved image was performed, but instead of the decorative pattern, another image overlaps with the reserved image. You can do it like this.
Below, referring to FIG. 407, an aura image with the same color as the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the decorative pattern, the aura image moves toward the pending image, and after the movement is completed, the aura image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. An embodiment modified so that the color changes will be described.
A display is performed that emphasizes the left decorative pattern that has been temporarily stopped from timing t19 to timing t19.5. Here, an aura image of the same color as the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. FIG. 407(a) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t19.5, the left decorative pattern enters a high-speed fluctuation state, and from timing t19.5 to timing t20, the aura image gradually shrinks and moves toward the position overlapping the standby pending image, and the movement ends. At the appropriate timing, the color of the standby image changes to the color of the decorative pattern, and the display of the aura image ends. FIG. 407(b) shows a display state in which the aura image is moving. FIG. 407(c) shows the display state at the timing when the aura image arrives at a position overlapping the standby image. FIG. 407(d) shows the display state when the standby pending image changes to the color of the aura image. FIG. 407(e) shows the display state when the display of the aura image is finished.
Note that the display content after timing t20 is the same as the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 399(b) and FIG. 405.
In this way, the color of the standby image may be changed by moving a specific image having the color of the decorative pattern so as to overlap the standby image.

If only the "first pending change color prediction effect" is executed, the predetermined timing during the period from the predetermined timing after the completion of movement of the standby pending image or the subsequent timing until the start of the next variable display. In this case, the standby image may be hidden.
Similarly, when the "second pending change color predictive effect" is executed following the "first pending change color predictive effect", a predetermined event occurs at the same time as the display of the background image for predictive effect ends or after that. The standby image may be hidden at the appropriate timing.
In either case, the display of the standby pending image is restarted at the timing when the next variable display is started.
According to such an embodiment, even if the color of the standby image does not change, or even if it changes, it changes to a color with relatively low expectations, the player can It is possible to prevent situations such as embarrassment from occurring.
In addition, if the color changes to a color with a relatively high expectation level, and if the change display result turns out to be a failure, a standby image of a color with a relatively high expectation level will be displayed for a long period of time. However, by hiding the standby image, you can shorten the display time of the standby image with a color that has a relatively high expectation level. This prevents the player from feeling embarrassed.

If only the "first pending change color foreshadowing effect" is executed, or if the "second pending change color foreshadowing effect" is executed following the "first pending change color foreshadowing effect", the standby Although an embodiment has been shown in which the reserved images may be hidden, the reserved images may not always be hidden, but may be hidden at a predetermined rate.
In this way, by making the rate at which the standby images are not hidden higher than the rate at which the standby images are hidden, the original purpose of the performance, which is to make the player recognize the mode of the standby images, is lost. There is no.
When only the "first pending change color prediction effect" is executed, the ratio of the ratio of not displaying the standby pending image and the ratio of hiding the pending pending image is preferably set to be higher.
When the "second pending change color predictive effect" is executed following the "first pending change color predictive effect", the ratio of not displaying the standby pending image and the percentage of hiding the pending pending image Then, it would be better to increase the ratio of the former.
In this case, in a situation where the "second pending change color foreshadowing performance" has been performed and the performance is highly anticipated, there is a possibility that people will feel embarrassed if it fails, but it is necessary to avoid making them feel embarrassed. be able to.
Conversely, the latter ratio may be set higher between the ratio of not displaying standby images and the ratio of hiding images.
In this case, the player's expectation can be increased by showing the standby pending image in a situation where the "second pending change color predictive effect" has been executed and the highly anticipated presentation has been performed.

The probability that only the "first pending change color foreshadowing effect" will be executed and the probability that the "second pending change color foreshadowing effect" will be executed following the "first pending change color foreshadowing effect" are as follows: It is better to increase the probability. Alternatively, the latter probability may be increased. Note that the "probability" here is the probability that the effect will be executed when one variable display is executed.
By increasing the probability of the former, it is possible to increase expectations for a jackpot when the game progresses to the "second pending change color foreshadowing performance." On the other hand, by increasing the probability of the latter, it is possible to maintain a sense of anticipation even if the image changes to a standby pending image with a low expectation level in the "first pending change color predictive performance".
Similarly, the probability that only the "first pending change color foreshadowing performance" is executed and the standby pending image is further hidden, and Regarding the probability that the "predictive effect" is executed and the standby pending image is further hidden, it is preferable to increase the former probability. Alternatively, the latter probability may be increased.
By increasing the probability of the former, it is possible to increase expectations for a jackpot when the game progresses to the "second pending change color foreshadowing performance." On the other hand, by increasing the probability of the latter, it is possible to maintain a sense of anticipation even if the image changes to a standby pending image with a low expectation level in the "first pending change color predictive effect".

Although an embodiment has been described in which the display of the standby image is hidden, in this case, the decorative pattern is only displayed in a state in which it is changing at high speed in front of the normal background image. Furthermore, the premise is that the result of the variable display being executed is a loss, and the displayed content is uninteresting.
Therefore, a predetermined ready-to-reach performance may be performed as a look-ahead performance during a period until the variable display in which the "pending change color predictive performance" is completed ends.
As the predetermined ready-to-reach presentation, it is preferable that two or more types of ready-to-win presentations are made possible, and the degree of expectation of a jackpot differs depending on the type of ready-to-win presentation.
Note that the predetermined ready-to-reach effect executed as the look-ahead effect corresponds to the standby pending image that has changed in the "hold change color foreshadowing effect." The same predetermined ready-to-reach effect is executed also when the variable display corresponding to the standby image is executed.

In addition, in this way, the execution time when executing a predetermined reach effect as a look-ahead effect and the original execution time of the predetermined reach effect may not match (the ``pending change color foreshadowing effect'' is triggered by a starting prize). (The probability that they will not match is extremely high because the performance starts with Therefore, if the time of high-speed fluctuation is longer than the execution time of the predetermined reach effect and there is enough time to execute the entire predetermined reach effect as a look-ahead effect, the entire predetermined reach effect It is a good idea to do this. Alternatively, the predetermined ready-to-win performance may be executed until just before the performance in which the win or loss at the end of the predetermined ready-to-win performance is shown.
On the other hand, if the time of high-speed fluctuation is shorter than the execution time of the predetermined reach effect and there is not enough time to execute the entire predetermined reach effect as a look-ahead effect, the predetermined reach effect It is also possible to execute only a part of it. For example, a predetermined reach effect may be executed from the beginning, and the execution of the predetermined reach effect may be ended several seconds before the predetermined variable display time ends (for example, 2 seconds before the variable stop period starts). You may also do so.
In addition, after the end of these ready-to-win effects, the background images and decorative patterns that were displayed before the start of the ready-to-win effects are displayed again.
Further, if the time period during which the high speed fluctuation is occurring is even shorter, the predetermined reach effect may not be executed. Alternatively, only the reach name of a predetermined reach effect may be displayed as a pre-read effect.

According to such an embodiment, the player can be made aware in advance of what kind of reach effect will be executed. Further, since there are a plurality of ready-to-win performances with different levels of expectation, the player can be informed of the expected level of jackpot in advance.
Further, it is possible to make the player visually recognize a predetermined reach effect based on the pre-reading process in an appropriate form corresponding to the remaining time of the high-speed variable display.

As a look-ahead effect, the timing to start executing a predetermined ready-to-reach effect is the timing when the decorative pattern in the middle right of the left is in a state of high-speed fluctuation (timing t13 in FIGS. 398(a) and 398(b), 399(a) and timing t20 in FIG. 399(b)) after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, after one second has elapsed).
In addition, when execution of a predetermined reach effect is started as a look-ahead effect, the decorative symbols do not maintain a high-speed fluctuation state, but instead change the left and right decorative symbols in the same way as the decorative symbols in the actual predetermined reach effect. It is best to display the reach state with the same number temporarily stopped.

In the "first pending change color foreshadowing performance", a performance that involves operating an operating section (operation button 410, attack button 3710, etc.) may be performed. An embodiment in which operations on the attack button 3710 are effective will be described below. Note that FIG. 408 shows an example of a display when the effect of operating the operation unit is executed.
FIG. 408(a) shows a state in which display of a blue aura image has started.
While the aura image is being displayed, an operation instruction image with the words "PUSH!" attached inside a horizontally long ellipse is displayed. FIG. 408(b) shows a state in which an operation instruction image is displayed. Here, at the timing when an operation is performed on the attack button 3710, or at the timing when the operation validity period ends without any operation on the attack button 3710, the color of the pending display after changing is displayed in the center of the display area 1600a instead of the aura image. A small aura image with a color corresponding to the image is displayed and the movement starts toward one of the standby images (FIG. 408(c), FIG. 408(d)), or the display of the aura image ends ( Either of FIG. 408(e)) is performed.

FIG. 408(c) shows an example of a display in which the display mode of the standby pending image is changed. Here, the small aura image starts moving toward the first standby image.
FIG. 408(d) shows a state in which the movement of the aura image has been completed and the color of the first standby image has changed from white to blue.

FIG. 408(e) shows an example of a display when the display mode of the standby pending image is not changed. In this case, the small aura image is not displayed and the standby pending image is not changed.

In this way, even if the operation reception on the operation unit is enabled while the "first pending change color prediction effect" is being executed, and the display mode of the aura image changes due to the operation of the operation unit or the end of the operation validity period. good.

Referring to FIG. 408, when the operation unit is operated or when the operation validity period ends, a small aura image with a color corresponding to the changed pending display color is displayed in place of the aura image currently displayed. Although the embodiment has been shown, instead of a small aura image, a held image having the same shape and size (or a different size) as the waiting held image is displayed, and this held image moves toward the waiting held image, and the existing The changed standby image may be displayed as a changed standby image, overlapping the standby image.
FIG. 409(a) shows a state in which an operation instruction image is displayed.

FIG. 409(b) shows a state in which a pending image of the same color as the changed pending image is displayed and is moving toward the standby pending image in response to the operation of the operating unit or the end of the valid operation period.
FIG. 409(c) shows a state in which the movement of the pending image of the same color as the aura image has been completed and it is displayed as the first standby pending image.

FIG. 409(d) shows the display state when the display of the aura image ends in response to the operation of the operation unit or the end of the valid operation period.

The operation instruction image includes the characters "PUSH!" indicating the operation method of pushing, but a simulated operation section image that imitates the shape of the operation section to be operated may be displayed as the operation instruction image. Furthermore, characters indicating the operation method (such as "PUSH!") may be added to the operation unit simulated image.

As in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 408 and 409, an operation instruction may always be requested.
On the other hand, there are cases where no operation instructions are requested as in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 400, and cases where operation instructions are requested as in the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. You can also do this. In this case, the probability that the color of the pending image will change (that is, the expectation level of a jackpot) may be made different depending on when an operation instruction is not requested and when an operation instruction is requested.
For example, it is preferable to make the probability that the color of the held image changes higher when an operation instruction is requested than when no operation instruction is requested. Alternatively, the color of the standby pending image may change more easily to a highly expected color when an operation instruction is requested than when no operation instruction is requested.
For example, when the color of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is blue (effect pattern PTN-1-01 to effect pattern PTN-1-04), if no operation instruction is requested, the probability of changing to blue is 10%, probability of changing to green is 7%, probability of changing to red is 3%, and when an operation instruction is requested, probability of changing to blue is 20%, probability of changing to green is 14%, The probability of changing to red may be set to 6%.

White, red, or rainbow colors may be used as the color of the characters and the background portion other than the characters of the operation instruction image. Further, the degree of expectation may be expressed by these colors, and the degree of expectation increases in the order of white, red, and rainbow color. Note that the expectation level in the case of rainbow colors is 100%.

Two types of operation reception performances may be provided as the "operation reception performance" for accepting the player's operation on the operation unit. Specifically, before the operation validity period becomes effective, a suggestion image suggesting that the operation is valid is displayed, and then an operation instruction image is displayed at the same time as the operation validity period starts. ``operation acceptance presentation'' and the ``operation instruction image'' is displayed at the same time as the start of the operation validity period without displaying a suggestion image suggesting that the operation is valid before the operation validity period becomes valid. 2, the operation reception effect” may be provided.
Further, as the suggestion image and the operation instruction image, an operation unit simulated image that imitates the operation unit may be adopted.
Note that the display mode of the suggestion image suggesting that the operation is valid and the operation instruction image indicating that the operation acceptance is valid may be different. For example, it is preferable that the suggestion image is a semi-transparent operation unit simulation image, and the operation instruction image is an opaque operation unit simulation image. In this case, by changing the operation unit simulated image from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state, the player can be made aware that the operation valid period has started.
Alternatively, a predetermined image that does not imitate the operation unit may be used as the suggestion image, and an operation unit simulated image that imitates the operation unit may be used as the operation instruction image.
In addition, if an operation is performed on the operation part during the operation validity period of the "operation reception performance" or when the operation validity period of the "operation reception performance" ends, the predetermined "post-operation performance" will not be executed. Begins. For example, an image of a predetermined color (one of blue, green, or red) is displayed in the display area 1600a to suggest the expectation of a jackpot.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 408 and 409, the operation reception may be performed using a "second operation reception performance" instead of the "first operation reception performance".
According to such an embodiment, the "operation reception effect" can be executed while ensuring the visibility of the color of the decorative pattern (the color in which the standby image can change).

On the other hand, the "second operation reception performance" may not be executed during the "first pending change color prediction performance", and only the "first operation reception performance" may be executed. At this time, while the "first pending change color foreshadowing performance" is being executed, only the suggestion image that suggests that the operation in the "first operation reception performance" is valid is displayed, and the "first pending change color foreshadowing performance" is being executed. It is preferable that after the end of the "pending change color prediction effect", the operation valid period in the "first operation reception effect" is started and the operation instruction image is displayed. In addition, by this "first operation reception effect", the standby hold image that has finished moving to the upper right of the display area 1600a changes to a standby hold image with higher expectations (for example, changes from white to blue). It is also possible to execute a change effect, or, unlike the pending change effect, for example, a comment preview in which a predetermined message is displayed (the "line preview effect" shown with reference to FIG. 385) or a "line preview effect" shown in FIG. 393. A preview display such as the "weather preview effect" shown in FIG.
According to such an embodiment, the player can be made to concentrate on the "first pending change color prediction performance." Further, even if the change of the standby hold image based on the display of the aura image is not executed, the standby hold image can be changed to a standby hold image of a color with a higher degree of expectation by operating the operation unit afterwards. This makes it possible to maintain the expectations of the players for a long period of time.If the effect is different from the pending change effect such as the above-mentioned comment notice, the ``pending change color foreshadowing effect'' can increase the level of expectation. A sense of anticipation is maintained even if the pending display is not performed.

Instead of or in addition to executing the "operation reception effect," the operation unit (for example, the attack button 3710) may be vibrated during the execution of the "first pending change color prediction effect." In this case, when the operating section vibrates, the expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a jackpot is higher than when it does not vibrate.
Alternatively, the operating section is formed of a transparent member, and a predetermined movable decorative member that is visible to the player is provided inside the operating section, and the movable decorative member is rotated, vibrated, or moved. You can do it like this. Furthermore, even when the movable decorative member performs such an action, the expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot is higher than when the movable decorative member does not perform such an action.
Note that during the period in which the operation section is operating in this manner, operation reception of the operation section is not valid, and the above-mentioned operation instruction image is not displayed.
In this way, by performing action effects using the operation section (sometimes referred to as "operation section action effects"), expectations are shown to the player tactilely or visually, thereby increasing interest. can do. In addition, while the aura image is displayed, the motion effect using the operation unit is executed in parallel with the effect of whether or not the hold status changes, so it is possible to determine what color it will change to. It is possible to provide a sense of expectation that a jackpot will occur in the "between" moments.
Note that the special lottery result here refers to the special lottery result corresponding to the standby pending image whose display mode has been changed by the "suspended change color predictive effect". Alternatively, in the case of an embodiment in which the standby that changes by the "hold change color foreshadowing effect" is a standby hold image corresponding to the most recently occurring standby hold, a special lottery is determined to execute the "hold change color foreshadowing effect". Refers to the result of The same holds true for other expressions of expectation level in the "reserved change color predictive effect".

Note that the fact that the "operation unit operation effect" is being executed may be displayed in the display area 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600. For example, text such as "Attack button vibrating!" may be displayed. This makes it easier for the player to notice that the "operation section operation effect" is being executed on the operation section.
Alternatively, the display area 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600 may not display that the operation effect of the operation section is being executed. Thereby, it is possible to give a feeling of satisfaction to the player who notices that the "operation unit operation effect" is being executed. Furthermore, since it becomes difficult for surrounding players to notice that the "operation unit operation performance" is being performed, the player can enjoy the state where he alone has high expectations for winning the jackpot.

In addition, in the "operation unit operation effect", a plurality of patterns in which the operation unit vibrates and patterns in which the movable decorative member operates may be provided. For example, a performance pattern in which vibrations or movements continue for 1 second, a performance pattern in which vibrations or movements continue for 2 seconds, a performance pattern in which vibrations or movements continue for 1 second, then interrupted for 1 second, and continued for 1 second again may be adopted. Furthermore, the expectation level of the jackpot may be increased in this order. Further, the vibration may be made to vibrate with a plurality of types of intensities such as weak vibration and strong vibration. In this case as well, it is preferable that the expectation level of the jackpot increases in this order.
In addition, in the case of a movable decorative member, effect patterns with different operating speeds may be provided. For example, a performance pattern in which the speed of the movable decorative member is slow and a performance pattern in which the speed of the movable decorative member is fast may be provided. Furthermore, the expectation level of the jackpot may be increased in this order. Further, although the operating mode of the movable decorative member is the same, the degree of expectation may be made to differ depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting decoration of the movable decorative member during operation. For example, when the movable decorative member emits white light and when it emits red light, the latter may be more expected.

The vibrations generated by the vibrations of the operating section and the movement of the movable decorative member may be made strong and transmitted to the handle 302, and the vibrations generated by the vibrations of the operating section and the movement of the movable decorative member may be Alternatively, a mechanism for transmitting vibrations to the handle 302 may be operated so that the vibrations are transmitted to the handle 302. In this case, only the player who is holding the handle 302 can recognize that the "operation section movement presentation" is being executed, and other players around him cannot notice that the "operation section operation presentation" is being executed. Since it becomes difficult to play, you can enjoy the state where you alone have high expectations of winning the jackpot. Furthermore, it is possible to make the player who is not gazing at the display area 1600a, such as by operating a smartphone with his/her left hand, aware that the "pending change color prediction effect" has started.

The timing to start the "operation unit operation effect" is the same timing as the timing at which the standby pending image starts moving in the "first pending change color prediction effect" (timing t6.5 in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 398 and 399). ).
Furthermore, the timing at which the "operation unit operation effect" ends is the same timing as the timing at which the standby pending image ends moving in the "first pending change color predictive effect" (timing t12 in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 398 and 399). ).
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to impress upon the player that the standby image has moved.

On the other hand, the timing at which the "operation unit movement effect" ends is set to a timing earlier than the timing at which the standby pending image ends moving in the "first pending change color predictive effect" (the timing in the embodiments shown in FIGS. 398 and 399). (timing before t12). For example, the timing at which the "operation section movement effect" ends may be set to timing t9 while the aura image is being displayed or timing t10.5 after the aura image display has finished.
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to firmly confirm whether or not the standby pending image has changed.

Alternatively, the timing at which the "operation unit movement effect" ends may be set to a later timing than the timing at which the standby pending image finishes moving in the "first pending change color predictive effect" (the timing in the embodiments shown in FIGS. 398 and 399). The timing may be set later than t12. For example, the timing at which the "operation part movement effect" ends may be set to the timing at which the high-speed fluctuation shown in FIGS. t15). Alternatively, the timing at which a display explaining the performance content in FIGS. 399(a) and 399(b) is displayed (for example, timing t15), the timing at which a remaining time gauge image is displayed (for example, timing t17), or the remaining time It may also be the timing (timing t19) when the display of the time gauge image ends.
According to such an embodiment, even after the standby image changes, the feeling of expectation for a jackpot can be maintained. Further, even if the standby image does not change, the "operation unit operation effect" is executed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming less interested. Furthermore, although there is a possibility that the "operation section movement presentation" is difficult for the player to notice, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice that the "operation section movement presentation" has started.

Although the embodiment has been described in which the timing at which the "operation unit operation effect" starts is the same as the timing at which the standby pending image in the "first pending change color predictive effect" starts moving, The ``operation unit operation effect'' may be started before the standby pending image starts moving in the ``predictive effect''. Alternatively, the "operation section operation effect" may be started after the standby pending image starts moving in the "first pending change color prediction effect".

The effect of moving the movable decorative member from the standby position to the movement position (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "movable decorative member movement effect") may be performed simultaneously with the "first pending change color prediction effect".
Specifically, the timing to start the "movable decorative member movement effect" (timing at which the movable decorative member starts moving from the standby position) is the timing at which the standby pending image in the "first pending change color prediction effect" starts moving. It is preferable to set the timing to be the same as the timing (timing t6.5 in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 398 and 399). In addition, the timing at which the "movable decorative member movement effect" ends (the timing at which the movable decorative member completes its movement to the moving position) is the timing at which the standby pending image in the "first pending change color prediction effect" ends its movement. (timing t12 in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 398 and 399) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "operation pattern A").

In addition, as described above, as the movable decorative member, the panel board rear board 2420 (FIG. 130, etc.), the panel board rear decorative member 2410 (FIG. 131, etc.), the tank accessory 3770 (FIG. 241, etc.), etc. may be adopted. Can be done. Further, as the operating mode of the movable decorative member, the above-mentioned operating modes (for example, vertical direction, horizontal direction, diagonal direction, etc.) can be adopted.
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to impress upon the player that the standby image has moved.

On the other hand, the execution period of the "movable decorative member movement effect" and the movement period of the standby pending image in the "first pending change color predictive effect" (period from timing t6.5 to timing t12) may be shifted.
For example, after the standby pending image starts moving, the movable decorative member starts moving from the standby position to the moving position, and after the waiting held image has finished moving, the movable decorative member starts moving to the moving position. It may be completed. For example, the movable decorative member may be moved from timing t9 to timing t13 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "movement pattern B").
Alternatively, the movable decoration member starts moving from the standby position to the movement position after the standby and held image starts moving, and the movement of the standby and hold image starts after the movable decoration member completes movement to the movement position. It may be configured to end. For example, the movable decorative member may be moved from timing t8 to timing t10.5 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "movement pattern C").
In addition, it is preferable that the expectation level of the jackpot is higher when the "movable decorative member movement effect" is executed and when it is not executed.
Note that the timing to start executing the "movable decorative member movement effect" may be before the time when the color of the standby pending image changes (timing t10), or after the timing when the color of the standby pending image changes (timing t10). You can also use it as

According to such an embodiment, it is possible to provide a feeling of expectation that a jackpot will occur at the "interval" when the waiting pending image changes to what color.
Alternatively, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of expectation of winning the jackpot after the timing when the color of the standby image changes.

On the other hand, the "movable decorative member moving effect" may be started after the moving period of the standby pending image (period from timing t6.5 to timing t12) in the "first pending change color prediction effect" ends.
For example, the movable decoration member may start moving from the standby position and complete the movement to the movement position after the standby and hold image starts to move and the movement of the standby and hold image ends. For example, the movable decorative member may be moved from timing t13 to timing t16 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "movement pattern D").
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to make the player concentrate on the movement of the standby hold image and the change in color of the standby hold image in the "first hold change color predictive effect".

As the predetermined movable decorative member to be moved in the "movable decorative member movement effect", one movable decorative member may be employed, or two or more movable decorative members may be employed. When using two or more movable decorative members in the "movable decorative member movement effect", all movable decorative members may be operated in "motion pattern A", or all movable decorative members may be operated in "motion pattern B". All movable decorative members may be operated in "operation pattern C," or all movable decorative members may be operated in "operation pattern D."
Alternatively, some movable decorative members may be operated in "operation pattern A" and other movable decorative members may be operated in "operation pattern B", "operation pattern C", or "operation pattern D".
Similarly, some movable decorative members may be operated in "operation pattern B" and other movable decorative members may be operated in "operation pattern A", "operation pattern C", or "operation pattern D".
Similarly, some movable decorative members may be operated in "operation pattern C" and other movable decorative members may be operated in "operation pattern A", "operation pattern B", or "operation pattern D".
Similarly, some movable decorative members may be operated in "operation pattern D" and other movable decorative members may be operated in "operation pattern A", "operation pattern B", or "operation pattern C".
In this way, by operating the plurality of movable decorative members in various manners, it is possible to enhance the "first pending change color foreshadowing effect".

With reference to FIGS. 406(a), 406(b), and 406(e), the movement path of the standby and hold image is shown. It may be longer than the length.
On the other hand, the length of the movement path of the movable decorative member may be longer than the length of the movement path of the standby pending image.
Alternatively, the length of the movement path of the movable decorative member may be made the same as the length of the movement path of the standby pending image.

It should be noted that even if the linear path shown in FIG. 406(c) or FIG. 406(d) is adopted as the movement path of the standby hold image and the movement distance of the standby hold image and the movement distance of the movable decorative member are compared, good. In this case, it is preferable to adopt a straight path for the movable decorative member as well.
For example, the moving distance of the standby pending image may be longer than the moving distance of the movable decorative member.
On the other hand, the moving distance of the movable decorative member may be longer than the moving distance of the standby pending image.
Alternatively, the moving distance of the movable decorative member may be the same as the moving distance of the standby pending image.

When the movement path and movement distance of the standby and hold image are made longer than the movement path and movement distance of the movable decoration member, it is possible to emphasize that the standby and hold image has changed.
Furthermore, if the moving route and moving distance of the movable decorative member are made longer than the moving route and moving distance of the reserved image, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the movement of the movable decorative member.
Furthermore, if the movement path and distance of the standby image are made the same as the movement path and movement distance of the movable decorative member, either the movement of the standby image or the movement of the movable decorative member will be missed. can be suppressed.

The moving speed of the standby pending image may be slower than the moving speed of the movable decorative member.
Alternatively, the moving speed of the movable decorative member may be slower than the moving speed of the standby pending image.
Alternatively, the moving speed of the movable decorative member may be made the same as the moving speed of the standby pending image.
Although an embodiment has been shown in which the standby and held image is temporarily stopped at an intermediate position, it is preferable that the speed when moving from the movement start position to the intermediate position and the speed when moving from the intermediate position to the movement end position are the same. Furthermore, if the standby and held image does not pause at an intermediate position, it is preferable to move it at a constant speed from the movement start position to the movement end position.

If the speed of the standby hold image is made slower than the speed of the movable decorative member, the movement of the standby hold image will be executed for a long time, making it difficult to ensure that the player knows that the standby hold image is moving. It can be recognized.
If the speed of the movable decorative member is made slower than the speed of the standby pending image, the movement of the movable decorative member will be executed for a long time, and it is difficult to ensure that the player knows that the movable decorative member is moving. It can be recognized.
By making the moving speed of the standby pending image and the moving speed of the movable decorative member the same, it is possible to suppress overlooking either the movement of the standby pending image or the movement of the movable decorative member.

When the movable decorative member moves from the standby position to the movement position, the display area 1600a and the movable decorative member do not overlap in front view, but the display area 1600a and the movable decorative member overlap in front view. good. Alternatively, it is preferable that the movable decorative member originally overlaps a part of the display area 1600a when viewed from the front, and that the overlapping area becomes larger by moving the movable decorative member from the standby position to the movement position. . This allows the player who is mainly looking toward the display area 1600a to recognize that the movable decorative member has moved.
When moving the movable decorative member, the movable decorative member is moved so that the movable decorative member being moved or after being moved and a certain standby pending image during or after being moved do not overlap in front view. It is preferable to move the standby pending image. That is, during the period from the start of movement of a certain standby and hold image to the end of movement, the movable decorative member and a certain standby and hold image do not overlap when viewed from the front.
Note that, after a certain standby and held image is moved, the moving movable decorative member and the stopped standby and held image may overlap when viewed from the front. In this case, if the whole of a certain standby image overlaps with the movable decorative member, the certain standby image becomes difficult or impossible to see, so only a part of a certain standby image (for example, only one half of the top or bottom) ) may overlap the movable decorative member when viewed from the front, but it is also possible for the entire standby image to overlap the movable decorative member when viewed from the front.
Note that not only a certain standby image but also all the plurality of standby and hold images displayed may have the same effect as a certain standby and hold image, or all of the plurality of standby and hold images displayed. Some of the standby images may be rendered in the same manner as a certain standby image.
Note that at least a standby pending image whose display mode has been changed by the "holding change color prediction effect" may have the same presentation mode as a certain standby pending image.

According to the embodiment in which the entire standby and hold image does not overlap with the movable decorative member, the visibility of the standby and hold image during movement is not hindered, and the display mode of the standby and hold image after change is It will not become impossible to confirm (color). In addition, the movement range of the movable decorative member is not excessively hindered, and the presentation mode using the movable decorative member is less likely to be restricted.

In the "first hold change color prediction effect", the standby hold image moves to a predetermined position over a predetermined period of time, but the expectation level is determined from the time the standby hold image starts moving until the time it finishes moving. A predetermined preview effect may be executed.
As the predetermined preview performance, the "step-up preview performance" shown with reference to FIG. 384 or the "weather preview performance" shown with reference to FIG. 393 can be adopted.
For example, in the period from timing t8 to timing t10, it is preferable to perform a "step-up notice effect" or a "weather notice effect". Note that timing t10 is a timing at which the color of the standby pending image can change. Note that the execution time of the "step-up preview performance" differs depending on the number of stages, but it is preferable to divide the performance execution time into four equal parts and make each period the execution period of the first to fourth stages. For example, if the "step-up preview performance" is to be executed for 2 seconds, the display time of the first stage, second stage, third stage, and fourth stage may each be set to 0.5 seconds.
The degree of expectation indicated by the "step-up notice performance" and the "weather notice performance" is not the degree of expectation that the fluctuation result of the fluctuating decorative pattern will be a jackpot, but the fluctuation corresponding to the standby pending image whose color may change at timing t10. This is the level of expectation that the result will be a jackpot.
The display priority of the horizontally long frame and character in the "step-up preview performance" and the weather phenomenon image in the "weather preview performance" is preferably lower than the display priority of the standby pending image and the aura image.

According to such an embodiment, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of expectation for a jackpot during a period of time in which it is determined whether or not the standby image changes. Furthermore, since the predetermined advance notice performance is not a performance that requires the player to accept an operation on the operation unit, it is possible to heighten the player's anticipation without making him feel anxious. In addition, since the moving standby and hold image is displayed closer to the image displayed by the predetermined preview effect, the moving standby and hold image is hidden by the image displayed by the predetermined preview effect, and the game It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which a person loses sight of a standby pending image.

Although the embodiment has been shown in which the timing at which the execution of a predetermined preview effect (such as "step-up preview effect" or "weather preview effect") ends is timing t10, which is the timing at which the color of the standby pending image can change, the decoration It may also be a predetermined timing during a period until the variable display of symbols ends.
For example, a predetermined preview effect may be executed until the timing immediately after the movement of the standby pending image (timing t12.5 in FIGS. 398 and 399).
For example, the timing at which the "first pending change color predictive effect" ends (timing t13) in FIGS. 398(a) and 398(b), or during the restarted high-speed fluctuation display (from timing t13 to timing t28.5) A predetermined preview effect may be executed until a predetermined timing.
Alternatively, the timing at which the display of the background image for predictive effect of the "second pending change color predictive effect" in FIGS. 399(a) and 399(b) ends (timing t20.5) or during the resumed high-speed fluctuation display A predetermined preview effect may be executed until a predetermined timing (from timing t20 to timing t28.5).

According to such an embodiment, the predetermined preview performance is executed even after the movement of the standby pending image is completed, so that the "first pending change color predictive performance" and the "second pending change color predictive performance" are performed. In this case, even if the standby image does not change or changes only to a color with low expectations, it is possible to make the player feel interested by a predetermined preview effect.
In particular, it is determined that the "reserved change color foreshadowing effect" is executed with the starting winning as an opportunity (in the example of the effect shown with reference to FIGS. 398 and 399, the starting winning occurs at timing t4.5). Although a series of performances are executed, the timing at which the starting prize occurs is not necessarily at timing t4.5), so there is a possibility that the time of the restarted high-speed fluctuation will be a long time. Further, it is also confirmed that the result of stopping the decorative pattern that is being changed is a loss. Therefore, it can be said that it becomes a period in which the player is shown a fluctuating display that is boring in a sense.
In the present embodiment, the predetermined preview performance will continue to be executed during the restarted high-speed fluctuation period, so that it is possible to create a sense of anticipation in the player for the fluctuation results of the fluctuation display from the next time onwards. .

It should be noted that a display effect in which it is certain that a jackpot will occur during execution of the variable display (a display effect in which the expectation level of the jackpot is 100%) may be executable. As a display effect that confirms that a jackpot will occur, it is preferable to display the words "Jackpot confirmed!" in the display area 1600a, or display an image of a specific character by executing a premium effect. In this case, while the "first pending change color foreshadowing performance" is being executed, the display performance that confirms that a jackpot will occur will not be started, and the jackpot will be announced after the "first pending change color foreshadowing performance" ends. It is also possible to perform a display effect that confirms that this will occur. In addition, the jackpot is confirmed at this time when a specific standby pending image whose color has changed (or a display that appears to be about to change but does not change) due to the "first pending change color foreshadowing effect" It is.
Note that, as shown in the effect pattern table of FIG. 396, in the "first pending change color predictive effect", the standby pending image does not change to a standby pending image with an expectation level of 100%. That is, in the "first pending change color prediction performance", a display performance that confirms that a jackpot will occur using the standby pending image is not executed.

In this way, by not executing a display performance whose expectation level is 100% while the "first pending change color foreshadowing performance" is being executed, the interest of the "first pending change color foreshadowing performance" is reduced. Therefore, the player can be made to look forward to the result of the "first pending change color prediction effect".

Preferably, the period from when the standby pending image starts moving until it ends moving in the "first pending change color predictive effect" (period from timing t6.5 to timing t12 in FIGS. 398 and 399) In this case, it is preferable not to execute a display effect whose expectation level is 100%.

On the other hand, for the purpose of creating a sense of surprise, the period from when the standby pending image starts moving until it ends moving in the "first pending change color foreshadowing performance" (timing t6 in FIGS. 398 and 399) is used. 5 to timing t12), a display effect with an expectation level of 100% may be executed.

In the "second hold change color prediction effect" explained with reference to FIGS. 399 and 403 to 405, the remaining time is determined by the remaining time gauge image as shown in FIGS. 403(f) and 403(g). There is a period (timing t16 to timing t19) in which is shown, and with reference to FIG. explain.

In this embodiment, an operation reception effect is performed in which operation reception of the attack button 3710 is enabled during a period in which the remaining time gauge image is displayed (from timing t16 to timing t19).
Specifically, in response to repeated presses of the attack button 3710, the temporarily stopped decorative pattern on the left-center right side swings up and down within a range that does not protrude from the display area 1600a. In addition, in response to repeated tapping operations, a predetermined number of small aura images are added around the left-center right decorative pattern.
There are three types of aura images: white, blue, and red. Two aura images are displayed for white, four are displayed for blue, and six are displayed for red.
Further, the expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of white aura image, blue aura image, and red aura image.
The type of aura image that is finally displayed is predetermined as white, blue, or red based on the results of a special lottery, and the color of the aura image is determined based on the number of operations on the operation panel. changes gradually.

For example, if it is determined that a red aura image will be displayed, the aura image will not be displayed when no operation is performed, but by operating the operation unit 5 times, a white aura image will be displayed, and then the operation unit will be operated. By operating the operating section five times, a blue aura image is displayed, and by operating the operating section five more times, a red aura image is displayed.
On the other hand, if it is determined that a white aura image is to be displayed, the aura image is not displayed when no operation is performed, but the white aura image is displayed by operating the operating section five times. Thereafter, even if the operating section is operated five times, the white aura image will be displayed as is, and even if the operating section is further operated five times, the white aura image will be displayed as is.

An example of the effect when it is determined that a red aura image is displayed is shown below.
FIG. 410(a) shows the display state at the start of displaying the remaining time gauge image. Here, an attack button simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed on the left side of the remaining time gauge image. Note that the attack button simulated image includes the words "continuously hit".
FIG. 410(b) shows a state in which the attack button 3710 has been pressed five times and a white aura image is displayed.
FIG. 410(c) shows a state in which the attack button 3710 is pressed five more times and a blue aura image is displayed.
FIG. 410(d) shows a state in which the attack button 3710 is pressed five more times and a red aura image is displayed.
FIG. 410(e) shows a display state in which the display of the remaining time gauge image is finished and the display of the aura image is finished. Further, here, the left decorative pattern maintains a temporarily stopped state, and the middle decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are in a state of high-speed fluctuation.
As shown in FIGS. 410(a) to 410(e), the display priority of the standby hold image, remaining time gauge image, and attack button simulated image is higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern and aura image.

According to such an embodiment, it is possible to make the player feel excited while the remaining time gauge image is displayed.

Note that the operation mode required of the player is not limited to repeated hits; for example, a long press may be required, or the operation mode may be such that the player presses only once. In the case of a long press, the color of the aura image may be changed in stages according to the long press time. In the case of an operation mode in which the button is pressed only once, it is preferable that an aura image of one of white, blue, and red be displayed in response to one operation. In addition, the operation parts such as the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 may be tilted forward or backward or left or right many times (corresponding to repeatedly pressing the attack button 3710), or tilted for a long period of time (corresponding to pressing and holding the attack button 3710). ) or one tilting action (corresponding to pressing the attack button 3710 only once).

The operation acceptance effect in this embodiment may be always executed. Alternatively, there may be times when the operation reception effect is executed and times when it is not executed. Further, the expectation level may be higher when the operation reception effect is executed and when it is not executed.

In the "second hold change color foreshadowing performance" described with reference to FIGS. In a situation where an image imitating a slot machine installed in a casino facility is displayed as a background image for an omen effect, an effect that prompts the player to perform a predetermined operation (operation reception effect) is executed. In this case, the timing of displaying the image imitating the operation unit is preferably after the image suggesting that the standby pending image may change is displayed in the "second pending change color prediction effect". By doing so, the player can perform the predetermined operation after being made aware that the standby image may change, allowing the player to perform the predetermined operation with a sense of anticipation. .

In addition, the timing for displaying the image imitating the operation unit is set to be displayed before the image suggesting that the standby hold image may change is displayed in the "second hold change color prediction effect". Good too. In this way, when the player attempts to operate the control panel before the player is aware that the standby image may change, an image suggesting that the standby image may change is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise. Therefore, in the case of displaying an image imitating the operation section before an image suggesting that the standby hold image may change in the "second hold change color prediction effect", the operation section may be imitated. It is preferable to display an image indicating that the standby image may change in a very short time (for example, about 0.2 seconds) after displaying the image. In this case, the image simulating the operation unit is displayed before and after the timing at which the image suggesting that the standby image may change is displayed.

When the player performs a predetermined operation or when the operation validity period ends, a decorative pattern (corresponding to the color of the standby image that can change) that finally temporarily stops is displayed, for example as shown in FIG. 410(e). (decorative pattern of the selected color) will be displayed as an effect after the operation. At the same time as this post-operation effect is displayed, the image simulating the operation panel is hidden, so when an image suggesting that the standby image may change is displayed, an image simulating the control panel is displayed. is hidden. By doing so, it is possible to concentrate on standby images that can change. Further, when hiding the image simulating the operation unit, the image may be hidden gradually instead of suddenly. Gradually means a display that gradually increases the transparency of an image simulating a control panel, a display in which an image simulating a control panel bursts, or an image simulating a control panel with a predetermined effect. For example, it may be displayed overlaid on the screen. In such a case, the timing at which the image simulating the operation panel is completely hidden is the timing at which the image simulating the operation panel is completely hidden, even if the image suggesting that the standby pending image may change is hidden. Things that are not shown may also occur. Even in such a case, it is possible to provide a beautiful flowing image and a display that does not feel strange to the player.

In addition, in the "second hold change color foreshadowing performance" (an image that suggests that the standby hold image may change in the "second hold change color foreshadowing performance" (an image installed in the casino facility as a background image for the foreshadowing effect) In a situation where an image resembling a slot machine) is displayed, an image resembling an operation section is displayed to prompt the player to perform a predetermined operation (operation reception rendition). ``First operation reception effect'' that displays a suggestive image that suggests that the operation is valid (suggesting that the operation is valid), and Which of the "second operation reception effects" that does not display a suggestive image that suggests that an image imitating the operation panel is displayed before the image is displayed (suggesting that the operation is valid)? It may also be applied. This is because the "first operation reception performance" can provide the player with a sense of anticipation in advance, and the "second operation reception performance" can provide the player with a sense of surprise.

In addition, when a decorative pattern that finally temporarily stops is displayed as a post-operation effect (a decorative pattern with a color that corresponds to the color of the standby image that can change), an image that suggests that the standby image can change ( As explained above, an image imitating a slot machine installed in a casino facility is displayed as a background image for a foreshadowing effect, but a decorative pattern (an image imitating a slot machine installed in a casino facility that can be changed) that temporarily stops as an effect after an operation is displayed. When displaying a decorative pattern with a color that corresponds to the color, an image that suggests that the standby image may change (an image imitating a slot machine installed in a casino facility as a background image for an omen effect) is removed. It may also be displayed. By doing so, only the decorative symbols that will eventually temporarily stop are displayed as a post-operation effect, and it is possible to clearly make the player aware of the changeable color of the standby image. In addition, instead of displaying a decorative pattern that finally temporarily stops as a post-operation effect (a decorative pattern with a color that corresponds to the color of the standby/holding image that can change), for example, "chance" or "fierce heat!" Rather than suggesting the color of the standby image that can change, as in the display above, it may be used as a preview effect indicating the degree of expectation of a jackpot, or as a display after the operation, a decorative pattern that temporarily stops at the end. (a decorative pattern with a color that corresponds to the color of the waiting/holding image that can change) may be displayed (as a holding change effect), or a preview effect such as ``chance'' or ``hot heat!'' may be displayed. It may also be possible to have

Note that a predetermined "operation reception performance" may be executed in a state where the display of the background image for predictive performance is finished and the decorative pattern changes at high speed. Further, in this operation reception performance, the standby pending image may be promoted. As a result, even if the standby pending image does not change in the "second pending change color foreshadowing performance", the player's expectation of the occurrence of a jackpot can be maintained. Furthermore, in this operation acceptance performance, a predetermined preview performance as described above may be executed instead of promoting the standby pending image. Further, this operation reception performance may be performed multiple times, all of these multiple times may be performed to promote the standby pending image or perform a predetermined preview performance, or to promote the standby pending image and perform a predetermined notice performance. Each of the preview effects may be executed.
In this case, the "operation reception effect" may include a "first operation reception effect" that displays a suggestion image that suggests that the operation is valid, or a "first operation reception effect" that does not display a suggestion image that suggests that the operation is valid. "Second operation reception performance" can be adopted.

In this way, by executing the "operation reception effect" during or before and after displaying the background image for predictive effect, it is possible to further enhance the effect of whether or not the display mode of the standby pending image changes.

The "movable decorative member moving effect" for moving the movable decorative member from the standby position to the movement position may be executed simultaneously with the display of the background image for predictive effect in the "second pending change color predictive effect".
Specifically, the timing at which the "movable decorative member movement effect" is started (the timing at which the movable decorative member starts moving from the standby position) is determined by the display of the background image for the foreshadowing effect in the "second pending change color foreshadowing effect". It is preferable to use the same timing as the start timing (timing t13.5 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 399). Also, the timing at which the "movable decorative member movement effect" ends (timing when the movable decorative member completes movement to the movement position) is the timing at which the display of the background image for the foreshadowing effect in the "second pending change color foreshadowing effect" ends. It is preferable to set the timing to be the same as the timing (timing t20.5 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 399).
Note that, as described above, it is preferable that the expectation level of the jackpot is higher in the case where the "movable decorative member movement effect" is executed and the case where it is not executed.

On the other hand, even if the execution period of the "movable decorative member moving effect" and the display period of the background image for predictive effect in the "second pending change color predictive effect" (the period from timing t13.5 to timing t20.5) are good.
For example, after the display of the background image for an omen effect in the "second pending change color omen effect" has started, the movable decorative member starts moving from the standby position while the background image for an omen effect is being displayed. , the movable decorative member may complete its movement to the movement position after the display of the background image for predictive effect in the "second pending change color predictive effect" is completed. For example, the movable decorative member may be moved from timing t15 to timing t22.

Alternatively, after the display of the background image for an omen effect in the "second pending change color omen effect" has started, the movable decorative member starts moving from the standby position while the background image for an omen effect is being displayed. After the movable decorative member completes its movement to the movement position, the display of the background image for predictive effect in the "second pending change color predictive effect" may be terminated. For example, the movable decorative member may be moved from timing t15 to timing t18.

According to such an embodiment, it is possible to provide a sense of anticipation even during waiting times such as during presentation explanations, and if the remaining time gauge is decreasing, two types of anticipation presentations are provided, thereby increasing interest. I can do it.

On the other hand, during the display period (period from timing t13.5 to timing t20.5) of the background image for predictive performance in the "second pending change color predictive performance", the "movable decorative member movement performance" is not executed. Good too. This allows the player to concentrate on the "second pending change color prediction effect".

On the other hand, the "movable decorative member movement effect" is started after the display period (period from timing t13.5 to timing t20.5) of the background image for the foreshadowing effect in the "second pending change color foreshadowing effect" ends. Good too.
For example, the movable decorative member may be moved from the standby position to the movement position from timing t21 to timing t22 after the display of the background image for predictive effect in the "second pending change color predictive effect" is finished.
According to such an embodiment, even if the standby pending image is not promoted in the "second pending change color foreshadowing performance", it is possible to maintain expectations for a jackpot.

In the "second pending change color foreshadowing performance", the background image for the foreshadowing performance is displayed for a predetermined period (period from timing t13.5 to timing t20.5), but the display of the background image for the foreshadowing performance has started. A predetermined preview effect indicating the level of expectation may be executed between the time and the end.
As the predetermined preview performance, the "step-up preview performance" shown with reference to FIG. 384 or the "weather preview performance" shown with reference to FIG. 393 can be adopted.
For example, in the period from timing t13.5 to timing t20.5, it is preferable to execute a "step-up preview performance" or a "weather preview performance". Note that the execution time of the "step-up preview performance" differs depending on the number of stages, but it is preferable to divide the performance execution time into four equal parts and make each period the execution period of the first to fourth stages. For example, if the "step-up preview performance" is to be executed for 2 seconds, the display time of the first stage, second stage, third stage, and fourth stage may each be set to 0.5 seconds.
The expectation level indicated by the "step-up preview performance" and the "weather preview performance" is not the expectation level that the fluctuating result of the fluctuating decorative pattern will be a jackpot, but the fluctuation corresponding to the standby pending image whose color may change at timing t20. This is the level of expectation that the result will be a jackpot.
The display priority of the horizontally long frame and character in the "step-up preview effect" and the weather phenomenon image in the "weather preview effect" is preferably lower than the display priority of the standby hold image and the remaining time gauge image.

According to such an embodiment, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of expectation for a jackpot during a period of time in which it is determined whether or not the standby image changes. Furthermore, since the predetermined advance notice performance is not a performance that requires the player to accept an operation on the operation unit, it is possible to heighten the player's anticipation without making him feel anxious. In addition, since the moving standby and hold image is displayed closer to the image displayed by the predetermined preview effect, the moving standby and hold image is hidden by the image displayed by the predetermined preview effect, and the game It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which a person loses sight of a standby pending image.

Rather than starting a predetermined preview effect (such as a "step-up preview effect" or "weather preview effect") at the same time as the background image for an omen effect starts to be displayed, it is performed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of displaying the background image for an omen effect. , a predetermined preview effect may be started. For example, at a predetermined timing in the period from timing t13.5 to timing t16 when a display explaining the content of the performance is displayed, or from timing t16 to timing t19 when a remaining time gauge image is displayed. A predetermined timing may be used as a timing to start a predetermined preview performance.

Rather than ending a predetermined preview effect (such as a "step-up preview effect" or "weather preview effect") at the same time as the display of the background image for an omen effect ends, it is done before the display of the background image for an omen effect ends. A predetermined preview performance may be ended. For example, the timing at which the predetermined preview performance ends may be set to timing t18.
Alternatively, the predetermined preview performance may be ended after the display of the background image for predictive performance ends. For example, the timing at which the predetermined preview effect ends may be set to timing t21.

Execution of a predetermined advance notice effect (such as a "step-up notice effect" or a "weather notice effect") may be started after the display of the background image for the foreshadow effect ends. For example, a predetermined preview effect may be executed during a period from timing t22 to timing t27. Instead of a predetermined preview performance (such as a "step-up preview performance" or a "weather preview performance"), a display performance that confirms that a jackpot will occur (a display performance in which the expectation level of the jackpot is 100%) will be executed. You can also do this.
According to such an embodiment, even if the standby pending image is not promoted, the expectation of a jackpot can be maintained.

The embodiment and modification of the "first pending change color prediction performance" and the embodiment and modification of the "second reservation change color prediction performance" have been described above, but these can be implemented in combination as appropriate. .
For example, if an embodiment (or modification) of the "first pending change color prediction effect" and an embodiment (or modification example) of the "second pending change color indication effect" are adopted, It can be executed as a "changing color foreshadowing effect".

In addition, the predetermined performances (the above-mentioned "first operation reception performance" and "second operation reception performance") are performed from the "first pending change color prediction performance" to the "second reservation change color prediction performance". , "operation unit movement effect,""movable decorative member movement effect,""step-up advance notice effect,""weather advance notice effect," etc.) may be executed.
In addition, after the "first pending change color prediction performance", the "development performance" is executed and the "second pending change color prediction performance" is started, but the execution period of the "development performance" is set to a predetermined number of seconds. (approximately 0.5 seconds to 10 seconds) to arouse the player's sense of anticipation. Also, while the "development effect" is being executed, the predetermined effect that was being executed during the "first pending change color foreshadowing effect" may end, or the execution of the predetermined effect may start and the "second pending change color prediction effect" may end. It may be configured to be executed until a predetermined timing during "color omen production".

After the "first pending change color prediction performance" is completed and the decorative pattern is changed at high speed, it may be possible to accept an operation on the operation unit. Further, after that, the "second pending change color prediction performance" may be started.
For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 399, etc., decorative patterns are displayed in high-speed fluctuations from timing t12.5 to timing t13.5, and "development effect" is executed from timing t13 to timing t13.5. You can. In addition, a predetermined timing after the timing when the decorative pattern becomes a high-speed fluctuation (a predetermined timing within the period from timing t12.5 to timing t13.0) or a predetermined timing during the execution of "development effect" (from timing t13 to timing t13.0) At a predetermined timing within the period of timing t13.5), execution of the "second operation reception effect" without displaying the suggestion image in advance may be started.

Based on the operation acceptance of the ``second operation reception performance'', the color of the characters ``KA-RA-NO-'' may be changed, and the expectation level of the jackpot may be indicated by the color. For example, if you display the characters "kara-no-" in white, and depending on the operation of the operation panel, it may change to red or remain white without changing to red. good. Further, it is preferable that the expectation level of a jackpot is higher when the color changes to red.
Note that instead of changing the color of the characters "kara-no-", it is possible to change the color of either a white predetermined image or a red predetermined image (for example, an aura image) based on the operation reception. An image may be displayed and the expectation level of a jackpot may be indicated by the color of the image. In this case as well, it is preferable that the red predetermined image has a higher expectation of a jackpot. Instead of executing the "second operation reception performance" in which the suggestion image is not displayed in advance, the execution of the "first operation reception performance" in which the suggestion image is displayed in advance may be started.

According to such an embodiment, after the high-speed fluctuation is resumed, it is determined that the "development effect" is executed and the "second pending change color prediction effect" is executed, and the "development effect" is executed. Since the "operation reception performance" is started during the execution of the game, it is possible to make the player have high expectations for the occurrence of a jackpot.

If no operation is performed on the operation unit, the execution period of the "second operation reception effect" ends at timing t13.5, which is the timing at which the "development effect" ends.
When an operation is performed on the operation unit, an image corresponding to the operation is displayed, and the display also ends at timing t13.5, which is the timing at which the "development effect" ends.

In this way, by making the period during which the operation unit is capable of accepting operations and the period during which an image corresponding to the acceptance of operations is displayed extremely short, it is possible to create a sense of tension in the game.

In addition, operation reception is supported until a predetermined timing during the period (from timing t13.5 to timing t20.5) when the "second pending change color foreshadowing effect" is started and the background image for the foreshadowing effect is displayed. The displayed image may continue to be displayed. Alternatively, the display of the image corresponding to the operation reception may be continued until a predetermined timing after the display of the background image for predictive effect ends.

According to such an embodiment, although the period of operation acceptance is short, the image corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed for a long time, giving the player a sense of satisfaction that he was able to successfully operate the operation unit. I can do it.

Although the embodiment has been shown in which the "second operation reception performance" ends at timing t13.5, which is the timing at which the "development performance" ends, the "second pending change color foreshadowing performance" starts and the foreshadowing performance The "second operation reception effect" may be continued even during the period when the background image is displayed. In this case, the image corresponding to the operation reception will be displayed even during the "second pending change color prediction effect".
According to such an embodiment, since the effective period of operation can be extended, the operation section can be operated reliably.

Although the image corresponding to the operation reception will be displayed during the "second pending change color foreshadowing effect", the display of the image corresponding to the operation reception will be terminated while the background image for the foreshadowing effect is being displayed. Alternatively, the image corresponding to the operation reception may be continued to be displayed even after the background image for predictive effect is displayed.

A modification example in which the decorative pattern changes at high speed during the period from the end of the "first pending change color prediction performance" to the start of the "second pending change color prediction performance" was shown, but the decorative pattern During the period of high-speed fluctuation, execution of the "movable decorative member movement effect" may be started, and movement of the movable decorative member from the standby position to the movement position may be started. Further, it is preferable that the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed while the background image for predictive effect is displayed.
Alternatively, after the movement of the movable decorative member to the moving position is completed, the "second pending change color foreshadowing effect" may be started, or after the display of the background image for the foreshadowing effect is completed, the movable decoration The movement of the member to the movement position may be completed.
Note that when the movable decorative member operates, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when it does not operate. Therefore, when the movable decorative member operates, the "second pending change color prediction performance" can be made more exciting.

Although we have shown a modification example in which the decorative pattern changes at high speed during the period from the end of the "first pending change color foreshadowing performance" to the start of the "second pending change color foreshadowing performance," the "second Depending on the type of the background image for predictive performance displayed in the "suspended change color predictive performance", the "movable decorative member movement performance" may not be executed during the period in which the decorative pattern is changing at high speed.
For example, when the background image for the first predictive effect is displayed in the "second pending change color predictive effect", the "movable decorative member movement effect" may or may not be executed; If the background image for the second predictive performance is displayed in the second pending change color predictive performance, the "movable decorative member movement performance" may not necessarily be executed.
Note that the degree of expectation of a jackpot may be varied depending on the type of background image for predictive effect. For example, between the first background image for omen effect and the second background image for omen effect, the expectation level of the former may be set higher, or the expectation level of the latter may be set higher, The expectations of both parties may be the same.
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to infer the type of background image for a predictive effect to be displayed depending on whether or not the "movable decorative member movement effect" is executed, and it is also possible to infer the degree of expectation of a jackpot. I can do it. Furthermore, since the "movable decorative member movement effect" is not executed, the player can be made to concentrate on the "second pending change color prediction effect".

Although we have shown a modification example in which the decorative pattern changes at high speed during the period from the end of the "first pending change color prediction performance" to the start of the "second pending change color prediction performance," the decorative pattern During the period of high-speed fluctuation, the display of the characters "KA-RA-NO-" may be started. In addition, there are three colors for the text "Kara-no-": white (low expectations), red (medium expectations), and rainbow color (confirmed jackpot). You may also indicate your expectations. Further, it is preferable that the display of the characters "Kara-no-" end while the background image for predictive effect is being displayed.
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to make the player look forward to the "second pending change color prediction effect."

Also, instead of ending the display of the characters "Kara~no~" while the background image for the foreshadowing effect is being displayed, the character "Kara~ no~" is displayed before the background image for the foreshadowing effect is displayed. The display of the characters ``no~'' may be terminated. According to such an embodiment, since the display of the characters "KA-RA-NO-" ends in a short period of time, it is possible to make the player concentrate on the "Second Pending Change Color Foreshadowing Performance."

Below are the start timings of the "second operation reception performance", the "movable decorative member movement performance", the predetermined preview performances ("step-up preview performance" and the "weather preview performance"), and the predetermined timings during the execution of the performance ( (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "intermediate timing") and the time relationship between the end timing will be explained.

First, regarding the "second operation reception effect", the timing to start displaying the operation instruction display, the timing to end displaying the operation instruction display (this is the end timing of the operation validity period, and the timing to start displaying the after-operation display) (This is also the timing), and there is a timing to end the display of the after-operation display. Note that when the operation instruction display is started and an operation is performed on the operation unit, the post-operation display is immediately performed. Note that the end timing of the post-operation display does not change regardless of the presence or absence of the operation.
Furthermore, regarding the "movable decorative member movement effect", there is a timing at which the movable decorative member starts moving to the moving position, a timing at which moving to the moving position is completed, and a timing at which moving to the standby position is completed.
Furthermore, there are start timings and end timings for predetermined preview effects (such as "step-up preview effects" and "weather preview effects").
Regarding each of these timings, the temporal relationship with other timings will be explained.
As shown in FIG. 411, the earliest timing among these production start timings (at least one of the start timing of operation instruction display, the movement start timing of the movable decorative member, and the start timing of the preview production) is the "development production". This is the timing (timing t13) at which the display of "KA-RA-NO-" begins.

The relationship between the display start timing of the operation instruction display and other timings will be explained below.
The relationship between the display start timing of the operation instruction display and other start timings will be explained.
Start moving the movable decorative member after starting the operation instruction display, start moving the movable decorative member at the same time as the start of the operation instruction display, or start the operation instruction display after starting the movement of the movable decorative member. You may also do so.
Start execution of a predetermined preview effect after starting to display operation instructions, start execution of a predetermined preview effect at the same time as the start of display of operation instructions, or start displaying operation instructions after starting to execute a predetermined preview effect. You may start it.

The relationship between the display start timing of the operation instruction display and other intermediate timings will be explained.
It is possible to complete the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position after starting the operation instruction display, complete the movement of the movable decoration member to the movement position at the same time as the start of the operation instruction display, or complete the movement of the movable decoration member to the movement position at the same time as the operation instruction display starts. The operation instruction display may be started after the movement is completed.

The relationship between the display start timing of the operation instruction display and other end timings will be explained.
It is possible to complete the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position after starting the operation instruction display, complete the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position at the same time as the start of the operation instruction display, or complete the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position at the same time as the operation instruction display starts. The operation instruction display may be started after the movement is completed.
It is possible to end the execution of a predetermined preview effect after starting the operation instruction display, to end the execution of the predetermined preview effect at the same time as the start of the operation instruction display, or to stop the operation instruction display after finishing the execution of the predetermined preview effect. You may start it.

The relationship between the display end timing of the operation instruction display and other timings will be explained below.
The relationship between the display end timing of the operation instruction display and other start timings will be explained.
Start moving the movable decorative member after the operation instruction display ends, start moving the movable decorative member at the same time as the operation instruction display ends, or end the operation instruction display after starting the movement of the movable decoration member. You may also do so.
Start execution of a predetermined preview effect after the operation instruction display ends, start execution of the predetermined preview effect at the same time as the operation instruction display ends, or start the operation instruction display after starting the execution of the predetermined preview effect. It may be configured to end.

The relationship between the display end timing of the operation instruction display and other intermediate timings will be explained.
It is possible to complete the movement of the movable decorative member to the moving position after the operation instruction display ends, complete the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position at the same time as the operation instruction display ends, or complete the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position at the same time as the operation instruction display ends. The operation instruction display may be ended after the movement is completed.

The relationship between the display end timing of the operation instruction display and other end timings will be explained.
It is possible to complete the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position after the operation instruction display ends, complete the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position at the same time as the end of the operation instruction display, or complete the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position at the same time as the operation instruction display ends. The operation instruction display may be ended after the movement is completed.
It is possible to end the execution of a predetermined preview performance after the operation instruction display ends, to end the execution of the predetermined preview performance at the same time as the operation instruction display ends, or to stop the operation instruction display after finishing the execution of the predetermined preview performance. It may be configured to end.

The relationship between the end timing of the post-operation display and other timings will be explained below.
The relationship between the end timing of the post-operation display and other start timings will be explained.
Start moving the movable decorative member after finishing the post-operation display, start moving the movable decorative member at the same time as the post-operation display ends, or end the post-operation display after starting the movement of the movable decorative member. You may also do so.
Start execution of a predetermined notice effect after the after-operation display ends, start execution of a predetermined notice effect at the same time as the end of the after-operation display, or start execution of a predetermined notice effect after starting the execution of the after-operation display. It may be configured to end.

The relationship between the end timing of the post-operation display and other intermediate timings will be explained.
It is possible to complete the movement of the movable decorative member to the moving position after finishing the post-operation display, complete the movement of the movable decorative member to the moving position at the same time as the post-operation display ends, or complete the movement of the movable decorative member to the moving position at the same time as the post-operation display ends. The post-operation display may end after the movement is completed.

The relationship between the end timing of the post-operation display and other end timings will be explained.
It is possible to complete the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position after finishing the after-operation display, complete the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position at the same time as the end of the after-operation display, or complete the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position at the same time as the end of the after-operation display. The post-operation display may be ended after the movement is completed.
It is possible to end the execution of a predetermined notice effect after finishing the after-operation display, finish the execution of the predetermined notice effect at the same time as the end of the after-operation display, or start the after-operation display after finishing the execution of the predetermined notice effect. It may be configured to end.

The relationship between the movement start timing of the movable decorative member and other timings will be explained below.
The relationship between the movement start timing of the movable decorative member and other start timings will be explained.
The operation instruction display can be started after the movable decorative member starts moving, the operation instruction display can be started at the same time as the movable decorative member starts moving, or the movable decorative member can start moving after the operation instruction display has started. You may also do so.
Starting the execution of a predetermined notice effect after the movement of the movable decorative member starts, starting the execution of the predetermined notice effect simultaneously with the start of the movement of the movable decorative member, or starting the execution of the predetermined notice effect after starting the execution of the predetermined notice effect. The movement of the movable decorative member may be started.

The relationship between the movement start timing of the movable decorative member and other intermediate timings will be explained.
The operation instruction display can be ended after the movement of the movable decoration member has started, the operation instruction display can be ended at the same time as the movement of the movable decoration member has started, or the movement of the movable decoration member can be started after the operation instruction display has ended. You may also do so.

The relationship between the movement start timing of the movable decorative member and other movement end timings will be explained.
The after-operation display can be ended after the movement of the movable decorative member has started, the after-operation display can be ended at the same time as the movement of the movable decorative member has started, or the movement of the movable decorative member can be started after the after-operation display has ended. You may also do so.
Finishing the execution of a predetermined preview effect after starting the movement of the movable decorative member, finishing the execution of the predetermined preview effect at the same time as the movement of the movable decorative member starts, or after finishing the execution of the predetermined preview effect. The display of operation instructions may also be started.

Below, the relationship between the timing of completion of movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position and other timings will be explained.
The relationship between the movement completion timing of the movable decorative member to the movement position and other start timings will be explained.
The operation instruction display may start after the movement of the movable decoration member to the movement position is completed, the operation instruction display may start at the same time as the movement of the movable decoration member to the movement position is completed, or the operation instruction display may start after the movement of the movable decoration member to the movement position is completed. The movement of the decoration member to the movement position may be completed.
The execution of a predetermined notice effect may be started after the movement of the movable decoration member to the movement position is completed, the execution of the predetermined notice effect may be started at the same time as the movement of the movable decoration member to the movement position is completed, The movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position may be completed after the execution of the preview effect is started.

The relationship between the movement completion timing of the movable decorative member to the movement position and other intermediate timings will be explained.
The operation instruction display may end after the movement of the movable decorative member to the moving position is completed, the operation instruction display may end at the same time as the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed, or the operation instruction display may end after the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed. The movement of the decoration member to the movement position may be completed.

The relationship between the movement completion timing of the movable decorative member to the movement position and other end timings will be explained.
The post-operation display may end after the movement of the movable decorative member to the moving position is completed, the post-operation display may end at the same time as the movement of the movable decorative member to the moving position is completed, or the post-operation display may end after the movable decorative member has finished moving to the moving position. The movement of the decoration member to the movement position may be completed.
The execution of a predetermined notice effect may be terminated after the movement of the movable decorative member to the moving position is completed, the execution of the predetermined notice effect may be terminated at the same time as the movement of the movable decorative member to the move position is completed, The movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position may be completed after the execution of the preview performance is completed.

Below, the relationship between the timing of completion of movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position and other timings will be explained.
The relationship between the movement completion timing of the movable decorative member to the standby position and other start timings will be explained.
The operation instruction display may start after the movement of the movable decoration member to the standby position is completed, the operation instruction display may start at the same time as the movement of the movable decoration member to the standby position is completed, or the operation instruction display may start after the movement of the movable decoration member to the standby position is completed. The movement of the decorative member to the standby position may be completed.
The execution of a predetermined notice effect may be started after the move of the movable decorative member to the standby position is completed, or the execution of a predetermined notice effect may be started simultaneously with the completion of movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position, or The movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position may be completed after the execution of the advance notice effect is started.

The relationship between the timing of completion of movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position and other intermediate timings will be explained.
The operation instruction display may end after the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position is completed, the operation instruction display may end at the same time as the movement of the movable decoration member to the standby position is completed, or the operation instruction display may end after the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position is completed. The movement of the decorative member to the standby position may be completed.

The relationship between the timing of completion of movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position and other timings of completion will be explained.
The after-operation display may end after the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position is completed, the after-operation display may end at the same time as the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position is completed, or the after-operation display may end after the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position is completed. The movement of the decorative member to the standby position may be completed.
The execution of a predetermined notice effect may be terminated after the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position is completed, the execution of the predetermined notice effect may be terminated at the same time as the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position is completed, The movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position may be completed after the execution of the preview performance is completed.

Below, the relationship between the execution start timing of the predetermined preview performance and other timings will be explained.
The relationship between the execution start timing of a predetermined preview effect and other start timings will be explained.
Start displaying the operation instructions after starting the execution of a predetermined preview effect, start displaying the operation instructions at the same time as the execution of the predetermined preview effect starts, or start displaying the operation instructions after starting the execution of the predetermined preview effect. You may start it.
The movement of the movable decorative member may begin after the execution of a predetermined advance notice effect has started, the movement of the movable decorative member may begin at the same time as the execution of the predetermined advance notice effect, or the movement of the movable decorative member may begin after the movement of the movable decorative member has started. The execution of the preview performance may be started.

The relationship between the execution start timing of a predetermined preview performance and other intermediate timings will be explained.
Ending the operation instruction display after starting the execution of a predetermined preview effect, ending the operation instruction display at the same time as the execution of the predetermined preview effect starts, or ending the execution of the predetermined preview effect after ending the operation instruction display. You may start it.
It is possible to complete the movement of the movable decorative member to the moving position after starting the execution of a predetermined advance notice effect, complete the movement of the movable decorative member to the move position at the same time as the start of execution of the predetermined advance notice effect, Execution of a predetermined preview effect may be started after the movement of the member to the movement position is completed.

The relationship between the execution start timing of a predetermined preview performance and other end timings will be explained.
Ending the post-operation display after starting execution of a predetermined notice effect, ending the post-operation display at the same time as the execution of a predetermined notice effect starts, or ending execution of a predetermined notice effect after finishing the post-operation display. You may start it.
It is possible to complete the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position after starting the execution of a predetermined notice effect, or to complete the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position at the same time as the start of execution of the predetermined notice effect, Execution of a predetermined advance notice effect may be started after the movement of the member to the standby position is completed.

Below, the relationship between the execution end timing of the predetermined preview performance and other timings will be explained.
The relationship between the execution end timing of a predetermined preview performance and other start timings will be explained.
Start displaying the operation instructions after finishing the execution of a predetermined preview effect, start displaying the operation instructions at the same time as the execution of the predetermined preview effect, or display the after-operation display after starting the execution of the predetermined preview effect. It may be set to end.
The movement of the movable decorative member may be started after the execution of a predetermined advance notice effect has been completed, the movement of the movable decorative member may be started at the same time as the execution of the predetermined advance notice effect has been completed, or the movement of the movable decorative member may be started after the execution of the predetermined advance notice effect has been completed. The execution of the preview performance may be terminated.

The relationship between the execution end timing of a predetermined preview performance and other intermediate timings will be explained.
Ending the operation instruction display after finishing the execution of a predetermined preview effect, ending the operation instruction display at the same time as the execution of the predetermined preview effect, or ending the execution of the predetermined preview effect after finishing the operation instruction display. It may be configured to end.
The move of the movable decorative member to the moving position may be completed after the execution of the predetermined advance notice effect is completed, or the move of the movable decorative member to the move position may be completed at the same time as the execution of the predetermined advance notice effect is completed, The execution of the predetermined preview performance may be ended after the movement of the member to the movement position is completed.

The relationship between the execution end timing of a predetermined preview performance and other end timings will be explained.
The move of the movable decorative member to the standby position may be completed after the execution of a predetermined advance notice effect is completed, or the move of the movable decorative member to the standby position may be completed at the same time as the execution of the predetermined advance notice effect, The execution of the predetermined preview effect may be ended after the movement of the member to the standby position is completed.
Ending the after-operation display after finishing the execution of a predetermined notice effect, ending the after-operation display at the same time as the execution of the predetermined notice effect, or ending the execution of a predetermined notice effect after finishing the after-operation display. It may be configured to end.

Although the temporal relationship between two timings, a certain timing and another timing, has been shown, the temporal relationships of the respective timings described above may be combined. In this case, temporal relationships will be shown for three or more timings.

Below, an embodiment in which three or more timings are combined will be illustrated with reference to the time charts shown in FIGS. 399 and 411. Note that FIG. 411 is a time chart showing the execution mode of "second operation reception performance", "movable decorative member movement performance", and "predetermined preview performance" during the period from timing t11 to timing t20 shown in FIG. 399. be. Note that in FIGS. 411(a) to 411(c), the execution timing of each performance and the length of time for performing the performance during the period from timing t11 to timing t20 are different.

After starting the operation instruction display, the movement of the movable decorative member is started, after the movement of the movable decoration member is started, the execution of a predetermined advance notice effect is started, and after the execution of the predetermined advance notice effect is started, the operation instruction display is ended. After the operation instruction display is finished, the movement of the movable decorative member to the moving position is completed, and after the movement of the movable decorative member to the moving position is completed, the execution of the predetermined preview effect is finished, and the predetermined preview effect is executed. The post-operation display may be finished after the execution is finished, and the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position may be completed after the post-operation display is finished.

For example, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 411(a), the operation instruction display starts at timing t13, the movement of the movable decorative member starts at timing t13.5, and the execution of a predetermined preview effect starts at timing t14, The post-operation display starts at timing t14.5, the movement of the movable decorative member to the moving position is completed at timing t15.5, the execution of the predetermined preview effect is finished at timing t16, and the post-operation display is completed at timing t16.5. The display ends, and the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position is completed at timing t17.5.

After starting the operation instruction display, execution of a predetermined advance notice effect is started, after starting execution of the predetermined advance notice effect, movement of the movable decorative member is started, and after the movement of the movable decoration member is started, the operation instruction display is ended. After the operation instruction display is finished, the movement of the movable decorative member to the moving position is completed, and after the movement of the movable decorative member to the moving position is completed, the execution of the predetermined preview effect is finished, and the predetermined preview effect is executed. The post-operation display may be finished after the execution is finished, and the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position may be completed after the post-operation display is finished.

For example, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 411(b), the operation instruction display starts at timing t13, the execution of a predetermined preview effect starts at timing t13.5, the movement of the movable decorative member starts at timing t14, The after-operation display is started at timing t14.5, the movement of the movable decorative member to the moving position is completed at timing t16, the execution of the predetermined preview effect is finished at timing t16.5, and the after-operation display is started at timing t17. The movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position is completed at timing t18.

After starting the execution of a predetermined advance notice performance, the movement of the movable decoration member is started, and after the movement of the movable decoration member is started, the movement of the movable decoration member to the movement position is completed, and the movement of the movable decoration member to the movement position is completed. starts displaying the operating instructions after completing the display, ends the execution of the predetermined preview effect after starting the display of the operating instructions, ends the display of the operating instructions after completing the execution of the predetermined preview effect, and ends the display of the operating instructions. After that, the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position may be completed, and the post-operation display may be ended after the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position is completed.

For example, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 411(c), execution of a predetermined preview effect is started at timing t13, movement of the movable decorative member is started at timing t13.5, and movement of the movable decorative member is started at timing t15.5. The movement to the position is completed, the operation instruction display is started at timing t16, the execution of the predetermined preview effect is finished at timing t16.5, the after-operation display is started at timing t17.5, and the movable decoration is displayed at timing t18. The movement of the member to the standby position is completed, and the post-operation display is ended at timing t19.5.

It is desirable that the difference between the timing of occurrence of a certain event and the timing of occurrence of another event occurring thereafter is at least 0.5 seconds or more. In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 411, all times are set to 0.5 seconds or more. This allows the player to recognize whether a certain event and another event occurred at the same time, or whether the other event occurred with a delay.
Note that the time period may not be at least 0.5 seconds, but may be at least 1 second or more. In this case, it is possible to more clearly recognize the delayed occurrence.

Instead of the "first operation reception performance", a "second operation reception performance" may be adopted as the operation reception performance. In this case, before the operation instruction display starts, a suggestion image indicating that the operation is valid is displayed at a predetermined timing. The display timing of this suggestion image can also have the same temporal relationship as the above-described temporal relationship between the start timing of the operation instruction display and other timings.
For example, in relation to the timing at which the movable decorative member starts moving, it is possible to start moving the movable decorative member after the display of the suggestion image has started, or to start moving the movable decorative member at the same time as the display of the suggestion image has started. Alternatively, the display of the suggestion image may be started after the movement of the movable decorative member is started.
The same holds true for the relationship between the display start timing of the suggestion image and various other timings.

We have shown the relationship between the timings when the three performances of "operation reception performance", "movable decorative member movement performance", and "predetermined notice performance" are executed, but any two of the three performances It is also possible to define the relationship between each timing when the is executed.
For example, the execution timing of the "operation reception performance" and "movable decorative member movement performance" is such that the movement of the movable decorative member starts after the operation instruction display starts, and the operation instruction display ends after the movable decoration member starts moving. The movement of the movable decoration member to the movement position is completed after the operation instruction display is finished, the after-operation display is finished after the movement of the movable decoration member to the movement position is completed, and the movement is completed after the operation instruction display is finished. The movement of the decorative member to the standby position may be completed.
It should be noted that among the three performances, "operation reception performance,""movable decorative member movement performance," and "predetermined preview performance," it is preferable that the higher the number of performances executed, the higher the expectation level. In other words, expectations will be higher when two performances are performed than when only one performance is performed, and expectations will be higher when three performances are performed than when two performances are performed. It is better to increase the degree.

As shown in FIG. 399, the length of the period (5.5 seconds) required for moving the standby pending image in the "first pending change color predictive effect" (from timing t6.5 to timing t12) is longer than the length (5.5 seconds) The length (7 seconds) of the period (from timing t13.5 to timing t20.5) during which the background image for predictive performance is displayed in "Pending change color predictive performance" is longer.
Note that the length of the period during which the background image for predictive effect is displayed may be made longer (for example, 10 seconds). In this case, it is preferable to lengthen the display time of the display explaining the content of the performance and the display time of the remaining time gauge image.
Although both the "first hold change color prediction performance" and the "second hold change color prediction performance" are effects that change the display mode of the standby hold image, by adopting such an embodiment, the "first hold change color prediction performance" To make a player aware that the expectation level of a jackpot is higher when the game progresses to the ``second pending change color prediction performance'' than when it ends only with the ``retention change color prediction performance.''

In addition, the length of the period required for moving the standby pending image in the "first pending change color predictive effect" is the same as the length of the period for displaying the background image for predictive effect in the "second pending change color predictive effect". You can also use it as In this case, it is preferable to shorten the display time of the display explaining the content of the performance and the display time of the remaining time gauge image. Since both the "first pending change color foreshadowing effect" and the "second pending change color foreshadowing effect" are effects that change the display mode of the pending pending image, by setting them to the same time, the timing at which the pending pending image changes can be adjusted. This makes it easier for the player to understand, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling irritated by not being able to understand the timing at which the standby image changes.
Alternatively, the length of the period required for moving the standby pending image in the "first pending change color predictive effect" may be set to be longer than the length of the period for displaying the background image for predictive effect in the "second pending change color predictive effect". It may be long. In this case, it is preferable to shorten the display time of the display explaining the contents of the performance and the remaining time gauge image (for example, to 3 seconds in total).
Since the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the game progresses to the "second pending change color foreshadowing performance" than when it ends with only the "first pending change color foreshadowing performance," the "second pending change color foreshadowing performance" If the player is shown `` for a long time, they will have to maintain a long-term sense of tension and fatigue will accumulate. By making the length of the period required for movement longer than the length of the period for displaying the background image for the foreshadowing performance in the "second pending change color foreshadowing performance", it is possible to eliminate the accumulated feeling of fatigue and to move the movement in a short time. It can instantly raise your expectations.

As shown in FIG. 399, the length of the period (5.5 seconds) required for moving the standby pending image in the "first pending change color predictive effect" (from timing t6.5 to timing t12) is longer than the length (5.5 seconds) The length of the period (from timing t13.5 to timing t20) from when the background image for predictive effect is displayed until the display mode of the standby pending image changes (6.5 seconds) in ``Pending change color predictive effect'' is longer. It is a long one.
Note that the length of the period from when the background image for predictive effect is displayed until the display mode of the standby pending image changes may be made longer (for example, 10 seconds). In this case, it is preferable to lengthen the display time of the display explaining the content of the performance and the display time of the remaining time gauge image.
Although both the "first pending change color foreshadowing effect" and the "second pending change color foreshadowing effect" are effects that change the display mode of the standby pending image, by adopting such an embodiment, the "first pending change color foreshadowing effect" It is possible to make the player aware that the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the game progresses to the ``second pending change color prediction performance'' than when it ends only with the ``retention change color prediction performance.''

Note that the length of time required for the movement of the standby image in the "first pending change color foreshadowing performance" is determined from the time when the background image for predictive effect in the "second pending change color foreshadowing performance" is displayed. It may be the same as the length of the period until the display mode changes. In this case, it is preferable to shorten the display time of the display explaining the content of the performance and the display time of the remaining time gauge image. Since both the "first pending change color foreshadowing effect" and the "second pending change color foreshadowing effect" are effects that change the display mode of the pending pending image, by setting them to the same time, the timing at which the pending pending image changes can be adjusted. This makes it easier for the player to understand, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling irritated by not being able to understand the timing at which the standby image changes.
Alternatively, the length of the period required for moving the standby pending image in the "first pending change color predictive effect" can be set from the time when the background image for predictive effect in the "second pending change color predictive effect" is displayed until the standby pending image is displayed. may be longer than the period until the display mode changes. In this case, it is preferable to shorten the display time of the display explaining the contents of the performance and the remaining time gauge image (for example, to 3 seconds in total).
Since the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the game progresses to the "second pending change color foreshadowing performance" than when it ends with only the "first pending change color foreshadowing performance," the "second pending change color foreshadowing performance" If the player is shown `` for a long time, they will have to maintain a long-term sense of tension and fatigue will accumulate. By making the length of the period required for movement longer than the length of the period for displaying the background image for the foreshadowing performance in the "second pending change color foreshadowing performance", it is possible to eliminate the accumulated feeling of fatigue and to move the movement in a short time. It can instantly raise your expectations.

As shown in FIG. 398, the length (5.5 seconds) of the period (from timing t6.5 to timing t12) required for the movement of the standby pending image in the "first pending change color predictive effect" is It is longer than the length (1 second) of the period (from timing t12 to timing t13) from the end of movement of the standby pending image to the start of high-speed fluctuation of the decorative pattern in the "change color predictive effect". In addition, as described above, in the modification of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 399, when executing the "development effect", the decorative pattern at the center left center right may be placed in a high-speed fluctuation state at timing t12.5. be.
The reason for this embodiment is that the "first pending change color prediction performance" does not necessarily develop into the "second pending change color prediction performance", so the "first pending change color prediction performance" There is no need to set the period (from timing t12 to timing t13) from the end of movement of the standby pending image to the start of high-speed fluctuation of the decorative pattern (timing t12 to timing t13) in the "first pending change color foreshadowing performance" to be too long. This is because it is preferable to make the player clearly aware of the change in the hold status.

In addition, the length of the period required for the movement of the standby and hold image in the "first hold change color foreshadowing performance" is determined by changing the length of the period required for the movement of the standby hold image in the "first hold change color foreshadowing performance" so that the decorative pattern changes at high speed from the end of the movement of the standby hold image in the "first hold change color foreshadowing performance". It may be the same as the length of the period until the start. In this case, it is preferable to lengthen the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern (for example, temporarily stop the decorative pattern for 5.5 seconds from the end of movement of the standby pending image).
Although the "first pending change color prediction performance" does not necessarily develop into the "second pending change color prediction performance," by adopting such an embodiment, the "first pending change color prediction performance" ” to the “second pending change color foreshadowing performance” is calculated as the period required for the movement of the standby pending image in the “first pending change color foreshadowing performance” performed before the branch. By making it the same as the length (5.5 seconds) from timing t6.5 to timing t12, it is possible to decide whether or not to develop from the first pending change color prediction performance to the second pending change color prediction performance. This has the effect of making it easier for the player to recognize the timing.
Alternatively, the length of the period required for the movement of the standby pending image in the "first pending change color foreshadowing effect" may be set as the length of the period required for the movement of the standby pending image in the "first pending change color foreshadowing effect". It may be shorter than the length of the period until the start. In this case, it is preferable to further lengthen the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern (for example, temporarily stop the decorative pattern for 10 seconds from the end of movement of the standby pending image).
Although it does not necessarily develop from the "first pending change color foreshadowing performance" to the "second pending change color foreshadowing performance," the "first pending change color foreshadowing performance" may lead to the "second pending change color foreshadowing performance." The time until the branch to determine whether or not to develop into the "performance" is calculated by calculating the period (from timing t6.5 to timing t12) required for moving the standby pending image in the "first pending change color foreshadowing performance" performed before the branch. By making it longer than the length (5.5 seconds), even if it develops into the second pending change color foreshadowing performance, the "first pending change color foreshadowing performance" performed before the branch This will not extend to the length of time required to move the standby and held images, so it is possible to reduce excessive tension.

As shown in FIGS. 398 and 399, the length (1 The length (7 seconds) of the display period (from timing t13.5 to timing t20.5) of the background image for predictive effect in the "second pending change color predictive effect" is longer than the period (7 seconds). There is. In addition, as described above, in the modification of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 399, when executing the "development effect", the decorative pattern at the center left center right may be placed in a high-speed fluctuation state at timing t12.5. be.
By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to make the player firmly recognize the change in the standby pending image in the "second pending change color predictive effect".

In addition, the length of the period from the end of the movement of the standby pending image in the "first pending change color foreshadowing performance" until the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate at high speed is the same as the length of the period from the end of the movement of the standby pending image to the time when the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate at high speed. It may be the same as the length of the display period of the background image. In this case, it is preferable to lengthen the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern (for example, temporarily stop the decorative pattern for 7 seconds from the end of movement of the standby pending image). By adopting such an embodiment, the player can firmly grasp the timing at which the change in hold is performed in the "second hold change color predictive effect".
Alternatively, the length of the period from the end of movement of the standby pending image in the "first pending change color foreshadowing performance" to the start of high-speed fluctuation of the decorative pattern may be set for the predictive performance in the "second pending change color predictive performance". The period may be longer than the display period of the background image. In this case, it is preferable to further lengthen the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern (for example, temporarily stop the decorative pattern for 10 seconds from the end of movement of the standby pending image). The "second pending change color foreshadowing performance" itself has high expectations for winning, and when it develops into the "second pending change color foreshadowing performance," the expectation level for winning improves, which improves the player's expectation. Therefore, it is better to increase the player's expectations by making the time it takes to determine whether or not it will develop into the "second pending change color foreshadowing performance" longer than the time it takes for the pending change due to the "second pending change color foreshadowing performance." can be improved.

As shown in FIGS. 398 and 399, the length (1 seconds), the period (from timing t13.5 to timing t20) from the start of the display of the background image for predictive effect in the "second pending change color predictive effect" until the display mode of the standby pending image changes. The length (6.5 seconds) is longer. In addition, as described above, in the modification of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 399, when executing the "development effect", the decorative pattern at the center left center right may be placed in a high-speed fluctuation state at timing t12.5. be.
By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to make the player firmly recognize the change in the standby pending image in the "second pending change color predictive effect".

In addition, the length of the period from the end of movement of the standby pending image in the "first pending change color foreshadowing performance" to the start of high-speed fluctuation of the decorative pattern is the same as the length of the period from the end of movement of the standby pending image to the start of high-speed fluctuation in the "second pending change color predictive performance". It may be the same as the length of the period from the start of display of the background image until the display mode of the standby pending image changes. In this case, it is preferable to lengthen the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern (for example, temporarily stop the decorative pattern for 6 seconds from the end of movement of the standby pending image). By adopting such an embodiment, the player can firmly grasp the timing at which the change in hold is performed in the "second hold change color prediction effect".
Alternatively, the length of the period from the end of movement of the standby pending image in the "first pending change color foreshadowing performance" to the start of high-speed fluctuation of the decorative pattern may be set to The period may be longer than the period from when the display of the background image starts until the display mode of the standby image changes. In this case, it is preferable to further lengthen the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern (for example, temporarily stop the decorative pattern for 10 seconds from the end of movement of the standby pending image). The "second pending change color foreshadowing performance" itself has high expectations for winning, and when it develops into the "second pending change color foreshadowing performance," the expectation for winning increases and the player's expectations improve. Therefore, it is better to increase the player's expectations by making the time it takes to determine whether or not it will develop into the "second pending change color foreshadowing performance" longer than the time it takes for the pending change due to the "second pending change color foreshadowing performance." can be improved.

If the remaining time of the variable display is 15 seconds or more and less than 20 seconds at the timing when a starting winning occurs, the "first pending change color foreshadowing effect" is executed, but the "second pending change color foreshadowing effect" is executed. '' has been shown in an embodiment in which it is not executed, but the ``suspended change color predictive effect'' may not be executed when the remaining time of the variable display is 15 seconds or more and less than 20 seconds.
In this case, at the timing when the starting winning occurs, the "holding change color predictive effect" will be executed only if the remaining time of the variable display is 20 seconds or more and less than 35 seconds.
Note that even when the remaining time of the variable display is 35 seconds or more, the "suspended change color foreshadowing effect" may be executed. In this case, when the remaining time of the variable display is 20 seconds or more at the timing when the starting winning occurs, the "holding change color prediction effect" will be executed.
When executing the "Pending Change Color Predictive Performance", there are cases where only the "First Pending Change Color Predictive Performance" is executed, and cases where the "Second Pending Change Color Predictive Performance" is executed after the execution of the "First Pending Change Color Predictive Performance". As mentioned above, there are cases in which a "foreshadowing performance" is executed, but the following ratio can be adopted as the execution ratio.

The rate at which only the "first pending change color foreshadowing effect" is executed is higher than the rate at which the "second pending change color foreshadowing effect" is executed after the "first pending change color foreshadowing effect" is executed. You can.
For example, the rate at which only the "first pending change color foreshadowing effect" is executed is 90%, and the percentage at which the "second pending change color foreshadowing effect" is executed after the execution of the "first pending change color foreshadowing effect" is 90%. may be set to 10%.
According to such an embodiment, since it is difficult for the "second pending change color prediction effect" to be executed, it is possible to increase the sense of anticipation when the "second pending change color prediction effect" is executed.

Conversely, the rate at which only the "first pending change color foreshadowing effect" is executed is determined from the rate at which the "second pending change color foreshadowing effect" is executed after the "first pending change color foreshadowing effect" is executed. may also be lower.
For example, the percentage of execution of only "first pending change color prediction effect" is 10%, and the percentage of execution of "second pending change color prediction effect" after execution of "first pending change color prediction effect". may be set to 90%.
According to such an embodiment, the probability that the "second pending change color prediction effect" will be executed becomes higher, so it is possible to provide the player with more timings at which the standby pending image may change. .

In the variable display, if the "pending change color prediction effect" is not executed, only the "first pending change color prediction effect" is executed. If the "pending change color prediction effect" is executed, the "first pending change color prediction effect" is A ``pending change color prediction performance'' may be executed in which a ``second pending change color prediction performance'' is executed after the execution of the ``color prediction performance''.
As for these execution ratios, the rate at which the "pending change color foreshadowing effect" is not executed is set higher than the ratio at which the "pending change color foreshadowing effect" in which only the "first pending change color foreshadowing effect" is executed is executed. You can. In addition, regarding the rate at which the "pending change color prediction effect" in which only the "first pending change color prediction effect" is executed, the "second pending change color prediction effect" is executed after the "first pending change color prediction effect" is executed. The rate at which the "changing color predictive effect" is executed may be higher or lower than the rate at which the "suspended changing color predictive effect" is executed.
For example, the rate at which the "pending change color prediction performance" is not executed is 70%, the rate at which the "pending change color prediction performance" in which only the "first pending change color prediction performance" is executed is 20%, and the rate at which the "pending change color prediction performance" is executed is 20%. The ratio of execution of the "on hold change color foreshadowing effect" in which the "second on hold change color foreshadowing effect" is executed after the execution of the "first on hold change color foreshadowing effect" may be set to 10%.
Alternatively, the rate at which the "pending change color prediction performance" is not executed is 70%, the rate at which the "pending change color prediction performance" in which only the "first pending change color prediction performance" is executed is 10%, and the rate at which the "pending change color prediction performance" is executed is 10%; The ratio of execution of the "on hold change color foreshadowing effect" in which the "second on hold change color foreshadowing effect" is executed after the execution of the "first on hold change color foreshadowing effect" may be set to 20%.
According to such an embodiment, since it is difficult for the "pending change color prediction effect" to be executed, it is possible to increase the sense of anticipation when the "pending change color prediction effect" is executed.

Conversely, the rate at which the "pending change color foreshadowing effect" is not executed is determined by the percentage at which the "pending change color foreshadowing effect" in which only the "first pending change color foreshadowing effect" is executed or the rate at which the "first pending change color foreshadowing effect" is executed. The rate at which the "second pending change color prediction performance" is executed after the "color prediction performance" is executed may be lower than the rate at which the "pending change color prediction performance" is executed. In addition, regarding the rate at which the "pending change color prediction effect" in which only the "first pending change color prediction effect" is executed, the "second pending change color prediction effect" is executed after the "first pending change color prediction effect" is executed. The rate at which the "changing color predictive effect" is executed may be higher or lower than the rate at which the "suspended changing color predictive effect" is executed.
For example, the rate at which the "pending change color prediction performance" is not executed is 10%, the rate at which the "pending change color prediction performance" in which only the "first pending change color prediction performance" is executed is 70%, and the rate at which the "pending change color prediction performance" is executed is 70%. The ratio of execution of the "on hold change color foreshadowing effect" in which the "second on hold change color foreshadowing effect" is executed after the execution of the "first on hold change color foreshadowing effect" may be set to 20%.
Alternatively, the rate at which the "pending change color foreshadowing effect" is not executed is 10%, the percentage at which the "pending change color foreshadowing effect" in which only the "first pending change color foreshadowing effect" is executed is 20%, and the rate at which the "pending change color foreshadowing effect" is executed is 20%, The ratio of execution of the "on hold change color foreshadowing effect" in which the "second on hold change color foreshadowing effect" is executed after the execution of the "first on hold change color foreshadowing effect" may be set to 70%.
According to such an embodiment, the probability that the "pending change color foreshadowing performance" will be executed increases, so that more timings at which the standby pending image may change can be provided to the player.

Note that the rate at which the "suspended change color predictive effect" is not executed may be set to 0%.
For example, the percentage of execution of the "pending change color prediction effect" in which only the "first pending change color prediction effect" is executed is set to 70%, and the rate at which the "second pending change color prediction effect" is executed is 70%. The rate at which the "pending change color prediction effect" is executed may be set to 30%.
Alternatively, the rate at which the "pending change color prediction effect" in which only the "first pending change color prediction effect" is executed is set to 30%, and the "second pending change color prediction effect" is executed after the execution of the "first pending change color prediction effect" is set to 30%. The rate at which the "pending change color prediction effect" is executed may be set to 70%.

During the execution of the "suspended change color prediction effect", a specific song (for example, a specific song or a specific BGM) is output as a variable effect sound from the speakers (upper speaker 573 and lower speaker 921) for a predetermined period of time. Good too. In this case, the output of the variable effect sound that is being output is stopped at the same timing as the start of output of the specific song, or at a predetermined timing before the start of output of the specific song.
For example, a specific song is output from the timing when the decorative pattern temporarily stops (timing t5) in the time charts shown with reference to FIGS. 398 and 399 until the timing when a new variable display starts (timing t31). You can do it like this.
Alternatively, a specific song may be output at a timing earlier than the timing at which the decorative pattern temporarily stops. For example, the output of a specific song may be started at the same time as the winning start, and the decorative pattern may be temporarily stopped two seconds later (the "first pending change color foreshadowing performance" may be started).
Further, a predetermined light emitting member provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5 may be caused to emit light in a light emitting manner that matches the melody of the variable performance sound. This makes it possible to enhance the production effect of the variable production sound.
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to enhance the "reserved change color predictive effect".

In the "Pending Change Color Predictive Performance", there are two cases in which only the "First Pending Change Color Predicting Performance" is executed and a case in which the "Second Pending Change Color Predicting Performance" is executed after the "First Pending Change Color Predicting Performance" is executed. '' may be executed, but in either case, it is preferable to continue outputting the specific song until a predetermined timing (timing t31 at which a new variable display starts).
Specifically, in the time chart shown in FIG. 398, it is preferable to continue outputting the specific song even in the period after timing t13 when the "second pending change color predictive effect" is not performed. Further, in the time chart shown in FIG. 399, it is preferable to continue outputting a specific song even during a period after timing t13 when the "development effect" or the "second pending change color predictive effect" is being executed.
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to enhance the "reserved change color predictive effect". Further, the regret that the player feels when the display mode of the standby pending image does not change can be alleviated by a specific song. In this embodiment, the time during which the decorative pattern changes at high speed is an indefinite length (it depends on the fluctuation time of the fluctuating display being executed and the timing of the starting prize that triggers the start of the "pending change color prediction performance"). It is effective to use such an output mode.

The variable performance sound that started to be output at the start of the variable display or the variable performance sound that had been output before the start of the variable display may be continued to be output as a specific song even in the "suspended change color foreshadowing performance". In this case, the volume of the fluctuating performance sound being output may be made louder than usual at the time of starting the "pending change color prediction performance" to excite the fact that the "pending change color prediction performance" has started.

The display mode of the standby pending image may change based on the execution of the "holding change color prediction effect", but the output of a specific song will continue until the variable display corresponding to the standby pending image whose display mode has changed stops. You may continue. Alternatively, the output of the specific song may be continued until a predetermined timing after the start of the variable display corresponding to the standby image whose display mode has changed. In this case, it is preferable to start executing the special ready-to-reach effect at a predetermined timing and output a song corresponding to the special ready-to-reach effect. Note that if it takes a long time to finish the fluctuating display corresponding to the standby image whose display format has changed, playback of a specific song may end; It is a good idea to start playing the specific song again after the playback has finished.
In this way, the same song is continuously output across multiple variable displays, and the display mode has changed until the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the standby image starts. can enliven.

A function that can adjust the volume output from the gaming machine may be provided so that the volume can be changed during the execution of the "hold change color predictive effect".
Specifically, a volume up button and a volume down button that enable volume adjustment are provided at predetermined positions near the upper plate 321, and each time the volume up button is pressed, the volume increases by one level, and the volume increases. It is recommended that the volume be lowered by one level each time the lower button is pressed.
Although the volume level can be set to two or more levels, it is preferable to provide 10 levels, for example. In this case, the stage with the lowest volume is the first stage, and the stage with the loudest volume is the tenth stage. In addition, the volume of the sound output when set to the minimum volume is 70 decibels, and the volume of the sound output when set to the maximum volume is 90 decibels, and the volume can be adjusted by one step by one operation of the adjustment button. It is best to configure it so that it rises and falls.

It is advisable to provide a standby time during which successive operations of the volume adjustment button are not accepted. Specifically, even if a press operation is performed during a period from a certain press operation until a predetermined standby time has elapsed, the press operation may not be treated as a valid operation. By adopting such an aspect, it is possible to prevent the volume from suddenly increasing or decreasing even if the volume adjustment button is pressed repeatedly, and to avoid situations where the volume changes suddenly and the volume cannot be adjusted properly. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the volume suddenly increases and disturbs other players.
Note that if the waiting time is too long, it may take a long time to change the volume, which may cause players to feel stressed. Therefore, it is preferable to adopt a predetermined time from about 0.1 to 1 second as the waiting time.
When the user continues to press the volume adjustment button, the volume level may be changed one level at a time. In this case as well, it is preferable that the volume level does not change until the standby time elapses, and that the volume level changes one by one each time the standby time elapses.
With this embodiment, the player can operate the volume adjustment button to set the volume to his or her preference.

Note that the length of the waiting time may be a predetermined constant length, or may be changed depending on the gaming situation.
For example, during the period in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped during the "first pending change color foreshadowing performance", the length of the waiting time is 1 second, and the decorative symbols during the "second pending change color foreshadowing performance" During the period in which the terminal is temporarily stopped, the length of the waiting time may be set to 0.2 seconds.
According to such an embodiment, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped during the "first pending change color foreshadowing performance" (or during the period when the background image for the foreshadowing performance is displayed), the button cannot be repeatedly pressed. The volume cannot be changed from the 1st level, which is the lowest volume, to the 10th level, which is the highest volume, by pressing or holding the button for a long time. Similarly, the volume cannot be changed from the 10th stage, which is the maximum volume, to the 1st stage, which is the minimum volume.
Furthermore, even during the movement period of the standby and hold image, which is shorter than the period in which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the volume cannot be changed from the 1st stage, which is the lowest volume, to the 10th stage, which is the highest volume. The volume cannot be changed from the 10th stage, which is the maximum volume, to the 1st stage, which is the minimum volume.
However, if the volume is set at a predetermined intermediate stage (for example, the second or third stage), it is possible to minimize the volume. Similarly, when the volume is set at a predetermined intermediate level (for example, the 8th level or the 9th level), it is possible to maximize the volume.

On the other hand, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped during the "Second Hold Change Color Foreshadowing Performance", the volume can be changed from the 1st level (the lowest level) to the 10th level (the highest level) by repeatedly pressing or holding down the button. You can quickly change the volume up to your eyes. Similarly, the volume can be quickly changed from the 10th stage, which is the maximum volume, to the 1st stage, which is the minimum volume.
In addition, even during the period when the background image for predictive effect is displayed, the volume can be changed from the 1st level, which is the minimum volume, to the 10th stage, which is the maximum volume, and the 10th stage, which is the maximum volume. You can change the volume from the top to the first level, which is the lowest volume.
Note that although an embodiment has been shown in which the volume changes by one step by pressing or holding down a button, it is also possible to change the volume by multiple steps (for example, two or three steps) by pressing or holding down a button. good. For example, the volume may be increased by three levels each time the volume up button is pressed once. According to such an embodiment, the volume can be changed more quickly.

Note that the following embodiments may also be used.
When the volume level is at the maximum value, a period in which the decorative pattern of the "first pending change color foreshadowing performance" is temporarily stopped starts, and the decorative pattern of the "first pending change color predictive performance" is temporarily stopped. Even if you try to adjust the volume to the minimum value at the same time as the period in which it is temporarily stopped starts, the volume will not reach the minimum value by the end of the period in which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. ).
When the volume level is at the minimum value, a period in which the decorative pattern of the "first pending change color foreshadowing performance" is temporarily stopped starts, and the decorative pattern of the "first pending change color predictive performance" is temporarily stopped. Even if you try to adjust the volume to the maximum value at the same time as the temporary stop period starts, the volume will not reach the maximum value by the end of the temporary stop period ( ).
In a situation where the volume level is at a predetermined stage value other than the maximum value or the minimum value (for example, stage 4), a period in which the decorative pattern of the "first pending change color foreshadowing performance" is temporarily stopped is started, Even if you try to adjust the volume to the maximum value at the same time as the period in which the decorative pattern of the "first pending change color foreshadowing effect" temporarily stops, the decorative pattern of the "first pending change color foreshadowing effect" temporarily stops. It does not reach the maximum value until the end of the stopped period (it may do so).
In a situation where the volume level is at a predetermined stage value other than the maximum value or the minimum value (for example, stage 4), a period in which the decorative pattern of the "first pending change color foreshadowing performance" is temporarily stopped is started, Even if you try to adjust the volume to the minimum value at the same time as the period in which the decorative pattern of the "first pending change color foreshadowing effect" temporarily stops, the decorative pattern of the "first pending change color foreshadowing effect" temporarily stops. It does not reach the minimum value by the end of the stopped period (it may do so).

When the volume level is at the maximum value, a period in which the decorative pattern of the "second pending change color foreshadowing performance" is temporarily stopped starts, and the "second pending change color predictive performance" decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. Even if you try to adjust the volume to the minimum value at the same time as the temporary stop period starts, the volume will not reach the minimum value by the time the decorative pattern of "Second Suspended Change Color Foreshadowing Effect" ends. ).
When the volume level is at the minimum value, a period in which the decorative pattern of the "second pending change color foreshadowing performance" is temporarily stopped starts, and the decorative pattern of the "second pending change color predictive performance" is temporarily stopped. Even if you try to adjust the volume to the maximum value at the same time as the temporary stop period starts, the volume will not reach the maximum value by the end of the temporary stop period when the decorative pattern of ``Second Suspended Change Color Foreshadowing Effect'' ends ( ).
In a situation where the volume level is at a predetermined stage value other than the maximum value or the minimum value (for example, stage 4), a period in which the decorative pattern of the "second pending change color foreshadowing performance" is temporarily stopped is started, Even if you try to adjust the volume to the maximum value at the same time as the period in which the decorative pattern of the "second pending change color foreshadowing effect" temporarily stops, the decorative pattern of the "second pending change color foreshadowing effect" temporarily stops. It does not reach the maximum value until the end of the stopped period (it may do so).
In a situation where the volume level is at a predetermined stage value other than the maximum value or the minimum value (for example, stage 4), a period in which the decorative pattern of the "second pending change color foreshadowing performance" is temporarily stopped is started, Even if you try to adjust the volume to the minimum value at the same time as the period in which the decorative pattern of the "second pending change color foreshadowing effect" temporarily stops, the decorative pattern of the "second pending change color foreshadowing effect" temporarily stops. It does not reach the minimum value by the end of the stopped period (it may do so).
In addition, instead of the period in which the decorative pattern of the "second pending change color foreshadowing performance" is temporarily stopped, the period in which the background image for the foreshadowing effect of the "second pending change color foreshadowing performance" is displayed may also be used. good.

Examples and modifications regarding the volume adjustment during the execution of the above-mentioned "first pending change color prediction performance" and embodiments and modifications regarding the volume adjustment during the execution of the "second pending change color prediction performance". They may be combined as appropriate.

According to such an embodiment, the volume of the music that is output during the execution of the "pending change color predictive performance" can be adjusted while the "pending change color predictive performance" is being performed.
Since it is difficult to greatly change the volume in the "first pending change color prediction performance," the player can concentrate on the performance itself.
On the other hand, when the "second pending change color foreshadowing performance" is executed, a pending pending image (for example, a golden pending pending image) with a higher expectation level than when the "first pending change color predictive effect" is executed. ) may be displayed, but the player may feel embarrassed if the result is a loss even though such a highly anticipated standby image is displayed. Therefore, in the "second hold change color foreshadowing effect", the volume can be changed easily to a large extent, and the "second hold change color foreshadowing effect" that can display a highly anticipated standby image is executed. It is possible to make it difficult for other players to notice that the player is there.
In addition, in the "second hold change color prediction performance", if a highly anticipated temporary stop mode occurs (for example, "performance pattern PTN-2-16" is executed and the rainbow-colored decorative pattern temporarily stops). (If it is confirmed that a jackpot will occur), the volume can be raised to the maximum level even if it is at the minimum level. You can be proud of yourself.

In place of or in addition to providing a volume up button and a volume down button that enable volume adjustment at predetermined positions near the upper plate 321, a light volume increase button and a light volume decrease button that enable light volume adjustment. may be provided at a predetermined position near the upper plate 321.
In addition, the above-described embodiments regarding volume adjustment can be applied not only to volume adjustment but also to light intensity adjustment. For example, it is possible to change the light intensity from the 1st level, which is the minimum light intensity, to the 10th level, which is the maximum light intensity, and while the "pending change color prediction effect" is being executed, the light intensity can be changed in the same way as when adjusting the volume. It may also be possible to adjust the amount of light.
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to obtain the same effect as when the volume can be adjusted.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 399, the number of times the "second pending change color prediction effect" is executed is one time, but after the end of the "second pending change color prediction effect", the "second pending change color prediction effect" is executed again. 2, the pending change color foreshadowing effect” may be executed.
For example, in the period from timing t20 to timing t20.5 in FIG. 399(a), a "development effect" is executed to display "kara-no-", and at timing t20.5, a state of high-speed fluctuation occurs. The "second pending change color foreshadowing performance" may be performed again with all the left-center right decorative patterns temporarily stopped.
Similarly, in the period from timing t21 to timing t21.5 in FIG. 399(b), the "development effect" is executed to display "kara-no-", and at timing t21.5, the high-speed fluctuation state is displayed. The "second pending change color prediction performance" may be performed again with all the left-center right decorative patterns temporarily stopped.
Furthermore, the number of times the "second pending change color predictive performance" is executed is not limited to two times, but may be three or more times.
Note that the remaining time of the variable display is taken into consideration when determining whether or not to execute the "second pending change color predictive performance." Specifically, if the execution of the "second pending change color foreshadowing effect" ends before the left decorative pattern enters the temporary stop state, the "second pending change color foreshadowing effect" is executed, and the left decoration If the execution of the "second pending change color foreshadowing performance" is not completed before the symbol comes to a temporary stop state, the "second pending change color foreshadowing performance" is not executed.

According to such an embodiment, since the "second hold change color predictive effect" can be executed multiple times (twice or more), it is possible to increase the chances of the change mode of the standby hold image changing. Furthermore, since the remaining time of the variable display can be effectively utilized, it is possible to prevent players from having a boring time.

A part of the normal background image A is visible in the "first pending change color foreshadowing effect", and a background image for the foreshadowing effect is displayed in place of the normal background image A in the "second pending change color foreshadowing effect". However, a common image may be displayed. For example, an image may be displayed in front of the normal background image A to indicate that the "pending change color prediction effect" is being executed. For example, an image may be displayed in front of the normal background image A that includes the words "Pending Promotion Chance!".
The image including the words "Hold promotion chance!" starts to be displayed at the start timing of the "first hold change color foreshadowing performance" and the start timing of the "second hold change color foreshadowing performance."
Furthermore, the display ends at the end timing of the "first pending change color prediction effect" and the end timing of the "second pending change color prediction effect." Alternatively, the display may end when a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed after the end of the timing at which the pending image changes.
In addition, the display priority of the image containing the words "Hold promotion chance!" is set lower than the temporarily stopped decorative symbols and standby pending images, and is displayed behind the temporarily stopped decorative symbols and standby pending images. be done.

With reference to FIG. 412, a display mode of an image including the words "Pending promotion chance!" will be described.
FIGS. 412(a) to 412(c) show that at the timing (timing t7.5 in FIGS. 398 and 399) of starting the display of the aura image during the "first pending change color predictive performance" A display state in which an image including the words "Chance!" is displayed is shown.
The size of the images including the text "Pending promotion chance!" increases in the order of FIG. 412(a), FIG. 412(b), and FIG. 412(c).

FIGS. 412(d) to 412(f) show the timing at which a display explaining the content of the performance during the "second pending change color prediction performance" is displayed (the words "READY GO!" are displayed) A display state is shown in which an image including the words "Pending promotion chance!" is displayed (from timing t15.5 to the latter half of timing t16 in FIG. 399).
The size of the images including the text "Pending promotion chance!" increases in the order of FIG. 412(d), FIG. 412(e), and FIG. 412(f).

It should be noted that the size of the image containing the text "Pending promotion chance!" shown in FIG. 412(a) and the size of the image containing the text "Pending promotion chance!" shown in FIG. 412(d) It's the same.
Furthermore, the size of the image containing the text "Pending promotion chance!" shown in FIG. 412(b) and the size of the image containing the text "Pending promotion chance!" shown in FIG. 412(e) It's the same.
Furthermore, the size of the image containing the text "Pending promotion chance!" shown in FIG. 412(c) and the size of the image containing the text "Pending promotion chance!" shown in FIG. 412(f) It's the same. Note that the size of the image containing the words "Pending promotion chance!" in FIGS. 412(c) and 412(f) is the same as the size of the display area 1600a, and as shown in the figure, the size of the image containing the characters "Pending promotion chance!" Here, the background image A) is normally invisible.

The display format of the image containing the text "Holding promotion chance!" is different between when the "first hold change color foreshadowing effect" is being executed and when the "second hold change color foreshadowing effect" is being executed. You can also use it as For example, during the execution of the "first hold change color prediction effect", a large image containing the words "Hold promotion chance!" shown in FIG. 412(c) is displayed, and "second hold change color prediction effect While the performance is being executed, a small image including the words ``Pending Promotion Chance!'' as shown in FIG. 412(d) may be displayed.
On the other hand, while the "first pending change color prediction effect" is being executed, a small image containing the words "Pending promotion chance!" as shown in FIG. In order to execute the "foreshadowing effect", a large image including the words "Pending promotion chance!" as shown in FIG. 412(f) may be displayed.
It should be noted that, not limited to this example, during the execution of the "first pending change color foreshadowing performance", the characters "Pending promotion chance!" shown in FIGS. 412(a) to 412(c) are included. Any of the images can be displayed. Similarly, during the execution of the "second hold change color prediction effect", any of the images containing the words "Hold promotion chance!" shown in FIGS. 412(d) to 412(f) is displayed. can be displayed.

According to such an embodiment, the visible area of the background image (here, the normal background image A) changes depending on the size of the image that includes the words "Pending promotion chance!" It is possible to clearly emphasize that the color omen production has started.
In addition, if the size of the image containing the words "Pending promotion chance!" is different, check whether the "first pending change color foreshadowing effect" is being executed or whether the "second pending change color foreshadowing effect" is being executed. ” is currently being executed.
It should be noted that if the size of the image including the words "Pending promotion chance!" is small, it is difficult for other players to notice. On the other hand, if the image including the words "Pending Promotion Chance!" is large, it is likely to be noticed by other players.
Although an image containing text has been taken as an example, similar effects can be obtained when character images or other images are displayed instead of text.

400 to 402 etc., the embodiment in which the standby and held image moves to the front side of the aura image has been shown, but the display priority of the aura image is set higher than the display priority of the standby and hold image, and the aura image The standby pending image may be moved behind the screen.
For example, an aura image may be displayed in front of the standby image to make the standby image invisible before the standby image starts moving. Alternatively, the standby pending image may be moved to the position of the aura image being displayed so that the standby pending image is located behind the aura image. In this case as well, the standby pending image becomes invisible.
Moreover, when the standby hold image moves and the standby hold image appears from behind the aura image, the display mode of the standby hold image may change. Alternatively, the display of the aura image may be ended when the standby hold image is located behind the aura image, and the display mode of the standby hold image that has become visible may change. .
The size and display position of the aura image may be such that it overlaps with the display position of the standby pending image (lower right of the display area 1600a), or may overlap the display position of the standby pending image (lower right of the display area 1600a). It is also possible to adopt a size and display position that does not overlap the lower right corner of
Alternatively, it may be possible to display aura images of different sizes, so that the larger the size of the aura image, the higher the possibility that the display mode of the standby image will change.

In the "reserved change color prediction performance", a performance (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a light-emission performance) that causes a light-emitting decorative member included in the gaming machine to be in a light-emitting state may be performed. Examples of light-emitting decorative members include the door frame left side unit 530, door frame right side unit 550, and door frame top unit 570 provided on the door frame 3, the light guide plate 1140 provided on the game board 5, the panel board rear board 2420, and the tank. One or more of the accessories 3770 can be employed.
Specifically, the light-emitting effect changes a predetermined light-emitting decorative member from an unlit state to a light-emitting state, continues the light-emitting state for a predetermined time, and then changes from the light-emitting state to an off state. In addition, in the light emitting state, the light source may continuously emit light, or the light source may be periodically blinked so that the light emitting decorative member blinks and is visually recognized.

The specific timing for executing the light emitting effect is, for example, from the timing when the starting winning occurs to the timing immediately before the standby pending image changes in the "first pending change color foreshadowing effect" (in the examples of FIGS. 398 and 399). It is preferable to cause the light-emitting decorative member to emit light until timing t9.5).
Alternatively, the light-emitting decoration member may be caused to emit light from the timing when a starting prize has occurred until a predetermined timing (timing t7 in the examples of FIGS. 398 and 399) during the movement of the standby pending image in the "first pending change color predictive effect". Good too.
Alternatively, from the timing at which the movement of the standby pending image in the "first pending change color foreshadowing effect" starts (timing t6.5 in the examples of FIGS. 398 and 399), the standby in the "first pending change color foreshadowing effect" It is preferable to cause the light-emitting decorative member to emit light until the movement of the pending image is completed (timing t12 in the examples of FIGS. 398 and 399).
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to appeal to the player that the "pending change color predictive performance" has started.

During the period in which the background image for predictive performance in the "second pending change color predictive performance" is displayed, the light-emitting decorative member that was changed to the luminous state in the "first pending change color predictive performance" is changed to the luminous state. You may choose not to change it.
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to prevent the "reserved change color predictive effect" from becoming an excessive effect, and it is possible to make the player concentrate on the display content in the display area 1600a.

Even if the light emitting effect started in conjunction with the execution of the "first pending change color foreshadowing effect" is continued until the execution period of the "development effect" (period from timing t13 to timing t13.5 in FIG. 399). good. For example, the light emission effect may be executed during the period from timing t5 to timing t13.5 in FIG. 399.
Alternatively, the light emitting effect is not performed during the "first pending change color foreshadowing effect" or the "second pending change color foreshadowing effect", and the emission effect is not performed during the execution period of the "development effect" (from timing t13 to timing t13.5 in FIG. 399). The light emitting effect may be performed only during the period of .
Alternatively, the light emitting effect is executed from the execution period of the "development effect" (period from timing t13 to timing t13.5 in FIG. 399) until a predetermined timing of the execution period of the "second pending change color prediction effect". It's okay.
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to emphasize that the "second pending change color prediction effect" is to be started.

Although the embodiment has been described in which the light-emitting effect using the light-emitting decorative member ends during the execution of the "first pending change color foreshadowing effect" or the execution of the "development effect," the "second pending change color foreshadowing effect" It may also be configured to end within the middle of the day.
For example, the light emitting effect may be terminated at a predetermined timing during the display of the remaining time gauge image (period from timing t16 to timing t19 in FIG. 399), or the timing at which the display of the background image for predictive effect is terminated (timing t20 in FIG. 399). .5), or at a predetermined timing after the display of the background image for omen effect (predetermined timing within the period from timing t20.5 to timing t28.5 in FIG. 399). You may also do so.

As an example of a light-emitting effect using a light-emitting decorative member, a light-emitting state in which the light source continuously emits light and a light-emitting state in which the light source blinks are shown, but the level of expectation may be indicated by these light-emitting states. For example, the expectation level for a light emission state in which the light source blinks may be higher than the expectation level for a light emission state in which the light source continuously emits light. Alternatively, the expectation level for a light emitting state in which the light source continuously emits light may be higher than the expectation level for a light emitting state in which the light source blinks.
The degree of expectation may be indicated by the color of the light emitted by the light source.
For example, the light source may emit three types of light, white, blue, and red, so that the light-emitting decorative member can be in a light-emitting state of white, blue, or red. Alternatively, the expectation level may increase in the order of white, blue, and red.
According to such an embodiment, since the degree of expectation is indicated by the light emitting mode of the light emitting decoration member, it is possible to enhance the "reserved change color foreshadowing effect".

The display time of the standby pending image whose display mode has been changed by the "second pending change color foreshadowing effect" is undefined (because the "holding change color foreshadowing effect" is started based on the timing when the starting winning occurs) , the time during which the standby hold image whose display mode has been changed by the "second hold change color prediction effect" is displayed may vary.

When a variable display corresponding to the pending image whose display mode has been changed by the "first pending change color foreshadowing effect" is performed, in the variable display, the decorative symbol shows a reach mode and executes a reach effect that makes you expect a jackpot. There are also cases where the decorative pattern does not show a reach mode and does not perform a reach effect that makes you expect a jackpot. In addition, when a variable display corresponding to a pending image whose display mode has changed by performing the "first pending change color predictive effect" and the "second pending change color predictive effect" is performed, in the variable display, decorations are displayed. There are cases in which the symbols show a ready-to-win pattern and a ready-to-win effect is performed that makes the player expect a jackpot, and cases in which the decorative pattern does not show a ready-to-win pattern and does not perform a ready-to-win presentation that makes the player expect a jackpot. Expectation level of jackpot is higher when "first pending change color prediction performance" and "second pending change color prediction performance" are performed than when only "first pending change color prediction performance" is performed. is higher when the "first pending change color predictive performance" and "second pending change color predictive performance" are performed than when only the "first pending change color predictive performance" is performed. It is preferable to execute the reach effect based on the percentage.

When it is decided to execute the "hold change color foreshadowing effect", all the decorative symbols corresponding to the current variable display are temporarily stopped, and the current variable display, for example, shows that a predetermined ready-to-reach effect is being executed. When it is decided to execute the "Pending Change Color Foreshadowing Performance", it is determined that the result of the current fluctuation display is a loss, so the predetermined reach performance is canceled and the "Pending Change Color Foreshadowing Performance" is executed. ” (in which the background image is normally displayed) and an example in which a reach effect is executed as a look-ahead effect. The display of the effect can be said to be a rare effect because it is not displayed in a variable display every time. Therefore, even if it is decided to execute the "suspended change color foreshadowing performance" while a predetermined reach effect is being displayed, the predetermined reach effect that is currently being executed will continue to be executed. Good too. This is because there are players who become more interested just by looking at the performance itself, even if they know that the result of the variable display will be a loss. In such a case, while the reach effect is being performed, only the "first pending change color foreshadowing performance" may be performed, or only the "second pending change color foreshadowing performance" may be performed. It's okay.

In addition, in the predetermined reach effect, a simulated image imitating the operating means is displayed immediately before the timing to suggest the winning or losing result, the operation of the operating means is enabled, and a display suggesting the winning or losing result is performed based on the operation. There is also a reach performance. In the case of such a reach effect, during the period when the operation of the operating means is valid immediately before the timing indicating the winning or losing result (the period during which the simulated image is displayed), the "first pending change color predictor" It is preferable that the "presentation" or "second pending change color foreshadowing performance" not be executed (it is not determined to execute the pending change color foreshadowing performance as a look-ahead performance), and in the predetermined ready-to-reach performance, "the first pending change color In the case where the "predictive performance" or the "second pending change color predictive performance" is executed (it may be determined to execute the "pending change color predictive performance" as a look-ahead performance), after the predetermined ready-to-reach performance has started, Preferably, the process may be executed at a predetermined timing before the relevant period (the period during which the simulated image is displayed). In addition, there is also a reach effect that displays a display suggesting a winning or losing result without activating the operation of the operating means (without displaying a simulated image imitating the operating means) immediately before the timing to suggest the winning or losing result. Even in the case of a reach effect like this, the "first pending change color prediction performance" or the "second pending change color prediction performance" is not executed immediately before the timing that indicates the winning or losing result (the pending change color prediction performance is performed as a look-ahead performance). It is preferable that the decision is not made if the foreshadowing effect is executed. In the case of such a reach performance, the "first pending change color prediction performance" or the "second pending change color prediction performance" is executed (it may be determined to execute the pending change color prediction performance as a look-ahead performance). In this case, it is preferable to avoid immediately before the timing that indicates a winning or losing result, for example, before 1/2 of the length (time) of the reach effect has elapsed.

The embodiments may be formed by combining and applying various technical matters in the structure of the gaming machine, the example of effects executed in the gaming machine, etc. in the embodiment. In addition, embodiments may be created by combining and applying some of the technical matters in the structure of the gaming machine, examples of effects executed in the gaming machine, and the like. Moreover, it is good also as an embodiment by applying each technical matter in each accessory structure in combination. Furthermore, embodiments may be created by applying a combination of these technical matters. Note that the number of technical items to be combined is not limited to two, but can be any number greater than or equal to two. Moreover, an embodiment obtained by modifying a certain embodiment (or another embodiment) may be applied to an embodiment obtained by modifying a certain embodiment to form another embodiment. Further, one embodiment described in the specification may be modified in multiple ways. For example, it is also possible to apply two embodiments and two modified embodiments to one embodiment. Further, a plurality of embodiments that a person skilled in the art could come up with in this way may be adopted in one gaming machine.
In addition to what is explicitly described as "embodiment" in this specification, "embodiment" here includes various modifications, examples, modified examples, etc. shown in this specification. It can also include technical matters, problem solving methods, etc.

Although preferred embodiments of the present invention have been described, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements and changes in design are possible as described above.

In the embodiment, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a gaming machine. However, the gaming machine to which the embodiment can be applied is not limited to a pachinko machine, and may include other gaming machines other than pachinko machines. It's okay. For example, Jankyu game machines, enclosed game machines with game balls sealed inside the game machine (managed game machines), pachislot machines, pachislot machines that do not require the insertion of medals (medalless game machines), pachinko machines and pachislot machines. The embodiment may be adopted in a gaming machine (such as Parrot) that combines the following. In this case as well, it is possible to achieve similar effects.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5' Game board 5a Game area 6 CR unit 190 Glass unit 530 Door frame left side unit 550 Door frame right side unit 570 Door frame top unit 931 Power supply board 1000 Front Components 1001 Outer rail 1002 Inner rail 1100 Game panel 1100a Game panel opening 1110 Panel plate 1110a Obstacle nail through hole 1110b Panel plate back rough surface 1118 Panel plate opening 1140 Light guide plate 1142 Light guide plate rough surface 1146 Light guide plate illumination member 1147 Guide Substrate for light plate 1148 Light-emitting member for light guide plate 1201 Obstruction nail 1201a Obstruction nail head 1201b Obstruction nail first body portion 1201c Obstruction nail spiral-shaped portion 1201d Obstruction nail second body portion 1201e Obstruction nail tip portion 1230 Life nail 1231 Jump nail 1232 Left side Guide nail 1310 Main control board 1402 Normal symbol display 1403 First special symbol display 1404 First special reserved number display 1405 Second special symbol display 1406 Second special reserved number display 1407 Round display 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board 1600 Game board side effect display device 1600a Display area 2000 Table unit 2001 General prize opening 2002 First starting opening 2003 Gate part 2004 Second starting opening 2004a Movable piece 2005 Big winning opening 2100 Starting opening unit 2400 Panel plate lower light emitting board 2410 Panel board rear decoration member 2410a Panel board rear decoration member rough surface part 2410c Panel board rear decoration member rotation axis 2420 Panel board rear board 2425 Panel board rear board light emitting part 2522 Warp exit 2530 Stage 3700 Mission button 3710 Attack button 3720 Left lever 3722 Left lever vibration source 3724 Left lever light source 3730 Right lever 3732 Right lever vibration source 3734 Right lever light source 3740 Defense button 3770 Tank accessory 7000 Door frame top unit upper right ear opening 7010 Door frame top unit upper left ear opening 7100 Right ear frame movable body 7110 Right ear frame movable body first surface 7112 Right ear frame movable body first surface inner decoration part 7114 Right ear frame movable body first surface outer decoration part 7116 Right ear frame movable body inner light emitting part 7118 Right ear Frame movable body outer light emitting part 7120 Right ear frame movable body second surface 7200 Left ear frame movable body 7210 Left ear frame movable body first surface 7212 Left ear frame movable body first surface inner decoration part 7214 Left ear frame movable body first Surface outer decoration part 7216 Left ear frame movable body inner light emitting part 7218 Left ear frame movable body outer light emitting part 7220 Left ear frame movable body second surface HKB Whitening part YGK Game ball

Claims (1)

A determining means for acquiring lottery information regarding a win based on the establishment of a starting condition, and determining whether or not it is a win based on the lottery information;
a performance execution means for performing the performance;
a display device capable of displaying a predetermined image;
An operation means that can be operated by a player;
Decorative pattern changing means that displays a decorative pattern on the display device, executes variable display of the decorative pattern based on establishment of a start condition, and indicates the result of the determination at the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern;
holding means for storing the lottery information up to a predetermined number if the starting condition is satisfied but not the starting condition;
Prior determination means for determining whether or not it is a win based on the lottery information stored by the holding means before the start condition is satisfied;
a hold display means for displaying on the display device as a hold indication that the lottery information is stored by the hold means;
As modes of the variable display of the decorative pattern, there are a first display mode in which the decorative pattern is difficult or impossible to recognize, and a second display mode in which the decorative pattern is easy to recognize,
enabling the pending display displayed on the display device to be moved;
displaying an operation promotion display that prompts the user to operate the operation means;
The production includes a first production and a second production,
The first performance is
When starting to move the pending display displayed on the display device, the fluctuating display mode of the decorative pattern is the second display mode,
Even when the movement of the pending display displayed on the display device ends, the fluctuating display mode of the decorative pattern is the second display mode,
an effect in which the fluctuating display mode of the decorative pattern is the second display mode until a predetermined time has elapsed after the movement of the pending display displayed on the display device is completed;
The second performance is
At least one of the decorative patterns is set in the first display mode when a suggestion display is displayed by a suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the pending display displayed on the display device changes. ,
When the pending display is shown in the display mode after the display of the suggestion display ends and changes, all the decorative patterns are in the first display mode,
When the predetermined period of time has elapsed after the movement of the pending display displayed on the display device is completed, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is set to the first display mode, and when the display mode is set to the first display mode, enabling the display of the operation promotion display;
It is possible to output a predetermined sound in accordance with the display of the operation promotion display,
The gaming machine is characterized in that there are a plurality of types of winnings with different degrees of advantage.

Images